JP7809289B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and slot machines (commonly referred to as "slot machines").

Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, gaming machines have been known that offer special games in which a large prize can be won when a winning jackpot is won.

In other words, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 first determines whether a gaming ball has entered the starting hole. Then, if a gaming ball has entered this starting hole, a determination process is performed to determine whether a win has been won. At this time, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a specified display for a specified variable time. Then, when the specified variable time has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed in a static manner in a manner indicating a win, and the opening and closing member of the large prize opening is operated, providing the player with a special game in which multiple prizes can be won.

JP 2017-006393 A

In such conventional gaming machines , there is a demand for further enhancement of gaming interest.

This invention was made in light of these circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

Means 1: First operating means and second operating means operable by a player;
A determination means for making a determination;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination by the determination means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may occur multiple times in response to an operation reception for the first operating means, and, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may occur multiple times in response to an operation reception for the second operating means,
a specific sound can be output when an operation instruction related to the second operation means is displayed, and the specific sound is maintained in an output state for an output time corresponding to the specific sound;
When an operation instruction related to the first operation means is displayed, a special sound can be output, and there are cases where a specific end condition is satisfied while the special sound is being output, and cases where the specific end condition is not satisfied, and in these cases, when the specific end condition is satisfied while the special sound is being output, the output state of the special sound is terminated early at an intermediate stage before the elapse of an output time corresponding to the special sound,
When the first operating means is set to a non-operated state while a change after acceptance has occurred in response to an operation acceptance to the first operating means, and then the first operating means is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, there is no case in which a process of changing the effect sound that was in an output state at that time to a non-output state is executed as a process in response to a new operation acceptance to the first operating means.
When the second operating means is changed to a non-operated state while the post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation acceptance to the second operating means, and then the second operating means is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, a process can be executed in response to the new operation acceptance to the second operating means, in which at least one of the effect sounds that was in an output state at that time is changed to a non-output state;
moreover,
the operation instruction for the first operating means is displayed in the same display mode in two cases: when the specific termination condition is satisfied while the special sound is being output and the output state of the special sound is terminated early at an intermediate stage before the elapse of the output time corresponding to the special sound; and when the specific termination condition is not satisfied and the output state of the special sound continues for the output time corresponding to the special sound;
moreover,
If the specific termination condition is met while the operation instruction for the first operating means is being displayed and the special sound is being output, the output state is terminated early at an intermediate stage before the output time corresponding to the special sound has elapsed, and the operation instruction for the first operating means that has been displayed up until that point is also made non-displayable.
A gaming machine characterized by:

This invention can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a left side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from behind. This is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. 1A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 1A. (a) is an enlarged oblique view showing the state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame has been removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged oblique view showing the state in which the main body side upper hinge member has been attached to the outer upper hinge member. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 10 is a left side view of the door frame. FIG. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from behind. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, broken down into its main components, viewed from the rear. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back. This is an explanatory diagram showing the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from behind. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit, viewed from the front. An explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit of Figure 37. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the operation button cut out and the area to be hidden by the first button decorative part, button frame, etc. in a view of the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the area to be hidden by the first button decorative part, button frame, etc. in a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit as seen from the front in an oblique view, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in Figure 47(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is an oblique view of the door frame right side unit from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the door frame right side unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in Figure 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in Figure 56. FIG. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the rear. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. This is an exploded oblique view of a game panel of a different configuration from that shown in Figure 63, seen from the front, along with its front components, board holder, and main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 seen from behind. This is a block diagram of the main control board, dispensing control board, and peripheral control board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. This is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board, which relays the electrical connection between the payout control board that constitutes the main board and the CR unit and degree display board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; This is a block diagram of the liquid crystal and sound control unit and the surroundings of the VDP with built-in sound source. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 75. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between a main control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing the circuitry of a dispensing control unit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing control input circuit. This is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of Figure 81. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing motor drive circuit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit. 10 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal board. This is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws in the display area of the upper tray liquid crystal display device. This is a table showing examples of various commands sent from the main control board to the dispensing control board. 10 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. This is a table showing the continuation of various commands sent from the main control board in Figure 89 to the peripheral control board. This is a table showing examples of various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when the main control side power is turned on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a LOCKN signal history creation process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection malfunction determination process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection recovery process. 10 is a timing chart illustrating the timing at which a connection confirmation signal is output to the INIT terminal of the upper tray side liquid crystal transmitter IC. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5232). A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern process processing (step S5238). This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern normal processing (step S5280). This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a pattern determination table. This is a flowchart showing the steps for the first special pattern stop pattern setting process (step S5281). A flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change processing (step S5283). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern stop processing (step S5284). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). 5 is a flowchart showing the procedure for gate section passing processing (step S5402). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal processing of normal symbols (step S5403). This figure shows a judgment table T1 of the presentation pattern (variation presentation) that is referenced in the above-mentioned presentation pattern variation start process when in normal game mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound definition table. This figure shows the notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for terminating notification (cancellation conditions) for each type of notification sound illustrated in Figure 119. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit. FIG. 10 is a right side view of the gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit. This figure shows an example of a selection table for presentation patterns in a presentation mode in which the sword-drawing presentation can be executed, where (A) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to display a sword-drawing preparation transition presentation depending on the type of variation pattern, and (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to display a main sword-drawing presentation. This is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing action of a sword decoration when an aura member is attached to the sword portion (blade portion) itself, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first unsheathing state, and (C) the second unsheathing state. 10A and 10B are longitudinal cross-sectional views illustrating the operation of the aura member. This is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing action of a sword decoration when an aura member is attached to the sheath, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first unsheathing state, and (C) the second unsheathing state. 10A and 10B are longitudinal cross-sectional views illustrating the operation of the aura member. A diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device and the movement transitions of the sword decoration body during the princess reach performance. A diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device and the movement transitions of the sword decoration body during the princess reach performance. A diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device and the movement transitions of the sword decoration body during the princess reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the movement transitions of the sword decoration in a reach performance that includes operation performances of the operation buttons that are used in various ways. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the movement transitions of the sword decoration in a reach performance that includes operation performances of the operation buttons that are used in various ways. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the movement transitions of the sword decoration in a reach performance that includes operation performances of the operation buttons that are used in various ways. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during the reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during the reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during the reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during the reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during the reach performance. A diagram explaining the shape of the sword ornament used in the pseudo-consecutive performance. This figure shows an example of the transition of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined by lottery by the peripheral control board that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled for operation during the reach effect based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern drawn by the main control board. This figure shows an example of the transition of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined by lottery by the peripheral control board that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled for operation during the reach effect based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern drawn by the main control board. This figure shows an example of a transition in a reach performance in which a pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled for operation during the reach performance, as with the first suggestion pattern described above. This figure shows a step-up pattern pre-operation suggestion effect in which, even though the second suggestion pattern is performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the sword decoration does not become operable, but the operation button becomes operable at first, and then the sword decoration becomes operable. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated model image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display of an integrated mockup image from the start to the end of the validity period. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a first A reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a first A reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the first A reception acceptance state occurs. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a second A reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a second A reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the second A reception acceptance state occurs. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a third A reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a third A reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a third A reception acceptance state occurs. 4 is a time chart showing an example of a fourth A reception permission state. 4 is a time chart showing an example of a fourth A reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 4A reception acceptance state occurs. 5 is a time chart showing an example of a fifth A reception permission state. 5 is a time chart showing an example of a fifth A reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 5A reception acceptance state occurs. 6 is a time chart showing an example of a 6A reception permission state. 6 is a time chart showing an example of a 6A reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 6A reception acceptance state occurs. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a first B reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the first B reception acceptance state occurs. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a second B reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the second B reception acceptance state occurs. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a third B reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the third B reception acceptance state occurs. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a fourth B reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 4B reception acceptance state occurs. 5B is a time chart showing an example of a reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 5B reception acceptance state occurs. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a sixth B reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 6B reception acceptance state occurs. 7 is a time chart showing an example of a seventh B reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 7B reception acceptance state occurs. 7 is a time chart showing an example of a seventh B reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a first B reception permission state and a second B reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a first B reception permission state and a second B reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a third B reception permission state and a fourth B reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a third B reception permission state and a fifth B reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a third B reception permission state and a fifth B reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a first B reception permission state and a sixth B reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a second B reception permission state and a sixth B reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a third B reception permission state and a seventh B reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a fifth B reception permission state and a seventh B reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a first B reception permission state and a sixth B reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a fourth B reception permission state and a seventh B reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a fifth B reception permission state and a seventh B reception permission state. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a sixth B reception permission state. 7 is a time chart showing an example of a seventh B reception permission state. 7 is a time chart showing an example of a seventh B reception permission state.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front, with the door frame, game board, main frame, and outer frame disassembled. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear, with the door frame, game board, main frame, and outer frame disassembled.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) in an amusement hall; a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2; a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed; and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the front of the main frame 4, is visible to the player through the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the player shoots game balls.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart vertically and extend horizontally, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed with the same front-to-back width. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a panel member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, an upper hinge member 60 that is attached to the left end of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, and a lower hinge member 70 that is attached to the upper left end of the panel member 50 when viewed from the front and to the left frame member 30. The upper hinge member 60 and lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 attach the main frame 4 and door frame 3 so that they can be opened and closed.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through hole 111 that penetrates from front to back; a handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and can be operated by the player to shoot game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5; a tray unit 320 that is attached to the lower front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100; and a participation type control unit 300 that is attached to the center of the tray unit 320 and allows the player to control the game status according to the game state that changes as game balls are shot into the game area 5a. the door frame base unit 100。 It is equipped with a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the tray unit 320 and to the left of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the tray unit 320 and to the right of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper part of the door frame left side unit 530 and door frame right side unit 550 and to the door frame base unit 100, above the through hole 111.

The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base 600, a portion of which can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; a main frame upper hinge member 620 and a main frame lower hinge member 640 attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front, which are rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and to which the door frame upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 are rotatably attached; a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front; and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the lower front of the main frame base 600. the ball launcher 680, which is attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and which locks the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4; an inverted L-shaped payout unit 800, which is attached to the rear side along the top and left sides of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and which pays out game balls to the player; a base unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base 600; and a back cover 980, which is attached to the rear side of the main frame base 600 in an openable and closable manner, and which covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 600.

The payout unit 800 of the main frame 4 comprises an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600; a ball tank 802 attached to the top of the payout unit base 801, open upward, and extending to the left and right, which stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown); a tank rail 803 attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 and extending to the left and right, which guides the game balls in the ball tank 802 to the left as viewed from the front; a ball guide unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 as viewed from the front, which guides the game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner; and a ball guide unit 820 detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball guide unit 820, which stores the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 in a payout control board box 950. the payout device 830, which pays out balls one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951; an upper full ball path unit 850, which is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and releases the game balls from either the normal release port 850d or the full release port 850e depending on the storage status of game balls in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320; and a lower full ball path unit 860, which is attached to the bottom end of the payout unit base 801 and has a normal guide path 861 that guides game balls released from the normal release port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and a full guide path 862 that guides game balls released from the full release port 850e forward and from the front end to the full ball receiving port 274 of the door frame 3.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 comprises a board unit base 910 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600; a speaker unit 920 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front, and having a lower bass speaker 921 inside; a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front, and housing a power supply board inside; an interface control board box 940 attached to the rear of the speaker unit 920 and housing an interface control board inside; and a payout control board box 950 attached across the power supply board box 930 and interface control board box 940, and housing a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls inside.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises a front component 1000 having outer rails 1001 and inner rails 1002 that define the outer periphery of the play area 5a into which game balls are shot and guide game balls launched from the ball launcher 680 to the top of the play area 5a, and a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the play area 5a.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when game balls are stored in the upper tray 321 and the player rotates the handle 302, the ball launcher 680 launches the game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a force that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302. When the game balls that have been launched into the game area 5a are received by a winning slot, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the payout device 830 according to the winning slot into which the game balls were received. This payout of game balls can increase the player's interest, allowing the game balls in the upper tray 321 to be shot into the game area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 16. Figure 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and Figure 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Also, Figure 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and Figure 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. Figure 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. Figure 16(a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame upper hinge member in the outer frame as seen from below with the left frame member omitted, and Figure 16(b) is an exploded perspective view of Figure 16(a). The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in an amusement hall or the like on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart vertically and extend laterally, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect the ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed with the same front-to-back width. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the left-to-right length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Furthermore, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are flush with the outward-facing side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40.

The outer frame 2 also includes an outer frame upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a locking member 66 attached to the underside of the outer frame upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the front panel member 50 and to the left frame member 30 when viewed from the front. The outer frame upper hinge member 60 and outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and door frame 3 to be attached so that they can be opened and closed.

The outer frame 2 also includes a header member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front of the lower frame member 20; a header reinforcement member 80 that is attached to the rear of the header member 50 and has both ends attached to the left and right frame members 30 and 40, respectively; a flat left sliding member 81 that is attached to the top surface of the header member 50 in a position to the left of the center; and a flat right sliding member 82 that is attached to the top surface of the header member 50 near the right end. The header reinforcement member 80 is made of a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, left frame member 30, and right frame member 40.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 is equipped with connecting members 85 that respectively connect the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40. The outer frame 2 is also equipped with an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage with the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700, which will be described later.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed from a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 has engagement notches 11 at the center of the front-rear direction on both the left and right ends, penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. Upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the upper-left connecting member 85A and the upper-right connecting member 85B (described later) of the connecting member 85 are attached within these engagement notches 11. The upper frame member 10 also has mounting steps 12 on the top surface and front surface of the left end (when viewed from the front) that are recessed from the general surface. The upper outer frame hinge member 60 is attached to these mounting steps 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed from a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The left-right length and top-bottom thickness of this lower frame member 20 are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and its front-to-back width is greater than that of the upper frame member 10. The lower frame member 20 has engagement notches 21 at both left and right ends, located rearward of the center in the front-to-back direction, that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-to-right direction. The lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the left lower connecting member 85C and the right lower connecting member 85D (described later) of the connecting member 85 are attached within these engagement notches 21.

The lower frame member 20 also has front-end cutouts 22 recessed rearward from the front surface on both the left and right ends. The front-to-rear width of the lower frame member 20, from the rear end of the front-end cutouts 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20, is formed to be the same dimension as the front-to-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When this lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front-end cutouts 22 is inserted into the header panel member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left and right frame members 30 and 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a uniform cross-sectional shape and are formed from extruded metal such as aluminum alloy. The left and right frame members 30 and 40 are symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When assembled into the outer frame 2, the left and right frame members 30 and 40 have, on their outer lateral sides in the left-right direction, recesses 31 and 41 recessed inward, extending from a position rearward relative to the center in the front-to-rear direction to near the rear end, and protrusions 32 and 42 bulging from the side opposite the recesses 31 and 41 and forming a hollow interior. The protrusions 32 and 42 enhance the strength and rigidity of the left and right frame members 30 and 40. Furthermore, rear lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the upper-left connecting member 85A and the upper-right connecting member 85B (described later) of the connecting member 85 are inserted into the protrusions 32 and 42 for attachment.

Furthermore, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have multiple grooves formed on their surfaces that extend vertically. These grooves provide fingerholds for workers to easily hold the pachinko machine 1 when installing or transporting it in island equipment at an amusement hall or the like, and also enhance the aesthetic appeal of the pachinko machine 1's exterior.

[2-4. Back panel components]
The header panel member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The header panel member 50 includes a rearward extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the top surface when viewed from the front, a left discharge hole 52 cut out in a U-shape from the left end of the rearward extending portion 51 and penetrating vertically so that a gaming ball can pass through, a right discharge hole 53 penetrating vertically to the right of the left discharge hole 52 in the rearward extending portion 51 and penetrating vertically so that a gaming ball can pass through, a standing wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the top surface of the header panel member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a return portion 55 bulging forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 and sloping rearward as its front surface extends upward.

The horizontal portion 71 (described later) of the outer frame lower hinge member 70 is attached to the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 of the header panel member 50 so that the outer frame lower hinge member 70 rests on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The left discharge hole 52 of the header panel member 50 is formed in a position that coincides with the discharge hole 74 (described later) of the outer frame lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed in a position that is to the right of the outer frame lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

The top surface of the header board member 50 to the right of the rear extension 51 is inclined so that the front end is lower. The header board member 50 also has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 to the right of the rear extension 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 57 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end of the top surface. The bottom surface of the main frame 4 rests on the top surface of the header board member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, this header board member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Furthermore, although not shown, the box-shaped interior of the header board member 50 is divided into a grid pattern by multiple ribs, increasing its strength and rigidity. Furthermore, the header board member 50 is formed so that the front half of the header board reinforcing member 80 can be housed within it.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 comprises a horizontally extending, flat, rectangular upper fixing portion 61, a flat forward extension portion 62 extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61, a bearing groove 63 extending forward from the right end of the forward extension portion 62 to the center of the left and right sides of the forward extension portion 62 and penetrating it vertically, a flat lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 61 when viewed from above, and a flat hanging portion 65 extending downward from the edge from the left end of the forward extension portion 62 around the front end to the point where the bearing groove 63 opens and continuing with the lateral fixing portion 64 (see Figure 16 (b) etc.).

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 has its upper fixing portion 61 placed on the upper surface of the mounting step 12 of the upper frame member 10 and secured with screws (not shown). The forward extension portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10. The lateral fixing portion 64 is inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 and secured to the left frame member 30 with screws.

By inserting the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 of the outer frame into the bearing groove 63, the upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame cooperates with the lower hinge member 70 to support the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame is formed by bending a metal plate using press molding.

[2-6. Locking member]
As shown in Figure 16, the locking member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped locking body 66a extending front to back with a predetermined width on both sides, an operating portion 66b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 66a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending left from the rear end of the locking body 66a and then diagonally forward and left, and a mounting hole 66d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 66a. The locking member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the underside of the forward extension portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 by mounting screws 67.

The rear end of the locking body 66a of this locking member 66 is attached through the mounting hole 66d at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. Furthermore, when the locking member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the locking body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end extends forward so that it can abut against the portion of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see Figure 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 66a abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer-frame-side upper hinge member 60. The locking member 66 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction that causes its front end to rotate leftward around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 abuts against the hanging portion 65 (see Figure 18). In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 63 forward of the locking body 66a that can accommodate the main-frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main-frame-side upper hinge member 620.

By operating the operating portion 66b of this locking member 66, the locking body 66a can be rotated against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operating portion 66b, the locking body 66a can be rotated in a direction that moves its front end to the left, thereby retracting the locking body 66a from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, thereby fully opening the bearing groove 63. This allows the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 to be inserted into or removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Lower outer frame hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 comprises a flat horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally, a flat rising portion 72 rising upward from a position on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 rearward of the center in the front-to-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a discharge hole 74 that penetrates the horizontal portion 71 from top to bottom and is large enough to allow only one game ball to pass through. This lower outer frame side hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

In plan view, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is trapezoidal, with the left edge as the base. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is cylindrical and has a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the vertical center. This outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the center of the rising portion 72 in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left edge of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. This discharge hole 74 is formed to be approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the header panel member 50.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 rests on the upper surface of the header panel member 50 near its left end and on the rearward extending portion 51. The horizontal portion 71 is fixed to the header panel reinforcement member 80 with screws (not shown) that penetrate the upper surface of the header panel member 50. When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached with screws (not shown) to a location on the inner side of the left frame member 30 that is forward of the protruding portion 32. By inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main frame-side lower hinge member 640 of the main frame 4, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 can cooperate with the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 to mount the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

Furthermore, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the header panel member 50. This allows game balls on the horizontal portion 71 to fall (discharge) to the rear side of the header panel member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 roll toward the rear side where the gap is wider, and can be discharged through the discharge hole 74, as the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed. In this case, the discharge hole 74 is formed in a position that is approximately flush with the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 while assembled into the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged through the discharge hole 74, making it less likely that game balls will become trapped in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 comprises a horizontally extending, flat, horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat, upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a flat, lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side of the horizontal fixing portion 86 as the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. This connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper-left connecting member 85A and the upper-right connecting member 85B, an upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the fore-and-aft direction, and lower horizontal fixing portions 88 extend downward from both the front and rear of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. In other words, the upper-left connecting member 85A and the upper-right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the fore-and-aft direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper-left connecting member 85A and the upper-right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while abutting against the underside of the upper frame member 10. Furthermore, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the upper-left connecting member 85A and the upper-right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Additionally, the front lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces forward of the protrusions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the rear lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, with screws inserted into the protrusions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed in from the outer side surfaces.

In the lower-left connecting member 85C and the lower-right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the lower end of the portion of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 that protrudes further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 86. The lower-left connecting member 85C and the lower-right connecting member 85D also include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower-left connecting member 85C and the lower-right connecting member 85D is fixed in abutment against the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower-left connecting member 85C and the lower-right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface forward of the protrusions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end faces of the lower frame member 20, respectively.

[2-9. Locking mechanism for outer frame upper hinge member]
Next, the locking mechanism for the main body frame upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the locking member 66 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60 in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18. Figure 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the main body frame upper hinge member of the main body frame 4 detached from the outer frame upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the main body upper hinge member attached to the outer upper hinge member. Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the locking member in the outer frame.

When the locking member 66 on the outer frame 2 is attached to the forward extension 62 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts the inner surface of the hanging portion 65, and the locking body 66a closes part of the L-shaped bearing groove 63. However, the tip of the locking body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and a space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 of the main frame 4 can be inserted.

In this embodiment, the support mechanism for the main frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and lock member 66 is in a normal support state in which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a is close to the right-side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a small gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right-side hanging portion 65, so they are not in contact). In this state, the centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622, which is located in the deepest part of the curved bearing groove 63, and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally offset and face each other.

In this normal support state, the main frame hinge pin 622, which supports the heavy main frame 4, abuts the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so there is almost no load from the main frame hinge pin 622 to the front end face of the locking body 66a. In other words, there is no load on the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Furthermore, because the front end face of the locking body 66a is arc-shaped, the locking member 66 rotates smoothly when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the locking member 66. In the illustration, the center of the arc on the front end face of the locking body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the locking member 66).

Therefore, when force F acts on the main frame hinge pin 622 in a direction that pulls it out along the slope of the V-shaped bearing groove 63 and abuts against the arcuate front end surface of the locking body 66a, this force F can be divided into a component force F1 (normal to the arc of the front end surface of the locking body 66a) that acts on the contact point between the main frame hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end surface, and a component force F2 that acts on the contact point between the main frame hinge pin 622 and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63. Because the direction of component force F1 is toward the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the locking member 66), no moment acts that rotates the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 away from the right-side hanging portion 65, and the main frame hinge pin 622 remains sandwiched between the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63.

As a result, even in the normal pivotal support state or when the force of the main frame hinge pin 622 is applied to the locking member 66, no load is constantly placed on the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66, preventing plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, which is integrally formed from synthetic resin, and preventing the main frame hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 over an extended period of time. Furthermore, even if excessive force is applied and the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is rotated in a direction moving to the right, the right side of the front end of the locking body 66a abuts against the hanging portion 65, preventing further rotation, and preventing the locking member 66 from protruding outside the forward extension 62.

Even if the front end surface of the locking body 66a is not arc-shaped, by positioning the center of rotation of the locking member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) in a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above, or where a rotational moment is generated that rotates the front end of the locking member 66 toward the outside of the forward extension 62, no load is constantly applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Furthermore, even when the locking member 66 rotates, the right side of the front end of the locking body 66a simply abuts against the hanging portion 65, so the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the forward extension 62.

When the upper main frame hinge pin 622 of the upper main frame hinge member 620 is supported in the bearing groove 63 of the upper outer frame hinge member 60, the upper main frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side. When the upper main frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the upper main frame hinge pin 622 abuts against the right side of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66, and the locking member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so that the front end of the locking body 66a moves leftward against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. As a result, the locking body 66a, which had been closing the bearing groove 63, retracts, opening the bearing groove 63 and allowing the upper main frame hinge pin 622 to move to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 are released from contact, and the locking member 66 rotates so that the front end of the locking body 66a moves to the right due to the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c, returning the locking member 66 to its normal state. As a result, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is housed in the space in front of the front end of the locking body 66a within the bearing groove 63, and the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is held (locked) in a rotatable state in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63.

To remove the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, operate the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 to rotate the locking member 66 so that the front end of the locking body 66a moves to the left, and retract the locking body 66a from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. This places the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 in communication with the opening, allowing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 to be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Anti-theft mechanism and ball jamming prevention mechanism at the outer frame lower hinge member]
We will explain the security mechanism at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and the ball trap prevention mechanism for preventing game balls from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the top surface of the header panel member 50 as viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame lower hinge member 70 is attached so that it rests near the left edge of the top surface of the header panel member 50 and on the top surface of the rearward extending portion 51. This header panel member 50 has a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the top surface. As a result, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the rear of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 70 and the main frame lower hinge member 640, the tip of the illegal tool will abut against the standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the top surface of the header panel member 50, preventing the illegal tool from being inserted any further rearward, and thus preventing illegal acts from being committed through the outer frame lower hinge member 70.

In addition, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 that extends forward. If an unauthorized tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 and bends upward, the return portion 55 can bend the tip of the unauthorized tool further forward, preventing the unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main frame 4 and reliably preventing unauthorized acts from being committed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

However, if the rear end of the top surface of the header panel member 50 is provided with a vertical wall portion 54 extending upward, when a game ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) while the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is prevented from being ejected rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, and there is a risk of the game ball becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. In contrast, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extending portion 51 of the header panel member 50 are provided with an ejection hole 74, left ejection hole 52, and right ejection hole 53 through which game balls can pass. Therefore, game balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be ejected downward through the ejection holes 74, etc., reducing the risk of game balls becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

This prevents a game ball from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could cause damage around the outer frame lower hinge member 70, or the main frame 4 not closing properly, creating a gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could then be used to commit fraud.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 19 to 30. Figure 19 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, Figure 20 is a right side view of the door frame, Figure 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 22 is a rear view of the door frame. Figure 23 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right, Figure 24 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left, and Figure 25 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 19, Figure 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in Figure 19, and Figure 28 is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 19. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

As shown in Figures 29 and 30, the door frame 3 comprises a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular, frame-like shape extending vertically when viewed from the front; a handle unit 300 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base unit 100; a tray unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100; a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the tray unit 320; a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 320; a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 320; and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left side unit 530 and the right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, as will be described in detail later, comprises a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular (quadrilateral) outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through-hole 111 penetrating from front to back, a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear of the door frame base 110, an upper door frame hinge member 140 and a lower door frame hinge member 150 attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end of the reinforcement unit 130 when viewed from the front and rotatably attached to the main frame 4, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through-hole 111, and a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the glass unit 190. the door frame 3 and main frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward, and which can be opened and closed; an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the gap between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2; a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launcher 680; and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for receiving game balls that have been launched by the ball launcher 680 but have not reached the play area 5a and discharging them into the lower tray 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302, which allows game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to be shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a force that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, below the through-hole 111, with its front surface bulging forward and a performance operation unit 400 attached to its front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 comprises an upper tray 321 for storing game balls to be shot into the game area 5a, a lower tray 322 located below the upper tray 321 and capable of storing game balls supplied from the upper tray 321 and the foul cover unit 270, an upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and a ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to players within the amount of cash inserted into the ball lending machine or the remaining balance on a prepaid card. It is equipped with a return button 329 for returning cash or prepaid cards minus the amount of gaming balls loaned from the ball loan machine, a ball loan return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining amount of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball loan machine, a left effect selection button 331 and a right effect selection button 332 which can be operated by the player when an effect is presented, and a lower tray ball removal button 333 for ejecting gaming balls in the lower tray 322 below the tray unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the tray unit 320, in the center left-right when viewed from the front. It can be pressed by the player and can display effect images to the player. This effect operation unit 400, details of which will be described later, is equipped with a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame-side effect display device 460 that is positioned within the operation button 410 so that it can be seen from the player's side and can display effect images.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper side of the tray unit 320, on the left side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, to the left of the through-hole 111, and decorates the left outer side of the through-hole 111 (play area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 is equipped with a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can emit light for decoration.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, above the tray unit 320, to the right of the through-hole 111, and decorates the right outer side of the through-hole 111 (play area 5a). This door frame right side unit 550 protrudes further forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is equipped with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 at the front end. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, right unit right decorative member 557, and right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached above the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550, above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and decorates the upper part of the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 570, details of which will be described later, is equipped with a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart on the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center of the front surface, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the top middle decorative member 576, top left decorative lens member 579, and top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and Figure 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed (hinged) with its left edge closed off against the front of the main frame 4 when viewed from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 attached to the lower front corner of the front face, a tray unit 320 to which the performance operation unit 400 is attached attached to the lower front face of the through opening 111, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left outer front face of the through opening 111, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right outer front face of the through opening 111, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper outer front face of the through opening 111.

As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 comprises a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular shape extending vertically in front view and a through-hole 111 penetrating from front to back; a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110; upper and lower door frame hinge members 140 and 150 attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end of the reinforcement unit 130 as viewed from the front, protruding forward from the door frame base 110 and rotatably attached to the upper and lower main frame hinge members 620 and lower main frame hinge members 640 of the main frame 4; a left-side door frame decorative board 160 attached to the front of the door frame base 110, to the left of the through-hole 111 as viewed from the front, and having multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface; and a glass unit mounting member 170 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting a glass unit 190.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front; a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111; a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward; a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110; and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 is equipped with various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, a ball delivery solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, a ball lending/returning display unit 330, a left effect selection button 331, a right effect selection button 332, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 440, a door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461), an upper speaker 573, etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 has an outer shape that is a square (rectangle) extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 has a through-hole 111 that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery that is a substantially square extending vertically when viewed from the front. The upper and left and right sides of the through-hole 111 that form the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, and the lower side that forms the inner periphery is located approximately one-third of the height in the vertical direction from the bottom end of the door frame base 110. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed into a frame shape as a whole by the through-hole 111 that penetrates from front to back. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is equipped with a handle mounting surface 112 formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward more than the right end; a cylinder mounting section 113 recessed from the rear toward the front near the right end when viewed from the front, between the handle mounting surface 112 and the through-hole 111, to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached; a cylinder insertion hole 114 that penetrates from the front to the rear of the cylinder mounting section 113 and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted; and a ball feed opening 115 that penetrates from the front to the left of the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting surface 112 when viewed from the front, allowing the entrance opening 251a and ball extraction opening 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to be seen forward.

The door frame base 110 also has a lower tray passage opening 116 that penetrates front to back, toward the left of the center of the door frame base 110 and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, allowing the ball discharge opening 276 of the foul cover unit 270 to face forward; an upper tray passage opening 117 that penetrates front to back near the left end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, adjacent to the lower edge of the through opening 111, allowing the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 to face forward; a glass unit mounting section 118 that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the through opening 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted; and speaker insertion openings 119 that penetrate front to back at both upper left and right corners of the door frame base 110, allowing the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 to be inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 and 33. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcement unit 130 comprises an upper reinforcing metal plate 131 extending left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a middle reinforcing metal plate 132 extending left and right and attached below the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a left reinforcing metal plate 133 extending up and down and attached along the left edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, a right reinforcing metal plate 134 extending up and down and attached along the right edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and with which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 engages.

The reinforcement unit 130 is configured such that the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing metal plate 131 are connected and fixed with screws to the upper ends of the left reinforcing metal plate 133 and the right reinforcing metal plate 134, respectively, and the left end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the left reinforcing metal plate 133 with a screw. The right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 via the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210, which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcement unit 130 is formed into a frame shape by the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, middle reinforcing metal plate 132, left reinforcing metal plate 133, right reinforcing metal plate 134, etc.

The upper reinforcing metal plate 131, middle reinforcing metal plate 132, left reinforcing metal plate 133, right reinforcing metal plate 134, and locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending metal plates. The middle reinforcing metal plate 132 has a notch 132a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has sections that are bent in the front-to-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, middle reinforcing metal plate 132, left reinforcing metal plate 133, and right reinforcing metal plate 134. These sections increase strength and rigidity and also prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as piano wire or flathead screwdrivers from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33, etc. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 comprises: a door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 attached to the door-frame base 110 and having a pair of protruding pieces 141 a spaced apart vertically; a cylindrical door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the pair of protruding pieces 141 a of the door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 and has its upper end inserted into the door-frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main-frame-side upper hinge member 620; a disk-shaped flange member 143 attached to the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 at a position between the pair of protruding pieces 141 a; and a lock spring 144 that is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141 a of the pair of protruding pieces 141 a, through which the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 is inserted, and that urges the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 upward.

The door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that connects the rear ends of a pair of protruding pieces 141a, and is U-shaped in side view with an open front. The mounting piece that connects the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The portion (upper end) of the upper door frame hinge pin 142 that protrudes above the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620. Furthermore, although not shown, the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 142 that protrudes below the lower protruding piece 141a is bent horizontally. This bent portion abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the upper door frame hinge pin 142.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring that is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the upper door frame hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring that can be inserted through the upper door frame hinge pin 142, with its upper end abutting the flange member 143 and its lower end abutting the lower protrusion 141a. This lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the lower protrusion 141a, and urges the upper door frame hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143.

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

When an operator grasps the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the upper door frame hinge pin 142 of the door frame-side upper hinge member 140 and pulls that portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, the entire door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward, and the upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 142 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 142 of the door frame-side upper hinge member 140 can be inserted from below into the upper door frame hinge hole 623 of the main body frame-side upper hinge member 620, or removed downward. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be supported so that it can rotate on a hinge relative to the main body frame 4.

In addition, the portion of the upper door frame hinge member 140 that is supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the upper door frame hinge axis bracket 141 on the upper door frame hinge pin 142 is supported coaxially with the lower door frame hinge pin 152 of the lower door frame hinge member 150 (described below). This allows the upper door frame hinge member 140 and the lower door frame hinge member 150 to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a favorable condition.

[3-1d. Door frame bottom hinge member]
The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame-side lower hinge axis bracket 151 having a flat extension piece 151a attached to the door-frame base 110 and extending forward, and a cylindrical door-frame-side lower hinge pin 152 (see Figures 21 and 22) protruding downward from near the front end of the extension piece 151a of the door-frame-side lower hinge axis bracket.

The door frame lower hinge axis bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat extension piece 151a, and its overall shape in a side view is roughly L-shaped. This door frame lower hinge axis bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows downward. This door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main frame 4 (described below). The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

This door frame-side lower hinge member 150 can support the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 so that the door frame can rotate along the hinge when the door frame-side lower hinge pin 152 is inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame-side lower hinge member 640.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The left-side door frame decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The left-side door frame decorative board 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, on the left side of the through-hole 111 as viewed from the front. The left-side door frame decorative board 160 includes an upper left-side door frame decorative board 161 that extends vertically from a height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 as viewed from the front, to a height near the vertical center of the through-hole 111, and a lower left-side door frame decorative board 162 that extends vertically from a height below the lower left-side door frame upper decorative board 161 to approximately the same height as the lower end of the upper tray passage opening 117.

The upper left-side decorative board 161 and the lower left-side decorative board 162 of the door frame left side decorative board 160 each have multiple LEDs 161a, 162a on their front surfaces that can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a, 162a are full-color LEDs.

When the door frame 3 is assembled, the door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 (described below), and by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 161a, 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 31(b) etc. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-like protrusion 172 that protrudes from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation.

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below a pair of speaker insertion holes 119, at positions outside the glass unit mounting portions 118.

By rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is positioned outward from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from behind, allowing the glass unit 190 to be inserted into or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 while the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 abuts against the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, restricting the rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, allowing the glass unit 190 to be mounted to the door frame base 110.

The glass unit mounting member 170 has a protrusion 172 protruding from a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110. Therefore, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protrusion 172. Therefore, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is free to rotate, the protrusion 172 is stable protruding downward from the base 171. Furthermore, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is in a rotated position where the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Therefore, even if vibrations or other factors act on the glass unit mounting member 170, the entire member will not rotate such that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 will not be released naturally.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the protrusion 172 is moved outward beyond the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, allowing the upper side of the glass unit 190 to be moved rearward, allowing the glass unit 190 to be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33, etc. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in Figures 32 and 33, etc., the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 182 extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181, a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 183 that protrude into the tube portion 181, extend the entire axial length of the tube portion 181, and are arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer circumferential surface of the tube portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181.

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 112 with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 182 abutting against the front surface of the handle mounting surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side of the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side. These three protrusions 183 are formed in positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 are aligned with the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301, thereby restricting the rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) relative to the door frame base 110.

In addition, because the axis of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, when it is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat 112 of the door frame base 110, the axis of the tubular portion 181 is tilted so that it extends forward and to the right, allowing the handle unit 300 to be mounted to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33, etc. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner periphery of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and two transparent glass plates 192 that close the interior of the glass frame 191 and have their outer peripheries attached to the glass frame 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front and rear ends of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and rear directions so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a that extend outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a strip-shaped locking piece 191b that protrudes downward from the bottom end and extends along the bottom edge. The mounting pieces 191a of the glass frame 191 are capable of abutting against the protrusions 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b is capable of being inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see Figure 26).

This glass unit 190 is attached to the door frame base 110 by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110, abutting the front end of the glass frame 191 against the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 abuts against the rear surface of the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191.

To remove the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, follow the steps above in reverse. This allows the glass unit 190 to be attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33, etc. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat main body 201 having a predetermined outer periphery, a flat rear projection 202 that protrudes rearward slightly along the outer periphery of the main body 201, and a pair of locking projections 203 that are spaced apart on the left and right, protrude forward beyond the main body 201, and are capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Furthermore, the upper end of the main body 201 is shaped to fit the lower edge of the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is shaped to fit a portion of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the playing area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 202 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion 202 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, giving it high strength and rigidity. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 33, the rear protrusion 202 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 201 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 201. This rear protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed so as to align with a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 202 is not formed in the area of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. As a result, game balls (game balls launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 do not come into contact with the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200, and do not hinder the game balls from being shot into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. This allows the security cover 200 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the rear projection 202, excluding the portion that protrudes rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201, is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the component 1000, which will be described later. Furthermore, the security cover 200 is in a state where the rear projection 202 that protrudes rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201 protrudes rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000, so as to abut against the underside of the component 1000. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear to a cylinder attachment part 113 located near the right end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112, and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and main frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and main frame 4, in cooperation with a locking unit 700 (described later).

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 comprises a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that extends forward and backward and has a keyhole 211a on the front, a rotation transmission member 212 that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and transmits the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 211a to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that attaches the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. With the corresponding key, the lock can be rotated a specified angle in either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The rotation transmission member 212 is cylindrical (more specifically, conical, with a diameter that increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and has a pair of notches 212a cut from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. This rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main frame 4 can be inserted from the rear; by inserting the protrusions of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 into the pair of notches 212a, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, causing the key cylinder 710 to rotate.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate and has a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. Specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 comprises a rectangular, flat front plate 213a that extends vertically in a front view, a pair of side plate portions 213b that extend rearward in a flat plate shape from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a, and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c that extend flatly away from each rear edge of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 from the rear at approximately the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. Of the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting metal sheet 213, the left mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing metal sheet 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the right mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right reinforcing metal sheet 134 of the reinforcing unit 130. In this way, the cylinder mounting metal sheet 213 connects the middle reinforcing metal sheet 132 and right reinforcing metal sheet 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211, which protrudes forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 114 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed within the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113, which is open to the rear.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 34 to 41. Figure 34(a) is a front view of the performance operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the performance operation unit. Also, Figure 35(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit from the rear. Figure 36 is an explanatory diagram of the performance operation unit as viewed from the direction of the central axis of the operation button. Figure 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along line D-D in Figure 34(a), and Figure 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E-E in Figure 34(b). Figure 39(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line F-F in Figure 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). Figure 40 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front, and Figure 41 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the rear. The presentation operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the tray unit 320 in the center of the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present presentation images to the player.

The effect operation unit 400 comprises an operation button 410 that has a circular outer shape and is transparent at the center except for the outer edge, and can be pressed by the player; a frame-shaped frame unit 415 that surrounds the outer edge of the operation button 410 and is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the tray unit cover 326; a decorative board unit 420 that is positioned behind the operation button 410 and is capable of illuminating and decorating the outer edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; a base unit 430 that is attached to the rear of the frame unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and decorative board unit 420 attached to its front; and a door frame-side effect display device 460 that is attached to the base unit 430 so that it can be seen by the player through the operation button 410 and is capable of displaying effect images.

[3-4a. Operation buttons]
The operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 42. Figure 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled from the front, and Figure 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled from the rear. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the vertical height of the tray unit 320, and the center, excluding the outer periphery, is transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer periphery and a curved surface (partial spherical shape) that bulges forward toward the center, an annular button frame 412 attached to the front of the outer periphery of the button lens 411, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and button base 413 are formed from materials that are difficult for light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially uniform thickness throughout. The front side of the button lens 411 is formed with a smooth, curved surface with no irregularities. The button lens 411 includes a first button decorative portion 411a, which extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) of the button frame 412 from the back surface while being recessed in a W-shape in cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner periphery of the button frame 412 and is arranged in a row circumferentially; and multiple (six) second button decorative portions 411b, which extend on an axis toward the center from the back surface while being recessed in an arc-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position further outward than the first button decorative portion 411a and are arranged in a row circumferentially within a predetermined angular range.

As shown in the figure, when assembled to the operating button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center, with the groups on the left and right sides extending further toward the center than the groups on the top and bottom.

The multiple second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, with three formed on each side. These second button decorative portions 411b are formed to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that their front sides are approximately flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 has a W-shaped or arc-shaped cross-section formed on the back surface of the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 411b, which creates a lens effect that refracts light, making it difficult to see clearly from behind.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape and has multiple (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an arc shape in the circumferential direction for a predetermined length. The six frame openings 412a are provided three on each side, corresponding to the six second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plated layer on its surface that gives it a metallic luster.

The button base 413 comprises a generally cylindrical main body 413a extending slightly in the front-to-rear direction; an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a; four guide bosses 413c protruding cylindrically from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and arranged at approximately equal intervals around the circumference; three detection pieces 413d protruding strip-like from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and arranged at approximately equal intervals around the circumference; six base openings 413e that penetrate the flange 413b from front to rear outside the main body 413a and extend a predetermined length around the outer periphery around the circumference; and an inner extension 413f that extends cylindrically forward from the front end of the main body 413a and narrows inward (towards the center) so that its front end fits snugly against the inner surface of the button lens 411.

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners, top, bottom, left, and right, in the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide bosses 413c are each slidably inserted into the retaining holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals around the circumferential direction of the main body 413a, with two on the upper side and one on the lower side. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e, three on each side, correspond to the second button decorative portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, the main body 413a and part of the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer periphery. The inner diameter of the inward-tapered front end of the inner extension 413f roughly matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of this operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface (the shape of a portion of an approximately spherical surface) and is transparent, allowing the display screen of the door frame-side performance display device 460 located at the rear to be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into retaining holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and is biased forward by an operation button spring 438 inserted into the retaining hole 431b of the unit base 431. The biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 causes the front side of the outer periphery to abut against the frame unit 415, restricting further forward movement of the operation button 410. By pressing the operation button 410 against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438, the rear end moves rearward until it abuts against the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. When this detection piece 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440, it indicates that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, when the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the operation button 410 has a first button decorative portion 411a formed around the entire circumference, extending from the inner edge of the button frame 412 of the transparent button lens 411 toward the center, making it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 of the base unit 430.

Furthermore, the front opening of the cylindrical button base 413 of the operation button 410 is closed by the button lens 411 and button frame 412. The button frame 412, which is attached to the outer edge of the button lens 411, forms a transparent section that allows visibility to the rear, tapering inward from the outer periphery relative to the outer diameter of the operation button 410. The presence of this button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 of the base unit 430.

When the operation button 410 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413a) passes through the inner periphery of the decorative board unit 420 and protrudes rearward beyond the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. This prevents light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423, respectively, of the decorative board unit 420 from leaking from the outside to the inside of the button base 413, and also prevents light emitted forward from the LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, operation button right inner decorative board 434, operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and operation button lower inner decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the LEDs mounted on the first LEDs 422a, 423a and second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420 and the left operation button interior decorative board 433, right operation button interior decorative board 434, above operation button interior decorative board 435, and below operation button interior decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 can prevent areas other than those intended for illumination decoration from being illuminated, allowing for attractive illumination decoration.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 41. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 comprises a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a and attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320; a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached to the rear of the frame body 416 on both sides of the central opening 416a; and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the front of the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that penetrates from front to back and has a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410; multiple (six) peripheral openings 416b that penetrate from front to back on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a and extend in an arc shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a and are arranged in a circumferential row; and a notch 416c cut out to a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. The central opening 416a is formed to be approximately the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. This allows the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to abut against the rear outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a, three on each side, and are closed from the rear by frame side lenses 417. The cutouts 416c also extend through in the front-to-rear direction, and a frame top lens 418 is fitted into them from the front.

The frame body 416 also has a generally cylindrical inner tube portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner tube portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and is cut out at a location corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. When the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tube portion 416d is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, and separates the first LEDs 422a, 423a from the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see Figure 38).

Furthermore, the frame main body 416 has a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery and are attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame main body 416 (performance operation unit 400) is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of mounting portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

The frame body 416 has a plated layer with a metallic luster formed on almost the entire surface, except for a section the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite the central opening 416a from the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached).

The frame side lenses 417 close the peripheral openings 416b, three of which are formed on each side of the frame body 416, from the rear. The front side of the frame side lenses 417 is formed as a smooth surface with no irregularities, and the rear side has multiple irregularities formed along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see Figures 39 and 46). These multiple irregularities refract light, making it impossible to see behind the frame side lenses 417.

The frame top lens 418 has a roughly rectangular outer shape so that it fits into the cutout 416c of the frame body 416 from the front. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In addition, the rear side of the frame top lens 418 has multiple rows of irregularities that extend in a zigzag pattern along the periphery of the central opening 416a in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see Figures 37 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple irregularities, making it impossible to see behind the frame top lens 418.

When the frame unit 415 is assembled into the performance operation unit 400, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are located in front of the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, and the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the base unit 430, and each can be illuminated and decorated by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc., mounted on them.

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 43. Figure 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415, as well as impart vibrations to the performance operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 comprises a C-shaped board base 421 that is open at the top, a left outer decorative board for operation buttons 422 and a right outer decorative board for operation buttons 423 that are attached to the front of both the left and right sides of the board base 421, a vibration motor 424 that is attached to the lower front of the board base 421, and a motor cover 425 that is attached to the front of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

The inner periphery of the substrate base 421 is formed slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer periphery is formed larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 and smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The operation button left outer decorative board 422 extends in an arc along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 is equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front surface along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted on the front surface along the inner periphery of the board base 421, radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 422a. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends in an arc along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front surface along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted on the front surface along the inner periphery of the board base 421, radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 423a. Both the front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and vibrations can be generated by rotating this weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Furthermore, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a, 423a on the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415. When assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the inner cylindrical part 416d of the frame unit 415 is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 (see Figure 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 can illuminate and decorate only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 using light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a on the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, and can illuminate and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 using light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b.

In addition, the decorative board unit 420 can generate vibrations by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, causing the entire performance operation unit 400 to vibrate.

[3-4f. Effects of the production operation unit]
The effects of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 44 to 46. Figure 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in Figure 37. Figure 45(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion of the operation button that is intended to be hidden by the first button decorative portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button, with a portion of the operation button cut out in a view of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion of the operation button that is intended to be hidden by the first button decorative portion, button frame, etc. in a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. Figure 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends.

The effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment can show the player effect images according to the game state that changes as the game ball is shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and can also allow the player to operate the operation button 410 to participate in the presented effect, allowing the player to enjoy it.

The overall height of the performance operation unit 400 is approximately the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 in the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The overall width of the performance operation unit 400 is also slightly larger than one-third of the overall width of the door frame 3. When viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 is positioned below the play area 5a (through-hole 111 in the door frame base 110), centered in the left-right direction.

The performance operation unit 400 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 by the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. When the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the underside of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which forms the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In other words, only the upper portion of the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, and it is attached in a suspended state.

The effect operation unit 400 is mounted so that the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 is inclined so that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a portion of an approximately spherical surface), moves upward as it moves forward at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical. As a result, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play with the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is positioned in front of the center of the play area 5a on the game board 5, which is located above the spinner unit 320 (effect operation unit 400), and the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when a player looks down from the play area 5a at the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 will appear as close as possible to its front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL), allowing the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410 to be clearly visible.

The performance operation unit 400 has four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into four retaining holes 431b of the base unit 430, and is biased forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not being pressed), the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to abut against a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit 400, the center side (toward the central axis CL) of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 from near the inner periphery. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a portion of a roughly spherical surface), the portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see Figure 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) protrudes approximately 4 cm forward from the front surface of the frame unit 415 in the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410.

Under normal conditions, when a player presses the operation button 410 on the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts against the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 stops. When a player presses the operation button 410, they press the button lens 411, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a portion of an approximately spherical surface).

This operation button 410 has a much larger outer diameter than the effect operation buttons found on conventional pachinko machines, so there is a high possibility that the peripheral area away from the center of the button lens 411 will be pressed. Specifically, effect operation buttons on conventional pachinko machines are attached so that their central axis extends approximately parallel to the vertical, whereas the operation button 410 on the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment is attached so that its central axis CL is inclined relative to the vertical. Therefore, when a player presses the operation button 410 from above, as with conventional pachinko machines, the player will press a portion of the operation button 410 that is away from the central axis CL, as shown by the hollow arrow in Figure 44.

However, in conventional pachinko machines, the operation buttons used for effects are formed with a flat surface that is pressed by the player. If the operation button were made larger while keeping the area that is pressed flat, pressing an area that is off-center on the operation button would tilt the surface that is pressed so that the pressed area would retract first, preventing the operation button from retracting in a straight line, and there is a risk that the operation button would not be able to be pressed.

In contrast, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface (the shape of a portion of a roughly spherical surface) that bulges forward at the part (button lens 411) that the player presses. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it less likely to tilt, and allowing the operation button 410 to move straight backward. Therefore, no matter where on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can move back smoothly without tilting, so the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the effect of pressing the operation button 410 can be fully enjoyed.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front part of the board base 421 of the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 so that the performance operation unit 400 can be suspended. Therefore, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration occurs at the part farthest from the mounting part, so the entire performance operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly) and the vibration can be transmitted to a player who is touching the performance operation unit 400. Furthermore, because the vibration motor 424 is located directly below a position that is relatively easy for a player to press (the position of the white arrow in Figure 44), strong vibrations can be transmitted to a player who is pressing the operation button 410, surprising the player and allowing them to enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and a gap is formed between the underside of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442, which forms the underside, and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 is pressed or struck strongly downward, the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., bend downward to absorb the impact until the underside of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i. Furthermore, after the underside of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i, downward movement of the performance operation unit 400 is restricted, preventing excessive force from being applied to the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., thereby preventing damage to the performance operation unit 400, etc. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with great force when an effect requiring pressing of the operation button 410 on the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit 400 will not be damaged, which prevents interruptions to play due to damage and prevents a decrease in the player's interest, while also preventing an increase in the burden on the gaming hall by making it less susceptible to damage.

As mentioned above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses is formed into a curved surface (the shape of a portion of a roughly spherical surface) that protrudes forward. This makes it stronger and more rigid than a flat plate, and even if it is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed throughout the entire button lens 411, making it less likely to break.

In addition, as shown in Figure 46, the button lens 411, frame side lens 417, frame top lens 418, and operation button inner decorative member 432 of the performance operation unit 400 are made of transparent materials, so the uneven decorations formed on the backside of these, such as the first button decoration portion 411a, second button decoration portion 411b, first button inner decoration portion 432f, and second button inner decoration portion 432g, can be seen from the front (player's side). Furthermore, in the areas where these uneven decorations are formed, the thickness of the plate varies, causing light to refract in complex ways, making it difficult to see the back side through the areas where the uneven decorations are formed.

The effect operation unit 400 is equipped with a first button decoration 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, and the uneven decoration of this first button decoration 411a makes it difficult to see behind the outer edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration 411a is formed (behind the direction of the central axis CL), there is a gap between the inner periphery of the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 432a of the operation button internal decoration member 432, but the first button decoration 411a located in front of that gap makes it difficult to see the gap on the outer periphery of the operation button internal decoration member 432 from the front side (player side). This prevents the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated even when the operation button 410 is equipped with an internal decorative element 432 that is fixed in position, preventing players from feeling uncomfortable when looking at the operation button 410. It also allows the internal decorative element 432 to be positioned without any problems inside the transparent operation button 410, improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured so that the first button decoration 411a, second button decoration 411b, and button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 prevent the player from seeing the unit base 431 and decorative board unit 420, which are located outside the outer periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 and to the rear (back) through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in Figure 45, the cross-hatched area surrounded by a dashed dotted line is hidden from the player. In this way, because the operation button 410 is equipped with the first button decoration 411a, second button decoration 411b, and button frame 412, the outside and back of the operation button interior decorative member 432 can be hidden and made less visible, improving the appearance of the operation button 410 and, ultimately, the entire effect operation unit 400.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 on the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a circumferential direction, while the second button interior decorative portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decorative member 432 located on the inside rear of the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL and is arranged in a concentric circle. Therefore, as shown in Figure 46, the concave and convex lines of the first button decorative portion 411a and the convex and convex lines of the second button interior decorative portion 432g intersect, allowing the player to see geometric decoration.

In addition, because the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the effect operation unit 400 are separated in the front-to-back direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g can present the player with a geometric pattern that gives a sense of depth and three-dimensionality, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration, including the interior of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g are spaced apart in the front-to-back direction. Therefore, as the player's eye position moves, the overlap between the embossed lines of the first button decorative portion 411a and the embossed lines of the second button inner decorative portion 432g changes, allowing the player to see a dynamic decoration and enjoy it.

In this way, the performance operation unit 400 can present a dynamic, three-dimensional decoration to the player using the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, thereby strongly attracting the player's attention and making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a left operation button interior decorative board 433, a right operation button interior decorative board 434, an upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and a lower operation button interior decorative board 436 arranged behind the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and by illuminating the multiple LEDs mounted on the front of these, the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. In other words, the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436 can illuminate and decorate the inside of the operation button 410. The LEDs mounted on the front of the left operation button interior decorative board 433, right operation button interior decorative board 434, upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and lower operation button interior decorative board 436 are positioned inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when viewed in the direction of the central axis CL, as shown in Figure 38. Therefore, light from these LEDs does not leak outside the main body 413a, allowing only the inside of the operation button 410 to be beautifully illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a first LED 422a on the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and a first LED 423a on the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button in the decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the second button decorative part 411b that is visible from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and by illuminating these first LEDs 422a, 423a, the six second button decorative parts 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. As shown in Figure 38, the first LED 422a on the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a on the right operation button outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the cylindrical inner tube 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415, so that light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a does not leak inside the main body 413a or outside the inner tube 416d, allowing only the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410 to be well illuminated and decorated.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b on the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and a second LED 423b on the right operation button outer decorative board 423 located behind the frame side lenses 417 visible through the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. The frame side lenses 417 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating these second LEDs 422b, 423b. The second LED 422b on the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b on the right operation button outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner tube portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b does not leak into the inside of the inner tube portion 416d or outside the frame main body 416, allowing only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 to be illuminated and decorated well.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 positioned behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the front of the frame top lens decorative board 437. A flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from below the portion of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached, to near the rear bottom end of the frame top lens 418. This prevents light from the LEDs on the frame top lens decorative board 437 from leaking toward the operation button 410 or frame side lens 417, allowing only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 to be illuminated and decorated well.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The left-side door frame unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, primarily with reference to Figures 47 to 50. Figure 47(a) is a front view of the left-side door frame unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the left-side door frame unit from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the left-side door frame unit from the rear. Figure 48 is an exploded perspective view of the left-side door frame unit from the front, and Figure 49 is an exploded perspective view of the left-side door frame unit from the rear. Figure 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line L-L in Figure 47(a). The left-side door frame unit 530 is attached to the left side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, to the left of the through-hole 111, above the tray unit 320, so as to cover the front sides of the upper left-side decorative board 161 and the lower left-side decorative board 162 (left-side decorative board 160). The door frame left side unit 530 is intended to decorate the left side of the through opening 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 consists of a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front of the left unit base 531; a translucent left unit decorative lens member (not shown) located in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedron-shaped decoration at its front end; and a cylindrical frame-shaped member attached to the upper front of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. a left unit upper decorative base 534 extending vertically together with the left unit upper decorative base 531; a left unit lower decorative base 535 attached to the lower front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and projecting forward in a frame shape that is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534; a transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and left unit lower decorative base 535; and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is shaped like a shallow box with an open rear, and has multiple openings 531a penetrating the front from front to back. As shown in the figure, the multiple openings 531a include circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically. The left unit base 531 is attached to the left side of the front of the door frame base 110 so that the LEDs 161a, 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and door frame left side lower decorative board 162) face forward through the multiple openings 531a. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that, when assembled to the door frame 3, each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned approximately in the vertical center. The left unit base 531 is made of an opaque material.

The left unit base 531 also has a left-side reflective upright wall 538 (see Figures 5 and 23) that stands toward the front from the glass plate 192 that is arranged to cover the through-hole 111. The left-side reflective upright wall 538 has a flat inner surface that faces the through-hole 111 and is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. This reflective surface can be provided by forming the inner surface of the left-side reflective upright wall 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, the left-side reflective upright wall 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as part (the left side) of the reflective upright wall 33 described above.

The left unit diffusion lens element 532 is made of a transparent element and is divided into an upper diffusion lens element 532A and a lower diffusion lens element 532B. The left unit diffusion lens element 532 has a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion 532b that is rectangular in front view and corresponds to the rectangular opening 531a. The door frame left side unit 530 is configured so that, when assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately behind the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed like a convex lens with smooth front and rear surfaces. This circular lens portion 532a allows light from the LEDs 161a and 162a located at the rear to be emitted forward as a point. The light emitted forward from this circular lens portion 532a causes the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member to glow and decorate.

The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 comprises a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is conically recessed backward at the center of the front surface, a front diffuse reflection lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface, an input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and a front reflection portion 532f that is outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface and is inclined overall to move forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided circumferentially by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflector portion 532c. More specifically, when the front diffuser lens portion 532d is cut along the radial direction, the cross-section has grooves that are recessed in an arc-like shape toward the rear, and the peaks between the grooves that bulge out in an arc-like shape toward the front, forming a smooth wavy front surface. Furthermore, the front diffuser lens portion 532d is formed so that the grooves and peaks alternate circumferentially, separated by the radially extending lines that divide it circumferentially.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves divided circumferentially by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These multiple grooves are V-shaped recessed from rear to front, with their deepest portions formed in an arc shape. When cut radially, the cross section of the front reflecting portion 532f is saw-like, with the peaks between the grooves forming triangular shapes that point backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the grooves and peaks move forward as they move away from the center. Furthermore, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the grooves and peaks alternate circumferentially, separated by radially extending lines. These radially extending lines that divide the front reflecting portion 532f circumferentially coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

When this rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a on the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

Light emitted forward from LEDs 161a and 162a enters rectangular lens portion 532b through input lens portion 532e. Because input lens portion 532e bulges backward in a curved (convex) shape, it refracts the light radiating forward from LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels parallel to the front, directing almost all of the input light to conical central diffuse reflector 532c. The light guided to central diffuse reflector 532c is then diffusely reflected by the inclined conical surface of central diffuse reflector 532c in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending forward (a direction parallel to the front surface of left-side door frame decorative board 160), and travels within rectangular lens portion 532b along its front surface from the center toward the outside. Furthermore, light reflected by the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c travels from the center to the outside (away from the center line of the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c) across the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction.

When light reflected from the center toward the outside within the rectangular lens portion 532b, approximately parallel to the front surface of the door frame left-side decorative board 160, reaches the sawtooth-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. Because the rear surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that it moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-back direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center (see Figure 50). This allows light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c across the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-back direction to be sequentially reflected forward by the forward reflecting portion 532f as it moves from the center toward the outside.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusing lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. Because the cross section of the front diffusing lens portion 532d is shaped like a wave, it can diffuse the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f in various directions, allowing light to be emitted substantially uniformly forward (to the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b.

In the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f of this rectangular lens portion 532b, multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are radially shifted along the dividing lines, so that the concentric arc grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This prevents the light irradiated forward from the front of the rectangular lens portion 532b from becoming a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and allows light of a more uniform shade to be irradiated forward. This allows the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

The left unit decorative lens element (not shown) is formed to fit along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens element includes a circular decorative element formed in front of the circular lens element 532a of the left unit diffusing lens element 532, and a polyhedral decorative element formed in front of the rectangular lens element 532b of the left unit diffusing lens element 532. The circular decorative element has a cylindrical shape with a recessed front surface and a short, elongated cylindrical portion with multiple triangular ribs circumferentially arranged around the periphery. The polyhedral decorative element is shaped like a rectangular parallelepiped, with multiple rows of square pyramidal elements arranged vertically on the front surface and multiple rows of triangular polyhedrons arranged vertically on both sides of the rectangular parallelepiped. The circular decorative element and polyhedral decorative element are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative element 561a and polyhedral decorative element 561b of the right unit decorative lens element 561 in the door frame right side element 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Furthermore, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the angular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed as a rectangular tube extending front to back. The portion of the left unit upper decorative base 534 that forms the lower surface of the outer periphery is inclined so that it protrudes downward as it moves from the front end to the rear end, and the lower part of this portion is open from front to back. This left unit upper decorative base 534 is made of an opaque material.

When viewed from the front, the left unit lower decorative base 535 is U-shaped and open at the top. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from approximately the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end, with the upper side moving rearward as it goes upward. This left unit lower decorative base 535 is made of an opaque material.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically across the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle section in the vertical direction is concave rearward, and is composed of a L-shaped section whose lower section is bent rearward to fit along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, a L-shaped section whose upper section is bent rearward to fit along the front end of the left unit lower decorative base 535, and a straight section connecting the lower end of the upper L-shaped section with the upper end of the lower L-shaped section.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at its upper and lower ends to the front of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. This left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent material, allowing the left unit decorative lens component located at the rear to be seen from the front.

The decorative members 537 extend vertically in short lengths and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative members 537 are made of an opaque material.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The right-side door frame unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 51 to 55. Figure 51(a) is a front view of the right-side door frame unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the right-side door frame unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the right-side door frame unit seen from the rear. Figure 52 is an exploded perspective view of the right-side door frame unit seen from the front, and Figure 53 is an exploded perspective view of the right-side door frame unit seen from the rear. Figure 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line M-M in Figure 51(a). Figure 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line N-N in Figure 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 51(a). The right-side door frame unit 550 is attached above the tray unit 320 to the right of the through-hole 111 in the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right-side unit 550 comprises a box-shaped right unit base 551 that extends vertically and is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, to the right of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; a door frame right-side decorative board 552 that is attached to the front of the right unit base 551; a transparent, flat, right unit left diffusion lens element 553 that is attached to the front of the right unit base 551, to the left of the center when viewed from the front, in front of the door frame right-side decorative board 552, and extends vertically and front-to-back; a decorative, sheet-shaped right unit left decorative element 554 that is attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553; and a transparent, flat, right unit left cover 555 that is attached to the right unit left diffusion lens element 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit left decorative element 554.

The door frame right side unit 550 also includes a transparent, flat right unit right diffusion lens element 556 that extends vertically and longitudinally and is attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative base plate 552 and to the right of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553 as viewed from the front, to the right of the center as viewed from the front on the front surface of the right unit base 551 and to the right of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553; a decorative, sheet-like right unit right decorative element 557 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens element 556; and a transparent, flat right unit right cover 558 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right decorative element 557.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is equipped with a shallow, box-shaped, opaque right unit left shading member 559 that is positioned between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and extends vertically and longitudinally with the front and right sides open, and a flat, opaque right unit right shading member 560 that is attached to the left of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left shading member 559.

The door frame right side unit 550 also includes a translucent right unit decorative lens element 561 attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens element 556 and having a polyhedral decoration at its front end, a frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that is attached to the front of the right unit base 551 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens element 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens element 556, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a plurality of decorative elements 564 attached to the front side of the right unit cover 563. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so that it passes vertically through the right unit base 551, and is equipped with a connection cable for connecting the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 to the door frame top unit relay board 589 of the door frame top unit 570.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, extending vertically and horizontally, and a short, rectangular cylindrical shape extending front to back, with a closed box-like shape near the center in the front to back direction. This right unit base 551 is made of an opaque material.

The right unit base 551 also has a right-side reflective upright wall 568 (see Figures 6 and 24) that stands toward the front from the glass plate 192 that is disposed so as to cover the through-hole 111. The right-side reflective upright wall 568 has a flat inner surface that faces the through-hole 111 and is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. Similar to the inner surface of the left-side reflective upright wall 538, this reflective surface can be formed by forming the inner surface of the right-side reflective upright wall 568 itself out of a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, the right-side reflective upright wall 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as part (the right portion) of the reflective upright wall 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is shaped like a vertically extending strip. It includes multiple left LEDs 552a mounted to the left of the center on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted to the right of the center on the front surface, and multiple middle LEDs 552c mounted in the center on the front surface. The left LEDs 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 are used to illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LEDs 552b are used to illuminate and decorate the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LEDs 552c are used to illuminate and decorate the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is white on both the front and back. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comprises a flat main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-to-rear directions; a rear wall portion 553b that protrudes in a short, flat shape from the rear edge of the main body portion 553a to the right as viewed from the front; multiple notches 553c that are cut out in a rectangular shape from the right end of the rear wall portion 553b to the left as viewed from the front and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; a shallow storage recess 553d on the left surface of the main body portion 553a as viewed from the front that can store the right unit left decorative member 554; multiple input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and are provided in the vertical direction; and multiple side reflectors 553f that are arranged in the vertical direction on the right surface of the main body portion 553a as viewed from the front so that each input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in side view, with the upper corner of the front end notched at an angle in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower edge is slanted so that it slopes upward as it moves forward. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 55, the main body 553a as a whole is slightly slanted relative to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552, so that it slopes to the right as it moves forward from the rear end. When assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the main body 553a protrudes further forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right end of the rear wall portion 553b extends to approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall portion 553b abuts against the left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The multiple cutouts 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward through the multiple cutouts 553c, allowing the right unit decorative lens member 561 to be effectively illuminated and decorated.

The storage recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554 to be stored therein.

The multiple input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, they are formed approximately in the vertical center of each of the six equal vertical divisions of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. While not shown in detail, the input lens portions 553e have a rectangular section with a vertically extending square protruding rearward, and a section recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular section to form a spherical curve. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens portions 553e are each positioned immediately in front of the left LED 552a on the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows light from the left LED 552a to be input so that it is widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

Six side reflectors 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 553f is formed by multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves divided circumferentially by lines extending radially from the input lens 553e. The surface of each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves closer to the input lens 553e is inclined relative to the surface of the main body 553a, while the surface farther from the input lens 553e extends perpendicular to the surface of the main body 553a, with the deepest portion formed in an arc shape. When cut radially from the input lens 553e, the side reflector 553f has a cross-sectional shape that is sharp and triangular, with the peaks between the grooves pointing toward the center, forming a sawtooth shape overall. Furthermore, the side reflector 553f is formed so that the grooves and peaks are alternately arranged circumferentially, with the peaks separated by the radial lines that divide the multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves circumferentially.

In this right unit left diffusion lens element 553, light emitted forward from the left LED 552a on the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens element 553e into the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553. The rear end of this input lens element 553e is concave and curved forward, so that the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so that it spreads out, and within the main body 553a, the light is diffused radially forward from each input lens element 553e as the center.

The main body 553a is slightly tilted with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves to the right when viewed from the front as it moves forward. Therefore, light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and entering the main body 553a through the input lens 553e hits the flat left surface inside the main body 553a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted externally from the left surface of the main body 553a, but is instead reflected by the inner surface of the left surface toward the side reflector 553f.

Light incident forward from input lens portion 553e into main body portion 553a hits sawtooth-shaped side reflector 553f, reflects to the left as viewed from the front, and is emitted outward from the left surface of main body portion 553a. Light is also emitted outward (to the right as viewed from the front) from the right surface of main body portion 553a (side reflector 553f). However, because right-unit left light-shielding member 559, located on the right side of main body portion 553a, is a white material, the left surface of right-unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by right-unit left light-shielding member 559 passes through main body portion 553a and is emitted to the left. Therefore, light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f within the main body 553a and light emitted to the right from the side reflector 553f, reflected to the left by the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559, and passed through the main body 553a are emitted to the left from the left surface of the main body 553a, allowing the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a to be illuminated and decorated with good brightness.

Furthermore, in the side reflector 553f, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are radially shifted along the dividing lines, so that the concentric arc grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This prevents the light irradiated outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a from becoming a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and allows light of a more uniform shade to be irradiated to the left. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554, which is housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a, to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

In addition, because the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is made of a transparent member, the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc grooves and radially extending lines on the side reflector 553f formed on the opposite side can be seen from the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 553d is formed). Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern on the side reflector 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be seen through that transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be decorated with the side reflector 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape and is translucent and decorated with decorations such as the pachinko machine 1 manufacturer's logo and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed approximately symmetrically to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and has a similar configuration. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 comprises a flat main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-to-rear directions; a rear wall portion 556b that protrudes in a short, flat shape from the rear edge of the main body portion 556a to the left in a front view; multiple notches 556c that are rectangularly cut out from the left end of the rear wall portion 556b to the right in a front view and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; a shallow storage recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a in a front view that can store the right unit right decorative member 557; multiple input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction; and multiple side reflectors 556f that are arranged in the vertical direction on the left surface of the main body portion 556a in a front view so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens element 556 has a rectangular shape in side view, with the upper front corner of the rectangular shape extending vertically and cut out at an angle to form a C-chamfer, and the lower edge is slanted upward as it moves forward. It has approximately the same external shape as the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 55, the main body 556a as a whole is slightly inclined relative to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552, so that it moves to the left as viewed from the front as it moves forward from the rear end. When assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the main body 556a protrudes further forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of this rear wall 556b abuts against the right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553.

The multiple cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c on the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 556c are formed in positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c on the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutouts 553c on the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutouts 556c on the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening that penetrates from front to back. The middle LEDs 552c on the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from this opening, allowing the multiple middle LEDs 552c to effectively illuminate and decorate the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The storage recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557 to be stored therein.

The multiple input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, they are formed approximately in the vertical center of each of the six equal vertical divisions of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. While not shown in detail, the input lens portions 556e have a rectangular section with a vertically extending square protruding rearward, and a section recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular section to form a spherical curve. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens portions 556e are each positioned immediately in front of the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows light from the right LED 552b to be input so that it is widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

Six (multiple) side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 556f is formed by multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves divided circumferentially by lines extending radially from the input lens 556e. The surface of each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves closer to the input lens 556e is inclined relative to the surface of the main body 556a, while the surface farther from the input lens 556e extends perpendicular to the surface of the main body 556a, with the deepest portion formed in an arc shape. When cut radially from the input lens 556e, the side reflector 556f has a cross-sectional shape that is sharp and triangular, with the peaks between the grooves pointing toward the center, forming a sawtooth shape overall. Furthermore, the side reflector 556f is formed so that the grooves and peaks alternate circumferentially, with the peaks dividing the multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves along the radial lines.

In this right unit right diffusion lens element 556, light emitted forward from the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens element 556e into the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens element 556. The rear end of this input lens element 556e is concave and curved forward, so that the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by this curved surface so that it spreads out, and within the main body 556a, it is diffused radially forward from each input lens element 556e as its center.

The main body 556a is slightly tilted with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves to the left as seen from the front as it moves forward. Therefore, light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a through the input lens 556e hits the flat right surface inside the main body 556a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted externally from the left surface of the main body 556a, but is instead reflected by the inner surface of the right surface towards the side reflector 556f.

Light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the sawtooth-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, reflects to the right as viewed from the front, and is emitted outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. Light is also emitted outward (to the left as viewed from the front) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a (side reflecting portion 556f). However, because the right-unit right light-shielding member 560 located on the left side of the main body portion 556a is a white member, the right surface of the right-unit right light-shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right-unit right light-shielding member 560 passes through the main body portion 556a and is emitted to the right. Therefore, light reflected to the right by the side reflector 556f within the main body 556a and light emitted to the left from the side reflector 556f, reflected to the right by the right surface of the right unit right light-shielding member 560, and passed through the main body 556a are emitted to the right from the right surface of the main body 556a, allowing the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a to be illuminated and decorated with good brightness.

Furthermore, in the side reflector 556f, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are radially shifted along the dividing lines, so that the concentric arc grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This prevents the light irradiated outward (to the right) from the right surface of the main body 556a from becoming a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and allows light of a more uniform shade to be irradiated to the right. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557, which is housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a, to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

In addition, because the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is made of a transparent member, the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc grooves and radially extending lines on the side reflector 556f formed on the opposite side can be seen from the right side of the main body 556a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 556d is formed). Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern on the side reflector 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through that transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be decorated with the side reflector 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape and is decorated with translucent decorations such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed approximately bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Furthermore, the decorations on the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same or different.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in side view that is substantially the same as the shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open to the front and right. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a flat main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-to-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b that protrudes in a short, flat shape from the rear edge of the main body portion 559a to the right in a front view, multiple notches 559c that are rectangularly cut out to the left from the right end side of the rear wall portion 559b in a front view and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and multiple flat reinforcing portions 559d that extend rightward from the right surface of the main body portion 559a and extend from the rear wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in side view that is rectangular and extends vertically, with the upper front corner cut out at an angle to form a C-chamfer, and the bottom edge slopes upward as it moves forward. It has approximately the same external shape as the main body 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right of approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall 559b abuts against the left surface of the right unit right light blocking member 560.

The multiple cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 559c are formed in positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c, 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward through the multiple cutouts 559c, allowing the right unit decorative lens member 561 to be well illuminated and decorated.

The multiple reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets, spaced a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction, with each set consisting of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d spaced apart vertically at approximately the same height as the left-right width. Each set of reinforcing portions 559d is formed behind a decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. These multiple reinforcing portions 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

When viewed from the side, the right unit right light shielding member 560 has a rectangular shape that extends vertically, with the upper front corner notched at an angle in a C-chamfered shape and the lower edge sloping upward as it moves forward, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening that opens to the right of the shallow box-shaped right unit left light shielding member 559.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed from a white material. As shown in Figure 55, when the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, their respective main bodies 559a and right unit right light-shielding member 560 are positioned in close proximity to the main bodies 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. As a result, the main bodies 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are spaced apart in the left-right direction, forming a space that extends up-down and front-to-back by a predetermined width in the left-right direction. Light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c on the door frame right side decorative board 552 is irradiated to the rear side of the right unit decorative lens member 561 through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560.

In addition, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are made of opaque material, preventing the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a, middle LED 552c, and right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552 from interfering with each other. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554, right unit right decorative member 557, and right unit decorative lens member 561 to be illuminated and decorated only by the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and middle LED 552c, respectively.

Furthermore, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 have their internal spaces vertically divided into four by three sets of reinforcing parts 559d. This means that the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552, which are located at the rear of each divided space, can prevent light from interfering between the spaces, and the parts of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be illuminated and decorated independently. In other words, the front end of the door frame right side unit 550 can be divided into multiple (four) areas vertically, and each can be illuminated and decorated independently.

The right unit decorative lens element 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shapes of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens element 556. The right unit decorative lens element 561 comprises a circular decorative portion 561a that is circular in front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has multiple polyhedrons formed on it. The circular decorative portion 561a has a concave front surface and a cylindrical portion that extends shortly in the front and rear, with multiple triangular ribs circumferentially formed on the outer periphery. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a shape like a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped with multiple rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions on the front surface, and multiple rows of polyhedrons made up of multiple triangles arranged vertically on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion.

More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed so that, in the areas located in front of each of the four spaces divided by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light-shielding member 559, multiple circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b are arranged, one on each side of the circular decorative portion 561a located in the vertical center, in the top three areas, and only the multifaceted decorative portion 561b is arranged in the lowest area.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. This right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 located at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and top ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so that it can cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, as well as both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward beyond the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed from an opaque material.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that it can close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent material, allowing the right unit decorative lens member 561 located on the rear side to be viewed from the front.

The decorative members 564 extend vertically in short lengths and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative members 564 are made of an opaque material. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four vertical sections.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward in a plate-like shape farther than the door frame left side unit 530, and protrudes slightly forward than the front end of the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320. The door frame right side unit 550 can be independently illuminated and decorated using the right unit left decorative member 554 and right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the protruding left and right sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end.

The door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes significantly forward, so when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement hall, the door frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between it and the adjacent pachinko machine on the right. This gives players playing with this pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

In addition, because the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes significantly forward, in amusement halls where pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, it can be seen from the side along the island equipment even if it is not positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out in amusement halls where many pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be made known from a distance even if it is not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, when a malfunction such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the door frame right side unit 550 causes the right unit left decorative member 554, right unit right decorative member 557, and right unit decorative lens member 561 on both the left and right sides to light up and be decorated in a unique manner, thereby immediately notifying and making the amusement hall staff aware of the malfunction and allowing them to respond quickly to the malfunction, thereby quickly resolving the player's interruption to play and preventing the player from becoming frustrated and losing interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 56 to 59. Figure 56(a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and Figure 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line P-P in Figure 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached above the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550, above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 comprises a central base 571 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the center in the left-right direction above the through-hole 111; a pair of side bases 572 attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571 and attached to the front of the door frame base 110; a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front of each of the pair of side bases 572; and a box-shaped base 571 extending left and right, with the center protruding forward in the left-right direction and open at the rear, which is penetrated front and rear at a position forward of the pair of upper speakers 573. The unit body 271 has a pair of openings 574a and multiple slits 574b (three on each side) that extend from positions closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to near the center, penetrate in the front-to-rear direction, and are spaced apart vertically. The unit body 271 is attached to the front of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572, and speaker covers 575 made of punched metal are arranged in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear of the unit body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a.

Although not shown in the figures, each of the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) has an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided. These internal spaces are configured to house the outer periphery external light-emitting units 34 (left side outer periphery external light-emitting unit 34a, right side outer periphery external light-emitting unit 34b) that emit light from outside the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and outer periphery external light detectors 35 (left side outer periphery external light detector 35a, right side outer periphery external light detector 35b) that detect light from inside the outer periphery of the opening window outside that periphery.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a translucent top middle decorative member 576 attached to the front of the unit body 271 in the center of the left-right direction; a door frame top middle decorative board 577 attached to the rear of the top middle decorative member 576 and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface; and multiple (three on each side) transparent flat light guides attached to the front surface of the unit body 271, closing the multiple slits 574b and extending from near the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 across the opening 574a to near the left and right ends of the unit body 271. top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580 are attached to the front of unit body 271 on the left and right sides of top middle decorative member 576 and cover the front of the plurality (three) of light-guiding members 578, and top middle left decorative member 581 and top middle right decorative member 582 are attached to the front of unit body 271 from the front side of top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580 and extend from the left and right sides of top middle decorative member 576 to near the central end of opening 574a.

The door frame top unit 570 further comprises a top-left door frame decorative board 583 and a top-right door frame decorative board 584, which are attached to the inside of the left and right sides of the unit body 271 and have LEDs mounted on them at locations facing the outer left and right ends of the multiple (three) light-guiding members 578; a pair of board bases 585 attached to the rear of the unit body 271 at locations penetrated by multiple (three) slits 574b formed on both the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction; a top-middle-left door frame decorative board 586 and a top-middle-right door frame decorative board 587 attached to the front of the pair of board bases 585 and have multiple LEDs 586a, 587a mounted behind the slits 574b of the unit body 271; and a pair of light-blocking members 588 attached to the rear of the unit body 271 in front of the top-middle-left door frame decorative board 586 and the top-middle-right door frame decorative board 587.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front of the central base 571 within the unit body 271, a relay board cover 590 attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the front of the door frame top unit relay board 589, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and a lower cover 592 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 has a rectangular shape that extends left and right when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is box-shaped and open to the rear, with multiple protrusions and recesses on its front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front of each side base 572, respectively. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the pair of upper speakers 573 are attached at an angle so that the front of each speaker moves toward the rear on the side closest to the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers that can output sound over a wide frequency band.

When viewed from the front, the unit body 271 has a shape resembling a rectangle extending from side to side with the lower portions bulging downward near both ends. In other words, when viewed from the front, the unit body 271 has a shape resembling a rectangle extending from side to side with a trapezoidal notch tapering upward from the bottom edge. When viewed from the top, the unit body 271 has a shape combining a rectangle extending from side to side, a trapezoid that protrudes forward with its base centered at the left-right center of the front edge of the rectangle and extending forward approximately half the total width (left-right length), and another rectangle that protrudes forward slightly with the front edge of the trapezoid as its long side. Therefore, both sides of the portion of the unit body 271 that protrudes forward at the left-right center on the front surface are located (recessed) behind a line connecting the left-right ends of the unit body 271 and the left-right ends of the front end of the forward-protruding portion.

Openings 574a are formed on the front surface of the unit body 271, penetrating from both left and right ends to a position outside the portion that protrudes forward. Furthermore, multiple slits 574b are formed on the front surface of the unit body 271, extending diagonally from the trapezoidally protruding forward portion of the front surface. The slits 574b extend left and right at a predetermined height and penetrate the front and rear direction. The slits 574b extend left and right from near the front end of the portion that extends diagonally forward on the front surface of the unit body 271 to near the openings 574a. The slits 574b are formed in groups of three on each side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction, spaced apart vertically.

The unit body 271 also has an upper opening 574c, which is a square notch cut out from the rear end to the front in the center of the left-right direction on the top surface, and a lower opening 574d, which is cut out from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by a lower cover 592.

The unit main body 271 also has a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f that extend vertically on both the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed so that its front surface is located further forward than the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed from an opaque material.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the left-right center on the front surface of the unit body 271. When viewed from the front, the top middle decorative member 576 has a shape that combines an irregular pentagon bent so that the left-right center of the bottom side of a roughly square is positioned downward, and a roughly right-angled triangle formed by connecting the tips of the sides extending outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the irregular pentagon to the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the irregular pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it moves downward. The entire top middle decorative member 576 is formed into a three-dimensional shape and is translucent.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is attached to the rear of the top middle decorative member 576 in a tilted position, with its front surface aligned with the front surface of the irregular pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576, and moving rearward as it extends downward. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface, and illuminating these LEDs allows the top middle decorative member 576 to be illuminated and decorated.

The light-guiding member 578 is made of a transparent material. The light-guiding member 578 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shape of the left and right outer edges of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that protrudes forward. Referring to the end sides of the unit body 271 as the sides closest to the left and right ends and the center side as the center side, the light-guiding member 578 is composed of a straight portion 578a that extends straight from the end sides toward the center, and an arc portion 578b that extends in an arc shape with a larger radius so as to move forward from the end side toward the center of the straight portion 578a. The light-guiding member 578 is formed so that the front-to-back depth of the straight portion 578a is smaller than the vertical height, and the front-to-back depth of the arc portion 578b is greater than the vertical height. Furthermore, the light-guiding member 578 has a straight portion 578a that has a constant vertical height, and an arc portion 578b that has a vertical height that decreases toward the center. When the light-guiding member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front.

The light-guiding member 578 includes a diffuse reflection section 578c consisting of sawtooth irregularities formed on the rear surface of the straight section 578a, and a diffuse input section 578d consisting of multiple irregularities formed on the rear surface of the arc section 578b.

When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the light-guiding member 578 has its outer left and right ends facing the LEDs 583a and 584a on the left top door frame decorative board 583 or the right top door frame decorative board 584, while its diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a on the middle-left top door frame decorative board 586 or the middle-right top door frame decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a on the left top door frame decorative board 583 or the right top door frame decorative board 584 is incident on both outer left and right ends of the light-guiding member 578, the light travels toward the center within the straight portion 578a and is sequentially reflected forward from the ends by the diffusion reflector 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, causing light to be emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light-guiding member 578, and the portion of each of these in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated for decoration.

In addition, when light from the LEDs 586a, 587a on the door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 or door frame top middle-right decorative board 587 enters the light-guiding member 578 through the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. This allows the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b to be illuminated and decorated.

In this way, the light-guiding member 578 guides light from the LEDs 583a, 586a on the top-left door frame decorative board 583 and the top-middle-left door frame decorative board 586, or from the LEDs 584a, 587a on the top-right door frame decorative board 584 and the top-middle-right door frame decorative board 587, allowing the entire top-left decorative lens member 579 or top-right decorative lens member 580 located in front to be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light-guiding members 578 located to the left of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light-guiding members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 are formed in a shape that imitates the light-guiding members 578, covering the front and both the top and bottom surfaces of the light-guiding members 578. The front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a has a row of rectangular truncated pyramidal projections that protrude forward, arranged on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens element 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative element 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. In other words, the top left decorative lens element 579 decorates almost the entire area to the left of the top middle decorative element 576 of the door frame top unit 570. This top left decorative lens element 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a, 586a on the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 via three light-guiding elements 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light-guiding members 578 located to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light-guiding members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 are formed in a shape that imitates the light-guiding members 578, covering the front and both the top and bottom surfaces of the light-guiding members 578. The front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a has a row of rectangular truncated pyramidal projections that protrude forward, arranged on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. In other words, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates almost the entire area to the right of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570. This top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a, 587a on the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 via three light-guiding members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 271, between the left-side opening 574a on the front of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576, from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the gap between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579, with the center of its front surface protruding further forward than the front surface of the top left decorative lens member 579. This top middle left decorative member 581 is made of an opaque material.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580, between the right-side opening 574a on the front of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580, with the center of its front surface protruding further forward than the front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580. This top middle right decorative member 582 is made of an opaque material.

The door frame top-left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side (top-left decorative part 574e) inside the unit body 271, with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. The door frame top-left decorative board 583 has the LED 583a mounted in a position facing the left end face of three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front side to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a on the door frame top-left decorative board 583 illuminates and decorates the portion of the top-left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit body 271, via the straight parts 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative part 574f) of the unit body 271, with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. The door frame top right decorative board 584 has the LED 584a mounted in a position facing the right end face of three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 to the right of the center in the left-right direction (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a on the door frame top right decorative board 584 illuminates and decorates the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit body 271, via the straight portions 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The pair of board bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion of the unit main body 271 where the multiple slits 574b are formed. The pair of board bases 585 are formed approximately bilaterally symmetrical to each other. The board base 585 includes side walls that are approximately square in side view with sides extending up and down and front and rear, a rear wall that is rectangular in front view and extends outward in the left-right direction at a right angle from the rear edges of the side walls, an upper wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape, connecting the upper edges of the side walls and rear walls with the line connecting the front ends of the upper edges of the side walls to halfway up the upper edges of the side walls as the hypotenuse, and a lower wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape, connecting the lower edges of the side walls and rear walls on the opposite side from the upper wall. The board base 585 is formed in a triangular box shape with the upper and lower hypotenuses open. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271. This board base 585 is fitted with a door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle-right decorative board 587 so that the open section is closed.

The door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271, to the left of the center in the left-right direction, so as to close the open box-shaped area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right, so that it moves forward as it approaches the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed, to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 has multiple LEDs 586a mounted in positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b to the left of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 586a, the door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 can illuminate and decorate the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

The door frame top middle-right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 to the right of the left-right center, so as to close the box-shaped open area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle-right decorative board 587 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right, moving forward as it approaches the left-right center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle-right decorative board 587 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed, to the right of the left-right center of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has multiple LEDs 587a mounted in positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b to the right of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 587a, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 can illuminate and decorate the area of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

A pair of light-blocking members 588 are attached to the front rear of the unit body 271, between the top middle-left door frame decorative board 586 and the top middle-right door frame decorative board 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light-blocking members 588 are made of opaque material and are formed approximately symmetrically with each other. The light-blocking members 588 separate the upper and lower LEDs 586a, 587a on the top middle-left door frame decorative board 586 and the top middle-right door frame decorative board 587, which are aligned in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. These light-blocking members 588 allow light to be guided forward only by the LEDs 586a, 587a located immediately behind each light-guiding member 578, allowing the decorative lens portions 579a, 580a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 to emit light and be beautifully decorated independently.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 relays the connections between the pair of upper speakers 573, door frame top middle decorative board 577, door frame top left decorative board 583, door frame top right decorative board 584, door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front of this door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered by a relay board cover 590.

This door frame top unit 570 is equipped with a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved as if carved out toward the rear, giving the player the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes significantly forward, strongly drawing the player's attention to this pachinko machine 1.

The door frame top unit 570 also features a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the centrally located top middle decorative member 576, extending from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit body 271. This allows the door frame top unit 570 to decorate the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3.

In this case, the door frame top unit 570 is equipped with upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punched metal, located behind each of the left and right ends of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580.The speaker covers 575 face forward from between the three decorative lens sections 579a, 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, allowing players to hear the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in good quality and enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 can guide light from the door frame top left decorative board 583, door frame top right decorative board 584, door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and door frame top middle right decorative board 587 to the top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580 through multiple light-guiding members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, allowing the entire front of the top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580 to be illuminated and decorated well. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front of the upper part of the door frame 3, including the area in front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Action and effect of door frame]
The effect of the door frame 3 will now be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the through-hole 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in conventional pachinko machines. To accommodate the enlargement of the through-hole 111, the vertical height of the tray unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. This allows the player (from the front) to see as much of the front of the game board 5 (playing area 5a) attached to the main frame 4 as possible through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190), accommodating a game board 5 with a wide playing area 5a.

The door frame 3 is provided with a presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) below the through-hole 111, which has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the left-right center of the tray unit 320 that bulges forward. The front surfaces (front surfaces of the tray lower decorative portion 326c) of the lower halves (portions below the upper tray 321) on both the left and right sides of the presentation operation unit 400 are recessed backward (a concave curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the presentation operation unit 400 are positioned further back than the line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the tray unit 320 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the presentation operation unit 400). This makes the presentation operation unit 400, which is attached to the front surface in the left-right center of the tray unit 320, appear to protrude significantly forward, highlighting and emphasizing the presentation operation unit 400 to the player and drawing their attention to the presentation operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400, which is located on the front of the tray unit 320 below the through-hole 111, tilted so that the large, hemispherical, transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward. Therefore, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face). When the player lowers their eyes to look at the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 appears nearly directly ahead, providing a strong visual impression of the large, round operation button 410, heightening anticipation for the effects using the operation button 410. The effect images displayed on the door frame-side effect display device 460, located within the transparent operation button 410, can also be clearly seen, allowing the player to fully enjoy the effect images.

In addition, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large, rounded, forward-bulging operation button 410 with a diameter roughly the same as the overall height of the tray unit 320. This means that when operating the operation button 410, any part of the operation button 410 can be touched with a short hand movement, making it relatively easy to "quickly press" the operation button 410. Furthermore, because the large, rounded, forward-bulging operation button 410 is installed at an angle, it can not only be pressed from above like the operation buttons on conventional pachinko machines, but can also be easily operated from the left, right, or front. This easy-to-operate operation button 410 makes the effects using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

The door frame 3 also has the effect operation unit 400 attached in a suspended state by the tray unit 320, and is equipped with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibrations at the bottom of the effect operation unit 400.When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations depending on the game status, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the top of the operation button 410, surprising the player and making the effect using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 (effect operation unit 400) that spans the entire height of the tray unit 320, located in the center of the front of the tray unit 320. This makes the lower tray 322 located below the upper tray 321 less noticeable compared to conventional pachinko machines, making it easier for players accustomed to conventional pachinko machines to recognize that it is clearly different, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and strongly attracts the attention of players.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the lower tray opening 326d, which opens to the left of the performance operation unit 400 on the front of the tray unit 320. This allows the volume of the lower tray 322 to be larger than the size of the lower tray opening 326d, ensuring a sufficient number of game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322. Also, because the rear of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400, when a player places their left hand inside the lower tray 322 or places their fingers in the lower tray opening 326d, their fingertips are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322. This reduces the player's discomfort and prevents a decline in their interest in the game. It also allows the player to recognize through touch that the volume of the lower tray 322 is larger than the size of the lower tray opening 326d.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c, through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are released into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a, through which game balls from the lower tray 322 are removed into a box or the like below the tray unit 320, arranged in a straight line from front to back, and is located to the right outside the lower tray opening 326d when viewed from the front (to the right of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400). In other words, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located behind the performance operation unit 400, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (outside the right side of the lower tray opening 326d) on the tray unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower tray cover 340, etc., so the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player's side, which gives the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) a neater appearance and improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a located below (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c on the lower tray 322. Therefore, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is opened, game balls released from the upper tray 321, etc. to the lower tray 322 will enter the lower tray 322 and immediately be ejected from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a into the dollar box, etc. below. At this time, the player cannot see the lower tray ball supply port 323c or the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a, and therefore cannot see the flow of game balls ejected from the upper tray 321, etc. through the lower tray 322 into the dollar box. This gives the player the illusion that the game balls in the upper tray 321, or the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper tray 321 is full, are being discharged directly into the money box, making it less likely that the game balls will feel annoyed as they pass through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game (such as the operation of shooting the game balls and the visual effects), preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball removal hole 322a located in the lower tray 322, to the front and left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the raised wall portion of the lower tray 322 to the right of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a.Therefore, game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be guided directly to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, or reflected off the right wall portion and indirectly guided to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. As a result, when the lower tray ball removal hole 322a remains open, game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the area to the left of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a on the lower tray 322 (lower tray first area A1).This means that game balls can be discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without the player being able to see the game balls circulating within the lower tray 322, achieving the same effect as described above.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326, through which the lower tray 322 faces forward, located between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if a player places their hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts their hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. This allows the sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 of the main frame 4 to be output forward effectively, allowing the player to enjoy the sound from this pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, when a player puts their hand into or approaches the lower tray 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibrations caused by the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker opening 326e, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a plate-shaped door frame right side unit 550 that protrudes significantly forward from the right side of the through opening 111. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement hall, the door frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right, giving players playing with the pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be decorated with illuminating lights on the front end and both left and right sides of the plate-shaped door frame right side unit 550, which protrudes significantly forward. Therefore, in an amusement hall where pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, even if you are not positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1, you can still make the presence of the pachinko machine 1 known from a distance, such as from the side along the island equipment, making it a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

The door frame 3 also includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through opening 111, and the front faces on both sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are recessed so that they are carved out toward the rear (a concave curved shape so that the front faces on both sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on the door frame top unit 570 are positioned further rearward than the line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576). This makes it appear as if only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 protrudes significantly forward, making the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized to the player, drawing strong attention to the top middle decorative member 576.

In conventional pachinko machines, the top of the door frame is equipped with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart on the left and right, making the two upper speakers conspicuous. In contrast, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a door frame top unit 570 attached above the through-hole 111, which is equipped with a pair of upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punched metal on both left and right ends. It also has top left decorative lens members 579 and top right decorative lens members 580 that extend from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576, passing in front of the speaker covers 575, to both left and right ends, allowing the entire front faces of the top left decorative lens members 579 and top right decorative lens members 580 to be illuminated and decorated. This allows the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 to be decorated, making the pair of upper speakers 573 less noticeable at the top of the door frame 3, allowing players to recognize at a glance that the decoration is clearly different from that of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players, and allowing players to enjoy high-quality stereo sound from the pair of upper speakers 573.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the effect operation unit 400 attached to the tray unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 each protruding significantly forward in the center of the left-right direction below and above the through-hole 111. This allows players to see a unified decoration from top to bottom, with a prominent imaginary line passing through the center of the left-right direction. The sophisticated decoration also makes the machine stand out more than other pachinko machines, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with great appeal.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative element 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the performance operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center of the left-right direction, protruding forward. Therefore, when the top middle decorative element 576 and the performance operation unit 400 are illuminated, the player can see an illuminated line extending vertically in the center of the left-right direction on the front of the door frame 3, and the player's gaze can be guided to the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400, which is arranged in the center of the left-right direction.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 60 to 66. Figure 60 is a front view of the game board. Figure 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board broken down into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board broken down into its main components as seen from the rear. Figure 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the rear unit. Figure 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Figure 63 broken down as seen from the front, and Figure 65 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Figure 63 broken down as seen from the rear. Figure 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the function display unit from the front when the game board is attached to a pachinko machine.

The gaming board 5 has a playing area 5a into which a player inserts a gaming ball by operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. The gaming board 5 also includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the playing area 5a and has a generally rectangular outline when viewed from the front; a plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the playing area 5a; a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100; and a main control unit 1300 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 that controls the game content played by inserting a gaming ball into the playing area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the gaming ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front side of the gaming panel 1100 in a portion of the playing area 5a (not shown).

The gaming board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so that it is visible to the player; a peripheral control unit 1500 that is attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100; a gaming board effect display device 1600 that is positioned in the center of the playing area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying specified effect images; a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100; and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. The gaming board effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear of the gaming board effect display device 1600.

The gaming panel 1100 comprises a transparent, flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, with the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The front unit 2000 is equipped with a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive game balls inserted into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive game balls depending on the result of a regular lottery that is drawn when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and a special winning opening 2005 that can receive game balls depending on the result of either a first or second special lottery that is drawn when a game ball is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the center of the left-right direction within the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005; a lower side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001; an upper side unit 2300 which is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front; and a frame-shaped center device 2500 which is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate section 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism 3020 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 for detachably attaching the game board side performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, the rear unit 3000 includes a rear-left middle decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center upwards on the left side when viewed from the front; a rear-bottom rear movable performance unit 3100 attached below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010 near the rear wall of the rear box 3010; a rear-upper-left movable performance unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010 on the left side when viewed from the front; a rear-left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010 when viewed from the front; a rear-upper-middle movable performance unit 3400 attached above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010 from the center left to the right edge when viewed from the front; and a rear-bottom front movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010 in front of the rear-bottom rear movable performance unit 3100.

[5-1. Front components]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has an approximately square outer shape in a front-to-back view, an approximately circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-to-back direction, and the inner periphery of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the play area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end toward the left of the center in the front view to the upper right, passing the upper end of the center in the front view to the upper right; an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 approximately along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front view to the upper left of the front view; and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the play area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in a front view and slopes downward toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right edge of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right edge of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 also includes a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the component 1000 has security recesses 1008 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the portions extending approximately perpendicularly from the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002, the underside of the out guide portion 1003 and lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, the rear projection 202 protruding rearward from the security cover 200 on the door frame 3 is inserted into this security recess 1008. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has multiple positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning protrusions 1009 can be inserted into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 to position and fix the inner rail 1002 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 has multiple mounting bosses 1010 that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The multiple mounting bosses 1010 can be inserted into mounting holes 1128 in the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 to determine positioning relative to the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1100).

The component 1000 also has a notch 1011 cut upward from the bottom end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100, so that when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and full ball guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

[5-2. Game Panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 61, 62, 64, 65, etc. The gaming panel 1100 comprises a flat panel board 1110 made of transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and has a rear surface on which the back unit 3000 is attached.

The panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) to be able to sufficiently hold obstacle nails planted on the front surface or to attach the front unit 2000. In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the bottom end at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The panel board 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

The panel plate 1110 also has multiple fitting holes 1113, which are round holes located near the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-to-back direction, and an elongated hole 1114 located near the outer periphery in the lower left corner, which penetrates in the front-to-back direction and extends vertically. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are located outside the play area 5a and are used to position the panel plate 1110 with respect to the panel holder 1120. The panel plate 1110 also has stepped engagement steps 1115, recessed at the front, on both ends of its upper and lower edges. These engagement steps 1115 are cut out approximately halfway through the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and, like the fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114, are located outside the play area 5a and are used to engage and secure the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 also has multiple inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed in a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusions 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into these inner rail fixing holes 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a roughly rectangular outer shape large enough to encompass the panel board 1110, and is thicker than the panel board 1110 (approximately 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step 1121 that is recessed from the front side to the rear side and detachably holds the panel board 1110, and a through hole 1122 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction inside the holding step 1121 and is approximately the same size as the gaming area 5a.

The holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is approximately the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, so that the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step 1121 is approximately flush with the front surface of the panel holder 1120. Furthermore, the holding step 1121 is sized so that its front inner peripheral surface leaves a predetermined amount of clearance with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. This clearance allows the panel plate 1110 to absorb any expansion or contraction that occurs relative to the panel plate 1110 due to temperature changes or changes over time.

The panel holder 1120 is positioned corresponding to the fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step 1121, extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and is equipped with a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into and into the fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engagement claw 1124 is located at the top of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engagement step 1115 on the panel plate 1110, protrudes forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and elastically engages with the engagement step 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is located below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece 1125 extends a predetermined distance upward (towards the center) along the front surface of the panel holder 1120, leaving a gap between the front surface of the holding step 1121 that is large enough to allow the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted. By engaging these engagement claws 1124 and engagement piece 1125 with the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is removably held to the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 also has an outlet 1126 that runs through from front to back at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The lower rear surface of the panel holder 1120 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1126.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 has a notch 1127 cut upward from the bottom end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and full ball guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has multiple mounting holes 1128 that penetrate from front to back at positions corresponding to the multiple mounting bosses 1010 on the preceding component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the preceding component 1000 into these multiple mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the preceding component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned between the preceding component 1000 and the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 also has a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through this insertion hole 1129.

When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear of the preceding component 1000, the outlet 1126 of the panel holder 1120 opens to the rear of the out-guide section 1003 of the preceding component 1000. As a result, gaming balls that flow down to the bottom end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out-guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1126, and are discharged through the outlet 1126 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of gaming panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the gaming panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming panel of a different form from that shown in FIG. 63, including the front components, the board holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67, seen from the rear. This gaming panel 1150 is formed from a wood board material such as plywood of a predetermined thickness (e.g., 18 mm to 21 mm). This gaming panel 1150 is formed to the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 described above.

The gaming panel 1150 has an outer shape that is approximately the same as that of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 is provided with an outlet 1151 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction at the bottom, approximately in the center in the left-to-right direction when viewed from the front, at a position corresponding to the outlet guide portion 1003 of the previous component 1000. The lower rear surface of the gaming panel 1150 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

The game panel 1150 also has a notch 1152 that penetrates horizontally in the front-to-back direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front and is open downward, and has the same shape as the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and a square insertion hole 1153 that penetrates vertically above the notch 1152 and through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1154 that penetrate from front to back and are capable of fitting with the positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 that penetrate from front to back and are capable of fitting with the positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000 into these mounting holes 1155, the gaming panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000 and the gaming panel 1150 can be positioned relative to the previous component 1000.

Furthermore, although not shown, the gaming panel 1150 is provided with multiple openings that run through it from front to back for attaching the front unit 2000, similar to the openings 1112 in the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 described above.

When the gaming panel 1150 is attached to the rear of the preceding component 1000, the outlet 1151 opens to the rear of the out-guide section 1003 of the preceding component 1000. As a result, gaming balls that flow down to the bottom end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out-guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1151, and are discharged through the outlet 1151 to the rear of the gaming panel 1150.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The board holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled to the gaming board 5, this board holder 1200 can cover from below the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. This allows it to receive all gaming balls that are discharged to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 through the outlet 1126 and gaming balls that are discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and to discharge them downward from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom surface.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 comprises a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, that sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320, leaving traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by examining the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, providing an increased deterrent against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

In addition, the main control board box 1320 and the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 are all made of transparent materials so that they can be visually inspected from the outside. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 are provided with surface mounting areas that have poor fraud prevention performance, and therefore it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain the various effects related to the fraud prevention measures described below.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 to 66. As shown in the figures, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 (see Figure 66). This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), the results of the regular lottery, the results of the special lottery, etc.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 comprises a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED that displays the game status, a normal pattern indicator 1402 consisting of four LEDs that displays the normal lottery result drawn when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds related to the passage of a game ball through the gate section 2003, a first special pattern indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result drawn when a game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002, and a normal symbol indicator 1409 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the number of holds related to the passage of a game ball through the gate section 2003. It mainly comprises a first special reserve number display 1404 consisting of two LEDs that displays the relevant reserve number; a second special pattern display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the second special lottery result drawn when game balls are received into the second starting port 2004; a second special reserve number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserve number related to the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004; and a round display 1407 consisting of three LEDs that displays the number of times the opening and closing pattern of the big winning port 2005 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc. by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to Fig. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 comprises a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 comprises a peripheral control unit for controlling light effects, sound effects, moving effects, etc., and an effect display control unit for controlling effect images.

[5-7. Game board side performance display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to Figures 61 and 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is located in the center of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010, approximately in the center. When the game board 5 is assembled, the game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role device 2500. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device backlit by white LEDs, and is capable of displaying still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 has two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side when viewed from the front. With the LCD screen facing forward, the game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two left fixed pieces 1601 from diagonally behind the rear box 3010 into two fixing grooves 3010c opening on the left inner surface when viewed from the front within the frame-shaped LCD mounting portion 3010b of the rear box 3010 (described below). The right fixed piece 1602 is then moved forward to insert the right fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and the locking mechanism 3020 is then slid downward to attach the device to the rear box 3010.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and its rear end penetrating the opening 1112 and protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The front unit 2000 of this embodiment is equipped with a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls shot into the game area 5a; a first starting opening 2002 that is always open and can accept game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001; a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls; a second starting opening 2004 that can accept game balls depending on the result of a regular lottery that is drawn when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003; and a special winning opening 2005 that can accept game balls depending on the result of a first or second special lottery that is drawn when a game ball is accepted into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

Multiple general winning openings 2001 are located at the bottom of the play area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 is located in the left-right center of the play area 5a, directly above the outlet 1126. The gate section 2003 is located in the upper right corner of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, approximately directly below the impact stop section 1006. The second starting opening 2004 is located directly below the gate section 2003, to the right when viewed from the front. The large winning opening 2005 is located between the first starting opening 2002 and the outlet 1126.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the center of the left-right direction within the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005; a lower side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001; an upper side unit 2300 which is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front; and a frame-shaped center device 2500 which is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate section 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The start opening unit 2100 is located within the game area 5a, directly above the outlet 1126, near the bottom end in the center of the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This start opening unit 2100 has a first start opening 2002 that opens upward and is large enough to accept only one game ball at a time, and a large prize opening 2005 that extends left and right and is large enough to accept multiple game balls at a time (e.g., 4 to 6), and is configured to be able to open and close depending on the game status.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 within the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has multiple general winning holes 2001 that can always accept game balls.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly below the vertical center and above the left of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, within the gaming area 5a. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, allowing gaming balls flowing down along the inner rail 1002 to be guided to the right (the horizontal center of the gaming area 5a).

The center device 2500 is located within the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center device 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side performance display device 1600 located behind the game panel 1100 and the performance units provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the front. The center device 2500 has a gate section 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The entire periphery of the frame-shaped center device 2500, excluding the bottom edge, protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, preventing gaming balls shot into the gaming area 5a from entering the frame.

The center device 2500 is equipped with a warp entrance 2520 on the outer periphery on the left side when viewed from the front, which opens to allow game balls within the game area 5a to enter; a warp exit 2522 which opens into the frame and allows game balls that have entered the warp entrance 2520 to be released; and a stage 2530 which rolls game balls released from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction before releasing them into the game area 5a. A start opening unit 2100 is located directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, there is an extremely high probability that the game ball will be accepted by the first start opening 2002.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In addition, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a box-like performance drive board box 3042, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending left and right along the lower edge of the opening 3010a and which houses the performance drive board.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear-left middle decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center upwards on the left side when viewed from the front; a rear-bottom rear movable performance unit 3100 attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010; a rear-upper-left movable performance unit 3200 attached to the left side when viewed from the front, above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010; a rear-left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010 when viewed from the front; a rear-upper-middle movable performance unit 3400 attached above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, from the center left to the right edge when viewed from the front; and a rear-bottom front movable performance unit 3500 attached to the front of the rear-bottom rear movable performance unit 3100 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010.

The rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 is box-shaped and open at the front, with a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall; a flat, frame-like LCD mounting section 3010b that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a; two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside to the outside of the frame on the left side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board-side performance display device 1600 is inserted; and a cutout 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 in the vertical center of the right side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. The LCD mounting portion 3010b is formed to be large enough to fit the game board side effect display device 1600 into the frame. A locking mechanism 3020 is attached to the rear box 3010 so that it can slide up and down, on the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from behind.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from its front end. This fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 with its front surface abutting the rear surface of the panel holder 1120. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed in appropriate positions for attaching each movable performance unit, etc.

The back unit 3000 can perform lighting effects, movement effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, back top left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and back bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc., allowing players to be entertained by various effects and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game Contents]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and other figures. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 located in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, causing game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 to pass between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and be shot into the upper part of the play area 5a, thereby starting a game using the game balls. The game balls shot into the upper part of the play area 5a flow down either the left or right side of the center device 2500 depending on the force of the shot. The force of the shot can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The more clockwise the rotation, the stronger the shot. A maximum of 100 game balls can be shot continuously per minute, i.e., at 0.6-second intervals.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110).When the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails, the speed at which the game ball flows down is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball, allowing players to enjoy watching those movements.In addition to the obstacle nails, within the game area 5a, windmills (not shown) that rotate when the game ball comes into contact with them are also provided at appropriate positions.

When a game ball is shot into the top of the center device 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 when viewed from the front, it will come into contact with multiple obstacle nails (not shown) and flow down the area to the left of the center device 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area to the left of the center device 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer periphery of the center device 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

Game balls supplied to stage 2530 roll back and forth on stage 2530 before being released forward. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of stage 2530, it is located directly above the first starting opening 2002, and therefore there is a high probability that it will be received by the first starting opening 2002. When a game ball is received by this first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 onto the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

When a game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from anywhere other than the center, it flows down toward the start opening unit 2100. A game ball released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center device 2500 may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 or an open big prize opening 2005.

If a gaming ball that flows down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it may be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300 and accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or first starting opening 2002 of the lower side unit 2200. When a gaming ball is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, if a game ball is hit into the upper part of the center device 2500 within the game area 5a and enters to the right of the highest point on the outer periphery of the center device 2500 (i.e., hits to the right), it will flow down through an area downstream where the gate section 2003 and second starting port 2004 are located.

When the gaming ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a regular lottery is conducted on the main control board 1310, and if the result of the regular lottery is a "regular win," the second starting opening 2004 opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing gaming balls to be received into the second starting opening 2004. When a gaming ball is received into the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number of gaming balls (e.g., four) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery, which is conducted when a gaming ball passes through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is indicated (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal variation time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the gaming board 5. The second starting gate 2004 opens after the normal variation time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if a gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 between the time the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 and the time the normal lottery result is suggested, it is not possible to start suggesting the normal lottery result, so the start of suggesting the normal lottery result is postponed until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result has finished. Furthermore, the number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003. This prevents the burden on the gaming hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, when a gaming ball is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will result in a favorable gaming state for the player (e.g., a "jackpot," "medium jackpot," "small jackpot," "probability-changing jackpot," "time-shortened jackpot," etc.). The drawn special lottery result is then indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special variable time). The special lottery results that are drawn when a gaming ball is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 include a "miss," a "small jackpot," a "2R jackpot," a "5R jackpot," a "15R jackpot," a "probability-changing jackpot," a "time-shortened jackpot," a "probability-shortened jackpot," a "win without time-shortened jackpot," etc.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of game balls into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 is a special lottery result that generates a favorable game state, the large prize opening 2005 will be able to accept game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern after the special variable time has elapsed. When a game ball is accepted into the large prize opening 2005 while it is in the open state, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 or 13) will be paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Therefore, by accepting game balls into the large prize opening 2005 when it is able to accept game balls, a large number of game balls can be paid out, providing enjoyment to the player.

If the result of the special lottery is a "small win," the large prize opening 2005 repeats an opening/closing pattern multiple times (e.g., twice) in which it opens to a state where it can accept game balls for a predetermined short time (e.g., between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) and then closes. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a "big win," after the large prize opening 2005 opens to a state where it can accept game balls, and one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined time (e.g., approximately 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) have been received by the large prize opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which it closes to a state where it cannot accept game balls is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a "2R jackpot" will repeat 2 rounds, a "5R jackpot" will repeat 5 rounds, and a "15R jackpot" will repeat 15 rounds, creating an advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, with a "jackpot," there are "wins" that change the probability of a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" being drawn after the jackpot game has ended ("probable win"), or that change the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result ("time-saving win").

In this embodiment, if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery due to the reception of game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the time when the special lottery result is indicated, the indication of the special lottery result cannot begin. Therefore, the start of the indication of the special lottery result is suspended until the indication of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. For any number more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the amusement hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, after which the combination of lit LEDs suggests the special lottery result.

Meanwhile, the game board side effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 displays three symbol rows consisting of multiple symbols lined up horizontally, and then varies each symbol row, causing the variable symbol rows to be displayed in a stopped state in sequence, and each of the three stopped symbol rows is displayed in a stopped state so that the symbols in the three stopped symbol rows form a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than a "lose," after the three symbol rows have stopped and each symbol is displayed in a stopped state, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a favorable game state (e.g., small win game, big win game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time for which the special lottery result is indicated on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time for which the special lottery result is indicated on the game board side performance display device 1600 (the time from when the pattern row changes until the final image is displayed), with the time for which it is indicated on the function display unit 1400 being set to be longer.

In addition to displaying effect images suggesting the results of the special lottery using the game board side effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can also use the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3, the door frame side effect display device 460, the various decorations of the center role device 2500, the various decorations of the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, the back top left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc., as appropriate, to perform light-emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., depending on the results of the special lottery. This allows players to be entertained by various effects, and prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment corresponds to the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in this embodiment corresponds to the main body unit of the present invention, the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment corresponds to the window portion of the present invention, the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment corresponds to the bulge portion of the present invention, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 in the performance operation unit 400 and the second performance operation unit 400A of this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the decorative element inside the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, and the main screen 471 and sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the second performance display device 460A on the door frame side correspond to the second decorative body of the present invention, and the second button decorative part 432g of the decorative element inside the operation button 432 in this embodiment, the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative part 476, and the peripheral decorative part 478 correspond to the second decorative part of the present invention.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the LEDs mounted on the operation button left interior decorative board 433, operation button right interior decorative board 434, operation button above interior decorative board 435, and operation button below interior decorative board 436, as well as the LED 477a on the sub-screen decorative board 477, correspond to the light-emitting bodies of the present invention, the door frame side performance display device 460 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear decorative means of the present invention, and the frame unit 415, unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 in this embodiment correspond to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 (or the second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the front of the tray unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 is viewed from the outside, the player can see an overlapping decoration of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second performance display device 460A, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), an overlapping decoration of the first button decorative portion 411a and the door frame side performance display device 460, and other decorations that are full of decorativeness with an unprecedented sense of perspective, which can strongly attract the interest of players and can be made into a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

In addition, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)) and the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the direction of movement of the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the player's operation. Therefore, when the player operates (presses) and moves the button lens 411, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) move closer to or farther away from each other, and the first button decorative By changing the distance between the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), it is possible to change the perspective of the overlapping decoration of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), allowing the player to change the decoration (intersection pattern) of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, because the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, opposite the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A), a space is formed between the first decorative body and the second decorative body. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the distance to the first button decorative member 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button interior decorative member 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the peripheral decorative member 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member This results in a greater difference in the distance to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or peripheral decorative portion 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), and even when the button lens 411 is not being moved by operation, when the player's eye position moves, the intersection pattern (degree of overlap) between the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or peripheral decorative portion 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) changes, allowing the player to see a dynamic decoration that strongly attracts the player's attention.

Furthermore, the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 is equipped with a first button decoration 411a with a radial decoration pointing toward the center, so that the inner operation button decoration element 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) and the door frame side performance display device 460 at the back can be clearly seen through the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration element 411a is not equipped. The radial decoration of the first button decoration element 411a also draws the player's gaze toward the center of the button lens 411, strongly drawing the player's attention to the inner operation button decoration element 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) and the door frame side performance display device 460 through the center of the transparent button lens 411.

In addition, the operation button interior decorative member 432 is equipped with a second button interior decorative portion 432g having multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric pattern centered on the center. Therefore, when viewed from the outside, the decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 intersect with each other, reliably creating a sense of perspective between the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g. This makes the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g stand out, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 is designed to have multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric circle centered at the center. This allows the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g to draw the player's gaze and attention to the door frame side performance display device 460, which can be seen in the center of the operation button interior decorative member 432, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration (performance image) of the door frame side performance display device.

Furthermore, when the LEDs (or LED 477a on the sub-screen decorative board 477) mounted on the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436 are illuminated, the light can be used to illuminate and decorate the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476), and the button lens 411 can also be illuminated and decorated, so that in addition to the decoration of the first button decorative member 411a and the second button interior decorative member 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476), players can also be entertained by the illuminated decoration. In this case, the second button interior decorative part 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) can diffuse the light from the LEDs (or LEDs 477a) of the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436. Therefore, the second button interior decorative part 432g is illuminated and decorated by direct light from the LEDs (or LEDs 477a) of the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436, whereas the first button decorative part 411a is illuminated and decorated by the direct light from the second button interior decorative part 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476). The second button decorative portion 432g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is illuminated with indirect light diffused by the light source, and the first button decorative portion 411a is illuminated with a weaker light, while the second button decorative portion 432g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is illuminated with a strong light, so that when the LEDs (or LEDs 477a) on the left operation button decorative board 433, right operation button decorative board 434, upper operation button decorative board 435, and lower operation button decorative board 436 are illuminated and the first button decorative portion 411a and second button decorative portion 432g (or sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside, the player will see decorations with an enhanced sense of perspective, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and able to strongly attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, because the decorative element 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame-side second effect display device 460A) is positioned in the direction of movement of the button lens 411, there is no need to reserve space outside the outer periphery of the button lens 411 or the decorative element 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame-side second effect display device 460A) for the button lens 411 to move. This allows the button lens 411 or the decorative element 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame-side second effect display device 460A) to be spread outward and made as large as possible. This allows the button lens 411 or the decorative element 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame-side second effect display device 460A) to stand out more. Furthermore, as mentioned above, because there is no need to reserve space outside the button lens 411 for movement, by placing the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the decorativeness of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and is highly appealing and attracts players' attention.

Furthermore, because the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when a player hits the button lens 411 or applies impact to part of its surface, the force of the impact is more easily dispersed across the entire button lens 411 than if the button lens 411 were flat, making the button lens 411 less likely to break (be damaged). Therefore, damage to the button lens 411 during play can be prevented, which can cause the game to be interrupted and, depending on the player, can be frustrating and reduce interest. In addition, because the button lens 411 is less likely to be damaged, an increase in the burden on the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the door frame 3 allows the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 arranged within the main frame 4 to be visible from the front through the through-hole 111, and the operation button 410, which is circular and has an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm within the range of 10 cm to 30 cm and is movable (moves forward and backward) when operated by the player, is attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through-hole 111, and a transparent button lens for the operation button 410. Since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) which can be seen from the front through the lens 411, and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged within the frame are attached, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) which has the operation button 410 as large as possible can be seen in a position where the game ball storage tray would be prominent in a conventional pachinko machine, players can recognize at a glance that this is different from conventional pachinko machines, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. First LEDs 422a, 423a are provided on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, respectively, for illuminating and decorating the second button decorative part 411b, and second LEDs 422b, 423b are provided on the operation button right outer decorative board 423 for illuminating and decorating the frame side lens 417. The frame body 416 includes an inner cylindrical portion 416d that separates the frame side lens 417 from the second button decorative portion 411b, and a main body 413a and inner extension 413f that separate the second button decorative portion 411b from the center of the button lens 411. The inner cylindrical portion 416d, main body 413a, and inner extension 413f prevent light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a from illuminating the frame side lens 417 or the center of the button lens 411, and prevent light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b from illuminating the second button decorative portion 411b. This allows the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decorative portion 411b to be illuminated and decorated independently. This allows the frame side lens 417 and second button decorative portion 411b to be illuminated and decorated clearly, producing a visually appealing illumination effect. Furthermore, by appropriately combining the off, on, flashing, brightness, color, etc. of the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decorative portion 411b, it is possible to create a variety of light-emitting patterns, which prevents players from getting bored and keeps them entertained, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a, 423a that illuminate and decorate the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b, 423b that illuminate and decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are provided on a single operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423, and the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450).Therefore, compared to when a board is provided on the second button decorative part 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be placed as far away as possible from the second button decorative part 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be irradiated onto the second button decorative part 411b in a sufficiently diffused state. Therefore, the second button decorative portion 411b can be uniformly illuminated, improving the appearance of the illuminated decoration of the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417, strongly attracting the player's attention and entertaining them, and preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, because the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the wiring connected to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 does not bend or stretch as the operation button 410 moves back and forth, eliminating the risk of the wiring breaking due to fatigue. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 (second button decorative part 411b) is moved, the wiring does not break, so players can enjoy the movement (operation) of the operation button 410 and the illuminated decoration of the frame side lens 417 and second button decorative part 411b without any problems, preventing a decline in player interest.

In addition, since a second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, when the rear operation button internal decorative part 432 and door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) are viewed through the transparent button lens 411, the second button decorative part 411b decorates the outer edges of the operation button internal decorative part 432 and door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, by appropriately illuminating the first LEDs 422a, 423a and second LEDs 422b, 423b, the second button decorative portion 411b and frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411, from which the operation button interior decorative member 432 and door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be seen to the rear, can be illuminated and decorated in a variety of patterns, as described above. This strongly draws the player's attention to the operation button 410 and door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), allowing the player to enjoy the illuminated performances, the operation of the operation button 410, and the performance images displayed by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the button lens 411 (operation button 410), which is equipped with a second button decoration 411b on its outer edge, can be operated by the player. By having the player operate the operation button 410 while a player-participation effect is being executed, the player can enjoy operating the operation button 410 (player-participation effect), preventing the player's interest in the game from declining. Furthermore, by illuminating the second button decoration 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 during execution of a player-participation effect, the player's attention can be drawn to the operation button 410, encouraging the player to operate the operation button 410 and allowing the player to participate in and enjoy the player-participation effect.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is equipped with an opaque main body 413a and an inner extension 413f that allow only the second button decorative portion 411b to be illuminated by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, the portion of the operation button 410 closer to the center than the second button decorative portion 411b is not illuminated (decorated) by the first LEDs 422a, 423a. As a result, the central side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) becomes brighter, preventing the operation button internal decorative member 432 and door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) located at the rear from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration 411b can be illuminated and decorated in good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be seen in good condition through the transparent button lens 411, allowing players to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner tube portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 equipped with the frame side lens 417, the inner tube portion 416d can completely separate the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b of the operating button 410 at the rear side of the frame unit 415. Meanwhile, at the rear end (rear end) of the inner tube 416d closest to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, the rear end of the inner tube 416d is closer to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range of light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b. Therefore, even if a gap is formed between the front of the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a will not illuminate the frame side lens 417, and light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b will not illuminate the second button decorative part 411b. Therefore, the inner tube 416d can reliably block light, realizing a pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, because the main body 413a and inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the main body 413a and inner extension 413f completely separate the second button decorative portion 411b and the center of the button lens 411 at the rear of the operation button 410. Meanwhile, the end (rear end) of the main body 413a closest to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends further rearward than the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423. Therefore, light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body 413a, completely blocking light from penetrating the center of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration 411b in good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be seen in good condition through the transparent button lens 411, allowing the player to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decorative part 411b is located in front of the outer part of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) which is located behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411).Therefore, the second button decorative part 411b makes it difficult to see the outer parts and rear side (rear side) of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), thereby preventing the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated. Furthermore, when the first LEDs 422a, 423a illuminate the second button decoration 411b, the outside and rear of the operation button interior decorative element 432 (door frame-side second performance display device 460A) become relatively dark compared to the brightness of the second button decoration 411b, making it difficult to see the components on the outside and rear of the operation button interior decorative element 432 (door frame-side second performance display device 460A). This further improves the appearance of the operation button 410, frame unit 415, operation button interior decorative element 432, and door frame-side performance display device 460 (door frame-side second performance display device 460A), preventing a decline in player interest.

Furthermore, because the outer periphery of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button ornament 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame side lens 417 adjacent to the second button ornament 411b form an arc-like extension. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LEDs 422a, 423a and second LEDs 422b, 423b, the player can see illumination effects such as light circling the outer edge of the operation button 410, light spreading from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410, and light converging from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410. This diverse illumination effect keeps players from getting bored, keeps players entertained, and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper tray 321, on which the stored game balls are shot into the game area 5a and used for play, is attached to the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3, and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front and below of the upper tray 321, forming a remaining space of a predetermined width of the mounting space 326j behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j A portion of the lower tray body 325 corresponding to the lower tray first area A1 is located on the left side of the space, and a portion of the lower tray body 325 corresponding to the lower tray second area A2 extends from that portion into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j to mount the lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls. This makes the lower tray 322 appear smaller when viewed from the front, making the lower tray 322 less noticeable and relatively making the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) more noticeable. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can be seen in the position where the upper and lower trays would appear lined up one above the other in conventional pachinko machines, allowing players to recognize at a glance that this is different from conventional pachinko machines and resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that is capable of strongly attracting players' attention.

In addition, in the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided which extend upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b which extends upward from the outer periphery and restrict the movement of game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby preventing game balls in the lower tray 322 from contacting the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and preventing game balls supplied into the lower tray 322 or game balls stored in the lower tray 322 from abutting or pressing against the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A). Therefore, the game ball will not come into contact with the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) will not be damaged by the game ball. This prevents the player's interest from being diminished by interrupting the game due to damage to the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and also reduces the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the lower tray second area A2 on the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322 is equipped with the main body upright wall portion 325b and lower tray covers 340, 340A that restrict the movement of game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby preventing game balls from entering (spilling) from the lower tray body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like they have lost money or are feeling uncomfortable due to game balls entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray main body 325 in the lower tray 322, so that even if the game balls supplied into the lower tray 322 bounce up within the lower tray 322, they can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby reliably achieving the above-mentioned effects. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray main body 325, when a player puts their hand into the lower tray second area A2 from the lower tray first area A1 side (lower tray opening 326d) of the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray covers 340, 340A can prevent the player's fingertips from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. This prevents the player's fingertips from touching the underside of the upper tray 321 or the back side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and causing injury, allowing the player to play in a safe environment.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), even if impact or pressure caused by a game ball hitting the lower tray covers 340, 340A acts on them, this is not transmitted from the lower tray covers 340, 340A to the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), thereby reliably preventing damage to the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A).

In addition, the lower tray second area A2 on the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322 is provided with a lower tray ball ejection hole 322a in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c. Therefore, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is open, game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a directly and be discharged downward (to the cash box), making it difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. Even if the game ball flies over the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a, the lower tray covers 340, 340A, as described above, can prevent the game ball from contacting the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A). This prevents damage to the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), reduces game interruptions, and prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray main body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 becomes higher as it moves forward, so that game balls heading toward the front end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 climb the inclined bottom surface, thereby attenuating the speed at which the game balls move. Therefore, the speed of game balls that come into contact with the lower tray covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, so the lower tray covers 340, 340A can reliably restrict the game balls from moving toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and also reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower tray covers 340, 340A or the main body standing wall portion 325b, thereby preventing them from being damaged.

Furthermore, because at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are separate components, if the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A, thereby reducing the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where games are played such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001, etc., a tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 is provided, which bulges furthest forward in the center of the front left and right direction, and the performance operation unit 400 and the second performance operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forward bulging portion, and the tray unit cover 326 is provided with a storage tray consisting of an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322 that can store game balls, and the storage trays (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) In addition, the machine has a lower tray first area A1 located outside the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, and a lower tray second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j behind the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. This makes the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) stand out when viewed from the front, and makes the storage trays (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) appear smaller and less noticeable. Therefore, because the conspicuous presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is visible in the area where the upper and lower trays would be visible in conventional pachinko machines, players can immediately recognize that this is a gaming machine that is different from conventional pachinko machines, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and capable of strongly attracting players' attention.

In addition, because the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front of the tray unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the area on the surface of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 is open is small. However, because the lower tray main body 325 has the first extension section 325B, the second extension section 325C, and the lower tray covers 340, 340A, which have the lower tray second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j, which is behind the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, it is possible to store game balls in an area of the lower tray 322 that cannot be seen from the front (lower tray second area A2). Therefore, contrary to appearances from the front, a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored, allowing players to concentrate on playing without worrying about the number of game balls remaining in the lower tray 322, allowing them to enjoy the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the lower tray 322 is formed by attaching (combining) the lower tray cover 340, 340A and the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C, which have the lower tray second area A2, to the lower tray main body 325 or main body part 325A, which have the lower tray first area A1.Therefore, by preparing multiple lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C, etc. of different sizes in advance and attaching the lower tray cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C of a size that corresponds to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the width of the mounting space 326j within the tray unit cover 326, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be optimized. Furthermore, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the first and second extensions 325B and 325C, it is possible to accommodate the size of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j, and since the size of this space at the rear depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), the lower tray 322 can be made to accommodate various presentation operation units 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) with different amounts of rearward protrusion, thereby increasing the versatility of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the lower tray 322 has a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body upright wall portion 325b that rises from the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 325a, so that the lower tray 322 has a container-like shape that is recessed downward, allowing game balls to be securely stored. Furthermore, the lower tray covers 340, 340A have a cover upright wall portion 340a that rises from the upper end of the main body upright wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, by preparing lower tray covers 340, 340A of various shapes in advance and combining (attaching) lower tray covers 340, 340A of shapes that correspond to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, it is possible to accommodate a variety of shapes and achieve the same effects as those described above.

In addition, the lower tray 322 is composed of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A. The lower tray covers 340, 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body upright wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, the portion of the lower tray 322 where the game balls are placed is the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, the boundary (seam, dividing line PL) between the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A is not located in the portion where the weight of a large number of game balls is applied due to storage. Therefore, since the weight of the stored game balls is borne only by the lower tray main body 325, no force is exerted that would pull the lower tray covers 340, 340A away from the lower tray main body 325, even if a large number of game balls are stored, and the lower tray covers 340, 340A can be prevented from coming off the lower tray main body 325.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls are provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where games are played such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001, etc., and the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) located in the center left-right makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the lower tray 322, difficult to see (makes it hard to see) from the front (player).This gives the pachinko machine 1 a neat and attractive appearance, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players. Furthermore, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game balls moving from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of game balls within the lower tray 322, preventing distraction and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game balls being guided by guidance means such as the ball guide section 322c and buffer section 322d in the area on the bottom of the lower tray 322 between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, which guides the game balls from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a.Therefore, if the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guidance means and smoothly (instantly) discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, giving the player the illusion that the game balls are being discharged below the lower tray 322 (to the cash box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it less likely that the player will feel annoyed by the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, difficult to see from the front, it is likely that the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located behind the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A). In other words, because more than half of the lower tray 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), the actual size (capacity) of the lower tray 322 is larger than the size of the lower tray 322 as it appears from the front, and therefore a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322 compared to its appearance.

Furthermore, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is open, game balls released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a by guide means such as the area between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a on the bottom of the lower tray 322, the ball guide section 322c, and the buffer section 322d, and discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box). This prevents game balls from circulating within the lower tray 322, and ensures that game balls circulating within the lower tray 322 are difficult to see from the front (player). This makes it difficult for players to notice the flow of game balls within the lower tray 322, preventing players from becoming distracted and suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is left open, game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be instantly ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a using the ball guide section 322c, etc., without the player noticing, giving the player the illusion that the game balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (to the cash box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it less likely for the player to feel annoyed by the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) of the lower tray 322 in a plan view difficult to see from the front. As a result, the actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the size that appears from the front, ensuring a sufficient amount of game ball storage, just like the lower trays of conventional pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a for mounting a large presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) of the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 is provided at the center of the left and right direction on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which bulges forward when viewed from the front below the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 where games such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001 are played.In addition, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c, which is below the approximate center in the up and down direction on both the left and right sides of the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, is recessed so as to be carved out toward the rear.This makes the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) mounted on the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a appear to protrude significantly forward, making the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) stand out. Therefore, where the upper and lower trays appear lined up one above the other in conventional pachinko machines, the large presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is now emphasized, allowing players to recognize at a glance that this is different from conventional pachinko machines and resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward from the tray front lower decorative portion 326c, which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) on the front of the tray unit cover 326, and a portion of it wraps around behind the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), ensuring a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322 (the volume of the lower tray 322). This eliminates the need to worry about the lower tray 322 becoming full of game balls while playing, allowing players to concentrate on playing, enjoying the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because a portion of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), when a player reaches into the lower tray 322 from the front, it is difficult for the player's fingertips to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 (the front surface of the tray unit base 323) or the lower tray cover 340. This allows the player to recognize by touch that there is a sufficient amount of game balls stored, and when game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the player can recognize that there are many game balls stored in the lower tray 322, which gives the player a sense of satisfaction and allows them to enjoy the game and prevent a decline in interest. Furthermore, because the fingertips of a hand placed in the lower tray 322 are unlikely to come into contact with the rear wall of the lower tray 322 or the lower tray cover 340, the player is given the same sensation as with the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by players accustomed to conventional pachinko machines, putting the player at ease and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the lower tray 322 is formed so that it becomes wider as it goes towards the back (rear), it is possible to ensure a sufficient amount of storage for game balls even if the front is small. In other words, because the front end portion of the lower tray 322 is small, it is possible to make the lower tray 322 less noticeable on the front surface of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 opens (the tray front lower decorative portion 326c), and in comparison, it is possible to make the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) more noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to provide a presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) while ensuring a sufficient amount of storage for game balls in the lower tray 322, which increases the appeal to players and entertains them, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the lower tray cover 340 covers the sides and top of the part of the lower tray 322 that wraps around to the rear of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A). This prevents injury to players when they put their hands inside the lower tray 322 by touching the inner surface of the tray unit cover 326 or the rear of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), allowing players to play in a safe environment. In addition, the lower tray cover 340 prevents game balls from entering (spilling out of) the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

Furthermore, because the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is positioned in the center of the left-right direction on the front of the tray unit cover 326, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is more noticeable to the player, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention. The decorations provided by the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can also be made more visible, allowing players to enjoy the decorations and presentations of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) and preventing a decline in player interest.

In addition, the lower tray 322 is equipped with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball ejection hole 322a that opens and closes vertically, providing the same functionality as the lower tray in conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, players familiar with conventional pachinko machines will not be confused by the function of the lower tray 322 when playing this pachinko machine 1, and can play in the same manner as before, allowing players to concentrate on their game and enjoy it. Furthermore, because the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a are located behind the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a are not visible to the player when viewed from the front, giving the pachinko machine 1 a clean and attractive appearance and resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that is likely to attract players' attention.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, an operation button interior decorative element 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the door frame side performance display device 460 that can present performances to the player is attached to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) that is attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3, and an operation button interior decorative element 432 (screen unit 470) that decorates the outside of the door frame side performance display device 460 that can present performances to the player is attached, and an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm and a center that faces away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) are attached to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button interior decorative element 432 (screen unit 470). ), and the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decorative part 411a, a second button decorative part 411b, and a button frame 412, and the button lens 411 is provided with a cylindrical button base 413 that protrudes from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Therefore, the first button decorative part 411a and the button base 413 can reduce visibility of the outer edge and inner side (rear side) of the operation button inner decorative part 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A) from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative part 432 (screen unit 470), thereby improving the appearance of the operation button 410. This makes it possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decorative member 432 provided inside, the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), etc., and to prevent a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the first button decorative part 411a, the second button decorative part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 make it difficult to see the outer edge or rear side of the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470) through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470). Therefore, even if the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470) becomes relatively large by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, it can be well hidden by the first button decorative part 411a, etc., and therefore a large operation button 410 (button lens 411) with an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm can be realized without any problems, while preventing a deterioration in appearance. Therefore, the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be enlarged, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out and strongly attracting the player's attention, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since it is equipped with a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, when the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and make invisible anything outside the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), further improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, because the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional (hemispherical) shape that bulges outward (away from) the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the surface near the outer edge of the button lens 411 is tilted relative to the plane formed by the opening at the front end of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are aligned, i.e., a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the operation button 410 moves forward and backward), making it easier for light to be refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, by combining the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b provided on the outer edge with the button frame 412 and button base 413, it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and rear side of the operation button internal decorative portion 432 (screen unit 470) through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative portion 432 (screen unit 470), thereby reliably achieving the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, because the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 is increased, which makes it possible to make the operation button interior decorative member 432 and door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) placed inside the operation button 410 larger and easier to move. This makes it easier to equip the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) inside the operation button 410 to entertain players, thereby realizing a pachinko machine 1 that provides even more entertainment for players.

Furthermore, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative) quality, making the operation button 410 stand out on this pachinko machine 1 and attracting the player's attention, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as the machine to play.

In addition, the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412, which are provided on the outer edge of the button lens 411, are opaque. This ensures that the back of the operation button 410, the operation button internal decorative portion 432 (screen unit 470), etc. are not visible through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative portion 432 (screen unit 470), thereby reducing deterioration in the appearance of the operation button 410, etc. and improving its appearance.

The button lens 411 is also provided with an opaque button frame 412 that extends from the outer edge of the button to the inside at a specified width around the entire circumference. This works in conjunction with the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b to make it difficult for the player to see the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). This makes it possible to increase the gap between the main body 413a and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), making it easier to ensure sufficient space for the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A to move, allowing them to move smoothly.

Furthermore, because the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, there is no directional aspect to the outer periphery compared to when it is polygonal, making it easier to move the operation button 410 smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is made larger, it can be pressed without any problems, allowing players to enjoy the player-participation effects that use the operation button 410 without losing interest.

In addition, because the operation button 410 has been enlarged, when a player-participation effect is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, the player can easily touch and press the operation button 410 without having to check the position of the operation button 410 while operating it. This makes it easier for the player to participate in player-participation effects using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is equipped with a door frame-side effect display device 460 (door frame-side second effect display device 460A), effect images are displayed according to the game status, strongly drawing the player's attention to the door frame-side effect display device 460 (door frame-side second effect display device 460A) within the operation button 410, allowing the player to enjoy the effects provided by the door frame-side effect display device 460 (door frame-side second effect display device 460A). Furthermore, effect images and light-emitting effects provided by the door frame-side effect display device 460 (door frame-side second effect display device 460A) can encourage the player to operate the operation button 410, allowing the player to actively participate in the player-participation effect and enjoy it, thereby preventing a decline in interest. Furthermore, by executing effects within the operation button 410, some players may feel as if something good is about to happen, heightening their anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 (the area inside the first button decorative portion 411a) of the large operation button 410, players can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of this pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players and increasing players' anticipation for the effects using the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) within the operation button 410, thereby preventing a decline in player interest.

The present invention has been described above using preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In other words, while the above embodiment shows an application to a pachinko machine 1 as the gaming machine, this is not limited to this and the invention may also be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case too, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decorative portion 411a formed on the inner periphery of the button frame 412, but this is not limited to this, and the button lens 411 may not have the first button decorative portion 411a formed thereon.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but this is not limited to this. Instead of attaching the button frame 412, a decorative part that hides the rear side around the entire periphery may be formed at the part of the button lens 411 that corresponds to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the operation button 410 is shown equipped with a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the outer edge of the button lens 411 toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround the entire periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame-side second performance display device 460A. However, this is not limited to this, and at least one protruding member may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround only a portion of the entire periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 or the door frame-side second performance display device 460A. The shape of this button base 413 may be a shape that follows the periphery of the button lens 411, or a shape that does not follow the periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have decoration (flat decoration such as stickers or printing, or three-dimensional decoration with reliefs or other irregularities) on at least the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be either translucent or opaque. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. If the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to apply a light diffusion treatment such as embossing, slits, or prisms to at least one of the inner and outer wall sides.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward only from the outer left portion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) on the front of the tray unit cover 326, but this is not limited to this. The lower tray 322 may be recessed rearward from both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and connected to each other behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), or it may be recessed rearward only from the outer right portion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and part of it may wrap around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A).

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the shape of the portion of the lower dish 322 on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 where it is recessed rearward (the dish front lower decorative portion 326c) (the shape of the front end of the lower dish 322) is recessed rearward in a curved surface, but this is not limited to this, and the front surface may also be recessed in a polygonal cylindrical or polyhedral shape.

While the above embodiment shows an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front of the tray unit cover 326, this is not limiting. It is also possible to attach units or panels equipped with the following: "ones equipped with an operation device such as an operation dial or touch panel," "ones equipped with a rotating body with a decorative surface," "ones equipped with a decorative body and a movable device for moving the decorative body," "ones equipped with a decorative body that three-dimensionally resembles characters, items, logos, and scenes (dioramas) that fit the concept of the gaming machine," and "ones decorated with characters, items, logos, and specified designs that fit the concept of the gaming machine, using stickers or printing." Furthermore, the component attached to the mounting space 326j (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be a single component; multiple components (two or more) may be attached. For example, separate components may be attached, such as a component attached to the upper half of the mounting space 326j and a component attached to the lower half of the mounting space 326j.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is shown to have a presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward for mounting the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A). However, this is not limited to this, and a dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) may be used that does not have an opening (presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and a space equivalent to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. It is desirable to decorate the front of such a dish unit cover with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. that are in line with the concept of the gaming machine, using stickers, printing, the attachment of decorative materials, etc.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which an area slightly larger than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) in a plan view of the lower tray 322 is covered by the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) as a covering part so as to be difficult to see from the front, but this is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the game ball storage area in the lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front, or the entire lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as being arc-shaped and partially circumferentially arranged, but this is not limited to this, and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may also be annular and extend around the entire circumference.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the performance operation unit 400 is shown as a decoration having multiple polygonal shapes in a concentric circle centered on the center, but this is not limited to this, and the second button interior decorative portion 432g may also be a decoration having multiple circular shapes (including ellipses) in a concentric circle centered on the center.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the rear components, such as the operation button interior decorative component 432, the door frame side performance display device 460, and the door frame side second performance display device 460A, which are arranged on the rear side, are always visible through the transparent button lens 411 (front component) of the operation button 410. However, this is not limited to this, and at least one of the front and rear components arranged in the front and rear (or top and bottom) may be configured with a variable light transmission means that makes the rear side visible when a predetermined condition is met. Examples of variable light transmission means include "a one-way mirror, which makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front and rear sides," and "a liquid crystal film, which becomes transparent or opaque when the power is turned on or off, making the rear side visible." The front and rear components may be movable relative to each other, or may not be movable relative to each other.

By providing variable light transmission means in at least one of the front and rear members, only the front member, or both the front and rear members, is visible in the normal state, allowing the player to see the decorations of the visible members. Then, in a special state, by satisfying certain conditions, the rear member (the rear member or the member located behind the rear member) that is not visible in the normal state becomes visible, allowing the player to see decorations in which the front and rear members, or the front, rear, and the member behind the rear member, overlap. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front and rear members, preventing players from getting bored and entertaining them, thereby preventing a decline in player interest.

To be more specific, for example, if the front member has a variable light transmission means such as a one-way mirror, by darkening the rear side of the front member under normal conditions, only the decoration on the front member can be seen by the player. Then, by brightening the area between the front and rear members, or the rear side of the rear member with light from a light-emitting element such as an LED, the conditions for the variable light transmission means in the front member are met, making the rear member visible through the front member, and allowing the player to see the overlapping decorations of the front and rear members.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmission means such as a one-way mirror, under normal conditions the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member, allowing the player to see the decoration made up of the decoration on the front member and the surface of the rear member. Then, if the rear side of the rear member is illuminated with light from a light-emitting element such as an LED, the conditions for the variable light transmission means in the rear member are met, making the rear side visible through the rear member, allowing the player to see the components behind the rear member (for example, decorative elements such as display devices and characters) through the front and rear members.

Furthermore, if both the front and rear members are equipped with variable light transmission means such as a one-way mirror, under normal conditions, only the decoration of the front member is visible to the player. However, if the area between the front and rear members is illuminated with light from a light-emitting element such as an LED, the conditions for the variable light transmission means in the front member are met, making the surface of the rear member visible through the front member and allowing the player to see the decoration of the front and rear members. On the other hand, if the rear side of the rear member is illuminated with light from a light-emitting element such as an LED (or if the area between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously illuminated with light from a light-emitting element such as an LED), the conditions for the variable light transmission means in each of the front and rear members are met, allowing the player to see the components behind the rear member (e.g., display devices, characters, and other decorations) through the front and rear members. This allows the visible range to be varied in multiple stages by appropriately selecting the areas to be illuminated with light from the light-emitting elements, allowing the player to enjoy a variety of decorations.

In the above specific example, the variable light transmission means is something like a magic mirror, so when the back side is darkened, it looks like a mirror, allowing the player to see the sparkling decorations on the surfaces of the front and rear members.

In addition, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means was described as something like a magic mirror, but the same effect can be achieved if it is something like a liquid crystal film. Furthermore, if something like a liquid crystal film is used as the variable light transmitting means, it can transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so if the area between the front and rear members and the back side of the rear member can be brightened (or decorated with light) by light from light-emitting elements such as LEDs, players can be shown a wider variety of light-emitting effects, decorative effects, and other effects.

[7. Main control board, dispensing control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 69 to 74. Figure 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, payout control board, and peripheral control board, Figure 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of Figure 69, Figure 71 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board that relays the electrical connection between the payout control board that constitutes the main board and the CR unit and the degree display board, Figure 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of Figure 69, Figure 73 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and Figure 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of the VDP with built-in sound source in the liquid crystal display control unit.

As shown in Figure 69, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that generates a control power supply (for example, +5V) and controls the game, including the payout of prize balls, and a second control unit SCG that produces effects related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by providing multiple boards, with the first control unit MCG comprising a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and the second control unit SCG comprising a peripheral control board 1510. In explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first control unit MCG will first be explained in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the second control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510).

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game, as shown in Figure 69, mainly comprises a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that controls the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on and has built-in various control programs such as a main control program that is executed a predetermined time after the power is turned on and controls the game operation, a ROM that stores various control programs and commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of a predetermined voltage.

In addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), the main control MPU 1310a also has built-in watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") that monitors its operation (system), as well as functions to prevent fraud, etc.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code (a code that exists only once in the world) assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual unit. Once assigned, this ID code cannot be rewritten, even using an external device, because it is stored in non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and reference the ID code from the non-volatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an") that uses hardware to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not a jackpot game state will occur, among various game-related random numbers. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is pre-set), and is configured so that the pre-set value as the initial value is not fixed (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping, based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, described below). Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping, based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs this rapid lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time it obtains a value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as the random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit 1310b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the main control system reset described below. In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open-collector output type with the emitter terminal grounded (GND). It is composed of a main control output circuit with a reset function (1310ca) that has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals, which outputs various signals to external boards, etc., and a main control output circuit without a reset function (1310cb) that does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The main control output circuit with a reset function (1310ca) is configured as a circuit that receives a system reset signal from the main control system reset (described below). In other words, the main control output circuit with a reset function (1310ca) is configured as a circuit that does not output any signals based on the information input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., by resetting the information by the main control system reset (described below). In contrast, the main control output circuit without a reset function (1310cb) is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the main control system reset (described below). In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to external boards, etc. is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

As shown in Figure 60, the detection signals from the first start port sensor 4002 which detects game balls that have entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 which detects game balls that have entered the second start port 2004, and the general prize port sensor 4020 which detects game balls that have entered the general prize port 2001, as well as the signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, are input to the input terminal of a designated input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. In addition, detection signals from the gate sensor 4003 shown in Figure 60, which detects gaming balls that have passed through the gate section 2003, the count sensor 4005 which detects gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in Figure 9, which is attached to the back unit 3000 and detects fraudulent activity using magnets, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the gaming board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b.

Based on the detection signals from each of these switches, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, which then outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacca solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of a specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the panel relay board 4161 and then via the function display unit 1400 to the first special symbol display 1403, second special symbol display 1405, first special reserved number display 1404, second special reserved number display 1406, normal symbol display 1402, status display 1401, and round display 1407.

The main control MPU 1310a also outputs various information about the game (game information) from the output terminal of a specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, causing the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to output various information about the game (game information) to the payout control board 951. The main control MPU 1310a also outputs a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e by outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca from the output terminal of the specified output port.

In this embodiment, non-contact electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first start opening sensor 4002, the second start opening sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005, while contact-type ON/OFF mechanical switches are used for the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 and frequently pass through the gate section 2003, so game balls are frequently detected by the first start opening sensor 4002, the second start opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start opening sensor 4002, the second start opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Furthermore, when a jackpot game state occurs that is advantageous to the player, the large prize opening 2005 opens and game balls frequently enter the opening, causing the count sensor 4005 to frequently detect game balls. For this reason, a proximity switch with a long life is used for the count sensor 4005. In contrast, the general prize openings 2001, 2201, where game balls do not frequently enter, are not frequently detected by the general prize opening sensors 4020, 4020. For this reason, mechanical switches with a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general prize opening sensors 4020, 4020.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to dispensing as serial data from the output terminal of a specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the dispensing control board 951. When the dispensing control board 951 has successfully received the various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, it outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a also receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data via the main control input circuit 1310b, and receives the various commands as serial data from the main control input circuit 1310b via the input terminal of its designated serial input port. When the main control MPU 1310a has successfully received the various commands as serial data from the payout control board 951, it outputs a signal indicating this (main payout ACK signal) from the output terminal of its designated output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and then outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of its specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, we will briefly explain the main serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I/O ports, is circuit-connected via bus 1310ah (see Figure 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and is primarily composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (see Figure 79). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmit buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmit start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. The serial management unit 1310aec then transfers the command set in the transmit buffer register 1310aeb from the transmit buffer register 1310aeb to the transmit shift register 1310aea, and begins transmitting it to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. In this embodiment, the transmit buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa sets multiple commands in the transmit buffer register 1310aeb and then outputs a transmit start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, thereby continuously transmitting multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") BC0 (see Figure 75) as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control's built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 of the dispensing control board 951 (described below) is operated within a predetermined period of time after power is turned on, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is output from the dispensing control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. This triggers the various information stored in the main control's built-in RAM to be completely erased (cleared) by the main control MPU 1310a.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., is equipped with a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 that performs various functions, and an error LED indicator 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in Fig. 70. The operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output when operated.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in Figure 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls related to payout, is equipped with a payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor that has built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, including a payout control program that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and controls the payout operation of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, a payout control input circuit 952b to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. In addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in payout control RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in payout control ROM"), the payout control MPU 952a also has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program receives various game-related information (game information) and various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payout serial data reception signal. The payout control program also generates a slot status 1 command (equivalent to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game balls, and creates a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the first error cancellation command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 serving as the error cancellation unit, and outputs these error occurrence commands and error cancellation navigation commands as serial data via the payout control I/O port 952b to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 as a main payout serial data transmission signal (command transmission means). Furthermore, if an error occurs with the dispensing operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since power was turned on, i.e., after the dispensing control unit main process is executed or the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is executed and dispensing control has begun, the dispensing control program will clear the error based on a detection signal generated by operating the operation switch 954 and stop the output of warning information corresponding to the error (error clearing control means).

In addition, this dispensing control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame open command (first main frame open command) when a detection signal (main frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main frame open switch 619. On the other hand, this dispensing control program also outputs a door frame close command (first door frame close command) when a detection signal (door frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame close command (first main frame close command) when a detection signal (main frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the main frame open switch 619.

The dispensing control input circuit 952b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the dispensing control system reset described below. In other words, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open-collector output type with the emitter terminal grounded (GND). It is composed of a payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which has a reset function and is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., and a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, which does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca is configured as a circuit that receives a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described below. In other words, the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca is configured as a circuit that does not output any signals based on information input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., when the information is reset by the payout control system reset described below. In contrast, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described below. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

Detection signals from the ball shortage detection sensor 827, which detects the running out of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800, the payout detection sensor 842, which detects game balls released from the payout outlets 831b, 832b of the payout device 830, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840, which detects the rotation of the payout blade 839, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. For the purposes of the following explanation, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

In addition, detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch 619, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether the storage space of the fall cover unit 270 shown in Figure 1 is full of stored game balls, is first input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the handle relay terminal board 315, the power supply board 931, and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The dispensing control MPU 952a receives various commands related to dispensing from the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of its serial input port in serial data format, and outputs the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. When the dispensing control MPU 952a has successfully received various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (dispenser ACK signal) indicating this from the output terminal of its specified output port to the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which then outputs a signal (dispenser ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of its serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and then transmits various commands as serial data from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 has successfully received various commands as serial data from the dispensing control board 951, it outputs a signal (main dispensing ACK signal) to that effect to the dispensing control board 951. This signal (main dispensing ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a also outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, causing the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to output a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the payout motor drive circuit 952d to output a drive signal to the payout motor 834. The payout control MPU 952a also outputs a drive signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator 860b from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, causing the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to output a drive signal to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The information displayed and reported by the error LED display 860b includes the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates "connection abnormality" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951), when the number "1" is displayed, it indicates "ball out" (specifically, that there are no game balls in the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 827), when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates "ball stuck" (specifically, that at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotor and the game ball are meshed near the entrance, making it difficult for the payout rotor to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, that there is a ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840). 2, indicating that there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842; when the number "5" is displayed, indicating a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of payout retries has reached a preset upper limit); when the number "6" is displayed, indicating a "full" state (specifically, that the storage space of the fault cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279); when the number "7" is displayed, indicating a "CR not connected" state (that an electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6); and when the number "9" is displayed, indicating a "stocked state (there are prize balls in stock (unpaid))" state (specifically, that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc. from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which then outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc. to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Furthermore, the payout control board 951 outputs various information relating to the game (game information) from the main control board 1310 via resistors (not shown) to the external terminal board 784. The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (each of which has an infrared LED and a photo IC built in), and transmits the number of game balls and various other information (game information, details of an error relating to the payout operation of game balls or a fact that an error has occurred) to a hall computer installed in the game parlor (hall) via these photocouplers.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by multiple photocouplers to prevent abnormal voltages from being applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1, causing the hall computer to malfunction or break down, and to prevent abnormal voltages from being applied from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 that progresses the game or the payout control board 951 that controls payouts, causing them to malfunction or break down. The hall computer monitors the player's play by keeping track of the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and other game information from the pachinko machine 1.

The ball loan request signal from the ball loan button 328 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are first input to the CR unit 6 via the number of balls display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the CR unit input/output circuit 952e. The CR unit 6 also updates the remaining balance on the inserted prepaid card according to the number of gaming balls loaned, and outputs a signal to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the degree display board 365 to display the remaining balance on the ball lending/return display unit 330. This signal is then input to the ball lending/return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/return display unit 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the dispensing control board 951, is equipped with a capacitor BC1 (see Figure 75) as a backup power supply to supply power to the dispensing control board 951 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC1 allows the dispensing control MPU 952a to store various information in the dispensing control built-in RAM (dispensing memory unit) during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, the operation signal is input via the dispensing control input circuit 952b to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The dispensing control MPU 952a interprets this as a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM, and the dispensing control MPU 952a then completely erases (clears) the information from the dispensing control built-in RAM. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output from the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game ball lending device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6, and between the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 will be described with reference to Fig. 71. As shown in Fig. 71, the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 (to be precise, the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the point display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit 6 and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal board 880 and the point display board 365 are electrically connected). Wiring (harnesses) electrically connect the CR unit 6 and the board between the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the board between the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the board between the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, and the board between the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the degree display board 365. In addition, AC 24V (described later) from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, direct current +12V (DC +12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V using an internal voltage generation circuit (not shown) and supplies this voltage, together with the ground LG, to the payout control board 951 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869, while also supplying it to the degree display board 365 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

The degree display board 365 has a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, mounted on its component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the ball lending unit 360, a return button 329, which is a push button switch, mounted on a position corresponding to the return button 329 on the ball lending unit 360, and a ball lending/returning display unit 330, which is a segment display, mounted on a position corresponding to the remaining loaned amount display unit 363 on the ball lending unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the switch of the ball lending button 328 is turned on, and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on, and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869.

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 consists of three segment displays arranged in a row, and the lighting of these three-digit segment displays is controlled by a so-called dynamic lighting method, which sequentially drives each digit of the three-digit segment displays. Through this lighting control, the ball lending/returning display unit 330 displays the remaining balance on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6, or indicates errors in the CR unit 6. When the ball lending/returning display unit 330 receives digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for specifying one of the three-digit segment displays, and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting up this specified one-digit segment display from the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, the one-digit segment displays are illuminated sequentially in accordance with the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and the content illuminated by these three-digit segment displays can be viewed through the remaining lending display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the degree display board 365 adjacent to the ball lending/return display unit 330. This CR unit lamp 365d receives a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL via the CR unit lamp 365d and a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates the predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 using an internal voltage generation circuit. When the ball lending button 328 and return button 329 are enabled and balls are available for lending, the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL is controlled to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to illuminate, and this illumination can be seen through the remaining loan display unit 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/return display unit 330 through a current-limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

When the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is input from the degree display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 outputs a ball lending request signal BRDY to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 then outputs a BRQ, a signal requesting the start of a single payout operation to pay out a specified number of loaned balls in one payout operation (in this embodiment, 25 balls, equivalent to 100 yen), via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a). The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, outputs an EXS signal, indicating that a single payout operation has started or ended, to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and outputs a PRDY signal, indicating whether a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible or impossible, to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Note that if, for example, a hall staff member or the like has preset the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation will be performed twice in succession, so that 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, followed by 25 balls worth 100 yen, for a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen.

When the return button 329 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the point display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 ejects and returns the prepaid card from an insertion slot (not shown). This returned prepaid card stores the remaining balance, minus the amount equivalent to the number of game balls dispensed as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, a brief description will be given of the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG. The power supply board 931 is provided with a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect the 24 volt alternating current (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment, a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power sources, and a launch control unit 953 that controls launching by the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in Figure 5 and ball sending by the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250 shown in Figure 1.

[7-3-1. Power supply control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the 24 volt alternating current (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment when the power switch 934 is operated, a power factor correction circuit 935b that improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a smoothing circuit 935c that smooths the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and a power supply creation circuit 935d that creates various DC power supplies from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to supply to various boards.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which controls launching using the launch solenoid 682 and ball delivery using the ball delivery solenoid 255, is primarily composed of a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a receives, via the handle relay terminal board 315, an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307, which electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) with which the gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 5a depending on the rotation position of the handle 302; a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 302; and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 312, which detects whether the player intends to forcibly stop the launching (launching) of the gaming balls. Furthermore, when the CR unit 6 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal indicating this is input to the launch control circuit 953a via the payout control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682. At the same time, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal board 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and controls the ball feeding member to send the received game ball to the ball launching device 650.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
In contrast to this first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG, as shown in Figure 72, controls the presentation based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and is also equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the presentation display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side presentation display device 460 shown in Figure 19, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side presentation display device 1600 and the door frame side presentation display device 460, while also controlling the sound of music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, a real time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, and a volume adjustment volume 1510a that adjusts the volume of the music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the presentation includes a peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, such as a sub-control program that controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and that controls the presentation operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, and various information (for example, game board It is equipped with a peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data that specifies the screen to be drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and schedule data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs, etc., a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of when a jackpot game state has occurred and information for managing special effect flags), and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as ``peripheral control external WDT 1511e'') for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally.

Peripheral control RAM 1511c can only retain its stored contents for the time it takes for power to be restored after a momentary power outage, and will lose its contents if power is cut off for an extended period of time (in the event of a prolonged power outage). In contrast, peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as the "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") mounted on power supply board 931, allowing it to retain its stored contents for approximately 50 hours. Because the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is mounted on power supply board 931, if the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power will no longer be supplied to peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d will no longer be able to retain its stored contents, resulting in the loss of its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is running out of control, and when this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to clear the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer expires), a reset will be applied. If the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within the certain period of time, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so a reset will not be applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 4170 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), and it also transmits game board side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the motor drive board to the motor drive board via the peripheral control output circuit. door-side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is transmitted from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882; door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is transmitted from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, the detection signal from the rotation detection switch provided on the performance operation unit 400, which detects the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401, and the detection signal from the pressure detection switch, which detects the operation of the pressure operation unit 405, are serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized performance operation unit detection data is input from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, and then to the performance operation unit detection serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (e.g., photosensors) used to detect the original and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the gaming board 5 are serialized by a gaming board-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the gaming board-side serial transmission circuit via a peripheral control input circuit to the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input and output of the motor drive board serial I/O port.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as the "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and uses the peripheral control built-in WDT in conjunction with the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to diagnose whether its own system is running out of control.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in Fig. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is composed of a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa at its core, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation for Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, various peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and a peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It has four channels, DMA0 to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac communicates, via the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, between the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently, data is read from and written to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac independently transfers data between storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and input/output devices such as peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, which are built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. To transfer data, data is read from and written to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad is a dedicated controller that controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to exchange various data between the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O port 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak.

The various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae include a serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, a serial I/O port for the motor drive board, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for obtaining information from the performance operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is running out of control, and when this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af to clear the timer within a certain period of time (until the timer expires), it will be reset. If the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within the certain period of time, it can restart the timer count and will not be reset.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, serializes detection signals from various detection switches used to detect the original and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 using a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal to receive this serialized movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-brightness white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp to indicate that a jackpot game state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are electrically connected directly, shortening the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag, thereby providing noise countermeasures for the LED lighting control, which is important for gameplay. Note that the LED lighting control is performed during the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, while the lighting control of other LEDs, etc., is performed during the peripheral control unit steady-state process, which will be described later.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 1510a. Rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a changes the resistance value. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and then converted into 1024 levels ranging from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven levels and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The LCD display control unit 1512 (the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a, described below) controls the volume set at board volumes 0 to 6, so that music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds are also played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 to alert parlor staff and others of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, as well as notification sounds to announce game effects (for example, to make the screen displayed on the game board-side effect display device 1600 appear more impressive, or to notify the player of a high probability of transitioning to a more favorable game state). However, these notification sounds are played completely independently of volume adjustments based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the LCD display control unit 1512 (the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, described below) via a program. Unlike the board volume, which is divided into seven levels as described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly adjusted from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if a hall staff member or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, and other sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be reduced in volume. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is engaging in fraudulent behavior, a loud notification sound (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is reduced, it is possible to prevent hall staff and the like from being distracted by the notification sound. Furthermore, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume through the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, or the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to add more impact to the screen displayed on the game board side display device 1600 in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous gaming state.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral Control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b pre-stores various control programs, data, control data, and schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the LCD display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, etc. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating music, sound effects, etc., and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen, arranged in chronological order, and specifies the order in which the screens are displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by light emission data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs, arranged in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by sound command data that is arranged in chronological order, and specifies the order in which the music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies an output channel number for specifying which output channel to use out of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (described later), and a track number for specifying which track out of multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, while others are copied to a various control program copy area in peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read and executed. Some of the various data, control data, and schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are copied to a various control data copy area in peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read.

The peripheral control ROM 1511b also includes, as one of the various control programs that control the RTC control unit 4165, a brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board display device 1600 depending on the amount of time the game board display device 1600 has been in use. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness that occurs over time in the game board display device 1600 when the game board display device 1600 is equipped with an LED-type backlight. It obtains the date and time when the game board display device 1600 was first powered on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 (described below), and corrects the obtained brightness setting information based on the correction information. This correction information is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 in 5% increments within a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side display device 1600. For example, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side display device 1600 was first powered on based on the date and time when the game board side display device 1600 was first powered on, corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness adjustment information obtained for this 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is an additional 5% correction information, and the game board side display device 1600 is turned on. If 12 months have already passed since the game board side display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is an additional 10% correction information obtained for this 75%.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral Control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management target work area 1511ca which is dedicated to storing information to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc which are dedicated to storing copies of the various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, a various control program copy area 1511cd which is dedicated to storing copies of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, a various control data copy area 1511ce which is dedicated to storing copies of various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and a backup non-management target work area 1511cf which is dedicated to storing information not to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored following a momentary or power outage), a value of 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf, clearing it to zero; however, the backup managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc are cleared to zero when the power-on status command (see Figure 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on instructs the start of a RAM clear effect and the game status (for example, instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in Figure 69 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on).

The backup management target work area 1511ca is composed of Bank0 (1fr), which exclusively stores, as a backup target, the performance information (1fr), which is various information updated during the peripheral control unit's routine processing, which is executed each time a V-blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the LCD display control unit 1512 (described below), and Bank0 (1ms), which exclusively stores, as a backup target, the performance information (1ms), which is various information updated during the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs (described below). To briefly explain the names Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the smallest management unit representing the size of the memory area for storing various information, and the "0" following "Bank" indicates that this is the normally used memory area for storing various information updated as various control programs are executed. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used memory area is the smallest management unit. Furthermore, "Bank1," "Bank2," "Bank3," and "Bank4," which are provided in the area spanning from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc described below, have the same memory area size as "Bank0." As will be described later, when the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, it outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to inform that it is in a state where it can accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a.Therefore, each time a V blank signal is input, in other words, every frame (1 frame), the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and therefore ``(1fr)'' is appended to ``Bank0'', ``Bank1'', ``Bank2'', ``Bank3'', and ``Bank4'' (the same meaning is also used for performance information (1fr) and performance backup information (1fr) described later). "(1 ms)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" because, as described below, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs (the same meaning is also used for the performance information (1 ms) and the performance backup information (1 ms) described below).

Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board transmission data memory area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, a received command memory area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad, and a schedule data memory area 1511cae. The lamp drive board transmission data memory area 1511caa is a memory area in which game board light emission data SL-DAT is set for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab is a memory area in which door light emission data STL-DAT is set for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The received command memory area 1511cac is a memory area in which the main control The RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad is a memory area where various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, described below) is set, and the schedule data memory area 1511cae is a memory area where various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is set based on the commands received. In the schedule data memory area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce is read and set, and in other areas, various schedule data is read and set directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, a transmission data memory area 1511cag for the motor drive board, a movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah, a performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai, and a drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf is a memory area in which door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is set, the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag is a memory area in which game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is set, the movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah is a memory area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 is set, and the performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai is a memory area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the performance operation unit 400 is set. The drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak is a memory area in which various information is set that is acquired based on the rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc., acquired based on detection signals from the switches (for example, rotation (direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401, and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the performance operation unit 400). The drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak is a memory area in which various information is set that is acquired based on the frequency of malfunctions and the state of malfunctions occurring between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450, when the performance display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the peripheral control board 1510 and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal, based on the LOCKN signal, described below, that is output to notify this fact.

In addition, the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab in Bank 0 (1fr), and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf and the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag in Bank 0 (1ms) are each divided into two areas: a first area and a second area.

When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing described below is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, and when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa.Each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed and, for example, the game board light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board transmission data storage area 1511caa during the current peripheral control unit regular processing, processing will proceed based on the game board light emission data SL-DAT that was set in the first area of the lamp drive board transmission data storage area 1511caa during the previous peripheral control unit regular processing.

When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board.Each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed and, for example, door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab during this peripheral control unit regular processing, processing will proceed based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab during the previous peripheral control unit regular processing.

When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described below is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board.Each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed and, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf during this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, processing proceeds based on the door side motor drive data STM-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed the previous time.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, and when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag.Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed and, for example, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag during this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, processing proceeds based on the game board motor drive data SM-DAT that was set in the first area of the motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag during the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Next, we will explain the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information, which is a variety of information stored in the backup management work area 1511ca. The backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc are managed as one page, with two pairs of two banks as one pair. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), a normally used memory area, is quickly copied as effect backup information (1fr) to backup area 1 1511cb and backup area 2 1511cc by peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). At the same time, the effect information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1ms), a normally used memory area, is quickly copied as effect backup information (1ms) to backup area 1 1511cb and backup area 2 1511cc by peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Consistency of a page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up that page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb manages two pairs as one page: Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match, and also by whether the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In addition, the backup second area 1511cc manages two pairs as one page: Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank 3 (1ms) and Bank 4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match, and also by whether the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb is an area for managing two pairs as one page, with Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) as one pair. The backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing two pairs as one page, with Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) as one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), a memory area that is normally used, is copied as performance backup information (1fr) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the performance information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1ms), a memory area that is normally used, is copied as performance backup information (1ms) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, but the program that performs these high-speed copies by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is common. In other words, in this embodiment, performance information (1fr) and performance information (1ms) are managed using a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral Control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management target work area 1511da, which exclusively stores backup-targeted information among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, and a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store copies of the various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. Note that the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are not cleared to zero even when a power-on status command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 instructs the start of a RAM clear effect and the game state when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored after a momentary power outage or blackout) (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on). This is completely different from the above-mentioned clearing of the backup management work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Furthermore, after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (e.g., the history of when a jackpot game state occurred) can be cleared. However, the content (item) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management work area 1511da is composed of Bank0 (SRAM), which exclusively stores various types of information (e.g., information for managing the history of jackpot game states and information for managing special effect flags) that are maintained across days as backup targets. To briefly explain the name Bank0 (SRAM), as mentioned above, "Bank" refers to the smallest management unit representing the size of the memory area for storing various types of information. The "0" following "Bank" indicates that this is the normally used memory area for storing various types of information updated by the execution of various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" refers to the size of the normally used memory area as the smallest management unit. Furthermore, "Bank1," "Bank2," "Bank3," and "Bank4," which are located in the area spanning the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc (described below), have the same memory area size as "Bank0." "(SRAM)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" respectively because the various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is the target for backup (the same meaning is also used for performance information (SRAM) and performance backup information (SRAM) described below).

Next, we will explain the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information (SRAM), which is the various information stored in the backup management work area 1511da. The backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc are managed as a pair of two banks, with each pair being managed as one page. The performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), the normally used storage area, is quickly copied as performance backup information (SRAM) to the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The consistency of one page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up that page match.

Specifically, the first backup area 1511db consists of a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM), each of which is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), the normally used storage area, are quickly copied to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

The backup second area 1511dc also consists of a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), which are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), the normally used storage area, are quickly copied to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

In this way, in this embodiment, backup first area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and backup second area 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 and controls the sound of the music and sound effects etc. that are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, has a built-in sound source (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in sound source") for controlling the sound of the music and sound effects etc., as shown in FIG. 72, and also has a built-in sound source VDP (Video Display an audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194; and a door frame side performance transmitter 1512b that transmits serialized drawing data to the door frame side performance display device 460 to a performance display drive board 4450 that is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed within the plate unit 320. a differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal; and a forced switching circuit 1512f that receives a signal from the differential circuit 1512e in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, connects the circuit to transmit this signal, but when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, connects the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The LCD and sound control ROM 1512b stores sprite data used to display screens and images described below, such as ring image data used to display ring-shaped objects (ring-shaped objects), operation menu background image data used to display operation menu background images described below, selection object image data used to display at least one selection object described below, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described below, volume setting icon image data used to display a volume adjustment icon described below, as well as main body frame back image data used to display a main body frame back image that enables the player to see the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4, service mode screen image data used to display a service mode screen, break timer setting screen image data used to display a break timer setting screen, and break screen image data used to display a break screen. The LCD and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion object image data used to display suggestion objects that prompt the player to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the performance operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the schedule data for screen generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and then copies the first screen data of the schedule data for screen generation set in this schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting the next screen data from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and outputting it to the tone generator VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in response to the input of a V blank signal (described later), extracts the next screen data following the first screen data from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae and outputs it to the tone generator VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data arranged in chronological order in the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the tone generator VDP 1512a one by one, starting from the first screen data, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, each time a V blank signal is input.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and then transfers the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control R of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting the sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in response to the input of a V blank signal, extracts the next sound command data following the first sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 in accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data arranged in chronological order in the sound generation schedule data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one, starting from the first sound command data, in accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, each time a V blank signal is input.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the built-in sound source described above, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") that, when screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts game board side character data and upper tray side character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, as shown in Figure 74, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs the drawing data generated on its built-in VRAM, of which the drawing data for the game board side performance display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) the drawing data for the door frame side performance display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, thereby synchronizing the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

The drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, while the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 which is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed within the dish unit 320. As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and since the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side performance display device 1600 are each attached to the game board 5, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600 is short.However, as described above, the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and since the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 while the performance display drive board 4450 is stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to channel CH1, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, where the wiring length for transmitting drawing data is significantly longer than that for channel CH1, the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d uses a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" from THine Electronics, Inc., making it less susceptible to the effects of noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface known as LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals (red, green, and blue video signals) and three synchronization signals (horizontal, vertical, and clock signals). This data is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and transmitted to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed within the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. These serialized signals are then restored to parallel signals by the performance display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs one screen (one frame) of screen data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460. is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of this generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 is output (transmitted) from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. In other words, "one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of screen data" refers to data for generating one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data on the built-in VRAM to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame's worth) from channel CH1 to the game board-side display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) image data for the door frame-side display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame-side display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. When this occurs, the VDP 1512a outputs a V-blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, indicating that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is ready to accept screen data. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so the interval at which the V-blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). When this V blank signal is input, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described below. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are implemented.

The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source uses a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer system" is a system in which one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460 is stored in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM), and the one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) stored in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460.

In addition, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on commands from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source, as shown in FIG. 74, to incorporate the sound data such as music and sound effects into tracks according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number, serializing the music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 and outputting them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data. The multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a incorporate sound data for sound effects such as music and sound effects and sub-volume values for adjusting their volume, as well as sound data for alarm sounds that alert parlor staff and others to malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 and sub-volume values for adjusting their volume. Specifically, for the sound effects, the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value. For the alarm sounds, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value, completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The sub-volume value for the sound effects can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation unit 405 of the sound effect operation unit 400 to enter the setting mode described below.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the track to be used out of the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track to be used, and amplify the volume of this combined effect sound to the master volume value that will actually be played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and then serialize this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is at its maximum volume, it is amplified up to the master volume value so that the volume played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the track being used from among the multiple tracks is synthesized with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track being used, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is amplified up to the master volume value, which is the volume that will actually be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified effect sound is serialized and transmitted as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512. For the alert sound, the sound data of the alert sound incorporated into the track being used is combined with the maximum volume that is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the alert sound incorporated into the track being used and is not dependent on volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the volume of this combined alert sound is amplified to the master volume value that will actually be the volume played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and this amplified alert sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Here, briefly explaining the control of playing an alarm sound to alert parlor staff and the like of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when an effect sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, first, the sub-volume value of the track incorporating the effect sound is forcibly set to mute, then the sound data of the track incorporating this effect sound, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track incorporating the alarm sound, and the sub-volume value for which the volume of the alarm sound is set to maximum are combined, and the volume of this combined effect sound and alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that will actually be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and these amplified effect sounds and alarm sounds are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the only sound actually played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is the notification sound at maximum volume. At this time, the sound effects are muted, so they are not played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the sound effects are still playing according to the sound generation schedule data described above. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (e.g., 90 seconds). After this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the sound effects, which have been playing according to the sound generation schedule data that was previously muted, is reset to the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (if the volume has been adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation unit 405 of the sound effects operation unit 400 in setting mode, the volume is set to the adjusted sub-volume value), and the sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, when sound effects are being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 and an alarm sound is played to alert parlor staff or others of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.However, since this muted sound effects progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 after a predetermined period of time has passed, the sound effects do not resume from the point at which the alarm sound started, but rather from the point at which the alarm sound started being played and progressed according to the sound generation schedule data up until the predetermined period of time had passed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in Figure 74, the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b pre-stores game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and upper tray side character data for drawing in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, and also pre-stores various sound data such as music, sound effects, alarm sounds, and notification sounds.

[7-4-2c. Audio Data Transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and transmits the left-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. This allows music and sound effects, etc., to be reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in accordance with various performances.

In addition, the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data for each of the left and right sides between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.This means that even if the positive and negative signals of the left audio data are affected by noise, when the noise components on the positive signal and the noise components on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to form a single left audio data, the noise components cancel each other out, eliminating the noise components, thereby providing a noise countermeasure.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side performance transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a. As described above, channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals (red, green, and blue video signals) and three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal). The red, green, and blue video signals are each 8 bits long, for a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits long, for a total of 18 bits. Therefore, the most significant 6 bits of each video signal are input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The least significant 2 bits contain extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish. Therefore, although the least significant 2 bits are output from the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a, the weak color information is invalidated.

When the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, consisting of three video signals (red, green, and blue video signals) and three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal), is input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d serializes the three video signals (red, green, and blue video signals) and the three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal) into differential serial signals (serial data) using THine Electronics Inc.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" and transmits these various signals via only a single differential pair cable from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side display device 1600. Therefore, the length of the wiring required for the path (first path) from channel CH1 to the game board side display device 1600 is short. However, the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, to the door frame side display device 460. Therefore, the length of the wiring required for the path (second path) from channel CH2 to the door frame side display device 460 is significantly longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed relative to the main frame 4 shown in Fig. 1, various wiring must be passed along the open side of the main frame 4 to the closed side, which is opposite the locking unit 700 shown in Fig. 5, to electrically connect various boards provided on the main frame 4 side with various boards provided on the door frame 3 side, such as the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 provided on the door frame 3. However, in addition to the payout device 830, a full tank branch unit 770 is also provided on the closed side of the main frame 4, which can guide game balls paid out by this payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and branch and guide the paid-out game balls to the lower tray 322 when the upper tray 321 is full of game balls.
5, which is a unit formed by bundling together the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6, which is supplied with power from the pachinko island equipment, is disposed below the main body frame 4. In this way, the various wiring that electrically connects the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side with the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side is routed near the payout device 830, full tank branch unit 770, power supply board 931, etc., and is in an environment that is subject to noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided on the payout device 830, as well as noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls and noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

For this reason, channel CH2, which requires significantly longer wiring for transmitting rendering data than channel CH1, employs a differential communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510, making it less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a differential one-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 (described below) on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, i.e., between the transmitter and receiver, as described above. However, this differential one-pair cable is not simply a parallel wire with two parallel wires, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also known as a twisted pair cable.

Here, we will briefly explain the case where parallel wires are used as a differential one-pair cable electrically connecting the transmitter and receiver. The length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data on channel CH2 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a is significantly longer than that of channel CH1 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a. Even though the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 uses differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc., making it less susceptible to noise, this hardware configuration alone can cause interference with the serial data on the parallel wires due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls and noise that has infiltrated the power lines supplied by the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. If this is affected, the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 attached to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, so the serial data is received in an affected state by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, and the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 as distorted data that is different from the normal data, causing a problem where an image like a snowstorm is displayed in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, making it impossible to tell what the image is.

In this embodiment, for channel CH2 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is significantly longer than channel CH1 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc., making it a system that is less susceptible to the effects of noise.In addition to this hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable is used as the differential one-pair cable electrically connecting the transmitter and receiver, which can cancel (remove) noise on the receiving side even if the differential serial data is affected by noise that has entered the wiring. As a result, even if the serial data in the twisted pair cable is affected by noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game balls or noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the noise is canceled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3.Therefore, the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is reliably received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460, so that the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the LCD display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460. By canceling (removing) noise, it is possible to prevent images such as sandstorms that make it impossible to recognize what the image is on the door frame side display device 460, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to the effects of noise.

In this embodiment, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are interposed between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 (described later) provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, i.e., between the transmitter and receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not constructed as a single unit, but are assembled separately and then the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, after attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twisted cables from the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, thereby electrically connecting the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side with the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. With this configuration, after opening the door frame 3 from the main frame 4 and disconnecting the various wiring, the door frame 3 can be removed from the main frame 4, allowing maintenance of the main frame 4 and door frame 3.If a problem with the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' can be attached to the main frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the various wiring from the various boards on the door frame 3' side can be electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 on the main frame 4 side, thereby electrically connecting the various boards on the main frame 4 side with the various boards on the door frame 3' side.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication using THine Electronics' "V-by-One (registered trademark)" to make it less susceptible to noise. In addition to this hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable is employed as the differential one-pair cable electrically connecting the transmitter and receiver, which is capable of canceling (removing) noise on the receiving side even if the differential serial data is affected by noise that has infiltrated the wiring. Specifically, the electrical connections between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are each made by twisted pair cables, while the power wiring and wiring transmitting various other signals are each electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 include a video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, as well as a power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 each have the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern formed a predetermined distance away from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns. Because the path from the transmitter to the receiver crosses multiple relay terminal boards, namely the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, a portion of the signal transmitting differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is reflected between the inputs and outputs of the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards, resulting in noise or a reduction in the output level of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the electrical connections between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the boards of the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are each made by twisted pair cables, whereas the power wiring and the wiring that transmits various other signals are each electrically connected by harnesses, with one wire of the twisted pair cable being red and the other wire being gray, and the wiring that supplies power within the harness being red and the other multiple wires being gray. Note that the wiring that supplies power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differentiating circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to a forced switching circuit 1512f, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, this forced switching circuit 1512f also receives LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by a differentiation circuit 1512e and input. This differentiation circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is sent as an operation confirmation request to the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. The forced switching circuit 1512f is configured to be circuit-connected to transmit two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, and to be circuit-connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, so that the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the performance display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600.

The performance display drive board 4450 housed within the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 is primarily composed of an LCD module circuit 4450V which receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 via the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 (described below), restores the various serialized signals to parallel signals, and outputs them to the door frame side performance display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. If it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described below) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is met based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image to communicate this and outputs it to the game board side effect display device 1600, thereby displaying it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify the user.

Furthermore, when the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs the LOCKN signal (described below) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when a LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, while when a LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert image to this effect (for example, ``A problem has occurred with the LCD display device on the upper tray side. Please call a store employee.'') to the game board side performance display device 1600, and also controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert sound to this effect (for example, ``A problem has occurred with the LCD display device on the upper tray side.'') to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, which causes the alert sound to be played from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made using notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like installed in the door frame 3. At this time, all of the decorative LEDs installed in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards installed in the game board 5 may be lit.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
The RTC control unit 4165, which stores calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is configured around the RTC 4165a, as shown in FIG. 72. This RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as the "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that stores calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a does not receive any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). This allows the RTC 4165a to update and maintain calendar information and time information using power supplied from the battery 4165b even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets it in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, allowing effects based on this acquired calendar information and time information to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Examples of such effects include, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and on New Year's Eve, a screen running a New Year's countdown is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa also stores and retains LED brightness setting information if the game board display device 1600 is equipped with an LED backlight. If the game board display device 1600 is equipped with an LED backlight, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the brightness setting information from the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight using PWM control. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, as well as the currently set brightness of the LED backlights of the game board display device 1600 and the door frame display device 460.

In addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa also stores input date and time information, which is the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second when the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information were first stored in the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa.

When the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are cold cathode fluorescent tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the backlight ON/OFF or only turns it ON.

The various information stored in the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the gaming machine manufacturer's production line. On the production line, in order to perform various tests, such as display tests of the gaming board display device 1600, the input date and time information is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second entered on the production line as the date and time when the gaming board display device 1600 was first powered on.

In this way, the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa can store and retain, in addition to calendar information and time information, information that needs to be maintained independently of the pachinko machine 1 model information (for example, the probability of a low- or high-probability jackpot game state occurring), such as brightness setting information when the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED-type backlight, and input date and time information.

Furthermore, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or too dim for the backlight brightness of the game board display device 1600 set at the time of manufacture. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the user can enter setting mode and adjust the backlight brightness to a predetermined level. After the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 within a predetermined time period displays a screen for entering setting mode on the game board display device 1600. Furthermore, during the waiting-for-customer mode during which the game board display device 1600 is performing a demonstration, operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 displays a screen for entering setting mode on the game board display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen, it is possible to reset calendar information and time information, and adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the desired brightness. This adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the LED brightness stored in the brightness setting information.

In setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above to correct the decrease in brightness that occurs over time in the game board display device 1600 if the game board display device 1600 is equipped with an LED backlight. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 to determine the date and time the game board display device 1600 was first turned on, acquires calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second to determine the current date and time, and acquires brightness setting information containing brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board display device 1600 in 5% increments within a range from 100% to 70%, as well as the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board display device 1600. The acquired brightness setting information is then corrected based on correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed since the game board side display device 1600 was first powered on, based on the current date and time and the date and time when the game board side display device 1600 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the game board side display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is 5% higher than this 75%, as obtained as correction information. The brightness of the backlight is adjusted and turned on, and if 12 months have already passed since the game board side display device 1600 was first powered on, corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is 75% plus the 10% correction information obtained.

The current date and time can be determined by directly obtaining calendar information specifying the year, month, and date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or by obtaining the current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510, and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510, in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, during the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 of the peripheral control unit power-on process described below.

[834. Volume Control]
As described above, the volume control volume 1510a is configured to adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume control volume 1510a has a resistance value that can be varied by rotating the knob, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob from an analog value to a digital value, and converts the voltage into 1024 levels ranging from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 .

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds are also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 to alert parlor staff and others of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, as well as notification sounds to announce game effects (for example, to make the screen displayed on the game board-side effect display device 1600 more impressive, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player). However, these notification sounds and notification sounds are played completely independently of volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the LCD display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) using a program.

Unlike the board volume, which is divided into seven levels as described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly adjusted from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if a hall staff member or the like turns the knob on the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, and other sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 will be reduced in volume, but the alert sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is engaging in fraudulent behavior. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is reduced, it is possible to prevent the alert sound from making it difficult for hall staff or the like to notice a malfunction or a player's fraudulent behavior.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sounds can be lowered so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, or the volume of the advertising sounds can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of the music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a, the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to enter setting mode. After the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 within a predetermined time period displays a screen for entering setting mode on the game board performance display device 1600. Furthermore, during the waiting-for-customer state during which the game board performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration, operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 displays a screen for entering setting mode on the game board performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen, the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and a predetermined value is added to or subtracted from this converted value in response to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, thereby increasing or decreasing the board volume value. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for tracks that incorporate sound data for performance sounds such as music and sound effects, among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and is reflected in adjusting the volume of the performance sounds, but is not reflected in adjusting the volume of the above-mentioned alert sounds and notification sounds.

As such, in this embodiment, there are two ways to adjust the volume of music and sound effects: by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a; or by increasing or decreasing the board volume value by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in response to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400. Because the volume control volume 1510a is implemented on the peripheral control board 1510, the main body frame 4 must always be open from the outer frame 2. In this case, only the hall staff can rotate the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. However, the volume adjusted by the hall staff may sound too low for the player, making it difficult for the player to hear the music and sound effects, or it may sound too high for the player, making the music and sound effects too loud. Therefore, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a specified time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600, a screen for entering the setting mode will be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen. This allows players to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to their desired volume, so if the volume adjusted by the hall staff feels too low and the music and sound effects are difficult to hear, they can operate the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to increase the volume to their desired level. Alternatively, if the volume adjusted by the hall staff feels too high and the music and sound effects are too loud, they can operate the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to decrease the volume to their desired level.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is left in a state where no play is being performed for a predetermined period of time, enters a waiting state for customers, and the game board-side performance display device 1600 repeatedly performs a demonstration (for example, 10 times), the volume adjusted by the player who was previously seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing is canceled and the volume is initialized. This volume initialization restores the volume adjusted by the hall staff, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall staff by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if the previous player who was seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 felt that the adjusted volume was too low and the music and sound effects were difficult to hear, the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400. Conversely, if the previous player who was seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 felt that the adjusted volume was too high and the music and sound effects were too loud, the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time can decrease the volume to the desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400.

8. Power Supply System
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 75 and 76. Figure 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of a pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a block diagram that continues from Figure 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, followed by the power supplied to each control board, etc. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various boards and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, power from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on.

As shown in Figure 75, the power supply board 931 is equipped with a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that generates various DC voltages from the 24 volt alternating current (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and payout control board 951. The launch control unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launcher 650 shown in Figure 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in Figure 1.

The power supply control unit 935 is equipped with a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the gaming ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 via the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. This power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create direct current +37V (DC +37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V"), which is supplied to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes ripples from the supplied +37V, smoothing the +37V and supplying it to the launch control circuit 953a and power supply generation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 supplies backup power to the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispense control MPU 952a of the dispense control unit 952 on the dispense control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source to adjust the drive current to output to the launch solenoid 682 in order to launch (launch) the game ball towards the game area 5a shown in Figure 1 with a launch strength (launch strength) that corresponds to the rotational position of the handle 302, while outputting a constant current to the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250, causing the ball sending member of the ball sending unit 250 to receive one of the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and send the received game ball to the ball launching device 650.

The power supply generation circuit 935d generates DC +5V (DC +5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC +12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC +24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") from the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c, and supplies these to the dispensing control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system to which +5V is applied and supplied is the +5V power line, the power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied is the +12V power line, and the power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied is the +24V power line.

The +5V generated by the power supply circuit 935d is supplied to the dispensing control board 951, as described below. The +5V supplied to the dispensing control board 951 is applied to the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM via diode PD0. The +12V generated by the power supply circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. This +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V, the control reference voltage for the main control MPU 1310a, from the +12V from the dispensing control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM via diode MD0.

The negative terminal of capacitor BC1 on the power supply board 931 is grounded, while the positive terminal of capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM on the dispensing control board 951 and also to the cathode terminal of diode PD0 on the dispensing control board 951. In other words, the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d on the power supply board 931 flows toward the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and current flows in the forward direction via diode PD0 toward the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC1. In this way, capacitor BC1 can be charged by receiving +5V via an electrical connection in which the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d on the power supply board 931 flows to the dispensing control board 951 and then returns from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power supply circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the dispensing control board 951, the charge stored in capacitor BC1 is supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as dispensing VBB. Therefore, although current is prevented from flowing to the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a by diode PD0 and the dispensing control MPU 952a does not operate, dispensing VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM, thereby maintaining the stored contents.

The negative terminal of capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM on the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode MD0 on the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and current flows forward via diode MD0 toward the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC0. In this way, capacitor BC0 can be supplied with +5V and charged through an electrical connection method in which the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and then from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, if the +12V generated by the power supply circuit 935d on the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the +5V generation circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as main VBB. Therefore, although current is blocked by diode MD0 from flowing to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, main VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the main control internal RAM, thereby maintaining the memory contents. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control internal RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, we will provide an overview of the voltages supplied to each control board, etc., and then we will explain the voltages supplied mainly to the dispensing control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board.

The three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as shown in FIG. 75, and of these three voltages, +12V and +24V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. In addition, the three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are supplied via this frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in Figure 76 (a). The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, flashing signals, and gradation lighting signals to the various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the game board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a +3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates direct current 3.3V (DC +3.3V, hereafter referred to as "+3.3V") from the +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, the +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side performance display device 1600.

In contrast, the three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in Figure 76 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is equipped with a +9V generation circuit 194a that generates direct current +9V (DC +9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from the +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with the +9V generated by the +9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative boards, etc. on the door frame 3.

In addition, the +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is supplied to the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V generated by the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to the various electronic components that make up the LCD module circuit 4450V shown in Figure 74, as well as to the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y and the door frame side performance display device 460. The voltage generated by the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side performance display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 75 , the payout control board 951 includes a payout control MPU 952a and other components, as well as a payout control filter circuit 951a. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931 and filters out noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. The +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. This external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs signals conveying the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information about the pachinko machine 1, and the like, to a hall computer installed in the gaming parlor (hall). The hall computer monitors the player's play by obtaining, from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a, the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used in the payout control board 951 at all, but is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in Figure 75, the main control board 1310 includes, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, etc., a +5V generating circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, etc. The +5V generating circuit 1310g receives +12V from the power supply board 931 via the delivery control board 951, and generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage for the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the circuit is configured so that the +5V power line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected, so the +5V power line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of other boards, etc. other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 931 via diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. The +12V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the +24V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e receives +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and monitors these +12V and +24V for signs of a power outage or momentary interruption. When the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. The power outage warning signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control board 951. The power outage warning signal is also input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. In addition, the power outage warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in Figure 76 (b), and is then input to the door frame decoration board, etc. via this frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In this embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines, the +12V power line and the +24V power line, respectively, thereby enabling more accurate detection of signs of a power outage or momentary power interruption, compared to monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line.

[9. Main Control Board Circuit]
Next, the circuitry of the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 69 will be described with reference to Figures 77 to 79. Figure 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuitry of the main control board, Figure 78 is a circuit diagram showing the power outage monitoring circuit, and Figure 79 is a circuit diagram showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Figure 75 will be described, followed by the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power outage monitoring circuit, various input/output signals to the main control MPU, and the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, which are created on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 is mainly composed of the main control MPU 1310a, main control input circuit 1310b, main control output circuit 1310c, main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, +5V generation circuit 1310g, and main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Figures 69 and 75, as well as peripheral circuits such as the main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and the main control crystal oscillator MX0 (24 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal, as shown in Figure 77.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h is primarily composed of a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied to terminal 1 of the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, its terminal 2 is connected to ground (GND), and +5V with noise components removed is output from terminal 3. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC0, the other end of which is grounded (GND), thereby first removing ripple (AC components superimposed on the voltage) and smoothing the voltage.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC1 and electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), which are grounded to ground (GND), thereby further removing ripple and smoothing the voltage. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal for the main control crystal oscillator MX0, and the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal for the main control MPU 1310a. Furthermore, if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal for the main control MPU 1310a for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC3, the other end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed and ripples are further removed. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to capacitor MC3 and the anode terminal of diode MD0. The cathode terminal of diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and to the other end of capacitor MC4, one end of which is grounded (GND). The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode MD0 and the other end of capacitor MC4, and is also electrically connected via resistor MR0 to the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 75. In other words, the +5V signal, which has been smoothed and noise components removed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and, via diode MD0, to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC0. As a result, as described above, if the +12V generated by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the delivery control board 951 and the +5V generation circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Therefore, although current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by diode MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM, thereby retaining the stored contents.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5V signal, smoothed and noise-free by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, as shown in Figure 77. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and includes a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC5, the other end of which is grounded (GND). The capacitance of this capacitor MC5 determines the delay time provided by the delay circuit. Specifically, when the +5V signal input to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 reaches a threshold value (e.g., 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from its output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open-collector output type, with one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC6, which is grounded (GND). This capacitor MC6 removes ripple and smooths the signal. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR1, resulting in a logic HI, and this logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, while when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, resulting in this logic being input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca.Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are both negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes less than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripple is removed. The ground terminal is also grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5V signal, which has been smoothed and noise removed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in Figure 77. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC8, the other end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed and ripple removed. This smoothed +5V signal is also applied to the A, B, C, and ST terminals, which are output frequency selection terminals, in addition to the VDD terminal. By applying +5V to the A, B, C, and ST terminals, the main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is its output terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input to it. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is connected to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the divided wave of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is a circuit to which detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69 are input, as well as operation signals (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in Fig. 70. The circuit configuration to which the detection signals from each switch are input is the same, so here we will explain the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or to clear an error when an error is reported after power-on. It has the function of clearing RAM within a predetermined period from power-on and the function of clearing an error after power-on (after the period in which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, i.e., after the predetermined period has elapsed from power-on). Since the main control board 1310 does not have the error clearing function of the dispensing control board 951, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power-on, it interprets it as a RAM clear signal to clear the main control built-in RAM and performs the process of clearing the main control built-in RAM.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal with a logic LOW is input from the dispensing control board 951 to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal with a logic HI is input from the dispensing control board 951 (this point will be explained in more detail later).

As shown in Figure 77, the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the dispensing control board 951 for a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor MR2, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR0 via resistor MR3. The base terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to resistor MR3 and also to the other end of resistor MR4, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is connected to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR5, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a via non-inverting buffer IC MIC10 (the non-inverting buffer IC MIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC10A) shapes and outputs the signal waveform input without inverting the logic).

The circuit on the dispensing control board 951 that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is connected to ground (GND), and the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled down to ground (GND) and input as a logic LOW, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2 and input as a logic HI.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, a logically LOW operation signal is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is raised to +5V by resistor MR5, and a logically HI operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this does not indicate an instruction to perform a RAM clear, which erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal, which is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic HI, is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning transistor MTR0 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled down to ground (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 954, which has a logic LOW, is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform a RAM clear, which erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the dispensing control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, in order to suppress the effects of noise that may enter the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards, a higher voltage of +12V than the control reference voltage of +5V is used to increase the reliability of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, and second starting opening sensor 4004, which are input directly to the main control board 1310, are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistors, while the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, count sensor 4005, general winning opening sensor 4020, and gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are not input directly to the main control board 1310 and are therefore pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistors, just like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in Figure 75, the main control board 1310 receives two voltages, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and the +12V and +24V are input to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V and +24V, and when it detects a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a, the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951, and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, we will first explain the configuration of the power outage monitoring circuit, then explain the monitoring of a power outage or momentary power outage of +24V, the monitoring of a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V, and the output of the power outage warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is mainly composed of a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open-collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which serves as the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which serves as the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR20, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and +5V is applied to them. The current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (set to 2.495V in this embodiment), which serves as the comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC20, the other end of which is connected to ground (GND). The reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is smoothed by the capacitor MC20, which removes ripple (AC components superimposed on the voltage). The A terminal, which serves as the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is connected to ground (GND).

Comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare a +24V monitoring voltage V1 with a reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare a +12V monitoring voltage V2 with a reference voltage Vref. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied to terminal 3, the positive terminal of MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to terminal 2, the negative terminal of MIC21A. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied to terminal 5, the positive terminal of MIC21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to terminal 6, the negative terminal of MIC21B. The results of these comparisons are input to D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which serves as the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC21, the other end of which is connected to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the Vcc terminal, which serves as the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is smoothed and ripple-free by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, monitoring for a +24V power outage or momentary power outage is performed by MIC21A of comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. Terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power line, and to the other end of a resistor MR22, one end of which is grounded (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of a capacitor MC23, one end of which is grounded (GND). The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors MR21 and MR22, and ripples are removed and smoothed by capacitor MC23. The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are set so that when the +24V power supply experiences a power outage or momentary interruption and the voltage starts to drop from +24V to a preset power outage detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment), the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

The output terminal of comparator MIC21A, terminal 1, is an open-collector output, with one end electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is lower than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to ground (GND), and a signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of +12V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, monitoring for a +12V power outage or momentary power outage is performed by MIC21B of comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. Terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR24, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and to the other end of a resistor MR25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of a capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors MR24 and MR25, and ripples are removed and smoothed by capacitor MC25. The values of resistors MR24 and MR25 are set so that when the +12V power supply experiences a power outage or momentary interruption and the voltage starts to drop from +12V to a preset power outage detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment), the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

Terminal 7, the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to terminal 1, the output terminal of MIC21A mentioned above. As a result, it is electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded to ground (GND), and is electrically connected to terminal PR, the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. As mentioned above, capacitor MC24 functions as a low-pass filter.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power outage detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to ground (GND), and a signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power outage warning signal output]
D-type flip-flop MIC22 memorizes the value (logic) of the signal input to its D-input terminal 1D in response to a change in the edge of the clock signal input to its clock input terminal 1CK, and outputs this memorized value (logic) from its output terminal 1Q, as well as outputting the inverse of the memorized value (logic) from its output terminal, negative logic 1Q. When a logic LOW signal is input to its clear terminal CLR, D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state and outputs a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal input to its preset terminal PR from its output terminal 1Q (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q, i.e., a signal with the same logic as the signal input to the preset terminal PR, is output from the negative logic 1Q). On the other hand, when a logic HI is input to its clear terminal CLR, D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latched state. Furthermore, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, to set the latch state, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which it outputs a signal with a logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, when a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal (at this time, it maintains a state in which it outputs a signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q, which is the inverted signal, from the negative logic 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22's D input terminal, terminal 1D, and clock input terminal, terminal 1CK, are both grounded to ground (GND). Therefore, the circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal, terminal 1CK, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal, terminal 1D, is not stored and output from the output terminal, terminal 1Q. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives, at its preset terminal, a signal from terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for power outages or momentary interruptions of +24V, and a signal from terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for power outages or momentary interruptions of +12V, as input to its preset terminal, terminal PR. Based on these signals, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a signal from its output terminal, terminal 1Q. The power supply terminal Vcc is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC22, the other end of which is grounded (GND). The +5V applied to the Vcc power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is smoothed and ripple removed by the capacitor MC22, the ground terminal GND is grounded, and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the output terminal 1Q, is not electrically connected to the outside.

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca at its clear terminal, CLR. This power outage clear signal is output during the main control side power-on process performed by the main control MPU 1310a, described below, and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Because the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, with its logic set to LOW. When a power outage clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases its latched state. At this time, the logic input to the preset terminal, PR, is inverted and output from the output terminal, 1Q.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HIGH via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is set to a latched state when the power outage clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal, latching the input state.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, so that the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is output from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal and to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. As shown in FIG. 78, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR26, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27 and also to the other end of a resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a via non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC23A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR27 and MR28 and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR20 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor MTR20 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, a logic HI signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR20, turning transistor MTR20 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR29, and a logic HI power outage warning signal is input to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a via non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, a logic LOW signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR20, turning transistor MTR20 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a logic LOW power outage warning signal is input to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a via non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

Furthermore, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs a signal from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, is configured as an open-collector output type as shown in Figure 78, and terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via resistor MR30. The base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to resistor MR30 and also to the other end of resistor MR31, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR32, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR33 and the other end of a resistor MR34, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and is also electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via a wiring harness. Furthermore, when the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power line in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 shown in Figure 70 on the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in Figure 70.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR30 and MR31 and the front-stage transistor MTR21 is the front-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors MR33 and MR34 and the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is the rear-stage switch circuit, which is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR21 OFF and the preceding switch circuit OFF. Furthermore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32, turning transistor MTR22 ON and the following switch circuit ON. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor MTR21 ON and the preceding switch circuit ON; the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR22 in the following stage OFF and the following switch circuit OFF.

When both the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, a logic HI signal is input to the PR terminal, the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, turning the following transistor MTR22 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the dispensing control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, a logic LOW signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, turning the following transistor MTR22 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 on the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

Furthermore, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs a signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, is configured as an open-collector output type as shown in FIG. 78. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 via resistor MR35. The base terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to resistor MR35 and also to the other end of resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power line in the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR35 and MR36 and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor MTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, a logic HI signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR23, turning transistor MTR23 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of peripheral control unit 1511 on peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), and a logic HI peripheral power outage warning signal is input to peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, a logic LOW signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR23, turning transistor MTR23 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND) on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a logic LOW peripheral power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b, which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, each have one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 While the logic of these signals is the same, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, has two transistors, one in the front stage and one in the rear stage, and the logic of the dispensing power outage warning signal is the inverse of the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23, while the collector terminal of transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to the other end of a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 on the dispensing control board 951, and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the dispensing control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510. This is because, between the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are mounted on the main control board 1310, and therefore a power outage warning is issued using the power outage warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) that uses the +5V control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. However, between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a power outage warning is issued using the power outage warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) that uses +12V, a voltage higher than the +5V control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, dispensing control MPU 952a, and peripheral control MPU 1511a, in order to suppress the effects of noise that may enter the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to Figure 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the dispensing control board 951 shown in Figure 69 as a dispensing main serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, transmit serial data to be sent to the dispensing control board 951 from the TXA terminal to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function as a main dispensing serial data transmission signal, and transmit the main dispensing serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to the dispensing control board 951, and transmit serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 69 from the TXB terminal to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal, and transmit the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal), each input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a also receives, for example, a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951, which indicates that the above-mentioned main payout serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in Figure 69 are also input via the main control input circuit 1310b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main pay ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal has been successfully received is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the main pay ACK signal to the pay control board 951, or a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in Figure 69, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the drive signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 131 0d to the start port solenoid 2107, and outputs drive signals to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69, which then outputs drive signals to the various displays from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and various information related to the game (game information) is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, which then outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 951, etc.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Fig. 79. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 75 via the dispensing control board 951, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g generates from this +12V a control reference voltage of +5V for the main control MPU 1310a. The main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using +12V, a voltage higher than the +5V control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the effects of noise that may enter the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 has the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function function as a communications interface circuit, which is primarily composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50. In contrast, the peripheral control board 1510 has a communications interface circuit primarily composed of diode AD10, electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and photocoupler AIC10 (composed of a built-in infrared LED and photo IC).

The anode terminal of diode MD50 on main control board 1310 is supplied with +12 V from power supply board 931 via dispensing control board 951, and the cathode terminal of diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacity: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), the negative terminal of which is grounded to ground (GND). The cathode terminal of diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of photocoupler AIC10 on peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness).
As a result, if, for example, a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is no longer supplied from the power supply board 931 to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 can continue to be applied as +12 V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmit port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in its transmit buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmit shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec, and complete transmission from the transmit shift register 1310aea as main serial data.

As mentioned above, the main serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the +5V control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to reduce the effects of noise that may enter the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, thereby increasing its reliability.

In this embodiment, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, when the main control serial transmit port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set in its transmit buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmit shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it as main serial data from the transmit shift register 1310aea, a main serial data transmit signal with a logic HI due to +12V can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a has a storage capacity of 32 bytes, and since one packet consists of 3 bytes of data, a maximum of 10 packets of data can be stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19,200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). Resistor AR10 on the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal, which outputs the main serial data transmit signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77, is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR50, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 via resistor MR51. The base terminal of transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to resistor MR51 and also to the other end of resistor MR52, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR51 and MR52 and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR50 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, turning photocoupler AIC10 OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR50, turning transistor MTR50 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, turning photocoupler AIC10 ON.

The anode terminal of diode AD10 on peripheral control board 1510 is supplied with +5V from power supply board 931 via frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The cathode terminal of diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor AC10, whose negative terminal is grounded (GND). The cathode terminal of diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor AC10 and also to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor AR11, which is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of peripheral control MPU 1511a. When photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 changes, and this signal is input as a main serial data transmission signal to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

As a result, as described above, if, for example, a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can continue to be applied as +5V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the +5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, allowing the main serial data transmission signal sent from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 to complete transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a. This ensures that the main serial data transmission signal, i.e., the main serial data, is reliably received by the peripheral control board 1510 without being interrupted or missing.

When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal sent from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR50 OFF and turning photocoupler AIC10 OFF. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor AR11, and the main serial data transmission signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR50, turning transistor MTR50 ON and turning photocoupler AIC10 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a main serial data transmission signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this way, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, in this embodiment, measures are taken to deal with a drop in the control reference voltage and communication voltage due to a power outage or momentary power outage occurring on the +5V power line to which +5V, the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and the +12V power line to which +12V, the communication voltage applied via diode MD50, is applied. In other words, for the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power line and the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC2, which uses electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power source, are electrically connected in parallel. Therefore, even if a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power line drops, the control reference voltage is applied from the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which serves as the first auxiliary power source, so that the control reference voltage can be maintained. Furthermore, For the reset-free main control output circuit 1310cb, which functions as a communications interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power line is applied to the anode terminal of diode MD50 as the communication voltage. The cathode terminal of this diode MD50 is electrically connected in parallel with the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC50, which serves as a second auxiliary power source. Even if a power outage or momentary power interruption causes a drop in the communication voltage applied from the +12V power line via diode MD50, the communication voltage is applied from the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC50, which serves as the second auxiliary power source, thereby maintaining the communication voltage. This prevents commands being sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being interrupted or dropped, allowing the peripheral control board 1510 to reliably receive commands being sent. This eliminates the risk of missing commands immediately after a power outage or momentary power interruption.

In addition, the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h is set to 470 μF, and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF so that all of the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can be completely transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which is composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50 and functions as a communication interface circuit. As a result, even if a power outage or momentary power outage occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb can be completely transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as an interface circuit, so the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb without any interruption or loss.

[10. Circuit of dispensing control board]
Next, the circuits of the dispensing control board 951 shown in Fig. 70 will be explained with reference to Figs. 80 to 85. Fig. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuits of the dispensing control unit, Fig. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the dispensing control input circuit, Fig. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of Fig. 81, Fig. 83 is a circuit diagram showing the dispensing motor drive circuit, Fig. 84 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input/output circuit, and Fig. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. First, the dispensing control filter circuit will be explained, followed by the circuits of the dispensing control unit, and the various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board.

[10-1. Dispense control filter circuit]
As shown in Figure 80, the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is primarily composed of a dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0. This dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit with excellent attenuation characteristics and magnetically shielded with ferrite. Terminal 1 of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 75 and is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC0, the other end of which is grounded (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by the capacitor PC0, removing ripple (AC components superimposed on the voltage). Terminal 2 of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded (GND), and terminal 3 of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V with noise components removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) terminals of capacitor PC1 and electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), respectively. This further smooths and removes ripple from the +5V output from terminal 3 of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This smoothed +5V is then applied to the power terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal, which is the power terminal for the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, and the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal for the payout control MPU 952a, as described below. Furthermore, if a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal for the payout control MPU 952a, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage.

The VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC3, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed and ripples are further removed by capacitor PC3. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is grounded to ground (GND).

In addition, the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to capacitor PC3 and the anode terminal of diode PD0. The cathode terminal of diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a, and to the other end of capacitor PC4, one end of which is grounded (GND). The VBB terminal of this dispensing control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode PD0 and the other end of capacitor PC4, and is also electrically connected to the positive terminal of capacitor BC1 on the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 75 via resistor PR0. In other words, the +5V signal, which has been smoothed and noise components removed by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a and, via diode PD0, to the VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC1. As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge stored in capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although current is blocked by diode PD0 from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, preventing the payout control MPU 952a from operating, payout VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, thereby maintaining the stored contents. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of dispensing control unit]
The dispensing control unit 952 is mainly composed of a dispensing control MPU 952a, a dispensing control input circuit 952b, a dispensing control output circuit 952c, a dispensing motor drive circuit 952d, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, and peripheral circuits, as shown in Figure 80, including a dispensing control system reset PIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal. Here, we will first explain the dispensing control system reset, followed by an explanation of the dispensing control crystal oscillator, dispensing control input circuit, dispensing motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispense control system reset]
The +5V signal, smoothed and noise-free by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control system reset PIC1, as shown in Figure 80. The dispensing control system reset PIC1 resets the dispensing control MPU 952a and the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and includes a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the dispensing control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC5, the other end of which is grounded (GND). The capacitance of this capacitor PC5 allows the delay time set by the delay circuit to be set. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control system reset PIC1 reaches a threshold value (e.g., 4.25V), the system reset signal is output from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the dispensing control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca. The output terminal is an open-collector output type, and is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and to the other end of a capacitor PC6, which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor PC6 acts as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively. On the other hand, when the voltage input to the power terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power terminal is less than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of capacitor PC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripple is removed. The ground terminal is also grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispense control crystal oscillator]
The +5V signal, which has been smoothed and noise removed by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in Figure 80. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC8, the other end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed and ripple removed. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0. When +5V is applied to the OE terminal, the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is its output terminal.

The OUT terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispense control input circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 952b is a circuit to which a dispensing power outage warning signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the main frame opening switch 619 shown in Fig. 70, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 75, the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Fig. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954, etc. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the dispensing power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input, and the circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input. In addition, the output terminals of the full tank detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches such as the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, and rotation detection sensor 840 shown in Figure 70 are open collector output type, so the circuit configurations to which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input are almost identical, and therefore here we will explain the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 is of a normally closed (NC) type, and is configured so that, as shown in FIG. 1 , the switch is ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4, and is OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4. The No. 2 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR20, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21 and also to the other end of a resistor PR22, one end of which is grounded (GND). In addition, terminal 1 of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor PR20 and to one end of a capacitor PC20, the other end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR23, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC20A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to it without inverting it). When transistor PTR20 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 changes, and this signal is input to input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a door opening signal.

Furthermore, terminal 1 of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR20 via resistor PR21. Terminal 1 is also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR21 via resistor PR24. The base terminal of transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to resistor PR24 and to the other end of resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on external terminal board 784, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. When transistor PTR21 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 changes, and this signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

Furthermore, terminal 1 of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR20 via resistor PR21, pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR21 via resistor PR24, and pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 via resistor PR26. The base terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to resistor PR26 and to the other end of resistor PR27, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown), one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR22 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 changes, and this signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR20 and capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 caused by a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the door frame opening switch 618 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for short periods of time when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, the circuit consisting of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618.

When the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor PTR20 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR23, and a door frame opening signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor PTR21 OFF and the switch circuit OFF.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12 V via the wiring (harness) by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784, and an outer frame door open information output signal with a logic high is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor PTR22 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12 V via the wiring (harness) by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310, and a main frame door open signal with a logic high is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20, turning transistor PTR20 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a door frame opening signal with a logic LOW is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor PTR21 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND), and an outer frame door open information output signal with a logic LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Furthermore, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor PTR22 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned ON, causing a door frame open signal with a logic HI to be input to input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic HI to be input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI to be input to the main control board 1310.On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, causing a door frame open signal with a logic LOW to be input to input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic LOW to be input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW to be input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input]
The frame opening switch 619 is of the normally closed type (NC), and is turned on (conductive) when the frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, as shown in FIG. 1, and turned off (disconnected) when the frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the frame opening switch 619 is grounded to ground (GND), while the first terminal of the frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR28, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29 and also to the other end of a resistor PR30, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). In addition, terminal 1 of the main frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to pull-up resistor PR28 and to the other end of capacitor PC21, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 described above and to external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on external terminal board 784, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. When transistor PTR23 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 changes, and this signal is input to external terminal board 784 as an outer frame door opening information output signal.

In addition, terminal 1 of the main frame open switch 619 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR23 via resistor PR29. It is also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 via resistor PR31. The base terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to resistor PR31 and to the other end of resistor PR32, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 described above and to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown), one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR24 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 changes, and this signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR28 and capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the main frame opening switch 619 caused by a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the main frame opening switch 619 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for short periods of time when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, or when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

When the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor PTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12V via the wiring (harness) by the pull-up resistor on external terminal board 784, and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic high is input to external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor PTR24 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12V via the wiring (harness) by the pull-up resistor in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310, and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR28, turning transistor PTR23 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND) at external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic LOW is input to external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR28, turning transistor PTR24 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to ground (GND) on the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned ON, causing an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic HI to be input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI to be input to the main control board 1310.On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF, causing an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic LOW to be input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW to be input to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, as described above, even if the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, or if both of these states occur, a main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the main frame door open signal. However, even if a player experiences a situation during normal play where the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 is open, It can be determined that a state in which the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open has occurred, and because an outer end frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal board 784, this outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. Although the hall computer cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal, it can determine that a state in which the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open has occurred, which does not occur during normal gameplay.

In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches. This means that even if the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the door frame 3 will remain open from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the main frame 4 will remain open from the outer frame 2. In this way, by using normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619, even in the event of a short circuit, the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and the outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

Furthermore, if the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (NO) switches (door frame opening switch 618' and main frame opening switch 619'), the door frame opening switch 618' will be ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, and will be OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is open to the main frame 4. The main frame opening switch 619' will be ON (conductive) when the main frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and will be OFF (disconnected) when the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618' becomes disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will remain open from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619' becomes disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the main frame 4 will remain open from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if normally open switches are used for the door frame opening switch 618' and the main frame opening switch 619', even in the event of a disconnection, a main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and an outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c) Circuit to which the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line that transmits a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected at one end to a pull-up resistor PR40 that is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR40 via a resistor PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41 and also to the other end of a resistor PR42 that is grounded at one end (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR43, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC40A) shapes the logic of the signal waveform input to it without inverting it.) When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and this signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a dispensing power outage warning signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR41 and PR42 and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a dispensing power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power outages or momentary power outages of the two voltages, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931. When a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage is detected, it outputs a dispensing power outage warning signal to the dispensing control board 951 via the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb as a power outage warning. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power outages or momentary power outages of the +12V and +24V voltages, and when both the condition that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side via the wiring (harness) on the dispensing control board 951, resulting in a logic LOW dispensing power outage warning signal. When a signal is input to the dispensing control board 951, and either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 mentioned above via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, that is, when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951. The voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor PTR40 OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled up to +5V by resistor PR43. As a result, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input from the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, that is, when there are signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and/or +24V voltage, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951. The dispensing power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e causes the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 to be pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor PR40, turning transistor PTR40 ON and pulling the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 down to ground (GND). As a result, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW at the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there are signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, while when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. As mentioned above, when there are signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, while when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the logic of the dispensing power outage warning signal input to the dispensing control MPU 952a in response to a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e and the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the fall cover unit 270 shown in Figure 1 is input to the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Figure 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 6. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and on the dispensing control board 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor PR44a, which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is also electrically connected to terminal 1 of the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. This three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

Terminal 2 of the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded, and terminal 3 of the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is electrically connected to terminal 1 of the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 via resistor PR44b and to the base terminal of transistor PTR41 via resistor PR45. As a result, the full tank detection sensor 279 detection signal is filtered out of noise by the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 and input to the base terminal of transistor PTR41. The base terminal of transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to resistor PR45, as well as to the other end of resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded, and to the other end of capacitor PC40, one end of which is electrically connected to ground. Capacitor PC40 functions as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR47, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting the logic). When transistor PTR41 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR41 changes, and this signal is input as a full signal to input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR45 and PR46 and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that turns ON/OFF based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a logic HI signal is input to the payout control board 951. On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to ground (GND) in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a logic LOW signal is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a logic HI signal is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR41, turning transistor PTR41 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR41 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a logic LOW full tank signal is input to input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to ground (GND) on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a logic LOW signal is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR41, turning transistor PTR41 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR41 is pulled up to +5V by resistor PR47, and a logic HI full tank signal is input to input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit consisting of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 via the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. However, in this circuit configuration, the detection signals from various detection switches, such as the bulb out detection sensor 827 and dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70, are input directly to the respective switch circuits without passing through a T-type filter circuit such as the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. Because the full tank detection sensor 279 is located in the fault cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, the path for transmitting the detection signal is significantly longer and more susceptible to noise than the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, etc., located in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main frame 4.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls. When the payout control MPU 952a determines that the storage space is full with stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, it forcibly stops the drive control of the payout motor 834 and controls the payout of game balls by the payout rotor to stop. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a may forcibly stop the drive control of the payout motor 834 and stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotor even though the storage space is not full of stored game balls, or if the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled to rotate the payout rotor and continue to pay out game balls even though the storage space is full of stored game balls, and the payout rotor itself becomes unable to rotate, and an abnormal load is placed on the payout motor 834, causing the payout motor 834 to become overloaded, generate abnormal heat, and break down, or the mechanism that transmits the rotational movement of the payout motor 834's rotational shaft to the payout rotor may break down. Therefore, in this embodiment, to prevent such problems from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered out by the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50, which removes noise components.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which operation signals from operation switches are input]
Terminals 1 and 2, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded, and terminals 3 and 4, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to resistor PR49 and to one end of a resistor PR50, one end of which is grounded to ground. Terminal 4, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to pull-up resistor PR48 and to the other end of a capacitor PC41, one end of which is grounded to ground. The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR51, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52 and also to the other end of a resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR54, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting the logic of the signal). The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 changes when the front-stage and rear-stage transistors PTR42, PTR43 are turned ON/OFF, and this signal is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In addition, terminals 3 and 4, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via resistor PR49, and are also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR44 via resistor PR55. The base terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to resistor PR55 and to the other end of resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor MR2, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 77. Turning transistor PTR44 ON/OFF changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR44, and this signal is input as a RAM clear signal to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR48 and capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 954 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the operation switch 954 is pressed.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is the front-stage switch circuit, the circuit consisting of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is the rear-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44 is the switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the operation signal from operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM (dispense control internal RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control internal RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or to resolve an error when an error is reported after power-on. It has two functions: clearing RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and clearing an error after power-on (after the period during which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, i.e., after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on). The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal when used to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and an error clearance signal when used to clear an error after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on).

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48, causing a logic HI operation signal to be input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42, turning the preceding transistor PTR42 ON and the preceding switch circuit ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR43, which is the voltage applied to the base of the following transistor PTR43, is pulled down to ground (GND), turning the following transistor PTR43 OFF and the following switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the following transistor PTR43 is pulled up to +5V by resistor PR54, causing a logic HI RWMCLR signal to be input to input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The dispensing control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI during a predetermined period from power-on, it does not instruct to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on), it determines that it does not instruct to clear the error.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and a logic HI operation signal is input to the base terminal of transistor PTR44, turning transistor PTR44 ON and the switch circuit ON. This causes the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 to be pulled down to ground (GND) on the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a logic LOW RAM clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When a logic LOW RAM clear signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after power-on, as described above, this logic LOW RAM clear signal shown in FIG. 77 is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is raised to +5V by resistor MR5, and a RAM clear signal with a logic high is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to input terminal PA0 is high, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this does not indicate an instruction to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are pulled to ground (GND), causing a logic LOW operation signal to be input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42, turning the preceding transistor PTR42 OFF and the preceding switch circuit OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42, which is the voltage applied to the base of the following transistor PTR43, is pulled up to +5V by resistor PR51, turning the following transistor PTR43 ON and the following switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the following transistor PTR43 is pulled to ground (GND), causing a logic LOW RWMCLR signal to be input to input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The dispensing control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on, this indicates that a RAM clear should be performed to erase the information stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on), this indicates that an error should be cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are pulled down to ground (GND) by the pull-up resistor PR48, causing a logic LOW operation signal to be input to the base terminal of transistor PTR44, turning transistor PTR44 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12V via the wiring (harness) by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310, causing a logic HI RAM clear signal to be input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic HIGH is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, as described above, this RAM clear signal with a logic HIGH is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, as shown in Figure 77, turning transistor MTR0 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the RAM clear signal input to input terminal PA0 is logic LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform a RAM clear, which will erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, we will explain the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 shown in Figure 5. As shown in Figure 83, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive IC PIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, to which +12V and +5V are applied, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is grounded (GND). A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and then output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive IC PIC60, via a Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing motor 834.Based on a voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, +12V or +5V is supplied as a motor drive voltage to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive IC PIC60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and to the dispensing motor 834.

Driver IC PIC60 has four Darlington power transistors, and in this embodiment, terminals 6 and 7, which are the emitter terminals of drive IC PIC60, are each grounded to ground (GND), and terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are the base terminals of drive IC PIC60, receive the dispensing motor drive signal via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. Terminals 2, 4, 9, and 11, which are collector terminals of drive IC PIC60, correspond to terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are base terminals of drive IC PIC60, respectively, and when a dispensing motor drive signal is input to terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are base terminals of drive IC PIC60, via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, a drive pulse, which is an excitation signal, is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to dispensing motor 834. This dispensing motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and then output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC60, via resistors PR60-PR63. These drive pulses are generated by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the dispensing motor 834, causing the dispensing motor 834 to rotate. Note that when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC PIC60, the drive IC PIC60 will be damaged, so as a protective measure, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected in front of terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive IC PIC60.

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, we will explain the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals to and from the CR unit 6 shown in Figure 71. The payout control board 951 receives a ball request signal BRDY and a single payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, as described above. It also receives a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG, generated from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 71. The payout control board 951 also outputs an EXS signal indicating the start or completion of a single payout operation and a PRDY signal indicating whether a payout operation to dispense balls is possible or impossible via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The input/output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals is primarily composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor), as shown in Figure 84.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. Resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON; when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns OFF. The emitter terminal of photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR70 via resistor PR71 and also to the base terminal of transistor PTR71 via resistor PR72. The collector terminal of photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to resistor PR71 and also to the other end of pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line.

The base terminal of transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to resistor PR71 and to the other end of resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in Figure 80 via non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC80A) shapes and outputs the signal waveform input without inverting the logic). When transistor PTR70 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR70 changes, and this signal is input as CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

Meanwhile, the base terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to resistor PR72 and also to the other end of resistor PR76, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on power supply board 931, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Turning transistor PTR71 ON/OFF changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR71, and this signal is input to power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR71 and PR74 and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the specified voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns OFF and is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to ground (GND), and the CR connection signal 1, whose logic is LOW, is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning the transistor PTR70 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1, whose logic is HI, is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR72 and PR76 and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the specified voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns OFF and is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to ground (GND) on the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic LOW is input to the power supply board 931.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning the transistor PTR71 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor on the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic high is input to the power supply board 931.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. Resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HIGH, the photocoupler PIC71 turns OFF. The emitter terminal of photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor PR78, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC80B) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it). When photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 changes, and this signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, photocoupler PIC71 turns ON, pulling the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 to ground (GND), resulting in a BRDY signal with a LOW logic level, which is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, photocoupler PIC71 turns OFF, pulling the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 to +5V by pull-up resistor PR78, resulting in a BRDY signal with a HI logic level, which is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via resistor PR79. The BRQ signal from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. Resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic level of the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 turns ON. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic level of the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6 is HIGH, the photocoupler PIC72 turns OFF. The emitter terminal of photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor PR80, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of dispensing control MPU 952a via non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC80C) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it). When photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 changes, and this signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, photocoupler PIC72 turns ON, pulling the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 to ground (GND), resulting in a BRQ signal with a logic LOW, which is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, photocoupler PIC72 turns OFF, pulling the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 to +5V by pull-up resistor PR80, resulting in a BRQ signal with a logic HI, which is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from CR unit 6.

The EXS signal, which indicates the start or end of a single dispensing operation from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is output to the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is input from the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the cathode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR81. The anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR82, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, and when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC73 turns OFF. The emitter terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL within the CR unit 6 by pull-up resistor PR83 via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 changes, and this signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI, photocoupler PIC73 turns OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic of EXS, which has become HI, is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

The PRDY signal, which indicates whether or not the dispensing operation for dispensing balls is possible or impossible, is input from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR84. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR85, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, and when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC74 turns OFF. The emitter terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL within the CR unit 6 by pull-up resistor PR86 via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 changes, and this signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HIGH, photocoupler PIC74 turns OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by pull-up resistor PR86, and the PRDY with a logic HIGH is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU]
Next, we will explain the various input/output signals input and output from the input/output terminals of the various input/output ports of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data reception signal via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. Meanwhile, the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, transmits the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data transmission signal to the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and the main dispensing serial data transmission signal is sent from the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

In addition to the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, dispensing power outage warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), each input terminal of the specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a also receives, for example, a main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the above-mentioned main dispensing serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the dispensing control input circuit 952b, and detection signals from the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, rotation detection sensor 840, etc., shown in Figure 70, are also input via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and the EXS signal and PRDY signal are output from the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da, and the dispensing motor drive signal is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function In addition to outputting a dispensing motor drive signal from the output circuit 952ca to the dispensing motor 834 via the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d, for example, a payer ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been successfully received is output to the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which then outputs the payer ACK signal to the main control board 1310, or a drive signal for the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which then outputs a drive signal to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the dispensing control board 951 and the main control board 1310, and various output signals from the dispensing control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be explained with reference to Figure 85.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board]
The dispensing control board 951 exchanges various input and output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in Figure 85 (a), the dispensing control board 951 outputs the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

Meanwhile, in addition to the above-mentioned main payout serial data reception signal, main payout ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 also receives input from the main control board 1310 of game information signals related to the game, such as jackpot information output signals such as the main prize ball count information output signal, 15-round jackpot information output signal, and 2-round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output signal, and starting gate winning information output signal, as well as payout power outage warning signals. These input signals are pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the outer end frame door opening information output signal described above, other game information signals are output to the external terminal board 784, such as a prize ball count information output signal output each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10, a main prize ball count information output signal, jackpot information output signals for a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time-saving information output signal, and a starting hole winning information output signal. These output signals are pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistors on the external terminal board 784. In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal board 784 from the payout control board 951 side: an outer end frame door opening information output signal, and a prize ball number information output signal; and eight signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310 side: a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time-reduction information output signal, and a starting port winning information output signal.

The signal output from external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in the gaming facility (hall), not shown, which monitors the player's play. When a 15-round jackpot information output signal or a 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as a single jackpot information output signal, the hall computer calculates the number of jackpots on pachinko machine 1 by adding together the number of jackpots with two rounds (number of 2-round jackpots) and the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of 15-round jackpots). Therefore, the hall computer cannot determine the number of 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots from the total number of jackpots, and therefore cannot determine whether the majority of jackpots on pachinko machine 1 are 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is located above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred, displayed on this data counter, to decide whether or not to play.

However, the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred displayed on the data counter may actually be biased towards the number of two-round jackpots, so even when a player starts playing, they may only get two-round jackpots and never get a 15-round jackpot. In this way, while the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred displayed on the data counter can give players a sense of hope, it may also stimulate their gambling instincts more than necessary.

In this embodiment, a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal are output separately to the hall computer as jackpot information output signals, allowing the hall computer to accurately determine the number of 2-round jackpots and the number of 15-round jackpots. Therefore, the hall computer can determine whether the jackpots that have actually occurred more frequently on pachinko machine 1 are 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots, and the data counter can display the number of 15-round jackpots and 2-round jackpots separately, or just the number of 15-round jackpots, as the number of jackpot game states, without unnecessarily encouraging the player's gambling spirit.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer from the time a 2-round jackpot occurs until its end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer from the time a 15-round jackpot occurs until its end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, another method can be used in which, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the gaming facility (hall) will be described with reference to Figure 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and its rear side is covered by an external terminal board cover 786. Figure 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 the outer end frame door opening information output signal, prize ball count information output signal, main prize ball count information output signal, jackpot information output signals including a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output signal, and starting port winning information output signal when they are input from the payout control board 951.

To briefly explain these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 shown in Figure 1 are open, a state that does not occur during normal gameplay; the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in Figure 5 reaches 10; the main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various prize openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general prize openings 2001, 2201, and the large prize opening 2005 shown in Figure 8 reaches 10; the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that a 15-round jackpot has occurred; The probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot has occurred, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal indicating that a probability fluctuation is occurring, the special pattern display information output signal is a signal indicating that the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the display of the changing special patterns, the normal pattern display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal pattern display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the display of the changing normal patterns, the time-saving information output signal is a signal indicating that a time-saving state is occurring, and the start port winning information output signal is a signal indicating that each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8.

As shown in FIG. 86, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row on the external terminal board 784. Output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball count information output signal. As described above, the prize ball count information output signal is a signal that indicates that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In this embodiment, the signal is output from output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball count information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 has paid out 10 game balls each time the prize ball count information output signal is input, and can count the number of game balls paid out to determine the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer frame door open information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open, a state that does not occur during normal gameplay. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 are open. When the outer frame door open information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 are open while the outer frame door open information output signal is being input.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the variable display of special symbols has ended (stopped) on the first special symbol display 1403 and second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT3 for 0.128 seconds when the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 and second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 has ended (stopped). When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is able to determine that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1, and is able to count the number of times this has occurred and determine the total number of times the variable display of the special symbol has been displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

Output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start port winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal that notifies the player each time a gaming ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8. In this embodiment, the start port winning information output signal is output from output terminal PT4 for 0.128 seconds each time a gaming ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the start port winning information output signal from external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a gaming ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of pachinko machine 1 each time the start port winning information output signal is input, and can count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to determine the total number of gaming balls that have entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of pachinko machine 1.

Output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from output terminal PT5 while a 15-round jackpot is occurring. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a 15-round jackpot is occurring in pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a 15-round jackpot has occurred in pachinko machine 1.

Output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a two-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from output terminal PT6 while a two-round jackpot is occurring. When the two-round jackpot information output signal from external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a two-round jackpot is occurring in pachinko machine 1 while the two-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a two-round jackpot has occurred in pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has finished (stopped) displaying the variable normal symbol. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display information output signal is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds when the variable normal symbol display in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 has finished (stopped). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the variable normal symbol display in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 has finished (stopped), and can count the number of times this has happened to determine the total number of times the variable normal symbol display has been displayed in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

Output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time-shortening information output signal. As described above, the time-shortening information output signal is a signal that indicates that a time-shortening state is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from output terminal PT8 while the time-shortening state is occurring. When the time-shortening information output signal from external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a time-shortening state has occurred in pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times the time-shortening information output signal has been input to determine the total number of times the time-shortening state has occurred in pachinko machine 1.

Output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from output terminal PT9 while a probability fluctuation is occurring. When the probability fluctuation information output signal from external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a probability fluctuation is occurring in pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times the probability fluctuation information output signal has been input to determine the total number of times a probability fluctuation has occurred in pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize ball count information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball count information output signal is a signal that notifies the user whenever the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered various prize slots, such as the first start slot 2002, the second start slot 2004, the general prize slots 2001 and 2201, and the large prize slot 2005 shown in FIG. 8, reaches 10. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. When the main prize ball count information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the pachinko machine 1 is scheduled to pay out 10 game balls each time the main prize ball count information output signal is input, and can count the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out to determine the total number of game balls scheduled to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, for example, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various prize ports, such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general prize port 2001, 2201, and the large prize port 2005, reaches 20 or more balls and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output at intervals of 0.128 seconds so as not to be one continuous signal for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2) seconds.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 on the external terminal board 784, output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the dispensing control board 951 side, while output terminals PT3 to PT10 are arranged so that various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are output via (pass through) the dispensing control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting wiring with connectors colored the same to each of these output terminals PT1 to PT10, it is possible to prevent the incorrect electrical connection of other wiring. In order to prevent the various signals output on the payout control board 951 from being mixed with the various signals output on the main control board 1310, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 to the hall computer are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 to the hall computer are arranged in a row from the left center of the external terminal board 784 to the right side. This also prevents the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 to the hall computer and the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 to the hall computer from being mistakenly electrically connected.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output from the payout control board 951 and the main prize ball number information output signal output from the main control board 1310 are each configured to be transmitted to the hall computer from the external terminal board 784. This means that, for example, if some kind of trouble in the pachinko island equipment prevents game balls from being supplied from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1, and the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 become scarce, and a 15-round jackpot occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to pay out as prize balls will be insufficient, and payout will not be possible (also, for example, if a ball jam or ball jam occurs in the payout device 830, game balls will not be payout unless this can be resolved). As a result, the prize ball count information output signal output from the payout control board 951, as described above, is a signal that indicates that the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. Therefore, when game balls can no longer be paid out, the payout control board 951 is no longer able to output the prize ball count information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. When game balls are no longer being paid out, the player will call a hall staff member or the like. The hall staff member, for example, will check the hose-like supply nozzle that supplies game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the location of the ball jam (or, for example, identify the location of a ball jam or ball breakage that has occurred within the payout device 830) and resolve the issue, thereby restoring the game balls to a state where they can be paid out.

However, even when a hall staff member or the like is performing their work, game play continues using the main control board 1310. Therefore, when the hall staff member or the like returns the machine to a state in which game balls are paid out after the 15-round jackpot has ended, the payout control board 951 will pay out unpaid game balls one after another. Even though the 15-round jackpot has ended and no further 15-round jackpots have occurred, the payout control board 951 will output a prize ball number information output signal informing the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 that the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10. As a result, even though no 15-round jackpots have occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out, which creates a problem in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between the game status of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 to actually pay out prize balls, that is, as a signal separate from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal as a signal to inform the hall computer that each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various prize winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general prize winning ports 2001, 2201, and the large prize winning port 2005 shown in Figure 8 reaches 10 balls, and transmits this signal to the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784. As a result, even if the above-mentioned problems occur (such as ball clogging in the refill nozzle, or ball clogging or ball breakage in the payout device 830), the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls to be paid out in this gaming state can be accurately communicated to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls to be paid out in this gaming state.

[12. Circuit of the performance display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the performance display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 will be explained with reference to Figure 87. As described above, the performance display drive board 4450 is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 that is attached to the right side of the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed within the tray unit 320, and is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460. Figure 87 is a circuit diagram showing the liquid crystal module circuit that draws the display area of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
The liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, as shown in Figure 87.

When serial signals (serial data) using a differential system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. are transmitted as positive and negative signals from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74, the LCD module circuit 450V inputs these signals to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively. This common mode choke coil SDL0 separates noise from the positive and negative signals. The noise-separated positive and negative signals are input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively, of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. Resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) that prevents the positive and negative signals from reflecting at the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively, preventing distortion of the serial signal.

The door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores the three video signals (red, green, and blue video signals) and the three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal) based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals (i.e., restores the signals to the parallel signals before they were serialized). As mentioned above, the red, green, and blue video signals output from channel CH2 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a are each 8 bits, but the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, so the red, green, and blue video signals are the most significant 6 bits of each video signal.

In addition to the signal from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, the LCD module circuit 450V is also configured to receive two signals, which are obtained by differentiating the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. The forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to connect the circuit to transmit these two signals when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, as described above, but to connect the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, and the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the LCD module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the LCD module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f transmits the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the serial signal (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differentiating circuit 1512e are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differentiating circuit 1512e are input, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that this is a request to output a LOCKN signal, and outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal (described later) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510.

As mentioned above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. In this embodiment, the LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differentiating circuit 1512e, but has a completely different data format structure from the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the differential serial signal (serial data) of the above-mentioned "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the signal is not output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and determines that the data is abnormal, and outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0's function of outputting a LOCKN signal when it determines that the received data is abnormal is utilized to forcibly output a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal described below. In order to do this, LOCKN signal output request data, which has a different data format than the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, is output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby making it possible to check whether the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 device is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3V generated by the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x shown in Figure 76, and the GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND terminal, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit. A capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for this digital circuit, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the VDD terminal.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output. A capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for this TTL output, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the VDDO terminal.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. A capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between this terminal and the LVDSGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the LVDS input, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit. A capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between this terminal and the PLLGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the PLL circuit, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the PLLVDD terminal.

When +3.3V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation, but when the supply of +3.3V is stopped, the logic becomes LOW, indicating power-down. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to one end of varistor SDZ0, the other end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage on the +3.3V power line supplied via resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal is a terminal used to specify whether the transmission of various signals output from the various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal (described below) is a rising edge (logic transition from LOW to HIGH) or a falling edge (logic transition from HIGH to LOW). In this embodiment, as described above, a falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. Incidentally, a rising edge can be specified by connecting the EDGE terminal to +3.3V.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to allow output from the various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described below. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the OE terminal is grounded to always enable output. Incidentally, connecting the OE terminal to +3.3V disables output.

The MODE0 and MODE1 terminals are terminals for selecting the operating mode, and can be selected by grounding both. There are two operating modes: normal mode and handshake mode. In normal mode, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores a parallel signal consisting of three video signals (18-bit video signals) - red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal - and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals) - horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal - based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. In handshake mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver. This handshake mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, if the parallel signals restored by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals are abnormal data that makes it difficult to display on the door frame side performance display device 460, the IC will automatically switch from normal mode to handshake mode and output a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and then input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is met based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to notify the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of this fact. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d transmits a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for restoring the connection with the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. Receiving this predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) at the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 facilitates the restoration of the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is pre-stored in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 may be electrically connected directly via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is a terminal that outputs a request to send a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor on the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and then input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are terminals that output three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In this embodiment, the restored three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal) are not used, and therefore the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are left unconnected.

The DE terminal outputs a DE signal that indicates whether the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and the data output from the data output terminals D0 to D17 (described below) are valid or invalid. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs the clock signal DCLK generated by the PLL circuit built into the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

Terminals D0 to D17 are data output terminals that output three video signals (18-bit video signals): a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of these blue video signals B0 to B5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via ladder resistor SDRA0, which is a damping resistor. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of these green video signals G0 to G5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via ladder resistor SDRA1, which is a damping resistor. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of these red video signals R0 to R5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via ladder resistor SDRA2, which is a damping resistor.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, performance display drive board 4450, and door frame side performance display device 460 are electrically connected and share the same ground.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Figures 88 to 91. Figure 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, Figure 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, Figure 90 is a table showing a continuation of the various commands transmitted from the main control board in Figure 89 to the peripheral control board, and Figure 91 is a table showing an example of various commands received from the payout control board by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by the various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and the various commands received from the payout control board by the main control board.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the dispensing control board]
When detection signals are input from various winning switches such as the general winning port sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in Fig. 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control board based on these detection signals to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls. This prize ball command is a command with a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (a device that communicates with the pachinko machine 1 and drives the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to pay out game balls as loan balls onto the storage trays, i.e., the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322) are electrically connected (such pachinko machines are referred to as "CR machines"), as shown in FIG. 88(a), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number), with command 10H specifying one prize ball, command 11H specifying two prize balls, ..., and command 1EH specifying fifteen prize balls. The payout control board 951 controls the drive of the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls according to the specified number of prize balls.

Furthermore, when a pachinko machine 1 and a ball dispensing machine (a device that dispenses game balls directly as loan balls into the storage trays, upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) are installed adjacent to each other in an amusement hall (hall) and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball dispensing machine are electrically connected (such pachinko machines are called "general machines"), as shown in Figure 88 (b), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 20H to 2EH, with command 20H specifying one prize ball, command 21H specifying two prize balls, ... and command 2EH specifying 15 prize balls. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to dispense game balls according to the specified number of prize balls.

As shown in Figure 88 (c), command 30H is provided as a common command for both CR machines and general machines, and command 30H specifies a self-check. If an ACK signal, which is output as confirmation of receipt of the command, is not input from the receiving side within a predetermined period after sending the command, the sending side sends command 30H and checks whether an ACK signal is input to confirm the connection status. In the case of a CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection status with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a memory capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in Figures 89 and 90, are composed of a status indicating the type of command having a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a mode indicating the variation of the effect having a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in Figures 89 and 90, the various commands are categorized into special chart 1 synchronization related, special chart 2 synchronization related, jackpot related, power on, normal chart synchronization related, normal electric role related, notification display, status display, and others.

[13-2-1. Special Chart 1 Synchronization Performance Related]
The special symbol 1 synchronization performance related commands are based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the classification is made up of commands named "Start special symbol 1 synchronization performance,""Specify special symbol 1,""End special symbol 1 synchronization performance," and "Specify state at time of change," which relate to the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "A*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The Special Symbol 1 Synchronization Presentation Start Command instructs the start of the Special Symbol Synchronization Presentation with the presentation pattern specified by the mode, the Special Symbol 1 Designation Command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the Special Symbol 1 Synchronization Presentation End Command instructs the end of the Special Symbol 1 Synchronization Presentation, and the Variable State Designation Command instructs the probability and time-saving state. The probability and time-saving state consist of a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and time-saving state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and not time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and not time-saving state (the low-probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set higher than in the low probability state (normal game state), and the time-saving state, for example, shortens the time for which the normal pattern is displayed variably by the normal pattern display device 1402 shown in FIG. 10 compared to the non-time-saving state (normal game state) and stops and displays the normal lottery result in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, so that the number of times the normal lottery result is stopped and displayed by the normal lottery described later in a predetermined time is increased compared to the non-time-saving state, and further, the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. This state allows players to have a chance to win a lottery for a special symbol without losing their balls by lengthening the period during which game balls are allowed to enter the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8 compared to the non-time-shortened state (normal game state) and increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls into the second starting opening 2004 (in other words, compared to the non-time-shortened state, there are more decisions to make about whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and if the pair of movable pieces are opened and closed, the period for the opening and closing movement of the pair of movable pieces is longer, thereby increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls into the second starting opening 2004).

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is sent when special symbol 1 begins to change, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization effect starts, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect end command is sent when the special symbol 1 change time has elapsed (when special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the change state designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol win/loss information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special Chart 2 Synchronization Performance Related]
The special symbol 2 synchronization performance related commands are based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the classification is made up of commands named "Start special symbol 2 synchronization performance,""Specify special symbol 2," and "End special symbol 2 synchronization performance," which relate to the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "B*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special symbol synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, the special symbol 2 designation command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, and the special symbol 2 synchronization effect end instructs the end of the special symbol 2 synchronization effect.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is sent when the special symbol 2 begins to change, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 2 synchronization effect starts, and the special symbol 2 synchronization effect end command is sent when the special symbol 2 change time has elapsed (when special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot-related]
As shown in Figure 89, the jackpot-related category consists of commands named jackpot opening, large prize slot 1 opening Nth time display, large prize slot 1 closing display, large prize slot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot pattern display, small prize opening, small prize opening display, small prize count display, and small prize ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, the display large prize opening 1 Nth command instructs the start of large prize opening 1 being open for rounds 1 to 16 (the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8 is opening or has started to open for the Nth round), the display large prize opening 1 closing command instructs the start of large prize opening 1 being closed between rounds (the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is closing or has started to close between rounds), the display large prize opening 1 count command notifies that the number of game balls counted from 0 to 10 has been counted (the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005 as detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69), the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the display jackpot symbol command instructs the display of jackpot symbol information.

The small win opening command instructs the start of a small win opening, the small win opening display command instructs the start of a small win opening (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opening or has started to open during a small win), the small win count display command instructs the large prize opening entry presentation during a small win (a presentation that occurs when a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during a small win), and the small win ending command instructs the start of a small win ending.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the jackpot opening command is sent when the jackpot opening begins, the large prize opening 1 Nth opening display command is sent when large prize opening 1 is opened in rounds 1 to 16 (when large prize opening 2005 of starting opening unit 2100 opens in the Nth round), the large prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when large prize opening 1 is closed (when large prize opening 2005 of starting opening unit 2100 starts closing), and the large prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when large prize opening 1 is closed (when large prize opening 2005 of starting opening unit 2100 starts closing). The count display command is sent when large prize opening 1 opens and when the count changes to large prize opening 1 (when large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 opens and when a game ball that has entered large prize opening 2005 is detected by count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending begins, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the large prize opening opens (when large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 opens).

The small win opening command is sent when the small win opening begins, the small win opening display command is sent when the small win opens (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 opens during a small win), the small win count display command is sent when the ball enters the large prize opening during a small win (when the game ball that entered the large prize opening 2005 during a small win is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the small win ending command is sent when the small win ending begins. Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
The power-on category consists of commands named "Power-on state" and "Main control return destination at power-on," as shown in Figure 89. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command consists of information instructing the user to clear the RAM when the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 shown in Figure 70 is operated to perform a RAM clear when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), information instructing which state (probability and time-saving state) the user will return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), from the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating so-called max type, mid type, and sweet type machines, specifies which copyright of the work it refers to and what game specifications it has (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state is reached, or a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of special symbol fluctuations (e.g., 30 or 70 times) (so-called ST machine)). In other words, the model code information of a pachinko machine is primarily composed of a series code that identifies the machine type (max type, mid type, or sweet type); a copyright code that identifies the copyright of the work; and a game specification code that specifies the game specifications (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state is reached, or a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of special symbol fluctuations (ST machine)).

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on is primarily composed of information indicating the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in Figure 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in Figure 69.

The power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent when the main control board is powered on (this includes not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or recovers from a power outage or momentary power outage, the main control side power-on processing described below is executed, and the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-5. General Illustrated Synchronous Performance Related]
The normal symbol synchronization performance related commands are based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the command classification is made up of commands named "normal symbol synchronization performance start,""normal symbol designation,""normal symbol synchronization performance end," and "variable state designation," which relate to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "E*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal symbol synchronization effect start command instructs the start of a normal symbol synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified by the mode, the normal symbol designation command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the normal symbol synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the variable state designation command instructs the probability and time-saving state. As mentioned above, the probability and time-saving state consist of a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and time-saving state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and not time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and not time-saving state (the low-probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state).

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal symbol synchronization start command is sent when normal symbol 1 begins to change, the normal symbol designation command is sent immediately after the normal symbol synchronization start command, the normal symbol synchronization end command is sent when the normal symbol change time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the change state designation command is sent immediately after the normal symbol win/loss information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Regular Electric Role Performance Related]
The normal electric role performance-related commands relate to the pair of movable pieces shown in Fig. 8 that are opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in Fig. 69, and are divided into commands named "normal winning opening,""normal electric opening display," and "normal winning ending," as shown in Fig. 89. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal map opening command instructs the start of normal map opening, the normal power release display command instructs the start of normal power release (when the pair of movable pieces are widened to the left and right by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107, or when they are about to be widened), and the normal map ending command instructs the start of normal map ending.

The timing for sending these various commands is as follows: the normal map opening command is sent when normal map opening begins, the normal power release display command is sent when normal power is released (when the pair of movable pieces opens left and right due to the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107), and the normal map ending command is sent when normal map ending begins. Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in Figure 90, the notification display categories consist of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, open/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H" (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command instructs the start of a winning abnormality alert when a ball enters the large winning slot other than during a jackpot (when the condition device is operating) (when a gaming ball enters the large winning slot 2005 of the start slot unit 2100 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 even when there is no jackpot). The connection abnormality display command instructs the start of a connection abnormality alert if, for example, there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The open circuit/short circuit abnormality display command instructs the start of a open circuit/short circuit abnormality display if, for example, there is an open circuit/short circuit in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the first start slot sensor 4002, second start slot sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command instructs the start of a magnetic detection switch abnormality alert if an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

The door open command instructs a door open notification when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the door frame close command instructs an end of the door open notification when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. On the other hand, the main frame open command instructs a main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main frame open switch 619 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the main frame close command instructs an end of the main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the winning error display command is sent when a prize is won in the large prize slot other than during a jackpot (when the condition device is operating); the connection error display command is sent when the payout control board 951 does not receive an ACK response (ACK signal) when sending a command from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951; the open/short circuit error display command is sent when any of the first start slot sensor 4002, second start slot sensor 4004, or count sensor 4005 is in an open or short state; and the magnetic detection switch error display command is sent when an error is detected in the magnetic detection sensor 4024. The door open command is sent when a door open state is detected (when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618); and the door frame close command is sent when a door closed state is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main frame open command is sent when the main frame is detected as open (when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619), and the main frame close command is sent when the main frame is detected as closed (when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in Figure 90, the status display is divided into commands named Frame Status 1 Command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), Error Cancel Navigation Command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), and Frame Status 2 Command. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The Slot Status 1 command, Error Clearance Navigation command, and Slot Status 2 command are each commands with a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the dispensing control board 951; a detailed description of these will be provided below. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the Slot Status 1 command, Error Clearance Navigation command, and Slot Status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it sets "7*H" as the status, as shown in FIG. 90, and sets the received command as the mode. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the Slot Status 1 command, Error Clearance Navigation command, and Slot Status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it adds the additional information "7*H" to the received commands, thereby converting them into commands with a memory capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted Frame Status 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the frame status changes, and when error clearance navigation is performed, the Error Clear Navigation command is sent when error clearance navigation is performed, and the Frame Status 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these formatted Frame Status 1 command, Error Clear Navigation command, and Frame Status 2 command are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test-related]
The test-related section is made up of various commands named "test," as shown in Fig. 90. These test commands are assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H" (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, tests of various boards such as the peripheral control unit 1511, LCD display control unit 1512, lamp drive board 4170, motor drive board 4180, and frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72).

The test command is sent when the RAM is cleared when the main control board is powered on and at times other than RAM clearing. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when recovering from a power outage or momentary power outage, and the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described below is executed, and the test command is sent in the peripheral control board command sending processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-10. Other]
Other categories, as shown in Figure 90, are made up of commands named "Starting hole winning", "Specify variable shortening operation end", "Specify high probability end", "Special symbol 1 memory", "Special symbol 2 memory", "Normal symbol memory", "Special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect", and "Special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect". These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start port entry command instructs the start of the start port entry effect, and instructs the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 based on a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004. The fluctuation reduction operation end command instructs the transition from the fluctuation reduction operation state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state, and instructs the transition from the fluctuation reduction operation state to the high probability end state. The designation command instructs a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state, the special symbol 1 storage command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbol 1 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. 8), and the special symbol 2 storage command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbol 2 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variation of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The special symbol memory command conveys the number of reserved balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1405, the normal symbol memory command conveys 0 to 4 reserved normal symbol 1 (the number of reserved balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8), and the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance command conveys the number of reserved special symbol 1 that has not yet been used to display the variation of the normal symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400). This command instructs the start of a pre-reading effect that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the first special pattern display 1403 based on the reserved special pattern 1 before it is used to display the changing patterns, and the special pattern 2 storage pre-reading effect command instructs the start of a pre-reading effect that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the second special pattern display 1405 based on the reserved special pattern 2 before the reserved special pattern 2 is used to display the changing special patterns on the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the start gate entry command is sent when the game ball enters the start gate (when the game ball enters the first start gate 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second start gate 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 4004), mainly to notify the fact by voice from the lower speaker 921 shown in Figure 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in Figure 2, and the fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation has been confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been used up (after the miss stop period has passed), and is sent as a high probability end designation command. The set command is sent at the end of the stop period after the confirmation of the variation when the number of high probability times in the case of "high probability N times" has been consumed (after the non-win stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 activation changes (when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there are reserved numbers that have not yet been used for the display of the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used for the display of the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the reserved number decreases). The pattern 2 memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 activation changes (when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and there are reserved numbers that have not yet been used to display the variation of the special pattern on the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and when another game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved number increases, or when that reserved number is used to display the variation of the special pattern on the second special pattern display 1405 and the reserved number decreases), and the normal pattern memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal pattern 1 activation changes (when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and there are reserved numbers that have not yet been used to display the variation of the special pattern on the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and when another game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved number increases, or when that reserved number is used to display the variation of the special pattern on the second special pattern display 1405 and the reserved number decreases). When there are reserved balls in 402 that have not yet been used to display the normal symbol variations, and a gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 and the reserved number increases, or when that reserved number is used to display the normal symbol variations on normal symbol display 1402 and the reserved number decreases), a special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 activation increases (when a gaming ball enters first start port 2002 and the reserved number increases), and a special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 activation increases (when a gaming ball enters second start port 2004 and the reserved number increases). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

As mentioned above, the start hole entry command is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 primarily to notify the player of the start hole entry (when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on a detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004) via audio. However, how the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 uses the start hole entry command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is designed to notify the player of the start hole entry command via audio from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, as well as to monitor for fraudulent activity. In contrast, some other pachinko machines are designed so that the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start hole entry command without notifying the player of the start hole entry via audio from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board]
Next, we will explain the various commands received by the main control board 1310 from the dispensing control board 951.

As shown in Figure 91, the various commands from the dispensing control board 951 are classified into commands named Slot Status 1, Error Clearance Navigation, and Slot Status 2, with the order of priority set as Slot Status 1, Error Clearance Navigation, and Slot Status 2.

The Frame Status 1 command (equivalent to the Error Occurrence command) has the following statuses: out of bulb, full, 50 or more bulbs in stock, connection error, and no CR connected. When out of bulb, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) is set to 1, when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1, when 50 or more bulbs are in stock, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1, when connection error occurs, bit 3 (B3) is set to 1, and when no CR is connected, bit 4 (B4) is set to 1. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame Status 1 command have B5 set to 1, B6 set to 0, and B7 set to 0.

The error release navigation command (equivalent to the error release command) is available for ball detection, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. For ball detection, a value of 1 is set to bit 2 (B2), for payout detection sensor error, a value of 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and for retry error, a value of 1 is set to bit 4 (B4). Here, a "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842 shown in Figure 70. A "retry error" indicates that inconsistent payouts of game balls have been repeatedly performed through retry operations. Bits (B0), (B1), and bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command are set to 0 for B0, 0 for B1, 0 for B5, 1 for B6, and 0 for B7.

The Frame State 2 command includes a "ball removed" command, during which bit 0 (B0) is set to a value of 1. Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command are set as follows: B1 is set to a value of 0, B2 is set to a value of 0, B3 is set to a value of 0, B4 is set to a value of 0, B5 is set to a value of 1, B6 is set to a value of 1, and B7 is set to a value of 0.

The timing for sending these various commands is as follows: Slot Status 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the slot status changes, and when error resolution navigation is performed; Error Resolution Navigation command is sent when error resolution navigation is performed; and Slot Status 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the slot status changes. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the command sending process of step S558 in the dispensing control unit main processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 69 in accordance with the progress of play on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 92 to Fig. 94. Fig. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Fig. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on process in Fig. 92, and Fig. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
The various random numbers used for game control include a random number for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, a random number for determining reach (missed reach) when a jackpot game state is not generated, a random number for determining a variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. 69, and a random number for determining whether or not to generate a reach (missed reach) when a jackpot game state is not generated. The random numbers provided are a random number for a jackpot pattern used to determine the jackpot pattern derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405, a random number for determining an initial value for the jackpot pattern used to determine the initial value of the random number for the jackpot pattern, a random number for a small win pattern used to determine the small win pattern derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405 when a small win game state is generated, and a random number for determining an initial value for the small win pattern used to determine the initial value of the random number for the small win pattern. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern has been hit, which are used to determine whether or not to open or close the movable piece shown in Figure 8, random numbers for determining the initial value of the random number for determining whether a normal pattern has been hit, and random numbers for determining the normal pattern's variable display pattern, which are used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal pattern that is displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402 shown in Figure 69.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, the random numbers used to determine jackpots are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the random number used to determine a jackpot is updated directly by hardware using the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in Figure 69. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in Figure 77). Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. This high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time it obtains the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as the random number for determining a jackpot.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol has won. Once the counter has finished counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won, from the minimum to the maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol has won is updated. This type of counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by treating the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 as a numerical value during the main control side power-on processing described below does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (when power is turned off), and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and executes an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining a normal symbol win based on this retrieved ID code, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for determining a normal symbol win is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number used to determine the initial value for determining a normal symbol win is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two security measures: a first security measure in which the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when it is stored in non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that produced the main control MPU 1310a; and a second security measure in which the same fixed value is derived based on the ID code by executing an initial value derivation process when the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared.

Here, we explain the advantages of extracting an ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using it as a random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit. For example, even if someone attempting to fraudulently acquire a prize ball were to somehow obtain and disassemble a gaming board 5, illegally obtain an ID code pre-stored in the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and determine the timing at which the counter value updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit matches the normal symbol hit determination value, this ID code would be uniquely coded for individual identification and would be completely different from the ID codes pre-stored in the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' of other gaming boards 5'. In other words, the timing at which the counter value updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit matches the normal symbol hit determination value on the other gaming boards 5' would also be completely different from that on the obtained gaming board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired gaming board 5 is completely useless on other gaming boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1', and therefore even if momentary power outages are caused at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and gaming balls are allowed to pass through the gate section 2003 shown in Figure 8 at those predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close the movable piece shown in Figure 8 and create a gaming state in which gaming balls can be received by the second starting opening 2004.

[14-2. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) currently in use, or an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when a subroutine is terminated and the program returns to the main routine; the stack pointer advances each time the stack is added.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figures 92 and 93. When this main control side power-on processing begins, the main control program sets RAM access permissions under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

Following step S10, the main control program sets the initial value and startup settings for the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in Figure 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set the initial value for the main control built-in WDT 1310af, which monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a timer setting value is set in the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, starting the time measurement until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts timing, and if a timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control built-in WDT 1310af will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and starts timing, if a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timed time by the main control built-in WDT 1310af will be cleared and timing will start again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af before the time set by the timer setting value is reached and then restarting the timekeeping, it is possible to monitor whether the main control MPU 1310a (system) is operating normally.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clear process (step S14). This power outage clear process first begins outputting a power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in Figure 78. This power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between +24V and a reference voltage, or between +12V and a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. If no power outage or momentary power outage has occurred, the comparison result becomes HIGH and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. If a power outage or momentary power outage has occurred, the comparison result becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

The power failure clear process begins by starting the output of a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, which then starts outputting the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of this D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input, with its logic set to LOW, from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set again, to invert the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and output it from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and monitor the signal from the 1Q terminal.

Next, in the power clear process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately between power-on and reaching the specified voltage. On the other hand, during a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. Similarly, during the period from power-on to reaching the specified voltage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, wait timer processing waits after power-on until the voltage exceeds the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). The determination of whether a power outage warning signal has been input is based on the signal output as a power outage warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 described above.

If, after power-on, the voltage exceeds the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes, but no power outage warning signal is received, the main control program stops outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Here, the power outage clear signal is input, with its logic set to HIGH, from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to a latched state. When the logic of the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and latches the input state, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power outage warning signal from its output terminal, the 1Q terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program enters a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on (game-side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 has been operated (step S16). To make this determination, the main control program determines whether an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 has been input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, if the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, the main control program determines that this does not instruct RAM clearing and determines that the operation switch 954 has not been operated. On the other hand, if the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, the program determines that this instructs RAM clearing and determines that the operation switch 954 has been operated.

In step S16, if the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S18). On the other hand, if the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20). That is, the main control program makes it possible to execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit)) for a predetermined period of time after power is turned on (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase game information related to gameplay, such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls, stored in the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is set to a value of 1 when game information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when game information is not to be erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). This wait time standby process waits until the system shown in FIG. 72, which controls the drawing of the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460 using the LCD display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510, starts up (boots). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s).

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. If the determination in step S24 indicates that a power outage warning signal has been input, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and making it impossible to restart timekeeping, resulting in the main control MPU 1310a being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. The main control program then performs this main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that the fact that the determination in step S24 is made following the wait time standby processing in step S22 will be explained in detail later.

If it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when game information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when game information is not to be erased. If the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when game information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S28, the main control program determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (power-off processing) described below (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG indicates whether game backup information, such as game play information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, was stored in the main control's internal RAM during the main control side power-off processing described below. It is set to 1 when the main control side power-off processing has been completed successfully, and to 0 when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed successfully. The calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30, which occur when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after production for inspection during the inspection process on the main control board 1310 production line, will be described in detail below.

When the backup flag BK-FLG is set to 1 in step S32, i.e., when the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control's internal RAM as the time of power restoration (step S34). This setting is performed by reading power restoration information from the ROM (i.e., the main control's internal ROM) built into the main control MPU 1310a and setting this power restoration information in the work area of the main control's internal RAM. This reads game information from the game backup information and stores various commands corresponding to this game information in a specified memory area of the main control's internal RAM. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, but also the state in which high-frequency waves from fraudulent means (for example, a high-frequency output device hidden in the hem of a cheater's arm) are irradiated onto the main control board 1310, causing the main control MPU 1310a to reset and then return to normal.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various subsequent processes will change the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. Therefore, unless the main control power failure process described below is successfully completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1, the entire main control internal RAM will be cleared, as described below.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not set to 0 (is set to 1) in step S26, i.e., when game information is erased, or if the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30, or if the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to 1 (is set to 0) in step S32, i.e., when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed successfully, the main control program clears the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing in response to the input of a detection signal accompanying the operation of the above-mentioned operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program does this by writing the value 0 to the main control's built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control's built-in ROM as the initial value. Furthermore, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clearing and game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code previously stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining a normal symbol win based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value for determining a normal symbol win, which is used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining a normal symbol win described above.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control's built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt period when the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, this is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, the program sets the communication speed and whether or not parity is enabled in the transmit serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receive channels and transmit channels) for the dispensing control board 951 and the serial input/output ports (receive channels and transmit channels) for the peripheral control board 1510), and also sets the transmit serial port control register to initialize the transmit circuit and enable transmission.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing laboratory initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control program performs startup settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in Figure 69 (step S48). Here, the main control program performs settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers in the hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU 1310a to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, among various random numbers related to the game, by hardware, and also sets the hardware random number setting register to start the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is started by these settings, it rapidly extracts other values within a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). After extracting all values within the predetermined numerical range, it again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an when this latch signal is input from a hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets this acquired random number as the random number for determining a jackpot.

Following step S48, the main control program reserves commands to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the main control's internal RAM's work area in step S34, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command, classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89, are created to notify the user that power has been turned on (power has been restored). These commands are then stored in the main control's internal RAM's transmission information storage area as transmission information. In some cases, the main control's internal RAM's transmission information storage area contains various commands corresponding to game information read from game backup information in the main control's internal RAM's work area in step S34. In such cases, after the various commands corresponding to the game information have been sent, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command are sent. These commands are sent during the main control's timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The reservation of commands to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described in detail later.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission settings (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt processing, described below, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, once a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, i.e., once the main control processing on the main control side has begun, the main control program will restrict the execution of the gaming control side RAM clear processing triggered by the receipt of an error cancellation navigation command in response to the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to treat the detection signal input in response to the operation of the operation switch 954 as a release switch for canceling an error notification in response to an error that has occurred, by executing the RAM clear processing in response to the input of the error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined time period from power-on (gaming control side power-on operation control means), or by restricting the execution of the RAM clear processing even if the error cancellation navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (gaming control side normal operation control means). In other words, the operation switch 954 (error reset unit), which was originally intended to be used to reset an error that occurred during the payout operation, can instead function as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process to initiate initialization of the main control built-in RAM (which serves as the game memory unit) (and the payout control built-in RAM (which serves as the payout memory unit, described below) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on), and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, can function as an operation unit for resetting an error that occurred during the payout operation of the game balls.

Next, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

If no power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). This non-win/lose random number update process updates the random numbers for reach determination, variable display pattern, jackpot symbol initial value determination random number, and small win symbol initial value determination random number, as described above. In this way, the non-win/lose random number update process updates random numbers that are not related to win/lose determination (jackpot determination) by software. Note that the random numbers for normal symbol win determination, normal symbol win symbol initial value determination random number, and normal symbol variable display pattern random number, as described above, are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

Following step S56, the program returns to step S54, where the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the program performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and then repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main control side main process."

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program disables interrupts (step S58). This setting disables the main control timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the main control's built-in RAM, and protects game information from being overwritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing is performed as in the power outage clear processing of step S14, which started outputting the power outage clear signal. This allows the main control program to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program stops the drive signals being output to the start port solenoid 2107, attacca solenoid 2108, first special symbol display 1403, second special symbol display 1405, first special reserved number display 1404, second special reserved number display 1406, normal symbol display 1402, normal symbol memory display 1188, status display 1401, round display 1407, etc., as shown in FIG. 69 (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets a RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting disables access to the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit), thereby preventing updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af that was started in step S12, clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and making it impossible to restart timekeeping, resulting in the main control MPU 1310a being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. The main control program then performs this main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing."

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and then performs main control power-on processing when power is restored.

In step S30, the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is checked to see if it is correct, and then in step S32, it is checked to see if the main control's power-off processing was completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked to see if the game backup information was stored as a result of fraudulent activity.

Here, we will explain the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problem that occurs when the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby process in step S22 and subsequent processing is carried out.

As mentioned above, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Figure 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption. In other words, even if power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary or sudden power outage, the charge stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, allowing the main control side power outage processing to be completed within approximately 7 ms after power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power outage processing can be completed reliably even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off while the player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described below is being performed.

However, in an extremely rare event, when power is restored, the wait time standby process of step S22 starts counting the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, set to 2.5 seconds) until the system that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 by the LCD display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 72 starts (boots), and if a momentary power outage or power failure occurs just before this waiting time is reached, the charge stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a.However, within a period of approximately 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52.This causes the main control side timer interrupt processing described below to be performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing. As a result, when power is restored, the main control's power-on processing will begin again without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.

As a result, when power is restored, the main control side power-on process is initiated and the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous or power outage. Then, when the checksum calculated in step S28 based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is compared in step S30 with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous or power outage, the checksum values will not match, and the entire main control built-in RAM will be cleared in step S38. In other words, when power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by a waiter or other person, forcing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM to be forcibly erased (cleared) even without the waiter or other person expressing an intention to clear the RAM.

In this embodiment, therefore, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and preventing it from starting timekeeping again, thereby forcing the main control built-in WDT 1310af to reset the main control MPU 1310a. Before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20. However, as described above, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined in step S24 that power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, thereby forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and restarting the main control board 1310. This prevents the game from progressing, prevents the game information from being updated, and prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation results. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it will determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum value calculated and stored in step S64, and will not initialize the game information stored in the main control's built-in RAM immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred. Therefore, when power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary or power outage from being initialized.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined in step S24 that power to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Figure 77, and the game information due to the progress of this game is maintained. Because the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is able to complete the main control side power outage processing, which consists of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processing for storing information, and an infinite loop, when restarted, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation result of the backup processing (i.e., the checksum value calculated and stored in step S64), and therefore does not initialize the game information stored in the main control's internal RAM immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred. In other words, the game information is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred, and the main control board 1310 can be started.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control's built-in WDT 1310af will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a, allowing the main control side power outage processing to be started again without any updating of the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power outage processing can be reliably completed within the hardware-based "power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage" of approximately 7 ms, as before. That is, in this embodiment, when power is restored and an instantaneous power outage or power failure occurs during the main control side power-on process, and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, then the process will be stopped immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22. A determination is made as to whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and if a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24. As long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, and a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af that was started in step S12, clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and making it impossible to start timekeeping again, thereby forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. This software-based main control built-in WDT 1310af forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a, preventing progress to steps after step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, followed by enabling interrupts in step S52 and starting the main control timer interrupt processing described below), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) from being updated. This separate system has two components: a software component that prevents any changes to the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, and a hardware component that ensures that the main control power-off processing is completed and no changes are made to the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information). This ensures that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are prevented from being changed.

Next, we will explain how the reservation setting for the command to be sent when power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on status command classified as power-on shown in Figure 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created to notify that power has been turned on (power has been restored), and these are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attack solenoid 2108 shown in Figure 69. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command in step S50 does not schedule the command to be sent when power is turned on.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game status screen (e.g., a jackpot game display screen) in the display area of the game board side display device 1600 shown in Figure 8, and the main control board 1310 is driving the attacca solenoid 2108 to open the large prize opening 2005 shown in Figure 8 by the opening/closing member 2107, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 will be restored to the game status immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and will begin driving the attacca solenoid 2108, causing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as the gaming state, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover by displaying a screen in the display area of the gaming board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but it cannot at all indicate which round in the jackpot gaming state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control board 1310 sends a large prize opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005 on the screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving status, but it cannot at all display which round in the large prize game state (i.e. which round) it is.

In such a situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state ends, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and sends a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, instructing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member 2107 (i.e., the start of closing the large prize opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 between rounds), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and sends a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, instructing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a closed state by the opening/closing member 2107 to an open state (i.e., the start of opening the large prize opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 will finally switch from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to a screen indicating the start of five rounds of the jackpot game state and display it in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to inform the player that the game is now in a favorable state where a game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 (for example, a screen informing the player that the movable pieces are being spread open), and the main control board 1310 is driving the starting port solenoid 2107 to spread the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 open to the left and right, if an instantaneous power outage or power failure occurs and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 will be restored to the game state it was in immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power failure based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and will begin driving the starting port solenoid 2107, causing the pair of movable pieces to transition from a state in which they are standing approximately vertically to a state in which they are spread open to the left and right.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored.Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state where a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be able to return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to display at all in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has become such that a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For this reason, a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which game balls could be received into the second starting port 2004. In such cases, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004, the screen instructing the game (i.e., the screen instructing the game to place a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when power is restored, which causes the player to become confused about what game to play.

As such, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, when a momentary or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine may mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine's system has frozen, or in other words, that it has malfunctioned.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in order to send a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in Figure 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then sent during the main control's timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 will, for example, in the above example, if a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of the jackpot game state and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the main control board 1310 will return to its original state by starting to drive the attacca solenoid 2108 and transitioning the jackpot opening 2005 from a closed state to an open state by the opening/closing member 2107. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (i.e., a screen indicating which round it is), in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but it can display a screen informing that it is a jackpot game state, that the attacca solenoid 2108 has started to be driven, and that the large prize opening 2005 has been opened by the opening/closing member 2107 (for example, a message saying, "It's a jackpot. The large prize opening is open. Please try to get the game ball to enter the large prize opening."). Please play the game.") can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and the player seated in front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to play a game in which a game ball is to be placed in the big winning opening 2005 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above example, when a momentary power outage or a blackout occurs in a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, when power is restored after that, the return destination of the main control board 1310 can be The peripheral control board 1510 then displays a screen on the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600 informing the player that the start port solenoid 2107 has begun to be driven, causing the pair of movable pieces to open laterally (for example, a screen informing the player of the message "The movable pieces are opening. Please play so that the game ball enters the lower start port."), thereby instructing the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play by placing the game ball in the second start port 2004 after power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 to provide detailed instructions on the destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when power is restored after a momentary power outage or blackout. Therefore, after power is restored, the game can be quickly restored to the state it was in immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout. In other words, when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine will not mistakenly believe that the system of the pachinko machine has frozen, or is otherwise known as a malfunction.

Next, we will explain the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since being manufactured for inspection during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the main control board 1310 manufacturing line. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since being manufactured for inspection during the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power-off processing consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control internal RAM in step S28, the checksum values will never match when compared in step S30, and the entire main control internal RAM will necessarily be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the command to be transmitted upon power-on is scheduled in step S50, the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. This results in only two commands, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, being stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted first in the main control timer interrupt process described below, followed by the power-on status command, followed by the power-on main control return destination command. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since being manufactured for inspection, the power-on status command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

As mentioned above, the power-on state command is composed of: information instructing the RAM to be cleared when the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated upon power-on (including not only power-on but also power restoration after a power outage or momentary power interruption); information instructing which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to upon power-on (including not only power-on but also power restoration after a power outage or momentary power interruption), from the low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state; and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type pachinko machine 1 (or more accurately, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine can identify which copyright of the work it refers to and what kind of game specifications it has (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or a game specification in which the number of times the special pattern can fluctuate (for example, 30 or 70 times) and the probability fluctuation occurs (a so-called ST machine)).

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, when the main control boards 1310 are manufactured, there may be a mixture of main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works.
As a result, workers on the production line may not know which of the multiple copyrights (for example, the copyrights for Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture for which of the multiple copyrights (for example, the copyright for Movie D), or they may mistakenly believe that even though the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for one of the multiple copyrights (for example, the copyright for Movie D), it is being sent down the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright for Manga F). For this reason, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when main control boards 1310 are manufactured on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures pachinko machines 1, workers on the production line will not be able to confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the production line is for, and even for the same work copyright, they will not be able to confirm which model type (max type, mid-type, sweet type) or what game specifications (game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or ST machine) it is. For this reason, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when main control boards 1310 are manufactured on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures pachinko machines 1, the main control boards 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control boards 1310 to the game board 5, with the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights mixed together. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that did not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in order to send a power-on status command containing information indicating the pachinko machine model code to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then sent during the main control's timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the production line, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that produces pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device derives the following information that constitutes the model code of the pachinko machine: a series code that identifies the model type (max type, middle type, or sweet type) as described above; a copyright code that identifies the copyright of the work; and game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs). By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification whereby a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that the special symbol changes, in addition to the game specification whereby a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that the special symbol changes (such as an ST machine), it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the copyright of the same work, it is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) it is, and what game specification it is (a game specification where when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or an ST machine). As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple different game copyrights are mixed together when manufacturing main control boards 1310 on the production line of a pachinko machine manufacturer, workers in the main control board inspection process on the production line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type, game copyright, and game specifications of the main control board 1310, allowing them to be separated into game copyrights and sent to the subsequent game board assembly line. This allows workers on the game board assembly line to reliably attach main control boards 1310 that correspond to game boards 5 for the game copyrights, preventing a decrease in game board 5 production efficiency caused by attaching main control boards 1310 that do not correspond to game boards 5 for the game copyrights to game boards 5. This therefore contributes to improving game board 5 production efficiency.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Figures 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing begins, the main control program on the main control board 1310, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks: a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing, begins, there is no need to save each register to a stack.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). This timer subtraction processing, for example, manages the time that the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric device control processing described below, the time that the normal symbol display device 1402 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric device control processing described below, as well as the ACK signal input determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether a payer ACK signal has been input, which indicates that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). Specifically, when the change time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the change time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol change display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program receives, for example, a detection signal from the general prize opening sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 69 that detect game balls that have entered the general prize openings 2001, 2201 shown in FIG. 8, a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects game balls that have entered the special prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 that detects game balls that have entered the first start opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8, and a detection signal from the second start opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8. 8, the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69 that detects gaming balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in Fig. 8, the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in Fig. 69 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 shown in Fig. 69 that notifies the payout control board 951 that the payout ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later has been successfully received are read, and stored as input information in the input information storage area. Also, when the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 4002 that detects gaming balls that have entered the first start gate 2002 and the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 4004 that detects gaming balls that have entered the second start gate 2004 are read, the corresponding start gate winning command classified as "other" shown in Fig. 90 is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In other words, when a detection signal is received from the first start gate sensor 4002, the corresponding start gate winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when a detection signal is received from the second start gate sensor 4004, the corresponding start gate winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is initiated, the detection signals from the general prize entry sensors 4020, 4020 that detect game balls that have entered the general prize entry ports 2001, 2201, the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the special prize entry port 2005, the detection signal from the first start entry sensor 4002 that detects game balls that have entered the first start entry port 2002, the detection signal from the second start entry sensor 4004 that detects game balls that have entered the second start entry port 2004, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 are each read a first time, and then, after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again a second time. The result of this second reading is then compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read a third time, and the result of this third read is compared with the result of the second read. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read a fourth time, and the result of this fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if no game balls have entered the ball.

In this way, during switch input processing, the main control program performs a total of two double readings of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, count sensor 4005, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and gate sensor 4003: a double reading that compares the signals over the first through third readings, and a double reading that compares the signals over the second through fourth readings. This avoids false detections caused by chattering, noise, etc., and thereby improves the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, count sensor 4005, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and gate sensor 4003.

Following step S104, the main control program performs a win/loss random number update process (step S106). This win/loss random number update process updates the random numbers for the jackpot symbol and the small win symbol, as described above. In addition to these random numbers, the program also updates the random numbers for determining the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the small win symbol, which are updated in the non-win/loss random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93. These random numbers for determining the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the small win symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby further enhancing randomness. In contrast, the random numbers for the jackpot symbol and the small win symbol are random numbers related to win/loss determination (jackpot determination), and therefore the respective counters count up only each time this win/loss random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers used to determine whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial values for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as mentioned above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from a minimum value to a maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol. Once the counter has finished counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from its minimum value to its maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a jackpot is reached is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol.

In this embodiment, the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the small win symbol are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in Figure 93, and the win/lose random number update process in step S106 of the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. However, if the processing time for this routine fluctuates each time the interrupt timer is generated and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed within the time remaining until the next interrupt timer is generated, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the small win symbol can be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). This prize ball control processing reads input information from the input information storage area described above and creates the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out game balls based on this input information. If the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the program sets the output of a main prize ball number information output signal to notify this and stores this information in the output information storage area as output information. It also creates the self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in Figure 8, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this, stored as output information in the output information memory area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951.If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has successfully received this prize ball command is not input within a specified time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 and sent to the payout control board 951. Furthermore, if the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, such as when creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 prize balls, the next time this prize ball control process is run, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information is added to the excess number of balls. When this added number of game balls is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs a slot command reception process (step S110). In the dispensing control board 951, the dispensing control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (e.g., slot status 1 command, error release navigation command, and slot status 2 command) that are classified into the status displays shown in Figure 91. Meanwhile, as will be described later, the dispensing control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the dispensing operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-mentioned frame command receiving process, when the main control program successfully receives these various commands as payer serial data, it stores information informing the payer control board 951 of this fact in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as output information. In addition, the main control program formats the command successfully received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status displays in Figure 90 (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command)) and stores it as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. Note that the frame status 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). This fraud detection process checks for any abnormal conditions related to the prize balls. For example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and if a detection signal is input from the count sensor 4005 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005), a prize abnormality display command classified as an annunciation display shown in Figure 90 is created as an abnormal condition, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric device control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random number value is set as the random number for determining a jackpot. The system then determines whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., a random number value obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) matches a jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control MPU 1310a (determines whether a jackpot game state should be generated (referred to as a "special lottery").), or determines whether the value of a counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol matches a probability variable determination value pre-stored in the main control MPU 1310a (determines whether a probability fluctuation should be generated). Here, "probability fluctuation" refers to a change in the probability of a jackpot from a normal state (low probability) to a high probability (probability variable). In this embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range) described above is set to a value between 32668 and 32767 for low probability, which is read from the normal state determination table, while the range is set to a value between 31768 and 32767 for high probability, which is read from the probability variable determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric device control process of step S114, when determining whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a built into the main control) matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, this is done by checking whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a built into the main control) is within the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are determined by the first start opening sensor 4002, various commands related to the special symbol 1 synchronization effect shown in Figure 89 are created, while if the lottery result is determined by the second start opening sensor 4004, various commands related to the special symbol 2 synchronization effect shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the transmission information memory area as transmission information.In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 is set to light up according to the determined special symbol variable display pattern, and this is stored in the above-mentioned output information memory area as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related commands shown in FIG. 89 (jackpot opening command, command to display Nth time that large prize opening 1 is opened, command to display closure of large prize opening 1, command to display count of large prize opening 1, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, the output of a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2108 is set to open and close the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the number of times (rounds) that the large prize opening 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state is set to 2. When the number of rounds is 15, a lighting signal is output to the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. 10 to light up, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; when the number of rounds is 15, a lighting signal is output to the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. 10 to light up, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; and a lighting signal is output to the status indicator 1401 to light up a specified color to indicate whether or not a probability fluctuation has occurred, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric device control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, if a detection signal has been input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the random number used to determine whether the normal symbol has been won described above is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

This gate information storage area has four sections, numbered 0 to 3, with gate information stored in the order of 0, 1, 2, and 3. For example, if gate information is stored in sections 0 to 2 of the gate information storage, and a detection signal from gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in section 3 of the gate information storage.

The gate information stored in Section 0 of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in Section 1 of the gate information storage is shifted to Section 0 of the gate information storage, the gate information in Section 2 of the gate information storage to Section 1 of the gate information storage, and the gate information in Section 3 of the gate information storage to Section 2 of the gate information storage, leaving Section 3 of the gate information storage empty. For example, if gate information is stored in Sections 1 and 2 of the gate information storage, the gate information in Section 1 of the gate information storage is shifted to Section 0 of the gate information storage, and the gate information in Section 2 of the gate information storage to Section 1 of the gate information storage, leaving Sections 2 and 3 of the gate information storage empty. Here, if gate information is stored in Sections 1 to 3 of the gate information storage, the output of the lighting signal for the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is set based on the gate information described above so that the total number of gate information stored is treated as reserved balls and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is illuminated, and this is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been won is extracted from this read gate information and a determination is made as to whether it matches the normal symbol winning determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (referred to as the "normal lottery"). The result of this determination (the result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the movable pieces. If this decision is made to open or close, the pair of movable pieces will open to the left and right, creating a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received into the second starting opening 2004, providing an advantageous gaming state for the player. The normal symbol variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the transmission information memory area described above as transmission information.In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display device 1402 is set so as to light up the normal symbol display device 1402 in accordance with the determined normal symbol variable display pattern, and stored in the output information memory area described above as output information. Furthermore, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won matches the normal symbol winning determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and a drive signal is set to be output to the start port solenoid 2107 to open and close the movable piece, and this is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won does not match the normal symbol winning determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, a normal symbol variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In addition, a lighting signal is set to be output to the normal symbol display device 1402 to light up the normal symbol display device 1402 according to the determined normal symbol variable display pattern, and this is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above through the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information when various commands from the payout control board 951 have been successfully received; when in a jackpot game state, outputs a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2108 which opens and closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the large prize opening 2005; and outputs a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2107 which opens and closes the movable piece. In addition, it also outputs various information (game information) signals relating to the game to the payout control board 951, such as a main prize ball count information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output information, and a start opening winning information output signal.

Following step S118, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special 1 synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to special 2 synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to jackpots (for example, a large prize entrance 1 count display command corresponding to a large prize entrance count command based on a detection signal from count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering large prize entrance 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification displays (door open command, door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, etc.) shown in FIG. 90, various commands classified as status displays (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command), various commands classified as test-related commands, and various other commands. Each packet of main serial data consists of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data consists of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the effect with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the following order: status, mode, and sum value. As mentioned above, in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Figure 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in Figure 79 is capable of transferring at least the command set in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec, and completing transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data. When power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Fig. 93, in order to notify that power has been restored, a power-on status command classified as power-on shown in Fig. 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the power-on status command is transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, followed by the power-on main control return destination command in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Note that in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the main control side power-on processing, game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such cases, after various commands corresponding to the game information have been sent, the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command will be sent.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a slot status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a slot status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the slot status 1 command in the format shown in Figure 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a slot status 1 command in the format shown in Figure 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command in the format shown in Figure 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as an error cancellation navigation command in the format shown in Figure 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame open command in the form shown in Figure 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main body frame open command in the form shown in Figure 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main body frame close command (second main body frame close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit). (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame close command in the format shown in Figure 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame close command in the format shown in Figure 90.

Also, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door open command (second door frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame close command in the form shown in Figure 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in Figure 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door close command (first door close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door close command (second door close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command in the format shown in Figure 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the format shown in Figure 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in Figure 69 (step S122) and terminates this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared in step S22 by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts again, preventing the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup processing for storing game information as the game progresses while the game is in progress before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and when power is restored, it can output to the peripheral control board 1510 the main control return destination command at power on of Figure 89, which instructs the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacca solenoid 2108, which are the electrical drive sources, by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed, as the return destination for the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 93, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on in Figure 89 and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control built-in RAM in order to notify that power has been turned on (power has been restored) based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the same processing, and in this routine, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 of this routine, it transmits these as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on status command, and then transmits them to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on main control return destination command. For this reason, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 can display in the display area of the game board display device 1600 the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return game progress when power is restored. As a result, when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs while a player is playing and power is subsequently restored, the game can be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout after power is restored, and the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return game progress can be notified by displaying in the display area of the game board display device 1600, thereby preventing the pachinko machine 1 system from appearing frozen to the player and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout after power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a malfunction.

Furthermore, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 of the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on is made, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in Figure 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only the two commands, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on status command is transmitted as main peripheral serial data to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on peripheral serial data. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the pachinko machine's model code contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. This information includes the series code that identifies the model type (max type, mid type, or sweet type) described above, the copyright code that identifies the copyright of the work, and the game specification code that identifies the game specifications (for example, a game specification in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, and in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for special symbols to fluctuate (ST machine)).

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control units]
[16-1-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When power is applied to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing begins, the performance control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the performance control program performs processes such as initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, and setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process to initialize itself, and the time required for this process to initialize the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), making it possible to initialize the peripheral control MPU 1511a in an extremely short time. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set to an interrupt permission state, and is then able to receive various commands, such as commands relating to the control of game presentations and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described below, as shown in Figures 89 and 90.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1fr) in its backup first area 1511cb is compared, and the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1ms) and Bank 2 (1ms) is compared. In the backup second area 1511cc, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) is compared, and the content backed up in Bank 3 (1ms) and Bank 4 (1ms) is compared. The performance backup information (1 ms) stored in Bank0 (1 fr) and Bank1 (1 fr) is compared, and if the compared contents match, the performance backup information (1 fr) stored in Bank1 (1 fr) for Bank0 (1 ms), which are the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the performance backup information (1 ms) stored in Bank1 (1 ms) for Bank0 (1 ms) are copied back to perform a hot start. On the other hand, if the compared contents do not match (i.e., there is a mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1 fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a cold start is performed.

In addition, in the hot start/cold start determination process, for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in Figure 73, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in its backup first area 1511db is compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in its backup second area 1511dc is compared. If the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in Figure 73, is copied back to Bank 0 (SRAM) and a hot start is performed. However, if the compared contents do not match (i.e., there is a mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank 0 (SRAM), the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and a cold start is performed. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, clearing it to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1000, the presentation control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and these are set in the calendar information storage section as current calendar information and in the time information storage section as current time information in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The current time information acquisition process also performs a brightness setting process for the LCD display device. In this LCD display device brightness setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and performs a process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board-side presentation display device 1600 so that it matches the LED brightness included in the acquired brightness setting information. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, as well as the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side display device 1600.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process for the LCD display device, when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information; and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 80% and the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Note that this brightness setting process for the LCD display device does not perform any correction similar to the brightness correction program used to correct the brightness of the game board side display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side display device 1600, as described above. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of this LCD display device, preventing the LED brightness from being corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the LCD display device is executed.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once, when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1002, the performance control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing described below, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below, which is executed when a V blank signal, which indicates that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is ready to accept screen data, is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting it to a value of 0. In addition, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1006, the performance control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to 1 (it is equal to 0), the program returns to step S1008 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1. By repeating this determination, the program enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit's regular processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1008, that is, when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is first set to 1 (step S1009). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed.

Following step S1009, the performance control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010). This 1 ms interrupt timer start process starts the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below, and also initializes the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN by setting the value to 1 to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the presentation control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the presentation control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73. When this continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board begins, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 has been created in the lamp data creation processing described below and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 specifies transmission from the lamp drive board serial I/O port as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board light-emitting data SL-DAT stored at the top address of the lamp drive board transmission data memory area 1511caa to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. This causes the lamp drive board serial I/O port to transfer the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board light-emitting clock signal SL-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac reads the remaining game board side light-emitting data stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. The data SL-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmit buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port via external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. The lamp drive board serial I/O port then transfers the written data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board light emission clock signal SL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the lamp drive board serial I/O port.

Furthermore, in the lamp data output process, the performance control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72. Here too, continuous transmission is performed via the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When this continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs begins, the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created in the lamp data creation process described below and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door-side light-emitting data STL-DAT stored at the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab to the transmit buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. This causes the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port to transfer the written data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door-side light-emitting clock signal STL-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac reads the remaining door-side light-emitting data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STL-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board then transfers the written data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board.

Following step S1012, the presentation control program performs presentation operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). This presentation operation unit monitoring processing monitors whether the operation button 410 has been operated based on the presentation operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73, where various information acquired from the operation of the operation button 410 based on detection signals from the various detection switches provided on the presentation operation unit 400 is set during the presentation operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described below, and appropriately determines whether or not the operation status of the operation button 410 should be reflected in the game presentation.

Following step S1014, the presentation control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described below to the game board side presentation display device 1600 and the door frame side presentation display device 460 via channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 74. This causes various screens to be drawn on the game board side presentation display device 1600 and the door frame side presentation display device 460. Note that in the display data output process, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capabilities of the sound source VDP 1512a, the output of the generated one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side presentation display device 1600 and the door frame side presentation display device 460 is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but may result in dropped frames. However, this system prioritizes synchronization between the effects produced by the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8 and the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, as performed by the lamp data output process in step S1012, and the effects produced by music and sound effects, etc., that accompany the various effects, as performed by the sound data output process described below, from the lower speaker 921 shown in Figure 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in Figure 2.

Following step S1016, the performance control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described below as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and outputs sound data such as music, sound effects, and alert sounds as well as music and sound effects as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and transmits the left audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This allows music and sound effects that accompany various performances to be played in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, as well as notification sounds and announcement sounds.

Following step S1018, the performance control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, of the chronologically arranged screen data that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae should be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

In addition, during the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae should be used as the light emission mode for various LEDs.

In addition, during the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a among the sound command data that indicates sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data for alarms and notification sounds, arranged in chronological order and constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which drive data, starting from the first drive data, of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is to be output. The drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is executed repeatedly every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. This motor and solenoid drive process, which is executed repeatedly every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, drives the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and updates the pointer each time the process itself is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Therefore, even if, for some reason, the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, the scheduler update process forcibly updates it to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the performance control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the performance control program analyzes the various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described below, including information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 (command analysis means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the performance control program extracts screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets the extracted data in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The performance control program also analyzes (command analysis means) whether the command received from main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of a start port winning effect, a normal symbol memory command for identifying the number of reserved normal symbols (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the start reserve number changes, a large prize port 1 count display command (large prize port count command) output each time a game ball is received in large prize port 2005, or a frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) indicating a full tank as shown in Figure 90, and recognizes the current game status. After a predetermined time has elapsed since power was turned on, the performance control program also analyzes whether the command received in this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a main body frame open command, main body frame close command, door open command, or door frame close command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73, and in the received command analysis processing, the performance control program analyzes the various commands stored in the received command memory area 1511cac. The various commands include, as shown in Figure 89, various commands categorized as related to special chart 1 synchronization effects, various commands categorized as related to special chart 2 synchronization effects, various commands categorized as related to jackpots, various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to normal chart synchronization effects, various commands categorized as related to normal electric role effects, various commands categorized as notification displays as shown in Figure 90, various commands categorized as status displays such as the above-mentioned door frame open command, door frame close command, main frame open command, and main frame close command, as well as the error release navigation command (equivalent to the second error release command) and frame status 1 command (equivalent to the second error occurrence command), various commands categorized as test-related, and various commands categorized as others.

Following step S1022, the performance control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022, as described above, include any of the various commands classified as warning displays shown in FIG. 90, the performance control program extracts the screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data, etc., set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality warnings, from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Note that in the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the warning process starts with the abnormality warnings registered in descending order of priority, and automatically transitions to the remaining abnormality warnings once the abnormality is resolved. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly occurred after one anomaly occurred but before the first anomaly was resolved.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, if the command analyzed by the presentation control program in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (step S1022) is one of the various commands classified as status displays shown in FIG. 90, such as an error reset navigation command (second error reset command), the LCD display control unit 1512 is controlled in a manner different from the normal presentation mode associated with the presentation operation, to issue a visual warning to the outside using, for example, the game board-side presentation display device 1600 (presentation device), the door frame-side presentation display device 460 (presentation device), or a lamp (presentation device), or an auditory warning to the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, if a malicious player attempts to input an error reset navigation command into the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 even while the game is in progress, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue an external warning, thereby deterring fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that could affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the performance control program performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information stored in the time information storage unit that were acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. This RCT acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second time information stored in the time information storage unit, and updates the year, month, and day calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on this updated time information.

Following step S1026, the performance control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the performance control program extracts game board side light emission data SL-DAT from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, based on the light emission data indicated by the pointer, which is included in the light emission data arranged in chronological order and constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, and outputs lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation light emission signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8, after the pointer has been updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1028, the presentation control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and extracts the screen data indicated by the pointer from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data on the built-in VRAM to be displayed on the game board side presentation display device 1600 and the door frame side presentation display device 460.

Following step S1030, the performance control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the performance control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and extracts the sound command data indicated by the pointer from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data, and outputs the sound command data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored on the LCD and in the sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source, thereby incorporating the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data and setting the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

Note that during the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated each time this sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing), and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is converted into 1024-level values ranging from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level values are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, with board volume 0 being set to mute and board volume 6 being set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the LCD display control unit 1512 is controlled to achieve the volume set for board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above, causing music and sound effects to be played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573.

Alert sounds and notification sounds are played without relying on volume adjustments based on the rotation of the knob. The volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the VDP 1512a, a built-in sound source, of the LCD display control unit 1512 via a program. Unlike the board volume, which is divided into seven levels as described above, the volume adjusted by this program allows for a smooth transition from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a parlor staff member or other such person turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, and other sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 will be reduced in volume. However, alert sounds set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is engaging in fraudulent behavior. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is reduced, it is possible to prevent parlor staff and other such persons from being distracted by the alert sounds. Furthermore, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, or the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous gaming state.

Following step S1032, the performance control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the performance control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to backup area 1511cb and backup area 2 1511cc, respectively, and also copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and external peripheral control SRAM 1511d to backup area 1511db and backup area 2 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, during the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, the received command memory area 1511cac, and the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cac are backed up for each frame (1frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in Figure 73, i.e., each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in the memory area 1511cad and the schedule data memory area 1511cae, as performance backup information (1fr) to Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb, and also quickly copies it to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied consecutively in a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All data is copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (1fr) in area 1511cb, and then the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb. The contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) to Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) from the first address to the last address of Bank 0 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc in a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank 3 (1fr), The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa then requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

In addition, during backup processing, for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) that is the backup target, to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, as performance backup information (SRAM) for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and then the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies this to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

To briefly explain how the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied consecutively in the backup first area by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). All data is copied in order from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) to Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup area 1511db. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the first address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup area 1511db in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) to Bank 3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank 0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank 3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa then requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) to Bank 4 (SRAM) of the second backup area 1511dc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank 0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank 4 (SRAM) of the second backup area 1511dc.

Following step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1036, the performance control program sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 (step S1038), indicating that the peripheral control unit has completed steady-state processing, and then returns to step S1006, initializes the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG by setting it to 0. The program then repeats the judgment of step S1008 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below. In other words, step S1008 waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1. If step S1008 determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, it performs steps S1009 through S1038, and then returns to step S1006. In this way, if step S1008 determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, it performs steps S1009 through S1038. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady-state processing."

This peripheral control unit steady-state processing begins with the performance control program setting the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1009, indicating that peripheral control unit steady-state processing is currently being executed. Then, in step S1010, the program starts a 1 ms interrupt timer. Then, in step S1012, step S1014, ..., and step S1036, the program finally completes the peripheral control unit steady-state processing by setting the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0 in step S1038, indicating that peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. Peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S1008. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below, which is executed when a V blank signal, indicating that the sound source VDP 1512a is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is input. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, as described above, so the interval at which a V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt process shown in Fig. 72, which is executed when a V blanking signal indicating that the peripheral control unit 1511 is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is input from the sound source VDP 1512a. When this peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 (step S1045), as shown in Fig. 96. As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 95 is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

If the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is not set to 0 (is set to 1) in step S1045, meaning that peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, the routine ends. On the other hand, if the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 in step S1045, meaning that peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and the routine ends. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag used to determine whether or not peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, and is set to 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not being executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is equal to 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. This is because, if a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 while the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is determined to be executed in step S1008 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, In step S1009 of the initial processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1, thereby informing this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, that peripheral control unit steady-state processing is currently being executed. Furthermore, in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in FIG. 95, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0, thereby informing this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, that peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. Step S1045 of this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, determines whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0, i.e., whether peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In other words, this is the procedure to be taken when peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed between the input of a V blanking signal and the input of the next V blanking signal, resulting in a so-called processing stall.

As a result, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing fails to complete within approximately 33.3 ms and stalls, step S1008 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95 will determine that the system will wait until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing that stalled will be approximately 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described below, which is executed repeatedly each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in Figure 95, is executed 32 times for each peripheral control unit steady-state processing. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing stalled as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady-state processing stalls, consistency between the performance progress achieved by the peripheral control unit steady-state processing and the performance progress achieved by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing will be described, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, as shown in Fig. 97 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed 32 times before the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, followed by the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts.

If the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, i.e., if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is initiated, the routine terminates. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled in this embodiment, even though the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is given a higher interrupt processing priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. In other words, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when a new 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by a value of 1 (step S1102). By incrementing the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN by a value of 1, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95, and the number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 are driven in accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for the motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The pointer is also updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is performed.

Specifically, the motor and solenoid drive processing involves DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, continuous transmission is performed from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the performance operation unit 400 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a then specifies transmission from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data memory area 1511caf to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. This causes the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to transfer the written data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor for the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor for the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it transfers the remaining door side motor drive data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor for the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor then transfers the written data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor.

In addition, during motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing is performed to the motor drive board 4180. Here too, continuous transmission is performed via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for this motor drive board is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the motors and solenoids for moving the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a then specifies transmission from the motor drive board serial I/O port as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board motor drive data SM-DAT stored at the top address of the motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. This causes the motor drive board serial I/O port to transfer the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac reads the remaining game board side motor drive data stored in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. The data SM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the motor drive board then transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board's motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches provided on the game board 5 is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various detection switches (e.g., original position history information, movable position history information, etc.), and set in the movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The original positions, movable positions, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, a performance operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation history information of the operation button 410) is created and set in the performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, a drawing status information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing status information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Figure 87 is created and set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. As described above, the LOCKN signal is output by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 to communicate that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver. The drawing status of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be obtained by obtaining the frequency and occurrence of malfunctions between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 from the LOCKN signal history information set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, each time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in Figure 73, that is, each time this routine, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, and movable body information acquisition memory area 1511caf, which are included in Bank 0 (1 ms) that is the backup target, are backed up. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1 ms) stored in area 1511cah and performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai as performance backup information (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of backup first area 1511cb, and then quickly copies it to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) of backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) from the first address to the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) are copied consecutively in a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All data is copied in order from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in area 1511cb, and then the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb. The contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) through to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) are copied in order from the first address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) from the first address to the last address of Bank 0 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511cc in a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa then requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) from the first address to the last address of Bank 0 (1 ms) in the second backup area 1511cc in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank 4 (1 ms).

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1 ms to progress the performance. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1012 to S1032 are executed within a period of approximately 33.3 ms to progress the performance. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, i.e., if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is initiated, the routine is terminated. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is initiated due to the first new 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, consistency is maintained between the performance progress due to the peripheral control unit regular processing and the performance progress due to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control. This ensures reliable consistency of performance progress.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a are implemented. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 starts transmitting various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, it uses this as a trigger to load one byte (8 bits) of main serial data into a receive buffer via the main control board serial I/O port built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and when this loading is complete, an interrupt occurs, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. Each packet of main serial data is composed of three bytes, with the first byte assigned to the status, the second byte assigned to the mode, and the third byte assigned to a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process begins, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 98. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if it is within the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral control MPU 1511a retrieves the received 1 byte of information from the receive buffer of the main control board serial I/O port (step S1202) and adds (increments) the value of the receive counter SRXC by 1 (step S1204). This receive counter SRXC indicates the number of times data has been retrieved from the receive buffer. If the status, the first byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer, the value becomes 1. If the mode, the second byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer, the value becomes 2. If the sum, the third byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer, the value becomes 3. The receive counter SRXC is initially set to 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is at a value of 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). This determines whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

If the receive counter SRXC is not equal to 3 in step S1206, that is, if the status (the first byte of the main serial data), the mode (the second byte of the main serial data), and the sum value (the third byte of the main serial data) have not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, a 1-byte receive period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208, a period is set during which the mode (the second byte of the main serial data) or the sum value (the third byte of the main serial data) can be received.

On the other hand, when the receive counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, when the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, the receive counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation regards the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and calculates their sum (sum value).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main loop serial data from the main control board 1310, and therefore should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko machine 1 receives game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs, generating noise, so pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 treats the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the peripheral control MPU 1511a to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to incorrect main serial data.

In step S1214, if the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the status assigned to the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned to the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73 (step S1216), and this routine ends. This receive command memory area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned to the first byte of the main serial data and the mode assigned to the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer of the receive command memory area 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and beginning of the buffer are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, data is stored again from the beginning. Note that when storing data in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data in association with each other, and discards the sum value assigned as the third byte.

On the other hand, if the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if, in step S1214, the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is terminated.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process shown in Figure 75, which is executed when a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Figure 72 first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1320) and determines whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1302). If this determination is made that a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has not been input, the routine is terminated.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). This determination determines whether the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If 2 microseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the routine returns to step S1302 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has not been input, the routine terminates. However, if a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, the determination in step S1304 determines whether a power outage warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, was started.

If the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). This power saving processing sequentially turns off the backlights of the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460, turns off excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turns off various LEDs, thereby reducing power consumption of the entire pachinko machine 1 system. This ensures stable operation for the 20 millisecond period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). This command reception standby processing assumes that the main control board 1310 is currently sending various commands, and waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is initiated, and the received command is stored in the received command memory area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which is external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in Figure 73.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) of the backup target work area 1511ca (shown in FIG. 73) to Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and then quickly copies the contents to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 specifies, in the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb are copied consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time from the first address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb are copied in order from the first address, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the receive command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. The contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the first address to the last address of the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) to the first address of the receive command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, in response to a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac contained in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command memory area contained in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac contained in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac contained in Bank0 (1fr) in order, starting from the first address of the received command memory area contained in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, in succession of a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa then specifies, in response to a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in order, starting from the first address of the received command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, in succession of a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1312). If this determination indicates that a power outage warning signal has been input, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. In other words, the process continues indefinitely to determine whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this manner, if a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has not been input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is unable to output a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. However, if a power outage warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. Note that when the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, if step S1312 determines that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) continues in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314, preventing the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset immediately before the power outage occurs. In contrast, if step S1312 determines that the input of the power outage warning signal does not continue in the infinite loop and is released, the WDT clear process is not executed, and the output of the clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing routine is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds, and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, if the judgment in step S1312 is that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) does not continue in the infinite loop and is released, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 will not be executed, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a will be reset, so it is possible to respond to such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, we will explain the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as part of the drawing status information acquisition process in step S1110 of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in Figure 97. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Figure 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74 is abnormal data. Specifically, this signal is output to request the transmission of a specified data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Figure 72 reads the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73, as shown in Figure 100 (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, where "B" represents a bit), and the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 is stored as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (step S1502). This judgment is made when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, and determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, and that a specified data pattern (SYNC pattern) has been requested to be sent for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, and determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (it is normal data), and that a specified data pattern (SYNC pattern) has not been requested to be sent for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

If a LOCKN signal is received from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process for the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this shift process for the LOCKN signal detection history information, when a LOCKN signal is received from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, as follows: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST was shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value of 1 (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process for the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). This shift process for the LOCKN signal detection history information is the same as the shift process for the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504. If there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, as follows: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST was shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0 is set to a value of 1 or 0, thereby creating a history of LOCKN signals from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection Trouble Determination Process]
Next, a description will be given of the connection failure determination process executed as part of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 95. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Fig. 87, it is determined whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection malfunction determination process is initiated, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Figure 72 reads the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73, as shown in Figure 101 (step S1520). As described above, this LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that is output by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 to communicate that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data; specifically, it is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

Following step S1520, a determination is made as to whether a LOCKN signal is present from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination is made by determining whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)," with the most significant four bits B7 to B4 having a value of 0 and the least significant four bits B3 to B0 having a value of 1. In step S1522, a determination is made as to whether the least significant four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the least significant four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, if the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is determined that there is no malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and this routine is then terminated.

On the other hand, in step S1522, if the lowest four bits B3-B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lowest four bits B3-B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is determined that there is a malfunction between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the number of times it has been determined in step S1522 that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. Furthermore, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but is not reset by a momentary or power outage, and is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power outage when power is restored.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is less than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is less than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, it is determined that the cumulative number of times a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT. Conversely, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not less than (greater than) the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, it is determined that the cumulative number of times a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is less than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, if the cumulative number of times it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not less than (greater than) the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, if the cumulative number of times it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a flag that indicates whether the cumulative number of times a malfunction has been determined to exist in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, indicating whether a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is set to a value of 1 when a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and to a value of 0 when the cumulative number of times a malfunction has been determined to exist in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT. Note that while the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is not reset by a momentary power outage or blackout, and is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout when power is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, a description will be given of the connection recovery process executed as one of the warning processes of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 95. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection malfunction determination process shown in Fig. 101, and outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and also notifies the user when the connection between the transmitter and receiver is abnormal.

When the connection recovery process begins, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether the screen generation schedule data among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is currently active (step S1540) during the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95, as shown in FIG. 102. This determination determines whether the pointer has been updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data should be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. In other words, during the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is currently active. However, when the performance has completed according to the screen generation schedule data and all pointer updates have been completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not yet active. This judgment is based on the screen generation schedule data to determine whether the period during which the start-up screen displayed on the game board display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or the period during which the game board display device 1600 is providing a demonstration in a customer waiting state, and if the period during which the start-up screen displayed on the game board display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or the period during which the game board display device 1600 is providing a demonstration in a customer waiting state, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later. However, if the period during which the start-up screen displayed on the game board display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or the period during which the game board display device 1600 is providing a demonstration in a customer waiting state (when the game machine is simply in a customer waiting state) the routine is terminated.

When the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, i.e., when the screen generation schedule data is running, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the performance has been completed according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540 and all pointer updates have been completed, i.e., when the screen generation schedule data has not yet started, the routine determines whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is equal to or greater than 0 (step S1542). As described above, each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed, this communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the determination in step S1522 in the process determines that there is a failure in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver. This determination is made by determining whether there has been at least one instance where a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, meaning that there has not been a single determination that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the routine terminates. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, meaning that there has been at least one determination that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the routine determines whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates whether the cumulative number of determinations that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT and therefore indicates that a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. The flag is set to 1 when a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and to 0 when the cumulative number of determinations that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT.

If the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, if the cumulative number of times a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546) and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510, causing the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 to output a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is pre-stored in the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, restoring the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1544, that is, if there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a communication error display process is performed (step S1548) and this routine is terminated. In this communication error display process, in order to inform the user that there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a process of drawing a message is performed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8. For example, a message saying "A malfunction has occurred in the LCD display device on the upper tray side. Please call a store employee" is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, in the communication error display process, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is in a waiting state for customers and is performing a demonstration, in order to check whether or not a problem has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation check request for the door frame side performance display device 460, and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 is output. CSDIC0 outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. If this LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver and that there is a problem with the door frame side performance display device 460. To this effect, an alert image (e.g., "A problem has occurred with the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store staff member.") is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and an alert sound (e.g., "A problem has occurred with the upper tray side LCD display device.") is repeatedly played from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, it is also possible to light up all of the decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74 will be explained using the timing chart in Figure 103.

First, to briefly explain the decorative patterns that are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8, the variable display of the decorative patterns is performed by the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 95, and the first special lottery result drawn upon the acceptance of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 shown in Figure 8, or the first special lottery result shown in Figure 8, is displayed by the main control side main processing of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 69, or the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 94, etc. If the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving a gaming ball into the second starting opening 2004 is a "jackpot," the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is repeated from round 1 to round 15, for a total of 15 rounds. In each round, if a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005 within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) and the number of balls enters a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), that round is completed, and each time a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number (e.g., 15 balls) of gaming balls are paid out.

Based on commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LCD display control unit 1512 to start displaying the varying left-side decorative pattern on the left side of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the central decorative pattern in the center, and the right-side decorative pattern on the right side, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the varying display of the left-side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right-side decorative pattern stops, allowing the player to recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.At this time, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed from the first special pattern or the second special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Figure 66. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern become semi-transparent to an extent that the background image can be seen, and the left decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner from the upper left to the lower left of the display area, the central decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area, as if the reels are rotating, and when the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern become opaque so that the background image at the positions corresponding to the stopped and displayed left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern becomes difficult to see. In this way, the first special pattern or second special pattern that starts to change and then stops on the first special pattern display 1403 or second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 is synchronized with the left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern that starts to change and then stops on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

When the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command from the main control board 1310 conveying the result of the first special lottery drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the first starting opening 2002, or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the second starting opening 2004, the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the LCD display control unit 1512 based on this received command, and as shown in FIG. 103, when the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8 begins to display the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern in a variable manner (timing K0), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in a column is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In other words, during the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data. Therefore, while the screen generation schedule data is running, that is, during the time from when the variable display of the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern begins to stop, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the routine is forcibly terminated as determined in step S1540 of this connection recovery process.

As a result, during the period from when the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to display the varying left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern until they stop, even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver), the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection between the transmitter and receiver is restored. The process to restore the connection is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection restoration process is not performed. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the upper tray LCD display. Please call a store staff member" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is invalidated, and the door frame side performance display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d.

When the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to display the varying left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern and then stops (timing K1), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the effect is completed in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and all pointer updates have been completed. In other words, in the scheduler update process, the screen generation schedule data is not yet activated. While the screen generation schedule data is not yet activated, in the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102, which is executed as part of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process. When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, the transmitter If the number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not been even once, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, if there has been even one time that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine proceeds to step S1544 in the same processing. If the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, if the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the routine proceeds to step S1546 in the same processing, where the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output processing is performed and the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, if there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine proceeds to step S1548 in the same processing, where the above-mentioned communication error display processing is performed and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, if there is a malfunction occurring even once between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and if the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, then SYNC pattern output processing is always performed to prevent a malfunction occurring between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. While processing to restore the connection is performed, if the cumulative number of times it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (in other words, there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver), a communication error display process is always performed, and a message such as "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray LCD display. Please call a store employee" is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user, and the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, is abnormal, is enabled.

During the interval period in which the left-side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right-side decorative pattern start to change and then stop displaying in the display area of the game board side display device 1600, and the left-side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right-side decorative pattern start to change again, the left-side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right-side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side display device 1600. Therefore, as described above, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is activated, and if there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once, When the cumulative number of times a connection malfunction is determined to exist does not reach the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is always performed to restore the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver. On the other hand, when the cumulative number of times a connection malfunction is determined to exist between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (i.e., there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver), a communication error display process is always performed to, for example, display a message in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 stating, "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store employee."

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern begins again (timing K2), as described above, because the screen generation schedule data is running, until the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are displayed stationary (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if there has been a determination that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver) even once, the SYNC pattern output of step S1546 in the connection recovery processing No power processing is performed, no processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection restoration processing is not performed. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the upper tray LCD display. Please call a store staff member" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. As a result, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is invalidated, and the door frame side performance display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, during the interval between when the varying display of the left-side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right-side decorative pattern starts and stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and when the varying display of the left-side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right-side decorative pattern starts again, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is enabled; on the other hand, during the interval between when the varying display of the left-side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right-side decorative pattern starts and stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is disabled. This is because the information of most interest to the player is the combination of the left-hand decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right-hand decorative pattern displayed in a static manner in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, and allows the player to determine whether a jackpot game state that will award the player a profit will occur. Therefore, when the left-hand decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right-hand decorative pattern are displayed in a dynamic manner in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, even if the effect image displayed in the display area of the door frame-side display device 460 becomes distorted due to noise or the like and cannot be displayed correctly until the left-hand decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right-hand decorative pattern are displayed in a static manner, the effect is not interrupted midway and processing is performed to restore it to a state where it can be displayed correctly, but rather the left-hand decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right-hand decorative pattern are displayed in a static manner in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, thereby completing the display of the information that interests the player most.

In this respect, this is significantly different from the case where the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 sends LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. This LOCKN signal output request data is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the game board side display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while the machine is waiting for customers. It is sent as a request to check the operation of the door frame side display device 460 to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side display receiver IC SDIC0 on the display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided on the peripheral control board 1510. When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit to transmit the two signals, and the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided on the performance display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it determines that the LOCKN signal output request data is abnormal data because, as described above, the data format of the LOCKN signal output request data is different from that of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and outputs a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when a LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450, while when a LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the performance display drive board 4450, and controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert image to that effect (for example, ``A problem has occurred with the LCD display device on the upper tray side. Please call a store employee.'') to the game board side performance display device 1600, and also controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert sound to that effect (for example, ``A problem has occurred with the LCD display device on the upper tray side.'') to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, which causes the alert sound to be played from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made using notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like installed in the door frame 3. At this time, all of the decorative LEDs installed in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards installed in the game board 5 may be lit.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 sends serial data, which is a LOCKN signal output request data, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so that the LOCKN signal output request data can be received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which receives the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal.Therefore, when a LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver and that there is no problem with the door frame side performance display device 460, whereas when a LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver and that there is a problem with the door frame side performance display device 460. Furthermore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame-side performance display device 460, it is able to execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as an alarm process. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a malfunction in the door frame-side performance display device 460, it is able to notify hall staff and the like by executing an alarm process. This allows hall staff and the like to very easily check whether a malfunction has occurred in the door frame-side performance display device 460 before the player plays, and the check is not time-consuming. Therefore, malfunctions in the door frame-side performance display device 460 can be discovered without much effort.

As mentioned above, the LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is a signal that is output to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver. Since the LOCKN signal is a signal output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for transmitting the image from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 can output a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that a communication failure has occurred in the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and that the received drawing data is abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input outputs a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d to notify that transmission of the predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 will begin, thereby eliminating the communication failure between the image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of detecting malfunctions in the door frame side display device 460 caused by communication problems during image communication at an early stage and instructing the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d to resolve the malfunction. Therefore, by detecting and resolving malfunctions in the door frame side display device 460, it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, when the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, which receives images transmitted from the door frame side presentation transmitter IC1512d and outputs them to the door frame side presentation display device 460, is unable to properly receive images transmitted from the door frame side presentation transmitter IC1512d, it is capable of outputting a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that indicates a communication failure in the image communication between the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side presentation transmitter IC1512d, to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, which is the presentation control microprocessor.The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the LCD display control unit 1512 to generate a message stating "A failure has occurred in the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store staff member," which is an image that indicates a communication failure, and this generated image can be displayed in the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600 to alert the user. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is able to detect malfunctions in the door frame side effect display device 460 caused by communication problems during image communication at an early stage, and alert the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 so that the player can inform a hall staff member, or can directly alert a hall staff member who happens to be passing by the pachinko machine 1, allowing the hall staff member to begin work to resolve the malfunction at an early stage after it occurs. Therefore, by detecting and resolving malfunctions in the door frame side effect display device 460 at an early stage, it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, if there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., between the transmitter and the receiver, even once during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, and the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is capable of repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, indicating that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating the communication malfunction between the image communications will begin to be transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can continue to repeatedly output connection confirmation signals only during the period when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is not executing game progress by starting and stopping the first special pattern or second special pattern game on the first special pattern display 1403 or second special pattern display 1405, thereby helping to resolve the communication problem.

Then, during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, if there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once, and if the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 activates the LOCKN signal and sends a connection confirmation signal to inform the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to start transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 to resolve the communication malfunction between the image communications. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the main control board 1310 starts varying the first special pattern or second special pattern game on the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 and restarts the game while the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the main control board 1310 continues to repeatedly output a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d stops outputting a connection confirmation signal, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d stops sending a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and can output an image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can move in the direction of resolving the communication malfunction by repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal, which is a malfunction resolution signal, only during the period when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has started to vary and stopped the first special symbol or second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and is not executing the game. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the display is stopped and game progress is not being executed, even if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts varying the first or second special pattern game on the first special pattern display device 1403 or second special pattern display device 1405 and starts game progress again, distortion of the performance (image disturbance) progressing on the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be eliminated each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and finishes game progress again (each time the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period) occurs).

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 is equipped with the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on whether a game ball launched by the ball launching device 650 toward the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, which are start areas provided in the game area 5a. The payout control board 951 is equipped with the payout control MPU 952a of FIG. 70, which is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands of FIG. 88(a) and (b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is equipped with at least RAM (main control internal RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control internal RAM is designed to store information related to games even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, is equipped with at least RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built into the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM is designed to store information related to payouts even after a power outage.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from when the power is turned on until the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, it outputs the RAM clear signal shown in FIG. 77 to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, to erase information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when it is operated within the period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed, it outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor It also has a RAM clear function that outputs the signal to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the game control microprocessor, and an error reset function that, when operated after the period from power-on during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 92 is performed (or the period from power-on during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed), outputs the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as an error reset signal for resetting an error that has occurred regarding the payout device 830, without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor.

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from power-on to the period in which the judgment process of step S16 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92 is performed, it outputs the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, to erase information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when it is operated within the period from power-on to the period in which the payout control unit power-on processing is performed, it outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, which is the payout control MPU 952a, as a RAM clear signal to erase information about the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM. When operated after the period from power-on during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed (or the period from power-on during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed), the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 is output to the payout control microprocessor, payout control MPU 952a, as an error release signal for clearing an error that has occurred in the payout device 830, without being output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. Therefore, by operating a single operation switch 954, two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, can be provided in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error release function while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input section of the panel relay board 4161 is a circuit to which detection signals are input from various detection sensors arranged on the game board, such as the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, the vibration detection sensor, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signals from each detection sensor are input is the same, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 will be taken as an example of a detection sensor and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described here.

In gaming machines, there has been a constant stream of fraudulent gaming practices in which players attempt to gain unfair benefits by manipulating the flow of gaming balls at will, for example by bringing magnets (for example, permanent magnets or electromagnets) close to gaming balls that have been shot into the gaming area.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming behavior and prevent it through the use of light-emitting devices, audio alarms, etc., magnetic detection sensors 4024 capable of detecting magnetism are provided in correspondence with predetermined positions in the gaming area.

The following provides an overview of the control over game progress and presentation in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of these processes. Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (display images such as designs, various background images, letters, characters, etc.) and the display mode and operation mode of various components that contribute to the effect (such as the effect operation unit 400 and movable components) based on the control signals (control commands) output by the main control board 1310.

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs special symbol process processing each time an interrupt process is performed. This special control process first performs first and second start port winning process. This first and second start port winning process determines whether a game ball has entered a start port, and if it determines that a winning has occurred, it performs processing such as increasing the number of reserved balls on the corresponding special symbol side by 1.

When the first and second starting port winning processing is complete, if the processing flag is 0, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, provided that the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, the pending jackpot determination is completed and executed, and the result of this jackpot determination (whether it was a win or a loss, its type, etc.) is stored, after which the processing flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, when the first and second starting port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 1, a variation pattern setting process is executed. This variation pattern setting process determines and sets the variation pattern (such as the time it takes for the special pattern to stop displaying from the start of its variation display until it stops) and the stopping pattern (such as a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) of the special pattern (identification pattern) displayed on the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device based on the stored jackpot determination results and the current game state, and then updates the processing flag to "2".

On the other hand, when the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 2, the during-variation processing is executed. In this during-variation processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing is monitored by a timer, and when the timer times out, the variable display of the special pattern on the first special pattern display or second special pattern display is stopped. After this, if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the processing selection flag is updated to "3", and if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (a miss), the processing selection flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start over from the fluctuation start processing.

On the other hand, when the first and second starting port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 3, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game processing, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated to set the jackpot game mode (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, and the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled based on this. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, the operation of the condition device is stopped, and if the type of jackpot won is a special type, the game state flag is updated to indicate that the game is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a probability variable state, and then the processing flag is updated to "0." In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start again from the variable start processing.

Note that multiple types of fluctuation patterns are stored. The fluctuation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the special symbol fluctuation, and by transmitting this information to the peripheral control board 1510, it can also determine the type of presentation pattern that appears on the presentation display device 1600. In this embodiment, the multiple types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a jackpot fluctuation pattern, a miss reach fluctuation pattern, and a miss fluctuation pattern. A jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and the presentation display device 1600 executes a presentation in which, after a reach performance, the decorative symbol fluctuation display ultimately displays a confirmed, stopped jackpot symbol. A miss reach fluctuation is a fluctuation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a miss and a reach determination based on a reach random number determines that a reach will be performed, and the presentation display device 1600 executes a presentation in which, after a reach performance, the decorative symbol fluctuation display ultimately displays a confirmed, stopped missing symbol. A miss variation occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a miss and the reach determination based on the reach random number does not determine that a reach should be made. The effect display device 1600 executes an effect in which the decorative pattern variation display ultimately develops to display a confirmed stop of a miss pattern, without going through a reach effect. The variation pattern is also specified so that it can be identified as either the first special pattern side or the second special pattern side.

In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the results of jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and references this information to make it possible to display these decorative symbol variation patterns. Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 not only displays decorative symbol variation patterns on the effect display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, but also performs control such as changing the effect display (background and pending image) related to the expectation level, changing the state (display and movement) of the effect operation unit 400, and operating movable components such as the rear-down movable effect unit 3100.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. Figure 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric device control process (Figure 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program has transitioned to the special symbol and special electric device control processing (Figure 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes the first start hole passage processing (step S5232), such as obtaining a random number for determining the first jackpot from the random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol reserve memory area of the main control built-in RAM, provided that the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the on state (ball has entered the first start hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), as shown in Figure 104. Furthermore, if the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the second start hole 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second start hole passing process is executed, such as obtaining the second special random number of the second special pattern (random number for determining a second jackpot) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special pattern reserved memory area of the main control's built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot execution flag, which indicates that control is being exercised in the jackpot gaming state, is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed to control the jackpot gaming state.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops indicates either an "8R guaranteed jackpot A" or an "8R normal jackpot," control is made to an 8R jackpot game state in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005,
When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates a mode suggesting a "16R guaranteed jackpot," the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated 16 times to set the state to a 16R jackpot game mode.
When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates a mode suggesting "8R guaranteed jackpot B," control is made to an 8R jackpot game state in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or is closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) eight times,
- When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops indicates a mode that suggests a "2R normal jackpot," the game is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) and then closed, repeating an opening and closing pattern (round play) twice.

In other words, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, right-handed hits are more advantageous to the player than left-handed hits when the time-saving control is being implemented, and left-handed hits are more advantageous to the player than right-handed hits when the time-saving control is not being implemented. In this regard, in the left-handed hit state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special pattern in response to the acceptance of a gaming ball into the first starting port 2002, only a maximum of eight rounds of long-term open jackpot gaming state (approximately 1,000 gaming balls can be won) will occur.

In contrast, in the right-hand hitting state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol in response to the reception of a game ball into the second starting port 2004, there is an approximately 50% probability (allocation rate of winning types) of entering a jackpot game state with a long 16-round open period (approximately 2000 game balls can be won). As a result, the expected number of prize balls that can be won when a jackpot is won is higher, so when the machine is controlled to transition to the right-hand hitting state, it can be expected to win more prize balls than when it is in the left-hand hitting state.

In the jackpot control process, before starting the opening control of the jackpot opening 2005, the process first starts the operation of the condition device, resets the fluctuation count counter (described below), and so on.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the jackpot opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, the high probability flag and time-saving flag are set according to the type of jackpot that triggered the jackpot game.

The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state and is used in the jackpot determination process shown in Figure 109, which will be described later. It is set when the jackpot gaming state based on a jackpot controlled by probability variable (8R probability variable jackpot A, 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B) ends after the jackpot gaming state ends, and is reset when the next jackpot occurs by the first special symbol stop process shown in Figure 114, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop process, not shown.

The time-saving flag is a flag that indicates that time-saving control is in progress (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state). As shown in FIG. 110, it is set when the jackpot gaming state based on a jackpot (8R special jackpot A, 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) that is subject to time-saving control (high-probability time-saving state) after the jackpot gaming state ends, and is reset when the next jackpot occurs by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 (described later) or the second special symbol stop process (not shown). Alternatively, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 (described later) or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) when 100 special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) have been displayed without a jackpot being won since the low-probability time-saving state occurred.

The variation count counter indicates the number of times the special symbol has varied since the variation count counter was reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112, which will be described later. It is updated (e.g., counted up) when a variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs, and is reset when a jackpot game state based on at least a specific type of jackpot (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) begins.

Also, if the big win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5235), the next step is step S5236, where it is determined whether the small win in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised to a small win gaming state, is set. If the small win in progress flag is set, the small win control process (step S5240b) is executed to control the small win gaming state. Note that the small win control process involves opening the big prize opening 2005 for a specific opening time (e.g., 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small win control process (step S5240b), unlike the big win control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big win slot 2005 is performed, the various setting processes such as the high probability flag, time-saving flag, and time-saving count counter are not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), a small win is not won in the big win determination.

Also, if the small win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5236), and the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second big win stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area, is "0" (step S5237), a first special pattern process is executed (step S5238), which includes a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops.

In contrast, if the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second jackpot stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area, is not "0" (step S5237), a second special symbol process is executed (step S5239), including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol stops. As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the reserved second special symbol does not run out (as long as the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0"), only the lottery for the random numbers for determining a second jackpot will be held continuously without interruption, regardless of the reserved status of the lottery for the first special symbol (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving mode (high-probability time-saving mode), the player can simply maintain hitting the game ball to the right of the center device 2500 (right hit) to continuously and uninterruptedly perform the lottery (determination process) for the random number used to determine the second jackpot.

Note that the special symbol game (symbol variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol); for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 and a start win occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start wins occurred, and it may be possible to determine from the stored data whether to start the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Figure 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passage process (step S5232).

Now, assuming that in the processing of step S5231, the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 105, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for determining a jackpot, random number for determining a reach, random number for the jackpot symbol, random number for the variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5241.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and determines whether the reserved number of the first special symbol is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S5242). If it is determined in the processing of step S5242 that the reserved number of the first special symbol is not its maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5243 to S5245 is performed to set the variable display of the first special symbol (determination processing for the first special symbol) to a new reserved state.

That is, first, in the processing of step S5243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in the processing of step S5244, each random number obtained in step S5241 is stored in a first special symbol reserved memory area within the memory area of the main control built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter.

Next, a first special symbol pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading effect on the first special symbol side, and the process ends (step S5245). As will be described later, the first special symbol pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests the first special symbol's judgment result (or its expected value) in advance before the first special symbol's variable display begins. In this first special symbol pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information required to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the content of the effect (e.g., information regarding the result of the pre-reading determination, information regarding the symbol type for the pre-reading determination, information regarding the variable pattern number for the pre-reading determination, etc.), and stores this information in a corresponding memory area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, instead of the first special symbol's judgment result itself, information regarding the stopped symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of jackpot game may be included in the command. For example, information prior to the final determination stage, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group, potential hit group, or small hit group among the variable patterns, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5242 that the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol is at its maximum value, the display of the variable first special symbol will not be newly reserved. In other words, by ending the process without executing steps S5243 to S5245, the display of the variable first special symbol will not be newly reserved.

Figure 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passage process (step S5234).

Now, assuming that in the processing of step S5233, the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 106, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, random number for second jackpot symbol, random number for second variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5251.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and determines whether the reserved number of the second special symbol is its maximum value of "4" based on this counter value (step S5252). If it is determined in the processing of step S5252 that the reserved number of the second special symbol is not its maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5253 to S5255 is performed to newly place the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) on hold.

That is, first, in the processing of step S5253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in the processing of step S5254, each random number obtained in step S5251 is stored in a second special symbol reserved memory area in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter.

Next, a second special symbol pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side, and the process ends (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests the judgment result (or its expected value) of the second special symbol before the variable display of the second special symbol begins. In this second special symbol pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (such as win/loss information, symbol type, variable pattern number) required to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the content of the effect, and stores this in a corresponding memory area as information to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, instead of the judgment result of the second special symbol itself, information regarding the stopped symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of jackpot game may be included in the command. For example, information at a stage before the final decision is made, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group among the variable patterns, or the potential hit group and small hit group among the symbol types, may be sent as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5252 that the number of reserved second special symbols is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the process without executing steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 2002, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command indicating the number of reserved first special symbols (first reserved number designation command 0-4) and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510. When the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command indicating the number of reserved second special symbols (second reserved number designation command 0-4) and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 107 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first special symbol process (step S5238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric device control process are similar program modules, and only the random numbers and tables used for judgment are different. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes will be selectively executed depending on the first special symbol process flag.

1. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280) reads the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control's built-in RAM, and performs a lottery based on the read jackpot determination random number to determine the display mode of the first special symbol when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped.

2. First Special Symbol Stop Pattern Setting Process (Step S5281) determines the display mode of the first special symbol when the control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the results of the determination process regarding the display mode when the control of the first special symbol is stopped.

3. First variation pattern setting process (step S5282) performs a lottery to determine the variation of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 based on the variation display pattern random number, and the variation of the effect display executed in response to the special symbol on the effect display device (gameboard-side effect display device) 1600.

4. First special symbol change processing (step S5283) that waits until the first special symbol display 1403 stops changing.

5. First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) stops the display of the first special symbol so that the display mode of the first special symbol when the control of the first special symbol is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the results of the determination processing regarding the display mode when the control of the first special symbol is stopped.

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that normal processing of the first special symbol should be performed, as shown in FIG. 108, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines, in step S5301, whether or not there is a display change of the reserved first special symbol based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter. If it is determined that there is a display change of the reserved first special symbol, then, in step S5302, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (e.g., first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variable display pattern random number) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, in steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops (e.g., first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variable display pattern random number) stored in each memory area of the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserve memory area has four memory areas (first special symbol reserve memory area a through first special symbol reserve memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to a start winning at the first start gate 2002 are stored in the first (earliest) memory area, starting with the first (earliest) memory area. When a start winning occurs while a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) memory area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1-3) memory area. When the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out, and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2-4) memory area. This allows the order in which the first special symbol variable display reservations occurred to be stored in a identifiable order, and the variable display reservations are released in order, starting with the earliest reservation (the reservation that occurred earliest). Similarly, the second special symbol reserve memory area has four memory areas (second special symbol reserve memory area a through second special symbol reserve memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to a start winning at the second start port 2004 are stored in the first (earliest) area in order. When a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1-3) memory area. When the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out, and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2-4) memory area. This allows the order in which the second special symbol variable display reservations occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the variable display reservations are released in order, starting with the earliest reservation (the reservation that occurred earliest).

Then, in step S5305, a jackpot determination process is performed, which determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred, based on the first jackpot determination random number read out. This process then ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) to transition to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the high probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5312), and if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), it selects the low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5313), and compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in Figure 110 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM and includes a low-probability jackpot determination table for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) used when the game state is low probability (low-probability non-time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state), and a high-probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is high probability (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state). In the low-probability jackpot determination table, which is referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the first jackpot determination random numbers (65,536 types) are associated with each other so that the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot, and the 65,332 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the miss determination value indicating a miss (low-probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 321). In contrast, in the low probability jackpot determination table that is referenced for comparison with the second special pattern jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) within the second special pattern process executed in step S5239 of the special pattern and special electric device control process, 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot, and 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (low probability jackpot; approximately 1 in 321).

In addition, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, the 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value, and the 63,496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value (jackpot probability during high probability: approximately 1 in 32). In contrast, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random numbers in the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric device control processing, the 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot, and the 63,496 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (jackpot probability during high probability: approximately 1 in 32). The jackpot determination values set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number may be different (the number of jackpot determination values may be the same but the jackpot determination values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot determination values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, it is sufficient to make the jackpot determination values of at least one of the low probability jackpot determination table and the high probability jackpot determination table different (both may be different).

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing, it sets a jackpot flag indicating that the variation has resulted in a jackpot (step S5316) and terminates the jackpot determination process.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S5315 above that the jackpot has not been won, a determination is made based on the selected jackpot determination table as to whether the read-out jackpot determination random number matches the small jackpot determination value, which indicates that a small jackpot has been won (step S5317). However, as mentioned above, in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing (second special pattern process processing) in this example, a jackpot determination random number that matches the small jackpot determination value is not read out (small jackpot probability: 0 in 65,536), so in this step S5317 it is determined that the small jackpot has not been won (determined as a miss).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the win is a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM and includes a reach determination table for a high probability non-time-saving state used when the game state is a high probability non-time-saving state, a reach determination table for a high probability time-saving state used when the game state is a high probability time-saving state, and a reach determination table for a low probability state used when the game state is a low probability state (low probability non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach determination table for the high-probability time-saving state, the reach determination random numbers are associated so that one type of reach determination random number matches a reach determination value indicating a reach, and 71 types of reach determination random numbers match reach determination values indicating a reach is not reached. However, in the reach determination table for the high-probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the speed at which games progress when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach determination random numbers may match reach determination values indicating a reach is not reached, and none may match reach determination values indicating a reach is reached.

In addition, in the reach determination table for the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers, including the same reach determination random numbers as those set in the reach determination table for the high probability time-saving state, are associated with the reach determination values indicating a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach determination random numbers are associated with reach determination values indicating a reach will not occur. In this way, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating a reach will occur is higher than in the high probability time-saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table for the high-probability non-time-save state, five types of reach determination random numbers, including the same reach determination random numbers as those set in the reach determination tables for the high-probability time-save state and the low-probability state, are associated with the reach determination values indicating a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach determination random numbers are associated with reach determination values indicating a reach will not occur. In this way, in this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-save state, the reach determination values indicating a reach will occur are the same as in the low-probability non-time-save state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319) and determines that the reach is missed (YES in step S5120), it sets a reach flag indicating that the change is a reach and ends processing (step S5121).

Figure 111 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, i.e., the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305). The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the pattern determination table shown in FIG. 110(B) and compares the random number for the first jackpot pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the selected pattern determination table to determine the jackpot pattern as the state when the variable control of the first special pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S5332).

As shown in Figure 110(B), the symbol determination table for the first special symbol stores random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the first jackpot symbol) associated with the respective judgment results (8R special jackpot A, 8R regular jackpot). As shown in Figure 110(C), the symbol determination table for the second special symbol stores random numbers for the second jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second jackpot symbol) associated with the respective judgment results (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B, 2R regular jackpot).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the judgment result associated with the acquired random number for the jackpot symbol. In this example, the symbol determination table is set so that the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol is different from the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol. More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) between a special jackpot, which triggers a transition to a high-probability state, and a regular jackpot, which does not trigger a transition to a high-probability state, is the same, but the expected value of game balls that can be obtained from a jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol is greater than the expected value of game balls that can be obtained from a jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol.

The specific gameplay and presentation details for each type of jackpot are summarized below.
1. After a jackpot symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the large prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the state to an 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to a high probability time-shortened state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins is performed, and the effect display device 1600 controls the state to a relatively advantageous state in the high probability time-shortened state.

2. After a jackpot symbol combination appears on the display device 1600, the large prize opening 2103 is opened for a long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize opening 2103. This repeats an open/close pattern (round play) eight times to control the game to an 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 2103. After this 8R jackpot game state, the game is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the special symbol variable display is consumed 100 times (or until a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are consumed). During the 8R jackpot game state, a battle effect is played in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat effect). In the low-probability time-saving state, the game is controlled to a display mode that indicates a relatively unfavorable state on the display device 1600. 8R normal jackpot

3. After a jackpot symbol combination appears on the display device 1600, the large prize slot 2103 is opened for a long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize slot 2103. This closes the opening and closing pattern (round play) 16 times, controlling the game to a 16R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for game balls to enter the large prize slot 2103. After this 16R jackpot game state, the game is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs. During the 16R jackpot game state, an additional challenge effect is performed in which an effect (success effect) is displayed to indicate whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 (or becomes 16). After a predetermined period of time has passed since the high-probability time-saving state was entered, the game is controlled to a relatively favorable state, indicating a 16R probability jackpot.

4. After a jackpot symbol combination appears on the display device 1600, the large prize slot 2103 is opened for a long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize slot 2103. This closes the opening and closing pattern (round play) eight times, controlling the game to an 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for game balls to enter the large prize slot 2103. After this 8R jackpot game state, the game is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs. During the 8R jackpot game state, an additional challenge effect is performed in which an effect (failure effect) is displayed to determine whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 (16). After a predetermined period of time has passed since the high-probability time-saving state was entered, the game display device 1600 is controlled to a relatively favorable state. 8R Probable Jackpot B

5. After a jackpot symbol combination appears on the display device 1600, the large prize opening 2103 is opened for a short time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize opening 2103. This closes the opening and closing pattern (round play) twice, controlling the game to a 2R jackpot game state in which game balls are less likely to enter the large prize opening 2103. After this 2R jackpot game state, the game is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the special symbol fluctuation display is consumed 100 times (or until a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are consumed). During the 2R jackpot game state, a battle effect is played in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat effect). In the low-probability time-saving state, the game is controlled to a display mode indicated on the display device 1600 to indicate a relatively unfavorable state. 2R normal jackpot

In addition, in the above-mentioned left-hand hitting state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-hand hitting state, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 2004, and only the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, and unless there is a reserved ball with the second special pattern, only the variable display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display 1403 is executed, and a jackpot related to the first special pattern (8R special jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) occurs. Similarly, in the above-mentioned right-hand hitting state, the game ball does not enter the first starting port 2002. Therefore, in the right-hand hitting state, only the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 will occur, and unless there is a reserved ball with the first special pattern, only the variable display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display 1186 will be executed, resulting in a jackpot related to the second special pattern (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B, 2R regular jackpot).

Furthermore, in the case of a jackpot associated with the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2103 open for a maximum long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times, and approximately 1,000 game balls are paid out, whereas in the case of a jackpot associated with the second special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2103 open for a maximum long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated 16 times, and approximately 2,000 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, if an 8R special jackpot A is determined in the first special symbol stopping symbol setting process, the jackpot symbol will be the 8R special jackpot A symbol, and if an 8R regular jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol will be the 8R regular jackpot symbol. Also, although not shown, if a 16R special jackpot is determined in the second special symbol stopping symbol setting process, the jackpot symbol will be the 16R special jackpot symbol, if an 8R special jackpot B is determined, the jackpot symbol will be the 8R special jackpot B symbol, and if a 2R regular jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol will be the 2R regular jackpot symbol.

Furthermore, if the big win flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether the small win flag is set in step S5333. If the small win flag is set in the processing corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process processing (step S5239), the small win symbol (unique symbol stop pattern) is determined as the pattern when the second special symbol stops changing (step S5334), and then the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small win flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the pattern when the special pattern stops changing to be a losing pattern (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337.

After the process for determining the stopping symbol has been carried out in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results in step S5337 so that the lottery result (indicating the type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the type of stopping symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, in step S5338, the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process transitions to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282), at which point this process ends.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displaying the left, center, and right decorative patterns and stopping them in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern (note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may be displayed synchronously as the same pattern and stopped at the same time)). For example, if a jackpot other than a 2R regular jackpot is won, the peripheral control MPU 1511a will determine a combination of three decorative patterns on the left, center, and right. On the other hand, if a 2R regular jackpot is won, a specific pattern combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, center, and right decorative patterns is not the same as the other patterns) will be determined. Furthermore, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern accompanied by a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns between "0" and "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern not accompanied by a reach (a combination of the left, center, and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined. The stopped patterns thus determined are displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of the progress of play, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a winning display (special display mode) before the jackpot play begins, and displays a display during the jackpot play after the jackpot play begins.

Figure 112 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, if the jackpot flag is set (step S5341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table for a jackpot (not shown) corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5342); if the small jackpot flag is set (step S5343), it selects a variation pattern table for a small jackpot (not shown) (step S5344); if the reach flag is set (step S5345), it selects a variation pattern table for a reach (not shown) (step S5346); and if none of the jackpot flag, small jackpot flag, or reach flag is set, i.e., if it is a normal miss (a miss where a reach effect is not executed), it selects a variation pattern table for a miss (not shown) (step S5347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S5348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern will be initiated, thereby initiating the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 (step S5349). The main control MPU 1310a also sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). This processing is then terminated when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) to transition the process to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283). As a result, the first special symbol variation display control is performed on the first special symbol display device 1403 for the determined variation time, and the performance control is performed on the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the special symbol variation display.

In this example, multiple types of fluctuation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on the random numbers for determining a jackpot (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) and the random numbers for the jackpot symbols (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table store multiple fluctuation time information indicating the predetermined time (fluctuation time) required to control the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), each associated with a corresponding random number for the first variable display pattern. The main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table from among multiple variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination results based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot pattern random number with the random number for the variable display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing, and obtains from this table the variation time information associated with the read random number for the variable display pattern to determine the variation pattern of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). This enables determination processing to be performed on the variation pattern of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). The variation pattern table is stored in the main control's built-in ROM.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, a small win will not be won, so the fluctuation pattern table for small wins is not used. In this example, a small win will not be won, but it is possible to make it so that a small win is won.

In addition, the variable display pattern table for reach in this example is set up to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute with the random number for the variable display pattern. For example, in the non-time-saving mode, 164 of the 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (0-163) indicating the execution of one of the normal reach effects, 59 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164-222) indicating the execution of one of the super reach effects with low jackpot expectations, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (223-240) indicating the execution of one of the super reach effects with high jackpot expectations.

The Super Reach effect (SP effect) has a higher probability of winning than the Normal Reach effect, and for players hoping for a jackpot game state, the player's expectations for a jackpot game state increase when the Super Reach effect is executed. In other words, this type of Super Reach effect has the highest selection rate in the jackpot variation pattern table, which makes it possible to increase the player's expectations for a jackpot game state even if a miss is ultimately displayed. In reality, however, to sufficiently increase the player's expectations for a jackpot game state, it is necessary for a high-expectation preview effect, which is drawn separately from the variation pattern, to appear (combined) during the period in which the Super Reach effect is being executed.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table for when a loss occurs, which is provided in correspondence with the random number for determining a first jackpot and the random number for the first jackpot symbol and is used to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, has a fluctuation time of 12 seconds set common to both the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern table for when a loss occurs, which is provided in correspondence with the random number for determining a second jackpot and the second symbol random number and is used to determine the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, allows a fluctuation time of 0.1 to 12 seconds to be set for the time-saving state, and sets a fluctuation time of 12 seconds for the non-time-saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same during both the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, and while the first special symbol is fluctuating in the time-saving state, the game ball is encouraged to enter the second start hole 2004 and time is secured for the player to enter the game ball into the second start hole 2004.

In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected as the variable time when the second special symbol is a miss, it will be possible to prevent each game ball that is shot into the game area 5a at 0.6 second intervals in a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state) from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

In other words, a gaming ball hit to the right is supplied to the area directly above gate 2003. When the game ball is received from this area by gate 2003 during a time-saving mode (such as a high-probability time-saving mode), a win is obtained as a normal symbol (e.g., a 100% probability of winning), and the movable piece that opens and closes second start opening 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). This enables control to be implemented so that, even in a situation where balls can be received successively by second start opening 2004 (a time-saving mode in which almost all game balls hit to the right of center device 2500 can be received by second start opening 2004), each time a gaming ball is received, the lottery draws for the second special symbol are completed one after another with a high probability of winning (approximately 1 in 32) (the probability in a high-probability mode).

In this example, since game balls are launched at 0.6 second intervals while the player is operating the handle 302, game balls are often received by the second starting port 2004 at 0.6 second intervals in a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state). In this regard, as described above, in this example, the variation pattern table for when the second special symbol is lost based on a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 can be set to an extremely short variation time of 0.1 seconds in a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state). In other words, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation ends in just 0.1 seconds, which is less than the interval between game ball launches (0.6 seconds). Therefore, even in a situation where game balls launched at 0.6 second intervals are received one after another by the second starting port 2004, the game balls are prevented from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

Figure 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol change processing (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, in step S5371, subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer, which is set to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery processing for the fluctuation pattern (step S5282). As a result, if the fluctuation time timer reaches 0, i.e., it is determined that the lottery-determined fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in step S5373, the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284), and the process ends.

If the variable time timer has not reached 0 despite the variable time timer being decremented by 1 (step S5371), steps S5371 and S5372 will be repeated each time the timer interrupt process is performed until the variable time timer reaches 0 (until the time to stop the symbol from being fixed).

Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control in step S5381 to cause the first special symbol display device 1403 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing, and sets a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the performance display device 1600 to display the derived display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol (step S5382).

If the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state (step S5387), sets the waiting time until the start of the jackpot gaming state (the time during which a message indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state is displayed) in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets a jackpot in progress flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is in progress, resets the high probability flag if set, and resets the time-saving flag if set (step S5389). The main control MPU 1310a resets the fluctuation counter, updates the first special symbol process flag to its initial value so that the process transitions to the first special symbol normal processing (step S5394), and then terminates this processing. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the processing in step S5235 above will determine that the jackpot execution flag has been set, and the jackpot game state will be executed in the jackpot control processing (step S5240a) described above.

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually for each type of jackpot. In step S5387, a jackpot start command (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) is set. As a result, the jackpot game state effects (battle effects or additional challenge effects) corresponding to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot start command are executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamps/LEDs, the speakers, etc.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of step S5386 above that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), it is first determined whether or not the game is in the low-probability time-saving mode (step S5390). If the game is in the low-probability time-saving mode, it is determined whether or not the number of special symbol changes that have occurred since the game was switched to the low-probability time-saving mode has reached a predetermined upper limit (100 in this case) (step S5391). In other words, when the number of special symbol changes that have occurred since the game was switched to the low-probability time-saving mode has reached the predetermined upper limit (100), it is determined that the conditions for terminating the low-probability time-saving mode have been met, and the time-saving function is stopped, causing a transition to the normal game mode (low-probability non-time-saving game mode) (step S5392).

After the time-saving function is processed, the system determines whether the small win flag is set (step S5393). If the small win flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small win start command is set (step S5394), indicating the start of the small win game state. The interval timer is set to the waiting time until the start of the small win game state (the time during which a message indicating the start of the small win game state is displayed) (step S5395). The system then sets a small win in-progress flag (step S5396), indicating that the small win game state is in progress. The first special symbol process flag is updated to its initial value, i.e., the first special symbol normal process (step S5394), and the system terminates this process. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the system determines that the small win in-progress flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small win game state is executed in the small win control process (step S5240b) described above. Incidentally, unlike when a big win is won, the game state does not change when this small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is considered a miss, and no processing related to the big win or small win is performed. The first special symbol process flag is updated to its initial value, which is the first special symbol normal processing, and this processing ends (step S5394). In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined that the big win in progress flag or small win in progress flag is not set (steps S5235, S5236), and processing related to the progress of a new game (lottery or symbol control) will be performed according to the pending status (steps S5237-S5239).

Figure 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric device control process (step S116).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, then, as shown in FIG. 115, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs gate section passing processing in the processing of step S5402, such as first obtaining the normal random number for the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol reserved memory area of RAM.

Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process is performed on the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation processing (step S5405) that waits until the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 1402 stops.
4. A normal pattern stop process (step S5406) for stopping the variable display of the normal pattern so that the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern determined based on the result of the lottery process for stopping the variable control of the normal pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402.
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the state when the normal symbol fluctuation control is stopped indicates a state suggesting a "normal symbol win," the movable piece is opened to execute a process for controlling the second starting opening 2004 to allow the game ball to be received (step S5407).

The normal symbol process flag is set to its initial value to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) should be performed.

Figure 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passing process (step S5402).

Now, assuming that in the processing of step S5401, the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 116, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a in the processing of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether the reserved number of normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

If it is determined in step S5411 that the reserved number of the normal symbols is not its maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed to set the variable display control of the normal symbols to a new reserved state. That is, first, in step S5412, the normal reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S5413, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are obtained from the random number counter. Next, in step S5414, the random numbers thus obtained are stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area in the RAM memory area of the main control MPU 1310a that corresponds to the counter value of the normal reserved number counter.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S5411 that the number of reserved normal symbols is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols will not be newly reserved. In other words, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbols will not be newly placed on hold.

Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that normal processing for the normal symbol should be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines in step S5421 whether there is variable display control for the normal symbol on hold based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter. If it is determined that there is variable display control for the normal symbol on hold, then in step S5422, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the normal symbol (e.g., normal random number, normal symbol variable random number) stored in the normal symbol hold memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the RAM. Next, in steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (normal random numbers, normal pattern variable random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the normal pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the normal reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol reserve memory area has four memory areas, 1 through 4, and random numbers extracted in response to the passage of a gaming ball through the gate unit 2003 are stored in order, starting with the first (earliest) area. When a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 through 3) memory area and a gaming ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 through 3) memory area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out, and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 through 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 through 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the reserves for variable display control of the normal symbols occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the reserves for variable display control are released in order, starting with the earliest reserve (the reserve that occurred earliest).

Next, if the current game state is a time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state) (step S5426), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal win determination table (not shown) for time-saving state (step S5426); if the current game state is a non-time-saving state (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), it selects a normal win determination table (not shown) for non-time-saving state (step S5427), and compares the selected normal win determination table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal pattern normal processing (step S5428).

The normal win determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a and includes a time-saving normal win determination table used when the game state is in time-saving mode (high-probability time-saving mode), and a non-time-saving normal win determination table used when the game state is not in time-saving mode (low-probability non-time-saving mode, high-probability non-time-saving mode). In the time-saving normal win determination table, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal win determination value indicating a normal win and never match the normal loss determination value indicating a normal loss. In this way, when time is saved, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a normal win is guaranteed, and the movable piece opens, allowing game balls to enter the second starting port 2004. Instead of all 255 types, more normal random numbers than when the time-saving mode is not active may match the normal win determination value, indicating that a normal win has been achieved.

Furthermore, in the normal win determination table for non-time-saving modes, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers are associated with the normal win determination value, which indicates a normal win, and the normal random numbers are each associated with a normal loss determination value, which indicates a normal loss. In this way, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 during non-time-saving modes, it will not result in a normal win, and therefore the movable piece 2106 will not be in an open state, thereby preventing the game ball from being accepted into the second starting port 2004. However, as mentioned above, it is also possible to make it possible to win with a normal symbol even in the non-time-saving state, in which case the probability of winning is set to be lower than in the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and when the lottery result for a normal symbol is a win, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 may be opened for a shorter period of time than in the time-saving state, for example, 2 seconds, to allow the second starting port 2004 to receive a game ball, and then moved forward again to prevent the second starting port 2004 from receiving a game ball.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a normal symbol has been won as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal normal symbol processing (step S5429), it sets a normal symbol winning flag indicating that the variation has been won as a normal symbol (step S5430), and then determines the normal symbol winning pattern as the pattern when the normal symbol variation control stops (the normal symbol stopping pattern) (step S5431).On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a normal symbol has been won as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal normal symbol processing, it determines that a normal symbol has been won as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal normal symbol processing, it determines the normal symbol losing pattern as the pattern when the normal symbol variation control stops (the normal symbol stopping pattern) (step S5432). Then, when the normal pattern process flag is updated (step S5433) so that the process transitions to the normal pattern change time determination process (step S5404), this process ends.

While this control is being performed by the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the various commands sent from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby understanding the current game situation within the peripheral control unit's routine processing (received command analysis processing (step S1022)) and enabling the execution of effects appropriate to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether a start win has occurred, and if so, controls the pending display and pre-reading effects corresponding to the start win. It then updates the process flag based on the determined game status, and executes one of the following processes: waiting for a change pattern specification command, effect symbol change start processing, effect symbol change in progress processing, effect symbol change stop processing, jackpot display processing, jackpot game processing, and jackpot end effect processing.

Waiting for receiving a fluctuation pattern specification command: Until a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, this performs control related to the effects (demo effects, etc.) when the pattern is not in a fluctuation state and no control related to a jackpot is being performed, and when a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect pattern fluctuation start processing.

Performance pattern change start processing: Various performance contents (performance patterns, preview performances, etc.) during the pattern change period are determined based on the change pattern command, etc., and the decorative pattern change is controlled to begin based on the determined performance contents. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during performance pattern change. Among the variation patterns (performance patterns), many of the "variation patterns (performance patterns) that stop at a jackpot pattern" are provided as pairs with "variation patterns (performance patterns) that stop at a losing pattern," and by functioning as the same variation pattern (performance pattern), a performance is provided depending on whether a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern appears. Therefore, when describing fluctuation patterns (presentation patterns) below, unless otherwise specified, terms such as "predetermined fluctuation pattern" or "specific fluctuation pattern" refer to both "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) that stops at a jackpot symbol" and "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) that stops at a losing symbol," and as a result of the presentation progressing in the same manner, a branching point will be reached where either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol appears.

Processing during the change of the display pattern: This performs control to start the various display contents determined in the display pattern change start processing at the respective timings during the pattern change period, and when the change time ends, updates the value of the process flag to a value corresponding to the display pattern change stop processing.
Processing to stop variation of decorative symbols: Controls the stopping of variation of decorative symbols and the deriving and display of the display result (stopped symbols) based on the reception of a command (symbol determination command) instructing the stopping of all symbols. When the decorative symbols are stopped at a jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display processing, and when the decorative symbols are stopped at a losing symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing to wait for reception of a variation pattern designation command.

Jackpot display processing: Controls the effects (such as display effects that notify the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a jackpot) during the period from when the decorative symbol stops on the jackpot symbol until the jackpot game begins. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot game processing.

Jackpot gameplay processing: Controls various effects during the jackpot gameplay state. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Jackpot end effect processing: The effect display device 1600 controls the effects (such as display effects informing the player that the jackpot game state has ended) during the period from the end of the jackpot game state until the changeover state is entered. The value of the process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the changeover pattern specification command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 shows a judgment table T1 of the presentation pattern (variation presentation) that is referenced in the above-mentioned presentation symbol variation start process when in normal game mode.
As shown in Fig. 118, in the judgment table T1, each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command is associated with a corresponding presentation pattern (variation presentation). Therefore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a, it determines the presentation pattern (variation presentation) associated with the variation pattern command based on the judgment table T1, and controls the start of variation of the decorative pattern based on the determined presentation pattern (variation presentation).

Note that the presentation patterns (variable presentations) do not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variable numbers indicated by the above-mentioned variable pattern commands. For example, multiple presentation patterns (variable presentations) may be associated with a single variable number indicated by a variable pattern command, and one of these presentation patterns (variable presentations) may be determined based on a presentation lottery or the game situation. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment also associates multiple presentation patterns with some of the variable numbers 1 to 22.

Furthermore, as will be explained later, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the presentation pattern (variable presentation) in this way, it performs a preview lottery (preview presentation determination process) based on the results of the jackpot determination, the pattern type, and the variation pattern, and performs control (presentation pattern variation processing) to cause the preview presentation selected in the preview lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the above-determined presentation pattern (variable presentation) is being performed, thereby making it possible to combine multiple presentation contents and indicating the likelihood of a jackpot pattern appearing based on the way they appear, etc.

In the past, among these combined effects, even if the same specific advance notice effect (for example, a timer effect) was used, multiple effects would appear while a single effect pattern (a variable effect) was being executed, with the hope of maintaining interest in the game. However, because advance notice effects could only be combined when there was a high probability of a jackpot symbol appearing, the frequency with which multiple timer effects were executed while a single effect pattern (a variable effect) was being executed naturally decreased, making it difficult to fully increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, a "timer effect" refers to a specific effect that appears during the execution of an effect pattern (variable effect). It may be implemented as a countdown effect that displays a countdown from a first predetermined value (e.g., "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (e.g., "0 seconds") until the timing of the specific effect is reached, or as a standby display (such as "preparation") before the countdown begins. In other words, in this case, when a timer effect starts counting from a first predetermined value (e.g., countdown), it is guaranteed that some effect will occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Alternatively, if the timer effect targets an effect (e.g., a conversation preview or cut-ins A and B) that produces either a relatively unfavorable effect (a low-expectation effect) or a favorable effect (a high-expectation effect) for the player, it is guaranteed that the favorable effect will occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, with timer effects (e.g., a preview-side timer effect executed as a result of a preview lottery), it is desirable to keep the identity of the target effect secret at least at the time the countdown begins. Additionally, a "timer effect target" refers to an effect that appears when the timer effect counts down from a first predetermined value (for example, a countdown) to a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"); in the timer effect, the countdown display is performed toward the timing at which the target effect occurs.

The "timer effect" in this embodiment accurately displays the time elapsed since the count started, down to two decimal points, to show the number of seconds, etc. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as a timer effect like this; as long as it is executed as a count effect that displays a count by counting up or down, it does not have to accurately show the time elapsed since the count started (such as the number of seconds, etc.).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute a timer effect (pre-notification timer effect) that appears only when the pre-notification lottery is won, as well as a timer effect (variable timer effect) that is pre-installed as the effect content of the effect pattern (variable effect) determined based on the judgment table T1. In other words, in this case, the count effect display is not only executed as "the effect content of the pre-notification effect that functions to increase the jackpot expectation rate for the effect pattern determined based on the variable pattern command," but also as "the effect content of the effect pattern itself determined based on the variable pattern command." This makes it possible to make the count effect display (timer effect) appear without unnecessarily increasing the jackpot expectation rate indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the variable pattern command (increasing the expectation rate by satisfying the condition of "winning the pre-notification lottery"). For example, if the expected probability of a jackpot is "20%" when a specific presentation pattern determined based on a fluctuation pattern command appears, then if the preview timer presentation is further executed, the combined presentation function will increase the expected probability of a jackpot to, for example, "40%," forcing the frequency of appearance to be lowered accordingly. However, if a fluctuation timer presentation is executed as part of the presentation content of the specific presentation pattern itself, it is possible to execute the timer presentation while keeping the expected probability of a jackpot at "20%" (it can appear simply by selecting a specific fluctuation pattern), making it possible to maintain an appropriate frequency of appearance.

In addition, the probability of a jackpot when a presentation pattern (variable presentation) appears in judgment table T1 varies depending on the variable number (and furthermore, the presentation pattern), and generally, the probability of a jackpot increases as the variable number increases. For example, the presentation patterns corresponding to variable numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18) all execute a variable timer presentation in which a "conversation preview" is the presentation target, but the appearance ratio is variable number 5 (6) > variable number 9 (10) > variable number 17 (18), while the probability of a jackpot when it appears is set to variable number 5 (6) < variable number 9 (10) < variable number 17 (18). For ease of explanation, only the judgment table referenced in normal game mode will be described in detail here, but the judgment tables referenced in low-probability time-saving mode and high-probability time-saving mode also include a performance pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which a variable timer performance can be executed as part of the performance content of the performance pattern itself, and can appear with a different probability than in normal game mode.

Also, in judgment table T1, variable numbers 3 to 6 are all the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but variable numbers 5 and 6 differ from variable numbers 3 and 4 in that a variable side timer effect with a conversation preview as the effect target can be executed.Also, variable numbers 7 to 14 are all the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but variable numbers 9 and 10 are different in that a variable side timer effect with a conversation preview as the effect target is executed, variable numbers 11 and 12 are different in that a variable side timer effect with a cut-in A as the effect target is executed, and variable numbers 13 and 14 are different in that a conversation preview and cut-in A are executed and a variable side timer effect with them as the effect target can be executed. Additionally, variable numbers 15 to 22 are all the same in that they all perform the same SP reach effect, but they differ in that variable numbers 17 and 18 perform a variable side timer effect with the conversation announcement as the effect target, variable numbers 19 and 20 perform a variable side timer effect with cut-in B as the effect target, and variable numbers 21 and 22 perform both the conversation announcement and cut-in B and may also perform a variable side timer effect with these as the effect target. Note that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when a variable side timer effect with cut-ins A and B as the effect target is performed than when a variable side timer effect with the conversation announcement as the effect target is performed, and furthermore, the likelihood of a jackpot tends to be higher when a variable side timer effect with both the conversation announcement and cut-ins A and B as the effect target is performed.

Note that a "conversation preview" is an effect that can appear relatively early after the effect pattern (decorative symbol variation effect) is executed and often results in a relatively low level of added expectation, whereas cut-ins A and B are effects that can appear relatively later after the effect pattern (decorative symbol variation effect) is executed and often results in a relatively high level of added expectation (or effects that always result in a relatively high level of added expectation). Therefore, a "conversation preview" is set to have a higher appearance rate (execution probability) than other effects with higher expectations (such as cut-ins A and B, or the role A and B actions described below). Also, in a character reach, the "cut-in" that appears as part of the variation effect is executed so that it corresponds to cut-in A, which appears as part of the preview effect, whereas in an SP reach, it is executed so that it corresponds to cut-in B, not cut-in A, which appears as part of the preview effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 118, the judgment table T1 according to this embodiment assigns the effect content (effect pattern) of multiple fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) as a fluctuation side timer effect. Furthermore, if the fluctuation pattern is a "predetermined type such as a shortened fluctuation or a normal reach effect with low expectation (for example, fluctuation numbers 1-6)," the count effect display as the preview side timer effect is prevented from winning (by increasing the premium level), thereby appropriately ensuring an increase in expectation when the preview side timer effect appears. However, if the fluctuation pattern is a "fluctuation pattern that executes a fluctuation side timer effect (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22)," the proportion of the fluctuation pattern that corresponds to the above-mentioned predetermined type (for example, fluctuation numbers 1-6) is lower than when the count fluctuation pattern is not one of these.

Here, there are 14 count fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) available for the execution of the variable timer effect, but only two of these (fluctuation numbers 5 and 6) (this can be set to zero) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.), so the matching rate is 2/14. In contrast, there are eight fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 1-4, 7, 8, 15, 16) available for the execution of the variable timer effect, and four of these (fluctuation numbers 1-4) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.), so the matching rate is 4/8.

In this configuration, when the effect content of the fluctuation pattern is one in which a count effect display (fluctuation side timer effect) can be performed (count fluctuation pattern), the probability that a count effect display (prediction side timer effect) cannot be executed as the effect content of the preview effect is lower than in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation side timer effect is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of multiple count displays within a single effect pattern (fluctuation effect) without unnecessarily increasing expectations and lowering the frequency of appearance.

As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22), the probability of the preview side timer effect appearing varies depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect pattern corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the preview side timer effect does not appear at all; when the effect pattern corresponding to variation numbers 9-14 is executed, the preview side timer effect can appear with a medium probability of being drawn; and when the effect pattern corresponding to variation numbers 17-22 is executed, the preview side timer effect can appear with a high probability of being drawn.

In addition, even when the effect patterns corresponding to variable numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-mentioned preview timer effect may be made to appear with a low probability. Also, even when one of the effect patterns corresponding to variable numbers 15 to 22, which have a high probability of causing the preview timer effect to appear, is executed, the preview timer effect will actually appear with a higher probability of appearing in an effect pattern that results in a jackpot than in a miss, and variable number 22 has an even higher probability of appearing than variable number 16.

In this configuration, the rate at which the count display is executed as the presentation content of the preview presentation (preview timer presentation) will differ depending on whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (e.g., variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (e.g., variation number 22). Therefore, even among the above count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) in which the rate at which multiple count displays appear within a single presentation pattern (variation presentation) is high, the rate at which multiple count displays appear can be made even higher depending on the type, which is expected to help maintain interest in the game.

In particular, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is configured so that even in presentation patterns in which the same reach type presentation content appears (e.g., character reach, SP reach), presentation patterns that include variable timer presentation as part of their presentation content (e.g., variable numbers 17-22) have a higher rate of appearance of the preview timer presentation within the execution period of that presentation pattern (the rate at which the preview timer presentation is determined to be executed in the preview lottery) than presentation patterns that do not include variable timer presentation as part of their presentation content (e.g., variable numbers 15, 16). In other words, in this case, two timer presentations (variable timer presentation, preview timer presentation) can be made to appear within one presentation pattern simply by requiring a jackpot expectation rate sufficient to win one preview timer presentation in the preview lottery, thereby enabling double timer presentation opportunities to be realized without unnecessarily increasing the jackpot expectation rate.

In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the presentation pattern (variation presentation) determined in the presentation symbol variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22), the count display format (such as the shape and color of the count numbers) is different between the variable side timer presentation (variation side count presentation display) in which a "conversation preview" is the presentation target and the variable side timer presentation (variation side count presentation display) in which a "cut-in" is the presentation target. In other words, in this case, even if a presentation pattern with the same reach presentation content (for example, variable numbers 9 and 11) is executed, by checking the count display format of the variable side timer presentation (variation side count presentation display), combined with the fact that "the appearance rate of the preview side timer presentation differs depending on which count variation pattern it is," it becomes possible to recognize and expect the likelihood of the preview side timer presentation appearing.

In addition, the manner of the count display that appears in the preview side timer effect (preview side count display) may be different from (or at least different from) the manner of the count display that appears in the variable side timer effect (variable side count display) (conversation preview, cut-in), regardless of whether the subject of the effect is the same (conversation preview, cut-in), or it may be the same as (or at least the same as) that manner.

However, for the count display executed as the preview side timer effect (preview side count display), it is beneficial to execute it in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the effect, as this will make the player aware that a preview side timer effect with a relatively high level of expectation is appearing, thereby increasing the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more desirable for the preview side timer effect to be different from any of the count display modes (conversation preview, cut-in) that appear in the variable side timer effect (variable side count display). For the above common mode as the preview side timer effect (preview side count display), multiple modes with different levels of expectation (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are available, and any of these may be executed.

Furthermore, to make it easier to recognize that the preview timer effect is being executed, it is desirable to have different count speeds (for example, the speed at which the numbers change when counting up or down) for the count display when the preview timer effect is executed and the count display when the variable timer effect is executed. With this configuration, even while the count display is progressing after the timer effect has started, players can focus on the count speed of the timer effect, creating interest in whether the variable timer effect, which has a relatively low expectation, or the preview timer effect, which has a relatively high expectation, is being executed, thereby maintaining interest in the game during the timer expiration period.

In addition, in this case, depending on the target of the effect (conversation preview, cut-in), the count can be displayed in two ways: at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed as) the count speed of the preview timer effect (cut-in), or at a speed relatively not close to the count speed of the preview timer effect (conversation preview), which makes it more interesting by varying the difficulty of determining whether the preview timer effect is being executed. Also, while the count is displayed by repeatedly appearing and disappearing the count numbers in the variable timer effect (or preview timer effect), the count can be displayed by continuously displaying the count numbers in the preview timer effect (or variable timer effect).

With this configuration, when a situation arises in which the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the preview timer effect are executed simultaneously, it becomes easy to understand whether the preview timer effect is being executed, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment sets multiple selectable presentation patterns for the variable-side timer presentation (count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, and 17-22) that differ in the start or end timing of the count display (total count or time required to consume all counts). When a variable-side timer presentation pattern is acquired, one of the multiple presentation patterns is selected based on a random number or other design element. This differentiates the ease with which the variable-side timer presentation count display and the preview-side timer presentation count display can be simultaneously executed (e.g., the larger the total count, the more likely they are to overlap), thereby varying the ease of determining whether the preview-side timer presentation is being executed and adding interest.

In this embodiment, multiple presentation patterns (the target of the timer presentation and the content of the reach presentation are the same) with different start or end timings of the count display (total number of counts or the time required to consume all counts) are prepared for one fluctuation pattern, but it is also possible to prepare multiple different fluctuation patterns for multiple presentation patterns (the target of the timer presentation and the type of reach presentation executed as the content of the fluctuation pattern are the same for each presentation pattern) with different start or end timings of the count display (total number of counts or the time required to consume all counts) and have them correspond one-to-one.

In addition, by making the count display number (total count number) different when it appears in the variable timer effect and the preview timer effect, or by making the selection rate of the specific count display number different between the variable timer effect and the preview timer effect even if the same specific count display number is selectable, it becomes more interesting by making it more difficult to determine whether the preview timer effect is being executed.

Furthermore, by executing the preview timer effect with a countdown display, while executing the variable timer effect with a countup display, it becomes possible to determine with certainty whether the preview timer effect is being executed, which is expected to significantly increase interest in the game.Furthermore, by executing the preview timer effect with a countdown display, while executing the variable timer effect for a specific effect (for example, a conversation preview) with a countup display, and executing the variable timer effect for an effect other than the specific effect (for example, a cut-in) with a countdown display, it becomes possible to vary the difficulty of determining whether the preview timer effect is being executed depending on the effect target, adding to the excitement.

As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment controls the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect so that there are cases where the same effect is the target of the effect, and cases where different effects are the target of the effect. When the same effect (for example, a conversation preview) is the target of the effect in the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect, the probability of a jackpot being lower is set to be higher than when different effects are the target of the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect, and even when the same effect (for example, a conversation preview) is the target of the effect in the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect, the end timing of each count display is set to be different.

In other words, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, a conversation announcement) is the target of both the variable timer effect and the announcement timer effect, one of the variable timer effect and the announcement timer effect will reach a predetermined value first and end, while the count display of the other will continue, so at this point it will appear as if a different effect is the target of the effect (the timer effect is being executed in a relatively highly anticipated manner). Then, after this, the other count display that was continuing will also reach a predetermined value and end in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (for example, a conversation announcement) is the target of the effect. Therefore, even if the timer effect that ended first makes it clear that a conversation announcement with relatively low expectations is the target of the effect, it is expected that the anticipation of a different effect that may appear later will be the target of the effect (the timer effect is being executed in a relatively highly anticipated manner), thereby increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the same effect (for example, a conversation preview) is targeted by both the variable timer effect and the preview timer effect, it is desirable to have separate count end corresponding displays (for example, "Count successful!", "Chance UP!", etc.) appear when the variable timer effect reaches a predetermined value and when the preview timer effect reaches a predetermined value.

More specifically, a variable-side timer effect and a notice-side timer effect, each targeting a "conversation notice" executed as either a variable-side or notice-side effect, are each displayed within a single effect pattern. In this case, the count display of the variable-side timer effect and the count display of the notice-side timer effect progress simultaneously, but in the variable-side timer effect, the count display progresses in accordance with the variable-side specific effect that occurs as a variable-side effect in connection with the "conversation notice" (such as "Count successful!" or an effect that coincides with the appearance of the conversation notice), whereas in the notice-side timer effect, the count display progresses in accordance with the notice-side specific effect that occurs as a notice-side effect in connection with the "conversation notice" (such as "Chance UP!" or a timer end display that appears in conjunction with the start of the conversation notice (or a specified number of seconds before the effect start)), resulting in the appearance of separate count-end corresponding displays at different times.

Regarding the conversation preview and cut-in effects, they are required to be executed whenever they are the target of a variable timer effect (when a count fluctuation pattern has been determined). In particular, because conversation previews and cut-ins can be executed in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation, when they are the target of a variable timer effect, they are required to appear in a way that has a relatively high expectation when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, it is desirable to incorporate the effects that are the target of a variable timer effect into the effect content of the above-mentioned effect pattern (variable effect) in advance, so that simply executing the effect pattern will allow the variable timer effect and the effect that is the target of that effect (the aspect with a relatively high expectation) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control the preview lottery so that when a variable timer effect is executed, the effect that is the target of that effect (the aspect with a relatively high expectation) is always selected.

In addition, if the conversation preview and cut-in effects are not targeted for effect in the variable timer effect, a determination is made in the preview lottery described below as to whether or not they will appear as part of the preview effect content, and a determination is made as to how they will appear as part of the preview effect content (a relatively high or low expectation mode), and their appearance is controlled based on the results of this determination.

Below, the process of determining the effect pattern using Figure 118 will be summarized.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives a variation pattern command or a symbol type command from the main control MPU 1310a, it first refers to a judgment table corresponding to the current game state based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command. For example, if the presentation pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it becomes possible to impart a bias (expectation) to the probability of a special presentation pattern appearing, the number of rounds in a jackpot game state, etc.

Next, if multiple selectable presentation patterns (such as multiple presentation patterns with different start or end timings for the count display that appears in the variable timer presentation) are available as presentation patterns associated with the variable number, one of the multiple presentation patterns with different start or end timings for the count display is selected based on whether the jackpot determination is successful. In this case, the presentation pattern is set so that if the jackpot determination is successful, the start or end timing of the count display is more likely to be delayed, thereby increasing the likelihood that the jackpot symbol will appear the later the start or end timing of the count display.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, when a special effect condition is met, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects from among multiple effect patterns an effect pattern that is set so that the variable timer effect does not appear, even if a count fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) has been acquired.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a then selects the presentation pattern that will appear during the pattern change (the presentation from when the decorative pattern starts to change until it stops changing), and then determines what preview presentation will be additionally executed (combined) and in what manner within the execution period of that presentation pattern (preview lottery).

Figure 119 shows an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control using a fixed channel method to output various notification sounds (dispensing notification sounds and abnormality notification sounds), excluding sound effects, only on a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) from a finite number of available channels. This sound definition table manages, for each sound name, definitions of playback priority, initial left/right panning value, initial up/down panning value, initial volume value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting. Note that for ease of explanation, only definitions for notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown here, and definitions for other notification sounds and sound effects are omitted. Note that for sound effects, in addition to definitions using the fixed channel method, it is also possible to use definitions using the automatic channel method for each channel other than channel X, which is the target for assigning notification sounds.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of multiple informative sounds should be assigned to channel X for output when each of the informative sounds satisfies the output conditions. An informative sound with a higher priority value will be assigned to channel X for output, regardless of the assignment status of informative sounds with lower priority values to channel X. As will be explained later, when the priorities are the same, the informative sound assigned to channel X first takes priority, and will be assigned to channel X for output after the output of the informative sound has finished.

The left/right pan initial value represents the initial sound image positioning position of the sound produced by the left and right speakers, which are the combination of the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left/right pan setting value during sound playback, a difference in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually is created, allowing the sound image to be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0x00" indicates that sound will be output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, a setting of "0x80" indicates that the difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which are the combination of the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R, will be 0, and the sound image will be localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, setting it to "0xFF" indicates that the sound will be output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial up/down pan value represents the initial position of the sound image generated by upper and lower speakers, such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). By dynamically changing the setting value for up/down pan while sound is being played, a difference is created in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers individually, making it possible to localize the sound image in any space between the upper and lower speakers. For example, a setting of "0x00" indicates that sound will be output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. A setting of "0x80" means that the difference in volume output from the upper and lower speakers individually is 0, and the sound image will be localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. A setting of "0xFF", for example, indicates that sound will be output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value indicates the volume setting when playback begins, and can be set within a range from "0x00" to "0xFF," for example. The sound number is an identifier used to distinguish between the sounds mentioned above. The playback type setting indicates whether the target sound is looped (corresponding to "LOOP" in the illustration), in which it is played repeatedly, or 1-shot (corresponding to "1-shot" in the illustration), in which the target sound is played once. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is played in mono or stereo.

Figure 120 is a table showing the notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for terminating notification (cancellation conditions) for each type of notification sound shown as an example in Figure 119. Note that in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for each notification sound. This is a measure to make effective use of the single channel X by keeping it as free as possible and refraining from outputting subsequent notification sounds.

As shown in FIG. 120, sound alert 1 (magnetic anomaly) alerts the player that magnetic field has been detected by the magnetic field detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity using a magnet). The alert is generated by a loop process that repeatedly outputs a sound alert such as "Beep, magnetic field detected," a display (e.g., "Magnetic field detected") within the display area of the game board display device 1600, and the illumination of various lamps (light-emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and game board 5. The loop process that repeatedly outputs a sound alert such as "Beep, magnetic field detected" terminates 60 seconds (equivalent to six repeated sound alerts) from the time of detection by the magnetic field detection sensor 4024, while the display within the display area of the game board display device 1600 and the illumination of various lamps continue until the release condition of "power reactivation" is met.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to alert sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), alert sound 2 (vibration abnormality), which alerts that a vibration has been detected by vibration sensor 2405 (a state in which there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity through banging), and alert sound 3 (large prize abnormality), which alerts that a detection has been made by count sensor 4005 (first large prize opening sensor or second large prize opening sensor) even though the machine is not in a jackpot game state (a state in which the large prize opening is open) (a state in which there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity such as forcibly opening a closed large prize opening to allow a game ball to enter), are considered to belong to a first alert group when there is a high possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity having been performed, and the alert sounds belonging to this first alert group are all set to the same alert mode, alert time, and release conditions.

For example, for alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality), the alarm mode involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Buzzing vibration detected," a display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Vibration detected"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5.The loop process that repeatedly outputs the alarm sound ends 60 seconds (equivalent to six repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the vibration sensor 2405, while the display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps continue to be executed until the release condition of "power re-applying" is met. Additionally, for sound alarm 3 (big prize abnormality), the alarm mode involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs a sound alarm such as "Boooooo big prize abnormality detected," a display within the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 (for example, "Big prize abnormality detected"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5. The loop process that repeatedly outputs the sound alarm ends 60 seconds (equivalent to six repeated sound alarms) from the time of detection by the count sensor 4005, while the display within the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 and the lighting of the various lamps continue until the release condition of "power re-on" is met.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are used for the sounds 1-3 belonging to the first alert group within the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600. However, the same lighting mode (not necessarily all of the lamps) is used for the various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5 for the sounds 1-3 belonging to the first alert group. Furthermore, the sounds subject to loop processing are a combination of a "buzzing" alarm sound used in all of the sounds 1-3, which serves to notify players that the sound belongs to the first alert group (a state in which fraudulent activity is highly likely), and a message sound (unique sound) which serves to identify the content of the alarm. The alarm sound is a monotonous sound to provide a warning in the event of a tense fraudulent situation, while the message sound is preferably a diverse sound to clearly distinguish it from other sounds.

In other words, when reporting something that belongs to the first alert group (a state where there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity), it is more important to speed up the hall's initial response to the fraudulent activity than to identify which alert type it is. In this regard, with the above configuration, it is possible to recognize that something belongs to the first alert group (a state where there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity) simply by outputting the "beep beep" alert sound or the lighting patterns unique to the first alert group using various lamps (light-emitting devices), which are expected to speed up the hall's initial response to the fraudulent activity. Furthermore, by outputting a message sound following the "beep beep" alert sound to indicate which alert type it is, and displaying this within the display area of the game board performance display device 1600, it is expected that the hall's initial response will also be able to proceed smoothly.

On the other hand, alarm sound 4 (door open) alerts that the door frame 3 has been detected as open relative to the main frame 4 by the door frame open switch 618 (a state in which, although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed by opening the door, there is also a possibility that the door has been opened as a result of abnormality response measures taken by the hall). The alarm is provided in the form of a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Door open, ping pong ping pong," a display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Door open"), and the illumination of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5. In addition, in terms of alarm time, the loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Door is open, ping pong ping pong" ends 30 seconds (equivalent to three repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the door frame open switch 618, whereas the display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps continue until the release condition "door closed detection (detection that the door frame 3 has been closed relative to the main frame 4 by the door frame open switch 618)" is met.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to alarm sound 4 (door open), alarm sound 5 (frame open), which alerts that the main frame 4 has been detected as open relative to the outer frame 2 by the main frame open switch 619 (a state in which there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed by opening the main frame, but there is also a possibility that the main frame has been opened as a result of abnormality response measures taken by the hall), is considered to belong to a second alarm group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been committed and this cannot be denied, and the alarm modes, alarm times, and release conditions for the alarm sounds belonging to this second alarm group are all set to the same settings.

For example, for alarm sound 5 (frame open), the alarm mode involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "The frame is open, ping pong ping pong," a display within the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 (for example, "The frame is open"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5.The loop process that repeatedly outputs the alarm sound ends 30 seconds (equivalent to three repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the main frame open switch 619, while the display within the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps continue until the release condition of "frame closed detection (detection that the main frame 4 has been closed relative to the outer frame 2 by the main frame open switch 619)" is met.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are used for the display within the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600 for the alert sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second alert group, but the same lighting mode (not all of the various lamps need to be lit) is used for the various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5 for the alert sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second alert group. However, the lighting mode of the lamps (light-emitting devices) when they belong to the second alert group is different from the lighting mode of the lamps (light-emitting devices) when they belong to the first alert group. Furthermore, for the alert sounds that are the subject of loop processing, a combination is used, output sequentially, of a message sound (unique sound) that serves to notify individual identification of the content of the alert, and an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" that is used for both alert sounds 4 and 5 and serves to notify that the alert belongs to the second alert group (a state in which there is a medium possibility of fraudulent activity).

In other words, when reporting a second notification group (a state where there is a medium possibility of fraudulent activity), it is important to avoid causing disgust to players who are playing properly while also allowing the hall to take relatively swift action to deal with the abnormality. In this regard, with the above configuration, the notification sound is first output as a message sound informing players of the type of notification, just as with notifications in the third notification group (described below). This is expected to make players who are playing properly less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, to make players who are playing properly less likely to feel disgust, an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" is output following the message sound, although it is a different alarm sound than when notifications belong to the first notification group, or various lamps are output in a different lighting pattern than when notifications belong to the first notification group, but are not output when notifications belong to the third notification group, to make players who are playing properly less likely to feel disgust. This is expected to make players who are playing properly less likely to feel disgust.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-hand hit guidance) notifies the player that the gate sensor 4003 has detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 2003 located in the area of the game area 5a to the right of the center device 2500, even though the game is not in a time-saving mode (a state in which the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player and should be corrected to an appropriate manner (left-hand hit)). The notification method involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please return to left-hand hit," and a display in the display area of the game board display device 1600 (e.g., "Please return to left-hand hit"). The notification time is set to end 20 seconds (equivalent to two repeated notification sounds) from the time of detection by the gate sensor 4003 in a time-saving mode.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-hand hit notification), the notification sound 7 (ball removal notification), which notifies that the full tray detection sensor 279 has detected that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls (a state in which the game balls in the lower tray 322 should be removed), is considered to belong to a third notification group, which is used when the possibility of fraud is low but game guidance should be given to ensure the game progresses properly, and the notification modes, notification times, and cancellation conditions for the notification sounds belonging to this third notification group are all set to the same thing.

For example, for notification sound 7 (ball removal guide), the notification mode involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please remove the balls from the bottom tray," and a display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Please remove the balls from the bottom tray").The notification time is set so that both the loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please remove the balls from the bottom tray," and the display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 end 20 seconds (equivalent to two repeated notification sounds) from the time of detection by the full tank detection sensor 279.

However, for notification sound 6 (left-hand shot notification) and notification sound 7 (ball removal notification), if the gate sensor 4003 or full tank detection sensor 279 is still in a detection state when the process ends 20 seconds after detection, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-hand shot notification) or notification sound 7 (ball removal notification)) will be executed again from the beginning.

In this embodiment, the third alarm group outputs only a sound message as alarm sounds 6 and 7. More precisely, after a five-second sound message has been output, five seconds of silence data is assigned to channel X, and the corresponding sound (silent output) is output. A loop is then performed in which a ten-second alarm sound consisting of a set of the sound message and the silence data is repeated. Because both alarm sounds 6 and 7 output silence data for the same amount of time, they function as a unique alarm mode distinct from the first and second alarm groups. Even the hall staff can properly recognize that an alarm belongs to the third alarm group simply by checking the silence data portion, rather than the message sound portion, which can be difficult to hear in a noisy hall. It is desirable to prepare the silence data in advance as a single sound data (ten-second sound data) that includes the sound message, and then perform the loop while this data remains assigned to channel X.

Incidentally, silent portions may exist within the alarm sounds used in the first and second alarm groups (such as between the warning sound and the message sound), but these are very short periods of silence to create a "gap," and are clearly fundamentally different from the relatively long silent portions (third alarm group) mentioned above that have a group identification function.

With this configuration, warning sounds such as "beep beep" or "ping pong ping pong" are not output, and only message sounds are output repeatedly with a predetermined silent period in between, making it possible to notify the player about game information without making them feel uncomfortable.

In the examples shown in Figures 119 and 120, the same priority is set for alert sounds belonging to the same alert group, but alert sounds belonging to the same alert group may also have different priorities. Furthermore, loop playback, in which the target sound is repeatedly played, is used as the playback type setting, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and one-shot playback, in which the target sound is played once, may also be used. Furthermore, the "buzzing" sound used in common by alert sounds belonging to the first alert group and the "ping pong ping pong" sound used in common by alert sounds belonging to the second alert group may be prepared as separate sound data linked to the message sound for each alert sound, or they may be prepared as separate sound data from the message sound, and when outputting, sound data combining the message sound and alarm sound is created and then assigned to a channel.

[Gaming machine equipped with multiple performance operation units]
In the above, a gaming machine was described in which the game machine is equipped with a game operation unit 400 in the reel unit 320, which can be operated by the player and can present game images to the player, but below, with reference to Figures 121 to 143, a gaming machine that can further increase the player's motivation to operate will be described. Note that the game operation unit described below controls the game effects by a peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 121 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Figure 122 is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, we will describe the sword effect operation unit 5000 that is disposed in the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above. Components similar to those described above will be given the same reference numerals, and explanations will be omitted where appropriate.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is installed on the front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword effect operation unit 5000 comprises a sword part 5010 having a blade part 5011, a handle part 5012, and a tsuba part 5013 sandwiched between the blade part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and a sword ornament 5001 consisting of a sheath part 5020 capable of housing the blade part 5011 of the sword part 5010.

The sword ornament 5001 is mounted on the door frame 3 so that the sheath 5020 can move left and right when viewed from the front. The sword 5010 is also mounted so that it can move in the unsheathing direction and the unsheathing direction. The sword 5010 is normally in a sheathed state with the blade 5011 sheathed in the sheath 5020, but in the unsheathing performance, the sword is unsheathed and the blade 5011 is visible to the player through the unsheathing action. Once unsheathed, the sword 5010 can then function as an operating device that accepts a sheathing operation by the player and returns to the sheathed state.

Now, with reference to Figure 123, we will explain opportunities for performing sword unsheathing effects involving movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword ornament 5001). Figure 123 shows an example of a selection table for effect patterns in an effect mode in which sword unsheathing effects can be performed. (A) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform a sword preparation transition effect depending on the type of movement pattern, and (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform a main sword unsheathing effect.

The performance patterns described here include a pattern in which the actual sword draw performance is performed after the sword preparation transition performance is executed, a pattern in which the actual sword draw performance is performed without a sword preparation transition performance being performed beforehand, a pattern in which the actual sword draw performance is not performed even though a sword preparation transition performance has been performed beforehand, and a pattern in which neither the sword preparation transition performance is performed nor the actual sword draw performance is performed.Furthermore, there are two patterns for the shape of the sword decoration 5001 in the actual sword draw performance: a form with an aura component and a form without an aura component.

As shown in FIG. 123 (A), whether or not to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is determined by lottery depending on the type of variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the multiple types of variation patterns are classified into jackpot variation patterns for jackpots, small jackpot variation patterns for small jackpots, and miss variation patterns for misses, and the more advantageous the variation pattern is for the player, the higher the probability that the sword-drawing preparation transition effect will be executed. Specifically, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed with a 50% probability when the jackpot variation pattern is used, with a 30% probability when the small jackpot variation pattern is used, and with a 20% probability when the miss variation pattern is used. Note that the probability of the miss variation pattern being executed may be changed depending on whether or not a reach effect is present, so that the probability of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect being executed is higher when a reach effect is present compared to when it is not present.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), whether or not the actual sword-drawing effect will be executed is determined by lottery depending on the type of fluctuation pattern and whether or not the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is present. Even if the type of fluctuation pattern is the same, if the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the probability of the actual sword-drawing effect being executed is set to be higher than if the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed. Also, the more advantageous the fluctuation pattern is for the player, the higher the probability of the actual sword-drawing effect being executed. Here, even if the fluctuation pattern is less advantageous, the probability of the actual sword-drawing effect being executed is set to be higher if the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, if the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in a fluctuation pattern for a miss fluctuation, the probability of the actual sword-drawing effect being executed is higher than if the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed in a fluctuation pattern for a small hit fluctuation. Note that in the case of a fluctuation pattern for a big hit fluctuation, the actual sword-drawing effect is always executed regardless of whether or not the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is present.

In addition, when the main sword drawing effect is executed, a sword preparation transition effect is executed beforehand, and the probability that the main sword drawing effect with an aura component will be executed increases the more advantageous the variation pattern is for the player. Note that in this case, the main sword drawing effect with an aura component will not be selected in the case of a variation pattern for small win variations.

(State transitions and aura component movements due to the unsheathing action of the sword decoration)
Next, the unsheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 in the sword unsheathing performance (the sword preparation transition performance and the actual unsheathing performance) will be described with reference to Figures 124 to 127. Also, the operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described for the following cases: when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) itself, which can accept the player's sheathing operation, and the sword section 5010 is transformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (Figures 124 and 125); and when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath section 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011), and the sword section 5010 is combined with a member on the door frame 3 (aura member 5035) to form an integrated ornament (Figures 126 and 127).

Figure 124 is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 when the aura member 5030 is attached to the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) itself, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first unsheathing state, and (C) the second unsheathing state. Figure 125 is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that Figure 125 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the blade portion 5011 extracted from the sheath portion 5020 to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easier to understand.

In its normal state, the sword decoration 5001 is in a sheathed state, with the blade 5011 sheathed in the sheath 5020, as shown in Figure 124 (A). After the unsheathing action in the transition to preparing to draw the sword, the sword decoration 5001 enters a first unsheathed state, as shown in Figure 124 (B), in which only the habaki 5011a attached to the blade 5011 at the hand is unsheathed from the sheath 5020 and is visible to the player. Then, after the unsheathing action in the main unsheathing action, the sword decoration 5001 enters a second unsheathed state, as shown in Figure 124 (C), in which the blade 5011 is further unsheathed from the sheath 5020 and most of it is visible to the player. Now, the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathed state can function as an operating means capable of accepting sheathing actions by the player.

The aura member 5030 attached to the blade 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently of the unsheathing action of the blade 5011. When the sword ornament 5001 is in an aura member-attached form, the aura member 5030 moves within the sheath 5020 from a closed state (FIG. 125(A)) to an open state (FIG. 125(B)) as far as possible (maximum movement) when the blade 5011 changes from the sheathed state (FIG. 124(A)) to the first unsheathing state (FIG. 124(B)), thereby transforming the blade 5011. Therefore, the player can see the aura member 5030 even when the blade 5011, transformed by the aura member 5030, changes from the first unsheathing state to the second unsheathing state (FIG. 124(C)). As will be described later, the aura member 5030 is positioned below the habaki 5011a of the blade 5011 even when fully extended, so the player cannot see the aura member 5030 in the first unsheathed state.

In its normal state (closed state), the aura member 5030 is enclosed within the blade portion 5011, as shown in Figure 125 (A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade blade 5011a and has a right aura member 5031, a left aura member 5032, and a pinion 5033 that engages with the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031 and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. When the pinion 5033 of the aura member 5030 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into linear motion of the rack 5031a to the right and the rack 5032a to the left, and as shown in Figure 125 (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop in a position where they protrude outward from the outer shape of the blade 5011 (open state).

Furthermore, an LED board 5011c with multiple LEDs is housed within the blade shaft 5011b below the habaki 5011a of the blade 5011. When these LEDs are illuminated, the blade 50011 (aura member 5030) can be illuminated and decorated.

Note that, here, an example has been shown in which the timing of the operation of the aura member 5030 changes from a closed state to an open state when the sword decoration 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sheathed state to the first drawn state, and the operation of the aura member 5030 deforms the blade portion 5011, causing the sword decoration 5001 to change from the first drawn state to the second drawn state, but this is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may also begin operating (transforming) after the sword decoration 5001 reaches the second drawn state. It is sufficient that the sword decoration 5001, which has reached the second drawn state, reaches the final state (not limited to a state formed by maximum operation, but including a state formed by stopping operation midway) based on the set performance pattern before it functions as an operating device.

Figure 126 is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing operation of the sword accessory 5001 when the aura member 5035 is attached to the sheath 5020, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first unsheathing state, and (C) the second unsheathing state. Figure 127 is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that Figure 127 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the blade 5011 extracted from the sheath 5020 to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easier to understand. Here, components similar to those in Figures 125 and 126 described above are assigned the same reference numerals, and explanations will be omitted where appropriate.

As shown in Figures 126(A) to (C), the aura member 5035 attached to the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) can move up and down, whereas the aura member 5030 attached to the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) itself can move left and right. The aura member 5035 is also attached so as to surround the outer periphery of the sword portion 5011. When the sword ornament 5001 is in an aura member-attached form, the aura member 5035 operates in accordance with the change in state of the sword portion 5011 (sheared state ⇔ first unsheathed state ⇔ second unsheathed state) while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the sword portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sheathed state. This allows the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) to be combined with the frame side component (aura component 5035) to appear as a single decorative piece.

In its normal state (fully stored state), the aura member 5035 is stored in the sheath 5020, as shown in Figure 127 (A). The aura member 5035 is positioned so that its upper end is below the blade 5011a of the blade 5011 when fully stored. It has a hollow, cylindrical surrounding aura member 5036 that surrounds the outer periphery of the blade 5011, a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b that are positioned below the hollow portion of the surrounding aura member 5036, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The right pinion 5037a of the surrounding aura member 5036 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a drive means (not shown), and the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. As both pinions mesh, the rotational force is converted into upward linear motion of the right rack 5036a and left rack 5036b, and as shown in Figure 127 (B), the surrounding aura member 5036 stops at a position where it combines with the blade 5011 to form the second unsheathed state. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a fully revealed state, with the surrounding aura member 5036 moving to the upper limit of its range of motion (maximum movement).

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the blade portion 5011 contains an LED board with multiple LEDs, allowing the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 to be illuminated and decorated.

Note that, while an example has been shown here in which the timing of the aura member 5035's movement combines with the blade 5011 while maintaining a relative positional relationship in response to changes in the state of the sword decoration 5001 (sword portion 5010) (sword sheathed state ⇔ first drawn state ⇔ second drawn state), this is not limiting. The aura member 5035 may begin movement (combination) once the sword decoration 5001 enters the second drawn state. It is sufficient that the sword decoration 5001, which has entered the second drawn state, can reach its final state (not limited to the fully-appearing state formed by maximum movement, but including a partially-appearing state with an aura member formed by stopping the movement midway) based on the performance pattern set before functioning as an operating device. Furthermore, the aura member 5035 may combine with the blade 5011 so as not to be visible to the player when transitioning from the sheathed state to the first drawn state.

(Another performance pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to Figures 128 to 130, another reach effect using the aforementioned sword decoration 5001 will be described. Figures 128 to 130 are diagrams illustrating the screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the main differences from the aforementioned sword decoration 5001 are as follows. First, the sword decoration 5001 in the sheathed state functions as an operating means, detecting the player's sword unsheathing operation. Second, the sheath portion 5020 attached to the door frame 3 is configured to be movable left and right when viewed from the front, and the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathing state can move up to the center of the front of the effect display device 1600.

When the changing symbols reach a reach state, the changing display of the three decorative symbols in the display area of the effect display device 1600 enters a reach state (Fig. 128 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (Fig. 128 (A2)). Here, a specific decorative element SDY (a blind device) that can be moved up and down is provided above the display area of the effect display device 1600. In its normal state, the specific decorative element SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and is stationary above the display area in a state where part of the blind is visible to the player (initial state). Also, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a sheathed state.

In the princess reach effect, an image of a princess approaching the back of a blind is displayed (Fig. 128 (A3)), followed by an operation effect suggestion image suggesting an operation effect (Fig. 128 (B1)). Then, the operation effect for the sword decoration 5001 begins, and the effective operation period for accepting operation of the sword decoration 5001 begins. At the same time, an operation prompt image urging the player to unsheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 129 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 or the specific decorative member SDY may be moved up and down in small increments between the display of the operation effect suggestion image and the display of the operation prompt image and the gauge indicating the effective operation period. Then, when the unsheathing operation by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a pre-set development pattern or end pattern.

The player's unsheathing operation refers to the action of grasping the handle 5012 of the sheathed sword decoration 5001 and lifting the sword 5010 upward to extract the blade 5011 from the sheath 5020. When the sword decoration 5001 transitions from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state, the player's unsheathing operation is detected, and a detection notification action is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification action may be any action that allows the player to sense an action separate from the player's own unsheathing operation through the gripped handle 5012, such as vertical movement or vibration of the sword 5010 (or handle 5012). Furthermore, the detection notification action is performed for a set period of time after the operation is detected, allowing the player to visually confirm the operation even if the player releases the handle 5012. This allows the player to visually confirm the detection of the operation, reducing unnecessary contact with the sword decoration 5001 (such as grabbing it again to confirm detection) and preventing malfunction or damage to the moving body.

When the player draws the sword here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but depending on the degree of expectation, the aura member 5030 (5035) may appear visible to the player when the player draws the sword.

When the end pattern is performed, when the player's unsheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative element SDY remains stationary (initial state) above the display area of the effect display device 1600 without overlapping the display area, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decorative element 5001 is displayed (Fig. 129 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is displayed stopped in the losing state "767" (Fig. 129 (C2)). At this time, the sword decorative element 5001 is returned to the sheathed state when the stop result of Fig. 129 (C2) is notified, but it may also be returned to the sheathed state when the detection and notification operation ends.

On the other hand, when a development pattern is performed, when the player's unsheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved down to the front center where it overlaps with the display area of the performance display device 1600 (only the reserved display area below the display area is visible (fully fallen state) (Figure 129 (D1)). Next, the shadow of the princess is projected in the display area of the performance display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the second unsheathing state (Figure 129 (D2)). Note that there may be multiple patterns for the display of the princess's shadow projected in the display area of the performance display device 1600 at this time; for example, the color and size of the shadow, or the comment displayed afterwards may be varied to suggest the expected probability of the lottery result due to the princess reach (such as the expected probability of winning or the gaming profit if it wins).

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the player's unsheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001 puts it into the second unsheathing state, i.e., since the shadow of the princess is projected in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sheath portion 5020 attached to the door frame 3 is moved, causing the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathing state to move to the center of the front left-right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 129 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the center of the front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from its fully fallen state to its initial state, and an image of the princess looking surprised as the blinds are removed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, which now has good visibility (Fig. 130 (D4)). The sword decoration 5001 then returns to the position where the original sword was drawn, and in the display area of the performance display device 1600, if the result of this variable display is a hit, an image of the smiling princess notifying the hit is displayed (Fig. 130 (E1) (E2)), and if it is a miss, an image of the sad princess notifying the miss is displayed (Fig. 130 (F1) (F2)).

When a player's unsheathing operation is detected, a detection notification is performed as described above. However, if the player is unable to move the sword decorative body 5001 while it is being held to the front left-right center of the display area of the display device 1600 during the movement effect, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. The effect itself continues even if the player does not stop holding the sword decorative body 5001. However, if the sword decorative body 5001 is held in the position where the player operated it at the timing of the left-right movement effect of the sword decorative body 5001 (Figure 129 (D3)), this will cause a delay in the left-right movement effect. However, the effect executed in the display area of the display device 1600 and the falling movement effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) are configured to proceed regardless of whether the left-right movement effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is executed, so the game progress does not stagnate. Furthermore, when the player releases the sword decoration 5001, the sword decoration 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a left-right movement effect, or may be configured not to perform a movement effect.

In this way, in the Princess Reach effect, the player's unsheathing of the sword decoration 5001 (up and down movements) causes the specific decorative element SDY that suggested the sword decoration 5001's operation effect (valid operation) to fall and move. Furthermore, the sword decoration 5001 itself, which was operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600, can be moved forward of the effect display device 1600 (to the left of the operation position) by moving the sheath 5020 attached to the door frame 3. In other words, based on the player's unsheathing operation, the sword decoration 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the unsheathing operation was performed, increasing the player's operational value and preventing a decline in the player's motivation to operate. Furthermore, because a single operating device is configured to operate in gradually different modes (up and down during operation, left and right after operation) depending on the player's operation, it is possible to provide effects using multiple movement modes, increasing the operational value of the operating device compared to conventional operating devices that only have one movement mode. This prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game.

The left-right movement of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed by displacing it from an operating position outside the display area of the performance display device 1600 to an operating position in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600 for the purpose of creating an integrated performance with the performance image displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (a bamboo blind), but this is not limited to this. For example, after performing the unsheathing operation with the sword decorative body 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, the sword decorative body 5001 may be moved to the left (to the left end of the frame) so that it is positioned outside the display area of the performance display device 1600, thereby performing a left-right movement performance. Furthermore, since the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player in this example is an up-and-down movement (the unsheathing movement of pulling the sword part 5011 up from the bottom), it is desirable that the movement of the sword decoration 5001 that is performed after the operation be in a direction (such as left-and-right as in this example) different from the direction of movement (up-and-down in this case) when the player operates the sword decoration 5001.

In addition, when a player's unsheathing operation is detected, a detection notification action is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, allowing the player to accurately determine the timing to end the operation. Furthermore, the detection notification action is performed for a certain period of time so that the player can visually confirm it, thereby preventing unnecessary contact, such as touching the operation unit again to confirm the detection. This prevents the player from continuing the operation, which could delay the subsequent movement of the sword decoration 5001, or damage to the moving body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, if the movement cannot be performed due to contact with the sword decoration 5001 even after the detection notification action, a warning such as an announcement is made to the player to remove their hand. Furthermore, since even contact with the operation unit, which was required during the valid operation period, is prohibited after the detection notification action has ended, the operation value of the operation unit can be increased.

(Another performance pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to Figures 131 to 133, other reach effects using the aforementioned sword decoration 5001 will be described. Figures 131 to 133 are diagrams illustrating the screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, the state transitions of the operation button 410, and the motion transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in reach effects including the operation effects of the multifaceted operation button 410. Here, we will explain a pattern in which an expectation suggestion effect is performed as the operation effect of the operation button 410, suggesting the expectation that the ongoing fluctuation will result in a jackpot ((A) (B) → N in the figures), and a pattern in which the operation effect of the operation button 410 suggests and develops the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 ((A) (B) → M in the figures).

In this reach effect, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols reaches a reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 131 (A)), first, the valid operation period for accepting pressing of the operation button 410 begins, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to press the operation button 410 (Fig. 131 (B)). The display area of the effect display device 1600 displays an image of the operation means to be operated (operation button 410) and the valid operation period, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 remains in its sheathed state. Then, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

First, in a pattern in which an expectation suggestion effect is produced by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 131 (N1)), and then an image suggesting the expectation of a jackpot is displayed (Fig. 132 (N2)). The result of the current variable display (jackpot, miss) is then announced (Fig. 132 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a pre-reading effect may be used instead of an expectation suggestion effect for the variable display currently being executed; for example, a character may appear that changes the pending display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image indicating the expectation (Fig. 132 (N2)).

Furthermore, in a pattern in which pressing the operation button 410 suggests and develops the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, an effect image suggesting that an operation effect requesting the sheathing of the sword decoration 5001 will be performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 131 (M1)). Next, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the start image of the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 (here, the title "Chance to Draw Sword" and the operation instruction message "Please sheathe your sword"), and the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member, with the blade 5011 transformed by the maximum movement of the aura member 5030 (Fig. 133 (M2)). Next, when the second drawn state is reached and a predetermined period of time has elapsed and the effective operation period for the sword decoration 5001 begins, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved up and down in small increments from its initial state, and an operation prompting image urging the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 133 (M3)). Then, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, an effect based on the results of this variable display is performed.

If the current display results in a jackpot, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) will be moved downwards from its initial state to its fully fallen state (Fig. 133 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is returned to its initial state, an image announcing a jackpot (the decorative symbol stop state "777" and the message "Well done") will be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) has been removed (Fig. 133 (M5)). On the other hand, if the current display results in a miss, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) will simply stop moving slightly from its initial state, and an image announcing a miss (the decorative symbol stop state "767") will be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 133 (M6)).

In this way, pressing the operation button 410 allows for a variety of effects, such as hinting at the level of expectation or unfolding effects for operating other operation means (sword decoration 5001), and the player cannot predict what will happen next when they operate the operation button 410. This increases the player's interest in operating the operation button 410, and prevents a decrease in motivation to operate the button and a decline in interest in the game, which can be a concern when the effects after operation are monotonous.

Furthermore, in a series of reach effects, the player is required to perform different operation modes (pressing operation and sheathing operation) between the first operation (pressing operation of operation button 410) and the second operation (sheathing operation of sword decoration 5001) based on the first operation (pressing operation of operation button 410). This increases the player's interest in participating in the operation and prevents a decrease in interest in the game, which may occur if the operations become monotonous and unchanging.

In this example, the operation button 410 is the valid operation means for the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (the operation of sheathing the sword decoration 5001) is granted based on the operation of pressing the operation button 410, but this is not limited to this. The operation of sheathing the sword decoration 5001 may also be the valid operation for the first operation opportunity. In this case, it is preferable that the operation means valid for the second operation opportunity target the sword decoration 5001 rather than targeting the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower expectation than the sword decoration 5001 for the first operation opportunity.

(Another performance pattern 3 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 134 to 138, other reach effects using the aforementioned sword decoration 5001 will be described. FIGS. 134 to 138 are diagrams illustrating the screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, the state transitions of the operation button 410, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration 5001 during reach effects. Here, we will explain a pattern in which a jackpot occurs when the specific decorative element SDY (the bamboo blind device) moves based on the operation of the operation button 410 ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figures), and a pattern in which, even if the specific decorative element SDY (the bamboo blind device) does not move based on the operation of the operation button 410 and is displayed in a losing mode, the pattern display in the losing mode is re-changed and the player is given another opportunity to operate it ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) in the figures → Q if an opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given/R if an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given).

In this reach effect, when the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the three decorative symbols in a reach state (Fig. 134(A)), the start image of the operation effect for the operation button 410 (here, the message "One press of the button will move the movable body") is first displayed (Fig. 134(B)). Then, the valid operation period for accepting pressing of the operation button 410 begins, and an operation promotion effect is displayed to encourage pressing of the operation button 410 (Fig. 134(C)). The display area of the effect display device 1600 displays an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the valid operation period, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 remains sheathed. When a player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, an effect is produced according to a preset effect pattern. Note that pressing of the operation button 410 is not limited to a single press (one time) and can be repeated (multiple times). Additionally, to make it easier for the player to grasp the object (movable object) that will move as a result of operation, the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) may be set to move up and down in small increments in its initial state while the operation button 410 is in operation. Furthermore, if the sword decorative element 5001 later becomes the object of operation, the state of the sword decorative element 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state at this point.

In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) moves to result in a jackpot, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved downwards from its initial state to a fully fallen state (Fig. 135 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to its initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the decorative pattern stop state "777" and the message "Well done") is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) has been removed (Fig. 135 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be made to vibrate.

In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) does not move, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) simply stops moving in small increments and does not fall. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern in a losing state ("767") is displayed swinging in the center of the screen (Figure 136 (P1)). After that, depending on the effect pattern that is set, the pattern will develop into either a pattern in which the decorative pattern remains stopped in a losing state ("767") (Figure 136 (P2)), or a revival pattern in which the reach state is restored.

In the revival pattern, the display area of the effect display device 1600 changes from the swinging display of the decorative pattern in the losing state shown in Figure 136 (P1) to a revival start image (an image of a samurai saying "Not yet") indicating that the variable display has not yet ended (Figure 136 (P3)). The decorative pattern again enters a reach state and is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the screen, while an operation activation indication image (the face of an allied samurai with his eyes closed) is displayed in the center of the screen, indicating that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is activated (Figure 136 (P4)). Then, as time passes, the samurai's eyes are enlarged, and the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) is moved up and down in small increments from its initial state (Figure 136 (P5)). This heightens the player's anticipation for the effect using the specific decorative element SDY (blind element). At this time, the operation button 410 may be illuminated with a rapid flashing pattern, or the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the first unsheathed state and moved up and down. Depending on the set performance pattern, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operating means, and a specific decorative element SDY (a bamboo blind) is displayed based on pressing the operation button 410 or sheathing the sword decoration 5001. Note that the pattern in which the operation button 410 is the target of operation is set to have a lower likelihood of success than the pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 is the target of operation.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image of sweat trickling down the samurai's forehead (operation button confirmation image) from the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button 410 is illuminated (Fig. 137 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind element) continues to move in small increments and the operation button 410 is illuminated, the effective operation period of the operation button 410 begins, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the operation button 410 to be pressed (Fig. 137 (R2)). The display area of the performance display device 1600 displays an image of the operation means to be operated (operation button 410), the number of operations, and the effective operation period. Here, once the operation button 410 has been operated the required number of times, the illumination decoration will no longer appear.

If the result of the variable display is a jackpot, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) is moved from its initial state to a fully fallen state (Fig. 137 (R3)). At this time, the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed frozen in the lower right corner of the screen so that it can be seen by the player. As described above (Fig. 133 (M4)), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the state of the decorative element at this point. Next, the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) is returned from the fully fallen state to its initial state, and an image announcing a jackpot (the decorative element's stopped state "777" and the message "Well done") is displayed in the center of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, where the overlap with the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) has been released (Fig. 137 (R4)).

On the other hand, if the result of the variable display is a miss, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, the small movements of the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) are stopped, and the decorative pattern in the miss state ("767") is displayed frozen in the center of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Figure 137 (R5)).

When the sword decoration 5001 is used as the operation means, an image (sword decoration confirmation image) is displayed in which the samurai's closed eyes in the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 open their eyes and their gaze becomes sharp, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from a sheathed state to a second drawn state with an aura component (Figure 138 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be decorated with light. The player can tell from the image in the display area that the sword decoration 5001, not the operation button 410, is valid for operation, but at this point, the form of the sword decoration 5001, such as whether it is in a form with an aura component, can be determined by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001. Next, while the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) is moved in small increments, it enters the second unsheathed state, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, the effective operation period for the sword decoration 5001 begins. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompting image urging the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed (Figure 138 (Q2)).

If the result of this variable display is a jackpot, and the player's sheathing operation is detected, the same presentation transition as in Figure 137 (R3) and (R4) described above will occur (Figure 138 (Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display is a miss, and the player's sheathing operation is detected, the same presentation transition as in Figure 137 (R5) described above will occur (Figure 138 (Q5)).

In this way, the degree of expectation is suggested based on the state of the fall of the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) which is performed based on the pressing of the operation button 410, so it is possible to provide a more powerful indication of expectation than an image-based indication of expectation, and to prevent a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is not caused to fall based on the pressing of the operation button 410, the player is given another opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Because the degree of expectation can be suggested based on the operation device that is given the opportunity to operate, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game, which may occur due to monotonous operation presentations that do not vary much.

Note that while Figures 128 to 138 above show three examples of reach effects using the sword ornament 5001, various types of effects may be combined. This allows for a wide variety of effects to be provided, further increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(Shape of sword decoration)
The shape of the sword ornament 5001 of this example will be described with reference to Figure 139. The sword ornament 5001 up until now has been provided with two types of shapes, a shape with an aura component and a shape without an aura component, but here, two more shapes are provided in which the sword part 5010 is transformed by operating the handle part 5012.

Figure 139 is a diagram explaining the shape of the sword decoration 5001 used in the pseudo-consecutive effect. The sword decoration 5001 here is capable of changing shape in two stages by deforming the handle 5012, and is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that is located inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 and appears visible to the player from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020. The aura member 5040 is located inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3, similar to the aura member 5035 described above, but its operating mode is movable left and right, similar to the aura member 5030 described above. Figures 139(A) to (D) are diagrams showing the types of shapes (stage changes) of the sword decoration 5001 in the sheathed state, showing stages 0 to 3, respectively. The sword decoration 5001 will take one of stages 0 to 3 depending on the effect.

As shown in Figure 139(A), the Stage 0 form is the normal state form similar to Figures 124(A) and 126(A) described above, and indicates the initial form in which no movement of any component is required. As shown in Figure 139(B), the Stage 1 form is a form in which the aura member 5040 moves from the Stage 0 form, causing it to appear outside the side of the sheath 5012. As shown in Figure 139(C), the Stage 2 form is a form in which the handle 5012 moves from the Stage 1 form, expanding and dividing into two parts, left and right, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from within. As shown in Figure 139(D), the Stage 3 form is a form in which the second decorative part 5012b moves upward from within the handle 5012 in the Stage 2 form, forming an integral decoration with the first decorative part 5012a. These Stages 1 to 3 form allow for transformation without requiring the sword decoration 5001 to be in the second drawn state. Furthermore, the sword section 5010, which can be operated by the player as the operating section of the operating device, and the sheath section 5020, which does not move, move together to form an integrated decorative body, providing a more impressive operating device.

(Pre-operation suggestion using specific decorative material SDY)
Next, with reference to Figures 140 to 143, a description will be given of a pre-operation suggestion effect that is executed before the effective operation period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective in the reach effect. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind reel element) can suggest whether, among multiple operation means, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will become effective. Specifically, the suggestion patterns of the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (blind reel element) include a first suggestion pattern in which the effective operation period occurs when the specific decorative member SDY (blind reel element) is positioned in its initial position, and a second suggestion pattern in which the effective operation period occurs when the specific decorative member SDY (blind reel element) is moved from its initial position to its suggested position. When the sword decoration 5001 (which has a higher expected hit rate than the operation button 410) becomes effective in the reach effect, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, when a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern (FIG. 140(B)) is performed, which generates an effective operation period with the specific decorative member SDY (blind element) positioned in its initial position even during the effective operation period, the sword decorative element 5001 becomes effective for operation with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes effective for operation with a probability of 70%. In contrast, when a pre-operation suggestion effect of a second suggestion pattern (FIG. 142(AA1)) is performed, which generates an effective operation period with the specific decorative member SDY (blind element) moved to the suggested position, the sword decorative element 5001 becomes effective for operation with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes effective for operation with a probability of 30%. Below, we will explain examples of presentation transitions according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind element) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect.

(First suggested pattern)
140 and 141 are diagrams showing an example of a reach effect transition in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed when the peripheral control board 1510 determines by lottery that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is to be enabled for operation during the reach effect, based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by lottery by the main control board 1310. In this reach effect, when three decorative symbols reach the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 140(A)), a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the effective operation period for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, which has been determined in advance by lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 to be enabled for operation, is generated. As a specific effect of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) indicating that the operation means will be enabled is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated (Fig. 140(B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind element) maintains its initial position. Also, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

Then, with the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) maintained in its initial position, an effective operation period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that has been predetermined to be effective for operation. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is effective for operation, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described below) as a pre-operation suggestion. In other words, when an effective operation period is generated with the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) in its initial position, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation button 410 is effective for operation at a higher rate than the sword ornament 5001.

When the operation button 410 becomes valid for operation, as shown in Figure 140 (C), an effective operation period for the operation button 410 is generated with the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) maintaining its initial position. At the same time, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays an operation prompt image encouraging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period. The operation button 410 is also illuminated at this time, allowing the player to easily recognize the target of operation. Even when the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid for operation, a pre-operation suggestion may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although at a lower rate than for the operation button 410. In this case, as shown in Figure 140 (D), an effective operation period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated with the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) maintaining its initial position. At the same time, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays an operation prompt image encouraging the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 changes state from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state (with aura member), allowing the player to sheathe the sword.

When an operation on a valid operating means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is detected in the aforementioned Figure 140 (C) or (D), if the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) is moved downwards from its initial state to a fully fallen state (Figure 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) is returned to its initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the decorative pattern stop state "777" and the message "Well done") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, where the overlap with the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) has been released (Figure 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of this variable display is a miss, the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) will remain in its initial state and will not move, and an image announcing a miss (decorative pattern stop state "767") will be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Figure 141 (CC3)).

(Second suggested pattern)
142 is a diagram showing an example of a transition of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a second suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is enabled for operation during the reach effect, as in the first suggestion pattern described above. Note that FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a pre-operation suggestion effect of a step-up pattern in which, even though the second suggestion pattern is executed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the sword decoration 5001 does not become enabled for operation, but the operation button 410 becomes enabled for operation at one time, and then the sword decoration 5001 becomes enabled for operation.

As shown in Figure 142 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed before the effective operation period for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001, which has been previously determined to be effective by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510, is generated. The specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern is that an operation suggestion image (rotating aura) indicating that the operation means will be effective is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the effective operation period is generated. The operation suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, along with the display of the operation suggestion image, the specific decorative member SDY (blind element) moves from its initial position to a slight drop state (suggested position) where it overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind element) is moved up and down in small increments between the initial position and the suggested position. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 or the sword ornament.

Then, with the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) in the suggested position, an effective operation period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that has been predetermined to be effective for operation. In this example, when the sword decoration 5001 is effective for operation, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as a pre-operation suggestion. In other words, when an effective operation period is generated with the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) in the suggested position, it is possible to suggest to the player that the sword decoration 5001 is effective for operation at a higher rate than the operation button 410.

When the sword decorative element 5001 becomes available for operation, as shown in Figure 142 (AA3), a valid operation period for the sword decorative element 5001 is generated while the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) is operating in the suggested position. At the same time, an operation prompting effect is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, displaying an operation prompting image encouraging the player to sheathe the sword decorative element 5001 and a gauge indicating the valid operation period. At this time, the sword decorative element 5001 changes state from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state (aura-equipped form), allowing the player to sheathe the sword. Even when the operation button 410 becomes available for operation, there is a low chance that the pre-operation suggestion effect will be executed in the second suggestion pattern. In this case, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA2), an effective operation period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is operating in the suggested position, and at the same time, an operation prompting effect is produced in which an operation prompting image urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In the second suggestion pattern, when a player's operation is detected in the operation prompting effect, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved from the state in which it is operating in the suggested position to its initial state. Alternatively, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) may be moved from the state in which it is operating in the suggested position to its initial state or to its fully dropped state without being returned to its initial state.

When an operation on a valid operating means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is detected in the aforementioned Figure 142 (AA2) or (AA3), similar to the aforementioned Figure 140 (C) or (D), if the current variable display results in a jackpot, the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) is moved downwards from its initial state to a fully fallen state (Figure 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) is returned to its initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the decorative pattern stop state "777" and the message "Well done") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, where the overlap with the specific decorative element SDY (blind element) has been released (Figure 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of this variable display is a miss, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) remains in its initial state and is not moved, and an image announcing a miss (decorative pattern stop state "767") is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Figure 141 (CC3)). The effect transitions after the operation prompt effect are the same as the effect transitions after the operation prompt effect in the first suggestion pattern.

The movement pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) in the second suggestion pattern may not only be a pattern in which it is moved to a suggested position, but may also include multiple movement patterns. For example, if multiple movement patterns are provided so that the sword decorative member 5001 is effective for operation at different rates, the player's interest in the movement can be heightened, thereby increasing the interest of the pre-operation suggestion and operation promotion effects using the specific decorative member SDY (blind device).

(Step-up pattern)
When the specific decorative member SDY (blind element) is moved to the suggested position and a pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern occurs, which generates an effective operation period, and the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective for operation, in addition to the basic pattern that follows the effect transition of (AA1) → (AA3) in Figure 142 described above until the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective for operation, there is also provided a step-up pattern in which the operation button 410 becomes effective for operation at first, and then the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective for operation.

As shown in Figures 143 (BB1) to (BB4), the step-up pattern pre-operation suggestion effect is executed before the effective operation period for the sword ornament 5001 that has been determined in advance to be effective for operation by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510 occurs, i.e., before the operation promotion effect for the sword ornament 5001 shown in Figure 142 (AA3) above is executed.

In the step-up pattern, first, an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) similar to that shown in Figure 142 (AA1) is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved in small increments (Figure 143 (BB1)). Next, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) moved to the suggested position, an effective operation period for the operation button 410 is generated. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated, and an operation prompting effect is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, in which an operation prompting image encouraging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed (Figure 143 (BB2)). Here, even if the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected during the effective operation period of the operation button 410, no result notification is made as shown in Figure 141 above, and instead a switching suggestion image (mostly blacked-out image) suggesting a switch to the effective operation means is displayed (Figure 143 (BB3)). The switch suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the valid operation period for the operation button 410 ends. Subsequently, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state (with an aura), and a switch notification image (messages such as "Chance to unsheathe sword" and "Please sheathe your sword") is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, indicating that the valid operation means will be switched from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration 5001 (Figure 143 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative element SDY (the blind device) remains in the suggested position. Then, when the valid operation period for the sword decoration 5001 begins, the operation prompt for the sword decoration 5001 shown in Figure 142 (AA3) is executed. The effect transitions following the operation prompt are the same as the effect transitions following the operation prompt in the second suggestion pattern (Figure 141).

In addition, in the above-mentioned Figure 143 (BB2), it is also possible to have only the image of button operation 410 displayed without enabling button operation 410 (no operation promotion effect). It is sufficient to first direct the player's attention to button operation 410 and then have them operate the sword decoration 5001. Furthermore, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when the second suggestion pattern is reached, but also when the first suggestion pattern is reached.

In this way, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the position of the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) can be changed before the effective operation period for one of the multiple operation means is generated, and the effective operation means is suggested based on that position. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (Figure 140 (B)) in which the effective operation period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is in its initial position, there is a high expectation that the operation button 410 will be effective, and in the second suggestion pattern (Figure 142 (AA1)) in which the effective operation period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is in its suggested position, there is a high expectation that the sword decorative body 5001 will be effective. For this reason, the player will focus on the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) to determine which operation means will be effective, which increases the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect.

In addition, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind element) moves up and down in small increments during the pre-operation suggestion. Furthermore, the movement (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (blind element) is also used to notify the result after the operation of the operation means (Figure 141). Therefore, the small up and down movements of the pre-operation suggestion and the falling effect can be seen as a continuous effect, preventing a decline in interest in the game. While the above description indicates the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind element), i.e., the likelihood that the operation means enabled by the movable body will be enabled, this is not limiting. Alternatively, a character may be displayed during the pre-operation suggestion to suggest the likelihood. Furthermore, when the enabled operation means is determined, not only may the operation button 410 light up or the sword decoration 5001 change to the second unsheathed state, but the enabled operation means may also be moved by vibration or the like.

The second suggestion pattern also includes a step-up pattern in which, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is in the suggested position, the operation button 410 becomes operable (or appears to become operable), and then the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable. This keeps the player interested in both operation methods. Even if the operation button 410 becomes operable immediately after the pre-operation suggestion, the player can still hope that the sword decoration 5001 may become operable afterwards, which prevents a decline in motivation to operate the device and a decline in interest in the game.

In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, at the timing when an operation suggestion image is displayed before the effective operation period in which one of the multiple operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is effective for operation (Fig. 140(B)), similar to the second suggestion pattern (Fig. 142(AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) may move from its initial position to a slight drop state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and may move slightly up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. When the effective operation period is subsequently generated, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is returned to its initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as that in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, making it possible to make the player believe that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed, even when an operation suggestion image according to the first suggestion pattern is displayed. This makes it possible to make the player hope that the sword decoration 5001 will be effective for operation even when a pre-operation suggestion effect using the first suggestion pattern is being executed. Furthermore, since players strongly desire that the effective operation period occur when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device), which is operated at the timing when the operation effect suggestion image is displayed, is operated to the suggested position, this increases the interest in the pre-operation suggestion effect.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the game board-side effect display device 1600 executes an effect using a specific effect pattern. During the effect period in which the specific effect pattern is executed, a specific effect acceptance period (valid period) can be generated in which specific effect execution conditions are met through operation by the player, and when operation is performed within the specific effect acceptance period, a specific operation-based effect (such as an effect suggesting the likelihood of receiving a bonus) can be executed based on the fulfillment of the specific effect execution conditions. The likelihood of receiving a bonus suggested as a result of the specific operation-based effect can be 100% or 0%.

As also mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can be provided with, in addition to the operation button 410, another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) as the operation means used for such operation-time effects (such as effects that suggest the likelihood of a bonus being awarded when the button is operated). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, based on the results of the effect determination, an operation opportunity may be granted to the operation button 410 (when a specific effect execution condition is met when the operation button 410 is operated), or an operation opportunity may be granted to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) (when a specific effect execution condition is met when the other operation means is operated). When an operation opportunity is granted to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001), the player is made aware that the likelihood of a bonus being awarded (the likelihood of a jackpot) is higher than when an operation opportunity is granted to the operation button 410, simply because a pre-operation effect that grants the operation opportunity occurs, even if no operation is performed during that operation opportunity. When an opportunity to operate another operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) is granted, the expected probability of receiving a bonus may be 100% or 0%.

With this configuration, when an opportunity to operate another operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) is presented, it is possible to increase interest in the game when the operation-related effect corresponding to the operation of that operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) has not yet been performed and the operation is about to be performed. In other words, in this case, even if the desired effect (such as an effect suggesting a high expectation of receiving a bonus) does not appear in the operation-related effect corresponding to the operation of the other operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001), or even if the operating means cannot be operated within the specific effect acceptance period (validity period), it is possible to increase interest in the game through such operation-related effects.

The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an operation opportunity is granted to any of the multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) that have such dramatic properties, can execute a common operation-related effect (see, for example, Figure 142 (AA1)) when granting the operation opportunity.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least the following are available as a performance mode for generating a valid period (performance acceptance period) during which operation of the operation button 410 is validated (performance acceptance is possible):
A first presentation mode that generates an effective period (presentation acceptance period) during which operations on the operation button 410 are enabled (presentation acceptance is possible) after the start of a "specific operation-related presentation" that can also appear when operations on the sword ornament 5001 are enabled (presentation acceptance is possible), and a second presentation mode that generates an effective period (presentation acceptance period) during which operations on the operation button 410 are enabled (presentation acceptance is possible) without the start of a "specific operation-related presentation." By executing one of these presentation modes, an effective period (presentation acceptance period) during which operations on the operation button 410 are enabled (presentation acceptance is possible) is generated.

With this configuration, whether a period occurs during which operations on a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) among multiple operation means (e.g., operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) are eligible for effects, or a period occurs during which operations on an operation means other than the specific operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) are eligible for effects, a common (specific) operation-related effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of these periods. This adds to the excitement of wondering which of the specific operation means and the other operation means is eligible for effects, and by having players perform operations while these effects are being played, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, with such common (specific) operation-related effects, a performance acceptance period corresponding to one of the multiple operation means (e.g., operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) will occur once a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect. However, it is desirable to keep secret, at least at the time the effect starts, which of the operation means (e.g., operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) will have a performance acceptance period. Furthermore, for each of the operation-related effects exemplified below, it may be possible to indicate (by displaying a performance result display) which of the multiple operation means (e.g., operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) will have an operation opportunity before the performance acceptance period occurs, or it may be possible to indicate (by displaying a performance result display) which of the multiple operation means (e.g., operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) will have an operation opportunity during the period after the performance acceptance period occurs, including simultaneously with the start of the performance acceptance period. The timing until which the operation-related effect is executed can be changed as appropriate.

[Automatic button effect status]
The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is capable of executing control into an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state). When the automatic button effect state is activated, if an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern for which an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of a jackpot determination, a process (automatic effect function) can be executed to produce the same effect changes as when a player's operation is accepted during the effect acceptance period, even if the player's operation is not accepted during the effect acceptance period. This automatic button effect state allows the post-operation effect to be produced without requiring an operation each time an effect acceptance period occurs, thereby preventing a decline in game interest due to forgetting to operate the button. The automatic effect function may, when activated, cause the same effect acceptance as when an operation actually occurred, thereby performing processing according to the effect acceptance, or it may perform the same processing as when an effect acceptance occurs without causing an effect acceptance.

In the embodiments of the "automatic effect function" described below, the above-mentioned operation-related techniques, effects, settings, etc. may be used in appropriate combinations or interchangeably.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, while a demo screen in which symbol variation has not yet been performed is displayed, the automatic button effect state can be set by operating the operation means multiple times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by operating the operation button 410 the first time, "Various Settings" displayed on the menu screen is selected by operating the operation button 410 the second time (or by an operation means other than the operation button 410), causing the "Various Settings" screen to be displayed. Then, when "Set Automatic Button Effect State" displayed on the "Various Settings" screen is selected by operating the operation button 410 the third time (or by an operation means other than the operation button 410), the automatic button effect state is set. Note that the operation button 410 alone may be operated multiple times, or the operation button 410 may be operated multiple times in combination with an operation means other than the operation button 410.

In contrast, during the symbol change execution state, the automatic button effect state can be set with a single operation of the operation button 410. This simplified operation allows the automatic button effect state to be set while maintaining a close eye on the progress of the effect during the symbol change. However, some players prefer to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether the valid period has occurred. For such players, simply operating the operation button 410 may reduce their interest in the game. Therefore, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the symbol change execution state, the operation button 410 must be operated once in a manner that maintains its operation for a predetermined period (here, two seconds) (a so-called "long press"). This makes it less likely that the automatic button effect state will be mistakenly set, even if the operation button 410 is actively operated during the symbol change execution state, regardless of whether the valid period has occurred. Furthermore, it is desirable that, during the period when the symbol variation is in execution, at least when the effect acceptance period is occurring, the automatic button effect state will not be set even if an operation is performed in the form of a long press.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button effect state is set, different operation modes are required to cancel this setting during the period when a demo screen is displayed in which the pattern change is not yet being performed, and during the period when the pattern change is being performed.

In other words, while the demo screen is displayed and the pattern change has not yet been performed, the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operating means multiple times. More specifically, the menu screen is displayed by operating the operating button 410 once, and then the "Various Settings" displayed on the menu screen is selected by operating the operating button 410 a second time (or by an operating means other than the operating button 410) to display the "Various Settings" screen; and the automatic button effect state is canceled by operating the operating button 410 a third time (or by an operating means other than the operating button 410) to select "Cancel Automatic Button Effect State" displayed on the "Various Settings" screen.

In contrast, while the symbol change is in progress, the automatic button effect state can be canceled with a single operation of the operation button 410. This simplified operation makes it possible to cancel the automatic button effect state while maintaining a close eye on the progress of the effect during the symbol change. However, unlike when the automatic button effect state is set, the automatic button effect state is canceled simply by detecting that the operation button 410 has entered an operation state (by simply operating it in a single operation mode) without the operation of the operation button 410 being maintained for a predetermined period of time (even without a long press operation mode). In other words, the fact that any operation has been performed on the operation button 410 indicates a desire to operate the operation button 410. Therefore, by canceling the automatic button effect state at the time of such operation and quickly returning to the normal effect state, it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured with multiple operating means, including the operating button 410. In this regard, when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is in an automatic button effect state set by operating the operating button 410, an effect acceptance period (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001, etc.) is generated in which an operation opportunity is granted to a specific operating means other than the operating button 410 (e.g., the sword ornament 5001, etc.) based on the result of the jackpot determination. Even if an operation by the player (an operation on the sword ornament 5001) is not accepted during this effect acceptance period, processing (automatic effect function) can be executed to bring about the same change to the effect as if an operation by the player (an operation on the sword ornament 5001) had been accepted during this effect acceptance period. With this configuration, when the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, which involves determining whether a period occurs during which operations on the operation button 410 out of multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) are acceptable for effect reception, or whether a period occurs during which operations on another operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) are acceptable for effect reception, regardless of whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is acceptable for effect reception as a result of the effect, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate it, and so such specific operation-related effect can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
When a first-side performance acceptance period occurs in which a first operating means (for example, the operating button 410) among a plurality of operating means is set as the operation target while the device is controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), if no operation is performed on the first operating means within the first-side performance acceptance period, an automatic process can be executed to bring about the same change in performance as when an operation is performed on the first operating means (first automatic performance means),
When a second side effect acceptance period occurs in which a second operating means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) among the multiple operating means is set as the operation target while the device is controlled in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), if no operation is performed on the second operating means within the second side effect acceptance period, automatic processing can be executed to bring about the same change in the effect as when an operation is performed on the second operating means (second automatic effect means).
With the above configuration, regardless of whether the first side performance acceptance period or the second side performance acceptance period occurs, automatic processing by the first automatic performance means or automatic processing by the second automatic performance means can be executed when the same specific time has elapsed since the period occurred.

With this configuration, when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), even if either the first-side presentation acceptance period in which the first operating means is set as the operation target or the second-side presentation acceptance period in which the second operating means is set as the operation target occurs within the pattern change execution period, the automatic presentation function will be able to function when the same specific amount of time has passed since the occurrence of both periods, allowing you to enjoy the presentation with peace of mind.

However, when a first-side effect acceptance period occurs in which the first operating means (e.g., operation button 410) is set as the operation target, the effect may progress within the pattern variation so that automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the first-side effect acceptance period began, or automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the first-side effect acceptance period began. With this configuration, while it is assumed that automatic processing by the first automatic effect means will be executed when a specific time has elapsed since the first-side effect acceptance period began, the effect acceptance occurs at a different timing and the post-operation effect occurs automatically, making it possible to function as a surprise effect.

When controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the occurrence of effect acceptance periods, in which an opportunity to operate the operation means is granted, may be increased within the symbol variation period compared to when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In other words, in this case, as the frequency of effect acceptance periods increasing, it can be expected that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the effect acceptance period will also increase. However, even if an operation is forgotten, the automatic effect function will function to execute the post-operation effect, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to frequent forgetting to operate. Incidentally, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable to increase the occurrence rate of both effect acceptance periods for the first operation means and effect acceptance periods for the second operation means. However, it is more desirable to make the degree of increase in occurrence different between the effect acceptance periods for the first operation means and the effect acceptance periods for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
If the effect acceptance condition is met within the effect acceptance period, the post-operation effect can be executed (post-operation effect execution means),
- A process for satisfying the effect acceptance conditions based on the operation performed by the player within the effect acceptance period can be executed (player operation acceptance means),
When no operation is performed by the player within the effect reception period, a process can be executed to establish the effect reception conditions at a specific timing within the effect reception period without receiving any operation by the player (automatic effect reception means).
However, the specific timing within the effect acceptance period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the effect acceptance period has elapsed since the start of the effect acceptance period. This gives the player ample time to operate the game himself before the automatic effect function starts, and leaves open the option of causing an effect acceptance through player operation, thereby making it possible to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this case, when the performance progresses within the pattern variation so that automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the first-side performance acceptance period began, or when automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the first-side performance acceptance period began, both the "specific time" and the "time different from the specific time" will be set to a time value that is at least half the time set as the first-side performance acceptance period.

Here, during the execution period of the pattern change when controlled in the automatic button effect state, an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and if an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted during that effect acceptance period, processing will be executed to generate a post-operation effect in accordance with that effect acceptance. However, at this time, in addition to the processing to generate a post-operation effect in accordance with that effect acceptance, processing to cancel the automatic button effect state may also be executed.

Similarly, if an effect acceptance period occurs for an operating means other than the operating button 410 (such as the sword decoration 5001) during the execution period of the pattern change when the button is controlled to the automatic button effect state, and an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted during that effect acceptance period, it is desirable to execute a process to generate a post-operation effect in accordance with that effect acceptance and a process to cancel the automatic button effect state. Note that even in this case, the "post-operation effect in accordance with effect acceptance" will be executed as an effect with the same content as the post-operation effect executed when an effect acceptance period occurs for the sword decoration 5001 during a period when the button is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, and an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted during that effect acceptance period.

In other words, after control has been placed into an automatic button presentation state (a specific presentation state), a player may wish to return to a presentation state (normal presentation mode) in which the presentation can progress depending on the player's own operations (a desire to end the specific presentation state). This desire often arises when a presentation acceptance period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to operate, but it is difficult to perform both the operation to end the specific presentation state and the operation to allow operation acceptance within the limited time between the start and end of the presentation acceptance period. If this results in a loss of the opportunity to operate, it could reduce the player's interest in the game. In this regard, with the above configuration, when the effect acceptance period for a specific effect occurs while the game is controlled in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), a single operation of the operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001 that has been given an opportunity to operate during that effect acceptance period (simply operating in a single operation mode) will perform both the process of ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the process of potentially changing the effect (the process of executing a post-operation effect). Therefore, even if a desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and progress the effect depending on the player's own operation arises during the effect acceptance period, it is possible to smoothly switch effect states.

However, when it comes to changing the settings for the automatic button presentation state (changing the setting to the automatic button presentation state or canceling the automatic button presentation state) while the demo screen is displayed (when the pattern change is not yet being executed), the setting can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword decorative body 5001. In other words, the sword decorative body 5001 is given an opportunity to operate less frequently than the operation button 410 during the execution of the pattern change, and therefore, when an opportunity to operate it is granted, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than with the operation button 410. Therefore, it is more desirable to not allow operations on the sword decorative body 5001 solely for the purpose of changing the settings for the automatic button presentation state (a specific presentation state), thereby enhancing the sense of premium when an opportunity to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is granted and maintaining interest in the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while a demo screen in which no pattern change has been performed is being displayed, the automatic button effect state can be set or canceled by operating any of the multiple operating means other than the sword decoration 5001 (such as the operating button 410 or another operating means) multiple times.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the pattern change when the machine is not controlled to the automatic button presentation state, the setting can be changed to the automatic button presentation state without requiring any operation on the sword decoration 5001. In other words, as mentioned above, the machine is controlled to the automatic button presentation state by operating the operation button 410 once in a "long press" mode, but operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not permitted solely for the purpose of changing the setting to the automatic button presentation state.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting for the automatic button effect state can be changed by operating the sword decorative body 5001 only when an effect acceptance period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the pattern change when the machine is controlled to the automatic button effect state, and an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted within that effect acceptance period, resulting in the appearance of a corresponding post-operation effect. This configuration makes it possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword decorative body 5001 without losing the premium feeling when an opportunity to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is granted.

The multiple operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment may include operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) that can be subject to the "automatic effect function that generates an operation-time effect even without operation within the effect acceptance period" when in the automatic button effect state, as well as special operation means that are not subject to the "automatic effect function that generates an operation-time effect even without operation within the effect acceptance period." In other words, in this case, when the pattern variation is in an execution state, an effect acceptance period occurs during which an opportunity to operate the special operation means is provided, and if an operation on the special operation means is accepted during this effect acceptance period, the post-operation effect corresponding to this effect acceptance will indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. However, even if the machine is in the automatic button effect state, if an operation on the special operation means is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the above effect was accepted will not appear. However, in this case, although the same post-operation effect as when the above effect was accepted will not appear, a different effect from when the above effect was accepted may be displayed.

In addition, it is desirable that the setting of the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operated in a long press mode) should not be permitted not only when an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the pattern change is in execution, but also when an effect acceptance period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 occurs (such as an effect acceptance period in which the expectation level is suggested when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, or an effect acceptance period in which the expectation level is suggested when a special operation means is operated). In other words, if an automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (by pressing and holding it) during an effect acceptance period for an operation means other than the operation button 410, the "automatic effect function that generates an effect upon operation without operation during the effect acceptance period" may be enabled partway through the effect acceptance period, causing the original effect acceptance (effect acceptance when an operation means other than the operation button 410 is operated) to occur without any operation. This could confuse a player who is unfamiliar with such automatic button effect states as to whether the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the effect acceptance period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 has occurred, which could reduce interest in the game.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is capable of executing premonition effects prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period, but it is also possible to have the premonition effects that appear prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) be executed in a different display mode from the premonition effects that appear prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether the automatic effect function is in a state where it can function within the specific effect acceptance period, allowing you to enjoy the effects with peace of mind.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to display a specific image (e.g., a "bar display" indicating the remaining time) indicating the remaining time during the effect acceptance period. However, when the effect acceptance period begins, an effect image different from the specific image (e.g., an image of lightning striking the specific area) may be displayed (premonition effect) outside the specific area where the specific image (e.g., the "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed, at least until the specific image is displayed. In other words, in this case, when the effect acceptance period begins, by checking the movement of the effect image different from the specific image, it is possible to encourage the player to focus on the location where the hidden "specific image indicating the remaining time" will soon appear. This effectively prevents the player from operating the device in time and causing the specific effect acceptance period to end. Furthermore, even if the player does not operate the device in time, the automatic effect function will function and the post-operation effect will be executed, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to set or cancel the automatic button presentation state through player operation. However, as shown in the following examples, the automatic button presentation state may be set or canceled as the game or presentation progresses based on the results of a jackpot determination. Examples of how the automatic button presentation state may be set or canceled as the game or presentation progresses include a control mode such as "controlling the machine in the automatic button presentation state while in the normal game state, but canceling the automatic button presentation state when the machine transitions to the jackpot game state or the high-probability time-saving state," a control mode such as "generating the automatic button presentation state during the execution period of the pattern change, and generating a presentation pattern that cancels the setting when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence, before the pattern change in the execution state ends," and a control mode such as "generating the automatic button presentation state over the period during which multiple pattern changes are executed." Alternatively, the pachinko machine 1 may be constantly controlled to the automatic button effect state, in which case the automatic button effect state will never be released, and the process of setting and releasing the "automatic button effect state" will be eliminated.

The automatic performance function described above may function when the remaining time in the performance acceptance period has expired, or at a specified timing thereafter, or at a timing during the remaining time in the performance acceptance period (specific timing). If the automatic performance function described above functions when the remaining time in the performance acceptance period has expired, or at a specified timing thereafter, the post-operation performance will be executed as if the performance acceptance had been made after the performance acceptance period had ended. In contrast, if the automatic performance function described above functions at a timing during the remaining time in the performance acceptance period (specific timing), the performance acceptance period will end and the post-operation performance will be executed at the time the automatic performance function described above functions (specific timing), just as if an operation had actually been performed.

However, in order to ensure peace of mind that a post-operation effect will occur even without operation when the machine is in the automatic button effect state, it is important to have the above-mentioned automatic effect function function and start the corresponding post-operation effect before the effect acceptance period ends (at a specific timing within the effect acceptance period). In other words, in this case, if the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function even though a specific timing within the effect acceptance period has arrived, the player can still cause the post-operation effect to occur by operating the machine themselves after the specific timing has arrived. This can effectively reduce any anxiety that may arise when the machine is in the automatic button effect state (for example, ``I might mistakenly believe that I am in the automatic button effect state even though I am not, and I won't be able to see the post-operation effect,'' or ``Some kind of problem might cause the automatic effect function to stop working and I won't be able to see the post-operation effect'').

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has characteristic technologies related to this automatic button presentation state. The characteristic technologies related to the automatic button presentation state will be explained below in order, but these characteristic technologies may be applied to each of the presentation examples described above, or the following characteristic technologies may be used in appropriate combination.

In explaining each of the characteristic technologies below, it is assumed that in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), when a presentation acceptance period occurs that can occur even when the device is not controlled to that specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), a post-operation presentation is generated that is the same as when an operation is performed, even if no operation is performed during that presentation acceptance period. However, instead of this, a specific display presentation (a display presentation that can be selected based on the result of a jackpot determination) that can only be performed when the device is controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) may be prepared, and when a specific valid period related to this occurs while the specific display presentation is being performed, a post-operation presentation that is the same as when the operation is performed may be generated, even if no operation is performed during that specific valid period. With this configuration, not only is the performance enhanced when the game is controlled in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) (the performance is improved by allowing the occurrence of specific display performances), but even if a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) is occurring, the automatic performance function may not function during another performance acceptance period that is set when the specific display performance is not being performed, whereas the automatic performance function functions during a specific valid period when the specific display performance is being performed, thereby eliminating the need for operation and allowing the player to experience a VIP feeling, which is expected to favorably increase gaming interest. Note that the automatic performance function does not necessarily have to be disabled during all of the other performance acceptance periods that are set when the specific display performance is not being performed; as long as the automatic performance function is disabled during at least some of the performance acceptance periods, it is possible to expect the above-mentioned effects when a specific valid period occurs when the specific display performance is being performed (when a performance acceptance period in which the automatic performance function always works occurs). Furthermore, even if such a specific valid period occurs, if the player does not perform any operation until a specific timing within the specific valid period arrives, it is desirable to activate the above-mentioned automatic performance function at that specific timing and start a corresponding post-operation performance.

In addition, at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect are prepared as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination,
When a first specific effective period occurs while a first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first specific effective period, thereby ending the first specific effective period and generating a corresponding post-operation effect.
When a second specific effective period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing when a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the second specific effective period, thereby ending the second specific effective period and generating a corresponding post-operation effect; and further,
When a third specific effective period occurs while a third specific display effect is being executed, various processes may be performed while the specific effect state is in such a manner that, if no operation is performed before the end of the third specific effective period despite the control being in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed will not appear. With this configuration, even if an effect acceptance period (specific effective period) occurs while the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is in effect, the automatic effect function described above will function when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the effect acceptance period began, or the automatic effect function will not function unless a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed, or the automatic effect function will not function at all even if the effect acceptance period ends. Therefore, even when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is possible to make it necessary to check which type of specific display effect was being performed when the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurs, and for example, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function even after the first predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to progress the effect with a sense of tension, such as whether the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function when the second predetermined time has elapsed, or whether the above-mentioned automatic effect function will not function at all. Note that the first specific valid period, second specific valid period, and third specific valid period are all accepted as effects and generate post-operation effects when the operating means to be operated (e.g., operation button 410) is in an operating state (when a so-called single operation is performed).

The first, second, and third specific display effects may be executable only when the game is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In this way, if a display mode that would not appear when the game is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed when the game is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is possible to maintain interest in the game when the game is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Furthermore, it is possible to provide a first specific display effect (first specific valid period) and a second specific display effect (second specific valid period), but not necessarily a third specific display effect (third specific valid period). Furthermore, the post-operation effects that occur when effects are accepted during the first specific valid period, second specific valid period, and third specific valid period may have different effects.

Furthermore, when a post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect function functioning as described above, a bar display (a display that changes image (here, changes area) over time) indicating the remaining time in the effect acceptance period may be displayed when the automatic effect function functions, rather than being hidden when the automatic effect function functions, so that it is possible to recognize when the automatic effect function function functioned (how much time was remaining in the effect acceptance period when the effect was accepted), and the post-operation effect may be generated while this bar display is displayed. With this configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that continues to be displayed when the automatic effect function functions, it becomes possible to recognize whether the effect acceptance period was a first specific valid period (a period in which the automatic effect function functions when a first predetermined time has elapsed, which is a relatively early stage after the effect acceptance period has occurred) or a second specific valid period (a period in which the automatic effect function functions when a second predetermined time has elapsed, which is a relatively late stage after the effect acceptance period has occurred).

In this sense, it is desirable to have the expected probability of a jackpot differ (e.g., more favorable) between the occurrence of a first specific valid period (the period during which the automatic effect function functions when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the effect acceptance period began) and the occurrence of a second specific valid period (the period during which the automatic effect function functions when a second predetermined time has elapsed since the effect acceptance period began) (e.g., more favorable for the second specific valid period). In this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, if the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect are executed, the expected probability of a jackpot differs between the appearance of the first specific display effect and the appearance of the second specific display effect (e.g., more favorable for the second specific display effect). Furthermore, if a post-operation effect is generated by a player's operation during the effect acceptance period, the "bar display" may be hidden when the post-operation effect occurs. Alternatively, as in the case when the automatic effect function described above operates, the "bar display" may be displayed rather than hidden, and the post-operation effect may be generated with the "bar display" displayed. The post-operation performance does not have to be implemented as a display change on the performance display device 1600; for example, it may be implemented as illumination from a lamp provided on the game board 5 or as an action by a movable decorative object.

Furthermore, when a post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect function described above, the post-operation effect occurs automatically without the player having any involvement in the operation of the operation means (e.g., operation button 410), raising concerns that the player may not be able to determine which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the automatic effect function described above is used to generate a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display an operation target suggestion image (e.g., an image display modeling the operation means to be operated) that suggests the operation target during the effect acceptance period, and to generate the post-operation effect with the operation target suggestion image displayed rather than hidden, even when the automatic effect function described above has functioned. Note that in this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transparency, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect occurs does not necessarily have to be the same, as long as it is possible to recognize which operation means was the operation target even when the post-operation effect occurs. In contrast, if a post-operation effect occurs as a result of an operation by a player during the effect acceptance period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden when the post-operation effect occurs, or, as when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the post-operation effect may be generated with the operation target suggestion image displayed rather than hidden. When the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, such as when the above-mentioned first specific valid period or the above-mentioned second specific valid period, the post-operation effect may always be generated with the operation target suggestion image displayed rather than hidden.

In addition, if the post-operation effect is generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed in one of several modes with different odds of winning, it will be possible to simultaneously check both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, the post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change on the effect display device 1600; for example, it may be executed as illumination from a lamp provided on the gaming board 5 or as an action by a movable decorative element.

For example, even in a pachinko machine 1 that does not have the automatic effect function described above, multiple modes of operation target suggestion images (such as images that mimic the operation means) with different jackpot expectations (for example, the rate at which the post-operation effect will be executed in a mode that appears only when a jackpot has been achieved) can be prepared, and when an operation is accepted by the player, the operation target suggestion image (such as an image that mimics the operation means) can remain displayed in one of the multiple modes with different expectations at the time the post-operation effect begins to be executed based on that operation acceptance. This allows the player to simultaneously check both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, when a valid period (effect acceptance period) during which a mock image is displayed is generated, it is desirable to have two types of valid period (effect acceptance period) based on the type of valid period (effect acceptance period) (such as the conditions under which the valid period occurs or the type of post-operation effect that occurs when an operation is accepted). These include a case where the display area is reduced over time (first valid period generated when a first condition is met) and a case where the display area is not reduced over time (second valid period generated when a second condition is met). In other words, during a valid period in which the display area is not reduced over time, it becomes difficult to tell how much time is left until operations can be accepted, thereby maintaining a sense of tension during the valid period. Note that "not reducing the display area of a specific image over time" can mean, for example, that while a gauge image is normally displayed in a manner that reduces its display area over time (first valid period), during the second valid period, the gauge image itself is not displayed, or the gauge image is displayed but its display area is not reduced over time.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the second valid period (when the display area is not reduced over time), it is desirable that the mock image remain displayed rather than hidden when the change corresponding to the accepted operation (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. This allows the user to know that the operation was accepted while the mock image is displayed (before the valid period ends), eliminating any anxiety that the user may have, such as "maybe I missed the operation acceptance in time."

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the imitation image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after a change occurs in response to operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or a lamp illumination), and the imitation image may be made difficult to see by other images. It is sufficient that the operating tool that was the target of operation can be recognized even when a change occurs in response to operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or a lamp illumination). However, to optimally achieve such effects, it is desirable that the display mode of the imitation image be maintained in the same mode as it was before the operation was accepted, at least at the time when a change occurs in response to operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or a lamp illumination), and that the imitation image is not made difficult to see by other images. Therefore, if the imitation image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which operation acceptance is permitted, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when a change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or a lamp illumination) begins to be executed. On the other hand, if a change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or a lamp illumination) occurs due to an operation by the player during the first valid period, the imitation image may be hidden when the change (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs, or, as in the case of the second valid period described above, the imitation image may be displayed rather than hidden, and a change in response to the operation acceptance (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) may occur while the imitation image is displayed.

However, even during this effective period when "the display area of the specific image is not reduced over time," a mock image of the operating means to be operated should be displayed, and it is desirable that this mock image be displayed as a moving image that progresses at a specific speed. With this configuration, although the remaining time is not indicated by the gauge image, it is possible, though difficult, to determine the remaining time during which operations are permitted to be accepted based on how much the moving image of the mock image has progressed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is equipped with a first operating means (e.g., operating button 410) and a second operating means (e.g., sword ornament 5001) as its operating means, and may generate an effective period during which operations are permitted for the first operating means (effect acceptance period), or an effective period during which operations are permitted for the second operating means (effect acceptance period). Of these effective periods, a first image modeled after the first operating means is displayed during the effective period during which operations are permitted for the first operating means, and a second image modeled after the second operating means is displayed during the effective period during which operations are permitted for the second operating means. Furthermore, the expected probability of a jackpot indicated when an operation is accepted (the rate at which a post-operation effect that only appears at the time of a jackpot is executed) differs between the effective period during which operations are permitted for the first operating means and the effective period during which operations are permitted for the second operating means. In addition to the valid period during which operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted (effect acceptance period) and the valid period during which operation acceptance for the second operating means is permitted (effect acceptance period), other valid periods may also be generated. In this regard, when an operation is accepted during a valid period with a higher probability of winning (for example, a valid period during which operation acceptance for the second operating means is permitted), it is desirable that the model image (second model image) be displayed rather than hidden when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed.

As a result, in addition to cases where an operation is accepted in a situation such as that shown in Figure 183 (f) above, even if an operation opportunity is given for the second operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001), and an operation is mistakenly performed on the first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) while the first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) is still in an operating state (while operating), and an operation is made on the second operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) and this operation is accepted, the player can be made to recognize that this was properly accepted.

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the imitation image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after a change occurs in response to operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or a lamp illumination), and the imitation image may be made difficult to see by other images, as long as it is possible to recognize which operating tool was the target of operation even when a change occurs in response to operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or a lamp illumination). However, to optimally achieve the above-mentioned effects, it is desirable to maintain the display mode of the imitation image in the same mode as it was displayed before the operation was accepted, at least at the time when a change occurs in response to operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or a lamp illumination), and to prevent the gauge image from being made difficult to see by other images. Therefore, if the dummy image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which operation acceptance is permitted, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when a change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. Furthermore, in order to ensure that the player recognizes that the effect has been accepted properly, even if a change in response to operation acceptance (such as a display change or lamp illumination) occurs due to a player's operation during the first valid period, it is desirable to display the dummy image (first dummy image) rather than hiding it when the change (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs, and cause the change in response to operation acceptance (such as a display change or lamp illumination) to occur while it is displayed.

According to this configuration, the game includes a determination means for making a determination, a performance means for performing a performance based on the result of the determination by the determination means, a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means obtaining a predetermined result, a specific operation receiving portion (operation button 410 that can be moved between a normal position and a pressed position) that is movable between a first position and a second position, a first detection unit that can detect a specific action (pressing operation) by a player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving portion to the second position, and a second detection unit that can detect a special action (e.g., sheathing operation) by a player to a special operation receiving portion (e.g., sword ornament 5001) different from the specific operation receiving portion, and multiple performance acceptance periods (different types of post-operation performances that occur when performance acceptance is made) including a first performance acceptance period and a second performance acceptance period. a number of effect acceptance periods are provided, during the first effect acceptance period a specific image simulating the specific operation receiving portion is displayed and an effect is accepted upon detection by the first detection unit, during the second effect acceptance period a special image simulating the special operation receiving portion is displayed and an effect is accepted upon detection by the second detection unit, and if the specific operation receiving portion is displaced from the first position to the second position by a specific action by the player during the second effect acceptance period despite the special image simulating the special operation receiving portion being displayed, an effect is accepted upon detection by the second detection unit even if the player performs the special action while maintaining the specific operation receiving portion at the second position, and a post-operation effect can be executed based on the effect acceptance.

And with this configuration, "even if the player performs the special action while maintaining the specific operation receiving section in the second position, the effect is accepted upon detection by the second detection section, and at the point in time when the post-operation effect begins to be executed based on that effect acceptance, the special image that imitates the special operation receiving section is not hidden but remains displayed, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the post-operation effect is being executed as a correct operation, rather than as an incorrect operation."

If the special Momo image is displayed in one of several different modes with different jackpot expectations, the post-operation effect will begin in that displayed mode. If the effect is accepted without any such erroneous operation, the Momo image may remain displayed rather than hidden when the post-operation effect begins, or the Momo image may be hidden when the post-operation effect begins.

The second effect acceptance period, during which a special operation opportunity is granted to a special operation receiving element, often occurs less frequently than the first effect acceptance period, during which a specific operation opportunity is granted to a specific operation receiving element, which is thought to be one of the factors that leads to operational errors. Therefore, when the second effect acceptance period, during which a special operation opportunity is granted to a special operation receiving element, occurs, it is desirable to output an acceptance acceptance sound that indicates that an operation acceptance state has been entered or that an operation acceptance state will be entered. This allows the player to recognize that the second effect acceptance period has occurred, which is expected to make operational errors less likely. The "acceptance acceptance sound" refers to a sound that, when output begins, either ensures that an acceptance acceptance state (valid period) occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is assigned), or indicates that an acceptance acceptance state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that output has begun within the set time during which effect reception is permitted, and that a state in which effect reception is permitted has been reached, or that output has begun before the set time during which effect reception is permitted has begun, and that a state in which effect reception is permitted has been reached; for example, it is output as a sound effect such as a "beep."

However, even when the first effect acceptance period occurs, during which an operation opportunity is granted to the specific operation receiving unit, a reception acceptance sound may be output to indicate that the operation acceptance has been permitted or to indicate that the operation acceptance will be permitted. In this case, however, it is desirable to make the type (tone, etc.) of the reception acceptance sound different when the first effect acceptance period occurs and when the second effect acceptance period occurs. Alternatively, during the first effect acceptance period, even if an operation acceptance is made while the reception acceptance sound is being output, the reception acceptance sound in the output state is continued without being terminated. However, during the second effect acceptance period, if an operation acceptance is made while the reception acceptance sound is being output, the reception acceptance sound in the output state is desirably terminated midway. Both of these configurations may be employed. This configuration makes it easier to determine whether the first effect acceptance period or the second effect acceptance period is occurring, and makes it possible to properly determine whether an operation to the specific operation receiving unit or an operation to the special operation receiving unit has been accepted.

In addition, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 may display a gauge image (small gauge image) with a relatively small display area, and then gradually reduce the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) over time (for example, eventually reducing the display area to "0"), thereby generating a small gauge valid period (effect acceptance period) that indicates the remaining time during which operations are permitted; or may display a gauge image (large gauge image) with a relatively large display area, and then gradually reduce the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) over time (for example, eventually reducing the display area to "0"), thereby generating a large gauge valid period (effect acceptance period) that indicates the remaining time during which operations are permitted. The small gauge valid period during which the small gauge image is displayed and the large gauge valid period during which the large gauge image is displayed have different jackpot expectations (the rate at which a post-operation effect that only appears at the time of a jackpot is executed) indicated when an operation is accepted (for example, the large gauge valid period has a higher jackpot expectation). In addition to the small gauge validity period and large gauge validity period, other validity periods may also be generated. The small gauge validity period and large gauge validity period may provide an opportunity to operate the same operation target, or may provide an opportunity to operate different operation targets.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the large gauge's valid period, it is desirable that the large gauge image remain displayed rather than hidden when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes resulting from the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp illumination) begins to be executed. It is also desirable that the large gauge image continue to shrink over time even when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes resulting from the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp illumination) begins to be executed. This provides a sense of security, as if there is a lot of time remaining, while, after the operation acceptance, it can create a sense of anxiety about whether the operation acceptance was appropriate, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the gauge image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after a change occurs in response to operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination), and the gauge image may be made difficult to see by other images. However, in order to optimally achieve the above-mentioned effects, it is desirable that, at least at the time when a change in response to operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed, the display state of the gauge image be maintained in the mode it was displayed in before the operation was accepted, and that the gauge image not be made difficult to see by other images. On the other hand, if a change occurs during the small gauge validity period due to a player's operation in response to the operation received (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp illumination), the gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden when the change (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs, or, as in the case of the large gauge validity period described above, the gauge image (large gauge image) may not be hidden, but may remain displayed while a change occurs in response to the operation received (display change, lamp illumination, etc.).

When the large gauge valid period begins, it is desirable to output a sound indicating that a state in which effect reception is permitted or that effect reception will be permitted. This allows the player to recognize that the large gauge valid period has begun, further emphasizing the sense of security until operation reception is completed. This "acceptance permission sound" refers to a sound that, when output begins, either guarantees that the acceptance permission state (valid period) will occur while this sound is being output (while sound data is assigned), or is a sound that indicates that the acceptance permission state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that output begins within the set time in which effect reception is permitted and that a state in which effect reception is permitted has begun, or that output begins before the set time in which effect reception is permitted and that a state in which effect reception is permitted has begun, and is output as a sound such as a "beep beep."

However, even when a small gauge valid period occurs, a sound indicating that a state in which a special effect is permitted or that a special effect will be permitted may be output. In this case, however, it is desirable to make the manner (tone, etc.) of the sound indicating that a special effect is permitted different between when a small gauge valid period occurs and when a large gauge valid period occurs. Alternatively, during a small gauge valid period, even if a special effect is permitted while the sound indicating that a special effect is permitted is being output, the sound indicating that a special effect is permitted may continue to be output without terminating. However, during a large gauge valid period, it is desirable to terminate the sound indicating that a special effect is permitted while the sound indicating that a special effect is permitted while being output. Both of these configurations may be employed. This configuration makes it easier to determine whether a small gauge valid period or a large gauge valid period is occurring, and allows for accurate determination of whether an operation was permitted during a small gauge valid period or a large gauge valid period.

The large gauge image and the small gauge image may not only differ in size, but also in shape (e.g., images that are not similar).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or below), during the period in which operation acceptance is permitted, the replica image is dynamically displayed to depict the state in which the operation receiving portion is displaced. In this regard, if the replica image is not hidden but remains displayed at the point in time when a change in response to operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed, the dynamic display of the replica image may also be continued without being terminated.

Furthermore, the model image and gauge image may be displayed as an integrated model image, which will be described later.

In the presentation examples mentioned above and those described below, "operation acceptance" may be detection by a mechanical operation means such as a button, or it may be acceptance by detecting contact with a specific operation receiving portion using a touch sensor, or acceptance by non-contact detection of the player's movements in a specific area.

In addition, when an effect that generates an effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is granted to an operation means (any of multiple operation means) is defined as an "operation-related effect," the operation-related effect may be executed in parallel with another unrelated specific effect (for example, a movable object effect, a count effect, etc.). In this case, however, when the "operation-related effect" is executed but the "other unrelated specific effect" is not executed, it is desirable to make the automatic effect function function more frequently than when the "operation-related effect" and the "other unrelated specific effect" are executed in parallel. That is, when an "operation-based effect" and an "unrelated other specific effect" are simultaneously present, even if the "operation-based effect" does not receive a special effect and a post-operation effect is not executed, the "unrelated other specific effect" is still in execution, which can prevent a decline in game interest. On the other hand, when an "operation-based effect" is executed but the "unrelated other specific effect" is not, if the "operation-based effect" does not receive a special effect and a post-operation effect is not executed, no effect will be executed, which inevitably leads to a decline in game interest. Therefore, when an "operation-based effect" is executed but the "unrelated other specific effect" is not, the automatic effect function is activated more frequently than when the "operation-based effect" and the "unrelated other specific effect" are simultaneously present, thereby maintaining game interest when an operation-based effect is generated. The percentage may be 100%. Incidentally, premonition effects that are performed before the effect acceptance period begins, and effects in which the operation means to be operated are operated, can be said to be executed as "operation-related effects" or effects related thereto. Furthermore, if the "other specific effect" is, for example, generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the premonition effect), it can be suggested in advance that the automatic effect function will function with a high probability. In this case, it is desirable to execute the effect as an effect that ends after the effect acceptance period (preferably, the post-operation effect) ends. In contrast, if the "other specific effect" is, for example, generated after the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the premonition effect) and executed as an effect that ends before the end of the effect acceptance period, it becomes possible to recognize whether the automatic effect function will function with a high probability only immediately before the start, thereby providing an effect with a sense of tension. In this regard, if the "another specific effect" is to be generated before the effect acceptance period (preferably, the precursor effect) begins, and the "another specific effect" is performed multiple times within one pattern change, it will be executed even when the effect acceptance period does not occur, which increases the probability that the automatic effect function will function when the "another specific effect" is executed, creating a sense of tension as to whether the effect acceptance period will occur.

In addition, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), until the number of miss variations according to the result of the jackpot determination is consumed in sequence and the number of times they are executed reaches a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive miss variations are executed and the 1000th miss variation), a presentation acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operating means (any of multiple operating means) based on the result of the jackpot determination can be generated with a predetermined probability, and even if the presentation acceptance period has occurred, if there is no operation by the player, the above-mentioned automatic presentation function may or may not be activated. In contrast, when a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) is in progress, and the number of executions of failure variations according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially consumed and reaches a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive failure variations are executed, resulting in the 1000th failure variation), the symbol variation (presentation pattern) that has reached the specific value will always generate a presentation acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the multiple operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, and even if there is no operation by the player during the presentation acceptance period, the above-mentioned automatic presentation function will be activated to always generate the same post-operation presentation as if there had been an operation by the player during the presentation acceptance period. With this configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of failure variations reaches a specific value, the pachinko machine 1 itself will always activate the automatic presentation function even if there is no operation by the player, as if feeling responsible for the past "having urged the player to operate every time a presentation acceptance period occurred while failure variations were being executed continuously, but without any results." This will ensure that the interest in the game is maintained. In this case, during the effect acceptance period that occurs when the losing variations are sequentially consumed and the number of times they are executed reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th losing variation), it is desirable to display a special display image (for example, "If it is too much trouble, I will operate it for you") that is different from the display image (for example, "Operate it") that appeared during the effect acceptance period until the losing variations are sequentially consumed and the number of times they are executed reaches a specific value (for example, up to 999 losing variations). Furthermore, even after a symbol change (presentation pattern) that has reached a specific value has been consumed, each time a symbol change is consumed until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a jackpot game state) is met, a presentation acceptance period should always be generated within that symbol change (presentation pattern), during which an operation opportunity is given to the operating means (any of multiple operating means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, and a special display image (for example, "If it's too much trouble, I'll operate it for you") should be displayed, and even if no operation is made by the player within that presentation acceptance period, the above-mentioned automatic presentation function should be activated to always generate a post-operation presentation corresponding to the presentation acceptance.

In addition, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), the number of remaining variations may be displayed until the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive executions of a losing variation and the 1000th losing variation) as the losing variations according to the result of the jackpot determination are consumed in sequence.

In addition, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), while the missing variations corresponding to the results of the jackpot determination are sequentially consumed until the number of times they are executed reaches a specific value, both a presentation acceptance period for the first operating means and a presentation acceptance period for the second operating means can occur during the pattern change; however, during the pattern change when the missing variations are sequentially consumed and the number of times they are executed reaches a specific value, the presentation can be advanced so that only one of the presentation acceptance periods for the first operating means or the second operating means always occurs, and the other cannot occur. With this configuration, because the opportunity to operate the same operating means is always provided, it is possible to effectively prevent expectations from being raised about the occurrence of a presentation acceptance period itself. However, this example of effect seems to be an expression of responsibility for the fact that "despite prompting the player to operate each time an effect acceptance period occurred while a series of losing variations were being executed, no results were achieved despite the fact that the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as an effect that ensures that the automatic effect function will function even if there is no operation by the player." In order to prevent excessive expectations from being raised any further, it is desirable to generate an effect acceptance period for the first operating means (e.g., operating button 410) which has a relatively low level of expectation at the time of activation, and not generate an effect acceptance period for the second operating means (e.g., sword decoration 5001).

Furthermore, the first effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is granted for a first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) among the multiple operation means can occur both when the operation means is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) and when the operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). However, the second effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is granted for a second operation means (e.g., sword ornament 5001) among the multiple operation means can be configured to not occur when the operation means is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but can occur when the operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). This configuration can enhance the effect when the operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and can maintain interest in the game when the operation means is in that specific effect state (automatic button effect state).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a performance acceptance period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
Displaying a mock-up image of the operation means (an operation target suggestion image suggesting the operation means to be operated) (mock-up image display means),
After the effect reception period has started, if a player performs an operation while the mock image is being displayed, a post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
After the effect reception period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives without any operation by the player while the mock image is being displayed, the post-operation effect can be executed without any operation by the player (automatic effect reception means).
However, it is desirable that the mock image can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different rates (expectations) of executing a post-operation effect in a "mode advantageous to the player" when the effect is accepted. With this configuration, in either case where the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation accepting means or where the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect accepting means, the post-operation effect can be generated while the expectation is recognizable.

Furthermore, when a post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect function described above, the post-operation effect occurs automatically without the player having any involvement in the operation of the operation means (e.g., operation button 410), raising concerns that the player may not be able to determine which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the automatic effect function described above is used to generate a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display a mock image (an operation target suggestion image that suggests the operation target operation means) during the effect acceptance period, and to generate the post-operation effect with the mock image displayed rather than hidden, even when the automatic effect function described above has functioned. Note that in this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transparency, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect occurs does not necessarily have to be the same, as long as it is possible to recognize which operation target operation means was used even when the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if a post-operation effect is generated by an operation by the player during the effect acceptance period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden when the post-operation effect is generated, or, as in the case when the automatic effect function described above is functioning, the operation target suggestion image may be displayed rather than hidden when the post-operation effect is generated. The post-operation effect may be executed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area where the mock image is displayed, or may be executed by lighting up a lamp provided on the game board 5 or by operating a movable decorative object.

In this case, if the replica image is displayed in one of multiple modes with different expected values, it will be possible to check the expected value (display mode of the replica image) that was suggested during the effect acceptance period even when the post-operation effect has occurred.

The mock-up image that continues to be displayed in this way will be hidden after the post-operation effect occurs. However, it is desirable that the time from when the post-operation effect is executed to when the mock-up image is hidden be different between when automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the first-side effect reception period began and when automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the first-side effect reception period began. With this configuration, even if it is not possible to determine whether the post-operation effect occurred by automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed or when a time different from the specific time has elapsed, it is possible to determine at what time the post-operation effect occurred by checking the time from when the post-operation effect was executed to when the mock-up image was hidden.

In addition, the expected probability of a jackpot being obtained in the jackpot determination may be different when a post-operation effect is generated by automatic processing after a specific time has passed and when a post-operation effect is generated by automatic processing after a time other than the specific time has passed.

In addition, when a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) is controlled and a presentation acceptance period occurs in which the player is given an opportunity to operate, one of two display modes (for example, a low-expectation display mode with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot, or a high-expectation display mode with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot) can appear during the presentation acceptance period, and when a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, the presentation is always accepted (the automatic presentation function always functions) and a post-operation presentation corresponding to the presentation acceptance is executed even if no operation is performed within the presentation acceptance period, but when a low-expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, the presentation can progress in two ways: if no operation is performed within the presentation acceptance period, the presentation is accepted (the automatic presentation function functions) and a post-operation presentation corresponding to the presentation acceptance is executed, or the presentation is not accepted (the automatic presentation function does not function) and a post-operation presentation is not executed. That is, if a player forgets to operate a button when a high-expectation display mode (e.g., a red operation image) appears, a decrease in gaming interest is unavoidable due to the inability to confirm the post-operation effect. However, if a player forgets to operate a button when a low-expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, it is expected that the decrease in gaming interest due to the forgetting of operation will not be significant. Therefore, if a player forgets to operate a button when a high-expectation display mode (e.g., a red operation image) appears, the automatic effect function is always activated within the effect acceptance period to avoid a decrease in gaming interest due to the forgetting of operation. However, if a player forgets to operate a button when a low-expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, the automatic effect function is not always activated within the effect acceptance period to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the button, thereby creating a sense of tension in the game and increasing the player's sense of participation. Note that, when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low-expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) may appear, but a high-expectation display mode (e.g., a red operation image) may not appear. Furthermore, any of three or more display modes may appear during the effect acceptance period.

[More dramatic effects for image display]
As explained with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to perform a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can perform a performance determination (such as a notice determination) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (such as a notice performance) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern to selectively display. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (such as a notice performance) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, or none of the plurality of expected performances (such as a notice performance) may be executed.

When such a presentation determination (presentation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is made, the presentation content corresponding to the result of the presentation determination is controlled to be displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and a variable presentation using decorative symbols according to the result of the jackpot determination is executed together with expected presentations (advance notice presentations) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of moving objects (gimmick presentations). As a result of this, when the variable presentation using decorative symbols is executed together with expected presentations related to the background depiction and the movement of moving objects, etc., and the jackpot pattern is displayed, the player is able to play a jackpot game as a special bonus.

In this configuration, the variable effect using the decorative symbols serves as an effect with the function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination, and the expectation effects related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serve as an effect with the function of suggesting the expectation level (including 0% and 100%) of obtaining a jackpot. In other words, players enjoy playing through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high-expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach effect accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, then regardless of the result of the effect determination (such as a preview determination), when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a predetermined condition is met), an operation acceptance effect (valid period) in which effect acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, as will be described later, the acceptance permission sound output when the operation acceptance effect is generated varies in type depending on the result of the effect determination, thereby indicating the percentage of times the post-operation effect will be executed in a highly expected manner and the percentage of times the jackpot symbol will stop.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which a reach state is not even formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, if a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, an operation acceptance effect (valid period) in which effect acceptance is permitted can be generated when the pattern effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met). However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the effect determination, the operation acceptance effect (valid period) will not be generated even if the pattern effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Furthermore, the operation acceptance effect (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as an effect different from the operation acceptance effect (valid period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during an SP reach.

Note that, regardless of the result of the preview effect determination, variation patterns that will cause an operation acceptance effect (valid period) to occur at a predetermined timing during an SP reach may be prepared in addition to the above-mentioned "specific variation patterns." However, it is desirable that variation patterns that will cause an operation acceptance effect (valid period) to occur at a predetermined timing regardless of the result of the preview effect determination not be included in low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns), or that their selection rate be low.

However, the operation acceptance effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions simply executes a post-operation effect that causes a predetermined change to the effect component that is the target of the effect (at least one of a display change on the effect display device 1600, a sound change on the speaker, a change in light emitted by a lamp, and an effect movement by a movable decorative element) as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the operation acceptance effect (valid period) itself has little effect, and there are concerns that it may reduce interest in playing until the post-operation effect is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
As mentioned above, various measures have been taken, such as making it possible to at least generate a low-expectation non-suppressed acceptance performance in which, during the execution period of a pattern performance (performance pattern) based on a low-expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) is output in a non-suppressed mode, providing an opportunity for operation, and a high-expectation suppressed acceptance performance in which, during the execution period of a pattern performance (performance pattern) based on a high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is in a non-output state (the playback period in which audible sounds are recorded in the sound data has ended, or channel allocation has ended, etc.).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further displays the Momo image displayed in the operation acceptance presentation as an integrated Momo image integrated with the peripheral decorative image that decorates the periphery of the Momo image, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game when the operation acceptance presentation (valid period) occurs. It is desirable for such an integrated Momo image to be displayed in both the operation acceptance presentation (valid period) that occurs when a symbol presentation based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during an SP reach, and the operation acceptance presentation (valid period) that occurs with the above-mentioned predetermined variation pattern. It is also desirable for such an integrated Momo image to be displayed in both the low-expectation non-suppression acceptance presentation and the high-expectation suppression acceptance presentation. Furthermore, in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game, it is desirable to replace the display mode of the exemplified Momo image in each of the presentation examples described above with one of the integrated Momo images described below.

The following describes the case where the mock-up image is displayed as an "integrated mock-up image."
First, to clarify the concept of "simulated image," the operating means that receives an operation opportunity during the operation reception effect includes a "operation receiving portion" that receives the player's operation and a "peripheral decorative portion" that decorates the periphery of the operation receiving portion. In this regard, the "simulated image" refers to an image that mimics the "operation receiving portion" of such an operating means. The "operation receiving portion" is typically designed to be displaced by the player's operation, while the "peripheral decorative portion" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the operating means (the operation unit 400) illustrated in Figures 39 and 40, the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the "peripheral decorative portion" corresponds to the frame unit 415. Furthermore, in the operating means (the sword decorative body 5001) illustrated in Figures 124 and 139, the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the "peripheral decorative portion" corresponds to the sheath portion 5020.

Figure 144 shows an example of an "integrated model image" that is displayed when an operation reception effect (valid period) occurs on an operating means that is provided with an "operation receiving portion" that receives a "pressing operation" by a player.

For ease of explanation, this example assumes that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiving part" on the top surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration 5001. In other words, when the player "presses" the handle button 5014, it is pushed into the handle portion 5012 and detected by a specified sensor (detection means), and this detection information is used in the performance (such as the trigger for executing a post-operation performance). With this configuration, the sword decoration 5001 as an operation unit is provided with two operation receiving parts: the "handle button 5014" which can move (move up and down) relative to the handle portion 5012, and the "handle portion 5012" which can move (move up and down) relative to the sheath portion 5020.

Figure 144 explains the "integrated model image" when a specific operation acceptance effect (valid period) occurs in which an operation opportunity is granted to the pattern button 5014 when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. However, in the examples described below, including Figure 144, the "integrated model image" when an operation opportunity is granted to the pattern button 5014 may also be applied as the "integrated model image" when an operation acceptance effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is granted to the operation button 410, rather than the pattern button 5014. In other words, in this case, the "model image of the operation button 410" exemplified in each of the above-mentioned performance examples can each be replaced with the "integrated model image" described below; in this case, the pattern button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a component.

As shown in FIG. 144(a)-(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific operation acceptance effect (valid period) is generated in which an operation opportunity is granted for the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the effect display device 1600 displays a button image BMG modeled after the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery as an integrated image IGa-IGd. In the example shown in FIG. 144(a)-(d), the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are not prepared as separate image data, but are displayed only as a single integrated image data (integrated image IGa-IGd). Furthermore, when the integrated image IGa-IGd is displayed, operation prompts such as "Press" and "Down Arrow" are also displayed, but for the sake of convenience, these will be omitted here.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of presentation modes including a "first presentation mode with a relatively low expectation" and a "second presentation mode with a relatively high expectation" are prepared as post-operation presentations to be executed when an operation is accepted in a specific operation acceptance presentation (valid period), and one of these presentation modes is executed based on the result of the jackpot judgment (presentation judgment). In this regard, in the examples shown in Figures 144(a) to 144(d),
- During a specific operation reception effect (validity period), the appearance rate of the "relatively highly anticipated second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image IGb) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image IGa) appears.
- During a specific operation reception effect (validity period), the appearance rate of the "relatively highly anticipated second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 144(c) (integrated model image IGc) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image IGb) appears.
- In order to establish a relationship in which the appearance rate of the "second presentation mode with a relatively high expectation" as a post-operation presentation is higher when the mode shown in Figure 144(d) (integrated model image IGd) appears than when the mode shown in Figure 144(c) (integrated model image IGc) appears during a specific operation acceptance presentation (validity period), one of the integrated model images IGa to IGd is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination).

It is not necessary to provide all four of the integrated model images IGa-IGd. Providing at least two of these models will still be sufficient to indicate the degree of expectation for the post-operation effect within the validity period. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide additional models different from the above four models (integrated model images IGa-IGd), and display any of these models.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
- An operation means (sword ornament 5001, performance operation unit 400) having an operation receiving part (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) that is displaced by operation by the player and a peripheral ornament part (handle part 5012, frame unit 415) provided on the periphery thereof,
- an integrated model image display means for displaying a model image of an operation receiving portion as an integrated model image IGa to IGd integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the model image;
- It is equipped with an operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation effect) when a player performs an operation while the integrated model image is displayed, causing a predetermined displacement in the operation receiving section, and the integrated model image can be displayed in any of multiple forms (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

Details of the "integrated model images" shown in Figures 144(a) to (d) will be explained separately for each of these aspects (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

First, the "integrated model image IGa" shown in Figure 144(a) is composed of a normal button model image BMGa and a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa that decorates its periphery. However, in the "integrated model image IGa," the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as "an image modeling the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the subject of an operation opportunity," whereas the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa does not model the peripheral decoration part (pattern part 5012 or frame unit 415) that is actually provided on the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the subject of an operation opportunity, and instead decorates the periphery of the normal button model image BMGa as a virtual decoration in the display performance of the performance display device 1600.

With this configuration, even when multiple operating means are provided, it is easy to determine which of those operating means has an opportunity to be operated by visually checking the normal button imitation image BMGa, which imitates (part of) the operating means being operated. Furthermore, the normal button imitation image BMGa itself is displayed not as an actual peripheral decoration, but as a luxurious and large image (integrated imitation image IGa) integrated with a peripheral decoration image, which is preferable for improving decorativeness and presentation. Therefore, the presentation impact when the normal button imitation image BMGa is displayed is greater, which is expected to increase the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, there is no need to worry about the cost or installation space required to make an actual peripheral decoration more luxurious, and it is possible to achieve a high degree of presentation freedom that is not limited by the shape of an actual peripheral decoration.

In the "integrated model image IGa" shown in Figure 144(a), the normal border decoration image SSGa is depicted as a base for placing a button (normal button model image BMGa), and its top surface is decorated with a predetermined decoration that warns that the button is high-risk. As mentioned above, this "base" and "predetermined decoration" have a different shape from the actual border decoration and are depicted as different decorations.

In this regard, the "integrated model image IGa" according to this embodiment provides a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG relative to the normal border decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 145 and other figures, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that its display area within the display target area decreases over time. More specifically, when no operation is accepted within the valid period, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that its display area decreases over time from a predetermined maximum value to a predetermined minimum value (including "0"). In other words, in this case, the normal border decoration image SSGa not only functions to suggest the operating tool that is the target of operation, but also serves as a remaining time suggestion function that suggests the remaining time until the state in which operation acceptance is permitted (valid period) ends.

The normal border decoration image SSGa shown in Figure 144 (a) has a partition image KG that separates the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas within the normal border decoration image SSGa. The area surrounded by this partition image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG." However, the partition image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal border decoration image SSGa may be used as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG."

In the example shown in Figure 144(a), a predetermined decoration (here, a "black and white striped pattern") is applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG with a predetermined transparency is displayed so as to overlap the display target area with the predetermined decoration. With this configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but remains visible even in the area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, making it possible to maintain interest in the game throughout the entire period from when the gauge image GG changes from full to empty.

When realizing this display mode within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, in addition to the method of displaying a gauge image GG with a predetermined transparency overlaid on the display target area with the predetermined decoration, it is also possible to use a method of displaying the display target area with the predetermined decoration by changing the color of the area itself between the area with the gauge and the area without the gauge. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist as standalone image data, and the gauge image GG can be expressed simply by changing the color of the predetermined decoration within the display target area.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 144(a), the predetermined decoration (here, a "black and white striped pattern") applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is applied in a manner that spans other areas within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. This further enhances the integrated decorativeness of the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself, and is expected to more favorably increase gaming interest when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(a), when a specific operation acceptance effect (validity period) in which an "integrated model image IGa" is displayed occurs on the effect display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) to be operated is illuminated in the same color (e.g., "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGa." That is, as will be described later, multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared for the button model image BMG, and the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as one of these modes. By adopting such an illumination mode, it becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation) of the button model image BMG simply by checking the pattern button 5014 to be operated, without visually checking the normal button model image BMGa.

The "button imitation image BMGa (Fig. 144(a))" does not necessarily have to be an exact imitation of the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the object of operation; the key is that it should be displayed with a level of imitation (deformation, etc.) that allows the user to recognize which operation tool is the object of operation.

In contrast, the "integrated model image IGb" shown in Figure 144 (b) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated model image IGa," and is configured as an image that integrates a button model image BMG that represents the object to be operated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. However, in this "integrated model image IGb," the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa," but the button model image BMG is not displayed as the above-mentioned "button model image BMGa," but as a "special button model image BMGb" that has a different shape.

More specifically, in the "integrated model image IGb" shown in Figure 144(b), the special button model image BMGb does not model the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the target of operation, and is displayed as an image with a different shape from the "button model image BMGa (Figure 144(a))" that models the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410). However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that it may become difficult to recognize which of multiple operation means is the target of operation when the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed.

However, as mentioned above, in the "integrated model image IGa," the "button model image BMGa," which models the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410), which is the object of operation, is displayed integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa." Therefore, the "normal border decoration image SSGa" itself naturally has the function of suggesting that the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the object of operation. In contrast, in the "integrated model image IGb," the "special button model image BMGb" is displayed integrated with this "normal border decoration image SSGa." Therefore, even if the "special button model image BMGb" does not properly model the object of operation, the "integrated model image IGb" as a whole can suggest that the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the object of operation. In order to effectively achieve this effect (the function of the normal border decoration image SSGa to suggest the operation target), it is important that the "normal border decoration image SSGa" is not displayed when the operation target is an operation means (such as the handle portion 5012) other than the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410).

With this configuration, the button image BMG, which represents the operation receiving portion, and the peripheral decoration image SSG, which decorates its periphery, are displayed as an integrated image. This allows the button image BMG, which is only a part of the integrated image, to be displayed in a more flexible manner that is not necessarily bound by the shape of the operating means to be operated, and is expected to increase the enjoyment of the game through more distinctive presentation and decorativeness.

The "special button image BMGb" shown in Figure 144(b) is depicted as a streamlined button with a more stylish design than the "button image BMGa," and has the word "DANGER" written on top. The appearance of this "special button image BMGb," which does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1, makes it easier for players to feel a sense of premium quality, and is expected to make them instinctively sense that there is a higher level of anticipation than when the "button image BMGa" appears.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when a specific operation acceptance effect (validity period) in which an "integrated model image IGb" is displayed occurs on the effect display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) to be operated is made to emit light in the same color (e.g., red) as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGb." In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner corresponding to the type of button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG." This makes it possible to recognize the appearance (expectation level) of the button model image BMG simply by checking the pattern button 5014 to be operated, without having to visually recognize the button model image BMG.

On the other hand, the "integrated mockup image IGc" shown in Figure 144 (c) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated mockup image IGa," and is configured as an image that integrates a button mockup image BMG that mimics the object to be operated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. However, in this "integrated mockup image IGc," the button mockup image BMG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal button mockup image BMGa," but the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed not as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa," but as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" that has a different shape.

However, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is similar to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" in the following respects.
- The button image BMG does not imitate the actual peripheral decorative portion (pattern portion 5012 or frame unit 415) provided around the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given, but rather decorates the periphery of the button image BMG as a virtual decoration for the display performance on the performance display device 1600.
A display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

With this "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))", it is possible to significantly change the overall shape of the "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))" without causing any change in the shape of the "button model image BMG" that suggests which operating means will be given an opportunity to operate, when the "integrated model image IGa (Fig. 144(a))" is used as the reference. This makes it possible to achieve a high degree of freedom in decorativeness and presentation by causing shape changes without sacrificing the function of suggesting the operation target.

In addition, in this embodiment, at least a portion of the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 144(c))" is displayed as an image with the same decoration as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 144(a))." Therefore, when the "integrated model image IGa (Fig. 144(a))" appears and when the "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))" appears, it can be suggested that this is a specific operation acceptance effect (validity period) that targets the same post-operation effect.

In particular, in this embodiment, the "special border decoration image SSGb (Fig. 144(c))" is displayed as an enlarged image in which a separate element with special decoration is added to the "normal border decoration image SSGa (Fig. 144(a))" and expanded. This makes it easier to recognize that the "special border decoration image SSGb" is displayed as an advanced version of the "normal border decoration image SSGa," and is expected to instinctively give a higher sense of anticipation than when the "button-like image BMGa" appears.

Furthermore, the "special border decoration image SSGb (Figure 144(c))" has a different shape and decoration from the "normal border decoration image SSGa (Figure 144(a))", but no changes are made to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself.

In other words, if a portion of such an integrated model image IG is used as the display target area of the gauge image GG, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the display target area or gauge image is "simply part of the decoration" or "a part with the function of indicating the remaining time." In this regard, with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 144(a))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 144(c))," the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, which has the important function of "indicating the remaining time," is not changed in shape, while other parts are changed in shape. This makes it possible to achieve a high degree of freedom in decorativeness and presentation by changing the shape without sacrificing the function of indicating the remaining time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(c), when a specific operation acceptance effect (validity period) in which an "integrated model image IGc" is displayed occurs on the effect display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) to be operated is illuminated in the same color (e.g., "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGc." In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) to be operated can be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the type of button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG." This makes it possible to recognize the appearance (expectation level) of the button model image BMG simply by checking the pattern button 5014 to be operated, without having to visually recognize the button model image BMG. However, when the "integrated model image IGc" is displayed, the normal button model image BMGa may be displayed in a different color (e.g., green) than when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit green light.

On the other hand, the "integrated model image IGd" shown in Figure 144 (d) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated model image IGa," and is configured as an image that integrates a button model image BMG that represents the object to be operated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. However, in this "integrated model image IGd," the button model image BMG is not displayed as the above-mentioned "normal button model image BMGa," but as a "special button model image BMGb" which has a different shape, and the peripheral decoration image SSG is not displayed as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa," but as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" which has a different shape.

In other words, the "integrated model image IGd (Figure 144 (d))" displays an image that is an integrated image of the "special button model image BMGb" used in the "integrated model image IGb (Figure 144 (b))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" used in the "integrated model image IGc (Figure 144 (c))." With this configuration, not only can the effects achieved by the "special button mockup image BMGb" described above in relation to the "integrated mockup image IGb (Fig. 144(b))" and the effects achieved by the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" described above in relation to the "integrated mockup image IGc (Fig. 144(c))" be obtained, but when the "integrated mockup image IGa (Fig. 144(a))" is used as the reference, the appearance of both the button mockup image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG will change, which is expected to give the user an instinctive sense of high expectations.

On the other hand, while both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are modified, the same decorations and shapes appear in some areas of the peripheral decoration image SSG. Therefore, when the "integrated model image IGa (Fig. 144(a))" appears and when the "integrated model image IGd (Fig. 144(d))" appears, it can be suggested that a specific operation acceptance effect (validity period) is targeted at the same post-operation effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(d), when a specific operation acceptance effect (validity period) in which an "integrated model image IGd" is displayed occurs on the effect display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) to be operated is illuminated in the same color (e.g., "red") as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGd." In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) to be operated can be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the type of button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG." This makes it possible to recognize the appearance (expectation level) of the button model image BMG simply by checking the pattern button 5014 to be operated, without having to visually recognize the button model image BMG. However, when the "integrated model image IGd" is displayed, the special button model image BMGb may be displayed in a different color (for example, "rainbow color") than when the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit light in rainbow color.

As shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the symbol presentation based on a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing and a predetermined operation acceptance presentation (valid period) occurs, an integrated button image IG in which the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are integrated is displayed. However, when one side of the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one manner, the other side can be displayed in one of multiple manners. For example, when the button image BMG is displayed as a "normal button image BMGa," the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as either a "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" (Figures 144(a) and (c)). Furthermore, when the button imitation image BMG is displayed as a "special button imitation image BMGb," the border decoration image SSG can be displayed as either a "normal border decoration image SSGa" or a "special border decoration image SSGb" (FIGS. 144(b) and (d)). Furthermore, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as a "normal border decoration image SSGa," the button imitation image BMG can be displayed as either a "normal button imitation image BMGa" or a "special button imitation image BMGb" (FIGS. 144(a) and (b)). Furthermore, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as a "special border decoration image SSGb," the button imitation image BMG can be displayed as either a "normal button imitation image BMGa" or a "special button imitation image BMGb" (FIGS. 144(a) and (b)).

With this configuration, even though the button-like image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are displayed as a single unit, only one side changes appearance. Therefore, by looking at the side where the appearance remains unchanged, it is easy to recognize that a specified operation reception effect (validity period) is occurring, regardless of the appearance of the other side, and by looking at the other side where the appearance has changed, it is also possible to appropriately recognize the degree of expectation. Note that it is also possible for the appearance of one side of the button-like image BMG and the border decoration image SSG to remain unchanged, while only the appearance of the other side can be changed.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the border decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated model image IG is displayed during the operation acceptance presentation (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that its display area within the display target area decreases over time. In other words, in this case, the "border decoration image SSG" serves the function of indicating the remaining time until the operation acceptance state ends, and is displayed as an integrated model image IG integrated with the "button model image BMG," which serves the function of indicating which operation tool is the operation target. This allows the player to grasp the remaining time and the operation target, as well as recognize which of multiple modes has appeared, which is expected to maintain interest in the game when the operation acceptance presentation (valid period) is occurring.

Furthermore, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (there are both parts with a remaining time indication function and parts without the remaining time indication function). In other words, the peripheral decoration image SSG is not intended solely to indicate the remaining time of the operation acceptance effect (validity period), and it is possible to actively adopt a display mode aimed at "enhancing the decorativeness of the button model image BMG" in the parts where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. This makes it possible to indicate the remaining time while significantly improving the presentation when the important operation acceptance effect occurs. To achieve this effect, it is more desirable to display the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Furthermore, in the integrated imitation image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode, the button imitation image BMG can be displayed in one of multiple modes. In reality, however, when the "pattern portion 5012" which is the peripheral decoration is in one mode, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) which is the operation receiving portion changes to one of multiple modes (multiple light-emitting colors). Therefore, when the button imitation image BMG changes, it can be confirmed simply by checking the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) which is the object to be replicated.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), when the button model image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in one of multiple modes, but in reality, the peripheral decoration "handle portion 5012" does not change to one of multiple modes. In other words, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the periphery of the button model image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not need to match the mode of the peripheral decoration "handle portion 5012," and can be depicted in a variety of ways that are desirable for enhancing the presentation. Note that the peripheral decoration "handle portion 5012" may be designed to be non-luminous, or otherwise not change into multiple modes.

Furthermore, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), there are cases where the appearance of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG changes (Figure 144(d)), but in reality, it is desirable to have the appearance of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change when the peripheral decoration part, the "handle part 5012", is in one aspect.

The "pattern portion 5012" of the peripheral decorative portion may be configured to appear in different forms when the peripheral decorative image SSG is the "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa" and when the peripheral decorative image SSG is the "special peripheral decorative image SSGb." However, while the peripheral decorative image SSG at least changes shape when the peripheral decorative image SSG is the "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa" and when the peripheral decorative image SSG is the "special peripheral decorative image SSGb," it is desirable to limit the peripheral decorative portion to a change in form (such as a change in light emission) that does not involve a change in shape. Designing the peripheral decorative portion as one that cannot change shape is desirable in order to highlight the virtual effect provided by the peripheral decorative image SSG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to a button imitation image BMG that imitates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), a pattern imitation image TMG that imitates the handle portion 5012 is provided as the imitation images, and the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is changed depending on which of these imitation images is displayed. In other words, in this case, the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b that decorate the periphery of the button imitation image BMG cannot be displayed when a imitation image different from the button imitation image BMG is displayed, and therefore the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b themselves can be expected to "function to suggest which operation means is being operated."

Note that if the form of the border decoration image SSG differs depending on the form of the imitation image (button imitation image BMG, pattern imitation image TMG), it is desirable to also vary the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the border decoration image. The operation acceptance effect in which a button imitation image BMG is displayed and the operation acceptance effect in which a pattern imitation image TMG is displayed may occur at the same timing within the same fluctuation pattern (which one occurs is selected based on the effect determination), or they may occur in different fluctuation patterns or at different timing. The border decoration image SSG that appears when a button imitation image BMG is displayed may not be an imitation of the border decoration part, and the border decoration image SSG that appears when a pattern imitation image TMG is displayed may be an imitation of the border decoration part. However, it is desirable that the set time for the operation acceptance effect (validity period) may be the same even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG differs.

Furthermore, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and other areas within the peripheral decoration image SSG are decorated with a predetermined decoration (here, a "striped pattern") that spans these areas, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed overlapping this predetermined decoration. In other words, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration increases, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG with a predetermined transparency is displayed superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. With this configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but remains visible even in the area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, making it possible to maintain interest in the game over the entire period from when the gauge image GG is full to when it is empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Furthermore, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (or also have) the predetermined decoration. In this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the predetermined decoration also decreases, which encourages players who dislike the decrease in the predetermined decoration to perform an operation early.

Furthermore, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG does not model the peripheral decoration (pattern portion 5012 or frame unit 415) provided around the operation receiving portion (pattern button 5014 or operation button 410) that is the object of operation, but is an image that represents an object that does not have substance as a gaming machine part. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a greater degree of freedom in decoration and presentation, without being bound by substance as a gaming machine part.

Furthermore, in the integrated mockup image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), of the button mockup image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, at least the peripheral decoration image SSG has multiple shapes. In other words, in this case, it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decoration image SSG, which represents an intangible object, without changing the shape of the button mockup image BMG, thereby properly indicating which of multiple operating tools is being operated, while varying the shape of the integrated mockup image IG to achieve a more dramatic and decorative display.

The shape of the border decoration image SSG may not necessarily be changed when the button-like image BMG is in one state, but only the color may be changed. However, shape changes are permitted because the border decoration image SSG represents an intangible object and the border decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button-like image BMG. In this sense, changing the shape of the border decoration image SSG can be said to have great technical value.

In the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG is changed by enlarging its size. As will be described later, possible methods for changing this shape include increasing the number of objects represented as images (such as the number of decorations), displaying them in one of multiple different outline shapes (such as a rectangular parallelepiped or a sphere), or expanding the range of objects displayed within the image. Also, as will be described later, the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG may be gradually changed from a low-expectation shape to a high-expectation shape as a precursor effect, after which operation acceptance in the operation acceptance effect is permitted while the final changed shape is maintained.

Furthermore, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), regardless of the form in which the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decoration image SSG is not changed (at least the shape is not changed) and is displayed in the same form. Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG changes, it is possible to preferably maintain the function of indicating how much time is remaining. In this way, while maintaining important functions, it is also possible to indicate the degree of expectation by changing the shape of areas other than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Depending on which of the above-mentioned effects is intended to be achieved, the border decoration image SSG does not necessarily have to represent an intangible object, but may be displayed as an image that resembles a border decoration provided on the periphery of the operation receiving part.

In addition, the integrated model images IG shown in Figures 144 (a) to (d) can be dynamically displayed during the "valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted," such as during a specified operation acceptance presentation, thereby encouraging the player to perform an operation.

However, in the integrated mockup image IG according to this embodiment, although the button mockup image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed as an integrated unit, only one side of the button mockup image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed dynamically, while the other side is displayed stationary. With this configuration, the dynamic expression on one side contributes to improving the presentation when an important button effect occurs, while the other side is displayed as if it were stationary, so that it does not move when viewed as a whole, thereby ensuring good visibility.

In the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the button model image BMG is dynamically displayed to depict the operation receiving portion, to which an operation opportunity is assigned, moving within its movable range, while the border decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. A display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the side that is not dynamically displayed (the border decoration image SSG), and when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the display target area can be displayed so that it decreases over time.

In this way, by including the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG on the side of the integrated mockup image IG that ensures optimal visibility (the side that is not dynamically displayed, the peripheral decoration image SSG), the performance when the important operation acceptance effect occurs is improved by the dynamic display of the button mockup image BMG, while also making it easy to recognize how much time is left for the effect acceptance to occur.

Furthermore, the side of the integrated model image IG that has good visibility (the peripheral decoration image SSG that is not dynamically displayed) includes not only the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but also an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. In other words, in this case, when performing an effect suggesting the degree of expectation on the side of the integrated model image IG that has good visibility, by performing the effect in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, it is possible to avoid adversely affecting the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

The area of the border decoration image SSG that is different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the border decoration image SSG itself, and the button-shaped image BMG have multiple forms with different levels of expectation, and one of these forms is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination). However, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may also have multiple forms with different levels of expectation, and one of these forms may be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination).

However, as shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), when a button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery, and when the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG, there is a concern that it will be difficult to determine whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is merely a decoration or pattern within the peripheral decoration image SSG, or whether it also has the function of indicating the remaining time. Furthermore, there is a concern that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG will be mixed with the decoration and pattern applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG, making it difficult to determine how far it has decreased, which may reduce interest in the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or an image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed, can be displayed in the display target area in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed.

More specifically, a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Then, in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display position of the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displayed so as to similarly displace.

With this configuration, the validity period ends when the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially altered" is displaced to a predetermined position. Therefore, even if it is not possible to determine whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is merely decorative or indicates the remaining time, the remaining time can be determined by checking the position of the "specific image." In this sense, when displaying such a "specific image," it can be said that it is not necessarily necessary to display the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Figure 145 shows an example of the display of the integrated model image IG from the start to the end of the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted.

As shown in Figure 145, if timing A0 arrives within a specified variation pattern, at which the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted (specified operation acceptance presentation) begins, the presentation display device 1600 will display an integrated model image IG and operation prompt images such as "Press!" and "Downward arrow."

In this example, the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(a) (integrated model image IGa), but it may also be displayed in any of the manners shown in Figures 144(b) to (d) based on the results of the performance determination. Regardless of the manner in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG during the valid period, or the display of a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the manner of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed," will change over time in the manner described below.

As shown in Figure 145 (a), first, at timing A0 (start timing of the valid period), the integrated model image IG displays the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in the entire display target area. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in this full state, it becomes possible to recognize that the valid period has just begun.

In this regard, in the example shown in Figure 145(a), at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. With this configuration, simply by checking whether a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displayed, it becomes easy to determine whether a predetermined time has already passed since operation acceptance was permitted (a situation in which the remaining crotch space has decreased).

However, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is first displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a way that "the display area increases in proportion to the amount of time that has passed" from timing A0 (the start timing of the validity period) until a predetermined time (the time required for the entire specific image to finish appearing) has elapsed.

For example, in the integrated model image IG at time A1, a short time after time A0 (the start of the valid period), as shown in Figure 145 (b), a "specific image TG" which is a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the appearance of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" has appeared to the point where about half of the image is visible, indicating that the display area is increasing as time passes.

In the integrated model image IG at times A2 and A3, when a significant amount of time has passed, as shown in Figures 145 (c) and (d), the "specific image TG," which is "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed," has already appeared in its entirety and is displaced within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG without increasing the display area.

In other words, as described above, the "specific image TG" is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, which displaces when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and is displayed so that its display position displaces in accordance with (continuously with) the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

The "specific image TG" in this embodiment is an image of a star-shaped mark in a white square space, displayed at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, the "specific image TG" does not have to be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG; for example, it may be displayed in a manner that partially changes the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, such as an image in which the image gradually fades from the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image that appears at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, which indicates that there is no time left when its display area reaches its minimum value (here, "0"), so even when there is no time left (when the valid period ends), at least a portion (or it could be all) of it will remain displayed and will not be hidden.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145(e), at timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in the integrated model image IG is "0", and the display area of the "specific image TG" remains approximately half. If no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends in this state, and the integrated model image IG is hidden.

However, as mentioned above, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is most desirable to display the integrated model image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the validity period, so that the entire display area of the "specific image TG" remains, and such a configuration may be adopted.

However, it is difficult to achieve a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches exactly "0" when the validity period ends. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) in this embodiment displays the "specific image TG" so that its display position shifts in accordance with (continuously with) the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. This makes it possible, when viewed from the player's side, to make it unclear which part of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In other words, although the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the validity period ends, and most of its display area (more than half, or even all) remains, from the player's perspective it appears to be part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, whose display area is minimized (hidden in this case) when the validity period ends. This configuration makes it possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be a longer image than it actually is, making it appear as if more time remains in the validity period than actually exists, and thereby maintaining interest in the game while the operation acceptance presentation is being performed.

On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation acceptance presentation ends, at least a portion of the "specific image TG" remains and ends. Therefore, even if the period does not end immediately after the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" in a reduced display area, which makes it less likely that a sense of discomfort will arise from the discrepancy between the timing when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden and the timing when the valid period ends. In other words, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to act as a buffer that can absorb such temporal discrepancies.

In the example shown in FIG. 145, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" may be displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

This configuration makes it possible to make "specific images that are different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or specific images in which the appearance of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially altered" appear as if they were part of the gauge image GG. This makes it appear as if the validity period is set to be longer than it appears, which is expected to increase interest in the game when the validity period begins.

[Acceptance period having at least one of configurations 1A to 40A and configurations 1B to 75B]
As illustrated in FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can execute a variation pattern determination based on the result of a jackpot determination according to the start winning (reserved consumption). When a variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute a performance determination (pre-notification determination, etc.) to determine which of the multiple expected performances (pre-notification performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern will be selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the multiple expected performances (pre-notification performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, or none of the multiple expected performances (pre-notification performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a presentation determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is made, the presentation content corresponding to the result of the presentation determination is controlled to be displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and a variation presentation using decorative symbols according to the result of the jackpot determination is executed together with expected presentations (advance notice presentations) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of moving bodies (gimmick presentations). As a result of this, when the variation presentation using decorative symbols is executed together with expected presentations related to the background depiction and the movement of moving bodies, etc., and a jackpot pattern (special pattern combination) is displayed, the player can enjoy a special jackpot game or transition to a high-probability game state.

In this configuration, the variable effects using the decorative symbols are provided as effects with the function of "indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation effects related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body are provided as effects with the function of "indicating the degree of expectation, or percentage (including 0% or 100%), of obtaining a jackpot." In other words, players enjoy playing through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high-expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach effect accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, then regardless of the result obtained as the effect determination (such as a preview determination), once the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) in which effect acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) that do not even form a reach state as a result of the variation pattern determination, if a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, an acceptance allowance state (valid period) in which effect acceptance is permitted can be generated when the pattern presentation based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met). However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the effect determination, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) will not be generated even if the pattern presentation based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. Furthermore, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated by a predetermined variation pattern is executed as an effect (such as a post-acceptance display or post-acceptance output sound) that is different from the acceptance allowance state (valid period) that occurs when the pattern presentation based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during an SP reach.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate an acceptance state in which acceptance of a player's action (operation) is permitted when predetermined conditions are met, and when a player's action (operation) is accepted within this acceptance state, a post-acceptance change (such as a display change, an acceptance output sound, or light emission for a special effect) can occur according to the type of acceptance state that has been generated.

In addition, in the acceptance state, operation acceptance for the operation unit is accepted (acceptance acceptance period), or an operation-related display mode that can only appear when the operation acceptance is accepted (acceptance acceptance period) can be displayed. Such operation-related display modes are often, for example, displayed as a mock-up image display that represents the object (operation means) that the player will operate (operate), but this is not limited to this, and any image display that, when displayed, will always provide the player with an opportunity to operate. The "operation-related display (mock-up image display)" may have multiple modes with different expected outcomes (for example, multiple color schemes such as white and red), and any of these multiple modes may be selectively displayed.

Moreover, an "operation-related display mode" can only appear when the operation acceptance state for the operation unit is entered (acceptance acceptance period) or when the operation acceptance state is in an accepted state (acceptance acceptance period). Therefore, at the very least, when the "operation-related display mode" is displayed, the acceptance acceptance state always occurs, or it must be in an accepted state at the time of its display. Therefore, it is also possible to have the acceptance acceptance state end before the "operation-related display mode" is hidden while it is displayed. Furthermore, multiple types of image displays may be prepared as such "operation-related display modes," and both of these image displays may be displayed in the acceptance acceptance state.

In addition, in the acceptance state, a remaining time display can be displayed, indicating the remaining time for which the player's actions (operations) are permitted to be accepted. Such remaining time display can be implemented, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image decreases over time. Multiple modes (e.g., the rate at which the display area of the gauge image decreases, an indication of the degree of expectation, an indication of the type of operation means, etc.) can be prepared for at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, and the image can be executed in any of these modes. In this case, a different degree of expectation (the probability of a jackpot symbol appearing) can be suggested depending on which mode is executed.

In addition, when a state where acceptance is permitted occurs, a pre-effect (premonition effect) can be executed before this, suggesting that the player will be given an opportunity to act (suggesting that a state where acceptance is permitted will occur). Pre-effects are executed, for example, by displaying an effect on the effect display device 1600 and outputting a corresponding sound effect.

Note that, regardless of the result of the preview performance judgment, a variation pattern that generates an acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach may be provided in addition to the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern." Furthermore, regardless of the result of the preview performance judgment, a variation pattern that generates an acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing before the SP reach may be provided.

In addition, in the examples above and below, the "operations (actions) by the player" that are the subject of detection are not limited to those that are directly operated by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001," but also include "contact actions by the player on specific parts" that are the subject of detection by a touch sensor, and "actions by the player in a specific space" that are the subject of detection by a non-contact sensor. Essentially, an "operation means" is anything that includes one or more reception means (operation units) that receive player actions (pressing actions, unsheathing the sword, touching actions, non-contact actions, etc.).

Incidentally, various types of acceptance acceptance states (validity periods) are available in this embodiment, including different types of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound, whether or not output is performed, different audible background music output status, different number of times operation acceptance is permitted within the acceptance acceptance state (validity period), and whether or not the auto-repeated function or automatic button function is enabled.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment provides the following special effects between multiple acceptance states, thereby enhancing the effects when an acceptance state occurs and maintaining a favorable sense of tension when an acceptance state occurs. It should be noted that it is not necessary to provide all of the effects (configurations) described below. For example, it may be possible to suppress a decline in interest in playing by providing only one of the effects (any configuration). Alternatively, it may selectively provide several configurations deemed necessary to achieve further effects, or it may appropriately adopt a configuration described as applicable (desirable) to another configuration. Furthermore, the effects (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient for any configuration to be provided that can suppress a decline in interest in playing associated with an acceptance state.

[Configuration 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. Also, a message display prompting the operation of the specific operation means can be displayed. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, as an operation valid state in which the message display can be displayed and the message display cannot be displayed. Furthermore, among such multiple operation enabled states, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which the message display is displayed, if the specific operation means is detected to be in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection. This is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension as to whether or not to continue operating the specific operation means when the message display is displayed. Note that the "specific operation means" in Configuration 1-A is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of Configuration 1-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if the specific operation means is detected to be in an operated state in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which a message display is not displayed among the multiple operation enabled states, and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be changed in response to the detection, but may instead change independently (for example, the sound may be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, whether or not a message display is displayed can indicate whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Also, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which a message display is not displayed, if it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be terminated as a result of the detection, but will be terminated without being triggered by the detection (for example, the sound will be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). ), in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which a message display is displayed, if it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, and if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may be terminated either in response to the detection or without being triggered by the detection (for example, the sound may be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, when a message display is not displayed in the multiple operation enabled state, it is preferable to suggest that the post-operation output sound will not change when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. However, when a message display is displayed in the multiple operation enabled state, it is difficult to tell whether the post-operation output sound will change when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to preferably maintain a sense of tension.

In order to optimally achieve the effect of "making it difficult to tell whether the post-operation output sound will change when the specific operation means is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state when a message display is displayed in the multiple operation enabled state," it is desirable to have both a case where the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state when a certain message display pattern is displayed, and a case where the post-operation output sound does not change. However, this configuration is not necessarily adopted. For example, when different message display patterns are displayed, such as when the message display is of different size, color, or display pattern, a case where the post-operation output sound changes or does not change depending on the pattern can be expected to make it somewhat more difficult for the player to tell whether the post-operation output sound will change compared to when the message display itself is not displayed at all. However, it is desirable (but not required) for message displays encouraging multiple operations to be displayed in a pattern that would not appear in an operation enabled state in which only a single operation is accepted.

[Configuration 2-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound in response to the detection. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can start to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and the multiple operation effective state includes a type of multiple operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and a type of multiple operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. Furthermore, in the multiple-operation enabled state, in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operated state, if the specific operation means is detected to be in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection, thereby preferably maintaining a sense of tension as to whether the operation state of the specific operation means should be maintained. Note that the "specific operation means" in Configuration 2-A is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of Configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if the specific operation means is detected to be in the operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operated state, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be changed in response to the detection, but may be changed independently (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then ended). With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, whether or not the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled can indicate whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, which is expected to maintain gameplay enjoyment in an appropriate manner.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operated state, if it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be terminated as a result of the detection, but will be terminated without being triggered by the detection (for example, the sound will be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). ), whereas in the multiple operation enabled state, if the specific operation means is detected to be in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operated state, and if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may be terminated either when triggered by the detection or without triggering the detection (for example, the sound may be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, when the so-called automatic rapid-fire function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state, it is preferable to indicate that no change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. However, when the so-called automatic rapid-fire function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state, it becomes difficult to tell whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, in configuration 2-A, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are both the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if a mock-up image display imitating an operating means that allows multiple operations is displayed in the multiple operation enabled state, a configuration may be adopted in which "whether or not a change occurs in the output sound after operation" is adopted between a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled when the operating means corresponding to the mock-up image display is maintained in an operated state, and a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled when the operating means corresponding to the mock-up image display is maintained in an operated state.

[Configuration 3-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and a mock image display imitating the specific operation means can be displayed. In this regard, as an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple-operation-enabled state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and the mock image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple-operation-enabled state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units of less than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. Furthermore, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change in the simulated image display occurs in units of time longer than the predetermined time, if the specific operation means is detected to be in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection. This is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the periodic change in the simulated image display occurs in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Note that the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" in configuration 3-A are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 3-A. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means and time as the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means and time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" and "time" as operation means and time named differently in other configurations. Furthermore, as the "time longer than a predetermined time," only one time may be prepared, or a plurality of different time periods may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, if the specific operation means is detected to be in an operated state in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the imitation image display is displayed so that periodic changes occur in time units of less than the predetermined time, and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be changed in response to the detection, but may instead change independently (for example, by being output for a predetermined output time and then ending). With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, it is possible to indicate whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state based on the length of time required for the imitation image display to change periodically, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly in the multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change in the simulated image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, if it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will be performed without being triggered by the detection (for example, the sound will be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). On the other hand, in the multiple operation enabled state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change in the simulated image display appears in time units longer than the predetermined time, and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in that output state may be terminated either in response to this detection or without being triggered by this detection (for example, in the case where the sound is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, when the time required for the imitation image display to change periodically in the multiple operation enabled state is relatively short, it is suitably indicated that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. However, when the time required for the imitation image display to change periodically in the multiple operation enabled state is relatively long, it becomes difficult to tell whether or not there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, in configuration 3-A, it is assumed that the operating means when the cyclical change in the mock-up image display occurs in time units equal to or less than the predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, and the operating means when the cyclical change in the mock-up image display occurs in time units longer than the predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, are both the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. In other words, whether the cyclical change in the mock-up image display occurs in time units equal to or less than the predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, or whether the cyclical change in the mock-up image display occurs in time units longer than the predetermined time, the operating means corresponding to that mock-up image display may be the operation target, and a configuration may be adopted that relates to "whether a change occurs in the output sound after operation."

Furthermore, in configuration 3-A, the above-mentioned "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time" may be provided in multiple time periods, or in only one time period (e.g., the "predetermined time"). Similarly, the above-mentioned "time period longer than the predetermined time" may be provided in multiple time periods, or in only one time period.

[Configuration 4-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and a mock image display imitating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, as a mock image operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of the operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and first operating means and second operating means are provided as the operating means. Furthermore, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which at least a mock image display simulating the first operating means is displayed, if the first operating means is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, when it is detected that the first operating means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection, thereby preferably maintaining the sense of tension when the mock image display simulating the first operating means is displayed. Note that the "first operating means" and "second operating means" in configuration 4-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 4-A. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means as the "first operating means" and "second operating means" in other configurations, or may refer to different operating means. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" as operating means with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if the second operating means is detected to be in an operating state in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the second operating means is displayed, and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the second operating means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be changed in response to the detection, but may change independently (for example, by being output for a predetermined output time and then ending). With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, it is possible to indicate whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, based on the type of operating means for which multiple operations are permitted, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the second operating means is displayed, if the second operating means is detected to be in an operated state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the second operating means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be terminated as a result of this detection, but will be terminated independently (for example, the sound will be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). On the other hand, in the multiple operation valid state of a type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the first operation means is displayed, when it is detected that the first operation means is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, if it is detected that the first operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in that output state may be terminated either in a case where it is triggered by the detection or in a case where it is not triggered by the detection (for example, in a case where it is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, when the second operation means is the target of the mock image display and the second operation means is operated, it is suitably indicated that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the second operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. However, when the first operation means is the target of the mock image display and the first operation means is operated, it becomes difficult to tell whether there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the first operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

[Configuration 5-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state is provided in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, and as one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in the multiple operation effective state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may change in response to the detection or may not change in response to the detection, so that it is expected that the sense of tension when in the multiple operation effective state can be maintained in an appropriate manner. The "specific operation means" in the configuration 5-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are prepared as multiple operation valid states. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, but the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection can be an indefinite time. In the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection cannot be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. In the third multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection can be newly started at regular intervals simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation valid state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state and a post-operation output sound corresponding thereto is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be terminated in response to the detection. In the second multiple-operation valid state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state and a post-operation output sound corresponding thereto is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the output sound can be terminated in response to the detection. The termination of the post-operation output sound in the forced state is not triggered by the detection but is performed without being triggered by the detection (for example, the sound is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state in the third multiple-operation valid state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the termination of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be performed without being triggered by the detection but is performed without being triggered by the detection (for example, the sound is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, it is possible to preferably suggest that no change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. In this regard, if the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in an operated state, then when the specific operating means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, there will be both cases where the post-operation output sound changes and cases where the post-operation output sound does not change. However, whether or not the post-operation output sound is output at regular intervals when the specific operating means is maintained in an operated state will make it possible to indicate whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In configuration 5-A, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are all the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to replace the "specific operating means" with "an operating means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 6-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed. In this regard, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be started to be executed when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, and as one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output, and a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are prepared as the multiple operation valid state. Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, while in the second multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection cannot be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state. If, in the multiple-operation valid state, it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state and a post-operation output sound corresponding thereto is output, and if, while the post-operation output sound is being output, it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated, the post-operation output sound in the output state may either change in response to the detection or not change in response to the detection, thereby preferably maintaining a sense of tension when in the multiple-operation valid state. Note that the terms "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in configuration 6-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means or multiple operation valid state as the "specific operating means,""first multiple operation valid state," or "second multiple operation valid state" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different operating means or multiple operation valid state. Also, it may mean the same "operating means" or "multiple operation valid state" as an operating means or multiple operation valid state with a different name according to another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are prepared as multiple operation valid states. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. In this case, the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is always longer than the specific time. In the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection cannot be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. In the third multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is always equal to or shorter than the specific time. In the first multiple-operation valid state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, it is determined that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be terminated using the detection as a trigger; when it is detected in the second multiple-operation valid state that the specific operation means is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not terminated using the detection as a trigger, but is terminated without being triggered by the detection (for example, the post-operation output sound is terminated after being output for a predetermined output time). When it is detected in the third multiple-operation valid state that the specific operation means is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be terminated without being triggered by the detection, but is terminated without being triggered by the detection (for example, the post-operation output sound is terminated after being output for a predetermined output time). With this configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound in response to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, it is possible to suitably suggest that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. In contrast, when the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, changing the specific operation means from an operated state to a non-operated state can trigger both a change in the post-operation output sound and no change in the post-operation output sound. However, based on whether the interval between the output of a post-operation output sound and its new output when the specific operation means is maintained in an operated state is longer than a specific time, it is possible to suggest whether there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in configuration 6-A, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state are all the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is expressed as a mock-up display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state. Furthermore, the "specific time" in configuration 6-A is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "specific time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. It may also mean the same "time" as a differently named time in other configurations. Furthermore, there may be multiple "times longer than the specified time" for configuration 6-A, or just one. Similarly, there may be multiple "times equal to or shorter than the specified time" for configuration 6-A, or just one.

[Configuration 7-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple-operation-enabled state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. Furthermore, in such a multiple operation valid state, in a type of multiple operation valid state in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, if the specific operation means is detected to be in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation state is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection, thereby preferably maintaining the sense of tension in the multiple operation valid state. Note that the "specific operation means" in this configuration 7-A is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 7-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the multiple operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operated state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, and the specific operation means is detected to be in the operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be changed in response to the detection, but may change independently (for example, the sound may be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, whether the effective operation state is terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operated state can suggest whether the post-operation output sound will change when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to maintain game enjoyment in an appropriate manner.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, if it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the termination of the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will be triggered without the detection. In a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be ended based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, if the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may be ended either in response to the detection or without being triggered by the detection (not being triggered). This configuration, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operated state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, preferably suggests that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. However, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operated state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, it becomes difficult to tell whether there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to preferably maintain a sense of tension.

In configuration 7-A, it is assumed that both an operating means that is the target of multiple operations in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, and an operating means that is the target of multiple operations in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state may be terminated based on detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, are the same operating means as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration according to this invention may be specified based on whether the "operating means" represented as a mock-up display in the multiple operation valid state is of a type in which the valid operation state may be terminated when the "operating means" is operated. Furthermore, even if a multiple operation valid state is one that will not be terminated before the arrival of a predetermined end timing depending on the results of a jackpot determination or the like, if there is a possibility that the multiple operation valid state may be terminated before the arrival of the predetermined end timing depending on the results of a jackpot determination or the like, then that multiple operation valid state corresponds to the above-mentioned "multiple operation valid state of a type that can terminate an operation valid state."

[Configuration 8-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and a message display that encourages operation of the specific operation means can be displayed. In this regard, as an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple-operation-enabled state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and in this multiple-operation-enabled state, there are both cases in which a message display is displayed and cases in which a message display is not displayed. Furthermore, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which a message display is displayed, when it is detected that a specific operation means is in an operated state, a post-operation output sound may be output, which is "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from the operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not fixed." Therefore, when the post-operation output sound is in an output state and a message display is displayed, even if the operation of the specific operation means is terminated, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass since the non-operated state when the post-operation output sound in the output state will end. Note that the "specific operation means" in Configuration 8-A is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of Configuration 8-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which a message display is not displayed among the multiple operation enabled states, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state, only "a sound for which the time from the time the specific operation means enters the non-operated state until the time the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound for which the time is not treated as a fixed time) when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output (a sound for which the time is indefinite and is not treated as a fixed time)" can be output as the post-operation output sound. In a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which a message display is displayed among the multiple operation enabled states, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state, When this is detected, the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time," or the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time."

With this configuration, when the post-operation output sound is in an output state and no message display is displayed in the multiple operation enabled state, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end. For example, it is possible to suitably suggest that the post-operation output sound is not worth paying attention to immediately after the specific operation means is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state. In contrast, when the post-operation output sound is in an output state and a message display is displayed in the multiple operation enabled state, it is possible to suggest how much time will pass after the specific operation means is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that the effect of switching the specific operation means from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end a certain amount of time after the non-operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when switching to a non-operated state.

In order to optimally achieve this effect, it is desirable to have the following two settings for the post-operation output sound output when a certain message display mode is displayed: "When the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is inaudible is treated as a fixed time"; and "When the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is inaudible is not fixed." However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be adopted. For example, when different message display modes appear, such as when the message display is of a different size, color, or display mode, even if one of the sounds is output depending on the mode, it can be expected that the above-mentioned effect will be achieved to a certain level compared to when the message display itself is not displayed at all. However, it is desirable (but not required) that messages prompting multiple operations be displayed in a manner that would not appear in an operation-enabled state where only one operation is accepted.

[Configuration 9-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is first possible to detect the state of a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound in accordance with the detection. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is provided as an operation valid state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, in which the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. Of the multiple operation valid states, in the multiple operation valid state of a type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation of the specific operation means is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time" can be output as the post-operation output sound. Therefore, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation of the specific operation means can be output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, it can be suggested that it is difficult to predict how much time will pass since the non-operation state was entered before the post-operation output sound in the output state will be terminated, even if the operation of the specific operation means is terminated. The "specific operation means" in the configuration 9-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state, only "a sound for which the time from the time the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state in which the post-operation output sound is inaudible to the time the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state is not a fixed time (a sound for which the time is not treated as a fixed time but is an indefinite time)" can be output as the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times. When it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operated state, the post-operation output sound may be output as follows: "When the specific operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operating means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is a fixed time (sound processed as a fixed time)," or the post-operation output sound may be output as "When the specific operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operating means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is not processed as a fixed time but is indefinite (sound not of a fixed time)."

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operating means is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end; for example, it is possible to appropriately suggest that the post-operation output sound is not worth paying attention to immediately after the specific operating means is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, it is possible to suggest both how much time will pass after the specific operating means is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end; for example, it is possible to appropriately suggest that the post-operation output sound is worth paying attention to after the specific operating means is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end after a certain amount of time has passed since the specific operating means is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state. This is expected to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when switching to a non-operated state.

In addition, in configuration 9-A, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are both the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if a mock-up image display imitating an operating means that allows multiple operations is displayed in the multiple operation enabled state, configuration 9-A may be adopted in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled when the operating means corresponding to the mock-up image display is operated and maintained, and in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled when the operating means corresponding to the mock-up image display is operated and maintained.

[Configuration 10-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and a mock image display imitating the specific operation means can be displayed. In this regard, as an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple-operation-enabled state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and the mock image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple-operation-enabled state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units of less than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. Furthermore, in the multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state, the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not constant." Therefore, when the periodic change in the imitation image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, it can be suggested that even if the operation of the specific operation means is terminated, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass since the non-operated state when the post-operation output sound in the output state will end. Note that the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" in configuration 10-A are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 10-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means or time as the "specific operating means" or "predetermined time" of another component, or it may mean a different operating means or time. Also, it may mean the same "operating means" or "time" as an operating means or time with a different name of another component. Furthermore, as the "time longer than the predetermined time," only one time may be prepared, or multiple different time periods may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the imitation image display is displayed so that periodic changes occur in time units of less than the predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state, only a sound that "is not treated as a fixed time but is an indefinite time from the time the specific operation means becomes in the non-operated state until the time the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output" can be output as the post-operation output sound. In a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the imitation image display is displayed so that periodic changes occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, When it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state, the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time," or the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not treated as a fixed time but is indefinite (a sound that is not of fixed duration)."

With this configuration, when the time required for the imitation image display to change periodically in the multiple operation enabled state is relatively short, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end. This can be suitably suggested, for example, that the specific operation means is not worth paying attention to immediately after being changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. In contrast, when the time required for the imitation image display to change periodically in the multiple operation enabled state is relatively long, it is possible to suggest both how much time will pass after the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end. This suggests, for example, that the effect of changing the specific operation means from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, but it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end a certain amount of time after being changed to a non-operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when the specific operation means is changed to a non-operated state.

In configuration 10-A, it is assumed that the operating means when the cyclical change in the mock-up image display occurs in time units equal to or less than the predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the cyclical change in the mock-up image display occurs in time units longer than the predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state are both the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. In other words, whether the cyclical change in the mock-up image display occurs in time units equal to or less than the predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state or the cyclical change in the mock-up image display occurs in time units longer than the predetermined time, the operating means corresponding to the mock-up image display may be the operating target, and the configuration according to configuration 10-A may be adopted.

Furthermore, in configuration 10-A, the above-mentioned "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time" may be provided in multiple time periods, or in only one time period (e.g., the "predetermined time"). Similarly, the above-mentioned "time period longer than the predetermined time" may be provided in multiple time periods, or in only one time period.

[Configuration 11-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the operating means (for example, the operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and a mock image display imitating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, a mock image operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state is provided, and a multiple operation valid state in which the detection of the operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and first operating means and second operating means are provided as the operating means. Furthermore, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which at least a mock-up image display simulating the first operation means is displayed, when it is detected that the first operation means is in an operated state, the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the first operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the first operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not constant." Therefore, when a mock-up image display simulating the first operation means is displayed as an operation means in which multiple operations are permitted, it can be suggested that even if the operation of the first operation means is terminated, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass since the non-operated state when the post-operation output sound in the output state will end. Note that the terms "first operation means" and "second operation means" in configuration 11-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 11-A. Therefore, the "first operating means" or the "second operating means" may mean the same operating means as the "first operating means" or the "second operating means" according to another configuration, or may mean a different operating means. Also, the "operating means" may mean the same "operating means" as an operating means with a different name according to another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the second operation means is displayed, when it is detected that the second operation means is in an operated state, only a sound that "is not treated as a fixed time and is indefinite, and is not processed as a fixed time, when the second operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, from the time the second operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible, when the second operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated, while the post-operation output sound is being output" can be output, and in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the first operation means is displayed, it is detected that the first operation means is in an operated state. The post-operation output sound may be output as follows: "When the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound is output in which the time from when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is a fixed time (a sound that is processed as a fixed time)"; or "When the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound is output in which the time from when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)."

With this configuration, when the second operating means is the target of the simulated image display in the multiple operation enabled state and the second operating means is operated, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end. For example, it is possible to suitably suggest that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect in a situation where the second operating means has just been changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. In contrast, when a first operating means is the target of the simulated image display and the first operating means is operated, it is possible to predict how much time will elapse after the first operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end, and it is also possible to predict how much time will elapse after the first operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end, so that, for example, while it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect of changing the first operating means from an operating state to a non-operating state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end after a certain amount of time has elapsed after the first operating means is changed to a non-operating state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the first operating means is changed to a non-operating state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

[Configuration 12-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound according to the detection. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is a certain time""When the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound is output in which the time from the time the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is inaudible is not a fixed time." This allows for, for example, a suggestion that the dramatic effect of changing the specific operation means from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth noting, while the post-operation output sound that is in an output state does not necessarily end a fixed time after being changed to a non-operated state, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when changing to a non-operated state. Note that the "specific operation means" in configuration 12-A is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of configuration 12-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are prepared as multiple operation valid states. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. At this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is an indefinite time. However, the post-operation output sound is generated in a fixed time interval from the time the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state where it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. In the second multiple operation valid state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated at predetermined time intervals simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, but the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound for which the time from when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state where it is not operated to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)" when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state where it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output.

With this configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state among the multiple operation valid states, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end, and it is possible to suitably suggest, for example, that the post-operation output sound is not worth paying attention to in a situation where the specific operation means has just been changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. In contrast, in the first multiple operation valid state, it is possible to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end, and it is possible to suggest, for example, that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state after the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state may be worth paying attention to.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in the first multiple operation valid state, even within one valid period, the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state in which it is not operated until the post-operation output sound is inaudible is a fixed time (a sound processed as a fixed time)," or "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state in which it is not operated until the post-operation output sound is inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)."

With this configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state among the multiple operation valid states, it is possible to predict, in both cases, how much time will elapse after the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end, when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. This suggests, for example, that the dramatic effect after the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state may be worth paying attention to, but it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end a certain amount of time after the non-operation state, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the operation state is changed to a non-operation state.

In configuration 12-A, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are all the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 13-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple-operation-enabled state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and in this multiple-operation-enabled state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. In this regard, in the multiple operation enabled state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state, there are two cases where the post-operation output sound is output: "when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state where it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound with a fixed time from the time the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible (a sound that is processed as a fixed time)"; and "when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state where it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound with a fixed time from the time the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state where it is not operated until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)." Therefore, for example, while suggesting the possibility that the dramatic effect after the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will not necessarily end a fixed time after the non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operated state will be maintained in an appropriate manner. The "specific operation means" in the configuration 13-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple operation valid state is prepared as the multiple operation valid state, and in this first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state. In this case, the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is always set to be longer than the specific time, and the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is a fixed time (a sound that is processed as a fixed time)."

Furthermore, as will be described later, a second multiple operation valid state may be prepared as the multiple operation valid state, and in this second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection described above will not be generated multiple times simply because the specific operation means is maintained in an operated state. Instead, the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not treated as a fixed time and is indefinite)."

As will be described later, a third multiple operation valid state may be prepared as the multiple operation valid state, and in this third multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection may be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state. In this case, the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated may be set to a specific time or less, and the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not treated as a fixed time and is indefinite)."

In addition, in configuration 13-A, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state are all the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is expressed as a mock-up display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state. Furthermore, the "specific time" in configuration 13-A is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of configuration 13-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "specific time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. It may also mean the same "time" as a differently named time in other configurations. Furthermore, there may be multiple "times longer than the specified time" for configuration 13-A, or just one. Similarly, there may be multiple "times equal to or shorter than the specified time" for configuration 13-A, or just one.

[Configuration 14-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound according to the detection. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is provided, and among the multiple operation effective states, in a type of multiple operation effective state in which the operation effective state can be ended based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound is output as "the post-operation output sound is being output while the specific operation means is in an operation state" When the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, a sound for which the time from when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is output (a sound that is not treated as a fixed time and is indefinite). Therefore, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type, it is difficult to predict how much time will elapse after the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state will end. For example, it is possible to suitably suggest that the post-operation output sound is not noteworthy in a situation where the specific operation means has just been changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. Note that the "specific operation means" in configuration 14-A is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of configuration 14-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operated state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state, the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not treated as a fixed time and is indefinite)." This configuration makes it difficult to predict how much time will pass after the post-operation output sound, which is in an output state when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, before it ends in the non-operated state, in a multiple operation valid state of a type that is not terminated. For example, it can be suitably suggested that the post-operation output sound is not noteworthy in a situation in which the specific operation means has just recently changed from an operated state to a non-operated state.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operated state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state, only "a sound for which the time from the time the specific operation means is in the non-operated state until the time the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)" can be output as the post-operation output sound when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing in the multiple operation valid state. In a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state, the post-operation output sound may be output as follows: "When the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is a fixed time (a sound processed as a fixed time)," or the post-operation output sound may be output as follows: "When the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)."

With this configuration, in the non-terminating multiple operation enabled state, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. This can suitably suggest, for example, that the specific operation means is not worth paying attention to immediately after being changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. In contrast, in the terminated multiple operation enabled state, it is possible to suggest both how much time will pass after the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. This suggests, for example, that the effect of changing the specific operation means from an operating state to a non-operating state may be worth paying attention to, but it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end a certain amount of time after being changed to a non-operating state, which is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when the specific operation means is changed to a non-operating state.

In configuration 14-A, it is assumed that both an operating means that is the target of multiple operations in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, and an operating means that is the target of multiple operations in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, are the same operating means as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration according to this invention may be specified based on whether the "operating means" represented as a mock-up display in the multiple operation valid state is of a type in which the valid operation state can be terminated when the "operating means" is operated. Furthermore, even if a multiple operation valid state is one that will not be terminated before the arrival of a predetermined end timing depending on the results of a jackpot determination or the like, if there is a possibility that the multiple operation valid state may be terminated before the arrival of the predetermined end timing depending on the results of a jackpot determination or the like, then that multiple operation valid state corresponds to the above-mentioned "multiple operation valid state of a type that can terminate an operation valid state."

[Configuration 15-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound in response to the detection. In this regard, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can start to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are provided which have different generation conditions. Furthermore, in both the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state, it is possible to play in such a way as to create a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operated state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state; if, in the first multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed as a result, but if the specific operation means is in a state in which it is operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may not be changed as a result. That is, in this case, even if the specific operation means in the operated state is switched to the non-operated state in the first multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that had been in the output state until then does not change, which is expected to encourage a casual interruption of the operation. However, when the specific operation means in the non-operated state is switched to the operated state, the post-operation output sound that had been in the output state until then may change, which is expected to provide a suitable sense of tension when the user resumes operation. Note that the "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in configuration 15-A are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 15-A. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or valid operation state as the "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or valid operation states. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "valid operation state" as operation means or valid operation states with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when, within the first multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the post-operation output sound may be in an output state of both a sound that may cause a change in its output state when the specific operation means is provisionally changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, and a sound that does not cause a change in its output state.However, if the specific operation means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the output state may not be changed when this happens, regardless of the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound. With this configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state, even if the specific operating means in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, the post-operation output sound that was in an output state until then does not change, which is expected to encourage the user to discontinue operation without hesitation. However, when the specific operating means in a non-operating state is changed to an operating state, the post-operation output sound that was in an output state until then may or may not change. Therefore, while encouraging re-operation, the possibility of a change in the post-operation output sound is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension regarding re-operation.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in a situation in which, within the second multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, a sound that does not cause a change in the output state when the specific operation means is provisionally changed from a non-operated state to an operated state is in an output state as the post-operation output sound (although no sound that may cause a change in the output state is output as the post-operation output sound), but if the specific operation means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this may be used as a trigger to cause the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound to either change or not change. With this configuration, in the second multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operating means that is in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, the post-operation output sound that was in an output state until then may or may not change. This encourages the user to stop the operation, but also provides a sense of tension about stopping the operation by allowing for the possibility that the post-operation output sound will change. On the other hand, when the specific operating means that is in a non-operating state is changed to an operating state, the post-operation output sound that was in an output state until then will not change, which is expected to encourage users to operate the operating means again without any hesitation.

In configuration 15-A, it is assumed that the operation means that is permitted to be operated multiple times in both the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means as the "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 16-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and a mock image display imitating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, as a mock image operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state, a multiple operation valid state is prepared in which detection of the operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are prepared, each with a different generation condition. The first multiple-operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display imitating a first operation means of the operation means is displayed, and it is possible to play so as to make appear a situation in which a first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state in response to detection that the first operation means has entered an operation state in which it is operated, and the first operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated; and the second multiple-operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display imitating a second operation means of the operation means is displayed, and a second-side post-operation output sound is in an output state in response to detection that the second operation means has entered an operation state in which it is operated, and the second operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated. In addition, if the first operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the first operating means is in a non-operated state and the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state in the first multiple-operation valid state, the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound may be changed triggered by this, but if the first operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the first operating means is in an operated state and the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound may not be changed triggered by this, so that it is possible to more actively encourage the first operating means from a non-operated state to be changed into an operated state. Note that the terms "first operating means,""second operating means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in configuration 16-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 16-A. Therefore, the "first operating means,""second operating means,""first multiple operation valid state," and "second multiple operation valid state" of other configurations may mean the same operating means or valid operation state, or may mean a different operating means or valid operation state. Also, the "operating means" or "valid operation state" may mean the same operating means or valid operation state with a different name as that of other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when, within the first multiple-operation valid state, the first operating means is in a non-operated state and the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state, only a sound that causes a change in the output state when the first operating means is provisionally changed from a non-operated state to an operated state may be output as the first-side post-operation output sound (although processing that causes a change in the sound in the output state is possible). However, if the first operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the first operating means is in an operated state and the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound may not be changed (processing that causes a change in the sound in the output state is not possible). This configuration makes it possible to more actively encourage the first operating means, which is in a non-operated state, to be changed into an operated state.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in a situation in which, within the second multiple operation valid state, the second operating means is in a non-operated state and the second-side post-operation output sound is in an output state, only a sound that does not cause a change in the output state is output as the second-side post-operation output sound when the second operating means is provisionally changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (no sound that may cause a change in the output state is output as the second-side post-operation output sound), but if the second operating means is in an operated state and the second-side post-operation output sound is in an output state, this may be used as a trigger to either change or not change the type of sound being output as the second-side post-operation output sound. With this configuration, when the second multiple operation valid state occurs, the player is more actively encouraged to change the second operating means from an operating state to a non-operating state, but since there is a possibility that a sound that does not cause a change may be output in response to the non-operating state, it is expected that a sense of tension will also be maintained in an appropriate manner.

[Configuration 17-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed, and an imitation image display imitating the operation means can be displayed. In this regard, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be started to be executed when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, and as one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are provided, each with different generation conditions. The second multiple operation valid state can be ended when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state before a predetermined end timing arrives, but the first multiple operation valid state cannot be ended when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state before a predetermined end timing arrives. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed as a result, but if the specific operation means changes from the operated state to a non-operated state while the specific operation means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be prevented from being changed as a result, so that it is possible to more actively encourage the specific operation means that is in a non-operated state to be changed into an operated state. Note that the "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in configuration 17-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of configuration 17-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means or valid operation state as the "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means or valid operation states. Furthermore, they may mean the same "operation means" or "valid operation state" as operation means or valid operation states with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if, in the first multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be triggered by this change; however, if the specific operation means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound will not be triggered by this change, and In a state where the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result of this. However, if the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the specific operation means is in the operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, this may or may not be a trigger for the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound to change depending on the type of sound being output. With this configuration, when a "first multiple operation valid state" that is not terminated by a player's operation occurs, the player can be more actively encouraged to change the specific operation means that is in a non-operated state to an operated state. Furthermore, when a "second multiple operation valid state" that can be terminated by a player's operation occurs, the player is more actively encouraged to change the specific operation means that is in an operated state to a non-operated state, but there is a possibility that a sound that does not cause a change as a result of the non-operated state is output, so that a sense of tension can be expected to be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In configuration 17-A, it is assumed that the operation means that is permitted to be operated multiple times in both the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means as the "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mockup image and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 18-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound in response to the detection. In this regard, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can start to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are provided which have different generation conditions. Furthermore, in both the first multiple-operation valid state and the second multiple-operation valid state, it is possible to play a game so as to create a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. When the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to when the post-operation output sound ends may be a fixed time or may not be a fixed time. This complicates the presentation of the end of operation of the specific operation means, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. Note that the terms "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in configuration 18-A are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 18-A. Therefore, the "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in other configurations may refer to the same operation means or valid operation state, or they may refer to different operation means or valid operation states. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operation means" or "operation valid state" as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and a post-operation output sound is in an output state in the first multiple-operation valid state, the time from when the specific operation means changes from the operated state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated may be fixed or indefinite depending on the type of post-operation output sound in the output state. However, if the specific operation means changes from the operated state to a non-operated state while the specific operation means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes from the operated state to the non-operated state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated may be indefinite. This configuration makes it difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means changes from the operated state to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will be terminated when the specific operation means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state in the first multiple-operation valid state. For example, it can be suitably suggested that the specific operation means has little noteworthy effect when it has just been changed from the operated state to the non-operated state. In contrast, when a specific operating means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the amount of time that will elapse after the specific operating means is put into an operated state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end is both predictable and difficult to predict. Therefore, for example, while it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effects that occur after the specific operating means is put into an operated state again may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end a certain amount of time after the specific operating means is put into an operated state again, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the operating state is put back into an operated state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in the second multiple-operation valid state, when the specific operation means is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means is switched from the operated state to a non-operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite. However, when the specific operation means is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state while the specific operation means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means is switched from the operated state to a non-operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated may be fixed or indefinite depending on the type of post-operation output sound in the output state. This configuration makes it difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state is terminated in the second multiple-operation valid state. For example, it can be suitably suggested that the effect of the specific operation means is low when it has just been switched from a non-operated state to an operated state. In contrast, when a specific operating means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, the amount of time that will elapse after the specific operating means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end is both predictable and difficult to predict.For example, while it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect after the specific operating means is changed to the non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end a certain amount of time after the state is changed to the non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the state is changed to the non-operated state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

[Configuration 19-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display simulating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, as an imitation image operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is in an operating state, a multiple operation valid state in which detection of the operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is provided, and first operating means and second operating means are provided as the operating means, and a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state, which have different generation conditions from each other, are provided as the multiple operation valid state. The first multiple operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display imitating the first operation means is displayed, and it is possible to play so as to make appear a situation in which a first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state in response to detection that the first operation means has entered an operation state in which it is operated, and the first operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated; and the second multiple operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display imitating the second operation means is displayed, and a second-side post-operation output sound is in an output state in response to detection that the second operation means has entered an operation state in which it is operated, and the second operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated. In addition to making it possible to play a game so as to cause a certain situation to appear, when the first operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the first operating means is in a non-operated state in the first multiple-operation valid state, the time from when the first operating means changes to the operated state until the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound is terminated is set to a fixed time. Therefore, in a situation where the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the first operating means is in a non-operated state, it is possible to add a dramatic effect regarding the timing at which the first operating means should be operated, and it is expected that interest in the game will be favorably maintained. Note that the terms "first operating means,""second operating means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in configuration 19-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 19-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means or valid operating state as the "first operating means,""second operating means,""first multiple operation valid state," or "second multiple operation valid state" of other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means or valid operating state. Also, it may mean the same "operating means" or "valid operating state" as an operating means or valid operating state with a different name of another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, when the second operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the second-side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the second operating means is in a non-operated state during the second multiple-operation valid state, the time from when the second operating means changes from a non-operated state to when the output state of the second-side post-operation output sound is terminated may be indefinite (instead of being treated as a fixed time). This configuration makes it difficult to predict how much time will pass after the second operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end during the second multiple-operation valid state; for example, it can be suitably suggested that the effect is not noteworthy when the second operating means has just changed from a non-operated state to an operated state.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in the first multiple operation valid state, if the first operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the first operating means is in a non-operated state, the time from when the first operating means changes from an operated state to when the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound is terminated can be treated as a fixed time; however, if the first operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the first operating means is in an operated state, the time from when the first operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state to when the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound is terminated may be indefinite (not treated as a fixed time). With this configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in an output state when the first operating means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state makes it possible to estimate how much time will pass after the operating state before it ends, which preferably suggests, for example, that there will be noteworthy dramatic effect even in a situation where the first operating means has just been changed from a non-operated state to an operated state. On the other hand, the post-operation output sound that is in an output state when the first operating means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state makes it difficult to estimate how much time will pass after the non-operated state before it ends, which preferably suggests, for example, that there will be little noteworthy dramatic effect in a situation where the first operating means has just been changed from an operated state to a non-operated state.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the second multiple operation valid state, if the second operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the second-side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the second operating means is in a non-operated state, the time from when the second operating means changes from an operated state to when the output state of the second-side post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite, but if the second operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the second-side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the second operating means is in an operated state, the time from when the second operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state to when the output state of the second-side post-operation output sound is terminated may be fixed or indefinite depending on the type of second-side post-operation output sound in the output state. With this configuration, in the second multiple operation enabled state, when the second operating means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation state for the post-operation output sound to end. This can suitably suggest, for example, that the noteworthy effect is low when the second operating means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state shortly thereafter. However, when the second operating means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, the post-operation output sound in the output state is made both predictable and difficult to predict. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that the effect after the second operating means is changed to a non-operated state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound in the output state will not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has passed since the second operating means was changed to a non-operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when the second operating means is changed to a non-operated state.

[Configuration 20-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are provided, and in all of these operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time (not treated as a fixed time), in the second multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and in the third multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. In this case, the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated can be set to a fixed time. Furthermore, in the multiple-operation valid state, if the specific operation means is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed as a result. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suitably suggest that there will be noteworthy dramatic effects even in a situation where the specific operation means is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state again shortly thereafter. Note that the terms "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state," and "third multiple-operation valid state" in configuration 20-A are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 20-A. Therefore, the terms "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state," and "third multiple-operation valid state" in other configurations may refer to the same operation means or effective operation states, or they may refer to different operation means or effective operation states. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operation means" or "operation valid state" as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, in the first multiple operation enabled state, in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is not changed as a result of this. On the other hand, in the third multiple operation enabled state, in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is a fixed time, In the second multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed as a result of this; and in the second multiple operation enabled state, in which the specific operation means is merely maintained in an operated state and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection is not made capable of being generated multiple times, if the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed as a result of this. With this configuration, when a player performs a second operation in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled, and when a player performs a second operation in the third multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled at regular intervals, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed in response to this. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the auto-rapid tap function is enabled or not, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state, if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is being output, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled (the second multiple operation enabled state), that is, that the auto-rapid tap function is enabled. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize whether the auto-rapid tap function is enabled or not by not enabling the so-called auto-rapid tap function at regular intervals, this configuration can prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In configuration 20-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are all the same operation means as the "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 21-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are provided, and in both of these operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to be an indefinite time, and in the second multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be treated as a fixed time, and in the multiple-operation valid state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed using this as a trigger, so that, for example, it can be suitably suggested that there will be noteworthy dramatic effect even in a situation where it has just happened to change the specific operation means from a non-operation state to an operation state again. Note that the "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in the configuration 21-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 21-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means or valid operation state as the "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state," or "second multiple-operation valid state" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means or valid operation states. Furthermore, they may mean the same "operation means" or "valid operation state" as operation means or valid operation states with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated is an indefinite time, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is not changed as a result of this; and in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated is a fixed time, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state as a result of this, the output state of the post-operation output sound may or may not be changed as a result of this, depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound. With this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state, in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled at regular intervals, even if the specific operating means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result. This, combined with the fact that the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated is indefinite, makes it difficult for the player to determine whether their operation has been properly accepted, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state, in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled at regular intervals, while suggesting that the performance effects after the specific operating means is changed back to an operated state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound that is in an output state does not necessarily change as a result of the specific operating means being changed back to an operated state, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension when the specific operating means is changed back to an operated state.

In configuration 21-A, it is assumed that the operation means that allows multiple operations in both the first multiple operation enabled state and the second multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mockup image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 22-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are provided, and in all of these operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, but the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is set to an indefinite time. In the second multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state. In the third multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, but the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated can be set to a fixed time. This expands the range of presentation possibilities and is expected to favorably maintain gaming interest. Note that the terms "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state," and "third multiple-operation valid state" in configuration 22-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 22-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means or valid operating state as the "specific operating means,""first valid operating state,""second valid operating state," or "third valid operating state" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different operating means or valid operating state. Also, it may mean the same "operating means" or "valid operating state" as an operating means or valid operating state with a different name according to another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, in the first multiple operation enabled state, in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is indefinite (it is not treated as a fixed time), whereas in the third multiple operation enabled state, in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is a fixed time, When the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the operation state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated can be treated as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time, and in the second multiple operation enabled state where the specific operation means is simply maintained in an operation state but is not enabled to generate the post-operation output sound multiple times in response to the detection, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the operation state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated can be treated as a fixed time. With this configuration, the time from when the player performs a second operation to when the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is constant whether the player performs a second operation in the second multiple-operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled, or in the third multiple-operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled at regular intervals. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the auto-rapid tap function is enabled or not, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension. In contrast, in the first multiple-operation enabled state, if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is being output, the player can recognize that the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled (the second multiple-operation enabled state), that is, that the auto-rapid tap function is enabled. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize whether the auto-rapid tap function is enabled or not by not enabling the so-called auto-rapid tap function at regular intervals, this configuration can prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In configuration 22-A, it is assumed that the operation means that allows multiple operations in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are all the same operation means as the "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mockup image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 23-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are provided, and in both of these operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, with the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated being set to an indefinite time. In the second multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, with the interval until the new post-operation output sound is set to a fixed time. This broadens the range of presentation and is expected to favorably maintain gaming interest. Note that the terms "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in configuration 23-A are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 23-A. Therefore, the "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in other configurations may refer to the same operation means or valid operation state, or they may refer to different operation means or valid operation states. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operation means" or "operation valid state" as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the new generation of the post-operation output sound is an indefinite time, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated may be indefinite; and in the second multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the new generation of the post-operation output sound is a fixed time, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated may be either an indefinite time or a fixed time. With this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state, in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled at regular intervals, even if the specific operating means is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state again, the time from when the operating state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is indefinite. This, combined with the fact that the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated is indefinite, makes it difficult for the player to determine whether their operation has been properly accepted, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state, in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled at regular intervals, while suggesting that the performance after the specific operating means is switched back to an operated state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state does not necessarily end within a certain time after the operation state is switched back to an operated state, is expected to maintain a sense of tension when the specific operating means is switched back to an operated state in an appropriate manner.

In configuration 23-A, it is assumed that the operation means that allows multiple operations in both the first multiple operation enabled state and the second multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 24-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound in accordance with the detection. In this regard, as an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple-operation-enabled state is prepared in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. Then, as the multiple operation valid state, there are provided an indefinitely-changed multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be processed to be an indefinite time, and a fixed-changed multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be processed to be a fixed time.The fixed-changed multiple operation valid state can be generated as a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, so that it is possible to suggest the possibility that the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state, through the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated. Note that the "specific operation means,""valid state of multiple operations with indefinite changes," and "valid state of multiple operations with fixed changes" in the configuration 24-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 24-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means or valid state as the "specific operation means,""valid state of multiple operations with indefinite changes," or "valid state of multiple operations with fixed changes" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means or valid states. Furthermore, they may mean the same "operation means" or "valid state of operation" as operation means or valid states with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the indefinite change multiple operation valid state can occur as a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, whereas the fixed change multiple operation valid state can occur either as a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state cannot be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, or as a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing. With this configuration, if the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated when the specific operating means is maintained in an operated state is set to an indefinite time, it is possible to suitably suggest that the state may be terminated when the detection that the specific operating means is in an operated state is triggered. However, if the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated when the specific operating means is maintained in an operated state is set to a fixed time, it becomes difficult to tell whether the state may be terminated when the detection that the specific operating means is in an operated state is triggered, or whether the state cannot be terminated when the detection that the specific operating means is in an operated state is triggered, which is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

In configuration 24-A, it is assumed that the operation means that allows multiple operations in both the indefinite change multiple operation enabled state and the fixed change multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 25-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are provided, and in all of these operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time. In the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. In the third multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time. In the multiple operation valid state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed using this as a trigger, and therefore it can be suggested that the performance after the specific operation means is again in an operation state may be worth paying attention to. The terms "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state,""third multiple-operation valid state," and "specific time" in configuration 25-A are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 25-A. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means, valid operation state, or time as the "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state,""third multiple-operation valid state," or "specific time" in other configurations, or may refer to different operation means, valid operation states, or times. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means,""valid operation state," or "time" as operation means, valid operation states, or times with different names in other configurations. Furthermore, "a time equal to or shorter than a specific time" includes "a specific time," and "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time equal to or shorter than a specific time" may each refer to only one time period, or may refer to multiple different times.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time, if the specific operation means changes from the non-operated state to the operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is not changed as a result of this, and in the third multiple operation enabled state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time In the operation-enabled state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed triggered by this; and in the second multiple-operation-enabled state, in which the specific operation means is simply maintained in an operated state but the post-operation output sound in response to the detection is not generated multiple times, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed triggered by this.

With this configuration, in both cases where the player performs another operation in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled, and where the player performs another operation in the third multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled and a new post-operation output is initiated only after a specific time or less has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, the post-operation output sound that was in an output state is changed in response to the player's second operation, making it difficult to recognize whether or not the situation is one in which the auto-rapid tap function is enabled, and it is expected that tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state, if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state), that is, that the player is in a situation where the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled. Therefore, since the auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled until a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is difficult to recognize that the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, and this configuration can prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game.

In configuration 25-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are all the same operation means as the "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mockup image and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 26-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are provided, and in both of these operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time. In the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time. In the multiple operation valid state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed as a result of this, which suggests the possibility that the performance after the specific operation means is again in an operation state may be worth paying attention to. The terms "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state," and "specific time" in configuration 26-A are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 26-A. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means, operation valid state, or time as the "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state," or "specific time" in other configurations, or may refer to different operation means, operation valid state, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means,""operation valid state," or "time" as the operation means, operation valid state, or time with different names in other configurations. Furthermore, "a time equal to or shorter than a specific time" includes the "specific time," and each of "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time equal to or shorter than a specific time" may each be a single time period, or multiple different times.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which the interval until the new generation of the post-operation output sound is always longer than a specific time, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is not changed as a result of this; and in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the interval until the new generation of the post-operation output sound is always less than the specific time, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state as a result of this, the output state of the post-operation output sound may or may not be changed as a result of this, depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound. With this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state, in which a new post-operation output is not initiated by the so-called auto-repeated tap function unless a specific time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, even if the specific operation means is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result. This, combined with the fact that the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not activated unless a specific time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, makes it difficult for the player to determine whether their operation has been properly accepted, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state, in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is activated and a new post-operation output is initiated simply when a specific time or less has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, while suggesting that the performance of switching the specific operation means back to the operated state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not necessarily changed as a result of switching the specific operation means back to the operated state, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension when switching the specific operation means back to the operated state.

In configuration 26-A, it is assumed that the operation means that allows multiple operations in both the first multiple operation enabled state and the second multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mockup image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 27-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are provided, and in all of these operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. The first multiple-operation valid state allows the post-operation output sound in response to the detection to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, with the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated always being longer than the specific time, the second multiple-operation valid state does not allow the post-operation output sound in response to the detection to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and the third multiple-operation valid state allows the post-operation output sound in response to the detection to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, with the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated always being shorter than the specific time, which is expected to broaden the range of presentation and favorably maintain gaming interest. Note that the terms "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state,""third multiple-operation valid state," and "specific time" in configuration 27-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 27-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means, valid operating state, or time as the "specific operating means,""first valid operating state multiple times,""second valid operating state,""third valid operating state multiple times," or "specific time" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means, valid operating state, or time. It may also mean the same "operating means,""valid operating state," or "time" as an operating means, valid operating state, or time with a different name according to other configurations. Furthermore, "a time equal to or shorter than a specific time" includes a "specific time," and each of "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time equal to or shorter than a specific time" may each have only one time period, or may have multiple different times periods.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, in the first multiple operation enabled state, in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than a specific time, if the higher-level specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the higher-level specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite (it is not treated as a fixed time), whereas in the third multiple operation enabled state, in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always equal to or shorter than the specific time, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated after the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state In the second multiple-operation valid state in which the specific operation means is merely maintained in an operation state but is not enabled to generate a post-operation output sound multiple times in response to the detection, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the operation state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated can be treated as a fixed time, and in the second multiple-operation valid state in which the specific operation means is merely maintained in an operation state but is not enabled to generate a post-operation output sound multiple times in response to the detection, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the operation state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated can be treated as a fixed time. With this configuration, in both cases where the player performs another operation in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is not enabled, and where the player performs another operation in the third multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started only after a specific time or less has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, the time from when the player performs another operation to when the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is constant, making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation in which the auto-rapid tapping function is enabled, and it is expected that tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state, if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state), that is, that the player is in a situation where the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled. Therefore, since the auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled until a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is difficult to recognize that the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, and this configuration can prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game.

In configuration 27-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are all the same operation means as the "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mockup image and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 28-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are provided, and in both of these operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. The first multiple-operation valid state allows a post-operation output sound to be generated multiple times in response to the detection simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, with the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated always being longer than the specific time. The second multiple-operation valid state allows a post-operation output sound to be generated multiple times in response to the detection simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, with the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated always being shorter than the specific time. This broadens the range of presentation and is expected to favorably maintain gaming interest. Note that the terms "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state," and "specific time" in configuration 28-A are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 28-A. Therefore, the terms "specific operation means,""first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state," and "specific time" in other configurations may refer to the same operation means, operation valid state, or time, or they may refer to different operation means, operation valid states, or times. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operation means,""operation valid state," or "time" as the differently named operation means, operation valid state, or time according to other configurations. Furthermore, "a time equal to or less than a specific time" naturally includes "a specific time," and as for "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time equal to or less than a specific time," only one time may be prepared, or multiple different time periods may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled until a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated may be indefinite (not treated as a fixed time); and in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled and a new post-operation output is initiated simply by the elapse of a specific time or less since the start of the previous post-operation output, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated may be indefinite (not treated as a fixed time) or fixed (can be treated as a fixed time). With this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state, in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled until a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, even if the specific operation means is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state again, the time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite. This, combined with the fact that the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled until a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, makes it difficult for the player to determine whether their operation was properly accepted, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state, in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled and a new post-operation output is initiated just after a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, the performance of the specific operation means after it is switched back into the operated state may be worth paying attention to, but the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end within a specific time after it is switched back into the operated state, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension when the operation state is resumed again.

In configuration 28-A, it is assumed that the operation means that allows multiple operations in both the first multiple operation enabled state and the second multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 29-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound in accordance with the detection. In this regard, as an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple-operation-enabled state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. The multiple operation valid state includes a long-change multiple operation valid state in which a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time, and a short-change multiple operation valid state in which a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always less than the specific time.The short-change multiple operation valid state can be generated as a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, so that it is possible to suggest the possibility that the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state, based on the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated. The terms "specific operation means,""long-change multiple operation valid state,""short-change multiple operation valid state," and "specific time" in configuration 29-A are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 29-A. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means, valid operation state, or time as the "specific operation means,""long-change multiple operation valid state,""short-change multiple operation valid state," or "specific time" in other configurations, or may refer to different operation means, valid operation state, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means,""valid operation state," or "time" as the operation means, valid operation state, or time with different names in other configurations. Furthermore, "a time equal to or shorter than a specific time" includes a "specific time," and each of "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time equal to or shorter than a specific time" may each be a single time period, or multiple different times.

In this case, as will be described later, the long-change multiple operation valid state may occur as a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state may be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, and the short-change multiple operation valid state may occur as a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state may not be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, or as a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state may be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing. With this configuration, if the auto-repeat function is enabled for a device that is subject to activation but the auto-repeat function is not enabled until a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is possible to appropriately indicate that the state may be terminated when the specific operation means is detected to be in an operated state. However, if the auto-repeat function is enabled and a new post-operation output is initiated just after a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is difficult to tell whether the state may be terminated when the specific operation means is detected to be in an operated state, or whether the state will not be terminated when the specific operation means is detected to be in an operated state, which is expected to appropriately maintain a sense of tension.

In configuration 29-A, it is assumed that the operation means that allows multiple operations in both the short-change multiple operation enabled state and the long-change multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mockup image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 30-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display that imitates the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is provided as a mock image operation valid state in which, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound can begin to be output; the operating state can be detected multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times; the mock image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in the multiple operation valid state; there are cases in which the periodic changes appear in time units that are equal to or shorter than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic changes appear in time units that are longer than the predetermined time; a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are provided as the multiple operation valid state; and in all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in a way that causes a situation to appear in which the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in a non-operating state where it is not being operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple-operation valid state, the periodic change in the mock-up image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the mock-up image display in an operating state; in the second multiple-operation valid state, the periodic change in the mock-up image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, but the post-operation output sound in response to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the mock-up image display in an operating state; and in the third multiple-operation valid state, the periodic change in the mock-up image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the mock-up image display in an operating state. The operation can be displayed so as to appear in the following time units, and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state of the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display, and in the multiple operation valid state, if the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed using this as a trigger, so it can be suggested that the performance after the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is again in an operation state may be worth paying attention to. Note that the "first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state,""third multiple operation valid state," and "predetermined time" in configuration 30-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 30-A. Therefore, it may mean the same valid operation state or time as the "first valid operation state multiple times,""second valid operation state multiple times,""third valid operation state multiple times," or "predetermined time" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different valid operation state or time. Also, it may mean the same "valid operation state" or "time" as the valid operation state or time with a different name according to other configurations. Furthermore, for the "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time," only one time may be prepared, or multiple different time periods may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the mock image display in an operated state, in the first multiple operation enabled state, in which the periodic change in the mock image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, if the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound will not be triggered by this. In the third multiple operation enabled state, in which the periodic change in the mock image display can be displayed in units of time shorter than the predetermined time, When a certain operating means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be triggered to change, and the imitation image display may be displayed so that periodic changes occur in time units longer than the predetermined time. However, in the second multiple operation enabled state, in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply because the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is maintained in an operated state, if the operating means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be triggered to change.

According to this configuration, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display, the first multiple operation enabled state has the same configuration as the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is not enabled, in that the periodic changes in the simulated image display appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. This makes it difficult to recognize whether or not the auto-rapid tapping function is being enabled, thereby maintaining a sense of tension. However, if a second operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, unlike in the second multiple operation enabled state, this does not trigger a change in the output state of the post-operation output sound. Therefore, the presence or absence of such a change upon second operation can be expected to effectively suggest that the situation is one in which the auto-rapid tapping function is being enabled, thereby suppressing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display, the third multiple operation enabled state is configured in the same way as the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled, in that if another operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed as a result. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the operation is subject to the auto-repeated tapping function and maintains a sense of tension, but unlike the second multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the imitation image display can be displayed in time units that are less than the specified time. Therefore, the length of such periodic changes in the imitation image display can be expected to effectively indicate that the operation is subject to the auto-repeated tapping function being enabled, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 31-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display that imitates the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is provided as a mock image operation valid state in which, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound can begin to be output; the operating state can be detected multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times; the mock image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in the multiple operation valid state; there are cases in which the periodic changes are displayed so that they appear in time units that are equal to or shorter than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic changes are displayed so that they appear in time units that are longer than the predetermined time; a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are provided as the multiple operation valid state; and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in a way that causes a situation to appear in which the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in a non-operating state where it is not being operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state, the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operating state; and in the second multiple operation valid state, the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operating state.In the multiple operation valid state, when the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed as a result of this, so that it can be suggested that the performance that occurs after the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is again in an operating state may be worth noting. Note that the "first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state," and "predetermined time" in configuration 31-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 31-A. Therefore, they may mean the same valid operation state or time as the "first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state," or "predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean a different valid operation state or time. Furthermore, they may mean the same "valid operation state" or "time" as a differently named valid operation state or time in other configurations. Furthermore, for the "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time," only one time may be provided, or multiple different time periods may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation enabled state, the periodic change in the mock image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the mock image display in an operating state. If the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, this triggers a change in the output state of the post-operation output sound. In the second multiple operation enabled state, In the first multiple operation valid state, in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state, and when the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state under the circumstances where the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, this may or may not be used as a trigger to change the output state of the post-operation output sound depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound. According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state, in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, even if the operating means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result, making it difficult for the player to recognize whether their operation has been properly accepted, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state, in which the simulated image display is displayed so that periodic changes occur in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effects that occur after the specific operating means is put into an operating state again may be worth paying attention to, but by not necessarily changing the post-operation output sound that is in an output state when the specific operating means is put into an operating state again, it is expected that the sense of tension when the operating state is put back into operation will be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 32-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and a mock-up image display imitating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, as a mock-up image operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock-up image display is in an operating state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and the mock-up image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation valid state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units of less than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the multiple operation valid state can be a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, a third multiple operation valid state, a fourth multiple operation valid state, a fifth multiple operation valid state, a sixth ... An operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are provided, and in all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play so as to create a situation in which the operation means that is the subject of the imitation image display is in a non-operation state where it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state; and as the multiple operation valid states, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are provided, and in all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play so as to create a situation in which the operation means that is the subject of the imitation image display is in a non-operation state where it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state, the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operating state; in the second multiple operation valid state, the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, but the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can not be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operating state; and in the third multiple operation valid state, the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operating state, so that the range of presentation is expanded and it can be expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. Note that the "first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state,""third multiple-operation valid state," and "predetermined time" in configuration 32-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 32-A. Therefore, they may mean the same valid operation state or time as the "first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state," or "predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean different valid operation states or times. Furthermore, they may mean the same "valid operation state" or "time" as the valid operation state or time with a different name in other configurations. Furthermore, for the "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time," only one time may be provided, or multiple different time periods may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state, in the first multiple operation enabled state, in which the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, if the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from when the operating state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite (not treated as a fixed time), whereas in the third multiple operation enabled state, in which the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes occur in time units shorter than the predetermined time, When the operating means that is the subject of the display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operating means changes to the operated state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated can be treated as a fixed time (rather than an indefinite time), and in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by the operating means that is the subject of the mock image display being maintained in an operated state, when the operating means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the time from when the operating means changes to the operated state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated can be treated as a fixed time (rather than an indefinite time).

According to this configuration, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state, the first multiple operation enabled state, like the second multiple operation enabled state, causes the periodic changes in the simulated image display to occur in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, making it difficult to recognize whether it is subject to the auto-rapid-operation function and maintaining a sense of tension. However, if a second operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, unlike the second multiple operation enabled state, the time from the second operation to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is indefinite (not treated as a fixed time). Therefore, by checking the output state of the post-operation output sound at the time of such a second operation, it can be expected that it will effectively suggest that the situation is one in which the auto-rapid-operation function is enabled, and will suppress a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operated state, the third multiple operation enabled state, like the second multiple operation enabled state, is designed so that if a second operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from the second operation to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound can be treated as a fixed time (rather than an indefinite time). This makes it difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated operation function is in effect and maintains a sense of tension. However, unlike the second multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the simulated image display can be displayed in time units that are equal to or shorter than the predetermined time. Therefore, the length of such periodic changes in the simulated image display can be expected to effectively indicate that the auto-repeated operation function is in an enabled state, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 33-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display that imitates the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is provided as a mock image operation valid state in which, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound can begin to be output; the operating state can be detected multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times; the mock image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in the multiple operation valid state; there are cases where the periodic changes are displayed so that they appear in time units that are equal to or shorter than a predetermined time, and cases where the periodic changes are displayed so that they appear in time units that are longer than the predetermined time; a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are provided as the multiple operation valid state; and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in a way that causes a situation to appear in which the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in a non-operating state where it is not being operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state, the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed so as to occur in units of time longer than the predetermined time, so that the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operated state, and in the second multiple operation valid state, the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed so as to occur in units of time shorter than the predetermined time, so that the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operated state, thereby expanding the range of presentation and can be expected to favorably maintain interest in the game. Note that the "first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state," and "predetermined time" in configuration 33-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 33-A. Therefore, it may mean the same valid operation state or time as the "first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state," or "predetermined time" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different valid operation state or time. Also, it may mean the same "valid operation state" or "time" as a differently named valid operation state or time according to other configurations. Furthermore, for the "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time," only one time may be prepared, or multiple different time periods may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, if the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, when the operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from when the operating state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is In contrast to the second multiple operation enabled state in which the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, when the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operating state is changed to when the output state of the post-operation output sound ends may be treated as a fixed time, or the time may not be treated as a fixed time and may be treated as an indefinite time.

With this configuration, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operating state, in the first multiple operation enabled state, in which the periodic changes in the imitation image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, even if the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state again, the time from when the operating state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is indefinite, making it difficult to tell whether the player's operation has been properly accepted, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state, in which the periodic changes in the imitation image display can be displayed in units of time shorter than the predetermined time, while suggesting the possibility of a new effect appearing when the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is changed back to an operating state, the post-operation output sound that is in an output state does not necessarily end in a fixed time after being changed back to an operating state, is expected to maintain a sense of tension when the operating state is changed back to an operating state.

[Configuration 34-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display that imitates the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the detection of an operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times as a mock image operation valid state in which the operation means that is the target of the mock image display is detected to be in an operation state, and the mock image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears, in either case, the periodic change appears in time units that are equal to or less than a predetermined time, or the periodic change appears in time units that are longer than the predetermined time. Of the multiple operation valid states, in the multiple operation valid state in which the periodic change in the mock image display appears in time units that are equal to or less than the predetermined time, when the operation means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operation state, the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times with a fixed interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated, so that it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner. The "predetermined time" for the configuration 34-A is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 34-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" for another configuration, or it may mean a different time. It may also mean the same "time" as a differently named time for another configuration. Furthermore, for the "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time," only one time may be provided, or multiple different times may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the imitation image display is displayed so that a periodic change occurs in a time unit that is equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, when the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is maintained in an operating state (there are cases in which the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times simply by maintaining the operating state), the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times with a fixed interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated, and in a multiple operation enabled state in which the imitation image display is displayed so that a periodic change occurs in a time unit that is longer than the predetermined time, In a multiple operation enabled state of the type displayed as shown in, when the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is maintained in an operating state, there may be two cases in which the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times with an indefinite interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated (as an output sound based on separate data read out based on detection) (without the post-operation output sound being output multiple times with a fixed interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated), and there may also be two cases in which the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times just by maintaining the operating state.

With this configuration, when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is possible to effectively suggest that the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is to be activated. In addition, when the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated, a post-acceptance output sound is output at regular intervals, making it easier to get a sense that the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated, which is expected to effectively maintain interest in the game. In contrast, when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, there are both cases where the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated and cases where it is not. In addition, even if the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated, a post-acceptance output sound is only output at irregular intervals, making it difficult to get a sense that the auto-rapid tapping function is activated, which is expected to effectively maintain a sense of tension.

[Configuration 35-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and a mock-up image display imitating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, as a mock-up image operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock-up image display is in an operating state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and the mock-up image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation valid state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units of less than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and in the multiple operation valid state In the multiple operation enabled state in which the periodic change in the simulated image display occurs in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state. In this case, the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated is always equal to or less than the specific time. Therefore, when the periodic change in the simulated image display is relatively rapid, it can be suitably indicated that "a situation exists in which the post-operation output sound can be continuously output at relatively short intervals simply by maintaining the operating means in an operating state." Note that the "predetermined time" and "specific time" in configuration 35-A are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 35-A. Therefore, they may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may mean different times. Furthermore, they may mean the same "time" as a differently named time in other configurations. Furthermore, for "a time equal to or less than the predetermined time,""a time longer than the predetermined time," and "a time equal to or less than the specific time," only one time period may be provided, or multiple different time periods may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation enabled states, in a "multiple operation enabled state of a type in which periodic changes in the simulated image display are displayed in time units less than the above-mentioned predetermined time," the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state, and in this case, the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is always set to be less than the above-mentioned specific time, whereas in a "multiple operation enabled state of a type in which periodic changes in the simulated image display are displayed in time units longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time," there are both cases in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state, and cases in which the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times simply by maintaining the operating state, but in cases in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating state, the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated may always be set to be longer than the above-mentioned specific time. With this configuration, when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed in time units less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is possible to effectively suggest that the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is to be activated. In addition, when the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated, new post-acceptance output sounds are output one after another within a relatively short period of time, making it easier to get a sense that the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated, which is expected to effectively maintain interest in the game. In contrast, when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed in time units longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is possible to both get a case where the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated and get a case where it is not. In addition, even if the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated, a new post-acceptance output sound is not output until a relatively long time has passed, making it difficult to get a sense that the auto-rapid tapping function has been activated, which is expected to effectively maintain a sense of tension.

[Configuration 36-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and a mock-up image display imitating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, as a mock-up image operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock-up image display is in an operating state, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection of the operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and the mock-up image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation valid state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units of less than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and in the multiple operation valid state, the periodic change of the mock-up image display can be displayed so that a periodic change of the mock-up image display appears. In a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change of the mock-up image display is displayed in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, if the periodic change of the mock-up image display is displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the state can be terminated when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock-up image display is in an operating state before the arrival of the predetermined termination timing. Therefore, the length of time required for the periodic change of the mock-up image display can suggest the possibility that the state will be terminated when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state. Note that the "predetermined time" in configuration 36-A is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of configuration 36-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. It may also mean the same "time" as a differently named time in other configurations. Furthermore, the "time equal to or less than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time" may each have only one time period, or multiple different time periods.

In this case, as will be described later, if the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, it is assumed that a multiple operation enabled state of a type that can be terminated when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing is occurring ((a multiple operation enabled state of a type that cannot be terminated is not occurring), and if the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed in units of time equal to or more than the above-mentioned predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, it is assumed that a multiple operation enabled state of a type that can be terminated when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing is occurring, and Alternatively, the state may be in a state in which a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state is not terminated occurs. With this configuration, when the periodic change in the mock image display in the multiple operation valid state is displayed so as to occur in time units of less than the predetermined time, it is possible to suitably suggest that the state is in a state in which the state may be terminated in response to detection that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operated state. On the other hand, when the periodic change in the mock image display in the multiple operation valid state is displayed so as to occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, it is difficult to tell whether the state is in a state in which the state may be terminated in response to detection that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operated state, or whether the state is not in a state in which the state is terminated in response to detection that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

[Configuration 37-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, it is possible to execute a post-operation change in response to the detection of the operation state. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times as an operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state. Among the multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change in response to the detection of the specific operation means being in the operation state cannot be executed multiple times simply by the specific operation means being maintained in the operation state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection of the specific operation means being in the operation state, but when the specific operation means changes from the operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated, a post-non-operation display corresponding to this is not displayed. On the other hand, in a specific type of multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change in response to the detection of the specific operation means being in the operation state can be executed multiple times simply by the specific operation means being maintained in the operation state, A post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the means is in an operated state, and when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, a corresponding post-operation display can be displayed. In addition, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state, the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation display is displayed in response to detection that it has changed to the non-operated state, and a situation in which the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, remains in an output state can be created by the player's play. This expands the range of presentation possibilities when the specific operation means is maintained in an operated state, and is expected to favorably maintain gaming interest. Note that the terms "specific operation means,""predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state," and "specific type of multiple operation enabled state" in configuration 37-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 37-A. Therefore, the term may refer to the same operating means or valid operating state as a "specific operating means," a "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state," or a "specific type of multiple operation valid state" according to other configurations, or may refer to a different operating means or valid operating state. Furthermore, the term may refer to the same "operating means" or "valid operating state" as an operating means or valid operating state with a different name according to other configurations. Furthermore, the term "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state" refers to a "multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change in response to detection of the operation state is not executable multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operation state." As such a multiple operation valid state, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one state may be prepared. Similarly, the term "specific type of multiple operation valid state" refers to a "multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change in response to detection of the operation state is executable multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operation state." However, as such a multiple operation valid state, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one state may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the specific type of multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state, the post-operation display is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, is maintained in an output state, and when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection may trigger a change to the post-operation display that was previously displayed, but the post-operation output sound, which was previously in an output state, may not be changed and may maintain its output state. According to this configuration, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state, the post-operation display is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, is maintained in an output state, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation changes are continued, but some changes are also executed, thereby creating a sense of anticipation for the start of a new effect.

Note that in configuration 37-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in both the predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state and the specific type of multiple operation enabled state are "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing "specific operation means" with "operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 38-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, it is possible to execute a post-operation change in response to the detection of the operation state. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times as an operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state. Among the multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the state is not ended in response to detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state, but when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, a post-non-operation display corresponding to this is not displayed. On the other hand, in a specific type of multiple operation valid state in which the state can be ended in response to detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state. A post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state, and when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-operation display can be displayed. Furthermore, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and a post-non-operation display is displayed in response to detection that the specific operation means has entered the non-operating state, and a situation in which a post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, maintains an output state can be created by a player's play. Therefore, when this situation appears, it can be expected to favorably suggest that the state may be terminated in response to detection that the specific operation means is in the operating state. The terms "specific operation means,""predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state," and "specific type of multiple operation enabled state" in configuration 38-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 38-A. Therefore, the term may refer to the same operating means or valid operating state as a "specific operating means," a "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state," or a "specific type of multiple operation valid state" according to other configurations, or may refer to a different operating means or valid operating state. Furthermore, the term may refer to the same "operating means" or "valid operating state" as an operating means or valid operating state with a different name according to other configurations. Furthermore, the term "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state" refers to a "multiple operation valid state in which the state is not terminated when it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives." As such a multiple operation valid state, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be provided, or only one state may be provided. Similarly, the term "specific type of multiple operation valid state" refers to a "multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated when it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives." As such a multiple operation valid state, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be provided, or only one state may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, in the specific type of multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state, the post-non-operation display is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, maintains its output state, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, this detection may be used as a trigger to cause a change to the post-non-operation display that was previously in a displayed state, but the post-operation output sound that was previously in an output state may not be changed and its output state may be maintained. With this configuration, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation change aspects are continued, while some changes are also made, thereby creating a sense of anticipation for the start of a new presentation.

Note that in configuration 38-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in both the predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state and the specific type of multiple operation enabled state are "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing "specific operation means" with "operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 39-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, it is possible to execute a post-operation change in response to the detection of the operation state. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times as an operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state. Among the multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times with a fixed interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started to be output when the specific operation means is maintained in an operation state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state, but even if the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, there are at least cases in which a post-operation display corresponding to this is not displayed. On the other hand, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times with a fixed interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started to be output when the specific operation means is maintained in an operation state, In the multiple operation valid state, not only is a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, made displayable based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operated state, but also a post-non-operation display made displayable in response to detection that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, and in the specific type of multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-non-operation display made display in response to detection that the specific operation means has changed to the non-operated state, and a situation in which the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, remains in an output state can be produced by the player's play, thereby expanding the range of effects that can be produced when the specific operation means is maintained in an operated state, and it can be expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a favorable manner. Note that the terms "specific operation means,""predetermined type of multiple operation valid state," and "specific type of multiple operation valid state" in configuration 39-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 39-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means or valid operation state as a "specific operation means," a "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state," or a "specific type of multiple operation valid state" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means or valid operation state. It may also mean the same "operation means" or "valid operation state" as an operation means or valid operation state with a different name according to another configuration. Furthermore, a "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state" means "a multiple operation valid state in which, when a specific operation means is maintained in an operation state, a post-operation change can be executed multiple times with a fixed interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output." As such a multiple operation valid state, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one state may be prepared. Similarly, the "specific type of multiple operation enabled state" refers to "a multiple operation enabled state in which, when a specific operation means is maintained in an operation state, a post-operation change can be executed multiple times with an indefinite interval until a new post-operation output sound, which is one of the above-mentioned post-operation changes, is started to be output." However, as such multiple operation enabled states, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one state may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the specific type of multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state, the post-non-operation display is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, maintains its output state, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, this detection may be used as a trigger to cause a change to the post-non-operation display that was previously in a displayed state, but the post-operation output sound that was previously in an output state may not be changed and its output state may be maintained. With this configuration, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation change aspects continue to be executed, but some changes are also made, which can appropriately create a sense of anticipation for the start of a new presentation.

Note that in configuration 39-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in both the predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state and the specific type of multiple operation enabled state are "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing "specific operation means" with "operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 40-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, it is possible to execute a post-operation change in response to the detection of the operation state. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times as an operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state. In a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state among the multiple operation valid states, the post-operation change can be executed multiple times such that when the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state, the interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts to be newly output is always equal to or shorter than a specific time. A post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state, but even if the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, there are at least cases in which a post-operation display corresponding to this is not displayed. On the other hand, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change can be executed multiple times such that when the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state, the interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts to be newly output is always longer than the specific time. In the specific type of multiple operation valid state, not only is a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, made displayable based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operated state, but also a post-non-operation display made displayable in response to detection that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, and in the specific type of multiple operation valid state, a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-non-operation display made display in response to detection that the specific operation means has changed to the non-operated state is made to appear through play by the player, so that the range of effects when the specific operation means is maintained in an operated state is expanded, and it can be expected that interest in the game will be favorably maintained. Note that the terms "specific operation means,""predetermined type of multiple operation valid state,""specific type of multiple operation valid state," and "specific time" in configuration 40-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 40-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means, valid operating state, or time as the "specific operating means,""predetermined type of multiple operation valid state,""specific type of multiple operation valid state," or "specific time" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means, valid operating state, or time. It may also mean the same "operating means,""valid operating state," or "time" as the operating means, valid operating state, or time with a different name according to other configurations. Furthermore, the "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state" means "a multiple operation valid state in which, when the specific operating means is maintained in an operating state, the post-operation change can be executed multiple times such that the interval until a new post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is always equal to or shorter than a specific time." As such multiple operation valid states, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one state may be prepared. Similarly, the "specific type of multiple operation valid state" refers to "a multiple operation valid state in which, when a specific operation means is maintained in the operation state, the interval until a new output of a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is always longer than the specific time, and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times." As such a multiple operation valid state, multiple states with different conditions for generation may be prepared, or only one state may be prepared. Furthermore, "a time equal to or shorter than a specific time" naturally includes "a specific time," and as "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time equal to or shorter than a specific time," only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the specific type of multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state, the post-non-operation display is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, maintains its output state, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, this detection may be used as a trigger to cause a change to the post-non-operation display that was previously in a displayed state, but the post-operation output sound that was previously in an output state may not be changed and its output state may be maintained. With this configuration, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation change aspects continue to be executed, but some changes are also made, which can appropriately create a sense of anticipation for the start of a new presentation.

Note that in configuration 40-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in both the predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state and the specific type of multiple operation enabled state are "specific operation means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing "specific operation means" with "operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Incidentally, while some of the above configurations 1-A to 40-A claim to have the effect of "suggesting that the presentation is worth noting," it is not essential that the presentation actually has something worth noting. Simply providing a presentation that suggests "a valuable presentation may be executed" can be expected to maintain interest in the game.

[Configuration 1-B]
For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes first and second operating means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player based on the determination by the determination means obtaining a predetermined result, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display prompting an operation on the first operating means, a first post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means, a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and a second post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operating means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, The post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for one operation means can be executed a plurality of times, at least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are prepared as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operation means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is being displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means can be executed a plurality of times, and when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, there is no case where the second operation-related display is newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made invisible, and when an operation for the second operation means is accepted a plurality of times while the second operation-related display is being displayed in the second predetermined mode and the second operation means is maintained in an operation state, the interval until a new post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance appears can be set to a time not exceeding a specific time.
That is, in this case, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined manner, the interval until a new change appears after reception when the "auto-rapid-tap function" is enabled for the second operation means is relatively short, which is expected to make it easier to recognize whether the "auto-rapid-tap function" is enabled and provide a sense of security. Note that the terms "first operation means,""second operation means,""first operation-related display,""second operation-related display,""first predetermined manner,""first specific manner,""second specific manner,""second specific manner,""predeterminedtime," and "specific time" in configuration 1-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 1-B. Therefore, the terms "first operation means,""second operation means,""first operation-related display,""second operation-related display,""first predetermined manner,""first specific manner,""second specific manner,""second specific manner,""predeterminedtime," and "specific time" in other configurations may refer to the same operation means, operation-related display, manner, or time, or may refer to different operation means, operation-related display, manner, or time. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operation means,""operation-relateddisplay,""mode," or "time" as the operation means, operation-related display, mode, or time of other configurations with different names.

Here, when realizing the inventions of "Configuration 1-B" and "Configuration 2-B" through "Configuration 8-B" described below, the terms "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second predetermined mode," and "second specific mode" do not necessarily have technical meaning. Essentially, when "a first operation-related display that, when in a displayed state, may be in a state where the first operating means is capable of automatic repeated taps (accepting multiple operations with a long press)" is hidden, there is a possibility that the first operation-related display will appear in a different mode within a predetermined time. On the other hand, when "a second operation-related display that, when in a displayed state, may be in a state where the second operating means is capable of automatic repeated taps (accepting multiple operations with a long press)" is hidden, there is no possibility that the second operation-related display will appear in a different mode within a predetermined time.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode, even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in the first specific mode (a mode different from the first predetermined mode) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first operation-related display was hidden. Whether the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode or the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode, the interval between multiple operations received by the first operation means while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and the appearance of a new post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception may always be set to a specific time or less. In other words, in this case, when the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled for the first operation means, the interval until the appearance of a new post-acceptance change is always set to a relatively short interval, which is expected to make it easier to recognize whether the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled and provide a sense of security.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, particularly when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined manner and when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific manner, the interval between multiple operations received for the second operation means while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and the appearance of a new post-acceptance change in response to that operation may be set to a specific time or less only when the second operation means is displayed in the second predetermined manner. In other words, in this case, even when the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled for the second operation means, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined manner, the interval until the appearance of a new post-acceptance change is always set to a relatively short interval, which is expected to make it easier to recognize whether the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled and provide a sense of security. In contrast, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific manner, the change interval when the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled for the second operating means can be set to a time longer than the specific time (a relatively long interval), which is expected to make it difficult to tell whether the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled or not, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, as will be described later, if post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific manner, the interval between these changes may not be set to be shorter than the specific time, but may always be set to be longer than the specific time. In other words, in this case, it can be expected that when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific manner, it will be even more difficult to determine whether the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled, thereby more appropriately maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes may be set to a non-predetermined time (an indefinite time). For example, this can be achieved by making a performance determination as to whether or not to cause a post-acceptance change each time an operation is accepted while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, and causing a post-acceptance change when a special determination result is obtained as a result. However, the method for realizing this configuration is not limited to this.

In this case, it is preferable (but not essential) to make the above-mentioned specific time shorter than the shortest time (interval) that can be adopted as an "indefinite time," in order to make it more difficult to recognize whether the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled or not.

Furthermore, in realizing this "Configuration 1-B," if operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specified manner, the interval until a new post-acceptance change in response to the accepted operation appears may be any time less than the specified time, and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (fixed time). Furthermore, if operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specified manner, the interval until a new post-acceptance change in response to the accepted operation appears may be any time longer than the specified time, and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (fixed time) (an indefinite time). Furthermore, if an operation is received multiple times for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears in response to the operation reception may be any time that can be set to a specific time or less, and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (a fixed time).

In addition, the interval (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, and the interval (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode are both set to a time less than a specific time, but these times (intervals) may be set to different times (intervals).

For example, if the interval (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode is set to a longer time than the interval (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the gap (the gap between the second predetermined mode and the second specific mode) when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed can be made to appear larger, which can be expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 1-B, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

[Configuration 2-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes first and second operating means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display prompting an operation on the first operating means, a first post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means when that operation is received, a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and a second post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operating means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, In this case, the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means can be executed a plurality of times, at least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are prepared as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operating means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is being displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operating means can be executed a plurality of times, and when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, there is no case where the second operation-related display is newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made invisible, and when an operation for the second operating means is accepted a plurality of times while the second operating means is maintained in an operation state while the second operation-related display is being displayed in the second predetermined mode, the interval until a new post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance appears can be set to a fixed time.
In other words, in this case, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined manner, the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears when the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled for the second operating means is set to a fixed time, which is expected to make it easier to recognize whether or not the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled, thereby providing a sense of security.
That is, in this case, when the "auto-repeated tap function" is activated at regular intervals for the second operating means, it can be suggested that the second predetermined mode will not be newly displayed within a predetermined time after the second predetermined mode is hidden. Note that the terms "first operating means,""second operating means,""first operation-related display,""second operation-related display,""first predetermined mode,""first specific mode,""second specific mode,""second specific mode," and "predetermined time" in configuration 2-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 2-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, mode, or time as the "first operating means,""second operating means,""first operation-related display,""second operation-related display,""first predetermined mode,""first specific mode,""second specific mode,""second specific mode," and "predetermined time" in other configurations, or may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, mode, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means,""operation-relateddisplay,""mode," or "time" as the operating means, operation-related display, mode, or time in other configurations with different names.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined manner, even if the first predetermined manner is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific manner (a manner different from the first predetermined manner) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined manner was hidden. This configuration is expected to prevent a decline in interest in playing the game when the first predetermined manner is hidden.

In addition, whether the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined manner or the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific manner, the interval between multiple operations received for the first operation means while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and the appearance of a new post-acceptance change in response to that operation acceptance may always be set to a predetermined time (a fixed time). In other words, in this case, when the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled for the first operation means, the interval until the appearance of a new post-acceptance change is set to a fixed time, which is expected to make it easier to recognize whether the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled and provide a sense of security.

Furthermore, when the second operation means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means may be set to be always shorter than the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operation means when the first operation means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode.

Furthermore, while the intervals at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode are constant, the intervals at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode (the intervals at which operations are accepted by the auto-rapid-tap function) may be variable rather than constant. In other words, in this case, depending on the display mode, the second operation-related display may make it easier to recognize that the "auto-rapid-tap function" is enabled, or make it more difficult to recognize that the "auto-rapid-tap function" is enabled, which is expected to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner through improved presentation.

Furthermore, while the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode is an indefinite time and may appear to be longer than the specific time, the interval (constant interval) between multiple post-acceptance changes when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, or the interval (constant interval) between multiple post-acceptance changes when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, may not appear to be longer than the specific time. In other words, in this case, the gap (the gap between the second predetermined mode and the second specific mode) between the so-called auto-rapid-tap function for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed can be made to appear larger, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, when implementing configuration 2-B as well as the configurations described above and below, "constant intervals until a new post-acceptance change appears" may mean that a new post-acceptance change occurs at a predetermined time interval, and may not necessarily occur at the same time interval. For example, the time from when the operating means is operated and the first post-acceptance change is executed until the second post-acceptance change (auto-tap function) is executed is set to 0.5 seconds, but thereafter the post-acceptance change (auto-tap function) is executed at 0.2 second intervals. In this case, "constant intervals until a new post-acceptance change appears" may be realized by including multiple "predetermined times."

Furthermore, when realizing configuration 2-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 3-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination by the determining means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display that prompts an operation on the first operating means, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted on the first operating means, and a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display that prompts an operation on the second operating means. and second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance to the second operating means, wherein at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are prepared as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operating means is operated while the first operation-related display is being displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, and the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance is started and the operation state is maintained even after the operation state is maintained, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance to the first operating means can be executed multiple times, and At least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are prepared as modes for displaying the related display, and if the second operating means is operated while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, and the operation state is maintained even after the execution of the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance is started, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the second operating means can be executed multiple times, and once the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation-related display will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made invisible, so that even if the first operating means is operated while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the first operating means may not be started, and even if the second operating means is operated while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the second operating means may not be started.

In other words, in this case, the auto-repeated function can be enabled when the first operation-related display or the second operation-related display is displayed, while still maintaining a sense of tension. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second specific mode," "second specific mode," and "predetermined time" in configuration 3-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 3-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means, operation-related display, mode, or time as the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second specific mode," "second specific mode," and "predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means, operation-related display, mode, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means," "operation-related display," "mode," or "time" as operation means, operation-related display, mode, or time with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined manner, even if the first predetermined manner is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific manner before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined manner was hidden. This configuration is expected to prevent a decline in interest in playing the game when the first predetermined manner is hidden.

Furthermore, even if the first operating means is operated while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, there may be cases where post-acceptance changes corresponding to the operation received for the first operating means are not initiated. In other words, in this case, it is possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the first operation-related display is displayed.

In this case, even if the first operating means is operated while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation of the first operating means is not initiated, if the first operating means is maintained in an operated state (if, while maintained, a condition that allows operation acceptance for the first operating means (conditions for the occurrence of an allowable state) is met), a situation may arise in which a post-acceptance change in response to the operation of the first operating means is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point. In other words, in this case, even if the so-called auto-rapid-press function is not enabled for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the auto-rapid-press function can be enabled if the operation state is continued, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this case, after multiple post-acceptance changes have occurred in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, there may be cases where no new post-acceptance changes occur while the first operation-related display is displayed, even though that operation state is maintained (the so-called auto-repeated tap function is disabled). However, even in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (if the conditions for allowing operation acceptance for the first operating means are met while the state is maintained), a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means may be executed again based on the operation state maintained up to that point.

Furthermore, if the second operating means is operated while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, but a post-acceptance change in response to the operation of the second operating means is not initiated, a situation in which a post-acceptance change in response to the operation of the second operating means is subsequently executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state may not occur, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operated state. In other words, in this case, if the so-called auto-rapid-press function for the second operating means is not enabled while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, there is no possibility of an operation being accepted based on the detection of the operation state even if the operation state is continued, and therefore it can be expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner when realizing the dramatic effect of the auto-rapid-press function.

[Configuration 4-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes first and second operation means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination by the determination means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display prompting an operation on the first operation means, a first post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted on the first operation means, a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display prompting an operation on the second operation means, and a second post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted on the second operation means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are prepared as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, When one operation means is operated and its operation state is maintained, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the first operation means can be executed a plurality of times; at least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are prepared as modes for displaying the second operation-related display; when the second operation means is operated and its operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is being displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed a plurality of times; when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation-related display will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made non-display; and when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode, a second operation-related sound related to the operation for the second operation means can be output.

In other words, in this case, even if the second specific behavior is not displayed for a long period of time after the second specific behavior is hidden, when the second specific behavior appears, it can effectively indicate that the situation is one in which the second specific behavior has appeared. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "first specified behavior," "first specific behavior," "second specified behavior," "second specific behavior," "predetermined time," and "second operation-related sound" in configuration 4-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 4-B. Therefore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "first specified behavior," "first specific behavior," "second specified behavior," "second specific behavior," "predetermined time," and "second operation-related sound" in other configurations may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, behavior, time, and operation-related sound, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, behavior, time, and operation-related sound. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operation means," "operation-related display," "mode," "time," or "operation-related sound" as the operation means, operation-related display, mode, time, or operation-related sound associated with other components with different names.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined manner, even if the first predetermined manner is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific manner before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined manner was hidden. In this case, a first operation-related sound related to the operation of the first operating means may be output. This configuration is expected to prevent a decline in interest in playing the game when the first predetermined manner is hidden.

Furthermore, at least when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific manner, a first operation-related sound related to an operation performed on the first operating means may be output. In particular, when the first operation-related sound is output before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific manner was hidden (when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific manner before the predetermined time has elapsed), the output state is always maintained for the first time (predetermined output time). However, when the first operation-related sound is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific manner was hidden (when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific manner after the predetermined time has elapsed), the output state may either be maintained for the first time (predetermined output time) or may be made inaudible (non-output) before the first time (predetermined output time) has elapsed. This configuration allows for different effects depending on the time that has elapsed since the first specific manner was hidden when the first operation-related sound is output, which is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension. In particular, when the first operation-related sound is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden (when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode after the predetermined time has elapsed), the output state may be maintained for the first time (predetermined output time), or it may be made inaudible (non-output) before the first time (predetermined output time) has elapsed, which is expected to provide an appropriate sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, at least when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific manner, a second operation-related sound related to the operation of the second operating means may be output. The second operation-related sound may be configured to be continuously output for a second period (a predetermined output period). With this configuration, although it takes a relatively long time for the second specific manner to appear after the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined manner, when the second specific manner appears, it is possible to effectively indicate that the situation is one in which the second specific manner has appeared.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related sound is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was made invisible, the output state may be maintained for the first time (predetermined output time), or the sound may be made inaudible (non-output) before the first time (predetermined output time) has elapsed. In either case, it is desirable that the mode (type of sound) of the first operation-related sound be the same (for example, a special mode).

Furthermore, if an operation is accepted for the first operating means while the first operation-related sound is being output in a special mode after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was made invisible, it is desirable that the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance be made in the same manner (same change) whether the output state of the first operation-related sound is maintained for the first time (predetermined output time) or whether it is made inaudible (non-output) before the first time (predetermined output time) has elapsed.

[Configuration 5-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes first and second operating means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player based on the determination by the determination means obtaining a predetermined result, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display prompting an operation on the first operating means, a first post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means when that operation is received, a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and a second post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are prepared as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operating means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the first operating means The post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for a stage can be executed a plurality of times, and at least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are prepared as modes for displaying the second operation-related display. When the second operating means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is being displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operating means can be executed a plurality of times. When the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation-related display will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made non-displayable. When the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode after the predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made non-displayable, the display state can be maintained for the second display time, so that it is possible to suitably suggest that the second specific mode is being displayed.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second specific mode," "second specific mode," "predetermined time," and "second display time" in configuration 5-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 5-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, mode, or time as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second specific mode," "second specific mode," "predetermined time," and "second display time" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, mode, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," "mode," or "time" as operating means, operation-related display, mode, or time with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined manner, even if the first predetermined manner is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific manner before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined manner was hidden. In this case, a first operation-related sound related to the operation of the first operating means may be output. This configuration is expected to prevent a decline in interest in playing the game when the first predetermined manner is hidden.

In this case, particularly, if the first specific mode (first operation-related display) is displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific mode (first operation-related display) was hidden, and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first specific mode is displayed, and operations are received multiple times via the first operating means, the first operation-related display will always remain displayed for the first display time (predetermined display time); however, if the first specific mode (first operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific mode (first operation-related display) was hidden, and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first specific mode is displayed, and operations are received multiple times via the first operating means, the first operation-related display may either remain displayed for the first display time (predetermined display time) or be hidden before the first display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed. With this configuration, the presentation differs depending on how much time has passed since the first predetermined mode was hidden when the first specific mode appeared, which is expected to provide a good sense of tension. In particular, when the first specific mode is displayed after a predetermined time has passed since the first predetermined mode was hidden, the display state may be maintained for the first display time (predetermined display time), or it may be hidden before the first display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed, which is expected to provide a good sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the second specific mode (second operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second specific mode (second operation-related display) was hidden, and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second specific mode is displayed and operations to the second operation means are received multiple times, the second operation-related display may either be maintained in a displayed state for the second display time (predetermined display time) or be made hidden before the second display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed. This can be expected to provide an appropriate sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game when the second specific mode is displayed.

In this regard, if the first specific mode (first operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific mode (first operation-related display) was hidden, the first operation-related display will either be displayed for the first display time (predetermined display time) or will be hidden before the first display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed, regardless of whether the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and operations are accepted multiple times while the first specific mode is displayed. Then, in a situation where the second specific mode (second operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode (second operation-related display) was hidden, and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second specific mode is displayed and operations to the second operating means are received multiple times, the second operation-related display may be displayed for the second display time (predetermined display time) or may be made to a hidden state before the second display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed; however, in a situation where the second specific mode (second operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode (second operation-related display) was hidden, and the second operating means is not operated and operations to the second operating means are not received while the second specific mode is displayed, the second operation-related display may not be made to a hidden state before the second display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed, but may be displayed for the second display time (predetermined display time). With this configuration, it is possible to provide, through different presentations, the sense of tension that occurs when the first specific mode (first operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has passed since the first predetermined mode (first operation-related display) was hidden, and the sense of tension that occurs when the second specific mode (second operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has passed since the second predetermined mode (second operation-related display) was hidden, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the first specific mode (first operation-related display) is displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific mode (first operation-related display) was hidden, the first operation-related display may be displayed for the first display time (predetermined display time) without being hidden before the first display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed, regardless of whether the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and operations are accepted multiple times while the first specific mode is displayed.

When the first operation-related display is displayed in a first specific manner, it is desirable that the manner as the first specific manner be the same whether or not the display state is continued for the first display time (a predetermined display time), and when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second specific manner, it is desirable that the manner as the second specific manner be the same whether or not the display state is continued for the second display time (a predetermined display time).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed in a first specific manner, it is desirable that the same manner (same change) appear as a post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the first operating means, whether or not the display state continues for the first display time (predetermined display time). Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second specific manner, it is desirable that even if the display state continues for the second display time (predetermined display time) (when no operation is accepted for the second operating means), the same manner (same change) appear as a post-acceptance change when the display state does not continue for the second display time (predetermined display time).

[Configuration 6-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with first and second operation means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display prompting an operation to the first operation means, a first post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operation means, a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display prompting an operation to the second operation means, and a second post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operation means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are prepared as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, The post-acceptance change can be executed a plurality of times, at least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are prepared as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operating means is operated and the operating state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change can be executed a plurality of times in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operating means, and once the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation-related display will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made invisible, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to the operation on the second operating means can be output, so that even if the second specific mode is not displayed for a long period of time after the second predetermined mode is made invisible, when the second specific mode appears, it can suitably suggest that the situation is such that the second specific mode will appear.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "first predetermined state," "first specific state," "second specific state," "second specific state," "predetermined time," and "second operation-related sound" in configuration 6-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 6-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, state, time, and operation-related sound as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "first predetermined state," "first specific state," "second specific state," "second specific state," "predetermined time," and "second operation-related sound" in other configurations, or may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, state, time, and operation-related sound. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," "state," "time," and "operation-related sound" as operating means, operation-related display, state, time, and operation-related sound with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined manner, even if the first predetermined manner is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific manner before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined manner was hidden. In this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to the operation of the first operating means may be output. This configuration is expected to prevent a decline in interest in playing the game when the first predetermined manner is hidden.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed, regardless of whether it is displayed in the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the second operation-related sound related to operations on the second operating means may be output as a single sound, in which the same sound does not appear multiple times. In contrast, when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode, the first operation-related sound related to operations on the first operating means is not output. However, when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode, the first operation-related sound related to operations on the first operating means may be output as a repeated sound, in which the same sound appears multiple times, regardless of whether the first specific mode was displayed before the predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden. With this configuration, when the second operation-related display is displayed, the operation of the second operating means is prompted through a single sound output, whereas when the first operation-related display is displayed, the operation of the first operating means may not be prompted through a sound output. This is expected to favorably create a sense of tension about forgetting to operate the second operating means. However, instead, when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific manner, the player is more strongly encouraged to operate the first operating means through multiple sound outputs, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In this case, particularly, if the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden, a specific sound will always be output multiple times as the first operation-related sound related to operations on the first operating means. However, if the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden, the first operation-related sound related to operations on the first operating means may be output either multiple times or only once. With this configuration, even if the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode, the player will not necessarily be strongly urged to operate the first operating means through multiple sound outputs, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension and maintain interest in the game.

The technique of "outputting a specific sound so that it appears only once" may be achieved by preparing such sound data in advance and playing back this sound data, or by terminating the playback of the sound data used in the technique of "outputting a specific sound so that it appears multiple times," or by some other technique.

[Configuration 7-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes first and second operating means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display prompting an operation on the first operating means, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means when that operation is received, a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means when that operation is received, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are prepared as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operating means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation received on the first operating means can be executed multiple times, and the second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display prompting an operation on the second operating means can be executed multiple times. At least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are prepared as modes for displaying the display, and when the second operating means is operated and the operating state is maintained while the second operation-related display is being displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change in response to operation reception for the second operating means can be executed a plurality of times, and when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation-related display will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made invisible, and when the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state under a circumstance in which the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode and the post-acceptance change in response to operation reception for the second operating means has been executed a plurality of times, a post-non-operating display corresponding to this can be displayed, so that it can be expected that the change of the second operating means from an operating state to a non-operating state will serve as a trigger to suggest that the second specific mode will not be displayed for a long period of time.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second specific mode," "second specific mode," "predetermined time," and "post-non-operation display" in configuration 7-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 7-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, mode, time, and post-non-operation display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second specific mode," "second specific mode," "predetermined time," and "post-non-operation display" in other configurations, or may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, mode, time, and post-non-operation display. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," "mode," "time," and "post-non-operation display" as operating means with different names, operation-related display, mode, time, and post-non-operation display in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined manner, even if the first predetermined manner is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific manner before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined manner was hidden. This configuration is expected to prevent a decline in interest in playing the game when the first predetermined manner is hidden.

In this case, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means are performed multiple times, and the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operating display may be displayed. Furthermore, when the first operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operation means are performed multiple times, a corresponding post-non-operating display may not be displayed regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode (when displayed in any displayable mode). This configuration makes it easy to recognize when the operating state of the second operation means is released, but makes it difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operation means is released, which is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension when using the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function).

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means are being executed multiple times, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. However, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means are being executed multiple times, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed when the second operation-related display is not displayed and the auto-repeated function is enabled. This configuration is expected to maintain a sense of tension when using the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operation means, even if the operating state of the second operation means is released.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means are being performed multiple times, and the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. However, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means are being performed multiple times, and the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. With this configuration, even if the operating state of the second operation means is released while the second operation-related display is displayed, the post-non-operating display will not be displayed if the auto-repeated function is enabled while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operation means while the second operation-related display is displayed will be maintained appropriately.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means have been executed multiple times, and the post-non-operation display is displayed in response to the second operating means changing from an operating state to a non-operating state, it may be possible to prevent a new sound from being output in response to the change to the non-operating state.

[Configuration 8-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes first and second operating means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display prompting an operation to the first operating means, a first post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means when that operation is received, a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display prompting an operation to the second operating means, and a second post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means when that operation is received for the second operating means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are prepared as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operating means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation received for the first operating means can be executed a plurality of times, and the mode for displaying the second operation-related display At least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are prepared as the second operation-related display, and when the second operating means is operated and the operating state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change in response to operation reception for the second operating means can be executed multiple times, and when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation-related display will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made invisible, and when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state under a circumstance where the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode and the post-acceptance change in response to operation reception for the second operating means has been executed multiple times, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state, so it can be expected that the change of the second operating means from an operating state to a non-operating state will be used as a trigger to suggest that the second specific mode will not be displayed for a long period of time.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second specific mode," "second specific mode," and "predetermined time" in configuration 8-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 8-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, mode, or time as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second specific mode," "second specific mode," and "predetermined time" in other configurations, or may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, mode, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," "mode," or "time" as operating means, operation-related display, mode, or time with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined manner, even if the first predetermined manner is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific manner before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined manner was hidden. This configuration is expected to prevent a decline in interest in playing the game when the first predetermined manner is hidden.

In this case, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means have been made multiple times, if the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this triggers at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time to be made inaudible. However, when the first operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operation means have been made multiple times, this may not be used as a trigger to make inaudible any of the sound effects that were audible at that time, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode (when displayed in any mode that can be displayed). This configuration makes it easy to recognize when the operation state of the second operating means has been released, but makes it difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operating means has been released, which is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension when using the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function).

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means are being executed multiple times, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this is used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that were in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state. However, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means are being executed multiple times, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may not be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that were in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state. With this configuration, even if the operation state of the second operating means is released, if the auto-repeat function was enabled while the second operation-related display was not displayed, at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time will not be made inaudible, so it can be expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-repeat function (long press function) on the second operating means will be maintained in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means have been performed multiple times, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this triggers at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time to be made inaudible. However, when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second specific manner, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means have been performed multiple times, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may not be used as a trigger to make inaudible the sound effects that were audible at that time. With this configuration, even if the operating state of the second operating means is released while the second operation-related display is displayed, there is no need to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at the time when the auto-repeat function was enabled while the second operation-related display was displayed in the second specific manner inaudible, so it can be expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-repeat function (long press function) on the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed will be maintained in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means are executed multiple times, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time is made inaudible, it is also possible to prevent a new sound from being output in response to the change to the non-operating state.

[Configuration 9-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means when the operation is received for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation for the first operating means can be received multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means, and a display encouraging an operation for the second operating means, in which, in and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which, when maintained in an operating state, allows operation acceptance for the second operating means to be performed a plurality of times; when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to operation for the second operating means can be output; when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means is occurring, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but is made audible for the predetermined output time; when the second operating means is placed in an operating state while the second operation-related sound is audible, and thereafter the operating state is maintained, the interval when post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means occur a plurality of times can be set to a time not greater than a specific time.

In other words, in this case, because the second operation-related sound is not rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize that multiple post-acceptance changes are occurring at relatively short intervals (a time shorter than the specific time), thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "specific time," and "second operation-related sound" in configuration 9-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 9-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means, operation-related display, time, and operation-related sound as the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "specific time," and "second operation-related sound" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means, operation-related display, time, and operation-related sound. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means," "operation-related display," "time," and "operation-related sound" as operation means, operation-related display, time, and operation-related sound with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to an operation on the first operating means can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed; and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to an operation on the second operating means can be output, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, but is audible for the predetermined output time. The interval at which the first operation means is put into an operating state when the first operation-related sound is audible and a post-acceptance change is then executed multiple times if the operating state is maintained thereafter (the interval at which a post-acceptance change occurs in the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is always set to a specific time or less, regardless of whether the first operation-related sound is put into an inaudible state before the lapse of a predetermined output time, and the interval at which the second operation means is put into an operating state when the second operation-related sound is audible and a post-acceptance change is then executed multiple times if the operating state is maintained thereafter (the interval at which a post-acceptance change occurs in the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) may be set to either a specific time or less or a time longer than the specific time. With this configuration, if the first operating means is placed in an operated state and maintained in this state while the first operation-related sound is being output, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance by the so-called auto-rapid tap function is always short, regardless of whether the first operation-related sound is rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, making it easier to recognize that the auto-rapid tap function is enabled and maintaining interest in the game.In contrast, if the second operating means is placed in an operated state and maintained in this state while the second operation-related sound is being output, not only will the second operation-related sound not be rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, but the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance by the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not necessarily short and may be longer than the specified time, making it harder to recognize that the auto-rapid tap function is enabled and maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to the operation of the first operating means can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, or may be made audible for the predetermined output time.

In this case, it is desirable that the output sound (type of sound) of the first operation-related sound be the same when it is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed and when it is made audible for the predetermined output time.

It is also desirable that the display mode of the first operation-related display be the same when the first operation-related sound is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed and when the first operation-related sound is made audible for the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, in realizing this "Configuration 9-B," if multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears in response to the accepted operation may be set to a time that is equal to or shorter than a specific time, and does not necessarily have to be set to a predetermined time (a fixed time).

In addition, the interval when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears), and the interval when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears), can both be set to a specific time or less, but even in this case, the respective times (intervals) may be set to different times (intervals).

For example, by setting the interval when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) to be longer than the interval when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears), and by setting the interval to be shorter than the interval when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears), the gap in the interval when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed (the gap between the second predetermined mode and the second specific mode) can be made to appear larger, which can be expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 9-B, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

[Configuration 10-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means when the operation is received on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation on the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation can be received on the first operating means multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means, and a display encouraging an operation on the second operating means, in which, if the display is in a displayed state, the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which allows operation acceptance for the second operating means to be performed a plurality of times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to operation for the second operating means can be output, and when the second operation-related sound is made audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means is occurring, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but is made audible for the predetermined output time, and when the second operating means is placed in an operating state when the second operation-related sound is made audible and the operating state is maintained thereafter, the interval when post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means occurs a plurality of times can be set to a fixed time.

In other words, in this case, since the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize that multiple operations are being accepted within a certain period of time, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. Note that the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "second operation-related sound" in configuration 9-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 9-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound as the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," or "second operation-related sound" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means," "operation-related display," or "operation-related sound" as operation means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to an operation on the first operating means can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed; and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to an operation on the second operating means can be output, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operating means, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, and is not made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed. The first operation-related sound is made audible for a certain period of time, and the interval when the first operation means is put into an operating state when the first operation-related sound is made audible, and thereafter, if the operating state is maintained, a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times (the interval when a post-acceptance change occurs in the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is a fixed time (it may be a predetermined time, and not an indefinite time) regardless of whether the first operation-related sound is put into an inaudible state before the lapse of a predetermined output time, and the interval when the second operation means is put into an operating state when the second operation-related sound is made audible, and thereafter, if the operating state is maintained, a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times (the interval when a post-acceptance change occurs in the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) may be either a fixed time (it may be a predetermined time, and not an indefinite time) or an indefinite time instead of a fixed time. With this configuration, if the first operating means is placed in an operated state and maintained in that state while the first operation-related sound is being output, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance by the so-called auto-rapid tap function is always a predetermined time, not an indefinite time, regardless of whether the first operation-related sound is rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed. This makes it easier to recognize that the auto-rapid tap function is enabled, and is expected to maintain interest in the game. In contrast, if the second operating means is placed in an operated state and maintained in that state while the second operation-related sound is being output, not only will the second operation-related sound not be rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, but the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance by the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not necessarily a fixed time (as long as it is a predetermined time, not an indefinite time) but may be an indefinite time, making it harder to recognize that the auto-rapid tap function is enabled, and is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to the operation of the first operating means can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, or may be made audible for the predetermined output time.

In this case, it is desirable that the output sound (type of sound) of the first operation-related sound be the same when it is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed and when it is made audible for the predetermined output time.

It is also desirable that the display mode of the first operation-related display be the same when the first operation-related sound is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed and when the first operation-related sound is made audible for the predetermined output time.

Note that when implementing configuration 10-B as well as the configurations described above and below, "indefinite time" refers to a time that is not predetermined, and can be realized, for example, by making a performance determination as to whether or not to cause a change after acceptance each time an operation is accepted while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, and then causing a change after acceptance when a special judgment result is obtained. However, the method for realizing the configuration is not limited to this.

Furthermore, when realizing configuration 10-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 11-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes first and second operating means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation accepted for the first operating means may be performed multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which prompts an operation for the second operating means, and in which, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation accepted for the second operating means may be performed multiple times, When the related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to operation of the second operating means is enabled to be output, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to operation of the second operating means, the second operation-related sound is not muted before a predetermined output time has elapsed but remains audible for the predetermined output time. Even if the first operating means is operated while the first operation-related display is displayed, the post-acceptance change in response to operation of the first operating means may not be initiated, and even if the second operating means is operated while the second operation-related display is displayed, the post-acceptance change in response to operation of the second operating means may not be initiated. This makes it possible to enable the auto-repeated function when the second operation-related display is displayed while maintaining a sense of tension. It is also expected that the sense of tension when the first operation-related display is displayed will also be maintained.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "second operation-related sound" in configuration 11-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 11-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," or "second operation-related sound" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "operation-related sound" as operating means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even if the first operation means is operated while the first operation-related display is displayed but a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation for the first operation means is not initiated, if the first operation means is maintained in an operated state (if the conditions for allowing operation reception for the first operation means (conditions for the occurrence of an acceptable state) are met while the first operation-related display is being maintained), a situation may arise in which a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation for the first operation means is initiated based on detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point; and if the second operation means is operated while the second operation-related display is displayed but a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation for the second operation means is not initiated, even if the second operation means is maintained in an operated state. With this configuration, even if the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled with the first operation-related display being displayed, the auto-rapid-hit function can be enabled if the operation state is continued, which is expected to maintain a favorable level of excitement when playing the first operation means. Meanwhile, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled with the second operation-related display being displayed, even if the operation state is continued, there is no possibility of an operation being accepted based on the detection of that operation state, which is expected to maintain a favorable level of tension when realizing the dramatic effects of the auto-rapid-hit function.

Also, when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to an operation on the first operating means may be outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed or may be made audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to an operation on the second operating means may be outputtable, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation on the second operating means, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed but may be made audible for the predetermined output time. This configuration makes it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, thereby creating a sense of tension about whether to maintain the operating state in such a situation. In contrast, the first operating means may be designed to make it easy or difficult to recognize whether the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, but in either case, the auto-rapid-hit function can be enabled by continuing to operate it, which is expected to add a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

However, the process of making the first operation-related sound inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed does not necessarily have to be triggered by the receipt of an operation on the first operating means (it may be triggered by the receipt of an operation on the first operating means). In other words, in this case, regardless of whether or not an operation is received on the first operating means, there will be both cases where the first operation-related sound is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, and cases where the first operation-related sound is not made inaudible and is output for the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, after post-acceptance changes have occurred multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, there may be cases where new post-acceptance changes no longer occur while the first operation-related display is displayed, even though that operating state is maintained (the so-called auto-tap function is disabled). However, even in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (if the conditions for allowing operation acceptance for the first operating means are met while the state is maintained), a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means may be executed again based on the operating state maintained up to that point.

[Configuration 12-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation accepted for the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for displaying a second operation-related display which prompts an operation for the second operating means, and in which, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation accepted for the second operating means can be performed multiple times, and a second operation-related display means that can output a second operation-related sound related to an operation on the second operation means when the second operation-related display is displayed, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to acceptance of an operation on the second operation means, the second operation-related sound will not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed and will be made audible for the predetermined output time, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-non-operating display corresponding to this can be displayed, so that it can be indicated that the second operation-related sound will not be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, triggered by the second operation means being changed from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "second operation-related sound," and "post-non-operation display" in configuration 12-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 12-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, operation-related sound, and post-non-operation display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "second operation-related sound," and "post-non-operation display" in other configurations, or may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, operation-related sound, and post-non-operation display. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," "operation-related sound," and "post-non-operation display" as operating means with different names, operation-related display, operation-related sound, and post-non-operation display in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, if the first operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operating display may not be displayed; and when the second operation-related display is displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, if the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operating display may be displayed. This configuration makes it easy to recognize when the operating state of the second operation means is released, but makes it difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operation means is released, which is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension when using the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to an operation performed on the first operating means may be outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation performed on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed or may be made audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to an operation performed on the second operating means may be outputtable, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation performed on the second operating means, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed but may be made audible for the predetermined output time. This configuration makes it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means. In this regard, if the post-operation display is displayed when the operation state for the second operation means is released, it is possible to confirm that the auto-rapid-hit function has been enabled for the second operation means, which is expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, for the first operation means, it is possible to make it both easy and difficult to recognize whether the auto-rapid-hit function has been enabled. In this regard, if the post-operation display is not displayed even when the operation state for the first operation means is released, the player will be forced to play either with a sense of security or with a sense of anxiety, so it is expected that a different presentation than that of the second operation means will be provided, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension and interest in the game.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation received on the first operation means, if the first operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, the corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed, regardless of the mode in which the first operation-related display is displayed.

It is also desirable to prevent a new sound from being output when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the second operating means is executed multiple times, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed, or the post-non-operation display may not be displayed. With this configuration, even when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the second operating means is executed multiple times, the corresponding post-non-operation display will not necessarily be displayed when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state.

Furthermore, even if the post-non-operation display is displayed when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is possible to prevent a new sound from being output when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state.

[Configuration 13-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation accepted for the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which prompts an operation for the second operating means, and in which, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation accepted for the second operating means can be performed multiple times. and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to an operation on the second operating means can be output, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to acceptance of an operation on the second operating means, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed and is made audible for the predetermined output time, and when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, this is used as a trigger to make inaudible at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time, so that it can be suggested that the change of the second operating means from an operating state to a non-operating state is used as a trigger to make inaudible the second operation-related sound.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "second operation-related sound" in configuration 13-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 13-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, operation-related sound, or non-post-operation display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," or "second operation-related sound" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "operation-related sound" as operating means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means, if the first operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may be used as a trigger to prevent at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time from becoming inaudible. Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operation means, if the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may be used as a trigger to prevent at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time from becoming inaudible. This configuration makes it easy to recognize when the operation state of the second operation means is released, but makes it difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operation means is released, which is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension when using the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to an operation performed on the first operating means may be outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation performed on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed or may be made audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to an operation performed on the second operating means may be outputtable, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation performed on the second operating means, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed but may be made audible for the predetermined output time. This configuration makes it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means. In this regard, if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at the time the operation state for the second operation means is made inaudible when the operation state for the second operation means is released, it is possible to confirm that the auto-rapid-hit function has been enabled for the second operation means, which is expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, for the first operation means, it is possible to make it both easy and difficult to recognize whether the auto-rapid-hit function has been enabled. In this regard, if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at the time is not made inaudible even when the operation state for the first operation means is released, the player will be forced to play either with a sense of security or with a sense of anxiety, so it is expected that a different effect than that of the second operation means will be provided, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension and interest in the game.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation received on the first operation means, if the first operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time may not be made inaudible, regardless of the mode in which the first operation-related display is displayed.

It is also desirable to prevent a new sound from being output when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation of the second operating means, if the second operating means is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time may be muted, or at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time may not be muted. With this configuration, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation of the second operating means, at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time may not necessarily be muted when the second operating means is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state. This is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state.

[Configuration 14-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes first and second operating means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation accepted for the first operating means may be performed multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which prompts an operation for the second operating means, and in which, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation accepted for the second operating means may be performed multiple times, When the display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to an operation on the second operating means can be output, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operating means, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before the lapse of a predetermined output time and is made audible for the predetermined output time. During the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operating means is changed to a non-operating state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operating means and then the second operating means is changed from the non-operating state back to the operating state, this can serve as a trigger to make inaudible at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time. Therefore, it can be suggested that the second operation-related sound will not be made inaudible before the lapse of the predetermined output time when the second operating means is again changed to an operating state.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "second operation-related sound" in configuration 14-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 14-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, operation-related sound, or non-post-operation display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," or "second operation-related sound" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "operation-related sound" as operating means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means, and then the first operation means is changed from the non-operational state back to the operational state, this may be used as a trigger to prevent the sound effects that were audible at that time from being made inaudible; and when the second operation means is changed from the non-operational state to the operational state back to the operational state while the second operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operation means, and then the second operation means is changed from the non-operational state back to the operational state, this may be used as a trigger to prevent at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time from being made inaudible. With this configuration, when the so-called automatic rapid press function (long press function) is interrupted and the second operating means is operated again, it is easy to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted; however, when the so-called automatic rapid press function (long press function) is interrupted and the first operating means is operated again, it is difficult to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when interrupting and re-operating the automatic rapid press function (long press function).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to an operation performed on the first operating means may be outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation performed on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed or may be made audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to an operation performed on the second operating means may be outputtable, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation performed on the second operating means, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed but may be made audible for the predetermined output time. This configuration makes it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means. In this regard, if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at the time the second operating means was released and then operated again could be made inaudible, it would be possible to confirm that the operation of the second operating means was properly accepted and that the auto-rapid-tap function was enabled, which is expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, for the first operating means, it is possible to make it both easy and difficult to recognize whether the auto-rapid-tap function is enabled. In this regard, if the sound effects that were audible at the time were not made inaudible when the first operating means was released and then operated again, the player would be forced to play either with a sense of security or with a sense of anxiety. Therefore, it is expected that a different effect from that of the second operating means could be provided, thereby maintaining a sense of tension and interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in response to an operation received on the first operation means, and then the first operation means is switched from the non-operation state to the operation state again, this may not be used as a trigger to make the sound effect that was audible at that time inaudible, regardless of the mode in which the first operation-related display is displayed.

In this case, if the second operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in response to the operation of the second operation means, and the second operation means is then switched from the non-operated state to the operated state again, then only if the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is in an audible state at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time (the post-acceptance output sound) inaudible. In this case, instead of the post-acceptance output sound, a different sound may be made inaudible.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation of the second operation means, and the second operation means is then switched from the non-operated state to the operated state again, even if a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is audible at that time, this may trigger either a case where at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is muted, or a case where the sound effects that were audible at that time are not muted. With this configuration, when the second operation means is released from its operating state and then operated again, at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is not necessarily muted, which can be expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation received on the second operating means, if the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time may be made inaudible, or at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time may not be made inaudible. With this configuration, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation received on the second operating means, at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time may not be made inaudible when the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. This is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in response to an operation on the second operating means, and the second operating means is then switched from the non-operated state to an operated state again, if this triggers at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time to become inaudible, a new sound will be output in response to the switch to the operated state. However, even if the sound effects that were audible at that time are not turned inaudible, a new sound may be output in response to the switch to the operated state.

[Configuration 15-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a pattern changing means for executing a pattern change in one of a plurality of change patterns based on the result of the determination by the determining means, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means when the operation is received on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display for prompting an operation on the first operating means, and which, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, allows an operation to be received on the first operating means multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means, and a display for prompting an operation on the second operating means when the display is in a displayed state. and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, wherein when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while in a state where an operation to the second operation means is being received a plurality of times, an operation to the second operation means may be received a plurality of times, and when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to an operation to the first operation means may be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in accordance with the reception of an operation to the first operation means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, and the first operation-related display may be displayed either before the second operation-related display is displayed or after the second operation-related display is displayed, which is expected to make it difficult to recognize the timing at which the first operation-related display is displayed or the timing at which the first operation-related sound is made inaudible, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "first operation-related sound" in configuration 15-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 15-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, operation-related sound, or non-post-operation display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," or "first operation-related sound" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "operation-related sound" as operating means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the multiple variation patterns may include a special variation pattern, and during the period when the pattern variation is being performed using this special variation pattern, the first operation-related display may be displayed either before the second operation-related display is displayed or after the second operation-related display is displayed. With this configuration, in addition to being able to expect the first operation-related display to be displayed regardless of whether the second operation-related display has already been displayed, it is also possible to expect the second operation-related display to be displayed regardless of whether the first operation-related display has already been displayed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In this case, it is desirable (but not essential) that within the special variation pattern, when an operation is accepted using the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed, the post-acceptance change be the same in both cases, where the first operation-related display is displayed before the second operation-related display and where the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to an operation on the first operating means can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed or may be made audible for the predetermined output time; and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to an operation on the second operating means can be output, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operating means, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed but may be made audible for the predetermined output time. Furthermore, the multiple variation patterns may include a special variation pattern, and during the period in which the symbol variation is performed according to the special variation pattern, the first operation-related display may be displayed either before the second operation-related display or after the second operation-related display. When the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display, the first operation-related sound may be rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed more frequently than when the first operation-related display is displayed before the second operation-related display. This percentage may include 100% or 0%. This configuration makes it possible to indicate the possibility that the first operation-related sound will be rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, within a special variation pattern, if the first operation-related display is displayed before the second operation-related display is displayed, the first operation-related display may not be displayed after the second operation-related display is displayed, or if the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display is displayed, the first operation-related display may not be displayed before the second operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in special variation patterns, the second operation-related display is always displayed, but the first operation-related display may not necessarily be displayed.

Furthermore, in a special variation pattern, even if the first operation-related display is displayed before the second operation-related display is displayed, it may be displayed again after the second operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in a special variation pattern, even when the first operation-related display is displayed again after the second operation-related display is hidden, the first operation-related sound may be made outputtable again, and the probability that the first operation-related sound will be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed may be higher than before the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 16-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a pattern changing means for executing a pattern change in one of a plurality of change patterns based on the result of the determination by the determining means, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means when the operation is received on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows the operation to be received multiple times when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means, and a display which prompts an operation on the second operating means, and which allows the operation to be received multiple times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, and when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to an operation on the first operation means can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation acceptance on the first operation means, the first operation-related sound can be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, and the plurality of variation patterns include a variation pattern of a type in which the second operation-related display is displayed and an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means, and a variation pattern of a type in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and an operation opportunity is not given to the second operation means, and regardless of which of these types the pattern variation is performed in, the first operation-related display may be displayed during the period in which the pattern variation is being executed, so that it can be expected that the sense of anticipation that the first operation-related display will be displayed will be preferably maintained during the period in which the pattern variation is being executed.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "first operation-related sound" in configuration 16-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 16-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, operation-related sound, or non-post-operation display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," or "first operation-related sound" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "operation-related sound" as operating means, operation-related display, or operation-related sound with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to an operation on the first operating means can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, or may be made audible for the predetermined output time; and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to an operation on the second operating means can be output, and when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operating means, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, but may be made audible for the predetermined output time. Furthermore, the plurality of variation patterns may include a variation pattern of a type in which the second operation-related display is displayed and an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means, and a variation pattern of a type in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and an operation opportunity is not given to the second operation means, but regardless of which type of pattern variation is performed, the first operation-related display may be displayed (when the display condition of the first operation-related display is satisfied) during the period in which the pattern variation is being performed, and if the first operation-related display is displayed during the period in which the pattern variation is performed in a variation pattern of a type in which the second operation-related display is displayed and an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible more frequently before the predetermined output time has elapsed than if the first operation-related display is displayed during the period in which the pattern variation is performed in a variation pattern of a type in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and an operation opportunity is not given to the second operation means. This ratio may include 100% or 0%. This configuration makes it possible to indicate the possibility that the first operation-related sound will be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, even if the first operation-related display is displayed within a period in which a second operation-related display is displayed and a pattern change is being executed in a type of change pattern in which an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means, if the first operation-related display is displayed before the second operation-related display is displayed, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible at a lower rate before the predetermined output time has elapsed than if the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display is displayed, or if the first operation-related display is displayed within a period in which a pattern change is being executed in a type of change pattern in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and an operation opportunity is not given to the second operation means. The rate may include 100% or 0%.

However, in this case, if the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display during a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed and a pattern change is performed in a type of change pattern that provides an operation opportunity for the second operation means, the first operation-related sound will be made inaudible more frequently before the predetermined output time has elapsed than if the first operation-related display is displayed during a period in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and a pattern change is performed in a type of change pattern that does not provide an operation opportunity for the second operation means. This percentage may be 100% or 0%.

Furthermore, in a variation pattern type in which a second operation-related display is displayed and an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means, the first operation-related display may be displayed again after the second operation-related display is displayed, even if it was displayed before the second operation-related display. In this case, it is desirable (but not essential) that the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the first operation means while the first operation-related display is displayed be the same in both cases where the first operation-related display is displayed before the second operation-related display and where the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 16-B, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

[Configuration 17-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means and which allows operation reception on the first operating means to be performed multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means. The display is a display that prompts an operation, and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation to the second operating means can be accepted multiple times. Even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation to the second operating means is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation to the second operating means can be executed multiple times. When the post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation to the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a specific time or less.

In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-rapid function is enabled, the intervals between multiple post-acceptance changes are set to be relatively short, making it easier for the player to notice that the auto-rapid function is secretly enabled when the second operation-related display is not displayed, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in configuration 17-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 17-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, or time as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "time" as the operating means, operation-related display, or time with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted on the first operating means, a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed. In this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may be executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means.

In this regard, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes in response to operation of the first operation means while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state is always a specific time or less, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed or not. Meanwhile, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes in response to operation of the second operation means while the second operation-related display is not displayed is always a specific time or less, regardless of whether the second operation-related display is displayed, but may be longer than the specific time when the second operation-related display is displayed. With this configuration, the interval between post-acceptance changes when the so-called auto-rapid press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operation means is always a short time, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed. This makes it easier to recognize that the auto-rapid press function is enabled, which is expected to maintain interest in the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is always short when the second operation-related display is not displayed, but may be longer than the specified time when the second operation-related display is displayed. This makes it difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated function is enabled, and is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means, the interval may be set to either a time equal to or shorter than a specific time, or a time longer than the specific time. This configuration can make it difficult to recognize that the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled when the second operation-related display is displayed, but it can also make it easier to recognize, which is expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing this "Configuration 17-B," if multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears in response to the accepted operation may be set to a time that is equal to or shorter than a specific time, and does not necessarily have to be set to a predetermined time (a fixed time).

In addition, the interval when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears), and the interval when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears), can both be set to a specific time or less, but even in this case, the respective times (intervals) may be set to different times (intervals).

For example, by setting the interval when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) to be longer than the interval when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears), and by setting the interval to be shorter than the interval when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears), the gap in the interval when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed (the gap between the second predetermined mode and the second specific mode) can be made to appear larger, which can be expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 17-B, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

[Configuration 18-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows operation reception on the first operating means to be performed multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means. and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which is a display that prompts a user to perform an operation to the second operation means, and which can accept operations for the second operation means multiple times when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. Even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation for the second operation means is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed, and in this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means can be executed multiple times, and when the post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means is executed multiple times while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a fixed time.

In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled, the intervals at which operations are accepted are set to a fixed interval, making it easier for the player to notice that the auto-rapid tapping function is secretly enabled even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game. Note that the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 18-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 18-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related display as the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related display" as operation means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted on the first operating means, a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed. In this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may be executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means.

In this regard, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes in response to operation of the first operation means while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state is always a fixed, predetermined time, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed or not. Meanwhile, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes in response to operation of the second operation means while the second operation-related display is not displayed is always a fixed, predetermined time, regardless of whether the second operation-related display is displayed, but may be an indefinite, non-predetermined time, regardless of whether the second operation-related display is displayed. With this configuration, the interval between post-acceptance changes when the so-called auto-rapid press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operation means is always a fixed (predetermined) time, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed. This makes it easier to recognize that the auto-rapid press function is enabled, which is expected to maintain interest in the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is always a fixed time (a predetermined time) when the second operation-related display is not displayed, but may be an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined) when the second operation-related display is displayed. This makes it difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated function is enabled, and is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means, the interval may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined). This configuration can make it difficult to recognize that the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled when the second operation-related display is displayed, but it can also make it easier to recognize, which is expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes based on the first operating means being maintained in an operating state may be the same whether the first operation-related display is displayed or not.

Furthermore, when implementing configuration 72-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 19-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation for the first operating means can be accepted multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means, and a display encouraging an operation for the second operating means, in which, if the display is in a displayed state, the and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which allows operations to be accepted for the second operation means multiple times when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state; when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, there are both cases where a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means is executed multiple times and cases where a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means is not executed multiple times; and when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, there are both cases where a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means is executed multiple times and cases where a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means is not executed multiple times, so it can be expected that the sense of tension when the first operation-related display or the second operation-related display is not displayed will be suitably maintained.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 19-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 19-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even if the first operation means is operated while the first operation-related display is not displayed and a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation for the first operation means is not initiated, if the first operation means is maintained in an operated state (if, while maintained, the conditions under which operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted (conditions for the occurrence of an acceptable state) are met), a situation may arise in which a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation for the first operation means is initiated based on detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point; and if the second operation means is operated while the second operation-related display is not displayed and a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation for the second operation means is not initiated, a situation may not arise in which a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation for the second operation means is subsequently initiated based on detection of the operation state, even if the second operation means is maintained in an operated state. With this configuration, even if the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled when the first operation-related display is not displayed for the first operating means, the auto-rapid-hit function can be enabled if the operating state is continued, which is expected to maintain a favorable level of excitement when playing. Meanwhile, with the second operating means, if the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled when the second operation-related display is not displayed, even if the operating state is continued, there is no possibility of operations being accepted based on the detection of that operating state, which is expected to maintain a favorable sense of tension when realizing the dramatic effects of the auto-rapid-hit function.

Furthermore, after post-acceptance changes have occurred multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, there may be cases where new post-acceptance changes no longer occur while the first operation-related display is displayed, even though that operating state is maintained (the so-called auto-tap function is disabled). However, even in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (if the conditions for allowing operation acceptance for the first operating means are met while the state is maintained), a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means may be executed again based on the operating state maintained up to that point.

[Configuration 20-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means when that operation is received, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation can be received on the first operating means multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means, and a display which prompts an operation on the second operating means, in which, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation can be received on the second operating means multiple times, The device is provided with second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, in which operations can be accepted multiple times for the operation means, and in which a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means may be executed even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, and in this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operation state, the post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means may be executed multiple times, and in a situation in which the second operation means is maintained in an operation state and the post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means is executed multiple times, if the second operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, a post-non-operation display triggered by the change to the non-operation state can be displayed, so that the change of the second operation means from an operation state to a non-operation state can be used as a trigger to suggest that the auto-repeated function was in an enabled state.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "post-non-operation display" in configuration 20-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 20-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, or post-non-operation display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," or "post-non-operation display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or post-non-operation display. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "post-non-operation display" as operating means, operation-related display, or post-non-operation display with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted on the first operating means, a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed. In this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may be executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means.

In this regard, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the first operating means has been made multiple times, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a post-non-operating display triggered by the change to the non-operating state may not be displayed. However, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the second operating means has been made multiple times, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a post-non-operating display triggered by the change to the non-operating state may be displayed.

In this case, in particular, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operating means have been executed multiple times, if the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a post-non-operating display triggered by the change to the non-operating state may not be displayed regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed; and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operating means have been executed multiple times, if the second operation-related display is displayed, a post-non-operating display triggered by the change to the non-operating state may be displayed; however, if the second operation-related display is not displayed, a post-non-operating display triggered by the change to the non-operating state may not be displayed. With this configuration, when the operation state of the first operation means is released while the auto-rapid-hit function for the first operation means is enabled, it is difficult to recognize that the first operation means has become non-operated (the auto-rapid-hit function has become disabled), regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed, which is expected to provide a desirable sense of tension when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled.In contrast, when the operation state of the second operation means is released while the auto-rapid-hit function for the second operation means is enabled, it is either difficult or easy to recognize that the second operation means has become non-operated (the auto-rapid-hit function has become disabled), which is expected to provide a desirable sense of tension when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled while maintaining a desirable sense of excitement when playing.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes have been executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, when the second operation-related display is displayed, a post-non-operating display triggered by the change to the non-operating state may be displayed, or the post-non-operating display may not be displayed; however, it may be possible to prevent the post-non-operating display triggered by the change to the non-operating state from being displayed when the second operation-related display is not displayed. With this configuration, when the second operation-related display is not displayed and the auto-rapid-hit function for the second operation means is enabled, and the second operation means is in a non-operated state (when the auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled), the display is difficult to recognize. On the other hand, when the second operation-related display is displayed and the auto-rapid-hit function for the second operation means is enabled, and the second operation means is in a non-operated state (when the auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled), the display is sometimes difficult to recognize and sometimes easy to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension that occurs when the second operation-related display is displayed and the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled will be appropriately imparted while maintaining interest in the game. Furthermore, since a sense of tension is thought to exist when the second operation-related display is not displayed and the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, it is expected that interest in the game will be appropriately maintained while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

It is also desirable to prevent a new sound from being output when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, even if the post-non-operation display is displayed when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is possible to prevent a new sound from being output when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state.

[Configuration 21-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation being accepted for the first operating means multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted for the second operating means, and a display encouraging an operation for the second operating means, in which, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation being accepted for the second operating means multiple times, and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which can be made a plurality of times, and in a state where the second operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means, a corresponding post-acceptance change may be made; in this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means can be made a plurality of times; and when the second operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state under a circumstance where the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means is made a plurality of times, the change to the non-operating state is used as an opportunity to make inaudible at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time, so that the change of the second operation means from an operating state to a non-operating state can be used as an opportunity to suggest that the auto-repeated function was in an enabled state.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 21-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 21-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted on the first operating means, a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed. In this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may be executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means.

In this regard, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes have been made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operating means, if the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, the change to the non-operating state may not be used as a trigger to make the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed. When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes have been made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operating means, if the second operation-related display is displayed, the change to the non-operating state may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible, but if the second operation-related display is not displayed, the change to the non-operating state may not be used as a trigger to make the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible. With this configuration, when the operation state of the first operation means is released while the auto-rapid-hit function for the first operation means is enabled, it is difficult to recognize that the first operation means has become non-operated (the auto-rapid-hit function has become disabled), regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed, which is expected to provide a desirable sense of tension when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled.In contrast, when the operation state of the second operation means is released while the auto-rapid-hit function for the second operation means is enabled, it is either difficult or easy to recognize that the second operation means has become non-operated (the auto-rapid-hit function has become disabled), which is expected to provide a desirable sense of tension when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled while maintaining a desirable sense of excitement when playing.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes have been executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, when the second operation-related display is displayed, the change to the non-operating state may trigger at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time to be made inaudible, or the sound effects that were audible at that time may not be made inaudible. However, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, the change to the non-operating state may not trigger the change to the audible sound effects that were audible at that time to be made inaudible. With this configuration, when the second operation-related display is not displayed and the auto-rapid-hit function for the second operation means is enabled, and the second operation means is in a non-operated state (when the auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled), the display is difficult to recognize. On the other hand, when the second operation-related display is displayed and the auto-rapid-hit function for the second operation means is enabled, and the second operation means is in a non-operated state (when the auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled), the display is sometimes difficult to recognize and sometimes easy to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension that occurs when the second operation-related display is displayed and the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled will be appropriately imparted while maintaining interest in the game. Furthermore, since a sense of tension is thought to exist when the second operation-related display is not displayed and the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, it is expected that interest in the game will be appropriately maintained while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

It is also desirable to prevent a new sound from being output when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, even if the transition of the second operating means from an operating state to a non-operating state does not cause the sound effects that were audible at that time to be made inaudible, or even if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is made inaudible, the transition to the non-operating state may not cause a new sound to be output.

[Configuration 22-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means when that operation is received, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation to be received multiple times on the first operating means when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means, and a display which prompts an operation on the second operating means, and which allows an operation to be received multiple times on the second operating means when the display is in a displayed state while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which allows operations to be accepted multiple times; even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means, a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed; in this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means may be executed multiple times; if the second operation-related display is not displayed and the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means is occurring, and then when the second operation means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible; therefore, when the second operation means is changed back to the operating state, it can be indicated that the auto-repeated function has been re-enabled.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 22-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 22-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted on the first operating means, a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed. In this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may be executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means.

In this regard, if the first operation-related display is not displayed and a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means, and the first operation means is then switched from the non-operational state back to the operation state, this may not be used as a trigger to make the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible; and if the second operation-related display is not displayed and a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operation means, and the second operation means is then switched from the non-operational state back to the operation state, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible. With this configuration, when the automatic rapid press function (long press function) for the second operating means is interrupted and the second operating means is then operated again while the second operation-related display is not displayed, it is easy to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted. However, when the automatic rapid press function (long press function) for the first operating means is interrupted and the first operating means is then operated again while the first operation-related display is not displayed, it is difficult to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted. Therefore, it can be expected that a suitable sense of tension will be created when interrupting and re-operating the automatic rapid press function (long press function).

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is not displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation received on the second operating means, if the second operating means is then switched from the non-operated state to the operated state again, and only if a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is in an audible state at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time (post-acceptance output sound) inaudible. In this case, instead of the post-acceptance output sound, a sound different from this may be made inaudible.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to operation of the second operation means, and the second operation means is then changed from the non-operation state back to the operation state, even if a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is audible at that time, this may trigger either a case where at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (post-acceptance output sound) is made inaudible, or a case where the effect sound that was audible at that time is not made inaudible. Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is not displayed and a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to operation of the second operation means, and the second operation means is then changed from the non-operation state back to the operation state (when operation is accepted), if a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is audible at that time, this may trigger at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (post-acceptance output sound) to be made inaudible.

Furthermore, when the first operating means is set to a non-operating state while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation accepted on the first operating means, and then the first operating means is changed from the non-operating state back to the operating state (when an operation is accepted), regardless of whether the first operation-related display is being displayed or not, it may be possible to prevent this from triggering the sound effect that was audible at that time to be made inaudible.

Furthermore, when a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation of the second operating means and the second operating means is then switched from the non-operated state to the operated state again, if this triggers at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time to become inaudible, a new sound is output in response to the switch to the operated state. However, even if the sound effects that were audible at that time are not turned inaudible, a new sound may be output in response to the switch to the operated state.

[Configuration 23-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a performance display means for displaying a display relating to a performance, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation for the first operating means, and in the case where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation for the first operating means can be accepted multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means, and a display encouraging an operation for the second operating means, in the case where the display is in a displayed state. When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, an operation can be accepted for the second operating means multiple times, and a second operation-related display means is provided which is capable of displaying a second operation-related display, and when an operation is accepted for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change can occur as the change after acceptance, and when an operation is accepted for the second operating means when the second operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change can occur as the change after acceptance.Therefore, even when an operation is accepted for either the first operating means or the second operating means when the operation-related display is not displayed, it can be suitably suggested that the operation acceptance has been performed appropriately.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 23-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 23-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operating means, a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed. In this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, operations may be accepted for the first operating means multiple times. In this case, even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operating means, a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, operations may be accepted for the second operating means multiple times.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is not displayed, the post-acceptance changes may include both a display change in the effect display means and a change different from the display change, and no display change in the effect display means and a change different from the display change. This configuration can be expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when an operation is accepted for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

In addition, when an operation is accepted for the first operation means when the first operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-acceptance change. In this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, the above-mentioned "change different from the display change" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to acceptance of an operation for the first operation means may be executed multiple times, whereas the above-mentioned "display change in the performance display means" as one of the post-acceptance changes may not be executed multiple times. In addition, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means when the second operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-acceptance change. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, both the above-mentioned "display change in the performance display means" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to acceptance of an operation for the second operation means and the "change different from the display change" may be executed multiple times. With this configuration, the effects produced when the auto-rapid-hit function is activated differ between the first operating means and the second operating means, which is expected to maintain interest in the game and to maintain the sense of tension when the auto-rapid-hit function is activated for the first operating means.

In addition, even if the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and the "display change in the effect display means" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception to the first operation means is not executed multiple times, it is desirable (but not essential) that the "change different from the display change" be executed multiple times in the same manner as that which appears when the "display change in the effect display means" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception to the first operation means occurs.

In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, it is desirable (but not essential) to ensure that only one of the above-mentioned "display change in the performance display means" and "change different from the display change" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance on the second operation means is not executed multiple times.

[Configuration 24-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state, an operation acceptance for the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a first prompting light emitting means for executing operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation for the first operating means, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operating means, and an image display for prompting an operation for the second operating means, in which, when the image display is in a displayed state, the When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, operations can be accepted multiple times for the second operating means, and the device is equipped with a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, and a second prompting light emitting means capable of emitting operation prompting light to encourage operation for the second operating means, separate from the second operation-related display which is an image display encouraging operation for the second operating means, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operating means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to this may be executed, in this case, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the first operating means can be executed multiple times, and when the first operation-related display is not displayed and acceptance of operations multiple times for the first operating means is permitted, the operation prompting light emitting light to encourage operation for the first operating means is not executed, so it can be expected that confidentiality regarding operation acceptance will be suitably maintained when the first operation-related display is not displayed and acceptance of operations multiple times for the first operating means is permitted.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in this configuration 24-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 24-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed when an operation is accepted for the second operation means. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may be executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means. Furthermore, if the second operation-related display is not displayed and multiple acceptance of operations for the second operation means is permitted, operation prompting light may be emitted to prompt the player to operate the second operation means. With this configuration, when multiple operation opportunities are secretly granted for the first operation means, the first operation-related display is not displayed and operation prompting light is not emitted to prompt the player to operate the first operation means. However, when multiple operation opportunities are secretly granted for the second operation means, the second operation-related display is not displayed, but operation prompting light may be emitted to prompt the player to operate the second operation means. This allows the degree of secrecy to be varied depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, operation prompt light may be emitted to prompt the player to operate the first operating means (between the time the first operation-related display is displayed and the time it is hidden), or operation prompt light may not be emitted to prompt the player to operate the first operating means (between the time the first operation-related display is displayed and the time it is hidden). Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means, operation prompt light may be emitted to prompt the player to operate the second operating means (between the time the second operation-related display is displayed and the time it is hidden). With this configuration, even when the operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the operating means, operation prompt light may or may not be emitted for the first operating means, which can provide a degree of secrecy. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operating means, which is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

[Configuration 25-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and which allows an operation for the first operating means to be accepted multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and a first prompting sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to an operation-related display; a second post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means; a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which is a display for encouraging an operation on the second operation means, and which allows an operation on the second operation means to be accepted multiple times if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; and a second prompting sound output means for outputting a second operation prompting sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, and which allows an operation on the first operation means to be accepted even when the first operation-related display is not displayed. When the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the first operation means can be executed multiple times. Even in a state where the second operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation is received for the second operation means, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed multiple times. When the first operation-related display is not displayed and the operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed multiple times. Even in a state where the first operation-related display is not displayed and the operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed multiple times. When the state transitions to a state in which acceptance of operations for the first operating means is permitted, the first operation prompt sound is not output, and when the state transitions from a state in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and acceptance of operations for the second operating means is not permitted to a state in which acceptance of operations for the second operating means is permitted without the second operation-related display being displayed, the second operation prompt sound is not output.Therefore, it can be expected that confidentiality regarding acceptance of operations will be suitably maintained when in a "state in which the first operation-related display is not displayed and acceptance of operations for the first operating means is permitted multiple times" or a "state in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and acceptance of operations for the second operating means multiple times" state.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 25-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 25-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the second operation-related display is displayed (while operation acceptance for the second operating means is permitted or when operation acceptance for the second operating means is permitted), the second operation prompt sound is always output, but when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output. With this configuration, even when the operation-related display is displayed in a state where acceptance of multiple operations for the operating means is permitted, the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output for the first operating means, which can provide a degree of secrecy. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operating means, which is expected to add tension while improving the presentation.

In this case, it is desirable (but not essential) to make the appearance of the first operation-related display different between when the first operation prompt sound is output when the first operation-related display is displayed and when the first operation prompt sound is not output.

[Configuration 26-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operation means and a second operation means operable by a player, a performance display means for displaying a display relating to a performance, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted for the first operation means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation for the first operation means, and in which, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation being accepted for the first operation means multiple times, a second post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted for the second operation means, and a display encouraging an operation for the second operation means, in which, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation being accepted for the second operation means multiple times, and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which can be performed a plurality of times, wherein when an operation is accepted for the first operation means, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change can occur as a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance, and when an operation is accepted for the second operation means, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change can occur as a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance, and if the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the second operation means is not started despite the second operation means being operated, then even if the second operation means is maintained in an operated state, operation acceptance for the second operation means is not performed based on detection of the maintained operation state. Therefore, when a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the second operation means does not appear despite the second operation means being operated, it can be expected that the operation state will not be maintained and a prompt to operate again will be made.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 26-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 26-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even if a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means is not initiated despite the operation of the first operation means (when the first operation means is set to an operating state in which operation acceptance for the first operation means is not permitted), if a predetermined acceptance acceptance condition is met while the first operation means is maintained in an operated state (when a state in which operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted), operation acceptance for the first operation means is performed based on the detection of the maintained operation state. At this time, the post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance may occur in either a case where both a display change in the effect display means and a change different from the display change occur, or a case where no display change in the effect display means occurs and only a change different from the display change occurs. With this configuration, it is both easy and difficult to recognize that an operation has been accepted for the first operation means based on the "operation state of the first operation means" maintained since the state in which operation acceptance for the first operation means was not permitted, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension while increasing enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state even after both a display change on the effect display means and a change different from the display change have occurred as post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance on the first operating means, operation acceptance on the first operating means may occur multiple times. However, it is also possible that, instead of multiple display changes on the effect display means as post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance, only a change different from the display change occurs multiple times. With this configuration, even if it is easy to recognize that an operation has been accepted on the first operating means based on the "operation state of the first operating means" maintained since the state in which operation acceptance on the first operating means is not permitted, it is difficult to recognize that multiple operations have been accepted on the first operating means in situations in which the auto-rapid-hit function is subsequently enabled, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In this case, when an operation is accepted on the second operating means, both a display change on the effect display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance. In this case, if an operation is accepted multiple times on the second operating means while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, it is desirable (but not essential) to ensure that both a display change on the effect display means and a change different from the display change occur multiple times as a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance.

[Configuration 27-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operation means and a second operation means operable by a player, a performance display means for displaying a display relating to a performance, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operation means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation on the first operation means, and which allows operation acceptance on the first operation means to be performed multiple times if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a second post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means, and a second operation-related display means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means. The display is a prompt for operation, and when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation for the second operation means can be accepted multiple times. The display is a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, and an operation for the first operation means may be accepted even when neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed. In this case, the post-acceptance change may be both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change. However, even if an operation for the second operation means is started at the time the post-acceptance change occurs and the operating state is maintained, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the second operation means will not be executed multiple times, and therefore it can be expected that the user will be encouraged to concentrate on the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the first operation means.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 27-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 27-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if an operation is accepted on the first operating means when neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed, the post-acceptance change may be either a display change on the effect display means and a change different from the display change (a specific change) or only the "change different from the display change (specific change)" of the display change on the effect display means and the change different from the display change (a specific change).In either case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, only the "change different from the display change (specific change)" of the display change on the effect display means and the change different from the display change (a specific change) may be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change.

In this case, when both a display change and a specific change occur in the performance display means as post-acceptance changes in response to the reception of an operation on the first operation means, even if an operation on the second operation means is started at that time and that operation state is maintained, the post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the second operation means will not be executed multiple times.However, when only the specific change out of the display change and the specific change occurs in the performance display means as post-acceptance changes in response to the reception of an operation on the first operation means, when an operation on the second operation means is started at that time and that operation state is maintained, both cases may occur in which the post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the second operation means is executed multiple times, and in which the post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the second operation means is not executed multiple times. With this configuration, whether or not the auto rapid fire function can be enabled for the second operating means can be suggested by the type of post-acceptance change in response to acceptance of an operation on the first operating means (whether or not both a display change on the effect display means and a change different from that display change (a specific change) occur). However, when the auto rapid fire function is enabled for the first operating means, no new "display changes on the effect display means" occur, making them difficult to distinguish, which is expected to maintain an optimal sense of tension.

[Configuration 28-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation for the first operating means can be accepted multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means, and a display encouraging an operation for the second operating means, in which, if the display is in a displayed state, the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display in which operation acceptance for the second operation means can be performed a plurality of times when the second operation-related display is maintained in an operating state, and if a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means is performed a plurality of times while the second operation-related display is being displayed, and then a situation arises in which no operation acceptance for the second operation means is performed despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, the situation in which operation acceptance for the second operation means is performed a plurality of times based on the detection of the operating state will not occur again even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in the operating state, and in the case in which post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means is performed a plurality of times while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the plurality of post-acceptance changes can be set to a time not greater than a specific time.

In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance can be set to a relatively short interval. Therefore, if a situation arises where an operation to the second operating means is not being accepted, this situation can be easily recognized relatively early, and it is expected that the user will be prompted to cancel the operation state of the second operating means. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in configuration 28-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 28-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, or time as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "time" as operating means, operation-related display, or time with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means during the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means is maintained and a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted), a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reoccur before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed.

In this case, particularly, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed, post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operating means may be executed multiple times, with the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes (the interval between the post-acceptance changes occurring in the auto-rapid tap function) being set to a specific time or less; and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed, post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operating means may be executed multiple times, with the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes (the interval between the post-acceptance changes occurring in the auto-rapid tap function) being set to either a specific time or less, or a time longer than the specific time. With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval, making it possible to easily recognize that the auto-rapid-tap function has been disabled relatively quickly. Furthermore, simply maintaining the first operating means in an operating state can cause a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed. This is expected to maintain the excitement of playing when the auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means. In contrast, when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval or a relatively long interval, making it not necessarily possible to easily recognize that the auto-rapid-tap function has been disabled. Furthermore, simply maintaining the second operating means in an operating state can prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means before the end of the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed. This is expected to maintain the excitement of playing when the auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the second operating means.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 28-B, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 28-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 29-B, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

[Configuration 29-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means when that operation is received, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation on the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation can be received multiple times on the first operating means, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means, and a display encouraging an operation on the second operating means, in which the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display in which operation acceptance for the second operation means can be performed a plurality of times in this case, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, if a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means is performed a plurality of times, and then a situation arises in which no operation acceptance for the second operation means occurs despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, then even if the second operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operation acceptance for the second operation means is performed a plurality of times based on the detection of that operating state will not occur again, and when post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means is performed a plurality of times while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the plurality of post-acceptance changes can be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance can be set to a relatively constant interval (a predetermined time). Therefore, if a situation arises where an operation to the second operating means is not being accepted, this can be easily recognized relatively early, and it can be expected that the user will be prompted to cancel the operation state of the second operating means. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 29-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 29-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means during the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means is maintained and a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted), a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reoccur before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed.

In this case, particularly, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed, post-acceptance changes in response to operation received on the first operating means may be executed multiple times, with the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes (the interval between the occurrence of post-acceptance changes in the auto-rapid tap function) being set to a fixed time (a predetermined time), and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed, post-acceptance changes in response to operation received on the second operating means may be executed multiple times, with the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes (the interval between the occurrence of post-acceptance changes in the auto-rapid tap function) being set to either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined). According to this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time), so that if the auto-rapid-tap function becomes disabled, it is possible to easily recognize that fact relatively early.In addition, by simply maintaining the first operating means in an operating state, a situation can arise again in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends, so it is expected that interest in playing when the auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means will be maintained in an optimal manner. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined). In addition to the fact that it is not necessarily possible to recognize relatively early the disabling of the auto-repeated function, simply maintaining the second operating means in an operating state will prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends. This is expected to maintain an optimal sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 29-B, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 29-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, when implementing configuration 29-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic repeated press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic repeated press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 30-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means when that operation is received, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation can be received on the first operating means multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operating means, and in which, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation can be received on the second operating means multiple times, and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display in which operation acceptance for the second operation means can be performed a plurality of times, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, after a situation appears in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means are executed a plurality of times, if a situation appears in which no operation acceptance for the second operation means occurs despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operation acceptance for the second operation means is executed a plurality of times based on detection of the operating state will not occur again, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in a situation in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means are executed a plurality of times, a post-non-operating display corresponding to this can be displayed.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the second operating means has been released, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game after a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 30-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 30-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means during the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means is maintained and a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted), a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reoccur before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed.

In this case, in particular, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operating means, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operating means, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. With this configuration, simply maintaining the first operating means in an operating state may result in a situation where multiple operations are made to the first operating means before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed. However, this situation is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means is released, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension and increase interest in the game. Furthermore, simply maintaining the second operating means in an operating state will prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends. However, when the operating state of the second operating means is released, it is easy to recognize this and it is possible to encourage re-operation, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension while increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance of the second operating means, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed or not displayed. This configuration is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension, as it does not necessarily make it easy to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means has been released.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 30-B, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 30-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended.

[Configuration 31-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation being accepted for the first operating means multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted for the second operating means, and a display encouraging an operation for the second operating means, in which, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation being accepted for the second operating means multiple times, and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display in which a post-acceptance change in response to an operation reception to the second operation means is executed a plurality of times, and when a situation appears in which the second operation-related display is displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation reception to the second operation means is executed a plurality of times, if a situation appears in which no operation is received to the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in the operating state, a situation in which an operation is received to the second operation means a plurality of times based on the detection of the operating state will not occur again, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation reception to the second operation means is executed a plurality of times, this is used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the second operating means has been released, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game after a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 31-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 31-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means during the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means is maintained and a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted), a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reoccur before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed.

In particular, in this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed and the first operation means is undergoing multiple post-acceptance changes in response to its operation state, if the first operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not trigger the sound effects that were audible at that time to be muted. However, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and is undergoing multiple post-acceptance changes in response to operation received for the second operation means to be muted from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time to be muted. With this configuration, simply maintaining the first operation means in an operating state may result in a situation where multiple operations are received for the first operation means before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed. However, this is difficult to notice when the operation state of the first operation means is released, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension and increase the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, simply maintaining the second operating means in an operating state will prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends. However, when the operating state of the second operating means is released, it is easy to recognize this and it is possible to encourage re-operation, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension while increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance of the second operating means, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger either one of the sound effects that was audible at that time to be made inaudible, or one of the sound effects that was audible at that time to not be made inaudible. With this configuration, it is not necessarily easy to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means has been released, which can be expected to provide a good sense of tension.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 31-B, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 31-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended.

[Configuration 32-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation for the first operating means can be accepted multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means, and a second operation-related table means for displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation for the second operating means, and in which, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation for the second operating means can be accepted multiple times, and a display means for displaying the second operation-related display, and if, while the second operation-related display is being displayed, a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means are executed multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operation acceptance for the second operation means occurs despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, then even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of that operating state will not occur again, and if, during the period in which the second operation-related display is being displayed, the second operation means is changed to a non-operating state while the post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means are occurring, and then the second operation means is changed from the non-operating state back to the operating state, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that were in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state, so that it can be expected to suggest that the second operation means is again in an operating state and an operation has been accepted.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in this configuration 32-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 32-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means during the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means is maintained and a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted), a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reoccur before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed.

In this case, in particular, when the first operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in the first operation means in accordance with the operation state, and then the first operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and then the first operation means is changed from a non-operating state back to an operating state, this does not serve as a trigger to make inaudible the sound effects that were audible at that time. However, when the second operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in accordance with the operation acceptance of the second operation means, and then the second operation means is changed from a non-operating state back to an operating state, this may serve as a trigger to make inaudible at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time. With this configuration, simply maintaining the first operating means in an operating state may result in a situation where multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed. However, when the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the first operating means is stopped and the first operating means is operated again, it is difficult to recognize that the operation was properly accepted, making it easier to progress through the game by maintaining the operating state for the first operating means. In contrast, simply maintaining the second operating means in an operating state may prevent a situation where multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means before the end of the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed. However, when the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the second operating means is stopped and the second operating means is operated again, it is easy to recognize that the operation was properly accepted, making it easier to re-operate the operating state for the second operating means in order to progress through the game properly.

Furthermore, during the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operating means is changed to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation received on the second operating means, and then the second operating means is changed from a non-operated state back to an operated state, then only if a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is in an audible state at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time (post-acceptance output sound) inaudible. In this case, instead of the post-acceptance output sound, a sound different from this may be made inaudible.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 32-B, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 32-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended.

[Configuration 33-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operation means and a second operation means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operation means, and a first operation-related table which is an image display that prompts an operation on the first operation means, and which allows an operation on the first operation means to be accepted multiple times if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state. a first prompting light emitting means capable of emitting an operation prompting light to prompt an operation on the first operating means separately from the first operation related display which is an image display prompting an operation on the first operating means; a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means when the operation on the second operating means is accepted; a second operation related display means capable of displaying a second operation related display which is an image display prompting an operation on the second operating means and which allows an operation on the second operating means to be accepted multiple times if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state; In addition to the second operation-related display which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operating means, second prompt light emitting means is provided which is capable of emitting operation prompt light to prompt an operation on the second operating means, and when the second operation-related display is displayed and a situation arises in which the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means is executed multiple times, and then a situation arises in which an operation on the second operating means is not accepted despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, a situation in which an operation on the second operating means is accepted multiple times based on the detection of that operation state will not occur again even if the second operating means is continued to be maintained in the operating state, and when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are accepted on the first operating means, operation prompt light emitting means is capable of emitting operation prompt light to prompt an operation on the first operating means, and when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are accepted on the second operating means, operation prompt light emitting means is capable of emitting operation prompt light to prompt an operation on the second operating means, it can be expected that a situation in which an operation on the second operating means is accepted multiple times will be easily created, thereby providing a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 33-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 33-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means during the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means is maintained and a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted), a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reoccur before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed.

In this case, particularly when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (when there is a period during which the first operation-related display is displayed), operation prompt light emitting to prompt the user to operate the first operating means may be emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden) (e.g., the 4B operation-permitted state shown in FIG. 170 ), or the operation prompt light emitting may not be emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden) (e.g., the 3B operation-permitted state shown in FIG. 168 ). Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means (when there is a period during which the second operation-related display is displayed), operation prompt light emitting to prompt the user to operate the second operating means may always be emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operating means, which is expected to add a sense of tension while improving the dramatic effect.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even when multiple operations are permitted for an operation means and an operation-related display is displayed, the first operation means may or may not emit an operation prompt light, which can provide a degree of confidentiality. However, even if operations for the first operation means are no longer accepted, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, the situation in which operations for the first operation means are accepted multiple times may reappear based on the detection of the maintained operating state. This is expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, with regard to the second operation means, although the operation prompt light is always emitted between the time the second operation-related display is displayed and the time it is hidden, if operations for the second operation means are no longer accepted, the situation in which operations for the second operation means are accepted multiple times will not reappear. This is expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 33-B, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 33-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended.

[Configuration 34-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes first and second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means when the operation is accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation for the first operating means, and in which operation acceptance for the first operating means can be made multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a first prompting sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means, and a display encouraging an operation for the second operating means, in which operation acceptance for the second operating means can be made multiple times if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and second prompting sound output means, when the second operation-related display is displayed, capable of outputting a second operation prompting sound corresponding to the second operation-related display. When the second operation-related display is displayed, a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means are executed multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state. In this case, even if the second operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations for the second operation means are accepted multiple times based on the detection of that operating state will not occur again. When the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompting sound can be output, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operation prompting sound can be output. This is expected to facilitate the creation of a situation in which operations for the second operation means are accepted multiple times, thereby providing a favorable sense of tension.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," "first operation prompt sound," and "second operation prompt sound" in configuration 34-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 34-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, or operation prompt sound as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," or "operation prompt sound" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or operation prompt sound. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "operation prompt sound" as the differently named operating means, operation-related display, or operation prompt sound in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means during the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means is maintained and a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted), a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reoccur before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed.

In this case, the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display is displayed (while operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted or when operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted), but when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output. With this configuration, even when multiple operations are permitted for the operation means and an operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound may or may not be executed for the first operation means, which can provide a degree of secrecy. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which can be expected to add tension while improving the presentation.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 34-B, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 34-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended.

[Configuration 35-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes first and second operating means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and which allows an operation to be accepted for the first operating means multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which prompts an operation for the second operating means, and which allows an operation to be accepted for the second operating means multiple times if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and When a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended until a state in which the second operation-related display is displayed again appears (and even after that), there will be no case in which operation acceptance for the second operation means is executed again based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is being displayed, and when post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes can be set to a specific time or less. Therefore, when a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means, it can be expected that this situation will be easily recognized relatively early and that the user will be prompted to release the operating state of the second operation means.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in configuration 35-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 35-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, or time as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," or "specific time" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "time" as operating means, operation-related display, or time with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display is displayed while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained, and when a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed and acceptance of operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted, a situation in which operation acceptance for the first operation means is accepted based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then may once again occur.

In this case, particularly, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the first operating means may be executed multiple times, with the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between the post-acceptance change occurring in the auto-rapid tap function) being set to a specific time or less; and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the second operating means may be executed multiple times, with the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between the post-acceptance change occurring in the auto-rapid tap function) being set to either a specific time or less, or a time longer than the specific time.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval, making it easier to recognize relatively early on when the auto-rapid-tap function has been disabled.In addition, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state after the period during which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display may be displayed again while that operating state is maintained.If predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related display is displayed, and acceptance of operations for the first operating means is permitted, a situation may once again arise in which operations for the first operating means are accepted based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained up to that point.This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of playing when the auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be relatively short or relatively long, and when the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled, it may not necessarily be recognized relatively quickly. In addition, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended until the second operation-related display is displayed again (until a state in which acceptance of operations for the second operating means is permitted occurs), there is no chance that operations for the second operating means will be accepted again based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed. This is expected to maintain an optimal sense of tension when the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the second operating means.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden, or may be a manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 35-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 35-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 35-B, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

[Configuration 36-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes first and second operating means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation accepted for the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation for the second operating means, and in which, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation accepted for the second operating means can be performed multiple times, and When a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation display is in an operating state and a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended until the time when the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after that), there will be no case in which an operation for the second operation means is again accepted based on the detection of the operation state maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is being displayed, and when a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a fixed time, and therefore it can be expected that when a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means, it will be easy to recognize this situation relatively early and prompt the user to cancel the operating state of the second operation means.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 36-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 36-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display is displayed while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained, and when a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed and acceptance of operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted, a situation in which operation acceptance for the first operation means is accepted based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then may once again occur.

In this case, particularly, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the first operating means may be executed multiple times, with the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between the post-acceptance change occurring in the auto-rapid tap function) being set to a fixed time (a predetermined time); and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the second operating means may be executed multiple times, with the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between the post-acceptance change occurring in the auto-rapid tap function) being set to either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). This makes it possible to easily recognize relatively early on when the auto-rapid-tap function has been disabled. In addition, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state after the period during which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display may be displayed again while this operating state is maintained. If a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed, allowing acceptance of operations for the first operating means, a situation may once again arise in which operations for the first operating means are accepted based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained up to that point. This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of playing when the auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined). This means that it is not necessarily possible to recognize that the auto-repeated function has been disabled relatively quickly. Furthermore, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended until the second operation-related display is displayed again (until a state in which acceptance of operations for the second operating means is permitted occurs), operations for the second operating means will not be accepted again based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed. This is expected to maintain a good sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden, or may be a manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 36-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 36-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing configuration 36-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 37-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation for the first operating means can be accepted multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means, and a second operating means for displaying a second operation-related display which prompts an operation for the second operating means, and in which, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation for the second operating means can be accepted multiple times, and a related display means, and when a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is being displayed and a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means is executed a plurality of times, and then a situation arises in which no operation acceptance for the second operation means occurs despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a state in which the second operation-related display is displayed again appears (and even after that state), there is no case in which an operation acceptance for the second operation means is executed again based on detection of the operating state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is being displayed, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means is executed a plurality of times, a post-non-operating display corresponding to this can be displayed.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the second operating means has been released, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game after a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 37-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 37-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display is displayed while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained, and when a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed and acceptance of operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted, a situation in which operation acceptance for the first operation means is accepted based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then may once again occur.

In this case, in particular, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operating means are executed multiple times, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operating means are executed multiple times, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed.

With this configuration, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state until the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed again (and even after it appears), a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means may occur again based on the detection of the maintained operating state. However, since this is difficult to notice when the operating state of the first operating means is released, it is expected that interest in the game will be increased while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state until the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after it appears), a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means will not occur again. However, it is easy to notice when the operating state of the second operating means is released, encouraging re-operation, which is expected that interest in the game will be increased while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden, or may be a manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception for the first operation means is executed multiple times; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception for the second operation means is executed multiple times; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 37-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 37-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

[Configuration 38-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment comprises first and second operating means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation accepted for the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation for the second operating means, and in which, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation accepted for the second operating means can be performed multiple times, When a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means are executed a plurality of times, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a state in which the second operation-related display is displayed again appears (and even after that state), there is no case in which operation is accepted for the second operation means again based on detection of the operating state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.When the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means are executed a plurality of times, this is used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that were in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the second operating means has been released, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game after a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 38-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 38-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display is displayed while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained, and when a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed and acceptance of operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted, a situation in which operation acceptance for the first operation means is accepted based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then may once again occur.

In particular, in this case, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operating means are executed multiple times, if the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not trigger the effect sound that was audible at that time to be made inaudible. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operating means are executed multiple times, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time to be made inaudible.

With this configuration, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state until the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed again (and even after it appears), a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means may occur again based on the detection of the maintained operating state. However, since this is difficult to notice when the operating state of the first operating means is released, it is expected that interest in the game will be increased while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state until the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after it appears), a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means will not occur again. However, it is easy to notice when the operating state of the second operating means is released, encouraging re-operation, which is expected that interest in the game will be increased while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden, or may be a manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 38-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 38-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

[Configuration 39-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with: first operation means and second operation means operable by a player; a determination means for making a determination; a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result; a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operation means; a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operation means, and which allows an operation to be accepted for the first operation means multiple times if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operation means; and a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which prompts an operation for the second operation means, and which allows an operation to be accepted for the second operation means multiple times if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; When a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means is executed multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended until the time when the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after that), there is no case in which an operation is accepted for the second operation means again based on the detection of the operating state maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is being displayed. During the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed, when the second operation means is changed to a non-operating state while a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means is occurring, and then the second operation means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state, and therefore it can be expected to suggest that the second operation means is again in an operating state and an operation has been accepted.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 39-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 39-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display is displayed while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained, and when a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed and acceptance of operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted, a situation in which operation acceptance for the first operation means is accepted based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then may once again occur.

In particular, in this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in the first operation means in response to the operation state, and then the first operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state again, this does not trigger the effect sounds that were audible at that time to be made inaudible. However, when the second operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in response to the operation of the second operation means ...

With this configuration, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state until the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed reappears (and even after it appears), a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means may occur again based on the detection of the maintained operating state. However, if the auto-rapid-tap function (long press function) for the first operating means is discontinued and the first operating means is operated again, it will be difficult to recognize that the acceptance was made properly, so maintaining the operating state for the first operating means makes it easier to progress through the game. In contrast, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state until the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed reappears (and even after it appears), a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means will not occur again, but it will be easy to recognize that the acceptance was made properly when the auto-rapid-tap function (long press function) for the second operating means is discontinued and the second operating means is operated again, so it will be easier to recognize that the acceptance was made properly, so redoing the operating state for the second operating means makes it easier to progress through the game properly.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden, or may be a manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 39-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 39-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

[Configuration 40-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination by the determining means, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, and a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation for the first operating means, and which allows an operation to be accepted for the first operating means multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state. a first prompting light emitting means capable of emitting light to prompt an operation on the first operating means separately from the first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts an operation on the first operating means; a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means when an operation on the second operating means is accepted; a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operating means, and in which, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, an operation on the second operating means can be accepted multiple times; and the second operation-related display which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operating means is The device further includes a second prompt light emitting means capable of emitting light to prompt an operation on the second operating means, and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operating-related display is being displayed, and a situation occurs in which a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means is executed multiple times, and then, in a situation in which no operation is accepted on the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, the second operating-related display will not be displayed even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state until a state in which the second operating-related display is displayed again appears (or even after the state occurs). When the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the first operation means, operation prompt light can be emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operation means, and when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the second operation means, operation prompt light can be emitted to prompt the user to operate the second operation means. Therefore, it can be expected that the second operation means will be put into an operating state again, suggesting that an operation has been accepted.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 40-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 40-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display is displayed while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained, and when a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed and acceptance of operation acceptance for the first operation means is accepted, a situation in which operation acceptance for the first operation means is accepted based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then may once again occur.

In this case, particularly when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (when there is a period during which the first operation-related display is displayed), operation prompt light emitting to prompt the user to operate the first operating means may be emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden) (e.g., the 4B operation-permitted state shown in FIG. 170 ), or the operation prompt light emitting may not be emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden) (e.g., the 3B operation-permitted state shown in FIG. 168 ). Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means (when there is a period during which the second operation-related display is displayed), operation prompt light emitting to prompt the user to operate the second operating means may always be emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operating means, which is expected to add a sense of tension while improving the dramatic effect.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even when multiple operations are permitted for the operating means and an operation-related display is displayed, the first operating means may or may not emit an operation prompt light, which can provide a degree of secrecy.However, even if operations are no longer accepted for the first operating means, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state until the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed appears again (or even after it appears), a situation in which operations are accepted for the first operating means multiple times can occur again based on the detection of that maintained operating state, which can be expected to add tension and maintain interest in the game. In contrast, with regard to the second operating means, although the operation prompt light is always emitted between the time the second operation-related display is displayed and the time it is hidden, if no operation is accepted for the second operating means, simply maintaining the operating state until the time when the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after it appears) will prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means from occurring again, which is expected to add tension and maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden, or may be a manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 39-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 39-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

[Configuration 41-B]
Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, and a display for prompting an operation on the first operating means, and when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, the first operating means is operated multiple times. a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display; a first prompting sound output means capable of outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means when the operation acceptance is made on the second operation means; a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display that encourages an operation on the second operation means, and which allows an operation on the second operation means to be accepted multiple times if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; and second prompting sound output means for outputting a second operation prompting sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed. If a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means is executed multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended until (or even after) a state in which the second operation-related display is displayed again appears, there will be no case in which an operation is accepted for the second operation means again based on detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed. Since the first operation prompting sound can be output when the first operation-related display is displayed and the second operation prompting sound can be output when the second operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that a situation in which operations for the second operation means are accepted multiple times will be easily created, thereby providing a favorable sense of tension.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 41-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 41-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display is displayed while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained, and when a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed and acceptance of operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted, a situation in which operation acceptance for the first operation means is accepted based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then may once again occur.

In this case, the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display is displayed (while or when operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted), but when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to add tension and improve the presentation.

Furthermore, with this configuration, with respect to the first operating means, when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output, which may provide a degree of confidentiality. However, even if operations for the first operating means are no longer accepted, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state until the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed reappears (or even after that), a situation in which operations for the first operating means are accepted multiple times may reappear based on the detection of that maintained operating state. This is expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means, although the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display is displayed, if operations for the second operating means are no longer accepted, simply maintaining the first operating means in an operating state until the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed reappears (or even after that), a situation in which operations for the second operating means are accepted multiple times may not reappear. This is expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden, or may be a manner in which the first operation-related display was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 41-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 41-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

[Configuration 42-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, and a second operation-related display capable of displaying a first operation-prompting display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation on the first operating means to be accepted multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. The apparatus includes a first operation-related display means, a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts an operation for the second operation means, and in the case where the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation acceptance for the second operation means can be performed multiple times. Even in a state where the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation for the first operation means is accepted, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be performed, and in this case, when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, the first operation means is A post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation to the second operation means can be executed multiple times, and even in a state where the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation to the second operation means is received, a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation to the second operation means can be executed multiple times. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation to the second operation means can be executed multiple times. After a situation arises where the second operation-related display is displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation to the second operation means can be executed multiple times even if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state. When a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operating means despite the above, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state until after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended, there is no case in which operation is accepted for the second operating means again based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up until then while the second operation-related display is in a non-display state, and when a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a time not exceeding a specific time.

In other words, in this case, since the intervals at which operations are accepted when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled are set to relatively short intervals, it is expected that it will be easier to recognize relatively early on that a situation has arisen in which operations for the second operating means are not being accepted, and that this will prompt the user to cancel the operating state of the second operating means. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in configuration 42-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 42-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, or time as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "time" as operating means, operation-related display, or time with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if, after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended and the first operation-related display is made invisible and the first operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation in which operation is accepted for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point may once again occur.

In this case, particularly, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the first operating means may be executed multiple times, with the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between the post-acceptance change occurring in the auto-rapid tap function) being set to a specific time or less; and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the second operating means may be executed multiple times, with the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between the post-acceptance change occurring in the auto-rapid tap function) being set to either a specific time or less, or a time longer than the specific time.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval, making it possible to easily recognize relatively early on when the auto-rapid-tap function has been disabled.In addition, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state even after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended, with the first operation-related display in a hidden state, until a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which an operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point.This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of playing when the auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be set to a relatively short interval or a relatively long interval, and when the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled, it is not necessarily possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended, there is no chance that an operation will be accepted for the second operating means again based on the detection of the operating state maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is not displayed. This is expected to maintain an optimal sense of tension when the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the second operating means.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 42-B, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means, from which operations are no longer being accepted, continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 42-B, when the second operating means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 42-B, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

[Configuration 43-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, and a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and which allows an operation to be accepted for the first operating means multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operation means, and which allows operation acceptance on the second operation means to be performed multiple times when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means is received, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation may be performed. In this case, when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may be performed on the first operation means. A post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation to the second operating means can be executed a plurality of times, and even in a state where the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operating means, a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation to the second operating means can be executed a plurality of times. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation to the second operating means can be executed a plurality of times, and after a situation arises where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation to the second operating means is executed a plurality of times, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state. When a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operating means despite the above, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state until after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended, there is no case in which operation is accepted for the second operating means again based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up until then while the second operation-related display is in a non-display state, and when a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a fixed time.

In other words, in this case, since the interval at which operations are accepted when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled is set to a fixed interval, it is expected that it will be easier to recognize relatively early on that a situation has arisen where operations for the second operating means are not being accepted, and that this will prompt the user to cancel the operating state of the second operating means. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 43-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 43-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if, after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended and the first operation-related display is made invisible and the first operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation in which operation is accepted for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point may once again occur.

In this case, particularly, when the first operation-related display is displayed and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, post-acceptance changes in response to operation received for the first operation means may be executed multiple times, with the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes (the interval between the post-acceptance changes occurring in the auto-rapid tap function) being set to a fixed time (a predetermined time); and when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and the second operation-related display is displayed and the second operation means may be displayed and the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes (the interval between the post-acceptance changes occurring in the auto-rapid tap function) may be set to either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time), making it possible to easily recognize relatively early on when the auto-rapid-tap function has been disabled.In addition, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state even after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended, with the first operation-related display in a hidden state, until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which an operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point.This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of playing when the auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined). This means that when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is not necessarily possible to recognize this relatively early. Furthermore, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended, there is no chance that an operation will be accepted for the second operating means again based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the second operation-related display was not displayed. This is expected to maintain an optimal sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 43-B, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 43-B, when the second operating means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing configuration 43-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 44-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation on the first operating means to be accepted multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and The apparatus includes a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on a second operating means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and which allows an operation acceptance on the second operating means to be performed multiple times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means may be performed, and in this case, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, an acceptance in response to the operation acceptance on the first operating means may be performed. A post-acceptance change can be executed multiple times, and even in a state where the second operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operating means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operating means can be executed multiple times. After a situation arises where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operating means is executed multiple times, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, When a situation arises in which no operation is accepted, even if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state until after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended, there is no case in which operation acceptance to the second operation means is again made based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up until then while the second operation-related display is in a non-display state, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance to the second operation means is executed multiple times, a post-non-operation display corresponding to this can be displayed.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the second operating means has been released, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game after a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 44-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 44-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if, after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended and the first operation-related display is made invisible and the first operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation in which operation is accepted for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point may once again occur.

In this case, in particular, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operating means are executed multiple times, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operating means are executed multiple times, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed.

With this configuration, if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is displayed, remains in an operating state even after the first operation-related display is hidden, a situation in which operations are being accepted for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is hidden may occur again. However, this is difficult to notice when the operation state of the first operating means is released, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension and increase interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, if operations are no longer being accepted while the second operation-related display is displayed, even if the second operating means remains in an operating state after the second operation-related display is hidden, a situation in which operations are being accepted for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is hidden will not occur again. However, this is easy to notice when the operation state of the second operating means is released, which is expected to encourage re-operation. This is expected to maintain a sense of tension and increase interest in the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 44-B, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 44-B, when the second operating means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 45-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display that prompts an operation on the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation acceptance on the first operating means can be performed multiple times, and the second operating means. and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and which allows operation acceptance for the second operating means to be performed multiple times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the first operating means, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be performed, and in this case, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means may be performed multiple times. Even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means may be executed multiple times. If a situation arises in which the second operation-related display is displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means is executed multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, Even if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state until after the period during which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended, there is no case in which an operation is again accepted for the second operation means based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up until then while the second operation-related display is in a non-display state, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means are executed multiple times, this is used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that were in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the second operating means has been released, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game after a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 45-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 45-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if, after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended and the first operation-related display is made invisible and the first operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation in which operation is accepted for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point may once again occur.

In particular, in this case, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operating means are executed multiple times, if the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not trigger the effect sound that was audible at that time to be made inaudible. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operating means are executed multiple times, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time to be made inaudible.

With this configuration, if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is displayed, remains in an operating state even after the first operation-related display is hidden, a situation in which operations are being accepted for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is hidden may occur again. However, this is difficult to notice when the operation state of the first operating means is released, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension and increase interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, if operations are no longer being accepted while the second operation-related display is displayed, even if the second operating means remains in an operating state after the second operation-related display is hidden, a situation in which operations are being accepted for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is hidden will not occur again. However, this is easy to notice when the operation state of the second operating means is released, which is expected to encourage re-operation. This is expected to maintain a sense of tension and increase interest in the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 45-B, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means, which has stopped accepting operations, continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 45-B, when the second operating means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 46-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display that prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation on the first operating means to be accepted multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and a second operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display that prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation on the second operating means to be accepted multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operation means, and which allows operation acceptance for the second operation means to be performed multiple times when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the first operation means, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be performed, and in this case, when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means may be performed multiple times. Even in a state where the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means may be executed multiple times. After a situation occurs in which the second operation-related display is displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means is executed multiple times, a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state. When the second operation means is turned off, even if the second operation means is kept in an operating state until after the period during which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended, there is no case where an operation is again accepted for the second operation means based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up until then while the second operation-related display is in a non-display state, and when the second operation means is turned off while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation acceptance for the second operation means, and then the second operation means is turned off again from the non-operating state to the operating state, this is used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 46-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 46-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if, after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended and the first operation-related display is made invisible and the first operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation in which operation is accepted for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point may once again occur.

In particular, in this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in the first operation means in response to the operation state, and then the first operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state again, this does not trigger the effect sounds that were audible at that time to be made inaudible. However, when the second operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in response to the operation of the second operation means ...

With this configuration, if a first operating means that has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is displayed is maintained in an operating state even after the first operation-related display is hidden, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is hidden. However, if the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the first operating means is interrupted and the first operating means is operated again, it will be difficult to recognize that the acceptance was appropriate, so maintaining the operating state for the first operating means makes it easier to progress through the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, if operations are no longer accepted while the second operation-related display is displayed, even if the operating state is maintained after the second operation-related display is hidden, the situation in which operations are accepted for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is hidden will not recur. However, when the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the second operating means is interrupted and the second operating means is operated again, it will be easier to recognize that the operation was properly accepted, making it easier to restart the operating state of the second operating means in order to properly progress through the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 46-B, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 46-B, when the second operating means, from which operations are no longer being accepted, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 47-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a performance display means for displaying a display relating to a performance, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means and which allows an operation on the first operating means to be accepted multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and a first operation-related display means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means. and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and which allows operation acceptance for the second operating means to be performed multiple times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operating means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be performed. In this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the first operating means may be performed multiple times, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operating means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be performed. In this case, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to an operation reception for the second operation means can be executed multiple times, and after a situation occurs in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation reception for the second operation means is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display is displayed, if a situation occurs in which no operation is received for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended, an operation for the second operation means will not be executed based on the detection of the operation state that has been maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is in a non-display state. The operation acceptance is not performed again, and when an operation is accepted for the first operation means when the first operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change can occur as the change after acceptance, and when an operation is accepted for the second operation means when the second operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change can occur as the change after acceptance. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted for either the first operation means or the second operation means when the operation-related display is not displayed, it can be suitably suggested that the operation acceptance has been performed appropriately.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 47-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 47-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if, after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended and the first operation-related display is made invisible and the first operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation in which operation is accepted for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point may once again occur.

In this case, particularly, if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, and then an operation is again accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state, it is possible for the display display means to either produce a display change as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance, or for the display not to produce a change. With this configuration, it is possible for the resumption of operation acceptance for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state to be both difficult and easy to recognize, thereby minimizing a decline in interest in the game and maintaining the sense of tension that arises when the first operating means is in an operating state while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state.

Furthermore, even if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, and an operation is again accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state, resulting in a "display change in the effect display means" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a "change different from the display change in the effect display means," which is one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance for the first operating means, may be executed multiple times, while the "display change in the effect display means," which is one of the post-acceptance changes, may not be executed multiple times. With this configuration, even if it is easy to recognize that an operation has again been accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state, it is difficult to recognize that the auto-rapid-fire function will also be activated when the operation state is maintained, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 47-B, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 47-B, when the second operating means, from which operations are no longer being accepted, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 48-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation on the first operating means, and which, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, allows an operation acceptance on the first operating means to be performed multiple times, and an operation-promoting light emission for prompting an operation on the first operating means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation on the first operating means. a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation on the second operation means, and which allows an operation on the second operation means to be accepted multiple times if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state; and a second operation-related display means for executing operation-prompting light emission for prompting an operation on the second operation means, separately from the second operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation on the second operation means, and when an operation on the first operation means is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation may be executed even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, and in this case, the first operation means is maintained in an operating state. When the second operation-related display is maintained in the operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the first operation means can be executed multiple times, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operation means, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed multiple times. After a situation arises in which the second operation-related display is displayed and the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, and a situation arises in which no operation is received for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in the operating state, a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends. Even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state for a period after the second operating means is turned off, there is no case where an operation is again accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the operation state maintained up until then while the second operation-related display is turned off, and in a state where the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple acceptance of operations for the first operating means is permitted, an operation prompt light is emitted to prompt an operation for the first operating means, and in a state where the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple acceptance of operations for the second operating means is permitted, an operation prompt light is emitted to prompt an operation for the second operating means, so that it is expected that a situation in which multiple acceptance of operations for the second operating means is likely to be created, thereby providing a suitable sense of tension.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 48-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 48-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if, after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended and the first operation-related display is made invisible and the first operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation in which operation is accepted for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point may once again occur.

In this case, particularly when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (when there is a period during which the first operation-related display is displayed), operation prompt light emitting to prompt the user to operate the first operating means may be emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden) (e.g., the 4B operation-permitted state shown in FIG. 170 ), or the operation prompt light emitting may not be emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden) (e.g., the 3B operation-permitted state shown in FIG. 168 ). Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means (when there is a period during which the second operation-related display is displayed), operation prompt light emitting to prompt the user to operate the second operating means may always be emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operating means, which is expected to add a sense of tension while improving the dramatic effect.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even when multiple operations are permitted for an operation means and an operation-related display is displayed, the first operation means may or may not be illuminated to prompt operation, which can provide a degree of secrecy. However, if a first operation means that has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is displayed is maintained in an operating state even after the first operation-related display is hidden, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the first operation means while the first operation-related display is hidden, which can be expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, with regard to the second operating means, although the operation prompt light is always emitted between the time the second operation-related display is displayed and the time it is hidden, if no operation is accepted while the second operation-related display is displayed, even if the operating state is maintained after the second operation-related display is hidden, the situation in which operations are accepted for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is hidden will not occur again, which is expected to add tension and maintain interest in the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception for the first operation means is executed multiple times; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception for the second operation means is executed multiple times; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 48-B, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 48-B, when the second operating means, from which operations are no longer being accepted, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 49-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation on the first operating means to be accepted multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed. a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operation means, and which, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, allows operation on the second operation means to be accepted multiple times; and a second operation-related display means for outputting a second operation prompt sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation on the first operation means is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the first operation means can be executed multiple times, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation for the second operation means is received, a post-acceptance change in response to this may be executed. In this case, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed multiple times, and after a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state when the second operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means is executed multiple times, even if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state. If a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operating means, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state until after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended, there will be no case in which operation is accepted for the second operating means again based on the detection of the operation state that has been maintained up until then while the second operation-related display is in a hidden state, and since the first operation prompt sound can be output when the first operation-related display is displayed and the second operation prompt sound can be output when the second operation-related display is displayed, it can be expected that a situation in which operations for the second operating means are accepted multiple times will be easily created, thereby providing a desirable sense of tension.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 49-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 49-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operation means despite the first operation means being maintained in an operating state, if, after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended and the first operation-related display is made invisible and the first operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation in which operation is accepted for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point may once again occur.

In this case, the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display is displayed (while or when operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted), but when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to add tension and improve the presentation.

Furthermore, with this configuration, when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output for the first operating means, which can provide a degree of secrecy. However, if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is displayed, is maintained in an operating state even after the first operation-related display is hidden, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is hidden, which can be expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, with regard to the second operating means, the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display is displayed. However, if no operation is accepted while the second operation-related display is displayed, even if the operating state is maintained after the second operation-related display is hidden, the situation in which operations are accepted for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is hidden will not occur again. This is expected to add tension while maintaining interest in the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed rather than hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 49-B, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 49-B, when the second operating means, from which operations are no longer being accepted, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 50-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means, and a first operating means capable of displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation to be received multiple times on the first operating means if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts an operation to be performed on the second operation means, and that allows operation reception on the second operation means to be performed multiple times if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. Even in a state in which the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation to the first operation means is received, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation may be performed. In this case, even if the first operation-related display is not displayed, When the second operation-related display is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the first operation means can be executed a plurality of times, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operation means, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed a plurality of times. In this case, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed a plurality of times. After a situation occurs in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is not displayed, and a situation occurs in which no operation is received for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, there is no case in which an operation is received for the second operation means again based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display is in a hidden state, and when a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means is executed a plurality of times while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, an interval between the plurality of post-acceptance changes can be set to a specific time or less.

In other words, in this case, the intervals at which operations are accepted when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled are set to relatively short intervals, which is expected to make it easier to recognize relatively early on that an operation is not being accepted for the second operating means, and to prompt the user to cancel the operating state of the second operating means. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in configuration 50-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 50-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, or time as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "time" as operating means, operation-related display, or time with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point.

In this case, in particular, the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in response to operation received for the first operating means while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-acceptance changes occurring in the auto-repeated tap function) may be set to a specific time or less, and the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in response to operation received for the second operating means while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-acceptance changes occurring in the auto-repeated tap function) may be set to either a specific time or less, or a time longer than the specific time.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval, making it possible to easily recognize relatively early on when the auto-rapid-tap function has been disabled.In addition, even after a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state, a situation can once again arise in which an operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point.This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of playing when the auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is not displayed. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be relatively short or relatively long, and when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is not necessarily recognized relatively early. In addition, after a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state, there is no chance that an operation will again be accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display was not being displayed. This is expected to maintain an optimal sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means when the second operation-related display is not being displayed.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 50-B, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 50-B, when the second operating means, which has stopped accepting operations, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained until then while the second operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 50-B, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

[Configuration 51-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means, and a first operation-related display capable of displaying a first operation-prompting display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation to be received on the first operating means multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. The apparatus includes an operation-related display means, a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts an operation for the second operation means, and in the case where the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation acceptance for the second operation means can be performed multiple times. Even in a state where the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation for the first operation means is accepted, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be executed, and in this case, the first operation means is maintained in an operating state. When the second operation-related display is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the first operation means can be executed a plurality of times, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operation means, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed a plurality of times. In this case, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed a plurality of times. After a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is not displayed, and a situation arises in which no operation is received for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, there is no case in which an operation is received for the second operation means again based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display is in a hidden state, and when a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means is executed a plurality of times while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the plurality of post-acceptance changes can be set to a fixed time.

In other words, in this case, since the interval at which operations are accepted when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled is set to a fixed interval, it is expected that it will be easier to recognize relatively early on that a situation has arisen where operations for the second operating means are not being accepted, and that this will prompt the user to cancel the operating state of the second operating means. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 51-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 51-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point.

In this case, in particular, the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in response to operation received for the first operating means while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in the auto-repeated tap function) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time), and the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in response to operation received for the second operating means while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in the auto-repeated tap function) may be set to either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined).

Furthermore, with this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time), making it possible to easily recognize relatively early on when the auto-rapid-tap function has been disabled.In addition, even after a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state, a situation can once again arise in which an operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point.Therefore, it can be expected that interest in playing when the auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is not displayed will be maintained in an appropriate manner. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a non-predetermined time). This means that when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is not necessarily possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, after a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in the operating state, there is no chance that an operation will again be accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display was not being displayed. This is expected to maintain an optimal sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means when the second operation-related display is not being displayed.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 51-B, when the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 51-B, when the second operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing configuration 51-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic repeated press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic repeated press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 52-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, and a first operation-related table capable of displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and which allows an operation to be accepted for the first operating means multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts an operation on the second operation means, and that allows operation acceptance on the second operation means to be performed multiple times if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means is accepted, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be performed. In this case, when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related display means may display a second operation-related display that prompts an operation on the second operation means to be performed multiple times. A post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed a plurality of times, and even in a state where the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operation means, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed a plurality of times. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed a plurality of times. After a situation arises where the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is not displayed, and a situation arises where no operation is received for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, there is no case where an operation is again received for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display is in a hidden state. When the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means is executed a plurality of times, a post-operation display in response to this situation can be displayed.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the second operating means has been released, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game after a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 52-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 52-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point.

In this case, in particular, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operating means are executed multiple times, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operating means are executed multiple times, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed.

Furthermore, with this configuration, if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the "first operation-related display is hidden," a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the first operating means while the "first operation-related display is hidden." However, since this is difficult to notice when the operating state of the first operating means is released, it is expected that tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, if operations are no longer accepted while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state thereafter, operations for the second operating means will not again be accepted based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden. However, when the operating state of the second operating means is released, this fact is easily noticeable, encouraging re-operation, which is expected that tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 52-B, when the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 52-B, when the second operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 53-B]
Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and which allows an operation to be accepted for the first operating means multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and The apparatus includes a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and in which, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation acceptance on the second operating means can be performed multiple times. Even in a state in which the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation is accepted on the first operating means, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be performed. In this case, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance on the first operating means may be performed. The post-acceptance change can be executed multiple times, and even in a state where the second operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means, the post-acceptance change in response to this acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means can be executed multiple times. After a situation arises where the second operation-related display is not displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means is executed multiple times, even if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, When a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the means, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, there is no case in which an operation is accepted for the second operating means again based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is in a non-display state, and when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the second operating means is executed multiple times, this is used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that were in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operation means has been released, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game after a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operation state. Note that the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 53-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 53-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related display as the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related display" as operation means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point.

In particular, in this case, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operating means are executed multiple times, if the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not trigger the effect sound that was audible at that time to be made inaudible. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operating means are executed multiple times, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time to be made inaudible.

Furthermore, with this configuration, if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the "first operation-related display is hidden," a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the first operating means while the "first operation-related display is hidden." However, since this is difficult to notice when the operating state of the first operating means is released, it is expected that tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, if operations are no longer accepted while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state thereafter, operations for the second operating means will not again be accepted based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden. However, when the operating state of the second operating means is released, this fact is easily noticeable, encouraging re-operation, which is expected that tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 53-B, when the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 53-B, when the second operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 54-B]
Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation on the first operating means to be accepted multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation on the second operating means to be accepted multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and which allows operation acceptance for the second operating means to be performed multiple times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operating means, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be performed, and in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means may be performed multiple times. Even in a state where the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means may be executed multiple times. If a situation arises in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means is executed multiple times, and if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, Even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, there is no case in which an operation is again accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is in a non-display state, and if the second operating means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation acceptance for the second operating means, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state, so it can be expected that the second operating means will be again in an operating state and suggest that an operation has been accepted.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 54-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 54-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point.

In particular, in this case, when a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation state of the first operating means and the first operating means is then changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, this does not trigger an inaudible sound effect that was audible at that time. However, when a post-acceptance change occurs in response to operation acceptance of the second operating means and the second operating means is then changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, this may trigger an inaudible sound effect that was audible at that time.

According to this configuration, if a first operating means that has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state" is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state," a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the first operating means while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state." However, when the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the first operating means is interrupted and the first operating means is operated again, it will be difficult to recognize that the operation was properly accepted, making it easier to progress through the game by maintaining the operating state of the first operating means. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, if operations are no longer accepted while the "second operation-related display is in a hidden state," even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state, operations will not again be accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is in a hidden state. However, when the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the second operating means is discontinued and the second operating means is operated again, it will be easier to recognize that the operation was properly accepted, making it easier to restart the operating state of the second operating means in order to properly progress through the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 54-B, when the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 54-B, when the second operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 55-B]
Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a performance display means for displaying a display relating to a performance, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation acceptance on the first operating means to be performed multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, and a first operation-related display means for executing a first operation-related display in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means. The device is provided with a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and which allows operation acceptance for the second operating means to be performed multiple times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operating means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to this may be performed, and in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to operation acceptance for the first operating means may be performed multiple times, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, an operation is accepted for the second operating means. In this case, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means can be executed multiple times. If a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is not displayed and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means is executed multiple times, and if a situation arises in which no operation is received for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, an operation will not be received again for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display is in a non-display state. When an operation is accepted for the first operation means while the first operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change can occur as the change after acceptance, and when an operation is accepted for the second operation means while the second operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change can occur as the change after acceptance. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted for either the first operation means or the second operation means while the operation-related display is not displayed, it can be suitably suggested that the operation acceptance has been performed appropriately.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 55-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 55-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point.

In this case, particularly, if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is not displayed, and then an operation is again accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the first operation-related display is in the hidden state, it is possible for either a display change in the effect display means to occur as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance, or no display change to occur. With this configuration, it is possible for it to be both difficult and easy to recognize that an operation has again been accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the first operation-related display is in the hidden state, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game and maintaining the sense of tension when maintaining the first operating means in an operating state while the first operation-related display is in the hidden state.

Furthermore, even if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is not displayed, and an operation is again accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the first operation-related display is in the hidden state, resulting in a "display change in the effect display means" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to that operation acceptance, if the first operating means is maintained in the operating state, then while a "change different from the display change in the effect display means," which is one of the post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, may be executed multiple times, it is possible to prevent the "display change in the effect display means," which is one of the post-acceptance changes, from being executed multiple times. With this configuration, even if it is easy to recognize that an operation has again been accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the first operation-related display is in the hidden state, it is difficult to recognize that the auto-rapid-fire function will also be activated when the operation state is maintained, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 55-B, when the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 55-B, when the second operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 56-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation on the first operating means to be accepted multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state, and an operation prompting display means for prompting an operation on the first operating means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation on the first operating means. a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the second operation means, and which, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, allows an operation to be accepted multiple times for the second operation means; and a second operation-related display means capable of executing operation-prompting light emission prompting an operation to the second operation means, separate from the second operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the second operation means, and when an operation to the first operation means is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation may be executed even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, in which case When the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means can be executed multiple times, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operating means, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation can be executed multiple times. In this case, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means can be executed multiple times, and if a situation arises in which no operation is received for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state after the second operation-related display is not displayed and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means is executed multiple times, Even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, there is no case in which an operation is again accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is in a hidden state, and in a state in which the first operation-related display is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted for the first operating means, an operation-promoting light is not emitted to prompt an operation for the first operating means, and in a state in which the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted for the first operating means, an operation-promoting light is emitted to prompt an operation for the first operating means, so that it can be expected that a sense of tension when the first operation-related display is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted for the first operating means will be suitably provided.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 56-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 56-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point.

In this case, particularly, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, operation prompting light emission, which is an image display prompting the user to operate the first operating means, may not be executed; and when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, operation prompting light emission prompting the user to operate the first operating means may or may not be executed. This provides confidentiality for the first operating means by not executing operation prompting light emission, even when the first operation-related display is displayed, and is expected to create an appropriate sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, when the first operation-related display is in a hidden state, the operation prompt light will not be emitted even if the state becomes such that operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted. However, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, operation acceptance for the first operation means can be resumed while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state. This is expected to effectively create a sense of tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed, the operation prompt light will not necessarily be emitted even if operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted. Therefore, although the first operation-related display encourages operation, a certain degree of confidentiality is maintained. This "method different from when the first operation-related display is in a hidden state" is expected to effectively create a sense of tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means (when there is a period during which the second operation-related display is displayed), an operation prompt light may be emitted to prompt the player to operate the second operating means (for at least part of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operating means, which is expected to add a sense of tension while improving the presentation.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 56-B, when the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 56-B, when the second operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 57-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation for the first operating means, and when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, operation acceptance for the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a first prompting sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and ... second prompting sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the operation acceptance for the second operating means is performed. a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and which allows an operation on the second operating means to be accepted multiple times if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; and a second prompting sound output means for outputting a second operation prompting sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation on the first operating means is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed, and in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance on the first operating means may be executed multiple times, and Even in a state where the related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operating means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operating means may be executed multiple times. If a situation occurs in which the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is not displayed and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operating means is executed multiple times, and if a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state after that, the second operation-related display may continue to be displayed based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display is in a hidden state. There is no chance that an operation will be accepted again for the second operating means, and when a transition occurs from a state in which the first operation-related display is not displayed and acceptance of operations for the first operating means is not permitted to a state in which acceptance of operations for the first operating means is permitted without the first operation-related display being displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not output as a result, and when a transition occurs from a state in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and acceptance of operations for the second operating means is not permitted to a state in which acceptance of operations for the second operating means is permitted without the second operation-related display being displayed, the second operation prompt sound is not output as a result, and it can be expected that this will provide an appropriate sense of tension when acceptance of operations for the operating means is permitted multiple times without an operation-related display being displayed.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 57-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 57-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point.

In this case, the first operation-related display may be capable of being displayed in any of a plurality of display modes including a first mode and a second mode, and the first operation prompt sound may not be output when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first mode, and the first operation prompt sound may be output when the first operation-related display is displayed in the second mode. This provides confidentiality for the first operating means by not issuing an operation prompt sound depending on the display mode, even when the first operation-related display is displayed, and is expected to create a favorable sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, when the first operation-related display is in a hidden state, the first operation prompting sound is not output even if the state becomes such that operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted. However, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, operation acceptance for the first operation means can be resumed even while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state. This is expected to effectively create a sense of tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompting sound is not necessarily output even if operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted. Therefore, although operation is encouraged by the first operation-related display, a certain degree of confidentiality is maintained. This "method different from when the first operation-related display is in a hidden state" is expected to effectively create a sense of tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, the second operation prompt sound may be output whenever the second operation-related display is displayed (while or when operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to add tension and improve the presentation.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 57-B, when the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 57-B, when the second operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 58-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, and a first operation-related display capable of displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and which allows an operation to be accepted for the first operating means multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. The device is provided with a display means, a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and in the case where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation acceptance on the second operating means can be performed multiple times, and even in a state where the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation on the first operating means is accepted, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be performed, and in this case, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, the first operation The second operation means may be configured to receive an operation multiple times, and even in a state where the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received on the second operation means, a post-reception change may be executed in response to the received operation. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the second operation means may be received multiple times, and after a situation arises where the second operation-related display is not displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-reception change in response to the received operation on the second operation means is executed multiple times, the second operation means may be maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change may be executed in response to the received operation on the second operation means. When a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the operating means, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state thereafter until a state in which the second operation-related display is displayed appears (and even after that state), there are no cases in which operation is accepted for the second operating means again based on the detection of the operating state maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is being displayed, and when a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a time not exceeding a specific time.

In other words, in this case, the intervals at which operations are accepted when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled are set to relatively short intervals, which is expected to make it easier to recognize relatively early on that an operation is not being accepted for the second operating means, and to encourage the user to cancel the operating state of the second operating means. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in configuration 58-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 58-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, or time as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "time" as operating means, operation-related display, or time with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state in which the first operation-related display is displayed appears, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point may once again appear.

In this case, in particular, the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in response to operation received for the first operating means while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-acceptance changes occurring in the auto-repeated tap function) may be set to a specific time or less, and the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in response to operation received for the second operating means while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-acceptance changes occurring in the auto-repeated tap function) may be set to either a specific time or less, or a time longer than the specific time.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval, making it possible to easily recognize relatively early on when the auto-rapid-tap function has been disabled.In addition, even after a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is hidden, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state until the first operation-related display is displayed and a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation can once again arise in which operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point.This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of playing when the auto-rapid-tap function is enabled for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is not displayed. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance can be either relatively short or relatively long. Disabling the auto-repeated function is not necessarily recognized immediately. Furthermore, if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operating means even though the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operating-related display is not displayed, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state until the second operating-related display is displayed (or even after it is displayed), there is no chance that an operation will again be accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up to that point while the second operating-related display is displayed. This is expected to maintain a good sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operating-related display is not displayed.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 58-B, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation from reoccurring in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 58-B, when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 58-B, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

[Configuration 59-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means, and a first operating means capable of displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation to be received multiple times on the first operating means if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts an operation to be performed on the second operation means, and that allows operation reception on the second operation means to be performed multiple times if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. Even in a state in which the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation to the first operation means is received, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation may be performed. In this case, even if the first operation-related display is not displayed, When the second operation-related display is displayed, an operation can be accepted multiple times for the first operation means, and even in a state where the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed; in this case, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, an operation can be accepted multiple times for the second operation means; if a situation arises where the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is not displayed and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means is executed multiple times, and if a situation arises where no operation is accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, thereafter, even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a state where the second operation-related display is displayed appears, an operation cannot be accepted again for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is displayed; and when a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means is executed multiple times while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a fixed time.

In other words, in this case, since the interval at which operations are accepted when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled is set to a fixed interval, it is expected that it will be easier to recognize relatively early on that a situation has arisen where operations for the second operating means are not being accepted, and that this will prompt the user to cancel the operating state of the second operating means. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 59-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 59-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state in which the first operation-related display is displayed appears, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point may once again appear.

In this case, in particular, the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in response to operation received for the first operating means while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in the auto-repeated tap function) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time), and the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in response to operation received for the second operating means while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in the auto-repeated tap function) may be set to either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). This makes it possible to easily recognize relatively early on when the auto-rapid-hit function has been disabled. In addition, even after a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is hidden, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state until the first operation-related display is displayed and a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation can once again arise in which an operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point. This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of playing when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is not displayed. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a non-predetermined time). This means that it is not necessarily possible to recognize that the auto-repeated function has been disabled relatively quickly. Furthermore, if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operating means even though the second operating means is maintained in an operating state when the second operating-related display is not displayed, then even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state until the second operating-related display is displayed (or even after it is displayed), there is no chance that an operation will again be accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up to that point while the second operating-related display is displayed. This is expected to maintain a sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means when the second operating-related display is not displayed.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 59-B, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 59-B, when the second operation means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing configuration 59-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 60-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, and a first operation-related display capable of displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and which allows an operation to be accepted for the first operating means multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operation means, and which allows operation acceptance on the second operation means to be performed multiple times when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means is received, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation may be performed. In this case, when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may be performed on the first operation means. The second operation-related display is displayed when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and when a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means is executed a plurality of times, even in a state in which the second operation-related display is not displayed, the second operation means can be operated a plurality of times. In this case, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the second operation means can be operated a plurality of times. If a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means is executed a plurality of times while the second operation-related display is not displayed, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, thereafter, even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a state in which the second operation-related display is displayed, there are no cases in which an operation is accepted for the second operation means again based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is displayed. When the second operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means is executed a plurality of times, a post-operation display in response to this situation can be displayed.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the second operating means has been released, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game after a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 60-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 60-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state in which the first operation-related display is displayed appears, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point may once again appear.

In this case, in particular, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operating means are executed multiple times, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operating means are executed multiple times, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed.

Furthermore, with this configuration, if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is maintained in an operating state until the first operation-related display is displayed and a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed. However, since this is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means is released, it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, if operations are no longer accepted while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter (for example, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state until the second operation-related display is displayed and a specific permissible condition is met), operations will not again be accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display was displayed. However, when the operating state of the second operating means is released, this can be easily recognized, encouraging re-operation, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension while increasing interest in the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 60-B, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operating means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation from reoccurring in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained until then, while the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 60-B, when the second operation means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

[Configuration 61-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation on the first operating means to be accepted multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and The device is provided with a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and in the case where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation acceptance on the second operating means can be performed multiple times, and even in a state where the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation is accepted on the first operating means, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance can be performed, and in this case, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, an operation acceptance on the first operating means can be performed multiple times. Even in a state where the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, an operation for the second operation means may be accepted multiple times. After a situation occurs in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is not displayed and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means is executed multiple times, a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state. Even if the second operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter until a state in which the second operation-related display is displayed appears, there will be no case in which an operation is again accepted for the second operation means based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is being displayed, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means are executed multiple times, this is used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that were in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the second operating means has been released, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game after a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 61-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 61-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state in which the first operation-related display is displayed appears, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point may once again appear.

In particular, in this case, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operating means are executed multiple times, if the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not trigger the effect sound that was audible at that time to be made inaudible. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operating means are executed multiple times, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time to be made inaudible.

Furthermore, with this configuration, if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is maintained in an operating state until the first operation-related display is displayed and a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed. However, since this is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means is released, it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, if operations are no longer accepted while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter (for example, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state until the second operation-related display is displayed and a specific permissible condition is met), operations will not again be accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display was displayed. However, when the operating state of the second operating means is released, this can be easily recognized, encouraging re-operation, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension while increasing interest in the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 61-B, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation from reoccurring in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, while the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 61-B, when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

[Configuration 62-B]
Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation on the first operating means, and which allows an operation on the first operating means to be accepted multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display on the second operating means. The device is provided with a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operation means, and in the case where the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation acceptance on the second operation means can be performed multiple times, and even in a state where the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means is accepted, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be performed, and in this case, when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, an operation acceptance on the first operation means can be performed multiple times, and the second operation-related display means Even in a state where the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means, a post-acceptance change may be executed in response to the acceptance of the operation. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the operation for the second operation means may be accepted multiple times. If a situation occurs in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means is executed multiple times, and if a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, a state in which the second operation-related display is displayed thereafter appears. Even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state until the second operating means is turned on, there is no case where an operation is again accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is being displayed, and if the second operating means is turned to a non-operating state while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation acceptance for the second operating means and then the second operating means is turned from the non-operating state to the operating state again, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state, so it can be expected that the second operating means will be turned to an operating state again and suggest that an operation has been accepted.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in this configuration 62-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 62-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state in which the first operation-related display is displayed appears, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point may once again appear.

In particular, in this case, when a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation state of the first operating means and the first operating means is then changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, this does not trigger an inaudible sound effect that was audible at that time. However, when a post-acceptance change occurs in response to operation acceptance of the second operating means and the second operating means is then changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, this may trigger an inaudible sound effect that was audible at that time.

With this configuration, if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is maintained in an operating state until the first operation-related display is displayed and a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed. However, if the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the first operating means is interrupted and the first operating means is operated again, it will be difficult to recognize that the operation was properly accepted, so maintaining the operating state for the first operating means makes it easier to progress through the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, if operations are no longer accepted while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter (for example, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state until the second operation-related display is displayed and a specific permissible condition is met), operations will not again be accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display was displayed. However, when the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the second operating means is discontinued and the second operating means is operated again, it can be easily recognized that the operation was properly accepted, making it easier to restart the operating state of the second operating means in order to properly progress through the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 62-B, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 62-B, when the second operation-related display is not displayed and the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, even when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

[Configuration 63-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operation means and a second operation means operable by a player, a performance display means for displaying a display relating to a performance, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance made to the first operation means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation to the first operation means and which allows an operation to be accepted multiple times if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, and a first operation-related display means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance made to the second operation means. and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and which allows operation acceptance for the second operating means to be performed multiple times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operating means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be performed. In this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, operation acceptance for the first operating means may be performed multiple times, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operating means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be performed. In this case, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, operation acceptance for the second operation means can be performed multiple times. If a situation arises in which the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is not displayed and a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means is performed multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operation acceptance for the second operation means occurs despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a state in which the second operation-related display is displayed appears, operation acceptance for the second operation means will not be performed again based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is displayed. When an operation is accepted for the first operation means when the first operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change can occur as the change after acceptance, and when an operation is accepted for the second operation means when the second operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change can occur as the change after acceptance. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted for either the first operation means or the second operation means when the operation-related display is not displayed, it can be suitably suggested that the operation acceptance has been performed appropriately.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in this configuration 63-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 63-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state in which the first operation-related display is displayed appears, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point may once again appear.

In this case, particularly, if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is not displayed, and then operation acceptance for the first operating means is resumed based on the detection of the operation state maintained until the first operation-related display is displayed and a predetermined tolerance condition is met, it is possible for the display display means to either change display as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance, or for the display not to change. With this configuration, it is possible for the system to make it both difficult and easy to recognize that operation acceptance for the first operating means has resumed based on the detection of the operation state maintained until the first operation-related display is displayed and a predetermined tolerance condition is met, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game and maintaining a sense of tension when the first operating means is continuously operated.

Furthermore, even if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is not displayed, and operation acceptance for the first operating means is resumed based on the detection of the operating state maintained until the first operation-related display is displayed and a predetermined tolerance condition is met, resulting in a "display change in the effect display means" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a "change different from the display change in the effect display means," which is one of the post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, may be executed multiple times, while the "display change in the effect display means," which is one of the post-acceptance changes, may not be executed multiple times. With this configuration, even if it is easy to recognize that operation acceptance for the first operating means has been resumed based on the detection of the operating state maintained until the first operation-related display is displayed and a predetermined tolerance condition is met, it is difficult to recognize that the auto-rapid tap function will also be activated when the operating state is further maintained, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 63-B, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation from reoccurring in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 63-B, when the second operation means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

[Configuration 64-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation for the first operating means, and which, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state, allows an operation for the first operating means to be accepted multiple times, and an operation-promoting light emitting means for prompting an operation for the first operating means, which is separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation for the first operating means. a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation on the second operation means, and which indicates that an operation on the second operation means may be accepted multiple times if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state; and a second operation-related display means for executing operation-prompting light emission for prompting an operation on the second operation means, separately from the second operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation on the second operation means. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means is accepted, a post-acceptance change may be executed in response to the acceptance of the operation. In this case, the first operation-related display means When the operation means is maintained in an operation state, an operation can be accepted for the first operation means multiple times, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the second operation means is maintained in an operation state, an operation can be accepted for the second operation means multiple times, and if a situation arises in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operation state and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means is executed multiple times, and thereafter, even though the second operation means is maintained in an operation state, an operation is not accepted for the second operation means. Even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state until the second operating means appears, there is no case in which an operation is again accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is being displayed, and in a state in which the first operation-related display is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted for the first operating means, operation-promoting light emission prompting an operation for the first operating means is not executed, and in a state in which the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted for the first operating means, operation-promoting light emission prompting an operation for the first operating means can be executed, so that it can be expected that a sense of tension when the first operation-related display is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted for the first operating means is preferably provided.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in this configuration 64-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 64-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state in which the first operation-related display is displayed appears, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point may once again appear.

In this case, particularly, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, operation prompting light emission, which is an image display prompting the user to operate the first operating means, may not be executed; and when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, operation prompting light emission prompting the user to operate the first operating means may or may not be executed. This provides confidentiality for the first operating means by not executing operation prompting light emission, even when the first operation-related display is displayed, and is expected to create an appropriate sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, when the first operation-related display is in a hidden state, the operation prompt light will not be emitted even if the state becomes such that operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted. However, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, operation acceptance for the first operation means can be resumed while the first operation-related display is in a hidden state. This is expected to effectively create a sense of tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed, the operation prompt light will not necessarily be emitted even if operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted. Therefore, although the first operation-related display encourages operation, a certain degree of confidentiality is maintained. This "method different from when the first operation-related display is in a hidden state" is expected to effectively create a sense of tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means (when there is a period during which the second operation-related display is displayed), an operation prompt light may be emitted to prompt the player to operate the second operating means (for at least part of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operating means, which is expected to add a sense of tension while improving the presentation.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 64-B, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation from reoccurring in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, while the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 64-B, when the second operation means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

[Configuration 65-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display for prompting an operation on the first operating means, and which, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, allows an operation to be received on the first operating means multiple times, and a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display for prompting an operation on the first operating means, and a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display which is a display for prompting an operation of the second operation means, and which allows an operation to be accepted multiple times for the second operation means if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; and a second operation-related display means for executing operation-promoting light for prompting an operation of the second operation means, separately from the second operation-related display which is a display for prompting an operation of the second operation means, and which allows an operation of the first operation means to be accepted even when the first operation-related display is not displayed. When an operation is accepted, a post-acceptance change may be executed in response to the acceptance of the operation, and in this case, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, an operation for the first operating means may be accepted multiple times, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, when an operation for the second operating means is accepted, a post-acceptance change may be executed in response to the acceptance of the operation, and in this case, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, an operation for the second operating means may be accepted multiple times, and when the second operation-related display is not displayed, a post-acceptance change may be executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of the operation for the second operating means, and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, If a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, then even if the second operating means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until a state in which the second operation-related display is displayed appears, there will be no case in which operation is accepted for the second operating means again based on the detection of the operation state that has been maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is being displayed.Since the first operation prompt sound can be output when the first operation-related display is displayed and the second operation prompt sound can be output when the second operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that a situation in which operations for the second operating means are accepted multiple times will be more easily created, thereby providing a desirable sense of tension.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in this configuration 65-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 65-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state in which the first operation-related display is displayed appears, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point may once again appear.

In this case, the first operation-related display may be capable of being displayed in any of a plurality of display modes including a first mode and a second mode, and the first operation prompt sound may not be output when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first mode, and the first operation prompt sound may be output when the first operation-related display is displayed in the second mode. This provides secrecy for the first operating means by not emitting operation prompt light depending on the display mode, even when the first operation-related display is displayed, and is expected to create a favorable sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, when the first operation-related display is in a hidden state, the first operation prompt sound is not output even if operation acceptance for the first operation means becomes permitted. However, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state until the first operation-related display is displayed and a predetermined acceptance condition is met (or even after that), operation acceptance for the first operation means can again be made while the first operation-related display is displayed. This is expected to effectively create a sense of tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output even if operation acceptance for the first operation means becomes permitted. Therefore, although operation is encouraged by the first operation-related display, a certain degree of confidentiality is maintained. This "method different from when the first operation-related display is in a hidden state" is expected to effectively create a sense of tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, the second operation prompt sound may be output whenever the second operation-related display is displayed (while or when operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to add tension and improve the presentation.

In addition, when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operation means. However, this situation may end with the first operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is not permitted. In addition, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operation means. However, this situation may end with the second operation-related display not being displayed when a predetermined termination condition is met and a state in which operation reception for the second operation means is not permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 65-B, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 65-B, when the second operation means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

[Configuration 66-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation for the first operating means, and which allows an operation acceptance for the first operating means to be performed multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state, a first prompting light emitting means for executing operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation for the first operating means, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operating means, and an image display for prompting an operation for the second operating means. and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, operations for the second operating means can be accepted multiple times; and a second prompting light emitting means capable of executing operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation for the second operating means, separately from the second operation related display which is an image display prompting an operation for the second operating means, wherein when the first operation related display is displayed and multiple acceptance of operations for the first operating means is permitted, operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation for the first operating means can be executed, and when the second operation related display is displayed and multiple acceptance of operations for the second operating means is permitted, operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation for the second operating means can be executed, and when a post-acceptance change in response to acceptance of operations for the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a specific time or less.

In other words, in this case, when the operation prompt light appears to prompt the player to operate the second operating means, not only does it create a sense of anticipation that the so-called automatic rapid-fire function will be activated, but it also makes it easier to recognize when the automatic rapid-fire function is functioning, which is expected to maintain a favorable interest in the game. The terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in configuration 66-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 66-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related display, or time as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related display, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related display," or "time" as operating means, operation-related display, or time with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, there are cases where operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (for at least a portion of the time between when the first operation-related display is displayed and when it is hidden), and cases where operation-prompting light is not emitted (for at least a portion of the time between when the first operation-related display is displayed and when it is hidden). However, in either case, the interval between multiple operations being accepted for the first operating means while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance with the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) may be set to a specific time or less.

In this case, particularly when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means, operation prompt light emitting to prompt the user to operate the second operating means is always possible (at least part of the time between when the second operation-related display is displayed and when it is hidden), but while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the operation prompt light emitting is being executed, the interval at which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (the interval at which operations are accepted automatically) may be set to either a time shorter than a specific time or a time longer than a specific time.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-play function is enabled for the first operating means, the intervals at which changes occur after acceptance are relatively short, making it possible to easily recognize relatively quickly that the auto-rapid-play function is functioning or that it has stopped functioning. However, when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, the operation prompt light is not necessarily activated, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-rapid-play function is enabled for the second operating means, the intervals at which changes occur after acceptance are either relatively short or relatively long, which may make it difficult to easily recognize that the auto-rapid-play function is functioning or that it has stopped functioning. However, when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means, the operation prompt light is necessarily activated, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game through a different presentation from that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 66-B, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

[Configuration 67-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation for the first operating means, and which allows an operation for the first operating means to be accepted multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state, a first prompting light emitting means for executing operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation for the first operating means, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operating means, and a first operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation for the second operating means. and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, operations for the second operating means can be accepted a plurality of times; and a second prompting light emitting means capable of executing operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation for the second operating means, separately from the second operation related display which is an image display prompting an operation for the second operating means, wherein when the first operation related display is displayed and a plurality of operation acceptances for the first operating means are permitted, operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation for the first operating means can be executed, and when the second operation related display is displayed and a plurality of operation acceptances for the second operating means are permitted, operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation for the second operating means can be executed, and when a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operating means is executed a plurality of times while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the plurality of post-acceptance change acceptances can be set to a fixed time.

In other words, in this case, when the operation-promoting light appears to prompt the player to operate the second operating means, not only does it create a sense of anticipation that the so-called automatic rapid-fire function will be activated, but it also makes it easier to recognize when the automatic rapid-fire function is functioning, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 67-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 67-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, either an operation prompt light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden), or the operation prompt light is not emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden), but in either case, the interval between multiple operations being accepted for the first operating means while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance with the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

In this case, particularly when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means, operation prompt light to prompt the user to operate the second operating means is always enabled (at least part of the time between when the second operation-related display is displayed and when it is hidden), but while the operation prompt light is being enabled and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (the interval at which operations are accepted automatically) may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time), making it possible to easily recognize relatively early on that the auto-rapid tapping function is functioning or that the auto-rapid tapping function has stopped functioning.However, since the operation prompt light is not necessarily activated when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple acceptance of operations is permitted for the first operating means, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined). This can make it difficult to realize relatively early on that the auto-rapid tapping function is functioning or that it has stopped functioning. However, when the second operation-related display is displayed and acceptance of multiple operations for the second operating means is permitted, the operation prompt light is always activated, so it can be expected that a different presentation from the first operating means will provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, when implementing configuration 68-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 68-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes first and second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the first operating means when the operation acceptance for the first operating means is made, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation for the first operating means, and in the case where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state, an operation acceptance for the first operating means can be made multiple times, a first prompting light emitting means for executing operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation for the first operating means apart from the first operation-related display which is an image display for prompting an operation for the first operating means, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operating means, and an image display for prompting an operation for the second operating means, and a second prompting light emitting means capable of executing operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation to the second operating means, separately from the second operation related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the second operating means, wherein, when the first operation related display is displayed and a plurality of operation acceptances are permitted for the first operating means, operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation to the first operating means can be executed, and when the second operation related display is displayed and a plurality of operation acceptances are permitted for the second operating means, operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation to the second operating means can be executed, and when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in a situation where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance to the second operating means is executed a plurality of times, a post-non-operation display corresponding to this can be displayed.

In other words, in this case, even if the second operating means is unintentionally released after the operation prompt light is emitted to prompt the player to operate the second operating means, the player will be able to quickly recognize this, which is expected to provide a sense of security. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 68-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 68-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, there are cases where operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until when it is hidden), and cases where operation-prompting light is not emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until when it is hidden). However, in either case, it is also possible to prevent the display of a corresponding post-non-operation display when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-acceptance changes are being made in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means.

In this case, particularly when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means, operation prompting light is always emitted to prompt the user to operate the second operating means. However, when the operation prompting light is being emitted, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-acceptance changes have been made in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed.

With this configuration, it is expected that with respect to the first operating means, in addition to making it difficult to recognize early on when the operating state of the first operating means has been released and the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the first operating means has stopped functioning, operation prompt light is not necessarily activated when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, thereby providing a desirable sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means, in addition to making it easy to recognize early on when the operating state of the second operating means has been released and the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the second operating means has stopped functioning, operation prompt light is always activated when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means, thereby providing a desirable sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game through a presentation different from that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means are executed multiple times, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed, or the post-non-operation display may not be displayed. With this configuration, if the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means stops functioning, it is not necessarily possible to recognize this early on, which can appropriately create a sense of tension.

While configuration 68-B has been specified as a configuration in which "the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means" and a configuration in which "the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means," it may alternatively be specified in the same manner as above as a configuration in which "multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means" and a configuration in which "multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means," regardless of whether the first operation-related display or the second operation-related display is displayed. In other words, in this case, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed for the first operating means, it is difficult to quickly recognize when the operating state is released and the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the first operating means is no longer functioning. In addition, because operation prompt illumination is not necessarily activated when multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, it is expected to create a sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means. In contrast, for the second operating means, regardless of whether or not the second operation-related display is present, in addition to making it easier to quickly recognize when the operating state is released and the automatic rapid press function (long press function) for the second operating means is no longer functioning, the operation prompt light will always be emitted when the second operating means is in a state where it is permitted to accept multiple operations.

[Configuration 69-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means when the operation is accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state, an operation-related display which can accept an operation for the first operating means multiple times, a first prompting light emitting means for executing operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation for the first operating means, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means, and an image display prompting an operation for the second operating means, in which, when the image display is in a displayed state, an operation-related display which can When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, operations for the second operating means can be accepted multiple times, and the system is provided with a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, and a second prompting light emitting means capable of executing operation prompting light emitting to encourage an operation for the second operating means, separately from the second operation-related display which is an image display encouraging an operation for the second operating means; when the first operation-related display is displayed and acceptance of operations for the first operating means is permitted multiple times, operation prompting light emitting to encourage an operation for the first operating means can be executed, and when the second operation-related display is displayed and acceptance of operations for the second operating means is permitted multiple times, operation prompting light emitting to encourage an operation for the second operating means can be executed; and when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to acceptance of operations for the second operating means is executed multiple times, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that were in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, even if the second operating means is unintentionally released after the operation prompt light is emitted to prompt the player to operate the second operating means, the player will be able to quickly recognize this, which is expected to provide a sense of security. Note that the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 69-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 69-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, there are cases where operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden), and cases where operation-prompting light is not emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden). However, in either case, when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-acceptance changes have been made in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means, there may be no cases where this triggers the sound effect that was audible at that time to be made inaudible.

In this case, particularly when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means, operation prompting light is always emitted to prompt the user to operate the second operating means. However, when the operation prompting light is being emitted, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-acceptance changes have been made in response to operations received for the second operating means, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time inaudible.

With this configuration, it is expected that with respect to the first operating means, in addition to making it difficult to recognize early on when the operating state of the first operating means has been released and the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the first operating means has stopped functioning, operation prompt light is not necessarily activated when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, thereby providing a desirable sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means, in addition to making it easy to recognize early on when the operating state of the second operating means has been released and the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the second operating means has stopped functioning, operation prompt light is always activated when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means, thereby providing a desirable sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game through a presentation different from that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means are executed multiple times, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to an inoperating state, this may trigger either one of the sound effects that was audible at that time to be made inaudible, or one of the sound effects not to be made inaudible. With this configuration, it is not necessarily possible to immediately recognize when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means has stopped functioning, thereby creating an ideal sense of tension.

While configuration 69-B has been specified as a configuration in which "the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means" and a configuration in which "the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means," it may alternatively be specified in the same manner as above as a configuration in which "multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means" and a configuration in which "multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means," regardless of whether the first operation-related display or the second operation-related display is displayed. In other words, in this case, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed for the first operating means, it is difficult to quickly recognize when the operating state is released and the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the first operating means is no longer functioning. In addition, because operation prompt illumination is not necessarily activated when multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, it is expected to create a sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means. In contrast, for the second operating means, regardless of whether or not the second operation-related display is present, in addition to making it easier to quickly recognize when the operating state is released and the automatic rapid press function (long press function) for the second operating means is no longer functioning, the operation prompt light will always be emitted when the second operating means is in a state where it is permitted to accept multiple operations.

[Configuration 70-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means when the operation is accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation for the first operating means, and in which operation acceptance for the first operating means can be performed multiple times when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state, a first prompting light-emitting means for executing operation prompting light-emitting to prompt an operation for the first operating means apart from the first operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation for the first operating means, a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means, and an image display prompting an operation for the second operating means, in which in The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which allows operations to be accepted for the second operating means multiple times, and a second prompt light-emitting means capable of emitting operation prompt light to prompt an operation for the second operating means, separate from the second operation-related display, which is an image display that prompts an operation for the second operating means; when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means, operation prompt light is emitted to prompt an operation for the first operating means; and when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means, operation prompt light is emitted to prompt an operation for the second operating means; and when the second operating means is changed to a non-operating state while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation acceptance for the second operating means, and then the second operating means is changed from the non-operating state back to the operating state, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time inaudible, so that it can be expected to suggest that the second operating means is again in an operating state and an operation has been accepted.

Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in this configuration 70-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 70-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related display as the "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related display" as operating means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, there are cases where operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden), and cases where operation-prompting light is not emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden). However, in either case, when a post-acceptance change occurs in response to operation reception for the first operating means and the first operating means is then changed from the non-operational state to the operating state again, there may be no case where the sound effect that was audible at that time is made inaudible as a result of this.

In this case, particularly when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means, operation prompting light is always emitted to prompt the player to operate the second operating means. However, if the second operating means is switched to a non-operating state while the operation prompting light is being emitted and a post-operation change has occurred in response to the operation of the second operating means, and then the second operating means is switched from the non-operating state back to an operating state, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time inaudible.

With this configuration, with regard to the first operating means, it is difficult to recognize that the automatic rapid press function (long press function) for the first operating means has been interrupted and then the first operating means is operated again. Furthermore, since the operation prompt light is not necessarily activated when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately created when the automatic rapid press function (long press function) for the first operating means is activated. In contrast, with regard to the second operating means, it is easy to recognize that the automatic rapid press function (long press function) for the second operating means has been interrupted and then the second operating means is operated again. Furthermore, since the operation prompt light is necessarily activated when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means, it is expected that a decrease in interest in playing the game will be suppressed when the automatic rapid press function (long press function) for the second operating means is interrupted.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means have been executed multiple times, if the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state and then changed back to an operating state from the non-operating state, only if a post-acceptance output sound as one of the post-acceptance changes is in an audible state at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state. This configuration can be expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the first operating means is interrupted, while also providing an appropriate sense of tension.

Note that while configuration 70-B has been identified as a configuration in which "the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted for the first operating means" and a configuration in which "the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted for the second operating means," it may alternatively be identified in the same manner as above as a configuration in which "multiple operations are permitted to be accepted for the first operating means" and a configuration in which "multiple operations are permitted to be accepted for the second operating means," regardless of whether the first operation-related display or the second operation-related display is displayed.

[Configuration 71-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display for prompting an operation on the first operating means, and in the case where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation acceptance on the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a first prompting sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and which allows operation acceptance for the second operating means to be performed multiple times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; and a second prompting sound output means capable of outputting a second operation prompting sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, wherein the first operation prompting sound can be output when the second operation-related display is displayed, and the second operation prompting sound can be output when the second operation-related display is displayed, and when post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means are performed multiple times while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes can be set to a time not exceeding a specific time.

In other words, in this case, when the second operation prompt sound is output to prompt the player to operate the second operation means, not only does the player feel a sense of anticipation that the so-called automatic rapid-fire function will be activated, but the player will also be able to easily recognize when the automatic rapid-fire function is functioning, which is expected to maintain their interest in the game. Note that the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in configuration 71-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 71-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means, operation-related display, or time as the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means, operation-related display, or time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means," "operation-related display," or "time" as operation means, operation-related display, or time with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output. In either case, the interval between multiple operations accepted for the first operation means while the first operation-related display is displayed and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance using the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) may be set to a specific time or less.

In this case, the second operation prompt sound is always output, particularly when the second operation-related display is displayed, but when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (the interval at which operation acceptance is performed automatically) may be set to either a time shorter than a specific time or a time longer than the specific time.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-play function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval, making it possible to easily recognize relatively quickly that the auto-rapid-play function is functioning or that it has stopped functioning. However, since the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output when the first operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-rapid-play function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval or a relatively long interval, making it possible to easily recognize relatively quickly that the auto-rapid-play function is functioning or that it has stopped functioning. However, since the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining interest in the game through a different presentation from that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 71-B, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

[Configuration 72-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means when the operation acceptance is made on the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the first operating means, and when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, operation acceptance on the first operating means can be made multiple times, a first prompting sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and a first prompting sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means when the operation acceptance is made on the second operating means. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and which allows operation acceptance for the second operating means to be performed multiple times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; and a second prompt sound output means capable of outputting a second operation prompt sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, wherein the first operation prompt sound can be output when the first operation-related display is displayed, and the second operation prompt sound can be output when the second operation-related display is displayed, and when post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means are performed multiple times while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes can be set to a fixed time.

In other words, in this case, when the second operation prompting sound is output to prompt the player to operate the second operation means, not only does the player feel a sense of anticipation that the so-called automatic rapid-fire function will be activated, but the player will also be able to easily recognize when the automatic rapid-fire function is functioning, which is expected to maintain their interest in the game. Note that the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 72-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 72-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related display as the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related display" as operation means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output. However, in either case, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple operations on the first operating means (the interval between post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance with the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

In this case, the second operation prompt sound is always output, particularly when the second operation-related display is displayed, but when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed, the interval at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (the interval at which operation acceptance is performed automatically) may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). This makes it possible to easily recognize relatively quickly that the auto-rapid-hit function is functioning or that the auto-rapid-hit function has stopped functioning. However, since the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output when the first operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined). This makes it possible to more easily recognize relatively quickly that the auto-rapid-hit function is functioning or that the auto-rapid-hit function has stopped functioning. However, since the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining interest in the game through a different presentation from that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, when implementing configuration 72-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called automatic rapid-press function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 73-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and in which, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation accepted for the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a first prompting sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and a second operation-related sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means. The device is provided with a post-acceptance change execution means, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, operations on the second operating means can be accepted multiple times, and a second prompt sound output means capable of outputting a second operation prompt sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, so that when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound can be output, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operation prompt sound can be output, and when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance on the second operating means is executed multiple times, a post-non-operating display corresponding to this can be displayed.

In other words, in this case, even if the second operation prompting sound prompting the player to operate the second operation means is output and the second operation means is then put into an operating state, and the operating state is then unintentionally released, the player will be able to quickly recognize this, which is expected to provide a sense of security. Note that the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 73-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 73-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related display as the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related display" as operation means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output. However, in either situation, it may be possible to prevent a corresponding post-non-operation display from being displayed when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operation-related display is displayed.

In this case, the second operation prompt sound is always output, particularly when the second operation-related display is displayed. However, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed, a corresponding post-non-operating display may be displayed.

With this configuration, in regards to the first operating means, in addition to making it difficult to recognize early on when the operating state of the first operating means has been released and the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the first operating means has stopped functioning, the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output when the first operation-related display is displayed, which is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means. In contrast, in regards to the second operating means, in addition to making it easy to recognize early on when the operating state of the second operating means has been released and the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means has stopped functioning, the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display is displayed, which is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game through a presentation different from that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means are executed multiple times, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed, or the post-non-operation display may not be displayed. With this configuration, if the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means stops functioning, it is not necessarily possible to recognize this early on, which can appropriately create a sense of tension.

[Configuration 74-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which is a display encouraging an operation for the first operating means, and which allows an operation to be accepted for the first operating means multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a first prompting sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means, The display is a display that prompts an operation on the second operating means, and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, operations on the second operating means can be accepted multiple times. The device is provided with: second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display; and second prompt sound output means capable of outputting a second operation prompt sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed; when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound can be output; and when the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operation prompt sound can be output; and when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance on the second operating means are executed multiple times, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, even if the second operation prompting sound prompting operation of the second operation means is output and the second operation means is put into an operating state, and then that operating state is unintentionally released, the player will be able to quickly recognize this, which is expected to provide a sense of security. Note that the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 74-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 74-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related display as the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related display" as operation means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output. However, in either case, when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operation-related display is displayed, this may be used as a trigger to prevent the sound effect that was audible at that time from becoming inaudible.

In this case, the second operation prompt sound is always output, particularly when the second operation-related display is displayed. However, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time inaudible.

With this configuration, in regards to the first operating means, in addition to making it difficult to realize early on that the operating state of the first operating means has been released and the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the first operating means has stopped functioning, the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output when the first operation-related display is displayed, which is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means. In contrast, in regards to the second operating means, in addition to making it easy to realize early on that the operating state of the second operating means has been released and the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means has stopped functioning, the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display is displayed, which is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game through a presentation different from that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means are executed multiple times, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to an inoperating state, this may trigger either one of the sound effects that was audible at that time to be made inaudible, or one of the sound effects not to be made inaudible. With this configuration, it is not necessarily possible to immediately recognize when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means has stopped functioning, thereby creating an ideal sense of tension.

[Configuration 75-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player, a determining means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determining means having obtained a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means, a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display which prompts an operation for the first operating means, and which allows an operation to be accepted for the first operating means multiple times if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a first prompting sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operating means, and which allows an operation to be accepted for the second operating means multiple times when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; and a second prompt sound output means capable of outputting a second operation prompt sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, wherein when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound can be output, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operation prompt sound can be output, and when the second operating means is changed to a non-operating state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation acceptance for the second operating means, and then the second operating means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that were in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, even if the second operation prompting sound prompting operation of the second operation means is output and the second operation means is put into an operating state, and then that operating state is unintentionally released, the player will be able to quickly recognize this, which is expected to provide a sense of security. Note that the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in configuration 75-B are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 75-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related display as the "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related display" as operation means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output. However, in either situation, if the first operation means is changed to a non-operating state while the first operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means, and then the first operation means is changed from the non-operating state back to an operating state, this may be used as an opportunity to prevent the effect sound that was audible at that time from being made inaudible.

In this case, the second operation prompt sound is always output, particularly when the second operation-related display is displayed. However, if the second operation means is changed to a non-operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in response to the operation of the second operation means, and then the second operation means is changed from the non-operating state back to an operating state, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time inaudible.

With this configuration, with regard to the first operating means, not only is it difficult to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted when the first operating means is operated again after the automatic rapid press function (long press function) for the first operating means has been interrupted, but also because the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output when the first operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that a sense of tension will be created when the automatic rapid press function (long press function) for the first operating means is activated. In contrast, with regard to the second operating means, not only is it easy to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted when the second operating means is operated again after the automatic rapid press function (long press function) for the second operating means has been interrupted, but also because the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that a sense of tension will be created while favorably maintaining interest in the game through a presentation different from that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means have been executed multiple times, if the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state and then changed back to an operating state from the non-operating state, only if a post-acceptance output sound as one of the post-acceptance changes is in an audible state at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state. This configuration can be expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the first operating means is interrupted, while also providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In each of the above configurations (Configurations 1-A to 40-A, Configurations 1-B to 75-B), even during the period when the operation-related display (first predetermined mode and first specific mode) corresponding to the first operating means is displayed, there may be both cases where auto-repeated tapping is possible and cases where auto-repeated tapping is not possible. The state where auto-repeated tapping is not possible may be, for example, a state shortly after the operation-related display (first predetermined mode and first specific mode) corresponding to the first operating means is displayed (just before the state in which operation acceptance is permitted) or a state shortly before the operation-related display (first predetermined mode and first specific mode) corresponding to the first operating means is hidden (just after the state in which operation acceptance is permitted ends), or any other state.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, even during the period when the operation-related display corresponding to the second operating means (second predetermined mode and second specific mode) is displayed, there may be both cases where auto-repeated tapping is possible and cases where auto-repeated tapping is not possible. The state where auto-repeated tapping is not possible may be, for example, a state shortly after the operation-related display corresponding to the second operating means (second predetermined mode and second specific mode) is displayed (just before the state in which operation acceptance is permitted) or a state shortly before the operation-related display corresponding to the second operating means (second predetermined mode and second specific mode) is hidden (just after the state in which operation acceptance is permitted ends), or any other state.

In addition, in each of the above configurations, the first operation-related display (first predetermined mode, first specific mode, etc.) and the second operation-related display (second predetermined mode, second specific mode, etc.) may be displayed when no pattern change is occurring (for example, during a jackpot game, or between the time when a pattern change stops and the time when the next pattern change starts), or may be displayed over multiple pattern changes (for example, an image display indicating that a valid period is in which a post-acceptance change (for example, a so-called pending change) that indicates in advance the "expectation that a jackpot pattern will appear in a pending pattern change" can appear).

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, even if the first operation-related display is changed from a state in which it is displayed in the first predetermined manner to a state in which it is not displayed again in the first specific manner before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was changed to the hidden state.

In addition, in each of the above configurations, there may be multiple conditions for displaying the first operation-related display, and it may be displayed when any of those conditions is met. There may be multiple conditions for displaying the second operation-related display, and it may be displayed when any of those conditions is met. There may be multiple conditions for hiding the first operation-related display, and it may be hidden when any of those conditions is met. There may be multiple conditions for hiding the second operation-related display, and it may be hidden when any of those conditions is met. Conditions for displaying the first operation-related display or the second operation-related display may include, for example, when a special result is obtained in the jackpot determination, when a special pattern is selected as the pattern change pattern, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (such as a pre-read determination) based on the ball entering the starting hole, or when a predetermined time has passed since the jackpot game state began. Conditions for hiding the first operation-related display or the second operation-related display may include, for example, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination based on the operation reception, or when a predetermined display time has expired.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, if a first operation-related display is newly displayed in the first specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first operation-related display displayed in the first predetermined mode was made invisible, the "time from when the first operation-related display displayed in the first predetermined mode was made invisible until the first operation-related display was newly displayed in the first specific mode" may be set to a predetermined time (always a constant time). In other words, in this case, it may be possible to preferably maintain interest in the game from when the first operation-related display displayed in the first predetermined mode was made invisible until the predetermined time has elapsed.

In addition, in each of the above configurations, the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode may be the same as or different from the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode. Furthermore, the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the second operating means when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode may be the same as or different from the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the second operating means when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode.

For example, the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined manner and the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the first operating means when the first operation-related display is displayed in a first specific manner are the same change, but the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the second operating means when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner and the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the second operating means when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second specific manner are different changes. This is desirable in that, when the first operation-related display is displayed, it is possible to encourage the user to focus on the dramatic effect of whether the first operation-related display will reappear within a predetermined time, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, it is possible to encourage the user to focus on the dramatic effect of what kind of post-acceptance change will appear depending on the display manner.

In each of the above configurations, it is desirable to ensure that the change after an operation is accepted on the first operating means and the change after an operation is accepted on the second operating means do not appear as the same change.

In addition, in each of the above configurations, the change after acceptance may indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot, or it may not indicate any likelihood. Examples of cases where the change does not indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot include cases where the change indicates the likelihood of transitioning from a jackpot game state to a high-probability game state where the probability of winning a jackpot is high, cases where the change indicates the score in a mini-game, or cases where the change is simply used as decoration by repeatedly emitting light.

In addition, in each of the above configurations, the interval (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode and the interval (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode may be the same time (interval).

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, as will be described later, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode, there may be two cases where a post-acceptance output sound whose output state is not terminated upon detection that the second operating means has entered a non-operated state is output as one of the above post-acceptance changes, and there may also be two cases where a post-acceptance output sound whose output state is terminated upon detection that the second operating means has entered a non-operated state is output as one of the above post-acceptance changes.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, "a post-acceptance output sound in which the output state is not terminated when it is detected that the second operating means has entered a non-operated state" and "a post-acceptance output sound in which the output state is terminated when it is detected that the second operating means has entered a non-operated state" may be output simultaneously.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, if it is detected that the second operating means is in an operating state while the "post-acceptance output sound, the output state of which is not terminated upon detection that the second operating means has entered a non-operating state" is being output, the "post-acceptance output sound, the output state of which is not terminated upon detection that the second operating means has entered a non-operating state" may be continued without being muted, or may be muted.

For example, in each of the above configurations, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined manner, a post-acceptance output sound whose output state is not terminated may be output as one of the above post-acceptance changes, triggered by detection that the second operation means has entered a non-operated state. However, if it is detected that the second operation means has entered a non-operated state again while the post-acceptance output sound is being output, the post-acceptance output sound may be rendered inaudible upon detection. In contrast, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific manner, a post-acceptance output sound whose output state is not terminated may be output as one of the above post-acceptance changes, triggered by detection that the second operation means has entered a non-operated state. However, if it is detected that the second operation means has entered a non-operated state again while the post-acceptance output sound is being output, the post-acceptance output sound may not be rendered inaudible upon detection.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, there may be no cases where a post-acceptance output sound whose output state is terminated upon detection that the second operating means has entered a non-operated state is output as one of the above post-acceptance changes, and only cases where a post-operation output sound whose output state is not terminated upon detection that the second operating means has entered a non-operated state may be output.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, a post-acceptance output sound whose output state is not terminated may be output as one of the above post-acceptance changes in response to detection that the second operating means has entered a non-operated state. However, if it is detected that the second operating means has entered an operated state again while the post-acceptance output sound is being output, the post-acceptance output sound may be made inaudible in response to the detection, or the post-acceptance output sound may not be made inaudible. It may also be possible for any of these types of sounds to be in an output state.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means or the second operating means does not necessarily have to be the output of a post-acceptance output sound or post-acceptance display, as long as some kind of change occurs.

In addition, in each of the above configurations, when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means, there are cases where so-called automatic repeated pressing (long press) is enabled (operations are accepted multiple times simply by placing the second operating means in an operating state) and cases where so-called automatic repeated pressing (long press) is not enabled (operations are not accepted multiple times simply by placing the second operating means in an operating state). However, when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means, there are cases where so-called automatic repeated pressing (long press) is not enabled (operations are not accepted multiple times simply by placing the first operating means in an operating state), and so-called automatic repeated pressing (long press) is always enabled (operations are accepted multiple times simply by placing the first operating means in an operating state).

In addition, in each of the above configurations, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode, the "number of times the post-acceptance output sound can be generated multiple times by maintaining the second operation means in an operated state" may be set to be less than the "number of times the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the second operation means without maintaining it in an operated state." In contrast, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the "number of times the post-acceptance output sound can be generated multiple times by maintaining the second operation means in an operated state" may be set to be the same as or greater than the "number of times the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the second operation means without maintaining it in an operated state." With this configuration, the usefulness of the so-called auto-rapid hit function differs when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode and when it is displayed in the second specific mode, which is expected to maintain gaming interest in a favorable manner.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, the maximum number of times that a post-acceptance change can occur when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period from when the first operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden may be greater than the maximum number of times that a post-acceptance change can occur when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period from when the second operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden.

In addition, in each of the above configurations, when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner, the second operation means is in a non-operated state, and a post-acceptance output sound (a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes) in response to operation reception on the second operation means is in an output state, if the second operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, this may trigger at least one of the sound effects in the output state at that time to be made inaudible (output terminated), or may not be made inaudible (output terminated). In contrast, in each of the above configurations, when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second specific manner, the second operation means is in a non-operated state, and a post-acceptance output sound (a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes) in response to operation reception on the second operation means is in an output state, if the second operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, this may not trigger at least one of the sound effects in the output state at that time to be made inaudible (output terminated). With this configuration, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific manner, it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner by making it difficult to recognize whether a second operation of the second operation means has been accepted. When the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined manner, it is sometimes difficult to recognize whether a second operation of the second operation means has been accepted, but sometimes it is easy to recognize, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner while maintaining interest in the game. Note that "at least one of the effect sounds" may be a post-acceptance output sound in response to acceptance of an operation, or it may be background music or other sound effects instead of a post-acceptance output sound.

In addition, in each of the above configurations, when the first operation-related display is displayed and the first operation means is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, no display change will occur as a result. However, when the second operation means is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed, a display change may or may not occur as a result. With this configuration, it is expected that tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner by making it difficult to determine whether the first operation means is being maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is displayed. It is expected that tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner by making it difficult to determine whether the second operation means is being maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed, but it is also sometimes easier to determine whether the second operation means is being maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed. This can be expected to maintain tension while also maintaining interest in the game.

In addition, in each of the above configurations, if the second operating means is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state during the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, no display change may occur as a result of this. However, if the second operating means is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state during the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode, a display change may occur as a result of this. With this configuration, when the second operation-related display is displayed, the ease of recognizing whether or not the second operating means is being maintained in an operating state varies depending on the mode, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, even if a display change is triggered when the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is also possible to prevent a new sound from being audibly output in response to the change to the non-operating state.

In addition, in each of the above configurations, the operation-related display (first operation-related display, second operation-related display, etc.) does not necessarily have to be displayed in relation to the occurrence of a state in which operation acceptance for the operation means is permitted. For example, while a game is in progress, an operation-related display may be displayed to explain the operation of the operation button, or an image display that simulates the operation target may be displayed to explain the meaning of the presentation (such as the expected level), even though operation acceptance is not permitted. Alternatively, a state in which operation acceptance for the operation means is permitted may occur even when the operation-related display (first operation-related display, second operation-related display, etc.) is not displayed.

In addition, in each of the above configurations, the operation-related display (first operation-related display, second operation-related display, etc.) may be hidden while the state in which operations are permitted to be received on the operating means continues, or the operation-related display (first operation-related display, second operation-related display, etc.) may not be hidden when the state in which operations are permitted to be received on the operating means ends, but may continue to be displayed.

In short, it is sufficient that an operation-related display (first operation-related display, second operation-related display, etc.) be such that, when the operation-related display is displayed, it may be possible to accept operation of the corresponding operation means (first operation means, second operation means).

In addition, in each of the above configurations, the operation-related display (first operation-related display, second operation-related display, etc.) may be an image display that mimics the operation target (operation means), or it may be text information (such as "push," "pull," or "hit repeatedly") that prompts the operation of the operation target. Anything that prompts an operation will suffice.

In implementing the configurations described above and below, "constant intervals until a new post-acceptance change appears" may mean that a new post-acceptance change occurs at a predetermined time interval, and does not necessarily mean that the post-acceptance change does not always occur at the same time interval. For example, the time from when the operating means is operated and the first post-acceptance change is executed until the second post-acceptance change (auto-tap function) is executed is set to 0.5 seconds, but from then on, the post-acceptance change (auto-tap function) is executed at 0.2 second intervals. In this case, "constant intervals until a new post-acceptance change appears" may be implemented by including multiple "predetermined times."

Furthermore, while some of the above configurations are described as different means (configurations), such as "first post-acceptance change execution means" and "second post-acceptance change execution means," when realizing these means (configurations), each means may be configured separately as different hardware (or software), or they may be configured as the same hardware (or software), or only one of the means may be configured as multiple pieces of hardware (or software), and one of the hardware (or software) may also configure the other of the means. In short, as long as a single gaming machine configures each means (configuration) as a whole, there are no restrictions on how those means (configurations) are configured.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, when it is stated that the event will be "displayed after a certain period of time has passed," or when no other specific mention is made, it is acceptable for such an event to occur over multiple symbol changes, or for such an event to occur only over multiple symbol changes. In fact, symbol changes do not necessarily have to be performed.

For ease of explanation, "a function in which an operation is accepted multiple times simply by maintaining the operation object in an operation state, thereby executing multiple post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operation" is sometimes referred to as an "auto-repeated function" or "long press function," but this is not limited to push-button operation objects. For example, with a pull-type operation object such as a lever, "by simply maintaining the pulled state, an operation is accepted multiple times, thereby executing multiple post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operation," but for ease of explanation, this is also sometimes referred to as an "auto-repeated function" or "long press function." Other types of operation objects that can be used include proximity-type or contact-type operation objects (the operation state corresponds to a "proximity state"), rotation-operation or pivot-operation type operation objects (the operation state corresponds to a "rotation or pivot state"), and pull-out type operation objects (the operation state corresponds to a "pulled-out state").

In addition, in each of the above configurations, the statement "if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, then even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state, there will be no case in which operation is accepted for the second operating means again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state" is intended to include a "single-operation state in which operation acceptance for the second operating means is permitted only once." However, in such a single-operation state, it is natural that operation acceptance for the second operating means will not be permitted again. This is because, in a single-operation acceptance state in which operation acceptance for the second operating means is permitted only once, operation acceptance for the second operating means is typically triggered only once upon detection of the second operating means switching from a non-operating state (off) to an operating state (on). In other words, in an operation that "maintains the operating state," such detection of a change from off to on does not occur, and it is clear that operation acceptance for the second operating means will not be permitted. The same applies to a state in which "multiple operations using the second operating means are permitted, but the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is not enabled."

In this regard, the technical feature of the above configuration is that the phrase "if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, then even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state, there will be no case in which operation is again accepted for the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state" encompasses "a state in which acceptance of operations for the second operating means is permitted multiple times and the so-called automatic repeated press function (long press function) is enabled." In other words, in a "state in which acceptance of operations for the second operating means is permitted multiple times and the so-called automatic repeated press function (long press function) can be enabled," a change occurs after multiple acceptances via the automatic repeated press function (long press function) based on detection that the second operating means is being maintained in an operating state (more precisely, detection that the second operating means is in an operating state (on) for each predetermined processing unit time). Therefore, even if "a state occurs in which multiple operations for the second operating means are permitted and the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) may be enabled," ensuring that "if a situation arises in which no operations are accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, operations for the second operating means will not be accepted again based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state," means that even though a detection result sufficient to determine a "valid operation" has been obtained, this is ignored in terms of control, and this is difficult, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "single operation acceptance state" in which no detection result (ON → OFF) sufficient to determine a "valid operation" is obtained.

In fact, if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the first operating means despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, and the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state, post-acceptance changes will occur multiple times in response to the acceptance of operations for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up to that point. This means that in a "state in which acceptance of operations for the operating means is permitted multiple times and the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) can be enabled," simply maintaining the operating means in an operating state will obtain a detection result sufficient to determine that an operation has been performed as a "valid operation."

Even if a "single operation acceptance state in which acceptance of an operation for the first operation means is permitted only once" occurs as a state in which acceptance of an operation for the first operation means is permitted, a change after acceptance may occur only once based on detection of the operation state for the first operation means that has been maintained up until that point, but it is preferable that this single change after acceptance does not occur based on detection of the "operation state for the first operation means that has been maintained up until that point." Alternatively, the only state in which acceptance of an operation for the first operation means is permitted may be a "state in which acceptance of an operation for the first operation means is permitted multiple times and the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) can be enabled," thereby preventing a change after acceptance only once based on detection of the "operation state for the first operation means that has been maintained up until that point."

In addition, in each of the above configurations, the first post-acceptance change execution means is realized as means "capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted on the first operating means," but in essence, it is sufficient that it be realized as means that detects an operation being accepted on the first operating means and causes a post-detection change in response to the detection (for example, a display change, movable body movement, light emission change, or sound output change (play, stop), etc.). The second post-acceptance change execution means is also realized as means "capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted on the second operating means," but in essence, it is sufficient that it be realized as means that detects an operation being accepted on the second operating means and causes a post-detection change in response to the detection (for example, a display change, movable body movement, light emission change, or sound output change (play, stop), etc.).

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, it is desirable that a post-acceptance display change can occur as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception of the first operating means, and that a post-acceptance display change can occur as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception of the second operating means. However, it is sufficient that a post-acceptance display change occurs as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception of the first operating means, and it is also possible that the post-acceptance display change does not occur, or it is sufficient that a post-acceptance display change occurs as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception of the second operating means, and it is also possible that the post-acceptance display change does not occur.

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance period (operation allowance state) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, an operation-related display related to the occurrence of the acceptance period (for example, a model image display modeling the operation receiving unit, or an image (ally character, enemy character, etc.) displayed in conjunction with the occurrence of the valid period) is displayed. For example, the model image display may be displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) integrated with a peripheral decorative image that decorates its periphery. It is desirable that such an integrated model image display be displayed in both the acceptance period (operation allowance state) that occurs when the pattern presentation progresses to a specific timing during an SP reach, and the acceptance period (operation allowance state) that occurs as a result of a warning determination in a variation pattern that does not develop into an SP reach, and it is also desirable that it be displayed in both the low-expectation non-suppression acceptance presentation and the high-expectation suppression acceptance presentation.

Such operation-related displays are as explained with reference to Figures 144 and 145, or as other examples or modifications thereof, so details will be omitted, but for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decorative image.
In addition, as the operation-related display, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectation levels are prepared, and the display is configured to be one of these modes. However, such a mock-up image display does not necessarily have to be displayed as an integrated mock-up image display integrated with the peripheral decorative image.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an acceptance-permitted period (operation-permitted state) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, an operation-related sound (such as an acceptance-permitted sound) associated with the occurrence of the acceptance-permitted period may be audibly output, thereby making it less likely that an operation will be forgotten. Here, the "acceptance-permitted sound" refers to a sound that, when output begins, will either result in an acceptance-permitted period (acceptance period) occurring while the sound is being output (while sound data is assigned), or is already in a state where an acceptance-permitted period (acceptance period) has occurred. In other words, the "acceptance-permitted sound" indicates that an operation acceptance state has been entered, or that an operation acceptance state will be entered, and can also be said to be a sound that is not output when a performance unrelated to the acceptance-permitted period (acceptance period) is being performed.

As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple acceptance allowance periods (operation allowance states) with different types (e.g., conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc.) of post-acceptance changes that appear when an acceptance is made (e.g., post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, etc.). Each acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) has its own occurrence condition, and when one of these occurrence conditions is met, an acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) of the type corresponding to the occurrence condition that is met can occur.

Also, as mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple operation units (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) that are operated by the player. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 in this presentation example is capable of generating an acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) in which not just one operation unit, but several (multiple) operation units are permitted to be in a state in which they can accept operation. However, this configuration is not a required configuration.

The following describes in detail the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" and "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 75-B," etc., with reference to the figures. However, when realizing these inventions, it is sufficient to select and partially include only the configurations necessary to achieve the desired effect from each of the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to include all of them. For example, depending on the type of problem to be solved (the type of invention) (the intended effect), the machine may not necessarily include an acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) during which several (multiple) operation units are acceptable as being in an operation acceptance state (an acceptance period during which only one operation unit is acceptable as being in an operation acceptance state), may not include an operation unit that is acceptable for accepting multiple operations, may not include an operation unit that is acceptable for accepting only one operation, or may not enable the automatic button function or the auto-rapid-press function. Furthermore, with reference to Figure 145, the acceptance periods described above may not necessarily be included, or only the configurations necessary to achieve the desired effect may be selected and partially included from each of the configurations. In other words, for each of the configurations described in the specification below, if you want to achieve additional benefits from any one of the above "Configuration 1-A" through "Configuration 40-A" and "Configuration 1-B" through "Configuration 75-B," you can arbitrarily select and adopt only the corresponding configuration. Furthermore, in the examples described below, for the sake of convenience, we will illustrate gaming machines that have all of the above "Configuration 1-A" through "Configuration 40-A" and "Configuration 1-B" through "Configuration 75-B," etc. However, each of the above "Configuration 1-A" through "Configuration 40-A" and "Configuration 1-B" through "Configuration 75-B" (technical concepts) does not necessarily have to have the "configuration possessed by other configurations (technical concepts)" exemplified below. For example, the "configuration possessed by other configurations (technical concepts)" exemplified below may be replaced with a different configuration, or the "configuration possessed by other configurations (technical concepts)" exemplified below may be omitted.

First, for the sake of convenience, we will first explain the case where the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" out of the above "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" and "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 75-B."

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "1A reception-permitted state" as the reception-permitted period (operation-permitted state). Figure 146 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "1A reception-permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 1A" as the generation condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 147 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "1A reception-permitted state" occurs but no operation is performed by the player. Figure 148 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation content when the "1A reception-permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "1A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the "1A fluctuation pattern." After this, it starts the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (such as a performance depiction according to the 1A fluctuation pattern, or sound output of background music playback according to the 1A fluctuation pattern (such as normal background music playback when not in a reach)), and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "1A fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 146 (c), during the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "1A variable pattern," based on the arrival of timing tAa2, when the 1A time has elapsed since the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ began (based on the satisfaction of "condition 1A"), the above-mentioned 1A reception allowance state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in Figure 148 (a)), in which "acceptance of operations to the 1A operation unit regarding changes after 1A acceptance (such as the 1A presentation status indication display JA1, the 1A rapid tap display HA1, and the post-1A acceptance output sounds SA1 and SB1)" is permitted.

Here, in the 1A reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, the "1A operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the operation button 410, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 1A reception acceptance state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 146(b) to (e), when the 1A acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-A1 that mimics the object operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 1A operation unit), a message display MA1 related to the operation on the object operated (here, the "operation button 410" as the 1A operation unit), and a status suggestion display JA1 that suggests the status of the operation are displayed at timing tAa1 before the 1A acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the 1A operation unit is permitted).

However, the mock-up image display MG-A1, message display MA1, and situation suggestion display JA1 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the first A reception acceptance state occurs; they may be displayed simultaneously with the first A reception acceptance state or slightly later. In particular, the situation suggestion display JA1 may not be displayed until the first operation is accepted via the first A operation unit in the first A reception acceptance state; that is, it may be realized as appearing and displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation via the first A operation unit. Furthermore, the timing at which the mock-up image display MG-A1 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA1 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MA1 may be displayed before the mock-up image display MG-A1 is displayed.

Once the mock image display MG-A1, message display MA1, and situation suggestion display JA1 have begun to be displayed, they will continue to be displayed at least until the 1A reception permission state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 1A operation unit.

Here, the "Mock Image Display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1A reception allowance state can selectively use either a "first color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" or a "second color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme, and is displayed using a color scheme determined based on the results of, for example, a performance determination.

In addition, the "simulated image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1A acceptance state is such that, when a moving image in which a portion simulating the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144 (β) to (σ)" is considered to be a periodic change, this periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined period of 1A. As will be explained later, this period of 1A is set to a shorter time (short cycle) than the periodic times used in many of the other acceptance states, and therefore, in this 1A acceptance state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted as quickly moving up and down within its movable range.

Also, as shown in FIG. 147(b), the 1A reception acceptance state is originally intended to continue until timing tAa3 arrives when there is no operation acceptance to the 1A operation unit, and to end upon the arrival of timing tAa3. Therefore, while the 1A reception acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, an image within the model image display MG-A1) indicating the remaining time until timing tAa3 arrives, at which the 1A reception acceptance state will end, is depicted as decreasing over time, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be performed.

Note that if the "simulated image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1A acceptance state is to begin displaying before timing tAa2 when the 1A acceptance state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAa2 before beginning the periodic changes and changes in the gauge image. In other words, in this case, the "simulated image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1A acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) until timing tAa2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the 1A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 146(c), (d) and 148(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A1, a message display related to the acceptance of operations for the 1A operation unit (here, operation button 410) (here, message display MA1 displayed as "Defeat the bat! Press the button repeatedly!!") is displayed.

Furthermore, in the 1A reception acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 146 (e) and 148 (a), a situation suggestion display JA1 indicating the status of operation in the 1A reception acceptance state is displayed, which includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the 1A reception acceptance state (here, the ally character YS-A1), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 1A reception acceptance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-A1 depicted as a giant bat), and a gauge image HP-A1 showing their remaining HP gauges. In the 1A operation acceptance state, the likelihood of a jackpot can be indicated through the presentation of whether or not ally character YS-A1 can defeat enemy character BOSS-A1 (whether or not gauge image HP-A1 can be reset to 0) by accepting multiple operations on the 1A operation unit. In other words, each time an operation (operation acceptance) is performed on the 1A operation unit (here, operation button 410), a presentation can be executed in which ally character YS-A1 attacks enemy character BOSS-A1. Note that in this example, the situation suggestion display JA1 displays ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays; as long as at least one of ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1 is displayed, it is possible to indicate the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 146, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-A1 within the 1A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 148 (b)).

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-A1 within the 1A acceptance state, a "change after 1A acceptance (post-1A acceptance effect)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 146(f) and (g) (the effect situation shown in Figure 148(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-A1 within the first A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 146(f) and 146(g), a "first A post-acceptance output sound" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "first A post-acceptance display" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed, as a post-first A acceptance change.

That is, when a single operation is accepted on the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 1A acceptance state, the above-mentioned "display after 1A acceptance" is displayed as a single animated display of "ally character YS-A1" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice magic (smoke effects, the generation of ice magic, etc.), as shown in FIG. 148(b). However, as will be described later, in the 1A acceptance state, based on the results of the performance determination made when the operation is accepted, there is a possibility that "enemy character BOSS-A1" will be injured, the strength of the ice magic will increase, or the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-A1 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance determination, etc.). When the effect content has progressed in this way, the state when an operation was subsequently accepted via the first A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice-based magic) will be displayed as a single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content (see, for example, FIGS. 146(e) and (f) and 148(f)). Note that, after the effect content has progressed in this way, as long as the first A operation acceptance state continues, the degree of progress of the effect content will not be returned to the state before the progress. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again via the first A operation unit after the end of the single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content, the state when the operation was accepted via the first A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice-based magic) can be displayed as a single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content. As the presentation progresses, it may also be possible to suggest that there is a high probability (expectation) of hitting the jackpot.

In addition, in this example, when a single operation is accepted on the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 1A acceptance state, in addition to the above-mentioned "1A acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound SA1 may be output as the above-mentioned "1A acceptance output sound," as shown in FIG. 146(g). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which ally character YS-A1 attacks enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of ice magic)" that appears as the above-mentioned "1A acceptance display." At this time, as will be described later, there is also a possibility that a second post-acceptance output sound SB1 may be further output as the "1A acceptance output sound." In this example, the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is output when the performance of the above-mentioned "1A acceptance display" progresses. Note that, while the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 is implemented here as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; it simply needs to be able to indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted, and that when the auto-repeated function is enabled, the first A operating unit is being maintained in an operating state.

In this way, in the 1A acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted on the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A1" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A1" and associated sound effects are displayed. In other words, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A1" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A1" (the presentation progresses), and when HP reaches 0 as a result, "enemy character BOSS-A1" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A1" cannot be defeated, this suggests low expectations.

This example assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the first A operation unit) initiated at timing tAa2-A1 continues until timing tAa2-A2, as shown in Figure 146(a).

In this regard, the 1A reception-permitted state is classified as a "multiple operation-enabled state (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (1A operation unit) in an operating state, a corresponding post-operation change (e.g., a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, a post-operation device operation, etc.) is executed multiple times." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 146(a), during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 (the period in which the 1A operation unit is maintained in an operating state), operations are accepted multiple times for the 1A operation unit, and each time a post-operation change corresponding to that operation (e.g., a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, a post-operation device operation, etc.) is executed.

As mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted on the 1A operation unit in the 1A acceptance state, the post-1A acceptance display (one animation display) shows ally character YS-A1 attacking enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (including smoke effects and the generation of ice magic), as shown in FIG. 148(b). Therefore, from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2, when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, this "one animation display" is first played multiple times, the number of times the operation was accepted.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted by the 1A operation unit in the 1A acceptance acceptance state, the post-1A acceptance output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to "ally character YS-A1 attacking enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of ice magic)," which appears as the "post-1A acceptance display." Therefore, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2, when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, in addition to the "single video display," a sound effect corresponding to this "single video display" will be played multiple times, equal to the number of times an operation was accepted.

However, in the 1A acceptance state, when the operation unit (1A operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-rapid-pressing function is enabled, the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (one animation display), and the sound effect corresponding to this "one animation display" (sound output after 1A acceptance) are newly executed every fixed time (predetermined time) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change.

Furthermore, in the 1A acceptance state, when the operation unit (1A operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-rapid tapping function is enabled, the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (one animation display), and the sound effect corresponding to this "one animation display" (1A post-acceptance output sound) can be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change, but in this case, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly started in response to the detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) is always set to a specific time or less.

In other words, in this case, from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 146, the auto-hit function will start a new "one animation display" every certain time, in which ally character YS-A1 attacks enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic, and this repeated display of "one animation display" is represented in the figure as "hit display HA1a."

Similarly, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, the sound effect (first A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will begin to be output anew at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as the "first post-acceptance output sound SA1a."

In this regard, the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 146 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the performance content corresponding to the 1A acceptance acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, neither the "status suggestion display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))" which indicates the status of the operation in the 1A reception-permitted state nor the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 146(h))" which indicates the status of the operation in the 1A reception-permitted state will change or be initiated as a result of the operation reception.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, the "ice-based magic attack" and "smoke effect" shown in FIG. 148 are displayed and the corresponding sound effects are output repeatedly at regular intervals by the auto-rapid tapping function (rapid tapping display HA1a, first post-acceptance output sound SA1a), but no change occurs in the "situation suggestion display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))." This allows the player to confirm the same presentation as when they performed the operation, or whether the presentation has not progressed, without having to perform monotonous repetitive operations, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Regarding the "situation suggestion display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))," at least one of the ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1 may be changed in response to the acceptance of an operation. In this case, however, the change must be to a mode different from the "mode when the performance progresses." Furthermore, if the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 (the period during which the first A operation unit is maintained in an operating state) ends without the performance progressing (when the operation is interrupted), this will trigger a return to the "display mode before the operation." Furthermore, as noted above, the "situation suggestion display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))" of the ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, gauge image HP-A1, etc. may not be displayed until an operation is accepted, and may instead be displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined period of time).

In addition, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2, neither the "status suggestion display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))" that suggests the status of the operation in the 1A reception permitted state nor the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 146(h))" that suggests the status of the operation in the 1A reception permitted state changes or begins to be executed as a result of the operation reception, which makes it possible to appropriately suggest that the performance content is not progressing.

However, when the rapid-fire display HA1a is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2), as shown in FIG. 148(b), the rapid-fire display HA1a will repeatedly show "ally character YS-A1 attacking enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of ice magic)" at regular intervals. This may make the "situation suggestion display JA1" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of the operation in the 1A acceptance acceptance state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 146 and 148 are designed to assume that the player temporarily suspends operation of the 1A operation unit at timing tAa2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 1A acceptance-permitted state.

Here, in the 1A reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 146(f) and 148(c), even if the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tAa2-A2 and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HA1a, which had been in an active state until then, will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire display HA1a will continue to be in an active state even after timing tAa2-A2 (even after the 1A operation unit is put into a non-operated state), for example, until the above-mentioned "one video display" that was in an active state has been executed for a predetermined display time and is finished being displayed, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HA1a, which had been in an active state until then, is not immediately made invisible, so it takes time for the operation status in the 1A reception-permitted state to become easy to recognize. This means that the remaining time in the 1A reception-permitted state is significantly consumed, and is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily interrupt the operation state of the 1A operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 1A reception-permitted state.

Also, in this example, if the operation of the first A operating unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HA1a is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-operating state until the rapid-hit display HA1a is made invisible is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled until the rapid-fire display HA1a is hidden and a situation appears in which the operation status in the 1A reception-permitted state becomes easy to recognize. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 1A reception-permitted state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation state of the 1A operation unit in order to more easily check the operation status in the 1A reception-permitted state.

Furthermore, in the 1A reception permitted state, as shown in FIG. 146(g) and elsewhere, the first post-reception output sound SA1a, which had been in an active state until then, is not rendered inaudible when the operation of the 1A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tAa2-A2 and the auto-repeated function is disabled, just like the rapid-fire display HA1a. In other words, in this case, the first post-reception output sound SA1a will continue to be output after timing tAa2-A2 (even after the 1A operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an active state has been executed and output for the predetermined output time, or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state.

With this configuration, even if the operation of the first A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, which had been in an active state until then, will not immediately be put into a non-output state. In this case, it will appear as if the auto-repeated tapping function is still active, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation of the first A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is no longer output, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 1A acceptance-permitted state, which is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation state of the 1A operation unit.

In addition, in the first A reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation of the first A operation unit is interrupted (transferred to a non-operation state) while the rapid-hit display HA1a and the first post-reception output sound SA1a are both in the execution state, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA1a is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is made silent are set to be different, as shown in Figures 146(f) and 146(g). In the figure, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA1a is made invisible is set to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is made silent, but the reverse relationship may also be set. Alternatively, due to the aforementioned nature in which the time until the display or silent state is set to be indefinite is variable, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA1a is made invisible may occur both before and after the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is made silent. It is also possible for the timing to be the same for both.

In this configuration, in the 1A reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation of the 1A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the rapid-hit display HA1a and the first post-reception output sound SA1a are both in an active state, a situation will occur in which the rapid-hit display HA1a continues to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound SA1a continues to be output while the 1A operation unit is in a non-operated state, as shown in Figures 146(f), (g), 148(c), etc. However, after this, as time passes after the 1A operation unit is put into a non-operated state, the rapid-hit display HA1a, which had been displayed, will be made invisible and the first post-reception output sound SA1a will be made non-output, as shown in Figures 146(f), (g), 148(d), etc. This not only allows the player to easily recognize when the auto-rapid function is disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the state of the status indication JA1 (here, state JA1a) that indicates the operating status, such as the ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1 (see Figure 148 (d)).

However, as mentioned above, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 146, although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 1A acceptance acceptance state does not progress.

Thus, in the situation shown in Figure 148(d), although the appearance of the status suggestion display JA1 (here, appearance JA1a) that suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1, can be easily recognized, these appearances are the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 148(a)), which suggests that the performance content has not progressed. Note that the appearance of the status suggestion display JA1 that suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1, does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 148(a)), as long as it can suggest that the performance content has not progressed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 146(a), it is assumed that the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state at timing tAa2-B1 within the 1A reception acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 148(e)).

In this example, if the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAa2-B1 within the 1A acceptance state, this will trigger a "1A post-acceptance change (1A post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 146(f) and (g) (the effect situation shown in Figure 148(e)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-B1 within the first A acceptance state, as shown in FIGS. 146(f) and (g), a post-first A acceptance change occurs in which the "first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (a sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "first A post-acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that even when operation on the 1A operation unit is resumed at timing tAa2-B1 within the 1A reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 1A reception acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 148(e), the post-1A reception change (post-1A reception display, post-1A reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-1A reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance on the 1A operation unit at timing tAa2-A1. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 146 and 148 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 1A operation unit) initiated at timing tAa2-B1 will be maintained until timing tAa2-B3, activating the auto-rapid-hit function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 (the period during which the 1A operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the 1A operation unit are accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and each time, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the accepted operation (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance device operation, etc.) is executed.

And even during this "period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 (the period during which the first A operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HA1a and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a) is the same as in the "period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2" described above (see Figure 148 (b)), unless the presentation content progresses. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 146, the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 is assumed to be a case in which, of the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid-tap function, the operation accepted at timing tAa2-B2 within that period has led to progress in the presentation content corresponding to the 1A acceptance-permitted state (presentation situation shown in Figure 148 (f)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 146, the "1st A post-acceptance change (1st A post-acceptance effect)" in response to operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has not progressed during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B2, whereas during the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3, the "1st A post-acceptance change (1st A post-acceptance effect)" in response to operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has progressed.

More specifically, at "timing tAa2-B2," the timing at which the presentation progresses during the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3, a display change is executed based on the operation received from the first A operation unit, changing the state of the status indication display JA1, which indicates the operation status, from the previously displayed "state JA1a" to a different "state JA1b," as shown in Figures 146(e) and 148(f). Here, as shown in Figure 148(f), the enemy character BOSS-A1 changes to an injured state, the ice-based magic cast by ally character YS-A1 changes to a state of increased strength, and the gauge image HP-A1 changes to an state showing a reduced remaining HP gauge. With this configuration, the change in the state of the status suggestion display JA1 indicates that the performance content corresponding to the 1A reception permission state has progressed due to (the result of performance determination based on) the operation reception (by the auto-repeated tap function) performed at timing tAa2-B2.

After the performance has progressed in this way, when one operation is received from the 1A operation unit, the "one animation display" will be displayed as the "1A post-reception display" in a manner that has progressed the performance, such as "ally character YS-A1 uses stronger ice magic to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-A1," as shown in Figure 148 (f).

In this example, once the presentation content has progressed, the progress of the presentation content will not be returned to the state before the progress as long as the 1A acceptance state continues. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted again at the 1A operation unit after the one video display that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced presentation content has ended, the state when the operation was accepted at the 1A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice magic) will appear as one video display that has changed to the advanced presentation content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tAa2-B2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, this "single video display" in which such a change in appearance has occurred will be played multiple times, the number of times that operations are accepted by the auto-hit function.

Furthermore, even in the period after timing tAa2-B2 when the performance has progressed, the mode (one animation display) in which ally character YS-A1 attacks enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic is set to be newly executed at regular intervals (predetermined intervals) as a post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one animation display" of the performance when the performance has progressed is also newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-hit function, and the repeated display of this "one animation display" of the progress mode is represented in the diagram as "hit-on display HA1b."

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tAa2-B2," the timing at which the effect content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 146(e), (f) and 148(e), (f), the state of the situation suggestion display JA1 changes from "state JA1a" to "state JA1b," and the state of the rapid-fire display HA1 also changes from "state HA1a" to "state HA1b." From this point on, while the auto rapid-fire function is enabled (timings tAa2-B2 to tAa2-B3), the situation suggestion display JA1 will be displayed in "state JA1b," while the rapid-fire display HA1 will be executed in "state HA1b."

In this example, the state of the rapid-hit display HA1 changes depending on the progress of the presentation, but it may not change depending on the progress of the presentation. In other words, even if the rapid-hit display HA1 continues to run in the same state regardless of the progress of the presentation, the player can confirm through the rapid-hit display HA1 that the auto rapid-hit function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) operations are being accepted, and can also confirm the progress of the presentation through the state of the status suggestion display JA1.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a single operation is accepted on the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 1A acceptance state, in addition to the "1A acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the "1A acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 146(g). As mentioned above, such "1A acceptance output sound" can include the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," as well as the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 that indicates progress in the presentation content corresponding to the 1A acceptance state as shown in FIG. 146(h).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 146, when timing tAa2-B2 arrives, at which time the presentation progresses, as shown in FIG. 146(h), the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 begins to be output in mode SB1b-1 based on the operation acceptance (presentation progress) at timing tAa2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the presentation has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output duration of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1, which is output once in response to an operation acceptance.

However, in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance content advances. Therefore, when timing tAa2-B2 arrives, at which point the performance content advances, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation being accepted, but in the same manner as when the operation was accepted before timing tAa2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not performance advancement occurs at timing tAa2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound SA1) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will be newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of the "sound effect" will be represented in the diagram as the "first post-acceptance output sound SA1a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a during this period is the same as in the "period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2" described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is not changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content, but it may be changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HA1b is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3), as shown in FIG. 148(f), the rapid-fire display HA1b will repeatedly show "ally character YS-A1 attacking injured enemy character BOSS-A1 with high-power ice magic (smoke effects, the generation of ice magic, etc.)" at regular intervals. This may make the "situation suggestion display JA1" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the 1A acceptance permitted state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 146 and 148 are designed to assume that the player again interrupts operation of the 1A operation unit at timing tAa2-B3 and disables the auto-repeated function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 1A acceptance-permitted state.

As described above, in the 1A reception acceptance state, even if the operation of the 1A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled while the 1A reception acceptance state continues, the rapid-fire display HA1, which had been in an active state until then, will not be hidden as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figures 146(f) and 148(g), even if the operation of the 1A operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the rapid-fire display HA1b will continue to be in an active state even after timing tAa2-B3 (even after the 1A operation unit becomes non-operated), for example, until the "one video display" that was in an active state has been executed for a predetermined display time and is finished being displayed, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

Also, as with the rapid-hit display HA1a, if you stop operating the 1A operation unit and put it into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HA1b is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is put into the non-display state until the rapid-hit display HA1b is made invisible is not set to a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 1A reception permission state, even if the operation of the 1A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 1A reception permission state is continuing and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, this will not cause the first post-reception output sound SA1a, which had been in an output state until then, to be put into a non-output state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 146(g), even if the operation of the 1A operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the first post-reception output sound SA1a will continue to be output after timing tAa2-B3 (even after the 1A operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has been executed for the predetermined output time and is finished being output, or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state.

However, the timing tAa2-B3 shown in FIG. 146 assumes that the operation of the first A operation unit is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound SB1, which began to be output at timing tAa2-B2, continues to be output.

In this regard, in the first A reception permitted state, like the first post-reception output sound SA1, the second post-reception output sound SB1 is not terminated (made inaudible) when the operation of the first A operation unit is interrupted (made non-operated). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 146(h), even if the operation of the first A operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the second post-reception output sound SB1b-1 will continue to be output after timing tAa2-B3 (even after the first A operation unit is made non-operated) for the predetermined output time until it is finished being output, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Also in this example, if operation of the first A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operated state while the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 is being output, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite. Similarly, for the second post-acceptance output sound SB1, if operation of the first A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operated state while the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is being output, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 become inaudible, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 1A acceptance-permitted state, which is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation state of the 1A operation unit.

Furthermore, in the first A reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, even if the operation of the first A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operation state) while the rapid-hit display HA1b and the first post-reception output sound SA1a are both in an execution state, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA1b is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is made silent are set to be different, as shown in Figures 146(f) and 146(g). In the figure, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA1b is made invisible is set before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is made silent, but the opposite relationship may also be set. Alternatively, due to the aforementioned nature that the time until the display is made invisible or silent is indefinite, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA1b is made invisible may occur both before and after the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is made silent. Furthermore, there may be cases where the timing of each is the same. Note that this relationship between the rapid-hit display HA1b and the first post-reception output sound SA1a also holds true between the rapid-hit display HA1b and the second post-reception output sound SB1, and between the first post-reception output sound SA1a and the second post-reception output sound SB1, and the same can be said for other examples.

In this configuration, in the 1A reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation of the 1A operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operated state) while the rapid-hit display HA1b, first post-reception output sound SA1a, and second post-reception output sound SB1b-1 are all in an active state, as shown in Figures 146(f), (g), and (h) and Figure 148(g), a situation will occur in which the rapid-hit display HA1b continues to be displayed, the first post-reception output sound SA1a continues to be output, and the second post-reception output sound SB1b-1 continues to be output, while the 1A operation unit is set to a non-operated state. However, as time passes after the 1A operation unit is set to a non-operated state (the time has passed since timing tAa2-B3), the rapid-hit display HA1b, which had been displayed, will be hidden, as shown in Figures 146(f), (g), and (h) and Figure 148(h). This not only allows the player to easily recognize when the auto-rapid function is disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the state of the status indication JA1 (here, the state JA1b where the presentation content has progressed) that indicates the operating status, such as the ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1 (see Figure 148 (h)).

Also, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 would normally end (become inaudible) as time passes since the first A operation unit is placed in a non-operated state (time passes from timing tAa2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 146(a), it is assumed that the first A operation unit is again put into an operating state at timing tAa2-C1 (the performance situation shown in FIG. 148(i)), which is after timing tAa2-B3 when the first A operation unit is put into a non-operated state, and when both the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 are in an audible state (before the output state is ended).

In this example, even if the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAa2-C1 within the 1A acceptance state, this will again trigger a "1A post-acceptance change (1A post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 146(f) and (g) (the effect situation shown in Figure 148(i)), just as in the case of timing tAa2-B1 described above.

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-C1 within the first A acceptance state, as shown in FIGS. 146(f) and (g), a change after first A acceptance occurs in which the "first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (a sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "first A post-acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that when operation on the 1A operation unit is resumed at timing tAa2-C1 within the 1A reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 1A reception acceptance state does not progress from the state shown in FIG. 148(h) (first-stage progression state). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 148(i), the post-1A reception change (post-1A reception display, post-1A reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-1A reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance on the 1A operation unit at timing tAa-B2. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, as mentioned above, this example assumes that timing tAa2-C1, at which operation of the first A operation unit is resumed, occurs while both the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 are in an audible state.

In this regard, for the first post-acceptance output sound SA1, the previous output state is terminated based on the restart of operation on the first A operation unit (operation acceptance) at timing tAa2-C1, and a new output is initiated in response to the new operation acceptance. In contrast, for the second post-acceptance output sound SB1, the previous output state is continued without any change based on the restart of operation on the first A operation unit (operation acceptance) at timing tAa2-C1.

With this configuration, when the 1A reception-permitted state is in a state where a 1A post-reception output sound is being output in response to the reception of an operation, and an operation is received for the 1A operation unit that had been in a non-operated state until then, this will either cause the 1A post-reception output sound to end (first post-reception output sound SA1) or not end (second post-reception output sound SB1), thereby providing an ideal sense of tension when the 1A operation unit that had been in a non-operated state is put into an operating state again. It goes without saying that in the 1A reception permitted state, in addition to the case where operation is accepted for the 1A operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 is being output and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is being output, there are also cases where operation is accepted for the 1A operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 is being output and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is not being output, and there are also cases where operation is accepted for the 1A operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 is not being output and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is being output.

The rapid-hit display HA1 may also be configured to continue displaying at timing tAa2-C1. In this case, when an operation is received from the first A operation unit that had been in an unoperated state up until that point, it is desirable to terminate the previous "one-shot video display" that was in progress and instead start a new display (one-shot video display) triggered by the new operation reception.

In addition, the presentation examples shown in Figures 146 and 148 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 1A operation unit) initiated at timing tAa2-C1 is maintained until timing tAa2-C2, activating the auto-repeated function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 (the period during which the 1A operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the 1A operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and each time, a post-acceptance change will be executed in response to that operation (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance device operation, etc.).

And even during this "period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 (the period during which the first A operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HA1b and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a) is the same as in the above-mentioned "period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3" (see Figure 148 (f)) unless further progress is made in the presentation. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 146 assumes that, among the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid function, the operation accepted at timing tAa2-C2 within that period (such as the result of the operation determination) will result in further progress (a second stage of progress) of the effect content corresponding to the 1A acceptance acceptance state (the effect situation shown in FIG. 148(j)). In particular, timing tAa2-C2 in this example assumes that the effect content corresponding to the 1A acceptance acceptance state will progress to the final stage of the effect mode, and that the 1A acceptance acceptance state will also be terminated as a result of the operation accepted at timing tAa2-C2 (see FIGS. 146(a) and 148(j)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, the "1A post-acceptance change (1A post-acceptance effect)" in response to operation acceptance is executed in a state in which the effect content has progressed only once (see FIG. 148(i)), whereas from timing tAa2-C2 onwards, operation acceptance to the 1A operation unit is not permitted, and the "1A post-acceptance change (1A post-acceptance effect)" is executed in a state in which the effect content has progressed further (final stage effect) (see FIG. 148(j)).

More specifically, at timing tAa2-C2, as shown in FIG. 146(e) and FIG. 148(j), based on the operation received from the 1A operation unit, a display change is executed to change the state of the status suggestion display JA1, which indicates the operation status, from the previously displayed "state JA1b" to a different "state JA1c." Here, as shown in FIG. 148(j), the state changes to one in which the enemy character BOSS-A1 has been defeated, the state changes to one in which the ice magic cast by ally character YS-A1 is exploding around the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 changes to one in which the remaining HP gauge has further decreased (here, to "0"). With this configuration, this change in state of the status suggestion display JA1 suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 1A performance acceptance state has progressed as a result of (the result of performance determination based on) the operation received (by the auto-rapid tapping function) at timing tAa2-C2.

However, as mentioned above, this "mode JA1c" as the status suggestion display JA1 corresponds to the "final stage presentation mode" among the presentation contents corresponding to the 1A reception acceptance state, and only appears when the 1A reception acceptance state is terminated as a result of operation acceptance. Therefore, once "mode JA1c" as the status suggestion display JA1 begins to execute based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAa2-C1, it will be executed for a predetermined period of time and then made invisible, regardless of whether or not an operation is performed by the player within that execution period. Note that here, only "mode JA1c" is prepared as the presentation mode for the final stage of the status suggestion display JA1; however, multiple modes with different expectations of a jackpot may be prepared, and a mode may be selectively displayed according to that expectation (according to the results of the presentation determination).

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted at timing tAa2-C2, the auto-rapid tap function, which had been enabled until then, is disabled as the 1A acceptance state is terminated at this point. When the auto-rapid tap function is disabled at timing tAa2-A2 or timing tAa2-B3, the rapid-tap display HA1, which had been displayed by the auto-rapid tap function until then, is not hidden (although it is hidden after an indefinite period of time after the auto-rapid tap function is disabled). However, when the auto-rapid tap function is disabled at timing tAa2-C2, the rapid-tap display HA1, which had been displayed by the auto-rapid tap function until then, is hidden (a fixed period of time (e.g., 0 seconds) after the operation is accepted).

In addition, in this example, when the auto-repeat function is disabled at timing tAa2-A2 or timing tAa2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a that had been output by the auto-repeat function until then is not made inaudible (it is made inaudible after an indefinite period of time after the auto-repeat function is disabled). However, when the auto-repeat function is disabled at timing tAa2-C2, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a that had been output by the auto-repeat function until then is made inaudible (after a fixed period of time from the time the operation is accepted). With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether the first A acceptance permission state has ended based on the output status of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a after the auto-repeat function is disabled.

However, with regard to the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, when the auto-rapid-hit function is disabled at timing tAa2-C2, it may either be made inaudible (for a certain period of time from the time the operation is accepted) or not be made inaudible. For example, if the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is made inaudible when the likelihood of a jackpot is high, but not made inaudible when the likelihood of a jackpot is low, this, combined with the fact that the sound is not made inaudible at timing tAa2-A2 or tAa2-B3 when the final state has not yet appeared (when high expectations cannot be indicated), makes it possible to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot through the output status of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a after the auto-rapid-hit function is disabled.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can output, in addition to the first post-acceptance output sound SA1, a second post-acceptance output sound SB1, as shown in FIG. 146(h), as the first A post-acceptance output sound in response to operation acceptance, which indicates that progress has been made in the presentation content corresponding to the first A acceptance permitted state.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, when timing tAa2-C2 arrives, at which time the presentation progresses, as shown in FIG. 146(h), the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 begins to be output in mode SB1b-2 based on the operation acceptance (presentation progress) at timing tAa2-C2. This allows the player to recognize the progress of the presentation through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output duration of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1, which is output in response to a single operation acceptance.

In this example, it is assumed that timing tAa2-C2 arrives after the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1, which began to be output at timing tAa2-B2, has become inaudible. However, timing tAa2-C2 may also arrive while the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1 is being audibly output. In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 may be output in a manner that changes from "mode SB1b-1" to a different "mode SB1b-2" at timing tAa2-C2 (mode SB1b-1 may be terminated and mode SB1b-2 may be output instead).

As mentioned above, the 1A reception allowance state is originally intended to continue until timing tAa3 arrives when no operation is received on the 1A operation unit, as shown in FIG. 147(b), and to end upon the arrival of timing tAa3. In this regard, the 1A reception allowance state occurs as a reception allowance state in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 147, when no operation is received on the 1A operation unit until timing tAa3 arrives in the 1A reception allowance state, not only does the 1A reception allowance state end upon the arrival of timing tAa3, but also, as a post-1A reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 1A operation unit, the final stage of the performance content corresponding to the 1A reception allowance state (see FIGS. 147(e) and (h), 147(h), 148(j), etc.) begins to be executed.

The 1A reception-permitted state may also be generated as a reception-permitted state in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. In other words, in this case, the 1A reception-permitted state is simply ended based on the arrival of timing tAa3, and the 1A post-reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 1A operation unit will no longer be initiated.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "2A reception-permitted state" as the reception-permitted period (operation-permitted state). Figure 149 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "2A reception-permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 2A" as the generation condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 150 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "2A reception-permitted state" occurs but no operation is performed by the player. Figure 151 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation content when the "2A reception-permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending consumption) and the "2nd A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the "2nd A fluctuation pattern." After this, it starts the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (such as a performance depiction corresponding to the 2nd A fluctuation pattern, or sound output of background music playback corresponding to the 2nd A fluctuation pattern (such as normal background music playback when not in a reach)), and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) corresponding to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "2nd A fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 149 (c), during the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "2nd A variable pattern," the 2nd A reception permissible state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in Figure 151 (a)) in which "operation acceptance to the 2nd A operation unit regarding changes after 2nd A acceptance (such as the 2nd A presentation status suggestion display JA2, the 2nd A rapid-hit display HA2, and the post-2nd A acceptance output sounds SA2, SB2)" is accepted based on the arrival of timing tAb2, when the 2nd A time has elapsed since the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ began (based on "condition 2A" being satisfied).

Here, in the 2A reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, the "2A operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the same operation means (operation button 410) as in the 1A reception acceptance state, and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted until the 2A reception acceptance state is terminated. However, the 2A operation unit may also be set as an operation means different from that in the 1A reception acceptance state.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 149(b) to (e), when the 2A acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-A2 that imitates the object to be operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 2A operation unit), a message display MA2 related to the operation on the object to be operated (here, the "operation button 410" as the 2A operation unit), and a status suggestion display JA2 that suggests the status of the operation are displayed at timing tAb1 before the 2A acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the 2A operation unit is permitted).

However, the model image display MG-A2, message display MA2, and situation suggestion display JA2 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the second-A reception acceptance state occurs; they may be displayed simultaneously with the second-A reception acceptance state or slightly later. In particular, the situation suggestion display JA2 may not be displayed until the first operation is accepted via the second-A operation unit in the second-A reception acceptance state; that is, it may be realized as appearing and displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation via the second-A operation unit. Furthermore, the timing at which the model image display MG-A2 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA2 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MA2 may be displayed before the model image display MG-A2 is displayed.

Once the mock image display MG-A2, message display MA2, and situation suggestion display JA2 have begun to be displayed, they will continue to be displayed at least until the 2A reception acceptance state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 2A operation unit.

Here, the "Mock Image Display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A reception allowance state can selectively use either the "first color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" or the "second color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme, and is displayed using a color scheme determined based on the results of, for example, a performance determination. However, these color schemes may be different from those of the 1A reception allowance state.

In addition, the "simulated image display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A acceptance state is such that, when a moving image in which a portion modeled after the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144 (β) to (σ)" is considered to be a periodic change, this periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined period of 2A time. However, because this period of 2A time is set to be a longer time (long cycle) than the period of 1A time that appears in the 1A acceptance state, in the 2A acceptance state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range more slowly than in the above-mentioned 1A acceptance state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 150(b), the 2A reception acceptance state is originally intended to continue until timing tAb3 arrives when there is no operation acceptance to the 2A operation unit, and to end upon the arrival of timing tAb3. Therefore, while the 2A reception acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, an image within the model image display MG-A2) indicating the remaining time until timing tAb3 arrives, at which the 2A reception acceptance state will end, is depicted as decreasing over time, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be performed.

Note that if the "simulated image display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A acceptance state is to begin displaying before timing tAb2 when the 2A acceptance state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAb2 before beginning the periodic changes and changes in the gauge image. In other words, in this case, the "simulated image display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) until timing tAb2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the 2A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 149(c), (d) and 151(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A2, a message display related to the acceptance of operations for the 2A operation unit (here, operation button 410) (here, message display MA2 displayed as "Defeat the tiger! Press the button repeatedly!!") is displayed.

Furthermore, in the second A reception acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 149 (e) and 151 (a), a situation suggestion display JA2 indicating the status of operation in the second A reception acceptance state is displayed, which includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the second A reception acceptance state (here, the ally character YS-A2), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the second A reception acceptance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-A2 depicted as a tiger), and a gauge image HP-A2 showing their remaining HP gauges. In the second-A reception-permitted state, the high or low likelihood of a jackpot can be suggested through the effect of "whether or not the ally character YS-A2 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A2 by receiving multiple operations on the second-A operation unit (whether or not the gauge image HP-A2 can be set to 0)." In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the second-A operation unit (here, operation button 410), a presentation can be executed in which the ally character YS-A2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A2. Note that in this example, the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JA2, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays. As long as at least one of the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation situation. Note that the ally character YS-A2 may be displayed as a different image than the ally character YS-A1 that appears in the above-mentioned 1A acceptance acceptance state.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 149, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-A1 within the 2A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 151 (b)).

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-A1 within the 2A acceptance state, a "2A post-acceptance change (2A post-acceptance effect)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 149(f) and (g) (the effect situation shown in Figure 151(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-A1 within the second A acceptance state, as shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (g), a change occurs after second A acceptance, in which a "post-second A acceptance output sound" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "post-second A acceptance display" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

That is, when a single operation is accepted on the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 2A acceptance state, the above-mentioned "display after 2A acceptance" is displayed as a single animated image of "ally character YS-A2" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire-based magic (smoke effects, the generation of fire-based magic, etc.), as shown in FIG. 151(b). However, as will be described later, in the 2A acceptance state, based on the results of the performance determination made when the operation is accepted, there is a possibility that "enemy character BOSS-A2" will be injured, the strength of the fire-based magic will increase, or the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-A2 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance determination, etc.). When the effect content has progressed in this way, the state when an operation is subsequently accepted via the second-A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire-based magic) will be displayed as a single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content (see, for example, FIGS. 149(e) and (f) and 151(e)). Note that, after the effect content has progressed in this way, the degree of progress of the effect content will not be reverted to the state before the progress was made, as long as the second-A operation acceptance state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again via the second-A operation unit after the end of the single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content, the state when the operation was accepted via the second-A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire-based magic) can be displayed as a single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content. As the presentation progresses, it may also be possible to suggest that there is a high probability (expectation) of hitting the jackpot.

In addition, in this example, when a single operation is accepted on the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 2A acceptance state, in addition to the above-mentioned "2A acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound SA2 may be output as the above-mentioned "2A acceptance output sound," as shown in FIG. 149(g). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which ally character YS-A2 attacks enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of fire magic)" that appears as the above-mentioned "2A acceptance display," and is a different sound from the above-mentioned "1st post-acceptance output sound SA1." In addition, as will be described later, there is a possibility that a second post-acceptance output sound SB2 may also be output as the "2A acceptance output sound." In this example, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is output when the performance of the above-mentioned "2A acceptance display" progresses. Note that, while the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 is implemented here as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; it simply needs to be able to indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted, and that when the auto-repeated function is enabled, the second A operating unit is being maintained in an operating state.

In this way, in the 2A acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted on the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A2" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A2" and a corresponding sound effect are displayed. In other words, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A2" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A2" (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-A2" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A2" cannot be defeated, it suggests low expectations.

This example assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the second A operation unit) initiated at timing tAb2-A1 continues until timing tAb2-A2, as shown in Figure 149(a).

In this regard, the 2A reception-permitted state is classified as a "multiple operation-enabled state (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (2A operation unit) in an operating state, corresponding post-operation changes (e.g., post-operation display, post-operation output sound, post-operation light emission, post-operation device operation, etc.) are executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled)." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 149(a), during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 (the period in which the 2A operation unit is maintained in an operating state), operations are accepted multiple times for the 2A operation unit, and each time a post-operation change corresponding to that operation (e.g., post-operation display, post-operation output sound, post-operation light emission, post-operation device operation, etc.) is executed.

As mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted on the 2A operation unit in the 2A acceptance state, the post-2A acceptance display (one animation display) shows ally character YS-A2 attacking enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (including smoke effects and the generation of fire magic), as shown in FIG. 151(b). Therefore, from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, this "one animation display" is first played multiple times, the number of times the operation was accepted.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted on the 2A operation unit in the 2A acceptance acceptance state, the post-2A acceptance output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to "ally character YS-A2 attacking enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of fire magic)," which appears as the "post-2A acceptance display." Therefore, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2, when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, in addition to the "single video display," a sound effect corresponding to this "single video display" will be played multiple times, equal to the number of times an operation was accepted.

However, in the 2A acceptance state, when the operation unit (2A operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, such post-acceptance changes (such as one video display or sound effect (2A post-acceptance output sound)) are executed multiple times, but the execution interval (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) is set to an indefinite time (a time not determined in advance).

Furthermore, in the 2A acceptance state, when the operation unit (2A operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-rapid-press function is enabled, the ally character YS-A2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (one animation display), and the sound effect (2A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to this "one animation display" can be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change, but in this case, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly started in response to the detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) is always longer than the specific time (the time used in the 1A acceptance state and the 3A acceptance state).

In other words, in this case, from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 149, the auto-hit function will start a new "one animation display" at irregular intervals, in which ally character YS-A2 attacks enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic, and this repeated display of "one animation display" is represented in the figure as "hit display HA2a."

Similarly, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 149, the sound effect (second A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will begin to be output anew at irregular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound effect" is represented in the figure as "first post-acceptance output sound SA2a."

In this regard, the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 149 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the performance content corresponding to the 2A acceptance acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, neither the "status suggestion display JA2 (see Figure 149(e))" which indicates the status of the operation in the second A reception permitted state nor the "second post-reception output sound (see Figure 149(h))" which indicates the status of the operation in the second A reception permitted state will change or begin to be executed (in a manner that progresses the presentation) as a result of the operation reception.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 149, the auto-rapid-hit function will repeatedly display the "fire-based magic attack" and "smoke effect" shown in FIG. 151, and output the corresponding sound effects (rapid-hit display HA2a, first post-acceptance output sound SA2a), at irregular intervals, but the "situation suggestion display JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))" will not change. This makes it possible to confirm the effects that have occurred in response to multiple input acceptances, as well as any progress that has not been made, simply by maintaining the operating state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Regarding the "situation suggestion display JA2 (see Figure 149(e))," at least one of the ally character YS-A2, enemy character BOSS-A2, and gauge image HP-A2 may be changed in response to the acceptance of an operation. In this case, however, the change must be to a mode different from the "mode when the performance progresses." Furthermore, if the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 (the period during which the second A operation unit is maintained in an operating state) ends without the performance progressing (when the operation is interrupted), this will trigger a return to the "display mode before the operation." Furthermore, as noted above, the "situation suggestion display JA2 (see Figure 149(e))" of the ally character YS-A2, enemy character BOSS-A2, gauge image HP-A2, etc. may not be displayed until an operation is accepted, and may instead be displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined period of time).

In addition, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2, neither the "status suggestion display JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))" that suggests the status of the operation in the second A reception permitted state nor the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 149(h))" that suggests the status of the operation in the second A reception permitted state changes or begins to be executed as a result of the operation reception, which makes it possible to appropriately suggest that the performance content is not progressing.

However, when the rapid-fire display HA2a is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2), as shown in FIG. 151(b), the rapid-fire display HA2a will repeatedly show "ally character YS-A2 attacking enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (smoke effects, the generation of fire magic, etc.)" at irregular intervals. This may make the "situation suggestion display JA2" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the 2A acceptance acceptance state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 149 and 151 are designed to assume that the player temporarily suspends operation of the 2A operation unit at timing tAb2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 2A acceptance acceptance state.

Here, in the 2A reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 149(f) and 151(c), when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tAb2-A2 and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HA2a, which had been in an active state until then, is made invisible. In other words, in this case, the arrival of timing tAb2-A2 (the putting into a non-operated state of the 2A operation unit) causes the active state of the rapid-fire display HA2a to end.

With this configuration, when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HA2a, which had been in an active state until then, is immediately hidden, making it easier to quickly recognize the operation status in the 2A reception-permitted state. This means that the remaining time in the 2A reception-permitted state is not consumed very much, and is expected to make it easier to temporarily interrupt the operation state of the 2A operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 2A reception-permitted state.

In addition, in this example, if the operation of the second A operation unit is interrupted and the unit is put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HA2a is displayed, the time from the non-operating state until the rapid-hit display HA2a is hidden is set to a fixed time (here, "0 seconds").

This configuration makes it easier to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the second A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-tap function is disabled until the rapid tap display HA2a is hidden and the operation status in the second A reception-permitting state becomes easily recognizable. This means that it is easier to predict how much time will be consumed in the second A reception-permitting state, which is expected to facilitate the action of temporarily suspending the operation state of the second A operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the second A reception-permitting state. This effect can be achieved even if the fixed time is set to "1 second," so the time from the non-operating state until the rapid tap display HA2a is hidden does not necessarily have to be set to "0 seconds."

Furthermore, in the 2A reception permitted state, as shown in FIG. 149(g) and elsewhere, the first post-reception output sound SA2a, which had been in an active state until then, is also made inaudible when the operation of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tAb2-A2 and the auto-repeated function is disabled, just like the rapid-hitting display HA2a. In other words, in this case, the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2a is terminated when timing tAb2-A2 arrives (when the 2A operation unit is put into a non-operated state), as a trigger.

With this configuration, when the operation of the second A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a, which had been in an active state until then, is immediately put into a non-output state, which can be expected to provide an appropriate indication that the auto-repeated tapping function has been disabled.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation of the second A operating unit is interrupted and the unit is put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is put into a non-output state is set to a fixed time (here, "0 seconds").

This configuration makes it easier to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the second A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-rapid tap function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is no longer output. This means that it is easier to predict how much time will be consumed in the second A acceptance permitted state, which is expected to facilitate gaming techniques that involve temporarily suspending the operation state of the second A operation unit. This effect can be achieved even if the fixed time is set to "0.5 seconds," for example. Therefore, the time from the non-operating state until the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is no longer output does not necessarily have to be set to "0 seconds."

Furthermore, in the 2A acceptance state according to this example, as shown in Figures 149(f) and 151(c), when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operation state) at timing tAb2-A2 and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, a new display change is triggered by this.

Here, the display change triggered by the second A operation unit being put into a non-operated state does not mean that "the previously displayed rapid-hit display HA2a is hidden, making the display image that was originally displayed behind it visible," but rather that some new aspect appears as a result of processing being performed in response to the second A operation unit being put into a non-operated state. In this example, the display change appears by processing to start the new display of the "post-no-operation display HB2" as a cut-in image shown in Figure 151(c). This configuration more reliably indicates that the second A operation unit is put into a non-operated state and the auto rapid-hit function is disabled.

In this example, the "post-no-operation display HB2" is provided in multiple modes depending on the progress of the presentation, and at timing tAb2-A2, it is displayed in mode HB2a, which suggests that the presentation has not progressed. However, the "post-no-operation display HB2" does not necessarily have to be provided in multiple modes that suggest the progress of the presentation. Alternatively, both a first post-no-operation display of a type that is displayed in one of multiple modes that suggest the progress of the presentation, and a second post-no-operation display of a type that is displayed only in one mode that does not suggest the progress of the presentation, may be displayed as the "post-no-operation display HB2."

In this regard, in the 2A reception permission state according to this example, when the 2A operation unit is put into a non-operation state, this triggers the display of a new display (post-non-operation display HB2), but does not initiate the new output of a sound corresponding to that display.

In addition, in the situation shown in Figure 151(c), the appearance (here, appearance JA2a) of the status suggestion display JA2 that indicates the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-A2, enemy character BOSS-A2, and gauge image HP-A2, is the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 151(a)), which also suggests that the presentation content has not progressed. Note that the appearance of the status suggestion display JA2 that indicates the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-A2, enemy character BOSS-A2, and gauge image HP-A2, does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 151(a)), as long as it can indicate that the presentation content has not progressed.

In this example, the gauge image HP-A2 of the situation suggestion display JA2 is not made difficult to see by the "post-non-operation display HB2," making it possible to easily grasp the progress of the presentation content through the state of the situation suggestion display JA2. The ally character YS-A2 and enemy character BOSS-A2 may also not be made difficult to see by the "post-non-operation display HB2."

Regarding this point, the "post-no-operation display HB2" may be hidden when a predetermined time has passed since the 2A operation unit was placed in a non-operated state, regardless of its type. However, in this example, the display state is maintained while the 2A reception acceptance state continues, and is hidden when the timing tAb3 at which the 2A reception acceptance state ends arrives, or when a new operation is accepted by the player. With this configuration, even if the player loses the intention to continue operation partway through the 2A reception acceptance state, the display state of the post-no-operation display HB2 continues until the timing tAb3 at which the 2A reception acceptance state ends. This makes it possible to make it appear as if the effects of the operations performed up to that point are being displayed, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 149(a), it is assumed that the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state at timing tAb2-B1 within the 2A reception acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(d)).

In this example, if the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAb2-B1 within the 2A acceptance state, this will trigger a "2A post-acceptance change (2A post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 149(f) and (g) (the effect situation shown in Figure 151(d)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-B1 within the second A operation acceptance state, as shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (g), the post-non-operation display HB2 (mode HB2a) is hidden, and then, as a post-second A operation acceptance change, the "first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (a sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "post-second A operation acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that even when operation on the 2A operation unit is resumed at timing tAb2-B1 within the 2A reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 2A reception acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 151(d), the post-2A reception change (post-2A reception display, post-2A reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-2A reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance on the 2A operation unit at timing tAb2-A1. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 149 and 151 are based on the assumption that the player's operation (operation state of the 2A operation unit) initiated at timing tAb2-B1 will be maintained until timing tAb2-B3, activating the auto-rapid-hit function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 (the period during which the second A operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the second A operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and each time, a post-acceptance change will be executed in response to that operation (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance device operation, etc.).

And even during this "period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 (the period during which the second A operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HA2a and the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a) is the same as in the "period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2" described above (see Figure 151 (b)), unless the presentation content progresses. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 149, the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 is assumed to be a case in which, of the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the operation accepted at timing tAb2-B2 within that period has led to progress in the presentation content corresponding to the 2A acceptance acceptance state (presentation situation shown in Figure 151 (e)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 149, the "change after 2nd A acceptance (post-2nd A acceptance effect)" in response to operation acceptance is executed in a manner in which the effect content has not progressed during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B2, whereas during the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3, the "change after 2nd A acceptance (post-2nd A acceptance effect)" in response to operation acceptance is executed in a manner in which the effect content has progressed.

More specifically, at "timing tAb2-B2," the timing at which the presentation progresses during the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3, a display change is executed based on the operation received from the second A operation unit, changing the state of the status indication display JA2, which indicates the operation status, from the previously displayed "state JA2a" to a different "state JA2b," as shown in Figures 149(e) and 151(e). Here, as shown in Figure 151(e), the enemy character BOSS-A2 changes to an injured state, the fire magic cast by ally character YS-A2 changes to a state of increased strength, and the gauge image HP-A2 changes to an state showing a reduced remaining HP gauge. With this configuration, the change in the state of the situation suggestion display JA2 indicates that the performance content corresponding to the second A reception permitted state has progressed due to (the result of performance determination based on) the operation reception (by the auto-tap function) performed at timing tAb2-B2.

After the performance has progressed in this way, when one operation is received from the second A operation unit, the "one animation display" will be displayed as the "display after second A reception" in a manner that has progressed in the performance, such as "ally character YS-A2 uses a stronger fire-based magic to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-A2," as shown in Figure 151 (e).

In this example, once the effect has progressed, the degree of progress in the effect will not be returned to the state before the progress was made, as long as the 2A acceptance state continues. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted again at the 2A operation unit after the one video display that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced effect has ended, the state when the operation was accepted at the 2A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire magic) will appear as one video display that has changed to the advanced effect.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tAb2-B2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, this "single video display" in which such a change in appearance has occurred will be played multiple times, the number of times that operations are accepted by the auto-hit function.

Furthermore, even in the period after timing tAb2-B2 when the performance has progressed, the mode (one animation display) in which ally character YS-A2 attacks enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic is newly initiated at indefinite intervals (unpredetermined time) as a post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one animation display" of the performance when the performance has progressed is also newly initiated at indefinite intervals by the auto-hit function, and the repeated display of this "one animation display" of the progress mode is represented in the diagram as "hit-on display HA2b."

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tAb2-B2," the timing at which the effect content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 149(e), (f) and 151(d), (e), the state of the situation suggestion display JA2 changes from "state JA2a" to "state JA2b," and the state of the rapid-hit display HA2 also changes from "state HA2a" to "state HA2b." From this point on, while the auto rapid-hit function is enabled (timings tAb2-B2 to tAb2-B3), the situation suggestion display JA2 will be displayed in "state JA2b," while the rapid-hit display HA2 will be executed in "state HA2b."

In this example, the state of the rapid-hit display HA2 changes depending on the progress of the presentation, but it may not change depending on the progress of the presentation. In other words, even if the rapid-hit display HA2 continues to run in the same state regardless of the progress of the presentation, the player can confirm through the rapid-hit display HA2 that the auto rapid-hit function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) operations are being accepted, and can also confirm the progress of the presentation through the state of the status suggestion display JA2.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a single operation is accepted on the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 2A acceptance state, in addition to the "2A acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the "2A acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 149(g). As mentioned above, such "2A acceptance output sound" can include the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," as well as the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 that suggests progress in the presentation content corresponding to the 2A acceptance state as shown in FIG. 149(h).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 149, when timing tAb2-B2 arrives, at which time the presentation progresses, as shown in FIG. 149(h), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 begins to be output in mode SB2b-1 based on the operation acceptance (presentation progress) at timing tAb2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the presentation has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output duration of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2, which is output once in response to an operation acceptance.

However, in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance content advances. Therefore, when timing tAb2-B2 arrives, when the performance content advances, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation acceptance, but in the same manner as when the operation was accepted prior to timing tAb2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not the performance advances at timing tAb2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound SA2) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will be newly output in the same manner at irregular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of the "sound effect" will be represented in the figure as the "first post-acceptance output sound SA2a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a during this period is the same as in the "period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2" described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is not changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content, but it may be changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HA2b is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3), as shown in FIG. 151(e), the rapid-fire display HA2b repeatedly displays at irregular intervals an image of "ally character YS-A2 attacking injured enemy character BOSS-A2 with high-power fire magic (such as smoke effects or the generation of fire magic)." This may make the "situation suggestion display JA2" difficult to see or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the 2A acceptance permitted state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 149 and 151 are designed to assume that the player again interrupts operation of the 2A operation unit at timing tAb2-B3 and disables the auto-repeated function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 2A acceptance-permitted state.

As described above, in the 2A reception acceptance state, if the operation of the 2A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operating state) while the 2A reception acceptance state is continuing and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HA2, which had been in an active state until then, is switched to a non-display state. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire display HA2b's active state is terminated when timing tAb2-B3 arrives (when the 2A operation unit is put into a non-operating state).

Also, as with the rapid-hit display HA2a, if the operation of the second A operation unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HA2b is displayed, the time from the non-operating state until the rapid-hit display HA2b is hidden is set to a fixed time (here, "0 seconds").

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the 2A acceptance state in this example, when the operation of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operated state) and the auto-rapid tap function is disabled, this triggers a new display change. Therefore, as shown in Figures 149(f) and 151(f), even when the operation of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operated state) and the auto-rapid tap function is disabled at timing tAb2-B3, this triggers processing to newly start displaying the "post-non-operation display HB2" as a cut-in image shown in Figure 151(f). Note that, as also mentioned above, the "post-non-operation display HB2" in this example has multiple forms that differ depending on the degree of progress in the presentation, and at timing tAb2-B3, it is displayed in form HB2b, which suggests that the presentation has progressed one step.

In the situation shown in Figure 151 (f), the state of the situation suggestion display JA2 (here, state JA2b), which indicates the operation state, such as the ally character YS-A2, enemy character BOSS-A2, and gauge image HP-A2, also suggests that the presentation has progressed one step.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 2A reception permission state, if the operation state of the 2A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 2A reception permission state is continuing and the auto-repeated function is disabled, this triggers the first post-reception output sound SA2, which had been in an output state until then, to be made inaudible. In other words, in this case, the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2a is terminated when timing tAb2-B3 arrives (when the 2A operation unit is put into a non-operated state).

However, the timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149 assumes that the operation of the second A operation unit is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound SB2, which began to be output at timing tAb2-B2, continues to be output.

In this regard, in the secondA reception permitted state, unlike the first post-reception output sound SA2 described above, the second post-reception output sound SB2 does not end its output state (become inaudible) when the operation state of the secondA operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 149(h), even if the operation state of the secondA operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tAb2-B3, the second post-reception output sound SB2b-1 will continue to be output after timing tAb2-B3 (even after the secondA operation unit is put into a non-operated state) for the predetermined output time until it is finished being output, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

Also, in this example, if the operation of the second A operation unit is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is being output and the second A operation unit is put into a non-operated state, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is put into a non-output state is set to a fixed time (here, "0 seconds"). In contrast, for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2, if the operation of the second A operation unit is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is being output and the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is put into a non-operated state, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite. In other words, in this case, when the operation of the second A operation unit is interrupted, different effects are provided between the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB2, which were in an output state until then.

With this configuration, even in the 2A reception permitted state according to this embodiment, if the 2A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 2A post-reception output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2b) is being played, as shown in FIG. 149(h), a situation will occur in which the 2A post-reception output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2b) continues to be played while the 2A operation unit is put into a non-operated state. However, as time passes after the 2A operation unit is put into a non-operated state (time has passed since timing tAb2-B3), the 2A post-reception output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2b) that had been continuing will be put into a non-output state, as shown in FIG. 149(h) and other figures.

In this regard, this performance example assumes that the second A operation unit is again put into an operating state at timing tAb2-C1 (the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(g)), which is after timing tAb2-B3 when the second A operation unit is put into a non-operated state, and when the second A post-acceptance output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2b) is in an audible state (before the output state ends), as shown in FIG. 149(a).

In this example, even if the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAb2-C1 within the 2A acceptance state, this will again trigger a "2A post-acceptance change (2A post-acceptance effect)" in response to the operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 149(f) and (g) (the effect situation shown in Figure 151(g)), just as in the case of timing tAb2-B1 described above (see Figure 151(g)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-C1 within the second A operation acceptance state, as shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (g), the post-non-operation display HB2 (mode HB2b) is hidden, and then, as a post-second A operation acceptance change, the "first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (a sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "post-second A operation acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that when operation on the 2A operation unit is resumed at timing tAb2-C1 within the 2A reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 2A reception acceptance state does not progress from the first-stage progression pattern described above. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 151(g), the post-2A reception change (post-2A reception display, post-2A reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-2A reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance on the 2A operation unit at timing tAb2-B2 described above (the pattern shown in FIG. 151(e)). The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, as mentioned above, this example assumes that the timing tAb2-C1 at which operation of the second A operation unit is resumed occurs while the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is still audible.

In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 continues to be output in the same state as before without any change based on the fact that operation on the second A operation unit is resumed (operation acceptance) at timing tAb2-C1. Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA2, which corresponds to the second A acceptance-permitted state, is made inaudible when the second A operation unit is put into a non-operated state, and therefore is not made audible when the second A operation unit is operated again.

With this configuration, while the second-A post-acceptance output sound is being output in response to operation acceptance in the second-A acceptance state, if an operation is accepted for the second-A operation unit that had been in a non-operation state until then, this will not cause the second-A post-acceptance output sound to end, and will always be output (second post-acceptance output sound SB2).

As with the first post-acceptance output sound SA2, the rapid-hit display HA2 is hidden when the second A operating unit is put into a non-operated state, so it will not be in a displayed state when the second A operating unit is operated again.

In addition, the presentation examples shown in Figures 149 and 151 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 2A operation unit) initiated at timing tAb2-C1 is maintained until timing tAb2-C2, activating the auto-rapid-hit function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 (the period during which the second A operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the second A operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and each time, a post-acceptance change will be executed in response to that operation (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance device operation, etc.).

And even during this "period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 (the period during which the second A operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HA2b and the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a) is the same as in the "period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3" described above (see Figure 151 (e)), unless further progress is made in the presentation. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 149 assumes that, among the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid function, the operation accepted at timing tAb2-C2 within that period (such as the result of the effect determination) will result in further progress (a second stage of progress) of the effect content corresponding to the 2A acceptance acceptance state (the effect situation shown in FIG. 151(h)). In particular, timing tAb2-C2 in this example assumes that the effect content corresponding to the 2A acceptance acceptance state will progress to the final stage of the effect mode, and that the 2A acceptance acceptance state will also be terminated as a result of the operation accepted at timing tAb2-C2 (see FIGS. 149(a) and 151(h)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 149, the "change after 2nd A acceptance (post-2nd A acceptance effect)" in response to operation acceptance is executed in a state in which the effect content has progressed only once (see FIG. 151(h)), whereas from timing tAb2-C2 onwards, operation acceptance to the 2nd A operation unit is not permitted, and the "change after 2nd A acceptance (post-2nd A acceptance effect)" is executed in a state in which the effect content has progressed further (final stage effect) (see FIG. 151(h)).

More specifically, at timing tAb2-C2, as shown in FIG. 149(e) and FIG. 151(h), based on the operation received from the second A operation unit, a display change is executed to change the state of the status suggestion display JA2, which indicates the operation status, from the previously displayed "state JA2b" to a different "state JA2c." Here, as shown in FIG. 151(h), the state changes to show that the enemy character BOSS-A2 has been defeated, the state changes to show that the fire magic cast by ally character YS-A2 is exploding around the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 changes to show that the remaining HP gauge has further decreased. With this configuration, this change in state of the status suggestion display JA2 suggests that the performance content corresponding to the second A reception permission state has progressed as a result of (the result of the performance determination based on) the operation received (by the auto-rapid tapping function) at timing tAb2-C2.

However, as mentioned above, this "mode JA2c" as the status suggestion display JA2 corresponds to the "final stage presentation mode" among the presentation contents corresponding to the 2A reception acceptance state, and only appears when the 2A reception acceptance state is terminated as a result of operation acceptance. Therefore, after "mode JA2c" as the status suggestion display JA2 begins to execute based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-C1, it will be executed for a predetermined period of time and then made invisible, regardless of whether or not an operation is performed by the player within that execution period. Note that here, only "mode JA2c" is prepared as the final stage presentation mode for the status suggestion display JA2, and multiple modes with different expectations of a jackpot are not prepared.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted at timing tAb2-C2, the auto rapid-fire function that had been enabled up until then is disabled as the second A acceptance state is terminated at this point. In this regard, when the auto rapid-fire function is disabled at timing tAb2-C2, the rapid-fire display HA2 that had been displayed by the auto rapid-fire function up until then is also disabled at this point.

In addition, in this example, when the auto-repeat function is disabled at timing tAb2-C2, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a that had been output by the auto-repeat function until then is made inaudible (a certain period of time after the operation was accepted).

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can output, in addition to the first post-acceptance output sound SA2, a second post-acceptance output sound SB2, as shown in FIG. 149(h), as the second A post-acceptance output sound in response to operation acceptance, which indicates that progress has been made in the presentation content corresponding to the second A acceptance permitted state.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 149, when timing tAb2-C2 arrives, at which time the presentation progresses, as shown in FIG. 149(h), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 begins to be output in mode SB2b-2 based on the operation acceptance (presentation progress) at timing tAb2-C2. This allows the player to recognize the progress of the presentation through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output duration of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2.

In this example, it is assumed that timing tAb2-C2 arrives after the second post-acceptance output sound SB2b-1, which began to be output at timing tAb2-B2, has become inaudible, but it may also arrive while the second post-acceptance output sound SB2b-1 is being audibly output. In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 may be output in a manner that changes from "mode SB2b-1" to a different "mode SB2b-2" at timing tAb2-C2 (mode SB2b-1 may be terminated and mode SB2b-2 may be output instead).

As mentioned above, the 2A reception allowance state is originally intended to continue until timing tAb3 arrives when no operation is received on the 2A operation unit, as shown in FIG. 150(b), and to end upon the arrival of timing tAb3. In this regard, the 2A reception allowance state occurs as a reception allowance state in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 150, when no operation is received on the 2A operation unit until timing tAb3 arrives in the 2A reception allowance state, not only does the 2A reception allowance state end upon the arrival of timing tAb3, but also, as a post-2A reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 2A operation unit, the final stage of the performance content corresponding to the 2A reception allowance state (see FIGS. 150(e) and (h), 151(h), etc.) begins to be executed.

The 2A reception-permitted state may also be generated as a reception-permitted state in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. In other words, in this case, the 2A reception-permitted state is simply ended based on the arrival of timing tAb3, and the 2A post-reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 2A operation unit will no longer be initiated.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "3A reception-permitted state" as part of the reception-permitted period (operation-permitted state). Figure 152 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "3A reception-permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 3A" as the generation condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 153 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "3A reception-permitted state" occurs but no operation is performed by the player. Figure 154 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation content when the "3A reception-permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending consumption) and the "3A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the "3A fluctuation pattern." After this, it starts the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (such as a performance depiction corresponding to the 3A fluctuation pattern, or sound output of background music playback corresponding to the 3A fluctuation pattern (such as normal background music playback when not in a reach state)), and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) corresponding to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "3A fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 152 (c), during the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "3A variable pattern," based on the arrival of timing tAc2, when the 3A time has elapsed since the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ began (based on "condition 3A" being satisfied), the above-mentioned 3A reception allowance state (valid period) can be generated, in which "acceptance of operations to the 3A operation unit regarding changes after 3A acceptance (such as the 3A presentation status indication display JA3, the 3A rapid-hit display HA3, and the post-3A acceptance output sounds SA3 and SB3)" is permitted (the situation shown in Figure 154 (a)).

Here, in the 3A reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, the "3A operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the operation button 410, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 3A reception acceptance state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 152(b) to (e), when a 3A acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-A3 that represents the object to be operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 3A operation unit) and a status suggestion display JA3 that suggests the status of the operation are displayed at timing tAc1 before the 3A acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the 3A operation unit is permitted).

However, the mock-up display MG-A3 and the status suggestion display JA3 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 3A reception acceptance state occurs; they may be displayed simultaneously with the 3A reception acceptance state or slightly after that state. In particular, the status suggestion display JA3 may not be displayed until the first operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit in the 3A reception acceptance state; in other words, it may be realized as something that appears and is displayed when an operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit.

Once the mock image display MG-A3 and the status suggestion display JA3 begin to display, they will continue to be displayed at least until the 3A reception acceptance state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 3A operation unit.

Here, the "Mock Image Display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A reception allowance state can selectively use either the "first color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" or the "second color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme, and is displayed using a color scheme determined based on the results of, for example, a performance determination.

In addition, the "simulated image display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A acceptance state is such that, when a moving image in which a portion simulating the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144 (β) to (σ)" is considered to be a periodic change, this periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined period of 3A. Note that this period of 3A is set to a shorter time (short cycle) than the period of 2A described above, and may be set to the same time as the period of 1A, for example. Therefore, in the 3A acceptance state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted as quickly moving up and down within its movable range.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 153(b), the 3A reception acceptance state continues until timing tAc3 arrives when there is no operation accepted by the 3A operation unit, and ends when timing tAc3 arrives. Therefore, while the 3A reception acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, an image within the model image display MG-A3) indicating the remaining time until timing tAc3 arrives, at which the 3A reception acceptance state will end, is depicted as decreasing over time, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be performed.

Note that if the "Model Image Display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A acceptance state is to begin displaying before timing tAc2, when the 3A acceptance state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAc2 before beginning the periodic changes and gauge image changes. In other words, in this case, the "Model Image Display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) until timing tAc2 arrives.

Note that in the 3A reception acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 152(d) and 154(a), unlike the 1A reception acceptance state and the 2A reception acceptance state, messages related to operation acceptance for the 3A operation unit (here, operation button 410) are not displayed.

Furthermore, in the 3A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 152 (e) and 154 (a), a situation suggestion display JA3 indicating the status of operation in the 3A acceptance state is displayed, which includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the 3A acceptance state (here, the ally character YS-A3), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 3A acceptance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-A3 depicted as a ghost), and a gauge image HP-A3 showing their remaining HP gauges. In the 3A operation acceptance state, the likelihood of a jackpot can be indicated through the presentation of whether or not ally character YS-A3 can defeat enemy character BOSS-A3 by accepting multiple operations on the 3A operation unit (whether or not gauge image HP-A3 can be reset to 0). In other words, each time an operation (operation acceptance) is performed on the 3A operation unit (here, operation button 410), a presentation can be executed in which ally character YS-A3 attacks enemy character BOSS-A3. Note that in this example, the situation suggestion display JA3 displays ally character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, and gauge image HP-A3, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays; as long as at least one of ally character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, and gauge image HP-A3 is displayed, it is possible to indicate the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 152, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-A1 within the 3A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 154 (b)).

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-A1 within the 3A acceptance state, a "change after 3A acceptance (post-3A acceptance effect)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g) (the effect situation shown in Figure 154(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-A1 within the 3A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 152 (f) and (g), a "post-3A acceptance output sound" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after 3A acceptance, and a "post-3A acceptance display" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

That is, when a single operation is accepted using the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance state, a single animated display is displayed as the "post-3A acceptance display" as shown in FIG. 154(b), showing "ally character YS-A3" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning-based magic. However, as will be described later, in the 3A acceptance state, based on the results of the performance determination made when the operation is accepted, there is a possibility that "enemy character BOSS-A3" will be injured, the strength of the lightning-based magic will increase, or the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-A3 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance determination, etc.). When the effect content has progressed in this way, the state when an operation is subsequently accepted via the 3A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning-based magic) will be displayed as a single animated image that has changed to the advanced effect content (see, for example, FIGS. 152(e) and (f) and 154(f)). Note that, after the effect content has progressed in this way, the degree of progress of the effect content will not be returned to the state before the progress was made, as long as the 3A acceptance state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again via the 3A operation unit after the end of the single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content, the state when the operation was accepted via the 3A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning-based magic) can be displayed as a single animated image that has changed to the advanced effect content. As the presentation progresses, it may also be possible to suggest that there is a high probability (expectation) of hitting the jackpot.

In addition, in this example, when a single operation is accepted on the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance permitted state, in addition to the above-mentioned "3A acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound SA3 may be output as the above-mentioned "3A acceptance output sound," as shown in FIG. 152(g). The first post-acceptance output sound SA3 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which ally character YS-A3 attacks enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic (such as the generation of lightning-based magic)," which appears as the above-mentioned "3A acceptance display." In addition, as will be described later, there is a possibility that a second post-acceptance output sound SB3 may also be output as the "3A acceptance output sound." The second post-acceptance output sound SB3 in this example is output when the performance of the above-mentioned "3A acceptance display" progresses. Note that, here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; in short, it only needs to be able to indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted, and that when the auto-repeated function is enabled, the third A operating unit is being maintained in an operating state.

In this way, in the 3A acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted on the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A3" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A3" and associated sound effects are displayed. In other words, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A3" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A3" (the presentation progresses), and when HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-A3" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A3" cannot be defeated, it suggests low expectations.

This example assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 3A operation unit) initiated at timing tAc2-A1 continues until timing tAc2-A2, as shown in Figure 152(a).

In this regard, the 3A reception-permitted state is classified as a "multiple operation-enabled state (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (3A operation unit) in an operating state, a corresponding post-operation change (e.g., a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, a post-operation device operation, etc.) is executed multiple times." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 152(a), during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 (the period in which the 3A operation unit is maintained in an operating state), operations are accepted multiple times for the 3A operation unit, and each time a post-operation change corresponding to that operation (e.g., a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, a post-operation device operation, etc.) is executed.

As mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted on the 3A operation unit in the 3A acceptance state, the post-3A acceptance display (one animation display) shows ally character YS-A3 attacking enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic, as shown in FIG. 154(b). Therefore, from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, this "one animation display" is first played multiple times, the number of times that an operation is accepted.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted on the 3A operation unit in the 3A acceptance acceptance state, the post-3A acceptance output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to "ally character YS-A3 attacking enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of lightning magic)," which appears as the "post-3A acceptance display." Therefore, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2, when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, in addition to the "single video display," a sound effect corresponding to this "single video display" is played multiple times, equal to the number of times an operation was accepted.

However, in the 3A acceptance state, when the operation unit (3A operation unit) is kept in an operating state and the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, the ally character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic (one animation display), and the sound effect corresponding to this "one animation display" (sound output after 3A acceptance) are newly executed every fixed time (predetermined time) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change.

Furthermore, in the 3A acceptance state, when the operation unit (3A operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-rapid tapping function is enabled, the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic (one animation display), and the sound effect corresponding to this "one animation display" (3A post-acceptance output sound) can be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change, but in this case, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly started in response to the detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) is always set to a specific time or less.

In other words, in this case, from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 152, the auto-hit function will start a new "one animation display" every certain time, in which ally character YS-A3 attacks enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic, and this repeated display of "one animation display" is represented in the figure as "hit display HA3a."

Similarly, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 152, the sound effect (third A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will begin to be output anew at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound effect" is represented in the figure as "first post-acceptance output sound SA3a."

In this regard, the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 152 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, no progress is made in the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance acceptance state.

Therefore, during this period, neither the "status suggestion display JA3 (see Figure 152 (e))" which indicates the status of the operation in the 3A reception permitted state nor the "second post-acceptance output sound (see Figure 152 (h))" which indicates the status of the operation in the 3A reception permitted state will change or be initiated as a result of the operation acceptance.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 152, the display of a "lightning-based magic attack" as shown in Figure 154 and the output of its corresponding sound effect are repeatedly executed at regular intervals by the auto-rapid tapping function (rapid tapping display HA3a, first post-acceptance output sound SA3a), but no change occurs in the "situation suggestion display JA3 (see Figure 152(e))." This makes it possible to confirm the same presentation as when the player performed the operation, or whether the presentation did not progress, without having to perform monotonous repetitive operations, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Regarding the "situation suggestion display JA3 (see Figure 152(e))," at least one of the ally character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, and gauge image HP-A3 may be changed in response to the acceptance of an operation. In this case, however, the change must be to a mode different from the "mode when the performance progresses." Furthermore, if the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 (the period during which the third-A operation unit is maintained in an operating state) ends without the performance progressing (when the operation is interrupted), this will trigger a return to the "display mode before the operation." Furthermore, as noted above, the "situation suggestion display JA3 (see Figure 152(e))" of the ally character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, gauge image HP-A3, etc. may not be displayed until an operation is accepted, and may instead be displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined period of time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2, neither the "status suggestion display JA3 (see FIG. 152(e))" that suggests the status of the operation in the 3A reception permitted state nor the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 152(h))" that suggests the status of the operation in the 3A reception permitted state changes or begins to be executed as a result of the operation reception, which makes it possible to appropriately suggest that the performance content is not progressing.

However, when the rapid-fire display HA3a is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2), as shown in FIG. 154(b), the rapid-fire display HA3a will repeatedly show an image of ally character YS-A3 attacking enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic at regular intervals. This may make the "situation suggestion display JA3" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of the operation in the 3A acceptance acceptance state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 152 and 154 are designed to assume that the player temporarily suspends operation of the 3A operation unit at timing tAc2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 3A acceptance acceptance state.

Here, in the 3A reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 152(f) and 154(c), even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tAc2-A2 and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HA3a, which had been in an active state until then, will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire display HA3a will continue to be in an active state even after timing tAc2-A2 (even after the 3A operation unit is put into a non-operated state), for example, until the above-mentioned "one video display" that was in an active state has been executed for a predetermined display time and is finished being displayed, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HA3a, which had been in an active state until then, is not immediately made invisible, and it takes time for the operation status in the 3A reception-permitted state to become easily recognizable. This means that a significant amount of the remaining time in the 3A reception-permitted state is consumed, and is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily interrupt the operation state of the 3A operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 3A reception-permitted state.

Also, in this example, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HA3a is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the rapid-hit display HA3a is hidden is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled until the rapid-fire display HA3a is hidden and a situation appears in which the operation status in the 3A reception-permitted state becomes easy to recognize. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 3A reception-permitted state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend operation of the 3A operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 3A reception-permitted state.

Furthermore, in the 3A acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 152(g) and elsewhere, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, which had been in an active state until then, is not rendered inaudible when the operation of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tAc2-A2 to disable the auto-hit function, just like the rapid-hit display HA3a. In other words, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a will continue to be output even after timing tAc2-A2 (even after the 3A operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an active state has been executed and output for the predetermined output time, or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state.

With this configuration, even if the operation of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, which had been active until then, will not immediately be put into a non-output state. In this case, it will appear as if the auto-repeated tapping function is still active, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is no longer output, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 3A acceptance-permitted state, which is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation state of the 3A operation unit.

In addition, in the 3A reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (transferred to a non-operation state) while the rapid-hit display HA3a and the first post-reception output sound SA3a are both in an execution state, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA3a is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made silent are set to be different, as shown in Figures 152(f) and 152(g). In the figure, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA3a is made invisible is set to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made silent, but the reverse relationship may also be set. Alternatively, due to the aforementioned nature that the time until the display is made invisible or silent is indefinite, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA3a is made invisible may occur both before and after the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made silent. It is also possible for the timing to be the same for both.

In this configuration, in the 3A reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the rapid-hit display HA3a and the first post-reception output sound SA3a are both in an active state, a situation will occur in which the rapid-hit display HA3a continues to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound SA3a continues to be output while the 3A operation unit is in a non-operated state, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g) and 154(c). However, after this, as time passes after the 3A operation unit is put into a non-operated state, the rapid-hit display HA3a, which had been displayed, will be made invisible and the first post-reception output sound SA3a will be made non-output, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g) and 154(d). This not only allows the player to easily recognize when the auto-rapid function is disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the state of the status indication JA3 (here, state JA3a) that indicates the operating status, such as the ally character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, and gauge image HP-A3 (see Figure 154 (d)).

However, as mentioned above, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 152, although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance acceptance state is not advanced.

Thus, in the situation shown in Figure 154(d), although the appearance of the status suggestion display JA3 (here, appearance JA3a) that suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, and gauge image HP-A3, can be easily recognized, these appearances are the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 154(a)), which suggests that the performance content has not progressed. Note that the appearance of the status suggestion display JA3 that suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, and gauge image HP-A3, does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 154(a)), as long as it can suggest that the performance content has not progressed.

In this example, as shown in Figure 152(a), it is assumed that the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state at timing tAc2-B1 within the 3A reception acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 154(e)).

In this example, if the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAc2-B1 within the 3A acceptance state, this will trigger a "change after 3A acceptance (post-3A acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g) (the effect situation shown in Figure 154(e)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-B1 within the 3A acceptance state, as shown in FIGS. 152(f) and 152(g), a post-3A acceptance change occurs in which the "first post-acceptance output sound SA3 (a sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "post-3A acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that even when operation on the 3A operation unit is resumed at timing tAc2-B1 within the 3A reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 3A reception acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 154(e), the post-3A reception change (post-3A reception display, post-3A reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-3A reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance on the 3A operation unit at timing tAc2-A1. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 152 and 154 are based on the assumption that the player's operation (operation state of the 3A operation unit) initiated at timing tAc2-B1 will be maintained until timing tAc2-B3, activating the auto-rapid-hit function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the 3A operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and each time, a post-acceptance change will be executed in response to that operation (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance device operation, etc.).

And even during this "period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HA3a and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a) is the same as in the "period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2" described above (see Figure 154 (b)), unless the presentation content progresses. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 152, the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 is assumed to be a case in which, of the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the operation accepted at timing tAc2-B2 within that period has led to progress in the presentation content corresponding to the 3A acceptance acceptance state (presentation situation shown in Figure 154 (f)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 152, the "Third A post-acceptance change (third A post-acceptance effect)" in response to operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has not progressed during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B2, whereas during the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3, the "Third A post-acceptance change (third A post-acceptance effect)" in response to operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has progressed.

More specifically, at "timing tAc2-B2," the timing at which the presentation progresses during the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3, a display change is executed based on the operation received from the third-A operation unit, changing the state of the status indication display JA3, which indicates the operation status, from the previously displayed "state JA3a" to a different "state JA3b," as shown in Figures 152(e) and 154(f). Here, as shown in Figure 154(f), the enemy character BOSS-A3 changes to an injured state, the lightning-based magic cast by ally character YS-A3 changes to a state of increased strength, and the gauge image HP-A3 changes to an state showing a reduced remaining HP gauge. With this configuration, the change in the state of the status suggestion display JA3 indicates that the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception permission state has progressed due to (the result of performance determination based on) the operation reception (by the auto-repeated tap function) performed at timing tAc2-B2.

After the performance has progressed in this way, when one operation is received from the 3A operation unit, the "one animation display" will be displayed as the "display after 3A reception," as shown in FIG. 154(f), in a manner that indicates the progress of the performance, such as "ally character YS-A3 uses a stronger lightning-based magic to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-A3."

In this example, once the effect has progressed, the degree of progress in the effect will not be returned to the state before the progress was made, as long as the 3A acceptance state continues. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted again at the 3A operation unit after the one video display that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced effect has ended, the state when the operation was accepted at the 3A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning-based magic) will appear as one video display that has changed to the advanced effect.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tAc2-B2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, this "single video display" in which such a change in appearance has occurred will be played multiple times, the number of times that operations are accepted by the auto-hit function.

Furthermore, even in the period after timing tAc2-B2 when the performance has progressed, the mode (one animation display) in which ally character YS-A3 attacks enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic is newly initiated at regular intervals (predetermined intervals) as a post-acceptance change. Therefore, the "one animation display" of the performance when the performance has progressed is also newly initiated at regular intervals by the auto-hit function, and the repeated display of this "one animation display" of the progress is represented in the diagram as "hit-on display HA3b."

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tAc2-B2," the timing at which the effect content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 152(e), (f) and 154(e), (f), the state of the situation suggestion display JA3 changes from "state JA3a" to "state JA3b," and the state of the rapid-hit display HA3 also changes from "state HA3a" to "state HA3b." From this point on, while the auto rapid-hit function is enabled (timing tAc2-B2 to tAc2-B3), the situation suggestion display JA3 is displayed in "state JA3b," while the rapid-hit display HA3 is executed in "state HA3b."

In this example, the state of the rapid-hit display HA3 changes depending on the progress of the presentation, but it may not change depending on the progress of the presentation. In other words, even if the rapid-hit display HA3 continues to run in the same state regardless of the progress of the presentation, the player can confirm through the rapid-hit display HA3 that the auto rapid-hit function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) operations are being accepted, and can also confirm the progress of the presentation through the state of the status suggestion display JA3.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a single operation is accepted on the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance state, in addition to the "3A acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the "3A acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 152(g). As mentioned above, such "3A acceptance output sound" can include the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," as well as the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 that indicates that progress has been made in the presentation corresponding to the 3A acceptance state as shown in FIG. 152(h).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 152, when timing tAc2-B2 arrives, at which time the presentation progresses, as shown in FIG. 152(h), the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 begins to be output in mode SB3b-1 based on the operation acceptance (presentation progress) at timing tAc2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the presentation has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output duration of the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3, which is output in response to a single operation acceptance.

However, in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance content advances. Therefore, when timing tAc2-B2 arrives, when the performance content advances, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation acceptance, but in the same manner as when the operation was accepted prior to timing tAc2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not performance advancement occurs at timing tAc2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound SA3) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will be newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of the "sound effect" will be represented in the diagram as the "first post-acceptance output sound SA3a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a during this period is the same as in the "period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2" described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is not changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content, but it may be changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HA3b is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3), as shown in FIG. 154(f), the rapid-fire display HA3b will repeatedly show "ally character YS-A3 attacking injured enemy character BOSS-A3 with high-power lightning magic" at regular intervals. This may make the "situation suggestion display JA3" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the 3A acceptance permitted state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 152 and 154 are designed to assume that the player again interrupts operation of the 3A operation unit at timing tAc2-B3 and disables the auto-rapid tapping function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 3A acceptance acceptance state.

As described above, in the 3A reception acceptance state, even if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled while the 3A reception acceptance state continues, the rapid-fire display HA3, which had been in an active state until then, will not be hidden as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figures 152(f) and 154(g), even if the operation of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tAc2-B3, the rapid-fire display HA3b will continue to be in an active state even after timing tAc2-B3 (even after the 3A operation unit becomes non-operated), for example, until the "one-time video display" that was in an active state has been executed for a predetermined display time and is finished being displayed, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

Also, as with the rapid-hit display HA3a, if operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HA3b is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the rapid-hit display HA3b is made invisible is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 3A reception acceptance state, even if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 3A reception acceptance state continues and the auto-repeated function is disabled, this will not cause the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, which had been in an output state until then, to be put into a non-output state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(g), even if the operation of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tAc2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a will continue to be output after timing tAc2-B3 (even after the 3A operation unit becomes non-operated), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has been executed for the predetermined output time and is finished being output, or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state.

However, the timing tAc2-B3 shown in Figure 152 assumes that the operation of the third A operating unit is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, which began to be output at timing tAc2-B2, continues to be output.

In this regard, in the 3A reception permitted state, like the first post-acceptance output sound SA3, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is not terminated (made inaudible) when the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (made non-operated), as shown in FIG. 152(h), even if the operation of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tAc2-B3, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 will continue to be output after timing tAc2-B3 (even after the 3A operation unit is made non-operated) for the predetermined output time until it is finished being output, or for the predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Also in this example, if operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operated state while the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is being output, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite. Similarly, for the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, if operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operated state while the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is being output, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 become inaudible, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 3A acceptance-permitted state, which is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation state of the 3A operation unit.

In addition, in the 3A reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, even if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operation state) while the rapid-hit display HA3b and the first post-reception output sound SA3a are both in an execution state, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA3b is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made silent are set to be different, as shown in Figures 152(f) and 152(g). In the figure, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA3b is made invisible is set before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made silent, but the opposite relationship may also be set. Alternatively, due to the aforementioned nature that the time until the display is made invisible or silent is indefinite, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA3b is made invisible may occur both before and after the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made silent. Furthermore, there may be cases where the timing of each is the same. Note that this relationship between the rapid-hit display HA3b and the first post-reception output sound SA3a also holds true between the rapid-hit display HA3b and the second post-reception output sound SB3, and between the first post-reception output sound SA3a and the second post-reception output sound SB3, and the same can be said for other examples.

In this configuration, in the 3A reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the rapid-hit display HA3b, first post-reception output sound SA3a, and second post-reception output sound SB3b-1 are all in an active state, as shown in Figures 152(f), (g), and (h) and Figure 154(g), a situation will occur in which the rapid-hit display HA3b continues to be displayed, the first post-reception output sound SA3a continues to be output, and the second post-reception output sound SB3b-1 continues to be output, while the 3A operation unit is put into a non-operated state. However, thereafter, as time passes after the 3A operation unit is put into a non-operated state (the time has passed since timing tAc2-B3), the rapid-hit display HA3b, which had been displayed, will be hidden, as shown in Figures 152(f), (g), and (h) and Figure 154(h). This not only allows the player to easily recognize when the auto-rapid function is disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the state of the status indication JA3 (here, the state JA3b where the presentation content has progressed) that indicates the operating status, such as the ally character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, and gauge image HP-A3 (see Figure 154 (h)).

Also, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 would normally end (become inaudible) as time passes since the third A operating unit is placed in a non-operated state (the time passes from timing tAc2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 152(a), it is assumed that the 3A operation unit is again put into an operating state at timing tAc2-C1 (the performance situation shown in FIG. 154(i)), which is after timing tAc2-B3 when the 3A operation unit is put into a non-operated state, and when both the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 are in an audible state (before the output state is ended).

In this example, even if the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAc2-C1 within the 3A acceptance state, this will again trigger a "change after 3A acceptance (post-3A acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g) (the effect situation shown in Figure 154(i)), just as in the case of timing tAc2-B1 described above.

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-C1 within the 3A acceptance state, as shown in FIGS. 152(f) and 152(g), a post-3A acceptance change occurs in which the "first post-acceptance output sound SA3 (a sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "post-3A acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that when operation of the 3A operation unit is resumed at timing tAc2-C1 within the 3A reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 3A reception acceptance state does not progress from the state shown in FIG. 154(h) (first-stage progression state). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 154(i), the post-3A reception change (post-3A reception display, post-3A reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-3A reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance of the 3A operation unit at timing tAc-B2. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, as mentioned above, this example assumes that the timing tAc2-C1 at which operation of the third A operation unit is resumed occurs while both the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 are still audible.

In this regard, with regard to the first post-acceptance output sound SA3, the previous output state is terminated based on the fact that operation on the 3A operation unit is resumed (operation acceptance) at timing tAc2-C1, and a new output is initiated in response to this new operation acceptance. In contrast, with regard to the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, the previous output state is continued without any change based on the fact that operation on the 3A operation unit is resumed (operation acceptance) at timing tAc2-C1.

With this configuration, when the 3A reception-permitted state is in a state where a 3A post-reception output sound is being output in response to the reception of an operation, and an operation is received for a 3A operation unit that had been in a non-operated state until then, this will either cause the 3A post-reception output sound to end (first post-reception output sound SA3) or not end (second post-reception output sound SB3), thereby providing an ideal sense of tension when the 3A operation unit that had been in a non-operated state is put into an operating state again. It goes without saying that in the 3A reception permitted state, in addition to the case where operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is being output and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is being output, there are also cases where operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is being output and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is not being output, and there are also cases where operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is not being output and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is being output.

The rapid-hit display HA3 may also be configured to continue displaying at timing tAc2-C1. In this case, when an operation is received from the 3A operation unit, which had been in an unoperated state until then, it is desirable to terminate the previous "one-shot video display" that was in progress and start a new display (one-shot video display) in response to the new operation reception.

In addition, the presentation examples shown in Figures 152 and 154 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 3A operation unit) initiated at timing tAc2-C1 is maintained until timing tAc3, when the 3A operation acceptance state ends, thereby activating the auto-repeated function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the 3A operation unit are accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and each time, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the accepted operation (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance device operation, etc.) is executed.

And even during the "period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HA3b and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a) is the same as in the "period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3" described above (see Figure 154 (f)), unless further progress is made in the presentation. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 152, the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 is intended to assume that, of the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid function, the operation accepted at timing tAc2-C2 within that period (such as the result of the effect determination) will result in further progress (a second stage of progress) in the effect content corresponding to the 3A acceptance acceptance state (the effect situation shown in FIG. 154(j)). In particular, timing tAc2-C2 in this example is intended to assume that the effect content corresponding to the 3A acceptance acceptance state will progress to the final stage of effect mode.

In this regard, the 3A reception acceptance state differs from the 1A reception acceptance state and the 2A reception acceptance state described above in that the valid period will not be terminated midway even if the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception acceptance state progresses to the final stage of the performance mode, and occurs as a valid period of a type that will always continue until timing tAc3 (see, for example, Figures 152 (a) and (e) and 154 (j)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 152, the "3A post-acceptance change (3A post-acceptance effect)" in response to operation acceptance is executed in a manner in which the effect content has progressed only once (see FIG. 154(i)), whereas in the period from timing tAc2-C2 to timing tAc3, while the state in which operation acceptance to the 3A operation unit is permitted continues, the "3A post-acceptance change (3A post-acceptance effect)" is executed in a manner in which the effect content has progressed further (final stage effect) (see FIG. 154(j)).

More specifically, at timing tAc2-C2, as shown in FIG. 152(e) and FIG. 154(j), based on the operation received from the 3A operation unit, a display change is executed to change the state of the status suggestion display JA3, which indicates the operation status, from the previously displayed "state JA3b" to a different "state JA3c." Here, as shown in FIG. 154(j), the state changes to one in which the enemy character BOSS-A3 has been defeated, the state changes to one in which a lightning-based magic spell cast by ally character YS-A3 is exploding around the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 changes to one in which the remaining HP gauge is further reduced (here, to "0"). With this configuration, this change in state of the status suggestion display JA3 suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 3A performance acceptance state has progressed as a result of (the result of the performance determination based on) the operation received (by the auto-rapid tapping function) at timing tAc2-C2.

As mentioned above, this "mode JA3c" as a status indication JA3 corresponds to the "final stage performance mode" among the performance contents corresponding to the 3A reception-permitting state.

After further development of the presentation has been achieved in this way, when one operation is accepted by the 3A operation unit, the "one animation display" will be displayed as the "post-3A acceptance display" in a more advanced form, such as "ally character YS-A3 uses even stronger lightning magic to defeat enemy character BOSS-A3," as shown in Figure 154 (j).

In this example, once the presentation content has progressed further, the progress of the presentation content will not be returned to the state before the progress was made, as long as the 3A acceptance state continues. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted again at the 3A operation unit after the completion of one video display that has changed to the more advanced presentation content, the state when the operation was accepted at the 3A operation unit (in this case, the state in which ally character YS-A3 uses even stronger lightning magic to defeat enemy character BOSS-A3) will appear as one video display that has changed to the more advanced presentation content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tAc2-C2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, a "single video display" with further changes in appearance will be played multiple times, the number of times that operations are accepted by the auto-hit function.

Furthermore, even during the period after timing tAc2-C2, the mode (one animation display) in which ally character YS-A3 defeats enemy character BOSS-A3 using lightning-based magic of even greater strength is set to be newly executed at regular intervals (predetermined intervals) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one animation display" of a mode in which the performance content has further progressed will also be newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-hit function, and the repeated display of this "one animation display" of a progressed mode is represented in the figure as "hit-in-progression display HA3c."

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tAc2-C2" arrives, which is the timing for further progression of the effect content, the state of the situation suggestion display JA3 changes from "state JA3b" to "state JA3c," and the state of the rapid-hit display HA3 also changes from "state HA3b" to "state HA3c," as shown in Figures 152(e), (f) and 154(i), (j). From this point on, while the auto rapid-hit function is enabled (timing tAc2-C2 to tAc3), the situation suggestion display JA3 will be displayed in "state JA3c," while the rapid-hit display HA3 will be executed in "state HA3c."

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a single operation is accepted on the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance state, in addition to the "3A acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the "3A acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 152(g). As mentioned above, such "3A acceptance output sound" can include the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," as well as the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 that indicates that progress has been made in the presentation corresponding to the 3A acceptance state as shown in FIG. 152(h).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 in the example shown in FIG. 152, when timing tAc2-C2 arrives, at which time the presentation progresses, as shown in FIG. 152(h), the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 begins to be output in mode SB3b-2 based on the operation acceptance (presentation progress) at timing tAc2-C2. This allows the player to recognize that the presentation has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound.

However, in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance content advances. Therefore, when timing tAc2-C2 arrives, when the performance content advances, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation acceptance, but in the same manner as when the operation was accepted prior to timing tAc2-C2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not performance advancement occurs at timing tAc2-C2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound SA3) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will be newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the diagram as the "first post-acceptance output sound SA3a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a during this period is the same as in the "period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2" described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 152 and 154 are intended to assume that the auto-rapid function enabled at timing tAc2-C1 continues, and timing tAc3 arrives, ending the 3A acceptance permission state.

In other words, in this case, the 3A reception permission state will end while the status indication display JA3 and rapid-fire display HA3 are displayed, and the first post-reception output sound SA3 and second post-reception output sound SB3 are being output, as shown in Figures 152 (e) to (h), and the auto rapid-fire function will also be disabled.

Here, as shown in Figures 152(e) and 154(k), the situation suggestion display JA3 is hidden when the 3A reception acceptance state is terminated. In the examples shown in Figures 152(e) and 154(k), the situation suggestion display JA3 is hidden when the 3A reception acceptance state is terminated, but this is not limited to this. For example, if the situation suggestion display JA3 is hidden when a certain time (longer than 0 seconds) has passed since the timing tAc3 at which the 3A reception acceptance state is terminated, this will ensure that there is sufficient time to confirm any progress made in the presentation just before the 3A reception acceptance state is terminated. In this case, it is desirable to ensure that the timing at which the situation suggestion display JA3 is hidden is always later than the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA3, described below, is hidden.

Furthermore, unlike the first A reception allowance state (repeated tapping display HA1) and the second A reception allowance state (repeated tapping display HA2), the rapid tapping display HA3 is not made to disappear when the third A reception allowance state ends. Therefore, as shown in Figures 152(f) and 154(k), the rapid tapping display HA3b will continue to be displayed even after timing tAc3 (even after the third A reception allowance state ends), for example, until the "one video display" that was in the running state has been executed for a predetermined display time and is finished being displayed, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, when the 3A acceptance state is ended while the rapid tap display HA3 is displayed, unlike the 1A acceptance state (repeated tap display HA1) and the 2A acceptance state (repeated tap display HA2), the time from when the 3A acceptance state is ended to when the rapid tap display HA3 is hidden is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, unlike the firstA acceptance state (rapid tap display HA1) and the secondA acceptance state (rapid tap display HA2), the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is not switched to a non-output state when the thirdA acceptance state is terminated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(g), the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a will continue to be output even after timing tAc3 (even after the thirdA acceptance state is terminated) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an output state has been executed for a predetermined output time and is finished being output, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, as with the above-mentioned first A reception allowance state (rapid tap display HA1) and second A reception allowance state (rapid tap display HA2), the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is not switched to a non-output state when the third A reception allowance state ends. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(h), etc., the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 will continue to be output after timing tAc3 (even after the third A reception allowance state ends) for the predetermined output time until it is finished being output, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Also in this example, if the 3A reception acceptance state is ended while the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is being output, the time from the end of the 3A reception acceptance state to the time when the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is switched to a non-output state is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite. Similarly, for the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, if the 3A reception acceptance state is ended while the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is being output, the time from the end of the 3A reception acceptance state to the time when the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is switched to a non-output state is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, in the 3A reception permission state according to this embodiment, even when the 3A reception permission state is terminated while the rapid-hit display HA3 and the first post-reception output sound SA3a are both in execution, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA3 is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made silent are set to be different, as shown in Figures 152(f) and 152(g). In the figure, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA3 is made invisible is set to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made silent, but the opposite relationship may also be set. Alternatively, due to the aforementioned nature that the time until the display is made invisible or silent is indefinite, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA3 is made invisible may occur both before and after the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made silent. Alternatively, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HA3 is made invisible may occur both before and after the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made silent. Furthermore, the timing at which the two events occur may be the same. This relationship between the rapid-hit display HA3 and the first post-reception output sound SA3a also holds true between the rapid-hit display HA3 and the second post-reception output sound SB3, and between the first post-reception output sound SA3a and the second post-reception output sound SB3, and the same can be said for other examples.

In this configuration, in the 3A reception permission state according to this embodiment, if the player interrupts the operation of the 3A operation unit (sets it to a non-operational state) while the rapid-hit display HA3c, first post-reception output sound SA3a, and second post-reception output sound SB3b-2 are all in an execution state, the rapid-hit display HA3c will remain displayed, the first post-reception output sound SA3a will remain output, and the second post-reception output sound SB3b-2 will remain output, as shown in Figures 152(f), (g), and (h) and 154(k). However, after this, as time passes after the 3A reception permission state ends (time has passed since timing tAc3), the rapid-hit display HA3b, which had been continuing, will be hidden, and the first post-reception output sound SA3a and second post-reception output sound SB3b-2 will be set to a non-output state.

In this example, it is assumed that timing tAc2-C2 arrives after the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1, which began output at timing tAc2-B2, has become inaudible, but it may also arrive while the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 is being audibly output. In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 may be output in a manner that changes from "mode SB3b-1" to a different "mode SB3b-2" at timing tAc2-C2 (mode SB3b-1 may be terminated and mode SB3b-2 may be output instead).

The 3A reception-permitted state occurs as a reception-permitted state in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 153, if no operation is received on the 3A operation unit until timing tAc3 arrives in the 3A reception-permitted state, the 3A reception-permitted state simply ends when timing tAc3 arrives, and the post-3A reception changes that appear when an operation is performed on the 3A operation unit are not initiated.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "4A reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 155 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "4A reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 4A" as the occurrence condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 156 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "4A reception permitted state" occurs but no operation is performed by the player. Figure 157 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation content when the "4A reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "4A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the "4A fluctuation pattern." After this, it starts the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (such as a performance depiction according to the 4A fluctuation pattern, or sound output of background music playback according to the 4A fluctuation pattern (such as normal background music playback when not in a reach)), and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "4A fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 155 (c), during the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "4A variable pattern," based on the arrival of timing tAd2, when 4A time has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (based on "condition 4A" being satisfied), the above-mentioned 4A reception allowance state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in Figure 157 (a)), in which "acceptance of operations to the 4A operation unit regarding changes after 4A acceptance (such as the 4A presentation status indication display JA4, the 4A single-shot display TA4, and the post-4A acceptance output sounds SA4 and SB4)" is permitted.

Here, in the 4A reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, the "4A operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the operation button 410, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 4A reception acceptance state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 155(b) to (e), when the 4A acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-A4 that mimics the object operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 4A operation unit), a message display MA4 related to the operation on the object operated (here, the "operation button 410" as the 4A operation unit), and a status suggestion display JA4 that suggests the status of the operation are displayed at timing tAd1 before the 4A acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the 4A operation unit is permitted).

However, the model image display MG-A4, message display MA4, and situation suggestion display JA4 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 4A reception acceptance state occurs; they may be displayed simultaneously with the 4A reception acceptance state or slightly after its occurrence. However, in this example, it is particularly desirable for the situation suggestion display JA4 to be displayed before the first operation is accepted on the 4A operation unit in the 4A reception acceptance state. Furthermore, the timing at which the model image display MG-A4 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA4 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MA4 may be displayed before the model image display MG-A4 is displayed.

Once the mock image display MG-A4, message display MA4, and status suggestion display JA4 begin to display, they will continue to be displayed at least until the 4A reception permission state is terminated, regardless of the operating state of the 4A operation unit.

Here, the "Simulated Image Display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A reception allowance state uses only the "first color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme.

In addition, the "simulated image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A acceptance state is such that, when a moving image in which a portion modeled after the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144 (β) to (σ)" is considered to be a periodic change, this periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined period of 5A. However, this period of 5A is set to be a longer time (long cycle) than the period of 1A that appears in the 1A acceptance state, and may be set to be the same time as the period of 2A, for example. Therefore, in the 4A acceptance state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted slowly moving up and down within its movable range.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 156(b), the 4A reception acceptance state continues until timing tAd3 arrives when there is no operation acceptance to the 4A operation unit, and ends when timing tAd3 arrives. Therefore, while the 4A reception acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, an image within the model image display MG-A4) indicating the remaining time until timing tAd3 arrives, at which the 4A reception acceptance state ends, is depicted as decreasing over time, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be performed.

Note that if the "simulated image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A acceptance state is to begin displaying before timing tAd2, when the 4A acceptance state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAd2 before beginning the periodic changes and gauge image changes. In other words, in this case, the "simulated image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) until timing tAd2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the 4A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 155(c), (d) and 157(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A4, a message display related to the acceptance of operations for the 4A operation unit (here, operation button 410) (here, message display MA4 displayed as "Defeat the demon! Press the button repeatedly!!") is displayed.

Furthermore, in the 4A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 155 (e) and 157 (a), a situation suggestion display JA4 indicating the status of operation in the 4A acceptance state is displayed, which includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the 4A acceptance state (here, the ally character YS-A4), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 4A acceptance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-A4 depicted as a demon), and a gauge image HP-A4 showing their remaining HP gauges. In the 4A acceptance state, the likelihood of a jackpot can be indicated through the presentation of whether or not ally character YS-A4 can defeat enemy character BOSS-A4 by accepting multiple operations on the 4A operation unit (whether or not gauge image HP-A4 can be reset to 0). In other words, each time an operation (operation acceptance) is performed on the 4A operation unit (here, operation button 410), a presentation can be executed in which ally character YS-A4 attacks enemy character BOSS-A4. Note that in this example, the situation suggestion display JA4 displays ally character YS-A4, enemy character BOSS-A4, and gauge image HP-A4, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays; as long as at least one of ally character YS-A4, enemy character BOSS-A4, and gauge image HP-A4 is displayed, it is possible to indicate the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 155, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAd2-A1 within the 4A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 157 (b)).

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAd2-A1 within the 4A acceptance state, a "4A post-acceptance change (4A post-acceptance effect)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 155(e), (g), and (h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 157(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAd2-A1 within the 4A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 155(f) and 155(g), a "4A acceptance post-output sound" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after 4A acceptance, and a "4A acceptance post-display" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

That is, when a single operation is accepted on the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 4A acceptance state, the above-mentioned "display after 4A acceptance" is displayed as a single animated display in which "ally character YS-A4" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A4" with wind-based magic (smoke effects, the generation of wind-based magic, etc.), as shown in FIG. 157(b). However, as will be described later, in the 4A acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted, "enemy character BOSS-A4" is injured, the strength of the wind-based magic increases, and the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-A4 decreases (the performance content is advanced). If the presentation progresses in this way, the state when the operation was subsequently accepted by the 4A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A4" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A4" with wind-based magic) will be displayed as a single animated display that has changed to the progressed presentation (see Figures 155 (e) and (f) and Figures 157 (d), (f), and (h)).

However, as will be explained later, the 4A reception allowance state in this example, like the third reception allowance state described above, occurs as a valid period of a type that is not subject to early termination due to operation reception (before timing tAd3, at which the 4A reception allowance state ends due to the passage of time). In other words, in this case, if during the valid period of such a type (4A reception allowance state), the effect content corresponding to the 4A reception allowance state is necessarily changed (advanced) each time an operation is received, then the processing when the effect content has progressed to its final state will become problematic.

In this regard, in the above-described 3A reception-permitting state, when a further operation is received in a situation where the presentation content corresponding to the 3A reception-permitting state has progressed to the final mode, the post-acceptance change to the final mode is repeatedly caused each time the operation is received. In contrast, in the 4A reception-permitting state according to this example, when a further operation is received in a situation where the presentation content corresponding to the 4A reception-permitting state has progressed to the final mode, the operation reception triggers the appearance of the initial presentation mode (predetermined presentation mode), and the presentation is restarted from the situation where the initial presentation mode (predetermined presentation mode) appears. The initial presentation mode (predetermined presentation mode) may be the mode that appears when the 3A reception-permitting state occurs, or it may be the mode that appears based on the first operation received after the 3A reception-permitting state occurs. With this configuration, even after the presentation content has progressed to the final mode, the player can repeatedly enjoy the progression of the presentation from the initial presentation mode to the final mode. Each time the presentation content progresses, a high probability (expectation level) of a jackpot may be suggested. In this case, if a jackpot is not obtained, the initial presentation mode (predetermined presentation mode) will be displayed in response to an operation received before the final presentation mode is reached, and the presentation will be restarted from the situation where the initial presentation mode (predetermined presentation mode) is displayed.

In addition, in this example, when a single operation is accepted on the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 4A acceptance state, in addition to the "4A acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound SA4 may be output as the "4A acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 155(g). The first post-acceptance output sound SA4 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which ally character YS-A4 attacks enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind-based magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of wind-based magic)" that appears as the "4A acceptance display." At this time, as will be described later, there is also a possibility that a second post-acceptance output sound SB4 may be output as the "4A acceptance output sound." The second post-acceptance output sound SB4 in this example is output when the effects of the "4A acceptance display" progress. Note that, here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; in short, it should be something that can indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted.

In this way, in the 4A acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted on the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A4" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A4" and associated sound effects are displayed. In other words, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A4" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A4" (the presentation progresses), and when HP reaches 0, "enemy character BOSS-A4" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A4" cannot be defeated, this suggests low expectations.

This example assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 4A operation unit) initiated at timing tAd2-A1 continues until timing tAd2-A2, as shown in Figure 155(a).

However, unlike the 1A, 2A, and 3A acceptance states, the 4A acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which, even if the operation unit (4A operation unit) is maintained in an operation state, the corresponding post-operation changes (e.g., post-operation display, post-operation output sound, post-operation light emission, post-operation device operation, etc.) are not executed multiple times (the so-called auto-repeated function is not enabled)." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 155(a), during the period from timing tAd2-A1 to timing tAd2-A2 (the period in which the 4A operation unit is maintained in an operation state), operation to the 4A operation unit is only accepted once at timing tAd2-A1, and only one post-operation change (e.g., post-operation display, post-operation output sound, post-operation light emission, post-operation device operation, etc.) corresponding to the operation accepted at timing tAd2-A1 is executed.

In this example, at timing tAd2-A1, the display after acceptance of the above-mentioned 4A will begin (one animation display) showing ally character YS-A4 attacking enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind-based magic (smoke effects, the generation of wind-based magic, etc.), as shown in Figure 157(b).

More specifically, in the example shown in Figure 157(b), the display after accepting the above-mentioned 4A operation changes to enemy character BOSS-A4 appearing wounded to the first degree, ally character YS-A4's wind-based magic is displayed as a single-shot display TA4 (mode TA4a), and the gauge image HP-A4 changes to an appearance in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased by one level. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from the pre-operation "mode JA4a" to "mode JA4b," suggesting that the presentation content corresponding to the 4A operation acceptance state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAd2-A1.

As mentioned above, the status indication display JA4 that has changed in this manner will continue to be displayed at least until the 4A reception permission state ends, so the player can easily recognize the current operating status while the 4A reception permission state continues.

In contrast, the single-shot display TA4, which is depicted as wind-based magic cast by ally character YS-A4, is hidden after a predetermined time (a fixed time) has passed. The presentation examples shown in Figures 155 and 157 assume that the time has passed before timing tAd2-A2 arrives, causing the single-shot display TA4 (mode TA4a) to be hidden. Note that in this example, the single-shot display TA4 is displayed in different modes depending on the progress of the presentation content, but it may also be displayed in one mode (the same mode) regardless of the progress of the presentation content. Alternatively, in the 4A reception-permitted state in this example, when an operation is received, the mode of the situation suggestion display JA4 will always change, which can indicate that an operation has been received. Considering this, the single-shot display TA4 may not necessarily be displayed.

Furthermore, at timing tAd2-A1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (post-4A acceptance output sound) begins to be output to function as a sound effect corresponding to this post-4A acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (post-4A acceptance output sound) begins to be output in mode SB4b-1 to indicate that the effect content corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state has progressed to the first stage mode.

In this regard, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 corresponding to the 4A acceptance state continues to be output at least until the 4A acceptance state is terminated. This allows the player to easily recognize the current operating status through its appearance while the 4A acceptance state is continuing. However, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 does not necessarily have to remain in its output state while the 4A acceptance state is continuing; for example, it may be output for a predetermined output time (a time shorter than the time between timings tAd2 and tAd3) and then switched to a non-output state.

In contrast, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is muted after a predetermined time (a fixed time) has elapsed. The example performance shown in Figure 155 assumes that the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is muted after the time tAd2-A2 has arrived.

In other words, in this case, timing tAd2-A2 arrives while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 are both in an output state. However, in this example, neither the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 nor the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 undergoes any change when the 4A operating unit is put into a non-operated state (when timing tAd2-A2 arrives).

In this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; it simply needs to be able to indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted. Also, while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is output in one manner (the same manner) regardless of the progress of the presentation, it may be output in different manners depending on the progress of the presentation. Alternatively, in the 4A acceptance state in this example, when an operation is accepted, the second post-acceptance output sound SA4 is always output, and given that this can indicate that an operation has been accepted, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 may not necessarily be output.

Here, in the 4A reception acceptance state, it is possible that the player will perform an operation to put the 4A operation unit into a non-operating state and then return it to an operating state from the non-operating state before the time required for the "single video display (single display TA4)" in response to the operation reception has elapsed (while the single display TA4 is being displayed). In this case, the "single display TA4" will be executed in such a manner that the "certain amount of time" elapses between the start and end of the "single video display" in response to the operation reception, and a new "single video display" will begin execution. In this case, the new "single video display" may be executed in place of the previous "single video display" that was in the middle of execution and terminated.

Similarly, in the 4A acceptance state, there may be cases where the player performs an operation to put the 4A operation unit into a non-operating state and then return it to an operating state before the time required for the "sound effect corresponding to one video display (first post-acceptance output sound SA4)" in response to the operation acceptance has elapsed (while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is being output). In this case, the "first post-acceptance output sound SA4" will be executed in such a manner that the "certain amount of time" elapses between the start and end of the "single sound effect" in response to the operation acceptance, and a new "single sound effect" begins to be executed. However, in this case, the new "single sound effect" may be executed in place of the previous "single sound effect" that was in the middle of being executed.

As mentioned above, the "situation suggestion display JA4 (see Figure 155(e))" for the ally character YS-A4, enemy character BOSS-A4, gauge image HP-A4, etc. is not displayed until an operation is accepted, and may be implemented as appearing and displayed once an operation is accepted (until the valid period expires, or for a predetermined period of time).

In a pachinko machine 1 according to this example presentation, the presentation situation shown in Figure 157(c) appears at timing tAd2-A2, when the 4A operation unit is placed in a non-operated state. However, this presentation situation does not appear as a result of the 4A operation unit being placed in a non-operated state. Simply put, of the 4A post-acceptance display and 4A post-acceptance output sound (situation suggestion display JA4, single-shot display TA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4) that began execution at timing tAd2-A1, those for which the conditions for terminating their execution state have not yet been satisfied at the time timing tAd2-A2 arrive continue to execute (situation suggestion display JA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4), while those for which the conditions for terminating their execution state were satisfied before the time timing tAd2-A2 arrive end their execution state at that time (a time before timing tAd2-A2).

Also, in this example, if operation of the 4A operation unit is interrupted and the unit is put into a non-operating state while the single-shot display TA4 is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the single-shot display TA4 is made invisible is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation of the 4A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, in the 4A reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 4A operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the one-time display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 are both in an execution state, the timing at which the one-time display TA4 is made non-displayable and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA4 is made non-output are set to different. In this example, the relationship between which of the one-time display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 ends first is not reversed; for example, the one-time display TA4 is always set to end before the first post-reception output sound SA4.

With this configuration, in the 4A reception-permitted state of this embodiment, if the operation state of the 4A operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operating state) while the one-off display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 are both in an executing state, a situation will occur in which the one-off display TA4 continues to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound SA4 continues to be output while the 4A operation unit is in a non-operating state.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), it is assumed that at timing tAd2-B1 within the 4A reception acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 157(d)), the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operation state, and this operation state continues until timing tAd2-B2.

In this example, if the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAd2-B1 within the 4A acceptance state, this will trigger a "4A post-acceptance change (4A post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, again for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 155(e)-(h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 157(d)).

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even if operation on the 4A operation unit is resumed at timing tAd2-B1 within the 4A reception acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 4A reception acceptance state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 157(d), post-4A reception changes (post-4A reception display, post-4A reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in a manner that indicates a second stage of progress based on the reception of an operation on the 4A operation unit.

In this example, at timing tAd2-B1, as shown in FIG. 157(d), after receiving the above-mentioned 4A, the display (one animation display) begins, showing the second stage of progression in which ally character YS-A4 attacks enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind-based magic (smoke effects, the generation of wind-based magic, etc.).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 157(d), the display after accepting the 4A command changes to one in which the enemy character BOSS-A4 is wounded to the second degree, the wind magic cast by ally character YS-A4 is displayed as a single-shot display TA4 in the second-degree display TA4b, and the gauge image HP-A4 changes to one in which the HP gauge remains and has decreased by two levels. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "mode JA4b" before the second operation to "mode JA4c," suggesting that the presentation content corresponding to the 4A command acceptance state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAd2-B1.

Furthermore, at timing tAd2-B1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (post-4A acceptance sound) begins to be output to function as a sound effect corresponding to this post-4A acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (post-4A acceptance sound) begins to be output in mode SB4b-2 to indicate that the effect content corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state has progressed to the second stage.

In this example, timing tAd2-B1 occurs while the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (fourth A post-acceptance output sound), which began output at timing tAd2-A1, is still in an output state. At this time, at timing tAd2-B1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (fourth A post-acceptance output sound) ends the first-stage output state SB4b-1 and instead begins outputting in the second-stage state SB4b-2.

In addition, timing tAd2-B2 assumes that while the single display TA4 is displayed, operation of the 4A operation unit is discontinued and it is placed in a non-operated state. As mentioned above, the time from the non-operated state until the single display TA4 is hidden is not set to a fixed time but is variable.

Then, at timing tAd2-B2 when the 4A operation unit is again placed in a non-operated state, the effect shown in Figure 157(e) will appear, but this effect does not appear as a result of the 4A operation unit being placed in a non-operated state. The 4A post-acceptance display and 4A post-acceptance output sound (status suggestion display JA4, one-off display TA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4), which began execution at timing tAd2-B1, continue to execute because the conditions for terminating their execution have not yet been met at the time timing tAd2-B2 arrives.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), at timing tAd2-C1 within the 4A reception acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 157(f)), the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is once again placed in an operation state, and this operation state is assumed to continue until timing tAd2-C2.

In this example, if the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is set to an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAd2-C1 within the 4A acceptance state, this will trigger a "4A post-acceptance change (4A post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 155(e)-(h), once again, for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance (the effect situation shown in Figure 157(f)).

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even if operation is once again initiated on the 4A operation unit at timing tAd2-C1 within the 4A reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 4A reception acceptance state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 157(f), post-4A reception changes (post-4A reception display, post-4A reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in a manner that corresponds to the third stage of progress based on the reception of an operation on the 4A operation unit.

In this example, at timing tAd2-C1, the display after accepting the above-mentioned 4A will begin (one animation display) showing the third stage of progression, as shown in Figure 157(f), in which ally character YS-A4 attacks enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind-based magic (smoke effects, the generation of wind-based magic, etc.).

More specifically, in the example shown in Figure 157(f), the display after accepting the above-mentioned 4A operation changes to enemy character BOSS-A4 appearing wounded at the third stage, ally character YS-A4's wind magic is displayed as a single-shot display TA4 in the third stage display TA4c, and the gauge image HP-A4 changes to an appearance in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased by three stages. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "mode JA4c" before the second operation to "mode JA4d," suggesting that the presentation content corresponding to the 4A operation acceptance state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAd2-C1.

Furthermore, at timing tAd2-C1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (post-4A acceptance sound) begins to be output to function as a sound effect corresponding to this post-4A acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (post-4A acceptance sound) begins to be output in mode SB4b-3 to indicate that the effect corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state has progressed to the third stage.

In this example, timing tAd2-C1 occurs while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4, which began output at timing tAd2-B1, are both in an output state. At this time, at timing tAd2-C1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) will end the second-stage mode SB4b-2 that was in an output state and begin outputting in second-stage mode SB4b-3 in its place. Furthermore, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) will also end the sound that was in an output state and begin outputting again from the beginning in its place.

Then, at timing tAd2-C2, when the 4A operation unit is again placed in a non-operated state, the effect shown in FIG. 157(g) will appear. However, this effect does not appear as a result of the 4A operation unit being placed in a non-operated state. Simply put, of the 4A post-acceptance displays and 4A post-acceptance output sounds (situation suggestion display JA4, one-off display TA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4) that began execution at timing tAd2-C1, those for which the conditions for terminating their execution have not yet been met at the time timing tAd2-C2 arrive continue to execute (situation suggestion display JA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4). Those for which the conditions for terminating their execution state were met before the time timing tAd2-C2 arrive ceased execution at that time (a time before timing tAd2-C2).

Furthermore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), at timing tAd2-D1 within the 4A reception acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 157(h)), the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is once again placed in an operation state, and this operation state is assumed to continue at least until timing tAd3.

In this example, if the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is set to an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAd2-D1 within the 4A acceptance state, this will trigger a "4A post-acceptance change (4A post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 155(e) to (h), once again, for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance (the effect situation shown in Figure 157(h)).

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even if an operation is once again initiated on the 4A operation unit at timing tAd2-D1 within the 4A reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 4A reception acceptance state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 157(h), post-4A reception changes (post-4A reception display, post-4A reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in a manner that indicates a fourth stage of progress based on the reception of an operation on the 4A operation unit.

In this example, at timing tAd2-D1, as shown in Figure 157(h), after accepting the above-mentioned 4A, the final (fourth stage) progression will begin, displaying (one animation display) an action in which ally character YS-A4 attacks enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind-based magic (including smoke effects and the generation of wind-based magic), as shown in Figure 157(h).

More specifically, in the example shown in Figure 157(h), the display after the 4A acceptance changes to show that the enemy character BOSS-A4 has been defeated, the wind-based magic cast by ally character YS-A4 is displayed as a single-shot display TA4 in its final display TA4d, and the gauge image HP-A4 changes to show that the remaining HP gauge is at 0. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "Display JA4d" before the second operation to "Display JA4e," suggesting that the presentation content corresponding to the 4A acceptance state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAd2-D1.

Furthermore, at timing tAd2-D1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (post-4A acceptance sound) begins to be output to function as a sound effect corresponding to this post-4A acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (post-4A acceptance sound) begins to be output in mode SB4b-4 to indicate that the presentation content corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state has progressed to the final stage (fourth stage).

In this example, timing tAd2-D1 occurs while the second post-acceptance output sound SB4, which began output at timing tAd2-C1, is still in an output state. At this time, at timing tAd2-D1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (fourth A post-acceptance output sound) ends the third stage mode SB4b-3 that was in an output state and instead begins outputting in the final stage (fourth stage) mode SB4b-4.

The examples of effects shown in Figures 155 and 157 are based on the assumption that, of the 4A post-acceptance display and 4A post-acceptance output sound (situation suggestion display JA4, one-off display TA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4) that began execution at timing tAd2-D1, timing tAd3 arrives when the 4A acceptance state is terminated while the situation suggestion display JA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, and second post-acceptance output sound SB4 are each in execution.

In other words, in this case, the 4A reception permission state will end while the situation suggestion display JA4 is displayed and the first post-reception output sound SA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4 are being output, as shown in Figures 155 (e) to (h).

Here, as shown in Figures 155(e) and 157(i), the status indication JA4 is hidden when the 4A reception permission state is terminated.

However, as shown in Figures 155 and 157(i), with regard to the status indication display JA4, when timing tAd3 arrives, the display state up until that point may be changed (progressed) to state JA4L, and state JA4L may be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the 4A reception-permitting state has ended.

Furthermore, for the status JA4L of the situation suggestion display JA4, multiple types (JA4La-JA4Le) may be prepared as needed to correspond to the statuses (JA4a-JA4e) of the situation suggestion display JA4 that may be displayed at timing tAd3, and when timing tAd3 arrives, the status JA4L corresponding to the status displayed at that time may be selectively executed. Incidentally, the examples shown in Figures 155 and 157 assume that, in response to the status JA4e of the situation suggestion display JA that was displayed at the time timing tAd3 arrives, the status JA4e of the situation suggestion display JA4 is changed (progressed) to the status JA4Le upon the arrival of timing tAd3.

In the examples shown in Figures 155 and 157(i), the single-shot display TA4 is in a hidden state, but if timing tAd3 arrives while the single-shot display TA4 is being displayed, the termination of the 4A reception permission state will prevent the display from being hidden. In other words, in this case, the single-shot display TA4 will continue to be in an execution state even after timing tAd3 (even after the 4A reception permission state is terminated), for example, until the above-mentioned "one-time video display" that was in an execution state has been executed for a predetermined display time and is finished being displayed, or for a predetermined time from a non-operation state.

In addition, if the 4A reception permission state is ended while the one-off display TA4 is displayed, the time from when the 4A reception permission state is ended to when the one-off display TA4 is hidden is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is not switched to a non-output state when the 4A acceptance state is terminated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155(g), etc., the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 will continue to be output even after timing tAd3 (even after the 4A acceptance state is terminated) until the above-mentioned "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an output state has been executed for a predetermined output time and is finished being output, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 is not put into a non-output state when the 4A acceptance state is terminated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155(h), etc., the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 will continue to be output after timing tAd3 (even after the 4A acceptance state is terminated) for the predetermined output time until it is finished being output, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Also in this example, if the 4A reception allowance state is ended while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is being output, the time from the end of the 4A reception allowance state to the time when the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is switched off is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite. Similarly, for the second post-acceptance output sound SB4, if the 4A reception allowance state is ended while the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 is being output, the time from the end of the 4A reception allowance state to the time when the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is switched off is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, in the 4A reception permission state according to this embodiment, even when the 4A reception permission state is terminated while the one-time display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 are both in an execution state, the timing at which the one-time display TA4 is made non-displayed and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA4 is made non-output are set to be different from each other. In this example, the relationship between which of the one-time display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 is terminated first is not reversed; for example, the one-time display TA4 is always terminated before the first post-reception output sound SA4. Note that this relationship between the one-time display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 also holds true between the one-time display TA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4, and between the first post-reception output sound SA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4, and the same can be said for other examples.

The 4A reception-permitted state occurs as a reception-permitted state in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 156, if no operation is received on the 4A operation unit until timing tAd3 arrives in the 4A reception-permitted state, the 4A reception-permitted state simply ends when timing tAd3 arrives, and the 4A post-reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 4A operation unit does not begin to be executed.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "5A reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 158 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "5A reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 5A" as the occurrence condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 159 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "5A reception permitted state" occurs but no operation is performed by the player. Figure 160 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation content when the "5A reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending consumption) and the "5A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the "5A fluctuation pattern." After this, it starts the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (such as a performance depiction according to the 5A fluctuation pattern, or sound output of background music playback according to the 5A fluctuation pattern (such as normal background music playback when not in a reach)), and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "5A fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 158 (c), during the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "5A variable pattern," based on the arrival of timing tAe2, when the 5A time has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (based on the satisfaction of "condition 5A"), the above-mentioned 5A reception allowance state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in Figure 160 (a)), in which "acceptance of operations to the 5A operation unit regarding changes after 5A acceptance (such as the 5A presentation status suggestion display JA5, the 5A single display TA5, and the post-5A acceptance output sounds SA5 and SB5)" is permitted.

Here, in the 5A reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, the "5A operation unit" that accepts multiple operations is set as the sword ornament 5001, not the operation button 410, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 5A reception acceptance state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 158(b) to (e), when the 5A acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-A5 that imitates the object of operation by the player (here, the "sword decoration 5001" as the 5A operation unit), a message display MA5 related to the operation on the object of operation (here, the "sword decoration 5001" as the 5A operation unit), and a status suggestion display JA5 that suggests the status of the operation are displayed at timing tAe1 before the 5A acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the 5A operation unit is permitted).

However, the mock-up image display MG-A5, message display MA5, and situation suggestion display JA5 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 5A reception acceptance state occurs; they may be displayed simultaneously with the 5A reception acceptance state occurring or slightly after that occurrence. Furthermore, the timing at which the mock-up image display MG-A5 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA5 is displayed may be different. For example, the message display MA5 may be displayed before the mock-up image display MG-A5 is displayed.

In this example, once the mock image display MG-A5 and message display MA5 have begun to be displayed, they will continue to be displayed at least until the 5A reception permission state is terminated, regardless of the operating state of the 5A operation unit. However, the situation suggestion display JA5 will be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed.

Here, the "Simulated Image Display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A reception allowance state uses only a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme.

In addition, the "simulated image display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A acceptance state is such that, when a moving image in which a portion modeled after the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144 (β) to (σ)" is considered to be a periodic change, this periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined period of 5A. This period of 5A is set to a longer time (long cycle) than the period of 1A that appears in the 1A acceptance state, and may be set to, for example, the same time as the period of 2A. Therefore, in the 5A acceptance state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted slowly moving up and down within its movable range.

However, as mentioned above, in the 5A acceptance state, an image modeled after the sword ornament 5001 is displayed as the "Model Image Display MG-A5" instead of the operation button 410. Therefore, the "Model Image Display MG-A5" is not actually displayed in the "form shown in Figure 144 (α)," but rather appears as a form in which the "form shown in Figure 144 (α)" has been replaced with an image modeled after the sword ornament 5001, rather than the operation button 410.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 159(b), the 5A reception acceptance state continues until timing tAe3 arrives when there is no operation acceptance to the 5A operation unit, and ends when timing tAe3 arrives. Therefore, while the 5A reception acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, an image within the model image display MG-A5) indicating the remaining time until timing tAe3 arrives, at which the 5A reception acceptance state ends, is depicted as decreasing over time, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be performed.

Note that if the "Mock Image Display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A acceptance state is to begin displaying before timing tAe2 when the 5A acceptance state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAe2 before beginning its periodic changes and changes in the gauge image. In other words, in this case, the "Mock Image Display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) (in reality, replaced with an image made by simulating the sword ornament 5001) until timing tAe2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the 5A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 158(c), (d) and 160(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A5, a message display related to the acceptance of operations for the 5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001) (here, message display MA5 displayed as "Defeat the goblins! 'Striking' the sword!!") is displayed.

Furthermore, in the 5A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 158(e) and 160(a), a situation suggestion display JA5 indicating the status of operation in the 5A acceptance state is displayed, which includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the 5A acceptance state (here, the ally character YS-A5), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 5A acceptance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-A5 depicted as a goblin), and a gauge image HP-A5 showing their remaining HP gauges. In the 5A operation acceptance state, the likelihood of a jackpot can be indicated through the presentation of whether or not ally character YS-A5 can defeat enemy character BOSS-A5 by accepting multiple operations on the 5A operation unit (whether or not gauge image HP-A5 can be reset to 0). In other words, each time an operation (operation acceptance) is performed on the 5A operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001), a presentation can be executed in which ally character YS-A5 attacks enemy character BOSS-A5. Note that in this example, the situation suggestion display JA5 displays ally character YS-A5, enemy character BOSS-A5, and gauge image HP-A5, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays; as long as at least one of ally character YS-A5, enemy character BOSS-A5, and gauge image HP-A5 is displayed, it is possible to indicate the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 158, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tAe2-A1 within the 5A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 160 (b)).

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tAe2-A1 within the 5A acceptance state, a "5A post-acceptance change (5A post-acceptance effect)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 158(e)-(h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 160(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001)" at timing tAe2-A1 within the 5A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 158(f) and 158(g), a change occurs after 5A acceptance, in which a "5A post-acceptance output sound" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001)" is audibly output, and a "5A post-acceptance display" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001)" begins to be displayed.

That is, when a single operation is accepted on the "5A operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001)" in the 5A acceptance state, the above-mentioned "display after 5A acceptance" is displayed as a single animated display in which "ally character YS-A5" uses swordsmanship to attack "enemy character BOSS-A5" (e.g., smoke effects, slashing effects, etc.), as shown in FIG. 160(b). However, as will be described later, in the 5A acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted, "enemy character BOSS-A5" is injured, the strength of the swordsmanship increases, and the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-A5 decreases (the performance content progresses). If the presentation progresses in this way, the state when the operation was subsequently accepted by the 5A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A5" uses swordsmanship to attack "enemy character BOSS-A5") will be displayed as a single animated display that has changed to the progressed presentation (see Figures 158 (e) and (f) and Figures 160 (d), (f), and (h)).

However, as will be explained later, the 5A reception allowance state in this example, like the third reception allowance state and fourth reception allowance state described above, occurs as a valid period of a type that is not subject to early termination due to operation reception (before timing tAe3, when the 5A reception allowance state ends due to the passage of time). In other words, in this case, if during the valid period of such a type (5A reception allowance state), the effect content corresponding to the 5A reception allowance state is necessarily changed (advanced) each time an operation is received, then the processing when the effect content has progressed to its final state will become problematic.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned 3A reception-permitting state, when an operation is further accepted in a situation where the presentation content corresponding to the 3A reception-permitting state has progressed to its final state, a post-acceptance change related to the final state is repeatedly generated each time the operation is accepted. In contrast, in the 5A reception-permitting state according to this example, when an operation is further accepted in a situation where the presentation content corresponding to the 5A reception-permitting state has progressed to its final state, a post-acceptance change related to the final state can also be repeatedly generated each time the operation is accepted. However, as will be described later, in the 5A reception-permitting state according to this example, when an operation is further accepted while a post-acceptance display (5A post-acceptance display) is being displayed due to a post-acceptance change related to the final state, the post-acceptance display related to the final state is not re-displayed, but rather the displayed state of the post-acceptance display is maintained and continued. Furthermore, once the post-acceptance output sound (5A post-acceptance output sound) has been output in the final mode, it will not be output again even if further operations are accepted, regardless of the output status of the post-acceptance output sound for that final mode. With this configuration, once the performance content has progressed to the final mode, even if further operations are accepted, post-acceptance changes for the final mode are less likely to occur, or their execution mode is limited (at least the post-acceptance output sound will not be output), thereby preventing the "5A operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001)" from being handled carelessly.

In addition, in this example, when a single operation is accepted on the "5A operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" in the 5A acceptance state, in addition to the "5A acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound SA5 may be output as the "5A acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 158(g). The first post-acceptance output sound SA5 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which ally character YS-A5 uses swordsmanship to attack enemy character BOSS-A5 (such as the generation of a smoke effect or a slashing effect)" that appears as the "5A acceptance display." At this time, as will be described later, there is also a possibility that a second post-acceptance output sound SB5 may be output as the "5A acceptance output sound." The second post-acceptance output sound SB5 in this example is output when the performance of the "5A acceptance display" progresses. Note that, here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; in short, it should be something that can indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted.

In this way, in the 5A acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted on the "5A operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001)," an image of "ally character YS-A5" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A5" and associated sound effects are displayed. In other words, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A5" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A5" (the presentation progresses), and when HP reaches 0, "enemy character BOSS-A5" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A5" cannot be defeated, this suggests low expectations.

This example assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 5A operation unit) initiated at timing tAe2-A1 continues until timing tAe2-A2, as shown in Figure 158(a).

However, unlike the 1A, 2A, and 3A reception allowance states, the 5A reception allowance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which, even if the operation unit (5A operation unit) is maintained in an operation state, the corresponding post-operation changes (e.g., post-operation display, post-operation output sound, post-operation light emission, post-operation device operation, etc.) are not executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated function is not enabled)." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158(a), during the period from timing tAe2-A1 to timing tAe2-A2 (the period in which the 5A operation unit is maintained in an operation state), operation is only accepted once at timing tAe2-A1 for the 5A operation unit, and only one post-operation change (e.g., post-operation display, post-operation output sound, post-operation light emission, post-operation device operation, etc.) corresponding to the operation accepted at timing tAe2-A1 is executed.

In this example, at timing tAe2-A1, the display after acceptance of the above-mentioned 5A begins (one video display) of ally character YS-A5 using swordsmanship to attack enemy character BOSS-A5 (including the generation of smoke effects and slashing effects), as shown in Figure 160(b).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 160(b), the display after accepting the 5A operation changes to one in which the enemy character BOSS-A5 has sustained a first stage of injury, a sword attack by ally character YS-A5 is displayed as a single display TA5 (display TA5a), and the gauge image HP-A5 changes to one in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased by one stage. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) changes from "display JA5a" before the operation to "display JA5b," suggesting that the presentation content corresponding to the 5A operation acceptance state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAe2-A1.

However, as mentioned above, the status indication display JA5 that has changed in this way will not necessarily continue to be displayed until the 5A acceptance state is terminated; in other words, it will be displayed for a predetermined period (a fixed period) from the time the status change occurs (from the time the operation is accepted) and then will be hidden.

Furthermore, the single-shot display TA5, which depicts a sword attack by ally character YS-A5, is hidden after a predetermined time (a fixed time). The presentation examples shown in Figures 158 and 160 assume that the time has passed before timing tAe2-A2 arrives, causing the single-shot display TA5 (mode TA5a) to be hidden. Note that in this example, the single-shot display TA5 is displayed in different modes depending on the progress of the presentation content, but it may also be displayed in one mode (the same mode) regardless of the progress of the presentation content. Alternatively, in the 5A reception-permitted state in this example, when an operation is received, a change in the mode of the situation suggestion display JA5 always occurs, which can indicate that an operation has been received. Considering this, the single-shot display TA5 may not necessarily be displayed.

Furthermore, at timing tAe2-A1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (post-5A acceptance sound) begins to be output to function as a sound effect corresponding to this post-5A acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (post-5A acceptance sound) begins to be output in mode SB5b-1 to indicate that the effect content corresponding to the 5A acceptance permission state has progressed to the first stage mode.

In this regard, the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 corresponding to the 5A acceptance state is output for a predetermined time (a fixed time shorter than the time between timings tAe2 and tAe3) from the time the performance advances (when the operation that causes the performance advances is accepted) and then is made non-output. Similarly, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is made non-output after the predetermined time (fixed time) has elapsed.

The example of the effect shown in Figure 158 assumes that the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are switched off after timing tAe2-A2 arrives.

In other words, in this case, timing tAe2-A2 arrives while the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are both in an output state. However, in this example, neither the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 nor the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 undergoes any change when the 5A operating unit is placed in a non-operated state (when timing tAe2-A2 arrives).

In this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; it simply needs to be something that can suggest that an operation by the player has been accepted. Also, while the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is output in one manner (the same manner) regardless of the progress of the presentation, it may be output in different manners depending on the progress of the presentation. Alternatively, in the 5A acceptance-permitted state in this example, the second post-acceptance output sound SA5 is always output when an operation is accepted, and considering that this can suggest that an operation has been accepted, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 may not necessarily be output.

Here, in the 5A reception acceptance state, it is possible that the player will perform an operation to put the 5A operation unit into a non-operating state and then return it to an operating state from the non-operating state before the time required for the "single video display (single display TA5)" in response to the operation reception has elapsed (while the single display TA5 is being displayed). In this case, the "single display TA5" will be executed in such a manner that the "certain amount of time" elapses between the start and end of the "single video display" in response to the operation reception, and a new "single video display" will begin execution. In this case, the new "single video display" may be executed in place of the previous "single video display" that was in the middle of execution and terminated.

Similarly, in the 5A acceptance state, there may be cases where the player performs an operation to place the 5A operation unit in a non-operating state and then return it to an operating state before the time required for the "sound effect corresponding to one video display (first post-acceptance output sound SA5)" in response to the operation acceptance has elapsed (while the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is being output). In this case, the "first post-acceptance output sound SA5" will be executed in such a manner that the "certain amount of time" elapses between the start and end of the "single sound effect" in response to the operation acceptance, and a new "single sound effect" begins to be executed. However, in this case, the new "single sound effect" may be executed in place of the previous "single sound effect" that was in the middle of being executed.

As mentioned above, the "situation suggestion display JA5 (see Figure 158 (e))" for the ally character YS-A5, enemy character BOSS-A5, gauge image HP-A5, etc. is not displayed until an operation is accepted, and may be implemented as appearing and displayed once an operation is accepted (until the valid period expires, or for a predetermined period of time).

In a pachinko machine 1 according to this example presentation, the presentation situation shown in Figure 160(c) appears at timing tAe2-A2 when the 5A operation unit is placed in a non-operated state. However, this presentation situation does not appear as a result of the 5A operation unit being placed in a non-operated state. Simply put, of the 5A post-acceptance display and 5A post-acceptance output sound (situation suggestion display JA5, single display TA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5) that began execution at timing tAe2-A1, those for which the conditions for terminating their execution state have not yet been satisfied at the time timing tAe2-A2 arrive continue to execute (situation suggestion display JA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5), while those for which the conditions for terminating their execution state were satisfied before the time timing tAe2-A2 arrive end their execution state at that time (a time before timing tAe2-A2).

Also, in this example, if the operation of the 5A operation unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operating state while the one-off display TA5 or the situation suggestion display JA5 is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-display state until the one-off display TA5 or the situation suggestion display JA5 is put into a non-display state is not set to a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation of the 5A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 or the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-output state for the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 or the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

In addition, in the 5A reception permission state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 5A operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the one-off display TA5, the status suggestion display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are all in an execution state, the timing at which the one-off display TA5, the status suggestion display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are set to a non-execution state (not displayed, not output) is set to a different state. In this example, the order in which they are terminated is not changed; for example, the one-off display TA5 is terminated earliest among them.

With this configuration, in the 5A reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 5A operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operating state) while the one-off display TA5, the status suggestion display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are each in an executing state, a situation will appear in which the one-off display TA5, the status suggestion display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 continue to be executed while the 5A operation unit is in a non-operating state.

However, in this example, as shown in Figures 158(a) and 160(d), it is assumed that even when the single display TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 all end their execution states, no new operations are accepted by the 5A operation unit.

In this example, while the single-shot display TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are all in a non-executed state, as shown in FIG. 158(a), at timing tAe2-B1 within the 5A acceptance acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 160(e)), the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is again put into an operating state, and this operating state is assumed to continue until timing tAe2-B2.

In this example, if the "5A operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAe2-B1 within the 5A acceptance state, this will trigger a "5A post-acceptance change (5A post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, again for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 158(e)-(h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 160(e)).

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even if operation on the 5A operation unit is resumed at timing tAe2-B1 within the 5A reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 5A reception acceptance state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 160(e), post-5A reception changes (post-5A reception display, post-5A reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in a manner that indicates a second stage of progress based on the acceptance of an operation on the 5A operation unit.

In this example, at timing tAe2-B1, as shown in FIG. 160(e), after accepting the above-mentioned 5A, a display (one video display) of ally character YS-A5 using swordsmanship to attack enemy character BOSS-A5 in the second stage of progression begins, as shown in FIG. 160(e) (smoke effects, slashing effects, etc.).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 160(e), the display after accepting the 5A operation changes to one in which the enemy character BOSS-A5 is wounded to the second stage, a sword attack by ally character YS-A5 is displayed as a single display TA5 in the second stage display TA5b, and the gauge image HP-A5 changes to one in which the HP gauge remains and has decreased by two stages. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) changes from "mode JA5b" before the second operation to "mode JA5c," suggesting that the performance content corresponding to the 5A operation acceptance state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAe2-B1.

Furthermore, at timing tAe2-B1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output to function as a sound effect corresponding to this 5A post-acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output in mode SB5b-2 to indicate that the effect corresponding to the 5A acceptance permission state has progressed to the second stage.

Here, timing tAe2-B1 may arrive while the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5th A post-acceptance output sound) that began output at timing tAe2-A1 is still in an output state. In this case, at timing tAe2-B1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5th A post-acceptance output sound) may end the first-stage mode SB5b-1 that was in an output state and instead begin outputting in the second-stage mode SB5b-2.

In addition, timing tAe2-B2 assumes that while the single display TA5 is displayed, operation of the 5A operation unit is discontinued and it is placed in a non-operated state. As mentioned above, the time from the non-operated state to the non-display of the single display TA5 is not set to a fixed time but is variable.

At time tAe2-B2 when the 5A operation unit is again placed in a non-operated state, the conditions for terminating the 5A post-acceptance display and 5A post-acceptance output sound (status suggestion display JA5, one-off display TA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5) that began execution at time tAe2-B1 have not yet been met, so they continue to be executed and no changes will occur as a result of time tAe2-B2.

Furthermore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 158(a), at timing tAe2-C1 within the 5A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 160(f)), the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is once again put into an operation state, and this operation state is assumed to continue until timing tAe2-C2.

In this example, if the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAe2-C1 within the 5A acceptance state, this will trigger the "5A post-acceptance change (5A post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance to occur once again, for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 158(e)-(h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 160(f)).

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even if operation on the 5A operation unit is initiated again at timing tAe2-C1 within the 5A reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 5A reception acceptance state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 160(f), post-5A reception changes (post-5A reception display, post-5A reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in a manner that corresponds to the third stage of progress (here, the final stage of progress) based on the reception of an operation on the 5A operation unit.

In this example, at timing tAe2-C1, the display after accepting the above-mentioned 5A begins (one video display) showing the final (third stage) progression of ally character YS-A5 using swordsmanship to defeat enemy character BOSS-A5 (including smoke effects and slashing effects), as shown in Figure 160(f).

More specifically, in the example shown in Figure 160(f), the display after the 5A acceptance changes to one in which the enemy character BOSS-A5 has been defeated, a sword attack by ally character YS-A5 is displayed as a single-shot display TA5 in the third stage display TA5c, and the gauge image HP-A5 changes to one in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased to 0. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) changes from "Display JA5c" before the second operation to "Display JA5d," suggesting that the presentation content corresponding to the 5A acceptance acceptance state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAe2-C1.

Furthermore, at timing tAe2-C1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (post-5A acceptance sound) begins to be output to function as a sound effect corresponding to this post-5A acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (post-5A acceptance sound) begins to be output in mode SB5b-3 to indicate that the effect corresponding to the 5A acceptance permission state has progressed to the third stage.

In this example, timing tAe2-C1 occurs while the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5, which began output at timing tAe2-B1, are both in an output state. At this time, at timing tAe2-C1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) ends the second-stage mode SB5b-2 that was in an output state and begins outputting in second-stage mode SB5b-3 instead. Furthermore, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) also ends the sound that was in an output state and starts outputting again from the beginning instead.

Then, at timing tAe2-C2, when the 5A operation unit is again placed in a non-operated state, the visual effect shown in FIG. 160(g) will appear. However, this visual effect does not appear as a result of the 5A operation unit being placed in a non-operated state. Simply put, of the 5A post-acceptance display and 5A post-acceptance output sound (situation suggestion display JA5, one-off display TA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5) that began execution at timing tAe2-C1, those for which the conditions for terminating their execution have not yet been met at the time tAe2-C2 arrive continue to execute (situation suggestion display JA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5). Those for which the conditions for terminating their execution were met before the time tAe2-C2 arrive end their execution at that time (a time before timing tAe2-C2).

However, in this example, as shown in Figures 158(a) and 160(h), it is assumed that even when the single display TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 all end their execution states, no new operations are accepted by the 5A operation unit.

In this example, while the single-shot display TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are all in a non-executed state, as shown in FIG. 158(a), at timing tAe2-D1 in the 5A acceptance permitted state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 160(i)), the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is once again put into an operating state, and this operating state is assumed to continue at least until timing tAe3.

As mentioned above, the presentation content corresponding to the 5A reception-permitted state has already progressed to its final state due to the operation reception at timing tAe2-C1. In this presentation example, even if an operation is further received at timing tAe2-D1 under these circumstances, as shown in Figures 158(a) and 160(i), the situation suggestion display JA5 and single display TA5 will begin execution in the same state (final state) as when execution began at timing tAe2-C1, corresponding to the single operation reception.

However, as mentioned above, in this performance example, once the 5A post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5) has been output in the final mode, it will not be output again even if further operation is accepted, regardless of the output status of the post-acceptance output sound in that final mode. Therefore, when an operation is accepted at timing tAe2-D1, the 5A post-acceptance display (single display TA5, situation suggestion display JA5) will begin to be executed in response to that operation acceptance, but the 5A post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5) will not be executed.

In this example, we assume that timing tAe2-D1 occurs after the situation suggestion display JA5d (final mode), which began displaying at timing tAe2-C1, is hidden. However, it is also possible that timing tAe2-D1 occurs while the situation suggestion display JA5d (final mode), which began displaying at timing tAe2-C1, is still displayed (an operation is accepted). In this case, at timing tAe2-D1, the situation suggestion display JA5d (final mode), which had been displayed up until that point, may be hidden and allowed to continue in its displayed state, rather than being redisplayed. In this case, the time for which the displayed state is maintained and continued may be reset based on timing tAe2-D1 rather than timing tAe2-C1. In this case, not only will no new output sound be output after the 5A is accepted at timing tAe2-D1, but the situation suggestion display JA5d (final mode) will also not be redisplayed.

The examples shown in Figures 158 and 160 assume that the 5A post-acceptance display, which began execution at timing tAe2-D1, is put into a non-executing state, and then timing tAe3 arrives, at which the 5A acceptance permission state ends.

However, it is possible that timing tAe3 arrives while the 5A post-reception display is still displayed. In this case, the 5A post-reception display, which had been displayed until then, may be hidden based on the arrival of timing tAe3.

It is also possible that timing tAe3 arrives while the post-5A reception output sound is in an output state. In this case, the post-5A reception output sound that had been in an output state until then may be switched to a non-output state upon the arrival of timing tAe3. However, while the post-5A reception display that had been in a displayed state until then may be switched to a non-display state upon the arrival of timing tAe3, the post-5A reception output sound that had been in an output state until then may continue to be output without being switched to a non-output state.

The 5A acceptance state occurs as a state in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 159, if no operation is accepted on the 5A operation unit until timing tAe3 arrives in the 5A acceptance state, the 5A acceptance state simply ends when timing tAe3 arrives, and the 5A post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is made on the 5A operation unit is not initiated.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "6A reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). Figure 161 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "6A reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 6A" as the occurrence condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 162 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "6A reception permitted state" occurs but no operation is performed by the player. Figure 163 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation content when the "6A reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "6A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the "6A fluctuation pattern." After this, it starts the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (such as a performance depiction according to the 6A fluctuation pattern, or sound output of background music playback according to the 6A fluctuation pattern (such as normal background music playback when not in a reach)), and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "6A fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 161 (c), during the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "6A variable pattern," the arrival of timing tAf2, when 6A time has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (based on "condition 6A" being satisfied), can trigger the above-mentioned 6A reception permissible state (valid period) in which "acceptance of operations to the 6A operation unit regarding post-6A acceptance changes (6A presentation status suggestion display JA6, 6A single display TA6, post-6A acceptance output sounds SA6, SB6, etc.)" is permitted (the situation shown in Figure 163 (a)).

Here, the 6A reception permission state in this embodiment allows reception of operations to the "6A operation unit" only once until the 6A reception permission state is terminated, and the above-mentioned operation button 410 is set as the "6A operation unit."

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 161(b) to (e), when the 6A acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-A6 that mimics the object operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6A operation unit), a message display MA6 related to the operation on the object operated (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6A operation unit), and a status suggestion display JA6 that suggests the status of the operation are displayed at timing tAf1 before the 6A acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the 6A operation unit is permitted).

However, the mock-up image display MG-A6, message display MA6, and situation suggestion display JA6 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 6A reception-permitting state occurs; they may be displayed simultaneously with the 6A reception-permitting state occurring or slightly after that occurrence. Furthermore, the timing at which the mock-up image display MG-A6 and the timing at which the message display MA6 are displayed may be different. For example, the message display MA6 may be displayed before the mock-up image display MG-A6 is displayed.

Here, the "Simulated Image Display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A reception acceptance state can selectively use either a "first color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" or a "second color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme.

In addition, the "simulated image display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A acceptance state is such that, when a moving image in which a portion modeled after the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144 (β) to (σ)" is considered to be a periodic change, this periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined period of 6A. This period of 6A is set to a longer time (long cycle) than the period of 1A that appears in the 1A acceptance state, and may be set to, for example, the same time as the period of 2A. Therefore, in the 6A acceptance state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted slowly moving up and down within its movable range.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 162(b), the 6A reception acceptance state continues until timing tAf3 arrives when there is no operation acceptance to the 6A operation unit, and ends when timing tAf3 arrives. Therefore, while the 6A reception acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, an image within the model image display MG-A6) indicating the remaining time until timing tAf3 arrives, at which the 6A reception acceptance state will end, is depicted as decreasing over time, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be performed.

Note that if the "Mock Image Display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A acceptance state is to begin displaying before timing tAf2 when the 6A acceptance state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAf2 before beginning the periodic changes and changes in the gauge image. In other words, in this case, the "Mock Image Display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) (in reality, replaced with an image simulating the operation button 410) until timing tAf2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the 6A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 161(c), (d) and 163(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A6, a message display related to the acceptance of operations on the 6A operation unit (here, operation button 410) (here, message display MA6 displayed as "Defeat the wizard! 'One hit' with the hammer!!") is displayed.

Furthermore, in the 6A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 161 (e) and 163 (a), a situation suggestion display JA6 indicating the status of operation in the 6A acceptance state is displayed, which includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the 6A acceptance state (here, the ally character YS-A6), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 6A acceptance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-A6 depicted as a wizard), and a gauge image HP-A6 showing their remaining HP gauges. In the 6A acceptance state, the likelihood of a jackpot can be indicated through the presentation of whether or not a single operation on the 6A operation unit will allow the ally character YS-A6 to defeat the enemy character BOSS-A6 (whether or not the gauge image HP-A6 can be reset to 0). In other words, when an operation (operation acceptance) is performed on the 6A operation unit (here, operation button 410), this can trigger a presentation in which the ally character YS-A6 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A6. Note that in this example, the situation suggestion display JA6 displays the ally character YS-A6, the enemy character BOSS-A6, and the gauge image HP-A6, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays; as long as at least one of the ally character YS-A6, the enemy character BOSS-A6, and the gauge image HP-A6 is displayed, it is possible to indicate the operational status.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 161, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAf2-A1 within the 6A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 163 (b)).

In this example, if an operation is accepted for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAf2-A1 within the 6A acceptance state, a "6A post-acceptance change (6A post-acceptance effect)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 161(e) to (h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 163(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAf2-A1 within the 6A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 161(e) to 161(h), a "6A acceptance post-output sound" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after 6A acceptance, and a "6A acceptance post-display (single display TA6, situation suggestion display JA6)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

In other words, when a single operation is accepted for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 6A acceptance state, the "post-6A acceptance display" is displayed as a single animated image of "ally character YS-A6" using a hammer to attack "enemy character BOSS-A6" (including the generation of an impact effect), as shown in FIG. 163(b).

In this example, a single video display first displays a hammer attack by ally character YS-A6 as a single display TA6. As a result, two modes are provided: one in which enemy character BOSS-A6 is defeated, and one in which enemy character BOSS-A6 is not defeated. The example shown in Figure 163(b) assumes the display of the mode in which enemy character BOSS-A6 is defeated.

More specifically, in the example shown in Figures 161 and 163, the "enemy character BOSS-A6" is defeated, the strength of the hammer increases, and the remaining HP gauge in the gauge image HP-A6 changes to 0. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA6 (enemy character BOSS-A6, ally character YS-A6, gauge image HP-A6) changes from the "state JA6a" before the operation to "state JA6b," suggesting that the player is now in an operational state in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 has been defeated (indicating that there is a high possibility that a jackpot has been achieved).

Although not shown in the figures, an attack using the hammer by ally character YS-A6 is displayed as a single-shot display TA6, and if a situation arises in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 is not defeated as a result, the enemy character BOSS-A6 survives, the strength of the hammer decreases, and the gauge image HP-A6 changes so that a portion of the remaining HP gauge remains. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA6 (enemy character BOSS-A6, ally character YS-A6, gauge image HP-A6) changes from the pre-operation "mode JA6a" to a different mode, "mode JA6b," suggesting that the player is in an operational situation in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 cannot be defeated (indicating that the chances of winning the jackpot are low).

In addition, in this example, when an operation is accepted on the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 6A acceptance state, in addition to the "6A post-acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound SA6 may be output as the "6A post-acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 161(g). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which ally character YS-A6 attacks enemy character BOSS-A6 with a hammer (single display TA6)" that appears as the "6A post-acceptance display." Note that, in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; it simply needs to indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted.

At this time, a second post-acceptance output sound SB6 is also output as the "6A post-acceptance output sound." In this example, different versions of the second post-acceptance output sound SB6 are provided for when the enemy character BOSS-A6 is successfully defeated (when the expectation level is high) and when the enemy character BOSS-A6 is not successfully defeated (when the expectation level is low), and the sound is output in either of these versions.

In this way, in the 6A acceptance state, when an operation is accepted on the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)," an image of "ally character YS-A6" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A6" and a corresponding sound effect are displayed. In other words, when the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A6" is reduced to 0 with a single attack by "ally character YS-A6," it is assumed that "enemy character BOSS-A6" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A6" cannot be defeated, it is suggested that expectations are low.

This example assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 6A operation unit) initiated at timing tAf2-A1 continues until timing tAf2-A2, as shown in Figure 161(a).

However, the 6A acceptance state only allows one operation to be accepted from the 6A operation unit. Therefore, a second operation will not be accepted between timing tAf2-A1 and timing tAf2-A2, and timing tAf2-A2 will not trigger any changes to the effects currently in execution.

Furthermore, the single display TA6, situation suggestion display JA6, first post-acceptance output sound SA6, and second post-acceptance output sound SB6, which began execution at timing tAf2-A1, are each executed for a predetermined period of time before being deactivated. These effects are executed for different periods of time, and each ends its execution state at a different time.

Furthermore, the execution states of the single display TA6, situation suggestion display JA6, first post-acceptance output sound SA6, and second post-acceptance output sound SB6, which began at timing tAf2-A1, will end an indefinite period of time from timing tAf2-A2.

In this example, the single-shot display TA6 is displayed in the same display mode when it appears that the enemy character BOSS-A6 has been defeated and when it appears that the enemy character BOSS-A6 has not been defeated. However, the single-shot display TA6 does not necessarily have to be displayed. Similarly, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 is output in the same mode when it appears that the enemy character BOSS-A6 has been defeated and when it appears that the enemy character BOSS-A6 has not been defeated. However, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 does not necessarily have to be output.

The 6A acceptance state is also generated as a state in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 162, if no operation is accepted on the 6A operation unit until timing tAf3 arrives in the 6A acceptance state, not only will the 6A acceptance state end upon the arrival of timing tAf3, but the 6A post-acceptance change will begin to be executed in the manner that appears when an operation is made on the 6A operation unit, as shown in FIG.

The 6A acceptance state may also be generated as a state in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. In other words, in this case, the 6A acceptance state is simply ended upon arrival of timing tAb3, and the 6A post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is performed on the 6A operation unit will no longer be initiated.

In addition, while the "1A Operation Unit," "2A Operation Unit," "3A Operation Unit," "4A Operation Unit," and "6A Operation Unit" in the above-described example are all implemented as "operation buttons 410," some of these operation units may be implemented as operation units different from "operation buttons 410." For example, they may be replaced with configurations that result when an operation unit represented as a mockup display in each operation acceptance state is operated. That is, the "1A Operation Unit," "2A Operation Unit," "3A Operation Unit," and "4A Operation Unit" may be displayed as a mockup display and accept multiple operations, while the "6A Operation Unit" may be displayed as a mockup display and accept only one operation. However, the "1A Operation Unit," "2A Operation Unit," "3A Operation Unit," "4A Operation Unit," and "6A Operation Unit" will all be provided as operation units different from the "5A Operation Unit."

In addition, the "post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display)" that occurs when an operation is accepted during each acceptance period (acceptance-permitted state) in the above-mentioned presentation examples does not necessarily indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot. For example, it may occur as an acceptance period to determine whether the probability fluctuation function will be enabled during the jackpot game execution period, and be executed as the post-acceptance display. Alternatively, it may occur based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions during various interval periods, and be executed as the post-acceptance display. Therefore, the acceptance period in the above-mentioned presentation examples does not necessarily occur during the period in which the pattern fluctuation is being executed. Furthermore, even when such a post-acceptance display that does not indicate the likelihood of winning is displayed, multiple modes for the post-acceptance display may be prepared, and the display may be displayed in any of these modes.

Furthermore, the mock-up image display can be displayed in the same form (or a similar form) when the periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and when the periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time." However, when the periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time," the mock-up image display may be displayed in at least the first form and the second form; and when the periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time," the mock-up image display may not be displayed in the second form (or a similar form), but may be displayed in the first form (or a similar form).

Incidentally, unlike color schemes or light emissions, cyclical changes in the model image display are a phenomenon that occurs over time, and so it takes a relatively long time to distinguish whether they are long or short. Furthermore, it can be said to be difficult to reliably distinguish whether the currently displayed cyclical change in the model image display is long or short (because not both long and short cycles are displayed). However, on the other hand, if players can distinguish between the two, they will be able to enjoy their value as a new source of information, and so it is through this difficulty in distinguishing between them and their value as a source of information that new dramatic effects can be provided.

Furthermore, in the second A reception permitted state according to the above-described effect example, when the auto-rapid tapping function is enabled, the first post-reception output sound SA2a is triggered by the arrival of timing tAb2-B2, which is the timing at which the effect content progresses, and a new "sound effect" begins to be output. However, instead of this, the arrival of timing tAb2-B2 may not trigger the start of output of a new "sound effect," and the output (sound effect) may continue in the same manner as before.

In other words, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a does not necessarily have to be realized as a repeated sound effect. For example, it may be realized as an output in the following manner: "The sound effect based on a single piece of data that began to be output when an operation was accepted continues as long as the operation state is maintained (based on the judgment of the operation acceptance detected each time) (provided the auto-rapid function is enabled), and ends when the operation state is no longer maintained." In this case, even if timing tAb2-B2, the timing at which the so-called auto-rapid function advances the effect content, arrives while such first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is being output, this may trigger no change in the output mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a (the sound effect based on a single piece of data), and the playback state may continue. In this sense, the auto-rapid function in this example can be said to be a function that periodically judges that the operation state is being maintained simply by maintaining the operation state. Even if the second A reception permitted state is realized in this configuration, new post-reception changes (second post-reception output sound SB2) will occur multiple times at intervals that are indefinite and longer than the specified time, at least the number of times the performance has progressed.

It is desirable that the interval at which the auto-rapid tapping function determines whether or not the device is in an operating state in the acceptance state be set to a time shorter than any of cycle 1A time, cycle 2A time, cycle 3A time, cycle 4A time, cycle 5A time, and cycle 6A time. However, the interval at which the auto-rapid tapping function determines whether or not the device is in an operating state in the acceptance state may differ depending on the type of acceptance state. For example, the interval at which the auto-rapid tapping function determines whether or not the device is in an operating state (operation acceptance) in the 2A acceptance state may be different from the interval at which the auto-rapid tapping function determines whether or not the device is in an operating state (operation acceptance) in the 1A acceptance state or the 3A acceptance state. Furthermore, the interval at which the auto-rapid tapping function determines whether or not the device is in an operating state (operation acceptance) may be the same in the 1A acceptance state and the 3A acceptance state.

Furthermore, when an operation target for which the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled is maintained in an operation state, in a type of acceptance acceptance state (such as the first A acceptance acceptance state or the third A acceptance acceptance state) in which the post-acceptance change is newly initiated at regular intervals (predetermined times), it is desirable that the post-acceptance change occurs more frequently within that acceptance acceptance state than in a type of acceptance acceptance state (such as the second A acceptance acceptance state) in which the post-acceptance change is newly initiated at irregular intervals (non-predetermined times).

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned presentation example displays a post-acceptance display on the presentation display device 1600 as one of the above-mentioned post-acceptance changes, but this post-acceptance display is not a required component as one of the above-mentioned post-acceptance changes. For example, it is possible to realize a presentation similar to the post-acceptance change caused by the above-mentioned post-acceptance display by changing the light emission mode of the presentation lamp or by changing the drive of the movable body.

As mentioned above, the 1A reception allowance state and the 2A reception allowance state are provided as "a type of reception allowance state in which the reception allowance state can be terminated early based on the acceptance of an operation (the final presentation mode appears)." However, in the 1A reception allowance state and the 2A reception allowance state, for example, if a predetermined judgment result is not obtained as a result of a jackpot judgment, presentation judgment, etc., the reception allowance state can be prevented from being terminated early (the final presentation mode does not appear) no matter how many operations are accepted; and the reception allowance state can be terminated early (the final presentation mode appears) only when a predetermined judgment result is obtained as a result of a jackpot judgment, presentation judgment, etc. Even with this configuration, it can be said that these are realized as "a type of reception allowance state in which the reception allowance state can be terminated early based on the acceptance of an operation (the final presentation mode appears)."

In addition, the interval at which the auto-repeated tapping function determines whether or not an operation is being performed (operation acceptance) (the interval at which a new change occurs after acceptance when the operation state is maintained) may be different between the 1A acceptance state and the 3A acceptance state.

Furthermore, the number of times that the post-second-action reception output sound can be generated in the second-action reception allowable state when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state may be set to be less than the number of times that the post-first-action reception output sound can be generated in the first-action reception allowable state when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state in the first-action reception allowable state.

Furthermore, the number of times that the post-2A reception output sound can be generated multiple times in the secondA reception allowable state when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state in the secondA reception allowable state may be set to be less than the number of times that the post-3A reception output sound can be generated multiple times in the thirdA reception allowable state when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state in the thirdA reception allowable state.

Furthermore, in the 2A reception permitted state, the upper limit number of times that the post-2A reception output sound can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state may be set to be less than the upper limit number of times that the post-2A reception output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining it in an operated state.

In addition, in the 1A reception permitted state, the upper limit number of times that the post-1A reception output sound can be generated by maintaining the operation button 410 in an operated state may be set to be the same as or greater than the upper limit number of times that the post-1A reception output sound can be generated by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining it in an operated state.

In addition, in the 3A reception permitted state, the upper limit number of times that the post-3A reception output sound can be generated by maintaining the operation button 410 in an operated state may be set to be the same as or greater than the upper limit number of times that the post-3A reception output sound can be generated by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining it in an operated state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output under either a situation where the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or a situation where it is not in an output state. The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) may not be output independently when the post-operation output sound of a type that changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in the output state, but may be output when (or simultaneously with) the post-operation output sound.

Furthermore, in the second A reception acceptance state according to the above-described exemplary effect, even if the output condition for the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up until that point may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 arrives simply continues to be played; the playback state is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not started to be played back, nor is playback restarted.

Furthermore, in the first A reception acceptance state according to the above-described exemplary effect, if the output condition for the first post-reception output sound SB1 is met while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2, while the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in an output state until then may be terminated and a new output may begin based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAa2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins to be output.

Furthermore, in the third A reception acceptance state according to the above-described exemplary effect, if the output condition for the third post-reception output sound SB3 is met while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state (timing tAc2-B2 shown in FIG. 152), the second post-reception output sound SB3 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAc2-B2, while the third post-reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that had been in an output state until then may be terminated and a new output may begin based on the operation reception made at timing tAc2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAc2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins to be output.

Furthermore, "the post-operation output sound is generated multiple times" means that simply by maintaining the operation state, there are multiple times when the post-operation output sound starts to be output anew. In other words, when the operation state is maintained, as long as the post-operation output sound based on one piece of data continues to be played, it can be said that the post-operation output sound is generated only once.

Furthermore, the mock-up image display does not necessarily have to be displayed in the reception-permitted state. For example, the mock-up image display may not be displayed in at least one of the reception-permitted states described above (1A reception-permitted state to 6A reception-permitted state). For example, the mock-up image display may not be displayed in the 1A reception-permitted state. Alternatively, the mock-up image display may not be displayed in the 3A reception-permitted state, but not in the 1A reception-permitted state.

Furthermore, in each of the reception permission states described above (1A reception permission state to 6A reception permission state), two types of sounds (first post-reception output sound, second post-reception output sound) can be output simultaneously as post-operation output sounds based on operation reception. However, both types of sounds (first post-reception output sound, second post-reception output sound) are not output simultaneously, and only one of these sounds may be selectively output when operation reception is performed, or only one of these sounds may be output, with the other not necessarily being provided.

Furthermore, in the second A reception allowance state, the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is not processed to be a fixed time, but is only processed to be an indefinite time. However, in the first A reception allowance state and the third A reception allowance state, it is sufficient that at least processing is executed to execute processing ...

In the above-mentioned acceptance state, the rapid-hit display and single-hit display do not necessarily have to be displayed.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "time less than a specific time" also includes a specific time, and only a specific time may be provided as a "time less than a specific time." Furthermore, the above-mentioned "time longer than a specific time" may only be provided as a single time period.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "time shorter than a predetermined time" includes a predetermined time, and it is also possible for only a predetermined time to be provided as a "time shorter than a predetermined time." Furthermore, it is also possible for only one time to be provided as a "time longer than a predetermined time."

It is desirable that the specific time be shorter than a predetermined time, and that the "time equal to or shorter than the specific time" be shorter than the "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time." Conversely, it is desirable that the "time longer than the specific time" be longer than the "time longer than the predetermined time." Alternatively, if the "time longer than the specific time" is set as an indefinite time, then due to this indefiniteness, both the "time longer than the specified time" and the "time longer than the specified time" may occur.

In the example performance shown in FIG. 149(g), when it is detected that the operation button 410 has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state while the second A post-acceptance output sound is being output, the second A post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2) in that output state is terminated in response to this detection. However, instead of terminating the sound, it is also possible to change the sound to a different output mode (such as by changing the volume or sound quality, or by changing the mode of the output sound).

Furthermore, the post-operation output sound (post-acceptance output sound) may or may not suggest the degree of expectation. In fact, the first post-acceptance output sound SA, for example, is a sound that does not suggest the degree of expectation.

The pachinko machine 1 may also be provided with additional reception allowance states different from the above-described 1A reception allowance state to the 6A reception allowance state. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a reception allowance state in which the effects related to operation and non-operation are the same as those in the 1A reception allowance state, but the type of enemy character that appears is different; a reception allowance state in which the effects related to operation and non-operation are the same as those in the 2A reception allowance state, but the type of enemy character that appears is different; or a reception allowance state in which the effects related to operation and non-operation are the same as those in the 3A reception allowance state, but the type of enemy character that appears is different.

In addition, while this pachinko machine 1 is provided with all of the above-mentioned 1A acceptance allowance state through 6A acceptance allowance state, it is not necessary to provide all of these acceptance allowance states. Rather, it is preferable to provide only some of these acceptance allowance states in an appropriate combination, taking into account the desired effect. By providing them in the "appropriate combinations" described separately in the configurations below, excellent effects can be achieved. Note that each of the configurations below exemplifies combinations of acceptance allowance states that must be provided to achieve the desired effect from the configurations shown in the above-mentioned presentation examples, but these combinations are not limited to the examples; combinations other than those exemplified may also be used as long as the desired effect is achieved. Furthermore, configurations adopted by other acceptance allowance states that are unrelated to the desired effect may also be provided as appropriate, as long as they do not adversely affect the achievement of the desired effect.

For example, in the first configuration A1, a multiple operation enabled state is provided in which acceptance of operations for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation enabled state includes a type of multiple operation enabled state in which a message display (message displays MA1, MA2, MA4) prompting an operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is displayed (first A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 146, second A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 149, fourth A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 155), and a type of multiple operation enabled state in which a message display is not displayed (third A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 152). In the multiple operation enabled state in which the message display is displayed (first A acceptance enabled state, second A acceptance enabled state, fourth A acceptance enabled state), it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound, fourth A post-reception output sound) is output. 149(g) )。 In the case where the post-operation output sound is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state, in which it is not operated, while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may be changed triggered by the detection (the second-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). On the other hand, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state in a multiple-operation enabled state (the third-A acceptance permitted state) in which no message display is displayed, and a post-operation output sound (the third-A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state, in which it is not operated, while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be changed triggered by the detection (the third-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIGS. 152(g) and 152(h)). In the example described above, the post-reception sound 3A shown in Figures 152(g) and (h) is not triggered by this detection, but is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated. With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, whether or not a message display is displayed can indicate whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the first configuration A1 according to the above-described performance example, in particular, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operation state in a multiple operation enabled state (third-A reception permitted state) of a type in which a message display is not displayed among the multiple operation enabled states, and a corresponding post-operation output sound (third-A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound (third-A post-reception output sound) is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound (third-A post-reception output sound) in that output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then ended), whereas when the message display ( In a multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state, fourth A reception allowable state) of a type in which a message display MA1, MA2, MA4 is displayed, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound, fourth A post-reception output sound) is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be triggered by the detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) or may be triggered without the detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, fourth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). With this configuration, when the message display is not displayed in the multiple operation enabled state, it is suitably indicated that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. However, when the message display is displayed in the multiple operation enabled state, it becomes difficult to tell whether there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

Moreover, in the first configuration A1 of the above-mentioned performance example, when one form (message display MA2) appears as the message display, there are two cases where the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) changes when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149 (g)), and there is no change in the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149 (h)).This more effectively achieves the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state when a message display is displayed in the multiple operations enabled state." However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be adopted. For example, when different message display modes appear, such as different message display sizes, colors, or display modes, the post-operation output sound may or may not change depending on the mode. This is expected to make it somewhat more difficult for the player to determine whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound, compared to when the message display itself is not displayed at all. However, it is desirable (but not required) for message displays encouraging multiple operations to be displayed in a mode that would not appear in an operation-enabled state where only a single operation is accepted.

Furthermore, in the eighth configuration A8, among the multiple operation enabled states, the multiple operation enabled states of the type in which a message display is displayed (first A reception allowed state, second A reception allowed state) and the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which a message display is not displayed (third A reception allowed state) may both be prepared as "multiple operation enabled states in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operation means in an operation state." In other words, in this case, even in a "multiple operation enabled state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operation means in an operation state," if a message display is not displayed, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will be made independently of the detection. Furthermore, if a message display is displayed, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in the output state will be made both as a result of the detection and as a result of the detection.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Furthermore, as described above, among the multiple operation enabled states in which a message display is displayed, the special multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) allows for both a single valid period in which a post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2) in which the output state is not terminated upon detection of a transition to a non-operation state is output, and a post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2) in which the output state is terminated upon detection of a transition to a non-operation state is output. Therefore, in the second A reception permitted state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state" is more suitably achieved.

In the 1A reception allowance state, 3A reception allowance state, and 4A reception allowance state in the above-mentioned performance examples, there are no cases where a post-operation output sound whose output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is output; only cases where a post-operation output sound whose output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is output.

Furthermore, with regard to the first configuration A1, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to mock-up image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

Furthermore, to realize the first configuration A1, the fourth A reception-permitting state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, a second configuration A2 is provided with a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a multiple operation valid state of a type in which a post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state (4A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a multiple operation valid state of a type in which a post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state (4B acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 14 149, and the third A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 152), in a multiple operation enable state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state) of a type in which a post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, and a post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation state (first A post-operation output sound, second A post-operation output sound, third A post-operation output sound) is output. In the case where the post-operation output sound (3A post-acceptance output sound) is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection (the 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), whereas the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection (the 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state. In this case, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (fourth-A post-acceptance output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound (fourth-A post-acceptance output sound) in the output state is not changed in response to the detection (fourth-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIGS. 155(g) and 155(h)). In the example described above, the fourth-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIGS. 155(g) and 155(h) is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated without being triggered by the detection. With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, whether or not the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled can indicate whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the second configuration A2 according to the above-mentioned performance example, particularly in the multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state in a multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state) of a type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, and a corresponding post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in that output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then terminated), whereas in the multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operation means In a multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state) of a type in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound, third A post-reception output sound) is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be triggered by the detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) or may be triggered without the detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, third A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152). With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state, it is suitably indicated that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. However, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state, it becomes difficult to tell whether there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the second configuration A2 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in a type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowed state, second A reception allowed state, third A reception allowed state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, the imitation image display is displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme (see Figures 146(c), 149(c), 152(c), etc.), but in a type of multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception allowed state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, the imitation image display is at least sometimes displayed in the first color scheme (it may always be the first color scheme), but it does not necessarily have to be displayed in the second color scheme.

In this case, in a type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, it is sufficient if the mock image display is displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme. For example, the type of multiple operation enabled state may include a specified multiple operation enabled state in which the mock image display is displayed only in the first color scheme, or may include a specific multiple operation enabled state in which the mock image display is displayed in neither the first color scheme nor the second color scheme.

As described above, among the multiple operation enabled states in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, the special multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) is configured so that, within a single valid period, both a post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2) is generated in which the output state is not terminated upon detection of a transition to a non-operated state, and a post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2) is generated in which the output state is terminated upon detection of a transition to a non-operated state is generated. Therefore, in the second A reception permitted state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state" is more suitably achieved.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Furthermore, among the types of multiple operation enabled states in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, in the special multiple operation enabled states (first A reception allowed state or third A reception allowed state), there are no cases in which a post-operation output sound whose output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operated state is output, and only cases in which a post-operation output sound whose output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operated state is output.

Furthermore, in the second configuration A2 according to the above-described performance example, the multiple operation enabled state of a type in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state includes a multiple operation enabled state of a type (second-A reception-permitted state) in which, during a single valid period, a post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) is generated in which the output state does not change (terminate) upon detection of a non-operated state, and a post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) is generated in which the output state changes (terminates) upon detection of a non-operated state. Also included are multiple operation enabled states of a type (first-A reception-permitted state, third-A reception-permitted state) in which only a post-operation output sound (first-A post-acceptance output sound, third-A post-acceptance output sound) in which the output state does not end upon detection of a non-operated state of the specific operation means (operation button 410) is generated. However, this does not apply to a type of multiple operation enabled state in which only a post-operation output sound is generated, and the output state is terminated upon detection that a specific operation means (operation button 410) has entered a non-operated state.

Furthermore, with regard to the second configuration A2, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to mock-up image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

Furthermore, when realizing the second configuration A2, it is possible to have only one of the first A reception-permitting state and the third A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, for example, a third configuration A3 includes a multiple operation enabled state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation enabled state includes a type of multiple operation enabled state in which a periodic change in the mock-up image display appears in units of time longer than a predetermined time (the second A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 149, the fourth A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 155), and a type of multiple operation enabled state in which a periodic change in the mock-up image display appears in units of time shorter than the predetermined time (the fourth A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 149). 152), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state in a type of multiple operation enabled state (second A reception allowance state, fourth A reception allowance state) in which a periodic change in the simulated image display appears in a time unit longer than a predetermined time, and a corresponding post-operation output sound (second A post-operation output sound, fourth A post-operation output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is output while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state where it is not being operated, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection (the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). On the other hand, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state in a multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state, third A acceptance permitted state) of a type in which a periodic change in the mock-up image display appears in a time unit of the predetermined time or less, When a post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, third A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound (fourth A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not changed in response to the detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146 and third A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152). In the above-mentioned example, the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146 and the third A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152 are output for a predetermined output time and then terminated, without being triggered by the detection. With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, it is possible to indicate, through the length of time required for the cyclical change in the model image display, whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the third configuration A3 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in particular, in the multiple operation enabled states (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) of a type in which the periodic change in the mock image display occurs in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-operation output sound, third A post-operation output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in that output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, it is output for a predetermined output time and then ended). On the other hand, in the multiple operation valid states (second A reception allowable state, fourth A reception allowable state) of a type in which a periodic change in the simulated image display appears in units of time longer than a predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (second A post-operation output sound, fourth A post-operation output sound) is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be triggered by the detection (second A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) or may be triggered without the detection (fourth A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 155). With this configuration, when the time required for the imitation image display to change periodically in the multiple operation enabled state is relatively short, it is suitably indicated that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. However, when the time required for the imitation image display to change periodically in the multiple operation enabled state is relatively long, it becomes difficult to tell whether or not there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the third configuration A3 according to the above-mentioned performance example, among the multiple operation enabled states, the multiple operation enabled states (first A reception allowed state, third A reception allowed state) of the type in which the imitation image display is displayed so that a periodic change occurs in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time occur as "a multiple operation enabled state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-operation output sound, third A post-operation output sound) occurs multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state," while the multiple operation enabled states (second A reception allowed state, fourth A reception allowed state) of the type in which the imitation image display is displayed so that a periodic change occurs in units of time longer than the predetermined time occur as "a multiple operation enabled state in which the specific operation means (operation button 4 This allows for both a "multiple operation enabled state in which simply maintaining specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state generates a corresponding post-operation output sound multiple times" (second A acceptance permitted state), and a "multiple operation enabled state in which simply maintaining specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state does not generate a corresponding post-operation output sound multiple times" (fourth A acceptance permitted state). Therefore, when the time required for the cyclical change of the simulated image display is short, it suggests that the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is to be enabled, and when the time required for the cyclical change of the simulated image display is long, it becomes difficult to determine whether the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled. In this regard, even when the time required for the cyclical change of the simulated image display is long, if the post-operation output sound changes (ends) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, it suggests that the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is to be enabled, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, as described above, among the types of multiple operation enabled states (second A reception allowable state, fourth A reception allowable state) in which the periodic changes in the simulated image display occur in units of time longer than a predetermined time, the special multiple operation enabled state (second A reception allowable state) is configured so that, within a single valid period, both a post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2) that does not end the output state upon detection of a transition to a non-operation state is generated, and a post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2) that ends the output state upon detection of a transition to a non-operation state is generated. Therefore, in the second A reception allowable state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state" is more suitably achieved.

Incidentally, among the multiple operation enabled states (2nd A reception permitted state, 4th A reception permitted state) in which the periodic changes in the simulated image display occur in units of time longer than a predetermined time, in the special multiple operation enabled state (4th A reception permitted state), there are no cases in which a post-operation output sound is generated that ends the output state when it is detected that a no-operation state has been entered, and only cases in which a post-operation output sound is generated that does not end the output state when it is detected that a no-operation state has been entered.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Furthermore, with regard to the third configuration A3, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to mock-up image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

Furthermore, in the third configuration A3, the above-mentioned "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time" may include multiple time periods, or only one time period (e.g., the "predetermined time"). Similarly, the above-mentioned "time period longer than the predetermined time" may include multiple time periods, or only one time period.

Furthermore, to realize the third configuration A3, it is not necessary to have the third A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, a fourth configuration A4 is provided with a multiple operation enabled state in which operation acceptance for the operation means that is the target of the simulated image display is permitted multiple times, and the operation means are provided with a first operation means (operation button 410) and a second operation means (sword ornament 5001), and the multiple operation enabled state is a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which at least a simulated image display that imitates the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed (first A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 146, second A acceptance allowed state, third A acceptance allowed state, fourth A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 149). ), and a multiple operation valid state (5A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 158) of a type in which at least a model image display imitating the above-mentioned second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed, in the multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state, 3A reception allowable state, 4A reception allowable state) of a type in which at least a model image display imitating the above-mentioned first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed, it is detected that the above-mentioned first operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, and a post-operation output sound (1A post-reception 149(g) ) is output, if it is detected that the first operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may change in response to the detection (the second-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) ), whereas the multiple operation enabled state (the fifth-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) ) of the type in which at least a model image display modeling the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed When the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is detected to be in the operated state in the operation-permitted state (reception-permitted state) and a corresponding post-operation output sound (5A post-operation output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound (5A post-operation output sound) in the output state is not changed in response to the detection (5A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 158). In the example described above, the 5A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 158 is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated, without being triggered by the detection. With this configuration, in the multiple operation-enabled state, it is possible to indicate whether the post-operation output sound will change when the operating means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state based on the type of operating means that allows multiple operations and is the target of a mock image display, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the fourth configuration A4 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in particular, when the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is detected to be in an operation state in a multiple operation enabled state (5A reception permitted state) of a type in which at least a model image display modeling the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed among the multiple operation enabled states, and a corresponding post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in that output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then ended), whereas when the multiple operation enabled state is in a type in which at least a model image display modeling the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed, When it is detected that the first operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state in a multiple operation valid state of at least one of the displayed types (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state, fourth A reception allowable state), and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-operation output sound, second A post-operation output sound, third A post-operation output sound, fourth A post-operation output sound) is output, if it is detected that the first operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be triggered by the detection (second A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) or may be triggered without the detection (first A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 146, third A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 152, fourth A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 155). With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, when the second operation means is the target of the mock image display and the second operation means is operated, it is suitably indicated that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the second operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. However, when the first operation means is the target of the mock image display and the first operation means is operated, it becomes difficult to tell whether there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the first operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

As described above, among the multiple operation enabled states (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state, fourth A reception allowable state) of types in which at least a replica image display modeling the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed, in the special multiple operation enabled state (second A reception allowable state), there are two cases in which, within a single valid period, a post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2) is generated that does not end the output state upon detection of a transition to a non-operation state, and a post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2) is generated that ends the output state upon detection of a transition to a non-operation state. Therefore, in the second A reception allowable state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the first operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state" is more suitably achieved.

In addition, in a multiple operation enabled state (5A acceptance permitted state) of a type in which at least an imitation image display modeling the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed, there is no case in which a post-operation output sound that terminates the output state is generated in response to the detection of a non-operation state; only a post-operation output sound that does not terminate the output state is generated in response to the detection of a non-operation state.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Furthermore, to realize the fourth configuration A4, the fourth A reception-permitting state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

Furthermore, to realize the fourth configuration A4, it is possible to have only one of the first A reception-permitting state and the third A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, for example, a fifth configuration A5 is provided which includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid states include a first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146). In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state), a post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state, but at that time, the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is an indefinite time, and the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state) is provided. In the third multiple-operation valid state (first-A reception allowable state), if it is assumed that a post-operation change in response to the detection can be newly started at regular intervals simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, when it is detected in the first multiple-operation valid state (second-A reception allowable state) that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound (second-A post-operation output sound) corresponding to this is output, while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state where it is not operated, When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has been operated in the second multiple-operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state), and a corresponding post-operation output sound (4A post-operation output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, after a predetermined output time). When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state in the third multiple operation enabled state (first A operation acceptance state) and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-operation output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in that output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made independently (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then end) (first A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 146).

With this configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, it is possible to preferably indicate that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound (post-reception output sound No. 4A) when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. In this regard, if the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, then when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, this can trigger either a change in the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) or no change in the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound). However, whether or not the post-operation output sound is output at regular intervals when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state can suggest whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In the fifth configuration A5, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are all the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operating means" with "an operating means that is represented as a mock-up display and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in realizing the fifth configuration A5, the multiple operation valid state may include the third A reception allowance state instead of the first A reception allowance state, and the third A reception allowance state may be realized as the third multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the first A reception allowance state and the third A reception allowance state.

Furthermore, for example, as a sixth configuration A6, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), a post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is always longer than the specific time. In the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state), In the third multiple-operation valid state (first-A acceptance state), the post-operation change in response to the detection is not made executable multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and in the third multiple-operation valid state (first-A acceptance state), the post-operation change in response to the detection is made executable multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and in this case, if it is assumed that the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is always equal to or shorter than a specific time, when it is detected in the first multiple-operation valid state (second-A acceptance state) that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) in response to this is output, When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state where it is not being operated, a change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state can be made triggered by the detection (the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149( g )). When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state in the second multiple-operation enabled state (the fourth A acceptance allowed state) and a post-operation output sound (the fourth A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state where it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not made triggered by the detection but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, For example, the post-operation output sound is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated (the fourth A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155). When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state in the third multiple operation enabled state (the first A acceptance permitted state) and a post-operation output sound (the first A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in that output state is not triggered by this detection, but is made independently (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then terminated) (the first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146).

With this configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, it is possible to preferably indicate that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound (post-reception output sound No. 4A) when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. In this regard, when the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, changing the specific operation means (operation button 410) from an operated state to a non-operated state can trigger either a change in the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) or no change in the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound). However, whether the interval between the output of a post-operation output sound and its new output when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state is longer than a specific time can indicate whether a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In the sixth configuration A6, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are all the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operating means" with "an operating means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in realizing the sixth configuration A6, the multiple operation valid state may include the third A reception allowance state instead of the first A reception allowance state, and the third A reception allowance state may be realized as the third multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the first A reception allowance state and the third A reception allowance state.

Furthermore, for example, a seventh configuration A7 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing (a first A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146, a second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149), and a multiple operation valid state in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing. 152, and a type of multiple operation valid state (the third A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 152, the fourth A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 155) in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, in a type of multiple operation valid state (the first A reception allowable state, the second A reception allowable state) in which the valid operation state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound, the second A reception allowable state) in which the valid operation state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, In the case where a post-operation output sound is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), whereas the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, in the case where the post-operation output sound is output in response to the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, in the case where the post-operation output sound in the output state is output in response to the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, in the case where the post-operation output sound in the output state is output in response to the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, in the case where the post-operation output sound in the output state is changed in response to the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state ... In the case where it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (third-A post-reception output sound, fourth-A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound (third-A post-reception output sound, fourth-A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not changed in response to the detection (the third-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152 and the fourth-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). In the example described above, the third-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152 and the fourth-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155 are output for a predetermined output time and then terminated, without being triggered by the detection. With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, whether or not the enabled operation state will end based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operated state can indicate whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the seventh configuration A7 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in particular, in a multiple operation valid state (third-A reception allowable state, fourth-A reception allowable state) of a type in which the multiple operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (third-A post-reception output sound, fourth-A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in that output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, the sound is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). On the other hand, in the multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state) of a type in which the operation valid state can be ended based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound) is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be triggered by the detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) or may be triggered without the detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146). This configuration, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operated state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, preferably suggests that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. However, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operated state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, it becomes difficult to tell whether there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to preferably maintain a sense of tension.

In the seventh configuration A7, it is assumed that both an operating means that is the target of multiple operations in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, and an operating means that is the target of multiple operations in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state may be terminated based on detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, are the same operating means as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the seventh configuration A7 may be specified based on whether or not the "operating means" represented as a mock-up display in the multiple operation valid state is a type in which the valid operation state may be terminated when the "operating means" is operated.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the seventh configuration A7 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, in the seventh configuration A7 according to the above-mentioned performance example, among the multiple operation enabled states, the types of multiple operation enabled states (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state) that can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing are generated as "multiple operation enabled states in which the corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state," but before the arrival of the predetermined end timing, The multiple operation valid state (3A reception allowable state, 4A reception allowable state) of the type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state can occur either as a "multiple operation valid state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state" (3A reception allowable state), or as a "multiple operation valid state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state" (4A reception allowable state).

As described above, among the types of multiple operation valid states (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state) in which the valid operation state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, the special multiple operation valid state (second A reception allowable state) is configured to have both a post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2) that does not terminate the output state upon detection of a transition to a non-operated state, and a post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2) that terminates the output state upon detection of a transition to a non-operated state, even within a single valid period. Therefore, in the second A reception allowable state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state" is more suitably achieved.

In contrast, among the types of multiple operation valid states (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of the predetermined termination timing, in the special multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state), there are no cases in which a post-operation output sound is generated that terminates the output state in response to the detection that a non-operation state has been entered, and only cases in which a post-operation output sound that does not terminate the output state in response to the detection that a non-operation state has been entered is entered.

Furthermore, in the seventh configuration A7, in a type of multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowance state, second A reception allowance state) in which the valid operation state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, the message display MA is always displayed (message displays MA1, MA2). However, in a type of multiple operation valid state (third A reception allowance state, fourth A reception allowance state) in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, the message display MA is sometimes displayed (fourth A reception allowance state) and sometimes not displayed (third A reception allowance state).

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Furthermore, with regard to the seventh configuration A7, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to mock-up image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

Furthermore, in order to realize the seventh configuration A7, it is possible to have only one of the third A reception-permitting state and the fourth A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain at least some of the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, for example, an eighth configuration A8 includes a multiple operation enabled state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation enabled state includes a type of multiple operation enabled state in which a message display (message displays MA1, MA2, MA4) prompting an operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is displayed (first A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 146, second A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 149, fourth A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 155), and a type of multiple operation enabled state in which the message display is not displayed (third A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 152). ), in a multiple operation enabled state (third A reception permitted state) of a type in which the message display is not displayed, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state, the post-operation output sound is "a sound that is not processed as a fixed time but is an indefinite time when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output." In contrast, in the multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state, fourth A reception permitted state) of the type in which the message display is displayed, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound is output as follows: "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound is made inaudible from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state." There are two cases where a "sound in which the time from the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output is treated as a fixed time" (the second-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), and there are also cases where a "sound in which the time from the time the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of indefinite time)" is output (the first-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, and the fourth-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). In the example described above, the second-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the time the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible.

With this configuration, when the multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound is in an output state and no message display is being displayed, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state ends; for example, it is possible to suitably suggest that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) has just been changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. In contrast, in the multiple operation enabled state, when the post-operation output sound is in an output state and a message display is being displayed, it is possible to make it possible to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end, and it is also possible to make it difficult to make predictions. For example, while it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end a certain amount of time after being changed to a non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to a non-operated state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Moreover, in the first configuration A1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, when one form (message display MA2) appears as the message display, the post-operation output sound is output in either of two ways: "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time" (second post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149 (g)); or "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time" (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149 (h)). With this configuration, for example, even when one form of message display (message display MA2) is displayed, it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect that occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth noting, and the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has passed since the state was changed to a non-operated state, which is expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension when the state is changed to a non-operated state.

Furthermore, in the eighth configuration A8, among the multiple operation enabled states, the multiple operation enabled states of the type in which a message display is displayed (first A reception allowed state, second A reception allowed state) and the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which a message display is not displayed (third A reception allowed state) can both be prepared as "multiple operation enabled states in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operation means in an operation state." In other words, in this case, even in a "multiple operation enabled state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operation means in an operation state," if a message display is not displayed, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will be made without being triggered by the detection. Furthermore, if a message display is displayed, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in the output state will be made both as a result of the detection and without being triggered by the detection.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

As mentioned above, among the multiple operation enabled states of the type in which a message display is displayed, in the special multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), even though there is one valid period, the post-operation output sound is output in two cases: when "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a fixed time" (second post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149 (g)); and when "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an operated state In this case, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state, a "sound in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is switched to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is switched to an inaudible state is not fixed" is output (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)). Therefore, for example, in the second A acceptance state, it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, while the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will not necessarily end after a fixed time has passed since the state was switched to a non-operated state, which is expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension when the state is switched to a non-operated state.

In the 1A reception allowance state, 3A reception allowance state, and 4A reception allowance state in the above-mentioned performance examples, there are no cases where a post-operation output sound whose output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is output; only cases where a post-operation output sound whose output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is output.

Furthermore, the "time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) enters the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible" may be set to any time, or may be "0 seconds."

Furthermore, with regard to the eighth configuration A8, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to mock-up image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

Furthermore, to realize the eighth configuration A8, the fourth A reception-permitting state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, as a ninth configuration A9, a multiple operation enabled state is provided in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation enabled state includes a type of multiple operation enabled state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state (first A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 146, second A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 149, third A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 152), and a type of multiple operation enabled state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state (fourth A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 155). In the case where the above-mentioned is provided, in a multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state) of a type in which a post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, the following is output as the post-operation output sound: "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound is generated that is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time) from the time when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible." In contrast to the above, in the multiple operation enabled states (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) of the type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound is output as follows: "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time when the specific operation means is in the non-operation state is when the post-operation output sound is output" 149(g)) is output, and "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound is output in which the time from the time the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to the time the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time (a sound of indefinite time)" is output (the first-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146 and the third-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152). In the example described above, the second-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the time the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to the time the post-operation output sound is made inaudible.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end. For example, it can be suitably suggested that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) has just been changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state, it is possible to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end, and it is also possible to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end, so while it is possible to suggest that the performance of the specific operation means after being changed from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end after a certain amount of time has passed since the state was changed to a non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the state is changed to a non-operated state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, in the ninth configuration A9 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in a type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowed state, second A reception allowed state, third A reception allowed state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, the imitation image display is displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme (see Figures 146(c), 149(c), 152(c), etc.), but in a type of multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception allowed state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, the imitation image display is at least sometimes displayed in the first color scheme (it may always be the first color scheme), but may not be displayed in the second color scheme.

In this case, in a type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, it is sufficient if the mock image display is displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme. For example, the type of multiple operation enabled state may include a specified multiple operation enabled state in which the mock image display is displayed only in the first color scheme, or may include a specific multiple operation enabled state in which the mock image display is displayed in neither the first color scheme nor the second color scheme.

As mentioned above, in the ninth configuration A9 according to the above-mentioned performance example, among the multiple operation enabled states of the type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, in the special multiple operation enabled state (2A acceptance permitted state), even within one valid period, the post-operation output sound is output in two cases: when "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a fixed time" (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)); and when "when the specific operation means When the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state where it is not operated, a sound may be output in which the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of indefinite time) (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)). This means that in the special multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance allowed state), it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect of changing the specific operation means from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, but the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will not necessarily end a fixed time after being changed to a non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to a non-operated state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Furthermore, in the ninth configuration A9 according to the above-mentioned performance example, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, in the special multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception allowance state or the third A reception allowance state), there is no case in which the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time," but only as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound with an indefinite time)."

In addition, the "time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) enters the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible" may be set to any time, or may be "0 seconds."

Furthermore, with regard to the ninth configuration A9, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to mock-up image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

Furthermore, when realizing the ninth configuration A9, it is possible to have only one of the first A reception-permitting state and the third A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, for example, a tenth configuration A10 includes a multiple operation enabled state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation enabled state includes a type of multiple operation enabled state in which a periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of time longer than a predetermined time (the second A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 149, the fourth A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 155), and a type of multiple operation enabled state in which a periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of time shorter than the predetermined time (the first A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 146, the third A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 152). In this case, in the multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) of the type in which the periodic change of the mock image display appears in a time unit of less than the predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state, the post-operation output sound is output as "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound is output that is not a fixed time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time)" In contrast to the above, in the multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state, the fourth A reception permitted state) of the type in which the periodic change of the mock image display appears in units of time longer than a predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound is output that reads, "When the specific operation means (the operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means is output to the non-operating state." There are two cases where a "sound is output in which the time from when the step is reached until the post-operation output sound is rendered inaudible is treated as a fixed time" (the 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), and a "sound in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is rendered inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of indefinite time)" is output (the 4A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155). In the example described above, the 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is rendered inaudible.

With this configuration, when the time required for the imitation image display to change periodically in the multiple operation enabled state is relatively short, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end. For example, it is possible to suitably suggest that the post-operation output sound is not noteworthy in a situation where the specific operation means has just been changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. In contrast, when the time required for the imitation image display to change periodically in the multiple operation enabled state is relatively long, it is possible to suggest both how much time will pass after the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end. This suggests that the effect of changing the specific operation means from an operated state to a non-operated state may be noteworthy, but it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end a certain amount of time after the non-operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when changing to a non-operated state.

Furthermore, in the tenth configuration A10 according to the above-mentioned performance example, among the multiple operation enabled states, the multiple operation enabled states (first A reception allowed state, third A reception allowed state) of the type in which the imitation image display is displayed so that a periodic change occurs in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time occur as "a multiple operation enabled state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-operation output sound, third A post-operation output sound) occurs multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state," while the multiple operation enabled states (second A reception allowed state, fourth A reception allowed state) of the type in which the imitation image display is displayed so that a periodic change occurs in units of time longer than the predetermined time occur as "a multiple operation enabled state in which the specific operation means (operation button The state can be either a "multiple operation enabled state in which a post-operation output sound corresponding to a specific operation means (operation button 410) is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state" (second A reception permitted state), or a "multiple operation enabled state in which a post-operation output sound corresponding to a specific operation means (operation button 410) is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state" (fourth A reception permitted state). Therefore, when the time required for the cyclical change of the simulated image display is short, it suggests that the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is to be enabled, and when the time required for the cyclical change of the simulated image display is long, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled or not. In this regard, even if the time required for the cyclical change in the simulated image display is long, if the post-operation output sound is such that "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a fixed time," this suggests that the so-called auto-repeated function will be activated, and it can be expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good manner.

Furthermore, in the tenth configuration A10 according to the above-mentioned performance example, among the multiple operation enabled states, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the mock image display may be displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme, but in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining the above-mentioned specific operation means in an operating state, the mock image display is at least sometimes displayed in the first color scheme (it does not necessarily have to be the first color scheme), but is never displayed in the second color scheme.

As mentioned above, among the multiple operation enabled states (second A reception permitted state, fourth A reception permitted state) of the type in which the periodic change in the simulated image display appears in units of time longer than a predetermined time, in the special multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), even within one valid period, the post-operation output sound is output in two cases: when "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a fixed time" (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)); and when "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a fixed time" (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)). 0) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state where it is not operated, a sound may be output in which the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of indefinite time) (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)). Therefore, in a special multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance allowed state), for example, it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect after the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, while the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will not necessarily end a fixed time after the state is changed to a non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to a non-operated state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, among the multiple operation enabled states (2A reception allowed state, 4A reception allowed state) of the type in which the periodic changes in the simulated image display appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time, in the special multiple operation enabled state (4A reception allowed state), the post-operation output sound output is not a sound in which "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time," but rather a sound in which "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (sound of indefinite time)."

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Furthermore, with regard to the tenth configuration A10, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is the target of displaying a mock image and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

Furthermore, in the tenth configuration A10, the above-mentioned "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time" may be provided in multiple time periods, or in only one time period (e.g., "predetermined time"). Similarly, the above-mentioned "time period longer than the predetermined time" may be provided in multiple time periods, or in only one time period.

Furthermore, to realize the tenth configuration A10, the third A reception-permitting state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-described configurations and effects.

Also, for example, as an eleventh configuration A11, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operations for the operation means that is the target of the simulated image display is permitted multiple times, and a first operation means (operation button 410) and a second operation means (sword ornament 5001) are provided as the operation means, and the multiple operation valid state includes multiple operation valid states of a type in which at least an imitation image display that imitates the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed (the first A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 146, the second A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 149, the third A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 152, and the fourth A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 155), and a type in which at least an imitation image display that imitates the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed. 158 ) and a multiple operation valid state (5A reception permission state shown in FIG. 158 ), when it is detected that the second operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is in an operation state in a multiple operation valid state (5A reception permission state) of a type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the second operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is displayed, the post-operation output sound is a sound that is output as follows: 158), when it is detected that the first operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state in a type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state, fourth A reception permitted state) in which at least an imitation image display simulating the first operating means (operation button 410) is displayed, a post-operation output sound is output that reads, "When the first operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the operation output sound is output from the timing when the first operating means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state." The following two cases are possible: a case in which a "sound in which the time from the time the first operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is rendered inaudible is treated as a fixed time" is output (the second-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)); and a case in which a "sound in which the time from the time the first operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is rendered inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of indefinite time)" is output (the first-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146, the third-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 152, and the fourth-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155). In the example described above, the second-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the time the first operating means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is rendered inaudible.

With this configuration, when the second operating means (sword decoration 5001) is the target of the mock image display in the multiple operation enabled state and the second operating means (sword decoration 5001) is operated, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the second operating means (sword decoration 5001) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end; for example, it is possible to suitably suggest that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect in a situation where the second operating means (sword decoration 5001) has just been changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. In contrast, when the first operating means (operation button 410) is the target of the mock image display and the first operating means (operation button 410) is operated, it is possible to predict how much time will pass after the first operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end, and it is also possible to predict how much time will pass after the first operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end, so that, for example, while it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect that occurs after the first operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end a certain amount of time after the first operating means (operation button 410) is changed to a non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the first operating means is changed to a non-operated state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

As mentioned above, among the multiple operation enabled states (first A reception allowed state, second A reception allowed state, third A reception allowed state, fourth A reception allowed state) of the type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed, in the special multiple operation enabled state (second A reception allowed state), even within one valid period, the post-operation output sound is output in two different cases: when "when the first operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the first operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time" (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)); and when "when the first operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the first operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time" (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)). When the first operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state where it is not operated, a sound may be output in which the time from when the first operating means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of indefinite time) (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)). Therefore, in a special multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state), for example, while it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect after the first operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will not necessarily end a fixed time after the state is changed to a non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the state is changed to a non-operated state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in a multiple operation enabled state (5A reception permitted state) of a type in which at least an imitation image display modeling the second operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is displayed, the post-operation output sound does not necessarily mean "when the second operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, and the time from when the second operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time." The only possible sound that is output is "when the second operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, and the time from when the second operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (sound of indefinite time)."

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Furthermore, to realize the 11th configuration A11, the 4A reception-permitting state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

Furthermore, in order to realize the 11th configuration A11, it is possible to have only one of the 1A reception-permitting state and the 3A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, a twelfth configuration A12 is provided with a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptance state), a post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) in response to the detection is generated in advance simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state. The post-operation output sound can be generated at a set time interval, but the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state where it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)" (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146), whereas in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state), the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time interval (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time interval and is indefinite)" (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146). The post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). At this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to be an indefinite time. However, the post-operation output sound is a sound in which "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state where it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the time when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is set to be a fixed time (set to a fixed time). 149(g)) or as "a sound that is processed as a sound ...

With this configuration, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) among the multiple operation enabled states, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state before the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) that is in an output state will end. This makes it possible to suitably suggest, for example, that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) has just been changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) of the multiple operation valid states, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, the amount of time that will elapse after the non-operation state for the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) to end is both predictable and difficult to predict. For example, while it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect that occurs after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed after the non-operation state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the state is changed to a non-operation state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the 12th configuration A12, a third multiple operation enabled state (4A reception allowed state) is further provided as a multiple operation enabled state, and in the third multiple operation enabled state (4A reception allowed state), simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state does not enable the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) in response to detection to be generated multiple times, and the post-operation output sound can be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not treated as a fixed time but is indefinite." With this configuration, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, it is possible to preferably indicate that the post-operation output sound will be output as a sound "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, and the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not treated as a fixed time but is instead an indefinite sound."

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In addition, the intervals at which the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception allowed state) are indefinite, but the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is not generated at intervals shorter than a predetermined time (fixed time) which is the intervals at which the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowed state), but is generated only at intervals longer than the predetermined time. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (post-second-A-reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple-operation enabled state (second-A-reception permitted state) differs from the post-operation output sound (post-first-A-reception output sound) corresponding to the second multiple-operation enabled state (first-A-reception permitted state) in that the intervals between repeated outputs by the auto-repeated tap function are indefinite and the time required for that interval (shortest time) is also long, making it difficult to determine whether the auto-repeated tap function is enabled and whether the first multiple-operation enabled state (second-A-reception permitted state) or the third multiple-operation enabled state (fourth-A-reception permitted state) is occurring, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, the number of times that the post-operation output sound (post-second-A reception output sound) can be generated in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second-A reception allowed state) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state is set to be less than the number of times that the post-operation output sound (post-first-A reception output sound) can be generated in the second multiple-operation enabled state (first-A reception allowed state) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state in the second multiple-operation enabled state (first-A reception allowed state). In other words, in this case, it becomes even more difficult to determine whether the auto-repeated operation function is enabled in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second-A reception allowed state), making it difficult to determine whether the first multiple-operation enabled state (second-A reception allowed state) or the third multiple-operation enabled state (fourth-A reception allowed state) is occurring, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (second A post-operation output sound) can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state is set to be lower than the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining it in an operated state. This configuration makes the characteristics of the presentation of the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) closer to the third multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled. This makes it difficult to tell whether the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) or the third multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) is occurring, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state), the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state is set to be the same as or greater than the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining it in an operation state.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) and the third multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound is not output as "a sound that is processed as a fixed time from the time the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible, with the time being a fixed time from the time the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state."

Furthermore, in the twelfth configuration A12, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is displayed as a mockup image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation valid state.

Furthermore, in realizing the twelfth configuration A12, the multiple operation valid state may include the third A reception allowance state instead of the first A reception allowance state, and the third A reception allowance state may be realized as the second multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the first A reception allowance state and the third A reception allowance state.

Furthermore, for example, a thirteenth configuration A13 is provided with a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid states are provided with a first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146). In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state. At that time, the post-operation output sound is generated anew. The interval until the post-operation output sound is generated is always longer than the specific time, and the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) can be output as "a sound (a sound processed as a specific time) from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state where it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible, is a specific time" (second-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In the second multiple-operation valid state (fourth-A acceptance permitted state), the post-operation output sound is not generated even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in an operating state. The post-operation output sound (fourth A post-acceptance output sound) in response to the detection is not made to be able to be generated multiple times, and the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is made to be able to be output as "a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state where it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite) from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state where it is not operated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible" (fourth A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155), and in the third multiple operation enabled state (first A acceptance permitted state), The post-operation output sound (first-A post-reception output sound) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the setting, but in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is set to a specific time or less, and the post-operation output sound (first-A post-reception output sound) can be output as "a sound for which the time from the time the specific operation means (operation button 410) enters the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound is inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not treated as a fixed time) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) enters the non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output (first-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146). In the example described above, the second-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the time the first operation means (operation button 410) enters the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound is inaudible.

According to this configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, it is suggested that the post-operation output sound will be output as "a sound in which the time from the time the specific operation means (operation button 410) enters the non-operated state from an operated state to an inoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output is not a fixed time (a sound that is not treated as a fixed time and is indefinite)." In this regard, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, the post-operation output sound can be output as "a sound for which the time from the time when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state where it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output is a fixed time (a sound processed as a fixed time) from the time when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state where it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output" (a second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), or as "a sound for which the time from the time when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state where the post-operation output sound is being output is a fixed time (a sound processed as a fixed time)" (a second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). When the specific operating means (operation button 410) enters a non-operated state, the post-operation output sound is output as a sound that is not a fixed time (a sound that is not treated as a fixed time and is indefinite) from the time the specific operating means enters a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible (the 1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146). However, when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, whether the interval between the output of the post-operation output sound and the new output is longer than the fixed time makes it possible to suggest the nature of the sound that the post-operation output sound will have, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth configuration A13, in particular, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is a fixed time (a sound processed as a fixed time)" (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149 (g)), or as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state in which it is not operated until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of an indefinite time)" (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h). That is, in this case, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, the amount of time that will elapse after the non-operated state for the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) to end is both predictable and difficult to predict. Therefore, for example, while it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect that occurs after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end a certain amount of time after the non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the state is changed to a non-operated state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In addition, in the 13th configuration A13, when a specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), the interval between when the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times is an indefinite time, and when a specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state in the third multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state), the interval between when the post-operation output sound is generated multiple times is a fixed time. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (post-second-A-reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple-operation enabled state (second-A-reception permitted state) differs from the post-operation output sound (post-first-A-reception output sound) corresponding to the third multiple-operation enabled state (first-A-reception permitted state) in that the intervals between repeated outputs by the auto-repeated tapping function are indefinite and the time required for that interval (shortest time) is also long, making it difficult to determine whether the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled and making it difficult to determine whether the first multiple-operation enabled state (second-A-reception permitted state) or the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth-A-reception permitted state) is occurring, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, the number of times that the post-operation output sound (post-second-A reception output sound) can be generated in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second-A reception allowed state) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state is set to be less than the number of times that the post-operation output sound (post-first-A reception output sound) can be generated in the third multiple-operation enabled state (first-A reception allowed state) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state. In other words, in this case, it becomes even more difficult to determine whether the auto-repeated operation function is enabled in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second-A reception allowed state), making it difficult to determine whether the first multiple-operation enabled state (second-A reception allowed state) or the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth-A reception allowed state) is active, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (second A post-operation output sound) can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state is set to be lower than the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining it in an operated state. This configuration makes the characteristics of the presentation of the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) closer to the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled. This makes it difficult to tell whether the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) or the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) is occurring, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the third multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state), the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state is set to be the same as or greater than the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining it in an operation state.

In addition, in the third multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) and the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound is not output as "a sound that is processed as a fixed time from the time the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible, with the time being a fixed time from the time the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state."

Furthermore, in the thirteenth configuration A13, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation valid state.

Furthermore, in realizing the thirteenth configuration A13, the multiple operation valid state may include the third A reception allowance state instead of the first A reception allowance state, and the third A reception allowance state may be realized as the third multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the first A reception allowance state and the third A reception allowance state.

Furthermore, for example, a fourteenth configuration A14 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives (a first A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146, a second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), and a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives (a third A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 152). 155 ), in the multiple operation valid state (the 3A reception allowable state, the 4A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 155 ) of the type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, when it is detected that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in an operation state, the following is executed as the post-operation output sound: "When the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the time when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound is changed to an inaudible state is not a certain time." 152, and the fourth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). On the other hand, in the multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state) of the type in which the operation valid state can be ended based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, a sound "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state where it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being outputted, the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state where it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being outputted" is output as the post-operation output sound. 149(g)) is output as the post-operation output sound, and the post-operation output sound is output as the post-operation output sound for a fixed time from the time the specific operation means (operation button 410) is pressed until the post-operation output sound is rendered inaudible (a sound processed as a fixed time). Also, the post-operation output sound is output as the post-operation output sound for a non-fixed time from the time the specific operation means (operation button 410) is rendered in the inoperable state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is rendered in the inoperable state from the operated state (i.e., not operated) (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite ...

With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled states of the type that cannot be terminated (the third A reception permitted state, the fourth A reception permitted state), it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end. For example, it is possible to suitably suggest that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect immediately after the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. On the other hand, in the multiple operation enabled states of the type that can be terminated (the first A reception permitted state, the second A reception permitted state), it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means When the operation button 410 is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, the amount of time that will elapse after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end is both predictable and difficult to predict. For example, while it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect that occurs after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end a certain amount of time after the button is changed to a non-operation state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the button is changed to a non-operation state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

As mentioned above, among the types of multiple operation valid states (first A reception allowance state, second A reception allowance state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A reception allowance state), even within one valid period, the post-operation output sound may be output in two ways: when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149 (g)) and when the post-operation output sound is output, When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated, a sound may be output in which the time from when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of indefinite time) (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)). Therefore, in a special multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state), for example, while it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect of changing the specific operation means from an operated state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will not necessarily end a fixed time after being changed to a non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to a non-operated state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Incidentally, among the types of multiple operation valid states (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, in the special multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound output is not a sound in which "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, in which it is not operated, while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time." However, the only case in which the post-operation output sound is output is a sound in which "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, in which it is not operated, while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (sound of an indefinite time)."

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In addition, in the 14th configuration A14, among the multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation valid states (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state) of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that a specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing are generated as "multiple operation valid states in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state," but the multiple operation valid states (third A reception allowable state) of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing are generated as "multiple operation valid states in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state." The fourth A reception allowable state, the fourth A reception allowable state, and the fourth A reception allowable state can occur either as a "multiple operation enabled state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state," or as a "multiple operation enabled state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state." Therefore, in a multiple operation enabled state in which the operation enabled state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the auto rapid-fire function is enabled or not.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth configuration A14, in a type of multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowance state, second A reception allowance state) in which the valid operation state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, the message display MA is always displayed (message displays MA1, MA2). However, in a type of multiple operation valid state (third A reception allowance state, fourth A reception allowance state) in which the valid operation state cannot be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, the message display MA is sometimes displayed (fourth A reception allowance state) and sometimes not displayed (third A reception allowance state). Therefore, when the message display MA is displayed, it is difficult to recognize which type of multiple operation valid state has occurred, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, with regard to the 14th configuration A14, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to mock image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 14th configuration A14 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in order to realize the 14th configuration A14, it is possible to have only one of the 3A reception-permitted state and the 4A reception-permitted state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, as a 15th configuration A15, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146) and a second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) are prepared, which have mutually different occurrence conditions. In both the first multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptance state) and the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated, and the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146, second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149) is in an output state (for example, the period from timing tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 in FIG. 146 or the timing In the first multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state), under the circumstances where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is provisionally changed from a non-operation state to an operation state, both of a sound that may cause a change (end) in the output state (first post-reception output sound SA1 (timing tAa2-C1) shown in FIG. 146(g)) and a sound that does not cause a change in the output state (second post-reception output sound SB1 shown in FIG. 146(h)) may be in an output state as the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound), but when the specific operation means is in an operation state, Moreover, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state under a situation in which the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state is prevented from changing regardless of the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound (first-A post-acceptance output sound) (see, for example, timing tAa2-A2 and timing tAa2-B3 in FIGS. 146(g) and 146(h)). On the other hand, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (first-A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state under a situation in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is provisionally changed from a non-operating state to an operating state (see, for example, timing tAa2-A2 and timing tAa2-B3 in FIG. 146(g) and 146(h)). See timing tAb-C1, etc.) When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state under circumstances in which a sound that does not cause a change in the output state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state (although no sound that may cause a change in the output state is being output as the post-operation output sound), and the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound (secondA post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, this triggers either a change depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) or no change (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3, etc.).

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state), even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state is set to a non-operation state, this does not cause a change (termination) in the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) that was in an output state until then, so it is expected that the user will interrupt the operation without hesitation. However, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in a non-operation state is set to an operation state, there are cases in which a change (termination) occurs in the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) that was in an output state until then, and cases in which no change (termination) occurs. Therefore, while encouraging re-operation, the possibility of a change in the post-operation output sound is also expected to provide an appropriate sense of tension regarding re-operation. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state is changed to a non-operated state, the post-operation output sound that had been in an output state until then may change, or may not change (end). This encourages the user to interrupt the operation, but the possibility of a change in the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) appropriately creates a sense of tension about interrupting the operation. On the other hand, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in a non-operated state is changed to an operated state, the post-operation output sound that had been in an output state until then (end) does not change (end), so it can be expected that the user will operate the operation again with ease.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this triggers a change (termination) of the post-operation display (repeated tap display HA2) that was displayed up until that point. At this time, a display different from the post-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) appears (see Figures 151 (c), (f), etc.), making it possible to more proactively encourage the user to discontinue operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in an operated state is changed to a non-operated state, this triggers the display of the post-non-operation display HB2. However, at this time, the sound effect corresponding to the post-non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, so it is possible to suggest that the post-non-operation display HB2 was not displayed as a result of the change to the operated state, but was instead displayed as a result of the change to the non-operated state.

In addition, in the fifteenth configuration A15, the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the second multiple-operation enabled state (second-A acceptance allowed state) includes a type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (terminate) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. This allows for a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in an output state. In other words, in this case, when an operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) that had been in an output state changes (terminates), thereby providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the fifteenth configuration A15, the post-operation output sound of a type that changes (ends) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output under both circumstances, when the post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state and when it is not in an output state, but the specific operation means (operation button 410) The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) does not start being output alone when the post-operation output sound of a type that changes (ends) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but can start being output when (or at the same time as) it is in an output state, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the second multiple-operation enabled state (second A reception-permitted state) of the fifteenth configuration A15, even if the output condition for the second post-operation output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-operation output sound SB2 is initiated based on the operation reception at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-operation output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be initiated based on the operation reception at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the first post-operation output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 simply continues to be played; the playback state is not interrupted and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data is not initiated or restarted.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the fifteenth configuration A15, if the output condition for the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time timing tAa2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and output of a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins.

Furthermore, with regard to the fifteenth configuration A15, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to mock-up image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the fifteenth configuration A15 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, to realize the fifteenth configuration A15, the third A reception-allowed state may be provided as the first multiple operation enabled state instead of the first A reception-allowed state. Alternatively, both the first A reception-allowed state and the third A reception-allowed state may be provided.

Furthermore, for example, as a 16th configuration A16, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times for the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 158) and a second multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) are prepared, each of which has a different occurrence condition, and the first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permitted state) is generated as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display that imitates the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) of the operating means is displayed, and a first-side post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 158) is in an output state in response to detection that the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) has entered an operation state in which it is being operated, and It is possible to play the game so as to create a situation in which the second operating means (operation button 410) is not being operated and is in a non-operation state (for example, the period from timing tAe2-B2 to timing tAe2-C1 shown in FIG. 158), and the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state) occurs as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display modeling the second operating means (operation button 410) of the operating means is displayed. It is possible to play the game so as to create a situation in which the second side post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149) is in an output state in response to detection that the second operating means (operation button 410) has entered an operation state in which it is being operated and the second operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated (for example, the period from timing tAb2-B3 to timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149).

In this regard, in the 16th configuration A16, in a situation where the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in a non-operated state and the first-side post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) is in an output state during the first multiple-operation enabled state (5A reception permitted state), only a sound (the 5A post-reception output sound shown in Figures 158(g) and 158(h)) that causes a change (end) in the output state when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is provisionally changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (for example, when timing tAe-C1 arrives) is output as the first-side post-operation output sound. While this may occur (although processing to cause a change to the sound in the output state is possible), if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is in an operating state and the first-side post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound (sword decorative body 5001) will not change as a result (processing to cause a change to the sound in the output state is not possible) (for example, see timing tAe2-A2 shown in Figures 158 (g) and (h)).

With this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (5A reception permitted state), even if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, the post-operation output sound (post-5A reception output sound) that had been in an output state until then will not change (end), which is expected to lead to a casual interruption of operation. However, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) in a non-operating state is changed to an operating state, the post-operation output sound (post-5A reception output sound) that had been in an output state until then may change (end), which is expected to provide a good sense of tension when operating again.

In addition, in the 16th configuration A16, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the second-side post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state, only a sound that does not cause a change (end) in the output state when the second operating means (operation button 410) is temporarily changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (for example, when timing tAb-C1 arrives) (the second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) is output as the second-side post-operation output sound (although a sound that may cause a change in the output state is not output). (The second side post-operation output sound is not output as the second-side post-operation output sound), when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and the second-side post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, this may trigger a change (termination) depending on the type of sound being output as the second-side post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) or a change (termination) may not occur (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)).

With this configuration, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), while the user is prompted to interrupt the operation, there is also a possibility that the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) may change (end), which creates a sense of tension about interrupting the operation. On the other hand, when the second operating means (operation button 410) that is in a non-operation state is switched to an operation state, the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) that was in an output state until then will not change (end), which is expected to encourage users to operate the device again without hesitation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) that is in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this triggers a change (termination) of the post-operation display (repeated tap display HA2) that was displayed up until that point. At this time, a display different from the post-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) appears (see Figures 151 (c), (f), etc.), making it possible to more proactively encourage the user to discontinue operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) that is in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this triggers the display of the post-non-operation display HB2. However, at this time, the sound effect corresponding to the post-non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, so it is possible to suggest that the post-non-operation display HB2 was not displayed as a result of the change to the operating state, but was instead displayed as a result of the change to the non-operating state.

In addition, in the sixteenth configuration A16, the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the second multiple-operation enabled state (second-A acceptance allowed state) includes a type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (terminate) when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. This allows for a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in an output state. In other words, in this case, when an operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) that had been in an output state changes (terminates), thereby providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) according to the 16th configuration A16, the type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output under both circumstances, when the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state and when it is not in an output state, but when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, the type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output under both circumstances, when the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state and when it is not in an output state. The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) when the operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) does not start being output alone when the post-operation output sound of a type that changes (ends) when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but can start being output when it is in an output state (or simultaneously), thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the second multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state) of the sixteenth configuration A16, even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 simply continues to be played; the playback state is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not initiated or restarted.

Furthermore, for example, a 17th configuration A17 is provided which includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state is provided with a first multiple operation valid state (3A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 152) and a second multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) which have different occurrence conditions, and the second multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state) can be terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing, but the first multiple operation valid state (3A acceptance acceptance state) is not a state which can be terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing. Then, in the first multiple operation valid state (third-A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (third-A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change (end) as a trigger (first post-reception output sound SA3 shown at timing tAc2-C1 in FIG. 152(g)). When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the post-operation output sound (third A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is prevented from changing (ending) (for example, see the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 shown at timing tAc2-B3 in FIGS. 152(g) and 152(h)). In contrast, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (third A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is prevented from changing (ending) (for example, see the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 shown at timing tAc2-B3 in FIGS. 152(g) and 152(h)). In a situation where the force sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is provisionally changed from a non-operation state to an operation state (see, for example, timing tAb-C1 shown in FIG. 149), a sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not cause a change (end) in the output state is in an output state as the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound). If the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, this will either cause a change (termination) depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) or no change (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3, etc.).

With this configuration, when a "first multiple operation valid state (third A reception permitted state)" that will not be terminated by a player's operation is occurring, it is possible to more actively encourage the player to put the specific operation means that is in a non-operated state into an operated state. Furthermore, when a "second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state)" that may be terminated by a player's operation is occurring, it is possible to more actively encourage the player to put the specific operation means that is in an operated state into a non-operated state, while also outputting a sound that does not cause a change (termination) in response to the non-operated state, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this triggers a change (termination) of the post-operation display (repeated tap display HA2) that was displayed up until that point. At this time, a display different from the post-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) appears (see Figures 151 (c), (f), etc.), making it possible to more proactively encourage the user to discontinue operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in an operated state is changed to a non-operated state, this triggers the display of the post-non-operation display HB2. However, at this time, the sound effect corresponding to the post-non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, so it is possible to suggest that the post-non-operation display HB2 was not displayed as a result of the change to the operated state, but was instead displayed as a result of the change to the non-operated state.

In addition, in the seventeenth configuration A17, the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the second multiple-operation enabled state (second-A acceptance allowed state) includes a type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (terminate) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. This allows for a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in an output state. In other words, in this case, when an operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) that had been in an output state changes (terminates), thereby providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the seventeenth configuration A17, the post-operation output sound of a type that changes (ends) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output under both circumstances, when the post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state and when it is not in an output state, but the specific operation means (operation button 410) The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) does not start being output alone when the post-operation output sound of a type that changes (ends) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but can start being output when (or at the same time as) it is in an output state, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the second multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state) of the seventeenth configuration A17, even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 is simply continued; the playback is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not initiated or restarted.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (3A reception permitted state) of the seventeenth configuration A17, if the output condition for the first post-acceptance output sound SB3 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state (timing tAc2-B2 shown in FIG. 152), the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAc2-B2, while the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAc2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time timing tAc2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins to be output.

Furthermore, with regard to the seventeenth configuration A17, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is the target of displaying a mock image and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the seventeenth configuration A17 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, for example, an 18th configuration A18 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146) and a second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) are prepared, which have mutually different occurrence conditions. In both the first multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptance state) and the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated, and the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146, second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149) is in an output state (for example, at timings tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 in FIG. 146). 149). In the first multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and a post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the time from when the specific operation means is in the operation state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is terminated may be fixed (first post-reception output sound SA1 shown in FIG. 146(g)) or indefinite (second post-reception output sound SB1 shown in FIG. 146(h)) depending on the type of the post-operation output sound in the output state (the timings shown in FIGS. 146(g) and 146(h)). 146(g) and (h) in the second multiple-operation valid state (second-A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound (first-A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite (see timing tAa2-B3 shown in FIG. 146(g) and (h) in the second multiple-operation valid state (second-A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an operating state while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (second-A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an operating state is indefinite (see timing tAa2-B3 shown in FIG. 146(g) and (h) in the second multiple-operation valid state (second-A reception permitted state), ... The time until the output state of the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) is terminated is variable (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h)). However, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) is terminated can be fixed (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) or variable (first post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) depending on the type of post-operation output sound in the output state (see timing tAa2-B3 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and 149(h)). In the example described above, the fixed time is set to "0 seconds."

With this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (first A acceptance permitted state), it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the non-operated state before the post-operation output sound in the output state ends when the specific operation means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state. For example, it is possible to suitably suggest that the post-operation output sound is not worth paying attention to immediately after the specific operation means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state. In contrast, when the specific operation means is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state, it is possible to suggest both how much time will pass after the operation state before the post-operation output sound in the output state ends. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that the post-operation output sound may be worth paying attention to after the specific operation means is changed back to the operated state, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in the output state will end after a certain amount of time has passed since the specific operation means is changed back to the operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when the specific operation means is changed back to the operated state.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end; for example, it is possible to suitably suggest that the post-operation output sound is not noteworthy immediately after the specific operation means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state. In contrast, when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, it is possible to suggest how much time will pass after the non-operated state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end, both in a predictable and a difficult way. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that the post-operation output sound may be noteworthy after the specific operation means is changed to a non-operated state, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in an output state will end after a certain amount of time has passed since the operation, which is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when the specific operation means is changed to a non-operated state.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this triggers a change (termination) of the post-operation display (repeated tap display HA2) that was displayed up until that point. At this time, a display different from the post-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) appears (see Figures 151 (c), (f), etc.), making it possible to more proactively encourage the user to discontinue operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in an operated state is changed to a non-operated state, this triggers the display of the post-non-operation display HB2. However, at this time, the sound effect corresponding to the post-non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, so it is possible to suggest that the post-non-operation display HB2 was not displayed as a result of the change to the operated state, but was instead displayed as a result of the change to the non-operated state.

In addition, in the 18th configuration A18, as the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the second multiple-operation enabled state (second-A acceptance allowed state), two types of post-operation output sound are provided: one type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state ends a fixed time after the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state; and another type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state ends an indefinite time, rather than a fixed time, after the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. This allows for a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in an output state. In other words, in this case, when an operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) that had been in an output state is terminated within the fixed time, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the 18th configuration A18, the post-operation output sound of a type that ends a fixed time after the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output under both circumstances, whether or not the post-operation output sound of a type that ends an indefinite time, not a fixed time, after the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state, but The post-operation output sound of a type that ends after an indefinite time, rather than a fixed time, after the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is not output independently when the post-operation output sound of a type that ends after a fixed time, after the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in the output state, but can be output when (or simultaneously with) it is in the output state, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension and encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the second multiple-operation enabled state (second A reception-permitted state) of the 18th configuration A18, even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is initiated based on the operation reception at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be initiated based on the operation reception at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 is simply continued; the playback is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not initiated or restarted.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the eighteenth configuration A18, if the output condition for the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time timing tAa2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins to be output.

Furthermore, with regard to the 18th configuration A18, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to mock-up image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 18th configuration A18 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, to realize the 18th configuration A18, the 3A reception-allowed state may be provided as the first multiple operation enabled state instead of the 1A reception-allowed state. Alternatively, both the 1A reception-allowed state and the 3A reception-allowed state may be provided.

Furthermore, for example, as a 19th configuration A19, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times for the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 158) and a second multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) are prepared, each of which has a different occurrence condition, and the first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permitted state) is generated as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display that imitates the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) of the operating means is displayed, and a first-side post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 158) is in an output state in response to detection that the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) has entered an operation state in which it is being operated, and when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is operated, It is possible to play the game so as to create a situation in which the second operating means (operation button 410) is not being operated and is in a non-operation state (for example, the period from timing tAe2-B2 to timing tAe2-C1 shown in FIG. 158), and the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state) occurs as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display modeling the second operating means (operation button 410) of the operating means is displayed. It is possible to play the game so as to create a situation in which the second side post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149) is in an output state in response to detection that the second operating means (operation button 410) has entered an operation state in which it is being operated and the second operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated (for example, the period from timing tAb2-B3 to timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149).

In this regard, in the 19th configuration A19, in the first multiple operation enabled state (5A reception permitted state), when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in a non-operated state and the first side post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the first operating means changes to the operated state until the output state of the first side post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) is terminated can be treated as a fixed time, but When the first operating means (sword decorative element 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operating means (sword decorative element 5001) is in an operating state and the first operating means (sword decorative element 5001) is in an operating state, the time from when the non-operating state is reached to when the output state of the first operating sound (output sound after receiving 5A) ends is indefinite (not treated as a fixed time) (see, for example, timing tAe2-A2 shown in Figures 158 (g) and (h)). In the example above, the fixed time is set to "0 seconds."

With this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (5A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) that is output when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state makes it possible to predict how much time will pass after the operating state when it ends. This preferably suggests, for example, that there is noteworthy dramatic effect even shortly after the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state. On the other hand, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the non-operated state when the post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) that is output when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. This preferably suggests, for example, that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect shortly after the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state.

In addition, in the 19th configuration A19, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the second operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state while the second side post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state and the second operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, if the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the second side post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is terminated is indefinite, but the second side post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) When the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means (operation button 410) is in an output state and the second operating means is in an operating state, the time from when the non-operating state is entered to when the output state of the second-side post-operation output sound (secondA post-acceptance output sound) is terminated is either fixed (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) or indefinite (first post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) depending on the type of second-side post-operation output sound in the output state.

With this configuration, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state when the post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound) that is in an output state will end. For example, this can suitably suggest that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect when the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state shortly thereafter. However, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, In this case, the time that will elapse after the second operating means is switched to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound (operation button 410) in the output state is either predictable or difficult to predict. For example, while it may be possible to suggest that the performance after the second operating means is switched to a non-operated state is worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound in the output state will not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the second operating means was switched to a non-operated state, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the second operating means is switched to a non-operated state.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) that is in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this is used as an opportunity to terminate the post-operation display (repeated tap display HA2) that was displayed up until then, but at this time, a display different from the post-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is made to appear (see Figures 151 (c), (f), etc.), making it possible to more actively encourage the user to discontinue operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) that is in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this triggers the display of the post-non-operation display HB2. However, at this time, the sound effect corresponding to the post-non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, so it is possible to suggest that the post-non-operation display HB2 was not displayed as a result of the change to the operating state, but was instead displayed as a result of the change to the non-operating state.

In addition, in the 19th configuration A19, as the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the second multiple-operation enabled state (second-A acceptance allowed state), two types of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state ends a fixed time after the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and another type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state ends an indefinite time, rather than a fixed time, after the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state are provided. This allows for a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in an output state. In other words, in this case, when an operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) that had been in an output state is terminated within a fixed time, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) according to the 19th configuration A19, the post-operation output sound of a type that ends a fixed time after the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output under both circumstances, whether or not the post-operation output sound of a type that ends an indefinite time, not a fixed time, after the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state, but The post-operation output sound of a type that ends after an indefinite time, rather than a fixed time, after the operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is not output independently when the post-operation output sound of a type that ends after a fixed time, after the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in the output state, but can be output when (or simultaneously with) it is in the output state, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension and encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance state) of the 19th configuration A19, even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 simply continues to be played; the playback state is not interrupted and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data is not initiated or restarted.

Furthermore, for example, a 20th configuration A20 is provided with a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid states are provided with a first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146). In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state where it is not operated and a post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in an operation state, and a post-operation output sound in response to the detection is output. In the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth-A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the fourth-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, but in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time (not treated as a fixed time). In the third multiple-operation enabled state (first-A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the first-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state. In this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be treated as a fixed time. Furthermore, among the multiple-operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, in the first multiple-operation valid state (second-A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to be an indefinite time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state under a situation in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second-A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second-A post-reception output sound) is not changed (ended) as a result of this (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and 149(h)). In contrast, in the third multiple-operation valid state (first-A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to be a fixed time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second-A post-reception output sound) is in an output state under When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) can be changed (ended) as a result (see, for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). Therefore, the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times in response to the detection simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state. In the second multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state) where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (ended) as a result (see, for example, timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155 (g) and 155 (h)).

With this configuration, in both cases where the player performs a second operation in the second multiple operation enabled state (4th A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled, and where the player performs a second operation in the third multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled at regular intervals, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (ended) as a result of this, making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation in which the auto-rapid tap function is enabled, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A operation acceptance permitted state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A operation acceptance permitted state)), that is, that the player is in a situation where the auto-rapid-hit function is to be enabled. Therefore, while it is difficult to recognize whether the auto-rapid-hit function is to be enabled by not enabling the so-called auto-rapid-hit function at regular intervals, this configuration can prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception allowed state shown in Figure 149), there are two cases where a post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149 (h)) is output, in which the output state does not change (terminate) upon detection of a non-operation state, and there are also cases where a post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149 (g)) is output, in which the output state changes (terminates) upon detection of a non-operation state. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), whose output state is changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operation state, will no longer be in an output state at the time that a second operation is performed thereafter, and only the post-operation output sound (the post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), whose output state is not changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operation state, can be put into an output state as a sound that will not be changed (terminated) by the second operation, at the time that a second operation is performed.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation enabled state (1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) does not include a post-operation output sound of the type that does not maintain the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, but instead uses this as an opportunity to change (terminate) the output state; only a post-operation output sound of the type that does not change (terminate) the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state is provided.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In the twentieth configuration A20, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are all the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to replace the "specific operating means" with "an operating means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, when realizing the twentieth configuration A20, the multiple operation valid state may include the third A reception allowance state instead of the first A reception allowance state, and the third A reception allowance state may be realized as the third multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the first A reception allowance state and the third A reception allowance state.

Furthermore, for example, as the 21st configuration A21, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which operation acceptance for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which it has not been operated and an output sound is in an output state after operation, and in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state), the specific operation The post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time (not processed as a fixed time), and in the second multiple operations enabled state (first A reception allowed state), the post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be processed to be a fixed time. In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149 ) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state under the circumstances in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception post-output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A reception post-output sound) is not changed (ended) as a result of this (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149( g) and 149( h)), and the post-operation output sound is not newly generated. In the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 ), in which the interval between the generation of the post-operation output sound and the generation of the post-operation output sound is a fixed time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state under conditions in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, this triggers either a change (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146 (g)) or no change (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146 (h)) depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound).

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 149) in which the so-called auto rapid-fire function is not activated at regular intervals, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) does not change (end) as a result of this. Therefore, combined with the fact that the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, it is expected that it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether their operation has been properly accepted, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast to this, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which the so-called auto rapid-fire function is enabled at regular intervals, for example, while suggesting that the performance that occurs after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is again put into an operation state may be worth noting, the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) that is in an output state is not necessarily changed (ended) when the operation state is again put into an operation state, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the operation state is again put into an operation state.

In addition, as the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation enabled state (post-2A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149), two types of post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) are provided, one type of post-operation output sound whose output state changes (ends) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and another type of post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. This allows for a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in an output state. In other words, in this case, when an operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that had been in an output state changes (ends), which provides a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is in an output state under either a situation where the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or a situation where it is not in an output state. However, a type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) may not be output independently when a type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in the output state, but may be output when (or simultaneously with) the type of post-operation output sound that does change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state.

Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A reception-permitted state) of the second configuration A21, even if the output condition for the second post-operation output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-operation output sound SB2 is initiated based on the operation reception at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-operation output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be initiated based on the operation reception at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-operation output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 is simply continued; the playback is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not initiated or restarted.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the 21st configuration A21, if the output condition for the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time timing tAa2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins to be output.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Note that, in the 21st configuration A21, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation valid state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 21st configuration A21 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 21st configuration A21, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception allowance state instead of the 1A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state may be realized as the second multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception allowance state and the 3A reception allowance state.

Furthermore, for example, a 22nd configuration A22 is provided with a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid states are provided with a first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (4A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146). In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state where it is not operated and a post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in an operation state, and a post-operation output sound in response to the detection is output. In the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth-A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the fourth-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, but in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time (not treated as a fixed time). In the third multiple-operation enabled state (first-A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the first-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state. In this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be treated as a fixed time. Then, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, 149(h) ) from a non-operation state to an operation state, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound (the output sound after the second A reception) is terminated is indefinite (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h) ). In contrast, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the new generation of the post-operation output sound is a fixed time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (the output sound after the first A reception) is terminated. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the operation state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is terminated can be treated as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time (see, for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). Therefore, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times only when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state. In the 2 multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output is terminated can be treated as a fixed time (see, for example, timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and 155(h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

With this configuration, whether the player performs a second operation in the second multiple operation enabled state (4th A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled, or the player performs a second operation in the third multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled at regular intervals, the time from the player performing a second operation to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is constant, making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation in which the auto-rapid tap function is enabled, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A operation acceptance permitted state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A operation acceptance permitted state)), that is, that the player is in a situation where the auto-rapid-hit function is to be enabled. Therefore, by making the so-called auto-rapid-hit function not enabled at regular intervals, it is difficult to recognize whether the auto-rapid-hit function is to be enabled, and this configuration can prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149 ) in which the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is set to an indefinite time, when a specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is processed as if the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state until the output state is terminated is indefinite (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(h)), or as if the time until the output state is terminated is treated as if it were a fixed time (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) that had been in an output state until then is terminated within a fixed time, which provides an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

In the above-mentioned performance example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state (the 4A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation enabled state (the 1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), no post-operation output sound of the type in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state to when the output state is terminated is fixed is provided; only post-operation output sounds of the type in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state to when the output state is terminated can be treated as a fixed time are provided.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In the 22nd configuration A22, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are all the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to replace the "specific operating means" with "an operating means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, when realizing the 22nd configuration A22, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception allowance state instead of the 1A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state may be realized as the third multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception allowance state and the 3A reception allowance state.

Furthermore, for example, as a 23rd configuration A23, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which it has not been operated and an output sound is in an output state after operation, and in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state), The post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time (not processed as a fixed time), and in the second multiple operations enabled state (first A reception allowed state), the post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be processed to be a fixed time. In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149 ) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, when the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is changed from the inactive state to the active state under the circumstances in which the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in the inactive state and the post-operation output sound (the post-second A reception output sound) is in the output state, the time from when the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is changed to the active state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (the post-second A reception output sound) is terminated is indefinite (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149( g) and 149( h)). In the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 ), in which the interval until a new operation is generated is a fixed time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means is changed to the operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is terminated can be either an indefinite time (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146( h)) or a fixed time (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146( g)). In the example described above, the fixed time from when the operating state is changed to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is set to "0 seconds."

With this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled at regular intervals, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite. This, combined with the fact that the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated is indefinite, makes it difficult for the player to determine whether their operation has been properly accepted, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A acceptance permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled at regular intervals, for example, while suggesting that the performance after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed back to an operated state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state does not necessarily end within a certain time after the operation state is changed back to an operated state, is expected to maintain a sense of tension when the operation state is changed back to an operated state in an appropriate manner.

In addition, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a situation can occur in which both a type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is not treated as a fixed time but is indefinite, and a type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) in which the time until the output state is terminated is treated as a fixed time (0 seconds in the example described above) are in an output state.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the post-operation output sound of a type that ends a certain time (0 seconds in the example described above) after the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is output regardless of whether the post-operation output sound of a type that does not end a certain time after the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state but ends an indefinite time (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or not in an output state. However, a post-operation output sound of a type that does not end within a fixed time after the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state and ends within an indefinite time (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) may not be output independently when a post-operation output sound of a type that ends within a fixed time (0 seconds in the example above) after the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in the output state, but may be output when (or simultaneously with) the post-operation output sound.

Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state) of the 23rd configuration A23, even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 is simply continued; the playback is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not initiated or restarted.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the 23rd configuration A23, if the output condition for the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time timing tAa2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and output of a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Note that, in the 23rd configuration A23, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation valid state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 23rd configuration A23 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 23rd configuration A23, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception allowance state instead of the 1A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state may be realized as the second multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception allowance state and the 3A reception allowance state.

Furthermore, for example, as a 24th configuration A24, there is provided a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, there are provided an indefinitely-changed multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) in which a post-operation output sound in response to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and at that time, it is possible to process the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated to be an indefinite time, and a fixed-changed multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state shown in FIG. 146, third A acceptance state shown in FIG. 152) in which a post-operation output sound in response to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and at that time, it is possible to process the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated to be a fixed time, and The operation valid state (second A reception allowable state) occurs as a type of multiple operation valid state that can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives, whereas the fixed-change multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state) occurs either as a type of multiple operation valid state that cannot be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives (third A reception allowable state), or as a type of multiple operation valid state that can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives (third A reception allowable state).

With this configuration, if the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state is set to an indefinite time, it is possible to appropriately suggest that the state can be ended when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state. On the other hand, if the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state is set to a fixed time, it becomes difficult to tell whether the state can be ended when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state, or whether the state cannot be ended when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state, which is expected to appropriately maintain a sense of tension.

In the indefinitely-changing multiple operations enabled state (second A reception permitted state), the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is not processed to be a fixed time, but is only processed to be an indefinite time. However, in the fixedly-changing multiple operations enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state), it is sufficient that at least processing be performed in which the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is a fixed time, and it is also possible to perform both processing in which the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is a fixed time (first post-reception output sound) and processing in which the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is an indefinite time (second post-reception output sound).

In the indefinitely changing multiple operation enabled state (second-A reception permitted state), when it is detected that a specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the post-operation output sound will either maintain its output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (second-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), or it will not maintain its output state and will instead end the output state (second-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (second-A post-reception output sound) that had been in an output state until then will change (end), thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

In the fixed change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowed state, third A reception allowed state), the post-operation output sound does not end its output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, making it easier to interrupt the operation.

Furthermore, in the indefinite-change multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), there are no cases where the message display is not displayed, and the message display is always displayed. However, in the fixed-change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state), there are cases where the message display is displayed and cases where the message display is not displayed, which is expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Note that in the 24th configuration A24, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the fixed-change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowed state, third A reception allowed state) and the non-fixed-change multiple operation enabled state (second A reception allowed state) is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 24th configuration A24 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, for example, as a 25th configuration A25, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which operation acceptance for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid states, a first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (4A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state where it is not operated and an output sound is in an output state after operation, and in the first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in an operated state, and The post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) can be generated multiple times, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time. In the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the fourth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155) in response to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state. In the third multiple-operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time. Furthermore, among the multiple-operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, in the first multiple-operation valid state (second-A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than a specific time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state under a situation in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second-A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second-A post-reception output sound) is not changed (ended) as a result (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and 149(h)). In contrast, in the third multiple-operation valid state (first-A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second-A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state under the circumstances where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) can be changed (ended) by this (see, for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). Therefore, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output multiple times while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is merely maintained in an operation state. In the second multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state) in which the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is not generated, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (ended) as a result (see, for example, timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155 (g) and 155 (h)).

With this configuration, in both cases where the player performs another operation in the second multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state) where the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled, and where the player performs another operation in the third multiple operation enabled state (1A reception permitted state) where the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled and a new post-operation output is initiated simply after a specific time or less has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, the post-operation output sound that was in an output state will change (end) in response to the player's second operation, making it difficult to recognize whether or not the situation is one in which the auto-rapid tap function is enabled, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-rapid-operation function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state)), that is, that the player is in a situation where the auto-rapid-operation function is enabled. Therefore, since the so-called auto-rapid-operation function is not enabled until a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is difficult to recognize that the auto-rapid-operation function is enabled, and this configuration can prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception allowed state shown in Figure 149), there are two cases where a post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149 (h)) is output, in which the output state does not change (terminate) upon detection of a non-operation state, and there are also cases where a post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149 (g)) is output, in which the output state changes (terminates) upon detection of a non-operation state. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), whose output state is changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operation state, will no longer be in an output state at the time that a second operation is performed thereafter, and only the post-operation output sound (the post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), whose output state is not changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operation state, can be put into an output state as a sound that will not be changed (terminated) by the second operation, at the time that a second operation is performed.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation enabled state (1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) does not include a post-operation output sound of the type that does not maintain the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, but instead uses this as an opportunity to change (terminate) the output state; only a post-operation output sound of the type that does not change (terminate) the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state is provided.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In the 25th configuration A25, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are all the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operating means" with "an operating means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, when realizing the 25th configuration A25, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception allowance state instead of the 1A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state may be realized as the third multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception allowance state and the 3A reception allowance state.

Furthermore, for example, as the 26th configuration A26, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operations on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which it has not been operated and an output sound is in an output state after operation, and in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state), Simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be longer than the specific time. In the second multiple operations enabled state (first A reception allowed state), simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be shorter than the specific time. In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149 ) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state under the circumstances where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception post-output sound) is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A reception post-output sound) is not changed (ended) as a result of this (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149( g) and 149( h)), and the post-operation output sound is not newly generated. In the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 ), in which the interval between the generation of the first operation sound and the generation of the second operation sound is always equal to or shorter than the specific time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, this triggers either a change (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146 (g)) or no change (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146 (h)) depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound).

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 149) in which a new post-operation output will not be initiated by the so-called auto rapid-fire function unless a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) will not change (end) as a result. Therefore, combined with the fact that the so-called auto rapid-fire function will not be enabled (function) unless a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is expected that it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether their operation has been accepted properly, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast to this, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), in which the so-called auto rapid-fire function is enabled (functions) and a new post-operation output is initiated simply when a specific time or less has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, for example, while suggesting that the dramatic effects that occur when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is again placed in the operation state may be worth noting, the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not necessarily changed (ended) when the operation state is resumed, so it is expected that the sense of tension when the operation state is resumed will be suitably maintained.

In addition, as the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation enabled state (post-2A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149), two types of post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) are provided, one type of post-operation output sound whose output state changes (ends) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and another type of post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. This allows for a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in an output state. In other words, in this case, when an operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that had been in an output state changes (ends), which provides a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is in an output state under either a situation where the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or a situation where it is not in an output state. However, a type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) may not be output independently when a type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in the output state, but may be output when (or simultaneously with) the type of post-operation output sound that does change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state.

Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state) of the 26th configuration A26, even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2, while the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 is simply continued; the playback is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not initiated or restarted.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the 26th configuration A26, if the output condition for the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time timing tAa2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and output of a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Note that in the 26th configuration A26, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mockup image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation valid state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 26th configuration A26 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 26th configuration A26, the multiple operation valid state may include the third A reception allowance state instead of the first A reception allowance state, and the third A reception allowance state may be realized as the second multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the first A reception allowance state and the third A reception allowance state.

Furthermore, for example, as a 27th configuration A27, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operations on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid states, a first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (4A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are provided, and in all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state where it is not operated and an output sound is in an output state after operation, and in the first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in an operated state, and in response to the detection, In the second multiple operations enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be longer than the specific time. In the second multiple operations enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the fourth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state. In the third multiple operations enabled state (first A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be shorter than the specific time. Then, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than a specific time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, When the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation state is changed to when the output state of the post-operation output sound (second-A post-acceptance output sound) is terminated is indefinite (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h)). In contrast, in the third multiple-operation valid state (first-A acceptance permitted state), in which the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is always the specific time or less, the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the output state of the post-operation output sound (first-A post-acceptance output sound) is terminated (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h)). When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state under the condition that the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the time from when the operation state is changed to the operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is terminated can be treated as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time (see, for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). Therefore, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state. In the second multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output is terminated can be treated as a fixed time (see, for example, timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and 155(h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

With this configuration, whether the player performs a second operation in the second multiple operation enabled state (4th A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled, or the player performs a second operation in the third multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled (functions) at regular intervals, the time from the player performing a second operation to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is constant, making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation in which the auto-rapid tap function is enabled, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A operation acceptance permitted state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A operation acceptance permitted state)), that is, that the player is in a situation where the auto-rapid-hit function is to be enabled. Therefore, by making the so-called auto-rapid-hit function not enabled at regular intervals, it is difficult to recognize whether the auto-rapid-hit function is to be enabled, and this configuration can prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149 ), in which the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is always longer than the specific time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is processed as if the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state until the output state is terminated is indefinite (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(h)), or as if the time until the output state is terminated is treated as if it were a fixed time (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) that had been in an output state until then is terminated within the fixed time, which provides an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

In the above-mentioned performance example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state (the 4A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation enabled state (the 1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), no post-operation output sound of the type in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state to when the output state is terminated is fixed is provided; only post-operation output sounds of the type in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state to when the output state is terminated can be treated as a fixed time are provided.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In the 27th configuration A27, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are all the same operating means as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operating means" with "an operating means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 27th configuration A27, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception allowance state instead of the 1A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state may be realized as the third multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception allowance state and the 3A reception allowance state.

Furthermore, for example, as the 28th configuration A28, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operations on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which it has not been operated and an output sound is in an output state after operation, and in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state), Simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be longer than the specific time. In the second multiple operations enabled state (first A reception allowed state), simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be shorter than the specific time. In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149 ) in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled unless a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state under the circumstances in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed to the operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is terminated is indefinite (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and 149(h)). In the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 ), in which a so-called auto-repeated function is enabled and a new post-operation output is initiated simply by the passage of a specific time or less after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the specific operation means is in the operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is terminated can be either an indefinite time (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146( h)) or a fixed time (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146( g)). In the example described above, the fixed time from when the specific operation means is in the operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is set to "0 seconds."

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state), in which the so-called auto rapid-fire function is not enabled until a specific time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state again, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite. Therefore, combined with the fact that the interval until the new generation of the post-operation output sound is an indefinite time, it is expected that it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether their operation has been properly accepted, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state), in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled and a new post-operation output is initiated simply when a specific time or less has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, for example, while suggesting that the dramatic effects that occur after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is again put into an operating state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end a specific time after being put into an operating state again, so it is expected that the sense of tension when the operation state is again put into an operating state will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a situation can occur in which both a type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is not treated as a fixed time but is indefinite, and a type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) in which the time until the output state is terminated is treated as a fixed time (0 seconds in the example described above) are in an output state.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the post-operation output sound of a type that ends a certain time (0 seconds in the example described above) after the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is output regardless of whether the post-operation output sound of a type that does not end a certain time after the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state but ends an indefinite time (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or not in an output state. However, a post-operation output sound of a type that does not end within a fixed time after the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state and ends within an indefinite time (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) may not be output independently when a post-operation output sound of a type that ends within a fixed time (0 seconds in the example above) after the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in the output state, but may be output when (or simultaneously with) the post-operation output sound.

Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state) of the 28th configuration A28, even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2, while the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 is simply continued; the playback is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not initiated or restarted.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the 28th configuration A28, if the output condition for the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time timing tAa2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins to be output.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Note that in the 28th configuration A28, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mockup image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation valid state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 28th configuration A28 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, when realizing the 28th configuration A28, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception allowance state instead of the 1A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state may be realized as the second multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception allowance state and the 3A reception allowance state.

Furthermore, for example, as a 29th configuration A29, a multiple operation enabled state is provided in which acceptance of operations for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation enabled state, a long change multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 149) in which a post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time, and a short change multiple operation enabled state (first A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 146, third A acceptance enabled state shown in FIG. 152) in which a post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time, and The operation valid state (second A reception allowable state) occurs as a type of multiple operation valid state that can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives, whereas the short-change multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state) occurs either as a type of multiple operation valid state that cannot be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives (third A reception allowable state), or as a type of multiple operation valid state that can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives (third A reception allowable state).

With this configuration, if the auto-repeated tap function is enabled but the auto-repeated tap function is not enabled until a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is possible to appropriately indicate that the state may be terminated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state. On the other hand, if the auto-repeated tap function is enabled and a new post-operation output is initiated just after a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is difficult to tell whether the state may be terminated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state, or whether the state cannot be terminated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state, which is expected to appropriately maintain a sense of tension.

In the long-change multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is not processed to be a fixed time, but is only processed to be an indefinite time. However, in the short-change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state), it is sufficient that at least processing be performed to cause a fixed time interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated, and both processing to cause a fixed time interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated (first post-reception output sound) and processing to cause an indefinite time interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated (second post-reception output sound) may be performed.

In the long-change multiple operation enabled state (second-A reception permitted state), when it is detected that a specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the post-operation output sound can either maintain its output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (second-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), or it can end its output state without maintaining it (second-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (second-A post-reception output sound) that had been in an output state until then changes (ends), providing an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

In the short-change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound does not end its output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, making it easier to interrupt the operation.

Furthermore, in the long-change multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), there are no cases where the message display is not displayed and the message display is always displayed, but in the short-change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state), there are cases where the message display is displayed and cases where the message display is not displayed, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Note that in the 29th configuration A29, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the short-change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowed state, third A reception allowed state) and the long-change multiple operation enabled state (second A reception allowed state) is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 29th configuration A29 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, for example, a 30th configuration A30 is provided with a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid states are provided with a first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146). In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in a situation where the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in a non-operation state where it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state), it is possible to display periodic changes in the mock image display so that they appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, and the operation means (operation button In the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth-A reception permitted state), a periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, but the post-operation output sound (fourth-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display in the operation state. In the third multiple-operation enabled state (first-A reception permitted state), a periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time shorter than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound (first-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display in the operation state. Then, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display in an operated state, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) in which the periodic change of the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, when the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, When the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound) is not changed (ended) as a result of this (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and 149(h)). In contrast, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state) in which the periodic change of the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is not changed (ended) as a result of this (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and 149(h)). When the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) can be changed (ended) as a result (see, for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)), and the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, but the detection is not possible if the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is simply maintained in an operation state. In the second multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound cannot be generated multiple times, if the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, and the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (ended) as a result (see, for example, timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155 (g) and (h)).

According to this configuration, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display, the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance allowed state) is configured the same as the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A acceptance allowed state) in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled, in that the periodic changes in the simulated image display occur in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the auto-rapid tap function is enabled, thereby maintaining a sense of tension. However, if a second operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, unlike in the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A acceptance allowed state) (see timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155 (g) and (h)), the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figure 149 (h)). Therefore, the presence or absence of such a change at the time of second operation can be expected to effectively suggest that the situation is one in which the auto-rapid tap function is enabled, thereby suppressing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the model image display, the third multiple operation enabled state (first A acceptance permitted state) is configured in the same way as the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A acceptance permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled, in that if another operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be triggered by this. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated tap function is being used, maintaining a sense of tension (see timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). However, unlike in the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A acceptance permitted state), the periodic change in the model image display can be displayed in time units that are equal to or shorter than the predetermined time. Therefore, the length of this periodic change in the model image display can be expected to effectively indicate that the auto-repeated tap function is being enabled, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception allowed state shown in Figure 149) in which the periodic changes in the simulated image display are displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned specified time, there are two cases in which a post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149 (h)) is output, in which the output state does not change (end) when it is detected that the device has entered a non-operation state, and a post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149 (g)) is output, in which the output state changes (ends) when it is detected that the device has entered a non-operation state. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), whose output state is changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operation state, will already be in a non-output state at that point, even if a second operation is performed thereafter, i.e., it will no longer be in an output state. Only the post-operation output sound (the post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), whose output state is not changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operation state, can be put into an output state as a sound that will not be changed (terminated) by the second operation, at the time a second operation is performed.

In the above-mentioned performance example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state (the 4A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation enabled state (the 1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), no post-operation output sound of the type that does not maintain the output state when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state and instead changes (terminates) the output state in response to this change is provided; only post-operation output sounds of the type that do not change (terminate) the output state when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state are provided.

In addition, in the 30th configuration A30, as the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, there are provided a type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149 (g)) whose output state changes (ends) when the operating means to be the target of the mock-up image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)) whose output state does not change (end) when the operating means to be the target of the mock-up image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and it is possible for a situation to occur in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in an output state. In other words, in this case, if the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that had been in an output state until then will be terminated when it goes into a non-operation state, which provides a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) according to the 30th configuration A30, the type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output under both the output state and the non-output state of the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) when the operating means to be displayed changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is not output independently when the post-operation output sound of a type that changes (ends) when the operating means to be displayed as a mock image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but can be output when (or simultaneously with) it is in an output state, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension and encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149) of the 30th configuration A30, even if the output condition for the second post-reception output sound SB2 is met while the operation means to be the target of the simulated image display is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 will begin to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that had been in an output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and that playback state is not interrupted and sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not started to be output, nor is playback restarted.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 30th configuration A30 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the operating means (operation button 410) targeted for mock image display is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Note that, in the 30th configuration A30, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in realizing the 30th configuration A30, the multiple operation enabled state may include the 5A reception allowed state (see FIGS. 158 to 160) instead of the 4A reception allowed state, and the 5A reception allowed state may be realized as the second multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in a second multiple operation enabled state (4A operation acceptance state or 5A operation acceptance state) in which the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes occur in units of time longer than the predetermined time and the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled, a specific type of output sound may be prepared as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state. And, while this specific type of output sound is of the same type, it may be configured so that the output state changes (terminates) when the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, or the output state does not change (terminate). In this case, whether or not such a change (termination) of the output state occurs may be determined based on a judgment (effect judgment) in response to operation acceptance, the number of times an operation is accepted, or the type of display mode that appears as the post-acceptance display.

Furthermore, for example, as the 31st configuration A31, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operations for the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are provided, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state) ), the periodic change in the mock-up image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock-up image display in an operated state, and in the second multiple-operation enabled state (first A reception allowed state), the periodic change in the mock-up image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time shorter than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock-up image display in an operated state. In addition, in the first multiple operations valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149 ), the periodic change of the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and when the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, when the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is not changed (ended) as a result (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149( g) and 149( h)). 146(g)), the imitation image display can be displayed so that periodic changes occur in time units of less than the predetermined time, and when the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first-A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, when the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, this triggers either a change (termination) of the output state (first-A post-acceptance output sound) (first-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)) or a change (termination) of the output state (first-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)), depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound (first-A post-acceptance output sound).

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, even if the operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) does not change (end) as a result of this, making it difficult for the player to recognize whether their operation has been properly accepted, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast to this, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which the periodic changes in the simulated image display are displayed in units of time less than the predetermined time, for example, while suggesting that the performance that occurs after the operation means (operation button 410) is again put into the operation state may be worth noting, the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not necessarily changed (ended) when the operation state is again put into the operation state, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the operation state is again put into the operation state.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception allowed state shown in Figure 149) in which the periodic changes in the simulated image display are displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned specified time, there are two cases in which a post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149 (h)) is output, in which the output state does not change (end) when it is detected that the device has entered a non-operation state, and a post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149 (g)) is output, in which the output state changes (ends) when it is detected that the device has entered a non-operation state. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), whose output state is changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operation state, will no longer be in an output state at the time that a second operation is performed thereafter, and only the post-operation output sound (the post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), whose output state is not changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operation state, can be put into an output state as a sound that will not be changed (terminated) by the second operation, at the time that a second operation is performed.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) does not include a type of post-operation output sound that does not maintain the output state when the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, but instead uses this as an opportunity to change (terminate) the output state; only a type of post-operation output sound that does not change (terminate) the output state when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is provided.

In addition, in the 31st configuration A31, as the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, there are provided a type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) when the operating means to be the target of the mock-up image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end) when the operating means to be the target of the mock-up image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and it is possible for a situation to arise in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in an output state. In other words, in this case, if the operation is interrupted, the output state will not change (end) when only a portion of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that was previously in an output state becomes in an inactive state, which provides a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) according to the 31st configuration A31, the type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output in both situations, whether or not the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state. The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) when the operating means to be displayed changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is not output independently when the post-operation output sound of a type that changes (ends) when the operating means to be displayed as a mock image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but can be output when (or simultaneously with) it is in an output state, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension and encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149) of the 31st configuration A31, even if the output condition for the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is maintained in an operating state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 will begin to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that had been in an output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and that playback state is not interrupted and sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not started to be output, nor is playback restarted.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the thirty-first configuration A31, if the output condition for the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the operation means (operation button 410) targeted for simulated image display is maintained in an operating state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time timing tAa2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins to be output.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the operating means (operation button 410) targeted for mock image display is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 31st configuration A31 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Note that, in the 31st configuration A31, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

Furthermore, for example, as the 32nd configuration A32, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operations for the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (4A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are provided, and in all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and in the first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permitted state), periodic changes in the mock image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display In the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth-A reception permitted state), a periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, but the post-operation output sound in response to the detection (the fourth-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155) cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display in the operation state. In the third multiple-operation enabled state (first-A reception permitted state), a periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time shorter than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection (the first-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display in the operation state. Then, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display in an operated state, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) in which the periodic change of the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, when the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, When the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the time from the change to the operation state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound) is terminated is indefinite (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h)). However, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state) in which the periodic change of the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is terminated. When the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state under the condition that the force sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the time from when the operation means changes to the operation state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is terminated can be treated as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time (see, for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). Therefore, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state of the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display. In the second multiple operation enabled state (4A acceptance permitted state) where the operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, if the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output is terminated can be treated as a fixed time (see, for example, timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and 155(h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

According to this configuration, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the so-called automatic rapid-fire function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display, the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) is configured in the same way as the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) in which the so-called automatic rapid-fire function is not enabled, in that the periodic changes in the simulated image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the operating means is the target of the automatic rapid-fire function, maintaining a sense of tension, while also preventing the operating means from re-operating while the output sound is still in the output state after the operation. In this case, unlike the case of the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) (see timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155(g) and (h)), the time from the second operation to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is not treated as a fixed time but as an indefinite time (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figure 149(h)).Therefore, through this processing mode at the time of the second operation, it can be expected that the situation will be such that the auto-repeated-operation function is enabled, and a decline in interest in the game will be suppressed. Furthermore, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the model image display, the third multiple operation enabled state (first A acceptance permitted state) is configured in the same way as the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A acceptance permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled, in that if a second operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the time from the second operation to the end of the post-operation output sound output state can be treated as a fixed time. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated tap function is in effect and maintains a sense of tension (see timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). However, unlike in the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A acceptance permitted state), the periodic change in the model image display can be displayed in time units that are equal to or shorter than the predetermined time. Therefore, the length of this periodic change in the model image display can be expected to effectively indicate that the auto-repeated tap function is in effect, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic changes in the simulated image display occur in units of time longer than the predetermined time, there are two cases in which a type of post-operation output sound is output in which the time from when the no-operation state is entered until the output state is terminated is treated as a fixed time (the second A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), and a type of post-operation output sound in which the time from when the no-operation state is entered until the output state is terminated is indefinite and not treated as a fixed time (the second A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the no-operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

In the above-mentioned performance example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation enabled state (1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), when the operating means that is the subject of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, no post-operation output sound of the type in which the time from when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is treated as a fixed time is provided, but only post-operation output sounds of the type in which the time from when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is not treated as a fixed time is provided.

In addition, in the 32nd configuration A32, as the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, there are provided a type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149 (g)) in which the time from when the operating means to be the target of the mock-up image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time, and a type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)) in which the time from when the operating means to be the target of the mock-up image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is not a fixed time, and a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state can occur. In other words, in this case, if the operation is interrupted, only part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that had been output until then will be terminated after a certain period of time, which creates a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) according to the 32nd configuration A32, the type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time can be started to be output in both situations, when the type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that cannot be processed so that the time from when the operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time, can be started to be output in both situations, when the mock image display is in the output state and when it is not in the output state. The post-operation output sound of a type that cannot be processed so that the time from when the operating means to be displayed changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is not output independently when the post-operation output sound of a type that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means to be displayed from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in the output state, but can be output when (or simultaneously with) the operating means is in the output state, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension and encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 32nd configuration A32 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not processing related to a change (end) is executed when the operating means (operation button 410) targeted for mock image display is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not processing related to a change (end) is executed when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Note that, in the 32nd configuration A32, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in realizing the 32nd configuration A32, the multiple operation enabled state may be the 5A reception allowed state (see FIGS. 158 to 160) instead of the 4A reception allowed state, and the 5A reception allowed state may be realized as the second multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in a second multiple operation enabled state (4A operation acceptance state or 5A operation acceptance state) in which the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes occur in units of time longer than the predetermined time and the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled, a specific type of output sound may be prepared as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state. The specific type of output sound may be of the same type, but may be processed so that a fixed time elapses between the time the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display changes from a non-operated state to an operated state and the time the output state is terminated, or may not be processed so that a fixed time elapses. In this case, whether or not to execute processing related to such a change (termination) in the output state may be determined based on a judgment (effect judgment) in response to operation acceptance, the number of times an operation is accepted, or the type of display mode that appears as the post-acceptance display.

Furthermore, for example, as a 33rd configuration A33, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operations for the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are provided, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state) ), the periodic change in the mock-up image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock-up image display in an operated state, and in the second multiple-operation enabled state (first A reception allowed state), the periodic change in the mock-up image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time shorter than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock-up image display in an operated state. In addition, in the first multiple operations valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the periodic change of the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and when the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is terminated is indefinite (not processed as a fixed time) (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and 149(h)). In the second multiple operations valid state, In this state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), periodic changes in the simulated image display can be displayed so as to occur in time units of less than the predetermined time, and when the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is terminated is treated as a fixed time (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)), and the time is not treated as a fixed time but is an indefinite time (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)).

According to this configuration, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display in an operation state, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic changes in the imitation image display are displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, even if the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state again, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite, making it difficult for the player to recognize whether their operation has been properly accepted, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast to this, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which the periodic changes in the simulated image display are displayed in units of time less than the predetermined time, for example, it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effects after the operation means (operation button 410) is again put into an operation state may be worth noting, while the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) in the output state does not necessarily end within a certain time after the operation state is again put into an operation state, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the operation state is again put into an operation state.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic changes in the simulated image display are displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, there are two cases in which a post-operation output sound is output (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not processed so that the time from when the no-operation state is entered until the output state is terminated is a fixed time, and there are also cases in which a post-operation output sound is output (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from when the no-operation state is entered until the output state is terminated is a fixed time.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) does not include a type of post-operation output sound that can be processed so that a fixed time elapses between the time the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state and the time the output state is terminated; only a type of post-operation output sound that cannot be processed so that a fixed time elapses between the time the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state and the time the output state is terminated is provided.

In addition, in the 33rd configuration A33, as the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, two types of post-operation output sound are provided: a type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149 (g)) that can be processed so that a fixed time elapses between the time when the operating means that is the target of the mock-up image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state and the time when the output state is terminated, and a type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)) that cannot be processed so that a fixed time elapses between the time when the operating means that is the target of the mock-up image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state and the time when the output state is terminated, and it is possible for a situation to arise in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in an output state. In other words, in this case, if the operation is interrupted, only part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that had been output until then will be terminated after a certain period of time, which creates a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) according to the 33rd configuration A33, a type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time can be started to be output in both situations, when a type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not processed so that the time from when the operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time, can be started to be output in both situations, when the operation is in an output state and when the operation is not in an output state. The post-operation output sound of a type that cannot be processed so that the time from when the operating means to be the target of the operation changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is not output independently when the post-operation output sound of a type that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means to be the target of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in the output state, but can be output when (or simultaneously with) it is in the output state, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension and encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149) of the 33rd configuration A33, even if the output condition for the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the operation means to be the target of the simulated image display is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 will begin to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that had been in an output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and that playback state is not interrupted and sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not started to be output, nor is playback restarted.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the thirty-third configuration A33, if the output condition for the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the operation means (operation button 410) targeted for simulated image display is maintained in an operating state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time timing tAa2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins to be output.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the operating means (operation button 410) targeted for mock image display is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 33rd configuration A33 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Note that, in the 33rd configuration A33, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

Furthermore, for example, as a 34th configuration A34, a multiple operation enabled state is provided in which operation acceptance for the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is permitted multiple times, and among the multiple operation enabled states, in a type of multiple operation enabled state (for example, the 1A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which a periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time, the post-operation output sound (the 1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be output multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state, and the post-operation output sound (the 1A post-acceptance output sound) can be output multiple times with a fixed interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated, whereas in a multiple operation enabled state in which a periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, In a multiple operation enabled state of the type shown (for example, the second A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149, the fourth A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 155, the fifth A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 158, etc.), if the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operating state, the post-operation output sound (the first A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be output multiple times, but there are two cases (the second A reception allowed state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is not processed to be a fixed time but is an indefinite time, and there are also cases (the fourth A reception allowed state, the fifth A reception allowed state) in which the post-operation output sound (the fourth A post-operation output sound, the fifth A post-operation output sound) cannot be output multiple times simply by maintaining the operating state.

With this configuration, when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is possible to effectively suggest that the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is to be activated. In addition, when the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated, a post-acceptance output sound is output at regular intervals, making it easier to get a sense that the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated, which is expected to effectively maintain interest in the game. In contrast, when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, there are both cases where the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated and cases where it is not. In addition, even if the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated, a post-acceptance output sound is only output at irregular intervals, making it difficult to get a sense that the auto-rapid tapping function is activated, which is expected to effectively maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic changes in the simulated image display appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned specified time, while the post-operation output sound is being output, which is not output multiple times simply because the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is maintained in an operating state, if the operating means that is in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, the time from when the non-operating state is entered to when the post-operation output sound that had been in an output state until then is terminated is not processed to be a fixed time, but is always an indefinite time (4A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 155, 5A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 158). In contrast, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change in the simulated image display occurs in units of time longer than the predetermined time, when the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is maintained in an operated state, thereby outputting the post-operation output sound (the first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) multiple times at variable intervals, if the operating means in an operated state is changed to a non-operated state, either the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the post-operation output sound that had been output until then is terminated is processed to be a fixed time (the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), or the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the post-operation output sound that had been output until then is terminated is not processed to be a fixed time but is an indefinite time (the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)). In the example described above, the fixed time from when the non-operated state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is set to "0 seconds."

With this configuration, if an operating means is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state while a post-operation output sound is being output, and the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the post-operation output sound that had been output is terminated is processed to be a fixed time (a predetermined time), it can be suggested that the so-called auto-repeated tap function is to be enabled. However, even if the so-called auto-repeated tap function is to be enabled (the second A acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the post-operation output sound that had been output is terminated is not necessarily processed to be a fixed time, which makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension when switching to a non-operating state.

In addition, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change in the simulated image display appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, if the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is maintained in an operating state, and as a result the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) is output multiple times at irregular intervals, when the operating means that is in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, the post-operation output sound of a type that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not processed so that the time from when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time (FIG. 1 149(h)) can be output in either the output state or the non-output state, but the post-operation output sound of a type that cannot be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display changes from the operated state to the non-operated state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time (second post-operation output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) may not be output independently when the post-operation output sound of a type that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display changes from the operated state to the non-operated state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time (first post-operation output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in the output state, but may be output when (or simultaneously with) the post-operation output sound.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the operating means targeted for mock image display is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, or whether a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 34th configuration A34 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in order to realize the 34th configuration A34, it is possible to have only one of the 4A reception-permitted state and the 5A reception-permitted state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, as a 35th configuration A35, a multiple operation enabled state is provided in which acceptance of operations for the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is permitted multiple times, and among the multiple operation enabled states, in a type of multiple operation enabled state (for example, the 1A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which a periodic change in the simulated image display appears in units of time less than a predetermined time, a post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound) in response to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be less than a specific time, whereas the periodic change in the simulated image display appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. In the multiple operation enabled state of the type displayed as shown in FIG. 149, there are cases where the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state (for example, the second A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149), and cases where the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times simply by maintaining the operating state (for example, the fourth A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 155, the fifth A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 158). However, in cases where the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating state (the second A reception allowed state), the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time.

With this configuration, when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is possible to appropriately suggest that the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is to be activated. In addition, when the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated, new post-acceptance output sounds are output one after another within a relatively short period of time, making it easier to get a sense that the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated, which is expected to appropriately maintain interest in the game. In contrast, when the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is possible to both get a sense that the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated and not be activated. In addition, even if the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is activated, a new post-acceptance output sound is not output until a relatively long period of time has passed, making it difficult to get a sense that the auto-rapid tapping function has been activated, which is expected to appropriately maintain a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the 35th configuration A35, when the operating means that is the target of the mock-up display is maintained in an operating state in a type of multiple operation enabled state (for example, the 1A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which the periodic changes in the mock-up display occur in units of time less than the predetermined time, the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation may be made shorter than the time required for the periodic changes in the mock-up display that occur in units of time less than the predetermined time. In other words, in this case, when an operation is performed, repeated changes occur in shorter time units than when no operation is performed, which provides the advantage of making it easier to recognize that the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled.

Furthermore, in the 35th configuration A35, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in units of time longer than the predetermined time, if the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the mock image display in an operated state (the 2A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated may be set to be longer than the time required for the periodic changes in the mock image display that occur in units of time longer than the predetermined time. In other words, in this case, even when an operation is performed, only repeated changes occur in units of time longer than when no operation is performed, which makes it possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension while suggesting that the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled.

In addition, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic changes in the simulated image display occur in units of time longer than the predetermined time, if the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated may be either "longer than the predetermined time" or "longer than the predetermined time." This configuration makes it possible to both easily and difficultly recognize that the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 35th configuration A35 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in order to realize the 35th configuration A35, it is possible to have only one of the 4A reception-permitting state and the 5A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, as a 36th configuration A36, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operations for the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, when the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time, it is set to a situation in which "a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state can be terminated when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing (for example, a 1A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146)" is occurring (a situation in which a multiple operation valid state of a type that is not terminated is not occurring is set to not occur), and the multiple operation valid state In the case where the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it may be possible to have both a situation in which "a type of multiple operation valid state (for example, the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the state can be ended when it is detected that the operation means that is the target of the simulated image display is in an operating state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing" occurs, and a situation in which "a type of multiple operation valid state (for example, the fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155 or the fifth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 158) in which the state is not ended when it is detected that the operation means is in an operating state" occurs.

With this configuration, when the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, it is possible to appropriately suggest that the state may be terminated upon detection that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operated state. On the other hand, when the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, it is difficult to tell whether the state may be terminated upon detection that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operated state, or whether the state will not be terminated upon detection that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operated state, which is expected to appropriately maintain a sense of tension.

It goes without saying that if the 36th configuration A36 is provided, the 3A reception-permitting state will not be provided as a rule. However, it is possible to provide the 3A reception-permitting state by, for example, modifying the periodic change in the mock-up image display so that it appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. Alternatively, the 3A reception-permitting state may be provided as a reception-permitting state in which the mock-up image display itself does not appear.

Furthermore, in the above-described exemplary presentation, when a multiple operation enabled state occurs, an acceptance sound indicating that operation acceptance is permitted may be output. The acceptance sound may be output in the same manner when, in the multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to appear in time units equal to or less than the predetermined time, and when, in the multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. However, when, in the multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, the acceptance sound may be output in a manner that cannot be output when, in the multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the model image display are displayed to appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time. Alternatively, conversely, when the simulcast image display is displayed so that periodic changes occur in units of a predetermined time or less in the multiple operation enabled state, the acceptance sound may be output in a manner that cannot be output when the simulcast image display is displayed so that periodic changes occur in units of a longer time than the predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state. Also, when the simulcast image display is displayed so that periodic changes occur in units of a predetermined time or less in the multiple operation enabled state, the acceptance sound is always output, but when the simulcast image display is displayed so that periodic changes occur in units of a longer time than the predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, the acceptance sound may or may not be output.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, whether the periodic changes in the model image display in the multiple operation enabled state are displayed to occur in time units shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined time, or whether the periodic changes in the model image display in the multiple operation enabled state are displayed to occur in time units longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the same post-acceptance changes as when an operation is accepted can occur even if no operation is accepted until the multiple operation enabled state is terminated (see, for example, Figures 147 and 150). In this regard, if the periodic changes in the model image display in the multiple operation enabled state are displayed to occur in time units shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the same post-acceptance changes as when an operation is accepted will always occur even if no operation is accepted until the multiple operation enabled state is terminated. However, if the periodic changes in the model image display in the multiple operation enabled state are displayed to occur in time units longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is possible that, even if no operation is accepted until the multiple operation enabled state is terminated, both the post-acceptance changes as when the operation is accepted and the post-acceptance changes as when the operation is accepted do not occur.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 36th configuration A36 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, when realizing the 36th configuration A36, it is possible to have only one of the 4A reception-permitting state and the 5A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, for example, as the 37th configuration A37, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operations for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and among the multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (4A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 155), in which a post-operation change in response to detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state is not permitted to be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state, but if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operation state, When the operation state is changed to a non-operation state, there is no case where a corresponding post-operation display is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 155(e) and (f) and 157(c), (e), and (g)). On the other hand, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149, and the third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in response to detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, a corresponding post-no-operation display HB2 (see FIG. 149(f), FIGS. 151(c), (f), etc.) can be displayed. In addition, in a specific type of multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state, and the post-no-operation display (post-no-operation display HB2) corresponding to the detection of the change to the non-operation state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound) among the post-operation changes maintains an output state (for example, in a state shown in FIG. 149 The timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1, etc., at which the post-operation display is activated can appear depending on the player's play. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, this detection triggers a change (end) to the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that was previously displayed, but the post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that was previously output does not change (end) and its output state is maintained (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (h), and FIG. 151(g)).

With this configuration, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (the 1A reception allowance state shown in FIG. 146, the 2A reception allowance state shown in FIG. 149, or the 3A reception allowance state shown in FIG. 152) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in response to detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in that operation state simply by maintaining that operation means, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation changes will continue to be executed, but some may also change (end). This provides a sense of tension when performing another operation, while also creating an appropriate sense of anticipation for the start of a new presentation.

Furthermore, in the specific type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowed state, second A reception allowed state, third A reception allowed state) according to the 37th configuration A37, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, a corresponding post-non-operation display is displayed (second A reception allowed state), and the post-non-operation display is not displayed (first A reception allowed state, third A reception allowed state), thereby providing an ideal sense of tension when changing to a non-operation state.

In addition, in the 37th configuration A37, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowed state, second A reception allowed state, third A reception allowed state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, and the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes is maintained in an output state (for example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection is triggered by a change (end) to the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that had been displayed until then, while the output of the post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) is stopped. The force state is always maintained without any change; however, in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, the post-non-operation display in response to detection of the non-operated state is not being displayed, and the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is maintaining its output state (for example, timings tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146), if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, then, triggered by this detection, the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) that was in an output state until then is either changed depending on its type (post-1A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)) or maintained without any change (post-1A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)).

With this configuration, among specific types of multiple operation enabled states (the 1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146, the 2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149, and the 3A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 152) in which the post-operation change in response to detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in that operation state can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining that operation state, even in multiple operation enabled states in which the non-post-operation display is not displayed (the 1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146 or the 3A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 152), if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation change aspects will continue to be executed, but some changes may also occur. This provides a sense of tension when performing another operation, while also creating an appropriate sense of anticipation for the start of a new effect.

In the above-described exemplary presentation, the first A reception-permitting state may be generated, similarly to the second A reception-permitting state, as a reception-permitting state in which a corresponding post-no-operation display is displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated. In this case, the conditions for displaying or hiding the post-no-operation display may be the same as those for the post-no-operation display HB2 described for the second A reception-permitting state. However, even in this case, it is preferable to generate the third A reception-permitting state as a reception-permitting state in which a corresponding post-no-operation display is not displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example, when the post-no-operation display is displayed, no corresponding sound is output, which makes it possible to suggest that the post-no-operation display was not displayed as a result of switching to an operation state, but rather as a result of switching to a non-operation state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the specific type of multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception allowance state shown in FIG. 146, the second A reception allowance state shown in FIG. 149, and the third A reception allowance state shown in FIG. 152) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in response to detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in that operation state simply by maintaining that operation means in that state includes a first reception allowance state (the first A reception allowance state or the third A reception allowance state) and a second reception allowance state (the second A reception allowance state).

In the second reception permission state (2A reception permission state), the type of post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that changes (ends) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state can be output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (ends) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state is in an output state or not. The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) does not start being output alone when the post-operation output sound of a type that ends when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but can start being output when (or simultaneously with) it is in an output state, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the second acceptance state (2A acceptance state) of the 37th configuration A37, even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 is simply continued; the playback is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not initiated or restarted.

Furthermore, when the first acceptance state of the 37th configuration A37 is the "1A acceptance state," if the output condition for the first post-acceptance output sound SB1 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 begins to be output based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAa2-B2. Meanwhile, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in an output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAa2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAa2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins to be output.

Furthermore, when the first acceptance state of the 37th configuration A37 is the "3A acceptance state," if the output condition for the third post-acceptance output sound SB3 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operation state in the first acceptance state (3A acceptance state), the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 begins to be output based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAc2-B2. Meanwhile, the third post-acceptance output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that had been in an output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAc2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAc2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins to be output.

Note that while the 37th configuration A37 assumes that the operation means to be operated in each multiple operation enabled state is the same operation means, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mockup image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 37th configuration A37 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in order to realize the 37th configuration A37, it is possible to have only one of the 1A reception-permitting state and the 3A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, as the 38th configuration A38, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operations for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and among the multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (the 3A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 152, the 4A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 155), the state is not terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, in which a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, but In contrast, in a specific type of multiple operation valid state (the first A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146 and the second A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149), in which the state can be ended when it is detected that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives, a corresponding post-non-operation display is not displayed when the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in an operating state (see FIGS. 152(e), (f), 154(c), (g), 155(e), (f), 157(c), (e), (g), etc.), the state can be ended when it is detected that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives. 149)。 In the specific type of multiple operation valid state (the first A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146, the second A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state, and the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) in response to the detection of the non-operation state is displayed. In addition, in the specific type of multiple operation valid state (the first A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149 ... post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound) among the post-operation changes is maintained in an output state. The timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1, etc., at which the display is activated can appear depending on the player's play. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, this detection triggers a change (end) to the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that was previously displayed, but the post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that was previously output does not change (end) and its output state is maintained (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (h), and FIG. 151(g)).

With this configuration, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) which can be ended when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation changes will continue to be executed, but some may also change (end). This provides a sense of tension when the next operation is performed, while also creating an appropriate sense of anticipation for the start of a new presentation.

Furthermore, in the specific type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowed state or second A reception allowed state) according to the 38th configuration A38, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, a corresponding post-non-operation display is either displayed (second A reception allowed state) or not displayed (first A reception allowed state), thereby providing an ideal sense of tension when changing to a non-operation state.

In addition, in the 38th configuration A38, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state or second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, and the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes is maintained in an output state (for example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection is triggered by a change (end) to the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that had been displayed until then, while the post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) that had been in an output state until then is not changed to its output state. However, in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, the post-non-operation display in response to detection of the non-operated state is not being displayed, and the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is maintaining its output state (for example, timings tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146), if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, then, triggered by this detection, the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) that had been in an output state until then will either be changed depending on its type (post-1A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)) or will be maintained without any change in output state (post-1A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)).

With this configuration, among specific types of multiple operation enabled states (such as the 1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146 and the 2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149) in which the post-operation change in response to detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in that operation state can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining that operation state, even in a multiple operation enabled state in which the non-post-operation display is not displayed (the 1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146), if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation change modes will continue to be executed, but some changes may also occur. This provides a sense of tension when performing another operation, while also creating an appropriate sense of anticipation for the start of a new presentation.

In the above-described exemplary presentation, the first A reception-permitted state may be generated as a reception-permitted state in which a corresponding post-no-operation display is displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, similar to the second A reception-permitted state. In this case, the conditions for displaying and hiding the post-no-operation display may be the same as those for the post-no-operation display HB2 described for the second A reception-permitted state. In the specific type of multiple operation-enabled state (first A reception-permitted state or second A reception-permitted state) according to the 38th configuration A38 employing this modification, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, the corresponding post-no-operation display is always displayed, eliminating the case where the post-no-operation display is not displayed. Even in this case, it is preferable to generate the third A reception-permitted state and the fourth A reception-permitted state as reception-permitted states in which a corresponding post-no-operation display is not displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example, when the post-no-operation display is displayed, no corresponding sound is output, which makes it possible to suggest that the post-no-operation display was not displayed as a result of switching to an operation state, but rather as a result of switching to a non-operation state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the specific type of multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 146 or the second A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149) that can be ended when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives includes the first reception allowed state (the first A reception allowed state) and the second reception allowed state (the second A reception allowed state).

In the second reception permission state (2A reception permission state), the type of post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that changes (ends) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state can be output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (ends) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state is in an output state or not. The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) does not start being output alone when the post-operation output sound of a type that ends when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but can start being output when (or simultaneously with) it is in an output state, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the second acceptance state (2A acceptance state) of the 38th configuration A38, even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2, while the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 is simply continued; the playback state is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not initiated or restarted.

Furthermore, in the first acceptance state (1A acceptance state) of the 38th configuration A38, if the output condition for the first post-acceptance output sound SB1 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 begins to be output based on the acceptance of the operation made at timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the acceptance of the operation made at timing tAa2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time timing tAa2-B2 arrives is interrupted, and output of a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) begins.

Note that in the 38th configuration A38, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in each multiple operation enabled state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mockup image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 38th configuration A38 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in order to realize the 38th configuration A38, it is possible to have only one of the 3A reception-permitted state and the 4A reception-permitted state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the respective configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, for example, a 39th configuration A39 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and among the multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (the first A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146 or the third A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 152), in which when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state, the post-operation change, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be executed multiple times with a fixed interval until a new post-operation output sound is started to be output, and a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state. However, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, there are at least some cases where a corresponding post-operation display is not displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 146(e) and (f) and FIGS. 148(c) and (g)). In contrast, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (a second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times with an interval of an indefinite time until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, is not displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state. 149(f), 151(c), 151(f), etc.) can be displayed in response to the detection of the non-operation state when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. In addition, in the specific type of multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state, and the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) in response to the detection of the non-operation state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) among the post-operation changes maintains its output state (for example, in the case of 149(h)) can appear as a result of the player's play. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, this detection triggers a change (end) to the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that was previously displayed, but the post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that was previously output does not change (end) and maintains its output state (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (h), and FIG. 151(g)).

With this configuration, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (the second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times with an indefinite interval until a new post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is started, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation changes will continue to be executed, but some may also change (end). This provides a sense of tension when the operation is repeated, while also creating an appropriate sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In the above-described exemplary presentation, the first A reception-permitting state may be generated, similarly to the second A reception-permitting state, as a reception-permitting state in which a corresponding post-no-operation display is displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated. In this case, the conditions for displaying or hiding the post-no-operation display may be the same as those for the post-no-operation display HB2 described for the second A reception-permitting state. However, even in this case, it is preferable to generate the third A reception-permitting state as a reception-permitting state in which a corresponding post-no-operation display is not displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated.

According to this configuration, among the multiple operation enabled states according to the 39th configuration A39, in a predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state (the 1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 or the 3A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times with a fixed interval until a new post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is started to be output when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is started to be output based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state. There are two cases: a case in which the display can be displayed, but even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, the corresponding post-operation display is not displayed (third A reception allowance state); and a case in which not only the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, but also a case in which the post-non-operation display can be displayed in response to the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. In this case, even in a predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state according to the 39th configuration A39 (the 1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 or the 3A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152), a situation can arise through the player's play in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, a post-non-operation display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, maintains its output state. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, this detection will trigger a change in the post-non-operation display that was previously in a displayed state, while the output state of the post-operation output sound that was previously in an output state will either be changed depending on its type (the 1A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)) or will be maintained without any change in its output state (the 1A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)).

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example, when the post-no-operation display is displayed, no corresponding sound is output, which makes it possible to suggest that the post-no-operation display was not displayed as a result of switching to an operation state, but rather as a result of switching to a non-operation state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the specific type of multiple operation enabled state in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times with an indefinite interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started to be output, is included in a special acceptance allowance state (second A acceptance allowance state).

In the special reception permission state (second A reception permission state), the type of post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that changes (ends) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state can be output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (ends) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state is in an output state or not. The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) does not start being output alone when the post-operation output sound of a type that ends when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but can start being output when (or simultaneously with) it is in an output state, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the special acceptance state (second A acceptance state) of the thirty-ninth configuration A39, even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 is simply continued; the playback state is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not initiated or restarted.

Note that while the 39th configuration A39 assumes that the operation means to be operated in each multiple operation enabled state is the same operation means, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mockup image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 39th configuration A39 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in order to realize the 39th configuration A39, it is possible to have only one of the 1A reception-permitting state and the 3A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain at least some of the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, for example, as a fortieth configuration A40, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operations for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and among the multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (a first A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146 or a third A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 152) in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state, the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a manner that the interval until a new post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is always set to a specific time or less, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state. However, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, there are at least some cases where a corresponding post-non-operation display is not displayed (see FIGS. 146(e) and (f) and FIGS. 148(c) and (g)). On the other hand, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (a second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a manner that when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, the interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output is always longer than the specific time, the post-operation display is displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state. Not only can a post-operation display, which is one of the changes, be displayed, but also when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, a post-no-operation display HB2 (see FIG. 149(f), FIG. 151(c), (f), etc.) in response to the detection of the change to the non-operated state can be displayed. In addition, in the specific type of multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, and the post-no-operation display (post-no-operation display HB2) in response to the detection of the change to the non-operated state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound) among the post-operation changes maintains its output state (for example, For example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149 can appear as a result of the player's play. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, this detection triggers a change (end) to the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that was previously displayed, but the post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that was previously output does not change (end) and its output state is maintained (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (h), and FIG. 151(g)).

With this configuration, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (the second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output is always longer than the specific time, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation changes will continue to be executed, but some may also change (end). This provides a sense of tension when the operation is repeated, while also creating an appropriate sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In the above-described exemplary presentation, the first A reception-permitting state may be generated, similarly to the second A reception-permitting state, as a reception-permitting state in which a corresponding post-no-operation display is displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated. In this case, the conditions for displaying or hiding the post-no-operation display may be the same as those for the post-no-operation display HB2 described for the second A reception-permitting state. However, even in this case, it is preferable to generate the third A reception-permitting state as a reception-permitting state in which a corresponding post-no-operation display is not displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated.

According to this configuration, among the multiple operation enabled states according to the 40th configuration A40, in a predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state (the 1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 or the 3A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a manner that when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is started to be newly output is always a specific time or less, one of the post-operation changes is detected based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state. However, there are two cases in which a post-operation display corresponding to a change in the non-operation state is not displayed even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operation state (third A reception allowance state), and in which not only is a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, displayable based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, but also a post-non-operation display corresponding to the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operation state can be displayed. In this case, even in a predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state according to the fortieth configuration A40 (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 or the third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152), a situation can arise through the player's play in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, a post-non-operation display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, maintains its output state. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, this detection will always result in a change to the post-non-operation display that was in a displayed state, while the output state of the post-operation output sound that was in an output state will either be changed depending on its type (the first A post-operation reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)) or will be maintained without any change in its output state (the first A post-operation reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)).

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example, when the post-no-operation display is displayed, no corresponding sound is output, which makes it possible to suggest that the post-no-operation display was not displayed as a result of switching to an operation state, but rather as a result of switching to a non-operation state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the specific type of multiple operation enabled state in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, with the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started to be output, always being longer than the specific time, includes a special acceptance allowance state (second A acceptance allowance state).

In the special reception permission state (second A reception permission state), the type of post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that changes (ends) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state can be output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (ends) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state is in an output state or not. The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) does not start being output alone when the post-operation output sound of a type that ends when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but can start being output when (or simultaneously with) it is in an output state, thereby providing an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the special acceptance state (second A acceptance state) of the fortieth configuration A40, even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be initiated based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state at the time timing tAb2-B2 is simply continued; the playback state is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not initiated or restarted.

Note that in the fortieth configuration A40, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in each multiple operation enabled state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is displayed as a mock-up image and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 40th configuration A40 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, when realizing the 40th configuration A40, it is possible to have only one of the 1A reception-permitting state and the 3A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain at least some of the configurations and effects described above.

Incidentally, while some of the above first configuration A1 to fortieth configuration A40 claim to have the effect of "suggesting that the presentation is worth noting," it is not essential that the presentation actually has something worth noting. Simply providing a presentation that suggests "a valuable presentation may be executed" can be expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, the first configuration A1 to the fortieth configuration A40 may be partially applied to each other.

Next, we will explain the case where a pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 75-B" and some of the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" and "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 75-B."

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "1B reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). Figure 164 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "1B reception permission state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 1B" as the generation condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 165 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "1B reception permission state" occurs.

In this example, for ease of explanation, although the name of the reception-permitting state is different, it is assumed that the "1B reception-permitting state" is realized as the above-mentioned "1A reception-permitting state (see Figures 146 to 148)." Therefore, in the following explanation of the configuration of the "1B reception-permitting state," the component numbers expressed as "B," "Sα," and "Sβ" are described as indicating the same configuration as the component numbers expressed as "A," "SA," and "SB" when explaining the configuration of the above-mentioned "2A reception-permitting state."

In other words, while the above-described "1A reception-permitting state" assumes a case in which a special mode (mode JA1c) appears as a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception, the "1B reception-permitting state" assumes a case in which the state in which operation reception is permitted ends without a special mode appearing as a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception. The post-acceptance changes and other presentation details of the "1B reception-permitting state" are basically as described above in the "1A reception-permitting state." However, as will be described later, this example assumes a case in which a special mode (e.g., a mode equivalent to the above-described mode JA1c) does not appear as a post-acceptance change, and the 1A operation unit (referred to as the "1B operation unit" in this example) continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the state in which operation reception is permitted ends.

Note that this "1B reception permission state" does not necessarily have to occur as the above-mentioned "1A reception permission state," and may, for example, be generated as a reception permission state of a different type from the "1A reception permission state" (a type with a different presentation corresponding to the reception permission state, such as a status indication display or post-reception change, or a different type of presentation progression). In this case, it goes without saying that when explaining the configuration of the "1B reception permission state" below, the component numbers expressed as "B," "Sα," and "Sβ" will be described as indicating a completely different configuration from the component numbers expressed as "A," "SA," and "SB" when explaining the configuration of the above-mentioned "1A reception permission state."

In other words, if the start condition is now met (pending consumption) and the "1B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the "1B fluctuation pattern." After this, it starts the decorative symbol SZ fluctuation performance (such as a performance depiction corresponding to the 1B fluctuation pattern, or sound output of background music playback (such as normal background music playback when not in a reach) corresponding to the 1B fluctuation pattern), and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) corresponding to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "1B fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 164 (b), during the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "1B variable pattern," based on the arrival of timing tBa2, when the 1B time has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (based on the satisfaction of "condition 1B"), the above-mentioned 1B acceptance permitted state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in Figure 165 (a)), in which "acceptance of operations to the 1B operation unit regarding changes after 1B acceptance (such as the 1B presentation status suggestion display JB1, the 1B rapid tap display HB1, and the post-1B acceptance output sounds Sα1, Sβ1)" is permitted.

Here, in the 1B reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, the "1B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the operation button 410, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 1B reception acceptance state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, as shown in Figures 164(b)-(e), when the 1B acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-B1 that mimics the object operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 1B operation unit), a message display MB1 related to the operation of the object operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 1B operation unit), and a status suggestion display JB1 that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period after the operation acceptance is made are displayed at timing tBa1 before the 1B acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the 1B operation unit is accepted). Furthermore, at timing tBa1 according to this example, audible output of a 1B operation-related output sound OB1 that prompts the player to perform an operation is also initiated. Therefore, during the period from timing tBa1 to tBa2 in this example, even though an operation-related display such as the mock image display MG-B1 or message display MB1 is displayed in a first manner (such as the message display "Press the button repeatedly!" shown in FIG. 165) to prompt multiple operations on the operation button 410, and the first B operation-related output sound OB1 is being audibly output, the operation on the operation button 410 is not determined to be a valid operation (the operation is not accepted).

However, the mockup display MG-B1, message display MB1, situation suggestion display JB1, and 1B operation-related output sound OB1 do not necessarily have to appear before the 1B reception-permitted state is established; they may be displayed simultaneously with the establishment of the 1B reception-permitted state or slightly after the establishment of the state. In particular, the situation suggestion display JB1 may not be displayed until the first operation is accepted for the 1B operation unit in the 1B reception-permitted state; that is, it may be realized as appearing and displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation for the 1B operation unit. Furthermore, the timing at which the mockup display MG-B1 is displayed, the timing at which the message display MB1 is displayed, and the timing at which the audible output of the 1B operation-related output sound OB1 begins may be different from each other. For example, the message display MB1 may be displayed before the mockup display MG-B1 is displayed.

Once the mock image display MG-B1, message display MB1, and situation suggestion display JB1 have begun to be displayed, they will continue to be displayed at least until the 1B reception permission state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 1B operation unit. In contrast, the 1B operation-related output sound OB1 is made inaudible during the 1B reception permission state, but it does not necessarily have to be terminated midway.

Furthermore, in this example, when the 1B operation acceptance state occurs (in this example, at timing tBa2, but it can be slightly later or earlier), the 1B operation promotion light LB1 is illuminated to prompt the player to perform an operation. In this example, the 1B operation promotion light LB1 is illuminated by a light-emitting element on the 1B operation unit (operation button 410). However, if the player is prompted to operate the operation button 410 (for example, if the light only appears when operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is permitted), the 1B operation promotion light LB1 may be illuminated by a light-emitting element provided in a location other than the 1B operation unit (operation button 410). In this case, it goes without saying that a light-emitting element does not necessarily have to be provided on the 1B operation unit (operation button 410).

Once the 1B operation prompt light LB1 begins to emit, it will continue to emit light at least until the 1B operation acceptance state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 1B operation unit.

Here, the "Simulated Image Display MG-B1" corresponding to the 1B acceptance state uses a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme. However, for example, a color scheme determined based on the results of a performance determination or the like may be selectively displayed from among multiple color schemes.

In addition, the "simulated image display MG-B1" corresponding to the 1B acceptance state is such that, when a moving image in which a portion simulating the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144 (β) to (σ)" is considered to be a periodic change, this periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined period of 1B time. As will be explained later, this period of 1B time is set to a shorter time (short cycle) than the periodic times used in many of the other acceptance states, and therefore, in this 1B acceptance state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted as quickly moving up and down within its movable range.

Furthermore, in the 1B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 164(c), (d) and 165(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-B1, a message display related to the acceptance of operations for the 1B operation unit (here, operation button 410) (here, message display MB1 displayed as "Defeat the bat! Press the button repeatedly!!") is displayed.

However, in the 1B reception-permitted state, it is sufficient that an operation-related display is displayed that prompts the user to operate the 1B operation unit (here, operation button 410) so that multiple operations are received. For example, as long as the operation-related display displays at least one of a mock-up image display and a message display, it is not necessary for both of them to be executed.

Furthermore, in the 1B reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 164(c) and (d), if no operation is accepted by the 1B operation unit, the mock-up image display and message display continue to be displayed until timing tBa3 arrives, at which point they are hidden. Therefore, while the 1B reception acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock-up image display MG-B1) indicating the remaining time until timing tBa3 arrives, at which point the 1B reception acceptance state will end, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display does not necessarily have to be displayed.

Furthermore, if the "simulated image display MG-B1" corresponding to the 1B acceptance state is started to be displayed before timing tBa2 when the 1B acceptance state occurs, its periodic changes and changes in the gauge image may be started after timing tBa2. In other words, in this case, the "simulated image display MG-B1" corresponding to the 1B acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) until timing tBa2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the 1B reception allowance state in this example, as shown in Figures 164 (e) and 165 (a), the situation suggestion display JB1 corresponding to the 1B reception allowance state displays an ally character corresponding to the type of the 1B reception allowance state (here, the ally character YS-B1), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 1B reception allowance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-B1 depicted as a giant bat), and a gauge image HP-B1 showing their remaining HP gauges. In the first B operation acceptance state, the likelihood of a jackpot can be indicated through the presentation of whether or not ally character YS-B1 can defeat enemy character BOSS-B1 (whether or not gauge image HP-B1 can be reset to 0) by accepting multiple operations on the first B operation unit. In other words, each time an operation (operation acceptance) is performed on the first B operation unit (here, operation button 410), an effect can be executed in which ally character YS-B1 attacks enemy character BOSS-B1. Note that in this example, the situation suggestion display JB1 displays ally character YS-B1, enemy character BOSS-B1, and gauge image HP-B1, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays; as long as at least one of ally character YS-B1, enemy character BOSS-B1, and gauge image HP-B1 is displayed, it is possible to indicate the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 164, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBa2-A1 within the 1B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 165 (b)).

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBa2-A1 within the 1B acceptance state, a "1B post-acceptance change (1B post-acceptance effect)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 164(f) and (h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 165(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBa2-A1 within the 1B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 164 (f) and (h), a "1B acceptance post-output sound" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "1B acceptance post-display" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed, as a change after 1B acceptance.

That is, when a single operation is accepted on the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 1B acceptance state, the above-mentioned "display after 1B acceptance" is displayed as a single animated display in which "ally character YS-B1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B1" with ice magic (smoke effects, the generation of ice magic, etc.), as shown in FIG. 165(b). However, as will be described later, in the 1B acceptance state, based on the results of the performance determination made when the operation is accepted, there is a possibility that "enemy character BOSS-B1" will be injured, the strength of the ice magic will increase, or the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-B1 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance determination, etc.). When the effect content has progressed in this way, the state when an operation is subsequently accepted via the first B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B1" with ice-based magic) will be displayed as a single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content (see, for example, FIGS. 164(e) and (f) and 165(f)). Note that, after the effect content has progressed in this way, as long as the first B acceptance state continues, the degree of progress of the effect content will not be returned to the state before the progress. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again via the first B operation unit after the one animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content has ended, the state when the operation is accepted via the first B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B1" with ice-based magic) can be displayed as a single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content. As the presentation progresses, it may be possible to suggest that there is a high probability (expectation) of a jackpot being achieved.

However, in the 1B reception permitted state, the degree of presentation may not be set for the presentation content as a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception to the 1B operation unit, and instead, each time an operation is received to the 1B operation unit, the 1B event as a post-acceptance change (which may be just a display, just a sound, just a light emission, or just a movable body movement) may simply be repeatedly executed (occurred). In this case, it goes without saying that the situation suggestion display JB1 will no longer be displayed.

In addition, in this example, when a single operation is accepted on the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 1B acceptance state, in addition to the above-mentioned "1B acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 may be output as the above-mentioned "1B acceptance output sound," as shown in FIG. 164(h). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which ally character YS-B1 attacks enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of ice magic)" that appears as the above-mentioned "1B acceptance display." At this time, as will be described later, there is also a possibility that a second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 may be further output as the "1B acceptance output sound." The second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 in this example is output when the performance of the above-mentioned "1B acceptance display" progresses. Note that, while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 is implemented here as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; it simply needs to be able to indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted, and that when the auto-repeated function is enabled, the first B operating unit is being maintained in an operating state.

In addition, in this example, it is assumed that the timing tBa2-A1 occurs when the 1B operation-related output sound OB1 is in an output state and the 1B operation prompt light LB1 is in an illuminated state, as shown in Figures 164 (g) and (j). However, at timing tBa2-A1, the acceptance of an operation on the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" does not cause the 1B operation-related output sound OB1 to be made inaudible, nor does the 1B operation prompt light LB1 become non-illuminated.

In other words, in this example, the 1B operation-related output sound OB1 is not terminated in its audible state as a result of the operation acceptance, regardless of how many operations are accepted for the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the 1B operation-related output sound OB1 is being audibly output, and regardless of what judgment result is obtained (even if the 1B acceptance permission state is terminated early), (it is output for a predetermined period of time regardless of the operation acceptance). In contrast, in this example, when the 1B operation prompting light LB1 is in an illuminated state and an operation is accepted for the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the acceptance of the operation may or may not cause the illuminated state to end. In this example, the illumination state of the 1B operation prompting light LB1 is also terminated early only when the acceptance of an operation for the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is triggered to end early (before timing tBa2-C2).

In this way, in the 1B acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted on the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)," an image of "ally character YS-B1" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B1" and a corresponding sound effect are displayed. In other words, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-B1" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-B1" (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-B1" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-B1" cannot be defeated, it suggests low expectations.

However, this presentation content for the 1B reception-permitted state is merely an example, and other content may be substituted for it. For example, as a post-reception change corresponding to the 1B reception-permitted state, as long as there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to operation reception (for example, starting or stopping lamp illumination, or ending the audible output of a sound that is in an output state), it is not necessary to execute a "post-reception display" or "post-reception output sound." Even with this configuration, the player can understand that the operation reception has been carried out appropriately.

This example assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 1B operation unit) initiated at timing tBa2-A1 continues until timing tBa2-A2, as shown in Figure 164(a).

In this regard, the 1B operation acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) in which simply maintaining the operation unit (1B operation unit) in an operation state causes a corresponding post-operation change (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, a post-operation device operation, etc.) to be executed multiple times." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 164(a), during the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 (the period in which the 1B operation unit is maintained in an operation state), operations are accepted multiple times for the 1B operation unit, and a post-operation change corresponding to that operation (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, a post-operation device operation, etc.) is executed multiple times.

As mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted by the 1B operation unit in the 1B acceptance state, the post-1B acceptance display (showing one animation) shows ally character YS-B1 attacking enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic (including smoke effects and the generation of ice magic), as shown in Figure 165(b). Therefore, from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, this "one animation" is first played multiple times.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted by the 1B operation unit in the 1B acceptance acceptance state, the post-1B acceptance output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to "ally character YS-B1 attacking enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of ice magic)," which appears as the "post-1B acceptance display." Therefore, during the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, in addition to the "single video display," a sound effect corresponding to this "single video display" will be played multiple times.

Here, in the 1B acceptance state, when the operation unit (1B operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled, a scene in which ally character YS-B1 attacks enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic (one animation display), and a sound effect corresponding to this "one animation display" (sound output after 1B acceptance) are newly executed every fixed time (predetermined time) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change.

Furthermore, in the 1B acceptance state according to this example, when the operation unit (1B operation unit) is maintained in an operation state and the auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled, the ally character YS-B1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic (one animation display), and the sound effect (1B post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to this "one animation display" can be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change, but in this case, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly started in response to the detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) is always set to a specific time (e.g., 1 second) or less.

In other words, in this case, from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 164, the auto-hit function will start a new "one-shot animation display (one of the post-acceptance changes)" at regular intervals, in which ally character YS-B1 attacks enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice-based magic, and this repeated display of "one-shot animation display" is represented in the figure as "hit-on display HB1a."

Similarly, during the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 164, the sound effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" (the first B post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes) will begin to be output anew at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound effect" is represented in the figure as "first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a."

In this regard, the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 164 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the performance content corresponding to the 1B acceptance acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, neither the "status suggestion display JB1 (see FIG. 164(e))" which suggests the status of the operation in the 1B reception-permitted state nor the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 164(i))" which suggests the status of the operation in the 1B reception-permitted state will change or be initiated as a result of the operation reception. Furthermore, during this period, not only will the 1B operation-related output sound OB1 not be terminated and will maintain its output state, but the 1B operation-prompting light LB1 will also not be terminated and will maintain its light-emitting state.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 164, the "ice-based magic attack" and "smoke effect" shown in FIG. 165 are displayed and the corresponding sound effects are output repeatedly at regular intervals by the auto-rapid tapping function (post-acceptance changes are repeatedly executed at regular intervals) (rapid tapping display HB1a, first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a), but no change occurs in the "situation suggestion display JB1 (see FIG. 164(e))." This allows the player to confirm the same presentation as when they performed the operation, or whether the presentation has not progressed, without having to perform monotonous repetitive operations, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Regarding the "situation suggestion display JB1 (see Figure 164(e))," at least one of the ally character YS-B1, enemy character BOSS-B1, and gauge image HP-B1 may be changed in response to the acceptance of an operation. In this case, however, the change must be to a mode different from the "mode when the performance progresses." Furthermore, if the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 (the period during which the first B operation unit is maintained in an operating state) ends without the performance progressing (when the operation is interrupted), this will trigger a return to the "display mode before the operation." Furthermore, as mentioned above, the "situation suggestion display JB1 (see Figure 164(e))" of the ally character YS-B1, enemy character BOSS-B1, gauge image HP-B1, etc. may not be displayed until an operation is accepted, and may instead be displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined period of time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2, neither the "status suggestion display JB1 (see FIG. 164(e))" that suggests the status of the operation in the 1B reception permitted state nor the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 164(i))" that suggests the status of the operation in the 1B reception permitted state changes or begins to be executed as a result of the operation reception, which makes it possible to appropriately suggest that the performance content is not progressing.

However, when the rapid-fire display HB1a is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2), as shown in FIG. 165(b), the rapid-fire display HB1a will repeatedly show "ally character YS-B1 attacking enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of ice magic)" at regular intervals. This may make the "situation suggestion display JB1" less visible or noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the 1B acceptance state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 164 and 165 are designed to assume that the player temporarily suspends operation of the 1B operation unit at timing tBa2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 1B acceptance state.

Here, in the 1B reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 164(f) and 165(c), even if the operation state of the 1B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBa2-A2 and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB1a, which had been in an active state until then, will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire display HB1a will continue to be in an active state even after timing tBa2-A2 (even after the 1B operation unit is put into a non-operated state), for example, until the above-mentioned "one video display" that was in an active state has been executed for the predetermined display time and is finished being displayed (or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 1B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB1a, which had been in an active state until then, is not immediately made invisible, so it takes time for the operation status in the 1B reception-permitted state to become easy to recognize. This means that a significant amount of the remaining time in the 1B reception-permitted state is consumed, and is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily interrupt the operation state of the 1B operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 1B reception-permitted state.

Also, in this example, if the operation of the 1B operating unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HB1a is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the rapid-hit display HB1a is hidden is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 1B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled until the rapid-fire indicator HB1a is hidden and a situation emerges where the operation status in the 1B reception-permitted state becomes easy to recognize. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed remaining in the 1B reception-permitted state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation state of the 1B operation unit in order to more easily check the operation status in the 1B reception-permitted state.

Furthermore, in the 1B reception permitted state, as shown in FIG. 164(h) and elsewhere, the first post-reception output sound Sα1a, which had been in an active state until then, is not rendered inaudible when the operation of the 1B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBa2-A2 and the auto-repeat function is disabled, just like the rapid-fire display HB1a. In other words, in this case, the first post-reception output sound Sα1a will continue to be output even after timing tBa2-A2 (even after the 1B operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an active state has been executed and output for the predetermined output time (or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the first B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a, which had been in an active state until then, will not immediately be put into a non-output state. In this case, it will appear as if the auto-repeated tapping function is still active, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation of the 1B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a (1B event) is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-output state of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 1B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a (1B event) is no longer being output, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 1B acceptance-permitted state, which is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation state of the 1B operation unit.

In addition, in the 1B reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation of the 1B operation unit is interrupted (transferred to a non-operation state) while the rapid-hit display HB1a and the first post-reception output sound Sα1a are both in an execution state, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB1a is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα1a is made silent are set to be different, as shown in FIG. 164(f) and (h), etc. In the figure, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB1a is made invisible is set to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα1a is made silent, but the opposite relationship may also be set. Alternatively, due to the aforementioned nature that the time until the display or silent state is set to be indefinite, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB1a is made invisible may occur both before and after the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα1a is made silent. It is also possible for the timing to be the same for both.

According to this configuration, in the 1B reception-permitted state of this embodiment, if the operation of the 1B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the rapid-hit display HB1a and the first post-reception output sound Sα1a are both in an active state, a situation will occur in which the rapid-hit display HB1a continues to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound Sα1a continues to be output while the 1B operation unit is put into a non-operated state, as shown in Figures 164(f), (h), 165(c), etc. However, after this, as time passes after the 1B operation unit is put into a non-operated state, the rapid-hit display HB1a, which had been displayed, will be made invisible and the first post-reception output sound Sα1a will be made non-output, as shown in Figures 164(f), (h), 165(d), etc. This not only allows the player to easily recognize when the auto-rapid function is disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the status of the status indication JB1 (here, status JB1a) that indicates the operating status, such as the ally character YS-B1, enemy character BOSS-B1, and gauge image HP-B1 (see Figure 165 (d)).

However, as mentioned above, in the example shown in Figure 164, the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 is intended to cover a case where multiple operations are accepted by the auto rapid-fire function and multiple post-acceptance changes are executed, but the presentation content corresponding to the 1B acceptance-permitted state does not progress. Note that the 1B acceptance-permitted state does not necessarily have to be generated as an acceptance-permitted state in which the presentation content may progress; for example, it may be generated as an acceptance-permitted state in which only one mode of post-acceptance change is executed multiple times.

Thus, in the situation shown in Figure 165(d), although the appearance of the status suggestion display JB1 (here, appearance JB1a) that suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B1, enemy character BOSS-B1, and gauge image HP-B1, can be easily recognized, these appearances are the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 165(a)), which suggests that the performance content has not progressed. Note that the appearance of the status suggestion display JB1 that suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B1, enemy character BOSS-B1, and gauge image HP-B1, does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 165(a)), as long as it can suggest that the performance content has not progressed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 164(a), it is assumed that the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state at timing tBa2-B1 within the 1B reception acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 165(e)).

In this example, if the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tBa2-B1 within the 1B acceptance state, this will trigger a "1B post-acceptance change (1B post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 164(f) and (h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 165(e)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "first B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBa2-B1 within the first B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 164(f) and (h), a post-first B acceptance change occurs in which the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 (a sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "first B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "post-first B acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "first B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that even when operation on the 1B operation unit is resumed at timing tBa2-B1 within the 1B reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 1B reception acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 165(e), the post-1B reception change (post-1B reception display, post-1B reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-1B reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance on the 1B operation unit at timing tBa2-A1. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 164 and 165 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 1B operation unit) initiated at timing tBa2-B1 will be maintained until timing tBa2-B3, activating the auto-rapid-hit function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3 (the period during which the 1B operation unit is again maintained in the operating state), operations to the 1B operation unit are accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance device operation) are executed multiple times.

And even during this "period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3 (the period during which the first B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HB1a and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a) is the same as in the "period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2" described above (see Figure 165 (b)), unless the presentation content progresses. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 165, the period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3 is assumed to be a case in which, of the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the operation accepted at timing tBa2-B2 within that period has led to progress in the presentation content corresponding to the first B acceptance acceptance state (presentation situation shown in Figure 165(f)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 164, the "1st B post-reception change (1st B post-reception effect)" in response to operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has not progressed during the period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B2, whereas during the period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3, the "1st B post-reception change (1st B post-reception effect)" in response to operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has progressed.

More specifically, at "timing tBa2-B2," which is the timing at which the presentation progresses during the period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3, a display change is executed based on the operation received from the first B operation unit, changing the state of the status indication display JB1, which indicates the operation status, from the previously displayed "state JB1a" to a different "state JB1b," as shown in Figures 164(e) and 165(f). Here, as shown in Figure 165(f), the enemy character BOSS-B1 changes to an injured state, the ice-based magic cast by ally character YS-B1 changes to a state of increased strength, and the gauge image HP-B1 changes to an state showing a reduced remaining HP gauge. With this configuration, the change in the state of the situation suggestion display JB1 indicates that the performance content corresponding to the first B reception acceptance state has progressed due to (the result of performance determination based on) the operation reception (by the auto-tap function) performed at timing tBa2-B2.

After the performance has progressed in this way, when one operation is received from the 1B operation unit, the "one animation display" will be displayed as the "display after 1B reception" in a manner that has progressed in the performance, such as "ally character YS-B1 uses stronger ice magic to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-B1," as shown in Figure 165 (f).

In this example, once the presentation progresses, the progress of the presentation will not be returned to the state before the progress was made, as long as the 1B acceptance state continues. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted again at the 1B operation unit after the one video display that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced presentation has ended, the state when the operation was accepted at the 1B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B1" with ice magic) will appear as one video display that has changed to the advanced presentation.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tBa2-B2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, this "single video display" in which such a change in appearance has occurred will be played multiple times by the auto-hit function.

Furthermore, even in the period after timing tBa2-B2 when the performance has progressed, the mode (one animation display) in which ally character YS-B1 attacks enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic is set to be newly executed at regular intervals (predetermined intervals (same time as before the change)) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one animation display" of the performance when the performance has progressed is also newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-rapid tapping function, and the repeated display (multiple post-acceptance changes) of this "one animation display (one post-acceptance change)" of the progression mode is represented in the diagram as "rapid tapping display HB1b."

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tBa2-B2," the timing at which the effect content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 164(e), (f) and 165(e), (f), the state of the situation suggestion display JB1 changes from "state JB1a" to "state JB1b," and the state of the rapid-fire display HB1 also changes from "state HB1a" to "state HB1b." From this point on, while the auto rapid-fire function is enabled (timings tBa2-B2 to tBa2-B3), the situation suggestion display JB1 is displayed in "state JB1b," while the rapid-fire display HB1 is executed in "state HB1b."

In this example, the state of the rapid-fire display HB1 changes depending on the progress of the presentation, but it may not change depending on the progress of the presentation. In other words, even if the rapid-fire display HB1 continues to run in the same state regardless of the progress of the presentation, the player can confirm through the rapid-fire display HB1 that the auto rapid-fire function is enabled and the number (frequency) of operations being accepted, and can also confirm the progress of the presentation through the state of the status suggestion display JB1. As mentioned above, the first B acceptance state may also be realized as a type of acceptance state in which progress in the presentation itself is not possible.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a single operation is accepted on the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 1B acceptance state, in addition to the "1B acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the "1B acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 164(h). As mentioned above, such "1B acceptance output sound" can include the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," as well as the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 that indicates that progress has been made in the presentation corresponding to the 1B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 164(i).

Therefore, in the period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 164, when timing tBa2-B2 arrives, at which time the presentation progresses, as shown in FIG. 164(i), the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 begins to be output in mode Sβ1b-1 based on the operation acceptance (presentation progress) at timing tBa2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the presentation has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output duration of the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1, which is output in response to an operation acceptance.

However, in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance content advances. Therefore, when timing tBa2-B2 arrives, when the performance content advances, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation acceptance, but in the same manner as when the operation was accepted before timing tBa2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not the performance advances at timing tBa2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound Sα1) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will be newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of the "sound effect" will be represented in the diagram as the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a during this period is the same as in the "period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2" described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a is not changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content, but it may be changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HB1b is being executed by this auto rapid-fire function (the period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3), as shown in FIG. 165(f), the rapid-fire display HB1b will repeatedly show "ally character YS-B1 attacking injured enemy character BOSS-B1 with high-power ice magic (smoke effects, the generation of ice magic, etc.)" at regular intervals. This may make the "situation suggestion display JB1" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the 1B acceptance state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 164 and 165 are designed to assume that the player again interrupts operation of the 1B operation unit at timing tBa2-B3 and disables the auto-repeated function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 1B acceptance acceptance state.

As described above, in the 1B reception permission state, even if the operation of the 1B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled while the 1B reception permission state continues, the rapid-fire display HB1, which had been in an active state until then, will not be hidden as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figures 164(f) and 165(g), even if the operation of the 1B operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBa2-B3, the rapid-fire display HB1b will continue to be in an active state even after timing tBa2-B3 (even after the 1B operation unit becomes non-operated), for example, until the above-mentioned "one video display" that was in an active state has been executed for a predetermined display time and is finished being displayed, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

Also, as with the case of the rapid-hit display HB1a, if operation of the 1B operating unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HB1b is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the rapid-hit display HB1b is no longer displayed is not set to a fixed time but is instead variable.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 1B reception acceptance state, even if the operation of the 1B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 1B reception acceptance state is continuing and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, this will not cause the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a, which had been in an output state until then, to be put into a non-output state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 164(h), even if the operation of the 1B operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBa2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a will continue to be output from timing tBa2-B3 onwards (even after the 1B operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has been executed for the predetermined output time and is finished being output, or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state.

However, the timing tBa2-B3 shown in Figure 164 assumes that the operation of the first B operating unit is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1, which began to be output at timing tBa2-B2, continues to be output.

In this regard, in the 1B reception-permitting state, like the first post-reception output sound Sα1, the second post-reception output sound Sβ1 will not terminate its output state (become inaudible) when the operation state of the 1B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 164(i), even if the operation state of the 1B operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBa2-B3, the second post-reception output sound Sβ1b-1 will continue to be output after timing tBa2-B3 (even after the 1B operation unit is put into a non-operated state) for the predetermined output time until it is finished being output, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

Also in this example, if the operation of the 1B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operated state while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 is being output, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite. Similarly, for the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1, if the operation of the 1B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operated state while the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 is being output, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 1B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 (1B event) and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 (1B event) become inaudible, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 1B acceptance-permitted state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation state of the 1B operation unit.

Furthermore, in the 1B reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, even if the operation of the 1B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operation state) while the rapid-hit display HB1b and the first post-reception output sound Sα1a are both in an execution state, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB1b is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα1a is made silent are set to be different, as shown in FIG. 164(f) and (h), etc. In the figure, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB1b is made invisible is set before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα1a is made silent, but the opposite relationship may also be set. Alternatively, due to the aforementioned nature that the time until the display is made invisible or silent is indefinite, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB1b is made invisible may occur both before and after the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα1a is made silent. Furthermore, there may be cases where the timing of each is the same. Note that this relationship between the rapid-hit display HB1b and the first post-reception output sound Sα1a also holds true between the rapid-hit display HB1b and the second post-reception output sound Sβ1, and between the first post-reception output sound Sα1a and the second post-reception output sound Sβ1, and the same can be said for other examples.

In this configuration, in the 1B reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation of the 1B operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operated state) while the rapid-hit display HB1b, first post-reception output sound Sα1a, and second post-reception output sound Sβ1b-1 are all in an active state, as shown in Figures 164(f), (h), (i), 165(g), etc., a situation will occur in which the rapid-hit display HB1b continues to be displayed, the first post-reception output sound Sα1a continues to be output, and the second post-reception output sound Sβ1b-1 continues to be output, while the 1B operation unit is set to a non-operated state. However, after this, as time passes after the 1B operation unit is set to a non-operated state (time has passed since timing tBa2-B3), the rapid-hit display HB1b, which had been displayed, will be hidden, as shown in Figures 164(f), 165(h), etc. This not only allows the player to easily recognize when the auto-hit function is disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the state of the status indication JB1 (here, the state JB1b where the presentation content has progressed) that indicates the operating status, such as the ally character YS-B1, enemy character BOSS-B1, and gauge image HP-B1 (see Figure 165 (h)).

Also, normally, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 would both end (become inaudible) as time passes since the first B operation unit is placed in a non-operated state (time passes from timing tBa2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 164(a), it is assumed that the 1B operation unit is again put into an operating state at timing tBa2-C1 (the performance situation shown in FIG. 165(i)), which is after timing tBa2-B3 when the 1B operation unit is put into a non-operated state, and when both the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 are in an audible state (before the output state is ended).

In this example, even if the "1B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tBa2-C1 within the 1B acceptance state, this will again trigger a "1B post-acceptance change (1B post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 164(f) and (h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 165(i)), just as in the case of timing tBa2-B1 described above.

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "first B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBa2-C1 within the first B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 164(f) and (h), a post-first B acceptance change occurs in which the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 (a sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "first B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "post-first B acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "first B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that when operation on the 1B operation unit is resumed at timing tBa2-C1 within the 1B reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 1B reception acceptance state does not progress from the state shown in FIG. 165(h) (first-stage progression state). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 165(i), the post-1B reception change (post-1B reception display, post-1B reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-1B reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance on the 1B operation unit at timing tBa-B2. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, as mentioned above, this example assumes that timing tBa2-C1, at which operation of the first B operation unit is resumed, occurs while both the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 are in an audible state.

In this regard, for the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1, the previous output state is terminated based on the restart of operation on the first B operation unit (operation acceptance) at timing tBa2-C1, and a new output is initiated in response to the new operation acceptance. In contrast, for the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1, the previous output state is continued without any change based on the restart of operation on the first B operation unit (operation acceptance) at timing tBa2-C1.

With this configuration, when the 1B reception-permitted state is in a state where a 1B post-reception output sound is being output in response to the reception of an operation, and an operation is received for the 1B operation unit that had been in a non-operated state until then, this will either cause the 1B post-reception output sound to end (first post-reception output sound Sα1) or not end (second post-reception output sound Sβ1), thereby providing an ideal sense of tension when the 1B operation unit that had been in a non-operated state is put into an operating state again. It goes without saying that in the 1B reception permitted state, in addition to the case where operation is received by the 1B operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 is being output and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 is being output, there are also cases where operation is received by the 1B operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 is being output and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 is not being output, and there are also cases where operation is received by the 1B operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 is not being output and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 is being output.

It should be noted that the rapid-hit display HB1 may also be configured to continue displaying at timing tBa2-C1. In this case, when an operation is received from the first B operation unit, which had been in an unoperated state until then, it is desirable to terminate the previous "one-shot video display" that was in progress and start a new display (one-shot video display) in response to the new operation reception.

In addition, the presentation examples shown in Figures 164 and 165 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 1B operation unit) that began at timing tBa2-C1 continues even at timing tBa2-C2 when operation acceptance for the 1B operation unit is no longer permitted (the timing when the 1B acceptance acceptance state ends), and as a result the auto-rapid-hit function remains enabled until timing tBa2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBa2-C1 to timing tBa2-C2 (the period during which the 1B operation unit is again maintained in the operating state), operations to the 1B operation unit are accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance role operation) are executed multiple times.

And even during this "period from timing tBa2-C1 to timing tBa2-C2 (the period during which the first B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the appearance when such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HB1b and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a) will be the same as in the "period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3" described above (see FIG. 165(f)), as shown in FIG. 165(i), unless further progress in the presentation occurs. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In the example shown in Figure 164, during the period from timing tBa2-C1 to timing tBa2-C2, among the multiple operations accepted by the auto rapid-fire function, if the operation accepted at a predetermined timing within that period (such as the result of the effect determination) further advances the effect content corresponding to the 1B acceptance permission state (if a second stage of progress is made), the effect will progress as described above with reference to Figures 146 and 148, but as the details of this effect have also been described above, a description will be omitted here.

However, as mentioned above, the 1B reception acceptance state in this example is assumed to be realized as the above-mentioned "1A reception acceptance state," but unlike the above-mentioned "1A reception acceptance state" (Figures 146 and 148), it is assumed that no special pattern (for example, a pattern equivalent to the above-mentioned pattern JA1c) appears as a post-acceptance change.

Therefore, in the period from timing tBa2-C1 to timing tBa2-C2 in the example shown in Figure 164, the "change after 1B acceptance (effect after 1B acceptance)" in response to the operation acceptance will be executed multiple times in a state in which the effect content progresses only once (see Figure 165(i)), and when timing tBa2-C2 arrives, this will trigger the automatic rapid-fire function that had been active up until then to be disabled.

In this regard, when the auto rapid-fire function is disabled at timing tBa2-A2 or timing tBa2-B3, the rapid-fire display HB1 that was displayed by the auto rapid-fire function until then is not hidden (it is hidden after an indefinite period of time after the auto rapid-fire function is disabled), but when the auto rapid-fire function is disabled at timing tBa2-C2, the rapid-fire display HB1 that was displayed by the auto rapid-fire function until then is hidden (after a fixed period of time (e.g., 0 seconds) from the time the operation was accepted).

In addition, in this example, when the auto-repeat function is disabled at timing tBa2-A2 or timing tBa2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a that had been output by the auto-repeat function until then is not made inaudible (it is made inaudible after an indefinite period of time after the auto-repeat function is disabled). However, when the auto-repeat function is disabled at timing tBa2-C2, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a that had been output by the auto-repeat function until then is made inaudible (after a fixed period of time from the time the operation is accepted). With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether the 1B acceptance permission state has ended based on the output status of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a after the auto-repeat function is disabled.

In addition, in this example, it is assumed that timing tBa2-C2 arrives after the second post-reception output sound Sβ1b-1, which began output at timing tBa2-B2, has become inaudible, but it may also arrive while the second post-reception output sound Sβ1b-1 is being audibly output. However, in this case, unlike the "first post-reception output sound Sα1a," it is desirable not to terminate the output state of the "second post-reception output sound Sβ1" that is currently being executed when timing tBa2-C2 arrives, but to maintain the execution state until the remaining execution time is exhausted.

Regarding the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a, when the auto-rapid function is disabled at timing tBa2-C2, it may either be made inaudible (for a certain period of time from when the operation is accepted) or not made inaudible. For example, if the sound is made inaudible when the likelihood of a jackpot is high, but not made inaudible when the likelihood of a jackpot is low, it will be possible to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot being obtained.

Furthermore, for the "rapid tap display HB1" and the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα1," even if timing tBa2-C2 arrives while they are in the middle of execution, they may be configured to remain in execution until their remaining execution time is consumed.

In this example, when timing tBa2-C2 arrives, the 1B operation prompting light LB1, which prompts the player to perform an operation, is turned off. In other words, the 1B operation prompting light LB1 begins to light when the 1B reception acceptance state occurs, and stops lighting when the 1B reception acceptance state ends. This indicates that a state has been entered in which operation acceptance is accepted, or a state in which operation acceptance is not accepted.

In other words, in this case, the "change after 1B acceptance (post-1B acceptance effect)" in this example indicates that the 1B acceptance acceptance state has ended without the "final stage effect (for example, an effect corresponding to the above-mentioned effect JA1c)" appearing among the effect contents corresponding to the 1B acceptance acceptance state (this is not a required configuration for having the configuration described below).

In this regard, the mock image display MG-B1, message display MB1, situation suggestion display JB1, etc. are not hidden when timing tBa2-C2 arrives, but remain displayed for a specified time (predetermined time) even after timing tBa2-C2 arrives and operation acceptance via the 1B operation unit is no longer permitted. This gives the player a sense of anticipation that even after timing tBa2-C2, "there may still be a chance for operation acceptance via the 1B operation unit to cause a new change after acceptance."

In this example, the model image display MG-B1 and message display MB1 begin displaying at timing tBa1, then go into a hidden state at timing tBa3 after passing through timings tBa2-C2 when operation acceptance is no longer permitted. Furthermore, the situation suggestion display JB1 is not hidden even at timing tBa3, but is hidden at an appropriate timing thereafter. However, as mentioned above, the timings at which the model image display MG-B1 and message display MB1 are displayed and hidden may be different, or only one of the model image display MG-B1 and message display MB1 may be displayed as the operation-related display. Furthermore, the situation suggestion display JB1 may be hidden at the same timing as the model image display MG-B1 and message display MB1.

In this example, it is assumed that the player continues operating the "1st B operation unit" starting at timing tBa2-C1 even when timing tBa3 arrives, at which the mock image display MG-B1 and message display MB1 are hidden, and even when timing arrives at which the situation suggestion display JB1 is hidden.

However, once the state transitions from the 1B operation acceptance state to the "state in which operation acceptance via the 1B operation unit is not accepted" (after timing tBa2-C2), the "state in which operation acceptance via the 1B operation unit is accepted" will not occur again until timing tBa3 arrives, at which the mock image display MG-B1 and message display MB1 are made invisible (and further, the timing at which the situation suggestion display JB1 is made invisible).

Therefore, even if the "first B operation unit" is maintained in an operating state from timing tBa2-C1 to timing tBa3 (and even the timing when the situation suggestion display JB1 is made invisible), the auto-rapid tapping function will not be enabled, operations will not be accepted multiple times, and post-acceptance changes in response to accepted operations will not be performed multiple times during that period.

In the example shown in Figure 165(j), a message such as "Failed!!" is displayed when timing tBa2-C2 arrives, but it is also possible to have no new message appear when timing tBa2-C2 arrives.

Furthermore, when the 1B reception allowance state is realized as the 1A reception allowance state described above, the configuration described in the 1A reception allowance state described above is possessed even if it is not described in the 1B reception allowance state. In this case, it goes without saying that the configurations according to the other examples described as applicable to the 1A reception allowance state described above are also applicable to the 1B reception allowance state. For example, the 1B reception allowance state is prepared as "a type of reception allowance state in which the reception allowance state can be terminated early based on the reception of an operation."

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "2B reception permission state" as part of the reception permission period (operation permission state). Figure 166 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "2B reception permission state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 2B" as the generation condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 167 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "2B reception permission state" occurs.

In this example, for ease of explanation, although the name of the reception-permitting state is different, it is assumed that the "2nd B reception-permitting state" is realized as the above-mentioned "2nd A reception-permitting state (see Figures 149 to 151)." Therefore, in the following explanation of the configuration of the "2nd B reception-permitting state," the component numbers expressed as "B," "Sα," and "Sβ" are described as indicating the same configuration as the component numbers expressed as "A," "SA," and "SB" when explaining the configuration of the above-mentioned "2nd A reception-permitting state."

In other words, while the above-described "first A reception-permitting state" assumes a case in which a special mode (mode JA2c) appears as a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception, the "second B reception-permitting state" assumes a case in which the state in which operation reception is permitted ends without a special mode appearing as a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception. The post-acceptance changes and other presentation details of the "second B reception-permitting state" are basically as described above for the "second A reception-permitting state." However, as will be described later, this example assumes a case in which a special mode (e.g., a mode equivalent to mode JA2c) does not appear as a post-acceptance change, and the second A operation unit (referred to as the "second B operation unit" in this example) continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the state in which operation reception is permitted ends.

Note that this "second B reception permission state" does not necessarily have to occur as the above-mentioned "second A reception permission state," and may, for example, be generated as a reception permission state of a different type from the "second A reception permission state" (a type with a different presentation corresponding to the reception permission state, such as a status indication display or post-reception change, or a different progression of presentation). In this case, it goes without saying that when explaining the configuration of the "second B reception permission state" below, the component numbers expressed as "B," "Sα," and "Sβ" will be described as indicating a completely different configuration from the component numbers expressed as "A," "SA," and "SB" when explaining the configuration of the above-mentioned "first A reception permission state."

In other words, if the start condition is now met (pending consumption) and the "2nd B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the "2nd B fluctuation pattern." After this, it starts the decorative symbol SZ fluctuation performance (such as a performance depiction according to the 2nd B fluctuation pattern, or sound output of background music playback according to the 2nd B fluctuation pattern (such as normal background music playback when not in a reach state)), and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "2nd B fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 166 (b), during the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "2nd B variable pattern," the 2nd B reception permissible state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in Figure 167 (a)) in which "acceptance of operations to the 2nd B operation unit regarding changes after 2nd B acceptance (such as the 2nd B presentation status suggestion display JB2, the 2nd B rapid tap display HB2, and the post-2nd B acceptance output sounds Sα2, Sβ2)" is permitted based on the arrival of timing tBb2, when the 2nd B time has elapsed since the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ began (based on "condition 2B" being satisfied).

Here, in the second B reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, the "second B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the same operation means (operation button 410) as in the first B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted until the second B reception acceptance state is terminated. However, the second B operation unit may also be set as an operation means different from that in the first B reception acceptance state.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, as shown in Figures 166(b)-(e), when the 2B acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-B2 that mimics the object operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 2B operation unit), a message display MB2 related to the operation of the object operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 2B operation unit), and a status suggestion display JB2 that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period after the operation acceptance is made are displayed at timing tBb1 before the 2B acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the 2B operation unit is accepted). Furthermore, at timing tBb1 according to this example, audible output of a 2B operation-related output sound OB2 that prompts the player to perform an operation is also initiated. Therefore, during the period from timing tBb1 to tBb2 in this example, even though an operation-related display such as mock image display MG-B2 or message display MB2 is displayed, urging the operation of the operation button 410 in a second manner (such as the message display "Press the button repeatedly!" as shown in FIG. 167), so that multiple operations on the operation button 410 are accepted, and the second B operation-related output sound OB2 is being audibly output, the operation on the operation button 410 is not determined to be a valid operation (the operation is not accepted).

However, the mockup display MG-B2, message display MB2, situation suggestion display JB2, and second-B operation-related output sound OB2 do not necessarily have to appear before the second-B reception-permitted state is established; they may be displayed simultaneously with the establishment of the second-B reception-permitted state or slightly after the establishment of the second-B reception-permitted state. In particular, the situation suggestion display JB2 may not be displayed until the first operation is accepted for the second-B operation unit in the second-B reception-permitted state; that is, it may be realized as appearing and displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second-B operation unit. Furthermore, the timing at which the mockup display MG-B2 is displayed, the timing at which the message display MB2 is displayed, and the timing at which the audible output of the second-B operation-related output sound OB2 begins may be different from each other. For example, the message display MB2 may be displayed before the mockup display MG-B2 is displayed.

Once the mock image display MG-B2, message display MB2, and situation suggestion display JB2 have begun to be displayed, they will continue to be displayed at least until the 2B operation acceptance state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 2B operation unit. In contrast, the 2B operation-related output sound OB2 is made inaudible during the 2B operation acceptance state, but it does not necessarily have to be terminated midway.

Furthermore, in this example, when the 2B operation acceptance state occurs (in this example, at timing tBb2, but it can be slightly delayed before or after that), the 2B operation promotion light LB2 is illuminated to prompt the player to perform an operation. In this example, the 2B operation promotion light LB2 is illuminated by a light-emitting element on the 2B operation unit (operation button 410). However, if the 2B operation promotion light LB2 is to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 (for example, a light-emitting element that appears only when operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is accepted), the 2B operation promotion light LB2 may be illuminated by a light-emitting element provided in a position other than the 2B operation unit (operation button 410). In this case, it goes without saying that the 2B operation unit (operation button 410) does not necessarily have to have a light-emitting element.

Once the second-B operation prompt light LB2 begins to emit, it will continue to emit light at least until the second-B operation acceptance state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the second-B operation unit.

Here, the "Mock Image Display MG-B2" corresponding to the 2B acceptance state uses a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme. However, for example, a color scheme determined based on the results of a performance determination or the like may be selectively displayed from among multiple color schemes. However, this color scheme may be different from that of the 1B acceptance state described above.

In addition, the "simulated image display MG-B2" corresponding to the 2B acceptance state is such that, when a moving image in which a portion simulating the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144 (β) to (σ)" is considered to be a periodic change, this periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined 2B period. However, because this 2B period is set to be a longer time (longer cycle) than the 1B period that appears in the 1B acceptance state, in the 2B acceptance state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range more slowly than in the above-mentioned 1B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the 2B acceptance state according to this example, as shown in Figures 166(c), (d) and 167(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-B2, a message display (here, message display MB2 displayed as "Defeat the Tiger! Press the button "Steam"!!") related to the acceptance of operations on the 2B operation unit (here, operation button 410) is displayed.

However, in the 2B reception-permitted state, it is sufficient that an operation-related display is displayed that prompts the user to operate the 2B operation unit (here, operation button 410) so that multiple operations are received. For example, as long as the operation-related display displays at least one of a mock-up image display and a message display, it is not necessary for both of them to be executed.

Furthermore, in the 2B reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 166(c) and (d), if no operation is accepted by the 2B operation unit, the mock-up image display and message display continue to be displayed until timing tBb3 arrives, at which point they are hidden. Therefore, while the 2B reception acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock-up image display MG-B2) indicating the remaining time until timing tBb3 arrives, at which point the 2B reception acceptance state will end, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display does not necessarily have to be displayed.

Furthermore, if the "simulated image display MG-B2" corresponding to the 2B acceptance state is started to be displayed before timing tBb2 when the 2B acceptance state occurs, the periodic changes and changes in the gauge image may be started after timing tBb2. In other words, in this case, the "simulated image display MG-B2" corresponding to the 2B acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α) until timing tBb2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the second B reception acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 166 (e) and 167 (a), the situation suggestion display JB2 corresponding to the second B reception acceptance state displays an ally character corresponding to the type of the second B reception acceptance state (here, the ally character YS-B2), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the second B reception acceptance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-B2 depicted as a tiger), and a gauge image HP-B2 showing their remaining HP gauges. In the second-B reception acceptance state, the high or low likelihood of a jackpot can be suggested through the effect of "whether or not ally character YS-B2 can defeat enemy character BOSS-B2 by accepting multiple operations on the second-B operation unit (whether or not gauge image HP-B2 can be set to 0)." In other words, each time an operation (operation acceptance) is performed on the "second-B operation unit (here, operation button 410)," a presentation can be executed in which "ally character YS-B2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B2." Note that in this example, the ally character YS-B2, the enemy character BOSS-B2, and the gauge image HP-B2 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JB2, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays; as long as at least one of the ally character YS-B2, the enemy character BOSS-B2, and the gauge image HP-B2 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status. Note that the ally character YS-B2 may be displayed as a different image than the ally character YS-B1 that appears in the first B acceptance state.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 166, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "2B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBb2-A1 within the 2B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 167(b)).

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "2B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBb2-A1 within the 2B acceptance state, a "2B post-acceptance change (2B post-acceptance effect)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 166(f) and (h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 167(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "second B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBb2-A1 within the second B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 166(f) and 166(h), a "second B post-acceptance output sound" in response to the operation accepted for the "second B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after second B acceptance, and a "second B post-acceptance display" in response to the operation accepted for the "second B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

That is, when a single operation is accepted on the "2B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 2B acceptance state, the above-mentioned "display after 2B acceptance" is displayed as a single animated image of "ally character YS-B2" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B2" with fire magic (smoke effects, the generation of fire magic, etc.), as shown in FIG. 167(b). However, as will be described later, in the 2B acceptance state, based on the results of the performance determination made when the operation is accepted, there is a possibility that "enemy character BOSS-B2" will be injured, the strength of the fire magic will increase, or the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-B2 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance determination, etc.). When the effect content has progressed in this way, the state when an operation is subsequently accepted via the second-B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B2" with fire-based magic) will be displayed as a single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content (see, for example, FIGS. 166(e) and 166(f) and 167(e)). Note that, after the effect content has progressed in this way, the degree of progress of the effect content will not be returned to the state before the progress was made, as long as the second-B operation acceptance state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again via the second-B operation unit after the end of the one animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content, the state when the operation was accepted via the second-B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B2" with fire-based magic) can be displayed as a single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content. As the presentation progresses, it may also be possible to suggest that there is a high probability (expectation) of hitting the jackpot.

However, in the 2B acceptance state, the degree of presentation may not be set for the presentation content as a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance to the 2B operation unit, and instead, each time an operation is accepted to the 2B operation unit, a 2B event (which may be just a display, just a sound, just a light emission, or just a movable body movement) as a post-acceptance change may be repeatedly executed (occurred). In this case, it goes without saying that the situation suggestion display JB2 will no longer be displayed.

In addition, in this example, when a single operation is accepted on the "2B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 2B acceptance state, in addition to the above-mentioned "2B acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound Sα2 may be output as the above-mentioned "2B acceptance output sound," as shown in FIG. 166(h). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which ally character YS-B2 attacks enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of fire magic)" that appears as the above-mentioned "2B acceptance display," and is a different sound from the above-mentioned "1st post-acceptance output sound Sα1." In addition, as will be described later, there is a possibility that a second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2 may also be output as the "2B acceptance output sound." In this example, the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2 is output when the performance of the above-mentioned "2B acceptance display" progresses. Note that, here, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; in short, it only needs to be a sound that can indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted, and when the auto-repeated function is enabled, it only needs to be a sound that can be output as a sound that can indicate that the second B operating unit is being maintained in an operated state.

In addition, in this example, it is assumed that the timing tBb2-A1 occurs when the second B operation-related output sound OB2 is in an output state and the second B operation prompt light LB2 is in an illuminated state, as shown in Figures 166(g) and 166(j). However, at timing tBb2-A1, the second B operation-related output sound OB2 is not made inaudible, nor is the second B operation prompt light LB2 made non-illuminating, as a result of receiving an operation on the "second B operation unit (here, operation button 410)."

In other words, in this example, the second B operation-related output sound OB2 is such that its audible state will not be terminated in response to the acceptance of an operation (it is output for a predetermined period of time regardless of the acceptance of an operation), regardless of how many operations are accepted for the "second B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the second B operation-related output sound OB2 is being audibly output, and regardless of what judgment result is obtained (even if the second B acceptance permitting state is terminated early). In contrast, in this example, when the secondB operation prompting light LB2 is in an illuminated state and an operation is accepted for the "secondB operation unit (here, operation button 410)," the acceptance of the operation may or may not terminate the illuminated state. In this example, the illumination state of the secondB operation prompting light LB2 is terminated early only when the acceptance of an operation for the "secondB operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is triggered to terminate early (before timing tBb2-C2) the "state in which acceptance of an operation for the secondB operation unit is permitted (secondB acceptance permitting state)."

In this way, in the 2B acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted on the "2B operation unit (here, operation button 410)," an image of "ally character YS-B2" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B2" and a corresponding sound effect are displayed. In other words, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-B2" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-B2" (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-B2" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-B2" cannot be defeated, it suggests low expectations.

However, this presentation content for the second B reception permission state is merely an example, and other content may be substituted for it. For example, as a post-reception change corresponding to the second B reception permission state, as long as there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to operation reception (for example, starting or stopping lamp illumination, or ending the audible output of a sound that is in an output state), it is not necessary to execute a "post-reception display" or "post-reception output sound." Even with this configuration, the player can understand that the operation reception has been carried out appropriately.

This example assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the second B operation unit) initiated at timing tBb2-A1 continues until timing tBb2-A2, as shown in Figure 166(a).

In this regard, the 2B operation acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) in which simply maintaining the operation unit (2B operation unit) in an operation state causes a corresponding post-operation change (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, and a post-operation device operation) to be executed multiple times." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 166(a), during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2 (the period in which the 2B operation unit is maintained in an operation state), operations are accepted multiple times for the 2B operation unit, and a post-operation change (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, and a post-operation device operation) corresponding to that operation is executed multiple times.

As mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted on the 2B operation unit in the 2B acceptance state, the post-2B acceptance display (showing one animation) shows ally character YS-B2 attacking enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire magic (including smoke effects and the generation of fire magic), as shown in FIG. 167(b). Therefore, during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, this "one animation" is first played multiple times.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted on the 2B operation unit in the 2B acceptance acceptance state, the post-2B acceptance output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to "ally character YS-B2 attacking enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of fire magic)," which appears as the "post-2B acceptance display." Therefore, during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2, when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, in addition to the "single video display," sound effects corresponding to this "single video display" are played multiple times.

However, in the 2B acceptance state, when the operation unit (2B operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled, such post-acceptance changes (one video display, sound effect (2B post-acceptance output sound), etc.) are executed multiple times, but the execution interval (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) is set to an indefinite time (a time not determined in advance).

Furthermore, in the 2B acceptance state, when the operation unit (2B operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-rapid-press function is enabled, the ally character YS-B2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire magic (one animation display), and the sound effect (2B post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to this "one animation display" can be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change, but in this case, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly started in response to the detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) may be set to be longer than the specific time (the time used in the 1B acceptance state or the 3A acceptance state).

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 166, the auto-hit function will start a new "one-shot animation display (one of the post-acceptance changes)" at irregular intervals, in which ally character YS-B2 attacks enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire-based magic, and this repeated display of "one-shot animation display" is represented in the figure as "hit-on display HB2a."

Similarly, during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 166, the sound effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" (the second B post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes) will begin to be output anew at irregular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound effect" is represented in the figure as "first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a."

In this regard, the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 166 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the performance content corresponding to the 2B acceptance acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, neither the "status suggestion display JB2 (see FIG. 166(e))" which suggests the status of the operation in the second B reception acceptance state nor the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 166(h))" which suggests the status of the operation in the second B reception acceptance state will change or begin to be executed (in a manner that progresses the performance) as a result of the operation reception. Furthermore, during this period, not only will the second B operation-related output sound OB2 not be terminated midway and will maintain its output state, but the second B operation prompt light LB2 will also not be terminated and will maintain its light-emitting state.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 166, the display of "fire-based magic attacks" and "smoke effects" as shown in FIG. 167 and the output of corresponding sound effects are repeatedly executed at irregular intervals by the auto-rapid-tap function (post-acceptance changes are repeatedly executed at irregular time intervals) (rapid-tap display HB2a, first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a), but no change occurs in the "situation suggestion display JB2 (see FIG. 166(e))." This makes it possible to confirm the effects that have occurred in response to multiple input acceptances, as well as any progress that has not been made, simply by maintaining the operating state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Regarding the "situation suggestion display JB2 (see Figure 166(e))," at least one of the ally character YS-B2, enemy character BOSS-B2, and gauge image HP-B2 may be changed in response to the acceptance of an operation. In this case, however, the change must be to a mode different from the "mode when the performance progresses." Furthermore, if the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2 (the period during which the second B operation unit is maintained in an operating state) ends without the performance progressing (when the operation is interrupted), this will trigger a return to the "display mode before the operation." Furthermore, as mentioned above, the "situation suggestion display JB2 (see Figure 166(e))" of the ally character YS-B2, enemy character BOSS-B2, gauge image HP-B2, etc. may not be displayed until an operation is accepted, and may instead be displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined period of time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2, neither the "status suggestion display JB2 (see FIG. 166(e))" that suggests the status of the operation in the second B reception permitted state nor the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 166(h))" that suggests the status of the operation in the second B reception permitted state changes or begins to be executed as a result of the operation reception, which makes it possible to appropriately suggest that the performance content is not progressing.

However, when the rapid-fire display HB2a is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2), as shown in FIG. 167(b), the rapid-fire display HB2a will repeatedly show "ally character YS-B2 attacking enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of fire magic)" at irregular intervals. This may make the "situation suggestion display JB2" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the 2B acceptance acceptance state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 166 and 167 are designed to assume that the player temporarily suspends operation of the 2B operation unit at timing tBb2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 2B acceptance acceptance state.

Here, in the 2B reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 166(f) and 167(c), when the operation state of the 2B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBb2-A2 and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB2a, which had been in an active state until then, is made invisible. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire display HB2a ends its active state when timing tBb2-A2 arrives (when the 2B operation unit is put into a non-operated state).

With this configuration, when the operation state of the second B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB2a, which had been in an active state until then, is immediately hidden, making it easier to quickly recognize the operation status in the second B reception-permitted state. This means that the remaining time in the second B reception-permitted state is not consumed very much, and is expected to make it easier to temporarily interrupt the operation state of the second B operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the second B reception-permitted state.

In addition, in this example, if the operation of the second B operation unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HB2a is displayed, the time from the non-operating state until the rapid-hit display HB2a is hidden is set to a fixed time (here, "0 seconds").

This configuration makes it easier to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the second-B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-tap function is disabled until the rapid-tap display HB2a is hidden and the operation status in the second-B operation acceptance state becomes easily recognizable. This means that it is easier to predict how much time will be consumed in the second-B operation acceptance state, which is expected to facilitate the action of temporarily suspending the operation state of the second-B operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the second-B operation acceptance state. This effect can be achieved even if the fixed time is set to "1 second," so the time from the non-operating state until the rapid-tap display HB2a is hidden does not necessarily have to be set to "0 seconds."

In addition, in the 2B reception permitted state, as shown in FIG. 166(g) and elsewhere, the first post-reception output sound Sα2a, which had been in an active state until then, is also rendered inaudible when the operation of the 2B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBb2-A2, similar to the case of the rapid-repeated display HB2a, and the auto-repeated function is disabled. In other words, in this case, the output state of the first post-reception output sound Sα2a is terminated when timing tBb2-A2 arrives (when the 2B operation unit is put into a non-operated state). Note that, at this time, all sounds audible at that time, other than the first post-reception output sound Sα2a, are not rendered inaudible when the 2B operation unit is put into a non-operated state. This applies not only to timing tBb2-A2, but also to timing tBb2-B3, etc., which will be described later; in the second B reception permitted state according to this example, sounds other than the first post-reception output sound Sα2 are not made inaudible when the second B operation unit is put into a non-operated state.

With this configuration, when the operation of the second B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a, which had been in an active state until then, is immediately put into a non-output state, which can be expected to provide an appropriate indication that the auto-repeated tapping function has been disabled.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation of the second B operating unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a is put into a non-output state is set to a fixed time (here, "0 seconds").

This configuration makes it easier to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the second B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-rapid tap function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a is no longer output. This means that it is easier to predict how much time will be consumed in the second B operation acceptance state, which is expected to facilitate gaming techniques that involve temporarily suspending the operation state of the second B operation unit. This effect can be achieved even if the fixed time is set to "0.5 seconds," for example. Therefore, the time from the non-operating state until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a is no longer output does not necessarily have to be set to "0 seconds."

Furthermore, in the 2B acceptance state according to this example, as shown in Figures 166(f) and 167(c), when the operation state of the 2B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) at timing tBb2-A2 and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, a new display change is triggered by this.

Here, the display change triggered by the second B operation unit being deactivated does not mean that "the previously displayed rapid-fire display HB2a is hidden, thereby making the image originally displayed behind it visible," but rather that a new display mode is created by processing triggered by the second B operation unit being deactivated. In this example, the display change is created by processing to start displaying a new "post-no-operation display HB2" as a cut-in image, as shown in FIG. 167(c). This configuration more reliably indicates that the second B operation unit has been deactivated and the auto rapid-fire function has been disabled. This configuration can be achieved by not only displaying a new display, but also by changing the display mode of the previously displayed image to a different mode.

In this example, the "post-no-operation display HB2" is provided in multiple modes depending on the progress of the presentation, and at timing tBb2-A2, it is displayed in mode HB2a, which suggests that the presentation has not progressed. However, the "post-no-operation display HB2" does not necessarily have to be provided in multiple modes that suggest the progress of the presentation. Alternatively, both a first post-no-operation display of a type that is displayed in one of multiple modes that suggest the progress of the presentation, and a second post-no-operation display of a type that is displayed only in one mode that does not suggest the progress of the presentation, may be displayed as the "post-no-operation display HB2."

In this regard, in the 2B reception permission state according to this example, when the 2B operation unit is put into a non-operated state, this triggers the display of a new display mode (post-non-operation display HB2), but does not initiate the new output of a sound corresponding to that display.

In addition, in the situation shown in Figure 167(c), the appearance (here, appearance JB2a) of the status suggestion display JB2 that indicates the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B2, enemy character BOSS-B2, and gauge image HP-B2, is the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 167(a)), which also suggests that the presentation content has not progressed. Note that the appearance of the status suggestion display JB2 that indicates the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B2, enemy character BOSS-B2, and gauge image HP-B2, does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 167(a)), as long as it can indicate that the presentation content has not progressed.

In this example, the gauge image HP-B2 of the situation suggestion display JB2 is not made difficult to see by the "post-non-operation display HB2," making it possible to easily grasp the progress of the presentation content through the state of the situation suggestion display JB2. The ally character YS-B2 and enemy character BOSS-B2 may also not be made difficult to see by the "post-non-operation display HB2."

Regarding this point, the "post-no-operation display HB2" may be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second-B operation unit was placed in a non-operated state, regardless of its state. However, in this example, the display state is maintained while the second-B reception acceptance state continues, and is hidden when timing tBb3, at which the second-B reception acceptance state ends, arrives, or when a new operation is accepted by the player. With this configuration, even if the player loses the intention to continue operation partway through the second-B reception acceptance state, the display state of the post-no-operation display HB2 continues until timing tBb3, at which the second-B reception acceptance state ends. This makes it possible to make it appear as if the results of the operations performed up to that point are being displayed, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game. Note that this non-display may be achieved by changing the display mode that was previously displayed to a different display mode.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 166(a), it is assumed that the "2B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state at timing tBb2-B1 within the 2B reception acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 167(d)).

In this example, if the "2B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tBb2-B1 within the 2B acceptance state, this will trigger a "2B post-acceptance change (2B post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 166(f) and (h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 167(d)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "second B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBb2-B1 within the second B operation acceptance state, then, as shown in FIGS. 166(f) and (h), the post-non-operation display HB2 (mode HB2a) is hidden, and then, as a post-second B operation acceptance change, the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα2 (a sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "second B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "post-second B operation acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "second B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that even when operation of the 2B operation unit is resumed at timing tBb2-B1 within the 2B reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 2B reception acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 167(d), the 2B reception acceptance change (post-2B reception display, post-2B reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the 2B reception acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation acceptance of the 2B operation unit at timing tBb2-A1. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 166 and 167 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the second B operation unit) initiated at timing tBb2-B1 is maintained until timing tBb2-B3, activating the auto-rapid-hit function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3 (the period during which the second B operation unit is again maintained in the operating state), operations to the second B operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance role operation) will be executed multiple times.

And even during this "period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3 (the period during which the second B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HB2a and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a) is the same as in the "period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2" described above (see Figure 167 (b)), unless the presentation content progresses. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 166, the period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3 is assumed to be a case in which, of the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the operation accepted at timing tBb2-B2 within that period has led to progress in the presentation content corresponding to the second B acceptance acceptance state (presentation situation shown in Figure 167(e)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 166, the "change after second B acceptance (post-second B acceptance effect)" in response to operation acceptance is executed in a manner in which the effect content has not progressed during the period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B2, whereas during the period from timing tBb2-B2 to timing tBb2-B3, the "change after second B acceptance (post-second B acceptance effect)" in response to operation acceptance is executed in a manner in which the effect content has progressed.

More specifically, at "timing tBb2-B2," the timing at which the presentation progresses during the period from timing tBb2-B2 to timing tBb2-B3, a display change is executed based on the operation received from the second B operation unit, changing the state of the status indication display JB2, which indicates the operation status, from the previously displayed "state JB2a" to a different "state JB2b," as shown in Figures 166(e) and 167(e). Here, as shown in Figure 167(e), the enemy character BOSS-B2 changes to an injured state, the fire magic cast by ally character YS-B2 changes to a state of increased strength, and the gauge image HP-B2 changes to an state in which the remaining HP gauge is reduced. With this configuration, the change in the state of the situation suggestion display JB2 indicates that the performance content corresponding to the second B reception acceptance state has progressed due to (the result of performance determination based on) the operation reception (due to the auto-hit function) performed at timing tBb2-B2.

After the performance has progressed in this way, when one operation is received from the second B operation unit, the "one animation display" will be displayed as the "display after second B reception" in a manner that has progressed in the performance, such as "ally character YS-B2 uses a stronger fire-based magic to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-B2," as shown in Figure 167(e).

In this example, once the effect has progressed, the degree of progress in the effect will not be returned to the state before the progress was made, as long as the second-order acceptance state continues. Therefore, even if an operation is again accepted at the second-order operation unit after the one video display that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced effect has ended, the state when the operation was accepted at the second-order operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B2" with fire magic) will appear as one video display that has changed to the advanced effect.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tBb2-B2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, this "single video display" in which such a change in appearance has occurred will be played multiple times by the auto-hit function.

Furthermore, even in the period after timing tBb2-B2 when the performance has progressed, the mode (one animation display) in which ally character YS-B2 attacks enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire magic is newly initiated at indefinite intervals (unpredetermined time) as a post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one animation display" of the performance when the performance has progressed is also newly initiated at indefinite intervals by the auto-rapid tapping function, and the repeated display of this "one animation display" of the progression mode is represented in the diagram as "rapid tapping display HB2b."

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tBb2-B2," the timing at which the effect content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 166(e), (f) and 167(d), (e), the state of the situation suggestion display JB2 changes from "state JB2a" to "state JB2b," and the state of the rapid-fire display HB2 also changes from "state HB2a" to "state HB2b." From this point on, while the auto rapid-fire function is enabled (timings tBb2-B2 to tBb2-B3), the situation suggestion display JB2 is displayed in "state JB2b," while the rapid-fire display HB2 is executed in "state HB2b."

In this example, the state of the rapid-fire display HB2 changes depending on the progress of the presentation, but it may not change depending on the progress of the presentation. In other words, even if the rapid-fire display HB2 continues to run in the same state regardless of the progress of the presentation, the player can confirm through the rapid-fire display HB2 that the auto rapid-fire function is enabled and the number (frequency) of operations being accepted, and can also confirm the progress of the presentation through the state of the status suggestion display JB2. As mentioned above, the second B acceptance state may also be realized as a type of acceptance state in which progress in the presentation itself is not possible.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a single operation is accepted on the "second B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the second B acceptance state, in addition to the "second B acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the "second B acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 166(h). As mentioned above, such "second B acceptance output sound" can include the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," as well as the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2 that indicates that progress has been made in the presentation corresponding to the second B acceptance state as shown in FIG. 166(i).

Therefore, in the period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 166, when timing tBb2-B2 arrives, at which time the presentation progresses, as shown in FIG. 166(i), the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2 begins to be output in mode Sβ2b-1 based on the operation acceptance (presentation progress) at timing tBb2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the presentation has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output duration of the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2, which is output once in response to an operation acceptance.

However, in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance progresses. Therefore, when timing tBb2-B2 arrives, when the performance progresses, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation being accepted, but in the same manner as when the operation was accepted before timing tBb2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not performance progress occurs at timing tBb2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound Sα2) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will begin to be output anew in the same manner at irregular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound effect" is represented in the diagram as "first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a during this period is the same as in the "period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2" described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a is not changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content, but it may be changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HB2b is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tBb2-B2 to timing tBb2-B3), as shown in FIG. 167(e), the rapid-fire display HB2b will repeatedly show at irregular intervals "ally character YS-B2 attacking injured enemy character BOSS-B2 with high-power fire magic (smoke effects, fire magic, etc.)." This may make the "situation suggestion display JB2" difficult to see or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the 2B acceptance acceptance state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 166 and 167 are designed to assume that the player again interrupts operation of the 2B operation unit at timing tBb2-B3 and disables the auto-rapid tapping function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 2B acceptance acceptance state.

As described above, in the 2B reception permission state, if the operation of the 2B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operating state) while the 2B reception permission state is continuing and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB2, which had been in an active state until then, is switched to a non-display state. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire display HB2b is terminated when timing tBb2-B3 arrives (when the 2B operation unit is put into a non-operating state).

Also, as with the rapid-hit display HB2a, if you stop operating the second B operation unit and put it into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HB2b is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the rapid-hit display HB2b is hidden is set to a fixed time (here, "0 seconds").

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the 2B acceptance state in this example, when the operation of the 2B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operated state) and the auto-rapid tap function is disabled, a new display change is triggered by this. Therefore, as shown in Figures 166(f) and 167(f), even when the operation of the 2B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operated state) and the auto-rapid tap function is disabled at timing tBb2-B3, this also triggers processing to start displaying a new "post-non-operation display HB2" as a cut-in image shown in Figure 167(f). Note that, as also mentioned above, the "post-non-operation display HB2" in this example has multiple forms that differ depending on the degree of progress in the presentation, and at timing tBb2-B3, it is displayed in form HB2b, which suggests that the presentation has progressed one step.

In the situation shown in Figure 167(f), the state of the status indication JB2 (here, state JB2b), which indicates the operation status, such as the ally character YS-B2, enemy character BOSS-B2, and gauge image HP-B2, also suggests that the performance has progressed one step.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 2B reception permission state, if the operation state of the 2B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 2B reception permission state is continuing and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, this triggers the first post-reception output sound Sα2, which had been in an output state until then, to be made inaudible. In other words, in this case, the output state of the first post-reception output sound Sα2a is terminated when timing tBb2-B3 arrives (when the 2B operation unit is put into a non-operated state).

However, the timing tBb2-B3 shown in Figure 166 assumes that the operation of the second B operating unit is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2, which began to be output at timing tBb2-B2, continues to be output.

In this regard, in the secondB reception permitted state, unlike the first post-reception output sound Sα2 described above, the output state of the second post-reception output sound Sβ2 is not terminated (made inaudible) when the operation state of the secondB operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 166(h), even if the operation state of the secondB operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBb2-B3, the second post-reception output sound Sβ2b-1 will continue to be output after timing tBb2-B3 (even after the secondB operation unit is put into a non-operated state) for the predetermined output time until it is finished being output, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

Also, in this example, if the operation of the second B operation unit is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a is being output and the second B operation unit is put into a non-operated state, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a is put into a non-output state is set to a fixed time (here, "0 seconds"). In contrast, for the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2, if the operation of the second B operation unit is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2 is being output and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2 is put into a non-operated state, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2 is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite. In other words, in this case, if the operation of the second B operation unit is interrupted, different effects will be provided between the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2 and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2, which were in an output state until then.

With this configuration, even in the 2B reception permitted state according to this embodiment, if the 2B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 2B post-reception output sound (second post-reception output sound Sβ2b) is being played, as shown in FIG. 166(i), a situation will occur in which the 2B post-reception output sound (second post-reception output sound Sβ2b) continues to be played while the 2B operation unit is put into a non-operated state. However, as time passes after the 2B operation unit is put into a non-operated state (time has passed since timing tBb2-B3), the continued 2B post-reception output sound (second post-reception output sound Sβ2b) will be put into a non-output state, as shown in FIG. 166(i) and other figures.

In this regard, in this performance example, as shown in FIG. 166(a), it is assumed that the second B operation unit is again put into an operating state at timing tBb2-C1 (the performance situation shown in FIG. 167(g)), which is after timing tBb2-B3 when the second B operation unit is put into a non-operated state and when the second B post-acceptance output sound (second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2b) is in an audible state (before the output state ends).

In this example, even if the "second B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tBb2-C1 within the second B acceptance state, this will again trigger a "second B post-acceptance change (second B post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 166(f) and (h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 167(g)), just as in the case of timing tBb2-B1 described above.

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "second B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBb2-C1 within the second B operation acceptance state, then, as shown in FIGS. 166(f) and (h), the post-non-operation display HB2 (mode HB2b) is hidden, and then, as a post-second B operation change, the "first post-operation output sound Sα2 (a sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "second B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "post-second B operation display (one video display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "second B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that when operation of the 2B operation unit is resumed again at timing tBb2-C1 within the 2B reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 2B reception acceptance state does not progress from the first-stage progression mode described above. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 167(g), the post-2B reception change (post-2B reception display, post-2B reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same mode as when the post-2B reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance of the 2B operation unit at timing tBb2-B2 described above (the mode shown in FIG. 167(e)). The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, as mentioned above, this example assumes that timing tBb2-C1, when operation of the second B operation unit is resumed, occurs while the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2 is still audible.

In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2 continues to be output in the same state as before without any change based on the fact that operation on the second B operation unit is resumed (operation acceptance) at timing tBb2-C1. Note that the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2, which corresponds to the second B acceptance acceptance state, is made inaudible when the second B operation unit is put into a non-operated state, and therefore is not made audible when the second B operation unit is operated again.

With this configuration, in the second-B reception acceptance state, if a second-B post-acceptance output sound is being output in response to an operation acceptance, and an operation is accepted for a second-B operation unit that had been in an inactive state until then, the second-B post-acceptance output sound will not be terminated as a result of this, and will always be terminated (second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2). Note that in this case, all sounds audible at that time other than the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ2 will not be rendered inaudible as a result of an operation acceptance for a second-B operation unit that had been in an inactive state until then. This is true not only for timing tBb2-C1, but also for timings such as tBb2-B1. In other words, in the second-B reception acceptance state in this example, sounds that were audible until then will not be rendered inaudible as a result of the second-B operation unit being reactivated.

As with the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2, the rapid-hit display HB2 is hidden when the second B operation unit is put into a non-operated state, so it will not be in a displayed state when the second B operation unit is operated again.

In addition, the presentation examples shown in Figures 166 and 167 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the second B operation unit) that began at timing tBb2-C1 continues even at timing tBb2-C2 when operation acceptance for the second B operation unit is no longer permitted (the timing when the second B acceptance acceptance state ends), and as a result, the auto-rapid-hit function remains active until timing tBb2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBb2-C1 to timing tBb2-C2 (the period during which the second B operation unit is again maintained in the operating state), operations to the second B operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance role operation) will be executed multiple times.

And even during this "period from timing tBb2-C1 to timing tBb2-C2 (the period during which the second B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HB2b and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a) is the same as in the "period from timing tBb2-B2 to timing tBb2-B3" described above (see Figure 167(e)), unless further progress is made in the presentation. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In the example shown in Figure 166, during the period from timing tBb2-C1 to timing tBb2-C2, among the multiple operations accepted by the auto rapid-fire function, if the operation accepted at a predetermined timing within that period (such as the result of the effect determination) leads to further progress in the effect content corresponding to the second B acceptance permission state (if a second stage of progress is made), then the effect will progress as described above with reference to Figures 149 and 151, etc.; however, as the details of this effect have also been described above, a description thereof will be omitted here.

However, as mentioned above, the second B reception acceptance state in this example is assumed to be realized as the above-mentioned "second A reception acceptance state," but unlike the above-mentioned "second A reception acceptance state" (Figures 149 and 151), it is assumed that no special pattern (for example, a pattern equivalent to the above-mentioned pattern JB1c) appears as a post-reception change.

Therefore, in the period from timing tBb2-C1 to timing tBb2-C2 in the example shown in Figure 166, the "change after 1B acceptance (effect after 1B acceptance)" in response to the operation acceptance will be executed multiple times in a state in which the effect content progresses only once (see Figure 167 (g)), and when timing tBb2-C2 arrives, this will trigger the automatic rapid-fire function that had been active up until then to be disabled.

In this regard, when the auto rapid fire function is disabled at timing tBb2-C2, the rapid fire display HB2, which had been displayed by the auto rapid fire function until then, is also disabled (a certain period of time (e.g., 0 seconds) from the time the operation was accepted). However, unlike when the auto rapid fire function is disabled at timing tBb2-A2 or tBb2-B3, when the auto rapid fire function is disabled at timing tBb2-C2, the rapid fire display HB2, which had been displayed by the auto rapid fire function until then, may not be disabled as a result. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether the second B acceptance acceptance state has ended based on the display status of the rapid fire display HB2 after the auto rapid fire function is disabled.

In addition, when the auto-repeat function is disabled at timing tBb2-C2, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a that had been output by the auto-repeat function until then is made inaudible (a certain period of time after the operation is accepted). However, unlike when the auto-repeat function is disabled at timing tBb2-A2 or timing tBb2-B3, when the auto-repeat function is disabled at timing tBb2-C2, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a that had been output by the auto-repeat function until then may not be made inaudible. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether the second-B acceptance permission state has ended based on the output status of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a after the auto-repeat function is disabled.

In addition, in this example, it is assumed that timing tBb2-C2 arrives after the second post-reception output sound Sβ2b-1, which began output at timing tBb2-B2, has become inaudible, but it may also arrive while the second post-reception output sound Sβ2b-1 is being audibly output. However, in this case, unlike the "first post-reception output sound Sα2a," it is desirable not to terminate the output state of the "second post-reception output sound Sβ2" that is currently being executed when timing tBb2-C2 arrives, but to maintain the execution state until the remaining execution time is exhausted.

Regarding the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a, when the auto-rapid function is disabled at timing tBb2-C2, it may either be made inaudible (for a certain period of time from the time the operation is accepted) or not made inaudible. For example, if the sound is made inaudible when the likelihood of a jackpot is high, but not made inaudible when the likelihood of a jackpot is low, it will be possible to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot being obtained.

Furthermore, for the "rapid tap display HB2" and the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα2," even if timing tBb2-C2 arrives while they are in the middle of execution, they may be kept in execution until their remaining execution time is consumed.

In this example, when timing tBb2-C2 arrives, the second-B operation prompting light LB2, which prompts the player to perform an operation, is turned off. In other words, the second-B operation prompting light LB2 begins to emit light when the second-B reception acceptance state occurs, and stops emitting light when the second-B reception acceptance state ends. This indicates that a state in which reception of an operation is accepted or not accepted has been reached.

In other words, in this case, the "change after 2nd B reception (post-2nd B reception effect)" in this example indicates that the 2nd B reception allowance state has ended without the "final stage effect (for example, the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned effect JB2c)" appearing among the effect contents corresponding to the 2nd B reception allowance state (this is not a required configuration for having the configuration described below).

In this regard, the mock image display MG-B2, message display MB2, situation suggestion display JB2, etc. are not hidden when timing tBb2-C2 arrives, but remain displayed for a specified time (predetermined time) even after timing tBb2-C2 arrives and operation acceptance via the second B operation unit is no longer permitted. This gives the player a sense of anticipation that even after timing tBb2-C2, "there may still be a chance for operation acceptance via the second B operation unit to cause a new change after acceptance."

In this example, the model image display MG-B2 and message display MB2 begin displaying at timing tBb1, then go into a hidden state at timing tBb3 after timing tBb2-C2, when operation acceptance is no longer permitted. Furthermore, the situation suggestion display JB2 is not hidden even at timing tBb3, but is hidden at an appropriate timing thereafter. However, as mentioned above, the timings at which the model image display MG-B2 and message display MB2 are displayed and hidden may be different, or only one of the model image display MG-B2 and message display MB2 may be displayed as the operation-related display. Furthermore, the situation suggestion display JB2 may be hidden at the same timing as the model image display MG-B2 and message display MB2.

In this example, it is assumed that the player continues operating the "first B operation unit" starting at timing tBb2-C1 until timing tBb3 arrives, when the mock image display MG-B2 and message display MB2 are hidden, and even until timing arrives when the situation suggestion display JB2 is hidden.

However, once the state transitions from the second B operation acceptance state to the "state in which operation acceptance via the first B operation unit is not accepted" (after timing tBb2-C2), the "state in which operation acceptance via the second B operation unit is accepted" will not occur again until timing tBb3 arrives, at which the mock image display MG-B2 and message display MB2 are made invisible (and further, the timing at which the situation suggestion display JB2 is made invisible).

Therefore, even if the "second B operation unit" is maintained in an operating state from timing tBb2-C1 to timing tBb3 (and even the timing when the situation suggestion display JB2 is made invisible), the auto-repeated tapping function will not be enabled, operations will not be accepted multiple times, and post-acceptance changes in response to accepted operations will not be performed multiple times during that period.

In the example shown in Figure 167(h), a message such as "Fail!!" is displayed when timing tBb2-C2 arrives, but it is also possible to have no new message appear when timing tBb2-C2 arrives.

Furthermore, when the 2B reception allowance state is realized as the 2A reception allowance state described above, the configuration described in the 2A reception allowance state described above is possessed even if it is not described in the 2B reception allowance state. In this case, it goes without saying that the configurations according to the other examples described above as applicable to the 2A reception allowance state can also be applied to the 2B reception allowance state. For example, the 2B reception allowance state is prepared as "a type of reception allowance state in which the reception allowance state can be terminated early based on the reception of an operation."

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "3B reception permission state" as part of the reception permission period (operation permission state). Figure 168 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "3B reception permission state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 3B" as the generation condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 169 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "3B reception permission state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "3B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the "3B fluctuation pattern." After this, it starts the decorative symbol SZ fluctuation performance (such as a performance depiction according to the 3B fluctuation pattern, or sound output of background music playback according to the 3B fluctuation pattern (such as normal background music playback when not in a reach state)), and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "3B fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 168 (b), during the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "3B variable pattern," the arrival of timing tBc2, when the 3B time has elapsed since the decorative pattern SZ variable presentation began (based on "condition 3B" being satisfied), can trigger the above-mentioned 3B acceptance permitted state (valid period) in which "acceptance of operations to the 3B operation unit regarding changes after 3B acceptance (such as the 3B presentation status suggestion display JB3, the 3B rapid tap display HB3, and the post-3B acceptance output sound Sα3)" is permitted (the situation shown in Figure 169 (a)).

Here, in the 3B reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, the "3B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the "sword ornament 5001" rather than the "operation button 410" that is permitted to accept multiple operations in the 1B reception acceptance state and the 2B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations are permitted until the 3B reception acceptance state is ended.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, as shown in Figures 168(b)-(e), when a 3B acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-B3 modeling the object of operation by the player (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 3B operation unit), a message display MB3 related to operations on the object of operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 3B operation unit), and a status indication display JB3 that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period after the operation acceptance is made are displayed at timing tBc1 before the 3B acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the 3B operation unit is accepted). Furthermore, at timing tBc1 in this example, audible output of a 3B operation-related output sound OB3 prompting the player to perform an operation is also initiated. Therefore, during the period from timing tBc1 to tBc2 in this example, operation-related displays such as the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 are displayed to prompt the user to accept multiple operations on the sword decorative body 5001, and even though the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is being audibly output, operations on the sword decorative body 5001 are not determined to be valid operations (operations are not accepted).

As will be described later, the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 in this example, as shown in FIG. 168(g), is different from the first-B operation-related output sound OB1 and the second-B operation-related output sound OB2 in that it is audibly output in the form of a "specific mode output sound" being repeatedly played multiple times. The repeated playback method may include preparing sound data storing one "specific mode output sound" and playing that sound data multiple times, or preparing sound data storing multiple "specific mode output sounds" and playing that sound data only once. Any method that sounds like repeated playback may be used. With this configuration, when the operation-related output sound is repeatedly played, it can be expected that it indicates that operation is permitted for the "sword ornament 5001" rather than the "operation button 410," which can be expected to effectively reduce operational errors by the player.

The mock-up image display MG-B3, message display MB3, situation suggestion display JB3, and third-B operation-related output sound OB3 do not necessarily have to appear before the third-B reception-permitted state is established; they may be displayed simultaneously with the establishment of the third-B reception-permitted state or slightly delayed thereafter. In particular, the situation suggestion display JB3 may not be displayed until the first operation is accepted for the third-B operation unit in the third-B reception-permitted state; that is, it may be realized as appearing and displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation for the third-B operation unit. Furthermore, the timing at which the mock-up image display MG-B3 is displayed, the timing at which the message display MB3 is displayed, and the timing at which the audible output of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 begins may be different from each other. For example, the message display MB3 may be displayed before the mock-up image display MG-B3 is displayed.

Furthermore, with regard to "Condition 3B," which is the condition under which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted when in the 3B acceptance acceptance state, unlike the above-mentioned "Condition 1B" and "Condition 2B," it may be satisfied either before the timing at which an operation-related display (such as a mock-up image or a message display) prompting the user to accept multiple operations for the 3B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed or the timing at which the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is audibly output arrives, or after the timing at which an operation-related display (such as a mock-up image or a message display) prompting the user to accept multiple operations for the 3B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed or the timing at which the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is audibly output arrives.

When this configuration is adopted, in the 3B reception acceptance state, there are cases where reception of operations to the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted before the timing at which an operation-related display (such as a mock-up or message display) is displayed or the timing at which the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is audibly output (when timing tBc2 shown in FIG. 168 arrives before timing tBc1), and cases where reception of operations to the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted after the timing at which an operation-related display (such as a mock-up or message display) is displayed or the timing at which the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is audibly output (when timing tBc2 shown in FIG. 168 arrives after timing tBc1), which can be expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension.

However, it is important that the same post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance appears in both cases where an operation is accepted for the 3B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001) in the 3B acceptance state in which timing tBc2 shown in FIG. 168 arrives before timing tBc1, and where an operation is accepted for the 3B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001) in the 3B acceptance state in which timing tBc2 shown in FIG. 168 arrives after timing tBc1. This makes it difficult to recognize the timing at which operation acceptance is accepted, even though there is only one valid period, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In addition, the above-mentioned "Condition 3B," which is the condition under which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted when in the 3B acceptance acceptance state, may be satisfied at the same timing as when an operation-related display (such as a mock-up image or message display) prompting the user to accept multiple operations for the 3B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed, or when the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is audibly output. However, even in this case, it goes without saying that it is important that the same behavior is displayed as a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance.

Furthermore, when adopting these configurations, the method for setting timing tBc1 and timing tBc2 (condition 3B) may be adopted as appropriate. Examples of implementation are listed below, but these are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other methods are also possible.

For example, if the time elapsed since the start of symbol change is set as "Timing tBc2 (Condition 3B)," multiple elapsed times can be prepared, and one of those elapsed times can be selectively used through a presentation judgment (lottery) or the like. Alternatively, if the remaining time until the symbol change is completed is set as "Timing tBc2 (Condition 3B)," multiple remaining times can be prepared, and one of those remaining times can be selectively used through a presentation judgment (lottery) or the like. Alternatively, if Timing tBc2 (Condition 3B) is set during a period when symbol change is not being performed, for example, the time elapsed since symbol change was deactivated or the time elapsed since a jackpot game began can be set as "Timing tBc2 (Condition 3B)," and multiple elapsed times can be prepared, and one of those elapsed times can be selectively used through a presentation judgment (lottery) or the like. When either of these methods is used, timing tBc1 will occur only at predetermined times.

Also, conversely, a similar configuration can be achieved by making timing tBc1 occur instead of timing tBc2 (condition 3B) using one of the above-mentioned methods for setting timing tBc2 (condition 3B), and making timing tBc2 (condition 3B) occur only at predetermined times.

Alternatively, the conditions for "Timing tBc1" and "Timing tBc2" may be determined by lottery each time with a predetermined probability, so that if the conditions for "Timing tBc1" are met first, then "Timing tBc2" will occur, whereas if the conditions for "Timing tBc2" are met first, then "Timing tBc1" will occur.

In this example, the mock image display MG-B3, message display MB3, and situation suggestion display JB3 are configured to continue displaying at least until the 3B reception permission state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 3B operation unit (this is not a required configuration). In contrast, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible during the 3B reception permission state, but it does not necessarily have to be terminated midway.

Furthermore, the conditions under which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is no longer accepted when in the 3B acceptance acceptance state may be satisfied before timing tBc3 when the operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) prompting the user to accept multiple operations for the 3B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is hidden or before timing when the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible, or may be satisfied after timing tBc3 when the operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) prompting the user to accept multiple operations for the 3B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is hidden or before timing when the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible.

When this configuration is adopted, in the 3B operation acceptance state, there will be cases where operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted before the timing when the operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) is hidden or the timing when the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible, and there will also be cases where operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted after the timing when the operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) is hidden or the timing when the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

However, it is important that the same post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance appears in two cases: when an operation is accepted for the 3B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) in a 3B acceptance state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted before the timing when operation-related displays (such as a model image display or a message display) are hidden or the timing when the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible; and when an operation is accepted for the 3B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) in a 3B acceptance state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted after the timing when operation-related displays (such as a model image display or a message display) are hidden or the timing when the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible. This makes it difficult to recognize the timing when acceptance of operations is not permitted even within a single valid period, which can be expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, the condition under which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is no longer accepted when in this 3B acceptance acceptance state may be met at the same time as when an operation-related display (such as a mock image display or message display) that prompts the user to accept multiple operations for the 3B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is hidden, or when the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible. However, even in this case, it goes without saying that it is important that the same behavior is displayed as a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance.

Furthermore, when adopting these configurations, the method for setting each of the above timings may be adopted as appropriate. The method for setting the timings before and after these two timings can be set, for example, by following the setting method for the timings before and after the above-mentioned "timing tBc1" and "timing tBc2 (condition 3B)."

Here, in the 3B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 168(b) and (j), when this occurs (in this example, at timing tBc2, but it can be slightly delayed before or after that), the operation prompting light to encourage the player to operate is not emitted. In this case, it goes without saying that the 3B operation unit (sword decoration 5001) does not necessarily have to be equipped with a light emitting unit.

With this configuration, unlike the first B reception permitted state and the second B reception permitted state, operation-related displays (such as mockups and messages) are displayed, but the operation-prompting light is not activated. In other words, in this case, compared to when operation-prompting light is activated, it is relatively difficult to recognize that operation reception is permitted, so it is expected that a sense of tension will be maintained while the operation-related displays suggest that operation reception is permitted.

Here, the "Mock Image Display MG-B3" corresponding to the 3B reception acceptance state uses a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)." However, for example, a color scheme determined based on the results of a performance determination or the like may be selectively displayed from among multiple color schemes.

In addition, the "simulated image display MG-B3" corresponding to the 3B acceptance state is such that, when a predetermined moving image in a portion that resembles the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is considered to be a single periodic change, this periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined 3B period. However, because this 3B period is set to be a longer time (longer cycle) than the 1B period that appears in the 1B acceptance state, in the 3B acceptance state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range more slowly than in the above-mentioned 1B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the 3B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 168(c), (d) and 169(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-B3, a message display related to the acceptance of operations for the 3B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001) (here, a message display MB3 displayed as "Attack the demon! 'Strike' the sword repeatedly!!") is displayed.

However, in the 3B reception acceptance state, it is sufficient that an operation-related display is displayed that prompts the 3B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001) to perform multiple operations. For example, as long as the operation-related display displays at least one of a mock-up image display and a message display, it is not necessary to execute both of them.

Furthermore, in the 3B reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 168(c) and (d), if no operation is accepted by the 3B operation unit, the mock-up image display and message display continue to be displayed until timing tBc3 arrives, at which point they are hidden. Therefore, while the 3B reception acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock-up image display MG-B3) indicating the remaining time until timing tBc3 arrives, at which point the 3B reception acceptance state will end, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display does not necessarily have to be displayed.

Furthermore, if the "Simulated Image Display MG-B3" corresponding to the 3B acceptance state is started to be displayed before timing tBc2 when the 3B acceptance state occurs, the periodic changes and changes in the gauge image may be started after timing tBc2.

Furthermore, in the 3B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 168(e) and 169(a), the situation suggestion display JB3 corresponding to the 3B acceptance state displays an ally character corresponding to the type of the 3B acceptance state (here, the ally character YS-B3), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 3B acceptance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-B3 depicted as a demon), and a gauge image HP-B3 showing their remaining HP gauges. In the 3B reception allowance state, the high or low likelihood of a jackpot can be suggested through the effect of "whether or not ally character YS-B3 can defeat enemy character BOSS-B3 by receiving multiple operations on the 3B operation unit (whether or not gauge image HP-B3 can be set to 0)." In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "3B operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)," a presentation can be executed in which "ally character YS-B3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B3." Note that in this example, the ally character YS-B3, the enemy character BOSS-B3, and the gauge image HP-B3 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JB3, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays; as long as at least one of the ally character YS-B3, the enemy character BOSS-B3, and the gauge image HP-B3 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status. Additionally, the ally character YS-B3 may be displayed as a different image than the ally characters YS-B1 and YS-B2 that appear in the first B acceptance state and the second B acceptance state. Additionally, in the third B acceptance state, the situation suggestion display JB3 may not necessarily be displayed.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 168, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBc2-A1 within the 3B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 169 (b)).

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBc2-A1 within the 3B acceptance state, a "change after 3B acceptance (post-3B acceptance performance)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 168(f) and (h) (the performance situation shown in Figure 169(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" at timing tBc2-A1 within the 3B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 168(f) and 168(h), a change occurs after 3B acceptance in which a "3B post-acceptance output sound" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is audibly output, and a "3B post-acceptance display" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" begins to be displayed.

In other words, when a single operation is accepted on the "3B operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" in the 3B acceptance state, the above-mentioned "display after 3B acceptance" is displayed as a single animated display of "ally character YS-B3" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B3" with a sword technique (such as effects of the sword stroke or slash), as shown in Figure 169(b). However, as will be described later, in the 3B acceptance state, based on the results of the performance determination made when the operation is accepted, there is a possibility that "enemy character BOSS-B3" will be injured, the strength of the sword technique will increase, or the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-B3 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance determination, etc.). When the effect content has progressed in this way, the state when an operation is subsequently accepted via the 3B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B3" with a sword technique) will appear as a single animated display that has changed to the advanced effect content (see, for example, FIGS. 168(e) and 168(f) and 169(e)). Note that, after the effect content has progressed in this way, the degree of progress of the effect content will not be returned to the state before the progress was made, as long as the 3B operation acceptance state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again via the 3B operation unit after the end of the single animated display that has changed to the advanced effect content, the state when the operation is accepted via the 3B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B3" with a sword technique) can appear as a single animated display that has changed to the advanced effect content. As the presentation progresses, it may also be possible to suggest that there is a high probability (expectation) of hitting the jackpot.

However, in the 3B reception allowance state, unlike the 1B reception allowance state and the 2B reception allowance state (reception allowance states in which the effect content has a setting for the effect degree), the effect degree is not set for the effect content as a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance to the 3B operation unit, and instead, each time an operation is accepted to the 3B operation unit, a 3B event (which may be just a display, just a sound, just a light emission, or just a movable body movement) as a post-acceptance change may simply be repeatedly executed (occurred). In this case, it goes without saying that the situation suggestion display JB3 will no longer be displayed.

In addition, in this example, when a single operation is accepted on the "3B operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" in the 3B acceptance state, in addition to the above-mentioned "3B acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound Sα3 can be output as the above-mentioned "3B acceptance output sound," as shown in FIG. 168(h). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to "the manner in which ally character YS-B3 attacks enemy character BOSS-B3 with a sword technique (such as a sword stroke or slash effect)," which appears as the above-mentioned "3B acceptance display." However, as will be described later, in the 3B acceptance state, unlike the 1B acceptance state and the 2B acceptance state, there is no possibility of an output sound different from the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3 being output as the "3B acceptance output sound." Note that, while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3 is implemented here as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; it simply needs to be a sound that can indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted, and when the auto-repeated function is enabled, it needs to be a sound that can be output as a sound that can indicate that the 3B operating unit is being maintained in an operated state.

However, in the 3B reception allowance state, unlike the 1B reception allowance state and the 2B reception allowance state, a post-reception display may not necessarily be displayed as a post-reception change in response to reception of an operation to the 3B operation unit, and a post-reception output sound may not necessarily be output. For example, in the 3B reception allowance state, a post-reception change in response to reception of an operation to the 3B operation unit may be only a predetermined light emission in a predetermined light-emitting unit, or only a predetermined action of a specific movable body. In short, when an operation is received to the 3B operation unit, it is sufficient that a 3B event (which may be only a display, only a sound, only a light emission, or only an action of a movable body) is executed (occurs) at least multiple times as a post-reception change in response to the operation reception.

In addition, in this example, it is assumed that the timing tBc2-A1 occurs while the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is in an output state, as shown in Figures 168(g) and (j). However, at timing tBc2-A1, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is not made inaudible as a result of receiving an operation on the "third B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)."

In other words, in this example, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is not terminated in its audible state in response to the acceptance of an operation (it is output for a predetermined period of time regardless of the acceptance of an operation), regardless of how many operations are accepted for the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" while the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is being audibly output, and regardless of the judgment result (even if the 3B acceptance acceptance state is terminated early).

However, as will be described later, in this example, the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is not only output for a predetermined output time, but also may terminate its audible output early at any timing within the time range TBc shown in FIG. 168(g). Methods for realizing this configuration include, for example, determining whether or not to terminate the audible output early at any timing within the time range TBc as a performance determination separate from the determination of the type of symbol change pattern when the symbol change begins, or determining at what timing. Alternatively, it is also possible to employ a method for determining whether or not to terminate the audible output early at any timing within the time range TBc as a performance determination when the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is output, or determining at what timing. Alternatively, it is possible to adopt a method in which the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 can be started at several timings within the "third-B variation pattern," and then, depending on which of these timings the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is started at, the audible output of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated early (or not) within the time range TBc, or the timing within the same time range is predetermined. Alternatively, it is possible to simply determine whether to terminate the audible output of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 early every predetermined time period, and terminate the audible output of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 early when a special result is obtained from the determination. In short, it is sufficient for the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 to be terminated early at any timing within the time range TBc shown in FIG. 168(g), and the method for achieving this is not particularly limited. This configuration functions at least when the game is progressing properly while the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is being audibly output.

In this regard, conditions for the early termination of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 may be set so that if the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is not output for a predetermined amount of time and is terminated early during the period in which the symbol fluctuation is being performed in the "3B fluctuation pattern," the percentage of jackpots resulting from the jackpot determination will be higher than if the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 had not been terminated early. With this configuration, when the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is output, not only will interest in the situation regarding the operation reception to the 3B operation unit and the changes that occur after reception in response to that operation reception be generated, but also the dramatic effect of the "early termination of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3" in a location unrelated to that operation reception will be provided, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Alternatively, the conditions for early termination of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 may be set so that, if the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is not output for a predetermined period of time and is terminated early, the probability that an operation-related display or fourth-B operation-related output sound OB4 (see FIG. 170) corresponding to the fourth-B operation acceptance state described below will appear within a specific period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) from the time the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible is higher than if the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 had not been terminated early. This probability may be 0% or 100%. Even with this configuration, when the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is output, not only will interest in the status regarding operation acceptance for the third-B operation unit and changes following acceptance in response to that acceptance be generated, but also the dramatic effect of the "early termination of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3" in a location unrelated to the acceptance of that operation will be provided, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

As mentioned above, in the firstB operation-related output state and the secondB operation-related output state, while the firstB operation-related output sound OB1 and the secondB operation-related output sound OB2 are being audibly output, and at least as long as gameplay is progressing properly, these operation-related output sounds are always output for a predetermined playback time and are not muted midway through playback. However, in this case, the rate at which an operation-related display or operation-related output sound corresponding to an "operation-related output state in which the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) for the firstB operation unit (operation button 410) is enabled and multiple operation acceptance is permitted" appears within a special time period (e.g., 10 seconds) from the time the thirdB operation-related output sound OB3 is muted is lower than the rate at which an operation-related display or fourthB operation-related output sound OB4 (see FIG. 170) corresponding to the fourthB operation-related output state described below appears within a special time period (e.g., 10 seconds) from the time the thirdB operation-related output sound OB3 is muted. Furthermore, the rate at which an operation-related display or operation-related output sound corresponding to an "acceptance-permitted state in which the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second B operation unit (operation button 410) is enabled and multiple operation acceptance is permitted" appears within a special time (e.g., 10 seconds) from the time the second B operation-related output sound OB2 is made inaudible is lower than the rate at which an operation-related display or fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 (see FIG. 170) corresponding to a fourth B acceptance-permitted state described below appears within a special time (e.g., 10 seconds) from the time the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible. This rate may be 0% or 100%.

In this way, in the 3B acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted on the "3B operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001)," an image of "ally character YS-B3" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B3" and the associated sound effect are displayed (a change after one acceptance). In other words, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-B3" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-B3" (the presentation progresses), and when HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-B3" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations (a change after multiple acceptances). However, in this case, if HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-B3" cannot be defeated, this suggests low expectations.

However, this presentation content for the 3B reception-permitted state is merely an example, and other content may be substituted for it. For example, as a post-reception change corresponding to the 3B reception-permitted state, as long as there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to operation reception (for example, starting or stopping lamp illumination, or ending the audible output of a sound that is in an output state), it is not necessary to execute a "post-reception display" or "post-reception output sound." Even with this configuration, the player can understand that the operation reception has been carried out appropriately.

This example assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the third B operation unit) initiated at timing tBc2-A1 continues until timing tBc2-A2, as shown in Figure 168(a).

In this regard, the 3B reception-permitted state is classified as a "multiple operation-enabled state (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) in which simply maintaining the operation unit (3B operation unit) in an operating state causes a corresponding post-operation change (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, and a post-operation device operation) to be executed multiple times." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 168(a), during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 (the period in which the 3B operation unit is maintained in an operating state), operations are accepted multiple times for the 3B operation unit, and a post-operation change (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, and a post-operation device operation) corresponding to that operation is executed multiple times.

As mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted on the 3B operation unit in the 3B acceptance state, the post-3B acceptance display (one animation display) shows ally character YS-B3 attacking enemy character BOSS-B3 with a sword technique (such as the effects of the sword strokes and slashes), as shown in FIG. 169(b). Therefore, during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, this "one animation display" is first played multiple times.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted on the 3B operation unit in the 3B acceptance acceptance state, the post-3B acceptance output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to "the manner in which ally character YS-B3 attacks enemy character BOSS-B3 with a sword technique (such as the generation of a sword stroke or slashing effect)," which appears as the "post-3B acceptance display." Therefore, during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, in addition to the "single video display," a sound effect corresponding to this "single video display" will be played multiple times.

Here, in the 3B acceptance state, when the operation unit (3B operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, such post-acceptance changes (one video display, sound effect (3B post-acceptance output sound), etc.) are executed multiple times, but the execution interval (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

Furthermore, in this example, in the 3B acceptance state, when the operation unit (3B operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, the ally character YS-B3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B3 with a sword technique (one animation display), and the sound effect (3B post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to that "one animation display" can be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change. In this case, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly initiated in response to the detection (the interval from the start of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of the next post-acceptance change) is always set to a specific time (e.g., 1 second) or less. However, it is desirable to set this interval in the 3B acceptance state to a different length of time than the interval when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled in the above-mentioned 1B acceptance state. For example, it may be set to a time longer than the interval when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled in the above-mentioned 1B acceptance state, but less than a specific time (e.g., 1 second).

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 168, the auto-rapid-hitting function will start a new "one-shot animation display (one of the post-acceptance changes)" at regular intervals, in which ally character YS-B3 attacks enemy character BOSS-B3 with a sword technique, and this repeated display of "one-shot animation display" is represented in the figure as "rapid-hitting display HB3a."

Similarly, during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 168, the sound effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" (the third B post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes) will begin to be output anew at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound effect" is represented in the figure as "first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a."

In this regard, the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 168 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the performance content corresponding to the 3B acceptance acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, the "status suggestion display JB3 (see FIG. 168(e))" that indicates the status of the operation in the 3B acceptance state will not change or begin execution (in a manner that progresses the performance) as a result of the operation acceptance. Also, this example assumes that the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 will not be terminated midway and will maintain its output state during this period.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 168, the "sword attack" and "slashing effect" shown in FIG. 169 are displayed and the corresponding sound effects are output repeatedly at regular intervals by the auto-rapid-hit function (post-acceptance changes are repeatedly executed at regular intervals) (rapid-hit display HB3a, first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a), but no change occurs in the "situation suggestion display JB3 (see FIG. 168(e))." This makes it possible to confirm the effects that have occurred in response to multiple input acceptances, as well as any progress that has not been made, simply by maintaining the operating state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Regarding the "situation suggestion display JB3 (see Figure 168(e))," at least one of the ally character YS-B3, enemy character BOSS-B3, and gauge image HP-B3 may be changed in response to the acceptance of an operation. In this case, however, the change must be to a mode different from the "mode when the performance progresses." Furthermore, if the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 (the period during which the third-B operation unit is maintained in an operating state) ends without the performance progressing (when the operation is interrupted), this will trigger a return to the "display mode before the operation." Furthermore, as noted above, the "situation suggestion display JB3 (see Figure 168(e))" of the ally character YS-B3, enemy character BOSS-B3, gauge image HP-B3, etc. may not be displayed until an operation is accepted, and may instead be displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined period of time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2, the "Status Suggestion Display JB3 (see FIG. 168(e))" which indicates the status of the operation in the third B acceptance state does not change or begin execution as a result of the operation acceptance, so it is possible to appropriately indicate that the performance content is not progressing.

However, when the rapid-fire display HB3a is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2), as shown in FIG. 169(b), the rapid-fire display HB3a will repeatedly show at regular intervals "ally character YS-B3 attacking enemy character BOSS-B3 with a sword technique (such as the generation of sword strokes or slashing effects)." This may make the "situation suggestion display JB3" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the 3B acceptance state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 168 and 169 are designed to assume that the player temporarily suspends operation of the 3B operation unit at timing tBc2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 3B acceptance acceptance state.

Here, in the 3B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 168(f), even if the operation of the 3B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBc2-A2 and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB3a (post-acceptance change) that was in an active state until then will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire display HB1a will continue to be in an active state even after timing tBc2-A2 (even after the 3B operation unit is put into a non-operated state), for example, until the above-mentioned "one animation display" that was in an active state has been executed for the predetermined display time and is finished displaying (until one post-acceptance change is finished executing).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 3B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB3a, which had been in an active state until then, is not immediately made invisible (the post-acceptance change is not terminated midway through one execution), so it takes time for the operation status in the 3B acceptance state to become easy to recognize. This means that a significant amount of the remaining time in the 3B acceptance state is consumed, and is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily interrupt the operation state of the 3B operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 3B acceptance state.

Also, in this example, if the operation of the 3B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HB3a is displayed, the time from the non-operating state until the rapid-hit display HB3a is put into a non-display state (the time until the one post-acceptance change that was in the middle of execution is completed) is not set to a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 3B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled until the rapid-fire indicator HB3a is hidden and a situation appears in which the operation status in the 3B reception-permitted state becomes easy to recognize. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 3B reception-permitted state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend operation of the 3B operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 3B reception-permitted state.

Furthermore, in the 3B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 168(h) and elsewhere, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a, which had been in an active state until then, is not rendered inaudible when the operation of the 3B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBc2-A2 and the auto-repeat function is disabled, just like the rapid-fire display HB3a. In other words, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a will continue to be output even after timing tBc2-A2 (even after the 3B operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an active state has been executed and output for the predetermined output time (or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state).

With this configuration, even if the operation of the 3B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a, which had been in an active state until then, will not immediately be put into a non-output state. In this case, it will appear as if the auto-repeated tapping function is still active, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation of the 3B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a (3B event) is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-output state of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 3B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a (3B event) is no longer output, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tapping function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 3B acceptance-permitted state, which is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation state of the 3B operation unit.

Furthermore, in the 3B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 168(g), the 3B operation-related output sound OB3, which had been in an active state until then, is not made inaudible when the operation state of the 3B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) at timing tBc2-A2 and the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled.

In addition, in the 3B reception permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation of the 3B operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operated state) while the rapid-hit display HB3a and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a are both in an active state, as shown in Figures 168(f) and 168(h), the rapid-hit display HB3a continues to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound SB3a continues to be output while the 3B operation unit is set to a non-operated state. However, as time passes after the 3B operation unit is set to a non-operated state, the rapid-hit display HB3a, which had been displayed, will be hidden and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a will be set to a non-output state, as shown in Figures 168(f) and 168(h) and 169(c). This not only allows the player to easily recognize when the auto-rapid function is disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the status of the status indication JB3 (here, status JB3a) that indicates the operating status, such as the ally character YS-B3, enemy character BOSS-B3, and gauge image HP-B3 (see Figure 169 (c)).

However, as mentioned above, in the example shown in Figure 168, the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto rapid-fire function and multiple post-acceptance changes are executed, the effect content corresponding to the 3B acceptance-permitted state does not progress. Note that the 3B acceptance-permitted state does not necessarily have to be generated as an acceptance-permitted state in which the effect content may progress; for example, it may be generated as an acceptance-permitted state in which only one mode of post-acceptance change is executed multiple times.

Thus, in the situation shown in Figure 169(c), although the state of the status suggestion display JB3 (here, state JB3a) that suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B3, enemy character BOSS-B3, and gauge image HP-B3, can be easily recognized, these states are the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 169(a)), which suggests that the performance content has not progressed. Note that the state of the status suggestion display JB3 that suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B3, enemy character BOSS-B3, and gauge image HP-B3, does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 169(a)), as long as it can suggest that the performance content has not progressed.

In this example, as shown in Figure 168(a), it is assumed that the "3B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state at timing tBc2-B1 within the 3B reception acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 169(d)).

In this example, if the "3B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tBc2-B1 within the 3B acceptance state, this will trigger a "change after 3B acceptance (post-3B acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 168(f) (the effect situation shown in FIG. 169(d)).

In this regard, this example assumes that the "3B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and operation is accepted at timing tBc2-B1, before the time required for the audible output of 3B operation-related output sound OB3 (the predetermined playback time) has elapsed. However, as described above, this 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is not affected by the status of operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit, and therefore the state related to the audible output does not end as a result of the operation acceptance at timing tBc2-B1.

However, as mentioned above, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 in this example is not affected by the status of operation reception for the third B operation unit, and is intended to remain audibly output throughout the time range TBc shown in FIG. 168(g) (over a predetermined playback time), but there are cases in which the audible output is terminated early at some point within the time range TBc.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 168(g), it is assumed that the conditions for terminating the audible output of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 are met at timing tBc2-X, which is between timing tBc2-A2 and timing tBc2-B1.

Therefore, in this example, the audible output of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated at timing tBc2-X shown in Figure 168 (g). However, in this case, with regard to post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance of the third-B operation unit, even if this is in the middle of one execution, the execution state will not be terminated at the timing when the audible output of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 168(h), at timing tBc2-X in this example presentation, the 3B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a) is being audibly output as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation on the 3B operation unit. However, the 3B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a) continues to be audibly output without being interrupted at timing tBc2-X when the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is interrupted.

Furthermore, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168 (g) can satisfy the conditions for its audible output to be terminated even during the period from timing tBc-A1 to timing tBc-A2, when the 3B operation unit is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated tapping function causes "multiple operations to be accepted, and post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance are executed multiple times (repeated tapping display HB3a and first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a appear)." However, even if the conditions for terminating the audible output of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 are met under these circumstances, this does not trigger a change in the situation where "multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to those operation acceptances are executed multiple times (rapid tapping display HB3a and first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a appear)." In other words, the manner in which post-acceptance changes occur is the same as when the conditions for terminating the audible output of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 are not met.

As described above, the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 in this example, as shown in FIG. 168(g), is different from the first-B operation-related output sound OB1 and the second-B operation-related output sound OB2 in that the "output sound of a specific mode" is audibly output in the form of being repeatedly played multiple times (twice in this case). That is, in this case, a condition for the audible output of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 to be terminated midway may be met between the end of the first output of the "output sound of a specific mode" as the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 and the start of the second output of the "output sound of a specific mode" as the third-B operation-related output sound OB3. In this case, although it is difficult for the player to realize that the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 has been terminated midway, because the "specific mode output sound" as the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is only output once, rather than multiple times, anyone who pays attention to the number of times it is output will be able to recognize that the audible output of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 has been terminated midway, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible in this manner, operation-related displays such as the mock-up image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 may also be made invisible. If this configuration is adopted, not only will the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 remain inaudible, but the following performance progression will occur from timing tBc2-X onwards while operation-related displays such as the mock-up image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 remain invisible.

In this example, if an operation is accepted for the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" at timing tBc2-B1 within the 3B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 168(f) and (h), a post-3B acceptance change occurs in which the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα3 (a sound effect corresponding to one animation display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is again audibly output, and the "post-3B acceptance display (one animation display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that even when operation of the 3B operation unit is resumed at timing tBc2-B1 within the 3B reception acceptance state, the effect corresponding to that 3B reception acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 169(d), the post-3B reception change (post-3B reception display, post-3B reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-3B reception change was first initiated based on the operation acceptance of the 3B operation unit at timing tBc2-A1. The details of the effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 168 and 169 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 3B operation unit) initiated at timing tBc2-B1 will be maintained until timing tBc2-B3, activating the auto-rapid-hit function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3 (the period during which the 3B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the 3B operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance role operation) will be executed multiple times.

And even during this "period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3 (the period during which the third B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HB3a and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a) is the same as in the "period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2" described above (see Figure 169 (b)), unless the presentation content progresses. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 168, the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3 is assumed to be a case in which, of the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the operation accepted at timing tBc2-B2 within that period is used to advance the effect corresponding to the 3B acceptance acceptance state (the effect situation shown in Figure 169 (e)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 168, the "change after receiving third B (effect after receiving third B)" in response to operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has not progressed during the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B2, whereas during the period from timing tBc2-B2 to timing tBc2-B3, the "change after receiving third B (effect after receiving third B)" in response to operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has progressed.

More specifically, at "timing tBc2-B2," the timing at which the presentation progresses during the period from timing tBc2-B2 to timing tBc2-B3, a display change is executed based on the operation received from the third B operation unit, changing the state of the status indication display JB3, which indicates the operation status, from the previously displayed "state JB3a" to a different "state JB3b," as shown in Figures 168(e) and 169(e). Here, as shown in Figure 169(e), the enemy character BOSS-B3 changes to an injured state, the sword technique performed by ally character YS-B3 changes to an increased strength state, and the gauge image HP-B3 changes to an state in which the remaining HP gauge is reduced. With this configuration, the change in the state of the situation suggestion display JB3 indicates that the performance corresponding to the third B reception acceptance state has progressed as a result of (the result of performance determination based on) the operation reception (by the auto-repeated tap function) performed at timing tBc2-B2.

After the performance has progressed in this way, when one operation is received from the third B operation unit, the "one animation display" will be displayed as the "display after third B reception" in a manner that has progressed in the performance, such as "ally character YS-B3 uses a sword technique with increased strength to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-B3," as shown in FIG. 169(e).

In this example, once the presentation progresses, the progress of the presentation will not be returned to the state before the progress was made, as long as the 3B acceptance state continues. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted again at the 3B operation unit after the one video display that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced presentation has ended, the state when the operation was accepted at the 3B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B3" with a sword technique) will appear as one video display that has changed to the advanced presentation.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tBc2-B2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, this "single video display" in which such a change in appearance has occurred will be played multiple times by the auto-hit function.

Furthermore, even in the period after timing tBc2-B2 when the performance has progressed, the mode (one animation display) in which ally character YS-B3 attacks enemy character BOSS-B3 with a sword technique is executed anew at regular intervals (predetermined intervals (same time as before the change)) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one animation display" of the performance when the performance has progressed is also executed anew at regular intervals by the auto-rapid tapping function, and the repeated display (multiple post-acceptance changes) of this "one animation display (one post-acceptance change)" of the progression mode is represented in the diagram as "rapid tapping display HB3b."

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tBc2-B2," the timing at which the effect content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 168(e), (f) and 169(d), (e), the state of the situation suggestion display JB3 changes from "state JB3a" to "state JB3b," and the state of the rapid-hit display HB3 also changes from "state HB3a" to "state HB3b." From this point on, while the auto rapid-hit function is enabled (timing tBc2-B2 to tBc2-B3), the situation suggestion display JB3 is displayed in "state JB3b," while the rapid-hit display HB3 is executed in "state HB3b."

In this example, the state of the rapid-fire display HB3 changes depending on the progress of the presentation, but it may not change depending on the progress of the presentation. In other words, even if the rapid-fire display HB3 continues to be displayed in one state regardless of the progress of the presentation, the player can confirm through the rapid-fire display HB3 that the auto rapid-fire function is enabled and the number (frequency) of operations being accepted, and can also confirm the progress of the presentation through the state of the status suggestion display JB3. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the third-B acceptance allowance state, unlike the first-B and second-B acceptance allowance states, may be realized as a type of acceptance allowance state in which progress in the presentation itself is not possible. In this case, it goes without saying that the status suggestion display will not be displayed, and post-acceptance changes will be executed multiple times in only one state.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a single operation is accepted on the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 3B acceptance state, in addition to the "3B acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound Sα3 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display" can be output as the "3B acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 168(h). However, as mentioned above, as shown in FIG. 168(i), in the 3B acceptance state, the second post-acceptance output sound is not output as the "3B acceptance output sound."

Furthermore, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3 in this example is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance content advances. Therefore, when timing tBc2-B2 arrives, when the performance content advances, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation acceptance, but in the same manner as when the operation was accepted before timing tBc2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not the performance advances at timing tBc2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will be newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound effect" will be represented in the diagram as "first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a during this period is the same as in the "period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2" described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a is not changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content, but it may be changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HB3b is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tBc2-B2 to timing tBc2-B3), as shown in FIG. 169(e), the rapid-fire display HB3b will repeatedly show "ally character YS-B3 attacking injured enemy character BOSS-B3 with a powerful sword technique (such as the generation of sword strokes or slashing effects)" at regular intervals. This may make the "situation suggestion display JB3" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the 3B acceptance acceptance state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 168 and 169 are designed to assume that the player again interrupts operation of the 3B operation unit at timing tBc2-B3 and disables the auto-rapid tapping function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 3B acceptance acceptance state.

As described above, in the 3B reception acceptance state, even if the operation of the 3B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 3B reception acceptance state is continuing and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB3, which was in an active state until then, will not be hidden (a post-acceptance change that was in an active state will not be terminated due to non-operation). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 168(f), even if the operation of the 3B operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBc2-B3, the rapid-fire display HB3b will continue to be active after timing tBc2-B3 (even after the 3B operation unit becomes non-operated), for example, until the "one animation display (one post-acceptance change)" that was in an active state has been executed for the predetermined display time (execution time) and is displayed (executed), or for a predetermined period of time from the non-operation state.

Also, as with the rapid-hit display HB3a, if you stop operating the 3B operation unit and put it into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HB3b is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is put into place until the rapid-hit display HB3b is hidden (the time until one post-acceptance change is completed) is not set to a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 3B reception permission state, even if the operation of the 3B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 3B reception permission state continues and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, this will not cause the first post-reception output sound Sα3a, which had been in an output state, to be put into a non-output state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 168(h), even if the operation of the 3B operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBc2-B3, the first post-reception output sound Sα3a will continue to be output after timing tBc2-B3 (even after the 3B operation unit becomes non-operated), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has been executed for the predetermined output time and is finished being output, or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state.

Furthermore, in this example, if operation of the 3B operation unit is interrupted and placed in a non-operated state while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3 (3B event) is being output, the time from the non-operated state until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a is no longer output is set to an indefinite period, rather than being set to a fixed time. This configuration makes it difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which operation of the 3B operation unit is interrupted (placed in a non-operated state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3 (3B event) becomes inaudible, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 3B acceptance state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when attempting to interrupt operation of the 3B operation unit.

Furthermore, in the 3B reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, even if the operation of the 3B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operation state) while the rapid-hit display HB3b and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a are both in an execution state, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB3b is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα3a is made silent are set to be different, as shown in Figures 168(f) and 168(h). In the figure, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB3b is made invisible is set before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα3a is made silent, but the opposite relationship may also be set. Alternatively, due to the aforementioned nature that the time until the display is made invisible or silent is indefinite, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB3b is made invisible may occur both before and after the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα3a is made silent. It is also possible for the timing to be the same for both.

In this configuration, in the 3B reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation of the 3B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the rapid-hit display HB3b and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a are both in an active state, as shown in Figures 168(f) and 168(h), the rapid-hit display HB3b will continue to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a will continue to be output while the 3B operation unit is in a non-operated state. However, as time passes after the 3B operation unit is put into a non-operated state (the time has passed since timing tBc2-B3), the rapid-hit display HB3b, which had been displayed, will disappear, as shown in Figures 168(f) and 169(f), etc. This not only allows the player to easily recognize when the auto-rapid function is disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the state of the status indication JB3 (here, the state JB3b where the presentation content has progressed) that indicates the operating status, such as the ally character YS-B3, enemy character BOSS-B3, and gauge image HP-B3 (see Figure 169 (f)).

Also, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a would normally cease to be output (become inaudible) as time passes since the third B operating unit is placed in a non-operated state (the time passes from timing tBa2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), it is assumed that the 3B operation unit is again put into an operating state at timing tBc2-C1 (the performance situation shown in FIG. 169(g)), which is after timing tBa2-B3 when the 3B operation unit is put into a non-operated state and when the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a is in an audible state (before the output state is ended).

In this example, even if the "3B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tBc2-C1 within the 3B acceptance state, this will trigger a "change after 3B acceptance (post-3B acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 168(f) (the effect situation shown in FIG. 169(g)), just as in the case of timing tBc2-B1 described above.

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "3B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBc2-C1 within the 3B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 168(f), a change after 3B acceptance occurs in which the "post-3B acceptance display (one video display)" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the "3B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that when operation of the 3B operation unit is resumed at timing tBc2-C1 within the 3B reception acceptance state, the presentation content corresponding to that 3B reception acceptance state does not progress from the state shown in FIG. 169(g) (first-stage progression state). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 169(g), the post-3B reception change (post-3B reception display) will begin to be executed in the same state as when the post-3B reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance of the 3B operation unit at timing tBc-B2. The details of this presentation are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in this example, timing tBc2-C1 is assumed to occur while the audible output of the third B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3), which began to be output within the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3, is still continuing.

In this regard, the 3B acceptance state in this example is realized by terminating the "previous post-acceptance change" that is currently in progress, without starting a new post-acceptance change. Therefore, not only at timing tBc2-C1, but even after timing tBc2-C1 arrives, as long as the audible output of the 3B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3) that began output during the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3 has not ended, a new 3B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3) will not be output. That is, in this case, in the 3B reception permitted state according to this example, as shown in FIG. 168(h), after the audible output (predetermined output time for one output) of one 3B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3) that has been audibly output across timings tBc2-B3 has ended, a new 3B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3) corresponding to that operation reception will begin at the timing when the operation to the 3B operation unit was first received. Note that, after the audible output (predetermined output time for one output) of one 3B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3) that has been audibly output across timings tBc2-B3 has ended, there is no need to re-operate the 3B operation unit; the 3B operation unit will be accepted simply by maintaining it in the operating state from timing tBc2-C1.

In addition, with regard to the rapid-hit display HB3, it is also possible for a single post-3B acceptance display that was initiated within the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3 to continue to be displayed at timing tBa2-C1. However, in this case, as with the post-3B acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3), once the single post-3B acceptance display that spans timing tBc2-B3 is made non-display (displayed for a predetermined display time and then non-displayed), a new post-3B acceptance display corresponding to the first operation accepted by the 3B operating unit will begin to be displayed.

Alternatively, when timing tBc2-C1 arrives while at least one of the post-acceptance changes initiated during the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3 is in an executing state, new post-acceptance changes may not be output unless all of those post-acceptance changes are deactivated. If this method is adopted, in the example shown in FIG. 168, a new display of the third-B post-acceptance display will not be initiated until the audible output of the third-B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3) has ended. In other words, in this case, a new display of the third-B post-acceptance display will not be initiated at timing tBc2-C1. Instead, a new display will be initiated at the timing when the first operation is accepted for the third-B operation unit after the audible output of the first third-B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3) that has been audibly output across timing tBc2-B3 has ended.

In addition, the presentation examples shown in Figures 168 and 169 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 3B operation unit) that began at timing tBc2-C1 continues even at timing tBc2-C2, when operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is no longer permitted (when the conditions for operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit are no longer permitted are met), and as a result, the auto-rapid-hit function remains enabled until timing tBc2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBc2-C1 to timing tBc2-C2 (the period during which the 3B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the 3B operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance role operation) will be executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the "period from timing tBc2-C1 to timing tBc2-C2 (the period during which the third B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HB3b and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a) will be the same as in the "period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3" described above (see FIG. 169(e)), as shown in FIG. 169(g), unless further progress in the presentation occurs. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

Here, the 3B acceptance state in this example assumes that no special mode (final mode) appears as a post-acceptance change. Therefore, during the period from timing tBc2-C1 to timing tBc2-C2 in the example shown in Figure 168, the "3B post-acceptance change (3B post-acceptance effect)" in response to operation acceptance will be executed multiple times in a mode in which the effect content progresses only once (see Figure 169 (g)), and when timing tBa2-C2 arrives, this will trigger the disabling of the auto-rapid-tap function that had been enabled up until then.

In this regard, when the auto-rapid tapping function is disabled at timing tBc2-A2 or timing tBc2-B3, post-acceptance changes such as the rapid tapping display HB3 that was previously displayed by the auto-rapid tapping function and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a that was previously output by the auto-rapid tapping function are not terminated midway due to the cessation of operation acceptance. Similarly, when the auto-rapid tapping function is disabled at timing tBc2-C2, as shown in FIG. 168(f) and (h), post-acceptance changes such as the rapid tapping display HB3 that was previously displayed by the auto-rapid tapping function and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a that was previously output by the auto-rapid tapping function are not terminated midway due to the cessation of operation acceptance (they are maintained in their execution state until their remaining execution time is used up).

This configuration makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions under which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is no longer permitted at timing tBc2-C2 have been met (that a situation has arisen in which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is no longer permitted), which is expected to encourage the player to continue to operate the 3B operation unit.

In this regard, the mock image display MG-B3, message display MB3, and situation suggestion display JB3 are not hidden when timing tBc2-C2 arrives, but remain visible even after timing tBc2-C2 arrives and operation acceptance via the 3B operation unit is no longer permitted. This gives the player a sense of anticipation that even after timing tBc2-C2, "there may still be a chance for operation acceptance via the 3B operation unit to result in new changes after acceptance."

In this example, the model image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 begin displaying at timing tBc1, then go into a hidden state at timing tBc3 after timing tBc2-C2 when operation acceptance is no longer permitted. Furthermore, the situation suggestion display JB3 is not hidden even at timing tBc3, but is hidden at an appropriate timing thereafter. However, as mentioned above, the timing at which the model image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 are displayed and hidden may be different, or only one of the model image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 may be displayed as the operation-related display. Furthermore, the situation suggestion display JB3 may be hidden at the same timing as the model image display MG-B3 and message display MB3.

In this example, it is assumed that the player continues operating the "third B operation unit" starting at timing tBc2-C1 even when timing tBc3 arrives, at which the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 are hidden, and even when timing arrives at which the situation suggestion display JB3 is hidden.

In this regard, in the 3B operation acceptance state, after a transition to a "state in which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is not accepted" (after timing tBc2-C2), the conditions for entering a "state in which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is accepted" may be met again (or not) until timing tBc3 arrives, at which the model image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 are hidden (and further, the timing at which the situation suggestion display JB3 is hidden). If the conditions for entering a "state in which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is accepted" are not met again, the auto-tap function will remain disabled from timing tBc2-C2 onwards, and operation-related displays such as the model image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 will be hidden until timing tBc3 arrives.

Whether the conditions for generating a "state in which operation acceptance via the third B operation unit is permitted" are met between timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc3, and the timing at which this state occurs, may be determined, for example, based on operation acceptance during the period from timing tBc2 to timing tBc2-C2, or based on the results of an effect determination performed during the period from timing tBc2-C2 to timing tBc3, or based on the type of pattern change pattern or the results of a jackpot determination. Essentially, there are no limitations on the method for achieving this, as long as the conditions for generating a "state in which operation acceptance via the third B operation unit is permitted" are met between timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc3.

Alternatively, the third B reception acceptance state may be set to occur as a reception acceptance state of a type that re-occurs a "state in which operation acceptance for the third B operation unit is accepted" at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBc2-C2 to timing tBc3.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 168(b), it is assumed that a "state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the third B operation unit" occurs again (when the occurrence conditions are met) at timing tBc2-C3 during the period from timing tBc2-C2 to timing tBc3.

In this regard, at timing tBc3 in this example, as shown in Figures 168(a) and (b) and Figures 169(g), (h), and (i), operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is properly carried out based on detection of the operation state of the "3B operation unit" that has been maintained since timing tBc2-C1, with a period in between when acceptance of operations for the 3B operation unit is not permitted (the period from timing tBc2-C2 to timing tBc2-C3, the situation shown in Figure 169(h)), and as a result, post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of the operation are initiated (the performance situation shown in Figure 169(i)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "third B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" at timing tBc2-C3, as shown in FIG. 168(f) and (h), a post-third B acceptance change occurs in which the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα3 (a sound effect corresponding to one animation display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "third B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is again audibly output, and the "third B post-acceptance display (one animation display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "third B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that even when operation of the 3B operation unit is resumed again at timing tBc2-C3, the effect corresponding to the 3B acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 169(i), the post-3B acceptance change (post-3B acceptance display, post-3B acceptance sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-3B acceptance change was first initiated based on the acceptance of operation of the 3B operation unit at timing tBc2-B2. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, in the 3B operation acceptance state, if the conditions for generating a "state in which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is permitted" are met again between timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc3 when the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 are made invisible (and further, timing when the situation suggestion display JB3 is made invisible), the "state in which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is permitted" may have its termination conditions met (or not met) before timing tBc3 arrives.

Regarding whether the "state in which operation acceptance via the third B operation unit is permitted" that occurs at timing Bc2-C3 after timing tBc2-C2 has its termination conditions met by the time timing tBc3 arrives, and the timing at which this state will end, for example, may be determined based on operation acceptance during the period from timing tBc2 to timing tBc2-C2, or may be determined based on the results of a performance determination performed during the period from timing tBc2-C2 to timing tBc3, or may be determined based on the type of pattern change pattern or the results of a jackpot determination. Essentially, as long as the "state in which operation acceptance via the third B operation unit is permitted" that occurs at timing tBc2-C3 has its termination conditions met by the time timing tBc3 arrives, the method for achieving this is not limited.

Alternatively, the third B reception acceptance state may be set to a type of reception acceptance state that always re-occurs at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBc2-C2 to timing tBc3, resulting in a "state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the third B operation unit," and always ends the "state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the third B operation unit" that has been generated at a predetermined timing within the period up to timing tBc3.

The examples shown in Figures 168 and 169 assume that the "state in which operation acceptance to the third B operation unit is permitted" that began at timing tBc2-C3 continues until timing tBc2-C4, which is before timing tBc3, and the termination conditions are met.

In this regard, at timing tBc2-C4, just as when the auto-rapid tapping function is disabled at timing tBc2-C2 described above, as shown in Figures 168(f) and (h), post-acceptance changes such as the rapid tapping display HB3 that was previously displayed by the auto-rapid tapping function and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a that was previously output by the auto-rapid tapping function are not terminated midway due to the cessation of operation acceptance (these changes are maintained in their execution state until their remaining execution time is exhausted).

This configuration makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions under which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is no longer permitted have been met at timing tBc2-C4 (that a situation has arisen in which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is no longer permitted), which is expected to encourage the player to continue to operate the 3B operation unit.

In this example, after the conditions for disallowing operation of the third B operation unit are met at timings tBc2-C4, the "state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the third B operation unit" will not occur again until timing tBc3 arrives, when the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 are hidden (and further, when the situation suggestion display JB3 is hidden). Therefore, even if the "third B operation unit" remains in an operational state until timing tBc3 (and further, when the situation suggestion display JB3 is hidden), the auto-repeated tapping function will not be enabled, multiple operations will not be accepted, and post-acceptance changes in response to accepted operations will not be performed multiple times during that period (see FIG. 169 (j)).

However, between timing tBc2-C4 and timing tBc3, the condition for "a state in which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is permitted" may be met again (or may not be met). In this case, based on the detection of the operation state of the "3B operation unit" that has been maintained since timing tBc2-C1, with multiple periods in between in which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is not permitted, operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit will once again be performed, and the post-acceptance change (auto-repeated tap function) in response to that operation acceptance will commence.

In the examples shown in Figures 169(h) and (j), a message such as "Miss!!" is displayed when timing tBc2-C2 or timing tBc2-C4 arrives, but it is also possible to have no new message appear when timing tBc2-C2 or timing tBc2-C4 arrives.

Furthermore, in order to optimally maintain the presentation of the 3B acceptance state, if the player does not perform an operation until timing tBc2-C2 (or timing tBc2-C4) arrives, at which point acceptance of operations to the 3B operation unit is no longer permitted, it is desirable that the same post-acceptance changes as when such an operation is performed do not occur (the automatic button function is not enabled).

Furthermore, the 3B reception permission state is not prepared as a "type of reception permission state in which the reception permission state can be terminated early based on the reception of an operation," and the state will not be terminated based on the reception of an operation to the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)."

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "4B reception permission state" as part of the reception permission period (operation permission state). Figure 170 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "4B reception permission state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 4B" as the generation condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 171 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "4B reception permission state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "4B variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the "4B variation pattern." After this, it starts the decorative pattern SZ variation performance (such as a performance depiction according to the 4B variation pattern, or sound output of background music playback according to the 4B variation pattern (such as normal background music playback when not in a reach state)), and within the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "4B variation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 170(b), during the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "4B variable pattern," the arrival of timing tBd2, when the 4B time has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (based on "condition 4B" being satisfied), can trigger the above-mentioned 4B acceptance permitted state (valid period) in which "acceptance of operations to the 4B operation unit regarding changes after 4B acceptance (such as the 4B presentation status suggestion display JB4, the 4B rapid tap display HB4, and the sound output after 4B acceptance Sα4)" is permitted (the situation shown in Figure 171(a)).

Here, in the 4B reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, the "4B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is not the "operation button 410" that is permitted to accept multiple operations in the 1B reception acceptance state and the 2B reception acceptance state, but is set as the "sword ornament 5001" that is permitted to accept multiple operations even in the 3B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 4B reception acceptance state is ended.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example presentation, as shown in Figures 170(b)-(e), when the 4B acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-B4 modeling the object of operation by the player (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 4B operation unit), a message display MB4 related to operations on the object of operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 4B operation unit), and a status indication display JB4 that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period after the operation acceptance is made are displayed at timing tBd1 before the 4B acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the 4B operation unit is accepted). Furthermore, at timing tBd1 in this example, audible output of a 4B operation-related output sound OB4 prompting the player to perform an operation is also initiated. Therefore, during the period from timing tBd1 to tBd2 in this example, operation-related displays such as the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are displayed to prompt the user to accept multiple operations on the sword decorative body 5001, and even though the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 is being audibly output, operations on the sword decorative body 5001 are not determined to be valid operations (operations are not accepted).

As will be described later, the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 in this example, as shown in FIG. 170(g), is audibly output in the form of a "predetermined mode output sound" being reproduced only once, unlike the third B operation-related output sound OB3. However, the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 does not necessarily have to be a "predetermined mode output sound" that is reproduced only once; it is sufficient that it be audibly output as an output sound of a different type from the third B operation-related output sound OB3. Therefore, if the output sound is a different type from the third B operation-related output sound OB3, it may be audibly output using a technique of repeatedly reproducing it.

The mock-up image display MG-B4, message display MB4, situation suggestion display JB4, and fourth-B operation-related output sound OB4 do not necessarily have to appear before the fourth-B reception-permitted state is established; they may be displayed simultaneously with the establishment of the fourth-B reception-permitted state or slightly delayed thereafter. In particular, the situation suggestion display JB4 may not be displayed until the first operation is accepted for the fourth-B operation unit in the fourth-B reception-permitted state; that is, it may be realized as appearing and displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation for the fourth-B operation unit. Furthermore, the timing at which the mock-up image display MG-B4 is displayed, the timing at which the message display MB4 is displayed, and the timing at which the audible output of the fourth-B operation-related output sound OB4 begins may be different from each other. For example, the message display MB4 may be displayed before the mock-up image display MG-B4 is displayed.

Furthermore, with regard to "Condition 4B," which is the condition under which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted when in the 4B acceptance acceptance state, unlike the above-mentioned "Condition 1B" and "Condition 2B," it may be satisfied either before the timing at which an operation-related display (such as a mock-up image or a message display) prompting an operation to accept multiple operations for the 4B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed or the timing at which the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is audibly output arrives, or after the timing at which an operation-related display (such as a mock-up image or a message display) prompting an operation to accept multiple operations for the 4B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed or the timing at which the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is audibly output arrives.

When this configuration is adopted, in the 4B reception acceptance state, there are two cases where reception of operations to the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted before the timing at which an operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) is displayed or the timing at which the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is audibly output (when timing tBd2 shown in FIG. 170 arrives before timing tBd1), and there are also cases where reception of operations to the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted after the timing at which an operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) is displayed or the timing at which the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is audibly output (when timing tBd2 shown in FIG. 170 arrives after timing tBd1), which can be expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension.

However, it is important that the same post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance appears in both cases where an operation is accepted for the 4B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001) in the 4B acceptance state in which timing tBd2 shown in FIG. 170 arrives before timing tBd1, and where an operation is accepted for the 4B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001) in the 4B acceptance state in which timing tBd2 shown in FIG. 170 arrives after timing tBd1. This makes it difficult to recognize the timing at which operation acceptance is accepted, even though there is only one valid period, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In addition, the above-mentioned "Condition 4B," which is the condition under which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted when in the 4B acceptance acceptance state, may be satisfied at the same timing as when an operation-related display (such as a mock-up image or message display) prompting the user to accept multiple operations for the 4B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed, or when the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is audibly output. However, even in this case, it goes without saying that it is important that the same behavior appears as a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance.

Furthermore, when adopting these configurations, the method for setting timing tBd1 and timing tBd2 (condition 4B) may be adopted as appropriate. Examples of implementation are listed below, but these are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other methods are also possible.

For example, if the time elapsed since the start of symbol change is set as "Timing tBd2 (Condition 4B)," multiple elapsed times can be prepared, and one of those elapsed times can be selected by effect judgment (lottery), etc. Alternatively, if the time remaining until the symbol change is completed is set as "Timing tBd2 (Condition 4B)," multiple remaining times can be prepared, and one of those remaining times can be selected by effect judgment (lottery), etc. Alternatively, if Timing tBd2 (Condition 4B) is set during a period when symbol change is not being performed, for example, the time elapsed since symbol change was deactivated or the time elapsed since a jackpot game began can be set as "Timing tBd2 (Condition 4B)," and multiple elapsed times can be prepared, and one of those elapsed times can be selected by effect judgment (lottery), etc. When either of these methods is used, timing tBd1 will occur only at predetermined times.

Also, conversely, a similar configuration can be achieved by making timing tBd1 occur instead of timing tBd2 (condition 4B) using one of the above-mentioned methods for setting timing tBd2 (condition 4B), and making timing tBd2 (condition 4B) occur only at predetermined times.

Alternatively, the conditions for the occurrence of "Timing tBd1" and the conditions for the occurrence of "Timing tBd2" may be drawn by lottery each time with a predetermined probability, so that if the conditions for the occurrence of "Timing tBd1" are met first, then "Timing tBd2" will occur, whereas if the conditions for the occurrence of "Timing tBd2" are met first, then "Timing tBd1" will occur.

In this example, the mock-up display MG-B4, message display MB4, and situation suggestion display JB4 are configured to continue displaying at least until the 4B operation acceptance state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 4B operation unit (this is not a required configuration). In contrast, the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible during the 4B operation acceptance state, but it does not necessarily have to be terminated midway.

Furthermore, the conditions under which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is no longer accepted when in the 4B acceptance acceptance state may be satisfied before timing tBd3 when the operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) prompting the user to accept multiple operations for the 4B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is hidden or before timing tBd3 when the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible, or after timing tBd3 when the operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) prompting the user to accept multiple operations for the 4B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is hidden or before timing tBd3 when the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible.

When this configuration is adopted, in the 4B operation acceptance state, there will be cases where operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted before the timing when the operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) is hidden or the timing when the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible, and there will be cases where operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted after the timing when the operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) is hidden or the timing when the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

However, it is important that the same post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance appears in two cases: when an operation is accepted for the 4B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) in a 4B acceptance state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted before the timing when operation-related displays (such as a model image display or a message display) are hidden or the timing when the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible; and when an operation is accepted for the 4B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) in a 4B acceptance state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted after the timing when operation-related displays (such as a model image display or a message display) are hidden or the timing when the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible. This makes it difficult to recognize the timing when acceptance of operations is not permitted even within a single valid period, which can be expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In addition, the condition under which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is no longer accepted when in this 4B acceptance acceptance state may be met at the same time as when an operation-related display (such as a mock-up image or message display) that prompts the user to accept multiple operations for the 4B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is hidden, or when the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible. However, even in this case, it goes without saying that it is important that the same behavior is displayed as a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance.

Furthermore, when adopting these configurations, the method for setting each of the above timings may be adopted as appropriate. The method for setting the timings before and after these two timings can be set, for example, by following the setting method for the timings before and after the above-mentioned "timing tBd1" and "timing tBd2 (condition 4B)."

Furthermore, in this example, when the 4B operation acceptance state occurs (in this example, at timing tBd2, but it can be slightly later or earlier), the 4B operation promotion light LB4 is illuminated to prompt the player to perform an operation. In this example, the 4B operation promotion light LB4 is illuminated by a light-emitting element on the 4B operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001). However, if the player is prompted to perform an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (for example, a light-emitting element that appears only when acceptance of an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is permitted), the 4B operation promotion light LB4 may be illuminated by a light-emitting element provided in a location other than the 4B operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001). In this case, it goes without saying that a light-emitting element does not necessarily have to be provided on the 4B operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001).

In this example, once the 4B operation prompt light LB4 has started to emit, it will continue to emit light at least until the 4B operation acceptance state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 4B operation unit (this is not a required configuration).

Here, the "Mock Image Display MG-B4" corresponding to the 4B reception acceptance state uses a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)." However, for example, a color scheme determined based on the results of a performance determination or the like may be selectively displayed from among multiple color schemes.

In addition, the "simulated image display MG-B4" corresponding to the 4B acceptance state is such that, when a specified moving image in a portion that resembles the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is considered to be a single periodic change, this periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined 4B period. However, because this 4B period is set to be a longer time (longer cycle) than the 1B period that appears in the 1B acceptance state, in the 4B acceptance state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range more slowly than in the above-mentioned 1B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the 4B operation acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 170(c), (d), and 171(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-B4, a message display (here, message display MB4 displayed as "Attack the goblins! 'Super-rapid' the sword!!") related to operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001) is displayed. The message display displayed in the 4B operation acceptance state (here, message display MB4 displayed as "Attack the goblins! 'Super-rapid' the sword!!") is different in appearance (display content) from the message display displayed in the 3B operation acceptance state (message display MB3 displayed as "Attack the demon! 'rapid' the sword!!").

However, in the 4B reception acceptance state, it is sufficient that an operation-related display is displayed that prompts the user to perform multiple operations on the 4B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001). For example, as long as the operation-related display displays at least one of a mock-up image display and a message display, it is not necessary for both to be executed.

Furthermore, in the 4B reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 170(c) and (d), if no operation is accepted by the 4B operation unit, the mock-up image display and message display continue to be displayed until timing tBd3 arrives, at which point they are hidden. Therefore, while the 4B reception acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock-up image display MG-B4) indicating the remaining time until timing tBd3 arrives, at which point the 4B reception acceptance state will end, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display does not necessarily have to be displayed.

Furthermore, if the "Simulated Image Display MG-B4" corresponding to the 4B acceptance state is started to be displayed before timing tBd2 when the 4B acceptance state occurs, the periodic changes and changes in the gauge image may be started after timing tBd2.

Furthermore, in the 4B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 170(e) and 171(a), the situation suggestion display JB4 corresponding to the 4B acceptance state displays an ally character corresponding to the type of the 4B acceptance state (here, the ally character YS-B4), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 4B acceptance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-B4 depicted as a goblin), and a gauge image HP-B4 showing their remaining HP gauges. In the fourth-B reception acceptance state, the high or low likelihood of a jackpot can be suggested through the effect of "whether or not ally character YS-B4 can defeat enemy character BOSS-B4 by accepting multiple operations on the fourth-B operation unit (whether or not gauge image HP-B4 can be set to 0)." In other words, each time an operation (operation acceptance) is performed on the fourth-B operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001), a presentation can be executed in which "ally character YS-B4" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B4." Note that in this example, the situation suggestion display JB4 displays ally character YS-B4, enemy character BOSS-B4, and gauge image HP-B4, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays; as long as at least one of ally character YS-B4, enemy character BOSS-B4, and gauge image HP-B4 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation situation. Additionally, the ally character YS-B4 may be displayed as a different image than the ally character YS-B1 that appears in the first B acceptance state and the second B acceptance state. Additionally, in the fourth B acceptance state, the situation suggestion display JB4 may not necessarily be displayed.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 170, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBd2-A1 within the 4B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 171 (b)).

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBd2-A1 within the 4B acceptance state, a "change after 4B acceptance (post-4B acceptance performance)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 170(f) and (h) (the performance situation shown in Figure 171(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" at timing tBd2-A1 within the 4B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 170(f) and 170(h), a change after 4B acceptance occurs in which a "4B acceptance post-output sound" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is audibly output, and a "4B acceptance post-display" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" begins to be displayed.

That is, when a single operation is accepted for the "4B operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001)" in the 4B acceptance state, the above-mentioned "display after 4B acceptance" is displayed as a single animated display of "ally character YS-B4" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B4" with a sword technique (such as effects of sword strokes or slashes), as shown in FIG. 171(b). However, as will be described later, in the 4B acceptance state, based on the results of the performance determination made when the operation is accepted, there is a possibility that "enemy character BOSS-B4" will be injured, the strength of the sword technique will increase, or the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-B4 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance determination, etc.). When the effect content has progressed in this way, the state when an operation is subsequently accepted via the 4B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B4" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B4" with a sword technique) will appear as a single animated display that has changed to the advanced effect content (see, for example, FIGS. 170(e) and (f) and 171(e)). Note that, after the effect content has progressed in this way, as long as the 4B acceptance state continues, the degree of progress of the effect content will not be returned to the state before the progress. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again via the 4B operation unit after the end of the single animated display that has changed to the advanced effect content, the state when the operation is accepted via the 4B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B4" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B4" with a sword technique) can appear as a single animated display that has changed to the advanced effect content. As the presentation progresses, it may also be possible to suggest that there is a high probability (expectation) of hitting the jackpot.

However, in the 4B reception allowance state, unlike the 1B reception allowance state and the 2B reception allowance state (reception allowance states in which the effect content has a setting for the effect degree), the effect degree is not set for the effect content as a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance to the 4B operation unit, and instead, each time an operation is accepted to the 4B operation unit, a 4B event (which may be just a display, just a sound, just a light emission, or just a movable body movement) as a post-acceptance change may simply be repeatedly executed (occurred). In this case, it goes without saying that the situation suggestion display JB4 will no longer be displayed.

Furthermore, the 4B reception allowance state differs from the 3B reception allowance state described above in at least one of the following (in this example, all are different): the configuration regarding whether or not operation prompting light is emitted to prompt the player to perform an operation; the mode (type of display) of the operation-related display (e.g., message display); and the mode (type of sound, non-output conditions, etc.) of the operation-related output sound. However, the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the 4B operation unit in the 4B reception allowance state may be the same as the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the 3B operation unit in the 3B reception allowance state described above. Alternatively, the differences between the 4B reception allowance state and the 3B reception allowance state described above may be set to be the same in all other respects: the configuration regarding whether or not operation prompting light is emitted to prompt the player to perform an operation; the mode (type of display) of the operation-related display (e.g., message display); and the mode (type of sound, non-output conditions, etc.) of the operation-related output sound. As mentioned above, it is not necessary to generate multiple changes as post-acceptance changes. In this case, for example, if it is decided that only a 4B specific event (e.g., a sound output after 4B acceptance) is generated as a post-acceptance change when an operation to the 4B operation unit is accepted in the 4B acceptance state (the operation to the 4B operation unit is determined to be valid), then with regard to the post-acceptance change when an operation to the 3B operation unit is accepted in the above-mentioned 3B acceptance state (the operation to the 3B operation unit is determined to be valid), only a 3B specific event (e.g., a sound output after 3B acceptance) will be generated as the same event (same output sound) as the above-mentioned 4B specific event.

In addition, in this example, when a single operation is accepted on the "4B operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" in the 4B acceptance state, in addition to the above-mentioned "4B acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound Sα4 can be output as the above-mentioned "4B acceptance output sound," as shown in FIG. 170(h). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to "the manner in which ally character YS-B4 attacks enemy character BOSS-B4 with a sword technique (such as a sword stroke or slash effect)," which appears as the above-mentioned "4B acceptance display." However, as will be described later, in the 4B acceptance state, unlike the 1B acceptance state and the 2B acceptance state, there is no possibility of an output sound different from the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4 being output as the "4B acceptance output sound." Note that, while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4 is implemented here as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; it simply needs to be a sound that can indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted, and when the auto-repeated function is enabled, it needs to be a sound that can be output as a sound that can indicate that the 4B operating unit is being maintained in an operated state.

However, in the 4B reception allowance state, unlike the 1B reception allowance state and the 2B reception allowance state, a post-reception display may not necessarily be displayed as a post-reception change in response to reception of an operation to the 4B operation unit, and a post-reception output sound may not necessarily be output. For example, in the 4B reception allowance state, a post-reception change in response to reception of an operation to the 4B operation unit may be only a predetermined light emission in a predetermined light-emitting unit, or only a predetermined action of a specific movable body. In short, when an operation is received to the 4B operation unit, it is sufficient that a 4B event (which may be only a display, only a sound, only a light emission, or only an action of a movable body) is executed (occurs) at least multiple times as a post-reception change in response to the operation reception.

In addition, in this example, it is assumed that the timing tBd2-A1 occurs while the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 is in an output state, as shown in Figures 170(g) and (j). However, at timing tBd2-A1, the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 is not made inaudible in response to the acceptance of an operation on the "fourth B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)."

In other words, in this example, the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is not terminated in its audible state in response to the acceptance of an operation (it is output for a predetermined period of time regardless of the acceptance of an operation), regardless of how many operations are accepted for the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" while the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is being audibly output, and regardless of the judgment result (even if the 4B acceptance acceptance state is terminated early).

In this regard, unlike the above-described third B operation-related output sound OB3 (see FIG. 168), the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 in this example is one in which its audible output is not terminated early. In other words, in this case, the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 in this example is always output for a predetermined playback time. However, like the above-described third B operation-related output sound OB3, the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 may also be made inaudible before the predetermined playback time has elapsed based on the satisfaction of a condition other than the receipt of an operation on the fourth B operation unit.

In this way, in the 4B acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted on the "4B operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001)," an image of "ally character YS-B4" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B4" and the associated sound effect are displayed (changes after one acceptance). In other words, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-B4" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-B4" (the presentation progresses), and when HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-B4" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations (changes after multiple acceptances). However, in this case, if HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-B4" cannot be defeated, this suggests low expectations.

However, this presentation content for the 4B reception-permitted state is merely an example, and other content may be substituted for it. For example, as a post-reception change corresponding to the 4B reception-permitted state, as long as there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to operation reception (for example, starting or stopping lamp illumination, or ending the audible output of a sound that is in an output state), it is not necessary to execute a "post-reception display" or "post-reception output sound." Even with this configuration, the player can understand that the operation reception has been carried out appropriately.

This example assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 4B operation unit) initiated at timing tBd2-A1 continues until timing tBd2-A2, as shown in Figure 170(a).

In this regard, the 4B operation acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) in which simply maintaining the operation unit (4B operation unit) in an operation state causes a corresponding post-operation change (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, and a post-operation role action) to be executed multiple times." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 170(a), during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 (the period in which the 4B operation unit is maintained in an operation state), operations are accepted multiple times for the 4B operation unit, and a post-operation change (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, and a post-operation role action) corresponding to that operation is executed multiple times.

As mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted by the 4B operation unit in the 4B acceptance state, the post-4B acceptance display (one animation display) shows ally character YS-B4 attacking enemy character BOSS-B4 with a sword technique (including the effects of the sword stroke and slash), as shown in FIG. 171(b). Therefore, during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, this "one animation display" is first played multiple times.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted by the 4B operation unit in the 4B acceptance acceptance state, the post-4B acceptance output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to "ally character YS-B4 attacking enemy character BOSS-B4 with a sword technique (such as the generation of a sword stroke or slashing effect)," which appears as the "post-4B acceptance display." Therefore, during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, in addition to the "single video display," sound effects corresponding to this "single video display" are played multiple times.

Here, in the 4B acceptance state, when the operation unit (4B operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, such post-acceptance changes (one video display, sound effect (4B post-acceptance output sound), etc.) are executed multiple times, but the execution interval (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). It is desirable to set this "fixed time" to the same time as in the 3B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in this example, in the 4B acceptance state, when the operation unit (4B operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, the ally character YS-B4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B4 with a sword technique (one animation display), and the sound effect (4B post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to that "one animation display" can be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change. In this case, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly initiated in response to the detection (the interval from the start of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of the next post-acceptance change) is always set to a specific time (e.g., 1 second) or less. However, it is desirable to set this interval in the 4B acceptance state to a different length of time than the interval when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled in the above-mentioned 1B acceptance state. For example, it may be set to a time longer than the interval when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled in the above-mentioned 1B acceptance state, but less than a specific time (e.g., 1 second).

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 170, the auto-hit function will start a new "one-shot animation display (one of the post-acceptance changes)" at regular intervals, in which ally character YS-B4 attacks enemy character BOSS-B4 with a sword technique, and this repeated display of "one-shot animation display" is represented in the figure as "hit-on display HB4a."

Similarly, during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 170, the sound effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" (the 4th B post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes) will begin to be output anew at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound effect" is represented in the figure as "first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a."

In this regard, the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 170 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the performance content corresponding to the 4B acceptance acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, the "status suggestion display JB4 (see FIG. 170(e))" that indicates the status of the operation in the 4B acceptance acceptance state will not change or begin execution (in a manner that progresses the performance) as a result of the operation acceptance. Also, this example assumes that the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 will not be terminated midway and will maintain its output state during this period.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 170, the "sword attack" and "slashing effect" shown in FIG. 171 are displayed and the corresponding sound effects are output repeatedly at regular intervals by the auto-rapid tapping function (post-acceptance changes are repeatedly executed at regular intervals) (rapid tapping display HB4a, first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a), but no change occurs in the "situation suggestion display JB4 (see FIG. 170(e))." This makes it possible to confirm the effects that have occurred in response to multiple inputs, as well as any progress that has not been made, simply by maintaining the operating state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Regarding the "situation suggestion display JB4 (see Figure 170(e))," at least one of the ally character YS-B4, enemy character BOSS-B4, and gauge image HP-B4 may be changed in response to the acceptance of an operation. In this case, however, the change must be to a mode different from the "mode when the performance progresses." Furthermore, if the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 (the period during which the 4B operation unit is maintained in an operating state) ends without the performance progressing (when the operation is interrupted), this will trigger a return to the "display mode before the operation." Furthermore, as noted above, the "situation suggestion display JB4 (see Figure 170(e))" of the ally character YS-B4, enemy character BOSS-B4, gauge image HP-B4, etc. may not be displayed until an operation is accepted, and may instead be displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined period of time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2, the "status suggestion display JB4 (see FIG. 170(e))" that indicates the status of the operation in the 4B acceptance state does not change or begin execution as a result of the operation acceptance, so it is possible to effectively indicate that the performance content is not progressing.

However, when the rapid-fire display HB4a is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2), as shown in FIG. 171(b), the rapid-fire display HB4a will repeatedly show "ally character YS-B4 attacking enemy character BOSS-B4 with a sword technique (such as the generation of sword strokes or slashing effects)" at regular intervals. This may make the "situation suggestion display JB4" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of the operation in the 4B acceptance acceptance state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 170 and 171 are designed to assume that the player temporarily suspends operation of the 4B operation unit at timing tBd2-A2 and disables the auto-rapid tapping function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 4B acceptance acceptance state.

Here, in the 4B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 170(f), even if the operation of the 4B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBd2-A2 and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB4a (post-acceptance change) that was in an active state until then will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire display HB1a will continue to be in an active state even after timing tBd2-A2 (even after the 4B operation unit is put into a non-operated state), for example, until the "one-time animation display" that was in an active state has been executed for the predetermined display time and is finished displaying (until one-time post-acceptance change is finished executing).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 4B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB4a, which had been in an active state until then, is not immediately made invisible (the post-acceptance change is not terminated midway through one execution), so it takes time for the operation status in the 4B acceptance state to become easy to recognize. This means that a significant amount of the remaining time in the 4B acceptance state is consumed, and is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily interrupt the operation state of the 4B operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 4B acceptance state.

Also, in this example, if the operation of the 4B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HB4a is displayed, the time from the non-operating state until the rapid-hit display HB4a is put into a non-display state (the time until the one post-acceptance change that was in the middle of execution is completed) is not set to a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 4B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled until the rapid-fire indicator HB4a is hidden and a situation appears in which the operation status in the 4B reception-permitted state becomes easy to recognize. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 4B reception-permitted state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation state of the 4B operation unit in order to more easily check the operation status in the 4B reception-permitted state.

Furthermore, in the 4B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 170(h) and elsewhere, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a, which had been in an active state until then, is not rendered inaudible when the operation of the 4B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBd2-A2 and the auto-repeat function is disabled, just like the rapid-fire display HB4a. In other words, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a will continue to be output even after timing tBd2-A2 (even after the 4B operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an active state has been executed for the predetermined output time and is finished being output (or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state).

With this configuration, even if the operation of the 4B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a, which had been in an active state until then, will not immediately be put into a non-output state. In this case, it will appear as if the auto-repeated tapping function is still active, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation of the 4B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a (4B event) is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-output state of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 4B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a (4B event) is no longer being output, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 4B acceptance-permitted state, which is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation of the 4B operation unit.

Furthermore, in the 4B reception acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 170(g), the 4B operation-related output sound OB4, which had been in an active state until then, is not made inaudible when the operation state of the 4B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBd2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated function.

Furthermore, in the 4B reception permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 4B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operating state) while the rapid-hit display HB4a and the first post-reception output sound Sα4a are both in an executing state, as shown in Figures 170(f) and 170(h), etc., a situation will appear in which the rapid-hit display HB4a continues to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound SB4a continues to be output while the 4B operation unit is put into a non-operating state. However, as time passes after the 4B operation unit is put into a non-operating state, the rapid-hit display HB4a, which had been displayed, will be made invisible and the first post-reception output sound Sα4a will be made non-output, as shown in Figures 170(f) and 170(h) and 171(c), etc. This not only allows the player to easily recognize when the auto-rapid function is disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the status of the status indication JB4 (here, status JB4a) that indicates the operating status, such as the ally character YS-B4, enemy character BOSS-B4, and gauge image HP-B4 (see Figure 171 (c)).

However, as mentioned above, in the example shown in Figure 170, the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto rapid-fire function and multiple post-acceptance changes are executed, the effect content corresponding to the 4B acceptance-permitted state does not progress. Note that the 4B acceptance-permitted state does not necessarily have to be generated as an acceptance-permitted state in which the effect content may progress; for example, it may be generated as an acceptance-permitted state in which only one mode of post-acceptance change is executed multiple times.

Thus, in the situation shown in Figure 171(c), although the appearance of the status suggestion display JB4 (here, appearance JB4a) that suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B4, enemy character BOSS-B4, and gauge image HP-B4, can be easily recognized, these appearances are the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 171(a)), which suggests that the performance content has not progressed. Note that the appearance of the status suggestion display JB4 that suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B4, enemy character BOSS-B4, and gauge image HP-B4, does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 171(a)), as long as it can suggest that the performance content has not progressed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 170(a), it is assumed that the "4B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state at timing tBd2-B1 within the 4B reception acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 171(d)).

In this example, if the "4B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tBd2-B1 within the 4B acceptance state, this will trigger a "change after 4B acceptance (post-4B acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 170(f) (the effect situation shown in FIG. 171(d)).

In this example, it is assumed that the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 is output for the playback time prior to timing tBd2-B1 and then made inaudible. Furthermore, like the third B operation-related output sound OB3 described above, the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 is not affected by the status of operation acceptance for the fourth B operation unit. Therefore, even if timing tBd2-B1 arrives while the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 is in an audible state, the acceptance of operation at timing tBd2-B1 will not terminate the audible output state.

Furthermore, unlike the above-described third B operation-related output sound OB3, the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 in this example is configured so that its audible output will not be terminated early due to conditions other than the acceptance of an operation, at least as long as the game is progressing properly (this is not a required configuration). As described above, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is configured so that its audible output may be terminated early due to conditions other than the acceptance of an operation, even when the game is progressing properly.

In this example, if an operation is accepted for the "4B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001)" at timing tBd2-B1 within the 4B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 170(f) and 170(h), a change occurs after 4B acceptance, in which the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα4 (a sound effect corresponding to one animation display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "4B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001)" is again audibly output, and the "4B post-acceptance display (one animation display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "4B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that even when operation of the 4B operation unit is resumed at timing tBd2-B1 within the 4B reception acceptance state, the effect corresponding to that 4B reception acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 171(d), the post-4B reception change (post-4B reception display, post-4B reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-4B reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance of the 4B operation unit at timing tBd2-A1. The details of the effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 170 and 171 are based on the assumption that the player's operation (operation state of the 4B operation unit) initiated at timing tBd2-B1 will be maintained until timing tBd2-B3, activating the auto-rapid-hit function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3 (the period during which the 4B operation unit is again maintained in the operating state), operations to the 4B operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance role operation) will be executed multiple times.

And even during this "period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3 (the period during which the 4B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HB4a and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a) is the same as in the "period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2" described above (see Figure 171 (b)), unless the presentation content progresses. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 170, the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3 is assumed to be a case in which, of the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the operation accepted at timing tBd2-B2 within that period has led to the progression of the performance content corresponding to the 4B acceptance acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 171 (e)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 170, the "change after acceptance of 4th B (effect after acceptance of 4th B)" in response to operation acceptance is executed in a manner in which the effect content has not progressed during the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B2, whereas during the period from timing tBd2-B2 to timing tBd2-B3, the "change after acceptance of 4th B (effect after acceptance of 4th B)" in response to operation acceptance is executed in a manner in which the effect content has progressed.

More specifically, at "timing tBd2-B2," the timing at which the presentation progresses during the period from timing tBd2-B2 to timing tBd2-B3, a display change is executed based on the operation received from the fourth B operation unit, changing the state of the status indication display JB4, which indicates the operation status, from the previously displayed "state JB4a" to a different "state JB4b," as shown in Figures 170(e) and 171(e). Here, as shown in Figure 171(e), the enemy character BOSS-B4 changes to an injured state, the sword technique performed by ally character YS-B4 changes to an increased strength state, and the gauge image HP-B4 changes to an state in which the remaining HP gauge is reduced. With this configuration, the change in the state of the situation suggestion display JB4 indicates that the performance corresponding to the 4B reception permission state has progressed due to (the result of performance determination based on) the operation reception (by the auto-hit function) performed at timing tBd2-B2.

After the performance has progressed in this way, when one operation is received from the 4B operation unit, the "one animation display" will be displayed as the "display after 4B reception" in a manner that has progressed in the performance, such as "ally character YS-B4 uses a sword technique with increased strength to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-B4," as shown in FIG. 171(e).

In this example, once the presentation progresses, the progress of the presentation will not be returned to the state before the progress was made, as long as the 4B acceptance state continues. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted again at the 4B operation unit after the completion of one video display that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced presentation content, the state when the operation was accepted at the 4B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B4" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B4" with a sword technique) will appear as one video display that has changed to the advanced presentation content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tBd2-B2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, this "single video display" in which such a change in appearance has occurred will be played multiple times by the auto-hit function.

Furthermore, even in the period after timing tBd2-B2 when the performance has progressed, the mode (one animation display) in which ally character YS-B4 attacks enemy character BOSS-B4 with a sword technique is executed anew at regular intervals (predetermined intervals (same time as before the change)) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one animation display" of the performance when the performance has progressed is also executed anew at regular intervals by the auto-rapid tapping function, and the repeated display (multiple post-acceptance changes) of this "one animation display (one post-acceptance change)" of the progression mode is represented in the diagram as "rapid tapping display HB4b."

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tBd2-B2," the timing at which the effect content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 170(e), (f) and 171(d), (e), the state of the situation suggestion display JB4 changes from "state JB4a" to "state JB4b," and the state of the rapid-hit display HB4 also changes from "state HB4a" to "state HB4b." From this point on, while the auto rapid-hit function is enabled (timing tBd2-B2 to tBd2-B3), the situation suggestion display JB4 is displayed in "state JB4b," while the rapid-hit display HB4 is executed in "state HB4b."

In this example, the state of the rapid-fire display HB4 changes depending on the progress of the presentation, but it may not change depending on the progress of the presentation. In other words, even if the rapid-fire display HB4 continues to be displayed in one state regardless of the progress of the presentation, the player can confirm through the rapid-fire display HB4 that the auto rapid-fire function is enabled and the number (frequency) of operations being accepted, and can also confirm the progress of the presentation through the state of the status suggestion display JB4. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the fourth B acceptance allowance state, unlike the first B acceptance allowance state and the second B acceptance allowance state, may be realized as a type of acceptance allowance state in which progress in the presentation itself is not possible. In this case, it goes without saying that the status suggestion display will not be displayed, and post-acceptance changes will be executed multiple times in only one state.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a single operation is accepted on the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 4B acceptance state, in addition to the "4B acceptance display," the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," as shown in FIG. 170(h), can be output as the "4B acceptance output sound." However, as mentioned above, as shown in FIG. 170(i), in the 4B acceptance state, the second post-acceptance output sound is not output as the "4B acceptance output sound."

Furthermore, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4 in this example is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance content advances. Therefore, when timing tBd2-B2 arrives, when the performance content advances, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation acceptance, but in the same manner as when the operation was accepted before timing tBd2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not the performance advances at timing tBd2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound Sα4) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will be newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound effect" will be represented in the figure as "first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a during this period is the same as in the "period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2" described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a is not changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content, but it may be changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HB4b is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tBd2-B2 to timing tBd2-B3), as shown in FIG. 171(e), the rapid-fire display HB4b will repeatedly show "ally character YS-B4 attacking injured enemy character BOSS-B4 with a powerful sword technique (such as the generation of sword strokes or slashing effects)" at regular intervals. This may make the "situation suggestion display JB4" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the 4B acceptance acceptance state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 170 and 171 are designed to assume that the player again interrupts operation of the 4B operation unit at timing tBd2-B3 and disables the auto-rapid tapping function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 4B acceptance acceptance state.

As described above, in the 4B reception permission state, even if the operation of the 4B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 4B reception permission state is continuing and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB4, which was in an active state until then, will not be hidden (a post-acceptance change that was in an active state will not be terminated prematurely due to non-operation). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170(f), even if the operation of the 4B operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBd2-B3, the rapid-fire display HB4b will continue to be active after timing tBd2-B3 (even after the 4B operation unit becomes non-operated), for example, until the "one animation display (one post-acceptance change)" that was in an active state has been executed for the predetermined display time (execution time) and is displayed (executed), or for a predetermined period of time from the non-operation state.

Also, as with the rapid-hit display HB4a, if you stop operating the 4B operation unit and put it into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HB4b is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the rapid-hit display HB4b is hidden (the time until one post-acceptance change is completed) is not set to a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 4B reception acceptance state, even if the operation of the 4B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 4B reception acceptance state continues and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, this will not cause the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a, which had been in an output state until then, to be put into a non-output state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170(h), even if the operation of the 4B operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBd2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a will continue to be output from timing tBd2-B3 onwards (even after the 4B operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has been executed for the predetermined output time and is finished being output, or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state.

Furthermore, in this example, if operation of the 4B operation unit is interrupted and placed in a non-operated state while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4 (4B event) is being output, the time from the non-operated state until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a is no longer output is set to an indefinite period, rather than being set to a fixed time. This configuration makes it difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which operation of the 4B operation unit is interrupted (placed in a non-operated state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4 (4B event) becomes inaudible, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 4B acceptance-permitted state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when attempting to interrupt operation of the 4B operation unit.

In addition, in the 4B reception permission state according to this embodiment, even if the operation of the 4B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operation state) while the rapid-hit display HB4b and the first post-reception output sound Sα4a are both in an execution state, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB4b is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα4a is made silent are set to be different, as shown in Figures 170(f) and 170(h). In the figure, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB4b is made invisible is set before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα4a is made silent, but the opposite relationship may also be set. Alternatively, due to the aforementioned nature that the time until the display is made invisible or silent is indefinite, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB4b is made invisible may occur both before and after the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα4a is made silent. It is also possible for the timing to be the same for both.

In this configuration, in the 4B reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the 4B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the rapid-hit display HB4b and the first post-reception output sound Sα4a are both in an active state, as shown in Figures 170(f) and 171(h), the rapid-hit display HB4b will continue to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound Sα4a will continue to be output while the 4B operation unit is in a non-operated state. However, as time passes after the 4B operation unit is put into a non-operated state (the time has passed since timing tBd2-B3), the rapid-hit display HB4b, which had been displayed, will disappear, as shown in Figures 170(f) and 171(f), etc. This not only allows the player to easily recognize when the auto-hit function is disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the state of the status indication JB4 (here, the state JB4b where the presentation content has progressed) that indicates the operating status, such as the ally character YS-B3, enemy character BOSS-B4, and gauge image HP-B4 (see Figure 171 (f)).

Also, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a would normally cease to be output (become inaudible) as time passes since the 4B operation unit is placed in a non-operated state (the time has passed since timing tBa2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 170(a), it is assumed that the 4B operation unit is again put into an operating state at timing tBd2-C1 (the performance situation shown in FIG. 171(g)), which is after timing tBa2-B3 when the 4B operation unit is put into a non-operated state and when the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a is in an audible state (before the output state is ended).

In this example, even if the "4B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tBd2-C1 within the 4B acceptance state, this will again trigger a "4B post-acceptance change (4B post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 170(f) (the effect situation shown in FIG. 171(g)), just as in the case of timing tBd2-B1 described above.

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "4B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBd2-C1 within the 4B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 170(f), a change after 4B acceptance occurs in which the "post-4B acceptance display (one video display)" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the "4B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that when operation of the 4B operation unit is resumed at timing tBd2-C1 within the 4B reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 4B reception acceptance state does not progress from the state shown in FIG. 171(g) (first-stage progression state). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 171(g), the post-4B reception change (post-4B reception display) will begin execution in the same state as when the post-4B reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance of the 4B operation unit at timing tBd-B2. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in this example, timing tBd2-C1 is assumed to occur while the audible output of the fourth B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα4), which began to be output within the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3, is still continuing.

In this regard, the 4B acceptance state in this example is realized by terminating the "previous post-acceptance change" that is currently in progress, without starting a new post-acceptance change. Therefore, not only at timing tBd2-C1, but even after timing tBd2-C1 arrives, as long as the audible output of the 4B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα4) that began output during the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3 has not ended, a new 4B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα4) will not begin to be output. That is, in this case, in the 4B reception permitted state according to this example, as shown in FIG. 170(h), after the audible output (for one predetermined output time) of one 4B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα4) that has been audibly output across timings tBd2-B3 has ended, a new 4B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα4) corresponding to that operation reception will begin at the timing when the operation to the 4B operation unit is first received. Note that, after the audible output (for one predetermined output time) of one 4B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα4) that has been audibly output across timings tBd2-B3 has ended, there is no need to re-operate the 4B operation unit; the 4B operation unit will be accepted simply by maintaining it in the operating state from timing tBd2-C1.

In addition, with regard to the rapid-hit display HB4, a single 4B post-acceptance display that was initiated within the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3 may continue to be displayed at timing tBa2-C1. However, in this case, as with the 4B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα4), after a single 4B post-acceptance display that spans timing tBd2-B3 is hidden (displayed for a predetermined display time and then hidden), a new 4B post-acceptance display corresponding to the first operation received on the 4B operation unit will begin to be displayed.

Alternatively, when timing tBd2-C1 arrives while at least one of the post-acceptance changes initiated during the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3 is in an executing state, new post-acceptance changes may not be output unless all of those post-acceptance changes are deactivated. If this method is adopted, in the example shown in FIG. 170, a new 4B post-acceptance display will not be displayed until the audible output of the 4B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα4) has ended. In other words, in this case, a new 4B post-acceptance display will not be displayed at timing tBd2-C1. Instead, a new display will be displayed at the timing when the first operation is accepted for the 4B operation unit after the audible output of the 4B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα4), which has been audibly output across timing tBd2-B3, has ended.

In addition, the presentation examples shown in Figures 170 and 171 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 4B operation unit) that began at timing tBd2-C1 continues even at timing tBd2-C2, when operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is no longer permitted (when the conditions for operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit are no longer permitted are met), and as a result, the auto-rapid-hit function remains active until timing tBd2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBd2-C1 to timing tBd2-C2 (the period during which the 4B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the 4B operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance role operation) will be executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the "period from timing tBd2-C1 to timing tBd2-C2 (the period during which the 4B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HB4b and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a) will be the same as in the "period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3" described above (see FIG. 171(e)), as shown in FIG. 171(g), unless further progress in the presentation occurs. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

Here, the 4B acceptance state in this example assumes that no special mode (final mode) appears as a post-acceptance change. Therefore, during the period from timing tBd2-C1 to timing tBd2-C2 in the example shown in Figure 170, the "4B post-acceptance change (4B post-acceptance effect)" in response to operation acceptance will be executed multiple times in a mode in which the effect content progresses only once (see Figure 171 (g)), and when timing tBa2-C2 arrives, this will trigger the disabling of the auto-rapid-tap function that had been enabled up until then.

In this regard, when the auto-rapid tapping function is disabled at timing tBd2-A2 or timing tBd2-B3, post-acceptance changes such as the rapid tapping display HB4 that was previously displayed by the auto-rapid tapping function and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a that was previously output by the auto-rapid tapping function are not terminated midway due to the cessation of operation acceptance. Similarly, when the auto-rapid tapping function is disabled at timing tBd2-C2, as shown in FIG. 170(f) and (h), post-acceptance changes such as the rapid tapping display HB4 that was previously displayed by the auto-rapid tapping function and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a that was previously output by the auto-rapid tapping function are not terminated midway due to the cessation of operation acceptance (they are maintained in their execution state until their remaining execution time is used up).

This configuration makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions under which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is no longer permitted have been met at timing tBd2-C2 (that a situation has arisen in which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is no longer permitted), which is expected to encourage the player to continue to operate the 4B operation unit.

In this regard, the mock image display MG-B4, message display MB4, and situation suggestion display JB4 are not hidden when timing tBd2-C2 arrives, but remain visible even after timing tBd2-C2 arrives and operation acceptance via the 4B operation unit is no longer permitted. This gives the player a sense of anticipation that even after timing tBd2-C2, there may still be a chance for operation acceptance via the 4B operation unit to result in a new change.

In this example, the model image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 begin displaying at timing tBd1, then go into a hidden state at timing tBd3 after timing tBd2-C2 when operation acceptance is no longer permitted. Furthermore, the situation suggestion display JB4 is not hidden even at timing tBd3, but is hidden at an appropriate timing thereafter. However, as mentioned above, the timing at which the model image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are displayed and hidden may be different, or only one of the model image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 may be displayed as the operation-related display. Furthermore, the situation suggestion display JB4 may be hidden at the same timing as the model image display MG-B4 and message display MB4.

In this example, it is assumed that the player continues operating the "fourth B operation unit" starting at timing tBd2-C1 until timing tBd3 arrives, when the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are hidden, and even until timing arrives when the situation suggestion display JB4 is hidden.

In this regard, in the 4B operation acceptance state, after a transition to a "state in which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is not accepted" (after timing tBd2-C2), the conditions for entering a "state in which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is accepted" may be met again (or not) between timing tBd3, when the model image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are hidden (and timing when the situation suggestion display JB4 is hidden). If the conditions for entering a "state in which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is accepted" are not met again, the auto-tap function will remain disabled after timing tBd2-C2, and operation-related displays such as the model image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 will be hidden until timing tBd3 arrives.

Whether the conditions for generating a "state in which operation acceptance via the 4th B operation unit is permitted" are met between timing tBd2-C2 and timing tBd3, and the timing at which this state occurs, may be determined, for example, based on operation acceptance during the period from timing tBd2 to timing tBd2-C2, or based on the results of an effect determination performed during the period from timing tBd2-C2 to timing tBd3, or based on the type of pattern change pattern or the result of a jackpot determination. Essentially, there are no limitations on the method for achieving this, as long as the conditions for generating a "state in which operation acceptance via the 4th B operation unit is permitted" are met between timing tBd2-C2 and timing tBd3.

Alternatively, the fourth B reception acceptance state may be set to occur as a reception acceptance state of a type that re-occurs a "state in which operation acceptance for the fourth B operation unit is accepted" at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBd2-C2 to timing tBd3.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 170(b), it is assumed that a "state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the 4th B operation unit" occurs again (when the occurrence conditions are met) at timing tBd2-C3 during the period from timing tBd2-C2 to timing tBd3.

In this regard, at timing tBd3 in this example, as shown in Figures 170(a) and (b) and 171(g), (h), and (i), operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is properly carried out based on detection of the operation state of the "4B operation unit" that has been maintained since timing tBd2-C1, with a period in between when acceptance of operations for the 4B operation unit is not permitted (the period from timing tBd2-C2 to timing tBd2-C3, the situation shown in Figure 171(h)), and as a result, post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of the operation are initiated (the performance situation shown in Figure 171(i)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "fourth B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" at timing tBd2-C3, as shown in Figures 170(f) and 170(h), a change after 4B acceptance occurs in which the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα4 (a sound effect corresponding to one animation display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "fourth B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is again audibly output, and the "fourth B post-acceptance display (one animation display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "fourth B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that even when operation of the 4B operation unit is resumed again at timing tBd2-C3, the effect corresponding to the 4B acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 171(i), the post-4B acceptance change (post-4B acceptance display, post-4B acceptance sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-4B acceptance change was first initiated based on the acceptance of operation of the 4B operation unit at timing tBd2-B2. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, in the 4B operation acceptance state, if the conditions for the "state in which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is permitted" to occur are met again after timing tBd2-C3 and before timing tBd3 arrives at which the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are made invisible (and further, the timing at which the situation suggestion display JB4 is made invisible), the "state in which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is permitted" may have its termination conditions met (or may not be met) before timing tBd3 arrives.

Regarding whether the "state in which operation acceptance via the 4B operation unit is permitted" that occurs at timing tBd2-C3 after timing tBd2-C2 has its termination conditions met by the time timing tBd3 arrives, and the timing at which this state ends, for example, may be determined based on operation acceptance during the period from timing tBd2 to timing tBd2-C2, or may be determined based on the results of a performance determination performed during the period from timing tBd2-C2 to timing tBd3, or may be determined based on the type of pattern change pattern or the results of a jackpot determination. Essentially, as long as the "state in which operation acceptance via the 4B operation unit is permitted" that occurs at timing tBd2-C3 has its termination conditions met by the time timing tBd3 arrives, the method for achieving this is not limited.

Alternatively, the fourth B reception acceptance state may be generated as a type of reception acceptance state that always re-occurs a "state in which operation acceptance for the fourth B operation unit is permitted" at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBd2-C2 to timing tBd3, and always ends the generated "state in which operation acceptance for the fourth B operation unit is permitted" at a predetermined timing within the period up to timing tBd3.

The examples shown in Figures 170 and 171 assume that the "state in which operation acceptance to the 4th B operation unit is permitted" that began at timing tBd2-C3 continues until timing tBd2-C4, which is before timing tBd3, and the termination conditions are met.

In this regard, at timing tBd2-C4, just as when the auto-rapid tapping function is disabled at timing tBd2-C2 described above, as shown in Figures 170(f) and (h), post-acceptance changes such as the rapid tapping display HB4 that was previously displayed by the auto-rapid tapping function and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a that was previously output by the auto-rapid tapping function are not terminated midway due to the cessation of operation acceptance (they are maintained in their execution state until their remaining execution time is used up).

This configuration makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions under which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is no longer permitted at timing tBd2-C4 have been met (that a situation has arisen in which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is no longer permitted), which is expected to encourage the player to continue operating the 4B operation unit.

In this example, when timing tBa2-C4 arrives, the 4B operation prompt light LB4, which prompts the player to perform an operation, is turned off. That is, the 4B operation prompt light LB4 is enabled to emit light when operation-related displays such as the image display MG-B4 and the message display MB4 are displayed (the 4B operation acceptance state), and its illumination stops when this state ends. This indicates that operation acceptance has been accepted or rejected. However, the 4B operation prompt light LB4 may be turned off at the same time that operation-related displays such as the image display MG-B4 and the message display MB4 are hidden, or it may be turned off after operation-related displays such as the image display MG-B4 and the message display MB4 are hidden. Additionally, the fourth B operation prompt light LB4 may be set to begin emitting light at the same time that an operation-related display such as image display MG-B4 or message display MB4 begins to be displayed, or may be set to begin emitting light before an operation-related display such as image display MG-B4 or message display MB4 begins to be displayed.

In this example, after the conditions for disallowing operation of the 4B operation unit are met at timing tBd2-C4, the "state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the 4B operation unit" will not occur again until timing tBd3 arrives, when the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are hidden (and further, when the situation suggestion display JB4 is hidden). Therefore, even if the "4B operation unit" remains in an operational state until timing tBd3 (and further, when the situation suggestion display JB4 is hidden), the auto-tap function will not be enabled, multiple operations will not be accepted, and post-acceptance changes in response to accepted operations will not be performed multiple times during that period (see FIG. 171 (j)).

However, between timing tBd2-C4 and timing tBd3, the condition for "a state in which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is permitted" may be satisfied again (or may not be satisfied). In this case, based on the detection of the operation state of the "4B operation unit" that has been maintained since timing tBd2-C1, with multiple periods in between in which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is not permitted, operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit will once again be performed, and a post-acceptance change (auto-repeated tap function) in response to that operation acceptance will commence.

In the examples shown in Figures 171(h) and (j), a message such as "Miss!!" is displayed when timing tBd2-C2 or timing tBd2-C4 arrives, but it is also possible to have no new message appear when timing tBd2-C2 or timing tBd2-C4 arrives.

Furthermore, in order to optimally maintain the presentation of the 4B acceptance state, if the player does not perform an operation until timing tBd2-C2 (or timing tBd2-C4) arrives, at which point acceptance of operations to the 4B operation unit is no longer permitted, it is desirable that the same post-acceptance changes that occur when such an operation is performed do not occur (the automatic button function is not enabled).

Furthermore, the 4B reception permission state is not prepared as a "type of reception permission state in which the reception permission state can be terminated early based on the reception of an operation," and the state will not be terminated based on the reception of an operation to the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)."

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "5B reception permission state" as part of the reception permission period (operation permission state). Figure 172 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "5B reception permission state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 5B" as the generation condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 173 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation content when the "5B reception permission state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "5B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the "5B fluctuation pattern." After this, it starts the decorative symbol SZ fluctuation performance (such as a performance depiction according to the 5B fluctuation pattern, or sound output of background music playback according to the 5B fluctuation pattern (such as normal background music playback when not in a reach)), and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "5B fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 172 (b), during the execution period of the variable presentation related to the "5B variable pattern," based on the arrival of timing tBe2, when the 5B time has elapsed since the decorative pattern SZ variable presentation began (based on "condition 5B" being satisfied), the above-mentioned 5B acceptance permitted state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in Figure 173 (a)), in which "acceptance of operations to the 5B operation unit regarding changes after 5B acceptance (such as the 5B presentation status suggestion display JB5, the 5B rapid tap display HB5, and the sound output after 5B acceptance Sα5)" is permitted.

Here, in the 5B reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, the "5B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is not the "operation button 410" that is permitted to accept multiple operations in the 1B reception acceptance state and the 2B reception acceptance state, but is set as the "sword ornament 5001" that is permitted to accept multiple operations even in the 3B reception acceptance state and the 4B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 5B reception acceptance state is ended.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, as shown in Figures 172(b) to (e), when the 5B reception acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-B5 that imitates the object operated by the player (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 5B operation unit), a message display MB5 related to the operation on the object operated by the player (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 5B operation unit), and a status suggestion display JB5 that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period after the operation acceptance is made are displayed at timing tBe1 before the 5B reception acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the 5B operation unit is accepted).

However, the 5B reception allowance state in this example is the same as the 3B reception allowance state and the 4B reception allowance state in that operation-related displays (such as the model image display MG-B5 and message display MB5) that prompt the player to perform an operation are displayed, but it differs from the 3B reception allowance state and the 4B reception allowance state in that no operation-related output sound is output to prompt the player to perform an operation. Therefore, during the period from timing tBe1 to tBe2 in this example, operation-related displays such as the model image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 that prompt the player to perform multiple operations on the sword decorative element 5001 are displayed, and no operation-related output sound is audibly output, and under these conditions, operations on the sword decorative element 5001 are not determined to be valid operations (operations are not accepted).

The model image display MG-B5, message display MB5, and situation suggestion display JB5 do not necessarily have to appear before the 5B reception acceptance state occurs; they may be displayed simultaneously with the 5B reception acceptance state or slightly after its occurrence. In particular, the situation suggestion display JB5 may not be displayed until the first operation is accepted via the 5B operation unit in the 5B reception acceptance state; that is, it may be realized as appearing and displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation via the 5B operation unit. Furthermore, the timing at which the model image display MG-B5 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MB5 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MB5 may be displayed before the model image display MG-B5 is displayed.

Furthermore, with regard to "Condition 5B," which is the condition under which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted when in the 5B acceptance acceptance state, unlike the above-mentioned "Condition 1B" and "Condition 2B," it may be satisfied either before the timing arrives for the display of an operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) that prompts the user to accept multiple operations for the 5B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001), or after the timing arrives for the display of an operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) that prompts the user to accept multiple operations for the 5B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001).

When this configuration is adopted, in the 5B reception acceptance state, there are cases where reception of operations to the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted before the timing arrives for the display of an operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) (when timing tBe2 shown in FIG. 172 arrives before timing tBe1), and cases where reception of operations to the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted after the timing arrives for the display of an operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) (when timing tBe2 shown in FIG. 172 arrives after timing tBe1), which can be expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

However, it is important that the same post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance appears in both cases where an operation is accepted for the 5B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001) in the 5B acceptance state in which timing tBe2 shown in FIG. 172 arrives before timing tBe1, and where an operation is accepted for the 5B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001) in the 5B acceptance state in which timing tBe2 shown in FIG. 172 arrives after timing tBe1. This makes it difficult to recognize the timing at which operation acceptance is accepted, even though there is only one valid period, and is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In addition, the above-mentioned "Condition 5B," which is the condition under which operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted when in the 5B acceptance acceptance state, may be satisfied at the same time as the timing when an operation-related display (such as a mock-up image or message display) is displayed to prompt the user to accept multiple operations for the 5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001). However, even in this case, it goes without saying that it is important that the same behavior appears as a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance.

Furthermore, when adopting these configurations, the method for setting timing tBe1 and timing tBe2 (condition 5B) may be adopted as appropriate. Examples of implementation are listed below, but these are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other methods are also possible.

For example, if the time elapsed since the start of symbol change is set as "Timing tBe2 (Condition 5B)," multiple elapsed times can be prepared, and one of those elapsed times can be selected by effect judgment (lottery), etc. Alternatively, if the time remaining until the symbol change is completed is set as "Timing tBe2 (Condition 5B)," multiple remaining times can be prepared, and one of those remaining times can be selected by effect judgment (lottery), etc. Alternatively, if Timing tBe2 (Condition 5B) is set during a period when symbol change is not being performed, for example, the time elapsed since symbol change was deactivated or the time elapsed since a jackpot game began can be set as "Timing tBe2 (Condition 5B)," and multiple elapsed times can be prepared, and one of those elapsed times can be selected by effect judgment (lottery), etc. When either of these methods is used, timing tBe1 will occur only at predetermined times.

Also, conversely, a similar configuration can be achieved by making timing tBe1 occur instead of timing tBe2 (condition 5B) using one of the above-mentioned methods for setting timing tBe2 (condition 5B), and making timing tBe2 (condition 5B) occur only at predetermined times.

Alternatively, the conditions for "timing tBe1" and "timing tBe2" may be determined by lottery each time with a predetermined probability, so that if the condition for "timing tBe1" is met first, then "timing tBe2" will occur, whereas if the condition for "timing tBe2" is met first, then "timing tBe1" will occur.

In this example, the mock image display MG-B5, message display MB5, and situation suggestion display JB5 will continue to be displayed at least until the 5B reception acceptance state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 5B operation unit (this is not a required configuration).

Furthermore, the conditions under which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is no longer accepted when in the 5B acceptance acceptance state may be satisfied either before timing tBe3 at which an operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) prompting the user to accept multiple operations for the 5B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is hidden, or after timing tBe3 at which an operation-related display (such as a model image display or a message display) prompting the user to accept multiple operations for the 5B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is hidden.

When this configuration is adopted, in the 5B acceptance state, there will be cases where acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 will not be permitted before the timing at which operation-related displays (such as model image displays and message displays) are hidden, and cases where acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 will not be permitted after the timing at which operation-related displays (such as model image displays and message displays) are hidden, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

However, it is important that the same post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance appears in both cases: when an operation is accepted for the 5B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) in the 5B acceptance state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted before the timing at which operation-related displays (such as a model image display or a message display) are hidden; and when an operation is accepted for the 5B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) in the 5B acceptance state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted after the timing at which operation-related displays (such as a model image display or a message display) are hidden. This makes it difficult to recognize the timing at which acceptance of operations is not permitted even though there is only one valid period, which can be expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, the condition under which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is no longer permitted when in this 5B acceptance acceptance state may be met at the same time as the operation-related display (such as a mock-up image or message display) that prompts the user to accept multiple operations for the 5B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is hidden. However, even in this case, it goes without saying that it is important that the same behavior appears as a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance.

Furthermore, when adopting these configurations, the method for setting each of the above timings may be adopted as appropriate. The method for setting the timings before and after these two timings can be set, for example, by following the setting method for the timings before and after the above-mentioned "timing tBe1" and "timing tBe2 (condition 5B)."

Here, in the 5B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 172(b) and (j), when this occurs (in this example, at timing tBe2, but it can be slightly later or later), the operation prompting light to encourage the player to operate the device is not emitted. In this case, it goes without saying that the 5B operation unit (sword decoration 5001) does not necessarily have to be equipped with a light emitting unit.

With this configuration, unlike the 1B reception allowed state, 2B reception allowed state, and 4B reception allowed state, operation-related displays (such as mockups and messages) are displayed, but operation-prompting light is not emitted. In other words, in this case, compared to when operation-prompting light is emitted, it is relatively difficult to recognize that operation reception is permitted, so it is expected that a sense of tension will be maintained while the operation-related displays suggest that operation reception is permitted.

In particular, in the 5B acceptance state, a configuration is adopted in which no operation-related output sound is output to prompt the player to perform an operation. This makes it relatively difficult to recognize that the state is one in which acceptance of operations is permitted, even compared to the 3B acceptance state described above, which shares the same feature of not emitting operation-prompting light.

Here, the "Simulated Image Display MG-B5" corresponding to the 5B reception acceptance state uses a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)." However, for example, a color scheme determined based on the results of a performance determination or the like may be selectively displayed from among multiple color schemes.

In addition, the "simulated image display MG-B5" corresponding to the 5B acceptance state is such that, when a specified moving image in a portion that resembles the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is considered to be a single periodic change, this periodic change appears repeatedly over a predetermined 5B period. However, because this 5B period is set to be a longer time (longer cycle) than the 1B period that appears in the 1B acceptance state, in the 5B acceptance state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted moving up and down within its movable range more slowly than in the above-mentioned 1B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the 5B operation acceptance state according to this example, as shown in Figures 172(c), (d), and 173(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-B5, a message display (here, message display MB5 displayed as "Attack the ghost tree! 'Sweep' with the sword!!") related to operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001) is displayed. The message display displayed in the 5B operation acceptance state (here, message display MB5 displayed as "Attack the ghost tree! 'Sweep' with the sword!!") differs in appearance (display content) from both the message display displayed in the 3B operation acceptance state (message display MB3 displayed as "Attack the demon! 'Sweep' with the sword!!") and the message display displayed in the 4B operation acceptance state (message display MB4 displayed as "Attack the goblin! 'Super-sweep' with the sword!!").

However, in the 5B reception acceptance state, it is sufficient that an operation-related display be displayed that prompts the user to perform multiple operations on the 5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001). For example, as long as the operation-related display displays at least one of a mock-up image display and a message display, it is not necessary for both to be executed.

Furthermore, in the 5B reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 172 (c) and (d), if no operation is accepted by the 5B operation unit, the mock-up image display and message display continue to be displayed until timing tBe3 arrives, at which point they are hidden. Therefore, while the 5B reception acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock-up image display MG-B5) indicating the remaining time until timing tBe3 arrives, at which point the 5B reception acceptance state will end, is depicted as decreasing over time. However, this depiction does not necessarily have to be displayed.

Furthermore, if the "Simulated Image Display MG-B5" corresponding to the 5B acceptance state is started to be displayed before timing tBe2 when the 5B acceptance state occurs, the periodic changes and changes in the gauge image may be started after timing tBe2.

Furthermore, in the 5B reception acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 172 (e) and 173 (a), the situation suggestion display JB5 corresponding to the 5B reception acceptance state displays an ally character corresponding to the type of the 5B reception acceptance state (here, the ally character YS-B5), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 5B reception acceptance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-B5 depicted as a ghost tree), and a gauge image HP-B5 showing their remaining HP gauges. In the 5B reception allowance state, the high or low likelihood of a jackpot can be suggested through the effect of "whether or not the ally character YS-B5 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-B5 by receiving multiple operations on the 5B operation unit (whether or not the gauge image HP-B5 can be set to 0)." In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)," a presentation can be executed in which the "ally character YS-B5" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-B5." Note that in this example, the ally character YS-B5, the enemy character BOSS-B5, and the gauge image HP-B5 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JB5, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays; as long as at least one of the ally character YS-B5, the enemy character BOSS-B5, and the gauge image HP-B5 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation situation. Additionally, the ally character YS-B5 may be displayed as a different image than the ally character YS-B1 that appears in the first B acceptance state and the second B acceptance state. Additionally, in the fifth B acceptance state, the situation suggestion display JB5 may not necessarily be displayed.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 172, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBe2-A1 within the 5B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 173 (b)).

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBe2-A1 within the 5B acceptance state, a "5B post-acceptance change (5B post-acceptance effect)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 172(f) and (h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 173(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" at timing tBe2-A1 within the 5B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 172 (f) and (h), a change occurs after 5B acceptance, in which a "5B post-acceptance output sound" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is audibly output, and a "5B post-acceptance display" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" begins to be displayed.

In other words, when a single operation is accepted on the "5B operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001)" in the 5B acceptance state, the above-mentioned "display after 5B acceptance" is displayed as a single animated display of "ally character YS-B5" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B5" with a sword technique (such as effects of sword strokes or slashes), as shown in FIG. 173(b). However, as will be described later, in the 5B acceptance state, based on the results of the performance determination made when the operation is accepted, there is a possibility that "enemy character BOSS-B5" will be injured, the strength of the sword technique will increase, or the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-B5 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance determination, etc.). When the effect content has progressed in this way, the state when an operation is subsequently accepted via the 5B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B5" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B5" with a sword technique) will appear as a single animated display that has changed to the advanced effect content (see, for example, FIGS. 172(e) and (f) and 173(e)). Note that, after the effect content has progressed in this way, as long as the 5B acceptance state continues, the degree of progress of the effect content will not be returned to the state before the progress. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again via the 5B operation unit after the end of the single animated display that has changed to the advanced effect content, the state when the operation is accepted via the 5B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B5" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B5" with a sword technique) can appear as a single animated display that has changed to the advanced effect content. As the presentation progresses, it may also be possible to suggest that there is a high probability (expectation) of hitting the jackpot.

However, in the 5B reception allowance state, unlike the 1B reception allowance state and the 2B reception allowance state (reception allowance states in which the effect content has a setting for the effect level), the effect level is not set for the effect content as a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance to the 5B operation unit, and instead, each time an operation is accepted to the 5B operation unit, the 5B event as a post-acceptance change (which may be just a display, just a sound, just a light emission, or just a movable body movement) may simply be repeatedly executed (occurred). In this case, it goes without saying that the situation suggestion display JB5 will no longer be displayed.

Furthermore, the 5B reception allowance state differs from the above-described 3B reception allowance state in at least one of the following (in this example, all of them are different): the mode (type of display) of the operation-related display (e.g., message display) and the configuration regarding whether an operation-related output sound is output. However, the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the 5B operation unit in the 5B reception allowance state may occur in the same way as the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the 3B operation unit in the above-described 3B reception allowance state. Alternatively, the differences between the 5B reception allowance state and the above-described 3B reception allowance state may be set to be the same in all other respects: the mode (type of display) of the operation-related display (e.g., message display) and the configuration regarding whether an operation-related output sound is output. As mentioned above, it is not necessary to generate multiple changes as post-acceptance changes. In this case, for example, if it is decided that only a 5B specific event (e.g., a sound output after 5B acceptance) is generated as a post-acceptance change when an operation to the 5B operation unit is accepted in the 5B acceptance state (the operation to the 5B operation unit is determined to be valid), then with regard to the post-acceptance change when an operation to the 3B operation unit is accepted in the above-mentioned 3B acceptance state (the operation to the 3B operation unit is determined to be valid), only a 3B specific event (e.g., a sound output after 3B acceptance) will be generated as the same event (same output sound) as the above-mentioned 5B specific event.

Furthermore, the 5B reception allowance state differs from the above-mentioned 4B reception allowance state in at least one of the following (in this example, all are different): the configuration regarding whether or not operation prompting light is emitted to prompt the player to perform an operation, the manner (type of display) of the operation-related display (e.g., message display), and the configuration regarding whether or not an operation-related output sound is output. However, the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the 5B operation unit in the 5B reception allowance state may occur as the same post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the 4B operation unit in the above-mentioned 4B reception allowance state. Alternatively, the differences between the 5B reception allowance state and the above-mentioned 4B reception allowance state may be set to be the same in all other respects, with only three differences: the configuration regarding whether or not operation prompting light is emitted to prompt the player to perform an operation, the manner (type of display) of the operation-related display (e.g., message display), and the configuration regarding whether or not an operation-related output sound is output. As mentioned above, it is not necessary to generate multiple changes as post-acceptance changes. In this case, for example, if it is decided that only a 5B specific event (e.g., a sound output after 5B acceptance) is generated as a post-acceptance change when an operation to the 5B operation unit is accepted in the 5B acceptance state (the operation to the 5B operation unit is determined to be valid), then with regard to the post-acceptance change when an operation to the 4B operation unit is accepted in the above-mentioned 4B acceptance state (the operation to the 4B operation unit is determined to be valid), only a 4B specific event (e.g., a sound output after 4B acceptance) will be generated as the same event (same output sound) as the above-mentioned 5B specific event.

In addition, in this example, when a single operation is accepted on the "5B operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" in the 5B acceptance state, in addition to the above-mentioned "5B acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound Sα5 can be output as the above-mentioned "5B acceptance output sound," as shown in FIG. 172(h). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to "the manner in which ally character YS-B5 attacks enemy character BOSS-B5 with a sword technique (such as a sword stroke or slash effect)," which appears as the above-mentioned "5B acceptance display." However, as will be described later, in the 5B acceptance state, unlike the 1B acceptance state and the 2B acceptance state, there is no possibility that an output sound different from the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5 will be output as the "5B acceptance output sound." Note that, while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5 is implemented here as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; it simply needs to be a sound that can indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted, and when the auto-repeated function is enabled, it needs to be a sound that can be output as a sound that can indicate that the 5B operating unit is being maintained in an operated state.

However, in the 5B reception allowance state, unlike the 1B reception allowance state and the 2B reception allowance state, a post-reception display may not necessarily be displayed as a post-reception change in response to reception of an operation to the 5B operation unit, and a post-reception output sound may not necessarily be output. For example, in the 5B reception allowance state, a post-reception change in response to reception of an operation to the 5B operation unit may be only a predetermined light emission in a predetermined light-emitting unit, or only a predetermined action of a specific movable body. In short, when an operation is received to the 5B operation unit, it is sufficient that a 5B event (which may be only a display, only a sound, only a light emission, or only an action of a movable body) is executed (occurs) at least multiple times as a post-reception change in response to that operation reception.

In this example, in the 5B acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted for the "5B operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001)," an image of "ally character YS-B5" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B5" and the associated sound effect are displayed (change after one acceptance). In other words, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-B5" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-B5" (the presentation progresses), and when HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-B5" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations (change after multiple acceptances). However, in this case, if HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-B5" cannot be defeated, it suggests low expectations.

However, this presentation content for the 5B reception-permitted state is merely an example, and other content may be substituted for it. For example, as a post-reception change corresponding to the 5B reception-permitted state, as long as there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to operation reception (for example, starting or stopping lamp illumination, or ending the audible output of a sound that is in an output state), it is not necessary to execute a "post-reception display" or "post-reception output sound." Even with this configuration, the player can understand that the operation reception has been carried out properly.

This example assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 5B operation unit) initiated at timing tBe2-A1 continues until timing tBe2-A2, as shown in Figure 172(a).

In this regard, the 5B operation acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (5B operation unit) in an operation state, a corresponding post-operation change (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, and a post-operation role action) is executed multiple times." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 172(a), during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 (the period in which the 5B operation unit is maintained in an operation state), operations are accepted multiple times for the 5B operation unit, and a post-operation change corresponding to that operation (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, and a post-operation role action) is executed multiple times.

As mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted by the 5B operation unit in the 5B acceptance state, the post-5B acceptance display (as shown in FIG. 173(b)) shows ally character YS-B5 attacking enemy character BOSS-B5 with a sword technique (including the effects of the sword stroke and slash), as shown in FIG. 173(b). Therefore, during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, this "single video display" is first played multiple times.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted by the 5B operation unit in the 5B acceptance acceptance state, the post-5B acceptance output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to "ally character YS-B5 attacking enemy character BOSS-B5 with a sword technique (such as the generation of a sword stroke or slashing effect)," which appears as the "post-5B acceptance display." Therefore, during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2, when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, in addition to the "single video display," sound effects corresponding to this "single video display" are played multiple times.

Here, in the 5B acceptance state, when the operation unit (5B operation unit) is maintained in an operation state and the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, such post-acceptance changes (such as one video display or sound effect (5B post-acceptance output sound)) are executed multiple times, with the execution interval (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) being set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). It is desirable to set this "fixed time" to the same time as in the 3B acceptance state and 4B acceptance state, which target the same operation unit.

Furthermore, in this example, in the 5B acceptance state, when the operation unit (5B operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, the ally character YS-B5 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B5 with a sword technique (one animation display), and the sound effect (5B post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to that "one animation display" can be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change. In this case, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly initiated in response to the detection (the interval from the start of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of the next post-acceptance change) is always set to a specific time (e.g., 1 second) or less. However, it is desirable to set this interval in the 5B acceptance state to a different length of time than the interval when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled in the above-mentioned 1B acceptance state. For example, it may be set to a time longer than the interval when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled in the above-mentioned 1B acceptance state, but less than a specific time (e.g., 1 second).

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 172, the auto-rapid-hitting function will start a new "one-shot animation display (one of the post-acceptance changes)" at regular intervals, in which ally character YS-B5 attacks enemy character BOSS-B5 with a sword technique, and this repeated display of "one-shot animation display" is represented in the figure as "rapid-hitting display HB5a."

Similarly, during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 172, the sound effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" (the 5B post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes) will begin to be output anew at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound effect" is represented in the figure as "first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a."

In this regard, the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 172 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the performance content corresponding to the 5B acceptance acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, the "Status Suggestion Display JB5 (see Figure 172 (e))" which indicates the status of the operation in the 5B acceptance state will not change or begin to be executed (in a manner that progresses the presentation) as a result of the operation acceptance.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 172, the "sword attack" and "slashing effect" shown in FIG. 173 are displayed and the corresponding sound effects are output repeatedly at regular intervals by the auto-rapid tapping function (post-acceptance changes are repeatedly executed at regular intervals) (rapid tapping display HB5a, first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a), but no change occurs in the "situation suggestion display JB5 (see FIG. 172(e))." This makes it possible to confirm the effects that have occurred in response to multiple input acceptances, as well as any progress that has not been made, simply by maintaining the operating state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Regarding the "Situation Suggestion Display JB5 (see Figure 172(e))," at least one of the ally character YS-B5, enemy character BOSS-B5, and gauge image HP-B5 may be changed in response to the acceptance of an operation. In this case, however, the change must be to a mode different from the "mode when the performance progresses." Furthermore, if the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 (the period during which the 5B operation unit is maintained in an operating state) ends without the performance progressing (when the operation is interrupted), this will trigger a return to the "display mode before the operation." Furthermore, as noted above, the "Situation Suggestion Display JB5 (see Figure 172(e))" of the ally character YS-B5, enemy character BOSS-B5, gauge image HP-B5, etc. may not be displayed until an operation is accepted, and may instead be displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined period of time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2, the "Status Suggestion Display JB5 (see FIG. 172(e))" which indicates the status of the operation in the 5B acceptance acceptance state does not change or begin execution as a result of the operation acceptance, so it is possible to appropriately indicate that the performance content is not progressing.

However, when the rapid-fire display HB5a is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2), as shown in FIG. 173(b), the rapid-fire display HB5a will repeatedly show at regular intervals "ally character YS-B5 attacking enemy character BOSS-B5 with a sword technique (such as the generation of sword strokes or slashing effects)." This may make the "situation suggestion display JB5" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the 5B acceptance acceptance state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 172 and 173 are designed to assume that the player temporarily suspends operation of the 5B operation unit at timing tBe2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 5B acceptance acceptance state.

Here, in the 5B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 172(f), even if the operation of the 5B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBe2-A2 and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB5a (post-acceptance change) that was in an active state until then will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire display HB1a will continue to be in an active state even after timing tBe2-A2 (even after the 5B operation unit is put into a non-operated state), for example, until the above-mentioned "one-time animation display" that was in an active state has been executed for the predetermined display time and is finished displaying (until one-time post-acceptance change is finished executing).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 5B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire indicator HB5a, which had been active until then, is not immediately hidden (the post-acceptance change is not terminated midway through one execution), so it takes time for the operation status in the 5B acceptance state to become easy to recognize. This means that the remaining time in the 5B acceptance state is significantly consumed, and is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily interrupt the operation state of the 5B operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 5B acceptance state.

Also, in this example, if the operation of the 5B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HB5a is displayed, the time from the non-operating state until the rapid-hit display HB5a is put into a non-display state (the time until the one post-acceptance change that was in the middle of execution is completed) is not set to a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 5B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled until the rapid-fire indicator HB5a is hidden and a situation appears in which the operation status in the 5B reception-permitted state becomes easy to recognize. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 5B reception-permitted state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation state of the 5B operation unit in order to more easily check the operation status in the 5B reception-permitted state.

Furthermore, in the 5B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 172(h) and elsewhere, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a, which had been in an active state until then, is not rendered inaudible when the operation of the 5B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBe2-A2 to disable the auto-repeat function, just like the rapid-fire display HB5a. In other words, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a will continue to be output even after timing tBe2-A2 (even after the 5B operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an active state has been executed and output for the predetermined output time (or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state).

With this configuration, even if the operation of the 5B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a, which had been in an active state until then, will not immediately be put into a non-output state. In this case, it will appear as if the auto-repeated tapping function is still active, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation of the 5B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a (5B event) is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-output state of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 5B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a (5B event) is no longer output, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 5B acceptance-permitted state, which is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation of the 5B operation unit.

Furthermore, in the 5B reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation of the 5B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the rapid-hit display HB5a and the first post-reception output sound Sα5a are both in an active state, as shown in Figures 172(f) and (h), etc., a situation will appear in which the rapid-hit display HB5a continues to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound SB5a continues to be output while the 5B operation unit is in a non-operated state. However, as time passes after the 5B operation unit is put into a non-operated state, the rapid-hit display HB5a, which had been displayed, will be made invisible and the first post-reception output sound Sα5a will be made non-output, as shown in Figures 172(f) and (h) and 173(c), etc. This not only allows the player to easily recognize when the auto-rapid function is disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the status of the status indication JB5 (here, status JB5a) that indicates the operating status, such as the ally character YS-B5, enemy character BOSS-B5, and gauge image HP-B5 (see Figure 173 (c)).

However, as mentioned above, in the example shown in Figure 172, the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto rapid-fire function and multiple post-acceptance changes are executed, the effect content corresponding to the 5B acceptance-permitted state does not progress. Note that the 5B acceptance-permitted state does not necessarily have to be generated as an acceptance-permitted state in which the effect content may progress; for example, it may be generated as an acceptance-permitted state in which only one mode of post-acceptance change is executed multiple times.

Thus, in the situation shown in Figure 173(c), although the appearance of the status suggestion display JB5 (here, appearance JB5a) that suggests the operation status, such as the ally character YS-B5, enemy character BOSS-B5, and gauge image HP-B5, can be easily recognized, these appearances are the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 173(a)), which suggests that the performance content has not progressed. Note that the appearance of the status suggestion display JB5 that suggests the operation status, such as the ally character YS-B5, enemy character BOSS-B5, and gauge image HP-B5, does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 173(a)), as long as it can suggest that the performance content has not progressed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 172(a), it is assumed that the "5B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state at timing tBe2-B1 within the 5B reception acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 173(d)).

In this example, if the "5B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operational state and an operation is accepted at timing tBe2-B1 within the 5B acceptance state, this will trigger a "5B post-acceptance change (5B post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 172(f) (the effect situation shown in FIG. 173(d)).

In this example, if an operation is accepted for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" at timing tBe2-B1 within the 5B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 172 (f) and (h), a change occurs after 5B acceptance in which the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα5 (a sound effect corresponding to one animation display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is again audibly output, and the "5B post-acceptance display (one animation display)" in response to the operation accepted for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that even when operation of the 5B operation unit is resumed at timing tBe2-B1 within the 5B reception acceptance state, the effect corresponding to that 5B reception acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 173(d), the 5B post-reception change (post-5B reception display, post-5B reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-5B reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance of the 5B operation unit at timing tBe2-A1. The details of the effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 172 and 173 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 5B operation unit) initiated at timing tBe2-B1 is maintained until timing tBe2-B3, activating the auto-rapid-hit function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3 (the period during which the 5B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the 5B operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance role operation) will be executed multiple times.

And even during this "period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3 (the period during which the 5B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HB5a and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a) is the same as in the "period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2" described above (see FIG. 173(b)), unless the presentation content progresses. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 172, the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3 is assumed to be a case in which, of the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the operation accepted at timing tBe2-B2 within that period leads to the progression of the performance content corresponding to the 5B acceptance acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 173 (e)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 172, during the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B2, the "5th B post-reception change (5th B post-reception effect)" in response to operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has not progressed, whereas during the period from timing tBe2-B2 to timing tBe2-B3, the "5th B post-reception change (5th B post-reception effect)" in response to operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has progressed.

More specifically, at "timing tBe2-B2," which is the timing at which the presentation progresses during the period from timing tBe2-B2 to timing tBe2-B3, a display change is executed based on the operation received from the 5B operation unit, changing the state of the status indication display JB5, which indicates the operation status, from the previously displayed "state JB5a" to a different "state JB5B," as shown in Figures 172(e) and 173(e). Here, as shown in Figure 173(e), the enemy character BOSS-B5 changes to an injured state, the sword technique performed by ally character YS-B5 changes to an increased strength state, and the gauge image HP-B5 changes to an state in which the remaining HP gauge is reduced. With this configuration, the change in the state of the status suggestion display JB5 indicates that the performance corresponding to the 5B reception permission state has progressed due to (the result of performance determination based on) the operation reception (due to the auto-hit function) performed at timing tBe2-B2.

After the performance has progressed in this way, when one operation is received from the 5B operation unit, the "single video display" will be displayed as the "display after 5B reception" in a manner that has progressed in the performance, such as "ally character YS-B5 uses a sword technique with increased strength to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-B5," as shown in Figure 173 (e).

In this example, once the presentation progresses, the progress of the presentation will not be returned to the state before the progress was made, as long as the 5B acceptance state continues. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted again at the 5B operation unit after the completion of one video display that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced presentation content, the state when the operation was accepted at the 5B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B5" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B5" with a sword technique) will appear as one video display that has changed to the advanced presentation content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tBe2-B2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, this "single video display" in which such a change in appearance has occurred will be played multiple times by the auto-hit function.

Furthermore, even in the period after timing tBe2-B2 when the performance has progressed, the mode (one animation display) in which ally character YS-B5 attacks enemy character BOSS-B5 with a sword technique is newly initiated at regular intervals (predetermined intervals (same time as before the change)) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one animation display" of the performance when the performance has progressed is also newly initiated at regular intervals by the auto-rapid tapping function, and the repeated display (multiple post-acceptance changes) of this "one animation display (one post-acceptance change)" of the progression mode is represented in the diagram as "rapid tapping display HB5B."

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tBe2-B2" arrives, which is the timing at which the effect content progresses, the state of the situation suggestion display JB5 changes from "state JB5a" to "state JB5B," and the state of the rapid-fire display HB5 also changes from "state HB5a" to "state HB5B," as shown in Figures 172(e), (f) and 173(d), (e). From this point on, while the auto rapid-fire function is enabled (timing tBe2-B2 to tBe2-B3), the situation suggestion display JB5 will be displayed in "state JB5B," while the rapid-fire display HB5 will be executed in "state HB5B."

In this example, the state of the rapid-fire display HB5 changes depending on the progress of the presentation, but it may not change depending on the progress of the presentation. In other words, even if the rapid-fire display HB5 continues to be displayed in one state regardless of the progress of the presentation, the player can confirm through the rapid-fire display HB5 that the auto rapid-fire function is enabled and the number (frequency) of operations being accepted, and can also confirm the progress of the presentation through the state of the status suggestion display JB5. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the 5B acceptance allowance state, unlike the 1B acceptance allowance state and the 2B acceptance allowance state, may be realized as a type of acceptance allowance state in which progress in the presentation itself is not possible. In this case, it goes without saying that the status suggestion display will not be displayed, and post-acceptance changes will be executed multiple times in only one state.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a single operation is accepted on the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 5B acceptance state, in addition to the "5B acceptance display," the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display" as shown in FIG. 172(h) can be output as the "5B acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 172(i). However, as mentioned above, in the 5B acceptance state, the second post-acceptance output sound is not output as the "5B acceptance output sound."

Furthermore, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5 in this example is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance content advances. Therefore, when timing tBe2-B2 arrives, when the performance content advances, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation acceptance, but in the same manner as when the operation was accepted before timing tBe2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not the performance advances at timing tBe2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound Sα5) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will be newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound effect" will be represented in the figure as "first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a during this period is the same as in the "period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2" described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a is not changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content, but it may be changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HB5B is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (the period from timing tBe2-B2 to timing tBe2-B3), as shown in FIG. 173(e), the rapid-fire display HB5B will repeatedly show "ally character YS-B5 attacking injured enemy character BOSS-B5 with a powerful sword technique (such as the generation of sword strokes or slashing effects)" at regular intervals. This may make the "situation suggestion display JB5" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the 5B acceptance acceptance state (this configuration is not required).

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 172 and 173 are designed to assume that the player again interrupts operation of the 5B operation unit at timing tBe2-B3, thereby disabling the auto-rapid-hit function, in order to more actively check the operation status in the 5B acceptance acceptance state.

As described above, in the 5B reception acceptance state, even if the operation of the 5B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 5B reception acceptance state is continuing and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB5, which was in an active state until then, will not be hidden (a post-acceptance change that was in an active state will not be terminated prematurely due to non-operation). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 172(f), even if the operation of the 5B operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBe2-B3, the rapid-fire display HB5B will continue to be active after timing tBe2-B3 (even after the 5B operation unit becomes non-operated), for example, until the "one animation display (one post-acceptance change)" that was in an active state has been executed for the predetermined display time (execution time) and is displayed (executed), or for a predetermined period of time from the non-operation state.

Also, as with the rapid-hit display HB5a, if you stop operating the 5B operation unit and put it into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HB5B is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is put into place until the rapid-hit display HB5B is hidden (the time until the change after one reception is completed) is not set to a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 5B acceptance state, even if the operation of the 5B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 5B acceptance state continues and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, this will not cause the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a, which had been in an output state until then, to be put into a non-output state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 172(h), even if the operation of the 5B operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBe2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a will continue to be output from timing tBe2-B3 onwards (even after the 5B operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has been executed for the predetermined output time and is finished being output, or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state.

Furthermore, in this example, if operation of the 5B operation unit is interrupted and placed in a non-operated state while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5 (5B event) is being output, the time from the non-operated state until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a (5B event) is no longer output is set to an indefinite period, rather than being set to a fixed time. This configuration makes it difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which operation of the 5B operation unit is interrupted (placed in a non-operated state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5 becomes inaudible, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 5B acceptance state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when attempting to interrupt operation of the 5B operation unit.

Furthermore, in the 5B reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, even if the operation of the 5B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operation state) while the rapid-hit display HB5B and the first post-reception output sound Sα5a are both in an execution state, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB5B is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα5a is made silent are set to be different, as shown in FIG. 172(f) and (h), etc. In the figure, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB5B is made invisible is set before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα5a is made silent, but the opposite relationship may also be set. Alternatively, due to the aforementioned nature that the time until the display is made invisible or silent is indefinite, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB5B is made invisible may occur both before and after the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα5a is made silent. It is also possible for the timing to be the same for both.

In this configuration, in the 5B reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the 5B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the rapid-hit display HB5B and the first post-reception output sound Sα5a are both in an active state, as shown in Figures 172(f) and 173(f), the rapid-hit display HB5B will continue to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound Sα5a will continue to be output while the 5B operation unit is in a non-operated state. However, as time passes after the 5B operation unit is put into a non-operated state (the time has passed since timing tBe2-B3), the rapid-hit display HB5B, which had been displayed, will disappear, as shown in Figures 172(f) and 173(f), etc. This not only allows the player to easily recognize when the auto-rapid function is disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the state of the status indication JB5 (here, the state JB5B where the presentation content has progressed) that indicates the operating status, such as the ally character YS-B3, enemy character BOSS-B5, and gauge image HP-B5 (see Figure 173 (f)).

Also, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a would normally cease to be output (become inaudible) as time passes since the 5B operating unit is placed in a non-operated state (the time has passed since timing tBa2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 172(a), it is assumed that the 5B operation unit is again put into an operating state at timing tBe2-C1 (the performance situation shown in FIG. 173(g)), which is after timing tBa2-B3 when the 5B operation unit is put into a non-operated state and when the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a is in an audible state (before the output state is ended).

In this example, even if the "5B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operational state and an operation is accepted at timing tBe2-C1 within the 5B acceptance state, this will again trigger a "5B post-acceptance change (5B post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 172(f) (the effect situation shown in FIG. 173(g)), just as in the case of timing tBe2-B1 described above.

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "5B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBe2-C1 within the 5B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 172(f), a change after 5B acceptance occurs in which the "5B post-acceptance display (one video display)" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the "5B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that when operation of the 5B operation unit is resumed at timing tBe2-C1 within the 5B reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 5B reception acceptance state does not progress from the state shown in Figure 173(g) (first-stage progression state). Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 173(g), the 5B post-reception change (5B post-reception display) will begin to be executed in the same state as when the 5B post-reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance of the 5B operation unit at timing tBe-B2. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in this example, timing tBe2-C1 is assumed to arrive while the audible output of the fifth B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα5), which began to be output within the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3, is still continuing.

In this regard, the 5B acceptance state in this example is realized by terminating the "previous post-acceptance change" that is currently in progress, without starting a new post-acceptance change. Therefore, not only at timing tBe2-C1, but even after timing tBe2-C1 arrives, as long as the audible output of the 5B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα5) that began output during the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3 has not ended, a new 5B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα5) will not be output. That is, in this case, in the 5B reception acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIG. 172(h), after the audible output (predetermined output time for one output) of the single 5B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα5) that has been audibly output across timing tBe2-B3 has ended, a new 5B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα5) corresponding to that operation acceptance begins at the timing when the operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is first made. Note that, after the audible output (predetermined output time for one output) of the single 5B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα5) that has been audibly output across timing tBe2-B3 has ended, there is no need to re-operate the 5B operation unit; operation acceptance is achieved simply by maintaining the 5B operation unit in its operating state from timing tBe2-C1.

In addition, with regard to the rapid-hit display HB5, a single 5B post-acceptance display that began execution within the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3 may continue to be displayed at timing tBa2-C1. However, in this case, as with the 5B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα5), after a single 5B post-acceptance display that spans timing tBe2-B3 is hidden (displayed for a predetermined display time and then hidden), a new 5B post-acceptance display corresponding to the first operation received on the 5B operation unit will begin to be displayed.

Alternatively, when timing tBe2-C1 arrives while at least one of the post-acceptance changes initiated during the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3 is in an executing state, new post-acceptance changes may not be output unless all of those post-acceptance changes are deactivated. If this method is adopted, in the example shown in FIG. 172, a new 5B post-acceptance display will not be displayed until the audible output of the 5B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα5) has ended. In other words, in this case, a new 5B post-acceptance display will not be displayed at timing tBe2-C1. Instead, a new display will be displayed at the timing when the first operation is accepted for the 5B operation unit after the audible output of the 5B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα5) that has been audibly output across timing tBe2-B3 has ended.

In addition, the presentation examples shown in Figures 172 and 173 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 5B operation unit) that began at timing tBe2-C1 continues even at timing tBe2-C2, when operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is no longer permitted (when the conditions for operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit are no longer permitted are met), and as a result, the auto-rapid-hit function remains enabled until timing tBe2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBe2-C1 to timing tBe2-C2 (the period during which the 5B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the 5B operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance role operation) will be executed multiple times.

And even during the "period from timing tBe2-C1 to timing tBe2-C2 (the period during which the 5B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HB5B and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a) will be the same as in the "period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3" described above (see FIG. 173(e)), as shown in FIG. 173(g), unless further progress in the presentation occurs. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

Here, the 5B acceptance state in this example assumes that no special mode (final mode) appears as a post-acceptance change. Therefore, during the period from timing tBe2-C1 to timing tBe2-C2 in the example shown in Figure 172, the "5B post-acceptance change (5B post-acceptance effect)" in response to operation acceptance will be executed multiple times in a mode in which the effect content progresses only once (see Figure 173 (g)), and when timing tBa2-C2 arrives, this will trigger the disabling of the auto-rapid-tap function that had been enabled up until then.

In this regard, when the auto-rapid tapping function is disabled at timing tBe2-A2 or timing tBe2-B3, post-acceptance changes such as the rapid tapping display HB5 that was previously displayed by the auto-rapid tapping function and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a that was previously output by the auto-rapid tapping function are not terminated midway due to the cessation of operation acceptance. Similarly, when the auto-rapid tapping function is disabled at timing tBe2-C2, as shown in FIG. 172(f) and (h), post-acceptance changes such as the rapid tapping display HB5 that was previously displayed by the auto-rapid tapping function and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a that was previously output by the auto-rapid tapping function are not terminated midway due to the cessation of operation acceptance (they are maintained in their execution state until their remaining execution time is used up).

This configuration makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions under which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is no longer permitted have been met at timing tBe2-C2 (that a situation has arisen in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is no longer permitted), which is expected to encourage the player to continue to operate the 5B operation unit.

In this regard, the mock image display MG-B5, message display MB5, and situation suggestion display JB5 are not hidden when timing tBe2-C2 arrives, but remain visible even after timing tBe2-C2 arrives and operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is no longer permitted. This gives the player a sense of anticipation that even after timing tBe2-C2, "there may still be a chance for operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit to result in a new change after acceptance."

In this example, the model image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 begin displaying at timing tBe1, then go into a hidden state at timing tBe3 after passing through timings tBe2-C2 when operation acceptance is no longer permitted. Furthermore, the situation suggestion display JB5 is not hidden even at timing tBe3, but is hidden at an appropriate timing thereafter. However, as mentioned above, the timings at which the model image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 are displayed and hidden may be different, or only one of the model image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 may be displayed as the operation-related display. Furthermore, the situation suggestion display JB5 may be hidden at the same timing as the model image display MG-B5 and message display MB5.

In this example, it is assumed that the player continues operating the "5th B operation unit" starting at timing tBe2-C1 even when timing tBe3 arrives, at which the mock image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 are hidden, and even when timing arrives at which the situation suggestion display JB5 is hidden.

In this regard, in the 5B operation acceptance state, after a transition to a "state in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is not accepted" (after timing tBe2-C2), the conditions for entering a "state in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is accepted" may be met again (or not) between timing tBe3, in which the model image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 are hidden (and further, timing in which the situation suggestion display JB5 is hidden). If the conditions for entering a "state in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is accepted" are not met again, the auto-tap function will remain disabled from timing tBe2-C2 onwards, and operation-related displays such as the model image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 will be hidden until timing tBe3 arrives.

Whether the conditions for generating a "state in which operation acceptance via the 5B operation unit is permitted" are met between timing tBe2-C2 and timing tBe3, and the timing at which this state occurs, may be determined, for example, based on operation acceptance during the period from timing tBe2 to timing tBe2-C2, or based on the results of an effect determination performed during the period from timing tBe2-C2 to timing tBe3, or based on the type of pattern change pattern or the result of a jackpot determination. Essentially, there are no limitations on the method for achieving this, as long as the conditions for generating a "state in which operation acceptance via the 5B operation unit is permitted" are met between timing tBe2-C2 and timing tBe3.

Alternatively, the 5B acceptance state may be set to occur as an acceptance state of a type that re-occurs a "state in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is permitted" at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBe2-C2 to timing tBe3.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 172(b), it is assumed that a "state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the 5B operation unit" occurs again (when the occurrence conditions are met) at timing tBe2-C3 during the period from timing tBe2-C2 to timing tBe3.

In this regard, at timing tBe3 in this example, as shown in Figures 172(a) and (b) and 173(g), (h), and (i), operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is properly carried out based on detection of the operation state of the "5B operation unit" that has been maintained since timing tBe2-C1, with a period in between when acceptance of operations for the 5B operation unit is not permitted (the period from timing tBe2-C2 to timing tBe2-C3, the situation shown in Figure 173(h)), and as a result, post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of the operation are initiated (the performance situation shown in Figure 173(i)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" at timing tBe2-C3, as shown in FIG. 172(f) and (h), a change after 5B acceptance occurs in which the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα5 (a sound effect corresponding to one animation display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is again audibly output, and the "5B post-acceptance display (one animation display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that even when operation of the 5B operation unit is resumed again at timing tBe2-C3, the effect corresponding to the 5B acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 173(i), the 5B post-acceptance change (post-5B acceptance display, post-5B acceptance sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the 5B post-acceptance change was first initiated based on operation acceptance of the 5B operation unit at timing tBe2-B2. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, in the 5B operation acceptance state, if the conditions for the "state in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is permitted" are met again between timing tBe2-C3 and timing tBe3, when the mock image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 are made invisible (and further, when the situation suggestion display JB5 is made invisible), the "state in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is permitted" may have its termination conditions met (or not met) before timing tBe3 arrives.

Regarding whether the "state in which operation acceptance via the 5B operation unit is permitted" that occurs at timing tBe2-C3 after timing tBe2-C2 has its termination conditions met by the time timing tBe3 arrives, and the timing at which this state ends, for example, may be determined based on operation acceptance during the period from timing tBe2 to timing tBe2-C2, or may be determined based on the results of a performance determination performed during the period from timing tBe2-C2 to timing tBe3, or may be determined based on the type of pattern change pattern or the results of a jackpot determination. Essentially, as long as the "state in which operation acceptance via the 5B operation unit is permitted" that occurs at timing tBe2-C3 has its termination conditions met by the time timing tBe3 arrives, the method for achieving this is not limited.

Alternatively, the 5B reception acceptance state may be set to a type of reception acceptance state that always re-occurs at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBe2-C2 to timing tBe3, resulting in a "state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the 5B operation unit," and that always ends at a predetermined timing within the period up to timing tBe3.

The examples shown in Figures 172 and 173 assume that the "state in which operation acceptance to the 5B operation unit is permitted" that began at timing tBe2-C3 continues until timing tBe2-C4, which is before timing tBe3, and the termination conditions are met.

In this regard, at timing tBe2-C4, just as when the auto-hit function is disabled at timing tBe2-C2 described above, as shown in Figures 172 (f) and (h), post-acceptance changes such as the hit-in-progress display HB5 that was previously displayed by the auto-hit function and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a that was previously output by the auto-hit function are not terminated midway due to the cessation of operation acceptance (these changes are maintained in their execution state until their remaining execution time is exhausted).

This configuration makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions under which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is no longer permitted have been met at timing tBe2-C4 (that a situation has arisen in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is no longer permitted), which is expected to encourage the player to continue to operate the 5B operation unit.

In this example, after the conditions for disallowing operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit are met at timing tBe2-C4, the "state in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is allowed" does not occur again until timing tBe3 arrives, when the mock image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 are hidden (and further, when the situation suggestion display JB5 is hidden). Therefore, even if the "5B operation unit" remains in an operational state until timing tBe3 (and further, when the situation suggestion display JB5 is hidden), the auto-repeated tap function will not be enabled, multiple operations will not be accepted, and post-acceptance changes in response to accepted operations will not be performed multiple times during that period (see FIG. 173 (j)).

However, between timing tBe2-C4 and timing tBe3, the condition for "a state in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is permitted" may be satisfied again (or may not be satisfied). In this case, based on the detection of the operation state of the "5B operation unit" that has been maintained since timing tBe2-C1, with multiple periods in between in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is not permitted, operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit will once again be performed, and the post-acceptance change (auto-repeated tap function) in response to that operation acceptance will commence.

In the examples shown in Figures 173(h) and (j), a message such as "Miss!!" is displayed when timing tBe2-C2 or timing tBe2-C4 arrives, but it is also possible for no new message to appear when timing tBe2-C2 or timing tBe2-C4 arrives.

Furthermore, in order to optimally maintain the presentation of the 5B acceptance state, if the player does not perform an operation until timing tBe2-C2 (or timing tBe2-C4) arrives, at which point acceptance of operations to the 5B operation unit is no longer permitted, it is desirable that the same post-acceptance changes as when such an operation is performed do not occur (the automatic button function is not enabled).

Furthermore, the 5B reception permission state is not prepared as a "type of reception permission state in which the reception permission state can be terminated early based on the reception of an operation," and the state will not be terminated based on the reception of an operation to the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)."

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "6B reception permission state" as part of the reception permission period (operation permission state). Figure 174 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "6B reception permission state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 6B" as the generation condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 175 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "6B reception permission state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "6B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the "6B fluctuation pattern." After this, it starts the decorative symbol SZ fluctuation performance (such as a performance depiction according to the 6B fluctuation pattern or sound output of background music playback according to the 6B fluctuation pattern (such as normal background music playback when not in a reach)), and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "6B fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 174 (b), during the execution period of the variable effect related to the "6B variable pattern," the 6B acceptance permitted state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in Figure 175 (a)) in which "acceptance of operations to the 6B operating unit regarding changes after 6B acceptance (6B repeated tap display HB6, sounds output after 6B acceptance Sα6, Sβ6, etc.)" is permitted based on the arrival of timing tBf2 when the 6B time has elapsed since the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ began (based on "condition 6B" being satisfied).

Here, in the 6B reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, the "6B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the operation button 410, similar to the 1B reception acceptance state and the 2B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted until the 6B reception acceptance state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 174(b) to (e), when the 6B reception acceptance state occurs, no operation-related displays such as a mock image display of the object operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6B operation unit), no message display related to the operation of the object operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6B operation unit), and no status indication displays that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period following acceptance of the operation are displayed. Furthermore, in this example, no operation-related output sound is audibly output to prompt the player to operate. In this way, the 6B reception acceptance state according to this example makes it difficult to recognize that acceptance of operations on the "6B operation unit" has been accepted.

However, in this example, when the 6B operation acceptance state occurs (in this example, at timing tBf2, but it can be slightly delayed), the 6B operation prompt light LB6 is illuminated to prompt the player to operate the game. In this example, the 6B operation prompt light LB6 is illuminated by a light-emitting element on the 6B operation unit (operation button 410). However, if the player is prompted to operate the operation button 410 (for example, if the light only appears when operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is accepted), the 6B operation prompt light LB6 may be illuminated by a light-emitting element located in a different position from the 6B operation unit (operation button 410). In this case, it goes without saying that the 6B operation unit (operation button 410) does not necessarily need to have a light-emitting element. This configuration makes it difficult to recognize that operation acceptance for the "6B operation unit" has been accepted, while providing a hint that acceptance of operation acceptance has been accepted, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In this example, once the 6B operation prompt light LB6 starts to emit, it continues to emit light at least until the 6B operation acceptance state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 6B operation unit. Note that the 6B operation prompt light LB6 may not necessarily be activated in the 6B operation acceptance state.

Furthermore, even in the 6B acceptance state of this example, as shown in FIG. 175(a), an ally character (here, ally character YS-B6) corresponding to the type of the 6B acceptance state and an enemy character (here, enemy character BOSS-B6 depicted as a shadow) corresponding to the type of the 6B acceptance state are displayed. Each time an operation (operation acceptance) is performed on the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)," an effect may be executed in which the "ally character YS-B6" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-B6." However, in this example, the ally character YS-B6 and enemy character BOSS-B6 do not function as the "status indication display" described above, which can indicate the progress of the effect even when the 6B operation unit (operation button 410) is not in an operation state. Furthermore, the ally character YS-B6 and enemy character BOSS-B6 do not necessarily need to be displayed in the 6B acceptance state.

In the 6B reception acceptance state, a status indication display may also be displayed, similar to the 1B reception acceptance state and the 2B reception acceptance state. However, in this case, in consideration of the confidentiality of the 6B reception acceptance state, it is desirable that the status indication display not be displayed while no operation is being accepted, but rather be displayed only when an operation is accepted, and remain displayed thereafter.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 174, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBf2-A1 within the 6B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 175 (b)).

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBf2-A1 within the 6B acceptance state, a "6B post-acceptance change (6B post-acceptance effect)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 174(f) and (h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 175(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBf2-A1 within the 6B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 174(f) and (h), a "6B post-acceptance output sound" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after 6B acceptance, and a "6B post-acceptance display" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

In other words, when a single operation is accepted on the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 6B acceptance state, the "display after 6B acceptance" is displayed as shown in FIG. 175(b), showing a single animated image of "ally character YS-B6" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B6" with light-based magic (such as the generation of light effects or light-based magic). However, as will be described later, in the 6B acceptance state, based on the results of the performance judgment at the time the operation is accepted, there is a possibility that the strength of the light-based magic will increase or the size of the light effect will change (the performance content may progress depending on the performance judgment, etc.). When the effect content has progressed in this way, the state when an operation is subsequently accepted via the 6B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B6" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B6" with light-based magic) will be displayed as a single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content (see, for example, FIG. 174(f) or FIG. 175(e)). Note that, after the effect content has progressed in this way, as long as the 6B acceptance state continues, the degree of progress of the effect content will not be returned to the state before the progress. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted via the 6B operation unit again after the end of the single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content, the state when the operation is accepted via the 6B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B6" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B6" with light-based magic) can be displayed as a single animated image display that has changed to the advanced effect content. As the presentation progresses, it may be possible to suggest that there is a high probability (expectation) of a jackpot being achieved.

However, in the 6B reception permitted state, the degree of presentation may not be set for the presentation content as a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception to the 6B operation unit, and instead, each time an operation is received to the 6B operation unit, the 6B event as a post-acceptance change (which may be just a display, just a sound, just a light emission, or just a movable body movement) may be repeatedly executed (occurred).

In addition, in this example, when a single operation is accepted on the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 6B acceptance state, in addition to the "6B acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 may be output as the "6B acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 174(h). The first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which ally character YS-B6 attacks enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic (such as a light effect or the generation of light-based magic)" that appears as the "6B acceptance display." At this time, as will be described later, there is also a possibility that a second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 may be output as the "6B acceptance output sound." The second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 in this example is output when the performance of the "6B acceptance display" progresses. Note that, while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 is implemented here as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; it simply needs to be able to indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted, and that when the auto-repeated function is enabled, the 6B operating unit is being maintained in an operating state.

In addition, in this example, it is assumed that the timing tBf2-A1 occurs when the 6B operation prompt light LB6 is in an illuminated state, as shown in FIG. 174(j). However, at timing tBf2-A1, the 6B operation prompt light LB6 is not turned off in response to the reception of an operation on the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)."

In other words, in this example, when an operation is accepted for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the 6B operation prompt light LB6 is in an illuminating state, the acceptance of the operation may or may not terminate the illuminating state. Here, the illuminating state of the 6B operation prompt light LB6 is also terminated early only when the acceptance of an operation for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" triggers early termination (i.e., termination before timing tBf2-C2) of the "state in which acceptance of operations for the 6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is accepted. However, unlike the firstB acceptance state and the secondB acceptance state, the 6B acceptance state may not be terminated early when the acceptance of an operation for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" triggers early termination of the "state in which acceptance of operations for the 6B operation unit (6B acceptance state)."

In this way, in the 6B acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted on the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)," an image of "ally character YS-B6" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B6" and a corresponding sound effect are displayed, and if the attack reaches its highest level as a result, this provides a dramatic effect that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if the attack does not reach its highest level despite multiple attacks, it suggests low expectations.

However, this presentation content for the 6B reception-permitted state is merely an example, and other content may be substituted for it. For example, as a post-acceptance change corresponding to the 6B reception-permitted state, as long as there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to operation reception (for example, the start or end of lamp illumination, or the end of audible output of a sound that is in an output state), a "post-acceptance display" or "post-acceptance output sound" may not necessarily be executed. Even with this configuration, the player can understand that the operation reception has been performed appropriately. Therefore, a post-acceptance display does not necessarily have to be executed as a post-acceptance change, and even in this case, it is possible to suggest the degree of progress in the presentation by, for example, the manner in which the lamp illuminates or the manner in which the sound is output.

This example assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 6B operation unit) initiated at timing tBf2-A1 continues until timing tBf2-A2, as shown in Figure 174(a).

In this regard, the 6B operation acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) in which simply maintaining the operation unit (6B operation unit) in an operation state causes a corresponding post-operation change (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, a post-operation device operation, etc.) to be executed multiple times." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 174(a), during the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2 (the period in which the 6B operation unit is maintained in an operation state), operations are accepted multiple times for the 6B operation unit, and a post-operation change corresponding to that operation (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, a post-operation device operation, etc.) is executed multiple times.

As mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted on the 6B operation unit in the 6B acceptance state, the post-6B acceptance display (showing one animation) shows ally character YS-B6 attacking enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic (including light effects and the generation of light-based magic), as shown in Figure 175(b). Therefore, from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, this "one animation" is first played multiple times.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted on the 6B operation unit in the 6B acceptance acceptance state, the post-6B acceptance output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to "ally character YS-B6 attacking enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic (such as a light effect or the generation of light-based magic)," which appears as the "post-6B acceptance display." Therefore, during the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2, when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, in addition to the "single video display," sound effects corresponding to this "single video display" will be played multiple times.

Here, in the 6B acceptance state, when the operation unit (6B operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled, a scene in which ally character YS-B6 attacks enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic (one animation display), and a sound effect corresponding to this "one animation display" (sound output after 6B acceptance) are newly executed every fixed time (predetermined time) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change.

Furthermore, in the 6B acceptance state according to this example, when the operation unit (6B operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled, the ally character YS-B6 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic (one animation display), and the sound effect (6B post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to this "one animation display" can be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change, but in this case, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly started in response to the detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) is always set to a specific time (e.g., 1 second) or less, just like in the 1B acceptance state.

In other words, in this case, from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 174, the auto-hit function will start a new "one-shot animation display (one of the post-acceptance changes)" at regular intervals, in which ally character YS-B6 attacks enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic, and this repeated display of "one-shot animation display" is represented in the figure as "hit-on display HB6a."

Similarly, during the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 174, the sound effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" (the 6th B post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes) will begin to be output anew at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound effect" is represented in the figure as "first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a."

In this regard, the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 174 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the performance content corresponding to the 6B acceptance acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, the "second post-acceptance output sound (see Figure 174 (i))" that indicates that a performance progression has occurred in the 6B acceptance acceptance state will not be triggered by the operation acceptance. Also, during this period, the 6B operation prompt light LB6 will not be terminated and will maintain its illuminating state.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 174, the display of "light-based magic attacks" and "light effects" as shown in FIG. 175 and the output of corresponding sound effects are repeatedly executed at regular intervals by the auto-rapid-hit function (post-acceptance changes are repeatedly executed at regular intervals) (rapid-hit display HB6a, first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a), but the attack mode does not change. This makes it possible to confirm the same presentation as when the player performed the operation, or whether the presentation did not progress, without having to perform monotonous repetitive operations, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Note that the ally character YS-B6 and enemy character BOSS-B6 may not be displayed until an operation is accepted, and may instead appear and be displayed once an operation is accepted (until the valid period expires, or for a predetermined period of time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2, the "second post-acceptance output sound (see FIG. 174(i))" that indicates that progress has been made in the presentation content in the 6B acceptance acceptance state does not begin to be executed, so it is possible to effectively indicate that progress has not been made in the presentation content.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 174 and 175 are designed to simulate a situation where a player becomes frustrated that the presentation is not progressing, and so temporarily suspends operation of the 6B operation unit at timing tBf2-A2 to check the situation when no operation is being performed, thereby disabling the auto-rapid-hit function.

Here, in the 6B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 174(f), even if the operation of the 6B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBf2-A2 and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB6a, which had been in an active state until then, will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire display HB6a will continue to be in an active state even after timing tBf2-A2 (even after the 6B operation unit is put into a non-operated state), for example, until the "one-time video display" that was in an active state has been executed for the predetermined display time and is finished being displayed (or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 6B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HB1a, which had been active until then, is not immediately hidden, so it takes time before the situation when the 6B operation reception is permitted becomes easier to recognize. This means that a significant amount of time is consumed in the 6B operation reception permitted state, and is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily interrupt the operation state of the 6B operation unit to more easily confirm the situation when the 6B operation reception is permitted in the non-operating state.

Also, in this example, if the operation of the 6B operation unit is stopped and it is put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HB6a is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the rapid-hit display HB6a is hidden is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation of the 6B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-rapid tapping function is disabled until the rapid tapping indicator HB6a is hidden and a situation appears in which it is easy to recognize the situation when the 6B reception acceptance state is not being operated. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 6B reception acceptance state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when trying to temporarily suspend the operation of the 6B operation unit to more easily check the situation when the 6B reception acceptance state is not being operated.

Furthermore, in the 6B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 174(h) and elsewhere, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a, which had been in an active state until then, is not rendered inaudible when the operation of the 6B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBf2-A2 to disable the auto-repeat function, just like the rapid-fire display HB6a. In other words, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a will continue to be output even after timing tBf2-A2 (even after the 6B operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an active state has been executed and output for the predetermined output time (or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state).

With this configuration, even if the operation of the 6B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a, which had been active until then, will not immediately be put into a non-output state. In this case, it will appear as if the auto-repeated tapping function is still active, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation of the 6B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a (6B event) is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-output state of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 6B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a (6B event) is no longer output, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 6B acceptance-permitted state, which is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation of the 6B operation unit.

Furthermore, in the 6B reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation of the 6B operation unit is interrupted (transferred to a non-operation state) while the rapid-hit display HB6a and the first post-reception output sound Sα6a are both in an execution state, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB6a is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is made silent are set to be different, as shown in Figures 174(f) and 174(h). In the figure, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB6a is made invisible is set to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is made silent, but the reverse relationship may also be set. Alternatively, due to the aforementioned nature that the time until the display or silent state is set to be indefinite, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB6a is made invisible may occur both before and after the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is made silent. It is also possible for the timing to be the same for both.

In this configuration, in the 6B reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the player interrupts the operation of the 6B operation unit (places it in a non-operated state) while the rapid-hit display HB6a and the first post-reception output sound Sα6a are both active, as shown in Figures 174(f) and 174(h), the rapid-hit display HB6a will continue to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound Sα6a will continue to be output while the 6B operation unit is in a non-operated state. However, as time passes after the 6B operation unit is placed in a non-operated state, the rapid-hit display HB6a, which had been displayed, will disappear and the first post-reception output sound Sα6a will no longer be output, as shown in Figures 174(f) and 174(h) and 175(c). This allows the player to easily recognize that the auto rapid-hit function has been disabled (see Figure 175(d)).

As mentioned above, the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 174 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto rapid-fire function and multiple post-acceptance changes are executed, the effect content corresponding to the 6B acceptance-permitted state does not progress. Note that the 6B acceptance-permitted state does not necessarily have to be generated as an acceptance-permitted state in which the effect content may progress; for example, it may be generated as an acceptance-permitted state in which only one mode of post-acceptance change is executed multiple times.

However, as mentioned above, in the 6B reception permission state in this example, the status suggestion display is not displayed, so it is not possible to check the progress of the presentation in that state (the state shown in Figure 175 (c)). As also mentioned above, it is also possible to display the status suggestion display even in the 6B reception permission state, or to realize status suggestions in that state (the state shown in Figure 175 (c)) using a method other than display (e.g., lamp illumination).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 174(a), it is assumed that the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state at timing tBf2-B1 within the 6B reception acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 175(d)).

In this example, if the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tBf2-B1 within the 6B acceptance state, this will trigger a "6B post-acceptance change (6B post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 174(f) and (h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 175(d)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBf2-B1 within the 6B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 174(f) and (h), a post-6B acceptance change occurs in which the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 (a sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "post-6B acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that even when operation of the 6B operation unit is resumed at timing tBf2-B1 within the 6B reception acceptance state, the effect corresponding to that 6B reception acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 175(d), the post-6B reception change (post-6B reception display, post-6B reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-6B reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance of the 6B operation unit at timing tBf2-A1. The details of the effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 174 and 175 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 6B operation unit) initiated at timing tBf2-B1 will be maintained until timing tBf2-B3, activating the auto-rapid-hit function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3 (the period during which the 6B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the 6B operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance role device operation) will be executed multiple times.

And even during this "period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3 (the period during which the 6B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HB6a and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a) is the same as in the "period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2" described above (see Figure 175 (b)), unless the presentation content progresses. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 175, the period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3 is assumed to be a case in which, of the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the operation accepted at timing tBf2-B2 within that period has led to progress in the presentation content corresponding to the 6B acceptance acceptance state (presentation situation shown in Figure 175(e)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 174, the "6th B post-acceptance change (6th B post-acceptance effect)" in response to operation acceptance is executed in a manner in which the effect content has not progressed during the period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B2, whereas during the period from timing tBf2-B2 to timing tBf2-B3, the "6th B post-acceptance change (6th B post-acceptance effect)" in response to operation acceptance is executed in a manner in which the effect content has progressed.

More specifically, after the progression of the presentation has been completed in this way, when one operation is received from the 6B operation unit, the "single animated display" will be displayed as the "post-6B reception display" in a manner that has progressed the presentation, such as "ally character YS-B6 uses a stronger light-based magic to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-B6," as shown in FIG. 175(e).

In this example, once the effect has progressed, the degree of progress in the effect will not be returned to the state before the progress was made, as long as the 6B acceptance state continues. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted again at the 6B operation unit after the one video display that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced effect has ended, the state when the operation was accepted at the 6B operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-B6" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B6" with light-based magic) will appear as one video display that has changed to the advanced effect.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tBf2-B2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, this "single video display" in which such a change in appearance has occurred will be played multiple times by the auto-hit function.

Furthermore, even in the period after timing tBf2-B2 when the performance has progressed, the mode (one animation display) in which ally character YS-B6 attacks enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic is executed anew at regular intervals (predetermined intervals (same time as before the change)) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one animation display" of the performance when the performance has progressed is also executed anew at regular intervals by the auto-rapid tapping function, and the repeated display (multiple post-acceptance changes) of this "one animation display (one post-acceptance change)" of the progression mode is represented in the diagram as "rapid tapping display HB6b."

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tBf2-B2," the timing at which the effect content progresses, arrives, the state of the rapid-hit display HB6 changes from "state HB6a" to "state HB6b," as shown in Figures 174(f) and 175(e). From this point on, while the auto rapid-hit function is enabled (timings tBf2-B2 to tBf2-B3), the rapid-hit display HB6 will be executed in "state HB6b."

In this example, the state of the rapid-fire display HB6 changes depending on the progress of the presentation, but it may not change depending on the progress of the presentation. In other words, even if the rapid-fire display HB6 continues to run in the same state regardless of the progress of the presentation, the player can confirm through the rapid-fire display HB6 that the auto rapid-fire function is enabled and the number (frequency) of operations being accepted, and can also confirm the progress of the presentation through the output of the 6B post-acceptance output sound Sβ6. As mentioned above, the 6B acceptance permission state may also be realized as a type of acceptance permission state in which the progress of the presentation itself is not possible.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a single operation is accepted on the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 6B acceptance state, in addition to the "6B acceptance display," a first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the "6B acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 174(h). As mentioned above, such "6B acceptance output sound" can include the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," as well as the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 that indicates that progress has been made in the presentation corresponding to the 6B acceptance state as shown in FIG. 174(i).

Therefore, in the period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 174, when timing tBf2-B2 arrives, at which time the presentation progresses, as shown in FIG. 174(i), the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 begins to be output in mode Sβ6b-1 based on the operation acceptance (presentation progress) at timing tBf2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the presentation has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output duration of the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6, which is output in response to an operation acceptance.

However, in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance content advances. Therefore, when timing tBf2-B2 arrives, when the performance content advances, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation acceptance, but in the same manner as when the operation was accepted before timing tBf2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not the performance advances at timing tBf2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound Sα6) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will be newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound effect" is represented in the figure as "first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a during this period is the same as in the "period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2" described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a is not changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content, but it may be changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 174 and 175 are based on the assumption that the player again interrupts operation of the 6B operation unit at timing tBf2-B3, thereby disabling the auto-rapid-hit function.

As described above, in the 6B reception permission state, even if the operation of the 6B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled while the 6B reception permission state continues, the rapid-fire display HB6, which had been in an active state until then, will not be hidden as a result. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 174(f), even if the operation of the 6B operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBf2-B3, the rapid-fire display HB6b will continue to be in an active state even after timing tBf2-B3 (even after the 6B operation unit becomes non-operated), for example, until the "one-time video display" that was in an active state has been executed for a predetermined display time and is finished being displayed, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

Also, as with the rapid-hit display HB6a, if you stop operating the 6B operation unit and put it into a non-operating state while the rapid-hit display HB6b is displayed, the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the rapid-hit display HB6b is no longer displayed is not set to a fixed time but is instead variable.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 6B acceptance state, even if the operation of the 6B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 6B acceptance state continues and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, this does not trigger the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a, which had been in an output state until then, to be put into a non-output state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 174(h), even if the operation of the 6B operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBf2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a will continue to be output from timing tBf2-B3 onwards (even after the 6B operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has been executed for the predetermined output time and is finished being output, or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state.

However, the timing tBf2-B3 shown in Figure 174 assumes that the operation of the 6B operating unit is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6, which began to be output at timing tBf2-B2, continues to be output.

In this regard, in the 6B reception-permitted state, like the first post-reception output sound Sα6, the output state of the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 is not terminated (made inaudible) when the operation state of the 6B operation unit is interrupted (made non-operated), as shown in FIG. 174(i), etc., even if the operation state of the 6B operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBf2-B3, the output state of the second post-reception output sound Sβ6b-1 will continue from timing tBf2-B3 onwards (even after the 6B operation unit is made non-operated), until the second post-reception output sound Sβ6b-1 is executed and output for a predetermined output time until it is completed, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

Also in this example, if the operation of the 6B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operated state while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 (6B event) is being output, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite. Similarly, for the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 (6B event), if the operation of the 6B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operated state while the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 is being output, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 6B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 (6B event) and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 (6B event) become inaudible, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 6B acceptance-permitted state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation of the 6B operation unit.

Furthermore, in the 6B reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, even if the operation of the 6B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operation state) while the rapid-hit display HB6b and the first post-reception output sound Sα6a are both in an execution state, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB6b is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is made silent are set to be different, as shown in FIG. 174(f) and (h), etc. In the figure, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB6b is made invisible is set before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is made silent, but the opposite relationship may also be set. Alternatively, due to the aforementioned nature that the time until the display is made invisible or silent is indefinite, the timing at which the rapid-hit display HB6b is made invisible may occur both before and after the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is made silent. Furthermore, there may be cases where the timing of each is the same. Note that this relationship between the rapid-hit display HB6b and the first post-reception output sound Sα6a also holds true between the rapid-hit display HB6b and the second post-reception output sound Sβ6, and between the first post-reception output sound Sα6a and the second post-reception output sound Sβ6, and the same can be said for other examples.

In this configuration, in the 6B reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the 6B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the rapid-hit display HB6b, first post-reception output sound Sα6a, and second post-reception output sound Sβ6b-1 are all in an active state, as shown in Figures 174(f), (h), and (i), the rapid-hit display HB6b continues to be displayed, the first post-reception output sound Sα6a continues to be output, and the second post-reception output sound Sβ6b-1 continues to be output, while the 6B operation unit is in a non-operated state. However, as time passes after the 6B operation unit is put into a non-operated state (the time has passed since timing tBf2-B3), the rapid-hit display HB6b, which had been displayed, disappears, as shown in Figures 174(f) and 175(f), etc. This allows the player to easily recognize when the auto-hit function has been disabled (see Figure 175 (f)).

In addition, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 would normally end (become inaudible) as time passes since the 6B operation unit is placed in a non-operated state (the time passes from timing tBf2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 174(a), it is assumed that the 6B operation unit is again put into an operated state at timing tBf2-C1 (the performance situation shown in FIG. 175(g)), which is after timing tBf2-B3 when the 6B operation unit is put into a non-operated state, and when both the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 are in an audible state (before the output state is ended).

In this example, even if the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operational state and an operation is accepted at timing tBf2-C1 within the 6B acceptance state, this will trigger a "6B post-acceptance change (6B post-acceptance effect)" in response to the operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 174(f) and (h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 175(g)), just as in the case of timing tBf2-B1 described above.

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tBf2-C1 within the 6B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 174(f) and (h), a post-6B acceptance change occurs in which the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 (a sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "post-6B acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

This example assumes that when operation of the 6B operation unit is resumed at timing tBf2-C1 within the 6B reception acceptance state, the effect content corresponding to that 6B reception acceptance state does not progress from the state shown in FIG. 175(e) (first-stage progression state). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 175(g), the post-6B reception change (post-6B reception display, post-6B reception sound, etc.) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the post-6B reception change was first initiated based on operation acceptance of the 6B operation unit at timing tBf-B2. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, as mentioned above, this example assumes that timing tBf2-C1, when operation of the 6B operation unit is resumed, occurs while both the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 are in an audible state.

In this regard, with regard to the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6, the previous output state is terminated based on the restart of operation on the 6B operation unit (operation acceptance) at timing tBf2-C1, and a new output is initiated in response to this new operation acceptance. In contrast, with regard to the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6, the previous output state is continued without any change based on the restart of operation on the 6B operation unit (operation acceptance) at timing tBf2-C1.

With this configuration, in the 6B reception-permitted state, when an operation is received for the 6B operation unit that had been in a non-operated state while the 6B post-reception output sound is being output in response to the operation reception, this will either cause the 6B post-reception output sound to end (first post-reception output sound Sα6) or not end (second post-reception output sound Sβ6), thereby providing an ideal sense of tension when the 6B operation unit that had been in a non-operated state is put into an operating state again. It goes without saying that in the 6B reception permitted state, in addition to the case where operation is received by the 6B operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 is being output and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 is being output, there are also cases where operation is received by the 6B operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 is being output and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 is not being output, and there are also cases where operation is received by the 6B operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 is not being output and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 is being output.

The rapid-hit display HB6 may also be configured to continue displaying at timing tBf2-C1. In this case, when an operation is received from the 6B operation unit, which had been in an unoperated state until then, it is desirable to terminate the previous "one-shot video display" that was in progress and instead start a new display (one-shot video display) triggered by the new operation reception.

In addition, the presentation examples shown in Figures 174 and 175 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 6B operation unit) that began at timing tBf2-C1 continues even at timing tBf2-C2 when operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is no longer permitted (the timing when the 6B acceptance acceptance state ends), and as a result the auto rapid-fire function remains active until timing tBf2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBf2-C1 to timing tBf2-C2 (the period during which the 6B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the 6B operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance role operation) will be executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the "period from timing tBf2-C1 to timing tBf2-C2 (the period during which the 6B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto rapid-fire function (such as the rapid-fire display HB6b and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a) will be the same as in the "period from timing tBf2-B2 to timing tBf2-B3" described above (see FIG. 175(e)), as shown in FIG. 175(g), unless further progress in the presentation occurs. The details of this presentation have been described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this example, during the period from timing tBf2-C1 to timing tBf2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 174, among the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid tap function, if the operation accepted at a predetermined timing within that period (such as the result of the effect determination) leads to further progress in the effect content corresponding to the 6B acceptance acceptance state (if a second stage of progress is made), the final form of the post-acceptance change will appear. However, unlike the 1B acceptance acceptance state and the 2B acceptance acceptance state, the 6B acceptance acceptance state in this example will not end early even if the final form of the post-acceptance change appears. Therefore, if the operation state is maintained thereafter, the post-acceptance change will be executed multiple times in the final form until timing tBf2-C2 arrives.

As mentioned above, the 6B acceptance state in this example assumes that the final post-acceptance change does not occur. Therefore, during the period from timing tBf2-C1 to timing tBf2-C2 in the example shown in Figure 174, the "6B post-acceptance change (6B post-acceptance effect)" in response to the operation acceptance will be executed multiple times in a state in which the effect content progresses only once (see Figure 175 (g)), and when timing tBf2-C2 arrives, this triggers the disabling of the auto-rapid function that had been enabled up until then.

In this regard, when the auto rapid-fire function is disabled at timing tBf2-A2 or timing tBf2-B3, the rapid-fire display HB6 that was displayed by the auto rapid-fire function until then is not hidden (it is hidden after an indefinite period of time after the auto rapid-fire function is disabled), but when the auto rapid-fire function is disabled at timing tBf2-C2, the rapid-fire display HB6 that was displayed by the auto rapid-fire function until then is hidden (after a fixed period of time (e.g., 0 seconds) from the time the operation was accepted).

In addition, in this example, when the auto-repeat function is disabled at timing tBf2-A2 or timing tBf2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a that had been output by the auto-repeat function until then is not made inaudible (it is made inaudible after an indefinite period of time after the auto-repeat function is disabled). However, when the auto-repeat function is disabled at timing tBf2-C2, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a that had been output by the auto-repeat function until then is made inaudible (after a fixed period of time after the operation is accepted). With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether the 6B acceptance permission state has ended based on the output status of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a after the auto-repeat function is disabled.

In addition, in this example, it is assumed that timing tBf2-C2 arrives after the second post-reception output sound Sβ6b-1, which began output at timing tBf2-B2, has become inaudible, but it may also arrive while the second post-reception output sound Sβ6b-1 is being audibly output. However, in this case, unlike the "first post-reception output sound Sα6a," it is desirable not to terminate the output state of the "second post-reception output sound Sβ6" that is currently being executed when timing tBf2-C2 arrives, but to maintain the execution state until the remaining execution time is exhausted.

In addition, even if timing tBf2-C2 arrives while the "rapid tap display HB6" or "first post-acceptance output sound Sα6" is in the middle of execution, the execution state may be maintained until the remaining execution time is consumed.

In this example, when timing tBf2-C2 arrives, the 6B operation prompt light LB6, which prompts the player to perform an operation, is turned off. In other words, the 6B operation prompt light LB6 begins to emit light when a 6B operation acceptance state is established, and stops emitting light when the 6B operation acceptance state ends. This indicates that an operation acceptance state has been established, or that an operation acceptance state has been established.

In other words, in this case, the "change after 6B acceptance (post-6B acceptance effect)" in this example indicates that the 6B acceptance acceptance state has ended without the "final stage effect pattern (for example, an effect corresponding to the above-mentioned effect JA1c)" appearing among the effect contents corresponding to the 6B acceptance acceptance state (this is not a required configuration for having the configuration described below).

In this example, as shown in Figures 174(a), (b) and 175(h), it is assumed that the player continues operating the "6th B operation unit" that began at timing tBf2-C1 even after timing tBf2-C2 has arrived.

However, once the 6B reception-permitted state has been transitioned to a "state in which reception of operations to the 6B operation unit is not permitted" (from timing tBf2-C2 onwards), in a situation in which the "operation-related display" that suggests that reception of operations to the 6B operation unit is permitted is not displayed, operations to the 6B operation unit will not be accepted based on the detection of the operation state that has been maintained since before timing tBf2-C2 (the 6B reception-permitted state). This configuration may be achieved by preventing a state in which operations are permitted for the 6B operation unit from secretly occurring after a transition from the 6B reception-permitted state to a "state in which operations are not permitted for the 6B operation unit" (after timing tBf2-C2) occurs, while no "operation-related display" that suggests that operations are permitted for the 6B operation unit is displayed. Alternatively, this may be achieved by preventing a state in which operations are permitted for the 6B operation unit from secretly occurring, but by not determining that the operation state that has been maintained since before timing tBf2-C2 (the 6B reception-permitted state) is a valid operation and instead invalidating it (not accepting operations).

Therefore, from timing tBf2-C1 onwards, while the "operation-related display" indicating that operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted remains off, no matter how long the "6B operation unit" is maintained in an operating state, the auto-rapid tapping function will not be enabled, operations will not be accepted multiple times, and post-acceptance changes in response to accepted operations will not be performed multiple times during that period.

Furthermore, even if, after timing tBf2-C1, an "operation-related display" suggesting that operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted is displayed and a state in which operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted occurs, and then a state in which operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted is secretly generated while the "operation-related display" suggesting that operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is not displayed, this may be achieved by invalidating (not accepting operations) the detection of the operation state maintained from before timing tBf2-C2 (the 6B acceptance-permitted state) without determining it as a valid operation. In this case, even when an "operation-related display" suggesting that operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted is displayed and a state in which operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted, it is desirable to invalidate (not accept operations) the detection of the operation state maintained from before timing tBf2-C2 (the 6B acceptance-permitted state) without determining it as a valid operation. Furthermore, even if an operation state for the 6B operation unit is maintained over multiple symbol changes from timing tBf2-C1 onwards, and an "operation-related display" suggesting that operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted is not displayed, and a state in which operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted secretly occurs, it is desirable to invalidate (not accept) the detection of the operation state maintained from before timing tBf2-C2 (6B acceptance permitted state) rather than determining this as a valid operation.

Furthermore, in order to optimally maintain the presentation of the 6B acceptance state, if the player does not perform an operation until timing tBf2-C2 arrives, at which point acceptance of operations to the 6B operation unit is no longer permitted, it is desirable that the same post-acceptance changes as when such an operation is performed do not occur (the automatic button function is not enabled).

Furthermore, the 6B reception permission state is not prepared as a "type of reception permission state in which the reception permission state can be terminated early based on the reception of an operation," and the state will not be terminated based on the reception of an operation to the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)."

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "7B reception permission state" as part of the reception permission period (operation permission state). Figure 176 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "7B reception permission state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "Condition 7B" as the generation condition, and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 177 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "7B reception permission state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "7B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the "7B fluctuation pattern." After this, it starts the decorative symbol SZ fluctuation performance (such as a performance depiction according to the 7B fluctuation pattern or sound output of background music playback according to the 7B fluctuation pattern (such as normal background music playback when not in a reach)), and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "7B fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 176 (b), during the execution period of the variable effect related to the "7B variable pattern," the 7B acceptance permitted state (valid period) can be generated (the situation shown in Figure 177 (a)) in which "acceptance of operations to the 7B operation unit regarding post-7B acceptance changes (post-7B acceptance display HB7, post-7B acceptance output sound Sα7, etc.)" is permitted based on the arrival of timing tBg2, when the 7B time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (based on "condition 7B" being satisfied).

Here, in the 7B reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, the "7B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is not the "operation button 410" that is permitted to accept multiple operations in the 1B reception acceptance state and the 2B reception acceptance state, but is set as the "sword ornament 5001" that is permitted to accept multiple operations even in the 3B reception acceptance state, the 4B reception acceptance state, and the 5B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted until the 7B reception acceptance state is ended.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 176(b) to (e), when the 7B reception acceptance state occurs, no operation-related displays such as a model image of the object operated by the player (here, the "sword decoration 5001" as the 7B operation unit), no message display related to operations on the object operated by the player (here, the "sword decoration 5001" as the 7B operation unit), and no status indication displays that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation for the entire period after the operation acceptance is made are displayed. Furthermore, in this example, no operation-related output sound is audibly output to prompt the player to accept an operation. In this way, the 7B reception acceptance state according to this example makes it difficult to recognize that acceptance of operations on the "7B operation unit" has been accepted.

Furthermore, in this example, when the 7B acceptance state is reached, as shown in Figures 176(b) and (j), the operation prompting light that prompts the player to perform an operation is not emitted. In this case, it goes without saying that the 7B operation unit (sword decoration 5001) does not necessarily have to be equipped with a light-emitting unit.

When the 7B reception allowance state is configured as described above, none of the following will be executed: an operation-related display prompting operation via a visual indicator, an operation-related output sound prompting operation via a sound, or an operation-prompting light emitting light prompting operation via a light. Therefore, the 7B reception allowance state not only offers greater confidentiality than the 4B reception allowance state in which all of these are executed, but also offers greater confidentiality than the 3B reception allowance state in which no operation-prompting light emitting light is executed, and the 5B reception allowance state in which neither the operation-related output sound nor the operation-prompting light emitting light is executed, thereby providing an opportunity to operate in a more tense atmosphere. Furthermore, although the operation target is different, the 7B reception allowance state can be said to offer greater confidentiality than the 6B reception allowance state in which no operation-related display or operation-related output sound is executed.

Furthermore, even in the 7B operation reception acceptance state of this example, as shown in Figures 176(e) and 177(a), an ally character corresponding to the type of the 7B operation reception acceptance state (here, ally character YS-B7) and an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 7B operation reception acceptance state (here, enemy character BOSS-B7 depicted as a ghost) are displayed. Each time an operation (operation acceptance) is performed on the "7B operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)," this can trigger an effect in which "ally character YS-B7" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B7." However, in this example, ally character YS-B7 and enemy character BOSS-B7 do not function as the above-mentioned "situation suggestion display" that can indicate the progress of the effect even when the 7B operation unit (operation button 410) is not in an operation state. Additionally, in the 7B acceptance state, the ally character YS-B7 and enemy character BOSS-B7 may not necessarily be displayed.

It should be noted that the status indication display may also be displayed in the 7B reception acceptance state. However, in this case, in consideration of the confidentiality of the 7B reception acceptance state, it is desirable that the status indication display not be displayed while no operation is being accepted, but rather be displayed only when an operation is accepted, and remain displayed thereafter.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 176, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBg2-A1 within the 7B acceptance state.

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBg2-A1 within the 7B acceptance state, a "7B post-acceptance change (7B post-acceptance effect)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 176(f) and (h) (the effect situation shown in Figure 177(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" at timing tBg2-A1 within the 7B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 176(f) and 176(h), a change occurs after 7B acceptance, in which a "7B post-acceptance output sound" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is audibly output, and a "7B post-acceptance display" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" begins to be displayed.

That is, when an operation is accepted once for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 7B acceptance state, the "7B acceptance post-display HB7" corresponding to that operation acceptance appears as shown in FIG. 177(b), with the faces of the "ally character YS-B7" and the "enemy character BOSS-B7" zoomed in on each other to suggest a showdown (7B acceptance post-display HB7). This allows the player to recognize that an operation has been accepted for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)." However, in this example, the 7B acceptance state does not change the appearance of the "7B acceptance post-display HB7" based on the results of the presentation determination made when the operation was accepted, even if the presentation progresses. Also, as will be described later, in the 7B acceptance state, even if the so-called auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is enabled, multiple display changes will not occur on the performance display device 1600 as post-acceptance changes. In other words, in this case, in the 7B acceptance state, only when the first operation is accepted for the "7B operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" will "7B post-acceptance display HB7" be executed as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to that operation acceptance, but thereafter, while the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is enabled, "7B post-acceptance display HB7" will not be executed again (multiple times) (the auto-repeated tapping function is not applied to the "display change" as one of the post-acceptance changes).

With this configuration, the strong confidentiality of the 7B reception acceptance state described above is temporarily lost with the appearance of the "7B post-reception display HB7 (see Figure 177 (b))." However, from then on, confidentiality is granted (made difficult to recognize) regarding a different subject (the auto-rapid function) from the subject (validity period) that has been kept secret until now, namely, "whether or not the so-called auto-rapid function (long press function) is enabled." This is expected to favorably increase interest in the game while maintaining a sense of tension. It goes without saying that in the above-mentioned 1B reception acceptance state through 6B reception acceptance state, no "performance elements" that are not subject to the auto-rapid function are provided as post-reception changes.

In addition, in this example, when a single operation is accepted on the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 7B acceptance state, in addition to the "7B acceptance display HB7," the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 may be output as the "7B acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 176 (h). However, as will be described later, in the 7B acceptance state, unlike the 1B acceptance state and the 2B acceptance state, there is no possibility of an output sound different from the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 being output as the "7B acceptance output sound." The first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 may be any sound that can indicate that an operation has been accepted by the player, and may be any sound that can indicate that the 7B operation unit is being maintained in an operating state when the auto-repeated function is enabled.

In the 7B reception-permitting state in this example, if the effect content progresses as a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception at the 7B operation unit, the manner (type of sound) of the output as the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 is changed. After the effect content progresses in this way, as long as the 7B reception-permitting state continues, the degree of progress of the effect content will not be returned to the state before the progress, and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 will be output in the progressed manner each time an operation is received. In other words, in this case, in the 7B reception-permitting state, although it is not possible to confirm through the display on the effect display device 1600 whether the effect content has progressed as a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception at the 7B operation unit, it is possible to confirm through the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 whether the effect content has progressed as a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception at the 7B operation unit.

Note that in the 7B reception allowance state, unlike the 6B reception allowance state (a reception allowance state in which the performance level is set for the performance content), the performance level is not set for the performance content as a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception to the 7B operation unit, and instead, each time an operation is received to the 7B operation unit, the 7B event (which may be just a display, just a sound, just a light emission, or just a movable body movement) as a post-acceptance change may simply be repeatedly executed (occurred).

Furthermore, the 7B reception-allowed state differs from the above-mentioned 3B reception-allowed state, 4B reception-allowed state, and 5B reception-allowed state in that the above-mentioned "7B post-reception display HB7" is executed as one of the post-reception changes in response to operation reception, but other changes as post-reception changes (here, corresponding to the "first post-reception output sound Sα7," but which do not have to be sound) may be executed as the same changes (here, sounds of the same type) as in the above-mentioned 3B reception-allowed state, 4B reception-allowed state, and 5B reception-allowed state (first post-reception output sounds Sα3, Sα4, Sα5). For example, in the 7B reception allowance state, "7B reception post-display HB7" and "7B event (which may be only sound, only light emission, or only movable body movement)" are executable as post-reception changes in response to operation reception on the 7B operation unit, and of these, only the "7B event" can be executed multiple times, whereas in the above-mentioned 3B reception allowance state, 4B reception allowance state, and 5B reception allowance state, for example, only an event the same as the above-mentioned "7B event" can be executed as a post-reception change in response to operation reception, and only this same event can be executed multiple times.

Here, in the 7B acceptance state according to this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the depiction shown in FIG. 177(b) and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 appear (change after one acceptance), but for subsequent operations, there is no change in the depiction shown in FIG. 177(b), and each time an operation is accepted, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 is audibly output. Then, as the performance progresses over multiple operations, the output form of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 changes, and when the "final form" appears as this form, a performance is provided that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if the "final form" does not appear as the form of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7, it suggests low expectations.

However, this presentation content for the 7B reception permission state is merely an example, and other content may be substituted for it. For example, as a post-reception change corresponding to the 7B reception permission state, in addition to the above-mentioned "7B post-reception display HB7," as long as there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to operation reception (for example, lamp illumination or movable body movement), the "post-reception output sound" may not necessarily be executed. Even with this configuration, the player can understand that the operation reception has been performed appropriately.

This example assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 7B operation unit) initiated at timing tBg2-A1 continues until timing tBg2-A2, as shown in Figure 176(a).

In this regard, the 7B operation acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) in which simply maintaining the operation unit (7B operation unit) in an operation state causes a corresponding post-operation change (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, and a post-operation device operation) to be executed multiple times." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 176(a), during the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2 (the period in which the 7B operation unit is maintained in an operation state), operations are accepted multiple times for the 7B operation unit, and a post-operation change (for example, at least one of a post-operation display, a post-operation output sound, a post-operation light emission, and a post-operation device operation) corresponding to that operation is executed multiple times.

As mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted by the 7B operation unit in the 7B acceptance state, the "7B acceptance post-display HB7" is displayed as shown in Figure 177(b), in which the faces of "ally character YS-B7" and "enemy character BOSS-B7" are zoomed in on each other, suggesting a showdown (7B acceptance post-display HB7).

However, as mentioned above, as a display change as one of the post-acceptance changes, the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" occurs only once between timing tBg2-A1 and timing tBg2-A2. After this, no matter how many operations are accepted using the auto-repeated press function (long press function), no new display changes will occur as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to that operation acceptance. Note that the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" in this example remains displayed even at timing tBe2-C2, when the state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the 7th B operation unit ends, and is intended to be hidden thereafter.

As mentioned above, when a single operation is accepted on the 7B operation unit in the 7B acceptance state, the 7B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) is output. Therefore, during the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2 when the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled, the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" is displayed only once, and this 7B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) is played multiple times.

Here, in the 7B reception allowance state, when the operation unit (7B operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the 7B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα7) is executed multiple times as one of the post-reception changes, but the execution interval (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-reception change to the start of execution of the next post-reception change) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). It is desirable to set this "fixed time" to the same time as in the 3B reception allowance state and the 4B reception allowance state, which target the same operation unit.

Furthermore, in the 7B acceptance state according to this example, when the operation unit (7B operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the 7B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) is executed multiple times as one of the post-acceptance changes. At this time, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly initiated in response to the detection (the interval from the start of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of the next post-acceptance change) is always set to a specific time (e.g., 1 second) or less. However, it is desirable to set this interval in the 7B acceptance state to a different length of time than the interval when the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled in the above-mentioned 1B acceptance state. For example, it may be set to a time longer than the interval when the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled in the above-mentioned 1B acceptance state, but less than a specific time (e.g., 1 second).

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 176, the 7B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7), which is one of the post-acceptance changes, will begin to be output anew at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of "sound" will be represented in the figure as "first post-acceptance output sound Sα7a."

In this regard, the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 176 assumes that although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the performance content corresponding to the 7B acceptance permission state does not progress. Therefore, during this period, there is no change in the manner in which the 7B post-acceptance output sound (output as the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) is output.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 176, while the "7th B post-reception display HB7" shown in FIG. 177(b) appears as a post-reception change, the output of the 7th B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα7) is repeatedly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated function (post-reception changes are repeatedly executed at regular time intervals) (first post-reception output sound Sα7a), but no change occurs in the output of the 7th B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα7). This makes it possible to confirm the presentation content corresponding to multiple operation receptions, as well as the fact that the presentation content has not progressed, simply by maintaining the operating state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Note that the ally character YS-B7 and enemy character BOSS-B7 may not be displayed until an operation is accepted, and may instead appear and be displayed as "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" once an operation is accepted.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 176 and 177 are designed to assume that the player temporarily suspends operation of the 7B operation unit at timing tBf2-A2, thereby disabling the auto-rapid-hit function, in order to check the situation when no operation is being performed.

Here, in the 7B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 176(f), even if the operation of the 7B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBg2-A2 and the auto-rapid tap function is disabled, the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" (post-acceptance change), which had been in an active state until then, will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" will continue to be in an active state even after timing tBg2-A2 (even after the 7B operation unit is put into a non-operated state), for example, until the "one-time animation display" that was in an active state has been executed for the predetermined display time and is finished displaying (until one-time post-acceptance change is finished executing).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 7B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-tap function is disabled, the "7B post-acceptance display HB7," which had been active until then, is not immediately hidden (the post-acceptance change is not terminated midway through one execution). This means that it takes time for the operation status in the 7B acceptance state to become easy to recognize. This means that the remaining time in the 7B acceptance state is significantly consumed, which is expected to create a sense of tension when trying to interrupt the operation state of the 7B operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 7B acceptance state. This is particularly true in this example, since the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" remains displayed even at timing tBe2-C2, when the operation acceptance state for the 7B operation unit ends, and is then hidden.

Note that the "7B post-reception display HB7" may not necessarily remain displayed at timing tBe2-C2 when the state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the 7B operation unit ends. Alternatively, the "7B post-reception display HB7" may remain displayed at timing tBe2-C2 when the state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the 7B operation unit ends, or may be hidden while the state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the 7B operation unit continues.

Also, in this example, if the operation of the 7B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the "7B post-reception display HB7" is displayed, the time from the non-operating state until the "7B post-reception display HB7" is put into a non-displaying state (the time until one post-reception change that was in the middle of execution is completed) is not set to a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 7B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-rapid tap function is disabled until the "7B post-reception display HB7" is hidden and a situation emerges where the operation status in the 7B reception-permitted state becomes easy to recognize. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 7B reception-permitted state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend operation of the 7B operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 7B reception-permitted state.

Furthermore, in the 7B acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 176(h) and elsewhere, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7a (7B event) that had been in an active state until then will not be rendered inaudible when the operation of the 7B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tBg2-A2 and the auto-repeated function is disabled, just like the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" described above. In other words, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7a will continue to be output even after timing tBg2-A2 (even after the 7B operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until the "single output sound" that was in an active state has been executed and output for the predetermined output time (or for the predetermined time from the non-operated state).

With this configuration, even if the operation of the 7B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7a, which had been in an active state until then, will not immediately be put into a non-output state. In this case, it will appear as if the auto-repeated tapping function is still active, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation of the 7B operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7a (7B event) is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-output state of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which the operation state of the 7B operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7a (7B event) is no longer output, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tapping function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 7B acceptance-permitted state, which is expected to create a desirable sense of tension when attempting to temporarily suspend the operation of the 7B operation unit.

Furthermore, in the 7B reception permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 7B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operating state) while the "7B post-reception display HB7" and the first post-reception output sound Sα7a are both in an executing state, as shown in Figures 176(f) and 176(h), etc., a situation will appear in which the "7B post-reception display HB7" continues to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound SB7a continues to be output while the 7B operation unit is in a non-operating state. However, thereafter, as time passes after the 7B operation unit is put into a non-operating state, the first post-reception output sound Sα7a will be put into a non-output state, as shown in Figures 176(f) and 176(h), etc. However, in this example, the "7th B post-reception display HB7" is configured not to be made invisible before the first post-reception output sound SB7a is made inaudible, and is also not to be made invisible while the 7th B reception-permitted state continues (this is not a required configuration). Even with this configuration, if the player notices that the periodic sound output of the first post-reception output sound Sα7a has stopped, they can recognize relatively quickly that the auto-repeated function has been disabled, which can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension and increase interest in the game.

As described above, the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 176 assumes that multiple operations are accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function and multiple post-acceptance changes are executed, but the effect corresponding to the 7B acceptance-permitted state does not progress. Therefore, during the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2, after the depiction shown in Figure 177(b) appears, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 (7B event) is simply executed multiple times in the same manner, suggesting that the effect has not progressed. Note that the 7B acceptance-permitted state does not necessarily have to be generated as an acceptance-permitted state in which the effect may progress; for example, it may be generated as an acceptance-permitted state in which only one mode of post-acceptance change is executed multiple times.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 176(a), it is assumed that the "7B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state at timing tBg2-B1 within the 7B reception acceptance state.

In this example, if the "7B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tBg2-B1 within the 7B acceptance state, this will trigger a "7B post-acceptance change (7B post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 176(h) (the effect situation shown in FIG. 177(b)).

However, the 7B acceptance state in this example is realized in such a way that the "previous post-acceptance change" that is currently being executed is terminated midway, without starting a new post-acceptance change. Therefore, if an operation is accepted for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" at timing tBg2-B1 of the 7B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 176(f) and 176(h), the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα7" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is again audibly output as the 7B post-acceptance change, but the "7B post-acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" will not be displayed again. In other words, in this case, while the "7B post-acceptance display (one video display)" shown in FIG. 177(b) continues to be displayed, the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα7" is again audibly output in response to the acceptance of an operation on the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" as a 7B post-acceptance change.

This example also assumes that even when operation of the 7B operation unit is resumed at timing tBg2-B1 within the 7B reception acceptance state, the effect corresponding to that 7B reception acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα7" that is audibly output again at timing tBg2-B1 will be output in the same manner as when the 7B post-acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation acceptance of the 7B operation unit at timing tBg2-A1. Details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the presentation examples shown in Figures 176 and 177 are based on the assumption that the player's operation (operation state of the 7B operation unit) initiated at timing tBg2-B1 will be maintained until timing tBg2-B3, activating the auto-rapid-hit function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBg2-B1 to timing tBg2-B3 (the period during which the 7B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the 7B operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance role operation) will be executed multiple times.

And even during the "period from timing tBg2-B1 to timing tBg2-B3 (the period during which the 7B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto-rapid tapping function (such as the manner in which the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7a is produced) is the same as in the "period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2" described above, unless the effect content progresses. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 176, the period from timing tBg2-B1 to timing tBg2-B3 is assumed to be a case in which, of the multiple operations accepted by the auto-rapid tapping function, the operation accepted at timing tBg2-B2 within that period is used to advance the performance content corresponding to the 7B acceptance acceptance state.

Therefore, during the period from timing tBg2-B1 to timing tBg2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 176, the "seventh B post-acceptance change (in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7)" in response to operation acceptance is executed in a manner in which the performance has not progressed during the period from timing tBg2-B1 to timing tBg2-B2, whereas during the period from timing tBg2-B2 to timing tBg2-B3, the "seventh B post-acceptance change (in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7)" in response to operation acceptance is executed in a manner in which the performance has progressed.

More specifically, at "timing tBg2-B2," which is the timing at which the effect progresses during the period from timing tBg2-B2 to timing tBg2-B3, the appearance (type of sound) of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 changes to an appearance in which the effect progresses by one level, as shown in FIG. 176(h). In contrast, no changes occur to the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" as a result of the progress in the effect. This configuration suggests, through the appearance (type of sound) of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7, that the effect corresponding to the 7B acceptance-permitted state has progressed as a result of (the result of the effect determination based on) the operation acceptance (by the auto-rapid tapping function) performed at timing tBg2-B2.

In this example, once the performance content has progressed, the degree of progress of the performance content will not be returned to the state before the progress as long as the 7B reception acceptance state continues. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted again at the 7B operation unit after the one audible output (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced performance content has ended, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 will be audibly output in a manner that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBg2-B1 to timing tBg2-B3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tBg2-B2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, this "single audible output" with such a change in form will be played multiple times by the auto-hit function.

Furthermore, even in the period after timing tBg2-B2 when the performance content has progressed, the audible output of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 (one audible output) is initiated anew at regular intervals (predetermined intervals (same intervals as before the change)) as the post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one audible output" of the performance content when it has progressed is also initiated anew at regular intervals by the auto-repeated function, and the repeated output (multiple post-acceptance changes) of this "one audible output (one post-acceptance change)" of the progressed mode is represented in the diagram as "first post-acceptance output sound Sα7b."

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tBg2-B2," the timing at which the effect content progresses, arrives, the display mode shown in FIG. 177(b) continues without any change, while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 changes from "mode Sα7a" to "mode Sα7b." From this point on, while the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled (timing tBg2-B2 to tBg2-B3), the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 will be executed multiple times as "mode Sα7b."

While in this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 (7B specific event) is changed depending on the progress of the presentation, it may not change depending on the progress of the presentation. For example, even if the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 is continuously executed in one mode regardless of the progress of the presentation, if other presentation elements (e.g., light emission) are used to indicate the progress of the presentation, the player can confirm through the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 that the auto-rapid tap function is enabled and the number (frequency) of operations being accepted, and can also confirm the degree of progress of the presentation through the mode of other presentation elements (e.g., light emission). Furthermore, as mentioned above, the 7B acceptance-permitted state may be realized as a type of acceptance-permitted state in which progress in the presentation itself is not possible, unlike the 6B acceptance-permitted state. In this case, it goes without saying that the post-acceptance change will be executed multiple times in only one mode.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 176 and 177 are based on the assumption that the player again interrupts operation of the 7B operation unit at timing tBg2-B3, thereby disabling the auto-rapid-hit function.

As described above, in the 7B acceptance state, even if the operation of the 7B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 7B acceptance state is continuing and the auto-repeated function is disabled, this will not cause the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" or "first post-acceptance output sound Sα7" that were running until then to cease execution (a post-acceptance change that was in the middle of execution will not be terminated midway due to non-operation). Therefore, as shown in Figures 176(f) and (h), even if the operation of the 7B operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tBg2-B3, the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" and "first post-acceptance output sound Sα7b" will continue to be displayed or output even after timing tBg2-B3 (even after the 7B operation unit becomes non-operated).

Also, as with the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7a, if operation of the 7B operation unit is interrupted and the unit is placed in a non-operated state while the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7b is being output, the time from the non-operated state until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7b becomes inaudible (the time until one post-acceptance change is completed) is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite. This configuration makes it difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point at which operation of the 7B operation unit is interrupted (placed in a non-operated state) to disable the auto-repeated tap function until the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7 becomes inaudible, i.e., when it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 7B operation acceptance state, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when attempting to interrupt operation of the 7B operation unit.

In addition, in the 7B reception permitted state according to this embodiment, even if the operation state of the 7B operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operation state) while the "7B post-reception display HB7" and the "first post-reception output sound Sα7b" are both in an execution state, the timing at which the "7B post-reception display HB7" is made to be in a non-display state and the timing at which the "first post-reception output sound Sα7b" is made to be in a non-output state are made to be different, as shown in Figures 176 (f) and 176 (h). However, in this example, the timing at which the "7B post-reception display HB7" is made to be in a non-display state is set to be always after the timing at which the "first post-reception output sound Sα7" is made to be in a non-output state, never before that timing.

Here, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7b would normally cease to be output (become inaudible) as time passes since the 7B operation unit is placed in a non-operated state (the time has passed since timing tBg2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 176(a), it is assumed that the 7B operation unit is again put into an operating state at timing tBg2-C1, which is after timing tBg2-B3 when the 7B operation unit is put into a non-operated state and when the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7b is in an audible state (before the output state is ended).

In this regard, even if the "7B operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and operation is accepted at timing tBg2-C1 within the 7B acceptance state, this would normally trigger a "7B post-acceptance change (7B post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 176(h), just as in the case of timing tBg2-B1 described above.

However, as described above, the 7B acceptance state in this example is realized by terminating the "previous post-acceptance change" that is currently in progress, without starting a new post-acceptance change. Therefore, not only at timing tBg2-C1, but even after timing tBg2-C1 arrives, as long as the audible output of the 7B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) that began output during the period from timing tBg2-B2 to timing tBg2-B3 has not ended, the 7B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) will not be newly output. That is, in this case, in the 7B reception acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIG. 176(h), after the audible output (for one predetermined output time) of one 7B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) that has been audibly output across timings tBg2-B3 has ended, a new 7B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) corresponding to that operation acceptance will begin at the timing when the operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit was first made. Note that, after the audible output (for one predetermined output time) of one 7B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) that has been audibly output across timings tBg2-B3 has ended, there is no need to re-operate the 7B operation unit; operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit can be achieved simply by maintaining it in the operation state from timing tBg2-C1.

Furthermore, in this example, even if an operation is accepted for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001)" during the period after timing tBg2-C2, the "7B post-acceptance display (one animation display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001)" will not begin to be displayed again. In other words, in this case, while the "7B post-acceptance display (one animation display)" shown in FIG. 177(b) continues to be displayed, the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα7" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001)" will again be audibly output as a 7B post-acceptance change.

This example also assumes that if operation of the 7B operation unit is resumed within the period from timing tBg2-C1 onwards, the effect content corresponding to the 7B acceptance state will not progress from the above-mentioned "first stage progression mode." Therefore, if operation of the 7B operation unit is resumed within the period from timing tBg2-C1 onwards in the 7B acceptance state, the 7B post-acceptance change (7B post-acceptance display) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the 7B post-acceptance change (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) was executed based on the acceptance of operation of the 7B operation unit at timing tBg2-B2. Details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, the presentation examples shown in Figures 176 and 177 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 7B operation unit) that began at timing tBg2-C1 continues even at timing tBg2-C2, when operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is no longer permitted (when the conditions for operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit are no longer permitted are met), and as a result, the auto-rapid-hit function remains active until timing tBg2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBg2-C1 to timing tBg2-C2 (the period during which the 7B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state), operations to the 7B operation unit will be accepted multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and post-acceptance changes in response to the accepted operations (for example, at least one of the following: post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, and post-acceptance role operation) will be executed multiple times.

And even during this "period from timing tBg2-C1 to timing tBg2-C2 (the period during which the 7B operation unit is again maintained in an operating state)," the manner in which such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto-rapid tapping function (such as the manner in which the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7b occurs) is the same as in the "period from timing tBg2-B2 to timing tBg2-B3" described above, unless further progress in the presentation occurs. The details of this presentation are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

Here, the 7B acceptance state in this example assumes that no special mode (final mode) appears as a post-acceptance change. Therefore, during the period from timing tBg2-C1 to timing tBg2-C2 in the example shown in Figure 176, the "7B post-acceptance change (7B post-acceptance effect)" in response to operation acceptance will be executed multiple times in a mode in which the effect content progresses only once, and when timing tBa2-C2 arrives, this will trigger the disabling of the auto-rapid-tap function that had been enabled up until then.

In this regard, when the auto-tap function is disabled at timing tBg2-A2 or timing tBg2-B3, post-acceptance changes such as the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" that was displayed until then and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7b that was output by the auto-tap function until then are not terminated midway due to the lack of operation acceptance. Similarly, when the auto-tap function is disabled at timing tBg2-C2 (when the conditions for terminating the permissive state are met), as shown in FIG. 176(f) and (h), post-acceptance changes such as the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" that was displayed until then and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7b that was output by the auto-tap function until then are not terminated midway due to the lack of operation acceptance (they are maintained in their execution state until their remaining execution time is used up).

This configuration makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions under which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is no longer permitted have been met at timing tBg2-C2 (that a situation has arisen in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is no longer permitted), which is expected to encourage the player to continue operating the 7B operation unit.

In this example, it is assumed that the player continues operating the "7th B operation unit" from timing tBg2-C1 onwards.

In this regard, in the 7B reception permitted state, even after a transition to a "state in which operation reception for the 7B operation unit is not permitted" (after timing tBg2-C2), there are cases in which the conditions for generating a "state in which operation reception for the 7B operation unit is permitted" are met again (or not met) while the operation-related display for the 7B operation unit is not displayed (or while the "7B post-reception display HB7" is displayed).

Whether or not the conditions for generating a "state in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is permitted" are met after timing tBg2-C2 arrives while the operation-related display for the 7B operation unit is not displayed (or while the "post-7B acceptance display HB7" is displayed), and the timing at which this state occurs, may be determined, for example, based on the operation acceptance during the period from timing tBg2 to timing tBg2-C2, or based on the results of a performance determination performed after timing tBg2-C2 arrives while the operation-related display for the 7B operation unit is not displayed, or based on the type of pattern change pattern or the result of a jackpot determination. Essentially, there are no limitations on the method for achieving this, as long as the conditions for generating a "state in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is permitted" are met after timing tBg2-C2 arrives while the operation-related display for the 7B operation unit is not displayed.

Alternatively, the 7B reception acceptance state may be set to occur as a type of reception acceptance state that always re-occurs "a state in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is accepted" at a predetermined timing after timing tBg2-C2 arrives when no operation-related display for the 7B operation unit is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 176(b), it is assumed that, during the period after timing tBg2-C2 when no operation-related display is displayed for the 7B operation unit, a "state in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is permitted" occurs again (when the occurrence conditions are met) at timing tBg2-C3.

In this regard, at timing tBg2-C3 in this example, as shown in Figures 176(a) and 176(b), operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is properly carried out based on detection of the operation state of the "7B operation unit" that has been maintained since timing tBg2-C1, with a period in between during which acceptance of operations for the 7B operation unit is not permitted (the period from timing tBg2-C2 to timing tBg2-C3), and as a result, post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of the operation are initiated.

More specifically, if an operation is accepted at timing tBg2-C3 for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)," this will trigger a "7B post-acceptance change (7B post-acceptance effect)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figure 176 (h), just as in the case of timing tBg2-B1 and timing tBg2-C1 described above.

However, as mentioned above, the 7B acceptance state in this example is realized in such a way that the "previous post-acceptance change" that is currently being executed is terminated midway, without starting a new post-acceptance change. Therefore, if an operation is accepted for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" at timing tBg2-C3 within the 7B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 176(f) and 176(h), the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα7" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" is again audibly output as the 7B post-acceptance change, but the "7B post-acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the acceptance of the operation for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornamentation 5001)" will not be displayed again.

This example assumes that even when operation is again accepted for the 7B operation unit at timing tBg2-C3, the effect corresponding to the 7B acceptance state has not progressed. Therefore, the 7B post-acceptance change (7B post-acceptance output sound) will begin to be executed in the same manner as when the 7B post-acceptance change was first initiated based on operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit at timing tBg2-B2. The details of this effect are as described above, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, in the 7B acceptance state, if the conditions for generating the "state in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is permitted" are met again after timing tBg2-C2 while the operation-related display for the 7B operation unit is not displayed (or while the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" is displayed), the "state in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is permitted" may end when the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" is displayed (or may not end when the conditions are met).

In addition, whether the "state in which operation acceptance to the 7B operation unit is permitted" that occurred at timing tBg2-C3 has its termination conditions met while the "7B post-reception display HB7" is displayed, and the timing at which this state ends, may be determined, for example, based on operation acceptance during the period from timing tBg2 to timing tBg2-C2, or based on the results of a performance determination performed during a predetermined period after timing tBg2-C2 (e.g., during the period in which the "7B post-reception display HB7" is displayed), or based on the type of pattern change pattern or the results of a jackpot determination. In short, the "state in which operation acceptance to the 7B operation unit is permitted" that occurred at timing tBg2-C3 may have its termination conditions met while the "7B post-reception display HB7" is displayed, and the method for achieving this is not limited.

Alternatively, the 7B reception acceptance state may be set to always re-occur "a state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the 7B operation unit" at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBg2-C2 to the timing when the "7B post-reception display HB7" is hidden, and the generated "state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the 7B operation unit" may always end at a predetermined timing within the period up to timing tBg3.

The examples shown in Figures 176 and 177 assume that the "state in which operation acceptance to the 7th B operation unit is permitted" that began at timing tBg2-C3 continues until timing tBg2-C4, which is before the timing at which the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" is hidden, and that the termination conditions are met.

In this regard, at timing tBg2-C4, just as when the auto-tap function is disabled at timing tBg2-C2 described above, as shown in Figures 176 (f) and (h), post-acceptance changes such as the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" that was previously displayed by the auto-tap function and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7a that was previously output by the auto-tap function are not terminated midway due to the cessation of operation acceptance (they are maintained in their execution state until their remaining execution time is used up).

This configuration makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions under which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is no longer permitted have been met at timing tBg2-C4 (that a situation has arisen in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is no longer permitted), which is expected to encourage the player to continue operating the 7B operation unit.

In this example, after the conditions for disallowing operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit are met at timing tBg2-C4, the "state in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is permitted" does not occur again until the timing arrives when the "7B post-reception display HB7" is hidden. Therefore, even if the "7B operation unit" remains in an operating state until the timing when the "7B post-reception display HB7" is hidden, the auto-repeated tapping function will not be enabled, multiple operations will not be accepted, and post-reception changes in response to accepted operations will not be performed multiple times during that period.

However, after timing tBg2-C4, until the timing when the "7B post-reception display HB7" is hidden, the conditions for "a state in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is permitted" may be met again (or may not be met). In this case, based on the detection of the operation state of the "7B operation unit" that has been maintained since timing tBg2-C1, with multiple periods in between when operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is not permitted, operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit will once again be performed, and the post-reception change (auto-repeated tap function) corresponding to that operation acceptance will begin.

In the example shown in Figure 177, after "7B Post-Acceptance Display HB7" is displayed at timing tBg2-A1, the performance display device 1600 does not cause any display changes triggered by the detection of an operation or non-operation state of the 7B operation unit. Therefore, each process from timing tBg2-A1 onwards is executed while the display shown in Figure 177(b) is displayed.

Furthermore, in order to optimally maintain the presentation of the 7B acceptance state, if the player does not perform an operation until timing tBg2-C2 (or timing tBg2-C4) arrives, at which point acceptance of operations to the 7B operation unit is no longer permitted, it is desirable that the same post-acceptance changes as when such an operation is performed do not occur (the automatic button function is not enabled).

Furthermore, timing tBg2-B1 and timing tBg2-C3 may occur either while a display change (7B post-reception display HB7) is appearing as one of the post-reception changes in response to operation acceptance of the 7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001), or after the display change (7B post-reception display HB7) has been hidden. Furthermore, if the display change (7B post-reception display HB7) is hidden after the display change, the display change (7B post-reception display HB7) may appear as one of the post-reception changes, as in the case of timing tBg2-A1.

Note that timing tBg2-C1 is assumed to occur while the "7B specific event (here, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7)" is being executed as one of the post-acceptance changes. That is, as described above, the 7B post-acceptance display HB7 is not hidden before the "7B specific event (here, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7)." Therefore, the 7B post-acceptance display HB7 is not hidden when timing tBg2-C1 arrives, and a display change (the 7B post-acceptance display HB7) as one of the post-acceptance changes does not appear at timing tBg2-C1. Furthermore, as described above, the 7B post-acceptance display HB7 does not appear as one of the post-acceptance changes among the multiple post-acceptance changes that occur due to the auto-repeated tapping function (it can only appear as one of the first post-acceptance changes), and therefore it will not appear within the valid period after timing tBg2-C1.

However, the 7B post-reception display HB7 may be configured to appear only when the 7B operation unit is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state while a "state in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is permitted" has already occurred. If this configuration is adopted, at timing tBg2-C3, a "state in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is permitted" occurs while the 7B operation unit is already maintained in an operated state, and as a result, the post-reception change is executed based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained up until that point. Therefore, even if the 7B post-reception display HB7 arrives while it is hidden, the display change (7B post-reception display HB7) as one of the post-reception changes will not appear.

Furthermore, in the 7B reception allowance state, even if the 7B operation unit is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state while the display change (7B post-reception display HB7) does not appear as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the 7B operation unit (sword decoration 5001), there may be both a case where the display change (7B post-reception display HB7) occurs as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the 7B operation unit (sword decoration 5001) (see Figure 176) and a case where the display change (7B post-reception display HB7) does not occur (see Figure 178). That is, in this case, as shown in Fig. 178 together with Fig. 176, even at timing tBg2-A1, there are two cases: a display change (7B post-acceptance display HB7) occurs as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation to the 7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) (see Fig. 176), and a display change (7B post-acceptance display HB7) does not occur (see Fig. 178). Note that in the case where "a display change is not caused as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation to the 7B operation unit at timing tBg2-A1" (see Fig. 178), all components except for the component related to the 7B post-acceptance display HB7 are the same as in the example described above (see Fig. 176) of "causing a display change as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation to the 7B operation unit at timing tBg2-A1," and therefore, for the sake of convenience, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, the implementation method for this configuration may be to cause (or not cause) a display change (post-7B reception display HB7) based on the performance determination when an operation is received, or to cause (or not cause) a display change (post-7B reception display HB7) based on the type of variation pattern or the result of a jackpot determination, or other methods may be employed.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 176 and 178, after the "state in which multiple operations are permitted for the 7B operation unit (sword decoration 5001)" occurs at timing tBg2, it may be possible for a display change (7B post-acceptance display HB7) to occur as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to an operation accepted for the 7B operation unit only at timing tBg2-A1, which is the earliest in chronological order among all the times an operation is accepted for the 7B operation unit (sword decoration 5001).

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned third B reception allowance state, fourth B reception allowance state, and fifth B reception allowance state, where the operation target is the same, it may be possible to prevent a display change from occurring as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception on the operation unit. In this case, only events other than display changes (for example, events the same as the seventh B specific event) can be executed as post-acceptance changes.

Furthermore, the 7B reception permission state is not prepared as a "type of reception permission state in which the reception permission state can be terminated early based on the reception of an operation," and the state will not be terminated based on the reception of an operation to the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)."

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "1B reception acceptance state" as part of the reception acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 164, 165, etc.). In this regard, Figure 179 is a time chart showing an example of a case in which an operation state for the 1B operation unit (operation button 410) that was initiated during the "1B reception acceptance state" is continued even after the "1B reception acceptance state" has ended, and while the operation state continues, an "operation-related display prompting the operation to accept multiple operations on the operation button 410" is displayed again, and an acceptance acceptance state occurs in which "the operation button 410 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long press function)."

For ease of explanation, this example describes a case where the operation state of the 1B operation unit (operation button 410) that was started while in the "1B reception allowance state" is continued even after the "1B reception allowance state" has ended. However, the example described below may be realized as a reception allowance state of a different type than the "1B reception allowance state." In this case, however, in this reception allowance state, post-reception changes will occur that are different from those in the "1B reception allowance state."

In other words, as shown in FIG. 179, the details of each configuration and effect during the period from when the operation-related displays (such as the mock-up display MG-B1 and message display MB1) begin to be displayed at timing tBa1 until when the operation-related displays (such as the mock-up display MG-B1 and message display MB1) are hidden at timing tBa3 have been described above with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, so a detailed explanation will not be given here.

In this regard, this example assumes that the operation state of the "1B operation unit (operation button 410)" that has continued since the 1B operation acceptance state (here, from timing tBa2-C1) continues even after the 1B operation acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, at the point when the "operation-related display that prompts the player to accept multiple operations on the operation button 410 that is the target for activating the auto rapid press function (long press function) and is the same operation target as in the 1B operation acceptance state" is displayed again (and even thereafter).

In this example, it is assumed that the "acceptance permitted state" that occurs while the operation state of the first B operation unit (operation button 410) is continuing is the "second B acceptance permitted state (see Figures 166 and 167)" described above.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from timing tBa3 when the first B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, "an operation-related display that prompts the user to perform an operation in a second manner (such as the message display of "Button Rapid Hit!" as shown in FIG. 167) so as to accept multiple operations on the operation button 410 that is the target for activating the auto rapid hit function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the first B acceptance state" is not displayed.

Therefore, in this example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned second B reception acceptance state (valid period) occurs, in which acceptance of operations to the second B operation unit (operation button 410) regarding post-second B reception changes (such as second B performance status indication display JB2, second B rapid tap display HB2, and post-second B reception output sounds Sα2, Sβ2) is accepted, based on the arrival of timing tBa5A, which is longer than a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) since timing tBa3, when the first B reception acceptance state ended and the corresponding operation-related display was hidden (based on "condition 2B" being satisfied at timing tBa5A) (the situation shown in FIG. 167(a)).

Here, in the second B reception acceptance state in this example, the "second B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the same operation means as in the first B reception acceptance state, i.e., the "operation button 410" that has been maintained in an operating state since the first B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations can be accepted until the second B reception acceptance state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the 2B operation acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-B2 that imitates the object operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 2B operation unit), a message display MB2 related to the operation of the object operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 2B operation unit), and a status suggestion display JB2 that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period after the operation acceptance are displayed at timing tBa4A before the 2B operation acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted) (see, for example, Figures 179(b)-(e)). Furthermore, at timing tBa4A according to this example, audible output of a 2B operation-related output sound OB2 that prompts the player to perform an operation is also initiated. Therefore, during the period from timing tBa4A to tBa5A in this example, even though an operation-related display such as the mock image display MG-B2 or message display MB2 is displayed, urging the operation of the operation button 410 in a second manner (such as the message display "Press the button repeatedly!" as shown in FIG. 167), so that multiple operations on the operation button 410 are accepted, and the second B operation-related output sound OB2 is being audibly output, the operation on the operation button 410 is not determined to be a valid operation (the operation is not accepted).

The configuration for this type of second-B reception-permitted state has been described above with reference to Figures 166 and 167, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to configurations for other examples that can be applied to the second-B reception-permitted state.

However, in the second-B acceptance state shown in FIG. 179, although a state occurs at timing tBa5A in which "operation acceptance is accepted in a form in which the operation button 410 is designated as the target for activating the auto-repeated press function (long press function)," in this state, the auto-repeated press function (long press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of the operation button 410 that has been maintained since the first-B acceptance state (multiple operation acceptances are not made and changes are not executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, in this case, the auto-repeated press function (long press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of the operation button 410 unless the operation state of the operation button 410 that has been maintained since the first-B acceptance state is released (ended) (more precisely, unless the operation button 410 that was in an unoperated state in the second-B acceptance state is put into an operated state). Therefore, the player can be prompted to release (end) the operation state of the operation button 410 that has been maintained since the first-B acceptance state.

In this case, if the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 1B operation acceptance state is released (ended), then by placing the "operation button 410" in the operation state again in the 2B operation acceptance state shown in FIG. 179, operation acceptance for the "operation button 410" will be performed, and the auto-repeated press function (long press function) will of course be enabled. The configurations for when operation acceptance is performed in the 2B operation acceptance state have also been described above with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167, so further explanation will be omitted here.

Furthermore, even if an operation-related display other than that corresponding to the "second B reception acceptance state" is displayed while the operation state of the "operation button 410" has continued since the first B reception acceptance state, i.e., an operation-related display that prompts the user to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410 that is the target for enabling the auto-repeated press function (long press function) and is the same operation target as in the first B reception acceptance state (for example, an operation-related display corresponding to the first B reception acceptance state (such as the message display "Press the button repeatedly!" as shown in FIG. 165)), the auto-repeated press function (long press function) may not be enabled based on the detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410" while the operation-related display is displayed, unless the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the first B reception acceptance state is released (ended).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 179, between the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 1B reception-permitted state is hidden and the time the "operation-related display prompting the operation to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410 that is the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 1B reception-permitted state" is displayed, another reception-permitted state may occur or end (or may not occur), or the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation effect of the next decorative pattern SZ may start.

Also, the second B reception allowance state is essentially a state in which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, the post-non-operation display HB2 is displayed as a result. However, in the example shown in FIG. 179, even if the second operation means (operation button 410) that was set to an operated state in the first B reception allowance state is set to a non-operated state in the second B reception allowance state, it is desirable that the post-non-operation display HB2 not be displayed as a result of the change to the non-operated state.

In the example shown in FIG. 179, even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is put into an operating state after the first B reception acceptance state has ended and before the second B reception acceptance state has begun, and the second operating means (operation button 410) that has been put into the operating state is then put into a non-operating state in the second B reception acceptance state, the post-non-operation display HB2 triggered by the change to the non-operating state may not be displayed.

It goes without saying that in the 1B reception permission state or the 6B reception permission state, even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, the post-non-operation display triggered by this will not be displayed.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "second B reception acceptance state" as part of the reception acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 166 and 167, etc.). In this regard, Figure 180 is a time chart showing an example of a case in which an operation acceptance state has occurred in which an operation state for the second B operation unit (operation button 410) that was initiated during the "second B reception acceptance state" is continued even after the "second B reception acceptance state" has ended, and while the operation state continues, an "operation-related display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 to accept multiple operations" is displayed again, and the "operation button 410 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long press function)."

For ease of explanation, this example describes a case where the operation state of the second B operation unit (operation button 410) that was started while in the "second B reception allowance state" is continued even after the "second B reception allowance state" has ended. However, the example described below may be realized as a reception allowance state of a different type than the "second B reception allowance state." In this case, however, in this reception allowance state, post-reception changes will occur that are different from those in the "second B reception allowance state."

In other words, as shown in FIG. 180, the details of each configuration and effect during the period from when the operation-related displays (such as the mock-up display MG-B2 and message display MB2) begin to be displayed at timing tBb1 until when the operation-related displays (such as the mock-up display MG-B2 and message display MB2) are hidden at timing tBb3 have been described above with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167, so a detailed explanation will not be given here.

In this regard, this example assumes that the player continues to operate the "second B operation unit (operation button 410)" from the second B acceptance state (here, from timing tBb2-C1) even after the second B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, at the point when the "operation-related display prompting the player to accept multiple operations on the operation button 410, which is the target for activating the auto rapid press function (long press function) and is the same operation target as in the second B acceptance state" is displayed again (and even thereafter).

In this example, it is assumed that the "acceptance permitted state" that occurs while the second B operation unit (operation button 410) is being operated continuously is the "first B acceptance permitted state (see Figures 164 and 165)" described above.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from timing tBb3 when the second B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, "an operation-related display that prompts the user to operate the operation button 410, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated press function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the second B acceptance state, in a first manner (such as the message display of "Press the button repeatedly!" as shown in FIG. 165), so as to accept multiple operations" is not displayed.

Therefore, in this example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned 1B acceptance state (valid period) occurs, in which acceptance of operations to the 1B operation unit (operation button 410) regarding post-1B acceptance changes (1B performance status suggestion display JB1, 1B rapid tap display HB1, post-1B acceptance output sounds Sα1, Sβ1, etc.) is permitted, based on the arrival of timing tBb5A, which is longer than a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) from timing tBb3, when the 2B acceptance state ended and the corresponding operation-related display was hidden (based on "condition 1B" being satisfied at timing tBb5A) (the situation shown in FIG. 165(a)).

Here, in the 1B reception acceptance state in this example, the "1B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the same operation means as in the 2B reception acceptance state, i.e., the "operation button 410" that has been maintained in an operating state since the 2B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 1B reception acceptance state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the 1B acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-B1 that mimics the object of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 1B operation unit), a message display MB1 related to the operation of the object of operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the 1B operation unit), and a status suggestion display JB1 that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period after the operation acceptance is made are displayed at timing tBb4A before the 1B acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted) (see, for example, Figures 180(b)-(e)). Furthermore, at timing tBb4A according to this example, audible output of a 1B operation-related output sound OB1 that prompts the player to perform an operation also begins. Therefore, during the period from timing tBb4A to tBb5A in this example, even though an operation-related display such as the mock image display MG-B1 or message display MB1 is displayed in a first manner (such as the message display "Press the button repeatedly!" shown in FIG. 165) to prompt multiple operations on the operation button 410, and the first B operation-related output sound OB1 is being audibly output, the operation on the operation button 410 is not determined to be a valid operation (the operation is not accepted).

The configuration for this type of 1B reception permission state has been described above with reference to Figures 164 and 165, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to configurations for other examples that can be applied to the 1B reception permission state.

However, in the 1B acceptance state shown in FIG. 180, although a state occurs at timing tBa5A in which "operation acceptance is accepted in a form in which the operation button 410 is designated as a target for activating the auto-repeated press function (long press function)," in this state, the auto-repeated press function (long press function) is not activated based on detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 2B acceptance state (multiple operation acceptances are not made and changes are not executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, in this case, the auto-repeated press function (long press function) is not activated based on detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410" unless the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 2B acceptance state is released (ended) (more precisely, unless the operation button 410 that was in an unoperated state in the 1B acceptance state is brought into an operated state). Therefore, the player can be prompted to release (end) the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 2B acceptance state.

In this case, if the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the second B reception acceptance state is released (ended), then by placing the "operation button 410" in the operation state again in the first B reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 180, operation acceptance for the "operation button 410" will be performed, and the auto-repeated press function (long press function) will of course be enabled. The various configurations when operation acceptance is performed in the first B reception acceptance state have also been described above with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, so further explanation will be omitted here.

Furthermore, even if an operation-related display other than that corresponding to the "first B reception acceptance state" is displayed while the operation state of the "operation button 410" has continued since the second B reception acceptance state, i.e., an operation-related display that prompts the user to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410 that is the target for enabling the auto-repeated press function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the second B reception acceptance state (for example, an operation-related display corresponding to the second B reception acceptance state (such as the message display "Button spam!" shown in FIG. 167)), the auto-repeated press function (long press function) may not be enabled based on the detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410" while the operation-related display is displayed, unless the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the second B reception acceptance state is released (ended).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 180, between the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 2B reception-allowed state is hidden and the time the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the operation button 410 that is the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 2B reception-allowed state" is displayed, another reception-allowed state may occur or end (or may not occur), or the decorative pattern SZ variation effect that was in the execution state may end, or the next decorative pattern SZ variation effect may start.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "3B reception acceptance state" as part of the reception acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 168, 169, etc.). In this regard, Figure 181 is a time chart showing an example of a case in which an operation state for the 3B operation unit (sword decorative body 5001) that was initiated during the "3B reception acceptance state" continues even after the "3B reception acceptance state" ends, and while the operation state continues, an "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 4B reception acceptance state) prompting the operation to accept multiple operations on the sword decorative body 5001" is displayed again, and an acceptance acceptance state occurs in which the sword decorative body 5001 is designated as a target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function)."

That is, as shown in FIG. 181, the details of the various components and effects during the period from when the operation-related displays (such as the model image display MG-B3 and message display MB3) begin to be displayed at timing tBc1 until when the operation-related displays (such as the model image display MG-B3 and message display MB3) are hidden at timing tBc3 are basically as described above with reference to FIGS. 168 and 169, and therefore will not be described here. For ease of explanation, this example assumes that a state in which multiple operations are permitted for the sword decorative element 5001 does not occur again between timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc3. However, even in the above-described example (see FIGS. 168 and 169) in which a state in which multiple operations are permitted for the sword decorative element 5001 occurs again between timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc3, a similar configuration can be applied when the following events occur after timing tBc3.

In this regard, this example assumes that the operation state of the "3B operation unit (sword ornament 5001)" that has continued since the 3B acceptance state (here, from timing tBc2-C1) continues even after the 3B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, at the point when the "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) that prompts the player to perform multiple operations in a specific manner (such as the message display "Super-rapid sword hits" shown in FIG. 171) on the sword ornament 5001, which is the same operation target as the 3B acceptance state and is the target for enabling the auto-rapid hit function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 3B acceptance state" is displayed again (and even thereafter).

In other words, in this example, it is assumed that the "acceptance permitted state" that occurs while the operation state of the 3B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) continues in this manner is the "4B acceptance permitted state (see Figures 170 and 171)" described above.

Here, when the 3B reception acceptance state in this example ends, unlike the 1B reception acceptance state and the 2B reception acceptance state, which have different operation-related display targets (operation targets for which the auto-repeated tap function is enabled) from the 3B reception acceptance state, during the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) from timing tBc3 when the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B reception acceptance state is hidden, an "operation-related display prompting an operation to accept multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for which the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) is enabled and which is the same operation target as the 3B reception acceptance state," may be displayed (or not displayed) during the time period.

For example, the 3B acceptance state in this example is assumed to occur when "Condition 3B" is met, which allows acceptance of multiple operations on the "3B operation unit (sword ornamentation 5001)" while the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 (see FIG. 181(g)) is being audibly output. However, as mentioned above, the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 may be terminated early at any time within the time range TBc shown in FIG. 181(g).

In this regard, with regard to the 3B operation-related output sound OB3, the audible output may or may not be terminated early at any timing within the time range TBc shown in FIG. 181 (g), and only if the audible output is terminated early, an "operation-related display prompting the user to perform an operation on the sword ornament 5001 for which the auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled in a specific manner (such as the message display "Super-repeated sword" shown in FIG. 171)" may be displayed (or not displayed) during the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) from timing tBc3 when the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state was hidden.

In other words, in this case, if the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is not terminated early and is output audibly for a predetermined period of time, then during the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) from timing tBc3 at which the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B operation acceptance state was hidden, there will be no case in which an "operation-related display prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 that is the target for activating the auto-rapid tap function (long press function) in a specific manner (such as the message display "Super-rapid tap on the sword" shown in FIG. 171)" will be displayed (the 4B operation acceptance state will not occur). This allows the player to recognize that the 4B operation acceptance state will not occur until at least a predetermined time has passed after the 3B operation acceptance state has ended, and that there is little benefit to maintaining the sword decoration 5001 in an operation state.

In contrast, when the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated early, an operation-related display prompting an operation on the sword ornament 5001 that is the target of activation of the auto-rapid tap function (long press function) in a specific manner (such as the message display "Super-rapid tap on the sword" shown in FIG. 171) may be displayed during the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) from timing tBc3 when the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B operation-receiving state was hidden (a 4B operation-receiving state may occur). This allows the player to recognize the possibility that the 4B operation-receiving state may occur before the predetermined time has elapsed, even if the 3B operation-receiving state has ended, and to recognize the benefits of maintaining the sword ornament 5001 in an operating state.

In addition, when the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated early, an operation-related display that prompts the user to perform an operation on the sword ornament 5001 that is the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function) in a specific manner (such as the message display "Super-repeatedly hit the sword" shown in FIG. 171) may be always displayed during the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) from timing tBc3 when the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B reception-permitted state was hidden.

In this example, it is assumed that the 4B acceptance state (valid period) occurs when timing tBc5A arrives (based on the fact that "condition 4B" is met at timing tBc5A) before a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBc3, when the 3B acceptance state ended and the corresponding operation-related display was hidden) and operation acceptance is permitted for the 4B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) regarding changes after 4B acceptance (such as the 4B performance status indication display JB4, the 4B rapid tap display HB4, and the post-4B acceptance output sound Sα4) (the situation shown in Figure 171(a)).

Here, in the 4B reception acceptance state in this example, the "4B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the same operation means as in the 3B reception acceptance state, i.e., the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained in an operating state since the 3B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 4B reception acceptance state is ended.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the 4B operation acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-B4 modeling the object of operation by the player (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 4B operation unit), a message display MB4 related to operations on the object of operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 4B operation unit), and a status indication display JB4 that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period after the operation acceptance are displayed at timing tBc4A before the 4B operation acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted) (see, e.g., Figures 181(b)-(e)). Furthermore, at timing tBc4A according to this example, audible output of a 4B operation-related output sound OB4 prompting the player to perform an operation also begins. Therefore, during the period from timing tBc4A to tBc5A in this example, operation-related displays such as the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are displayed to prompt the user to accept multiple operations on the sword decorative body 5001, and even though the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 is being audibly output, operations on the sword decorative body 5001 are not determined to be valid operations (operations are not accepted).

The configuration for this 4B reception permission state has been described above with reference to Figures 170 and 171, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to configurations for other examples that can be applied to the 4B reception permission state.

In this regard, in the 4B acceptance state shown in Figure 181, in addition to the state occurring at timing tBc5A where "acceptance of operations is permitted in the form of the sword ornament 5001 being the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function)," in this state, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained since the 3B acceptance state (multiple operations are accepted and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, after the 3B reception allowance state ends, when an operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 4B reception allowance state) appears that prompts in a specific manner (such as the "Super Rapid Hit the Sword" message display shown in FIG. 171) to accept multiple operations on the sword decoration 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated hit function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 3B reception allowance state, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, while the operation-related display is displayed, the auto-repeated hit function (long press function) can be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 (because operation acceptance is performed at timing tBc5A), without canceling (terminating) the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 that has been maintained since the 3B reception allowance state (more accurately, without re-operating the sword decoration 5001), and therefore, the game can proceed properly simply by continuing the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 that has been maintained since the 3B reception allowance state.

In particular, when the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated early at any timing within the time range TBc shown in FIG. 181(g), there is a possibility (even if the display rate is 100%) that an "operation-related display encouraging operation of the sword decorative body 5001 for which the auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled in a specific manner (such as the message display "Super-repeated sword" shown in FIG. 171)" will be displayed relatively early, within a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) from timing tBc3 at which the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B reception-permitting state is hidden. Therefore, it is expected that the display rate will be 100%. This will encourage the user to maintain the operation state of the "sword decorative body 5001" even after the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B reception-permitting state is hidden.

Note that the configuration of each element when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in an operational state (when the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled) in the 4B reception-permitted state has been described above with reference to Figures 170 and 171, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In the example shown in FIG. 181, from the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B reception-allowed state is hidden until the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 3B reception-allowed state," is displayed, another reception-allowed state may occur or end (or may not occur), or the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation effect of the next decorative pattern SZ may start.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 181, after the 3B reception allowance state ends, when an operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 4B reception allowance state) appears that prompts in a specific manner (such as the message display "Super-rapid hits on the sword" shown in Figure 171) to accept multiple operations on the sword decoration 5001, which is the target for enabling the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 3B reception allowance state, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is always enabled (multiple operations are accepted and a change is executed after multiple acceptances) while the operation-related display is displayed based on the detection of the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 that has been maintained since the 3B reception allowance state was entered (multiple operations are accepted and a change is executed after multiple acceptances). However, instead of this, after the 3B reception allowance state ends, when an "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 4B reception allowance state) that prompts in a specific manner (such as the message display of "super-rapid hits on the sword" shown in FIG. 171) to accept multiple operations on the sword decoration 5001 that is the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 3B reception allowance state" appears, while the operation-related display is being displayed, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) may be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword decoration 5001" that has been maintained since the 3B reception allowance state (multiple operations are accepted and changes after multiple acceptances are executed), or the activation may not be performed (multiple operations are not accepted and changes after multiple acceptances are not executed). In other words, if the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is not enabled based on the detection of the operation state of the sword decorative body 5001, which has been maintained since the 3B acceptance state, the operation state of the sword decorative body 5001 from the 3B acceptance state remains maintained, no operation acceptance or post-acceptance change is performed, and the timing arrives for the operation-related display, which began displaying at timing tBc5A, to be hidden. Note that a configuration for when the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is not enabled (no multiple operations are accepted, and no post-acceptance change is performed) while the operation-related display is displayed can be achieved by creating a state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted while the operation-related display is displayed, but disabling the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function), or by not allowing acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 at all.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "5B reception acceptance state" as part of the reception acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 172, 173, etc.). In this regard, Figure 182 is a time chart showing an example of a case in which an operation state for the 5B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) that was initiated during the "5B reception acceptance state" continues even after the "5B reception acceptance state" ends, and while the operation state continues, an "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 3B reception acceptance state) prompting an operation to accept multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001" is displayed again, and an acceptance acceptance state occurs in which the sword ornament 5001 is designated as a target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function)."

That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the details of the various components and effects during the period from when the operation-related displays (such as the model image display MG-B5 and message display MB5) begin to be displayed at timing tBe1 until when the operation-related displays (such as the model image display MG-B5 and message display MB5) are hidden at timing tBe3 are basically as described above with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173, and therefore will not be described here. For ease of explanation, this example assumes that a state in which multiple operations are permitted for the sword decorative body 5001 does not occur again between timing tBe2-C2 and timing tBe3. However, even in the above-described example (see FIGS. 172 and 173) in which a state in which multiple operations are permitted for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs again between timing tBe2-C2 and timing tBe3, a similar configuration can be applied when the following events occur after timing tBe3.

In this regard, this example assumes that the operation state of the "5B operation unit (sword ornament 5001)" that has continued since the 5B acceptance state (here, from timing tBe2-C1) continues even after the 5B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, at the point when the "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state) that urges the player to operate in a predetermined manner (such as the message display "repeatedly strike the sword" shown in FIG. 169) so that multiple operations can be accepted for the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for activating the auto rapid-fire function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 5B acceptance state" is displayed again (and even thereafter).

In other words, in this example, it is assumed that the "acceptance permitted state" that occurs while the 5B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) is being operated continuously is the "3B acceptance permitted state (see Figures 168 and 169)" described above.

Here, when the 5B acceptance state in this example ends, unlike the 1B acceptance state and the 2B acceptance state, which have different operation-related display targets (operation targets for which the auto-repeated tap function is enabled) from the 5B acceptance state, during the period from time tBe3 when the operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state is hidden until a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed, "an operation-related display prompting an operation to accept multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for which the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) is enabled and which is the same operation target as the 5B acceptance state" may be displayed (or not displayed).

In this example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned 3B reception acceptance state (valid period) occurs when timing tBe5A-1 arrives (based on the fact that "Condition 3B" is met at timing tBe5A-1), which is before a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBe3, when the 5B reception acceptance state ended and the corresponding operation-related display was hidden (based on the fact that "Condition 3B" is met at timing tBe5A-1), and acceptance of operations to the 3B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) regarding changes after 3B reception (such as the 3B performance status suggestion display JB3, the 3B rapid tap display HB3, and the post-3B reception output sound Sα3) is accepted (the situation shown in Figure 169(a)).

Here, in the 3B reception acceptance state in this example, the "3B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the same operation means as in the 5B reception acceptance state, i.e., the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained in an operation state since the 5B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 3B reception acceptance state is ended.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a 3B operation acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-B3 modeling the object operated by the player (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 3B operation unit), a message display MB3 related to the operation of the object operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 3B operation unit), and a status indication display JB3 that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period after the operation acceptance are displayed at timing tBe4A-1 before the 3B operation acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted) (see, e.g., Figures 182(b)-(e)). Furthermore, at timing tBe4A-1 according to this example, audible output of a 3B operation-related output sound OB3 prompting the player to perform an operation is also initiated. Therefore, during the period from timing tBe4A-1 to tBe5A-1 in this example, operation-related displays such as the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 are displayed to prompt the user to accept multiple operations on the sword decorative body 5001, and even though the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is being audibly output, operations on the sword decorative body 5001 are not determined to be valid operations (operations are not accepted).

The configuration for this type of 3B reception permission state has been described above with reference to Figures 168 and 169, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to configurations for other examples that can be applied to the 3B reception permission state.

In this regard, in the 3B acceptance state shown in Figure 182, in addition to the state occurring at timing tBe5A-1 where "operation acceptance is accepted in the form of the sword ornament 5001 being the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function)," in this state, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained since the 5B acceptance state (multiple operations are accepted and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, after the 5B reception allowance state ends, when an operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 3B reception allowance state) appears, prompting in a predetermined manner (such as the "repeatedly hit the sword" message display shown in FIG. 169) to accept multiple operations on the sword decoration 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated hit function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 5B reception allowance state, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, while the operation-related display is displayed, the auto-repeated hit function (long press function) can be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 (because operation acceptance is performed at timing tBe5A), and the game can be played properly simply by continuing the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 that has been maintained since the 5B reception allowance state.

Note that the configuration of each element when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in an operational state (when the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled) in the 3B reception-permitted state has been described above with reference to Figures 168 and 169, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 182, between the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 5B reception-allowed state is hidden and the time the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 5B reception-allowed state" is displayed, another reception-allowed state may occur or end (or may not occur), or the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation effect of the next decorative pattern SZ may start.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 182, after the 5B reception allowance state ends, when an operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 3B reception allowance state) appears that prompts an operation in a predetermined manner (such as the message display "repeatedly hit the sword" shown in Figure 169) so that multiple operations are accepted for the sword decoration 5001, which is the target for enabling the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 5B reception allowance state, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is always enabled (multiple operations are accepted and a change is executed after multiple acceptances) while the operation-related display is displayed based on the detection of the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 that has been maintained since the 5B reception allowance state was entered (multiple operations are accepted and a change is executed after multiple acceptances). However, instead of this, after the 5B reception allowance state ends, when an "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 3B reception allowance state) that prompts an operation in a predetermined manner (such as the message display of "repeatedly hit the sword" shown in FIG. 169) to accept multiple operations on the sword decoration 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 5B reception allowance state" appears, while the operation-related display is being displayed, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) may be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword decoration 5001" that has been maintained since the 5B reception allowance state was in effect (multiple operations are accepted and changes are executed after multiple acceptances), or the activation may not be performed (multiple operations are not accepted and changes are not executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, if the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is not enabled based on the detection of the operation state of the sword decorative body 5001, which has been maintained since the 5B acceptance state, the operation state of the sword decorative body 5001 from the 5B acceptance state remains maintained, no operation acceptance or post-acceptance change is performed, and the timing arrives for the operation-related display, which began displaying at timing tBe5A-1, to be hidden. Note that a configuration for when the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is not enabled (no multiple operations are accepted, and no post-acceptance change is performed) while the operation-related display is displayed can be achieved by creating a state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted while the operation-related display is displayed, but disabling the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function), or by not allowing acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 at all.

As mentioned above, the audible output of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 (the operation-related output sound corresponding to the third B reception-permitted state) may be terminated early at any timing within the time range TBc shown in Figure 168 (g).

In this regard, when an operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state) that prompts an operation in a predetermined manner (such as the "Strike the sword repeatedly" message shown in FIG. 169) to accept multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001 that is the target for enabling the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is displayed before a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBe3 when the operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state) that prompts an operation in a special manner (such as the "Strike the sword repeatedly" message shown in FIG. 173) to accept multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001 that is the target for enabling the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is made invisible, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 that is audibly output in response to this may be configured to not terminate its audible output early at any timing within the time range TBc shown in FIG. 168(g) (equivalent to the example shown in FIG. 182).

In contrast, when an operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance acceptance state) is displayed after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing tBe3 described above, prompting the user to accept multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001 for which the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is enabled in a predetermined manner (such as the message display "repeatedly tap the sword" shown in FIG. 169), the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 that is audibly output in response to this may be terminated early (or not) at any time within the time range TBc shown in FIG. 168(g).

Figure 183 is a time chart showing an example of a case in which the audible output of the third B operation-related output sound OB3, which starts being output after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing tBe3, is terminated early at some timing within the time range TBc shown in Figure 168 (g).

The example shown in FIG. 183 is basically the same as the example described above with reference to FIG. 182, so a description of the same components will be omitted. However, unlike the example described above with reference to FIG. 182, the example shown in FIG. 183 assumes a case in which an "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state) that prompts multiple operations to be accepted on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for enabling the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 5B acceptance state), is displayed after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed from timing tBe3, rather than before.

More specifically, this assumes that when timing tBe5A-2 arrives a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after timing tBe3, when the 5B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden (based on "Condition 3B" being met at timing tBe5A-2), the 3B acceptance state (valid period) occurs, during which "acceptance of operations to the 3B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) regarding changes after 3B acceptance (such as the 3B performance status indication display JB3, the 3B rapid tap display HB3, and the post-3B acceptance output sound Sα3)" is permitted (the situation shown in Figure 169(a)).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example presentation, when a 3B operation acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-B3 modeling the object operated by the player (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 3B operation unit), a message display MB3 related to the operation of the object operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 3B operation unit), and a status indication display JB3 that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period after the operation acceptance are displayed at timing tBe4A-2 before the 3B operation acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted) (see, for example, Figures 183(b)-(e)). Also, at timing tBe4A-2 according to this example, audible output of a 3B operation-related output sound OB3 prompting the player to perform an operation is initiated. Therefore, during the period from timing tBe4A-2 to tBe5A-2 in this example, operation-related displays such as the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 are displayed to prompt the user to accept multiple operations on the sword decorative body 5001, and even though the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is being audibly output, operations on the sword decorative body 5001 are not determined to be valid operations (operations are not accepted).

The configuration for this type of 3B reception permission state has been described above with reference to Figures 168 and 169, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to configurations for other examples that can be applied to the 3B reception permission state.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 183, between the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 5B reception-allowed state is hidden and the time the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 5B reception-allowed state" is displayed, another reception-allowed state may occur or end (or may not occur), or the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation effect of the next decorative pattern SZ may start.

In this regard, after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBe3 when the operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state) that prompts in a special manner (such as the "Strike the sword repeatedly" message display shown in FIG. 173) to accept multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001 for which the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is enabled is made invisible, when an operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state) that prompts in a predetermined manner (such as the "Strike the sword repeatedly" message display shown in FIG. 169) to accept multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001 for which the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is enabled is displayed, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 that is audibly output in response to this prompting may or may not be terminated early at any time within the time range TBc shown in FIG. 168(g).

The example shown in FIG. 183 is a time chart illustrating a case where the audible output of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated early at timing tBe6, but the timing of the early termination is not limited to this and can occur at any timing within the time range TBc shown in FIG. 168(g). The configuration for such early termination of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 has been described above with reference to FIG. 168, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

In the examples shown in Figures 182 and 183, the "configuration for early termination of 3B operation-related output sound OB3" differs depending on whether the timing at which the operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance acceptance state) that prompts an operation in a predetermined manner (such as the "repeated sword strike" message display shown in Figure 169) to accept multiple operations for the sword ornament 5001 that is the target for enabling the auto-repeated strike function (long press function) is displayed is before a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the timing tBe3 at which the operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance acceptance state) that prompts an operation in a special manner (such as the "repeated sword strike" message display shown in Figure 173) to accept multiple operations for the sword ornament 5001 that is the target for enabling the auto-repeated strike function (long press function) is hidden, or whether the timing at which the operation-related display is displayed is after the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "1B reception acceptance state" as part of the reception acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 164, 165, etc.). In this regard, Figure 184 is a time chart showing an example of a case in which an operation acceptance state occurs in which the operation state for the 1B operation unit (operation button 410) that began during the "1B reception acceptance state" continues even after the "1B reception acceptance state" has ended, and while the operation state continues, no "operation-related display prompting the operation to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410" is displayed, and the "operation button 410 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long press function)."

For ease of explanation, this example describes a case where the operation state of the 1B operation unit (operation button 410) that was started while in the "1B reception allowance state" is continued even after the "1B reception allowance state" has ended. However, the example described below may be realized as a reception allowance state of a different type than the "1B reception allowance state." In this case, however, in this reception allowance state, post-reception changes will occur that are different from those in the "1B reception allowance state."

In other words, as shown in FIG. 184, the details of each configuration and effect during the period from when the operation-related displays (such as the mock-up display MG-B1 and message display MB1) begin to be displayed at timing tBa1 until when the operation-related displays (such as the mock-up display MG-B1 and message display MB1) are hidden at timing tBa3 have been described above with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, so a detailed explanation will not be given here.

In this regard, this example assumes that the operation state of the "1B operation unit (operation button 410)" that has continued since the 1B reception acceptance state (here, from timing tBa2-C1) continues even (and even thereafter) after the 1B reception acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, without any operation-related display prompting the player to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410, which is the same operation target as in the 1B reception acceptance state, and the operation button 410 is targeted for activation of the auto-repeated function (long press function).

In this example, it is assumed that the "acceptance permitted state" that occurs while the operation state of the 1B operation unit (operation button 410) continues is the "6B acceptance permitted state (see Figures 174 and 175)" described above.

In this example, it is assumed that when timing tBa5B shown in FIG. 184 arrives after timing tBa3 when the 1B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden (based on "condition 6B" being satisfied at timing tBa5B), the 6B acceptance state (valid period) occurs, in which "acceptance of operations to the 6B operation unit (operation button 410) regarding changes after 6B acceptance (6B repeated tap display HB6, sounds output after 6B acceptance Sα6, Sβ6, etc.)" is permitted (the situation shown in FIG. 175(a)).

Here, in the 6B reception acceptance state in this example, the "6B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the same operation means as in the 1B reception acceptance state, i.e., the "operation button 410" that has been maintained in an operating state since the 1B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 6B reception acceptance state is ended.

However, as mentioned above, when the 6B reception acceptance state occurs, no operation-related display prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed (see, for example, Figures 184 (b) to (d)). Furthermore, no operation-related output sound prompting the player to operate is audibly output. Therefore, after time tBa3 when the 1B reception acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, the player will have difficulty recognizing that the 6B reception acceptance state has occurred, and will continue playing the game.

The configuration for this 6B reception permission state has been described above with reference to Figures 174 and 175, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to configurations for other examples that can be applied to the 6B reception permission state.

In this regard, in the 6B acceptance state shown in FIG. 184 (an acceptance state in which operation-related display is not displayed), a state occurs at timing tBa5B in which "operation acceptance is accepted in such a way that the operation button 410 is the target for activating the auto-repeated press function (long press function)," but in this state, the auto-repeated press function (long press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 1B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which operation-related display is displayed) (multiple operation acceptances are not made and changes are not executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, in this case, unless the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 1B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which the operation-related display is displayed) is released (ended) (more precisely, unless the operation button 410 that is in an inactive state in the 6B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which the operation-related display is not displayed) is put into an active state), the auto-repeated press function (long press function) will not be enabled based on the detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410", and therefore it can be expected that gameplay will be favorably maintained, such that "even if the 6B acceptance state occurs after timing tBa3, the game will proceed despite it being difficult to recognize this."

In this case, if the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 1B operation acceptance state is released (ended), then by placing the "operation button 410" in the operation state again in the 6B operation acceptance state shown in FIG. 184, operation acceptance for the "operation button 410" will be performed, and the auto-repeated press function (long press function) will of course be enabled. The configurations in the case where operation acceptance is performed in the 6B operation acceptance state have also been described above with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 184, between the time when the operation-related display corresponding to the 1B reception-permitting state is hidden and the time when the 6B reception-permitting state occurs, another reception-permitting state may occur or end (or may not occur), or the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation effect of the next decorative pattern SZ may start.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "second B reception acceptance state" as part of the reception acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 166 and 167, etc.). In this regard, Figure 185 is a time chart showing an example of a case in which an operation acceptance state occurs in which an operation state for the second B operation unit (operation button 410) that began during the "second B reception acceptance state" continues even after the "second B reception acceptance state" has ended, and while the operation state continues, no "operation-related display prompting the operation to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410" is displayed, and the "operation button 410 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long press function)."

For ease of explanation, this example describes a case where the operation state of the second B operation unit (operation button 410) that was started while in the "second B reception allowance state" is continued even after the "second B reception allowance state" has ended. However, the example described below may be realized as a reception allowance state of a different type than the "second B reception allowance state." In this case, however, in this reception allowance state, post-reception changes will occur that are different from those in the "second B reception allowance state."

In other words, as shown in FIG. 185, the details of each configuration and effect during the period from when the operation-related displays (such as the mock-up display MG-B2 and message display MB2) begin to be displayed at timing tBb1 until when the operation-related displays (such as the mock-up display MG-B2 and message display MB2) are hidden at timing tBb3 have been described above with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167, so a detailed explanation will not be given here.

In this regard, this example assumes that the operation state of the "second B operation unit (operation button 410)" that has continued since the second B acceptance state (here, from timing tBb2-C1) continues even after the second B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, at the point in time when (and even thereafter) a state in which operation acceptance is permitted occurs in which the operation button 410 is the target for activation of the auto-repeated press function (long press function), without any operation-related display prompting the player to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410, which is the same operation target as in the second B acceptance state.

In this example, it is assumed that the "sixth B reception permission state (see Figures 174 and 175)" described above occurs as the "reception permission state" that occurs while the second B operation unit (operation button 410) is being operated.

In this example, it is assumed that when timing tBb5B shown in FIG. 185 arrives (based on "condition 6B" being satisfied at timing tBb5B), which occurs after timing tBb3 when the 2B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, the 6B acceptance state (valid period) occurs, in which "acceptance of operations to the 6B operation unit (operation button 410) regarding changes after 6B acceptance (6B repeated tap display HB6, sounds output after 6B acceptance Sα6, Sβ6, etc.)" is accepted (the situation shown in FIG. 175(a)).

Here, in the 6B reception acceptance state in this example, the "6B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the same operation means as in the 2B reception acceptance state, i.e., the "operation button 410" that has been maintained in an operating state since the 2B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 6B reception acceptance state is terminated.

However, as mentioned above, when the 6B acceptance state occurs, no operation-related display prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed (see, for example, Figures 185 (b) to (d)). Furthermore, no operation-related output sound prompting the player to operate is audibly output. Therefore, after time tBb3 when the 2B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, the player will have difficulty recognizing that the 6B acceptance state has occurred, and will continue playing the game.

The configuration for this 6B reception permission state has been described above with reference to Figures 174 and 175, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to configurations for other examples that can be applied to the 6B reception permission state.

In this regard, in the 6B acceptance state shown in FIG. 185, at timing tBb5B, a state occurs in which "operation acceptance is accepted in such a way that the operation button 410 is the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function)." However, in this state, the auto-repeated function (long press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 2B acceptance state (multiple operation acceptances are not made and changes are not executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, in this case, the auto-repeated function (long press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410" unless the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 2B acceptance state is released (ended) (more precisely, unless the operation button 410 that was in an unoperated state in the 6B acceptance state is put into an operated state). Therefore, it can be expected that gameplay will be favorably maintained, such that "even if the 6B acceptance state occurs after timing tBb3, gameplay will proceed despite the difficulty of recognizing this."

In this case, if the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 2B operation acceptance state is released (ended), then by placing the "operation button 410" in the operation state again in the 6B operation acceptance state shown in FIG. 185, operation acceptance for the "operation button 410" will be performed, and the auto-repeated press function (long press function) will of course be enabled. The various components when operation acceptance is performed in the 6B operation acceptance state have also been described above with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 185, between the time when the operation-related display corresponding to the 2B reception allowance state is hidden and the time when the 6B reception allowance state occurs, another reception allowance state may occur or end (or may not occur), or the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation effect of the next decorative pattern SZ may start.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "3B reception acceptance state" as part of the reception acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 168, 169, etc.). In this regard, Figure 186 is a time chart showing an example of a case in which an operation state for the 3B operation unit (sword decorative body 5001) that was initiated during the "3B reception acceptance state" continues even after the "3B reception acceptance state" has ended, and while the operation state continues, no "operation-related display prompting the operation to accept multiple operations on the sword decorative body 5001" is displayed, and an acceptance acceptance state occurs in which the "sword decorative body 5001 is the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function)."

That is, as shown in FIG. 186, the details of the various components and effects during the period from when the operation-related displays (such as the model image display MG-B3 and message display MB3) begin to be displayed at timing tBc1 until when the operation-related displays (such as the model image display MG-B3 and message display MB3) are hidden at timing tBc3 are basically as described above with reference to FIGS. 168 and 169, and therefore will not be described here. For ease of explanation, this example assumes that a state in which multiple operations are permitted for the sword decorative element 5001 does not occur again between timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc3. However, even in the above-described example (see FIGS. 168 and 169) in which a state in which multiple operations are permitted for the sword decorative element 5001 occurs again between timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc3, the same configuration can be applied when the following events occur after timing tBc3.

In this regard, this example assumes that the operation state of the "3B operation unit (sword decoration 5001)" that has continued since the 3B reception acceptance state (here, from timing tBc2-C1) continues even after the 3B reception acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, without any operation-related display prompting the player to accept multiple operations on the sword decoration 5001, which is the same operation target as in the 3B reception acceptance state, and continues even at the point (and even thereafter) when a state in which operation acceptance is accepted occurs in which the sword decoration 5001 is the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function).

In other words, this example assumes that the "7B acceptance state (see FIGS. 176-178)" described above occurs as an "acceptance state" that occurs while the 3B operation unit (sword ornamentation 5001) is being operated. More specifically, it assumes that the 7B acceptance state (valid period) occurs when acceptance of operations for the 7B operation unit (sword ornamentation 5001) regarding post-7B acceptance changes (post-7B acceptance display HB7, post-7B acceptance sound Sα7, etc.) is permitted when timing tBc5B shown in FIG. 186 arrives (based on the satisfaction of "condition 7B" at timing tBc5B), which occurs after timing tBc3 when the 3B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden (the situation shown in FIG. 177(a)).

Here, in the 7B reception acceptance state in this example, the "7B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the same operation means as in the 3B reception acceptance state, i.e., the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained in an operating state since the 3B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 7B reception acceptance state is ended.

However, as mentioned above, when the 7B acceptance state occurs, no operation-related display prompting the player to operate the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (see Figures 186 (b)-(d), etc.). Furthermore, no operation-related output sound is audibly output to prompt the player to operate. Therefore, after time tBc3 when the 3B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, the player will have difficulty recognizing that the 7B acceptance state has occurred, and will continue playing the game.

The configuration for this 7B reception permission state has been described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to other example configurations that can be applied to the 7B reception permission state.

In this regard, in the 7B acceptance state shown in Figure 186, in addition to the state in which "operation acceptance is accepted in such a way that the sword ornament 5001 is the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function)" occurring at timing tBc5B, in this state, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained since the 3B acceptance state (multiple operations are accepted and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, after the 3B reception acceptance state ends, when an operation-related display prompting operation of the same operating means (sword decoration 5001) as in the 3B reception acceptance state is not displayed, and a state (7B reception acceptance state) occurs in which operation acceptance is accepted such that the operating means (sword decoration 5001) is set as the target for activating the auto-repeated tap function (long press function), unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) can be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 (because operation acceptance is performed at timing tBc5B) without canceling (terminating) the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 that has been maintained since the 3B reception acceptance state (more accurately, without re-operating the sword decoration 5001), and therefore, game play can proceed properly simply by continuing the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 that has been maintained since the 3B reception acceptance state.

Note that the configurations when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in an operational state (when the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled) in the 7B reception-permitted state have been described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so further explanation will be omitted here.

However, the "3B operation-related output sound OB3" and "7B post-acceptance display HB7" shown in FIG. 186 may have the following relationship:

For example, the 3B acceptance state in this example is assumed to occur when "Condition 3B" is met, which allows acceptance of multiple operations on the "3B operation unit (sword ornamentation 5001)" while the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 (see FIG. 186(g)) is being audibly output. However, as mentioned above, the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 may or may not end early at any timing within the time range TBc shown in FIG. 186(g).

Furthermore, in the 7B acceptance state, when the first operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" may be displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to that operation acceptance, but as mentioned above, the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" may either be displayed based on the first operation acceptance (see Figure 176 (f)) or not be displayed (see Figure 178 (f)).

In this regard, if the audible output of the thirdB operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated early, the "seventhB post-acceptance display HB7" will be displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation on the sword decorative element 5001 at timing tBc5B only when timing tBc5B (the timing at which "condition 7B" is met) arrives after a time longer than the special time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBc3. In contrast, if the audible output of the thirdB operation-related output sound OB3 is not terminated early, the "seventhB post-acceptance display HB7" will be displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation on the sword decorative element 5001 at timing tBc5B, even if timing tBc5B (the timing at which "condition 7B" is met) arrives before a time longer than the special time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBc3.

With this configuration, the likelihood that the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" will be displayed at timing tBc5B (the likelihood that the 7B acceptance permission state has been secretly generated and that the operation acceptance has been performed properly) will differ depending on whether the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated early, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Note that if the audible output of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated early and timing tBc5B (the timing at which "Condition 7B" is satisfied) arrives after a time longer than the special time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBc3, then "7B post-acceptance display HB7" may or may not be displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance at timing tBc5B. This configuration is expected to maintain a favorable sense of tension. However, it goes without saying that if the audible output of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated early and timing tBc5B (the timing at which "Condition 7B" is satisfied) arrives before a time longer than the special time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBc3, then "7B post-acceptance display HB7" will not be displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance at timing tBc5B.

Furthermore, if the audible output of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is not terminated early, the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" may be displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation on the sword ornament 5001 at time tBc5B, whether the timing tBc5B (the timing at which "Condition 7B" is satisfied) arrives after a time longer than the special time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since time tBc3, or the timing tBc5B (the timing at which "Condition 7B" is satisfied) arrives before a time longer than the special time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since time tBc3. However, in either case, the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" may or may not be displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation at time tBc5B. This configuration is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In the example shown in Figure 186, between the time when the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B reception-permitting state is hidden and the time when the 7B reception-permitting state occurs, other reception-permitting states may occur or end (or may not occur), or the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation effect of the next decorative pattern SZ may start.

In addition, the example shown in Figure 186 assumes that, after the 3B reception acceptance state ends, no operation-related display is displayed encouraging multiple operations to be accepted for the sword decoration 5001, which is the same operation target as the 3B reception acceptance state, and a state occurs in which operation acceptance is accepted in such a way that the sword decoration 5001 is made the target for activating the auto-repeated tap function (long press function). However, if the operation state of the "sword decoration 5001" is maintained from the 3B reception acceptance state until such state occurs, the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) will always be activated based on that detection (multiple operations will be accepted and a change will be executed after multiple acceptances).

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "5B reception acceptance state" as part of the reception acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 172, 173, etc.). In this regard, Figure 187 is a time chart showing an example of a case in which an operation state for the 5B operation unit (sword ornamentation 5001) that was initiated during the "5B reception acceptance state" continues even after the "5B reception acceptance state" has ended, and while the operation state continues, no "operation-related display prompting the operation to accept multiple operations on the sword ornamentation 5001" is displayed, and an acceptance acceptance state occurs in which the "sword ornamentation 5001 is the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function)."

That is, as shown in FIG. 187, the details of the various components and effects during the period from when the operation-related displays (such as the model image display MG-B5 and message display MB5) begin to be displayed at timing tBe1 until when the operation-related displays (such as the model image display MG-B5 and message display MB5) are hidden at timing tBe3 are basically as described above with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173, and therefore will not be described here. Note that, for the sake of convenience, this example assumes that a state in which multiple operations are permitted for the sword decorative body 5001 does not occur again between timing tBe2-C2 and timing tBe3. However, even in the above-described example (see FIGS. 172 and 173) in which a state in which multiple operations are permitted for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs again between timing tBe2-C2 and timing tBe3, a similar configuration can be applied when the following events occur after timing tBe3.

In this regard, this example assumes that the operation state of the "5B operation unit (sword decoration 5001)" that has continued since the 5B reception acceptance state (here, from timing tBe2-C1) continues even after the 5B reception acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, without any operation-related display prompting the player to accept multiple operations on the sword decoration 5001, which is the same operation target as in the 5B reception acceptance state, and continues even at the point (and even thereafter) when a state in which operation acceptance is accepted occurs in which the sword decoration 5001 is the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function).

In other words, this example assumes that the "7B acceptance state (see FIGS. 176-178)" described above occurs as an "acceptance state" that occurs while the 5B operation unit (sword ornamentation 5001) is being operated. More specifically, it assumes that the 7B acceptance state (valid period) occurs when acceptance of operations for the 7B operation unit (sword ornamentation 5001) regarding post-7B acceptance changes (post-7B acceptance display HB7, post-7B acceptance sound Sα7, etc.) is permitted when timing tBe5B shown in FIG. 187 arrives (based on the satisfaction of "condition 7B" at timing tBe5B), which occurs after timing tBe3 when the 5B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden (the situation shown in FIG. 177(a)).

Here, in the 7B reception acceptance state in this example, the "7B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the same operation means as in the 5B reception acceptance state, i.e., the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained in an operation state since the 5B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 7B reception acceptance state is ended.

However, as mentioned above, when the 7B acceptance state occurs, no operation-related display prompting the player to operate the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (see Figures 187(b)-(d), etc.). Furthermore, no operation-related output sound is audibly output to prompt the player to operate. Therefore, after time tBe3, when the 5B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, the player will have difficulty recognizing that the 7B acceptance state has occurred, and will continue playing the game.

The configuration for this 7B reception permission state has been described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to other example configurations that can be applied to the 7B reception permission state.

In this regard, in the 7B acceptance state shown in Figure 187, in addition to the state occurring at timing tBe5B where "acceptance of operations is permitted in the form of the sword ornament 5001 being the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function)," in this state, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained since the 5B acceptance state (multiple operations are accepted and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, after the 5B reception acceptance state ends, when a state (7B reception acceptance state) occurs in which operation acceptance is accepted such that the operation means (sword decoration 5001) is the target for activating the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) while no operation-related display prompting operation of the same operation means (sword decoration 5001) as in the 5B reception acceptance state is displayed, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) can be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 without canceling (terminating) the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 that has been maintained since the 5B reception acceptance state (more accurately, without re-operating the sword decoration 5001) (because operation acceptance is performed at timing tBe5B), and the game can proceed properly simply by continuing the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 that has been maintained since the 5B reception acceptance state.

Note that the configurations when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in an operational state (when the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled) in the 7B reception-permitted state have been described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so further explanation will be omitted here.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 187, in the 7B acceptance state, when the first operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBe5B, the "7B acceptance post-acceptance display HB7" can be displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to that operation acceptance; however, as mentioned above, the "7B acceptance post-acceptance display HB7" may be displayed based on the first operation acceptance (see Figure 176 (f)) or may not be displayed (see Figure 178 (f)).

In the example shown in Figure 187, between the time when the operation-related display corresponding to the 5B reception-permitting state is hidden and the time when the 7B reception-permitting state occurs, another reception-permitting state may occur or end (or may not occur), or the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation effect of the next decorative pattern SZ may start.

In addition, the example shown in Figure 187 assumes that, after the 5B reception acceptance state ends, no operation-related display is displayed encouraging the sword decoration 5001, which is the same operation target as the 5B reception acceptance state, to accept multiple operations, and a state occurs in which operation acceptance is accepted in such a way that the sword decoration 5001 is made the target for activating the auto-repeated tap function (long press function). However, if the operation state of the "sword decoration 5001" is maintained from the 5B reception acceptance state until such time as this state occurs, the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) will always be activated based on this detection (multiple operations will be accepted and a change will be executed after multiple acceptances).

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "6B reception acceptance state" as part of the reception acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 174, 175, etc.). In this regard, Figure 188 is a time chart showing an example of a case in which an operation acceptance state occurs in which an operation state for the 6B operation unit (operation button 410) that began during the "6B reception acceptance state" continues even after the "6B reception acceptance state" has ended, and while the operation state continues, an "operation-related display prompting the operation to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410" is displayed, and the "operation button 410 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long press function)."

In other words, as shown in FIG. 188, in the "6B acceptance state," operation-related displays (such as mock-up images and messages) are not displayed. Details of the configurations and effects during the period from when the state in which acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is accepted (timing tBf2) to when it ends (timing tBf2-C2) have been described above with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, this example assumes that the player continues to operate the "6B operation unit (operation button 410)" from the 6B acceptance state (here, from timing tBf2-C1) even after the 6B acceptance state ends, at the time when the "operation-related display prompting the player to accept multiple operations on the operation button 410, which is the target for activating the auto rapid press function (long press function) and is the same operation target as in the 6B acceptance state" is displayed (and even thereafter).

In this example, it is assumed that the "acceptance acceptance state" that occurs while the operation state of the operation button 410 is continued is the above-mentioned "1B acceptance acceptance state (see FIGS. 164 and 165)." More specifically, it is assumed that the above-mentioned 1B acceptance acceptance state (valid period) occurs when timing tBf4A shown in FIG. 188 arrives (based on "condition 1B" being satisfied at timing tBf4A), which is after timing tBf2-C2 when the 6B acceptance acceptance state ends) and "acceptance of operations to the 1B operation unit (operation button 410) regarding post-1B acceptance changes (1B performance status suggestion display JB1, 1B rapid tap display HB1, post-1B acceptance output sounds Sα1, Sβ1, etc.)" (the situation shown in FIG. 165(a)).

Here, in the 1B reception acceptance state in this example, the "1B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the same operation means as in the 6B reception acceptance state, i.e., the "operation button 410" that has been maintained in an operating state since the 6B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 1B reception acceptance state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the 1B acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-B1 that mimics the object of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 1B operation unit), a message display MB1 related to the operation of the object of operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the 1B operation unit), and a status suggestion display JB1 that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period after the operation acceptance is made are displayed at timing tBf3A before the 1B acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted) (see, for example, Figures 188(b)-(e)). Furthermore, at timing tBf3A according to this example, audible output of a 1B operation-related output sound OB1 that prompts the player to perform an operation also begins. Therefore, during the period from timing tBf4A to tBf5A in this example, even though an operation-related display such as the mock image display MG-B1 or message display MB1 is displayed in a first manner (such as the message display "Press the button repeatedly!" shown in FIG. 165) to prompt multiple operations on the operation button 410, and the first B operation-related output sound OB1 is being audibly output, the operation on the operation button 410 is not determined to be a valid operation (the operation is not accepted).

The configuration for this type of 1B reception permission state has been described above with reference to Figures 164 and 165, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to configurations for other examples that can be applied to the 1B reception permission state.

However, in the 1B acceptance state (acceptance state in which operation-related display is displayed) shown in FIG. 188, although a state occurs at timing tBf4A in which "acceptance of operations is permitted in such a way that the operation button 410 is made the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function)," in this state, the auto-repeated function (long press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 6B acceptance state (acceptance state in which operation-related display is not displayed) (multiple operations are not accepted and changes are not executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, in this case, the auto-repeated press function (long press function) will not be enabled based on the detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410" unless the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 6B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which the operation-related display is not displayed) is released (ended) (more precisely, unless the operation button 410 that was in an unoperated state in the 1B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which the operation-related display is displayed) is put into an operated state), and therefore the player can be prompted to release (end) the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 6B acceptance state.

In this case, if the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 6B operation acceptance state is released (ended), then by placing the "operation button 410" in the operation state again in the 1B operation acceptance state shown in FIG. 188, operation acceptance for the "operation button 410" will be accepted, and the auto-repeated press function (long press function) will of course be enabled. The various configurations when operation acceptance is accepted in the 1B operation acceptance state have also been described above with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, so further explanation will be omitted here.

Furthermore, even if an operation-related display other than that corresponding to the "1B reception allowance state" is displayed while the operation state of the "operation button 410" has continued since the 6B reception allowance state, i.e., an operation-related display that prompts the user to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410 that is the target for enabling the auto-repeated press function (long press function) and is the same operation target as in the 6B reception allowance state (for example, an operation-related display corresponding to the 2B reception allowance state (such as the message display "Press the button repeatedly!" as shown in FIG. 167)), the auto-repeated press function (long press function) may not be enabled based on the detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410" while the operation-related display is displayed, unless the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 6B reception allowance state is released (ended).

In the example shown in FIG. 188, between the end of the 6B acceptance state and the display of the "operation-related display prompting the user to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410 that is the target for activating the auto rapid press function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 6B acceptance state," another acceptance state may occur or end (or may not occur), or the decorative pattern SZ variation effect that was in the execution state may end, or the next decorative pattern SZ variation effect may begin.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "7B reception acceptance state" as part of the reception acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 176, 177, etc.). In this regard, Figure 189 is a time chart showing an example of a state in which an operation state for the 7B operation unit (sword ornamentation 5001) that began during the "7B reception acceptance state" continues even after the "7B reception acceptance state" has ended, and an "operation-related display prompting an operation to accept multiple operations on the sword ornamentation 5001" is displayed while the operation state continues, and the sword ornamentation 5001 is designated as a target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function)."

That is, as shown in Figure 189, the "7B Acceptance State" is one in which no operation-related displays (such as mockup images or message displays) are displayed, and the details of each configuration and effect during the period from when the state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted (timing tBg2) to when it ends (timing tBg2-C2) have been described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. Note that, for the sake of convenience, this example assumes that the state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted multiple times does not occur again between timing tBg2-C2 and timing tBg2-C4. However, even in the above-mentioned example (see Figures 176 to 178) in which a state in which multiple operations on the sword decorative element 5001 are permitted recurs between timing tBg2-C2 and timing tBg2-C4, a similar configuration can be applied when the following events occur from timing tBg3A onwards while the operation state on the sword decorative element 5001 is maintained. Furthermore, the example shown in Figure 189 assumes that the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" in response to the operation acceptance at timing tBg2-A1, etc., is not displayed (corresponding to the case in Figure 178). However, as mentioned above, there are also cases in which the 7th B post-acceptance display HB7 is displayed (corresponding to the case in Figure 176), and in this case as well, the configuration described below will appear.

In this regard, this example assumes that the player continues to operate the "7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001)" that has been in the 7B acceptance state (here, from timing tBg2-C1) even after the 7B acceptance state ends (and even after that) when an "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) that prompts the player to operate the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for activating the auto rapid-fire function (long press function) and is the same operation target as in the 7B acceptance state, in a specific manner (such as the message display "Super rapid-fire the sword" shown in FIG. 171) so that multiple operations can be accepted" is displayed again.

In other words, this example assumes that the "4B acceptance state (see FIGS. 170 and 171)" described above occurs as an "acceptance state" that occurs while the operation state of the sword decorative element 5001 continues. More specifically, it assumes that when timing tBg4A shown in FIG. 189 arrives after timing tBg2-C2, when the 7B acceptance state ends (based on "condition 4B" being met at timing tBg4A), the 4B acceptance state (valid period) occurs, in which "acceptance of operations to the 4B operating unit (sword decorative element 5001) regarding post-4B acceptance changes (such as the 4B performance status indication JB4, the 4B rapid tapping indication HB4, and the post-4B acceptance sound Sα4)" is accepted (the situation shown in FIG. 171(a)).

Here, in the 4B reception acceptance state in this example, the "4B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the same operation means as in the 7B reception acceptance state, i.e., the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained in an operation state since the 7B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 4B reception acceptance state is ended.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the 4B operation acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-B4 modeling the object operated by the player (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 4B operation unit), a message display MB4 related to the operation of the object operated by the player (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 4B operation unit), and a status indication display JB4 that can suggest the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period after the operation acceptance are displayed at timing tBg3A before the 4B operation acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted) (see, for example, Figures 189(b)-(e)). Furthermore, at timing tBg3A according to this example, audible output of a 4B operation-related output sound OB4 prompting the player to perform an operation also begins. Therefore, during the period from timing tBg3A to tBg4A in this example, even though operation-related displays such as the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are displayed to prompt the user to accept multiple operations on the sword decorative body 5001, and the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 is being audibly output, no operations on the sword decorative body 5001 are determined to be valid operations (no operations are accepted).

The configuration for this 4B reception permission state has been described above with reference to Figures 170 and 171, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to other example configurations that can be applied to the 4B reception permission state.

In this regard, in the 4B acceptance state shown in Figure 189, in addition to the state occurring at timing tBg4A where "operation acceptance is accepted in the form of the sword ornament 5001 being the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function)," in this state, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (multiple operations are accepted and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, after the 7B acceptance state ends, when an operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) appears, which prompts in a specific manner (such as the "Super Rapid Hit the Sword" message display shown in FIG. 171) to accept multiple operations on the sword decoration 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state, unlike the example shown in FIG. 188, the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) can be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 without canceling (terminating) the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which the operation-related display is not displayed) (more accurately, without re-operating the sword decoration 5001), because operation acceptance is performed at timing tBg4A), the game can be played properly simply by continuing the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state.

Note that the configuration of each element when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in an operational state (when the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled) in the 4B reception-permitted state has been described above with reference to Figures 170 and 171, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In the example shown in FIG. 189, between the end of the 7B acceptance state and the display of the "operation-related display prompting the user to accept multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state," another acceptance state may occur or end (or may not occur), or the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation effect of the next decorative pattern SZ may begin.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 189, after the 7B acceptance state ends, when an "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) that prompts in a specific manner (such as the message display "Super-rapid hits on the sword" shown in Figure 171) to accept multiple operations on the sword decoration 5001, which is the target for enabling the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state" appears, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is always enabled (multiple operations are accepted and a change is executed after multiple acceptances) based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword decoration 5001" that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (acceptance state in which the operation-related display is not displayed). However, instead of this, after the 7B reception allowance state ends, when an "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 4B reception allowance state) that prompts in a specific manner (such as the message display of "super-rapid hits on the sword" shown in FIG. 171) to accept multiple operations on the sword decoration 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B reception allowance state" appears, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) may be activated (multiple operations are accepted and changes after multiple acceptances are executed) based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword decoration 5001" that has been maintained since the 7B reception allowance state (an allowance state in which the operation-related display is not displayed), or the activation may not be performed (multiple operations are not accepted and changes after multiple acceptances are not executed). In other words, if the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is not enabled based on the detection of the operation state of the sword decorative element 5001, which has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state, the operation state of the sword decorative element 5001 from the 7B acceptance state remains unchanged, no operation acceptance or post-acceptance change is performed, and the timing arrives for the operation-related display, which began displaying at timing tBg4A, to be hidden. Note that a configuration for when the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is not enabled (no multiple operations are accepted, and no post-acceptance change is performed) while the operation-related display is displayed can be achieved by creating a state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative element 5001 is permitted while the operation-related display is displayed, but disabling the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function), or by not allowing acceptance of operations for the sword decorative element 5001 at all.

Figure 189 assumes that the above-mentioned "fourth B reception permission state (see Figures 170 and 171)" occurs as the "reception permission state" that occurs while the operation state of the sword decorative body 5001 continues from the seventh B reception permission state. However, the "reception permission state" that occurs while the operation state of the sword decorative body 5001 continues from the seventh B reception permission state is not limited to the above-mentioned "fourth B reception permission state (see Figures 170 and 171)," and may also include, for example, the above-mentioned "fifth B reception permission state (see Figures 172 and 173)."

Figure 190 assumes the case where, when timing tBg4B arrives after timing tBg2-C2, when the 7B acceptance state ends (based on "condition 5B" being met at timing tBg4B), the above-mentioned 5B acceptance state (valid period) occurs, in which "acceptance of operations to the 5B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) regarding changes after 5B acceptance (such as 5B performance status indication display JB5, 5B rapid tapping display HB5, and post-5B output sound Sα5)" is accepted (the situation shown in Figure 173(a)).

As mentioned above, the "7B Acceptance Allowed State" is one in which no operation-related displays (such as mockup images or messages) are displayed, and the details of the various components and effects during the period from when the state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted occurs (timing tBg2) to when it ends (timing tBg2-C2) have been described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so we will not explain them here. Note that, for the sake of convenience, this example assumes that the state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted multiple times does not occur again between timing tBg2-C2 and timing tBg2-C4. However, even in the above-mentioned example (see Figures 176 to 178) in which a state in which multiple operations on the sword decorative element 5001 are permitted recurs between timing tBg2-C2 and timing tBg2-C4, a similar configuration can be applied when the following events occur from timing tBg3A onwards while the operation state on the sword decorative element 5001 is maintained. Furthermore, the example shown in Figure 190 assumes that the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" in response to the operation acceptance at timing tBg2-A1, etc., is not displayed (corresponding to the case in Figure 178), but as mentioned above, there are also cases in which the 7th B post-acceptance display HB7 is displayed (corresponding to the case in Figure 176), and in this case as well, the configuration described below will appear.

In this regard, this example assumes that the player continues to operate the "7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001)" from the 7B acceptance state (here, from timing tBg2-C1) even after the 7B acceptance state ends (and even after that) when an "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state) that urges the player to operate in a special manner (such as the "sword rapid strike" message display shown in FIG. 173) so that multiple operations can be accepted for the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for activating the auto rapid strike function (long press function) and is the same operation target as in the 7B acceptance state" is displayed again (and even thereafter).

In other words, this example assumes that the "5B acceptance state (see FIGS. 172 and 173)" described above occurs as an "acceptance state" that occurs while the operation state of the sword decorative element 5001 continues. More specifically, it assumes that when timing tBg4B shown in FIG. 190 arrives (based on the satisfaction of "condition 5B" at timing tBg4B), which occurs after timing tBg2-C2 when the 7B acceptance state ends, the above-mentioned 5B acceptance state (valid period) occurs, in which "acceptance of operations to the 5B operating unit (sword decorative element 5001) regarding post-5B acceptance changes (such as the 5B performance status indication JB5, the 5B rapid tapping indication HB5, and the post-5B acceptance sound Sα5)" is accepted (the situation shown in FIG. 173(a)).

Here, in the 5B reception acceptance state in this example, the "5B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations is set as the same operation means as in the 7B reception acceptance state, i.e., the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained in an operating state since the 7B reception acceptance state, and multiple operations can be accepted until the 5B reception acceptance state is ended.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, when the 5B reception acceptance state occurs, a replica image display MG-B5 modeling the object to be operated by the player (here, the "sword decoration 5001" as the 5B operation unit), a message display MB5 related to the operation on the object to be operated (here, the "sword decoration 5001" as the 5B operation unit), and a status suggestion display JB5 capable of indicating the degree of progress of the presentation over the entire period following the acceptance of the operation are displayed at timing tBg3B before the 5B reception acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted) (see Figures 190 (b) to (e), etc.). Therefore, during the period from timing tBg3B to tBg4B in this example, even though operation-related displays such as the sketch image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are displayed, prompting the user to accept multiple operations on the sword decorative element 5001, operations on the sword decorative element 5001 are not determined to be valid operations (operations are not accepted).

The configuration for this 5B reception permission state has been described above with reference to Figures 172 and 173, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to configurations for other examples that can be applied to the 5B reception permission state.

In this regard, in the 5B acceptance state shown in Figure 190, in addition to the state in which "operation acceptance is accepted in the form that the sword ornament 5001 is the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function)" occurring at timing tBg4B, in this state, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (multiple operations are accepted and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, after the 7B acceptance state ends, when an operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state) appears, which prompts in a special manner (such as the "Strike the sword repeatedly" message display shown in FIG. 173) to accept multiple operations on the sword decoration 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated hit function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state, unlike the example shown in FIG. 188, the auto-repeated hit function (long press function) can be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 without canceling (terminating) the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which the operation-related display is not displayed) (more accurately, without re-operating the sword decoration 5001), because operation acceptance is performed at timing tBg4B), the game can proceed properly simply by continuing the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state.

Note that the configuration of each element when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in an operational state (when the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled) in the 5B reception-permitted state has been described above with reference to Figures 172 and 173, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In the example shown in Figure 190, between the end of the 7B acceptance state and the display of the "operation-related display prompting the user to accept multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state," another acceptance state may occur or end (or may not occur), or the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation effect of the next decorative pattern SZ may begin.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 190, after the 7B acceptance state ends, when an "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state) that prompts in a special manner (such as the message display "Strike the sword repeatedly" shown in Figure 173) to accept multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for enabling the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state" appears, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is always enabled (multiple operations are accepted and a change is executed after multiple acceptances) based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (acceptance state in which the operation-related display is not displayed). However, instead of this, after the 7B reception allowance state ends, when an "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 5B reception allowance state) that prompts in a special manner (such as the message display of "strike the sword repeatedly" as shown in FIG. 173) to accept multiple operations on the sword decoration 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B reception allowance state" appears, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) may be activated (multiple operations are accepted and changes after multiple acceptances are executed) based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword decoration 5001" that has been maintained since the 7B reception allowance state (an allowance state in which the operation-related display is not displayed), or the activation may not be performed (multiple operations are not accepted and changes after multiple acceptances are not executed). In other words, if the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is not enabled based on the detection of the operation state of the sword decorative element 5001, which has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state, the operation state of the sword decorative element 5001 from the 7B acceptance state remains unchanged, no operation is accepted, and no change after acceptance is made, and the timing arrives for the operation-related display, which began displaying at timing tBg4B, to be hidden. Note that a configuration for when the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is not enabled (no multiple operations are accepted, and no change after multiple acceptances is made) while the operation-related display is displayed can be achieved by creating a state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative element 5001 is accepted while the operation-related display is displayed, but disabling the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function), or by not accepting acceptance of operations for the sword decorative element 5001 at all.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "6B reception acceptance state" as part of the reception acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 174, 175, etc.). In this regard, Figure 191 is a time chart showing an example of a case in which an operation acceptance state occurs in which an operation state for the 6B operation unit (operation button 410) that began during the "6B reception acceptance state" continues even after the "6B reception acceptance state" has ended, and while the operation state continues, no "operation-related display prompting the operation to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410" is displayed, and the "operation button 410 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long press function)."

In other words, as shown in FIG. 188, in the "6B acceptance state," operation-related displays (such as mock-up images and messages) are not displayed. Details of the configurations and effects during the period from when the state in which acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is accepted (timing tBf2) to when it ends (timing tBf2-C2) have been described above with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, this example assumes that the operation state of the "6B operation unit (operation button 410)" that has continued since the 6B reception acceptance state (here, from timing tBf2-C1) continues even after the 6B reception acceptance state ends (and continues thereafter) at the point in time when a state in which operation acceptance is accepted occurs in which the operation button 410 is the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function), without any operation-related display being displayed urging the player to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410, which is the same operation target as in the 6B reception acceptance state.

In this example, it is assumed that the "6B acceptance state" (see FIGS. 174 and 175) described above occurs again as an "acceptance state" that occurs while the operation state of the operation button 410 is continued. More specifically, it is assumed that the 6B acceptance state (valid period) occurs again when timing tBf4B shown in FIG. 191 arrives (based on the satisfaction of "condition 6B" at timing tBf4B), which is after timing tBf2-C2 when the 6B acceptance state ends) and in which "acceptance of operations to the 6B operation unit (operation button 410) regarding post-6B acceptance changes (6B repeated tap display HB6, post-6B acceptance output sounds Sα6, Sβ6, etc.)" is accepted (the situation shown in FIG. 165(a)).

The acceptance state that occurs at timing tBf4B need only be a "state in which operation acceptance is permitted in such a way that the operation button 410, which is the same operation target as the 6B acceptance state, is subject to activation of the auto-repeated press function (long press function) without displaying an operation-related display prompting the user to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410, which is the same operation target as the 6B acceptance state," and does not necessarily have to be the 6B acceptance state. If an acceptance state of a different type from the 6B acceptance state occurs, a different change will appear as the post-acceptance change, but the configurations described below can be applied in the same way.

As described above, when the 6B reception permission state occurs, no operation-related display prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed (see, for example, Figures 191 (b) to (d)). Furthermore, no operation-related output sound prompting the player to operate is audibly output. Therefore, after timing tBf2-C2, when the 6B reception permission state ends, the player will have difficulty recognizing that the 6B reception permission state has occurred, and will continue playing the game.

The configuration for this 6B reception permission state has been described above with reference to Figures 174 and 175, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to configurations for other examples that can be applied to the 6B reception permission state.

In this regard, in the example shown in Figure 191, at timing tBf4B, a state (6B acceptance state) occurs again in which "operation acceptance is permitted in such a way that the operation button 410 is the target for activating the auto-repeated press function (long press function)," but in this state, the auto-repeated press function (long press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since before timing tBf2-C2 (multiple operations are not accepted and changes are not executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, in this case, unless the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 6th B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which the operation-related display is not displayed) that occurred at timing tBf2 is released (ended) (more precisely, unless the operation button 410, which is in an unoperated state in the newly generated 6th B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which the operation-related display is not displayed) is put into an operated state), the auto-repeated press function (long press function) will not be enabled based on the detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410." Therefore, it can be expected that gameplay will be favorably maintained, such that "even if the 6th B acceptance state occurs after timing tBf2-C2, the game will proceed despite the difficulty of recognizing this."

In this case, if the operation state of the "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 6B acceptance state that occurred at timing tBf2 is released (ended), then by placing the "operation button 410" in an operation state again in the 6B acceptance state that occurs again at timing tBf4B, operation of the "operation button 410" will be accepted, and the auto-repeated press function (long press function) will of course be enabled. The configurations in the case where operation acceptance is performed in the 6B acceptance state have also been described above with reference to Figures 174 and 175, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In the example shown in FIG. 191, after the 6B acceptance state ends, until a state occurs again in which "operation acceptance is accepted in such a way that the operation button 410, which is the same operation target as in the 6B acceptance state, is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long press function) without displaying an operation-related display prompting the operation to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410," another acceptance state may occur or end (or may not occur), or the decorative pattern SZ variation effect that was in the execution state may end, or the next decorative pattern SZ variation effect may start.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "7B reception acceptance state" as part of the reception acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 176 to 178, etc.). In this regard, Figure 192 is a time chart showing an example of a case in which an operation acceptance state occurs in which the operation state for the 7B operation unit (sword ornamentation 5001) that began during the "7B reception acceptance state" continues even after the "7B reception acceptance state" ends, and while the operation state continues, no "operation-related display prompting the operation to accept multiple operations on the sword ornamentation 5001" is displayed, and the sword ornamentation 5001 is designated as a target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function)."

That is, as shown in Figure 192, the "7B Acceptance Allowed State" is one in which no operation-related displays (such as mockup images or message displays) are displayed, and the details of each configuration and effect during the period from when the state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is allowed occurs (timing tBg2) to when it ends (timing tBg2-C2) have been described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. Note that, for the sake of convenience, this example assumes that the state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is allowed multiple times does not occur again between timing tBg2-C2 and timing tBg2-C4. However, even in the above-mentioned example (see Figures 176 to 178) in which a state in which multiple operations on the sword decorative element 5001 are permitted recurs between timing tBg2-C2 and timing tBg2-C4, a similar configuration can be applied if the following events occur after timing tBg4C while the operation state on the sword decorative element 5001 is maintained. Furthermore, the example shown in Figure 192 assumes that the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" in response to the operation acceptance at timing tBg2-A1, etc., is not displayed (corresponding to the case in Figure 178). However, as mentioned above, there are also cases in which the 7th B post-acceptance display HB7 is displayed (corresponding to the case in Figure 176). In this case, the configuration described below will also be implemented. However, this assumes that the 7th B post-acceptance display HB7 is hidden before timing tBg4C.

In this regard, this example assumes that the operation state of the "7B operation unit (sword decoration 5001)" that has continued since the 7B reception acceptance state (here, from timing tBg2-C1) continues even after the 7B reception acceptance state ends (and continues thereafter) when a state in which operation acceptance is permitted again occurs, with the sword decoration 5001 being the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function), without any operation-related display being displayed urging the player to perform multiple operations on the sword decoration 5001, which is the same operation target as in the 7B reception acceptance state.

In other words, this example assumes that the "7B acceptance state (see FIGS. 176-178)" described above occurs again as an "acceptance state" that occurs while the operation of the sword decorative element 5001 continues. More specifically, it assumes that when timing tBg4C shown in FIG. 192 arrives (based on "Condition 7B" being satisfied at timing tBg4C), which occurs after timing tBg2-C2 when the 7B acceptance state ends, the above-mentioned 7B acceptance state (valid period) occurs, in which "acceptance of operations to the 7B operating unit (sword decorative element 5001) regarding post-7B acceptance changes (post-7B acceptance display HB7, post-7B acceptance sound Sα7, etc.)" is accepted (the situation shown in FIG. 177(a)).

The acceptance state that occurs at timing tBg4C need only be a state in which "operation acceptance is permitted in such a way that the sword ornament 5001 is the target for activation of the auto-repeated function (long press function) without displaying an operation-related display prompting the user to accept multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the same operation target as in the 7B acceptance state," and does not necessarily have to be the 7B acceptance state. Even if an acceptance state of a different type than the 7B acceptance state occurs, the configurations described below can be similarly applied.

As mentioned above, when the 7B acceptance state occurs, no operation-related display prompting the player to operate the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (see Figures 192 (b)-(d), etc.). Furthermore, no operation-related output sound is audibly output to prompt the player to operate. Therefore, after timing tBg4C when the 7B acceptance state ends, the player will have difficulty recognizing that the 7B acceptance state has occurred, and will continue playing the game.

The configuration for this 7B reception permission state has been described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The same applies to other example configurations that can be applied to the 7B reception permission state.

In this regard, in the example shown in Figure 192, at timing tBg4C, a state (7B acceptance state) in which "operation acceptance is permitted in the form of the sword decoration 5001 being the target for activating the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function)" occurs again, and in this state, the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword decoration 5001" that has been maintained since before timing tBg2-C2 (multiple operations are accepted and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). That is, after the 7B acceptance state ends at timing tBg2-C2, when an operation-related display prompting an operation on the same operating means (sword ornamentation 5001) as in the 7B acceptance state is not displayed, and when a state (7B acceptance state) occurs again in which operation acceptance is permitted by making the operating means (sword ornamentation 5001) the target for activating the auto-repeated function (long press function), unlike the example shown in FIG. 191, The auto-repeated function (long press function) can be re-enabled based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword decoration 5001" without canceling (terminating) the maintained operation state of the "sword decoration 5001" (more accurately, without operating the sword decoration 5001 again) (because operation is accepted at timing tBg4C), so the game can proceed properly simply by continuing the operation state of the "sword decoration 5001" that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance acceptance state occurred at timing tBg2.

Note that the configurations when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in an operational state (when the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled) in the 7B reception-permitted state have been described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so further explanation will be omitted here.

In the example shown in Figure 192, after timing tBg2-C2 arrives, another acceptance acceptance state may occur or end (or may not occur) until the 7B acceptance acceptance state occurs again, or the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end or the variable presentation of the next decorative pattern SZ may begin.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 192, when the first operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg4C, the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" can be displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to that operation acceptance, but as mentioned above, the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" may be displayed based on the first operation acceptance (see Figure 176 (f)) or may not be displayed (see Figure 178 (f)).

Figure 193 is a time chart showing an example of a case where, when the first operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg4C, "7th B Post-Acceptance Display HB7" is not displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to that operation acceptance.

As shown in Figure 193, this example differs from the example shown in Figure 192 in that when the first operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg4C, "7B Post-Acceptance Display HB7" is not displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance. However, the other configuration is as described above with reference to Figure 192, so explanation will be omitted here. In addition, the configuration regarding whether or not "7B Post-Acceptance Display HB7" is displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance is also as described above.

In the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, after the 7B reception acceptance state ends, no operation-related display is displayed encouraging multiple operations to be accepted for the sword decoration 5001, which is the same operation target as in the 7B reception acceptance state, and a state in which operation acceptance is accepted again occurs in which the sword decoration 5001 is the target for enabling the auto-repeated tap function (long press function).However, if the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 is maintained from the 7B reception acceptance state until this state occurs again, the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) will always be enabled based on this detection (multiple operations will be accepted and a change will be executed after multiple acceptances).

The configuration of each of the above-mentioned performance examples may be modified as follows:

For example, the first B reception allowance state, the second B reception allowance state, and the sixth B reception allowance state all occur and end as states in which operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is permitted, but in these states, operation acceptance for other operation means such as the sword ornament 5001 may also be permitted. Conversely, the third B reception allowance state, the fourth B reception allowance state, the fifth B reception allowance state, and the seventh B reception allowance state occur and end as states in which operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted, but in these states, operation acceptance for other operation means such as the operation button 410 may also be permitted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance examples, the configurations labeled "1B" through "7B" are intended to correspond to the "1B reception-permitted state" through the "7B reception-permitted state," respectively, and do not specify whether the configurations are the same or different types. For example, while the "1B operation unit" and the "2B operation unit" have different names, they all use the "operation button 410" as their operation unit, and it is clear that they do not specify whether they are the same or different types of operation units. Furthermore, the names "1B" through "7B" may not necessarily specify whether the "reception-permitted state" is the same or different type (the manner of change after reception). For example, the "1B reception-permitted state" and the "6B reception-permitted state" differ only in the performance environment at the time of their occurrence and termination, and their occurrence and termination conditions may be set to be the same, or the same change may occur as a post-reception change in response to operation reception. That is, in this case, only the time at which operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is permitted and the presentation environment (e.g., the mode of the operation-related display, the mode or presence of operation-prompting light emission, the mode or presence of operation-related output sound, etc.) differ until the termination condition is satisfied, but the mode of the post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is accepted is the same. In this case, the "first B acceptance state" and the "sixth B acceptance state" can be considered as at least two presentation modes prepared as a "state in which operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is permitted." However, as described above, it is not necessary for the "state in which operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is permitted" to have both of these presentation modes. Furthermore, the third B acceptance state to the fifth B acceptance state and the seventh B acceptance state may have the same conditions for occurrence and termination, and the same post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance may appear. In other words, in this case, only the point at which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted and the presentation environment until the end conditions are met (for example, the mode of operation-related displays, the mode or presence of operation-prompting light, the mode or presence of operation-related output sounds, etc.) are different, but the mode of post-acceptance changes that appear when an operation is accepted will be the same. In this case, rather than being separate acceptance states, the third-B reception acceptance state through the fifth-B reception acceptance state and the seventh-B reception acceptance state can be thought of as at least four presentation modes prepared as "states in which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted." However, as mentioned above, it is not necessary for all four of these presentation modes to be provided as "states in which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted."

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "1st B reception allowance state" through the "7th B reception allowance state" may all be made to occur within the same fluctuation pattern. In this case, all of the "1st B reception allowance state" through the "7th B reception allowance state" will occur within one fluctuation pattern. Alternatively, any number of the "1st B reception allowance state" through the "7th B reception allowance state" may be made to occur within the same fluctuation pattern.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "1st B reception permission state" to the "7th B reception permission state" do not necessarily have to occur or end within the execution period of the pattern change, and may occur across multiple pattern changes.

Furthermore, the "post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display)" that occurs when an operation is accepted in an acceptance-permitted state according to each of the above-mentioned presentation examples and their modified examples does not necessarily indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot. For example, it may occur as an acceptance-permitted state that determines whether the probability fluctuation function is enabled during the jackpot game's execution period, and be executed as that post-acceptance change. Alternatively, it may occur based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions during various interval periods, and be executed as that post-acceptance change. Therefore, the acceptance-permitted state according to each of the above-mentioned presentation examples and their modified examples does not necessarily occur during the period in which the pattern fluctuation is being executed. Furthermore, even when it is executed as a post-acceptance change that does not indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot, multiple modes may be prepared for when the post-acceptance change is executed, and the display may be in any of those modes.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when an operation opportunity is granted to the operation button 410, it is possible that none of the following are not executed: an operation-related display that prompts operation by visual display, an operation-related output sound that prompts operation by sound, or an operation-promoting light that prompts operation by light; at least one of these is always executed. In contrast, when an operation opportunity is granted to the sword ornament 5001, it is possible that none of the following are executed (7B acceptance-permitted state).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "start conditions (for example, timing tBc2-C3, timing tBd2-C3, timing tBe2-C3, timing tBg2-C3, timing tBe5A-1, timing tBe5A-2, timing tBc5B, timing tBe5B, timing tBg4A, timing tBg4B, timing tBg4C, timing tBg4D, etc.)" for the "situation in which multiple operations can be accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 (a situation in which multiple operations are allowed)" to appear, and The "termination conditions (for example, timing tBc2-C2, timing tBd2-C2, timing tBe2-C2, timing tBg2-C2, etc.)" for terminating the "game" may be met based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a performance determination when operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a performance determination based on operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of operation for an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; these conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, only the "1B reception allowance state" through the "7B reception allowance state" may be provided as reception allowance states in which the auto rapid-fire function (long press function) is enabled. Alternatively, only some of the "1B reception allowance state" through the "7B reception allowance state" may be provided.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, either the "first B reception permission state" or the "second B reception permission state" may maintain sound output as one of the post-reception changes for as long as the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation target is maintained in an operation state, the auto-tap function may cause "a constant interval until a new post-acceptance change appears," but this configuration may be such that a new post-acceptance change occurs at a predetermined time interval when the operation target is maintained in an operation state, and the post-acceptance change does not necessarily always occur at the same time interval. For example, the time from when the operation means is maintained in an operation state and the first post-acceptance change is executed until the second post-acceptance change (auto-tap function) is executed is set to 0.5 seconds, but thereafter the post-acceptance change (auto-tap function) is executed at 0.2 second intervals. In this case, the above-mentioned configuration of "a constant interval until a new post-acceptance change appears" may be realized by including multiple "predetermined times."

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, among the post-acceptance changes in response to acceptance of an operation based on a specific operation on the sword decorative body 5001 in the 7B acceptance acceptance state, the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" and the "7B event (7B post-acceptance output sound Sα7)" may be realized as being executed based on different operation detections. However, in this case, if the "7B event (7B post-acceptance output sound Sα7)" is executed based on the detection of a "specific operation (e.g., a pushing operation, a pulling operation, etc.)" on the sword decorative body 5001, then the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" would be realized as being executed based on the detection of an operation required to perform a specific operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (e.g., a proximity operation on the sword decorative body 5001, a touch operation on the sword decorative body 5001, etc.). Even with this configuration, when an operation based on a specific operation is received on the sword ornament 5001, the "7th B post-reception display HB7" and "7th B event (7th B post-reception output sound Sα7)" will be executed as post-reception changes.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, "Condition 1B" through "Condition 7B," which result in the "1B Reception Allowed State" through "7B Reception Allowed State," do not have to be met over time after the symbol change begins. They simply need to be predetermined conditions.

In addition, unless otherwise noted, the configurations in each of the above-mentioned presentation examples are the configurations when games are being played properly, i.e., they correspond to the configurations when no error processing based on fraudulent activity is being performed.

In addition, while the "1st B operation unit," "2nd B operation unit," and "6th B operation unit" in the above-mentioned performance examples are all realized as "operation button 410," some or all of these operation units may be realized as operation units different from the "operation button 410" (operation means different from the sword ornament 5001, or from both the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001). Similarly, while the "3rd B operation unit," "4th B operation unit," "5th B operation unit," and "7th B operation unit" in the above-mentioned performance examples are all realized as the "sword ornament 5001," some or all of these operation units may be realized as operation units different from the "sword ornament 5001" (operation means different from the operation button 410, or from both the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001).

In addition, in the "1B reception allowable state" to "5B reception allowable state," a mock-up image display modeling the operation section for which the auto rapid tap function is enabled is displayed, but as long as an operation-related display is displayed, the mock-up image display may not necessarily be displayed. Furthermore, the "1B reception allowable state," "2B reception allowable state," and "6B reception allowable state" may differ in the type of operation-related display and its presence or absence, and may show the same change after reception. Furthermore, the "3B reception allowable state" to "5B reception allowable state," and "7B reception allowable state" may differ in the type of operation-related display and its presence or absence, and may show the same change after reception.

Furthermore, the mock-up image display can be displayed in the same form (or a similar form) when the periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and when the periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time." However, when the periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time," the mock-up image display may be displayed in at least the first form and the second form; and when the periodic change in the mock-up image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time," the mock-up image display may not be displayed in the second form (or a similar form), but may be displayed in the first form (or a similar form).

Incidentally, unlike color schemes or light emissions, cyclical changes in the model image display are a phenomenon that occurs over time, and so it takes a relatively long time to distinguish whether they are long or short. Furthermore, it can be said to be difficult to reliably distinguish whether the currently displayed cyclical change in the model image display is long or short (because not both long and short cycles are displayed). However, on the other hand, if players can distinguish between the two, they will be able to enjoy their value as a new source of information, and so it is through this difficulty of distinction and their value as an information source that new dramatic effects can be provided.

The first B reception allowance state and the second B reception allowance state are also provided as "a type of reception allowance state in which the reception allowance state can be terminated early based on the acceptance of an operation." However, in the first B reception allowance state and the second B reception allowance state, for example, if a predetermined judgment result is not obtained as a result of a jackpot judgment, a presentation judgment, or the like, the reception allowance state may not be terminated early no matter how many operations are accepted (the final presentation mode does not appear), and the reception allowance state may be terminated early only when a predetermined judgment result is obtained as a result of a jackpot judgment, a presentation judgment, or the like. Even with this configuration, it can be said that the reception allowance state is realized as "a type of reception allowance state in which the reception allowance state can be terminated early based on the acceptance of an operation (the final presentation mode appears)." However, the first B reception allowance state and the second B reception allowance state may also be provided as "a type of reception allowance state in which the reception allowance state cannot be terminated early based on the acceptance of an operation."

Furthermore, the interval at which post-acceptance changes occur due to the auto-rapid tap function (the interval at which new post-acceptance changes occur when the operation state is maintained) is the same in the 1B acceptance state and the 6B acceptance state. In this regard, the 3B acceptance state to the 5B acceptance state, and the 7B acceptance state also have the same interval at which post-acceptance changes occur due to the auto-rapid tap function (the interval at which new post-acceptance changes occur when the operation state is maintained), but the interval at which post-acceptance changes occur due to the auto-rapid tap function may be shorter than in the 1B acceptance state and the 6B acceptance state. This configuration makes it relatively difficult to recognize that the auto-rapid tap function is enabled in the 3B acceptance state to the 5B acceptance state, and the 7B acceptance state, thereby creating a desirable sense of tension.

Furthermore, the interval at which post-acceptance changes occur due to the auto-rapid tap function (the interval at which new post-acceptance changes occur when the operation state is maintained) does not necessarily have to be the same between the first B acceptance state and the sixth B acceptance state. The interval at which post-acceptance changes occur due to the auto-rapid tap function (the interval at which new post-acceptance changes occur when the operation state is maintained) also does not necessarily have to be the same between the third B acceptance state through the fifth B acceptance state and the seventh B acceptance state.

Furthermore, the number of times that post-acceptance changes can occur in the second B acceptance state when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state may be set to be less than the number of times that post-acceptance changes can occur in the first B acceptance state when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state.

Furthermore, the number of times that post-acceptance changes can occur in the 3B acceptance state or the 4B acceptance state when the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state in the 3B acceptance state or the 4B acceptance state may be set to be less than the number of times that post-acceptance changes can occur in the 5B acceptance state when the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state in the 5B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the second B reception-permitting state, the upper limit number of times that post-acceptance changes can occur by maintaining the operation button 410 in an operated state may be set to be less than the upper limit number of times that post-acceptance changes can occur by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining it in an operated state.

Furthermore, in the first B reception-permitting state, the upper limit number of times that a post-reception change can occur by maintaining the operation button 410 in an operated state may be set to be the same as or greater than the upper limit number of times that a post-reception change can occur by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining it in an operated state.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "time less than a specific time" also includes a specific time, and only a specific time may be provided as a "time less than a specific time." Furthermore, the above-mentioned "time longer than a specific time" may only be provided as a single time period.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "time shorter than a predetermined time" includes a predetermined time, and it is also possible for only a predetermined time to be provided as a "time shorter than a predetermined time." Furthermore, it is also possible for only one time to be provided as a "time longer than a predetermined time."

Furthermore, in the second B acceptance state, when the operation button 410 is set to an operation state and this operation state is maintained, the interval at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times (the interval at which post-acceptance changes occur with the so-called auto-repeated button press function) may be set to either a time less than a specific time (for example, 1 second) or a time longer than the specific time, depending on its indeterminacy.

Furthermore, it is desirable to realize the above-mentioned "Message Display MB1" and "Message Display MB2" as types (modes) that are only displayed when multiple operations are permitted on the operation button 410, making it eligible for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function); in other words, as types (modes) that are not displayed when "multiple operations are permitted on the operation button 410, but the button is not eligible for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function)." Furthermore, the above-mentioned "Message Display MB3," "Message Display MB4," and "Message Display MB5" are also only displayed when multiple operations are permitted on the sword decoration 5001, making it eligible for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function). However, it is also possible to prevent the sword decoration 5001 from being eligible for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) when multiple operations are permitted.

It is desirable that the specific time be shorter than a predetermined time, and that the "time equal to or shorter than the specific time" be shorter than the "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time." Conversely, it is desirable that the "time longer than the specific time" be longer than the "time longer than the predetermined time." Alternatively, if the "time longer than the specific time" is set as an indefinite time, then due to this indefiniteness, both the "time longer than the specified time" and the "time longer than the specified time" may occur.

Furthermore, when the conditions for early termination of the audible output of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 are met at any timing within the time range TBc shown in FIG. 168(g), the operation-related displays (sample image display MG-B3 and message display MB3) may also be hidden based on the same conditions being met (early termination of operation-related displays such as message display MB3).

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the operation of the operation button 410, a corresponding post-operation display (e.g., post-operation display HB2) can be displayed when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state. In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, a corresponding post-operation display (e.g., post-operation display HB2) can be displayed only when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function" is displayed. However, instead of this, a corresponding post-operation display may also be displayed when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function" is not displayed.

As described above, in the 2B reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 166, if the operation button 410 is changed to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state back to the operated state, this does not trigger the effect sound that was audible at that time to be made inaudible. In this regard, in the 2B reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 166, the post-2B reception output sound Sα2 is not in an audible state when the operation button 410 is operated again from a non-operated state. However, instead, the post-2B reception output sound Sα2 may be in an audible state when the operation button 410 is operated again from a non-operated state, and even in this case, the audible post-2B reception output sound Sα2 may not be made inaudible when the operation button 410 is operated again.

In the example performance shown in Figure 166 (h), when it is detected that the operation button 410 has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state while the second B post-acceptance output sound is being output, the second B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a) in that output state is terminated in response to this detection. However, instead of terminating the sound, it is also possible to change the sound to a different output mode (such as by changing the volume or sound quality, or by changing the mode of the output sound).

Furthermore, if a situation arises in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations are received for the sword decorative body 5001 multiple times, the situation will be terminated when the sword decorative body 5001 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while in the situation, or when a predetermined termination condition is met while the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state; and if a situation arises in which the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state and operations are received for the operation button 410 multiple times, the situation will be terminated when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while in the situation, or when a specific termination condition is met while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state.

Furthermore, in the above presentation examples, as shown in Figures 168, 170, 172, 176, etc., if a situation arises in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are accepted multiple times, the situation is terminated when the sword decorative body 5001 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while in the situation, or when a predetermined termination condition is met while the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state. However, the predetermined termination condition may be one that is met in advance based on, for example, the result of a jackpot determination, or may be one that is met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be one that is met based on the passage of time, or may be one that is met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, or the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of operation for an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the content of the condition is not particularly limited.

In addition, in the above presentation example, while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state, a situation may arise in which operations for the operation button 410 are accepted multiple times. This situation is terminated without the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" being hidden when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state during this situation, or when a specific termination condition is met while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state. However, this condition may also be satisfied in advance based on, for example, the result of a jackpot determination, or may be satisfied in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be satisfied based on the passage of time, or may be satisfied based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is permitted, or the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001, or operation or release of operation for an operating means other than the sword decoration 5001; the content of the condition is not particularly limited.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a situation occurs in which the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state (specific operation) and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001, and then a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 despite the sword decoration 5001 being maintained in an operating state (specific operation is continued), the sword decoration 5001 is kept in an operating state without the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" being displayed. If the state continues to be maintained (when a specified start condition is met while the state is being maintained and a state is reached in which acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted), a situation may arise again in which operations on the sword decorative body 5001 are accepted multiple times based on the detection of that operation state (specific operation) (for example, timing tBg2-C3 shown in Figure 178, timing tBc5B shown in Figure 186, timing tBe5B shown in Figure 187, timing tBg4C shown in Figure 192, timing tBg4D shown in Figure 193, etc.). In this regard, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, while the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, the "7th B post-reception display HB7" and the "7th B event (7th B post-reception output sound Sα7)" can each be executed as the post-reception change based on the detection of the operation state (specific operation) maintained up to that point. However, instead of this, the "7th B event (7th B post-reception output sound Sα7)" can be executed as the post-reception change, but the "7th B post-reception display HB7" may not be displayed. That is, in this case, when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated tap function" is not displayed, and a specific operation is newly performed on the sword ornament 5001 to change it from a non-operation state to an operation state, there are two cases where the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" and the "7th B event (7th B post-acceptance output sound Sα7)" are executed as post-acceptance changes triggered by this (see, for example, FIG. 176, etc.), and there are also cases where the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" is not executed and the "7th B event (7th B post-acceptance output sound Sα7)" is executed (see, for example, , see FIG. 178, etc.), but when the above post-acceptance change is executed based on the detection of the operation state (specific operation) that has been maintained up until that point while the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, the "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" and "7th B event (7th B post-acceptance output sound Sα7)" will not be executed as the post-acceptance change, and "7th B event (7th B post-acceptance output sound Sα7)" will be executed without "7th B post-acceptance display HB7" being displayed.

In this case, as mentioned above, among the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation based on a specific operation on the sword ornament 5001, the "7B post-acceptance display HB7" and the "7B event (7B post-acceptance output sound Sα7)" may be realized as being executed based on the detection of different operations.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when a specific operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001, the "7th B post-reception display HB7" and the "7th B event (7th B post-reception output sound Sα7)" may be executed as post-reception changes according to the detection information obtained thereby, but these post-reception changes are not limited to the "7th B post-reception display HB7" and the "7th B event (7th B post-reception output sound Sα7)," and other changes may also occur.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when a specific operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001, the "7B post-reception display HB7" and the "7B event (7B post-reception output sound Sα7)" may each be executed as post-reception changes according to the detection information obtained thereby. However, the post-reception change that may occur in conjunction with the "7B event (7B post-reception output sound Sα7)" does not necessarily have to be a display change (7B post-reception display HB7), and may be, for example, a light emission change or a change in the movement of a movable object. In other words, in this case, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed and a post-acceptance change is executed in response to a specific operation being performed on the sword decoration 5001, there are two possible post-acceptance changes: a "first event (for example, the 7th B post-acceptance display HB7, but this may be another change)" and a "second event (for example, the 7th B post-acceptance output sound Sα7, but this may be another change)" occur, and there are also two possible cases where the "first event (for example, the 7th B post-acceptance display HB7, but this may be another change)" does not occur and the "second event (for example, the 7th B post-acceptance output sound Sα7, but this may be another change)" occurs.

However, even in this case, it is desirable that the "first event (e.g., the display HB7 after receiving the 7B, but it can also be another change)" not be subject to the so-called auto-repeated tapping function. In other words, in this case, after the "first event (e.g., the display HB7 after receiving the 7B, but it can also be another change)" has occurred once as one of the post-acceptance changes, it will not occur again as long as the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operational state (see, for example, Figure 176(f)). In contrast, the "second event (e.g., the output sound Sα7 after receiving the 7B, but it can also be another change)" is subject to the so-called auto-repeated tapping function, and therefore, even after it has occurred once as one of the post-acceptance changes, it can occur multiple times as long as the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operational state (see, for example, Figure 176(h)).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when a specific operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001 in an acceptance-permitted state (such as the third B acceptance-permitted state, fourth B acceptance-permitted state, fifth B acceptance-permitted state, etc.) in which an "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, a "first event (for example, the seventh B post-acceptance display HB7, but this may be another change)" and a "second event (for example, the seventh B post-acceptance output sound Sα7, but this may be another change)" occur as corresponding post-acceptance changes. However, instead of this, when a specific operation is performed on the sword decorative element 5001 in an acceptance state (such as the third B acceptance state, fourth B acceptance state, or fifth B acceptance state) in which an "operation-related display related to the sword decorative element 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed, the corresponding post-acceptance change may not be a "first event (for example, the seventh B post-acceptance display HB7, but this may be another change)," but rather a "second event (for example, the seventh B post-acceptance output sound Sα7, but this may be another change)."

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, operation-related output sounds OB3 and OB4 are prepared as first operation prompting sounds that prompt operation of the sword ornament 5001, but it is desirable that these output sounds be output as sounds of different manners (types). In contrast, operation-related output sounds OB1 and OB2 are prepared as second operation prompting sounds that prompt operation of the operation button 410, but it is also possible that these output sounds be output as sounds of the same manner (type).

In this case, even though the output sounds are different when operation-related output sound OB3 is output and when operation-related output sound OB4 is output, the same post-acceptance change in response to an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 may be displayed, and even though operation-related output sound OB1 and operation-related output sound OB2 are output as the same sound, different post-acceptance change in response to an operation on the operation button 410 may be displayed.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the first B operation prompt light LB1 shown in FIG. 164 and the second B operation prompt light LB2 shown in FIG. 166 may have the same light emission pattern.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described effect examples, in the first B reception-permitted state and the sixth B reception-permitted state, even if the operation button 410 is operated again while a post-acceptance output sound is being output as one of the post-acceptance changes, this may trigger either a case in which at least one of the effect sounds that is currently audible is interrupted, or a case in which at least one of the effect sounds that is currently audible is not interrupted. For example, in the first B reception-permitted state, if the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 is audible as one of the post-acceptance changes, a second operation of the operation button 410 may be triggered to interrupt at least one of the effect sounds that is currently audible. However, if the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 is not audible as one of the post-acceptance changes and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 is audible as one of the post-acceptance changes, a second operation of the operation button 410 may be triggered to not interrupt at least one of the effect sounds that is currently audible. Furthermore, in the 6B acceptance state, if the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 is in an audible state as one of the post-acceptance changes, a second operation of the operation button 410 will be triggered to interrupt at least one of the sound effects that are in an audible state at that time. However, if the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 is not in an audible state as one of the post-acceptance changes and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6 is in an audible state as one of the post-acceptance changes, a second operation of the operation button 410 may not be triggered to interrupt at least one of the sound effects that are in an audible state at that time.

Furthermore, the post-operation output sound (post-acceptance output sound) may or may not indicate the degree of expectation.

As mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001" may be displayed when operation acceptance (acceptance of specific operations) for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted. In this regard, even if the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001" is displayed when operation acceptance (acceptance of specific operations) for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted, there may be cases where operation acceptance (acceptance of specific operations) for the sword decorative body 5001 is never permitted and the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001" is hidden (when the conditions for accepting operation acceptance (acceptance of specific operations) for the sword decorative body 5001 are not met while the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed). With this configuration, it can be expected that the sense of tension when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001" is displayed will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

As mentioned above, in each of the above-described performance examples, the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410" may be displayed when operation acceptance (acceptance of a predetermined operation) for the operation button 410 is not permitted. In this regard, even if the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410" is displayed when operation acceptance (acceptance of a predetermined operation) for the operation button 410 is not permitted, there may be cases where operation acceptance (acceptance of a predetermined operation) for the operation button 410 is never permitted and the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410" is hidden (when the conditions for accepting operation acceptance (acceptance of a predetermined operation) for the operation button 410 are not met while the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 is displayed). With this configuration, it can be expected that the sense of tension when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410" is displayed will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 may be configured to have additional reception allowance states different from the above-mentioned 1B reception allowance state to 7B reception allowance state.

In addition, while this pachinko machine 1 is provided with all of the above-mentioned 1B acceptance acceptance states through 7B acceptance acceptance states, it is not necessary to provide all of these acceptance acceptance states. Rather, it is preferable to provide only some of these acceptance acceptance states in an appropriate combination, taking into account the desired effect. By providing them in the "appropriate combinations" described separately in the configurations below, excellent effects can be achieved. Note that each of the configurations below exemplifies combinations of acceptance acceptance states that must be provided to achieve the desired effect from the configurations shown in the above-mentioned presentation examples, but these combinations are not limited to the examples; combinations other than those exemplified may also be used as long as the desired effect is achieved. Furthermore, configurations adopted by other acceptance acceptance states that are unrelated to the desired effect may also be provided as appropriate, as long as they do not adversely affect the achievement of the desired effect.

For example, the first configuration B1 includes a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by a player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display for the sword decoration 5001) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) that prompts an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) that prompts an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) that prompts an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410). and a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to the operation of the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and wherein at least a first predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB3" as a first example shown in FIG. 181 or the like, or corresponding to "message display MB5" as a second example shown in FIG. 182 or the like) and a first specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB4" as a first example shown in FIG. 181 or the like, or corresponding to "message display MB3" as a second example shown in FIG. 182 or the like) are prepared as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation of the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is executed. can be executed a plurality of times (see FIGS. 168, 170, 172, etc.), and at least a second predetermined mode (equivalent to, for example, "message display MB1" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165) and a second specific mode (equivalent to, for example, "message display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167) are prepared as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is being displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change in accordance with operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed a plurality of times (see FIGS. 164, 166, etc.), and the second operation-related display (the operation-related display of the operation button 410) changes to the second predetermined mode (e.g., 164 and 165 ), there is no case where the second operation-related display (the operation-related display of the operation button 410) is newly displayed in the second specific mode (e.g., equivalent to “message display MB2” shown in FIGS. 166 and 167 ) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made to disappear (see, for example, FIG. 179 ), and when operations are accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display of the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the interval until a new change after acceptance in response to the operation acceptance appears can be set to a specific time (e.g., 1 second) or less (see, for example, FIGS. 164 and 179 ). That is, in this case, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB1" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165), the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears when the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled for the second operation means (operation button 410) is set to a relatively short interval, which is expected to make it easier to recognize whether or not the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled, providing a sense of security.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined manner (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.), even if the first predetermined manner is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific manner (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined manner was hidden. With this configuration, in the case of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), even if the indication mode (a mode of the first operation-related display) that allows for automatic rapid tapping is hidden, there is a possibility that another indication mode (a different mode of the first operation-related display) that allows for automatic rapid tapping will appear within a predetermined time, thereby maintaining interest in the game. Meanwhile, in the case of the second operating means (operation button 410), when the indication mode (a mode of the second operation-related display) that allows for automatic rapid tapping is hidden, there is no possibility that another indication mode (a different mode of the second operation-related display) that allows for automatic rapid tapping will appear within a predetermined time, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In this case, whether the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined manner or a first specific manner, when the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple operations being accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) and the appearance of a new post-acceptance change in response to that operation acceptance may be set to a specific time (e.g., one second) or less. In other words, in this case, when the "auto-repeated tap function" is enabled for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), the interval until the appearance of a new post-acceptance change is always set to a relatively short interval, which is expected to make it easier to recognize whether the "auto-repeated tap function" is enabled and provide a sense of security.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) (see Figures 164 and 165), and when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in a second specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) (see Figures 166 and 167), only when the display is in the second predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) (see Figures 164), the interval between when an operation is accepted multiple times for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and when a new post-acceptance change appears in response to the operation acceptance may be set to a specific time or less. That is, in this case, even when the "auto-repeated function" is enabled for the second operation means (operation button 410), when the second operation-related display (operation-related display for operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165), the interval until a new change appears after acceptance is always set to a relatively short interval, which is expected to make it easier to recognize whether the "auto-repeated function" is enabled and provide a sense of security. In contrast, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display for operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167), the change interval when the "auto-repeated function" is enabled for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be set to a time longer than the specific time (a relatively long interval), which is expected to make it harder to recognize whether the "auto-repeated function" is enabled and maintain a favorable sense of tension.

Note that when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167) and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times (see FIGS. 166 and 167), the interval between changes may not be shorter than the specific time, but may always be longer than the specific time. In other words, in this case, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode, it is even more difficult to determine whether the "auto rapid fire function" is enabled, which can be expected to better maintain a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167), the interval between multiple executions of a post-acceptance change when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state may be set to appear as a non-predetermined time (indefinite time) (see FIGS. 166 and 167). For example, this can be achieved by making a performance determination as to whether or not to cause a post-acceptance change each time an operation is accepted while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and causing a post-acceptance change when a special determination result is obtained as a result. However, the method for realizing this configuration is not limited to this.

In this case, it is preferable (but not essential) to make the above-mentioned specific time shorter than the shortest time (interval) that can be adopted as an "indefinite time," in order to make it more difficult to recognize whether the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled or not.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the first configuration B1 and each of the above-described performance examples, if an operation is accepted multiple times for the operation button 410 while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed in a second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to the "message display MB1" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165), the interval until a new post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance may be less than a specific time and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (fixed time). Furthermore, if an operation is accepted multiple times for the operation button 410 while the operation-related display for the operation button 410 is displayed in a second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to the "message display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167), the interval until a new post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance may be longer than the specific time and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (fixed time) (an indefinite time). Furthermore, when the operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed in a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as a first example shown in FIG. 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB5" as a second example shown in FIG. 182, etc.) or a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as a first example shown in FIG. 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as a second example shown in FIG. 182, etc.), and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state, and operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 multiple times, the interval until a new change after acceptance in response to the operation acceptance appears can be set to a time that is less than a specific time, and does not necessarily have to be set to a predetermined time (a fixed time).

Furthermore, in order to realize the configuration according to the first configuration B1 and each of the above-mentioned examples, the "operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001" is displayed in a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in FIG. 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in FIG. 182, etc.) or a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in FIG. 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in FIG. 182, etc.), and the sword ornament The interval when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled for the decorative body 5001 (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) and the interval when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled for the operation button 410 while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed in a second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) are both set to a specific time or less, but the respective times (intervals) may be set to different times (intervals).

For example, when the "operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001" is displayed in a first predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in FIG. 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in FIG. 182, etc.) or a first specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in FIG. 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in FIG. 182, etc.), the interval when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is activated for the sword decorative body 5001 (the interval until a new change after acceptance appears) can be set as "the operation of the operation button 410" By setting this to a time that is longer than the interval (the interval until a change appears after a new request is received) when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the operation button 410 while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed in the second predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165), the gap (the gap between the second predetermined mode and the second specific mode) when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the operation button 410 while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed can be made to appear larger, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the first configuration B1 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, or the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the operation button 410, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even during the period when the "operation-related display corresponding to the sword decoration 5001" is displayed, there are cases where the sword decoration 5001 is in a state where it can be automatically hit repeatedly, and cases where the sword decoration 5001 is in a state where it cannot be automatically hit repeatedly. For example, during the period when the operation-related display corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, "when the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state where auto-repeated tapping is not possible" corresponds to the periods tBc1 to tBc2, tBc2-C2 to tBc2-C3, and tBc2-C4 to tBc3 shown in FIG. 168, the periods tBd1 to tBd2, tBd2-C2 to tBd2-C3, and tBd2-C4 to tBd3 shown in FIG. 170, and the periods tBe1 to tBe2, tBe2-C2 to tBe2-C3, and tBe2-C4 to tBe3 shown in FIG. 172.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even during a period when the "operation-related display corresponding to operation button 410" is displayed, there are cases where the operation button 410 is in a state where it can be automatically pressed repeatedly and cases where the operation button 410 is not in a state where it can be automatically pressed repeatedly. For example, during a period when the operation-related display corresponding to operation button 410 is displayed, the "cases where the operation button 410 is not in a state where it can be automatically pressed repeatedly" correspond to the periods from timing tBa1 to tBa2 and timing tBa2-C2 to tBa3 shown in FIG. 164, and the periods from timing tBb1 to tBb2 and timing tBb2-C2 to tBb3 shown in FIG. 166. However, during the period when the operation-related display corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, unlike the period when the "operation-related display corresponding to the sword decoration 5001" is displayed, it is possible to prevent the state where auto-repeated tapping is possible from reappearing after the state where auto-repeated tapping is no longer possible while the operation-related display is displayed (such as timing tBc2-C3 shown in FIG. 168, timing tBd2-C3 shown in FIG. 170, or timing tBe2-C3 shown in FIG. 172).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the first configuration B1 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the configuration according to the "means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the sword decorative body 5001" and the "means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the operation button 410" may be realized on a single board, or on multiple different boards. For example, the post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 may include a first change that appears through processing by the main control board, and a second change that appears through processing by the peripheral control board. This configuration is not limited to the "means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of an operation on the sword decorative body 5001," but can be similarly applied to the "means" according to other configurations.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the first configuration B1 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the "operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001" is hidden in a first predetermined manner (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in FIG. 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in FIG. 182, etc.), it may be possible for the "operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001" not to be newly displayed in a first specific manner (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in FIG. 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in FIG. 182, etc.) before a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the "display" was hidden.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the first configuration B1 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the "Sword Decoration 5001 Operation-Related Display" is newly displayed in "Message Display MB4" before a predetermined time has elapsed since the "Sword Decoration 5001 Operation-Related Display" in "Message Display MB3" is hidden, it is desirable to always keep the time between the "Message Display MB3" being hidden and the "Message Display MB4" being newly displayed constant (example shown in Figure 181).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the first configuration B1 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "change after acceptance in response to acceptance of an operation on the sword decorative body 5001" made while the first predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in FIG. 181, etc., or equivalent to "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in FIG. 182, etc.) is displayed may be the same as the "change after acceptance in response to acceptance of an operation on the sword decorative body 5001" made while the first specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in FIG. 181, etc., or equivalent to "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in FIG. 182, etc.) is displayed, or they may be different changes. However, it is desirable that the "change after acceptance in response to acceptance of an operation on the sword decorative body 5001" and the "change after acceptance in response to acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410" are not the same changes.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the first configuration B1 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation on the sword ornament 5001" and the "post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410" may either output a post-acceptance output sound or not output a post-acceptance output sound.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the sword ornament 5001, operation-prompting light is not emitted to prompt the player to operate the sword ornament 5001. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the operation button 410, operation-prompting light is always emitted to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410. However, instead of this, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the operation button 410, operation-prompting light may be emitted to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410, or the operation-prompting light may not be emitted. This makes it possible to appropriately create a sense of tension regardless of which operation means is presented, by varying the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means when no operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the first configuration B1 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, there may be cases where the acceptance state is such that "the operation-related display for the operation button 410 is displayed," "multiple operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is permitted," and "simply placing the operation button 410 in an operation state does not result in multiple acceptance of the operation," but it is possible to prevent cases where "the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed," "multiple operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted," and "simply placing the sword decorative body 5001 in an operation state does not result in multiple acceptance of the operation."

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when a message display MB1 is displayed as an operation-related display for the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is in a non-operated state, and the "first B post-acceptance output sound Sα" corresponding to the operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is in an output state (see FIG. 164), if the operation button 410 changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the "first B post-acceptance output sound" may change as a result of this (first B post-acceptance output sound Sα1 at timing tBa2-C1) or may not change (first B post-acceptance output sound Sα2 at timing tBa2-C1). However, under circumstances where a message display MB2 is displayed as the operation-related display for the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is in a non-operated state, and the "second B post-acceptance output sound" is in an output state in response to the operation of the operation button 410 (see FIG. 166), if the operation button 410 changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the "second B post-acceptance output sound" will not change as a result of this, and will always remain unchanged (second B post-acceptance output sound Sβ2 at timing tBb2-C1).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the sword decoration 5001 is changed from an operating state (a state in which a change occurs after acceptance) to a non-operating state during the period in which the operation-related display of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, no display change will occur as a result (see Figures 168(f), 170(f), 172(f), and 176(f)). However, when the operation button 410 is changed from an operating state (a state in which a change occurs after acceptance) to a non-operating state during the period in which the operation-related display of the operation button 410 is displayed, this will either cause a display change to occur (see Figure 166(f)) or not (see Figures 164(f) and 174(f)).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is changed from an operating state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to a non-operating state during the period in which the operation-related display for the operation button 410 is displayed, and this causes a display change, no new sound is output in response to this.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the operation-related display does not necessarily have to be displayed in relation to the occurrence of an acceptance-permitted state in which acceptance of operations on the operation means (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410) is permitted. For example, an operation-related display may be displayed as a presentation explanation or the like while a game is in progress, and acceptance of operations on the operation means is not permitted during the period in which the operation-related display is displayed, or there may be both cases in which acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted and cases in which acceptance of operations on the operation means is not permitted during the period in which the operation-related display is displayed. Furthermore, there may be cases in which acceptance of operations on the operation means is permitted even when the operation-related display is not displayed. There may also be cases in which the operation-related display is hidden during the acceptance-permitted state even while the acceptance-permitted state continues, or there may be cases in which the display state of the operation-related display continues when the operation-permitted state ends. In short, it is sufficient if acceptance of operations is permitted when the operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the operation-related display may be a mock image display of the operation target (operation means), or it may be text information (such as "press") that prompts the operation of the operation target. Anything that prompts the operation will suffice.

Furthermore, for example, the second configuration B2 may include a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display for the sword decoration 5001) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) that prompts an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means. and a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received from the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001), and for displaying the first operation-related display, at least a first predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB3" as a first example shown in FIG. 181 or the like, or corresponding to "message display MB5" as a second example shown in FIG. 182 or the like) and a first specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB4" as a first example shown in FIG. 181 or the like, or corresponding to "message display MB3" as a second example shown in FIG. 182 or the like) are prepared, and when the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, and the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) is operated and the operation state is maintained, a post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to the operation received from the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) is executed. The post-acceptance change can be executed a plurality of times (see FIGS. 168, 170, 172, etc.), and at least a second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB1" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165) and a second specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167) are prepared as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is being displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change in accordance with operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed a plurality of times (see FIGS. 164, 166, etc.), and the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) 166 and 167) (e.g., see FIG. 179). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB1" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165), there is no case in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is newly displayed in the second specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made to disappear (e.g., see FIG. 179). Furthermore, when operations are accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times while the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is being maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is being displayed in the second predetermined mode, the interval until a new change after acceptance in response to the operation acceptance appears can be set to a fixed time (e.g., see FIGS. 164, 179, etc.). That is, in this case, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB1" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165), the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears when the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled for the second operation means (operation button 410) is set to a fixed time, which is expected to make it easier to recognize whether or not the "auto rapid-fire function" is enabled, providing a sense of security.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined manner (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.), even if the first predetermined manner is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific manner (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined manner was hidden. With this configuration, in the case of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), even if the indication mode (a mode of the first operation-related display) that allows automatic rapid tapping is hidden, there is a possibility that another indication mode (a different mode of the first operation-related display) that allows automatic rapid tapping will appear within a predetermined time, maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, in the case of the second operating means (operation button 410), when the indication mode (a mode of the second operation-related display) that allows automatic rapid tapping is hidden, there is no possibility that another indication mode (a different mode of the second operation-related display) that allows automatic rapid tapping will appear within a predetermined time, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In addition, in this case, whether the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined manner or the first operation-related display is displayed in a first specific manner, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple operations being accepted for the first operating means and the appearance of a new post-acceptance change in response to that operation acceptance may always be set to a predetermined time (a fixed time). In other words, in this case, when the "auto-repeated tap function" is enabled for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears is set to a fixed time, which can be expected to make it easier to recognize whether the "auto-repeated tap function" is enabled or not, providing a sense of security.

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the second configuration B2 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval between multiple operations being accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 while the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operation state and the appearance of a new post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance may be set to a predetermined time (a fixed time) regardless of the type of "operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001" or whether or not it is present.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the second configuration B2 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed, for example, as "message display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165, and the operation button 410 is operated and the operation state is maintained, the interval at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the operation of the operation button 410 may be made shorter than the interval at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the "operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001" is displayed, for example, as "message display MB3" or "message display MB5," and the sword decorative body 5001 is operated and the operation state is maintained.

In addition, when realizing the configurations according to the above-mentioned presentation examples, the intervals at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed as "Message Display MB1" are constant; however, the intervals at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed as "Message Display MB2" (the intervals at which operations are accepted by the auto-rapid-tap function) may be variable rather than constant. In other words, in this case, depending on the display mode, the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" may make it easier to recognize that the "auto-rapid-tap function" is enabled, or make it more difficult to recognize that the "auto-rapid-tap function" is enabled. This is expected to maintain interest in the game through improved presentation.

Furthermore, in implementing the second configuration B2 and the configurations described in the above-mentioned presentation examples, the intervals between multiple post-acceptance changes when the operation button 410 is held in an operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed as "Message Display MB2" may be indefinite and may appear to be longer than a specific time (e.g., 1 second). However, the intervals (constant intervals) between multiple post-acceptance changes when the sword ornament 5001 is held in an operated state, or the intervals (constant intervals) between multiple post-acceptance changes when the operation button 410 is held in an operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed as "Message Display MB1," may not appear to be longer than a specific time (e.g., 1 second). In other words, in this case, the gap between the time when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated for the operation button 410 while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed (the gap between Message Display MB1 and Message Display MB2) can be made to appear larger, which is expected to maintain gameplay interest.

When realizing the configurations of the above-mentioned performance examples, "constant intervals until a new post-acceptance change appears" may mean that a new post-acceptance change occurs at a predetermined time interval, and may not necessarily occur at the same time interval. For example, the time from when the operating means is operated and the first post-acceptance change is executed until the second post-acceptance change (auto-repeated function) is executed is set to 0.5 seconds, but from then on, the post-acceptance change (auto-repeated function) is executed at 0.2 second intervals. In this case, "constant intervals until a new post-acceptance change appears" may be realized by including multiple "predetermined times."

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the second configuration B2 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, there are no particular limitations on the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated tap function (long press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated tap function (long press function) is enabled for the operation button 410.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the second configuration B2 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, a state may occur in which the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed, and multiple operations are permitted for the operation button 410, and the operation is not permitted to be permitted multiple times simply by placing the operation button 410 in an operating state. However, it is possible to prevent a state in which the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001" is displayed, and multiple operations are permitted for the sword ornament 5001, and the operation is not permitted multiple times simply by placing the sword ornament 5001 in an operating state.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the second configuration B2 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes when the sword ornament 5001 is in an operating state is constant, but it may be set to a time longer than the time when the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes is constant when the operating state of the operation button 410 is maintained.

Also, for example, the third configuration B3 includes a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display for the sword decoration 5001) that prompts operation of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a means for accepting operations for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). and a first post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response thereto, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to the operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), wherein at least a first predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB3" as a first example shown in FIG. 181 or the like, or corresponding to "message display MB5" as a second example shown in FIG. 182 or the like) and a first specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB4" as a first example shown in FIG. 181 or the like, or corresponding to "message display MB3" as a second example shown in FIG. 182 or the like) are prepared as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated to execute the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance. If the operation state is maintained even after the execution of the post-acceptance change has started, the post-acceptance change according to the operation acceptance to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figs. 168, 170, 172, etc.), and at least a second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figs. 164 and 165) and a second specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figs. 166 and 167) are prepared as modes for displaying the second operation-related display. When the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance is started and the operation state is maintained, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIGS. 164, 166, etc.), and the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in either the second predetermined mode (for example, 164 and 165), there is no case where the second operation-related display (the operation-related display of the operation button 410) is newly displayed in the second specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "message display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made non-displayed (see, for example, FIG. 179), and the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in the first predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "message display MB3" shown in FIG. 181, etc.). 182 and 167), the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) may not be started even when the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is operated while the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in either of the first specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in FIG. 181 and 167, or equivalent to "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in FIG. 182 and 167), the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (sword decorative body 5001) may not be started. In other words, in this case, the auto-rapid tapping function can be enabled when the first operation-related display or the second operation-related display is displayed, while still maintaining a comfortable sense of tension.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined manner (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.), even if the first predetermined manner is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific manner (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined manner was hidden. With this configuration, in the case of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), even if the indication mode (a mode of the first operation-related display) that allows automatic rapid tapping is hidden, there is a possibility that another indication mode (a different mode of the first operation-related display) that allows automatic rapid tapping will appear within a predetermined time, maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, in the case of the second operating means (operation button 410), when the indication mode (a mode of the second operation-related display) that allows automatic rapid tapping is hidden, there is no possibility that another indication mode (a different mode of the second operation-related display) that allows automatic rapid tapping will appear within a predetermined time, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, even if the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is operated while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in either a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) or a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.), it may be possible for the post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance for the first operation means to not be initiated. For example, during the period when the operation-related display corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, "when the sword decoration 5001 is in a state where auto-repeated play is not possible" corresponds to the periods tBc1 to tBc2, tBc2-C2 to tBc2-C3, and tBc2-C4 to tBc3 shown in FIG. 168, the periods tBd1 to tBd2, tBd2-C2 to tBd2-C3, and tBd2-C4 to tBd3 shown in FIG. 170, and the periods tBe1 to tBe2, tBe2-C2 to tBe2-C3, and tBe2-C4 to tBe3 shown in FIG. 172. In other words, in this case, the sense of tension when the first operation-related display is displayed can be optimally maintained.

In this case, even if the first operation means is operated while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in either a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in FIG. 181, etc., or "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in FIG. 182, etc.) or a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in FIG. 181, etc., or "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in FIG. 182, etc.), and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation received for the first operation means is not initiated, if the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operated state (and while maintaining the state, the conditions for allowing operation reception for the first operation means (conditions for the occurrence of an allowable state) are met), a situation may arise in which a post-acceptance change in response to the operation received for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point. For example, "...when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operated state (when the conditions for allowing operation of the first operating means (conditions for the occurrence of an allowable state) are met while the first operating means is maintained), post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point" corresponds to timing tBc2-C3 shown in FIG. 168, timing tBd2-C3 shown in FIG. 170, and timing tBe2-C3 shown in FIG. 172. In other words, in this case, even if the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled when the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the auto-rapid-hit function can be enabled if the first operating means is maintained in that state, which is expected to maintain gameplay enjoyment.

In this case, it may be possible to make it so that after multiple post-acceptance changes occur in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, there are cases where, even though that operation state is maintained, no new post-acceptance changes occur while the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed (the so-called auto-repeated function is disabled) (for example, this corresponds to timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168, timing tBd2-C2 shown in Figure 170, timing tBe2-C2 shown in Figure 172, etc.). However, even in this case, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state (if the conditions for allowing operation acceptance for the first operating means are met while the first operating means is maintained), a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may be executed again based on the operating state maintained up to that point (equivalent to timing tBc2-C3 shown in FIG. 168, timing tBd2-C3 shown in FIG. 170, timing tBe2-C3 shown in FIG. 172, etc.).

Furthermore, if the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in either the second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) or the second specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) and the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated but a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not initiated, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is subsequently executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state, even if the second operation means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operated state. In other words, in this case, with respect to the second operating means, if the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, there is no possibility that an operation will be accepted based on the detection of that operating mode even if that operating mode is continued, and therefore it can be expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained when realizing the dramatic effect of the auto-repeated tap function.

As mentioned above, when realizing the configuration according to the third configuration B3 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, "Message Display MB3" may be hidden in the middle of its display (before the predetermined display time has elapsed) (early termination of operation-related displays such as Message Display MB3). However, in this case, it is desirable that "Message Display MB4" is always displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB3" was hidden. It is also desirable that the time from when "Message Display MB3" is hidden until "Message Display MB4" is displayed be set to a predetermined time (a fixed time).

Furthermore, for example, a fourth configuration B4 may include a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by a player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display for the sword decoration 5001) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) that prompts an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means. and a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the operation means (operation button 410), and at least a first predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB5" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, etc.) and a first specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB3" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, etc.) are prepared as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, and the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) is operated and the operation state is maintained, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance on the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) can be executed multiple times (see FIGS. 168 and 17 160, 172, etc.), at least a second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB1" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165) and a second specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167) are prepared as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is being displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change in accordance with the operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIGS. 164, 166, etc.), and the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) changes to the second predetermined mode (e.g., 164 and 165), there is no case where the second operation-related display (the operation-related display of the operation button 410) is newly displayed in the second specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "message display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second specific mode was hidden (see, for example, FIG. 179). When the second operation-related display (the operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "message display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167), a second operation-related sound (e.g., equivalent to "operation-related output sound OB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 179) related to the operation of the second operating means (operation button 410) can be output.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB5" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, etc.), even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB3" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, etc.) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden. At this time, a first operation-related sound (equivalent to "Operation-related Output Sound OB3") related to the operation of the first operating means (the sword decorative body 5001) may be output. This configuration is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game when the first predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB5" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, etc.) is hidden.

In addition, when at least the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in a first specific mode (e.g., corresponding to the "message display MB3" shown in Figures 182 and 183, etc.), it may be possible to output a first operation-related sound (operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation of the first operating means (the sword decorative body 5001). Furthermore, with regard to the first operation-related sound, in particular, if it is output before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183, etc.) was hidden (if the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode before the predetermined time has elapsed), its output state is always maintained for the first hour (predetermined output time) (see Figure 182(g)), whereas if it is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (equivalent to "message display MB5") was hidden (if the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode after the predetermined time has elapsed), its output state may be maintained for the first hour (predetermined output time) or may be made inaudible (non-output) before the first hour (predetermined output time) has elapsed (see Figure 183(g)). This configuration is expected to provide a desirable sense of tension, as the presentation differs depending on the amount of time that has passed since the first predetermined mode (e.g., "Message Display MB5" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183) was hidden when the first operation-related sound (e.g., "Operation-Related Output Sound OB3" shown in FIG. 168) was output. In particular, when the first operation-related sound is output after a predetermined time has passed since the first predetermined mode was hidden (when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode after the predetermined time has passed), the output state may be maintained for the first time (a predetermined output time) or may be made inaudible (non-output) before the first time (a predetermined output time) has passed. This is expected to provide a desirable sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, when at least the second operation-related display (the operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (message display MB2), a second operation-related sound (e.g., equivalent to the "operation-related output sound OB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 179) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) may be output. The output state of the second operation-related sound may be particularly maintained for a second period (a predetermined output period). With this configuration, after the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB1), a relatively long time is required for the second specific mode (message display MB2) to appear (see FIG. 179). However, when the second specific mode appears, it is possible to appropriately indicate that the situation in which the second specific mode appears is one in which the second specific mode has appeared.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the fourth configuration B4 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, for example, when operation-related output sound OB3 is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since message display MB5 was hidden (see FIG. 183), the output state may be maintained for a first time (a predetermined output time), or it may be made inaudible (non-output) before the first time (a predetermined output time) has elapsed. In either case, however, it is desirable that the mode (type of sound) of operation-related output sound OB3 be the same (for example, a special mode).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the fourth configuration B4 and each of the above-mentioned examples, if an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related output sound OB3 is being output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the message display MB5 was hidden, it is desirable that the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance be executed in the same manner (same change) whether the output state of the operation-related output sound OB3 is maintained for a first time (a predetermined output time) or whether it is made inaudible (non-output) before the first time (a predetermined output time) has elapsed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the fourth configuration B4 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation-related output sound OB3 (see FIG. 168, etc.) is made inaudible (non-output) before the predetermined output time has elapsed, it may be made inaudible in response to an operation on the sword decorative body 5001, or it may be made inaudible without being triggered by an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (based on the satisfaction of a predetermined inaudible condition).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the fourth configuration B4 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the "operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001" is displayed, for example, as the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183, the operation-related sound (acceptance sound) related to operations on the sword decorative body 5001 may not be output (see Figures 172 and 183, etc.).

Also, for example, a fifth configuration B5 may include a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display for the sword decoration 5001) that prompts the player to operate the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) that prompts the player to operate the second operating means (operation button 410). and second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410), wherein at least a first predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "message display MB5" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, etc.) and a first specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "message display MB3" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, etc.) are prepared as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance on the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) can be executed multiple times. 168, 170, 172, etc.), at least a second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165) and a second specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167) are prepared as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is being displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change in accordance with operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIGS. 164, 166, etc.), and the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB1" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165), the second operation-related display (the operation-related display of the operation button 410) will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden (see, for example, FIG. 179). If the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode after the predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden, the display state can be maintained for the second display time (predetermined display time), which makes it possible to appropriately indicate that the second specific mode is being displayed.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB5" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, etc.), even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB3" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, etc.) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden. At this time, a first operation-related sound (equivalent to "Operation-related Output Sound OB3") related to the operation of the first operating means (the sword decorative body 5001) may be output. This configuration is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game when the first predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "Message Display MB5" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, etc.) is hidden.

In this case, particularly, if the first specific mode (message display MB3) is displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific mode (message display MB5) was hidden, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the first specific mode is displayed and operations are received multiple times for the first operating means, the first operation-related display (operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001) will always remain displayed for the first display time (predetermined display time) (see Figure 182), but will not be displayed for a predetermined period of time after the first specific mode (message display MB5) is hidden. When the first specific mode (message display MB3) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the first specific mode is displayed and operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means, the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword decoration 5001, such as message display MB3) may either continue to be displayed for the first display time (a predetermined display time) or be made invisible before the first display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed (see Figure 183). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 183, after timing tBe4A-2, the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornamentation 5001, such as message display MB3) is configured to continue to be displayed for a predetermined display time, but instead, the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornamentation 5001, such as message display MB3) may be configured to continue to be displayed for the first display time (predetermined display time) or to be made invisible before the first display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed. Note that this configuration for "early terminating the first operation-related display (such as message display MB3, an operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001)" is a case where the other example of "early terminating the operation-related display, such as message display MB3," described above, is applied. That is, when the condition for early termination of the audible output of the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is met at any timing within the time range TBc shown in FIG. 168(g), the operation-related display (the mock-up display MG-B3 and the message display MB3) is also hidden based on the same condition being met. With this configuration, the presentation changes depending on the amount of time that has passed since the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) was hidden before the first specific mode (message display MB3) appeared, which is expected to provide a desirable sense of tension. In particular, if the first specific mode (message display MB3) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) was hidden, the display state may be maintained for the first display time (predetermined display time), or it may be hidden before the first display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed, which is expected to provide a good sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the fifth configuration B5 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if "Message Display MB2" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB1" was hidden, and the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state while "Message Display MB2" is displayed and multiple operations are received for the operation button 410, "Message Display MB2" may either be maintained in a displayed state for the second display time (a predetermined display time) or be made hidden before the second display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed.

In this regard, the second B reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 166, as described above, can be either a state in which the reception of an operation for the operation button 410 is triggered to terminate early (before timing tBb2-C2) when an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, or a state in which the reception of an operation for the operation button 410 is not terminated early (before timing tBb2-C2) no matter how many times an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted. In other words, in a situation where the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state while the "message display MB2" is displayed and operations are accepted for the operation button 410 multiple times, if the "message display MB2" is made to be in a hidden state before the second display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed, this corresponds to a case where the "state in which operations are accepted for the operation button 410" is terminated early before timing tBb2-C2, and in this case, the "message display MB2" is made to be in a hidden state based on the fact that the conditions for early termination of the "state in which operations are accepted for the operation button 410" have been met. In contrast, if "Message Display MB2" is displayed while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and operations are being accepted for the operation button 410 multiple times, and "Message Display MB2" is not made invisible before the second display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed, this corresponds to the case where the "state in which operations are accepted for the operation button 410" is not terminated early before timing tBb2-C2. In this case, the condition for early termination of the "state in which operations are accepted for the operation button 410" is not met, and therefore "Message Display MB2" will remain displayed for the predetermined display time.

Furthermore, in the configurations of each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if "Message Display MB3" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB5" was hidden, then, as mentioned above, "Message Display MB3" may either be displayed for the first display time (predetermined display time) or may be made hidden before the first display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed, regardless of whether or not an operation is received (multiple times) on the sword ornament 5001 while "Message Display MB3" is displayed (see Figure 183). In this regard, in a situation where "Message Display MB2" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB1" was made invisible, and the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state while the "Message Display MB2" is displayed, and operations on the operation button 410 are accepted multiple times, the "Message Display MB2" may be either displayed for the second display time (a predetermined display time) or made invisible before the second display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed (prematurely terminated). However, in a situation where "Message Display MB2" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB1" was made invisible, and the operation button 410 is not operated while the "Message Display MB2" is displayed, and operations on the operation button 410 are not accepted, the "Message Display MB2" may not be made invisible before the second display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed, and may always be displayed for the second display time (a predetermined display time). With this configuration, the sense of tension that arises when "Message Display MB3" is displayed after a predetermined time has passed since "Message Display MB5" was hidden, and the sense of tension that arises when "Message Display MB2" is displayed after a predetermined time has passed since "Message Display MB1" was hidden, can be provided through different presentations, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the fifth configuration B5 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if "Message Display MB3" is displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB5" was hidden, "Message Display MB3" may be displayed for the first display time (predetermined display time) without being hidden before the first display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed, regardless of whether the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state and operations are accepted multiple times while "Message Display MB3" is displayed (see FIG. 182).

When the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001" is displayed in message display MB3, it is desirable that the appearance of message display MB3 be the same whether or not the display state continues for the first display time (predetermined display time), and when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed in message display MB2, it is desirable that the appearance of message display MB2 be the same whether or not the display state continues for the second display time (predetermined display time).

Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001" is displayed in message display MB3, it is desirable that the same mode (same change) be displayed as the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, whether or not the display state continues for the first display time (predetermined display time).Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed in message display MB2, it is desirable that the same mode (same change) be displayed as the post-acceptance change that appears when the display state does not continue for the second display time (predetermined display time), even if the display state continues for the second display time (predetermined display time) (when no operation is accepted for the operation button 410).

Also, for example, as a sixth configuration B6, there may be provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display for the sword decoration 5001) that prompts the player to operate the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) that prompts the player to operate the second operating means (operation button 410), and a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means. and second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to acceptance when acceptance is made, and at least a first predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to "message display MB5" shown in Figs. 182 and 183, etc.) and a first specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "message display MB3" shown in Figs. 182 and 183, etc.) are prepared as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) is operated and this operating state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-acceptance change in response to acceptance of an operation on the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figs. 168, 170, 172, etc.), and At least two predetermined modes (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB1" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165) and a second specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167) are prepared, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change in accordance with the operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIGS. 164, 166, etc.), and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB1" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165), the second predetermined mode is hidden and then a predetermined The second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) is not newly displayed in the second specific mode (e.g., equivalent to "message display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167) before the specified time has elapsed (see, for example, FIG. 179), and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound shown in FIG. 164 or the second B operation-related output sound shown in FIG. 166) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) can be output. Therefore, even if the second specific mode (message display MB2) is not displayed for a long period of time after the second specified mode (message display MB1) is hidden, when the second specific mode appears, it can suitably indicate that the situation is such that the second specific mode will appear.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message Display MB5" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183), even if the first predetermined mode (Message Display MB5) is hidden, the first operation-related display may be re-displayed in a first specific mode (Message Display MB3) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (Message Display MB5) was hidden (see FIG. 182). Furthermore, in this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed, a first operation-related sound (third-order operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation of the first operating means (the sword decorative body 5001) may be output (see FIG. 182(g)). This configuration is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game when the first predetermined mode (Message Display MB5) is hidden.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed, regardless of whether it is displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB1) or the second specific mode (message display MB2), the second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound shown in FIG. 164 or the second B operation-related output sound shown in FIG. 166) associated with the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) may be output as a single sound in which the same sound does not appear multiple times. In contrast, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in the first predetermined mode (message display MB5), the first operation-related sound related to the operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is not output (see, for example, Figures 172(g), 182(g), and 183(g)). However, when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode (message display MB3), the first operation-related sound (3B operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may be output as a repeated sound in which the same sound appears multiple times, regardless of whether the first specific mode (message display MB3) was displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) was made to disappear (see, for example, Figures 168(g), 182(g), and 183(g)). With this configuration, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) is displayed, a single sound is output to prompt the player to operate the second operation means (operation button 410), whereas when the first operation-related display (operation-related display for the sword decoration 5001) is displayed, a sound may not be output to prompt the player to operate the first operation means (sword decoration 5001), which is expected to effectively create a sense of tension about forgetting to operate the sword decoration. However, instead, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display for the sword decoration 5001) is displayed in the first specific mode (message display MB3), the player is more strongly prompted to operate the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) through multiple sound outputs, which is expected to effectively maintain interest in the game.

In this case, particularly, if the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in the first specific mode (message display MB3) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) was hidden, a specific sound is always output so that it appears multiple times as the first operation-related sound (3B operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) (see Figure 182 (g)), but if the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in the first specific mode (message display MB3) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) was hidden, there may be at least two cases in which the specific sound is output so that it appears multiple times as the first operation-related sound (3B operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) (see Figure 183 (g)). With this configuration, even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword decoration 5001) is displayed in the first specific mode (message display MB3), the player is not necessarily urged to operate the first operating means (the sword decoration 5001) more strongly through multiple sound outputs, which is expected to create a good sense of tension while maintaining good interest in the game.

The technique of "outputting a specific sound so that it appears only once" may be achieved by preparing such sound data in advance and playing this sound data, or by terminating the playback of the sound data used in the technique of "outputting a specific sound so that it appears multiple times," or by terminating the playback midway in response to an operation on the first operating means, or by some other technique.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the sixth configuration B6 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the first B operation-related output sound shown in FIG. 164 and the second B operation-related output sound shown in FIG. 166 may be output as the same sound.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the sixth configuration B6 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the "operation-related display of the operation button 410" is displayed, regardless of whether it is displayed as "Message Display MB1" or "Message Display MB2," the operation-related output sound (first B operation-related output sound, second B operation-related output sound) may be made to be audible only once (and not terminated midway).

In each of the above-mentioned performance examples, in the situation shown in FIG. 182, the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 is always output in the form of a "specific sound" that is repeated multiple times; in other words, it is repeatedly audible a predetermined number of times regardless of whether or not an operation is received on the sword decorative body 5001. Also, in the situation shown in FIG. 183, the third-B operation-related output sound OB3 may end playback of the "specific sound" midway, but whether or not playback ends midway is realized as a configuration that is determined based on conditions unrelated to the reception of an operation on the sword decorative body 5001.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the sixth configuration B6 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if an operation is accepted on the sword ornament 5001 while the 3B operation-related output sound OB3, which began to be output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the message display MB1 was hidden, is in an audible state, it is desirable that the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance be executed as the same change (in the same manner) whether the "specific sound" as the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is audible multiple times or only once.

The method for making the "specific sound" serving as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 audible multiple times can be set as appropriate. For example, this can be achieved by repeatedly reading out a single piece of data, or by storing multiple repeated sounds within a single piece of data and playing that data to output the repeated sounds. In this case, however, pausing the playback of the data will ensure that only one sound is audible.

Also, for example, as a seventh configuration B7, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by a player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display for the sword decoration 5001) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) that prompts an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and a post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted on the second operating means (operation button 410). and a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a change after acceptance, wherein at least a first predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB5" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, etc.) and a first specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB3" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, etc.) are prepared as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) is operated and the operated state is maintained while the first operation-related display is being displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-acceptance change in accordance with acceptance of an operation for the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) can be executed multiple times (see FIGS. 168, 170, 172, etc.), and a second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167) and a second specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB3" shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, etc.) are prepared as modes for displaying the second operation-related display. 166 and 167), at least two specific modes (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB1" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165) are prepared, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change according to the operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIGS. 164, 166, etc.), and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB2" shown in FIGS. 166 and 167), the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) changes to the second specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB2" shown in FIGS. 164 and 165) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made invisible. Instead of the second operation-related display being displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB2), if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and the post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display is being displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB2), and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, a corresponding post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed (see FIGS. 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.). Therefore, it can be expected that the change of the second operation means (operation button 410) from an operated state to a non-operated state will serve as a trigger to indicate that the second specific mode (message display MB1) will not be displayed for a long period of time.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message Display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183), even if the first predetermined mode (Message Display MB5) is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (Message Display MB3) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (Message Display MB5) was hidden (see Figure 182). This configuration is expected to prevent a decline in interest in playing the game when the first predetermined mode (Message Display MB5) is hidden.

In this case, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB2), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operating display (post-non-operating display HB2) can be displayed, and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) changes to an operating state. When the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in the operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) has been performed multiple times, the corresponding post-non-operating display may not be displayed regardless of whether the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) or the first specific mode (message display MB3) (or in any other displayable mode). This configuration makes it easy to recognize when the second operating means (operation button 410) is released from its operating state, but makes it difficult to recognize when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is released from its operating state, which is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension when using the so-called auto-repeated-hit function.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB2), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed multiple times, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, a corresponding post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) may be displayed (see FIG. 166 (f)). However, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is not displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed multiple times, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, the corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed (see FIG. 174 (f)). With this configuration, even if the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) is released, if the auto-repeated press function is enabled while the second operation-related display is not displayed, the post-non-operation display will not be displayed, and it can be expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the second operation means (operation button 410) will be maintained in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB2), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed multiple times, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, a corresponding post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) may be displayed (see FIG. 166 (f)). However, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (message display MB1), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed multiple times, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed. With this configuration, even if the operation state of the second operating means is released while the second operation-related display is displayed, if the auto-repeated function is enabled while the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (message display MB1), the post-non-operation display will not be displayed. Therefore, it can be expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed will be maintained in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, while the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB2), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes have been made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), and a post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed in response to the second operation means (operation button 410) changing from an operating state to a non-operation state, it is also possible to prevent a new sound from being output in response to the change to the non-operation state (see FIG. 166).

In each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed in "message display MB1," there is no case where the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is newly displayed in "message display MB2" before a predetermined time has elapsed since the "message display MB1" was hidden (see FIG. 179), and when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed in "message display MB2," there is no case where the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is newly displayed in "message display MB1" before a predetermined time has elapsed since the "message display MB2" was hidden (see FIG. 180).

Also, for example, the eighth configuration B8 may include a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by a player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display for the sword decoration 5001) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) that prompts an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation being accepted on the second operating means (operation button 410). and a post-acceptance change executing means, wherein at least a first predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB5" shown in Figs. 182 and 183, etc.) and a first specific mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB3" shown in Figs. 182 and 183, etc.) are prepared as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-acceptance change in accordance with operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figs. 168, 170, 172, etc.), and a second predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "message display MB2" shown in Figs. 166 and 167) and a second specific mode (e.g., 164 and 165 ) is prepared, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-acceptance change in accordance with the operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIGS. 164 , 166 , etc.), and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (e.g., equivalent to “message display MB2” shown in FIGS. 166 and 167 ), the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) changes to the second specific mode (e.g., “message display MB1” shown in FIGS. 164 and 165 ) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was made non-display. 166(h) and 180(h)), is not newly displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB1) (see, for example, FIG. 180). Instead, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the second operation-related display is being displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB2), and the post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is being executed multiple times, if the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this triggers at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the secondB post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in FIG. 166(h) and FIG. 180(h)) to be made inaudible. Therefore, it can be expected that the change of the second operation means (operation button 410) from an operated state to a non-operated state will serve as a trigger to indicate that the second specific mode (message display MB1) will not be displayed for a long period of time.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (e.g., corresponding to "Message Display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183), even if the first predetermined mode (Message Display MB5) is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (Message Display MB3) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (Message Display MB5) was hidden (see Figure 182). This configuration is expected to prevent a decline in interest in playing the game when the first predetermined mode (Message Display MB5) is hidden.

In this case, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB2), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times, when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this triggers at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the second B post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166 (h) and Figure 180 (h)) to be made inaudible, but the first operation means (sword decoration When the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-acceptance changes have been made in response to an operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, the sound effect that was audible at that time may not be made inaudible, regardless of whether the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) or the first specific mode (message display MB3) (or in any other displayable mode). This configuration makes it easy to recognize when the second operating means (operation button 410) is released from its operating state, but makes it difficult to recognize when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is released from its operating state, which is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension when using the so-called auto-repeated-hit function.

Furthermore, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB2), and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is being executed multiple times, if the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this triggers the activation of at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (the second B However, when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an inoperation state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is not displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-acceptance changes are made in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), this may not be used as a trigger to inactivate at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time. With this configuration, even when the operating state of the second operation means (operation button 410) is released, if the auto-repeated function was enabled while the second operation-related display was not displayed, at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time may not be inaudible. This is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when using the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operation means (operation button 410).

Furthermore, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB2), and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the second operation means (operation button 410) is being executed multiple times, when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this triggers the output of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the second B post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166 (h) and Figure 180 (h)). However, when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state under the circumstances where the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (message display MB1), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times, this may be used as a trigger to prevent the effect sound that was in an audible state at that time from being made inaudible (see FIG. 164). With this configuration, even if the operation state of the second operating means is released while the second operation-related display is displayed, if the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled while the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (message display MB1), there is no need to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time inaudible. Therefore, it can be expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-rapid-hit function (long press function) for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed will be maintained in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB2), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and post-acceptance changes have been made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), and at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is made inaudible when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is possible to prevent new sounds from being output when the second operation means changes to a non-operating state (see FIG. 166).

In each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed in "message display MB1," there is no case where the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is newly displayed in "message display MB2" before a predetermined time has elapsed since the "message display MB1" was hidden (see FIG. 179), and when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed in "message display MB2," there is no case where the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is newly displayed in "message display MB1" before a predetermined time has elapsed since the "message display MB2" was hidden (see FIG. 180).

Also, for example, as a ninth configuration B9, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the first operating means a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which an operation to the operation means (the sword ornament 5001) can be accepted multiple times; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted to the second operation means (the operation button 410); and a display prompting an operation to the second operation means (the operation button 410), and when the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a display prompting an operation to the second operation means (the operation button 410) in which an operation to the second operation means (the operation button 410) is accepted multiple times. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function), and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound (such as a first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or a second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) relating to an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be output, and the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and a post-acceptance change occurs in accordance with the acceptance of an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410). In a situation where the second operation-related sound is audible, the second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) is not made inaudible before the lapse of a predetermined output time, but is made audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation means is made in an operating state while the second operation-related sound is made audible, and if the operating state is maintained thereafter, the intervals between multiple post-acceptance changes occurring in response to operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) can be set to a specific time or less (see FIG. 164). In other words, in this case, because the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before the lapse of the predetermined output time, it is difficult to recognize that multiple post-acceptance changes are occurring at relatively short intervals (a time or less than the specific time), which is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a first operation-related sound (such as the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound is output after a predetermined output time has elapsed. When the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) can be output, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operation means, The second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before the lapse of a predetermined output time, but is made audible for the predetermined output time (see Fig. 164(g) and Fig. 166(g)). When the first operation-related sound (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Fig. 168 or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Fig. 170) is made audible, the first operating means (the sword ornament 5001) is made in an operating state, and thereafter, if the operating state is maintained, the interval at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times (the interval at which post-acceptance changes occur in the so-called auto-repeated function) is set to 1/2 the time at which the first operation-related sound becomes inaudible before the lapse of a predetermined output time. The interval between the execution of post-acceptance changes multiple times when the second operation means (operation button 410) is put into an operating state when the second operation-related sound (such as the firstB operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or the secondB operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) is made audible and the operation state is maintained thereafter (the interval between the execution of post-acceptance changes in the so-called auto-repeated function) may be set to either a time period equal to or shorter than the specific time period (see FIG. 164) or a time period longer than the specific time period (see FIG. 166). With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated and maintained while the first operation-related sound is being output, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance by the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is always short, regardless of whether the first operation-related sound is rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed. This makes it easier to recognize that the auto-rapid tapping function is enabled, and is expected to maintain interest in the game. In contrast, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is operated and maintained while the second operation-related sound is being output, the second operation-related sound will not be rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed. In addition, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance by the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is not necessarily short and may be longer than the specified time. This makes it harder to recognize that the auto-rapid tapping function is enabled, and is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a first operation-related sound (such as the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see FIG. 168(g) or FIG. 183(g)), or may be made audible for the predetermined output time (see FIG. 182(g)).

In this case, it is desirable that the output sound (type of sound) of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 be the same when it is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed and when it is made audible for the predetermined output time.

It is also desirable that the display mode of the message display MB3 be the same when the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed and when the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is made audible for the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the ninth configuration B9 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if multiple operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 while the message display MB3 (see FIG. 168) is displayed and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state, the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears in response to the accepted operation can be set to a time that is less than a specific time, and does not necessarily have to be set to a predetermined time (a fixed time).

Furthermore, the interval (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the operation button 410 while message display MB1 (see FIG. 164) is displayed, and the interval (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the sword decoration 5001 while operation-related displays (message displays MB3, MB4, MB5) related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function are displayed, can both be set to a specific time or less, but even in this case, the respective times (intervals) may be set to different times (intervals).

For example, the interval (the interval until a new change after acceptance appears) when the so-called auto-repeated function is activated for the sword ornament 5001 while "operation-related display (message display MB3, MB4, MB5) related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed is set to a time longer than the interval (the interval until a new change after acceptance appears) when the so-called auto-repeated function is activated for the operation button 410 while message display MB1 (see FIG. 164) is displayed as "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function," and By setting the time to be shorter than the interval (the interval until a change appears after a new reception) when the so-called auto-rapid function is enabled for the operation button 410 while message display MB2 (see FIG. 166) is displayed as "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function," it is possible to make the gap in the interval when the so-called auto-rapid function is enabled for the operation button 410 appear larger while "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function" is displayed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the ninth configuration B9 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, or the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) is enabled for the operation button 410, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the ninth configuration B9 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display (message display MB3, MB4, MB5) related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" or the corresponding operation-related sound is being executed, the sword ornament 5001 is put into an operation state, and then if that operation state is maintained, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes can be set to a fixed time rather than an indefinite time.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the ninth configuration B9 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the operation button 410 is put into an operating state while the "operation-related display (message display MB1, message display MB2) related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" or the corresponding operation-related sound is being executed, and then when this operating state is maintained, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes may be either a fixed time (see FIG. 164) or an indefinite time (see FIG. 166).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the ninth configuration B9 and each of the above-mentioned examples, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes when the operation button 410 is put into an operating state while the "operation-related display (Message Display MB1, Message Display MB2) related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" or the corresponding operation-related sound is being executed and the operation state is maintained thereafter may be set to an indefinite time (see Figure 166), but the shortest time that can be used as the indefinite time may also be longer than the above-mentioned specific time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the ninth configuration B9 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the post-acceptance change when the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state is the same whether the "operation-related sound related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed or made audible for the predetermined output time, but if the "operation-related sound related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is made audible for the predetermined output time, the post-acceptance change when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state may be implemented either as a specific change or as a change different from the specific change.

Furthermore, for example, as the tenth configuration B10, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which an operation to the first operation means (the sword ornament 5001) can be accepted multiple times; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted to the second operation means (the operation button 410); and a display that prompts an operation to the second operation means (the operation button 410), and when the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, the second operation means (the operation button 410) is operated multiple times. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function), and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound (such as a first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or a second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) relating to an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be output, and the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410) is output. When a situation occurs in which the second operation-related sound (such as the firstB operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or the secondB operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) is not made inaudible before the lapse of a predetermined output time, but is made audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation means is made in an operating state while the second operation-related sound is made audible, and if the operating state is maintained thereafter, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance of the second operation means (operation button 410) can be set to a fixed time (see FIG. 164). In other words, in this case, because the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before the lapse of the predetermined output time, it is difficult to recognize that a situation is occurring in which multiple operations are being accepted within a fixed time, and this is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a first operation-related sound (such as the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound becomes inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed. When the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) can be output, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operation means, the second operation-related sound is output for a predetermined output time. The first operation-related sound is not made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, but is made audible for a predetermined output time (see Fig. 164(g) and Fig. 166(g)). When the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is made in an operating state while the first operation-related sound (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Fig. 168 or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Fig. 170) is made audible, and thereafter, if the operating state is maintained, the interval at which a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times (the interval at which a post-acceptance change occurs in the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is constant, regardless of whether the first operation-related sound is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed. The interval between the execution of post-acceptance changes multiple times when the second operation means (operation button 410) is put into an operating state while the second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) is audible (the interval between the execution of post-acceptance changes in the so-called auto-repeated function) may be either a fixed time (which may be a fixed time as long as it is a fixed time) (see FIG. 164) or an indefinite time (see FIG. 166). With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated and maintained while the first operation-related sound is being output, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance by the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is always a predetermined time, not an indefinite time, regardless of whether the first operation-related sound is rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed. This makes it easier to recognize that the auto-rapid tapping function is enabled, and is expected to maintain interest in the game. In contrast, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is operated and maintained while the second operation-related sound is being output, the second operation-related sound will not be rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed. In addition, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance by the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is not necessarily a fixed time (as long as it is a predetermined time, not an indefinite time) but may be an indefinite time. This makes it harder to recognize that the auto-rapid tapping function is enabled, and is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a first operation-related sound (such as the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see FIG. 168(g) or FIG. 183(g)), or may be made audible for the predetermined output time (see FIG. 182(g)).

In this case, it is desirable that the output sound (type of sound) of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 be the same when it is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed and when it is made audible for the predetermined output time.

It is also desirable that the display mode of the message display MB3 be the same when the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed and when the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is made audible for the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the tenth configuration B10 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, "indefinite time" refers to a time that is not determined in advance, and can be realized, for example, by making a performance determination as to whether or not to cause a change after acceptance each time an operation is accepted while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, and causing a change after acceptance when a special judgment result is obtained as a result. However, the method for realizing this configuration is not limited to this.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the tenth configuration B10 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, there are no particular limitations on the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the tenth configuration B10 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is put into an operating state when an "operation-related sound related to the operation of the operation button 410" is audible, and the interval at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times if the operating state is maintained thereafter (the interval at which operations are accepted by the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is an indefinite time (see FIG. 166), even the shortest time that can be adopted as the indefinite time may be longer than the time at which the interval at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times if the operating state of the operation button 410 is maintained is constant (see FIG. 164).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the tenth configuration B10 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is put into an operating state when the "operation-related sound related to the operation of the operation button 410" is audible, and the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes is then maintained if that operating state is maintained (the interval at which operations are accepted by the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is set to an indefinite time, even the shortest time that can be adopted as that indefinite time may be longer than the interval (constant interval) between multiple post-acceptance changes (see Figures 168, 170, 172, etc.) when the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 is maintained.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the tenth configuration B10 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the "operation-related sound related to the operation on the sword decorative body 5001" is audible, the sword decorative body 5001 is put into an operating state, and thereafter, if this operating state is maintained, the interval at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times (the interval at which operations are accepted by the so-called auto-repeated function) is constant, but it may be set to a time longer than the time when the interval at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times when the operating state of the operation button 410 is maintained is constant (see Figure 164).

Also, for example, as an 11th configuration B11, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (a sword decoration as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and that can accept an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function) which is a display prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) and which indicates that an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) may be accepted multiple times if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is in a displayed state, and which generates a second operation-related sound ( 164, the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166, etc.) can be output, the second operation-related sound is audible, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410), the second operation-related sound (the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164, the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166, etc.) is not made inaudible before the lapse of a predetermined output time, but is made audible for the predetermined output time, and the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. Even when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated while the first operating means is in operation, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation of the first operating means may not be initiated (see FIGS. 168, 182, 183, etc.), and even when the second operating means (operation button 410) is operated while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation of the second operating means may not be initiated (see FIGS. 164, 166, 179, 180, etc.). This makes it possible to enable the auto-repeated function when the second operation-related display is displayed, while still maintaining a sense of tension. It can also be expected that the sense of tension will be maintained when the first operation-related display is displayed.

In this case, even if the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is operated while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the first operation means is not initiated, if the first operation means is maintained in an operated state (if the conditions for allowing operation acceptance for the first operation means (conditions for the occurrence of an acceptable state) are met while the first operation means is maintained), a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) will be initiated based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point. It is possible to make it possible to create a situation in which a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and if the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-tap function) is displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated but the execution of the post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means is not started, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state even if the second operation means continues to be maintained in an operated state. With this configuration, with regard to the first operation means (sword decoration 5001), even if the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, the auto-rapid-hit function can be enabled if the operation state is continued, so it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner. Meanwhile, with regard to the second operation means (operation button 410), if the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, even if the operation state is continued, there is no possibility of operation being accepted based on the detection of that operation state, so it is expected that the tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner when realizing the dramatic effects of the auto-rapid-hit function.

In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a first operation-related sound (third-B operation-related output sound OB3 or fourth-B operation-related output sound OB4) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can be output, and when the first operation-related sound (third-B operation-related output sound OB3) is audible and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before the elapse of a predetermined output time (see Figures 168 and 183), or may be audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 170 and 182). When the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed, a second operation-related sound (a first-B operation-related output sound OB1 or a second-B operation-related output sound OB2) related to an operation of the second operation means (the operation button 410) can be output. When the second operation-related sound (the first-B operation-related output sound OB1 or the second-B operation-related output sound OB2) is audible and the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation of the second operation means, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may be audible for the predetermined output time (see FIGS. 164 and 166 ). This configuration makes it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operation means (the operation button 410), thereby creating a sense of tension about whether to maintain the operation state under such circumstances. In contrast, the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) can be made to either make it easy to recognize whether the auto-repeated-hits function is enabled or difficult to recognize, but in either case, the auto-repeated-hits function can be enabled by continuing to operate it, which is expected to add a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

However, the process of making the first operation-related sound inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed does not necessarily have to be triggered by the receipt of an operation on the first operating means (sword ornamentation 5001) (it may be triggered by the receipt of an operation on the first operating means). In other words, in this case, regardless of whether an operation is received on the first operating means (sword ornamentation 5001), there will be both cases where the first operation-related sound is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, and cases where the first operation-related sound is not made inaudible and is output for the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, after multiple post-acceptance changes have occurred in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), there may be cases where, even if that operating state is maintained, no new post-acceptance changes occur while the first operation-related display is displayed (the so-called auto-repeated function is disabled) (see Figures 168 and 170). However, even in this case, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state (if the conditions for allowing operation acceptance for the first operating means are met while the state is maintained), a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means may be executed again based on the operating state maintained up to that point (see Figures 168 and 170).

In addition, with regard to "a situation in which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) based on detection of the operation state that had been maintained up to that point," the display may be configured to appear while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed (see FIG. 168). Alternatively, the display may be configured to appear while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden after the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is made invisible (see FIG. 186). Alternatively, the display may be configured to appear while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is made invisible after the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is made invisible (see FIG. 181). In either case, it is desirable that the post-acceptance change that appears in "a situation in which a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) based on the detection of the operating state that had been maintained up until that point" be the same as when it first appeared (before new post-acceptance changes stopped occurring).

Also, for example, as the 12th configuration B12, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the display prompts an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times. a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and which can accept operations on the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related sound (such as the secondB operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) related to an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) when the second operation-related display is displayed, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410), the second operation-related sound (such as the secondB operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, and is audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, if the second operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, a corresponding post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) can be displayed (see FIGS. 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.), so it can be indicated that the second operation-related sound will not be rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed when the second operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, and the first operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed (see Figures 164, 166, etc.); and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and the second operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, a corresponding post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) may be displayed (see Figure 166 (f), etc.). With this configuration, it is easy to recognize when the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released, but it is difficult to recognize when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) has been released, which is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension when using the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function).

In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a first operation-related sound (third-B operation-related output sound OB3 or fourth-B operation-related output sound OB4) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can be output, and when the first operation-related sound (third-B operation-related output sound OB3) is audible and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before the elapse of a predetermined output time (see Figures 168 and 183), or may be audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 170 and 182). When the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed, a second operation-related sound (the first B operation-related output sound OB1 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2) related to the operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be output, and when the second operation-related sound (the first B operation-related output sound OB1 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2) is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operation means, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before the lapse of a predetermined output time, and may be made audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 164 and 166). In this regard, if the post-operation display (post-operation display HB2) is displayed when the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) is released, it is possible to confirm that the auto-rapid-hit function has been enabled for the second operation means, which is expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. Furthermore, if the post-operation display is not displayed even when the operation state of the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is released, it is expected to provide a different presentation than that of the second operation means (operation button 410), and to maintain a sense of tension and interest in the game.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation for the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is possible to prevent the corresponding post-non-operation display from being displayed regardless of the form in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed.

It is also desirable to prevent new sounds from being output when the sword ornament 5001 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the twelfth configuration B12 and each of the above-described performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation of the operation button 410 is executed multiple times, and the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the corresponding post-operation display may be displayed (see FIG. 166), or the post-operation display may not be displayed (see FIG. 164). With this configuration, even when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation of the operation button 410 is executed multiple times, the corresponding post-operation display is not necessarily displayed when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state. This is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state.

Furthermore, even if the post-non-operation display is displayed when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, it is possible to prevent a new sound from being output when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state.

Furthermore, for example, as the thirteenth configuration B13, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) can be performed multiple times. a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function); a second operation-related change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) and which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, allows an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) to be accepted multiple times. and a display means, wherein when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound (such as the secondB operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166 ) related to an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410) can be output, and when the second operation-related sound is made audible and the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (the operation button 410), the second operation-related sound (such as the secondB operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166 ) is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed and is made audible for the predetermined output time, and When an operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled) is displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, if the second operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this can be used as a trigger to make inaudible at least one of the sound effects that was in an audible state at that time (the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in FIG. 166(h) and FIG. 180(h)). Therefore, it can be suggested that the second operation-related sound will not be made in an inaudible state before the predetermined output time has elapsed when the second operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), if the first operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this will not trigger the event of making at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time in an inaudible state, and the second operation-related display When the second operating means (operation-related display related to the operating button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed and the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation received from the second operating means, and the second operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this may trigger at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the secondB post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in FIG. 166(h) or FIG. 180(h)) to become inaudible. With this configuration, the release of the operated state of the second operating means (operation button 410) can be easily recognized, but the release of the operated state of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) can be difficult to recognize, which is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension when using the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function).

In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a first operation-related sound (third-B operation-related output sound OB3 or fourth-B operation-related output sound OB4) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can be output, and when the first operation-related sound (third-B operation-related output sound OB3) is audible and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before the elapse of a predetermined output time (see Figures 168 and 183), or may be audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 170 and 182). When the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed, a second operation-related sound (the first B operation-related output sound OB1 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2) related to the operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be output, and when the second operation-related sound (the first B operation-related output sound OB1 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2) is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operation means, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before the lapse of a predetermined output time, and may be made audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 164 and 166). In this regard, if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at the time the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) was released could be made inaudible, it would be possible to confirm that the auto-rapid-fire function had been enabled for the second operation means, which would be expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. Furthermore, if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at the time was not made inaudible even when the operation state of the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) was released, it would be possible to provide a different effect from that of the second operation means (operation button 410), which would be expected to maintain a sense of tension and interest in the game.

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the thirteenth configuration B13 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation for the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is possible to make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time not become inaudible, regardless of the manner in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed.

It is also desirable to prevent new sounds from being output when the sword ornament 5001 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, in implementing the thirteenth configuration B13 and the configurations described above, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to the operation of the operation button 410, when the operation button 410 is switched from an operated state to an inoperated state, at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time may be made inaudible (see FIG. 166), or at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time may not be made inaudible (see FIG. 164). With this configuration, even when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to the operation of the operation button 410, at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time may not necessarily be made inaudible when the operation button 410 is switched from an operated state to an inoperated state. This is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the thirteenth configuration B13 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if "when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to an inoperated state, at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time is made inaudible," the performance sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the changes after acceptance, and may be, for example, another performance sound such as background music, or it may be all performance sounds that are in an audible state at that time.

Also, for example, as a 14th configuration B14, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the determination by the determination means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and that can receive operations on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. a first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as a target; a second operation-related change execution means capable of executing a change after acceptance in response to an acceptance of an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) and which indicates that an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is in a displayed state. When the second operation-related display is displayed, 166 ) is enabled to be output, the second operation-related sound is audible, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), the second operation-related sound (the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 ) is not made inaudible before the lapse of a predetermined output time, but is made audible for the predetermined output time, and the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed during the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed. When the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed to a non-operated state while the post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and then the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operated state back to the operated state (timing tBa2-C1 shown in FIG. 164), this can be used as a trigger to make inaudible at least one of the sound effects that was in an audible state at that time (first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h)). Therefore, it can be suggested that the second operation-related sound (such as firstB operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164) will not be made in an inaudible state before the predetermined output time has elapsed when the second operating means (operation button 410) is again changed to an operated state.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in response to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), and then the first operation means is changed from the non-operated state back to the operated state, this may be used as a trigger to prevent at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time from being made inaudible; and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in response to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410), and then the second operation means is changed from the non-operated state back to the operated state, this may be used as a trigger to prevent at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time from being made inaudible (the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164 (h)). With this configuration, when the so-called automatic rapid-fire function (long press function) is interrupted and the second operating means (operation button 410) is operated again, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted; however, when the so-called automatic rapid-fire function (long press function) is interrupted and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is operated again, it becomes more difficult to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted, and it can be expected that this will create a favorable sense of tension when interrupting and re-operating the automatic rapid-fire function (long press function).

In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a first operation-related sound (third-B operation-related output sound OB3 or fourth-B operation-related output sound OB4) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can be output, and when the first operation-related sound (third-B operation-related output sound OB3) is audible and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before the elapse of a predetermined output time (see Figures 168 and 183), or may be audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 170 and 182). When the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed, a second operation-related sound (a first-B operation-related output sound OB1 or a second-B operation-related output sound OB2) related to an operation of the second operation means (the operation button 410) is enabled, and when the second operation-related sound (the first-B operation-related output sound OB1 or the second-B operation-related output sound OB2) is audible and the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation of the second operation means, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may be audible for the predetermined output time (see FIGS. 164 and 166 ). This configuration makes it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operation means (the operation button 410). In this regard, if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at the time the second operating means (operation button 410) was released and then operated again could be made inaudible, it would be possible to confirm that the operation of the second operating means had been properly accepted and that the auto-rapid-fire function had been enabled, thereby providing a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, if the sound effects that were audible at the time the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) was released and then operated again could be prevented from being made inaudible, it would be possible to provide a different kind of effect from that of the second operating means (operation button 410), thereby maintaining a sense of tension and interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 14th configuration B14 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the sword decorative body 5001, and then the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the non-operational state to the operation state again, regardless of the manner in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, it is possible to prevent the performance sound that was audible at that time from being made inaudible.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the fourteenth configuration B14 and each of the above-described effect examples, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state back to the operated state, only if the post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα1) as one of the post-acceptance changes is audible at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164) inaudible. In this case, instead of the post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα1), a sound different from this may be made inaudible.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the fourteenth configuration B14 and each of the above-described effect examples, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tap function" is displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 is then turned to a non-operated state and then turned to an operated state again from the non-operated state, even if the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is audible at that time, this may trigger either a case in which at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible (see FIG. 164), or a case in which the effect sounds that were audible at that time are not made inaudible (see FIG. 166). With this configuration, when the operation state of the operation button 410 is released and then the operation button 410 is operated again, at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time is not necessarily made inaudible, which is expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the fourteenth configuration B14 and each of the above-described exemplary effects, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the operation button 410 is executed multiple times, when the operation button 410 is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, it is possible to either make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see FIG. 166(h)), or not make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see FIG. 164). With this configuration, even when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the operation button 410 is executed multiple times, at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time is not necessarily made inaudible when the operation button 410 is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. This is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the fourteenth configuration B14 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tap function" is displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 is then changed from the non-operated state back to the operated state, if this triggers at least one of the effect sounds that were audible at that time to be made inaudible, a new sound is output in response to the change to the operated state (timing tBa2-C1 shown in FIG. 164). However, even if the effect sounds that were audible at that time are not made inaudible, a new sound may be output in response to the change to the operated state (timing tBa2-B1 shown in FIG. 164).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 14th configuration B14 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, when the operation button 410 is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, this triggers at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time to be made inaudible. The effect sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the post-acceptance changes, and can be any type of sound as long as it is different from the second operation-related sound. For example, it may be another effect sound such as background music, or it may be multiple effect sounds that are audible at that time.

Furthermore, for example, as the 15th configuration B15, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and the display a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, an operation to the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be accepted multiple times; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted to the second operation means (operation button 410); The second operation-related display means is capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for activating the so-called automatic rapid-fire function) which is a display that prompts an operation, and when the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation for the second operation means (the operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times. When the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as a target for activating the so-called automatic rapid-fire function) is displayed, A first operation-related sound (such as the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168) related to an operation on the operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can be output, and when the first operation-related sound (the 3B operation-related output sound OB3) is audible and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound can be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see FIG. 168(g)). In this regard, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function, for example, message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) may be configured to be displayed either before the timing at which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function, for example, message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164) is displayed (when it is displayed before the timing and then hidden), or after the timing at which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function, for example, message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164) is displayed (after it is hidden), within the execution period of one (same) pattern change. With this configuration, it is expected that tension will be maintained in an optimal manner by making it difficult to recognize the timing when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is activated, such as the message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed and the timing when the first operation-related sound (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168) is made inaudible).

In this case, a special variation pattern is prepared as one of the multiple variation patterns prepared as pattern variation patterns, and during the period in which the pattern variation is being carried out using this special variation pattern, the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) may be displayed either before the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in Figure 164 or message display MB2 shown in Figure 166) is displayed, or after the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in Figure 164 or message display MB2 shown in Figure 166) is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to expect that the first operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) will be displayed regardless of whether the second operation-related display (for example, message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164 or message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) has already been displayed, and it is also possible to expect that the second operation-related display (for example, message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164 or message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) will be displayed regardless of whether the first operation-related display has already been displayed, so it is expected that interest in playing the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In this case, during the period in which the pattern is changing in a special changing pattern, it is desirable that the change after acceptance when an operation is accepted on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) while the first operation-related display is displayed be the same in both cases: when the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed before the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164 or message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) is displayed, and when the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed after the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164 or message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) is displayed.

Furthermore, when a first operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed, a first operation-related sound (for example, 3B operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation of the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means, the first operation-related sound (for example, 3B operation-related output sound OB3) can be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed (see FIG. 168 or FIG. 183) or can be made audible for the predetermined output time (see FIG. 182), and when a second operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 shown in FIG. 164) is displayed, a first operation-related sound (for example, 3B operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation of the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means, the first operation-related sound (for example, 3B operation-related output sound OB3) can be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed (see FIG. 168 or FIG. 183), or can be made audible for the predetermined output time (see FIG. 182). When a message display MB1 shown in FIG. 166 or a message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166 is displayed, a second operation-related sound (e.g., a firstB operation-related output sound OB1 or a secondB operation-related output sound OB2) related to an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be output, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operation means, the second operation-related sound (e.g., the firstB operation-related output sound OB1 or the secondB operation-related output sound OB2) is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, and may be made audible for the predetermined output time (see FIGS. 164, 166, etc.). Furthermore, during the period in which the symbol fluctuation is performed in the special fluctuation pattern, the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) may be displayed either before the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164 or message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) or after the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164 or message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166). When the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible more frequently before the predetermined output time has elapsed than when the first operation-related display is displayed before the second operation-related display. This percentage may include 100% and 0%. This configuration makes it possible to indicate the possibility that the first operation-related sound (e.g., third B operation-related output sound OB3) will be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, during the period in which the pattern variation is performed in a special variation pattern, if the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed before the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164 or message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) is displayed, the first operation-related display may not be displayed after the second operation-related display is displayed, or if the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display, the first operation-related display may not be displayed before the second operation-related display is displayed.

In addition, during the period in which the pattern is changing in a special change pattern, the second operation-related display (for example, message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164 or message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) is always displayed, but the first operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) may not necessarily be displayed (it may or may not be displayed).

Furthermore, during the period in which the pattern is changed in a special change pattern, even if the first operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed before the second operation-related display (for example, message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164 or message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) is displayed, it may be configured to be displayed again after the second operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, during the period in which the pattern is changed in a special change pattern, even if the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed again after the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164 or message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) is hidden, the first operation-related sound (e.g., third B operation-related output sound OB3) may be made outputtable again, and the probability that the first operation-related sound (e.g., third B operation-related output sound OB3) is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed may be higher than before the second operation-related display is displayed.

In addition, during the period when the pattern changes in a special change pattern, the mode shown in Figures 168 and 169 (Message Display MB3) may be displayed as the first operation-related display, but other modes (such as the mode shown in Figures 170 and 171 (Message Display MB4) or the mode shown in Figures 172 and 173 (Message Display MB5)) may not be displayed.

Furthermore, during the period in which the pattern variation is performed in a special variation pattern, if the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed before the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164 or message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (e.g., third-B operation-related output sound OB3) may not be rendered inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed. Furthermore, if the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed after the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164 or message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (e.g., third-B operation-related output sound OB3) may or may not be rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed.

In addition, regardless of the special variation pattern, if the first operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed during the period in which the pattern variation is being executed, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot being obtained may be higher than if the display is not made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed.

Also, for example, as the 16th configuration B16, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination by the determination means, a pattern change means that can execute a pattern change in one of a plurality of change patterns based on the result of the determination by the determination means, and a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display that prompts an operation on the first operation means (the sword decorative body 5001), and which allows an operation on the first operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) to be accepted multiple times if the first operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; and a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted on the second operation means (the operation button 410). and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410), and which allows an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410) to be accepted multiple times if the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and When this is indicated, a first operation-related sound (such as the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can be output, and when the first operation-related sound (the 3B operation-related output sound OB3) is audible and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound can be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see FIG. 168(g)). In this regard, the multiple variation patterns include "a variation pattern type in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means (operation button 410)" and "a variation pattern type in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and an operation opportunity is not given to the second operation means." However, regardless of which of these types of pattern variation is performed, the first operation-related display (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168) may be displayed during the period in which the pattern variation is being executed, and therefore it can be expected that the sense of anticipation that the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) will be displayed during the period in which the pattern variation is being executed will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed, a first operation-related sound (for example, 3B operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation of the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means, the first operation-related sound (for example, 3B operation-related output sound OB3) can be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed (see FIG. 168 or FIG. 183) or can be made audible for the predetermined output time (see FIG. 182). When the second operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 shown in FIG. 164) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (for example, 3B operation-related output sound OB3) can be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed (see FIG. 168 or FIG. 183) or can be made audible for the predetermined output time (see FIG. 182). or the message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) is displayed, a second operation-related sound (e.g., a firstB operation-related output sound OB1 or a secondB operation-related output sound OB2) related to an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be output, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to acceptance of an operation on the second operation means, the second operation-related sound (e.g., the firstB operation-related output sound OB1 or the secondB operation-related output sound OB2) is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, and may be made audible for the predetermined output time (see FIG. 164, FIG. 166, etc.). Furthermore, the multiple variation patterns include "a type of variation pattern in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means (operation button 410)" and "a type of variation pattern in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed and an operation opportunity is not given to the second operation means (operation button 410)", but regardless of which of these types of pattern variation is performed, there are cases in which the first operation-related display is displayed (when the display conditions for the first operation-related display are satisfied) during the period in which the pattern variation is being executed. Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed during a period in which a pattern change is performed in a type of change pattern in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed and an operation opportunity is provided for the second operation means (operation button 410), the first operation-related sound (e.g., third-B operation-related output sound OB3) may be made inaudible more frequently before the predetermined output time has elapsed than when the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed during a period in which a pattern change is performed in a type of change pattern in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and an operation opportunity is not provided for the second operation means. This percentage may include 100% and 0%. This configuration makes it possible to indicate the possibility that the first operation-related sound (e.g., the third B operation-related output sound OB3) will be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, even if the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed within a period in which a pattern change is performed in a "type of change pattern in which a second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is activated) is displayed and an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means (operation button 410)," if the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed before the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164 or message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (e.g., third-B operation-related output sound OB3) may be made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed less frequently than when the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display, or when the first operation-related display is displayed within a period in which a pattern change is performed in a type of change pattern in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and an operation opportunity is not given to the second operation means. The percentage may be 100% or 0%.

Furthermore, if the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed after the second operation-related display during a period in which a pattern change is performed in a type of change pattern in which a second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled) is displayed and an operation opportunity is provided for the second operation means (operation button 410), the first operation-related sound (e.g., third-B operation-related output sound OB3) may be made inaudible more frequently before the predetermined output time has elapsed than if the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed during a period in which a pattern change is performed in a type of change pattern in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and an operation opportunity is not provided for the second operation means. This percentage may include 100% and 0%.

Furthermore, in a "variation pattern of a type in which a second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled) is displayed and an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means (operation button 410)," the first operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) may be displayed again after the second operation-related display, even if it was displayed before the second operation-related display. In this case, it is desirable (but not essential) that the post-acceptance change when an operation is accepted for the first operation means while the first operation-related display is displayed be the same in both cases where the first operation-related display is displayed before the second operation-related display and where the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display.

In addition, the "type of fluctuation pattern in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled) is displayed and an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means (operation button 410)" may include the "special fluctuation pattern" according to the above-mentioned 15th configuration B15.

Also, for example, as the 17th configuration B17, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state, a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which, when the first operation means (the sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, an operation for the first operation means (the sword ornament 5001) can be accepted multiple times; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operation means (the operation button 410); and a display prompting an operation for the second operation means (the operation button 410), and the display is in a display state and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called automatic rapid-fire function) in which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation means (operation button 410) is in a state where the operation is accepted multiple times, and even in a state where the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called automatic rapid-fire function) is not displayed, an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410) is accepted. When an operation is performed on the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed (see Figures 174 and 175). In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation of the second operation means may be executed multiple times. If the post-acceptance change in response to the operation of the second operation means is executed multiple times while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change may be set to a specific time or less (6B acceptance-permitted state). In other words, in this case, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled is set to a relatively short interval, making it easier for the player to notice that the auto-rapid-hit function is secretly enabled even when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 that is the target of the auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this case, even when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed.In this case, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means may be executed multiple times (see Figures 176 and 177).

In this regard, the intervals at which the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are the same whether the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function, such as message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170, or message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) is displayed (see FIG. 168, FIG. 170, FIG. 172, etc.) or the first operation-related display is not displayed (see FIG. 176). In contrast, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes in response to an operation of the second operating means (operation button 410) while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state is always set to a time equal to or shorter than the specific time when the second operation-related display is not displayed (see FIG. 174, etc.), but may be set to a time longer than the specific time when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed (see FIG. 166, for example). With this configuration, the interval between post-acceptance changes when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is always set to a short time regardless of whether the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed. This makes it easier to recognize that the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, which is expected to maintain interest in the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is always short when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is not displayed, but may be longer than the specified time when the second operation-related display is displayed (for example, the second B acceptance permitted state). This makes it difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled, and is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means, the interval may be either a time less than a specific time (for example, the first B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 164) or a time longer than the specific time (for example, the second B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 166). With this configuration, while it may be difficult to recognize that the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled when the second operation-related display is displayed, it may also be easier to recognize, which is expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

In addition, the interval (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed is set to the interval (the interval until a new post-acceptance change appears) when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410) while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed in a second predetermined manner (message display MB1 shown in FIG. 164). By setting the time to a time longer than the time interval when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410) while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode (message display MB2 shown in FIG. 166) (the time interval until a change appears after a new request is received), the gap (the gap between the second specified mode and the second specific mode) as the interval when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed can be made to appear larger, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the seventeenth configuration B17 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, operations may be accepted for the operation button 410 even when the display image does not suggest that operations are permitted (operation-related displays are not displayed), and at this time, the so-called auto-repeated press function (long press function) may or may not be enabled. In contrast, operations may be accepted for the sword decoration 5001 even when the display image does not suggest that operations are permitted (operation-related displays are not displayed), and at this time, the so-called auto-repeated press function (long press function) may always be enabled. With this configuration, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 while the display is concealed, it is possible to enjoy the changes that occur after the acceptance with a sense of security, but when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 while the display is concealed, it is expected that a sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Also, for example, as the 18th configuration B18, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state, When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, an operation for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be accepted multiple times, and a first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an object for activating the so-called auto-repeated-hit function); a second post-acceptance change execution means is capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410); and a display that prompts an operation for the second operating means (operation button 410), and the display is and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called automatic rapid-fire function) in which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times, and even in a state in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called automatic rapid-fire function) is not displayed, an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times. When a command is received, a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed (see Figures 174 and 175). In this case, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation received for the second operating means may be executed multiple times. If a post-acceptance change in response to the operation received for the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change may be set to a fixed time (6B acceptance-permitted state). In other words, in this case, the interval between operations is set to a fixed time when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the auto-rapid-hit function is secretly enabled even when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 that is the target of the auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this case, even when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed.In this case, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means may be executed multiple times (see Figures 176 and 177).

In this regard, the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance of the first operating means (sword ornamentation 5001) while the first operating means (sword ornamentation 5001) is maintained in an operating state is not set to an indefinite time that is not a predetermined time, regardless of whether the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornamentation 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function, such as message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170, or message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) is displayed (see FIG. 168, FIG. 170, FIG. 172, etc.) or the first operation-related display is not displayed (see FIG. 176). The interval between the first and second operation means (operation button 410) is always a predetermined fixed time when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), but may be set to an indefinite time other than a predetermined time when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see FIG. 166, for example). With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated tap function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is always a fixed time (predetermined time) regardless of whether the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated tap function) is displayed. This makes it easier to recognize that the auto-repeated tap function is enabled, and is expected to maintain interest in the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated tap function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is always a fixed time when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated tap function) is not displayed, but may be an indefinite (non-predetermined) time when the second operation-related display is displayed (e.g., the second B acceptance state). This makes it harder to recognize that the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) is enabled, and is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means, the interval between these operations may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 164) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined) (for example, the second B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 166). With this configuration, while it may be difficult to recognize that the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled when the second operation-related display is displayed, it may also be easier to recognize, which is expected to provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Also, for example, as a 19th configuration B19, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by a player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), which can be attached multiple times; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); a display prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, can accept an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times; and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function, and when the first operation-related display (operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, there are cases where a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the first operation means is executed multiple times (for example, a period from timing tBg2-C1 to tBg2-C2 shown in FIG. 176), and cases where a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the first operation means is not executed multiple times (for example, a period from timing tBg2-C2 to tBg2-C3 shown in FIG. 176), and When the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the first operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the auto-repeated function is enabled is not displayed, there are cases where post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means are executed multiple times (for example, the period from timing tBa2-C1 to timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 164), and cases where post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means are not executed multiple times (for example, the period from timing tBa2-C2 to timing tBa3 shown in FIG. 164). This is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the first operation-related display or the second operation-related display is not displayed.

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is operated and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation received for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not initiated, if the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operated state (and while maintained, the conditions under which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted (conditions for the occurrence of an permitted state) are met), a situation may arise in which a post-acceptance change in response to the operation received for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (see, for example, timing tBg2-C3 in Figure 176, timing tBg4A in Figure 189, timing tBg4C in Figure 192, etc.). In contrast to this, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tap function) is not displayed and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means is not started to be executed, even if the second operation means continues to be maintained in an operated state, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means is subsequently executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state (see, for example, timing tBf2-C2 and thereafter in Figures 174, 188, and 191). With this configuration, with regard to the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), even if the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled when the first operation-related display is not displayed, the auto-rapid-hit function can be enabled if the operating state is continued, which is expected to maintain a favorable level of excitement when playing. On the other hand, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), if the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is not enabled when the second operation-related display is not displayed, even if the operating state is continued, there is no possibility of operations being accepted based on the detection of that operating state, which is expected to maintain a favorable sense of tension when realizing the dramatic effects of the auto-rapid-hit function.

The situation in which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) based on detection of the maintained operating state may be made to appear while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see Figures 189 and 190, etc.). The situation in which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) based on detection of the maintained operating state may be made to appear while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed (while the first operation-related display has not been displayed even once since the operating state was maintained) (see Figure 192, etc.).

Furthermore, among the configurations associated with each of the above-mentioned performance examples, in the examples shown in Figures 176 and 178, the same configuration as described above may be achieved even if the sword decoration 5001 is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state within the period from timing tBG2-C2 to tBG2-C3, and this operated state is continued after timing tBg-C3. Similarly, the same configuration as described above may be achieved even if the operation button 410 is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state within the period from timing tBf2-C2 onwards in Figures 174, 188, and 191, and this operated state is continued after timing tBf4A or tBf4B.

Also, for example, as the 20th configuration B20, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which an operation for the rank (the sword ornament 5001) can be accepted a plurality of times; a second operation-after-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operation means (the operation button 410); and a second operation means which is a display prompting an operation for the second operation means (the operation button 410), and in which an operation for the second operation means (the operation button 410) can be accepted a plurality of times when the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function), and even in a state in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change corresponding to this may be executed (see FIGS. 174 and 175). In this case, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance for the second operation means may be executed multiple times. If the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and the post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and the second operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, a post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed in response to the change to the non-operated state (see Figures 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.), so that the fact that the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state can be used to indicate that the auto-repeated function was enabled.

In this case, even when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed.In this case, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means may be executed multiple times (see Figures 176 and 177).

In this regard, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes have been made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, there is no case in which a post-operation display triggered by the change to the non-operating state is displayed. However, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes have been made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operating means, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a post-operation display triggered by the change to the non-operating state (post-operation display HB2) may be displayed (see Figures 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes have been made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), if the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, regardless of whether the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there is no case where a post-non-operating display triggered by the change to a non-operating state is displayed, and the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes have been made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means. Under certain circumstances, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, if the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, a post-non-operating display (post-non-operating display HB2) triggered by the change to the non-operating state may be displayed (see Figures 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.), but if the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed, it is possible to prevent the post-non-operating display triggered by the change to the non-operating state from being displayed (see Figure 174, etc.). With this configuration, when the operation state of the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is released while the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, it is difficult to recognize that the first operation means has become in a non-operated state (that the auto-rapid-hit function has become disabled), regardless of whether the first operation-related display (i.e., the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed. This is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled. In contrast, when the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) is released while the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, it is either difficult or easy to recognize that the second operation means has become in a non-operated state (that the auto-rapid-hit function has become disabled). This is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes have been executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410), if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, a post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) triggered by the change to the non-operating state may be displayed (see Figures 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.), or the post-non-operation display may not be displayed (see Figures 164(f), 179(f), etc.). However, it is also possible to prevent the post-non-operation display triggered by the change to the non-operating state from being displayed when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed (see Figure 174, etc.). With this configuration, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the auto-rapid function is enabled) is not displayed and the auto-rapid function for the second operation means (operation button 410) is enabled, and the second operation means is in a non-operated state (when the auto-rapid function is not enabled), the display is difficult to recognize. On the other hand, when the second operation-related display is displayed and the auto-rapid function for the second operation means is enabled, and the second operation means is in a non-operated state (when the auto-rapid function is not enabled), the display is sometimes difficult to recognize and sometimes easy to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension that is generated when the second operation-related display is displayed and the auto-rapid function is enabled will be appropriately maintained while maintaining interest in the game. Furthermore, since a sense of tension is inherently present when the second operation-related display is not displayed and the auto-rapid function is enabled, it is expected that the display will provide an appropriate sense of tension and maintain interest in the game.

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 20th configuration B20 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled) is not displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated but a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance for the second operation means is not initiated, the operation state for the second operation means may be maintained until a "state in which operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted" occurs, and even if the state is released when this occurs (for example, in the second B acceptance-permitted state shown in FIG. 179, the second operation means that was in an operation state prior to that is set to a non-operation state), it may be configured so that a post-non-operation display triggered by the non-operation state is not displayed.

Also, for example, as the 21st configuration B21, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the first operating means ( a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornamentation 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), which allows for a plurality of operation acceptances for the sword ornamentation 5001; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display which is a display that prompts an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410), and which allows for a plurality of operation acceptances for the second operation means (operation button 410) if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function), and even in a state in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change corresponding to this may be executed (see FIGS. 174 and 175). In this case, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance for the second operation means may be executed multiple times, When the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and the post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) has been executed multiple times, if the second operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the change to the non-operated state will trigger at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the second B post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in FIG. 166 (h) and FIG. 180 (h)) to become inaudible. Therefore, the change of the second operating means from an operated state to a non-operated state can be used as a trigger to indicate that the auto-repeated function was enabled.

In this case, even when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed.In this case, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means may be executed multiple times (see Figures 176 and 177).

In this regard, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes have been made multiple times in response to the acceptance of operations on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), if the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, regardless of whether the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, the sound effect that was audible at that time will not be made inaudible in response to the change to the non-operating state (see Figures 168 to 173, 176 to 178, etc.), and when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes have been made multiple times in response to the acceptance of operations on the second operating means, When the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function) is displayed, the change to the non-operating state can be used as a trigger to make inaudible at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time (the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166 (h) and Figure 180 (h)), but when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function) is not displayed, it is possible not to use the change to the non-operating state as a trigger to make inaudible the sound effects that were audible at that time (see Figure 174, etc.). With this configuration, when the operation state of the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is released while the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, it is difficult to recognize that the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) has become in a non-operated state (that the auto-rapid-hit function has become disabled), regardless of whether the first operation-related display (i.e., the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed. This is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled. In contrast, when the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) is released while the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled, it is either difficult or easy to recognize that the second operation means has become in a non-operated state (that the auto-rapid-hit function has become disabled). This is expected to provide a favorable sense of tension when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes have been made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410), if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function) is displayed, the change to the non-operating state may trigger at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time to be made inaudible (see Figures 166(h) and 180(h) etc.), or the sound effects that were audible at that time may not be made inaudible (see Figures 164(h) and 179(h) etc.). However, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function) is not displayed, the change to the non-operating state may not trigger the sound effects that were audible at that time to be made inaudible (see Figure 174 etc.). With this configuration, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the auto-rapid function is enabled) is not displayed and the auto-rapid function for the second operation means (operation button 410) is enabled, and the second operation means is in a non-operated state (when the auto-rapid function is not enabled), the display is difficult to recognize. On the other hand, when the second operation-related display is displayed and the auto-rapid function for the second operation means is enabled, and the second operation means is in a non-operated state (when the auto-rapid function is not enabled), the display is sometimes difficult to recognize and sometimes easy to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension that is generated when the second operation-related display is displayed and the auto-rapid function is enabled will be appropriately maintained while maintaining interest in the game. Furthermore, since a sense of tension is inherently present when the second operation-related display is not displayed and the auto-rapid function is enabled, it is expected that the display will provide an appropriate sense of tension and maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 21st configuration B21 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if "when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to an inoperated state, at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time is made inaudible," the performance sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the changes after acceptance, and may be, for example, another performance sound such as background music, or it may be all performance sounds that are in an audible state at that time.

Also, for example, as the 22nd configuration B22, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an object for activating the so-called auto-repeated-function), which allows for a plurality of operation acceptances for the second operation means (the operation button 410); a second operation-related change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (the operation button 410); and a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an object for activating the so-called auto-repeated-function), which is a display that prompts an operation for the second operation means (the operation button 410), and which allows for a plurality of operation acceptances for the second operation means (the operation button 410) when the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function, and even in a state in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed (see Figs. 174 and 175). In this case, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means may be executed multiple times, and the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) may be displayed. When the second operating means (operation button 410) is switched to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation accepted on the second operating means (operation button 410) while the operation-related display related to 410 is not displayed, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is then switched from the non-operated state back to the operated state, this will trigger at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 shown in FIG. 174 (h)) to be made inaudible, so that when the second operating means (operation button 410) is switched back to the operated state, it will be possible to indicate that the auto-repeated function has been re-enabled.

In this case, even when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed.In this case, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means may be executed multiple times (see Figures 176 and 177).

In this regard, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed, if a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation received on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001), and the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is then changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, this will prevent the sound effects that were audible at that time from being made inaudible (see Figures 176 to 178, etc.), and the second operation-related display (the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) will not be displayed. When the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the function is not displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410), if the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed to a non-operated state and then changed from the non-operated state to an operated state again, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 shown in Figure 174 (h)) inaudible (see timing tBf2-C1 in Figure 174, etc.). With this configuration, when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) is interrupted and the second operating means is operated again when the second operating means is not displayed and the second operating means is then operated again, it is easier to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted. However, when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is interrupted and the first operating means is operated again when the first operating means is not displayed and the first operating means is then operated again, it is more difficult to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted. This is expected to create a favorable sense of tension when interrupting and resuming the auto-repeated function (long press function).

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled) is not displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation received on the second operation means (operation button 410), and the second operation means is then switched from the non-operation state to the operation state again, only if a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is audible at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time inaudible. In this case, instead of the post-acceptance output sound, a different sound may be made inaudible.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is then switched from the non-operation state to the operation state again, even if the post-acceptance output sound as one of the post-acceptance changes is in an audible state at that time, this may trigger a change to an inaudible state for at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h)) (the first B acceptance-permitted state shown in FIG. 164), or a change to an inaudible state for the effect sound that was in an audible state at that time (the first B acceptance-permitted state shown in FIG. 164). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-operation function is enabled) is not displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), if the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state again (when an operation is accepted), and a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is audible at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (post-acceptance output sound) inaudible (the 6B acceptance-related display shown in FIG. 174).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is set to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and then the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again (when an operation is accepted), it may be possible to prevent this from triggering the inaudible sound effect that was audible at that time to be made inaudible, regardless of whether or not the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is being displayed.

Furthermore, when a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation received on the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operating means is then switched from the non-operated state to an operated state again, if this triggers at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time to become inaudible, a new sound will be output in response to the switch to the operated state. However, even if the sound effects that were audible at that time are not turned inaudible, a new sound may be output in response to the switch to the operated state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 22nd configuration B22 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if "when the operation button 410 is operated again, at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible," the performance sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the post-acceptance changes; for example, it may be another performance sound such as background music, or it may be all performance sounds that are audible at that time.

Also, for example, as the 23rd configuration B23, there may be provided a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, an effect display means (effect display device 1600) that displays effects, a determination means that makes a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the determination by the determination means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and that, when the display is in a displayed state, causes the first operating means ( a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which an operation to the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) can be accepted multiple times when the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state; a second operation-related change execution means for executing an operation-related change after acceptance when an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410) is accepted; and a display for prompting an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), in which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a second operation-related change execution means for executing an operation-related display relating to the second operation means (operation button 410) in which an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state. 176). The second operation-related display means is capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), and when an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornamentation 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, this triggers a change after acceptance, which can be a display change in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) or a change different from the display change (see FIG. 176). When an operation (predetermined operation) is performed on the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled) is not displayed, the post-acceptance change triggered by this can be either a display change in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) or a change different from the display change (see FIG. 174). Therefore, whether an operation is performed on the first operation means or the second operation means while the operation-related display is not displayed, it can be suitably indicated that the operation has been properly accepted.

In this case, even when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed. In this case, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, operations for the first operating means may be accepted multiple times (see FIG. 176). In this case, even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operating button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, operations for the second operating means may be accepted multiple times (see FIG. 174).

Furthermore, when an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is not displayed (when the non-operation state is changed to an operation state), the post-acceptance changes according to the detection information obtained at that time may include both a display change in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) and a change different from the display change (see FIG. 176), or a case where no display change occurs in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) and only a change different from the display change (see FIG. 178). With this configuration, it can be expected that the sense of tension when an operation is accepted on the first operating means while the first operation-related display is not displayed can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, when an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-acceptance change in response to the detection information obtained at that time (see Figure 176).In this case, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the above-mentioned "change different from the display change" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation reception on the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may be executed multiple times, whereas the above-mentioned "change different from the display change" as one of the post-acceptance changes may only be executed multiple times. The "display change in the effect display means (effect display device 1600)" is not executed multiple times (see FIG. 176). When an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the auto-rapid-hit function is activated) is not displayed, both a display change in the effect display means (effect display device 1600) and a change different from the display change may occur as post-acceptance changes (see FIG. 174). In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, both the "display change in the effect display means" and the "change different from the display change" may be executed multiple times as post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance for the second operation means. This configuration results in different effects when the auto-rapid-hit function is activated for the first operation means and the second operation means, which is expected to maintain a favorable level of excitement and tension when the auto-rapid-hit function is activated for the first operation means.

In addition, even if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state and the "display change in the performance display means" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation to the first operation means is not executed multiple times, it is desirable to make it possible for a "change different from the display change (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7)" to be executed multiple times in the same manner as that which appears when the "display change in the performance display means" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation to the first operation means occurs (see FIG. 176 (h)).

Furthermore, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled) is not displayed, it is desirable to prevent only one of the above-mentioned "display change in the performance display means (post-acceptance display HB6)" as one of the above-mentioned post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance on the second operation means and "a change different from the display change (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6)" from being executed multiple times (see Figures 174 (f) and (h)).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if the operation (specific operation) of the sword decoration 5001 is not accepted and the corresponding post-acceptance change is not initiated when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in the operated state (if specific conditions are met while the operation is maintained), a situation may arise in which the post-acceptance change is executed multiple times based on the detection (acceptance) of the operation (specific operation) on the sword decoration 5001 based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point.

However, in this case, when a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to an operation received on the sword decorative body 5001 based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained up to that point, it is possible to prevent a display change on the performance display device 1600 from occurring (even once) as the post-acceptance change, and to execute multiple changes different from the display change. In this configuration, even if an operation (specific operation) on the sword decorative body 5001 is not accepted and the corresponding post-acceptance change is not initiated, the post-acceptance change will appear simply by maintaining the sword decorative body 5001 in the operated state, but the trade-off is that a display change on the performance display device 1600 will no longer appear as the post-acceptance change, which is expected to maintain a favorable sense of tension. However, even in this case, when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is in a non-operating state and a new operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) while the first operation-related display is not displayed, it is desirable that the post-acceptance change be performed in either the manner shown in FIG. 176 or the manner shown in FIG. 178.

Also, for example, as the 24th configuration B24, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the determination by the determination means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (a sword decoration as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and that can receive operations on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. a first prompt light emitting means capable of performing operation prompt light emitting (for example, 4B operation prompt light LB4 shown in FIG. 170) prompting an operation on the first operating means (sword ornamentation 5001) separately from the first operation related display which is an image display prompting an operation on the first operating means (sword ornamentation 5001); a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of performing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means (operation button 410); a second operating means which is a display prompting an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and which allows an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) to be accepted multiple times if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function); a second prompt light emitting means capable of executing operation prompt light (for example, a first B operation prompt light LB1 shown in FIG. 164 or a second B operation prompt light LB2 shown in FIG. 166) for activating the second operation means (operation button 410) separately from the second operation-related display which is an image display for activating the second operation means (operation button 410); and a case where, even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted, a corresponding post-acceptance change is executed (for example, a second B operation prompt light LB2 shown in FIG. 166). In this case, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can be executed multiple times. When the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed and multiple acceptance of operations for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted, the operation prompting light emission prompting operation of the first operating means is not executed (see FIG. 176 (j)). Therefore, it can be expected that confidentiality regarding operation acceptance will be appropriately maintained when the first operation-related display is not displayed and multiple acceptance of operations for the first operating means is permitted.

In this case, even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed (for example, the 6B acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 174).In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, post-acceptance changes may be executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means, and when the second operation-related display is not displayed and multiple acceptance of operations for the second operation means is allowed, an operation-prompting light (for example, the 6B operation-prompting light LB6) may be executed to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (see Figure 174 (j)). With this configuration, when multiple opportunities to operate the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) are secretly granted, the first operation-related display is not displayed and the operation prompt light to prompt operation of the first operating means is not activated, whereas when multiple opportunities to operate the second operating means are secretly granted, the second operation-related display is not displayed, but the operation prompt light to prompt operation of the second operating means can be activated. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operating means, which can be expected to add a sense of tension while improving the presentation.

In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), operation prompting light can be emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (between the time when the first operation-related display is displayed and the time when it is hidden) (for example, the 4B acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 170), and when multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (between the time when the first operation-related display is displayed and the time when it is hidden), operation prompting light can be emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (between the time when the first operation-related display is displayed and the time when it is hidden). It is also possible to configure the system so that there are both cases where prompt illumination is enabled and cases where prompt illumination is not enabled (for example, the 3B acceptance state shown in FIG. 168 and the 5B acceptance state shown in FIG. 172), and cases where the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means, and operation prompt illumination that prompts operation of the second operation means (between the time the second operation-related display is displayed and the time it is hidden) is always enabled (for example, the 1B acceptance state shown in FIG. 164 and the 2B acceptance state shown in FIG. 166). With this configuration, even when the operation-related display is displayed in a state where multiple operations are permitted for the operation means, operation prompt illumination may or may not be enabled for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), which can provide a degree of secrecy. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to add tension while improving the presentation.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 24th configuration B24 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the sword decorative body 5001, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" (message display MB3, message display MB4, etc.) may be different between when operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 and when operation-prompting light is not emitted to prompt an operation on the sword decorative body 5001.

However, even if the form of the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" (e.g., message display MB3, message display MB4) or whether or not operation prompt illumination is activated is different, the changes that occur after an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 24th configuration B24 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tap function" is not displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the operation button 410, operation prompting light emission to prompt the operation of the operation button 410 may not be executed, or it may be configured so that there are both cases where operation prompting light emission to prompt the operation of the operation button 410 is executed and cases where operation prompting light emission is not executed.

Also, for example, as the 25th configuration B25, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and the display is in a display state a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which, when the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state while in the operating state, operations for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) can be accepted multiple times; and a first operation prompt sound (for example, a third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or a fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed. a second post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display (for the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated-hit function) which is a display for prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) and which allows an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) to be accepted multiple times if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and a second prompting sound output means capable of outputting a second operation prompting sound (for example, a first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or a second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, and even in a state where the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is not displayed, the operation prompting sound for the first operating means (the sword ornament 5001) can be output. When an operation is accepted, a post-acceptance change may be executed in response thereto (such as the 7B acceptance state shown in FIG. 176 ). In this case, when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may be executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) (see FIG. 176 ). Even when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-function) is not displayed, when an operation for the second operating means (operation button 410) is accepted, a post-acceptance change may be executed in response thereto. In this case, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may be executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operating means operation button 410 (see FIG. 174 ). From a state in which the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-function) is not displayed and acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is not permitted, When the state transitions to a state in which acceptance of operations for the first operating means (sword ornamentation 5001) is permitted without the first operation-related display being displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not output (see FIG. 176(g)). Furthermore, when the state transitions from a state in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed and acceptance of operations for the second operating means (operation button 410) is not permitted to a state in which acceptance of operations for the second operating means (operation button 410) is permitted without the second operation-related display being displayed, the second operation prompt sound is not output (see FIG. 174(g)). Therefore, it can be expected that confidentiality regarding acceptance of operations can be suitably maintained in a "state in which the first operation-related display is not displayed and acceptance of operations for the first operating means multiple times (7B acceptance state shown in FIG. 176)" or a "state in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and acceptance of operations for the second operating means multiple times (6B acceptance state shown in FIG. 174)."

In this case, when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed while operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, or when operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, the second operation prompt sound (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) is always output, but when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed, there may be both cases where the first operation prompt sound is output (see Figure 168 (g) or Figure 170 (g)) and cases where the first operation prompt sound is not output (see Figure 172 (g), etc.). With this configuration, even when an operation-related display is displayed in a state where multiple operations are permitted for an operation means, the first operation prompt sound may be output or the operation prompt light may not be output for the first operation means, which provides a degree of secrecy. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to add tension and improve the presentation.

In this case, it is particularly desirable that the appearance of the first operation-related display (message display MB3, message display MB4, message display MB5, etc.) differ between when the first operation prompt sound is output when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is activated) is displayed (see Figure 168(g) and Figure 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see Figure 172(g), etc.).

However, even if the form of the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" (Message Display MB3, Message Display MB4, Message Display MB5, etc.) and whether or not an operation-related output sound is executed are different, the changes that occur after an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 may be the same.

Also, for example, as the 26th configuration B26, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, an effect display means (effect display device 1600) that displays effects, a judgment means that makes a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the first operating a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornamentation 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), which allows for a plurality of operation receptions for the means (sword ornamentation 5001); a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display prompting an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410), which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, allows for a plurality of operation receptions for the second operation means (operation button 410). When an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), both a display change (for example, post-acceptance display HB7) and a change different from the display change (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7, etc.) can occur in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) as a post-acceptance change triggered by this (see FIG. 176 ), and when an operation (predetermined operation) is performed on the second operation means (operation button 410), both a display change (for example, post-acceptance displays HB1, HB2, HB6, etc.) and a change different from the display change (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7, etc.) can occur in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) as a post-acceptance change triggered by this (see FIG. 176 ). It is possible to generate both post-acceptance output sounds Sα1, Sα2, Sα6, etc. (see Figures 164, 166, 174, etc.), and if, despite operating the second operating means (operation button 410) (predetermined operation), a post-acceptance change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operated state (state in which the predetermined operation is continued), operation of the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be accepted based on the detection of this maintained operating state. Therefore, if, despite operating the second operating means, no post-acceptance change corresponding to operation acceptance of the second operating means occurs, it is expected that the operating state will not be maintained and the user will be prompted to operate the second operating means again.

In this case, even if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is operated (specific operation) and the post-acceptance change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated (when the first operating means is put into an operating state when operation acceptance for the first operating means is not permitted), if a specified acceptance acceptance condition is met while the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operated state (when a state is reached in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted), an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted based on the detection of the maintained operating state, but at this time, it is possible to prevent a display change in the performance display device 1600 from occurring (even once) as a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance, and to have only changes different from the display change executed multiple times. With this configuration, even if the operation (specific operation) of the sword decoration 5001 is not accepted and the corresponding post-acceptance change is not initiated, the post-acceptance change will appear simply by maintaining the sword decoration 5001 in an operated state. However, as a trade-off, the display change on the performance display device 1600 will not appear as the post-acceptance change, which is expected to maintain a favorable sense of tension. However, even in this case, when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is in a non-operated state and a new operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) while the first operation-related display is not displayed, it is desirable to have both the post-acceptance change be executed in the manner shown in FIG. 176 and the post-acceptance change be executed in the manner shown in FIG. 178.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 26th configuration B26 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is operated (a specific operation) and the post-acceptance change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated (when the sword decorative body 5001 is put into an operating state when operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted), if a specified acceptance acceptance condition is met while the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operated state (when a state is reached where operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted), an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted based on the detection of the maintained operation state.At this time, as the post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance, there may be either a case where both a display change in the performance display device 1600 and a change different from the display change occur (see Figure 192), or a case where no display change occurs in the performance display device 1600 and only a change different from the display change occurs (see Figure 193). With this configuration, based on the "operation state of the sword decorative body 5001" that has been maintained since the state in which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted, there are both cases in which it is easy and difficult to recognize that an operation has been accepted for the sword decorative body 5001, which is expected to increase the enjoyment of the game while maintaining an appropriate sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 26th configuration B26 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if an operation (specific operation) on the sword decorative body 5001 results in both a display change on the performance display device 1600 and a change different from the display change occurring as the post-acceptance change, and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state even after that operation (specific operation) on the sword decorative body 5001 is detected multiple times and accepted multiple times. However, in this case, the post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may not result in multiple display changes on the performance display device 1600, and only a change different from the display change may occur multiple times (see, for example, Figures 176 (f) and (h)). With this configuration, while it is initially easy to recognize that an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 has been accepted, it is difficult to recognize that multiple operations on the sword decorative body 5001 have been accepted when the auto-repeated tapping function is subsequently enabled, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

However, when an operation (predetermined operation) is performed on the operation button 410, both a display change and a change different from the display change may occur in the performance display device 1600 as a corresponding post-acceptance change (see, for example, Figures 164, 166, 174, etc.). In this case, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state and an operation is accepted multiple times for the operation button 410, it is desirable to ensure that both a display change and a change different from the display change always occur multiple times in the performance display means as a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance.

Also, for example, as the 27th configuration B27, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, an effect display means (effect display device 1600) that displays effects, a judgment means that makes a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the first operating a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornamentation 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), which allows for a plurality of operation receptions for the means (sword ornamentation 5001); a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display prompting an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410), which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, allows for a plurality of operation receptions for the second operation means (operation button 410). When an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), both a display change (for example, post-acceptance display HB7) and a change different from the display change (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7, etc.) can occur in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) as a post-acceptance change triggered by this (see FIG. 176 ), and when an operation (predetermined operation) is performed on the second operation means (operation button 410), both a display change (for example, post-acceptance displays HB1, HB2, HB6, etc.) and a change different from the display change (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7, etc.) can occur in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) as a post-acceptance change triggered by this (see FIG. 176 ). 164, 166, 174, etc.), and in the case where, despite the operation (predetermined operation) of the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not started to be executed, even if the second operation means is maintained in an operated state (state in which the predetermined operation is continued), operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not performed based on the detection of the maintained operation state. Therefore, when, despite the operation of the second operation means, no post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance for the second operation means appears, it can be expected that the operation state will not be maintained and the user will be prompted to operate it again. Even when neither the first operation-related display (operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) nor the second operation-related display (operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is displayed, when an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), the operation may be accepted based on the detection information (see Figures 176 to 178, etc.). In this case, the post-acceptance change may include both a display change (post-acceptance display HB7) in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) and a change different from the display change (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7). However, even if an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) is started at the time the post-acceptance change occurs and that operation state is maintained, it is possible to prevent the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance on the second operation means from being executed multiple times (the so-called auto-rapid tapping function from being activated). In other words, in this case, it is expected that this will encourage the viewer to focus on the post-acceptance changes that occur in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001).

Furthermore, in order to realize the configuration according to the 27th configuration B27 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 when neither the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" nor the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (the 7B acceptance-permitted state shown in FIG. 176), both a display change (post-acceptance display HB7) and a change different from the display change (specific change) occur in the performance display device 1600 as a post-acceptance change ( See FIG. 176), or there are cases where only the "change different from the display change (specific change)" occurs out of the display change in the performance display device 1600 and a change different from the display change (a specific change, for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) (see FIG. 178). In either case, when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, out of the display change in the performance display device 1600 and a change different from the display change (specific change), only the "change different from the display change (specific change)" may be executed multiple times as a post-acceptance change (see FIGS. 176 and 178).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 27th configuration B27 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when both a display change in the performance display device 1600 and a change different from the display change (a specific change) occur as post-acceptance changes in response to the reception of an operation on the sword ornamental body 5001, even if an operation on the operation button 410 is started at that time and the operation state is maintained, the post-acceptance changes in response to the reception of an operation on the operation button 410 will not be executed multiple times. However, when only a specific change occurs as post-acceptance changes in response to the reception of an operation on the sword ornamental body 5001, when an operation on the operation button 410 is started at that time and the operation state is maintained, the post-acceptance changes in response to the reception of an operation on the operation button 410 will be executed multiple times, or the post-acceptance changes in response to the reception of an operation on the operation button 410 will not be executed multiple times. With this configuration, whether or not the auto-repeated tapping function can be enabled for the operation button 410 can be suggested by the mode of change after receiving an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (whether or not both a display change on the performance display device 1600 and a change different from that display change (a specific change) occur), but once the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the sword decoration 5001, no new "display changes on the performance display device 1600" will occur, making them difficult to distinguish, and so it can be expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 27th configuration B27 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if the sword decoration 5001 is operated (a specific operation) and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated, if a specified acceptance acceptance condition is met while the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operated state (when a state in which acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is permitted) an operation for the sword decoration 5001 will be accepted based on the detection of the maintained operation state, but at this time, it is possible to prevent a display change in the performance display device 1600 from occurring (even once) as a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance, and to have only changes different from the display change executed multiple times. With this configuration, even if the operation (specific operation) of the sword decoration 5001 is not accepted and the corresponding post-acceptance change is not initiated, the post-acceptance change will appear simply by maintaining the sword decoration 5001 in an operated state. However, as a trade-off, the display change on the performance display device 1600 will not appear as the post-acceptance change, which is expected to maintain a favorable sense of tension. However, even in this case, when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is in a non-operated state and a new operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) while the first operation-related display is not displayed, it is desirable to have both the post-acceptance change be executed in the manner shown in FIG. 176 and the post-acceptance change be executed in the manner shown in FIG. 178.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 27th configuration B27 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state and the corresponding post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times, it is possible to have both a state in which the sword decorative body 5001 is allowed to accept operations multiple times and a state in which the sword decorative body 5001 is not allowed to accept operations multiple times.

Also, for example, as the 28th configuration B28, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the determination by the determination means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an object for activating the so-called auto-repeated-function), in which an operation for the second operation means (the operation button 410) can be accepted a plurality of times; a second operation-related change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operation means (the operation button 410); and a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an object for activating the so-called auto-repeated-function), in which an operation for the second operation means (the operation button 410) can be accepted a plurality of times when the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function. When the second operation-related display (the operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then, even though the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at timing tBa2 shown in FIG. 164 ), -C2 and timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 166, etc.) are designed so that even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state, a situation will not occur again in which an operation is accepted multiple times for the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of that operating state (see, for example, FIGS. 164 and 166), and in the case where a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to an operation acceptance for the second operating means while the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a specific time or less (1B acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 164, etc.). In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance can be set to a relatively short interval, so that if a situation arises where an operation to the second operating means (operation button 410) is not being accepted, this can be easily recognized relatively early, and it can be expected that this will prompt the user to cancel the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, during the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and then a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168), However, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) continues to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained and a state is reached in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted), a situation in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is performed multiple times based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed (for example, timing tBc2-C3 shown in FIG. 168).

In this case, particularly, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is displayed, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times. In this case, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes (the interval between post-acceptance changes in the auto-repeated tapping function) is set to a time that is equal to or shorter than a specific time (for example, the 3B acceptance acceptance state to the 5B acceptance acceptance state shown in Figures 168 to 173, etc.), and the second operation-related display (the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is set to a time that is shorter than a specific time (for example, the 3B acceptance acceptance state to the 5B acceptance acceptance state shown in Figures 168 to 173, etc.). If the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state during a period in which an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the auto rapid-press function is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times; in this case, the interval between multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between post-acceptance changes in the auto rapid-press function) may be set to either a time equal to or shorter than a specific time (for example, the first B acceptance state shown in FIG. 164) or a time longer than the specific time (for example, the second B acceptance state shown in FIG. 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-hits function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), the interval at which changes occur after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval, making it possible to easily recognize relatively early on when the auto-rapid-hits function has been disabled.In addition, simply by maintaining the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) in an operating state, a situation can arise again in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hits function) is displayed.This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of playing when the auto-rapid-hits function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be either a relatively short interval or a relatively long interval, and when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is not necessarily recognized relatively early. In addition, simply maintaining the second operating means (operation button 410) in an operating state will prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) before the end of the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed. This is expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 28th configuration B28 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met (for example, timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168) and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, in a state where "operation-related display related to operation button 410 as a target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 164) and acceptance of operations for operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while "operation-related display related to operation button 410 as a target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 28th configuration B28 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is also possible to ensure that when the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the sword decoration 5001 based on the detection of that operating state does not reoccur after the period in which the "operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 28th configuration B28 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is continuously maintained in an operation state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the operation button 410 based on the detection of that operation state may occur again after the period in which the "operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state during the period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called automatic rapid-fire function" is displayed in "Message Display MB1," the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may be set to a time not longer than a specific time, but always shorter than a specific time.

Furthermore, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called automatic rapid-fire function" is displayed in "Message Display MB2," the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may be set to either a time longer than a specific time or a time shorter than a specific time due to the indeterminacy described above.

Furthermore, while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative element 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decorative element 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the sword decorative element 5001 are accepted multiple times. However, there may be cases in which a predetermined condition is met (e.g., timing tBc2-C2 shown in FIG. 168) under which this situation ends before the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative element 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function (e.g., message display MB3)" becomes hidden, and cases in which the predetermined condition is not met. In other words, when the predetermined condition is not met before the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative element 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden, this means that the state in which operations for the sword decorative element 5001 are accepted ends after the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative element 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden. In contrast, while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state, a situation may arise in which operations for the operation button 410 are accepted multiple times. However, it is also possible to ensure that the conditions for ending this situation are met before the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 164 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 166).

Also, for example, as a 29th configuration B29, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination by the determination means, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an object for activating the so-called auto-repeated-function), in which an operation for the second operation means (the operation button 410) can be accepted a plurality of times; a second operation-related change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operation means (the operation button 410); and a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an object for activating the so-called auto-repeated-function), in which an operation for the second operation means (the operation button 410) can be accepted a plurality of times when the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function. When the second operation-related display (the operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then, even though the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at timing tBa2 shown in FIG. 164 ), -C2 and timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 166, etc.) are designed so that even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state, a situation will not occur again in which an operation is accepted multiple times for the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of that operating state (see, for example, FIGS. 164 and 166), and in the case where a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to an operation acceptance for the second operating means while the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a specific time or less (1B acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 164, etc.). That is, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated pressing function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the intervals at which post-acceptance changes occur can be set to relatively short intervals, so that when a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410), this situation can be easily recognized relatively early, and it can be expected that the user will be prompted to cancel the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated pressing function) is displayed, after a situation arises in which the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operating means (operation button 410), if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 164), the second operating Even if the operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of that operation state will not occur again (see, for example, FIG. 164). Furthermore, if a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a fixed time (predetermined time) (the 1B acceptance-permitted state shown in FIG. 164, etc.). In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated function for the second operation means is enabled, the interval between post-acceptance changes can be set to a relatively fixed interval (predetermined time). This can be expected to make it easier to recognize a situation in which operations for the second operation means are not accepted relatively early, and to encourage the user to cancel the operation state of the second operation means.

In this case, during the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and then a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168), However, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) continues to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained and a state is reached in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted), a situation in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is performed multiple times based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed (for example, timing tBc2-C3 shown in FIG. 168).

In this case, particularly, when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times. In this case, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between the post-acceptance change in the auto-repeated tapping function) is set to a certain time (a predetermined time) (for example, the 3B acceptance allowance state to the 5B acceptance allowance state shown in Figures 168 to 173, etc.), and the second operation-related display (the so-called auto-repeated tapping If the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state during a period in which an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling a function is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times; in this case, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between post-acceptance changes in the auto-repeated function) may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B acceptance state shown in FIG. 164) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined) (for example, the second B acceptance state shown in FIG. 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). This makes it possible to easily recognize relatively early on when the auto-rapid-hit function has been disabled. In addition, simply by maintaining the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) in an operating state, a situation can arise again in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed. This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of playing when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be set to either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined), and when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is not necessarily recognized relatively early. In addition, simply maintaining the second operating means (operation button 410) in an operating state will prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) before the end of the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed. This is expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 29th configuration B29 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operation state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met (for example, timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168) and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, in a state where "operation-related display related to operation button 410 as a target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 164) and acceptance of operations for operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while "operation-related display related to operation button 410 as a target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 29th configuration B29 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is also possible to ensure that when the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the sword decoration 5001 based on the detection of that operating state does not reoccur after the period in which the "operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 29th configuration B29 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is continuously maintained in an operation state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the operation button 410 based on the detection of that operation state may occur again after the period in which the "operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tap function" is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state during the period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called automatic rapid-fire function" is displayed in the "Message Display MB1," the interval between multiple operations for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

Furthermore, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state during the period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called automatic rapid-fire function" is displayed in "Message Display MB2," the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may be set to an indefinite period (a period not determined in advance).

Furthermore, while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative element 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decorative element 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the sword decorative element 5001 are accepted multiple times. However, there may be cases in which a predetermined condition is met (e.g., timing tBc2-C2 shown in FIG. 168) under which this situation ends before the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative element 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function (e.g., message display MB3)" becomes hidden, and cases in which the predetermined condition is not met. In other words, when the predetermined condition is not met before the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative element 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden, this means that the state in which operations for the sword decorative element 5001 are accepted ends after the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative element 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden. In contrast, while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state, a situation may arise in which operations for the operation button 410 are accepted multiple times. However, it is also possible to ensure that the conditions for ending this situation are met before the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 164 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 166).

Furthermore, for example, as the 30th configuration B30, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), which can be performed multiple times; a second operation-after-acceptance change execution means capable of performing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and which can receive an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a display related to the second operation means (operation button 410) when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, and after a situation appears in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, if a situation appears in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 164 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 166), Even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operated state, a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of that operating state will not occur again (see, for example, FIGS. 164 and 166). When the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-acceptance changes are made in response to accepted operations for the second operating means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-operation display (post-operation display HB2) is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 166(f), 167, 180(f)). In other words, in this case, it is easy to recognize that the second operating means has been released from its operated state, which is expected to maintain gameplay interest after a situation occurs in which no operations are accepted for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operated state.

In addition, while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). However, this situation may be terminated without the first operation-related display being made invisible when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state during this situation, or when a predetermined termination condition is met while the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if a situation arises in which the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) even though the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168), if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) continues to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means is maintained and a state is reached in which acceptance of an operation for the first operating means is permitted), a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operation state may reappear before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed (for example, timing tBc2-C3 shown in Figure 168).

In this case, in particular, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-operation display (post-operation display HB2) may be displayed when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operating means (operation button 410). With this configuration, simply maintaining the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) in an operating state can result in a situation where multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) before the end of the period during which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed. However, this is difficult to notice when the operating state of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is released, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, simply maintaining the second operating means (operation button 410) in an operating state can prevent a situation where multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means before the end of the period during which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed. However, this is easy to notice when the operating state of the second operating means is released, which encourages re-operation. This is expected to maintain a sense of tension while increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance of the second operating means (operation button 410), when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 166), or the post-non-operation display may not be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 164). With this configuration, it is not necessarily easy to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released, which can be expected to provide a favorable sense of tension.

In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not hidden but remains displayed (see, for example, timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc2-C4 shown in Figure 168). Furthermore, while the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means are executed multiple times; however, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the second operating means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 30th configuration B30 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is also possible to ensure that when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reoccur after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 30th configuration B30 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 30th configuration B30 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, a situation may arise in which operations are accepted multiple times for the sword decoration 5001; however, it is also possible to have both a case in which a predetermined condition is met for ending this situation before the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden (see, for example, timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc2-C4 shown in Figure 168), and a case in which the predetermined condition is not met. In this case, for example, if the above-mentioned "when specified conditions are not met" is applied to the example shown in FIG. 168, the third B acceptance state in the figure may continue to allow acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 even at timings tBc2-C2 and tBc2-C4. In other words, the state in which acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is allowed may end after timing tBc2-C2 arrives, when "operation-related displays related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function," such as message display MB3, are hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 30th configuration B30 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, a situation may arise in which operations are accepted for the operation button 410 multiple times; however, it is possible to ensure that the condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, when the configuration according to each of the above-mentioned performance examples is realized, it goes without saying that if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the operation button 410 despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operation state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, the corresponding post-non-operation display will not be displayed.

Furthermore, for example, as the 31st configuration B31, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, if an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is made multiple times, a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function); a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and which allows an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) to be accepted multiple times if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. 164 and 166), when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, if a situation appears in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then a situation appears in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) even though the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (for example, at timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 164 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 166), ) is maintained in an operated state, a situation in which operations for the second operation means (operation button 410) are accepted multiple times based on the detection of that operation state will not occur again (see, for example, FIGS. 164 and 166 ). When the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), this is used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (such as the secondB post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in FIG. 166(h)) inaudible. In other words, in this case, it is easy to recognize that the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) has been released, and it can be expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a favorable manner after a situation occurs in which operations for the second operation means (operation button 410) are not accepted despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state.

In this case, if, during the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is executed multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168), if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) continues to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means is maintained and a state in which acceptance of an operation for the first operating means is permitted), a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed (for example, timing tBc2-C3 shown in Figure 168).

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001), and the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, there is no case where the sound effects that were audible at that time are made inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, etc.), whereas when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may be used as an opportunity to make inaudible at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time (such as the secondB post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166 (h)) (see Figures 166, 167, etc.). With this configuration, simply maintaining the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) in an operating state can result in a situation where multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) before the end of the period during which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed. However, this is difficult to notice when the operating state of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is released, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, simply maintaining the second operating means (operation button 410) in an operating state can prevent a situation where multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means before the end of the period during which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed. However, this is easy to notice when the operating state of the second operating means is released, which encourages re-operation. This is expected to maintain a sense of tension while increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are being executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance of the second operating means, this may trigger either one of the sound effects that was audible at that time to be made inaudible (see, for example, FIG. 166), or one of the sound effects that was audible at that time to not be made inaudible (see, for example, FIG. 164). With this configuration, it is not necessarily easy to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released, which can be expected to provide a good sense of tension.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 31st configuration B31 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not hidden but remains displayed (see, for example, timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc2-C4 shown in Figure 168). Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times. However, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the second operation means (operation button 410) is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is still displayed, rather than being hidden (see, for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 164 and timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 166).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 31st configuration B31 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is also possible to ensure that when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reoccur after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 31st configuration B31 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations according to the above-mentioned effect examples, if "when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to an inoperated state, at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time is made inaudible," the effect sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the changes after acceptance; for example, it may be another effect sound such as background music, or it may be all effect sounds that are in an audible state at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 31st configuration B31 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during the period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, a situation may arise in which operations are accepted for the operation button 410 multiple times; however, it is also possible to ensure that the condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, when the configuration according to each of the above-mentioned performance examples is realized, when a situation arises in which operation of the operation button 410 is not accepted despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state, it goes without saying that this will not be the trigger for making the performance sound that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

Furthermore, for example, as the 32nd configuration B32, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (sword decoration 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and that can accept an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. a first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for activating a so-called auto-repeated function; a second operation-related change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for activating a so-called auto-repeated function) which is a display prompting an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) and which indicates that an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be accepted multiple times if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is in a displayed state, and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for activating a so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed 166), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in the operated state, a situation where a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times appears, and then a situation where an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not performed despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in the operated state appears (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 164 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 166), a situation where an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is performed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state does not appear again (for example, see FIG. 164 or FIG. 166), and During the period in which the related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is turned off while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410), and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is returned to the operated state from the off-operation state, this can trigger at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h)) to become inaudible, which can be expected to indicate that the second operation means (operation button 410) has been returned to the operated state and an operation has been received (for example, see timing tBa2-C1 shown in FIG. 164).

In this case, even if a situation arises in which, during the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation is not accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) continues to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained and an operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted), a situation in which an operation is accepted multiple times for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed (see timing tBa2-C3 shown in FIG. 168, etc.).

In this case, while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is displayed and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is undergoing a post-acceptance change according to the operation state, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and then the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state again, there is no case where this triggers the effect sound that was in an audible state at that time to be made inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, etc.), whereas the second operation-related display When the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state while an operation-related display (related to the operating button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is being displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410), and then the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state again, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164 (h)) in an inaudible state. With this configuration, simply by maintaining the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed.However, when the auto-rapid-hit function (long press function) for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is interrupted and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is operated again, it becomes difficult to recognize that the acceptance was made properly, so maintaining the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) in an operating state makes it easier to progress through the game. In contrast, simply maintaining the second operating means (operation button 410) in an operating state will prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) before the end of the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-press function is enabled) is displayed. However, when the auto-rapid-press function (long press function) for the second operating means is interrupted and the second operating means is operated again, it will be easier to recognize that the operation was accepted properly, making it easier to redo the operating state of the second operating means in order to ensure proper gameplay.

Furthermore, during the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled) is displayed, if a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) and the second operation means (operation button 410) is subsequently changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, only if the post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα1) as one of the post-acceptance changes is audible at that time, this may trigger at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164) to be made inaudible. In this case, instead of the post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα1), a different sound may be made inaudible.

In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) are executed multiple times.However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed rather than being hidden (see, for example, timing tBc2-C2 shown in FIG. 168).

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-tap function is enabled) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the second operation means is no longer permitted (see, for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 164).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 32nd configuration B32 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is also possible to ensure that when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reoccur after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 32nd configuration B32 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 32nd configuration B32 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, during the period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed, when the operation button 410 is changed to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state back to an operated state, even if the post-acceptance output sound as one of the post-acceptance changes is in an audible state at that time, this may trigger either a case in which at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time is made inaudible (for example, see timing tBa2-C1 shown in FIG. 164), or a case in which the effect sound that was in an audible state at that time is not made inaudible (for example, see FIG. 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 32nd configuration B32 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if "when the operation button 410 is operated again, at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible," the performance sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the post-acceptance changes; for example, it may be another performance sound such as background music, or it may be all performance sounds that are audible at that time.

Also, for example, as the 33rd configuration B33, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the determination by the determination means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a means for prompting an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as a target for activating a so-called auto-repeated function), which is an image display that prompts an operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001), and which is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as a target for activating a so-called auto-repeated function), when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a display state; a first prompt light emitting means capable of executing operation prompt light emitting (e.g., fourth-B operation prompt light LB4) that prompts an operation on the second operating means (sword ornament 5001); a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means (operation button 410); a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for activating a so-called auto-repeated function) that is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and in which an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state; and a second prompt light emitting means capable of executing operation prompt light emitting (e.g., first-B operation prompt light LB1, second-B operation prompt light LB2, sixth-B operation prompt light LB6, etc.) that prompts an operation on the second operating means, separate from the second operation-related display that is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410). 164 and 166 , and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, if a situation appears in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), and then a situation appears in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 164 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 166 ), then even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is continuously maintained in an operated state, a situation in which an operation is accepted multiple times for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state will not appear again (for example, see FIGS. 164 and 166 ), and the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed. In a state where the operation related display for all the sword ornaments 5001) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operation means (sword ornaments 5001) (for example, the 4B reception permitted state shown in FIG. 170), operation prompt light (for example, the 4B operation prompt light LB4) that prompts the operation of the first operation means (sword ornaments 5001) can be executed, and the second operation related display (the operation related display for the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed and the second operation related display (for example, the 4B operation prompt light LB4) that prompts the operation of the first operation means (sword ornaments 5001) can be executed. In a state where multiple operations are permitted for the operation means (operation button 410) (for example, the first B operation permitted state shown in FIG. 164 or the second B operation permitted state shown in FIG. 166), operation prompt light (for example, first B operation prompt light LB1 or second B operation prompt light LB2) can be emitted to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410). This makes it easier to create a situation where multiple operations are permitted for the operation means, which is expected to provide a good sense of tension.

In this case, even if a situation occurs in which the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB4 corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) is displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operation state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not accepted despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operation state (timing tB shown in FIG. 170), d2-C2), if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained and a state is reached in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted), a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display (for example, message display MB4 corresponding to the 4B acceptance acceptance state) is displayed (see FIG. 170).

In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (when there is a period during which the first operation-related display is displayed), operation prompting light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, see FIG. 170), and when the operation prompting light is emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden), In addition, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (when there is a period during which the second operation-related display is displayed), operation-prompting light to prompt the player to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) may be always activated (for at least a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) (see, for example, Figures 164 and 166). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to add a sense of tension while improving the presentation.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even when multiple operations are permitted for the operating means and an operation-related display is displayed, there are cases in which an operation prompt light is emitted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) and cases in which an operation prompt light is not emitted, which can provide a degree of secrecy.However, even if operations are no longer being accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) multiple times can occur again based on the detection of that maintained operating state, which can be expected to add tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), operation prompt light is always emitted between the time the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed and the time it is hidden, but once no operation is being accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410), simply maintaining the second operating means (operation button 410) in an operating state will not again result in a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410), which can be expected to add tension and maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 33rd configuration B33 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 33rd configuration B33 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is also possible to ensure that when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reoccur after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 33rd configuration B33 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 33rd configuration B33 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" can be displayed in any of a number of display modes, including the first mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) and the second mode (message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), and that when the first mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the sword decorative body 5001, operation prompting light emission prompting operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not executed, and when the second mode (message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the sword decorative body 5001, operation prompting light emission (for example, 4B operation prompting light LB4) prompting operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is executed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 33rd configuration B33 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if a situation arises in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 despite the sword decorative body 5001 being maintained in an operating state, the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed in the first mode (Figure Whether the display is in the first mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) or the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170), if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state (if a certain start condition is met while the sword ornament 5001 is maintained), it is desirable that the situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the sword ornament 5001 based on the detection of that operating state reappears before the end of the period in which the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed (see Figures 168 and 170, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 33rd configuration B33 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the "predetermined start conditions" for the "situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the sword decorative body 5001" to reappear may be satisfied based on, for example, the result of a jackpot determination, or may be satisfied in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be satisfied based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation for an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 33rd configuration B33 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed and multiple operations are allowed to be accepted for the sword decorative body 5001, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (see Figure 170, etc.) and when operation-prompting light is not emitted to prompt an operation on the first operating means (see Figures 168 and 172, etc.), but the changes that occur after acceptance of an operation may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, as the 34th configuration B34, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change executing means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and an image display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that, when the image display is in a displayed state, puts the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) into an operating state. a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornamentation 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first prompting sound output means capable of outputting a first operation prompting sound (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and a first prompting sound output means capable of executing a post-acceptance change corresponding to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410). a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function) which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410), and which allows an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410) to be accepted multiple times when the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state; and a second operation prompting sound (for example, a first B operation-related output sound OB shown in FIG. 164) corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed. 1 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166), and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound can be output, and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound can be output, which is expected to create a situation in which multiple operations are received by the operation means and provide a favorable sense of tension.

In this case, even if a situation occurs in which the first operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 corresponding to the 3B reception-allowed state or message display MB4 corresponding to the 4B reception-allowed state) is displayed during which the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not accepted despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168, (See timing tBd2-C2 shown in FIG. 170.) If the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) continues to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained and a state is reached in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted), a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the end of the period in which the first operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 corresponding to the 3B acceptance acceptance state, message display MB4 corresponding to the 4B acceptance acceptance state) is displayed.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (while operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted or when operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted), the second operation prompt sound is always output (see, for example, Figures 164 and 166), but when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there may be both cases where the first operation prompt sound is output (see Figures 168 and 170) and where the first operation prompt sound is not output (see Figure 172). With this configuration, even when multiple operations are permitted for an operating means and an operation-related display is displayed, the first operating means may or may not emit the first operation prompt sound, which provides a degree of secrecy. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operating means, which is expected to add tension and improve the presentation.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 34th configuration B34 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is also possible to ensure that when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reoccur after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 34th configuration B34 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 34th configuration B34 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" can be made to be displayable in any of a number of display modes including the first mode (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) and the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), and when the first mode (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound corresponding to the first operation-related display is not output, and when the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound corresponding to the first operation-related display can be output.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 34th configuration B34 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function" is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 multiple times, and then a situation occurs in which no operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 despite the sword decorative body 5001 being maintained in an operating state, the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function" is displayed in the first mode (the message display shown in FIG. 172 Whether the display is in the first mode (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 168) or the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 170, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), if the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state (if a specified start condition is met while the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained), it is desirable that a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the sword decorative body 5001 based on the detection of that operating state can reappear before the end of the period in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIGS. 168, 170, 172, etc.).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration of the 34th configuration B34 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when an "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when a first operation prompt sound corresponding to the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is output (see Figure 168 or Figure 170, etc.) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see Figure 172, etc.), but the changes that occur after an operation is accepted may be the same.

Also, for example, as the 35th configuration B35, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (an operation related to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) that is a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that can accept operations on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display (operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) and which indicates that operations on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is in a displayed state, and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, 179 and 180), after a situation has arisen in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 179 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 180), even if the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is continuously displayed after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended (or even after the second operation means (operation button 410) has been maintained in an operated state) until a situation in which the second operation-related display is displayed again appears, While the second operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, there is no case in which operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) is again performed based on detection of the operation state that has been maintained up until that point (see FIGS. 179(f) and (h) and 180(f) and (h)). When post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes can be set to a specific time or less (see the 1B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIGS. 164 and 179). Therefore, if a situation arises in which operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) is not being performed, this can be recognized relatively early, and it can be expected that this will prompt the user to cancel the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) are executed multiple times, and then even if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2, timing tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 181 to 183, etc.), the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed ends. If the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the first operating means is turned off, the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained.If a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, and a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted becomes possible, a situation in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up to that point may once again appear (for example, timing tBc5A and timing tBe5A shown in Figures 181 to 183).

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 35th configuration B35 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is displayed during a period in which the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times. In this case, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes (the interval between post-acceptance changes in the auto-repeated tapping function) is set to a specific time or less (the third B acceptance acceptance state shown in Figures 168 and 181, the fourth B acceptance acceptance state shown in Figures 170 and 181, and the fifth B acceptance acceptance state shown in Figures 172, 182, and 183). If the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state during a period in which an operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled) is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to operation reception for the second operating means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times; in this case, the interval between multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between post-acceptance changes in the auto-rapid tapping function) may be either a time equal to or shorter than a specific time (for example, the first B acceptance state shown in Figures 164 and 179) or a time longer than the specific time (for example, the second B acceptance state shown in Figures 166 and 180).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval. This makes it possible to easily recognize when the auto-repeated tapping function has been disabled relatively early. In addition, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state even after the period during which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for which the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled) is displayed, the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for which the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled) will continue to be displayed while the operating state is maintained. The first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) may be displayed again, and when a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and a state in which acceptance of operations for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is permitted becomes possible, a situation in which acceptance of operations for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is made based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point may once again appear, so that it can be expected that interest in playing when the auto-rapid-hit function is activated for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) will be maintained in an optimal manner. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be relatively short or relatively long, and when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it may not necessarily be recognized relatively quickly. In addition, even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the auto-repeated function is enabled) has ended and the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed again (until a state occurs in which acceptance of operations for the second operating means is permitted), there is no case in which acceptance of operations for the second operating means (operation button 410) will be resumed based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed. This is expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410).

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-press function is enabled) is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 35th configuration B35 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the thirty-fifth configuration B35, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the thirty-fifth configuration B35, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the thirty-fifth configuration B35, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, in a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state, the second operation-related display may appear when the second operation-related display is in a hidden state, such as after the second operation-related display is displayed again and then hidden, or before the second operation-related display is displayed again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 35th configuration B35 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B acceptance allowance state), it is desirable that the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) should never be longer than a specific time, but should always be shorter than a specific time (see Figures 164 and 179, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 35th configuration B35 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (message display MB2 corresponding to the 2B acceptance allowance state), the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may be either longer than a specific time or shorter than a specific time (see Figures 166 and 180, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 35th configuration B35 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the sword decoration 5001 are accepted multiple times; however, it is possible to have both cases in which a predetermined condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden, and cases in which this predetermined condition is not met. On the other hand, while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the operation button 410 are accepted multiple times; however, it is possible to have always cases in which the condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden.

Also, for example, as the 36th configuration B36, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the determination by the determination means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (related to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and that can accept operations on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) and which indicates that an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is in a displayed state, and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, When a situation arises in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 179 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 180), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state until a situation arises in which the second operation-related display is displayed again (or even after the second operation-related display appears), the second operation-related display will not be displayed after the period in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) has ended. While the second operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, there is no case in which operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is again performed based on detection of the operation state that has been maintained up until that point (see FIGS. 179(f) and (h) and 180(f) and (h)). When post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes can be set to a fixed time (see the 1B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIGS. 164 and 179). Therefore, if a situation arises in which operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not being performed, this can be recognized relatively early, and it can be expected that this will prompt the user to cancel the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410).

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) are executed multiple times, and then even if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2, timing tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 181 to 183, etc.), the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed ends. If the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the first operating means is turned off, the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained.If a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, and a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted becomes possible, a situation in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up to that point may once again appear (for example, timing tBc5A and timing tBe5A shown in Figures 181 to 183).

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 36th configuration B36 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

In addition, when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times. In this case, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between post-acceptance changes in the auto-repeated tapping function) is set to a certain time (a predetermined time) (the third B acceptance state shown in Figures 168 and 181, the fourth B acceptance state shown in Figures 170 and 181, and the fifth B acceptance state shown in Figures 172, 182, and 183). If the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state during a period in which a display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called automatic rapid press function is enabled) is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception for the second operating means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times. In this case, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between post-acceptance changes in the automatic rapid press function) may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B acceptance state shown in Figures 164 and 179) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined) (for example, the second B acceptance state shown in Figures 166 and 180).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). This makes it possible to easily recognize relatively early on when the auto-repeated tapping function has been disabled. In addition, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state even after the period during which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) will continue to be displayed while the operating state is maintained. In some cases, the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) may be displayed again, and when a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and a state is reached in which acceptance of operations for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is permitted, a situation may again appear in which acceptance of operations for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is permitted based on the detection of the operation state that has been maintained up to that point, so it can be expected that interest in playing when the auto-rapid-hit function is activated for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) will be maintained in an appropriate manner. On the other hand, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined). In addition, when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is not necessarily possible to recognize that the auto-repeated function has been disabled relatively early. In addition, even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed has ended and the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed again (until a state occurs in which acceptance of an operation for the second operating means is permitted), there is no case in which acceptance of an operation for the second operating means (operation button 410) is again performed based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed. Therefore, it can be expected that the sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410) will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-press function is enabled) is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 36th configuration B36 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the 36th configuration B36, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the 36th configuration B36, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the 36th configuration B36, in a situation where an operation is received multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the second operation-related display may appear when the second operation-related display is in a hidden state, such as after the second operation-related display is displayed again and then hidden, or before the second operation-related display is displayed again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 36th configuration B36 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B acceptance allowance state), it is desirable that the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) should not be an indefinite period, but should always be a fixed period (see Figures 164, 179, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 36th configuration B36 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the sword decoration 5001 are accepted multiple times; however, it is possible to have both cases in which a predetermined condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden, and cases in which this predetermined condition is not met. On the other hand, while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the operation button 410 are accepted multiple times; however, it is possible to have always cases in which the condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden.

Also, for example, as the 37th configuration B37, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that can accept an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function), which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410), and which indicates that an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410) can be activated multiple times if the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an activated state while the display is in a displayed state; ) is displayed, if a situation appears in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then a situation appears in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 179 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 180), after the period in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed has ended, the second operation means ( Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state, there is no case where an operation is again accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state that has been maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is being displayed (see, for example, Figs. 179(f) and (h) and Figs. 180(f) and (h)). When the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) can be displayed (see, for example, Figs. 166(f), 167 and 180(f)). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) has been released, and it can be expected that interest in playing will be maintained in an appropriate manner after a situation arises in which no operation is being received on the second operation means (operation button 410) even though the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) are executed multiple times, and then even if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2, timing tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 181 to 183, etc.), the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed ends. If the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the first operating means is turned off, the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained.If a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, and a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted becomes possible, a situation in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up to that point may once again appear (for example, timing tBc5A and timing tBe5A shown in Figures 181 to 183).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 37th configuration B37 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-operation display will not be displayed (see Figures 168 to 173, 176, 177, etc.), whereas when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operating means (operation button 410), if the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-operation display (post-operation display HB2) may be displayed (see Figures 166, 167, etc.).

With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until (or even after) the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again, a situation may arise again in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the maintained operating state.However, since this is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is released, it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), simply maintaining the second operating means (operation button 410) in an operating state until (and after) the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again will prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) from reoccurring. However, when the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released, this can be easily recognized and it can be expected that the player will be encouraged to operate it again, which can be expected to maintain a sense of tension while increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-press function is enabled) is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 37th configuration B37 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the 37th configuration B37, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the 37th configuration B37, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 37th configuration B37 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operation state and operations are received multiple times for the operation button 410, when the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, it is desirable that the corresponding post-non-operation display be displayed (see FIG. 166) or the post-non-operation display not be displayed (see FIG. 164).

In this case, even if the post-non-operation display is displayed (see FIG. 166), it is desirable to prevent a new sound from being output when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (see FIG. 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 37th configuration B37 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the sword decoration 5001 are accepted multiple times; however, it is possible to have both cases in which a predetermined condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden, and cases in which this predetermined condition is not met. On the other hand, while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the operation button 410 are accepted multiple times; however, it is possible to have always cases in which the condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the operation button 410 despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operation state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, this will trigger the display after non-operation not to be displayed.

Also, for example, as the 38th configuration B38, there is provided a system including a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination by the determination means, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (related to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that can receive operations on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. a first operation-related display means for displaying an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function; a second operation-related change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (the operation button 410); and a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function) which is a display for prompting an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410) and which indicates that an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410) may be accepted multiple times if the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is in a displayed state; 179 ) and the operation button 410 as the activation target of the auto-repeated-hit function), even if the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed for a period from the end of the period until the state in which the second operation-related display is displayed again (or even after the state in which the second operation-related display is displayed again) appears, is displayed, there is no case where an operation to the second operating means (operation button 410) is again accepted based on the detection of the operation state maintained up until that point (see Figs. 179(f) and (h) and Figs. 180(f) and (h) etc.), and when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in a situation where the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance to the second operating means (operation button 410), this is used as a trigger to make inaudible at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time (for example, the 2B post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in Fig. 166(h) and Fig. 180(h) etc.) (see Figs. 166(h) and Fig. 180(h) etc.). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) has been released, and it can be expected that interest in playing will be maintained in an appropriate manner after a situation arises in which no operation is being received on the second operation means (operation button 410) even though the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises in which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001). Even if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state, the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed has ended. If the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) may be displayed again while this operating state is maintained, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while this first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, and a state is reached in which acceptance of operations for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted, a situation in which operations for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) are accepted based on the detection of the operating state that had been maintained up until then may once again appear.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 38th configuration B38 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not serve as a trigger for making the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, 176, 177, etc.), whereas when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may serve as a trigger for making at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible (for example, the secondB post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166 (h) and Figure 180 (h)).

With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until (or even after) the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again, a situation may arise again in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the maintained operating state.However, since this is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is released, it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), simply maintaining the second operating means (operation button 410) in an operating state until (and after) the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again will prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) from reoccurring. However, when the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released, this can be easily recognized and it can be expected that the player will be encouraged to operate it again, which can be expected to maintain a sense of tension while increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-press function is enabled) is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 38th configuration B38 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the 38th configuration B38, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the 38th configuration B38, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 38th configuration B38 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state and operations are received multiple times for the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state, it is desirable that this be used as a trigger to make at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state (see FIG. 166), or that at least one of the performance sounds not be made in an inaudible state (see FIG. 164).

When the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, even if this is used as an opportunity to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time inaudible, it is desirable that no new sound be output in response to the non-operated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 38th configuration B38 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if "when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to an inoperated state, at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time is made inaudible," the performance sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the changes after acceptance, and may be, for example, another performance sound such as background music, or it may be all performance sounds that are in an audible state at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 38th configuration B38 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the sword decoration 5001 are accepted multiple times; however, it is possible to have both cases in which a predetermined condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden, and cases in which this predetermined condition is not met. Furthermore, while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the operation button 410 are accepted multiple times; however, it is possible to have always cases in which the condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, when the configuration according to each of the above-mentioned performance examples is realized, when a situation arises in which operation of the operation button 410 is not accepted despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state, it goes without saying that this will not be the trigger for making the performance sound that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

Furthermore, for example, as the 39th configuration B39, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display that can display a first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that can accept operations on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. The apparatus includes a display means, a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an acceptance of an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function) which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and in which, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times. After a situation appears in which a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance is executed multiple times, if a situation appears in which an operation is not accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 179 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 180), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operation state after the period in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed has ended and until a state in which the second operation-related display is displayed again appears (and even after it appears), the operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) will not be accepted based on the detection of the operation state maintained up until then while the second operation-related display is displayed. The second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is not to be repeated. During the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to an operation accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operated state back to the operated state, this will trigger at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h)) to be made inaudible. This can be expected to indicate that the second operation means (operation button 410) has been returned to an operated state, indicating that an operation has been accepted.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises in which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001). Even if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state, the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed has ended. If the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) may be displayed again while this operating state is maintained, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while this first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, and a state is reached in which acceptance of operations for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted, a situation in which operations for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) are accepted based on the detection of the operating state that had been maintained up until then may once again appear.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 39th configuration B39 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is displayed and the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) undergoes a post-acceptance change according to the operation state, if the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state and then the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state again, there is no case where this triggers the effect sound that was in an audible state at that time to be made inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, 176, 177, etc.), whereas the second operation When an operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410), and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operating state back to an operating state, this may be used as a trigger to make inaudible at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h)).

With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until (and even after) the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again, a situation may arise again in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the maintained operating state. However, when the auto-rapid-hit function (long press function) for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is interrupted and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is operated again, it becomes difficult to recognize that the acceptance was made properly, so maintaining the operating state for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) makes it easier to progress through the game. In contrast, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), simply maintaining the second operating means (operation button 410) in an operating state until (and after) the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-press function is enabled) is displayed again will prevent a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) from reoccurring. However, when the auto-rapid-press function (long press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) is interrupted and the second operating means (operation button 410) is operated again, it will be easier to recognize that the acceptance was appropriate, and therefore it will be easier to redo the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) in order to ensure proper gameplay.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-press function is enabled) is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 39th configuration B39 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the thirty-ninth configuration B39, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the thirty-ninth configuration B39, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 39th configuration B39 and each of the effect examples described above, if the operation button 410 is switched to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation received for the operation button 410 (during the period when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tap function" is displayed), and then the operation button 410 is switched back to the operated state from the non-operated state, only if a post-acceptance output sound (e.g., the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h)) as one of the post-acceptance changes is audible at that time, this may be used as an opportunity to make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state. However, in this case, the effect sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the post-acceptance changes, and may be any type of sound as long as it is different from the second operation-related sound. For example, it may be another effect sound such as background music, or it may be multiple effect sounds that are audible at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 39th configuration B39 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, when the operation button 410 is set to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation received for the operation button 410 (during the period when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tap function" is displayed), and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state back to an operated state, even if the post-acceptance output sound as one of the post-acceptance changes is in an audible state at that time, this may trigger either a case in which at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time is made inaudible (for example, see timing tBa2-C1 shown in Figure 164(h)), or a case in which the effect sound that was in an audible state at that time is not made inaudible (for example, see Figure 166).

Furthermore, for example, as the 40th configuration B40, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and an image display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and the image display a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) that can receive operations for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) multiple times when the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is in a display state; and an operation-promoting light emitting device (e.g., a second operation-related display (so-called auto-link display) which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) and which allows the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) to be accepted multiple times if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state. 164 and 166), and second prompt light emitting means capable of emitting operation prompt light (for example, first B operation prompt light LB1 shown in FIG. 164 or second B operation prompt light LB2 shown in FIG. 166) to prompt an operation on the second operating means, separately from the second operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operating button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed. When the second operation means (operation button 410) is being maintained in an operation state and a situation where a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times appears, and then a situation where an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not performed despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state appears (for example, at timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 179 or at timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 180), the second operation-related display (i.e. Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state after the period in which the operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the easy auto-repeated tapping function is displayed has ended and until the state in which the second operation-related display is displayed again (even after it has appeared), there is no case in which an operation is again accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state that has been maintained until then while the second operation-related display is displayed (see Figs. 179(f) and (h) and Fig. 180( 170 ) in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed and acceptance of multiple operations for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted (for example, the 4B acceptance permitting state shown in FIG. 170 ), operation prompt light (for example, the 4B operation prompt light LB4) that prompts operation for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed, and the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed and acceptance of multiple operations for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted (for example, the 4B acceptance permitting state shown in FIG. 170 ). In a state where an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, the 1B operation permitted state shown in FIG. 164 or the 2B operation permitted state shown in FIG. 166), operation prompt light (for example, 1B operation prompt light LB1 or 2B operation prompt light LB2) that prompts operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) can be emitted, so it can be expected that the second operation means will be put into an operating state again, indicating that an operation has been permitted.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises in which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001). Even if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state, the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed has ended. If the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) may be displayed again while this operating state is maintained, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while this first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, and a state is reached in which acceptance of operations for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted, a situation in which operations for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) are accepted based on the detection of the operating state that had been maintained up until then may once again appear.

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 40th configuration B40 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (when there is a period during which the first operation-related display is displayed), operation prompt illumination to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is executed (at least part of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) (see Figure 170 (j)), and when the operation prompt illumination is not executed (at least part of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden). In addition, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (when there is a period during which the second operation-related display is displayed), operation prompt light to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) may be always activated (for at least a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) (see FIGS. 164(j) and 166(j), etc.). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to add a sense of tension while improving the presentation.

With this configuration, even when multiple operations are permitted for an operating means and an operation-related display is displayed, the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may or may not emit an operation-prompting light, which can provide a degree of secrecy. However, even if operations are no longer being accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until (or even after) the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can recur based on the detection of that maintained operating state. This can be expected to add tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), although the operation prompt light is always emitted between the time the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and the time it is hidden, if no operation is accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410), simply maintaining the operating state until (and even after) the time when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again will not result in a situation where multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410). This is expected to create a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-press function is enabled) is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 40th configuration B40 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the fortieth configuration B40, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the fortieth configuration B40, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the fortieth configuration B40 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" can be displayed in one of multiple display modes, including the first mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168 or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 172) and the second mode (message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), and that when the first mode (for example, message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the sword decorative body 5001, operation prompting light emission prompting operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not executed, and when the second mode (message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the sword decorative body 5001, operation prompting light emission (for example, 4B operation prompting light LB4) prompting operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is executed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 40th configuration B40 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function" is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 multiple times, and then a situation occurs in which no operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 despite the sword decorative body 5001 being maintained in an operating state, the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function" is displayed in the first mode (the message shown in FIG. 168 Whether the display is in the first mode (message display MB3 or message display MB4 shown in Figure 172) or the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170), if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state (if a certain start condition is met while the sword ornament 5001 is maintained), it is desirable that the situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the sword ornament 5001 based on the detection of that operating state reappears before the end of the period in which the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed (see Figures 168 and 170, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 40th configuration B40 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the "predetermined start conditions" for the "situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the sword decorative body 5001" to reappear may be satisfied based on, for example, the result of a jackpot determination, or may be satisfied in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be satisfied based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation for an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 40th configuration B40 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed and multiple operations are allowed to be accepted for the sword decorative body 5001, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (see Figure 170, etc.) and when operation-prompting light is not emitted to prompt an operation on the first operating means (see Figures 168 and 172, etc.), but the changes that occur after acceptance of an operation may be the same.

Also, for example, as the 41st configuration B41, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the fact that a predetermined result has been obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). and a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function), which allows multiple operations to be accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) when the first operation-related display is in a display state and the first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function), when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a first prompting sound output means capable of outputting a first operation prompting sound (for example, a third-B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or a fourth-B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) corresponding to an operation-related display; a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function) which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) and which may result in multiple operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410) if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; and a second operation prompting sound (for example, a first-B operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function) corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. 166, etc.), and when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if a situation appears in which the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (the operation button 410), and then a situation appears in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (the operation button 410) despite the second operation means (the operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state (for example, at timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 179 or at timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 180), the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not accepted until a state in which the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after the situation appears), Even if the step (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state, there is no case where an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410) is again accepted based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is being displayed (see Figs. 179(f), (h), 180(f), (h), etc.), and when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, the first operation prompt A prompting sound (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) can be output, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operation prompting sound (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) can be output, which is expected to create a situation in which multiple operations are accepted on the operating means and provide a favorable sense of tension.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises in which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001). Even if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state, the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed has ended. If the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) may be displayed again while this operating state is maintained, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while this first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, and a state is reached in which acceptance of operations for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is permitted, a situation in which operations for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) are accepted based on the detection of the operating state that had been maintained up until then may once again appear.

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 41st configuration B41 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed (while operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted or when operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted), the second operation prompt sound (for example, the 1B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or the 2B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166, etc.) is always output, but when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed, there may be both cases where the first operation prompt sound (for example, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170, etc.) is output (see FIG. 168, FIG. 170, etc.) and cases where the first operation prompt sound is not output (see FIG. 172). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operating means, which is expected to add tension and improve the dramatic effect.

With this configuration, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output, which can provide a degree of secrecy. However, even if operations for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) are no longer accepted, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until (or even after) the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again, a situation in which operations for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) are accepted multiple times may occur again based on the detection of that maintained operating state. This can be expected to create a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), although the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if no operation is accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410), simply maintaining the operating state until (and even after) the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) appears again will not result in a situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410). This is expected to create a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-press function is enabled) is displayed again may be the same as the manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed, or may be a manner in which the hidden second operation-related display was displayed differently.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 41st configuration B41 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the 41st configuration B41, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state from reoccurring before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends or when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the 41st configuration B41, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed ends or when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 41st configuration B41 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" can be displayed in any of a number of display modes including the first mode (e.g., message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) and the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), and that when the first mode (e.g., message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) is displayed, an operation prompt sound prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not output, and when the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) is displayed, an operation prompt sound prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is output.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 41st configuration B41 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function" is displayed, if a situation arises in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 despite the sword decorative body 5001 being maintained in an operating state, the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function" is displayed in the first mode (for example, the message shown in FIG. 172 Whether the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed in the first mode (message display MB5) or the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), if the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state (if a specified start condition is met while the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained), it is desirable that a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the sword decorative body 5001 based on the detection of that operating state can reappear before the end of the period in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIGS. 181, 182, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 41st configuration B41 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the "predetermined start conditions" for the "situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the sword decorative body 5001" to reappear may be satisfied based on, for example, the result of a jackpot determination, or may be satisfied in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be satisfied based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation for an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 41st configuration B41 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when an operation prompt sound is output to prompt operation on the sword decorative body 5001 when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see Figures 168, 170, etc.), the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs from when the operation prompt sound is not output (see Figure 172, etc.), but the changes that occur after acceptance of an operation may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, as the 42nd configuration B42, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the fact that a predetermined result has been obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change executing means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which, when the display is in a display state and the first operation means (the sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, an operation to the first operation means (the sword ornament 5001) can be accepted multiple times; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted to the second operation means (the operation button 410); and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated hitting function), which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176 ). Even in a state where an operation related display relating to the operation button 410) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). When the second operation related display (operation related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, after a situation appears in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, a situation appears in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state (for example, at timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 184 or at timing tBa2-C3 shown in FIG. 184). 185, etc.), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state until after the end of the period during which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there is no case in which operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is again performed based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is in a hidden state (see FIGS. 184, 185, etc.), and in the case where post-acceptance changes are performed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes can be set to a specific time or less (see the 1B acceptance allowed state shown in FIGS. 164 and 184). In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled, the intervals at which operations are accepted are set to relatively short intervals, which is expected to make it easier to recognize at a relatively early stage that an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) is not being accepted, and to prompt the user to cancel the operation of the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and then a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2, timing tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display After the period during which the display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed has ended, if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBc5B and timing tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 42nd configuration B42 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is in a hidden state may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

In addition, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is displayed, post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed multiple times. In this case, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes (the interval between post-acceptance changes in the auto-repeated tapping function) is set to a specific time or less (the third B acceptance acceptance state shown in Figures 168 and 186, the fourth B acceptance acceptance state shown in Figure 170, and the fifth B acceptance acceptance state shown in Figures 172 and 187). If the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state during a period in which an operation-related display (for the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times; in this case, the interval between multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between post-acceptance changes in the auto-rapid tapping function) may be either a time period shorter than a specific time (for example, the first B acceptance state shown in Figures 164 and 184) or a time period longer than the specific time (for example, the second B acceptance state shown in Figures 166 and 185).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-hits function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), the interval at which changes occur after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval, making it possible to easily recognize relatively early on when the auto-rapid-hits function has been disabled. In addition, even after the period in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hits function) is displayed has ended, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hits function) is not displayed, a situation in which an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point can once again occur, which is expected to maintain the enjoyment of playing when the auto-rapid-hits function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001). In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be relatively short or relatively long, and when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it may not necessarily be recognized relatively quickly. In addition, even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed has ended, there are no cases in which operations for the second operating means (operation button 410) are again accepted based on the detection of the operation state maintained up until that point when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed. This is expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 42nd configuration B42 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 42 and configuration B42, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 42 and configuration B42, when the second operating means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 42/B42, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 42nd configuration B42 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B acceptance allowance state), it is desirable that the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) should never be longer than a specific time, but should always be shorter than a specific time (see Figures 164, 184, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 42nd configuration B42 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (message display MB2 corresponding to the 2B acceptance allowance state), the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may be either longer than a specific time or shorter than a specific time (see Figures 166, 185, etc.).

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 42nd configuration B42 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, "the interval between multiple operations for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state when the operation-related display for the operation button 410 that is the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is not displayed may be set to be longer than a specific time, and may always be set to be shorter than a specific time (see FIG. 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 42nd configuration B42 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the sword decoration 5001 are accepted multiple times; however, it is also possible to have both cases in which a predetermined condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden, and cases in which this predetermined condition is not met. On the other hand, while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the operation button 410 are accepted multiple times; however, it is also possible to have always cases in which the condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 42nd configuration B42 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which operations are again accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is in a hidden state may be set to the same mode (interval) as when the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, and operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 multiple times.

Also, for example, as the 43rd configuration B43, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the determination by the determination means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a means for prompting an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) which is a display and which, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, can receive operations for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times; and a second post-acceptance change execution means which, when an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is received, can execute a post-acceptance change in response to the reception of the operation. and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for activating a so-called auto-repeated hitting function), which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as a target for activating a so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176 ). Even in a state where the second operation means (operation button 410) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, after a situation appears in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, a situation appears in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state (for example, at the timing tBa2-C2 or 185, etc.), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state until after the end of the period during which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there is no case in which operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is again performed based on detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is in a hidden state (see FIGS. 184, 185, etc.), and when post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the intervals between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes can be set to a fixed time (see the 1B acceptance allowed state shown in FIGS. 164 and 184). In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled, the interval at which operations are accepted is set to a fixed time, which is expected to make it easier to recognize relatively early on that an operation is not being accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410), and to prompt the user to cancel the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and then a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2, timing tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display After the period during which the display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed has ended, if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBc5B and timing tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 43rd configuration B43 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is in a hidden state may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

In addition, when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times. In this case, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between the post-acceptance change in the auto-repeated tapping function) is set to a certain time (a predetermined time) (the third B acceptance-permitted state shown in Figures 168 and 186, the fourth B acceptance-permitted state shown in Figure 170, and the fifth B acceptance-permitted state shown in Figures 172 and 187, etc.), and the second operation-related display (the so-called If the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state during a period in which an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the auto rapid press function is displayed, a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times; in this case, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change (the interval between post-acceptance changes in the auto rapid press function) may be set to either a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B acceptance state shown in Figures 164 and 184) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined) (for example, the second B acceptance state shown in Figures 166 and 185).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-hits function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). This makes it possible to easily recognize relatively early on when the auto-rapid-hits function has been disabled. In addition, even after the period during which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hits function) is displayed has ended, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hits function) is not displayed, a situation can once again arise in which an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point. This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of playing when the auto-rapid-hits function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001). In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be set to either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined). This means that when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is not necessarily possible to recognize this relatively early. Furthermore, even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there is no chance that an operation will be accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) again based on the detection of the operation state maintained up until that point when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed. This is expected to maintain a sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 43rd configuration B43 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, when realizing configuration 43, configuration B43, and the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing configuration 43, configuration B43, and the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the second operating means, which has stopped accepting operations, continues to be maintained in an operating state, and a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point, while the second operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing configuration 43, configuration B43, and the configurations according to the above-mentioned performance examples, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 43rd configuration B43 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B acceptance allowance state), it is desirable that the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) should not be an indefinite period, but should always be a fixed period (see Figures 164, 184, etc.).

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 43rd configuration B43 and each of the above-mentioned examples, "the interval between multiple operations for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state when the operation-related display for the operation button 410 that is the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is not displayed may be set to a fixed time instead of an indefinite time (see FIG. 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 43rd configuration B43 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the sword decoration 5001 are accepted multiple times; however, it is also possible to have both cases in which a predetermined condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden, and cases in which this predetermined condition is not met. On the other hand, while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the operation button 410 are accepted multiple times; however, it is also possible to have always cases in which the condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 43rd configuration B43 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which operations are again accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is in a hidden state may be set to the same pattern (interval) as when the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, and a situation occurs in which operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 multiple times.

Furthermore, for example, the 44th configuration B44 includes a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts the player to operate the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), When the display is in a display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, an operation for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be accepted multiple times. A first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), a second post-acceptance change execution means is capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410), and and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for activating a so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as a target for activating a so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176 ). is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, after a situation appears in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, if a situation appears in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state (for example, at timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 184 or at timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 185), the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state until after the end of a period during which the operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there is no case in which an operation is again accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is in a hidden state (see FIGS. 184 and 185, etc.), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times, a corresponding post-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) can be displayed (see FIGS. 166(f), 167, 185(f), etc.). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) has been released, and it can be expected that interest in playing will be maintained in an appropriate manner after a situation arises in which no operation is being received on the second operation means (operation button 410) even though the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and then a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2, timing tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display After the period during which the display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed has ended, if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBc5B and timing tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 44th configuration B44 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is in a hidden state may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-operation display is not displayed (see, e.g., Figures 168 to 173 and 176), whereas when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception for the second operating means (operation button 410), if the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-operation display (post-operation display HB2) may be displayed (see, e.g., Figures 166(f), 167, 185(f)).

With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) that has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed is maintained in an operating state even after the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden, a situation may arise again in which operations are being accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden.However, since this is difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is released, it is expected that tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), if operations are no longer being accepted while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, even if the operating state is maintained even after the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is made invisible, the situation in which operations are accepted for the second operating means while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is made invisible will not recur. However, when the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released, this can be easily recognized and the player can be encouraged to operate it again, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension and increase interest in the game.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 44th configuration B44 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, when realizing configuration 44, configuration B44, and the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing configuration 44, configuration B44, and the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the second operating means, which has stopped accepting operations, continues to be maintained in an operating state, and a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point, while the second operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 44, configuration B44, and the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operation state and operations are received multiple times for the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, it is possible for the corresponding post-non-operation display to be displayed (see Figures 166(f), 167, 185(f), etc.), or for the post-non-operation display not to be displayed (see Figures 164(f), 165, 184(f), etc.).

In this case, even if the post-non-operation display is displayed (see FIG. 166), it is desirable to prevent a new sound from being output when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (see FIG. 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 44th configuration B44 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the sword decoration 5001 are accepted multiple times; however, it is also possible to have both cases in which a predetermined condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden, and cases in which this predetermined condition is not met. On the other hand, while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the operation button 410 are accepted multiple times; however, it is also possible to have always cases in which the condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the operation button 410 despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operation state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, this will trigger the display after non-operation not to be displayed.

Also, for example, as the 45th configuration B45, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and the display a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, an operation to the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be accepted multiple times; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted to the second operation means (operation button 410); and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-function), which is a display that prompts an operation, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the display is in a display state, an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-function) is not displayed, if an operation for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176 ). Even when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-function) is not displayed, When an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed, and in this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174 ). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, after a situation appears in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, if a situation appears in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state (for example, at timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 184 or at timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 185 ), the second operation-related display (operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed. Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state until the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed has ended, there is no case in which an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410) is again accepted based on the detection of the operation state that has been maintained while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is in a non-display state (see FIGS. 184 and 185, etc.), and When the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation of the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an inoperated state, this triggers at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (e.g., the secondB post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in FIG. 166(h) and FIG. 180(h)) to become inaudible (see FIG. 166(h) and FIG. 185(h), etc.). In other words, in this case, it is easy to recognize that the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released, which is expected to maintain game interest even after a situation occurs in which no operation of the second operating means (operation button 410) is accepted despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and then a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2, timing tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display After the period during which the display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed has ended, if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBc5B and timing tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 45th configuration B45 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is in a hidden state may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) changes from an operating state to an inactive state, this does not trigger the effect sound that was in an audible state at that time to become inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, 176, etc.), whereas if the second operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, When the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance of the second operating means (operation button 410), this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the secondB post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in FIG. 166(h) and FIG. 185(h)) inaudible (see FIG. 166(h), FIG. 185(h), etc.).

With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) that has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed is maintained in an operating state even after the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden, a situation may arise again in which operations are being accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden.However, since this is difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is released, it is expected that tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), if operations are no longer being accepted while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, even if the operating state is maintained even after the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is made invisible, the situation in which operations are accepted for the second operating means while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is made invisible will not recur. However, when the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released, this can be easily recognized and the player can be encouraged to operate it again, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension and increase interest in the game.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 45th configuration B45 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, when realizing configuration 45, configuration B45, and the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing configuration 45, configuration B45, and the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the second operating means, which has stopped accepting operations, continues to be maintained in an operating state, and a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the second operating means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point, while the second operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 45, configuration B45, and the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state and operations are received multiple times for operation button 410, and operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state (see Figures 166(h), 185(h), etc.), or at least one of the performance sounds may not be made in an inaudible state (see Figures 164(h), 184(h), etc.).

In this case, even if the post-non-operation display is displayed (see FIG. 166), it is desirable to prevent a new sound from being output when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (see FIG. 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 44th configuration B44 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the sword decoration 5001 are accepted multiple times; however, it is also possible to have both cases in which a predetermined condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden, and cases in which this predetermined condition is not met. On the other hand, while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the operation button 410 are accepted multiple times; however, it is also possible to have always cases in which the condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden.

Incidentally, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to a non-operated state, even if this is used as an opportunity to make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time inaudible, it is desirable that no new sound be output in response to the non-operated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 45th configuration B45 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if "when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to an inoperated state, at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time is made inaudible," the performance sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the changes after acceptance, and may be, for example, another performance sound such as background music, or it may be all performance sounds that are in an audible state at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 45th configuration B45 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the sword decoration 5001 are accepted multiple times; however, it is possible to have both cases in which a predetermined condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden, and cases in which this predetermined condition is not met. Furthermore, while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which operations for the operation button 410 are accepted multiple times; however, it is possible to have always cases in which the condition for ending this situation is met before the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, when the configuration according to each of the above-mentioned performance examples is realized, when a situation arises in which operation of the operation button 410 is not accepted despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state, it goes without saying that this will not be the trigger for making the performance sound that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

Also, for example, as the 46th configuration B46, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and the display When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state while in a display state, an operation for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be accepted multiple times. A first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), a second post-acceptance change execution means is capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display means is provided for prompting an operation for the second operating means (operation button 410). and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function), in which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the display is in a display state, an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is not displayed, when an operation to the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation to the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176 ). Even when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is not displayed, 174 ), when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) and the second operation means (operation button 410) is held in an operation state, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174 ). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, if a situation arises in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is held in an operation state and a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being held in an operation state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 184 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 185 ), the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed. Even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state until the end of the indicated period, there is no case where an operation is again accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is in a hidden state (see Figures 184 and 185, etc.), and if the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410), and then the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)) in an inaudible state, so that it can be easily recognized that a re-operation of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been properly accepted.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and then a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2, timing tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display After the period during which the display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed has ended, if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBc5B and timing tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 46th configuration B46 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is in a hidden state may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is undergoing a post-acceptance change according to the operation state, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and then the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state again, there is no case where this triggers the effect sound that was in an audible state at that time to be made inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, etc.), whereas the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) When the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state while an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 to be enabled is being displayed and a post-acceptance change has occurred in response to the operation of the second operating means (operation button 410), and then the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state again, this may be used as a trigger to make inaudible at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h)) (see FIGS. 164(h), 184(h), etc.).

With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, is maintained in an operating state even after the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden, a situation may arise again in which operations are being accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden. However, when the auto-rapid-hit function (long press function) for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is interrupted and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is operated again, it will be difficult to recognize that the operation was properly accepted. Therefore, maintaining the operating state of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) makes it easier to progress through the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), if operations are no longer accepted while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, even if the operating state is maintained even after the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) will not reoccur. However, when the auto-rapid-hit function (long press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) is interrupted and the second operating means (operation button 410) is operated again, it is easy to recognize that the operation was accepted properly, and therefore it becomes easy to redo the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) in order to properly progress through the game.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 46th configuration B46 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 46th configuration B46 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 46th configuration B46 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to make it so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point may occur again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 46th configuration B46 and each of the above-described performance examples, if the operation button 410 is changed to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state back to an operated state, only if a post-acceptance output sound (e.g., the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1) representing one of the post-acceptance changes is in an audible state at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time (e.g., the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164) in an inaudible state. In this case, instead of the post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα1), a sound different from this may be made inaudible.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 46th configuration B46 and the configuration of each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is changed to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state to an operated state again, even if the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is in an audible state at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time (post-acceptance output sound) in an inaudible state (see timing tBa2-C1 in FIG. 164, etc.), or to not make the performance sound that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state (see timing tBb2-C1 in FIG. 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations according to the above-mentioned effect examples, if "when the operation button 410 is operated again, at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible," the effect sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the post-acceptance changes; for example, it may be another effect sound such as background music, or it may be all effect sounds that are audible at that time.

Also, for example, the 47th configuration B47 includes a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, an effect display means (effect display device 1600) that displays effects, a judgment means that makes a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that when the display is in a displayed state, a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which an operation to the first operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) can be accepted multiple times when the first operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted to the second operation means (the operation button 410); and a display prompting an operation to the second operation means (the operation button 410), and in which, when the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted to the second operation means (the operation button 410). and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which an operation to the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be accepted multiple times, and even in a state in which the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation to the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to this may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may be executed in response to an operation acceptance to the first operation means (sword decoration 5001). Even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change corresponding to this may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). Even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change corresponding to this may be executed. When the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times while the second operation means (operation button 410) is being maintained in an operating state, if a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 184 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 185), the second operation-related display (the so-called auto-repeated-function-activation-target display) is displayed. Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state until after the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed has ended, there is no case in which an operation is again accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is in a non-display state (see Figures 184 and 185, etc.), and When an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, as the post-acceptance change according to the detection information obtained at that time, both a display change (for example, the post-acceptance display HB7 shown in FIG. 176) in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) and a change different from the display change (for example, the seventh B post-acceptance output sound Sα7 shown in FIG. 176) can occur, and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, When an operation (predetermined operation) is performed on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) or the second operating means (operation button 410), the post-acceptance change according to the detection information obtained at that time can be either a display change on the performance display means (performance display device 1600) (for example, the post-acceptance display HB6 shown in FIG. 174) or a change different from the display change (for example, the sixth B post-acceptance output sound Sα6 shown in FIG. 174). Therefore, even if an operation is accepted on either the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) or the second operating means (operation button 410) when no operation-related display is displayed, it can be suitably indicated that the operation was accepted appropriately.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and then a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2, timing tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display After the period during which the display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed has ended, if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBc5B and timing tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 47th configuration B47 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for operations to be permitted for the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is in a hidden state may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when operations to the sword decorative body 5001 are permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the operation reception for the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation for an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 47th configuration B47 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is operated (a specific operation) and the post-acceptance change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated (when the first operating means is set to an operating state when operation acceptance for the first operating means is not permitted), if a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operated state (when operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted), operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is performed based on the detection of the maintained operating state. However, at this time, it is possible to prevent a display change (even once) from occurring on the performance display device 1600 as a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance, and instead have only changes different from the display change be executed multiple times. In other words, in this case, in the examples shown in Figures 186 and 187, there is no possibility (possibility) that the post-acceptance display HB7 is displayed at timing tBc5B. With this configuration, even if the operation (specific operation) of the sword decoration 5001 is not accepted and the corresponding post-acceptance change is not initiated, the post-acceptance change will appear simply by maintaining the sword decoration 5001 in an operated state. However, as a trade-off, the display change on the performance display device 1600 will not appear as the post-acceptance change, which is expected to maintain a favorable sense of tension. However, even in this case, when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is in a non-operated state and a new operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) while the first operation-related display is not displayed, it is desirable to have both the post-acceptance change be executed in the manner shown in FIG. 176 and the post-acceptance change be executed in the manner shown in FIG. 178.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 47th configuration B47 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is operated (a specific operation) and the post-acceptance change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated (when the sword decorative body 5001 is placed in an operation state in which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted), if a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operation state (when a state in which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted), an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted based on the detection of the maintained operation state. At this time, the post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance may occur in either a case where both a display change in the performance display device 1600 and a change different from the display change occur, or a case where no display change occurs in the performance display device 1600 and only a change different from the display change occurs (the configuration described with reference to Figures 186 and 187). With this configuration, based on the "operation state of the sword decorative body 5001" that has been maintained since the state in which operation acceptance for the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted, there are both cases in which it is easy and difficult to recognize that an operation has been accepted for the sword decorative body 5001, which is expected to increase the enjoyment of the game while maintaining an appropriate sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 47th configuration B47 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 despite the sword decorative body 5001 being maintained in an operating state, and then an operation (specific operation) for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted again based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is in a hidden state, and as a result a "display change in the performance display device 1600" occurs as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to that acceptance, if the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state at this time, one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation for the sword decorative body 5001, "a change different from the display change in the performance display device 1600," may be executed multiple times, while the "display change in the performance display device 1600," which is one of the post-acceptance changes, may not be executed multiple times (see Figures 186 and 187). With this configuration, even if it is easy to recognize that an operation has been received again for the sword decoration 5001 based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated tapping function" is in a hidden state, it is difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated tapping function will also be activated if the operation state is maintained further, so it can be expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 47th configuration B47 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operation means are executed multiple times; this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is displayed, rather than being hidden, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the first operation means is no longer permitted. Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means are executed multiple times; this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is displayed, rather than being hidden, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 47th configuration B47 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 47th configuration B47 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to make it so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point may occur again.

Also, for example, as the 48th configuration B48, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and an image display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that puts the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) into an operating state when the image display is in a displayed state. a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which, when the first operation is maintained, an operation for the first operation means (the sword ornament 5001) can be accepted multiple times; a first prompt light emitting means capable of executing operation prompt light (for example, see FIG. 170(j)) to encourage an operation for the first operation means, separately from the first operation-related display which is an image display that encourages an operation for the first operation means; a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operation means (the operation button 410); A second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called automatic rapid-fire function), which is an image display that prompts an operation on the operation means (the operation button 410), and which can receive an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410) multiple times when the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, and an operation-promoting light emitting device (see, for example, FIG. 164(j) or FIG. 166(j)) that prompts an operation on the second operation means, separate from the second operation-related display that is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operation means. ), and even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the first operation means (the sword decoration 5001), a post-acceptance change corresponding to this may be executed, and in this case, when the first operation means (the sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the first operation means (the sword decoration 5001) may be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176 ), and when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, Even in a state where the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, 185), after a situation has arisen in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), if a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 184 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in FIG. 185), the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed until the end of the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed, Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state, the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is kept in a non-display state, and there is no case where an operation is again accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (see FIGS. 184 and 185, etc.), and the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state. When multiple operations are permitted, an operation prompt light can be emitted to prompt the player to operate the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operating button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means (operation button 410), an operation prompt light can be emitted to prompt the player to operate the second operating means (operation button 410).This makes it easier to create situations in which multiple operations are permitted for the operating means, which is expected to provide a good sense of tension.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and then a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2, timing tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display After the period during which the display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed has ended, if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBc5B and timing tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 48th configuration B48 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is in a hidden state may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (when there is a period during which the first operation-related display is displayed), operation prompting light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (at least part of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) (for example, the 4B acceptance permitted state shown in Figure 170), and when the operation prompting light is emitted (at least part of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden), 168) and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (when there is a period during which the second operation-related display is displayed), operation-prompting light emitting to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) may be always executed (for at least a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until when it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to add a sense of tension while improving the presentation.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even when multiple operations are permitted for an operating means and an operation-related display is displayed, there are cases in which an operation prompt light is emitted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and cases in which an operation prompt light is not emitted, which can provide a degree of secrecy. However, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) that has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is kept in an operating state even after the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden, a situation can arise again in which an operation is being received for the first operating means while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden, which can be expected to create a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), operation prompt illumination is always executed between the time the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function) is displayed and the time it is hidden; however, if no operation is accepted while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function) is displayed, even if the operation state is maintained after the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function) is hidden, a situation in which operation is accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function) is hidden will not occur again, which is expected to add tension and maintain interest in the game.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 48th configuration B48 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 48th configuration B48 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 48th configuration B48 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to make it so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point may occur again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 48th configuration B48 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" can be displayed in any of multiple display modes including the first mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) and the second mode (message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), and that when the first mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the sword decorative body 5001, operation prompting light emission to prompt the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is not executed, and when the second mode (message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) is displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the sword decorative body 5001, operation prompting light emission (for example, 4B operation prompting light LB4) to prompt the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is executed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 48th configuration B48 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if a situation arises in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 despite the sword decorative body 5001 being maintained in an operating state, then the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" will be displayed. Whether it is displayed in the first mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) or the second mode (message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), it is desirable to keep the sword decoration 5001 in an operational state even after the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is hidden, so that when a predetermined start condition is met under such circumstances, operations for the sword decoration 5001 will again be accepted based on the detection of the operation state that has been maintained up to that point, allowing the player to continue playing.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 48th configuration B48 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed and multiple operations are allowed to be accepted for the sword decorative body 5001, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (see Figure 170, etc.) and when operation-prompting light is not emitted to prompt an operation on the first operating means (see Figures 168 and 172, etc.), but the changes that occur after acceptance of an operation may be the same.

Also, for example, as the 49th configuration B49, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination by the determination means, a first post-acceptance change executing means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and that, when the display is in a displayed state, changes the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) 168, 170, 180, 181, 182, 183, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188, 189, 190, 191, 192, 193, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 200, 200, 210, 211, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 217, 218, 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252, 253, 254, 255, 256, 257, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278, 279, 280, 281, 282, 283, 284, 285, 286, 287, a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated-hit function) which is a display prompting an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410) and which allows an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410) to be accepted multiple times if the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; and a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed. The device is provided with a second prompting sound output means capable of outputting an operation prompting sound (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166, etc.), and even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed, and in this case, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, Even when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change in response to this may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times. (See FIG. 174 ), when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, if a situation appears in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then a situation appears in which an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not accepted despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state (for example, at the timing tBa2-C2 shown in FIG. 184 185 ), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state until the end of the period in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not performed based on the detection of the operation state maintained until then while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is in a non-display state. It is designed so that it will not be repeated (see Figures 184 and 185, etc.), and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound can be output, and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound can be output, which is expected to create a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times on the operating means, providing a favorable sense of tension.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and then a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBc2-C2, timing tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display After the period during which the display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed has ended, if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBc5B and timing tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 49th configuration B49 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for operations to be permitted for the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is in a hidden state may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when operations to the sword decorative body 5001 are permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on the operation reception for the sword decorative body 5001, or operation or release of operation for an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (while operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted or when operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted), the second operation prompt sound is always output (see, for example, Figures 164 and 166), but when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there may be both cases where the first operation prompt sound is output (see Figures 168 and 170) and where the first operation prompt sound is not output (see Figure 172). With this configuration, even when multiple operations are permitted for an operating means and an operation-related display is displayed, the first operating means may or may not emit the first operation prompt sound, which provides a degree of secrecy. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operating means, which is expected to add tension and improve the presentation.

With this configuration, when the first operation-related display is displayed for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), the first operation prompt sound may or may not be output, which can provide a degree of secrecy. However, if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) that has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is kept in an operating state even after the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden, a situation can once again arise in which operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is hidden, which can be expected to create a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function) is displayed. However, if operation is no longer accepted while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function) is displayed, even if the operation state is maintained after the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function) is made invisible, a situation in which operation is accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function) is hidden will not occur again, which is expected to add tension and maintain interest in the game.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 49th configuration B49 and each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times; however, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed rather than being hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 49th configuration B49 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 49th configuration B49 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to make it so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point may occur again.

In addition, in realizing the configuration of the 49th configuration B49 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" can be made to be displayable in any of a number of display modes including the first mode (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) and the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), and when the first mode (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound corresponding to the first operation-related display is not output, and when the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound corresponding to the first operation-related display can be output.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 49th configuration B49 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function" is displayed, if a situation occurs in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 multiple times, and then a situation occurs in which no operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 despite the sword decorative body 5001 being maintained in an operating state, the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function" is displayed in the first mode (shown in Figure 172). Whether the display is in the first mode (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 168) or the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168 or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), it is desirable to keep the sword decoration 5001 in an operational state even after the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is hidden, so that when a predetermined start condition is met under such circumstances, operations for the sword decoration 5001 are again accepted based on the detection of the operation state that has been maintained up to that point, allowing the player to continue playing.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when an "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when a first operation prompt sound corresponding to the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is output (see Figure 168 or Figure 170, etc.) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see Figure 172, etc.), but the changes that occur after an operation is accepted may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, as the 50th configuration B50, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) that prompts an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that allows multiple operations for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) to be received if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) in response to an operation received for the second operating means (operation button 410). and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of a so-called auto-repeated-hit function) which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and which allows operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410) to be performed multiple times when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the display is in a display state. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to this acceptance may be performed, and in this case, when the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance on the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is performed multiple times. Even in a state where the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). After a situation arises where the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, If a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in the operating state (for example, at timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 191), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is continued to be maintained in the operating state thereafter, there will be no case in which operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) will be performed again based on detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto rapid hit function) is in the hidden state (see FIG. 191), and if post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes can be set to a specific time or less (such as the 6B acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 191). In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled, the intervals at which operations are accepted are set to relatively short intervals, which is expected to make it easier to recognize at a relatively early stage that an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) is not being accepted, and to prompt the user to cancel the operation of the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not performed despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, as shown in Figures 192 and 19 3), if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is kept hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 50th configuration B50 and the configurations of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions) for allowing operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is hidden may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when operations on the sword decorative body 5001 are allowed, the result of a presentation determination based on the operation received on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for allowing operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions).

In addition, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the interval when a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) (the interval at which a post-acceptance change occurs in the auto-repeated tapping function) may be set to a specific time or less (such as the third B acceptance state shown in FIG. 168, the fourth B acceptance state shown in FIG. 170, the fifth B acceptance state shown in FIG. 172, the seventh B acceptance state shown in FIG. 176, etc.), and when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval when a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operating means (operation button 410) (the interval at which a post-acceptance change occurs in the auto-repeated tapping function) may be set to a specific time or less (such as the first B acceptance state shown in FIG. 164, the sixth B acceptance state shown in FIG. 174, etc.) or may be set to a time longer than the specific time (such as the second B acceptance state shown in FIG. 166, etc.).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval. This makes it possible to easily recognize when the auto-repeated tapping function has been disabled relatively early. In addition, even after a situation arises where no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) being maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) remains. If the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is kept in an operating state while in a hidden state until a predetermined permissible condition is met, a situation may arise again in which an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point. Therefore, it is expected that interest in playing will be maintained in an optimal manner when the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be relatively short or relatively long, and when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it may not necessarily be recognized relatively quickly. In addition, after a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operating state, there is no case in which an operation for the second operating means (operation button 410) is accepted again based on the detection of the operation state maintained up until that point when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for which the auto-repeated function is enabled) is not displayed. This is expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410) when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for which the auto-repeated function is enabled) is not displayed.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 50th configuration B50 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 50th configuration B50 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 50th configuration B50 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to make it so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point may occur again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 50th configuration B50 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 50th configuration B50 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval (the interval at which operations are automatically accepted) when multiple operations are accepted for the operation button 410 based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is not displayed may never be longer than a specific time, but may always be shorter than a specific time (see Figure 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 50th configuration B50 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B acceptance-permitted state), the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may never be longer than a specific time, but may always be shorter than a specific time (see FIG. 164, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 50th configuration B50 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (for example, message display MB2 corresponding to the 2B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may be either longer than a specific time or shorter than a specific time (see FIG. 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 50th configuration B50 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 when a situation arises in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are accepted multiple times while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, and the interval at which operations are again accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 based on the detection of the above-mentioned operating state maintained while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, may be the same (interval).

Furthermore, for example, as the 51st configuration B51, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) that prompts an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that can accept operations for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and a second operation-related display means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means (operation button 410). and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of a so-called auto-repeated-hit function) which is a display prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and which allows operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410) to be performed multiple times when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the display is in a display state. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to this acceptance may be performed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance on the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is performed multiple times. Even in a state where the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). After a situation arises where the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, If a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state (for example, at timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 191), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is continued to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, there will be no case in which an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) will be accepted again based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto rapid-fire function) is in a hidden state (see FIG. 191), and if post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes can be set to a fixed time (such as the 6B acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 191). In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled, the interval at which operations are accepted is set to a fixed time, which is expected to make it easier to recognize relatively early on that an operation is not being accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410), and to prompt the user to cancel the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not performed despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, as shown in Figures 192 and 19 3), if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is kept hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 51st configuration B51 and the configurations of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is hidden may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined permissible conditions).

In addition, when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) (the interval between post-acceptance changes in the auto-repeated tapping function) is set to a fixed time (predetermined time) (such as the 3B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 168, the 4B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 170, the 5B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 172, the 7B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 176, etc.), and the second operating means (operation button 4 10) is maintained in an operating state, the interval (the interval at which a post-acceptance change occurs with the auto-repeated-tap function) when a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to an operation accepted by the second operating means (operation button 410) may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B acceptance state shown in FIG. 164, or the sixth B acceptance state shown in FIG. 174), or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined) (for example, the second B acceptance state shown in FIG. 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). This makes it possible to easily recognize relatively early on when the auto-repeated tapping function has been disabled. In addition, even after a situation arises where no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) being maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related display (operation-related information related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) remains displayed. If the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is in a hidden state, a situation may arise again in which an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point. Therefore, it can be expected that interest in playing will be maintained in an appropriate manner when the auto-rapid-hit function is activated for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed. On the other hand, when the so-called automatic rapid-fire function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be set to a fixed time (predetermined time) or an indefinite time (non-predetermined time), and in addition to the fact that the automatic rapid-fire function is disabled, it is not necessarily possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, after a situation arises where no operation is accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state, the second operating means (operation button 410) may be set to an operating state. Even if the state is maintained, there is no case where an operation is again accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function) is not displayed. Therefore, it can be expected that the sense of tension when the auto-rapid function is activated for the second operating means (operation button 410) while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid function) is not displayed will be maintained in an optimal manner.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 51st configuration B51 and each of the above-mentioned examples, if the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 51st configuration B51 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 51st configuration B51 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to make it so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point may occur again.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 51st configuration B51 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 51st configuration B51 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval (the interval at which operations are automatically accepted) when multiple operations are accepted for the operation button 410 based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operated state when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is not displayed may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) rather than an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined) (see Figure 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 51st configuration B51 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which "an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a specific mode (for example, message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B acceptance-permitted state), the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may not be an indefinite time (a time not determined in advance), but may always be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (see FIG. 164, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 51st configuration B51 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (for example, message display MB2 corresponding to the 2B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may be set to an indefinite time (a time not predetermined) rather than a fixed time (a time determined in advance) (see FIG. 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 51st configuration B51 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 when a situation arises in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are accepted multiple times while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, and the interval at which operations are again accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 based on the detection of the above-mentioned operating state maintained while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, may be the same (interval).

Furthermore, for example, as the 52nd configuration B52, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a display that prompts an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, a first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) that can receive an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times, and a first operation-related display that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means (operation button 410). and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of a so-called auto-repeated-hit function), which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be performed multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to this acceptance may be performed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance on the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) can be performed multiple times (see FIG. 176 ). Even in a state where the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). After a situation arises where the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times even though the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state. When a situation arises in which no operation is accepted in response to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 191), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operation state thereafter, there are no cases in which an operation is accepted again for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto rapid-fire function) is in a hidden state (see FIG. 191). When the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times, a corresponding post-non-operation display (for example, post-non-operation display HB2) can be displayed (for example, see FIG. 166(f) and FIG. 167). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) has been released, and it can be expected that interest in playing will be maintained in an appropriate manner after a situation arises in which no operation is being received on the second operation means (operation button 410) even though the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not performed despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, as shown in Figures 192 and 19 3), if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is kept hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 52nd configuration B52 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions) for allowing operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is hidden may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when operations on the sword decorative body 5001 are allowed, the result of a presentation determination based on the operation received on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for allowing operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-operation display is not displayed (see, for example, Figures 168 to 173, 176, etc.). However, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception of the second operating means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-operation display (e.g., post-operation display HB2) may be displayed (see, for example, Figure 166(f), 167, etc.).

With this configuration, if the operation state for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state," is maintained until a specified tolerance condition is met while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state," a situation may arise again where operations are accepted for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state." However, since this is difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is released, it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), if operations are no longer accepted while the "second operation-related display is in a hidden state," even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operating state, operations for the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be accepted again based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is in a hidden state. However, when the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released, this can be easily recognized and the player can be encouraged to operate it again, which is expected to maintain tension and increase interest in the game.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 52nd configuration B52 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 52nd configuration B52 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 52nd configuration B52 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to make it so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point may occur again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 52nd configuration B52 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operation state and operations are received multiple times for the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, it is possible for the corresponding post-non-operation display to be displayed (see Figures 166(f), 167, etc.), or for the post-non-operation display not to be displayed (see Figures 164(f), 165, 174, etc.).

In this case, even if the post-non-operation display is displayed (see FIG. 166), it is desirable to prevent a new sound from being output when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (see FIG. 166).

Furthermore, it goes without saying that if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the operation button 410 despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operation state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, this will trigger the display after non-operation not to be displayed.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the operation button 410 despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operation state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, this will not serve as a trigger for the post-non-operation display to be displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 52nd configuration B52 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed; however, when the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 52nd configuration B52 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, it is possible to have both a case where a corresponding post-non-operation display is displayed (see FIG. 166, etc.) and a case where the post-non-operation display is not displayed (see FIG. 164, etc.).

Furthermore, for example, as the 53rd configuration B53, there may be provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by a player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result obtained in the determination by the determination means, a first post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) that prompts an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and which allows multiple operations for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) to be received if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and a second post-acceptance change means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means (operation button 410). and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of a so-called auto-repeated-hit function) which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and which allows an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) to be accepted multiple times when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the display is in a display state. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) may be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176 ). Even in a state where the second operation means (operation button 410) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). After a situation appears where the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state with the second operation related display (operation related display for the operation button 410) being not displayed and a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, if a situation appears where no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state (for example, For example, at timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 191, even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state thereafter, there is no case where an operation is again accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is in a hidden state (see FIG. 191). When the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410), this is a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time (such as the secondB post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in FIG. 166(h)) in an inaudible state (see, for example, FIG. 166(h)). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) has been released, and it can be expected that interest in playing will be maintained in an appropriate manner after a situation arises in which no operation is being received on the second operation means (operation button 410) even though the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not performed despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, as shown in Figures 192 and 19 3), if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is kept hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 53rd configuration B53 and the configurations of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is hidden may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined permissible conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not serve as a trigger for making the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible (see, for example, Figures 168 to 173, 176, etc.), whereas when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) and the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may serve as a trigger for making at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible (such as the secondB post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166(h)) inaudible (see, for example, Figure 166(h)).

With this configuration, if the operation state for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state," is maintained until a specified tolerance condition is met while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state," a situation may arise again where operations are accepted for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state." However, since this is difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is released, it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), if operations are no longer accepted while the "second operation-related display is in a hidden state," even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operating state, operations for the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be accepted again based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is in a hidden state. However, when the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released, this can be easily recognized and the player can be encouraged to operate it again, which is expected to maintain tension and increase interest in the game.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 53rd configuration B53 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 53rd configuration B53 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 53rd configuration B53 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to make it so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point may occur again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 53rd configuration B53 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state and operations are accepted for the operation button 410 multiple times and the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time (such as the 2B post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in FIG. 166(h)) inaudible (see FIG. 166(h) etc.), or to not make the performance sounds that were audible at that time inaudible (see FIG. 164(h), FIG. 174(h), etc.).

Incidentally, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to a non-operated state, even if this is used as an opportunity to make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time inaudible, it is desirable that no new sound be output in response to the non-operated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 53rd configuration B53 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if "when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to an inoperated state, at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time is made inaudible," the performance sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the changes after acceptance, and may be, for example, another performance sound such as background music, or it may be all performance sounds that are in an audible state at that time.

Furthermore, when the configuration according to each of the above-mentioned performance examples is realized, when a situation arises in which operation of the operation button 410 is not accepted despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state, it goes without saying that this will not be the trigger for making the performance sound that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 53rd configuration B53 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function" is displayed, this may serve as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that were audible at that time inaudible; however, when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function" is not displayed, this may not serve as a trigger to make the effect sounds that were audible at that time inaudible.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 53rd configuration B53 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state while the "operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, this may trigger either a case where at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible (see FIG. 166, etc.), or a case where at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time is not made inaudible (see FIG. 164, etc.).

Furthermore, for example, the 54th configuration B54 includes a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and When the display is in a display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, an operation reception for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be performed multiple times. A first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), a second post-acceptance change execution means is capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation reception for the second operating means (operation button 410), and a second post-acceptance change execution means for the second operating means (operation button 410). and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-function), which is a display that prompts the user to perform an operation to activate the second operation means (operation button 410), and which can accept operations for the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the display is in a display state. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-function) is not displayed, if an operation for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176 ). Even when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-function) is not displayed, When an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). After a situation occurs in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state with the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) not being displayed, and a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, if a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state (for example, at timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 191), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is continued to be maintained in an operation state thereafter, the second operation-related display (the The second operation means (operation button 410) is not subjected to operation acceptance again based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the operation related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the automatic rapid-hit function is in a hidden state (see FIG. 191 ), and after the second operation means (operation button 410) is set to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation acceptance of the second operation means (operation button 410), the second operation means (operation button 410) is not subjected to operation acceptance again based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the operation related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the automatic rapid-hit function is in a hidden state (see FIG. 191 ). When the state is changed back to the operating state, this triggers at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h) or the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 shown in FIG. 174(h)) to become inaudible (for example, see timing tBa2-C1 in FIG. 164 or timing tBf2-C1 in FIG. 174), so it can be expected that the second operating means (operation button 410) will be put back into the operating state, indicating that an operation has been accepted.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not performed despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, as shown in Figures 192 and 19 3), if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is kept hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 54th configuration B54 and the configurations of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions) for allowing operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is hidden may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when operations on the sword decorative body 5001 are allowed, the result of a presentation determination based on the operation received on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for allowing operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation state of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and then the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state again, there is no case where this triggers the audible sound effect at that time to be made inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, Figure 176, etc.), whereas when a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation of the second operating means (operation button 410), there is no case where the second operating sound effect is made inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, Figure 176, etc.). When the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state and then the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h) or the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 shown in FIG. 174(h)) inaudible (for example, see timing tBa2-C1 in FIG. 164 or timing tBf2-C1 in FIG. 174).

With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) that has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state" is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state," a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state." However, when the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is interrupted and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is operated again, it will be difficult to recognize that the operation was properly accepted, and therefore maintaining the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) in an operating state makes it easier to progress through the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), if operations are no longer accepted while the "second operation-related display is in a hidden state," even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operating state, operations for the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be accepted again based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is in a hidden state. However, when the auto-repeated press function (long press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) is discontinued and the second operating means (operation button 410) is operated again, it can be easily recognized that the operation was accepted properly, making it easier to restart the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) in order to ensure proper gameplay.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 54th configuration B54 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 54th configuration B54 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 54th configuration B54 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to make it so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point may occur again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 54th configuration B54 and each of the above-described performance examples, if the operation button 410 is changed to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state back to an operated state, only if a post-acceptance output sound (e.g., the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 or the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) representing one of the post-acceptance changes is audible at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time (e.g., the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 or the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) inaudible. In this case, instead of the post-acceptance output sound, a sound different from this may be made inaudible.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 54th configuration B54 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is changed to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state to an operated state again, even if the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is in an audible state at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state (see timing tBa2-C1 in FIG. 164 or timing tBf2-C1 in FIG. 174, etc.), or the performance sounds that were in an audible state at that time not in an inaudible state (see timing tBb2-C1 in FIG. 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations according to the above-mentioned effect examples, if "when the operation button 410 is operated again, at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible," the effect sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the post-acceptance changes; for example, it may be another effect sound such as background music, or it may be all effect sounds that are audible at that time.

Also, for example, the 55th configuration B55 includes a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, an effect display means (effect display device 1600) that displays effects, a judgment means that makes a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and the display is in a display state a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is in a state where the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is in an operating state, an operation can be accepted multiple times for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001); a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display prompting an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) and displaying the second operation means (operation button 410) when the display is in a display state. When the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be performed multiple times, and a second operation-related display means is provided that can display a second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function). Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted, a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed. In this case, the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) When the operation state is maintained, post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword ornamentation 5001) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176), and even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), post-acceptance changes in response to this may be executed. In this case, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times. 174, and after a situation appears in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times in a state in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, and a situation appears in which an operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not performed despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state (for example, at the timing shown in FIG. 191). Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operating state after that, there is no case where an operation is again accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is in a hidden state (see FIG. 191), and there is no case where an operation is again accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is in a hidden state (see FIG. 191). When an operation (specific operation) is performed on the operation means (operation button 410), as the post-acceptance change according to the detection information obtained at that time, both a display change (for example, post-acceptance display HB7 shown in FIG. 176, etc.) in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) and a change different from the display change (for example, the seventh B post-acceptance output sound Sα7 shown in FIG. 176, etc.) can occur, and when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, the operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) When a (predetermined operation) is performed, the post-acceptance change according to the detection information obtained at that time can be either a display change in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) (for example, the post-acceptance display HB6 shown in FIG. 174) or a change different from the display change (for example, the 6B post-acceptance output sound Sα6 shown in FIG. 174). Therefore, even if an operation is accepted for either the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) or the second operating means (operation button 410) when no operation-related display is displayed, it can be suitably indicated that the operation was accepted appropriately.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not performed despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, as shown in Figures 192 and 19 3), if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is kept hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 55th configuration B55 and the configurations of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is hidden may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined permissible conditions).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 55th configuration B55 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is operated (specific operation) and the post-acceptance change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated (when the first operating means is set to an operating state in a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is not permitted), if a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operated state (when a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted), an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted based on the detection of the maintained operation state, but at this time, it is possible to prevent a display change in the performance display device 1600 from occurring (even once) as a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance, and to have only changes different from the display change executed multiple times. In other words, in this case, the effect shown in FIG. 192 will not appear (there will be no possibility of the post-acceptance display HB7 being displayed at timing tBg4C), and the effect shown in FIG. 193 will always appear. With this configuration, even if a specific operation performed on the sword decorative element 5001 is not accepted and the corresponding post-acceptance change is not initiated, the post-acceptance change will appear simply by maintaining the sword decorative element 5001 in an operated state. However, as a trade-off, the display change on the effect display device 1600 will not appear as the post-acceptance change, which is expected to maintain a favorable sense of tension. However, even in this case, when the first operating means (sword decorative element 5001) is in a non-operated state and a new operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operating means (sword decorative element 5001) while the first operation-related display is not being displayed, it is desirable to have both the post-acceptance change being executed in the manner shown in FIG. 176 and the post-acceptance change being executed in the manner shown in FIG. 178.

Alternatively, in realizing the configuration relating to the 55th configuration B55 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, after a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 while the "operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if an operation is accepted again for the sword decoration 5001 based on the detection of the above-mentioned operation state maintained while the "operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is in a hidden state, it is possible for there to be both a case in which a display change occurs in the performance display device 1600 as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance (see Figure 192), and a case in which no display change occurs (see Figure 193). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult or easy to recognize that an operation has been received again for the sword decorative element 5001 based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative element 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is in a hidden state, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game and optimally maintaining the sense of tension when maintaining the sword decorative element 5001 in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative element 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is in a hidden state.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 55th configuration B55 and each of the above-mentioned examples, if the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 55th configuration B55 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 55th configuration B55 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to make it so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point may occur again.

In addition, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is not displayed and the "display change in the performance display device 1600" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is not executed, it is desirable that a "change different from the display change (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7)" be executed multiple times in the same manner as that which appears when the "display change in the performance display device 1600" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs.

Furthermore, for example, as the 56th configuration B56, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination by the determination means, a first post-acceptance change executing means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and an image display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that changes the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) when the image display is in a displayed state. 01) is maintained in an operating state, operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be performed multiple times, a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as an object for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), a first prompting light emitting means capable of executing operation prompting light (for example, 4B operation prompting light LB4) to encourage operation for the first operating means, separately from the first operation-related display which is an image display that encourages operation for the first operating means, and a post-acceptance change that corresponds to the operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410). a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function) which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410), and which can accept operations on the second operation means (the operation button 410) multiple times when the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state; and a display means that prompts an operation on the second operation means, separately from the second operation-related display which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operation means. and a second prompt light emitting means capable of emitting operation prompt light (for example, a first B operation prompt light LB1 or a second B operation prompt light LB2) to prompt the user to perform the operation. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the first operating means (the sword decorative body 5001), a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the first operating means (the sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (the sword decorative body 5001) may be executed multiple times. Even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change corresponding to this may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). When a situation occurs in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (for example, at timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 191), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state thereafter. Even if the state continues to be maintained, there is no case where an operation is again accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is in a non-display state (see FIG. 191 ), and there is no case where an operation is again accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, see FIG. 192 ). In the 7B operation acceptance state shown in FIGS. 76 to 178), operation prompting light is not emitted to prompt operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), but in a state where the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means (for example, the 4B operation acceptance state shown in FIG. 170), operation prompting light is emitted to prompt operation of the first operating means (for example, 4B operation prompting light LB4), which is expected to provide an ideal sense of tension when the first operation-related display is not displayed and multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not performed despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, as shown in Figures 192 and 19 3), if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is kept hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 56th configuration B56 and the configurations of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is hidden may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined permissible conditions).

Furthermore, in a state where the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, the 7B acceptance state shown in FIG. 176), operation prompt illumination, which is an image display that prompts operation for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), is not executed, and the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). In a state where multiple operations are permitted (when a period occurs during which the first operation-related display is displayed), there may be two cases in which operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt the player to operate the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden) (e.g., the 4B operation-prompting state shown in FIG. 170), and there may also be cases in which operation-prompting light is not emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden) (e.g., the 3B operation-prompting state shown in FIG. 168). This provides confidentiality for the first operating means by not emitting operation-prompting light even when the first operation-related display is displayed, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension.

With this configuration, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is in a hidden state, the operation-promoting light will not be emitted even if the state becomes one in which operation acceptance for the first operation means (the sword decoration 5001) is permitted. However, if the first operation means (the sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, operation acceptance for the first operation means (the sword decoration 5001) can be resumed even while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is in a hidden state, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably created while preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, operation-prompting light is not necessarily emitted even if a state is reached in which acceptance of operations for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is permitted. Therefore, although the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) encourages operation, a certain degree of confidentiality is maintained, and it can be expected that this "method different from when the first operation-related display is not displayed" will effectively add tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (when there is a period during which the second operation-related display is displayed), operation prompting light to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) may be always activated (for at least a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which can be expected to add a sense of tension while improving the presentation.

Furthermore, even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is not displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation prompting light to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) may always be activated (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until when it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which can be expected to add tension while improving the presentation.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 56th configuration B56 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 56th configuration B56 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 56th configuration B56 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to make it so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point may occur again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 56th configuration B56 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" can be displayed in one of multiple display modes, including the first mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) and the second mode (message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), and that when the first mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the sword decorative body 5001, operation prompting light emission to prompt the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is not executed, and when the second mode (message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) is displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the sword decorative body 5001, operation prompting light emission (for example, 4B operation prompting light LB4) to prompt the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is executed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 56th configuration B56 and each of the above-mentioned examples, it is desirable to be able to play such that, after the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state even after the period during which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" has ended, whether the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed in the first form (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) or the second form (message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) while the operating state is maintained, operations for the sword decoration 5001 are again accepted based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (when a predetermined start condition is met while the display is maintained).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 56th configuration B56 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed and multiple operations are allowed to be accepted for the sword decorative body 5001, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (see Figure 170, etc.) and when operation-prompting light is not emitted to prompt an operation on the first operating means (see Figures 168 and 172, etc.), but the changes that occur after acceptance of an operation may be the same.

Also, for example, as the 57th configuration B57, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state, When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, an operation for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be accepted multiple times. A first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, a first operation prompt sound (for example, a third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or a third B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 17 a first prompting sound output means capable of outputting a fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 0, a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); a second operation-related display (a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated-hit function) which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) and which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, can accept an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times. 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166, etc.) corresponding to the second operation-related display, and when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed, the second operation-related display means is provided with: a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function; and a second prompting sound output means capable of outputting a second operation prompting sound (for example, a first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164, or a second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166, etc.) corresponding to the second operation-related display, Even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) may be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176). When an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a change after acceptance may be executed accordingly. In this case, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a change after acceptance may be executed multiple times in response to the operation accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (see FIG. 174). When the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and acceptance of an operation for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted, When the state transitions from the state where the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) to the state where the acceptance of an operation to the first operation means (the sword ornament 5001) is permitted without being displayed, no sound (including the first operation prompt sound) is output (for example, see FIGS. 192 and 193 ), and when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is not displayed and the second operation means (the operation button 41 When the state transitions from one in which acceptance of operations for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not permitted to one in which acceptance of operations for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted without the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) being displayed, no sound (including the second operation prompt sound) is output in response to this (see, for example, FIG. 191), which is expected to provide an ideal sense of tension when acceptance of multiple operations for the operation means is permitted without the operation-related display being displayed.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not performed despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, as shown in Figures 192 and 19 3), if the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is kept hidden and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may again appear in which operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point (for example, timing tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 57th configuration B57 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions) for allowing operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is hidden may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when operations on the sword decorative body 5001 are allowed, the result of a presentation determination based on the operation received on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for allowing operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 57th configuration B57 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) can be displayed in any of a number of display modes, including the first mode (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) and the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170). When the first mode (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not output, and when the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound corresponding to the first operation-related display can be output. This provides confidentiality by not issuing an operation prompt sound depending on the display mode, even when the first operation-related display is displayed for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension.

With this configuration, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is in a hidden state, the first operation prompt sound will not be output even if the state becomes one in which operation acceptance for the first operation means (the sword decoration 5001) is permitted. However, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, operation acceptance for the first operation means (the sword decoration 5001) can again be made while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is in a hidden state, which is expected to create an appropriate sense of tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, the first operation prompting sound is not necessarily output even if a state is reached in which acceptance of operations for the first operating means (the sword ornament 5001) is permitted. Therefore, although the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) prompts operation, a certain degree of confidentiality is maintained, and it can be expected that this "method different from when the first operation-related display is not displayed" will effectively add tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed (while operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, or when operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted), the second operation prompt sound may be output without fail. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to add a sense of tension while improving the presentation.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 57th configuration B57 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 57th configuration B57 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point while the first operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 57th configuration B57 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if a period in which the second operation-related display is displayed occurs again when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to make it so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, a situation in which operations are accepted for the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until that point may occur again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 57th configuration B57 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable to be able to play after the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operation state even after the period during which the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed has ended, and whether the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed in the first form (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) or the second form (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) while the operation state is maintained, so that operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are again accepted based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until then while the first operation-related display "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (when a predetermined start condition is met while it is maintained),

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when an "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when a first operation prompt sound corresponding to the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is output (see Figure 168 or Figure 170, etc.) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see Figure 172, etc.), but the changes that occur after an operation is accepted may be the same.

Also, for example, as the 58th configuration B58, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by a player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) that prompts an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that allows multiple operation receptions for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and a second post-acceptance change means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means (operation button 410). and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of a so-called auto-repeated-hit function), which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the display is in a display state, an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176 ). Even in a state where the second operation means (operation button 410) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change may be executed accordingly. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may be executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) (see FIG. 174). After a situation appears where the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state in a state where the second operation related display (operation related display for the operation button 410) is not displayed and a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a situation appears where no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state (see FIG. 174). For example, even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state from time to time (such as timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 188) until (and even after) the state in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there will be no case in which operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is again performed based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see FIG. 188), and when post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes can be set to a specific time or less (such as the 6B acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 189). In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled, the intervals at which operations are accepted are set to relatively short intervals, which is expected to make it easier to recognize at a relatively early stage that an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) is not being accepted, and to prompt the user to cancel the operation of the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not accepted despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function, is displayed, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, at times tBg4A and tBg4B shown in Figures 189 and 190), a state in which operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may again appear based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 58th configuration B58 and the configurations of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions).

In addition, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the interval when a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) (the interval at which a post-acceptance change occurs in the auto-repeated tapping function) may be set to a specific time or less (such as the third B acceptance state shown in FIG. 168, the fourth B acceptance state shown in FIG. 170, the fifth B acceptance state shown in FIG. 172, the seventh B acceptance state shown in FIG. 176, etc.), and when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval when a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to the acceptance of an operation for the second operating means (operation button 410) (the interval at which a post-acceptance change occurs in the auto-repeated tapping function) may be set to a specific time or less (such as the first B acceptance state shown in FIG. 164, the sixth B acceptance state shown in FIG. 174, etc.) or may be set to a time longer than the specific time (such as the second B acceptance state shown in FIG. 166, etc.).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval. This makes it possible to easily recognize when the auto-repeated tapping function has been disabled relatively early. In addition, even after a situation arises where no operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state when the first operating-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is not displayed, the first operating-related display If the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state until the time when the operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may again occur in which an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point. Therefore, it can be expected that interest in playing will be maintained in an optimal manner when the auto-rapid-hit function is activated for the first operating means when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed. On the other hand, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be set to a relatively short interval or a relatively long interval, and when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is not necessarily possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, when a situation arises in which the second operating means (operation button 410) is not accepted for operation even though the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, Even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state until (or even after) the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed, there will be no further acceptance of operations for the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is displayed. This is expected to maintain an optimal sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410) when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 58th configuration B58 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 58th configuration B58 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation from reoccurring in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 58th configuration B58 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second operation means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 58th configuration B58 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, or the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the operation button 410, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 58th configuration B58 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval (the interval at which operations are automatically accepted) when multiple operations are accepted for the operation button 410 based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is not displayed may never be longer than a specific time, but may always be shorter than a specific time (see Figure 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 58th configuration B58 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B acceptance-permitted state), the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may never be longer than a specific time, but may always be shorter than a specific time (see FIG. 164, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 58th configuration B58 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (for example, message display MB2 corresponding to the 2B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may be either longer than a specific time or shorter than a specific time (see FIG. 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 58th configuration B58 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance (by the auto-rapid tapping function) when a situation arises in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are accepted multiple times while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is not displayed, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance (by the auto-rapid tapping function) after operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are again accepted based on the detection of the above-mentioned operating state that is maintained until the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed, may be the same.

Alternatively, when realizing the configuration according to the 58th configuration B58 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance (by the auto-rapid tapping function) when a situation arises in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are accepted multiple times while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is not displayed, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance (by the auto-rapid tapping function) when operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are accepted again based on the detection of the above-mentioned operating state that is maintained until the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed, may or may not be the same.

Furthermore, for example, as the 59th configuration B59, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), a first operation-related display means for displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) that prompts an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that allows multiple operation receptions for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, and a second post-acceptance change means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received for the second operating means (operation button 410). and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of a so-called auto-repeated-hit function) which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and which allows an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) to be accepted multiple times when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the display is in a display state. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance on the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) may be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176 ). Even in a state where the second operation means (operation button 410) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change may be executed in response to the acceptance of the operation. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). After a situation occurs where the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state in a state where the second operation-related display (operation related display for the operation button 410) is not displayed and a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, a situation occurs where no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) even though the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state. In this case (for example, at timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 188), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state thereafter until (and even after) the state in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there will be no case in which operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is again performed based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see FIG. 188), and in the case in which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance changes can be set to a fixed time (such as the sixth B acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 189). In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled, the intervals at which operations are accepted are set to a fixed interval, which is expected to make it easier to recognize relatively early on that an operation is not being accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410), and to prompt the user to cancel the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not accepted despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function, is displayed, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, at times tBg4A and tBg4B shown in Figures 189 and 190), a state in which operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may again appear based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 59th configuration B59 and the configurations of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be satisfied based on, for example, the result of a jackpot determination, or may be satisfied in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be satisfied based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions).

In addition, when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple executions of post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) (the interval between post-acceptance changes in the auto-repeated tapping function) is set to a fixed time (predetermined time) (such as the 3B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 168, the 4B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 170, the 5B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 172, the 7B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 176, etc.), and the second operating means (operation button 4 10) is maintained in an operating state, the interval (the interval at which a post-acceptance change occurs with the auto-repeated-tap function) when a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to an operation accepted by the second operating means (operation button 410) may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B acceptance state shown in FIG. 164, or the sixth B acceptance state shown in FIG. 174), or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined) (for example, the second B acceptance state shown in FIG. 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). Therefore, when the auto-repeated tapping function is disabled, it is possible to easily recognize this relatively early. In addition, even after a situation arises where operations are not accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) despite the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) not being displayed and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can still be used. If the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state until a related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point. Therefore, it is expected that interest in playing will be maintained in an optimal manner when the auto-rapid-hit function is activated for the first operating means when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed. In contrast to this, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be set to either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined), and in addition, when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is not necessarily possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, there is a situation in which no operation is accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410) even though the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed. Once this is detected, even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state until (or even after) the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed, there will be no further acceptance of operations for the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state that has been maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is displayed. This is expected to maintain an optimal sense of tension when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410) when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 59th configuration B59 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 59th configuration B59 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation from reoccurring in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 59th configuration B59 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second operation means that has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 59th configuration B59 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 59th configuration B59 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval (the interval at which operations are automatically accepted) when multiple operations are accepted for the operation button 410 based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operated state when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is not displayed may not be an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined), but may always be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (see Figure 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 59th configuration B59 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a specific mode (for example, message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may not be an indefinite time (a time not determined in advance), but may always be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (see FIG. 164, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 59th configuration B59 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (for example, message display MB2 corresponding to the 2B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may be set to an indefinite time (a time not predetermined) rather than a fixed time (a time determined in advance) (see FIG. 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 59th configuration B59 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance (by the auto-rapid tapping function) when a situation arises in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are accepted multiple times while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is not displayed, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance (by the auto-rapid tapping function) when operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are again accepted based on the detection of the above-mentioned operating state that is maintained until the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed, may be the same.

Alternatively, when realizing configuration B59 and the configurations described above for each of the performance examples, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance (by the auto-rapid tapping function) when a situation arises in which the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state and operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are accepted multiple times while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is not displayed, and the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance (by the auto-rapid tapping function) when operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are accepted again based on the detection of the above operating state that is maintained until the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed, may or may not be the same.

Furthermore, for example, as the 60th configuration B60, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). and a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which, when the display is in a display state and the first operation means (the sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, an operation to the first operation means (the sword ornament 5001) can be accepted multiple times; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted to the second operation means (the operation button 410); and second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function), which is a display that prompts an operation on the operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176 ). Even in a state where the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). After a situation appears in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, if a situation appears in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state (for example, at timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 188), Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state until (or after) a state in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there is no case in which an operation is again accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see FIG. 188). When the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-operation display (e.g., post-operation display HB2) can be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 166(f) and FIG. 167). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) has been released, and it can be expected that interest in playing will be maintained in an appropriate manner after a situation arises in which no operation is being received on the second operation means (operation button 410) even though the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not accepted despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function, is displayed, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, at times tBg4A and tBg4B shown in Figures 189 and 190), a state in which operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may again appear based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point.

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 60th configuration B60 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined permissible conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be satisfied based on, for example, the result of a jackpot determination, or may be satisfied in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be satisfied based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined permissible conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception of the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-operation display is not displayed (see, for example, Figures 168 to 173, 176, etc.). However, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation reception of the second operating means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-operation display (e.g., post-operation display HB2) may be displayed (see, for example, Figure 166(f), 167, etc.).

With this configuration, if the operation state for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) that has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden" is maintained until the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operations are being accepted for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, but since this is difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is released, it is expected that tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), if operations are no longer accepted while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter (for example, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state until the second operation-related display is displayed and a specific permissible condition is met), operations for the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be accepted again based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 that is the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) was displayed. However, when the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released, this can be easily recognized and the player can be encouraged to operate it again, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension and increase interest in the game.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 60th configuration B60 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 60th configuration B60 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation from reoccurring in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 60th configuration B60 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second operation means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 60th configuration B60 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operation state and operations are received multiple times for the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, it is possible for the corresponding post-non-operation display to be displayed (see Figures 166(f), 167, etc.), or for the post-non-operation display not to be displayed (see Figures 164(f), 165, 174, etc.).

In this case, even if the post-non-operation display is displayed (see FIG. 166), it is desirable to prevent a new sound from being output when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (see FIG. 166).

Furthermore, it goes without saying that if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the operation button 410 despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operation state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, this will trigger the display after non-operation not to be displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 60th configuration B60 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed; however, when the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 60th configuration B60 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, it is possible to have both a case where a corresponding post-non-operation display is displayed (see FIG. 166, etc.) and a case where the post-non-operation display is not displayed (see FIG. 164, etc.).

Furthermore, for example, the 61st configuration B61 includes a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), When the display is in a display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, an operation for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be accepted multiple times. A first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function), a second post-acceptance change execution means is capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display means is configured to execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operating means (operation button 410). and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-function), which is a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the display is in a display state, an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-function) is not displayed, when an operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176 ), and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-function) is displayed, Even in a state where the second operation means (operation button 410) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). After a situation occurs where the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and a post-acceptance change corresponding to the acceptance of an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, if a situation occurs where no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state (for example, at timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 188), thereafter, the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed. Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state until (or even after) a state appears in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, there is no case in which an operation is again accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed (see FIG. 188). When the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), this can trigger at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time (such as the secondB post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in FIG. 166(h)) to be made inaudible (see, for example, FIG. 166(h)). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) has been released, and it can be expected that interest in playing will be maintained in an appropriate manner after a situation arises in which no operation is being received on the second operation means (operation button 410) even though the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not accepted despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function, is displayed, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, at times tBg4A and tBg4B shown in Figures 189 and 190), a state in which operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may again appear based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 61st configuration B61 and the configurations of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) are executed multiple times, and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not serve as a trigger for making the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible (see, for example, Figures 168 to 173, 176, etc.). However, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation reception for the second operating means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may serve as a trigger for making at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible (such as the secondB post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166(h)) inaudible (see, for example, Figure 166(h)).

With this configuration, if the operation state for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) that has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden" is maintained until the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operations are being accepted for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, but since this is difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is released, it is expected that tension will be maintained while increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), if operations are no longer accepted while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter (for example, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state until the second operation-related display is displayed and a specific permissible condition is met), operations for the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be accepted again based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 that is the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) was displayed. However, when the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released, this can be easily recognized and the player can be encouraged to operate it again, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension and increase interest in the game.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 61st configuration B61 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 61st configuration B61 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation from reoccurring in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 61st configuration B61 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second operation means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 61st configuration B61 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state and operations are accepted for the operation button 410 multiple times, and the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time (such as the 2B post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in FIG. 166(h)) inaudible (see FIG. 166(h) etc.), or the performance sounds that were audible at that time not inaudible (see FIG. 164(h) or FIG. 174(h) etc.).

Incidentally, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to a non-operated state, even if this is used as an opportunity to make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time inaudible, it is desirable that no new sound be output in response to the non-operated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 61st configuration B61 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if "when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to an inoperated state, at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time is made inaudible," the performance sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the changes after acceptance, and may be, for example, another performance sound such as background music, or it may be all performance sounds that are in an audible state at that time.

Furthermore, when the configuration according to each of the above-mentioned performance examples is realized, when a situation arises in which operation of the operation button 410 is not accepted despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state, it goes without saying that this will not be the trigger for making the performance sound that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 61st configuration B61 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function" is displayed, this may serve as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that were audible at that time inaudible; however, when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function" is not displayed, this may not serve as a trigger to make the effect sounds that were audible at that time inaudible.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 61st configuration B61 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state while the "operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, this may trigger either a case where at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible (see FIG. 166, etc.), or a case where at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time is not made inaudible (see FIG. 164, etc.).

Furthermore, for example, as the 62nd configuration B62, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and the display is in a displayed state. When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be accepted multiple times, and a first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function); a second post-acceptance change execution means is capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted to the second operating means (operation button 410); and a display that prompts an operation to the second operating means (operation button 410), and the display and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) that can receive operations for the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the first operation-related display means is in a display state. When an operation is accepted, a change after acceptance may be executed accordingly. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a change after acceptance according to the operation accepted for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) may be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176). Even when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a change after acceptance according to the operation may be executed. In this case, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state, a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). After a situation occurs in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state (for example, timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 188), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state from that point onwards until (and even after) a situation in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed appears, Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is turned off, there is no case where the operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is performed again based on the detection of the operation state maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed (see FIG. 188). After the second operation means (operation button 410) is turned off while the post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), When the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, this triggers at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h) or the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 shown in FIG. 174(h)) to become inaudible (for example, see timing tBa2-C1 in FIG. 164 or timing tBf2-C1 in FIG. 174), which can be expected to indicate that the second operating means (operation button 410) has been put back into the operated state and that an operation has been accepted.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not accepted despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function, is displayed, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, at times tBg4A and tBg4B shown in Figures 189 and 190), a state in which operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may again appear based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 62nd configuration B62 and each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation state of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and then the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state again, there is no case where this triggers the audible sound effect at that time to be made inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, Figure 176, etc.), whereas when a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation of the second operating means (operation button 410), there is no case where the second operating sound effect is made inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, Figure 176, etc.). When the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state and then the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h) or the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6 shown in FIG. 174(h)) inaudible (for example, see timing tBa2-C1 in FIG. 164 or timing tBf2-C1 in FIG. 174).

With this configuration, if the operation state for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) that has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden" is maintained until the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and a specified tolerance condition is met, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed. However, when the auto-rapid-hit function (long press function) for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is interrupted and the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is operated again, it will be difficult to recognize that the acceptance was appropriate, and therefore maintaining the operation state for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) makes it easier to progress through the game. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), if operations are no longer accepted while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter (for example, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state until the second operation-related display is displayed and a specific permissible condition is met), operations for the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be accepted again based on the detection of the operation state maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-press function is enabled) is displayed. However, when the auto-rapid-press function (long press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) is interrupted and the second operating means (operation button 410) is operated again, it can be easily recognized that the operation was accepted properly, making it easier to restart the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) in order to ensure proper gameplay.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 62nd configuration B62 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 62nd configuration B62 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation from reoccurring in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 62nd configuration B62 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second operation means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 62nd configuration B62 and each of the above-described performance examples, if the operation button 410 is changed to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state back to an operated state, only if a post-acceptance output sound (e.g., the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 or the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) representing one of the post-acceptance changes is audible at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time (e.g., the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 or the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) inaudible. In this case, instead of the post-acceptance output sound, a sound different from this may be made inaudible.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 62nd configuration B62 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is changed to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state to an operated state again, even if the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is in an audible state at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state (see timing tBa2-C1 in FIG. 164 or timing tBf2-C1 in FIG. 174, etc.), or the performance sounds that were in an audible state at that time not in an inaudible state (see timing tBb2-C1 in FIG. 166, etc.).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration of the 62nd configuration B62 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, if the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is not displayed, and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, and the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is audible at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make sure that the effect sound that was audible at that time is made inaudible (see timing tBf2-C1 in FIG. 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations according to the above-mentioned effect examples, if "when the operation button 410 is operated again, at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible," the effect sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the post-acceptance changes; for example, it may be another effect sound such as background music, or it may be all effect sounds that are audible at that time.

Also, for example, the 63rd configuration B63 may include a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, an effect display means (effect display device 1600) that displays effects, a determination means that makes a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the determination by the determination means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state, a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which, when a first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, an operation to the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be accepted multiple times; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted to the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display prompting an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, The apparatus is provided with a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which an operation to the operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times, and even in a state in which the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation to the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted, a post-acceptance change corresponding to this may be executed, and in this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) ) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176), and even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed. In this case, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174), and even when the second operation-related display ( When a situation occurs in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the operation-related display (operation related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, and then a situation occurs in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 188), thereafter the second operation-related display (operation related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed. Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state until (or after) a state in which the second operation related display (operation related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, there is no case in which an operation is again accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up until that point while the second operation related display (operation related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed (see FIG. 188), and even if the first operation related display (operation related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, When an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation-related display (operation related display related display for the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, both a display change (for example, the post-acceptance display HB7 shown in FIG. 176 ) and a change different from the display change (for example, the seventh B post-acceptance output sound Sα7 shown in FIG. 176 ) can occur in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) as the post-acceptance change according to the detection information obtained at that time. 410), the post-acceptance change according to the detection information obtained at that time can be either a display change on the performance display means (performance display device 1600) (for example, the post-acceptance display HB6 shown in FIG. 174) or a change different from the display change (for example, the sixth B post-acceptance output sound Sα6 shown in FIG. 174). Therefore, even if an operation is accepted on either the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) or the second operating means (operation button 410) when no operation-related display is displayed, it can be suitably indicated that the operation acceptance was appropriate.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not accepted despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function, is displayed, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, at times tBg4A and tBg4B shown in Figures 189 and 190), a state in which operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may again appear based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 63rd configuration B63 and the configurations of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be satisfied based on, for example, the result of a jackpot determination, or may be satisfied in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be satisfied based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 63rd configuration B63 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is operated (specific operation) and the post-acceptance change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated (when the first operating means is set to an operating state in a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is not permitted), if a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operated state (when a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted), an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is accepted based on the detection of the maintained operation state, but at this time, it is possible to prevent a display change in the performance display device 1600 from occurring (even once) as a post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance, and to have only changes different from the display change executed multiple times. In other words, in this case, the presentation mode shown in Fig. 192 will not appear (there will be no possibility that the post-acceptance display HB7 will be displayed at timing tBg4C), and the presentation mode shown in Fig. 193 will always appear. Also, in the examples shown in Figs. 189 and 190, in the 4B acceptance state that occurred at timing tBg4A or the 5B acceptance state that occurred at timing tBg4B, no display change will occur (even once) on the presentation display device 1600 as a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001). With this configuration, even if an operation (specific operation) of the sword decorative body 5001 is not accepted and the corresponding post-acceptance change is not initiated, the post-acceptance change will appear simply by maintaining the sword decorative body 5001 in the operated state. However, the trade-off is that the display change on the presentation display device 1600 will not appear as the post-acceptance change, which is expected to maintain a favorable sense of tension. However, even in this case, when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is in a non-operating state and a new operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) while the first operation-related display is not displayed, it is desirable that the post-acceptance change be performed in either the manner shown in FIG. 176 or the manner shown in FIG. 178.

Alternatively, in realizing the configuration according to the 63rd configuration B63 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, after a situation arises in which no operation is accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operated state (a state is reached in which acceptance of operations for the first operating means is accepted), an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the maintained operating state, and at this time, it is possible for there to be both cases in which a display change occurs in the performance display device 1600 as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the operation acceptance (see, for example, Figure 192), and cases in which no display change occurs (see, for example, Figure 193). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult or easy to recognize that an operation has been received again for the sword decorative element 5001 based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative element 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is in a hidden state, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game and optimally maintaining the sense of tension when maintaining the sword decorative element 5001 in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative element 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is in a hidden state.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 63rd configuration B63 and each of the above-mentioned examples, if the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decorative body 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 63rd configuration B63 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation from reoccurring in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 63rd configuration B63 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second operation means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

In addition, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operating state when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is not displayed and the "display change in the performance display device 1600" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is not executed, it is desirable that a "change different from the display change (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7)" be executed multiple times in the same manner as that which appears when the "display change in the performance display device 1600" as one of the post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs.

Also, for example, as the 64th configuration B64, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change executing means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and an image display that prompts an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that maintains the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) in an operating state when the image display is in a displayed state. a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) in which, when the first operation means (the sword ornament 5001) is held, an operation can be accepted multiple times for the first operation means (the sword ornament 5001); a first prompt light emitting means capable of executing operation prompt light (for example, 4B operation prompt light LB4) to encourage an operation for the first operation means, separately from the first operation-related display which is an image display encouraging an operation for the first operation means; a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the second operation means (the operation button 410); a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called automatic rapid-fire function), which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410), and which can receive an operation on the second operation means (the operation button 410) multiple times when the second operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a display state; and an operation-promoting light (for example, a first B operation-promoting light LB1 or a second B operation-promoting light LB2) that prompts an operation on the second operation means, separate from the second operation-related display that is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operation means. and a second prompt light emitting means capable of executing an operation prompt light LB2, etc., and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decoration 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001), a post-acceptance change in response to this may be executed, and in this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to the acceptance of an operation for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) may be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176), and the second operation-related display (the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed. Even in a state where the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a change after acceptance corresponding to the acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, a change after acceptance corresponding to the acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see FIG. 174). After a situation appears in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), if a situation appears in which no operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state (for example, timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 188), the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed (and also after the situation appears), Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operating state, there is no case where an operation is again accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up until that point while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed (see FIG. 188), and the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001). In a state where the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (for example, the 7B operation acceptance state shown in FIGS. 176 to 178), operation-prompting light is not emitted to prompt the player to operate the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), but in a state where the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (for example, the 4B operation acceptance state shown in FIG. 170), operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt the player to operate the first operating means (for example, the 4B operation acceptance state LB4), which is expected to provide an ideal sense of tension when the first operation-related display is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not accepted despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function, is displayed, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, at times tBg4A and tBg4B shown in Figures 189 and 190), a state in which operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may again appear based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 64th configuration B64 and the configurations of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions).

Furthermore, in a state where the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, the 7B acceptance state shown in FIG. 176), operation prompt illumination, which is an image display that prompts operation for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), is not executed, and the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). In a state where multiple operations are permitted (when a period occurs during which the first operation-related display is displayed), there may be two cases in which operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt the player to operate the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden) (e.g., the 4B operation-prompting state shown in FIG. 170), and there may also be cases in which operation-prompting light is not emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed to when it is hidden) (e.g., the 3B operation-prompting state shown in FIG. 168). This provides confidentiality for the first operating means by not emitting operation-prompting light even when the first operation-related display is displayed, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension.

With this configuration, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is in a hidden state, the operation prompt light will not be emitted even if the state becomes one in which operation acceptance for the first operation means (the sword decoration 5001) is permitted. However, if the operation state for the first operation means (the sword decoration 5001) in which operation acceptance is no longer permitted while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state" is maintained until the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation in which operation acceptance for the first operation means (the sword decoration 5001) is permitted while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed may once again occur, which is expected to provide an appropriate sense of tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, operation-prompting light is not necessarily emitted even if a state is reached in which acceptance of operations for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is permitted. Therefore, although the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) encourages operation, a certain degree of confidentiality is maintained, and it can be expected that this "method different from when the first operation-related display is not displayed" will effectively add tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (when there is a period during which the second operation-related display is displayed), operation prompting light to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) may be always activated (for at least a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which can be expected to add a sense of tension while improving the presentation.

Furthermore, even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is not displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation prompting light to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) may always be activated (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until when it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which can be expected to add tension while improving the presentation.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 64th configuration B64 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 64th configuration B64 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation from reoccurring in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 64th configuration B64 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second operation means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 64th configuration B64 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" can be displayed in one of multiple display modes, including the first mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) and the second mode (message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), and that when the first mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) is displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the sword decorative body 5001, operation prompting light emission to prompt the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is not executed, and when the second mode (message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) is displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the sword decorative body 5001, operation prompting light emission (for example, 4B operation prompting light LB4) to prompt the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is executed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 64th configuration B64 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable to be able to play such that, after the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state even after the period during which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed has ended, whether the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed in the first form (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168) or the second form (message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) while the operating state is maintained, operations for the sword decoration 5001 are again accepted based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained up until then while the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (when a predetermined start condition is met while it is being maintained),

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 64th configuration B64 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed and multiple operations are allowed to be accepted for the sword decorative body 5001, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (see Figure 170, etc.) and when operation-prompting light is not emitted to prompt an operation on the first operating means (see Figures 168 and 172, etc.), but the changes that occur after acceptance of an operation may be the same.

Also, for example, the 65th configuration B65 includes a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that operates the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) when the display is in a displayed state. a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) in which, when the state is maintained, operations for the first operating means (the sword decorative body 5001) can be accepted multiple times; and a first prompting sound output means capable of outputting a first operation prompting sound (for example, a third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or a fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword decorative body 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed. a second post-acceptance change execution means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); a second operation-related display means for displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated function) which is a display for prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) and which indicates that an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed, when an operation is accepted for the first operation means (the sword decorative body 5001), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed. In this case, when the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be executed multiple times (see FIG. 176). Even when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, when an operation is accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-acceptance change in response to this acceptance may be executed. In this case, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the second operation The second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is not displayed, and after a situation arises in which a post-acceptance change in response to an operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times (see FIG. 174), even though the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, When a situation where no operation is accepted occurs (for example, timing tBf2-C2 shown in FIG. 188), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state until (or after) a state where the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is not detected based on the detection of the operation state maintained until then while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed. The first operation prompt sound can be output when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and the second operation prompt sound can be output when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. This makes it easier to create situations where operations are accepted multiple times for the operating means, which is expected to provide a good sense of tension.

In this case, even if a situation arises in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not displayed and the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001), and then an operation acceptance for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is not accepted despite the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function, is displayed, and if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001, which is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, at times tBg4A and tBg4B shown in Figures 189 and 190), a state in which operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) may again appear based on the detection of the operating state maintained up to that point.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 65th configuration B65 and the configurations of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions) for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed may be met, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may be met in advance depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, or may be met based on a presentation determination when acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001 is permitted, the result of a presentation determination based on acceptance of operations on the sword decorative body 5001, or an operation or release of an operation on an operating means other than the sword decorative body 5001; the conditions are not particularly limited. Furthermore, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for accepting operations on the sword decorative body 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined tolerance conditions).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 65th configuration B65 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) can be displayed in any of a number of display modes, including the first mode (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) and the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170). When the first mode (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not output, and when the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound corresponding to the first operation-related display can be output. This provides secrecy by not issuing an operation prompt sound depending on the display mode, even when the first operation-related display is displayed for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension.

With this configuration, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is in a hidden state, the first operation prompt sound will not be output even if the state becomes one in which operations are permitted for the first operating means (the sword decoration 5001). However, if the operation state for the first operating means (the sword decoration 5001) in which operations are no longer being accepted while the "first operation-related display is in a hidden state" is maintained until the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and a predetermined tolerance condition is met, a situation in which operations are being accepted for the first operating means (the sword decoration 5001) while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed may once again occur, which is expected to provide an appropriate sense of tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, the first operation prompting sound is not necessarily output even if a state is reached in which acceptance of operations for the first operating means (the sword ornament 5001) is permitted. Therefore, although the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) prompts operation, a certain degree of confidentiality is maintained, and it can be expected that this "method different from when the first operation-related display is not displayed" will effectively add tension while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed (while operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, or when operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted), the second operation prompt sound may be output without fail. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to add a sense of tension while improving the presentation.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 65th configuration B65 and each of the above-mentioned examples, when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, if the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the sword decoration 5001 is no longer permitted, this situation may end in either a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.), or a state in which the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see FIG. 176, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 168, timing tBc1 is made to arrive after timing tBc2, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in an operating state before timing tBc2. In contrast, when the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise in which post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the operation button 410 are executed multiple times; however, when a specific termination condition is met and acceptance of operations for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, this situation may always be terminated in a state in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 65th configuration B65 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and the first operation means that has stopped accepting operations continues to be maintained in an operating state, it is also possible to prevent a situation from reoccurring in which operations are accepted multiple times for the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained until then, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 65th configuration B65 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second operation means, which has stopped accepting operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, continues to be maintained in an operating state, a situation may arise again in which operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the operation state that had been maintained until then, while the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration related to the 65th configuration B65 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" be able to be displayed in any of a number of display modes including the first mode (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) and the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), and that when the first mode (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not output, and when the first operation-related display is displayed in the second mode (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168, or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170), the first operation prompt sound is output.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 65th configuration B65 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable to be able to play after the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in an operation state even after the period during which the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed has ended, and whether the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed in the first form (message display MB5 shown in FIG. 172) or the second form (message display MB3 shown in FIG. 168 or message display MB4 shown in FIG. 170) while the operation state is maintained, so that operations for the sword decorative body 5001 are again accepted based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up until then while the first operation-related display "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (when a predetermined start condition is met while the first operation-related display is maintained), it is possible to play.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 65th configuration B65 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated hit function" is displayed and multiple operations are allowed to be accepted for the sword ornament 5001, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated hit function" differs between when the first operation prompt sound is output (see Figures 168 and 170, etc.) and when operation prompt light is not emitted to prompt operation of the first operating means (see Figure 172, etc.), but the changes that occur after acceptance of an operation may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, as the 66th configuration B66, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (so-called auto) that is an image display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state, can accept an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times. a first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target of the rapid-fire function; a first prompt light emitting means capable of executing operation prompt light (for example, 4B operation prompt light LB4) to prompt an operation on the first operation means separately from the first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts an operation on the first operation means; a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); and an image display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the image display is in a display state, a change is made after the operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410) is accepted multiple times. and a second prompt light emitting means capable of emitting operation prompt light (for example, first B operation prompt light LB1 or second B operation prompt light LB2) to prompt an operation on the second operating means, separate from the second operation related display, which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operating means. In a state where the first operation related display (operation related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 that is the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), operation prompt light emitting can be emitted to prompt an operation on the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-tap function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation-prompting light can be emitted to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 164(j) and 166(j)), and when a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a specific time or less (for example, the 1B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 164). In other words, in this case, when the operation prompting light appears to prompt the player to operate the second operating means (operation button 410), not only does the player feel a sense of anticipation that the so-called automatic rapid-fire function will be activated, but when the automatic rapid-fire function is in operation, it becomes easier to recognize this (because the intervals between operations are set to be relatively short), which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 for which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), an operation prompt light is emitted to prompt the operator to operate the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) (see, for example, FIG. 170(j)), and the operation prompt light is not emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) (see, for example, FIG. 168(j) and FIG. 172(j)). However, in either case, the interval between multiple operations for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) while the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance in the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) may be set to a specific time or less.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation prompt light emitting to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) is always enabled (at least part of the time between when the second operation-related display is displayed and when it is hidden), but when the operation prompt light emitting is being executed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval at which post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (the interval at which operations are accepted automatically) may be either equal to or shorter than a specific time (for example, the first B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 164) or longer than a specific time (for example, the second B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), the interval at which changes occur after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval, making it easier to recognize relatively early on that the auto-rapid-hit function is functioning or that the auto-rapid-hit function has stopped functioning.However, since the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and the operation prompt light is not necessarily emitted when multiple acceptance of operations is permitted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be either a relatively short interval or a relatively long interval, which may make it difficult to recognize relatively early on that the auto-rapid-hit function is functioning or that it has stopped functioning. However, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed and multiple acceptance of operations is permitted for the second operating means (operation button 410), the operation prompt light is always activated, so it can be expected that a different presentation from the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) will provide a sense of tension while favorably maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 66th configuration B66 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, or the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the operation button 410, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 66th configuration B66 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differ between when operation-prompting illumination is executed when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and when operation-prompting illumination is not executed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 66th configuration B66 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when the operation-prompting light is executed when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and when the operation-prompting light is not executed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)), but the changes that occur after the operation is accepted may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 66th configuration B66 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the intervals at which operations are accepted on the sword decorative body 5001 may be the same (time) in both cases where operation prompting light is emitted to prompt operations on the sword decorative body 5001 (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and where such operation prompting light is not emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 66th configuration B66 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval (the interval at which operations are automatically accepted) when multiple operations are accepted for the operation button 410 based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tap function" is not displayed may never be longer than a specific time, but may always be shorter than a specific time (such as the 6B acceptance-allowed state shown in FIG. 174).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration of the 66th configuration B66 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval (the interval at which operations are automatically accepted) when multiple operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 based on the sword decorative body 5001 being maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed can never be longer than a specific time, and can always be set to be shorter than a specific time (such as the 7B acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 176).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 66th configuration B66 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B reception allowance state), the interval between multiple operations for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation reception) may never be longer than a specific time, but may always be shorter than a specific time (such as the 1B reception allowance state shown in FIG. 164).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 66th configuration B66 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (for example, message display MB2 corresponding to the 2B reception acceptance state), the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may be either longer than a specific time or shorter than a specific time (such as the 2B reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 66th configuration B66 and each of the above-mentioned examples, a first light-emitting means may be used to emit light when illuminating the operation prompting operation of the sword ornament 5001, and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means may be used to emit light when illuminating the operation prompting operation of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 66th configuration B66 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the second light-emitting means will not emit light during the period in which operation-promoting light is emitted to prompt operation of the sword ornament 5001, but the first light-emitting means may emit light during the period in which operation-promoting light is emitted to prompt operation of the operation button 410 (even if operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted).

Also, for example, as the 67th configuration B67, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (so-called auto-repeated button) that is an image display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that can accept an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state. a first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as a function activation target; a first prompting light emitting means capable of executing operation prompting light (for example, 4B operation prompting light LB4) prompting an operation on the first operation means separately from the first operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation on the first operation means; a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); and an image display prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the image display is in a display state, an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be performed multiple times. The apparatus includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function), and a second prompt light emitting means capable of executing operation prompt light (for example, first B operation prompt light LB1 or second B operation prompt light LB2) to prompt an operation on the second operation means, separately from the second operation-related display which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operation means, and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), operation prompt light emitting can be executed (for example, 170(j), etc.), when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation prompt light can be emitted to prompt the operator to operate the second operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 164(j) and 166(j)), and when a post-acceptance change is executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the 1B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 164, etc.). In other words, in this case, when the operation prompting light appears to prompt the player to operate the second operating means (operation button 410), not only does the player feel a sense of anticipation that the so-called automatic rapid-fire function will be activated, but when the automatic rapid-fire function is in operation, it becomes easier to recognize this (as the intervals between operations are set to a fixed time), which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 for which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is activated) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), there are cases in which operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) (see, for example, FIG. 170(j)), and cases in which operation-prompting light is not emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) (see, for example, FIG. 168(j) and FIG. 172(j)). However, in either case, the interval between multiple operations for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance in the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

In addition, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation prompt illumination to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) is always enabled (at least part of the time between when the second operation-related display is displayed and when it is hidden). However, while the operation prompt illumination is being executed, the interval at which post-acceptance changes are made multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 164) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined) (for example, the second B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), the interval at which changes occur after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time), making it possible to easily recognize relatively early on that the auto-rapid-hit function is functioning or that the auto-rapid-hit function has stopped functioning.However, since the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and the operation prompt light is not necessarily emitted when multiple acceptance of operations is permitted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined). This may make it difficult to recognize relatively early on that the auto-rapid-hit function is functioning or that it has stopped functioning. However, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed and multiple acceptance of operations is permitted for the second operating means (operation button 410), the operation prompt light is always activated, and it can be expected that a different presentation from that of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) will provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 67th configuration B67 and the configurations of the above-mentioned performance examples, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, or the length of the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 67th configuration B67 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differ between when operation-prompting illumination is executed when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and when operation-prompting illumination is not executed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 67th configuration B67 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when operation-prompting illumination is executed when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and when operation-prompting illumination is not executed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)), but the changes that occur after acceptance of an operation may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 67th configuration B67 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the intervals at which operations are accepted on the sword decorative body 5001 may be the same (time) when operation prompting light is emitted to prompt operations on the sword decorative body 5001 (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and when such operation prompting light is not emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 67th configuration B67 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval (the interval at which operations are automatically accepted) when multiple operations are accepted for the operation button 410 based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tap function" is not displayed may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) rather than an indefinite time (a time not determined in advance) (such as the 6B acceptance-allowed state shown in FIG. 174).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 67th configuration B67 and each of the above-mentioned examples, the interval (the interval at which operations are automatically accepted) when multiple operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 based on the sword decorative body 5001 being maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed can always be a fixed time (a predetermined time) rather than an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined) (such as the 7B acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 176).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 67th configuration B67 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B reception allowance state), the interval between multiple operations for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation reception) may not be an indefinite time (a time not determined in advance), but may always be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (such as the 1B reception allowance state shown in FIG. 164).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 67th configuration B67 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (for example, message display MB2 corresponding to the 2B reception acceptance state), the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may be set to an indefinite period (a period not determined in advance) (such as the 2B reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 67th configuration B67 and each of the above-mentioned examples, a first light-emitting means may be used to emit light when illuminating the operation prompting operation of the sword ornament 5001, and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means may be used to emit light when illuminating the operation prompting operation of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 67th configuration B67 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the second light-emitting means will not emit light during the period in which operation-promoting light is emitted to prompt operation of the sword ornament 5001, but the first light-emitting means may emit light during the period in which operation-promoting light is emitted to prompt operation of the operation button 410 (even if operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted).

Also, for example, as the 68th configuration B68, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means for making a determination, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the determination by the determination means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) that displays an image prompting an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state, can receive an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times. a first prompting light emitting means capable of performing operation prompting light (for example, 4B operation prompting light LB4) to prompt an operation on the first operating means, separate from the first operation related display which is an image display to prompt an operation on the first operating means; a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of performing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means (operation button 410); and a second operation related display (so-called automatic operation display) which is an image display to prompt an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and which allows an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) to be accepted multiple times if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state. and a second prompt light emitting means capable of emitting operation prompt light (for example, first B operation prompt light LB1 or second B operation prompt light LB2) to prompt an operation on the second operating means, separate from the second operation related display, which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operating means. In a state where the first operation related display (the operation related display on the sword decorative body 5001 that is the target for enabling the so-called automatic rapid-hit function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (the sword decorative body 5001), operation prompt light emitting to prompt an operation on the first operating means (the sword decorative body 5001) can be emitted (for example, see FIG. 170(j) and the like), and the second operation related display In a state where the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-acceptance change in response to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, a post-operation display corresponding to this (for example, post-operation display HB2) can be displayed (for example, see FIG. 166(f) and FIG. 167). In other words, in this case, after the operation prompting light is emitted to prompt the player to operate the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operating means (operation button 410) is put into an operating state, even if that operating state is unintentionally released, the player will be able to recognize this immediately, which is expected to provide a sense of security.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is displayed and multiple operations are allowed to be accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), there are cases in which an operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until when it is hidden) (see, for example, Figure 170(j)), and there are also cases in which the operation-prompting light is not emitted (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until when it is hidden) (see, for example, Figure 168(j) and Figure 172(j)).However, in either situation, while the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-acceptance changes are being executed in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), it is possible to prevent a corresponding post-non-operation display from being displayed when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation prompt illumination to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) is always executable (at least part of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until when it is hidden). However, when the operation prompt illumination is being executed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) are being executed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 166(f) and FIG. 167).

With this configuration, it is difficult to quickly recognize when the operation state of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is released and the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) no longer functions. In addition, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated tap function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), the operation prompt light is not necessarily activated, which is expected to create a sense of tension both before and during operations on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). In contrast, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), in addition to making it easier to recognize early on when the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released and the auto-rapid-hit function (long press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) is no longer functioning, operation-promoting light is always emitted when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means (operation button 410), so it can be expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining interest in the game through a presentation that is different from that of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001).

Furthermore, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times, and the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 166(f) or FIG. 167), or the post-non-operation display may not be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 164(f) or FIG. 165). With this configuration, it is not always possible to immediately recognize when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) no longer functions, thereby creating an appropriate sense of tension.

In identifying the 68th configuration B68, it was decided to identify it as a configuration when "the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means" and a configuration when "the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means." However, instead, it is not important whether the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) or the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, and it is also possible to identify it in the same way as above as a configuration when "multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means" and a configuration when "multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means."

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 68th configuration B68 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differ between when operation-prompting illumination is executed when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and when operation-prompting illumination is not executed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 68th configuration B68 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when the operation-prompting light is executed when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and when the operation-prompting light is not executed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)), but the changes that occur after the operation is accepted may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 68th configuration B68 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the intervals at which operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 may be the same (time) when operation prompting light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and when the operation prompting light is not emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 68th configuration B68 and each of the above-mentioned examples, a first light-emitting means may be used to emit light when illuminating the operation prompting operation of the sword ornament 5001, and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means may be used to emit light when illuminating the operation prompting operation of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 68th configuration B68 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the second light-emitting means will not emit light during the period in which operation-promoting light is emitted to prompt operation of the sword ornament 5001, but the first light-emitting means may emit light during the period in which operation-promoting light is emitted to prompt operation of the operation button 410 (even if operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted).

In addition, even when the post-non-operation display is displayed (see FIG. 166), it is desirable to prevent a new sound from being output when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (see FIG. 166).

Furthermore, it goes without saying that if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the operation button 410 despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operation state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, this will trigger the display after non-operation not to be displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 68th configuration B68 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed; however, when the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed.

Also, for example, as the 69th configuration B69, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation accepted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (a sword decoration as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) that is an image display that prompts an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that can accept an operation for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state. a first prompt light emitting means capable of emitting operation prompt light (for example, fourth-order operation prompt light LB4) to prompt an operation on the first operating means separately from the first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts an operation on the first operating means; a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display (as a target for activating a so-called auto-repeated-hit function) which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) and which, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state, can accept an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) multiple times. and a second prompt light emitting means capable of emitting operation prompting light (for example, first B operation prompting light LB1 or second B operation prompting light LB2) to prompt an operation on the second operating means, separate from the second operation related display which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operating means, and when the first operation related display (operation related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as an object for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be emitted (for example, see FIG. 170(j) and the like), and when the second operation related display (operation related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as an object for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), operation prompting light emitting to prompt an operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be emitted (for example, see FIG. 170(j) and the like), In a state where an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410) is displayed and multiple operations are allowed to be accepted for the second operation means (operation button 410), an operation-promoting light can be emitted to encourage operation of the second operation means (see, for example, Figures 164(j) and 166(j)). When the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), if the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this can serve as a trigger to make inaudible at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time (such as the secondB post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166(h)) (see, for example, Figure 166). In other words, in this case, after the operation prompting light is emitted to prompt the player to operate the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operating means (operation button 410) is put into an operating state, even if that operating state is unintentionally released, the player will be able to recognize this immediately, which is expected to provide a sense of security.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), an operation prompt light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for at least part of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) (see, for example, Figure 170 (j)), or (for at least part of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) In some cases, the operation prompt light emission is not executed (see, for example, Figure 168 (j) or Figure 172 (j)), but in either case, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes have been executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is not necessary to use this as an opportunity to make the sound effect that was audible at that time inaudible.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-rapid tapping function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation prompt light emitting to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) is always executable (at least part of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until when it is hidden). However, when the operation prompt light emitting is being executed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-acceptance changes are being made in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may be used as an opportunity to make at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible (see, for example, FIG. 166(h)).

With this configuration, it is difficult to quickly recognize when the operation state of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is released and the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) no longer functions. In addition, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated tap function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), the operation prompt light is not necessarily activated, which is expected to create a sense of tension both before and during operations on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). In contrast, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), in addition to making it easier to recognize early on when the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released and the auto-rapid-hit function (long press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) is no longer functioning, operation-promoting light is always emitted when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means (operation button 410), so it can be expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining interest in the game through a presentation that is different from that of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001).

Furthermore, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) have been executed multiple times, and the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an inoperated state, this may trigger either a case in which at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is made inaudible (see, for example, FIG. 166(h)), or a case in which at least one of the sound effects is not made inaudible (see, for example, FIG. 164(h)). With this configuration, when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) stops working, it is not necessarily possible to recognize this early on, which can advantageously add to the sense of tension.

In identifying the 69th configuration B69, it was decided to identify it as a configuration when "the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means" and a configuration when "the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means." However, instead, it is not important whether the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) or the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, and it is also possible to identify it in the same way as above as a configuration when "multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means" and a configuration when "multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means."

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 69th configuration B69 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differ between when operation-prompting illumination is executed when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and when operation-prompting illumination is not executed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 69th configuration B69 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when operation-prompting illumination is executed when the "operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and when operation-prompting illumination is not executed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)), but the changes that occur after acceptance of an operation may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 69th configuration B69 and each of the above-mentioned examples, a first light-emitting means may be used to emit light when illuminating the operation prompting operation of the sword ornament 5001, and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means may be used to emit light when illuminating the operation prompting operation of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 69th configuration B69 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the second light-emitting means will not emit light during the period in which operation-promoting light is emitted to prompt operation of the sword ornament 5001, but the first light-emitting means may emit light during the period in which operation-promoting light is emitted to prompt operation of the operation button 410 (even if operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted).

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to a non-operated state, even if this is used as an opportunity to make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time inaudible, it is desirable that no new sound be output in response to the non-operated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 69th configuration B69 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if "when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to an inoperated state, at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time is made inaudible," the performance sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the changes after acceptance, and may be, for example, another performance sound such as background music, or it may be all performance sounds that are in an audible state at that time.

Furthermore, when the configuration according to each of the above-mentioned performance examples is realized, when a situation arises in which operation of the operation button 410 is not accepted despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state, it goes without saying that this will not be the trigger for making the performance sound that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 69th configuration B69 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function" is displayed, this may serve as a trigger to make at least one of the performance sounds that were audible at that time inaudible; however, when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function" is not displayed, this may not serve as a trigger to make the performance sounds that were audible at that time inaudible.

Also, for example, the 70th configuration B70 includes a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) that displays an image prompting an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that can receive operations on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is displayed. a first prompt light emitting means capable of performing operation prompt light emitting (for example, 4B operation prompt light LB4) to prompt an operation on the first operating means separately from the first operation related display which is an image display that prompts an operation on the first operating means; a second post-acceptance change executing means capable of performing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operating means (operation button 410); and a second operation related table capable of displaying a second operation related display (an operation related display related to the operation button 410 as a target for activating a so-called auto-repeated function) which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) and in which an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a displayed state. and a second prompt light emitting means capable of emitting operation prompt light (for example, first B operation prompt light LB1 or second B operation prompt light LB2) to prompt an operation on the second operating means, separate from the second operation-related display which is an image display that prompts an operation on the second operating means, and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (the sword ornament 5001), operation prompt light emitting can be executed to prompt an operation on the first operating means (the sword ornament 5001) (for example, see FIG. 170(j) and the like), and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-hit function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means (the operation button 410), operation prompt light emitting can be executed ... In a state where multiple operations are permitted, operation prompting light can be emitted to prompt operation of the second operating means (see, for example, FIG. 164(j) or FIG. 166(j)). When a post-acceptance change occurs in response to operation acceptance of the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operating means (operation button 410) is then switched from the non-operation state back to the operation state, this can trigger at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h)) to be switched back to an inaudible state, which can be expected to indicate that the second operating means (operation button 410) has been switched back to an operation state and an operation has been accepted (see, for example, timing tBa2-C1 in FIG. 164).

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the activation target of the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and multiple operations are allowed for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), an operation prompt light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (at least part of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) (see, for example, Figure 170 (j)), or (at least part of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) There are cases where the operation prompt light emission is not executed (at least in part) (see, for example, Figures 168(j) and 172(j)), but in either case, when a post-acceptance change occurs in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is then changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, it is not necessary to use this as an opportunity to make the sound effect that was audible at that time inaudible.

In addition, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation prompt light emitting to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) is always executable (at least part of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until when it is hidden). However, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed to a non-operated state while the operation prompt light emitting is being executed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410), and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operated state back to an operated state, this may be used as a trigger to make inaudible at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h)).

With this configuration, it is difficult to recognize that the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) has been properly accepted when the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is interrupted and then the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is operated again. In addition, since the operation prompt light is not necessarily emitted when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately created when the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is activated. In contrast, with regard to the second operating means, when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) is interrupted and the second operating means is operated again, it is easy to recognize that the operation has been accepted properly. In addition, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means (operation button 410), the operation prompt light is always activated, so it can be expected that a decrease in interest in the game will be suppressed when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) is interrupted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 70th configuration B70 and each of the above-described exemplary effects, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and post-acceptance changes have been made multiple times in response to operation acceptance of the operation button 410, if the operation button 410 is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state and then changed back to an operated state from the non-operated state, and only if a post-acceptance output sound (e.g., the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 or the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) representing one of the post-acceptance changes is audible at that time, this may trigger at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (e.g., the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 or the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7). In this case, a sound other than the post-acceptance output sound may be made inaudible. This configuration is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is interrupted, while also providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In identifying the 70th configuration B70, it was decided to identify it as a configuration when "the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means" and a configuration when "the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means." However, instead, it is not important whether the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) or the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, and it is also possible to identify it in the same way as above as a configuration when "multiple operations are permitted for the first operating means" and a configuration when "multiple operations are permitted for the second operating means."

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 70th configuration B70 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is changed to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state to an operated state again, even if the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is in an audible state at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state (see timing tBa2-C1 in FIG. 164 or timing tBf2-C1 in FIG. 174, etc.), or the performance sounds that were in an audible state at that time not in an inaudible state (see timing tBb2-C1 in FIG. 166, etc.).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 70th configuration B70 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, if the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is not displayed, and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, and the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is audible at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make the effect sound that was audible at that time inaudible (see timing tBf2-C1 in FIG. 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations according to the above-mentioned effect examples, if "when the operation button 410 is operated again, at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible," the effect sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the post-acceptance changes; for example, it may be another effect sound such as background music, or it may be all effect sounds that are audible at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 70th configuration B70 and each of the above-mentioned examples, a first light-emitting means may be used to emit light when illuminating the operation prompting the user to operate the sword ornament 5001, and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means may be used to emit light when illuminating the operation prompting the user to operate the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 70th configuration B70 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the second light-emitting means will not emit light during the period in which operation-promoting light is emitted to prompt operation of the sword ornament 5001, but the first light-emitting means may emit light during the period in which operation-promoting light is emitted to prompt operation of the operation button 410 (even if operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 70th configuration B70 and each of the above-mentioned examples, it is desirable that the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differ between when operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and when the operation-prompting light is not emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 70th configuration B70 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, operation-prompting light is emitted to prompt operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and when this operation-prompting light is not emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)), the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is different, but the changes after acceptance of the operation may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 70th configuration B70 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the intervals at which operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 may be the same (time) when operation prompting light is emitted to prompt the user to operate the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) when the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) and when the operation prompting light is not emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

Also, for example, as the 71st configuration B71, there is provided a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by a player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) can be performed multiple times. a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated-hit function); a first prompting sound output means capable of outputting a first operation prompting sound (for example, a third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or a fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and that maintains the second operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state when the display is in a displayed state. 164, or the like) corresponding to the second operation-related display. When the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed, the second operation-related display can receive operations for the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times when the second operation-related display is held. The second operation-related display can receive operations for the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times when the second operation-related display is held. When the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed, the second operation-related display can receive operations for the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed, the second operation-related display can receive operations for the second operation-related display. When the second operation-related display (operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-operation function) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound can be output (see, for example, FIG. 168(g) or FIG. 170(g)), and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the activation target of the so-called auto-repeated-operation function) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound can be output (see, for example, FIG. 164(g) or FIG. 166(g)), and when a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a time not longer than a specific time (for example, the 1B acceptance-allowed state shown in FIG. 164). In other words, in this case, when the second operation prompting sound is output to prompt operation of the second operating means (operation button 410), not only does the player feel a sense of anticipation that the so-called automatic rapid-fire function will be suitably activated, but when the automatic rapid-fire function is in operation, it becomes easier to recognize this (because the intervals between operations are set to be relatively short), so it can be expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good way.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, there are cases in which the first operation prompt sound is output (see, for example, Figures 168(g) and 170(g)), and cases in which the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). In either case, when the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, the interval between multiple operations accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) (the interval between changes occurring after acceptance of an operation in the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) may be set to a time that is less than a specific time.

In addition, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound is always output, but when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is displayed, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) (the interval at which operations are accepted automatically) may be either set to a time equal to or shorter than a specific time (for example, the first B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 164) or set to a time longer than the specific time (for example, the second B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), the interval at which changes occur after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval, making it easier to recognize relatively early that the auto-rapid-hit function is functioning or that it has stopped functioning.However, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output, so it can be expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which changes occur after acceptance can be either relatively short or relatively long. This can make it difficult to realize relatively quickly that the auto-rapid-hit function is functioning or that it has stopped functioning. However, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound is always output, so it can be expected that a different presentation from the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) will provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 71st configuration B71 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, or the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the operation button 410, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 71st configuration B71 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differ between when the first operation prompt sound is output when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 71st configuration B71 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when the first operation prompt sound is output when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)), but the changes that occur after the operation is accepted may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 71st configuration B71 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the intervals at which operations are accepted on the sword decorative body 5001 may be the same (time) when a first operation prompt sound is output to prompt an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (see, for example, Figures 168(g) and 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

In addition, when realizing the configuration of the 71st configuration B71 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval (the interval at which operations are automatically accepted) when multiple operations are accepted for the operation button 410 based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tap function" is not displayed may never be longer than a specific time, but may always be shorter than a specific time (such as the 6B acceptance-allowed state shown in FIG. 174).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration of the 71st configuration B71 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval (the interval at which operations are automatically accepted) when multiple operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 based on the sword decorative body 5001 being maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed may never be longer than a specific time, but may always be shorter than a specific time (such as the 7B acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 176).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 71st configuration B71 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B reception allowance state), the interval between multiple operations for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation reception) may never be longer than a specific time, but may always be shorter than a specific time (such as the 1B reception allowance state shown in FIG. 164).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 71st configuration B71 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (for example, message display MB2 corresponding to the 2B reception acceptance state), the interval between multiple operations accepted for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation acceptance) may be either longer than a specific time or shorter than a specific time (such as the 2B reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 166).

Furthermore, for example, as the 72nd configuration B72, a first operation means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operation means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001), and a display that prompts an operation on the first operation means (sword decoration 5001), and if the first operation means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation-related first operation a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-repeated-hit function); a first prompting sound output means capable of outputting a first operation prompting sound (for example, a third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or a fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed; a second post-acceptance change execution means capable of executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display that prompts an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and which, when the display is in a display state, causes the second operation means (operation button 410) to be operated when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state. In this case, the second operation means (operation button 410) can accept operations multiple times, and the second operation-related display means is capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function), and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed, the second operation-related display means is capable of outputting a second operation prompt sound (for example, a first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or a second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) corresponding to the second operation-related display, and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed, When the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound can be output (see, for example, FIG. 168(g) or FIG. 170(g)), and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound can be output (see, for example, FIG. 164(g) or FIG. 166(g)), and when a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-acceptance change can be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the 1B acceptance allowance state shown in FIG. 164). In other words, in this case, when the second operation prompting sound is output to prompt operation of the second operating means (operation button 410), not only does the player feel a sense of anticipation that the so-called automatic rapid-fire function will be suitably activated, but when the automatic rapid-fire function is in operation, it becomes easier to recognize this (because the intervals between operations are set to a fixed time), so it can be expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good way.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, there are cases in which the first operation prompt sound is output (see, for example, Figures 168(g) and 170(g)), and cases in which the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). In either case, when the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, the interval between multiple operations accepted for the first operation means (sword decorative body 5001) (the interval between changes occurring after acceptance of an operation in the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

In addition, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound is always output, but when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the interval between multiple post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) (the interval at which operations are accepted automatically) may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 164) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined) (for example, the second B acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), the interval at which changes occur after acceptance is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time), making it possible to easily recognize relatively early on that the auto-rapid-hit function is functioning or that it has stopped functioning.However, since the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is not necessarily output when it is displayed, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining interest in the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-rapid-hit function is enabled for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time not predetermined). This may make it difficult to realize relatively early on that the auto-rapid-hit function is functioning or that it has stopped functioning. However, when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the auto-rapid-hit function is enabled) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound is always output, and it can be expected that a different presentation from the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) will provide a sense of tension while maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 72nd configuration B72 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, or the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance when the so-called auto-repeated function (long press function) is enabled for the operation button 410, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 72nd configuration B72 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differ between when the first operation prompt sound is output when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 72nd configuration B72 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when the first operation prompt sound is output when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)), but the changes that occur after the operation is accepted may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 72nd configuration B72 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the intervals at which operations are accepted on the sword decorative body 5001 may be the same (time) when a first operation prompt sound is output to prompt an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (see, for example, Figures 168(g) and 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

In addition, when realizing the configuration according to the 72nd configuration B72 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the interval (the interval at which operations are automatically accepted) when multiple operations are accepted for the operation button 410 based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tap function" is not displayed may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) rather than an indefinite time (a time that is not predetermined) (such as the 6B acceptance-allowed state shown in FIG. 174).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 72nd configuration B72 and each of the above-mentioned examples, the interval (the interval at which operations are automatically accepted) when multiple operations are accepted for the sword decorative body 5001 based on the sword decorative body 5001 being maintained in an operating state while the "operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed can always be a fixed time (a predetermined time) rather than an indefinite time (a time not determined in advance) (such as the 7B acceptance-allowed state shown in FIG. 176).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 72nd configuration B72 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tap function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B reception allowance state), the interval between multiple operations for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation reception) may not be an indefinite time (a time not determined in advance), but may always be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (such as the 1B reception allowance state shown in FIG. 164).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 72nd configuration B72 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state during a period in which the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is displayed in a special mode (for example, message display MB2 corresponding to the 2B reception allowance state), the interval between multiple operations for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation reception) may be set to an indefinite period (a period not determined in advance) (such as the 2B reception allowance state shown in FIG. 166).

Also, for example, as the 73rd configuration B73, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (so-called on-screen display) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that, if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, can accept an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times. a first prompting sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound (for example, a third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or a fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed; a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display for prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the display is in a display state, executes a post-acceptance change on the second operation means (operation button 410). 164, 165, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 200, 201, 210, 211, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 217, 220, 221, 222, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 250, 251, 252, 253, 254, 255, 256, 257, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278, 279, 280, 281, 282, 283, 284, 285, 286, 287, 288, 289, 290, 300, 309, 310, 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 316, 317, 318, 319, 320, 321, 322, 323, (See, for example, FIG. 168(g) and FIG. 170(g)), when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound can be output (see, for example, FIG. 164(g) and FIG. 166(g)), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in a situation where the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-operation display (for example, post-non-operation display HB2) can be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 166(f) and FIG. 167). In other words, in this case, after the second operation prompting sound is output to prompt the player to operate the second operation means (operation button 410), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is put into an operating state, even if the operating state is unintentionally released, the player will be able to recognize this immediately, which is expected to provide a sense of security.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there are cases in which the first operation prompt sound is output (see, for example, Figures 168(g) and 170(g)), and cases in which the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). However, in either situation, it is possible to prevent the display of a corresponding post-non-operation display when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) are executed multiple times.

In addition, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound is always output, but if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed (see, for example, Figures 166(f) and 167).

With this configuration, it is difficult to quickly recognize when the operation state of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is released and the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) no longer functions.In addition, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated tap function) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). In contrast, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), in addition to making it easier to recognize early on when the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released and the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) for that second operating means (operation button 410) is no longer functioning, the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 that is the target for activating the auto-repeated tap function) is displayed, so it can be expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining interest in the game through a different presentation from the first operating means (sword decoration 5001).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 73rd configuration B73 and each of the above-described performance examples, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times, when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 166(f) or FIG. 167), or the post-non-operation display may not be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 164(f) or FIG. 165). With this configuration, it is not necessarily possible for the second operating means (operation button 410) to recognize early on that the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) has stopped functioning, thereby creating an appropriate sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 73rd configuration B73 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differ between when the first operation prompt sound is output when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 73rd configuration B73 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when the first operation prompt sound is output when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)), but the changes that occur after the operation is accepted may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 73rd configuration B73 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the intervals at which operations are accepted on the sword decorative body 5001 may be the same (time) when a first operation prompt sound is output to prompt an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (see, for example, Figures 168(g) and 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 73rd configuration B73 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed; however, when the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 73rd configuration B73 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the post-non-operation display is displayed (see FIG. 166), it is desirable not to output a new sound when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (see FIG. 166).

Furthermore, it goes without saying that if a situation arises in which no operation is being accepted for the operation button 410 despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operation state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, this will trigger the display after non-operation not to be displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 73rd configuration B73 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed; however, when the operation button 410 changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is not displayed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed.

Also, for example, as the 74th configuration B74, there is provided a system including a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on the judgment by the judgment means obtaining a predetermined result, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (a display indicating the enablement of a so-called auto-repeated function) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that can accept an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. a first prompting sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound (for example, a third-B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or a fourth-B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed; a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display for prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410) when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state while the display is in a display state. and a second prompting sound output means capable of outputting a second operation prompting sound (for example, a first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 164 or a second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166) corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation prompting sound can be output (for example, a first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in FIG. 168(g) or a second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in FIG. 166). 164(g) and 166(g)), when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound can be output (see, for example, FIG. 164(g) and FIG. 166(g)), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and a post-acceptance change in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, this triggers at least one of the effect sounds that was in an audible state at that time (such as the secondB post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in FIG. 166(h)) to be made inaudible (see, for example, FIG. 166, etc.). In other words, in this case, after the second operation prompting sound is output to prompt the player to operate the second operation means (operation button 410), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is put into an operating state, even if the operating state is unintentionally released, the player will be able to recognize this immediately, which is expected to provide a sense of security.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, there are cases in which the first operation prompt sound is output (see, for example, Figures 168(g) and 170(g)), and cases in which the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). However, in either situation, when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) are executed multiple times, and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is not necessary to use this as an opportunity to make the sound effect that was audible at that time inaudible.

In addition, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound is always output, but if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may be used as an opportunity to make at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible (see, for example, Figure 166 (h)).

With this configuration, it is difficult to quickly recognize when the operation state of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is released and the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) no longer functions.In addition, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated tap function) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). In contrast, with regard to the second operating means (operation button 410), in addition to making it easier to recognize early on when the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released and the auto-repeated tap function (long press function) for that second operating means (operation button 410) is no longer functioning, the second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 that is the target for activating the auto-repeated tap function) is displayed, so it can be expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining interest in the game through a different presentation from the first operating means (sword decoration 5001).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 74th configuration B74 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times, when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this may trigger either a case in which at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible (see, for example, FIG. 166(h)), or a case in which at least one of the effect sounds is not made inaudible (see, for example, FIG. 164(h)). With such a configuration, when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operation means (operation button 410) stops working, it is not necessarily possible to recognize this early on, so a sense of tension can be appropriately imparted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 74th configuration B74 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differ between when the first operation prompt sound is output when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 74th configuration B74 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when the first operation prompt sound is output when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168 (g) or Figure 170 (g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172 (g)), but the changes that occur after the operation is accepted may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 74th configuration B74 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the intervals at which operations are accepted on the sword decorative body 5001 may be the same (time) when a first operation prompt sound is output to prompt an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (see, for example, Figures 168(g) and 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 74th configuration B74 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function" is displayed, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that were audible at that time inaudible (see, for example, Figure 166 (h)). However, when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function" is not displayed, this can be used as a trigger to not make the effect sounds that were audible at that time inaudible.

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 74th configuration B74 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to a non-operated state, it is desirable that no new sound be output in response to the non-operated state (see FIG. 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 74th configuration B74 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if "when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after acceptance) to an inoperated state, at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time is made inaudible," the performance sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the changes after acceptance, and may be, for example, another performance sound such as background music, or it may be all performance sounds that are in an audible state at that time.

Furthermore, when the configuration according to each of the above-mentioned performance examples is realized, when a situation arises in which operation of the operation button 410 is not accepted despite the operation button 410 being maintained in an operating state, and then the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inoperating state, it goes without saying that this will not be the trigger for making the performance sound that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 74th configuration B74 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inactive state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function" is displayed, this may serve as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that were audible at that time inaudible; however, when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to an inactive state while the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid hit function" is not displayed, this may not serve as a trigger to make the effect sounds that were audible at that time inaudible.

Also, for example, as the 75th configuration B75, a first operating means (sword decoration 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means for making a judgment, a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus to the player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, a first post-acceptance change execution means that can execute a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and a first operation-related display (sword decoration 5001 as a target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) that prompts an operation on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), and that can accept operations on the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) multiple times if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state. a first prompting sound output means for outputting a first operation prompting sound (for example, a third-B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in FIG. 168 or a fourth-B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in FIG. 170) corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed; a second post-acceptance change executing means for executing a post-acceptance change in response to an operation acceptance on the second operation means (operation button 410); a second operation-related display (a target for enabling a so-called auto-repeated-hit function) which is a display for prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) and which may accept an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state; 166, and the like). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound can be output (see, for example, FIG. 168(g) and FIG. 170(g)), and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound can be output (see, for example, FIG. 168(g) and FIG. 170(g)), and the second operation prompt sound (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as an activation target for the so-called auto-repeated hitting function) can be output (see, for example, FIG. 168(g) and FIG. 170(g)). When the operation-related display (indicating an operation related to the second operation means) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound can be output (see, for example, FIG. 164(g) or FIG. 166(g)). If the second operation means (operation button 410) is switched to a non-operated state while the post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the acceptance of an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is switched from the non-operated state back to the operated state, this can trigger at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h)) to be switched to an inaudible state. This can be expected to indicate that the second operation means (operation button 410) has been switched back to an operated state and an operation has been accepted (see, for example, timing tBa2-C1 in FIG. 164).

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display related to the sword decorative body 5001 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function) is displayed, there are cases in which the first operation prompt sound is output (see, for example, Figures 168(g) and 170(g)), and cases in which the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). However, in either situation, when a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) and the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is then changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, it is not necessary to use this as an opportunity to make the sound effect that was audible at that time inaudible.

In addition, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled) is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation prompt light emitting to prompt the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) is always executable (at least part of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until when it is hidden). However, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed to a non-operated state while the operation prompt light emitting is being executed and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410), and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operated state back to an operated state, this may be used as a trigger to make inaudible at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h)).

In addition, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound is always output. However, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid-hit function) is displayed and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) are executed multiple times, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is then changed from the non-operated state to an operating state again, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in FIG. 164(h)) inaudible.

With this configuration, with regard to the first operating means (sword decoration 5001), when the auto-repeated tapping function (long press function) for the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is interrupted and then the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is operated again, it is difficult to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted.In addition, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the sword decoration 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-repeated tapping function) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output, which is expected to create a favorable sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means (sword decoration 5001). In contrast, with regard to the second operating means, when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) is interrupted and then the second operating means is operated again, it is easy to recognize that the operation has been accepted properly. In addition, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display related to the operation button 410 that is the target for activating the auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound is always output, so it can be expected that a different presentation from the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) will provide a sense of tension while favorably maintaining interest in the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 75th configuration B75 and each of the above-described exemplary effects, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance of the operation button 410 have been executed multiple times, if the operation button 410 is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state and then changed back to an operated state from the non-operated state, only if a post-acceptance output sound (e.g., the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1, etc.) representing one of the post-acceptance changes is audible at that time, this may trigger at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time (e.g., the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1, etc.) to be made inaudible. In this case, a different sound may be made inaudible rather than the post-acceptance output sound. This configuration is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the auto-repeated function (long press function) for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is interrupted, while also providing an appropriate sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration of the 75th configuration B75 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the operation button 410 is changed to a non-operated state while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state to an operated state again, even if the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is in an audible state at that time, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the performance sounds that was in an audible state at that time in an inaudible state (see timing tBa2-C1 in FIG. 164 or timing tBf2-C1 in FIG. 174, etc.), or the performance sounds that were in an audible state at that time not in an inaudible state (see timing tBb2-C1 in FIG. 166, etc.).

Furthermore, when realizing the configuration according to the 75th configuration B75 and each of the above-mentioned effect examples, if the "operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the activation target for the so-called auto-rapid tapping function" is not displayed, and a post-acceptance change occurs in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, and the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is audible at that time, this may be used as an opportunity to make the effect sound that was audible at that time inaudible (see timing tBf2-C1 in FIG. 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations according to the above-mentioned effect examples, if "when the operation button 410 is operated again, at least one of the effect sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible," the effect sound that is made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appears as one of the post-acceptance changes; for example, it may be another effect sound such as background music, or it may be all effect sounds that are audible at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 75th configuration B75 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differ between when the first operation prompt sound is output when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 75th configuration B75 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the appearance of the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" differs between when the first operation prompt sound is output when the "operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activating the so-called auto-rapid-hit function" is displayed (see, for example, Figures 168(g) and 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)), but the changes that occur after the operation is accepted may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration according to the 75th configuration B75 and each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the intervals at which operations are accepted on the sword decorative body 5001 may be the same (time) when a first operation prompt sound is output to prompt an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (see, for example, Figures 168(g) and 170(g)) and when the first operation prompt sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

The present invention has been described above using several embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements and design modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

During the reception period in the above-described exemplary effect, if no operation is received at the operation unit, the method of not displaying the same post-reception display as when an operation is received at the operation unit (not causing the same post-reception change) may be to "not generate the effect related to the reception period itself," or to "not display the same post-reception display as when an operation is received (not cause the same post-reception change), but may display a post-reception display different from when an operation is received (may cause a different post-reception change)."

If multiple operation units that are permitted to accept operations are provided during the acceptance period for the above-mentioned example performance, these operation units may be provided as separate operation units, or as separate parts within a single operation unit.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example presentation, the display that resembles the operation unit may be an image display in which at least that part is represented as an image, and parts other than the operation unit may also be represented within the same image display.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, depending on the type of acceptance period, when the acceptance period begins, the acceptance permission sound may be output in one of several ways with different expectation levels (expectation levels for receiving a bonus such as a jackpot). During acceptance periods of the type in which the acceptance permission sound is output in this way, if an operation is performed on a specific operation unit while the acceptance permission sound is being output, the acceptance permission sound may be made inaudible (although this is not a required configuration). In other words, in this case, if an operation is performed early after the acceptance period begins, there is a risk that the expectation level information provided by the acceptance permission sound will not be recognized early on, so it is expected that careless playing, such as rapid operation, will be discouraged before the acceptance period begins.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, depending on the type of acceptance period, the acceptance allowance sound may always be output in the same manner when that acceptance period occurs. However, during acceptance periods of a type in which the acceptance allowance sound is output in this manner, if a specific operation unit is operated while the acceptance allowance sound is being output, the acceptance allowance sound may be muted or may not be muted (although this is not a required configuration). In other words, in this case, if the acceptance allowance sound is not muted, even if the operation is performed early by mistake, the player will be able to recognize that it was not a type of acceptance allowance sound that suggests a degree of expectation, which is expected to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Furthermore, if the acceptance allowance sound is muted, there is no disadvantage to operating it early because it is not a type of acceptance allowance sound that suggests a degree of expectation in the first place, but the player will be aware that it may have been a type of acceptance allowance sound that suggests a degree of expectation, which is expected to prevent the player from engaging in careless play as described above, even with this type of acceptance allowance sound.

For example, in the above-mentioned examples of effects related to the automatic effect function, a message such as "Auto button setting in progress" may be displayed, but this message does not necessarily have to be displayed. In particular, if the pachinko machine 1 is not set to automatic effect mode, but is instead implemented as a pachinko machine 1 that is always in a state where the automatic effect function can be enabled and does not include processing such as "setting to effect state," it is desirable not to display a message such as "Auto button setting in progress." In a pachinko machine 1 that does not include processing such as "setting to effect state," it is possible to create an effective period during which the automatic effect function is performed and an effective period during which the automatic effect function is not performed, depending on the type of operation acceptance effect that is permitted to be operated by the player.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "operation-related display (for example, a mock image display)" can only appear when the operation unit is in a state where operation reception is permitted (reception permitted period) or when the operation reception is permitted (reception permitted period). Therefore, at the very least, when the "operation-related display" is displayed, the reception permitted period must occur, or the display must be in a permitted state at the time of its display. Therefore, it is also possible for the reception permitted period to end while the "operation-related display" is displayed, before it is hidden.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the "imitation image" may be any image that prompts the player to perform an operation, and does not necessarily have to be an image that mimics the operating means that is the target of operation, such as an arrow image that points downward and moves up and down.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, the "operations (actions) by the player" that are the subject of detection are not limited to those that are directly operated by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or "sword decoration 5001," but also include "contact actions by the player on specific parts" that are the subject of detection by a touch sensor, and "actions by the player in a specific space" that are the subject of detection by a non-contact sensor. In short, it is sufficient that the device is equipped with one or more reception means (operation units) that accept actions by the player (pressing actions, unsheathing the sword, touch actions, non-contact actions, etc.).

Furthermore, when the automatic effect function is employed in each of the above-mentioned effect examples, the timing for automatically generating (automatically accepting) an operation within the valid operation period may be set to any timing within the valid operation period. In order to provide the player with an optimal opportunity to operate, it is desirable for the operation acceptance to be automatically generated (automatically accepted) when no operation is detected until a predetermined timing that occurs after more than half of the valid operation period has elapsed, and for the post-operation effect to be initiated based on the automatically generated operation acceptance. In this sense, it is most desirable for the operation acceptance to be automatically generated (automatically accepted) when no operation is detected until one frame remains within the valid operation period, and for the post-operation effect to be initiated based on the automatically generated operation acceptance. Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned effect examples related to the automatic effect function, if the bar display is not hidden but maintained after the valid period has expired, it is desirable to execute an effect that changes the mode of the operating means to be operated (e.g., vibration, turning off the LED, etc.) in accordance with the timing at which the valid period expires. This is expected to prevent players from mistaking the validity period for the bar display, even if it is displayed continuously rather than being hidden.

In each of the above-mentioned examples, when "period," "time," or "state" is mentioned, it may refer to the smallest unit of control, such as "period," "time," or "state," and it also includes, for example, the period, time, or state of one frame.

Furthermore, the "post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display)" in response to an operation acceptance during each acceptance period (operation-permitted state) in the above-described presentation examples and their variations does not necessarily indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot. For example, it may occur as an acceptance period to determine whether the probability fluctuation function will be enabled during the jackpot game execution period, and be executed as the post-acceptance display. Alternatively, it may occur based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions during various interval periods, etc., and be executed as the post-acceptance display. Therefore, the acceptance period in the above-described presentation examples and their variations does not necessarily occur during the period in which the pattern fluctuation is being executed. Furthermore, even when such a post-acceptance display is displayed without indicating the likelihood of winning a jackpot, multiple modes for displaying the post-acceptance display may be provided, and the display may be displayed in any of these modes. Furthermore, each acceptance period (operation permitted state) in the above-mentioned performance examples and their variations may not be a finite period with a predetermined set time, but may include a type of acceptance period (operation permitted state) that continues indefinitely unless a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is met.

In each of the above-mentioned examples, sound effects such as "BGM sound effects" and "BMG playback sound" refer to sounds whose audible output can begin based on a starting win, and which can be output so that the audible state can be maintained across multiple symbol changes.

The mock-up image representing the operation receiving portion that receives the operation and the border decoration image that decorates the border of the mock-up image may be prepared separately as image data, and the image data may be combined to display as an integrated mock-up image.

In the example shown in FIG. 144, when an operation opportunity is granted to one operation means, there are two cases: a "normal button imitation image BMGa" is displayed (FIG. 144(a) and (c)), and a "special button imitation image BMGb" having a different shape is displayed (FIG. 144(b) and (d)). However, when a "normal button imitation image BMGa" is displayed (FIG. 144(a) and (c)), an operation opportunity may be granted to the first operation means (first operation receiving unit), and when a "special button imitation image BMGb" is displayed (FIG. 144(b) and (d)), an operation opportunity may be granted to a second operation means (second operation receiving unit) different from the first operation means (first operation receiving unit).

In each of the above-mentioned examples, the components (operating means) provided as the object of operation may be realized as items that require a pressing operation (pressing action) (such as a button), items that require an insertion/removal operation (such as a sword ornament), or items that require a player action such as a non-contact or touch action (such as a proximity sensor).

The peripheral decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral decoration that is actually provided around the periphery of the "operation receiving portion that is the target of the operation opportunity," but it is sufficient if at least a portion does not imitate the peripheral decoration, and there may be a portion that imitates the peripheral decoration.

If the specific image TG is displayed within the validity period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

Regarding the "automatic reception effect (reception period during which the automatic button function is enabled)" described in Figure 144 and subsequent figures, any of the implementation methods for the "automatic reception effect" exemplified earlier may be employed. Regarding how the mock image and gauge image are displayed during the automatic reception effect, any of the implementation methods described above may be employed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception effect occurs, depending on the type of effect state at the time of the occurrence, the type of the reception effect (post-operation effect) itself, or the conditions under which the reception effect occurred, the same post-operation effect as when the player operates the machine may be executed even if no operation is performed by the player within the valid period (the "automatic effect function" is enabled), or the post-operation effect may not be executed if no operation is performed by the player within the valid period (the "automatic effect function" is not enabled). The timing at which the automatic effect function is enabled may be a predetermined timing within the valid period, when the valid period ends, or a short time after the valid period ends.

The acceptance period (operation-permitted state) illustrated in each of the above-mentioned presentation examples does not necessarily have to occur within the presentation pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination). For example, it may occur (based on the establishment of predetermined conditions) during a period when no pattern change is being performed (for example, a period when a jackpot game is being performed, or various interval periods), rather than during a period when a pattern change is being performed.

Furthermore, the acceptance period exemplified in each of the above-mentioned presentation examples does not necessarily have to end when a predetermined time has elapsed, but may end when a predetermined end condition is met (for example, when 10 game balls are received in the big prize slot).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned effect examples, the disappearance EF effect (disappearance effect image, overlapping effect display, etc.) can be used in common (executed in the same effect format) for multiple acceptance periods with different types of post-acceptance effects (conversation previews in which the level of expectation is indicated by which conversation appears, movement effects in which the level of expectation is indicated by whether or not a moving object moves, cut-in previews in which the level of expectation is indicated by the manner in which a cut-in display appears, etc.), thereby enabling recognition that action acceptance (operation acceptance) has been properly completed (a state in which the acceptance period has ended). In other words, because the post-acceptance effect differs depending on the type of acceptance period, it is difficult to recognize when looking at the effect content whether it is being performed within the acceptance period or is being performed as a result of the acceptance period having ended. In this regard, by providing a disappearance EF effect that can appear in a common (same) effect format when the acceptance period ends, regardless of the type of acceptance period, it is possible to appropriately indicate that action acceptance (operation acceptance) has been properly completed and the post-acceptance effect is being executed. However, as a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), it is sufficient if there are cases where a disappearance EF effect (disappearance effect image, overlapping effect display, etc.) that is common to multiple types of post-acceptance effects is executed, and for example, a dedicated disappearance EF effect (overlapping effect display) that can be executed only when a specific type of post-acceptance effect occurs may be provided.

Unless otherwise specified, the configurations described in the above examples apply when the game is being played under normal conditions, and not when some abnormal condition occurs.

The acceptance permission state in each of the above-mentioned presentation examples does not have to be based on a judgment, but may occur over time, for example, and the display after acceptance does not have to indicate the result of the judgment, such as a mini-game during a jackpot.

The term "mochi (mochi image)" used when explaining the above-mentioned examples is synonymous with "mock (mock image)."

The "multiple operation permitted state" mentioned above may be a state in which the selection target (e.g., a character) changes each time an operation is performed.

The above-mentioned "auto rapid-fire function" can be implemented as a rapid-fire mode in which new post-acceptance changes occur at regular intervals simply by maintaining the operating state, or as a long-press mode in which, if the operating state is maintained, one post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance continues without ending (extending the execution time).

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned examples, variations, and notes, matters described as "desirable" merely describe the additional effects that can be achieved by having the same configuration, and it goes without saying that the same configuration does not necessarily have to be provided.

In other words, in the embodiment, the invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1 as the gaming machine, but it is not limited to this and may also be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case, the same effects can be achieved.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Normal pattern display 1403 First special pattern display 1404 First special reserved number display 1405 Second special pattern display 1406 Second special reserved number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting port 2005 Large winning port

Claims (1)

a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player;
A determination means for making a determination;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination by the determination means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which, when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may occur multiple times in response to an operation reception for the first operating means, and, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-acceptance change may occur multiple times in response to an operation reception for the second operating means,
a specific sound can be output when an operation instruction related to the second operation means is displayed, and the specific sound is maintained in an output state for an output time corresponding to the specific sound;
When an operation instruction related to the first operation means is displayed, a special sound can be output, and there are cases where a specific end condition is satisfied while the special sound is being output, and cases where the specific end condition is not satisfied, and in these cases, when the specific end condition is satisfied while the special sound is being output, the output state of the special sound is terminated early at an intermediate stage before the elapse of an output time corresponding to the special sound,
When the first operating means is set to a non-operated state while a change after acceptance has occurred in response to an operation acceptance to the first operating means, and then the first operating means is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, there is no case in which a process of changing the effect sound that was in an output state at that time to a non-output state is executed as a process in response to a new operation acceptance to the first operating means.
When the second operating means is changed to a non-operated state while the post-acceptance change is occurring in response to the operation acceptance to the second operating means, and then the second operating means is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, a process can be executed in response to the new operation acceptance to the second operating means, in which at least one of the effect sounds that was in an output state at that time is changed to a non-output state;
moreover,
the operation instruction for the first operating means is displayed in the same display mode in two cases: when the specific termination condition is satisfied while the special sound is being output and the output state of the special sound is terminated early at an intermediate stage before the elapse of the output time corresponding to the special sound; and when the specific termination condition is not satisfied and the output state of the special sound continues for the output time corresponding to the special sound;
moreover,
If the specific termination condition is met while the operation instruction for the first operating means is being displayed and the special sound is being output, the output state is terminated early at an intermediate stage before the output time corresponding to the special sound has elapsed, and the operation instruction for the first operating means that has been displayed up until that point is also made non-displayable.
A gaming machine characterized by: